Analytics

Analytics
Salesforce, Spring ’24
@salesforcedocs
Last updated: March 8, 2024
© Copyright 2000–2024 Salesforce, Inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of Salesforce, Inc., as are other
names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
Analyze Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Salesforce Analytics Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Reports and Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CRM Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Intelligent Analytics Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1932
Analyze Data with Tableau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1932
Unified Analytics Experiences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937
Einstein Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1937
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2315
ANALYZE YOUR DATA
Unleash the power of data to drive better business decisions. Connect data sources, gain deep understanding of your business and
customer data, and deliver timely, actionable insights and predictions to your teams within the context of their work.
Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau
Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Learning Map Tableau Learning Map
Reports Direct Data for Data Cloud Data Cloud for Tableau
Dashboards Intelligent Analytics Apps Einstein Discovery in Tableau
Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards Industry Apps and Prebuilt Apps Explore Metrics with Tableau Pulse
CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud
Unified Analytics Experiences Einstein Discovery Marketing Cloud Intelligence
Analytics Tab Einstein Discovery Learning Map Marketing Cloud Intelligence Learning
Map
Collections Einstein Discovery for Reports
Tableau Views in CRM Analytics
Slack
Mobile
Salesforce Analytics Tools

Salesforce offers several tools to help you analyze your data and act on it. Reports and dashboards are built into Salesforce. Connect
data and create interactive visualizations with CRM Analytics, a Salesforce-native tool. Tableau is a flexible analytics platform with
cloud, on-premises, and desktop applications. Use this matrix to understand each tool’s capabilities.
1
Analyze Your Data Salesforce Analytics Tools
Reports and Dashboards

Salesforce offers a powerful suite of reporting tools that work together to help you understand and act on your data.
Explore Data and Take Action with CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics is a cloud-based platform for connecting data from multiple sources, creating interactive views of that data, and
sharing those views in apps. CRM Analytics is a better way to distribute insight to business users so they can understand and act on
changing information.
Intelligent Analytics Apps
Provide your teams with curated paths through your data, plus powerful tools for spontaneous, deep explorations. With an intelligent
app, you have a purpose-built set of analyses and insights about a specific area of your business. Answer pressing questions, predict
outcomes, and get recommendations on the next best actions with insights infused directly within the flow of work in Salesforce.
Analyze Data with Tableau
Tableau is a complete, flexible analytics platform with cloud, on-premises, and desktop applications for harmonizing, managing,
and exploring data with interactive visualizations. You can combine and manage data from multiple sources, including Salesforce,
in the Tableau platform.
Unified Analytics Experiences
With unified experiences in Analytics tab, mobile, and Slack, you can interact with all of your Lightning reports and dashboards, CRM
Analytics assets, Tableau views, and Einstein Discovery models and predictions.
Explain, Predict, and Take Action with Einstein Discovery
Einstein Discovery augments your business intelligence with statistical modeling and supervised machine learning to identify, surface,
and visualize insights into your business data. It uses predictive and prescriptive analysis to predict future outcomes, as well as
suggests ways in which you can improve predicted outcomes. Einstein Discovery requires either the CRM Analytics Plus license or
Einstein Predictions license, both of which are available for an extra cost.
Salesforce Analytics Tools

Salesforce offers several tools to help you analyze your data and act on it. Reports and dashboards are built into Salesforce. Connect data
and create interactive visualizations with CRM Analytics, a Salesforce-native tool. Tableau is a flexible analytics platform with cloud,
on-premises, and desktop applications. Use this matrix to understand each tool’s capabilities.
Develop tools and data analysis for decision-making

Reports and Dashboards Limitations, Connect to Local Salesforce Data Connect to Salesforce Data
Allocations, and Technical Requirements Connect to Remote Data Outside of Unlock Hidden Insights with Tableau for
Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards Salesforce Data Cloud
Build a Report Clean, Transform, and Load Data Structure Data for Analysis
Build a Dashboard CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud Get Started with Building Views
Explore and Visualize Your Data Analyze Data
Build CRM Analytics Dashboards
2
Analyze Your Data Salesforce Analytics Tools
Bring data into decision-making processes

Export and Connect Reports to Other Tools Create and Share CRM Analytics Apps to Publish Data Sources and Workbooks
Drill Down into Your Reports to Learn Even Give Business Users a Big Data Picture Schedule Extract Refreshes as You Publish
More Intelligent Analytics Apps a Workbook
Link from Dashboard Widgets in Lightning Deploy CRM Analytics Industry Apps and Use Parameters to Make Views More
Experience Prebuilt Apps Interactive
Embed Dashboards on the Home Tab and Embed Dashboards Everywhere Embed Tableau Views into Salesforce
in Lightning Apps CRM Analytics Distribution and Packaging Explore and Manage Web Content
Govern and manage

Manage Your Reports and Dashboards on CRM Analytics Security Implementation Tableau Cloud Site Administrator Roles and
Analytics Home Guide Tasks
Improve Report Performance Data Integration Best Practicies Governance in Tableau
Control Dashboard Data Visibility Control Access to the Analytics Studio Set Web Edit, Save, and Download Access
on Content
Answer business questions with data

Analyze Reports with Einstein Discovery for Learn What You Can Do with CRM Analytics Explore and Inspect Data in a View
Reports Converse with Your Data What can I do with a Tableau Web View?
Filter Report Data Get Data Answers While You Search with Explore Metrics with Tableau Pulse
Filter a Dashboard Ask Data for Salesforce
Personalize and act on your analysis

Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards Get Scheduled Updates with Email Create a Subscription to a View or Workbook
Customize Report Views in the Run Page Subscriptions Use Custom Views
Schedule and Subscribe to Reports Save Your Filtered View of a Dashboard Customize the Underlying Data you View
Get Notified When Report Conditions are Monitor Important Metrics with the CRM Send Select Data to Salesforce Flow
Met Analytics Watchlist
Perform Salesforce Actions Directly from
CRM Analytics
3
Analyze Your Data Reports and Dashboards
Collaborate with others around data

Subscribe to Dashboards and Reports Set and Send Smart Notifications Set and Send Data-Driven Alerts
Report and Dashboard Folders Share, Annotate, Present, and Download Create Metrics with Tableau Pulse
Stay Organized with Collections CRM Analytics Share or Grant Access to Content
Post Lightning Dashboards to Slack Curate and Share Insights with Collections Explore and Manage Web Items
View Your Reports on Mobile with Enhanced Go Mobile with CRM Analytics Tableau Mobile Overview
Reports CRM Analytics for Slack Tableau for Slack
Reports and Dashboards

Salesforce offers a powerful suite of reporting tools that work together to help you understand and act on your data.
Get Started with Reports and Dashboards

Manage Reports and Dashboards in the Analytics Tab
Help
• Manage Reports and Dashboards in the Analytics Tab
• Browsing Analytics Home
• Use Navigation Breadcrumbs in Analytics Home
• Create Reports and Dashboards in Analytics Home
• Stay Organized with Collections
• Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards
• Share a Lightning Report or Dashboard Folder
Learn Reporting Concepts and Build Your First Report and

Trailhead
Dashboard
• Reports and Dashboards (Lightning Experience)
• Reports and Dashboards (Salesforce Classic)
Help
• Reports Basics
• Dashboards Basics
Video
• Series: Get Started with Reports and Dashboards in
Lightning Experience
• Series: Get Started with Reports and Dashboards in
Salesforce Classic
Review Report and Dashboard Limitations

Help
• Reports and Dashboards Limits and Allocations
4
Get Started with Reports and Dashboards
• Lightning Reports and Dashboards Technical Requirements
Report on Your Data

Build Reports
Help
• Build a Report
Video
• Build a Report (Lightning Experience)
• Getting Started with Buckets (Salesforce Classic)
• Building Matrix Reports (Salesforce Classic)
• Introducing Joined Reports in Salesforce (Salesforce
Classic)
Filter Reports
Help
• Filter Reports by Values
• Filter Across Objects with Cross Filters
• Filter Reports with URL Parameters in Lightning Experience
Video
• How to Use Cross Filters (Lightning Experience)
• Dynamically Filter Reports Using URL Parameters
(Lightning Experience)
• Using Cross Filters in Reports (Salesforce Classic)
Share Reports and Report Data

Help
• Report and Dashboard Folders
Video
• Manage Report and Dashboard Folders (Lightning
Experience)
Subscribe to and Schedule Reports

Help
• Schedule and Subscribe to Reports
Video
• Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning
Experience)
• Report Notifications (Salesforce Classic)
• Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic)
5
Report on Your Data

Work with Report Data in Other Tools
Help
• Salesforce Reports in Quip
• Export a Report
Analyze Report Data Using AI

Help
• Analyze Reports with Einstein Discovery for Reports
Troubleshoot Reports
Video
• Making Your Reports Run Faster (Salesforce Classic)
Share Insights with Dashboards

Build Dashboards
Help
• Build a Dashboard
• Edit and Customize Lightning Experience Dashboard
Widgets
• Salesforce Classic Dashboards
• Control Dashboard Data Visibility
• Install the Preconfigured Sales Cloud Dashboards from
AppExchange
• Sample CRM Dashboards (PDF)
Video
• An Overview of Dashboards (Salesforce Classic)
Filter Dashboards
Help
• Filter a Dashboard
Subscribe to and Schedule Dashboards

Help
• Subscribe to or Schedule Dashboards
Video
• Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning
Experience)
Share Dashboards
Help
• Report and Dashboard Folders
6
Analyze Your Data Manage Your Reports and Dashboards on Analytics Home
Share Insights with Dashboards
Video
• Manage Report and Dashboard Folders (Lightning
Experience)
Troubleshoot Dashboards
Help
• Why Doesn't My Dashboard Display the Data I Expect?
Manage Your Reports and Dashboards on Analytics Home

The Analytics tab provides a modern and cohesive experience for organizing all your analytics
EDITIONS
content in one place. You can access all your reports and dashboards in a single location, making
it easier for you to manage and analyze your data. Some of the enhancements you can experience Available in: Lightning
in the Analytics tab include an improved search experience that helps you find the information you Experience
need more efficiently. Another enhancement is the organization of your data with Collections to
curate analytics for a project or items that are the most relevant to you. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Enterprise,
Watch a Demo: Unified Analytics Home Professional, Unlimited,
From the App Launcher, select Analytics. and Developer Editions.
Note: If you can’t find the Analytics tab or accidentally remove it, refer to the steps in
Personalize the Navigation Bar in Lightning Experience. USER PERMISSIONS
Use the search bar (1) for keyword searches and Browse (2) to locate specific reports and dashboards. To access the Analytics tab:
The cards in For You (3) organize your reports and dashboards and help you find what you’re looking • Legacy Folder Sharing
for quickly. Go to My Analytics (4) to access content from a chronological listing and Favorites (5). Run Reports AND
Use Collections (6) to curate and organize analytics across different folders, and share them with Manage
other users. Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
To access the Analytics tab

with CRM Analytics items:
• Use CRM Analytics
Browsing the Analytics Tab

Find the last report or dashboard that you worked with or see what’s available on the Analytics tab. Browse enables you to quickly
locate the items you’re looking for by filtering through different categories.
Use Navigation Breadcrumbs on the Analytics Tab
Use the navigation breadcrumb to guide you back to where you started when opening items in the Analytics tab.
7
Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards

Favorite your reports and dashboards for quick access, such as My Analytics, and throughout the Analytics tab.
Stay Organized with Collections
Collections enable you to curate and organize your analytics in a customized way. By creating a collection, you have a personalized
set of analytics that’s relevant to your projects or interests. Your analytics can be drawn from different folders, and you can avoid
searching different folders to access your most important analytics. In addition, collections can personalize the home page that
makes it easier to find and use the information that matters most to you.
Create Reports and Dashboards on the Analytics Tab
Create reports and dashboards right from the Analytics tab. Rather than opening multiple tabs, you can stay in one app and create
the analytics you want.
Share a Lightning Report or Dashboard Folder
Use enhanced folder sharing to share a report or dashboard folder with users, groups, roles, or territories. Enhanced folder sharing
is the default option for all orgs created after 2013.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Report or Dashboard Folder as a Favorite
Create a Report or Dashboard Subfolder in Lightning Experience
Create a Lightning Report or Dashboard Folder
Global Search for Folders
Quick Search for Folders
Rename a Report or Dashboard Folder in Lightning Experience
8
Browsing the Analytics Tab

Find the last report or dashboard that you worked with or see what’s available on the Analytics tab.
EDITIONS
Browse enables you to quickly locate the items you’re looking for by filtering through different
categories. Available in: Lightning
Click Browse (1) that shows all your analytics organized by type. Within Browse are filters that set Experience
the current context and determine the results that are returned. Click an asset filter (2) to narrow
Available in: Essentials,
down the browse page to a selection, then click additional filters (3) to narrow your search further
Group, Enterprise,
by date or owner. Professional, Unlimited,
and Developer Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
To browse the Analytics tab:

• Legacy Folder Sharing
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
To browse the Analytics tab

Click column headers to sort search results in ascending or descending order.
9
Click Details in the row-action menu to view asset metadata.
10
Use Navigation Breadcrumbs on the Analytics Tab

Use the navigation breadcrumb to guide you back to where you started when opening items in
EDITIONS
the Analytics tab.
Navigation breadcrumbs are activated when you open a report or dashboard. Use the navigation Available in: Lightning
breadcrumb to guide you back to where you started, whether from home, search, or browse. In Experience
addition to helping you know where you started, the navigation breadcrumb also identifies the
item and type you’re currently viewing.
Group, Enterprise,
This breadcrumb begins with the location where the item was opened (1). In this example, the Professional, Unlimited,
dashboard was opened from Browse. Next, is the item type (2). Within the opened dashboard it and Developer Editions.
shows its icon (3), type (4), and saved name (5).
USER PERMISSIONS
To access the Analytics tab:

Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards

11
Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards

Favorite your reports and dashboards for quick access, such as My Analytics, and throughout the
EDITIONS
Analytics tab.
Favorite analytics assets by using the row level action menu. Available in: Lightning
Experience

Group, Enterprise,
Professional, Unlimited,
USER PERMISSIONS
To access the Analytics tab:

Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Access favorited assets from the Favorites tab (1), Browse (2), or the global header (3).
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards

12
Stay Organized with Collections

Collections enable you to curate and organize your analytics in a customized way. By creating a
EDITIONS
collection, you have a personalized set of analytics that’s relevant to your projects or interests. Your
analytics can be drawn from different folders, and you can avoid searching different folders to access Available in: Lightning
your most important analytics. In addition, collections can personalize the home page that makes Experience
it easier to find and use the information that matters most to you.
Available in: Professional,
Add your items, such as those related to a project or commonly used, for immediate access. You
Enterprise, Performance,
can pin collections to your home page, hide collections, and share collections with others. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Available in: Enhanced

Folder Sharing
Also available with CRM

Analytics, which is available
for an extra cost in
Performance, Enterprise,
Unlimited, and Developer
Editions.
SEE ALSO:
USER PERMISSIONS
Curate and Share Insights with Collections
To use collections:
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
To manage a collection with

CRM Analytics items:
13
Create Reports and Dashboards on the Analytics Tab

Create reports and dashboards right from the Analytics tab. Rather than opening multiple tabs, you
EDITIONS
can stay in one app and create the analytics you want.
From the Analytics tab, click the Create button. Options to create a report, dashboard, and folder Available in: Lightning
appear within its menu. For example, from the menu, click Dashboard, and it brings up the wizard Experience
for a new dashboard.
Group, Enterprise,
USER PERMISSIONS
To create reports and

dashboards on the Analytics
tab:
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
When you finish, use the navigation breadcrumb to return home.
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
14

Use enhanced folder sharing to share a report or dashboard folder with users, groups, roles, or
EDITIONS
territories. Enhanced folder sharing is the default option for all orgs created after 2013.
You can share a report or dashboard folder with up to 25 users, groups, roles, or territories from the Available in: Lightning
UI. To share a folder with up to 500 users, groups, roles, or territories, use the folder sharing REST Experience
API.
1. Open the folders list on the Analytics, Reports, or Dashboards tab. Enterprise, Performance,
• On the Analytics tab, click Browse and then click Folders. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
• On the Reports or Dashboard tab, select a folder view from the left panel.
2. Find the folder in the list, click , and select Share. Folder Sharing
3. From the Share With dropdown, select who you want to share with.
USER PERMISSIONS
To share report folders:

• Manage Reports in
Public Folders
To share dashboard folders:
• Manage Dashboards in
Public Folders
4. For Name, enter the name you want to match. The name must match the category (such as user, group, or role). For example, if
you select User as the category, specify the name of a user.
5. Select the folder access level for the user, role, group, or territory.
15
Note: The Analytics tab doesn’t support sharing with partner roles. To share with a partner role, access the Share Folder
window from the Reports or Dashboards tab.
6. Click Share. The sharing setting is applied to the Who Can Access list. Continue to add entries as needed. You can share with users,
groups, roles, territories, or a combination. If a user is identified in more than one entity, the greatest permission is granted. For
example, a group is added with view only, but a user in the group is also added with edit or manage permissions. In this case, the
edit or manage permissions apply to that user. To delete a Who Can Access entry, click X to the right of the entry. To modify the
access level for an entry, select a new access level.
7. When you’re done, click X in the upper corner of the dialog box to close it and return to the page you were on.
16
Analyze Your Data Reports
The folder is now available on the Folders list for organizing your Lightning reports or dashboards.
SEE ALSO:
Reports
Reports give you access to your Salesforce data. You can examine your Salesforce data in almost
EDITIONS
infinite combinations, display it in easy-to-understand formats, and share the resulting insights with
others. Before building, reading, and sharing reports, review these reporting basics. Available in: Salesforce
As you prepare to report on your Salesforce data, keep these tips in mind: Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
• Well-designed reports run faster.
Experience
• Before building your report, consider writing down each of the questions your report must
answer. This way, your report is sure to return all the data you need. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Professional,
• Reports are shared via folders. Whomever has permission to the folder your report is saved in
also has access to your report. Ensure that you save your report in an appropriate folder. Unlimited, and Developer
Before building your first report, familiarize yourself with these features and concepts. Editions
Report Builder Available in: Enhanced
The report builder is a visual, drag-and-drop tool which you use to create reports and edit existing Folder Sharing and Legacy
ones. The report builder is where you choose a report type, report format, and the fields that Folder Sharing
make up your report.
You can launch the report builder from the Analytics tab or the Reports tab.
• To start a new report, click Create > Report on the Analytics tab or New Report on the Reports tab.
• To edit a report, find the report on the Analytics tab or Reports tab and select > Edit.
Fields
One or more fields describe each report result. If you imagine that your report as a table of information, then each row is a result and
each column is a field.
For example, a human resources manager creates a report about employees. Each result is an employee, and each field is a different
piece of information about the employee: first name, last name, job title, start date, and so forth.
When you create or edit a report, you choose which fields you want to include in your report. To ensure your reports run quickly, it’s
a good idea to include only the fields that you need.
Filters
Limit the data that your report returns by using filters. Filters are useful for many reasons, such as focusing your report on specific
data, or ensuring that your report runs quickly.
For example, say your report returns all the Cases in your company, but you only want to see Cases which are open and assigned to
you. Filter the report on the Owner field and Status field.
Add filters in the Report Builder. In Lightning Experience, you can add, edit, or remove filters while reading a report, too.
Report Types
The report type governs which fields are available in your report. For example, File and Content reports have fields like File ID,
File Name, and Total Downloads. Accounts reports have fields like Account ID, Account Name, and Phone.
The first thing you do when creating a report is choose a report type.
17
Report Format
The report format specifies how your report results are laid out. Available formats are tabular (no grouping), summary (grouped by
rows), matrix (grouped by rows and columns), or joined (with report blocks that provide different views of your data). In the Salesforce
Classic report builder, you must choose a report format before grouping data. In the Lightning report builder, the report format
automatically updates as you group report data.
Build a Report
When you have questions about your Salesforce data, like “How much revenue did we earn in the South East last quarter?”, “Which
lead source is generating the most closed opportunities?”, or “What is the average age of all open cases?”, build a report to get the
answers.
Customize Report Views in the Run Page
Use the power of Lightning Experience when you review and analyze your report records in the run page.
Updating Multiple Fields Inline on the Report Run Page in Lightning Experience
Keep records up to date by editing field values directly on tabular, summary, and matrix reports.
Filter Report Data
What if your report gives you more data than you need? Use filters to pare down your report until it only shows the data that you
want.
Schedule and Subscribe to Reports
Receive notifications that keep you informed about metrics you care most about without having to manually run reports. In Salesforce
Classic, you can specify criteria that trigger report notifications.
Export and Connect Reports to Other Tools
Export or connect a report to another tool, such as Quip, to work with report data outside of Salesforce.
Drill Down into Your Reports to Learn Even More
Drill-down helps you take a closer look at records in a report. For example, as a sales manager, drill-down can help you track the
progress of just a few of your reps or review the breakdown of current opportunities based on type.
Organize Reports
Keep your reports at your fingertips by sorting them into folders and deleting unused reports. If you have a lot of reports, you can
use the search field to find the one you need.
Analyze Reports with Einstein Discovery for Reports
Einstein Discovery for Reports (previously known as Einstein Data Insights) scans your report data - quickly and thoroughly - using
artificial intelligence and comprehensive statistical analysis. Einstein Discovery for Reports goes deep into the report data, explores
underlying patterns, identifies insights, and surfaces those insights with charts and explanations that are easy to understand. Einstein
Discovery for Reports works with Tabular and Summary reports.
Use these tips to help solve problems that arise when you’re working with reports.
Improve Report Performance
If your report is running slowly, it’s generally because it’s processing a lot of data, which can be reduced with filters and other methods.
Review these best practices and recommendations to optimize your report and help it run faster.
18
Build a Report
When you have questions about your Salesforce data, like “How much revenue did we earn in the
EDITIONS
South East last quarter?”, “Which lead source is generating the most closed opportunities?”, or “What
is the average age of all open cases?”, build a report to get the answers. Available in: both Salesforce
Classic and Lightning
1. Build a Report in Lightning Experience Experience
Lightning Report Builder is a powerful and intuitive tool for analyzing your Salesforce data. Available in: Essentials,
Group, filter, and summarize records to answer business questions like “How much revenue Group, Professional,
did we generate from new business in California last quarter?” For a visual overview of your Enterprise, Performance,
data, add a report chart. Refresh the preview to see progress as you build. When finished, run Unlimited, and Developer
your report to see the full results. Editions
2. Build a Report in Salesforce Classic Available in: Enhanced
Report Builder is a drag-and-drop tool for accessing your data quickly and comprehensively. Folder Sharing
Use it to set up new reports and edit existing ones.
3. Show Report Data Graphically
To help readers understand your data quickly and easily, show the data in chart form. Charts appear just above the report table. They
can help users get a feel for the data before they delve into the details. Use line charts to track changes over time, or a bar or pie
chart to compare values at a point in time. You can add a chart to any report that’s grouped by rows (summary report) or rows and
columns (matrix report). Charts can also appear in dashboard widgets.
4. Show Report Data in Tables
To help readers scan for data easily, hide details and ranges, limit the number of results shown, and highlight with color. You can
also show your table in a dashboard widget.
5. Categorize Data with Bucket Columns
Quickly categorize report records without creating a formula or a custom field by bucketing them. When you create a bucket column,
you define multiple categories (buckets) used to group report values. Like any other column in your report, you can sort, filter, and
group by bucket columns.
6. Evaluate Report Data with Formulas
Reports feature built-in basic math functions (sum, average, min, and max) that you can apply to any numerical column in a report.
When you're ready to perform advanced logical or mathematical operations, write a formula.
7. Count Unique Values in Report Results
See how many distinct values a column in your report returns with a unique count.
8. Combine Different Types of Information in a Joined Report
The joined report format lets you view different types of information in a single report. A joined report can contain data from multiple
standard or custom report types. You can turn any existing report into a joined report using the report builder.
9. Report on Historical Changes
On top of the standard up-to-the-minute reporting on the current state of your business, you can analyze day-to-day and week-to-week
changes in opportunities, cases, forecasts, and custom objects.
10. Report Type Reference
The report type you choose determines which records and fields appear in your report. For example, the Opportunities report type
gives you access to Opportunity records and fields like Amount, Stage, and Opportunity Owner.
19
11. Turn Automatic Updates to the Report Preview On or Off

Edit reports faster by turning off automatic preview updates. When off, you can make multiple edits without waiting for the preview
to refresh after each edit. When you’re ready to preview data, manually refresh the report preview. Or, see sample records returned
after each edit by keeping automatic previews on.
SEE ALSO:
Customizing Reports in Salesforce Classic
Build a Report in Lightning Experience

Lightning Report Builder is a powerful and intuitive tool for analyzing your Salesforce data. Group,
EDITIONS
filter, and summarize records to answer business questions like “How much revenue did we generate
from new business in California last quarter?” For a visual overview of your data, add a report chart. Available in: Lightning
Refresh the preview to see progress as you build. When finished, run your report to see the full Experience
results.
These instructions are for building reports in the Lightning Report Builder. To learn how to build a
Group, Essentials,
report using the Classic Report Builder, see Build a Report in Salesforce Classic in Salesforce Help. Professional, Enterprise,
Watch a video: Build a Report (Lightning Experience) Performance, Unlimited,
and Developer Editions
1. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report.
2. Choose a report type, and click Start Report.
Folder Sharing
In the Create New Report window, you can select a category from the left panel and search for
report types by name. You can also filter by objects or fields. Fields included via lookup or part
of composite fields (such as geolocation or address) aren’t available as filter options. When USER PERMISSIONS
using keyboard input, move focus to the selected filter option and use backspace or delete to To create, edit, and delete
remove the option. To display details about a report type, click it in the search results or in the reports in private folders:
Recently Used list. The Details panel lists reports created by you and others in your org that are • Create and Customize
based on the report type and the objects and structure that the report type uses. Reports
To view the fields in the report type, click the Fields tab in the Details panel. The report type To create, edit, and delete
you choose determines which records are returned and which fields are available in your report. reports in public and private
folders:
3. The report opens in edit mode, and shows a preview. • Report Builder OR Report
Builder (Lightning
In edit mode, add and remove fields to your report as columns, group by rows and columns,
Experience)
filter report data, or add a chart. Customize your report until it shows the data that you need.
4. To add a column to your report, choose a field in the Add column dropdown.
To remove a column from your report, in the Columns list click .
Removing a column from your report doesn’t delete the field. You can also add the column back later.
5. To summarize a column in your report:

a. From the preview pane, find the column that you want to summarize, and select > Summarize.
b. Choose how you want to summarize the column.
6. To group records in your report, choose a field in the Add group dropdown. You can group up to two rows and two columns.
After adding a group, you can show or hide detail rows, subtotals, and a grand total by clicking the switches at the bottom of the
preview pane.
20
Note: For a report that is grouped by rows and columns (matrix report), the preview sometimes shows different results than
the actual report.
After grouping records by a date field, you can also customize date granularity. First select the date field that you want to group your
report by. Then, for Group Date By, apply a calendar or fiscal period.
To ungroup records in your report, find the group you’d like to ungroup and then click . To ungroup all groups in your report,
from the Groups list, click .
Removing a group also removes the column from your report. If you still want to show the column, add it back.
7. To filter records from your report, click .

Depending on which report type you chose, your report has a few standard filters that are applied by default. Most templates include
a Show Me filter and a Date filter. The Show Me filter scopes report results around common groups, like “my opportunities” or “all
opportunities.” The Date filter scopes results around a date field, like “created date” or “closed date.”
• To add a field filter, choose a field from the Add filter dropdown.
• To edit a filter, including standard filters, click the filter.
• To remove a filter, click the on the filter.
For more information about filtering reports, see Filter Report Data in Salesforce Help.
8. To add a chart, first add at least one group, and click Add Chart.
•
To customize the chart, click . Change the chart type, color palette, and more.
• To show or hide the chart, click .
•
To remove the chart, select > Remove Chart.
9. Click Save. If this report is new, give it a name and, optionally, a description. With access and sharing in mind, save the report in an
appropriate folder.
10. To view the report results, click Run.
As you get ready to build reports with Lightning Report Builder, take note of how it differs from the Salesforce Classic Report Builder.
Remember, with the appropriate user permissions, both builders are available in Lightning Experience.
Table 1: Differences Between Lightning and Classic Report Builders

Feature Difference
Report Formats In the Salesforce Classic Report Builder, you must choose a report
format before grouping data.
In Lightning Report Builder, the report format automatically updates
as you group report data. It isn’t necessary to select a report format.
Charts Lightning Report Builder features the same charts as the report
view in Lightning Experience.
21
Build a Report in Salesforce Classic

Report Builder is a drag-and-drop tool for accessing your data quickly and comprehensively. Use it
EDITIONS
to set up new reports and edit existing ones.
Watch a Demo: Getting Started with Report Builder (Salesforce Classic) Available in: Salesforce
Classic (not available in all
Note: These instructions are for building reports in the Classic report builder. To learn how orgs)
to build a report using the Lightning report builder, see Build a Report in Lightning Experience
(Beta) on page 20 in Salesforce Help. Available in: Essentials,
• To customize an existing report using report builder, click the name of a report and click Enterprise, Performance,
Customize. Unlimited, and Developer
• To optimize screen real estate, report builder uses a compressed page header. Editions
• To view your application tabs, close the builder or click the Salesforce logo. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing and Legacy
1. Choose a Report Type in Salesforce Classic Folder Sharing
The report type you choose determines which records and fields appear in your report. For
example, the Opportunities report type gives you access to Opportunity records and fields like USER PERMISSIONS
Amount, Stage, and Type.
To create, edit, and delete
2. Report Formats in Salesforce Classic reports:
A report can use the tabular, summary, matrix, or joined format. Choose a format that’s complex • Legacy Folder Sharing
enough to capture the data you want to show, but simple enough to communicate it effectively.
Create and
3. Group Your Report Data in Salesforce Classic Customize Reports
Group data in columns or rows in summary, matrix, and joined reports to display meaningful AND
information. For example, group opportunities by Close Date to see closed opportunities or Report Builder
group cases by product to see the number of cases for each product. You can have groupings
Enhanced Folder
inside groupings.
Sharing
4. Keep Working While Your Report Preview Loads Create and
For most actions, you can continue working on your report while the preview loads. For example, Customize Reports
when editing a report you can drag multiple fields into the report, then create a grouping while AND
those columns load. Report Builder
5. Customizing Reports in Salesforce Classic
Report builder is a visual editor for reports. The report builder screen lets you work with report
fields and filters, and shows you a preview of your report with just some of the data.
6. Report Fields in Salesforce Classic
The Fields pane displays fields from the selected report type, organized by folder. It also lists custom summary formulas, which you
can create, edit, and delete.
7. Subtotal Report Results in Salesforce Classic
Subtotaling your reports gives you a tool to analyze trends in the data. You can group sets of information, sort the groupings, and
compare subtotals for each set against the overall total. In summary and joined reports, you can also subtotal by multiple fields to
give you cascading sets of information.
8. Smart Totaling in Reports
Smart totaling means that duplicate data is counted only once in a subtotal or total. Salesforce uses smart totaling when you run
reports that include duplicate data in any column chosen for summing or averaging.
22
9. Save Your Report in Salesforce Classic

Click Save to update an existing report with recent changes, or Save As to clone the original report without changing it. In Lightning
Experience, click Clone to clone the report.
SEE ALSO:
Keep Working While Your Report Preview Loads
Build a Report
Report Fields in Salesforce Classic
Choose a Report Type in Salesforce Classic
Report Formats in Salesforce Classic
Creating a Custom Report
Combine Different Types of Information in a Joined Report
23

The report type you choose determines which records and fields appear in your report. For example,
EDITIONS
the Opportunities report type gives you access to Opportunity records and fields like Amount, Stage,
and Type. Available in: Salesforce
There are two types of report types: standard report types and custom report types. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
Standard report types give you access to most Salesforce data. For example, the Opportunities
report type gives you access to Opportunity records and fields in your report. If you’re going to Available in: Essentials,
report on Opportunity Amounts or Probability or Type, then Opportunities is the report type is for Group, Professional,
you. Enterprise, Performance,
Custom report types give you access to custom objects in Salesforce, or custom views of standard
Editions
objects (like Opportunities), which your administrator configures. For example, your administrator
can create a custom report type that gives access to Opportunities, plus related fields from Products. Available in: Enhanced
With that custom report type, you can easily report on Opportunities for a given product. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
1. From the Reports tab, click New Report.
2. Select the report type, and then click Create. You can’t change the report type after the report
is created. USER PERMISSIONS
The report builder opens, granting access to records and fields based on your selected report type. To run reports:
SEE ALSO: Run Reports
Set Up a Custom Report Type Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Why doesn’t my report return the data I expect?
Run Reports
To schedule reports:
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
24
Report Formats in Salesforce Classic

A report can use the tabular, summary, matrix, or joined format. Choose a format that’s complex
EDITIONS
enough to capture the data you want to show, but simple enough to communicate it effectively.
You can choose one of the following report formats using the Format menu of the report builder. Available in: Salesforce
Tabular format is the default. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
Format Description Available in: Essentials,
Tabular Tabular reports are the simplest and fastest way to look at data. Similar to a Group, Professional,
spreadsheet, they consist simply of an ordered set of fields in columns, with each Enterprise, Performance,
matching record listed in a row. Tabular reports are best for creating lists of records Unlimited, and Developer
or a list with a single grand total. They can't be used to create groups of data or Editions
charts, and can't be used in dashboards unless rows are limited. Examples include Available in: Enhanced
contact mailing lists and activity reports. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
Summary Summary reports are similar to tabular reports, but also allow users to group rows
of data, view subtotals, and create charts. They can be used as the source report
for dashboard components. Use this type for a report to show subtotals based USER PERMISSIONS
on the value of a particular field or when you want to create a hierarchical list,
such as all opportunities for your team, subtotaled by Stage and Owner. To create, edit, and delete
reports:
Summary reports with no groupings show as tabular reports on the report run
page.
Create and
Matrix Matrix reports are similar to summary reports but allow you to group and Customize Reports
summarize data by both rows and columns. They can be used as the source AND
report for dashboard components. Use this type for comparing related totals,
Report Builder
especially if you have large amounts of data to summarize and you need to
compare values in several different fields, or you want to look at data by date Enhanced Folder
Sharing
and by product, person, or geography. Matrix reports without at least one row
Create and
and one column grouping show as summary reports on the report run page. Customize Reports
Building Matrix Reports (Salesforce Classic) AND
Report Builder
Joined Joined reports let you create multiple report blocks that provide different views
of your data. Each block acts like a “sub-report,” with its own fields, columns,
sorting, and filtering. A joined report can even contain data from different report
types.
Joined reports are available only in Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and
Developer Editions.
Introducing Joined Reports in Salesforce (Salesforce Classic)
Change the Report Format

If you change the report format, it affects filters and groupings, as follows:
When you change... What Happens?

Tabular to Summary or Matrix The Rows to Display filter is removed.
25
When you change... What Happens?

Summary, Matrix, or Joined to Tabular All groupings, charts, and custom summary formulas are removed from the report.
Grouping fields aren’t converted to columns in the tabular report. If the joined report
contained multiple blocks, the columns from only the first block are included in the tabular
report.
Summary to Matrix The first summary grouping becomes the first row grouping. The second becomes the
first column grouping. The third becomes the second row grouping.
If you're using the report wizard, the third summary grouping is removed.
Matrix to Summary The first row grouping becomes the first summary grouping. The second row grouping
becomes the third summary grouping. The first column grouping becomes the second
summary grouping. The second column grouping is removed.
If you're using the report wizard, both the second row grouping and second column
grouping are removed.
Tabular, Summary, or Matrix to Joined The existing report becomes the first block in the joined report, and the report type
becomes the principle report type for the joined report.
Joined report blocks are formatted as summary reports, so if you switch from a summary
to a joined report, your groupings stay the same. If you switch from a matrix to a joined
report, groupings are converted the same way as when you switch from a matrix to a
summary report.
The following items aren’t supported in joined reports, and aren’t converted:
• Bucket fields
• Cross filters
• The Rows to Display filter
SEE ALSO:
26
Group Your Report Data in Salesforce Classic

Group data in columns or rows in summary, matrix, and joined reports to display meaningful
EDITIONS
information. For example, group opportunities by Close Date to see closed opportunities or group
cases by product to see the number of cases for each product. You can have groupings inside Available in: Salesforce
groupings. Classic (not available in all
The Fields pane displays fields from the selected report type, organized by folder. Before you group orgs)
data in a summary report, drag at least a few fields into the preview pane.
• To add a group, drop a field onto a drop zone. Group (View Only),
Professional, Enterprise,
Add a group by dropping a field onto a drop zone.
Performance, Unlimited,

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

Click Show > Drop Zones to make them visible. You can also click a column menu for a field
reports:
in the report and choose Group by this Field.
If you group your report by a date field, you can click the group menu, select Group Dates By, Create and
and specify the grouping time frame: day, week, month, quarter, year, and so forth. Customize Reports
To group data in different report formats: Summary and joined reports can have up to three AND
grouping levels. Matrix reports can have two row and two column groupings. For matrix reports, Report Builder
you can't use the same field for both row and column groupings. For joined reports, you can
Enhanced Folder
use the fields from the Common Fields category in the Fields pane to group across all report
Sharing
blocks. Create and
Customize Reports
• To remove a group, click the group menu and choose Remove Group.
AND
You can also grab the group and:
Report Builder
– Drag it to the column bar to remove the group, but keep the field as a column in the report.
– To remove the group and the field from the report, drag it back to the Fields pane.
• To change the order of groups, drag the group. You can also click the group menu and choose Move Group Up, Move Group
Down for column groupings, or Move Group Left or Move Group Right for row groupings.
SEE ALSO:
Subtotal Report Results in Salesforce Classic
Keep Working While Your Report Preview Loads

For most actions, you can continue working on your report while the preview loads. For example, when editing a report you can drag
multiple fields into the report, then create a grouping while those columns load.
The data you see in the Preview panel is real data, but it’s only a subset of the data in the report, designed to show you what the report
will look like when you run it. Don’t worry if rows are missing or not sorted as expected in the Preview panel.
27
Note: For each external object in the report, your org calls out to the external system each time the preview loads. If the URL of
a report callout approaches or exceeds 2 KB, your org splits the request into multiple HTTP calls, with each URL being less than 2
KB.
You can continue working in the report preview while the following actions occur:
• Add, remove, or reorder fields
• Add or remove summary fields
• Add, remove, or reorder groupings
• Remove formulas
If you remove a summary field or formula used in a chart, the chart reloads, but the report preview loads asynchronously. Asynchronous
loading isn’t available for matrix and joined reports.
You can’t work in the report preview while the following actions occur:
• Add or edit formulas
• Remove a report's only grouping
• Remove a column used to limit the row count for a tabular report
• Sort the report by group or column
• Update standard or custom filters
• Change report format
• Show or hide report details
• Add or remove a chart
• Add or remove conditional highlighting
• Change Group Dates By
• Change a converted currency field
• Save the report
SEE ALSO:

Report builder is a visual editor for reports. The report builder screen lets you work with report fields
EDITIONS
and filters, and shows you a preview of your report with just some of the data.
To optimize screen real estate, report builder uses a compressed page header. To view your Available in: Salesforce
application tabs, simply close the builder or click the Salesforce logo. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
Available in: Group,


Folder Sharing
28
• Fields Pane (1): Find the fields you want using the Quick Find search box and field type filters, then drag them into the Preview pane
to add them to the report. You can create, view, edit, and delete custom summary formulas and bucket fields in the Fields pane as
well.
In the joined report format, the Fields pane displays fields from all report types added to the report, organized by report type.
• Filters Pane (2): Set the view, time frame, and custom filters to limit the data shown in the report.
29
• Preview Pane (3): The dynamic preview makes it easy for you to customize your report. Add, reorder, and remove columns, summary
fields, formulas, groupings, and blocks. Change the report format and display options, or add a chart. The preview shows only a
limited number of records. Run the report to see all your results.
Watch a Demo: Getting Started with Report Builder (Salesforce Classic)
SEE ALSO:
Build a Report

The Fields pane displays fields from the selected report type, organized by folder. It also lists custom summary formulas, which you can
create, edit, and delete.
Adding Field Filters
With tabular, summary, and matrix reports, you can drag a field from the Fields pane to the Filters pane to add a report filter.
Finding Fields
Find a field by typing its name into the Quick Find search box. You can also filter the list by type:
• Click to see all field types, as well as custom summary formulas.
• Click to see just text fields.
• Click to see just number fields (numeric, percentage, or currency).
• Click to see just date fields.
Adding and Removing Fields
To add a field to a tabular, summary, or matrix report, double-click it or drag it into the Preview pane. To add a field to a joined report,
drag it to the Preview pane. Press CTRL to select multiple fields. Drag an entire folder to add all its fields. If a tabular, summary, or
matrix report already contains a field, you can't add it again. You can add the same field multiple times to a joined report as long as
you add it to different blocks. In the preview pane, click Show > Details to see your report fields. While Show > Details is disabled,
you can only add summary fields.
To remove a field, grab its column header and drag it back to the Fields pane. With tabular, summary, and matrix reports, you can
click the column menu and choose Remove Column, or click Remove All Columns.
Working with More than One Field
You can select multiple fields to add, remove, or reorder. For example, you can add Created By, Type and Opportunity
Name to your report at the same time.
To select multiple fields or columns, press CTRL (Windows) or Command (Mac).
Note:
• When you add multiple fields, they appear in the report in the order selected.
• For summary and tabular formats, disable Show > Details when adding multiple summarizable fields to a report. The
Summarize dialog automatically appears, letting you select summaries for all the fields at once.
• Enable Show > Details when adding non-summary fields, such as text fields to a report.
• When working with a joined report, you can select multiple fields from the Common Fields category and one report type.
You can’t select multiple fields from different report types.
30
Ordering and Sorting Fields

Reorder report columns by grabbing a column header and dragging it to a new location. Press CTRL to select multiple columns. To
sort your report by a column, click its column header. You can also click the column menu and choose Sort Ascending or Sort
Descending from the dropdown list. Sort is disabled when Show > Details isn't selected.
Changing the Currency Displayed
If your organization has enabled multiple currencies, you can change the currency shown for all currency fields. Click Show > Display
Currencies Using, then select an active currency to display.
SEE ALSO:
Evaluate Groups and Totals with Summary Formulas
Group Your Report Data in Salesforce Classic
Summarize Report Data
Highlight Data Ranges with Conditional Formatting

Subtotaling your reports gives you a tool to analyze trends in the data. You can group sets of
EDITIONS
information, sort the groupings, and compare subtotals for each set against the overall total. In
summary and joined reports, you can also subtotal by multiple fields to give you cascading sets of Available in: Salesforce
information. Classic (not available in all
For example, if you subtotal a summary report by Opportunity Owner, the report groups the accounts orgs)
by Opportunity Owner, lists the number of opportunities owned by each user, and shows subtotals
by Opportunity Owner for all the columns in the report. You could further subtotal each user’s Group, Professional,
opportunities by product. Enterprise, Performance,
1. Click Customize or Edit from any report. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
2. In the report builder, add a summary field to the report.
Summaries show up at grouping levels as well as for individual rows. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
SEE ALSO:
Add a Summary Formula Column to a Report
USER PERMISSIONS
Subtotal Report Results in Salesforce Classic To subtotal report results:
Smart Totaling in Reports Create and

Customize Reports
Smart totaling means that duplicate data is counted only once in a subtotal or total. Salesforce uses
AND
smart totaling when you run reports that include duplicate data in any column chosen for summing
or averaging. Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
For example, an opportunity has two products, and you run the Opportunity Product Report with
Sharing
the total opportunity amount selected as a column to sum by. The amount appears twice in the Create and
details of the report, once for each product on the opportunity. Customize Reports
In this case, smart totaling correctly calculates any subtotals, grand totals, and averages, adding AND
that opportunity amount only once. Report Builder
31
Note: For dashboard widgets, smart totaling isn’t used. For example, in a dashboard table, the total displayed is simply the sum
of the values listed in the table.
SEE ALSO:
Save Your Report in Salesforce Classic

Click Save to update an existing report with recent changes, or Save As to clone the original report
EDITIONS
without changing it. In Lightning Experience, click Clone to clone the report.
1. Verify the name, description, and folder, then choose where to go next: Available in: Salesforce
• Click Save to save the report and go to the Reports home page
orgs)
• Click Save & Return to Report to save it and go back to the report run page.
Note: To save your report at a specific role hierarchy level on sales, forecast, opportunity, Professional, Enterprise,
and activity reports, select Save Hierarchy Level. Performance, Unlimited,
Tip: If you add a colon to your report name, it displays in two separate lines when you view
the report. Use this information to categorize reports by name, or better display long names. Available in: Enhanced
For example, if you enter First Line: Second Line for Report Name, you see
Folder Sharing
this result on the run page:
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports
Show Report Data Graphically

To help readers understand your data quickly and easily, show the data in chart form. Charts appear just above the report table. They
can help users get a feel for the data before they delve into the details. Use line charts to track changes over time, or a bar or pie chart
to compare values at a point in time. You can add a chart to any report that’s grouped by rows (summary report) or rows and columns
(matrix report). Charts can also appear in dashboard widgets.
1. Add a Chart to a Report

Add a chart to give users a visual way to understand the data in your report.
2. Chart Properties
You can add a chart to any report that’s grouped by rows (summary report) or rows and columns (matrix report). The chart properties
specify the data that appears in the chart, its labels and colors, and any conditional highlighting.
32
3. Present Data Effectively with Charts

Report chart appearance can be affected by negative values, very large or small numbers, custom summary formulas, and field-level
security. Chart appearance can also change when you switch the report format or change groupings and blocks.
4. Show Multiple Sets of Data in One Chart
A combination chart plots multiple sets of data on a single chart. Each set of data is based on a different field, so values are easy to
compare. You can also combine certain chart types to present data in different ways in a single chart.
5. Combination Chart Examples
Use a combination chart to show multiple values against a single axis range, show two chart types together, or compare two
continuous summary values.
6. Chart Formatting Options
Control the appearance and behavior of your chart.
SEE ALSO:
Present Data Effectively with Charts
Add a Chart to a Report
Chart Properties
Combination Chart Examples
Show Multiple Sets of Data in One Chart
33

Add a chart to give users a visual way to understand the data in your report.
EDITIONS
Note: You can add a chart to any report that’s grouped by rows (summary report) or rows
and columns (matrix report). Available in: Salesforce
In Lightning Experience, add or edit a chart from the report builder or the report run page. orgs) and Lightning
1. To show or hide the chart, click . Experience
2. To edit the chart, click . Available in: Essentials,

From the chart editor, change the chart type, give the chart a title, change axes, show or hide Enterprise, Performance,
a reference line, and show or hide chart values. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
In Salesforce Classic, add or edit a chart from the report builder.
1. Click Add Chart in report builder. For existing charts, click Edit Chart.
2. Select a chart type. Folder Sharing
3. Enter the appropriate settings on the Chart Data tab for the chart type you selected.
4. Enter the appropriate settings on the Formatting tab. USER PERMISSIONS
5. Click OK. To create, edit, and delete
reports:
SEE ALSO: • Legacy Folder Sharing
Chart Types Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
34
Chart Properties
You can add a chart to any report that’s grouped by rows (summary report) or rows and columns
EDITIONS
(matrix report). The chart properties specify the data that appears in the chart, its labels and colors,
and any conditional highlighting. Available in: Salesforce
The tables in this topic describe the properties for report charts. Not all properties are available for Classic (not available in all
all reports. To view and edit report properties: orgs) and Lightning
Experience
• In the Lightning Experience report builder or report run page, click .
• In the Salesforce Classic report builder, click Add Chart or Edit Chart and edit the fields on the
Chart Data and Formatting tabs.
Chart Data Settings Editions
Control the data that appears in your chart with these options. Available in: Enhanced
Field Description Folder Sharing
Chart Type Select the type of chart to use when representing the data in your
report. The chart type that you choose determines which chart USER PERMISSIONS
properties are available to set.
X-Axis and Y-Axis Choose what values to display on the axes of your chart. Depending reports:
on the chart type, axis values can be record count, summary fields, • Legacy Folder Sharing
or groupings defined in the report. Create and
Customize Reports
Note: If the Y-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula
AND
that has the Where Will this Formula Be
Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than Report Builder
All summary levels, then the X-axis and Groupings Enhanced Folder
selection must correspond to that custom summary formula's Sharing
grouping level. Create and
Customize Reports
Combination Chart Select this option to plot additional values on this chart. The chart AND
type you chose must allow combination charts. Report Builder
Groupings Choose how to group information on your chart. You can only pick
from groupings defined in the report. For bar and column charts, click
an icon to select the grouping display: side-by-side, stacked, or stacked
to 100%. For either single or grouped line charts, you can select
Cumulative.
Values Choose what to display as values for your pie, donut, or funnel chart.
Wedges Choose what to display as wedges for your pie or donut chart.
Segments Choose what to display as segments for your funnel chart.
Chart Presentation
Control the appearance and behavior of your chart using these options.
35
Field Description
Chart Title Enter a name for the chart.
Title Color Select the color for the text of your chart title.
Title Size Select the font size for the text of your chart title. The maximum size is 18. Larger values are shown at
18 points.
Text Color Select a color for all the text and labels in your chart.
Text Size Select a font size for all the text and labels in your chart. The maximum size is 18. Larger values are shown
at 18 points.
Background Fade Choose a direction for a gradient color background. Also select a Start Color and End Color
for the gradient. Use white for both if you don’t want a background design.
Legend Position Choose a place to display the legend in relation to your chart.
Combine Small Combine all groups less than or equal to 3% of the total into a single “Others” wedge or segment. Deselect
Groups into to show all values individually on the chart. This setting applies only to pie, donut, and funnel charts.
“Others” This option is on by default for pie and donut charts, and off for funnel.
X- or Y-Axis Range Choose a manual or automatic axis range for bar, line, or column charts. If you choose manual, enter
numbers for the minimum and maximum axis values to be displayed. If there are data points outside
the range that you set, the axis automatically extends to include those values when you generate the
chart.
Show Axis Labels Display labels for each axis of your chart. This setting applies only to bar and line charts.
Show Labels Display labels for your pie, donut, or funnel chart.
Show Group % Display the percentage value for each group in the chart.
Show X- or Y-Axis Display the values of individual records or groups on the chart axis. This setting applies only to certain
Values horizontal bar and vertical column charts.
Show Values Display the values of individual records or groups on the chart. This setting applies only to certain chart
types.
Show Wedge % Display the percentage value for each wedge of pie and donut charts.
Show Total Display the total value for the donut chart.
Show Segment % Display the percentage value for each segment of funnel charts.
Show Details on Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart type.
Hover Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled when viewing charts that have
more than 200 data points.
Chart Size Select a size for the chart, from Tiny to Extra Large.
Chart Position Place the chart above or below your report.
36
Conditional Highlighting
Highlight field values reports based on ranges and colors you specify. You can apply conditional formatting to reports that are grouped
by rows (summary reports) or grouped by rows and columns (matrix reports).
Field Description
Summary Choose a summary field whose number ranges you want represented by colors.
Low Color Select a color to represent data that falls below the Low Breakpoint value.
Low Breakpoint The number that acts as the threshold between the Low Color and the Mid Color. Values that
are the same as the Low Breakpoint value are shown as the Mid Color.
Mid Color Select a color to represent data that falls between the Low Breakpoint and High Breakpoint
values.
High Breakpoint The number that acts as the threshold between the Mid Color and the High Color. Values that
are the same as the High Breakpoint value are shown as the High Color.
High Color Select a color to represent data that falls above the High Breakpoint value.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types

Report chart appearance can be affected by negative values, very large or small numbers, custom
EDITIONS
summary formulas, and field-level security. Chart appearance can also change when you switch
the report format or change groupings and blocks. Available in: Salesforce
• You can't have more than 250 groups or 4,000 values in a chart. If you see an error message Classic (not available in all
saying that your chart has too many groups or values to plot, adjust the report filters to reduce orgs) and Lightning
the number. In combination charts, all groups and values count against the total. Experience
• If you lose access to a field used in a chart, use another field in its place. If no other fields are Available in: Essentials,
available, record count is used. Group, Professional,
• Decimal-place precision on charts isn’t customizable. Numeric and currency values round to Enterprise, Performance,
two decimal places. Percentage values round to one decimal place. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
• If numeric values are too large or too small, they’re shown in scientific notation. For example,
the number 5,750,000,000 is displayed as 5.75E9; -0.0000000061 is displayed as -6.1E-9. Available in: Enhanced
• Some charts may display shortened numbers with a unit symbol. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
Symbol Unit Example
K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
37
Symbol Unit Example

P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
f Quadrillionth (10^-15) 4f = 0.000000000000004
a Quintillionth (10^-18) 4a = 0.000000000000000004
z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
• Negative values are displayed on all line charts and bar and column charts.
In Salesforce Classic, negative values don't appear on pie, donut, and funnel charts. Groupings containing negative values appear
in the legend, and negative values are reflected in the calculation of all summary values, including the total for donut charts.
In Lightning Experience, negative values appear on donut and funnel charts.
• When creating charts, it isn’t good practice to group by a field on a child object and then sum by a field on the parent object. On a
donut chart, for example, it’s possible that the total shown doesn’t match the sum of the wedges.
• In Salesforce Classic, dashboard and report charts that display values from summary formulas display decimal places using your
default currency setting instead of what you specified for the formula. For example, if the summary formula specifies zero decimal
places, no decimal places appear in columns, but chart values show the number of decimal places specified for your default currency
(usually two decimal places). This limit applies to currencies, numbers, and percentages.
• With joined reports, summary field names contain both the field name and the block name. For example, if you’ve summarized the
Amount field in Block 1, it appears as Block 1 — Sum of Amount in the Chart Editor. A cross-block or standard custom
summary formula contains the block name when the formula is included in multiple blocks.
• When a report already has a chart, changing the report format or removing blocks, groupings, or summary fields has the impacts
described in this table.
When you make this change ... The effect is ...

Switch format from summary, matrix, or All charts are removed from the report.
joined to tabular
Switch format from summary to matrix The first summary grouping becomes the first row grouping. The second becomes the
first column grouping. The third becomes the second row grouping. The chart is
unchanged.
38
When you make this change ... The effect is ...

Switch format from matrix to summary The first row grouping becomes the first summary grouping. The second row grouping
becomes the third summary grouping. The first column grouping becomes the second
summary grouping. The second column grouping is removed. If the chart used the
second column grouping, that grouping is replaced by the first available summary
field that’s not already used in the chart.
Switch format from summary or matrix to The existing report becomes the first block and the chart remains in the report.
joined If the matrix report used the second column grouping, that grouping is replaced by
the first available summary field that’s not already used in the chart.
If the summary or matrix report included a grouping from a bucket field, the grouping
is replaced with the next available grouping not already used in the chart.
Switch format from joined to summary or The first block becomes the report, and groupings and the chart are preserved. If the
matrix chart in the joined version contained summary fields from the first block, they remain
in the chart in the summary report. Summaries from other blocks are removed from
the chart.
Remove a block containing a summary The summary field is replaced with the next available summary field. If no additional
field from a joined report summary fields are available, the original field is replaced with the record count from
the first remaining block. Removing all blocks from a report removes the chart
completely.
Remove a grouping used in the chart The grouping is replaced with the next available grouping. If all groupings are removed,
the chart is removed as well. Groupings can be removed automatically when you add
a report type to a joined report or if a field becomes unavailable, for example as a result
of field-level security.
Remove a summary field used in the chart The summary field is replaced with the next available summary field. If no additional
(including custom and cross-block summary fields are available, the field is replaced with the record count for either the
summaries) report or the first block. Summary fields can be removed automatically, for example
as a result of field-level security or when the report format changes.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Formatting Options
39

A combination chart plots multiple sets of data on a single chart. Each set of data is based on a
EDITIONS
different field, so values are easy to compare. You can also combine certain chart types to present
data in different ways in a single chart. Available in: Salesforce
With combination charts, you can: Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
• Add a line to an existing line, vertical column, grouped vertical column, or stacked vertical
Experience
column chart.
• Add a cumulative line to an existing line cumulative chart. Available in: Essentials,
• Add up to three columns to a vertical column chart.
• Add up to three bars to a horizontal bar chart. Unlimited, and Developer
For example, as a sales manager, you can display “Pipeline amount” as a line and “Number of open Editions
deals” as vertical bars on the same chart. Available in: Enhanced
In Lightning Experience, to display multiple measures on the same chart, follow these steps: Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
1. Edit the chart for any report grouped by rows (summary report) or grouped by rows and columns
(matrix report).
2. Verify that a summary measure is applied to each of the fields that you want to plot on the Y
USER PERMISSIONS
axis. To create, edit, and delete
3. To add a chart to the report, click . reports:
4. To edit the chart, click . Create and
5. Choose the Bar, Column, or Line chart. Customize Reports
6. The X axis for the chart is the field for the row grouping. If the report is grouped by multiple AND
rows, select the one to use as the X axis. Report Builder
7. For the Y axis, select a measure field. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
8. To display a reference line, click Show Reference Line and enter the reference value. Create and
9. If your chart is a line chart and you want to display cumulative values, select Cumulative. Customize Reports
10. To add another measure of the same type, click + Measure and select the measure field to AND
add. For bar chart and column charts, you can add up to 3 additional measures. Report Builder
11. If your chart is a column chart, you can display the second measure as a line chart. Select Plot
as Line Chart. To display a separate axis for the line chart on the right, select Plot on Second
Axis. The measure for the second axis can be different than the measure for the first axis. For example, if the column chart shows
Amount, you can add Percentage as a line chart using a second axis.
12. After adding measures and modifying any other settings, click Run Report or Save.
In Salesforce Classic, to display multiple measures on the same chart, follow these steps:
1. Edit the chart for any summary or matrix report, or edit a dashboard component that displays a summary or matrix report.
2. Choose a chart type that allows combination charts:
• Bar chart
• Column chart
• Grouped column chart
• Stacked column chart
• Line chart
40
• Cumulative line chart
3. Select the Plot additional values checkbox. The chart preview updates as you configure your combination chart.
4. To plot on the chart, select a Value.
5. Choose a Display option. Available options differ based on your chart type and whether you're editing a chart or a dashboard
component.
• For columns or bars, click Add Bar or Add Column links to add up to three sets.
• When adding a line to a vertical column chart, select Use second axis to show a separate axis for the added line on the right
side of the column chart. A separate axis can be useful when the two values have different ranges or units.
Note: Selecting Use second axis makes more values available in the Value dropdown list. Without this option, you
can only pick from values of the same type as the primary Y axis—for example, number, currency, or percentage. This
option is only available for certain combination charts.
6. When you've finished setting up your report, click Run Report or Save.
Note:
• If you lose access to a field used in a chart, another field can be used in its place. If no other fields are available, the record
count is used.
• Don't set both the X axis and Y axis to Auto. If they're both set to Auto, you can’t plot the chart.
• Filtered drilldown doesn't work for combination charts in dashboards.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types

Use a combination chart to show multiple values against a single axis range, show two chart types together, or compare two continuous
summary values.
A combination chart plots multiple sets of data on a single chart. To create chart combinations similar to these examples in Lightning
Experience, use the +Measure settings in the Chart Properties panel. In Salesforce Classic, use the Plot additional values settings
on the Chart Data tab in the chart editor.
Column-on-Column
To show multiple values against a single axis range, add columns to a column chart.
To create the chart in this example, choose the Vertical Column chart type, set the opportunity sum of amount as the Y-Axis and
stage as the X-Axis. Add the sum of expected revenue as a second column chart.
You can quickly compare the actual values against the expected values for each stage.
41
Line-on-Column
To show two chart types together, add a line to a column chart. Using a second axis allows you to add different types of values to
the chart.
To create the chart in this example, choose the Vertical Column chart type, set the opportunity sum of amount as the Y-Axis, and
set fiscal year as the X-Axis. Add the number of deals as a line chart plotted on a second axis.
You can now see both the total amount and number of deals for each year on a single chart.
Line-on-Line
To compare two continuous summary values, add a line to a line chart.
To create the chart in this example, first set up a custom summary formula that calculates a three-week moving average of opportunity
amounts. Then choose the Line chart type. Set the opportunity sum of amount as the Y-Axis and date as the X-Axis. Add the
calculated three-week moving average as a second line chart.
You can now compare sales against the moving average over time.
42
The custom summary formula used in this example is shown here:

(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM+ PREVGROUPVAL(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM,
OppProductTrends__c.as_of_date__c) + PREVGROUPVAL(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM,
OppProductTrends__c.as_of_date__c,2))/3
SEE ALSO:
Chart Formatting Options

Control the appearance and behavior of your chart.
Field Description
Chart Title Enter a name for the chart.
Title Color Select the color for the text of your chart title.
Title Size Select the font size for the text of your chart title. The maximum size is 18. Larger values are shown at
18 points.
Text Color Select a color for all the text and labels in your chart.
Text Size Select a font size for all the text and labels in your chart. The maximum size is 18. Larger values are shown
at 18 points.
Background Fade Choose a direction for a gradient color background. Also select a Start Color and End Color
for the gradient. Use white for both if you don’t want a background design.
Combine Small Combine all groups less than or equal to 3% of the total into a single “Others” wedge or segment. Deselect
Groups into to show all values individually on the chart. This setting applies only to pie, donut, and funnel charts.
“Others” This option is on by default for pie and donut charts, and off for funnel.
X- or Y-Axis Range Choose a manual or automatic axis range for bar, line, or column charts. If you choose manual, enter
numbers for the minimum and maximum axis values to be displayed. If there are data points outside
43
Field Description
the range that you set, the axis automatically extends to include those values when you generate the
chart.
Show Axis Labels Display labels for each axis of your chart. This setting applies only to bar and line charts.
Show Labels Display labels for your pie, donut, or funnel chart.
Show Group % Display the percentage value for each group in the chart.
Show X- or Y-Axis Display the values of individual records or groups on the chart axis. This setting applies only to certain
Values horizontal bar and vertical column charts.
Show Values Display the values of individual records or groups on the chart. This setting applies only to certain chart
types.
Show Wedge % Display the percentage value for each wedge of pie and donut charts.
Show Total Display the total value for the donut chart.
Show Details on Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart type.
Hover Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled when viewing charts that have
more than 200 data points.
Chart Size Select a size for the chart, from Tiny to Extra Large.
Chart Position Place the chart above or below your report.
SEE ALSO:
Show Report Data in Tables

To help readers scan for data easily, hide details and ranges, limit the number of results shown, and highlight with color. You can also
show your table in a dashboard widget.
1. Show and Hide Report Details

You can show or hide report details from either the run reports page or the report builder. When you hide details, individual records
don’t display in the report. Groupings, summary formulas, and record counts remain visible.
2. Highlight Data Ranges with Conditional Formatting
Highlight field values reports based on ranges and colors you specify. You can apply conditional formatting to reports that are
grouped by rows (summary reports) or grouped by rows and columns (matrix reports).
3. Use a Tabular Report in a Dashboard
You can use a tabular report as the source report for a dashboard table or chart widget if you limit the number of rows it returns.
44
4. Limit Report Results

Set limits to the scope of your report to avoid processing too many records. The built-in choices for limiting your results vary according
to the object you’re reporting on.
SEE ALSO:
Limit Report Results
Show and Hide Report Details
Use a Tabular Report in a Dashboard
45

You can show or hide report details from either the run reports page or the report builder. When
EDITIONS
you hide details, individual records don’t display in the report. Groupings, summary formulas, and
record counts remain visible. Available in: Salesforce
• From the run reports page, click Hide Details to hide individual records. Click Show Details Classic (not available in all
to show all records. orgs)
• From the report builder, click Show > Details. A check mark beside the Details menu item Available in: Group,
means that details are displayed. Click Details to toggle between showing or hiding records. Essentials, Professional,
SEE ALSO:
Editions
Show and Hide the Record Count for a Block
Combine Different Types of Information in a Joined Report Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To run reports:
Run Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
46

Highlight field values reports based on ranges and colors you specify. You can apply conditional
EDITIONS
formatting to reports that are grouped by rows (summary reports) or grouped by rows and columns
(matrix reports). Available in: Salesforce
In Lightning Experience, you can set up to five rules and define custom colors for each range. To Classic (not available in all
enable conditional highlighting, your report must be a summary report (grouped by rows) or matrix orgs) and Lightning
report (grouped by rows and columns). It must also contain at least one summary field or custom Experience
summary formula. Available in: Essentials,
Click Conditional Formatting. In Add Conditional Formatting Rule, select a summary or custom Group, Professional,
summary formula field that serves as a KPI for your business. You can also apply conditional Enterprise, Performance,
formatting to grand totals in a matrix report. Set the breakpoint values and their range colors for Unlimited, and Developer
each bin. When you’re ready to apply the conditional formatting rule, click Done. Editions
In Salesforce Classic, you can set up to three formatting rules. To set conditional highlighting, click Available in: Enhanced
Show > Conditional Highlighting in report builder, then set the breakpoint values and their Folder Sharing and Legacy
range colors as follows: Folder Sharing
Field Description USER PERMISSIONS

Summary Choose a summary field whose number ranges you want represented by
colors. reports:
Low Color Select a color to represent data that falls below the Low Breakpoint • Legacy Folder Sharing
value. Create and
Customize Reports
Low The number that acts as the threshold between the Low Color and the
AND
Breakpoint Mid Color. Values that are the same as the Low Breakpoint value
are shown as the Mid Color. Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Mid Color Select a color to represent data that falls between the Low Breakpoint Sharing
and High Breakpoint values. Create and
Customize Reports
High The number that acts as the threshold between the Mid Color and the
Breakpoint High Color. Values that are the same as the High Breakpoint AND
value are shown as the High Color. Report Builder
High Color Select a color to represent data that falls above the High Breakpoint
value.
Notes:
• When you apply more than three conditional formatting rules to a report, conditional formatting can be viewed and edited only in
Lightning Experience.
• You can subscribe to reports with conditional highlighting, but conditional highlighting doesn't appear in the subscription email.
• The rounding of data values for conditional formatting differs slightly for Lightning Experience versus Salesforce Classic. The following
table shows some sample differences.
Range Interpretation in Salesforce Classic Interpretation in Lightning Experience

<=5 All negative values plus positive values up All negative values plus positive values up to and including
to but not including 5.0 5.99999999
47
Range Interpretation in Salesforce Classic Interpretation in Lightning Experience

Classic: 5.00000001 to 6.0 6.0 to 6.99999999
Between 5 and 6
Lightning Experience:
> 5 to 6
>6 7.0 and greater 7.0 and greater
SEE ALSO:
Use a Tabular Report in a Dashboard

You can use a tabular report as the source report for a dashboard table or chart widget if you limit
EDITIONS
the number of rows it returns.
1. Select Add > Row Limit. Available in: Salesforce
2. Set the row limit to 10, 25, or Custom. If you chose custom, enter a number between 1 and
orgs) and Lightning
99.
Experience
3. Set the sort by and sort order options. If you selected Limit Rows by this Field for a column,
these options are already set. Available in: Group,
Essentials, Professional,
4. Click OK. Enterprise, Performance,
5. Click Dashboard Settings in the toolbar. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
6. Enter a name and value to use in dashboard tables and charts. Tables show both the name and
value. Charts are grouped by name.
USER PERMISSIONS
7. Click OK.
You can now use this tabular report as the source report for a dashboard widget. When you create To create, edit, and delete
a dashboard widget to display your tabular report, you can use the dashboard widget editor to reports:
override the settings you chose in Dashboard Settings. • Create and Customize
Reports
AND
Report Builder
48

Set limits to the scope of your report to avoid processing too many records. The built-in choices for
EDITIONS
limiting your results vary according to the object you’re reporting on.
• To see a collapsed view of a report showing only the headings, subtotals, and total in report Available in: Salesforce
builder, deselect Show > Details. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
On the report run page, click Hide Details or Show Details at the top of the report.
Experience
• To filter by a field, click Add > Field Filter. With tabular, summary, and matrix reports, you can
drag a field from the Fields pane to the Filters pane to add a report filter. Group, Professional,
• As you create and work with cross filters, take note of these considerations and limits. To add Enterprise, Performance,
one, click Add > Cross Filter. Unlimited, and Developer
• In Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer edition organizations, the Editions
Hierarchy links let you browse report results based on the role or territory hierarchies.
• If your organization uses divisions to segment data and you have the “Affected by Divisions” USER PERMISSIONS
permission, use the Division dropdown list to include records in just one division or all divisions.
To show records in your current working division, select Current. Reports that are already To create, edit, and delete
reports:
scoped (such as My Cases or My team’s accounts) include records in all divisions, and you can't
• Create and Customize
further limit them to a specific division. If you don’t have the “Affected by Divisions” permission,
Reports
your reports include records in all divisions.
AND
• You can set the maximum number of records to display in a tabular report by clicking Add >
Report Builder
Row Limit in report builder. Set the number of rows, then choose a field to sort by, and the
sort order. Limiting rows on a tabular report allows you to use it as a source report for dashboard
table and chart widgets. If you change the report format, Row Limit settings are lost.
Note: Only the first 255 characters in a custom text field count for filtering purposes. For example, if you add a field filter to find
opportunities where the custom text field Customer notes includes the word “phone,” but “phone” appears after the 255th
character in the field, the filter doesn’t find the record. In standard text fields, all characters count, regardless of the length of the
field.
SEE ALSO:
Filter Across Objects with Cross Filters
49
Categorize Data with Bucket Columns

Quickly categorize report records without creating a formula or a custom field by bucketing them.
EDITIONS
When you create a bucket column, you define multiple categories (buckets) used to group report
values. Like any other column in your report, you can sort, filter, and group by bucket columns. Available in: Salesforce
For example, get a view of your accounts based on how many employees they have. Create a bucket Classic (not available in all
column named Size based on the # Employees field. Then, create buckets that group records orgs) and Lightning
into Small, Medium, and Large ranges that you define. Small includes accounts with 5,000 or less Experience
employees. Medium includes accounts with 5,000 to 10,000 employees. Large includes accounts Available in: Enterprise,
with more than 10,000 employees. Now you can sort, filter, or group records based on how they’re Performance, Unlimited,
grouped in buckets. If one account grows or shrinks, it automatically switches buckets. and Developer Editions
Note: Consider a report with custom type and object for which you create a bucket column Available in: Enhanced
with a total of more than 1000 characters across the bucket values. It’s possible for the buckets Folder Sharing and Legacy
not to appear when you group by columns in dashboards that use the report. Folder Sharing
1. Add a Bucket Column USER PERMISSIONS

Create a bucket column while editing a report.
To add, edit, or delete a
2. Edit a Bucket Column bucket column in private
When it’s time to add, remove, or change buckets in a bucket column, edit it. reports:
3. Delete a Bucket Column • Legacy Folder Sharing
When you no longer need a bucket column, delete it. Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

bucket column in public and
private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
50
Add a Bucket Column

Create a bucket column while editing a report.
EDITIONS
1. Edit a report.
Available in: Salesforce
2. Find the column you want to bucket in the report preview, then click > Bucket This Classic (not available in all
Column. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Alternatively, from the Columns section, click > Add Bucket Column.
The Edit Bucket Column menu opens. Available in: Enterprise,
3. From Field, choose a field from the report type. The bucket column is based on the field you and Developer Editions
choose. If you started bucketing a column in the report preview, then the field is already set.
4. From Bucket Name, enter a name for the bucket column.
5. Add buckets and choose values for each bucket. Folder Sharing
Depending on the data type of the column you’re bucketing, you see different bucket options
in the Edit Bucket Column menu. You can bucket 3 data types: numeric, picklist, and text. USER PERMISSIONS
Numeric
A numeric bucket helps you sort data that can be described in terms of numbers. Numeric To add, edit, or delete a
bucket column in private
buckets include columns with field types like currency (Amount), number (Number
reports:
of Employees), and percent (Probability), but not necessarily mixed alphanumeric field
types like auto number. Alphanumeric values don’t reside on the number line, which
Create and
means they can’t get numerically evaluated, which prevents them from getting bucketed
Customize Reports
in a numeric bucket. Alphanumeric values can be included in text buckets.
Enhanced Folder
Each numeric bucket includes a range and a name. Sharing
To gain insight into your deals, use bucketing to group by deal size instead of looking at Create and
individual deals. For example, create 3 buckets based on deal size: Small, Medium, and Customize Reports
Large. Small holds deals worth $1,000 or less. Medium holds deals worth between $1,000 To add, edit, or delete a
and $25,000 dollars. Large holds deals worth more than $25,000. bucket column in public and
a. To create a numeric bucket, click Add. Each numeric bucket consists of a range and a private reports:
name. • Legacy Folder Sharing
b. From RANGE, enter the lower-bound and upper-bound breakpoints for ranges. The Report Builder
first number entered buckets values equal to or less than the number you enter. Each Enhanced Folder
subsequent number you enter buckets values greater than the prior number you enter. Sharing
The last number entered buckets values greater than the number you enter. Report Builder OR
c. From BUCKET, enter a name for the bucket. Report Builder
(Lightning
d. Optionally, to move all empty or null values to the bucket that contains the value zero, Experience)
select Treat empty values in the report as zeroes. If deselected, unbucketed values
appear as a dash (-).
Picklist
A picklist bucket contains items that can be selected from a list.
To get a generalized view of your accounts, bucket them by industry. Create buckets with industry names like Manufacturing,
Technology, and Media. Then, add accounts into the bucket that best represents their operation.
a. To create a picklist bucket, click Add Bucket. Then, give the new bucket a name.
b. To put values in a bucket, select the values you want to move, then click Move To and select bucket you want to move
them into. To move values into a new bucket, click Move To > New Bucket, enter a name for the new bucket.
51
c. To take values out of a bucket, click Move To > Unbucketed Values. Unbucketed values appear in the bucket column as
they would in a normal report column. You can put them all into a bucket named Other by enabling Bucket remaining
values as Other.
d. To rename a bucket, click . To delete a bucket, click .
Text
At first glance, text buckets seem to have the same options as picklist buckets. Values of the text column appear as though they
were values in a picklist, and you can add them into buckets in much the same way.
Unlike picklist fields, text fields feature the Enter Values button. If you know which value you want to bucket, you can use the
Enter Values function to quickly bucket it without searching. Entering values is useful if your report has a large number (such as
millions) of values and searching for a value is slow. You can also use this method to enter and bucket values that appear in the
report later.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click Save.
The bucket column appears in the report preview and in the Columns section. Like any other column in the report, you can sort, filter,
and group by the bucket column.
To edit the bucket column, find the column in the report preview and click > Edit Bucket Column. To delete the bucket column,
click > Delete Bucket Column.
As you prepare to add bucket columns to your report, take note of these limitations:
• Each report can include up to 5 bucket fields.
• Each bucket field can contain up to 20 buckets.
• Each bucket can contain up to 20 values.
• Bucket columns are available for use only in the report where they’re generated. To use a bucket in multiple reports, create the
bucket column for each report. Or create a separate formula field for the object that’s dependent on the bucket.
• Buckets and bucket fields aren’t available for reports that include external objects.
• If a bucket column’s source column has a custom index, and you filter by the bucket column, then the custom index performance
gains are lost.
• If a bucket column has a filter on it, modifying the values in the buckets removes any filters that refer to the bucket column.
• Bucket columns don’t support picklist values that contain a tab character.
52
Edit a Bucket Column

When it’s time to add, remove, or change buckets in a bucket column, edit it.
EDITIONS
1. Edit the report.
2. In Lightning Experience, from the report preview, click > Edit Bucket Column. Classic (not available in all
In Salesforce Classic, from the Fields pane under Bucket Fields, hover over a bucket field and orgs) and Lightning
click . Or in the Preview pane, click the bucket field column menu and select Edit Bucket Experience
Field.
Available in: Enterprise,
The Edit Bucket Column menu opens. Performance, Unlimited,
3. Add, remove, or change buckets and bucket values.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Save. Folder Sharing
For more information about the Edit Bucket Column menu, see Add a Bucket Column in Salesforce
Help. USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
53
Delete a Bucket Column

When you no longer need a bucket column, delete it.
EDITIONS
Deleting a bucket column doesn’t affect the source fields. Deleting a bucket column from the report
preview also deletes it from the Columns section. If you accidentally delete a bucket column, undo Available in: Salesforce
the delete action to retrieve it. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
1. Edit the report.
Experience
2. From the report preview, find the bucket column you want to delete and click > Delete Available in: Enterprise,
Bucket Column. Alternatively, find the bucket column in the Columns section and click X. Performance, Unlimited,
3. Click Save. and Developer Editions
The bucket column is deleted. Available in: Enhanced

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
54
Evaluate Report Data with Formulas

Reports feature built-in basic math functions (sum, average, min, and max) that you can apply to
EDITIONS
any numerical column in a report. When you're ready to perform advanced logical or mathematical
operations, write a formula. Available in: Salesforce
There are three types of formulas, summaries, summary formulas, and row-level formulas. The type Classic (not available in all
of formula you write depends in part on where you want that formula to apply. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Summaries Available in: Essentials,

Summaries are mathematical functions that you can apply to numeric columns in a report. Apply
summaries to find the sum, average, minimum, or maximum value. Summaries evaluate data in Unlimited, and Developer
and show subtotals for each report group, plus a grand total for all data in the report. No need to Editions
write a formula to find these essential math functions; instead, apply them from a numeric column's
More Actions menu. Available in: Enhanced
Apply a summary to answer business questions like these: Folder Sharing
• What is the total value of all our open opportunities?
• What is the average age of all our cases? USER PERMISSIONS
• Which of our accounts has the most employees, and which has the least?
formulas in private reports:
Row-level Formulas • Legacy Folder Sharing
Row-level formulas apply to every record in a report, and can evaluate data mathematically or Create and
logically. For example, use a row-level formula in an opportunity report to subtract Created Customize Reports
Date from Close Date to how long it took to close each opportunity. Write another row-level Enhanced Folder
formula to flag each opportunity with an emoticon based on whether customer satisfaction score Sharing
(CSAT) is above 9, above 6, or below 6. Create and
Customize Reports
Write a row-level formula to answer business questions like these:
• How many days did it take each opportunity to close?
formulas in public and
• Which case subjects contain the word "widget"? private reports:
• As defined by a customer satisfaction (CSAT) score, which customers are satisifed or upset? • Legacy Folder Sharing
Report Builder
Summary Formulas Enhanced Folder
Summary formulas evaluate data in either a specified group, all groups, or all groups and the entire Sharing
report. If an opportunity report is grouped by Type and Stage, a summary function can apply Report Builder OR
to any of these places: Report Builder
(Lightning
• Just to Type Experience)
• Just to Stage
• Just to the grand total of all report data
• To Type, Stage and the grand total of all report data
Summary formulas are perfect for comparing grouped data to other groups or to report totals. For example, write a summary formula
to evaluate cases by source or product.
Write a summary formula to answer business questions like these:
• After deducting taxes and expenses, what are our net earnings?
55
• What percentage of our opportunities are attributable to each lead source?
PREVGROUPVAL() and PARENTGROUPVAL()

PREVGROUPVAL() and PARENTGROUPVAL() are two types of special summary formulas that are particular useful in reporting.
Use PREVGROUPVAL() to compare one group to other groups in the report. Use PARENTGROUPVAL() to compare a child group
to a parent group or to a report total.
Write summary formulas with PREVGROUPVAL() and PARENTGROUPVAL() to answer business questions like these:
• PREVGROUPVAL(): How much more or less business did we do in February compared to January?
• PARENTGROUPVAL(): In which month did we do the most business last year?
1. Summarize Report Data

When you want to know sum, average, highest, or lowest value of a numeric column (like Amount, Age, or Probability), summarize
the column. Summaries calculate subtotals for every group in a report, as well as a grand total for all report data.
2. Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas
Answer business questions like "how many days did it take each opportunity to close?" by using row-level formulas that evaluate
each record in a report.
3. Evaluate Groups and Totals with Summary Formulas
Write summary formulas to evaluate a report's group subtotals and grand totals. For example, summary formulas can adjust earnings
after tax.
4. Compare Groups with PARENTGROUPVAL() and PREVGROUPVAL()
Write row level formulas to evaluate each record in a report. For example, see how many days it took each opportunity to close by
subtracting the Open Date from the Close Date.
56
Summarize Report Data

When you want to know sum, average, highest, or lowest value of a numeric column (like Amount,
EDITIONS
Age, or Probability), summarize the column. Summaries calculate subtotals for every group in a
report, as well as a grand total for all report data. Available in: Salesforce
Summarize report data from the report builder (in Lightning Experience). Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
1. Edit a report.
Experience
2. Find the numeric column you'd like to summarize. Click > Summarize, and then choose Available in: Essentials,
how you'd like to evaluate the data: Sum, Average, Max, Min (1). Group, Professional,
A check mark appears next to already-applied summaries. Click You can apply all four summaries Enterprise, Performance,
at once. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
57
3. If you don't see the Summarize option, it means that the column isn’t numeric. To add a numeric column, expand the Fields pane
and either double-click a numeric field or drag it into the Columns list.
Each field's type is denoted by an icon directly to the left of the field name. Numeric fields are identified by a number sign ( ).
4. Optionally, there’s a second way to summarize a numeric field (2).
a. From the Columns section of the OUTLINE panel, click the numeric field you want to summarize.
b. Then, select the summary function you wish to calculate: Sum, Average, Max, Min.
c. Click Apply
58
For each group in the report, every summary you apply appears as a subtotal. At the bottom of the report, summaries appear as a total
(3). The report builder preview displays data for a limited number of records. Save and run the report to see everything.
When viewing the report on the run page, summaries also appear at the top of the report (4).
59
Example: After building a basic opportunity report grouped by Stage, you can find yourself wondering what the sum and
average amounts are for each stage.
No need to add amounts together. No need to write a formula. Instead, summarize the Amount column. Click > Summarize,
and then choose how you'd like to evaluate the data: Sum, Average, Max, Min. For this example, choose Sum and Average.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Summary Field

To add a summary field:
• Double-click a number field in the Fields pane.
• Drag a number field into the preview. Press CTRL to select multiple fields. For matrix reports, there are drop zones before, between,
and after sets of summaries. For example, the sum, average, max, and min of Annual Revenue are a set, and you can't drop a
new summary field between them.
• Choose Summarize this Field in the column menu for a field already in the report.
To change an existing summary field, or add other summaries on that same field, click next to the summary field and choose
Summarize this Field.
Reorder sets of summary fields in matrix reports by dragging them. The summaries for each field move together when dragged. For
example, if your report contains the sum and average of Annual Revenue, and the max and min of Probability, you can drag
the Probability summaries before or after the Annual Revenue summaries, but not between. Summaries can't be placed
after custom summary formulas or Record Count.
Summarize Report Data in Salesforce Classic

The Fields pane displays fields from the selected report type, organized by folder.
A summary is the Sum, Average, Max, or Min for a number field. (Use the filter to find them faster.)
To remove a summary field:
• Click its menu and choose Summarize this Field and deselect all options.
• Click its menu and choose Remove Summary.
• Drag the summary set back to the Fields pane. All summaries for that field are removed. Press CTRL to select multiple summary
fields.
60
Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas

Answer business questions like "how many days did it take each opportunity to close?" by using
EDITIONS
row-level formulas that evaluate each record in a report.
To answer common questions like these, you need to assess each record in a report: Available in: Lightning
Experience
• How many days did it take each opportunity to close?
• Which cases mention the word "widget"? Available in: Essentials,
• As defined by a customer satisfaction (CSAT) score, which customers are satisfied or upset?
The answer to these questions, and many more, are a row-level formula away. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Write a Row-Level Formula Available in: Enhanced
Writing a row-level formula adds a row-level formula column to your report that makes Folder Sharing and Legacy
calculations on every report row. Write row-level formulas directly in the Lightning report Folder Sharing
builder.
Edit a Row-Level Formula USER PERMISSIONS
Edit a row-level formula to expand, refine, or change how it evaluates report data.
Delete a Row-Level Formula formulas in private reports:
When you no longer need a row-level formula in your report, delete it. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Examples: Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas Create and
"How many days did it take each opportunity to close? Which case subjects mention the word Customize Reports
widget?" Here's how to write row-level formulas that answer these business questions, and Enhanced Folder
others. Sharing
Create and
Get the Most Out of Row-Level Formulas: Tips, Limits, and Limitations Customize Reports
As you get ready to write row-level formulas, review these tips, limits, and limitations.
private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
61
Write a Row-Level Formula

Writing a row-level formula adds a row-level formula column to your report that makes calculations
EDITIONS
on every report row. Write row-level formulas directly in the Lightning report builder.
Here's how to add a row-level formula to a report. Available in: Lightning
Experience
1. Create or edit a report.
2. From the Columns section of the Outline pane, click Available in: Essentials,
> Add Row-Level Formula.
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
62
3. From the Edit Row-Level Formula Column window, enter a Column Name (2), choose a Formula Output Type (3), and write a
Formula (4). Optionally, enter a Description and set the number of Decimal Points.
To test your formula for errors, click Validate. If necessary, resolve any errors. Then, click Apply (5).
Tip: For a little row-level formula inspiration, see Examples: Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas on
page 70 in Salesforce Help.
To learn more about writing formulas, see Formula Operators and Functions by Context in Salesforce Help.
4. The row-level formula appears as a column on the report (6).
63
5. To save and run the report, click Save & Run.

The report now features a row-level formula.
64
Edit a Row-Level Formula

Edit a row-level formula to expand, refine, or change how it evaluates report data.
EDITIONS
Edit row-level formulas directly in the Lightning report builder. Here's how.
Available in: Lightning
1. Edit a report.
Experience
2. From the Columns section of the OUTLINE pane, click the row-level formula column's name.
For example, if the row-level formula you want to edit is named Time to Close, then click Available in: Essentials,
Time to Close (1). Group, Professional,
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
65
3. From the Edit Row-Level Formula Column window, edit the Column Name (2), choose a Formula Output Type (3), and edit the
Formula (4). If applicable, edit the Description and change the number of Decimal Points.
To test your formula for errors, click Validate. If necessary, resolve any errors. Then, click Apply (5).
Tip: For a little row-level formula inspiration, see Examples: Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas on
page 70 in Salesforce Help.
To learn more about writing formulas, see Formula Operators and Functions by Context in Salesforce Help.
66
4. The edited row-level formula appears as a column on the report (6).

The row-level formula column on the report is updated to reflect your edits.
67
Delete a Row-Level Formula

When you no longer need a row-level formula in your report, delete it.
EDITIONS
Delete row-level formulas directly from the Lightning report builder. Here's how.
1. Edit a report.
Experience
2. From the Columns section of the Outline pane, find the row-level formula you want to delete
and click x. Available in: Essentials,
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
68
3. If you mistakenly remove a row-level formula from the report, you can recover it by clicking .
The row-level formula column is removed from the report and from the row-level formulas folder in the Fields pane.
69
Examples: Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas

"How many days did it take each opportunity to close? Which case subjects mention the word
EDITIONS
widget?" Here's how to write row-level formulas that answer these business questions, and
others. Available in: Lightning
To answer common questions like these, assess each record in a report: Experience
• How many days did it take each opportunity to close? Available in: Essentials,
• Which case subjects mention the word "widget"? Group, Professional,
The answer to these questions, and many more, are a row-level formula away. Here's how. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Example: How many days did it take each opportunity to close? Available in: Enhanced
To answer this question, create an opportunity report and write a row-level formula that subtracts Folder Sharing and Legacy
the Created Date from the Closed Date. Folder Sharing
1. Create or edit an opportunities report.
2. From the Columns section of the Outline pane, click USER PERMISSIONS
> Add Row-Level Formula.
Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
70
3. From the Edit Summary-Level Formula Column window, write the formula.
a. In Column Name, enter Time to Close.
b. In Description, enter Time to Close in Days.
c. From Formula Output Type, select Number.
Even though this formula works with date values, number is the output type needed because the formula performs subtraction
and returns a number.
d. From Decimal Points to 0.

e. In Formula, write:
CLOSE_DATE - DATEVALUE(CREATED_DATE)
Note:
• CLOSE_DATE and CREATED_DATE are the API names of the Close Date and Created Date fields. Formulas work
with the API names of fields, not the display names. The easiest way to enter the API name of a field is to search for it
from the FIELDS menu, select it, and click Insert >.
• Because CLOSE_DATE's data type is date and CREATED_DATE's data type is datetime, we convert the
value of CREATED_DATE to the date data type with the DATEVALUE() function. The two values must have
a matching data type so that we can subtract one from the other. (Datetime and date are different data types
because datetime includes information about units of time smaller than a day - hours, minutes, seconds, and so
on - and DATE does not.)
f. To make sure that the formula is error-free, click Validate. If necessary, resolve errors.
g. Click Apply (5).
71
4. To save the report, click Save.

The row-level formula appears as a report column named Time to Close (6). The Time to Close column calculates how many days
each opportunity was open by subtracting Created Date from Closed Date.
Example: Which case subjects mention the word "widget"?

To answer this question, create a cases report and write a row-level formula that evaluates each case subject to see whether it includes
the term "widget".
1. From the Columns section of the OUTLINE pane, click > Add Row-Level Formula.
72
2. From the Edit Summary-Level Formula Column window, write the formula.
a. In Column Name, enter Mentions Widgets?.
b. In Description, enter Determines whether or a case subject includes the term "widget".
c. From Formula Output Type, select Text.
d. In Formula, write:
IF(CONTAINS(SUBJECT, "widget"), "Yes", "No")
Note:
• SUBJECT is the API name of the Subject field. Formulas work with the API names of fields, not the display names.
The easiest way to enter the API name of a field is to search for it from the FIELDS menu, select it, and click Insert >.
e. To make sure that the formula is error-free, click Validate. If necessary, resolve errors.
3. Click Apply.
4. Click Save.
The row-level formula appears as a report column named Mentions Widgets?. The Mentions Widgets? column evaluates
each case's subject field to determine whether it includes the text widget. If it does, the row-level formula returns Yes. If it doesn't,
the row-level formula returns No.
73
Get the Most Out of Row-Level Formulas: Tips, Limits, and Limitations
As you get ready to write row-level formulas, review these tips, limits, and limitations.
EDITIONS
• Each report supports 1 row-level formula.
• Each row-level formula can reference up to 5 unique fields. If the formula references the same Available in: Lightning
field 5 times, that counts as referencing 1 unique field. Experience
• You can't use row-level formulas for: Available in: Essentials,

– Cross filters
– Buckets Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
• Row-level formulas can't reference:
– Bucket fields Available in: Enhanced
– Summary formulas
Folder Sharing
– Other row-level formulas
• Row-level formulas don't support these field types: USER PERMISSIONS

– Boolean
– Timeonly formulas in private reports:
– Email • Legacy Folder Sharing
– Phone Create and
Customize Reports
– Multiselect picklist
Enhanced Folder
• Some date fields aren't supported, including: Sharing
Create and
– Due Date
Customize Reports
– Birthdate
• Some text fields aren't supported, including: formulas in public and
private reports:
– Billing Address
• Row-level formulas always use an org's default currency. Row-level formulas don't respect
Report Builder
multi-currency settings on reports.
Enhanced Folder
For example, if USD is your org's default currency and a report is set to show GBP, the row-level Sharing
formula displays USD.
Report Builder OR
• "With or Without" custom report types (like Accounts with or without Contacts) don't support Report Builder
row-level formulas. The Add Row-Level Formula button doesn't appear. (Lightning
Experience)
• You can create row-level formulas on historical trend reports, but you can't reference historical
fields in row-level formulas.
• Reporting snapshots don't support row-level formula fields.
• Row-level formulas aren't available on joined reports. To convert a report with row-level formulas into a joined report, first remove
the row-level formulas.
• The embedded Salesforce Classic report builder in Lightning Experience doesn't support row-level formulas. If a report has a row-level
formula, then the Edit (Salesforce Classic) button doesn't appear.
• You can't create, edit, or delete row-level formulas from the Fields panel. Create, edit, or delete them from the OUTLINE panel.
• Row-level formulas aren't available in Salesforce Classic. You can't run or edit reports with row-level formulas in Salesforce Classic.
• Row-level formulas aren't available in the Apex API.
74

Write summary formulas to evaluate a report's group subtotals and grand totals. For example,
EDITIONS
summary formulas can adjust earnings after tax.
With the report builder, you can summarize numeric columns with four built-in functions: Sum, Available in: Salesforce
Average, Min, and Max. If you want to know the total value of closed opportunities, you can Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
calculate it by finding the Amount column in the report preview and clicking > Summarize >
Experience
Sum.
But what if you want to know the total value of closed opportunities after tax, and what if earnings
are taxed at a progressive rate? (Say, 15% on sales below $1,000,000, and 20% on sales above
$1,000,000). Add a summary formula column named “Amount After Tax” to your report and use a
formula like this one to evaluate the Amount column:
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

summary formula columns
in private reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports

in public and private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
IF(AMOUNT:SUM < 1000000, AMOUNT:SUM * (1 - 0.15), AMOUNT:SUM * (1 - 0.20))
Now you can easily incorporate after-tax earnings into fiscal quarter planning.
1. Add a Summary Formula Column to a Report

Before adding a summary formula to your report, be sure to group report data. Summary formula columns require at least 1 group.
75
2. Edit a Summary Formula Column

To update a summary formula after adding it to a report, edit it.
3. Delete a Summary Formula Column
If you no longer need a summary formula column, delete it.
4. Get the Most Out of Summary Formulas: Tips, Limits, and Limitations
Summary formulas are a powerful reporting technique, but they can be tricky. Here are some tips, limits, and limitations to keep in
mind when working with them.
SEE ALSO:
76

Before adding a summary formula to your report, be sure to group report data. Summary formula
EDITIONS
columns require at least 1 group.
Summary formula columns are available in both Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. They Available in: Salesforce
use the same formula language, so the summary formulas you add in Lightning Experience work Classic (not available in all
in Salesforce Classic, and vice versa. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
The steps for adding a summary formula column are a little different depending on whether you’re
using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re Available in: Essentials,
using the Lightning Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder. Group, Professional,
Note: Summary formulas are powerful and complex. For help with building your formula, Unlimited, and Developer
refer to https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_functions.htm in Salesforce Editions
Help.
Add a Summary Formula Column in Lightning Experience Folder Sharing and Legacy
1. Edit or create a report. Folder Sharing
2. If necessary, group report data. From the Groups section, select a field from the Add group...
lookup menu under GROUP ROWS. USER PERMISSIONS
3. From the Columns section, click > Add Summary Formula Column. To create, edit, and delete
Alternatively, from the Fields pane, under Summary Formulas, click + Create Formula.
in private reports:
If a summary formula is available, but not yet added as a summary formula column, you • Legacy Folder Sharing
can add it from the Fields pane. Under Summary Formulas, click > Add Create and
Customize Reports
4. Enter a name for the summary formula column. Enhanced Folder
5. Choose the Formula Output Type. Sharing
Create and
6. Enter a summary formula. For example: Customize Reports

Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
IF(AMOUNT:SUM < 1000000, AMOUNT:SUM * (1 - 0.15), AMOUNT:SUM * (1 - 0.20))
7. To see if your formula contains errors, click Check Syntax. Resolve any errors.
8. Optionally, enter a description for the formula.
9. If applicable, choose the number of decimal points.
77
10. Optionally, click FORMAT to choose how to format results, how many decimal points to show, and to change where the formula
gets applied.
11. Click Apply.
12. Click Save.
Add a Summary Formula Column in Salesforce Classic
1. Edit or create a report.
2. If necessary, group report data. Change the format to Summary, Matrix, or Joined, find the field you want to group by, and
drop it into the grouping field.
3. From the Fields pane, in the Formulas folder, click Add Formula.
4. Enter a name for your formula column. The label must be unique. Optionally, enter a description.
5. From the Format dropdown list, select the appropriate data type for your formula based on the output of your calculation.
6. From the Decimal Places dropdown, select the number of decimal places to display for currency, number, or percent
data types. This setting is ignored for currency fields in multicurrency organizations. Instead, the Decimal Places for your
currency setting apply.
7. Set the Where will this formula be displayed? option. The formula calculation displays in the report at the
level you select. To display the formula calculation at every level, including the Grand Total, select All summary levels.
8. Build your formula.
a. Select one of the fields listed in the Summary Fields dropdown list. This field’s value is used in your formula.
b. Select a summary type for use in your formula. This option isn't available for Record Count.
Summary Type Description

Sum The summary value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Largest Value The largest value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Smallest Value The smallest value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Average The average of data in a field or grouping of fields.
c. To add operators (like > or <) to your formula, click Operators.

d. Select the function category (All, Logical, Math, or Summary), choose the function you want to use in your formula, and click
Insert.
e. Repeat these steps as necessary.
9. To see if your formula contains errors, click Check Syntax. If there are errors, the cursor highlights them.
10. Click OK.
11. Click Save.
78
The summary formula column appears in your report.
SEE ALSO:
Get the Most Out of Summary Formulas: Tips, Limits, and Limitations
Add a Summary Formula to a Joined Report
79
Edit a Summary Formula Column

To update a summary formula after adding it to a report, edit it.
EDITIONS
The steps for editing a summary formula column are a little different depending on whether you’re
using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re Available in: Salesforce
using the Lightning Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Note: Summary formulas are powerful and complex. For help with building your formula, Experience
refer to https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=customize_functions.htm in Salesforce
Help. Available in: Essentials,
Edit a Summary Formula Column in Lightning Experience Enterprise, Performance,
1. Edit a report. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
2. From the Formula Columns section, click the formula column you want to edit. (Don’t click
X. It deletes the formula column. If you accidentally delete the formula column, undo the Available in: Enhanced
deletion by clicking .) Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
Alternatively, from the Fields pane, under Summary Formulas, find the formula column you
want to edit and click > Edit.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. Edit the summary formula.
4. To see if your formula contains errors, click Check Syntax. Resolve any errors. summary formula columns
in private reports:
5. Optionally, click FORMAT to choose how to format results, how many decimal points to
show, and to change where the formula gets applied.
Create and
6. Click Apply. Customize Reports
7. Click Save. Enhanced Folder
Edit a Summary Formula Column in Salesforce Classic Sharing
Create and
1. Edit a report. Customize Reports
2. From the Fields pane, find the summary formula you want to edit and click .
The Custom Summary Formula menu opens. summary formula columns
3. Enter a name for your formula column. The label must be unique. Optionally, enter a • Legacy Folder Sharing
description.
Report Builder
4. From the Format dropdown list, select the appropriate data type for your formula based
Enhanced Folder
on the output of your calculation.
Sharing
5. From the Decimal Places dropdown, select the number of decimal places to display Report Builder OR
for currency, number, or percent data types. This setting is ignored for currency fields in Report Builder
multicurrency organizations. Instead, the Decimal Places for your currency setting (Lightning
apply. Experience)
6. Set the Where will this formula be displayed? option. The formula
calculation displays in the report at the level you select. To display the formula calculation
at every level, including the Grand Total, select All summary levels.
7. Build your formula.
a. Select one of the fields listed in the Summary Fields dropdown list. This field's value is used in your formula.
b. Select a summary type for use in your formula. This option isn't available for Record Count.
80
Summary Type Description

Sum The summary value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Largest Value The largest value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Smallest Value The smallest value of data in a field or grouping of fields.
Average The average of data in a field or grouping of fields.
c. To add operators (like > or <) to your formula, click Operators.

d. Select the function category (All, Logical, Math, or Summary), choose the function you want to use in your formula, and click
Insert.
e. Repeat these steps as necessary.
8. To see if your formula contains errors, click Check Syntax. If there are errors, the cursor highlights them.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Save.
The summary formula column updates to reflect your edits.
81
Delete a Summary Formula Column

If you no longer need a summary formula column, delete it.
EDITIONS
The steps for deleting a summary formula column are a little different depending on whether you’re
using Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re Available in: Salesforce
using the Lightning Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Delete a Summary Formula Column in Lightning Experience
Experience
2. From the Formula Columns section, find the summary formula column you want to remove Group, Professional,
and click X. When you remove a summary formula this way, it's still available in the Fields Enterprise, Performance,
pane under Summary Formulas. You can add it back to the report as a summary formula Unlimited, and Developer
column from the Fields pane later. Editions
Alternatively, from the Fields pane, under Summary Formulas, find the formula column you Available in: Enhanced
want to edit and click > Delete. When you delete a summary formula this way, it is Folder Sharing and Legacy
removed for good. If you want to add it back later, you'll have to rewrite it. Folder Sharing
3. Click Save.
USER PERMISSIONS
Delete a Summary Formula Column in Salesforce Classic
2. From the Fields pane, in the Formulas folder, find the summary formula column you want in private reports:
to delete and click • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create and
3. Click Save.
Customize Reports
The summary formula column is removed from your report. Enhanced Folder
In Lightning Experience, If you accidentally delete a formula column in Lightning Experience, undo Sharing
Create and
the deletion by clicking .
Customize Reports
In Salesforce Classic, you can’t undo a deletion. If you can’t undo the deletion, deleting a summary
formula column is permanent. To get it back, you’ll have to recreate it from scratch. To create, edit, and delete
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
82
Summary formulas are a powerful reporting technique, but they can be tricky. Here are some tips,
EDITIONS
limits, and limitations to keep in mind when working with them.
Functions for use with summary formulas in reports are available under the function category. Select Available in: both Salesforce
a function, then click Help on this function for information. Classic and Lightning
Experience
• Summary level formulas don’t support date or date-time functions or fields.
• A summary formula can't reference another summary formula. Nor can a summary formula Available in: Essentials,
reference a row-level formula. Group, Professional,
• You can’t group report data by summary formula columns.
• You can’t filter report data by summary formula columns. Editions
• You can’t reorder summary formula columns.
• Before adding a summary formula column, group report data at least one time. Folder Sharing and Legacy
• Summary formulas can contain 3900 or fewer characters. Folder Sharing
• Regardless of the summary formula data type, your summary formula can contain fields of
different data types, including: number, currency, percent, and checkbox (true/false) fields. For USER PERMISSIONS
example, a summary formula in an Opportunities with Partners report can reference opportunity
Amount or Stage Duration, as well as account Annual Revenue. To create, edit, and delete
• In Salesforce Classic, dashboard and report charts that display values from summary formulas in private reports:
display decimal places using your default currency setting instead of what you specified for the • Legacy Folder Sharing
formula. For example, if the summary formula specifies zero decimal places, no decimal places
Create and
appear in columns, but chart values show the number of decimal places specified for your
Customize Reports
default currency (usually two decimal places). This limit applies to currencies, numbers, and
Enhanced Folder
percentages.
Sharing
• When a field is deleted or is unavailable (for example, because of field-level security), all summary Create and
formulas that contain the field are removed from the report. Customize Reports
• The summary types Sum, Largest Value, Smallest Value, and Average aren’t To create, edit, and delete
available for use with the Record Count field. summary formula columns
• The Smallest Value summary type includes blank (null) or zero values in the summary in public and private reports:
formula calculation if these values are present in your report data. • Legacy Folder Sharing
• The Largest Value summary type includes the largest blank (non-null) value present in Report Builder
your report data.
Enhanced Folder
• Percents are represented as decimals in summary formulas. 20% is represented as 0.20. Sharing
• Operators can be used to give fields in summary formulas a negative value. For example: Report Builder OR
{!EMPLOYEES:SUM} + - {!SALES:SUM}. Report Builder
(Lightning
• For summary formulas on reports that are grouped by rows and columns (matrix reports),
Experience)
Salesforce calculates results for all formulas where the Where will this formula
be displayed? option isn’t set to All summary levels. The formula determines
the value returned. If null is returned, the cell is empty.
• Summary fields can display up to 21 digits. If a summary field has more than 21 digits, an accurate result might not be displayed. If
“#Too Big!” appears in a report cell, check your formula for calculations that could result in more than 21 digits. Avoid multiplying
large numbers, raising a large number to a power, or dividing by a very small number.
• Formulas treat blank (null) report cells as zero values.
• “#Error!” displays on report cells whenever an error occurs while calculating a formula’s value. “#Error!” also displays when
formulas divide by zero. To resolve the error, check your formula and provide an alternative value.
83
• Cross-block summary formulas are available for joined reports.
SEE ALSO:
Summary Formulas with Joined Reports
Compare Groups with PARENTGROUPVAL() and PREVGROUPVAL()

Write row level formulas to evaluate each record in a report. For example, see how many days it
EDITIONS
took each opportunity to close by subtracting the Open Date from the Close Date.
PARENTGROUPVAL and PREVGROUPVAL Classic (not available in all
Use PARENTGROUPVAL to calculate values relative to a parent grouping. Use orgs) and Lightning
PREVGROUPVAL to calculate values relative to a peer grouping. Experience
Calculate Values Relative to a Parent or Peer Group Available in: Essentials,

You can add a formula that calculates values relative to a parent or peer grouping in a Lightning Group, Professional,
report. PARENTGROUPVAL calculates values relative to a parent grouping. PREVGROUPVAL
calculates values relative to a peer grouping. For example, calculate the proportion of total
Editions
opportunity amounts from each lead source, or compare sales each month to the previous
month. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
PARENTGROUPVAL and PREVGROUPVAL
Use PARENTGROUPVAL to calculate values relative to a parent grouping. Use PREVGROUPVAL
USER PERMISSIONS
to calculate values relative to a peer grouping.
PARENTGROUPVAL
Use this function to calculate values relative to a parent grouping.
Create and
Customize Reports
Description: This function returns the value of a specified parent grouping. A “parent”
Enhanced Folder
grouping is any level above the one containing the formula. You can Sharing
use this function only in custom summary formulas and at grouping Create and
levels for reports, but not at summary levels. Customize Reports

private reports:
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
84
Use: For reports that are grouped by rows (summary) and for joined reports:
PARENTGROUPVAL(summary_field, grouping_level)
For reports that are grouped by rows and columns (matrix):
PARENTGROUPVAL(summary_field, parent_row_grouping,
parent_column_grouping)
Where summary_field is the summarized field value, grouping_level is
GRAND_SUMMARY or the API name of the parent level group for summary reports, and
parent_row_level and parent_column_level are the parent levels for matrix reports.
In reports with multiple grouping levels, you can set the grouping_level to be any group
level higher than the formula display level.
Example:
TOTAL_PRICE:SUM/PARENTGROUPVAL(TOTAL_PRICE:SUM, GRAND_SUMMARY)
This formula calculates, for each product, its relative size compared to the grand total. In this example,
the report is a summary of opportunities and their products, grouped by Product Name.
PREVGROUPVAL
Use this function to calculate values relative to a peer grouping. If there's no previous grouping, the function returns a null value.
Description: This function returns the value of a specified previous grouping. A “previous” grouping is one that
comes before the current grouping in the report. Choose the grouping level and increment. The
increment is the number of columns or rows before the current summary. The default is 1; the
maximum is 12. You can use this function only in custom summary formulas and at grouping levels
for reports, but not at summary levels.
Use:
PREVGROUPVAL(summary_field, grouping_level [, increment])
When summary_field is the name of the grouped row or column:

• grouping_level is the API name of the peer level group whose summary value is used for
the previous grouping.
• increment is the number of previous groupings.
In reports with multiple grouping levels, you can specify grouping_level to be either the
same group level as the formula display level or a group level higher than the formula display level.
Example:
AMOUNT:SUM - PREVGROUPVAL(AMOUNT:SUM, CLOSE_DATE)
This formula calculates, for each month, the difference in amount from the previous month shown
in the report. In this example, the report is an opportunity matrix with columns grouped by Close
Date and rows by Stage.
85
Example: Three Week Moving Average

To calculate a three-week moving average of opportunity amounts:
(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM+ PREVGROUPVAL(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM,
OppProductTrends__c.as_of_date__c) + PREVGROUPVAL(OppProductTrends__c.Amount__c:SUM,
OppProductTrends__c.as_of_date__c,2))/3
SEE ALSO:
Calculate Values Relative to a Parent or Peer Group

You can add a formula that calculates values relative to a parent or peer grouping in a Lightning
EDITIONS
report. PARENTGROUPVAL calculates values relative to a parent grouping. PREVGROUPVAL calculates
values relative to a peer grouping. For example, calculate the proportion of total opportunity Available in: Salesforce
amounts from each lead source, or compare sales each month to the previous month. Classic (not available in all
1. Edit or create a report that has at least one row grouping and optionally one or more column orgs)
groupings.
2. From the Columns section in the report builder, click and select Add Summary Formula. Group, Professional,
3. Enter a column name. Unlimited, and Developer
4. Select the formula output type. Editions
5. In the left panel, select Functions. Available in: Enhanced

6. Select PARENTGROUPVAL or PREVGROUPVAL.
Folder Sharing
7. In the Display panel, select a specific grouping or groupings (1).
8. In the Function panel (2), select the grouping or groupings to use in the function. USER PERMISSIONS
The available groupings depend on what you selected in the Display area.
reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
9. To add the function to your formula with the selected parameters included, click Insert
86
10. Add other parameters, functions, and operators to the formula as needed.
11. To check the formula, click Validate.

12. To close the formula builder and add the summary formula column to the report, click Apply.
87
Count Unique Values in Report Results

See how many distinct values a column in your report returns with a unique count.
EDITIONS
When you add a unique count to a column, it shows the number of unique column values in report
results. Duplicate values aren’t counted. Available in: Lightning
Experience
1. While editing a report in the report builder, find the column for which you want to count unique
values. Available in: Essentials,
2. Click Group, Professional,
> Show Unique Count. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Click Save. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
A count of unique values appears as a grand total for the whole report and as a subtotal for each
group.
USER PERMISSIONS
Example: Opportunity reports often list multiple opportunities with the same account. Add
a unique count to the Account Name column to see how many individual accounts values To add a unique count to a
appear in the report. report saved in a private
folder:
Reports
To add a unique count to a
report saved in a private or
public folder:
• Report Builder OR Report
Builder (Lightning
Experience)
To remove the unique count, click > Hide Unique Count.

As you get ready to count unique values in report results, take note of these limitations.
• Each report supports up to three unique counts.
• Lightning table dashboard widgets don’t support unique counts.
• Fields of these data types don't support unique counts:
– Blobs
– Clobs
– Encrypted fields
88
– Multi-select picklist
– Text area, including long text area and rich text area

The joined report format lets you view different types of information in a single report. A joined
EDITIONS
report can contain data from multiple standard or custom report types. You can turn any existing
report into a joined report using the report builder. Available in: both Lightning
Joined reports are made up of up to 5 blocks. Each block shows data from one standard or custom Experience and Salesforce
report type, so a joined report can include data from up to 5 different report types. Report types Classic
can only be joined if they share some common fields with each other. For example, Opportunities
and Accounts can be joined because they share the common fields Account Name and Account Performance, Unlimited,
ID. Each block returns up to 2,000 records, which means that a joined report with 5 blocks can return and Developer Editions
up to 10,000 records. When you group data, you group data across blocks, which means you can
only group data by common fields.
USER PERMISSIONS
When you filter joined reports, you add filters to each block independent of one another.
You can create the ultimate sales report by building a joined report. Add three blocks to the joined To create, edit, and delete
report for a complete view of your operation: Accounts, Opportunities, and Cases. joined reports:
Or, build a joined report to get the birds-eye-view of your customer service operation. Add three Reports
blocks with the Cases report type. Filter block 1 by Status equals Open, block 2 by Status
AND
equals In Progress, and block 3 by Status equals Closed.
Report Builder
Joined reports are based on SQL outer join. Each row in the source blocks has a corresponding row
in the joined report, regardless of whether all the blocks that make up the joined report have
matching data.
For example, here’s a simple joined report that shows Accounts and Cases grouped by Account Name. Each row represents an account.
The Accounts data is shown in the left block, and the associated Cases data is shown in the right block. You can see that the first Abbott
account has 5 associated cases.
89
Tip: You can show a joined report that includes a chart on a dashboard. Edit the joined report dashboard widget, and select Use
chart as defined in the source report.
1. How Joined Reports Work

A joined report can contain data from multiple standard or custom report types. You can add report types to a joined report if they
have relationships with the same object or objects. For example, if you have a joined report that contains the Opportunities report
type, you can add the Cases report type as well because both have a relationship with the Accounts object.
2. Create a Joined Report
With up to five blocks, joined reports let you view different types of information in a single report. Each block shows data from one
standard or custom report type.
3. Add a Report Type to a Joined Report
Adding a report type lets you expand the set of data available for analysis in a joined report.
4. Change the Principal Report Type
The principal report type controls how common fields are named. A joined report must have a principal report type. You can change
the principal report type at any time.
5. Summary Formulas with Joined Reports
Two types of custom summary formulas are available with joined reports: standard and cross-block.
6. Work with Blocks
Blocks let you create different views of the information contained in a joined report.
7. Joined Report Examples
Creating a sales rep performance scorecard, reviewing support cases by status, and predicting your opportunity pipeline are some
examples of what you can do with joined reports. Here’s how.
8. Joined Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
Most of the things you can do with reports you can also do with joined reports, such as find, add, and remove fields; summarize
fields; and run and save reports. However, there are some things you can’t do. When working with Lightning Experience joined
reports, there are some Lightning Experience-specific limits and limitations to consider.
SEE ALSO:
How Joined Reports Work

A joined report can contain data from multiple standard or custom report types. You can add report types to a joined report if they have
relationships with the same object or objects. For example, if you have a joined report that contains the Opportunities report type, you
can add the Cases report type as well because both have a relationship with the Accounts object.
A joined report consists of up to five report blocks, which you add to the report to create multiple views of your data. For each block,
you can add regular and summary fields, create standard and cross-block custom summary formulas, apply filters, and sort columns.
You apply groupings across all blocks in the report, and can add up to three groupings to the blocks, the same as for the summary format.
You can also add a chart to a joined report.
Note: When you add a block to a joined report and the block has multiple entities in common with the report, only the first entity
(in alphabetical order) is shown. Only the fields from the first entity are shown in the common fields area.
90
Each joined report has a principal report type. By default, the principal type is the first one added to the report. For example, if you create
the joined report by selecting the Opportunities report type, and then add the Cases type, the Opportunities type is the principal report
type.
The principal report type controls how common fields are named. Some common fields have different names or appear in different
sections in different report types.
When a joined report contains multiple report types, some fields are identified as common fields. A field is a common field if it’s shared
by all report types or if all report types share a lookup relationship to the field. Common fields can be used to group report blocks. In
Lightning Experience, common fields are identified by the icon. In Salesforce Classic, common fields appear in the Common Fields
area in the Fields pane.
Joined reports are based on SQL outer join. Each row in the source blocks has a corresponding row in the joined report, regardless of
whether all the blocks that make up the joined report have matching data.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Report Type to a Joined Report
Work with Blocks
91
Create a Joined Report

With up to five blocks, joined reports let you view different types of information in a single report.
EDITIONS
Each block shows data from one standard or custom report type.
You can turn any existing report into a joined report, or start fresh with a new one. Available in: both Lightning
Experience and Salesforce
Create a Joined Report in Lightning Experience
Classic
2. Choose a report type and click Continue. Performance, Unlimited,
The report type you choose becomes the joined report's principal report type. The principal and Developer Editions
report type determines how common fields shared by different report types in a report are
named. For more information about principal report types and common fields in joined Folder Sharing and Legacy
reports, see How Joined Reports Work on page 90. Folder Sharing
3. The report opens in the report builder. To turn it into a joined report, in the upper left corner
of the report builder, click Report > Joined Report > Apply. USER PERMISSIONS
4. To add another report type to the joined report, click Add Block.
a. Choose a report type. joined reports:
b. If you'd like to include standard columns for this report type, leave Include default • Legacy Folder Sharing
columns checked. If you'd like to add an empty block, uncheck Include default Create and
columns. In either case, you can customize the block after adding it by adding or Customize Reports
removing columns. AND
Report Builder
Note: If you add an empty block, it doesn’t appear in the preview until you add
columns to it. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
c. Click Add Block. Create and
Customize Reports
d. To learn more about working with blocks, see Work with Blocks on page 97.
AND
5. Customize the joined report with columns, groups, filters, and formulas. Report Builder
6. Click Save and name the report.
7. Optionally, describe the report and click Select Folder to choose a report folder.
8. Click Save.
9. To run the report, click Run.
Create a Joined Report in Salesforce Classic
1. On the Reports tab, click New Report...
2. Choose a report type, and click Create.
The report type you choose becomes the joined report's principal report type. The principal report type determines how common
fields shared by different report types in a report are named. For more information about principal report types and common
fields in joined reports, see How Joined Reports Work on page 90.
3. The report opens in the report builder. To turn it into a joined report, click Tabular Format > Joined.
4. To add another report type, click Add Report Type.
a. Choose a report type.
b. Click OK.
92
c. The additional report type appears in a new block. To learn more about working with blocks, see Work with Blocks on page
97.
5. Customize the joined report with columns, groups, filters, and formulas.
6. Click Save and name the report.
7. Optionally, describe the report and click Select Folder to choose a report folder.
8. Click Save.

Adding a report type lets you expand the set of data available for analysis in a joined report.
EDITIONS
Add a Report Type in Lightning Experience
Available in: both Lightning
1. To add another report type to the joined report, click Add block.
2. Choose a report type. Classic
3. If you'd like to include standard columns for this report type, leave Include default columns Available in: Enterprise,
checked. If you'd like to add an empty block, uncheck Include default columns. In either Performance, Unlimited,
case, you can customize the block after adding it by adding or removing columns. and Developer Editions
4. Click Add Block. Available in: Enhanced
Add a Report Type in Salesforce Classic Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
1. To add another report type, click Add Report Type.
2. Choose a report type.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. Click OK.
The additional report type is added. Notice that: To create, edit, and delete
joined reports:
• A new block appears in the report. • Legacy Folder Sharing
• In Lightning Experience, common fields are marked with in the Fields pane. In Salesforce Create and
Classic, The Fields pane updates with a new area that contains fields unique to the report type. Customize Reports
Fields common to all report types are in the Common Fields area. Enhanced Folder
To learn more about working with blocks, see Work with Blocks on page 97. Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
SEE ALSO:
93
Change the Principal Report Type

The principal report type controls how common fields are named. A joined report must have a
EDITIONS
principal report type. You can change the principal report type at any time.
By default, the first report type you add to the report is the principal. Available in: both Lightning
The principal report type doesn’t affect what data is available for reporting.
Classic
Change the principal report type by removing its blocks. If there are multiple blocks based on the
principal report type, you must remove them all. Alternatively, in Lightning Experience, change Available in: Enterprise,
principal report type by reordering blocks. In Lightning Experience, the first block's report type is Performance, Unlimited,
always the principal report type (the first block is the top-most in the OUTLINE).
When you remove the principal report type, the way the new report type is selected depends on Available in: Enhanced
how many report types the report contains. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
• If the report contains only two report types, the other report type automatically becomes the
principal.
USER PERMISSIONS
• In Lightning Experience, if the report contains more than two report types, the report type of
the first block is the principal report type. The first block is the top-most block in the columns To create, edit, and delete
pane. reports:
In Salesforce Classic, if the report contains more than two report types, a dialog displays that • Legacy Folder Sharing
prompts you to pick one of them as the new principal report type. Create and
Customize Reports
AND
SEE ALSO:
Report Builder
Add a Block
Enhanced Folder
Add a Report Type to a Joined Report Sharing
Joined Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder

Two types of custom summary formulas are available with joined reports: standard and cross-block.
EDITIONS
Standard Custom Summary Formulas Available in: both Lightning

Standard custom summary formulas apply to one report type, and can be added to blocks that are
Classic
based on that report type only. For example, a summary formula created for the Cases report type
can only be applied to Cases blocks. The configuration options for custom summary formulas are Available in: Enterprise,
the same for joined reports, reports grouped by rows (summary), and reports grouped by rows and Performance, Unlimited,
columns (matrix). and Developer Editions
Keep the following in mind when working with custom summary formulas in joined reports. Available in: Enhanced
• In Lightning Experience, formulas are automatically added to the block from which they're
Folder Sharing
created. In Salesforce Classic, the formulas aren't automatically added to the report when you
create them. To add a formula to a block in Salesforce Classic, drag it to a block with the same
report type.
94
• When you add custom summary formulas to a block, they appear to the right of the standard fields in the order in which you added
them to the block. If you also add cross-block custom summary formulas, they appear to the right of the standard ones.
• The results of custom summary formulas are affected by the filter options applied to the blocks they're included in. As a result, the
same formula can yield different results in different blocks.
• You can add up to 10 custom summary formulas to each block in a joined report. A joined report can have a total of 50 custom
summary formulas.
• Each custom summary formula must have a unique name. However, standard and cross-block custom summary formulas can have
the same name.
• Custom summary formula names can't include brackets (“[“ or “]”).
Cross-Block Custom Summary Formulas

Cross-block custom summary formulas let you calculate values across multiple blocks in a joined report. For example, you can use a
cross-block formula to calculate the ratio of open to closed opportunities for an account or the ratio of closed pipeline deals to sales
targets.
Building a cross-block formula is similar to creating a standard one. The same data formats, formula options, functions, and calculation
display locations are available. The formula syntax is also similar, except that block information is also included. For example, when
calculating the ratio of opportunities to cases for each account, the formula also includes the block title: [Opportunities block
1]RowCount / [Cases block 2]RowCount. If you omit block title, you see an error message when you check formula
syntax or save the formula.
Keep the following in mind when working with cross-block custom summary formulas.
• You can add a cross-block formula to any block in the report.
• In Lightning Experience, cross-block formulas are automatically added to the report when you create them. In Salesforce Classic,
cross-block formulas aren't automatically added to the report when you create them. To add a cross-block formula in Salesforce
Classic, drag it to a block.
• When you add cross-block formulas to a block, they appear to the right of standard ones in the order in which you add them to the
block.
• The results of cross-block formulas are affected by the filter options applied to the blocks in the report. As a result, a cross-block
formula can yield different results when you change filter options.
• Each joined report can have up to 10 cross-block custom summary formulas.
• Deleting a block that’s used in a cross-block formula also deletes the formula from both the Fields pane and any remaining blocks
containing it.
• Each cross block formula must have a unique name. However, standard and cross-block custom summary formulas can have the
same name.
• Cross-block formula names can't include brackets (“[“ or “]”).
95

Summary formulas in joined reports are just like summary formulas in standard reports, except they can apply to multiple blocks or
just one. When you add a summary formula to a block, you specify whether it applies across blocks or only to that block.
SEE ALSO:
Joined Report Examples

Summary formulas in joined reports are just like summary formulas in standard reports, except they
EDITIONS
can apply to multiple blocks or just one. When you add a summary formula to a block, you specify
whether it applies across blocks or only to that block. Available in: both Lightning
Add a summary formula to a joined report in Lightning Experience Experience and Salesforce
Classic
1. Create or edit a joined report.
2. Ensure that there is at least one grouping on the joined report. If necessary, group data by Available in: Enterprise,
clicking Add group... and selecting a field to group by. Performance, Unlimited,
3. From the Columns section of the Outline panel, click adjacent to a block name.
4. To add a summary formula that only evaluates data in one block, click Add Summary Folder Sharing and Legacy
Formula. To add a cross-block summary formula that evaluates all the data in the joined Folder Sharing
report, click Add Cross-Block Summary Formula.
5. Write the formula. For help with writing the formula, see Evaluate Groups and Totals with
USER PERMISSIONS
Summary Formulas on page 75.
6. Click Apply. To create, edit, and delete
joined reports:
Add a custom summary formula to a joined report in Salesforce Classic • Legacy Folder Sharing
1. Create or edit a joined report. Create and
2. Ensure that there is at least one grouping on the joined report. If necessary, group data by Customize Reports
dragging and dropping a field onto the area that reads Drop a field here to group across AND
report blocks. Report Builder
3. To add a standard custom summary formula, from the Fields pane, go to the report type Enhanced Folder
category and double-click Add Formula. To add a cross-block custom summary formula, Sharing
from the Fields pane, go to the Common category and double-click Add Cross Block Create and
Formula. Customize Reports
AND
4. Write the formula. For help with writing the formula, see Evaluate Groups and Totals with
Summary Formulas on page 75. Report Builder
5. Click OK.
96
The summary formula column appears in your report.
SEE ALSO:
Work with Blocks

Blocks let you create different views of the information contained in a joined report.
EDITIONS
1. Add a Block Available in: both Lightning

Adding blocks to joined reports lets you create multiple views of the data included in a single Experience and Salesforce
report. Classic
2. Reorder Blocks Available in: Enterprise,

You can reorder blocks in joined reports. Reordering blocks affects the report’s appearance but Performance, Unlimited,
doesn’t affect the data in the blocks. and Developer Editions
3. Rename a Block Available in: Enhanced

You can rename blocks to provide more user-friendly descriptions of the information they Folder Sharing and Legacy
contain. Folder Sharing
4. Show and Hide the Record Count for a Block

You can choose to show or hide the number of records, or record count, for each block in a USER PERMISSIONS
joined report. By default, record count is displayed for each block in the report builder and on To create, edit, and delete
the run reports page. joined reports:
5. Delete a Block • Legacy Folder Sharing
When you no longer need a block, delete it. Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
97
Add a Block
Adding blocks to joined reports lets you create multiple views of the data included in a single report.
EDITIONS
Add a block to a joined report in Lightning Experience
1. Create or edit a joined report.
2. Click Add Block. Classic
3. Choose a report type. Available in: Enterprise,
4. If you'd like to include standard columns for this report type, leave Include default columns Performance, Unlimited,
checked. If you'd like to add an empty block, uncheck Include default columns. In either and Developer Editions
case, you can customize the block after adding it by adding or removing columns. Available in: Enhanced
5. Click Add Block. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
6. Click Save.
Add a block to a joined report in Salesforce Classic
USER PERMISSIONS
1. Click and hold a field from the Fields pane, then drag it to the empty area of the Preview
pane. To create, edit, and delete
reports:
2. When you’ve added the block, notice that standard and field filters for the additional block
are added to the Filters pane (1). Also, the new block appears in the Preview pane (2).
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
3. Click Save.
98
To delete a block, click in the block header, then click Remove Block.
SEE ALSO:
Delete a Block
Work with Blocks
Reorder Blocks
You can reorder blocks in joined reports. Reordering blocks affects the report’s appearance but
EDITIONS
doesn’t affect the data in the blocks.
When you reorder blocks, block numbers don't change. For example, if you have a report containing Available in: both Lightning
three blocks, and you move block 1 to a new position to the right of block 3, the blocks now display Experience and Salesforce
as block 2, block 3, and block 1. To avoid confusion, rename the blocks. Classic
When reordering a block, you move it to either the left or right of an existing block. Available in: Enterprise,
Reorder a block in Lightning Experience Performance, Unlimited,
1. From the Columns section of the Outline panel, click adjacent to the name of the block
you wish to reorder. Available in: Enhanced
2. To move the block left, click Move Block Up. To move the block right, click Move Block Folder Sharing
Down.
3. Click Save.
USER PERMISSIONS
Reorder a block in Salesforce Classic
1. In the Preview pane, drag the block to either the left or right side of an existing block. A joined reports:
blue bar beside the block indicates an acceptable drop location. • Legacy Folder Sharing
2. Drop the block in the desired location. Create and
3. Click Save. Customize Reports
AND
SEE ALSO: Report Builder
Rename a Block Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Work with Blocks Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
99
Rename a Block
You can rename blocks to provide more user-friendly descriptions of the information they contain.
EDITIONS
When you add a block to a joined report, it’s named automatically based on the report type and
the number of blocks in the report. For example, if your report contains two blocks and you add a Available in: both Lightning
block that’s based on the Opportunities report type, it’s named Opportunities block 3. Experience and Salesforce
Classic
Rename a block in Lightning Experience
1. Create or edit a joined report. Available in: Enterprise,
2. From the preview panel, find the block you wish to rename and click next to the current and Developer Editions
block name.
3. Enter a new block name. Folder Sharing and Legacy
4. To keep the name, on your keyboard, press Enter. Folder Sharing
5. Click Save.
Rename a block in Salesforce Classic USER PERMISSIONS
1. Create or edit a joined report. To create, edit, and delete
joined reports:
2. Click the block’s name.
3. Enter the new name.
Create and
4. To apply the name, press Enter on your keyboard or click outside the block. Customize Reports
5. Click Save. AND
Report Builder
SEE ALSO: Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Work with Blocks
Create and
Combine Different Types of Information in a Joined Report Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
100
Show and Hide the Record Count for a Block

You can choose to show or hide the number of records, or record count, for each block in a joined
EDITIONS
report. By default, record count is displayed for each block in the report builder and on the run
reports page. Available in: both Lightning
Show or hide record count for a block in Lightning Experience Experience and Salesforce
Classic
For joined reports created in Lightning Experience, record count shows by default. You can't
hide record count until you summarize another field in the report, like Amount. After adding a Available in: Enterprise,
summary, click the Row Count toggle to hide record count. Click it again to show it. Performance, Unlimited,
If you hide record count and then remove all summaries from the report, then record count is
automatically shown. Available in: Enhanced
Show or hide record count for a block in Salesforce Classic Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
You can hide or show record count in either of two ways.
• Display the block menu by clicking in the block header. The check mark beside the USER PERMISSIONS
Record Count menu item shows that record count is enabled for the block. to toggle
between showing and hiding the count, click Record Count. To create, edit, and delete
reports:
• When you’ve hidden report details, position the cursor over the Record Count column. Click
and select Remove Column. To display the record count again, click in the block
Create and
header and select Record Count.
Customize Reports
If you haven’t summarized any rows in your report blocks and have hidden both details for the AND
report and row counts for all blocks, your blocks are hidden on the run reports page. To display
Report Builder
the blocks, choose Show Details (in Salesforce Classic) or toggle the Row Counts, Detail
Rows, Subtotals, or Grand Total switches (in Lightning Experience) from the report run page Enhanced Folder
Sharing
or the report builder.
Create and
Customize Reports
SEE ALSO: AND
Show and Hide Report Details Report Builder
Use a Summary Function in a Custom Summary Formula
101
Delete a Block
When you no longer need a block, delete it.
EDITIONS
Delete a block from a joined report in Lightning Experience
1. From the Columns section of the OUTLINE panel, click adjacent to the name of the
block you wish to delete.
Classic
2. Click Remove Block.
3. Click Save. Performance, Unlimited,
Delete a block from a joined report in Salesforce Classic and Developer Editions
1. To display the block menu, click , then click Remove Block. Or, click and hold in the Available in: Enhanced
block header, and drag the block to the Fields pane. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
2. Click Save.
USER PERMISSIONS
SEE ALSO:
Work with Blocks To delete reports in My
Personal Custom Reports
folder:
Create and
Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
To delete reports in public

folders:
Manage Public
Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Manage Reports in
Public Folders
102

Creating a sales rep performance scorecard, reviewing support cases by status, and predicting your
EDITIONS
opportunity pipeline are some examples of what you can do with joined reports. Here’s how.
Accounts with Open Cases (Lightning Experience) Experience and Salesforce
Classic
A joined report is an ideal way to see Accounts that have open Cases.
2. Select the Accounts report type. Then, click Create. and Developer Editions
3. If necessary, customize standard filters. For example, set Show to All accounts and Range to Available in: Enhanced
All Time. Folder Sharing and Legacy
4. The report opens in the report builder. To turn it into a joined report, in the upper left corner Folder Sharing
of the report builder, click Report > Joined Report > Apply.
5. To add another report type to the joined report, click Add Block. USER PERMISSIONS
a. Choose the Cases report. To create, edit, and delete
b. Click Add Block. joined reports:
6. If necessary, continue to customize the report. For example, we want to see only open cases, Create and
which we can achieve by adding a field filter to block 2. Customize Reports
a. From FILTERS, under the Cases block, click Add filter.... AND
b. Select Closed. Report Builder
c. Select False and click Apply. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
7. If necessary, group across blocks using common fields. Common fields are shared between all Create and
objects in the joined report. For example, we can group this report by Account Owner. Customize Reports
8. Click Save and Run Report. AND

Report Builder
Admire your handiwork and start gaining actionable insights!
103
Creating a Sales Rep Performance Scorecard (Salesforce Classic)

A sales rep scorecard lets your sales management team understand the performance and actions of your organization’s sales reps. To
create it, you must have three separate custom report types, each of which creates a relationship between User (as the primary object)
and one of the following three objects: Opportunity Owner, Opportunity Creator, and Activity Owner. In this example, we’ve named the
custom report types User and Opportunity Owner Custom Report, User and Opportunity Creator
Custom Report, and User and Activity Owner Custom Report.
Start by creating a custom report based on the User and Opportunity Owner custom report type. Then add the User and Opportunity
Creator and User and Activity owner custom report types as two additional blocks. Then, group by Sales Rep (opportunity owner) and
set the filters as described in the procedure.
To create the report:
1. Create a report, selecting User and Opportunity Owner Custom Report as the report type.
2. Select Joined from the Format dropdown.
3. Click Add Report Type.
4. Select User and Opportunity Creator Custom Report.
5. Click Add Report Type again, and choose User and Activity Owner Custom Report.
6. Group the blocks by Full Name.
7. Add additional fields and filters to the report as needed. For example, consider changing the date filters to focus on rep performance
during a particular time frame. Or, to make sure that only sales people are included as opportunity owners, create a filter on the
Role: Name filter limit your results to users with “Sales” in their roles.
8. Optionally, provide names for the blocks.
9. Click Save or Run Report.
104
Reviewing Support Cases by Status (Salesforce Classic)

You can also create a report comparing the number of support cases that are new, closed, or in-progress by priority. The report contains
a single standard report type: Cases. First, create the report, add three blocks to the report, filter each block by the appropriate status,
and then use the Priority field for grouping.
1. Create a report, selecting Cases as the report type.
2. Select Joined from the Format dropdown.
3. Remove unwanted fields by dragging them to the Fields pane.
4. Create three blocks, each containing the Case Number and Status and, optionally, Case Owner fields.
5. For each block, filter on all cases. Then, filter each of the blocks by Status as follows:
• Block 1: Status equals Closed
• Block 2: Status equals New
• Block 3: Status not equal to Closed, New, Closed in Portal, Closed — First Call
6. Group the blocks by Priority.

7. Optionally, rename the blocks.
105
Predicting Opportunity Pipeline (Salesforce Classic)

Using cross-block custom summary formulas, you can create a report that predicts future opportunity revenue based on your sales reps’
past performance. Create a report based on the Opportunities standard report type. Add three blocks to the report, filter each block by
the appropriate status, and then create a formula that uses fields from different blocks.
1. Create a new joined report, selecting Opportunities as the report type.
2. Remove unwanted fields by dragging them to the Fields pane.
3. Create three blocks, each containing the Opportunity Name, Account Name and Amount fields.
4. For each block, show All Opportunities. Then, filter each block.
Block Filters
Block 1 Opportunity Status equals Closed
Date Field equals Close Date
Range equals Current and Previous FY
Stage equals Closed Lost
Block 2 Opportunity Status equals Closed Won

Date Field equals Close Date
Range equals Current and Previous FY
106
Block Filters
Block 3 Date Field equals Close Date
Range equals Next Month
Opportunity Status equals Open
5. Group the blocks by Opportunity Owner.

6. Rename the blocks. For example, “Closed — Won”, “Close — Lost”, and “Closing Next Month”.
7. Create a cross-block custom summary formula that predicts upcoming revenue based on past sales rep performance:
[Closing Next Month]AMOUNT:SUM*([Closed - Won]RowCount/([Closed -
Lost]RowCount+[Closed - Won]RowCount))
8. Add the formula to one or more of the blocks.

9. Optionally, add a cross-block custom summary formula that calculates the win ratio of each sales rep:
[Closed - Won]RowCount/([Closed - Lost]RowCount+[Closed - Won]RowCount)
Adding a Chart to the Opportunity Pipeline Predictor Report (Salesforce Classic)

You can include a chart with a joined report to provide a visual representation of the data. For example, you can add a chart to the
Opportunity Pipeline Predictor report that shows actual versus predicted revenue.
To add the chart:
1. Create the Predicting Opportunity Pipeline report as described in the previous section. .
2. Click Add Chart.
3. For the Y-axis, select Closed — Won — Sum of Amount.
4. Select Plot additional values.
5. Select Line for the Display option, and Predicted Revenue as the Value.
107
6. Click the Formatting tab, and enter Actual versus Predicted Revenue as the chart title.
7. Click OK.
SEE ALSO:
Work with Blocks
Joined Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

Most of the things you can do with reports you can also do with joined reports, such as find, add,
EDITIONS
and remove fields; summarize fields; and run and save reports. However, there are some things you
can’t do. When working with Lightning Experience joined reports, there are some Lightning Available in: both Lightning
Experience-specific limits and limitations to consider. Experience and Salesforce
Here are some things you can’t do with joined reports. Classic
• Add bucketed fields. Available in: Enterprise,

• Add cross filters. Performance, Unlimited,
• Drag and drop filters from the Fields pane on to the Filter pane.
• Apply conditional highlighting. Available in: Enhanced
• Change the hierarchy for account, activity, lead, and opportunity reports.
Folder Sharing
108
• Create reporting snapshots based on joined reports.

• Schedule or subscribe to joined reports in Salesforce Classic.
Note:
• For users to be able to create and edit joined reports, report builder must be enabled for your entire organization. When report
builder isn’t enabled, users can run joined reports, but can’t create them.
• Joined reports require that the new user interface theme is enabled. Users without the new theme are unable to create, edit,
or run joined reports.
• Internet Explorer 6 is not supported for joined reports.
• You can’t filter data on a joined report in dashboard view or add a filter to a dashboard that only has joined reports.
• When using the console in run mode, the Hide Details and Show Details buttons aren't available for joined reports. To use
the buttons, click Customize to enter edit mode.
• Joined reports aren't supported in console apps.
Standard Report Types That Can’t Be Used in Joined Reports

• Accounts and Contacts
– Account History
– Account Owners*
– Contact History
• Activities
– My Delegated Approval Requests*
• Administrative
– All Pending Approval Requests*
– API Usage Last 7 Days*
• Campaign
– Campaign Call Down*
– Campaign Member
– Campaign Member Analysis*
– Campaigns with Influenced Opportunities
• Contract
– Contract History
– Order History
• Customer Support
– Case History
– Self Service Usage
– Solution History
• File and Content

– Content Authors
– Content Publication Time Frame
109
– File and Content Downloads

– File and Content Engagement
– File and Content Links
– Library Administrators
– Library Content
– Most Content Downloads
– Most Content Subscriptions
– Stale Content
• Lead
– Lead All
– Lead History
– Lead Status*
• Opportunity
– Opportunities with Contact Roles and Products
– Opportunities with Opportunity Teams and Products
– Opportunity Field History
• Price Books, Products and Assets

– Assets without Products*
Note:
• You might not have access to all the report types listed here. Certain factors can affect the report types you see, such as which
features your organization has enabled and how your administrator has set up report folder visibility. Check with your
administrator if you think you should see a report type that you don’t.
• If your organization has renamed standard objects, the names of the standard report types will contain your organization’s
names instead of the original ones. For example, if your organization has renamed the “Opportunity” object as “Deal,” the
standard report type “Opportunity Field History” will be renamed “Deal Field History.”
• In this list, report types marked with an asterisk (*) aren’t available when you create a new report. Instead, you access them by
customizing standard reports, which are in folders on the Reports tab.
Lightning Experience Joined Report Feature Gaps, Differences, and Limitations

As you get ready to work with joined reports in Lightning Experience, take note of these limitations. These features aren’t available yet,
but we’re working hard to implement them in a future release.
• Subscriptions
• Export as details only (Formatted report export is supported)
• Open in Quip
• Conditional formatting
• Trend report data in CRM Analytics
110
• Einstein Discovery in Reports
SEE ALSO:
Change the Principal Report Type
Standard Report Types
Report on Historical Changes

On top of the standard up-to-the-minute reporting on the current state of your business, you can analyze day-to-day and week-to-week
changes in opportunities, cases, forecasts, and custom objects.
Note: Historical trend reports are also called historical tracking reports.
1. Track Changes Over Time with Historical Trend Reporting

Historical trend reporting uses a special custom report type designed to highlight changes between five snapshot dates, such as
five business days or five business weeks. You can visually represent the data changes in charts and on dashboards.
2. Report on Historical Data with Reporting Snapshots
A reporting snapshot lets you report on historical data. Authorized users can save tabular or summary report results to fields on a
custom object, then map those fields to corresponding fields on a target object. They can then schedule when to run the report to
load the custom object's fields with the report's data. Reporting snapshots enable you to work with report data similarly to how you
work with other records in Salesforce.
Track Changes Over Time with Historical Trend Reporting

Historical trend reporting uses a special custom report type designed to highlight changes between five snapshot dates, such as five
business days or five business weeks. You can visually represent the data changes in charts and on dashboards.
For organizations created in Winter ’14 and thereafter, historical trend reporting is activated by default. If your organization is older than
that, you must activate historical trend reporting in the Setup menu.
Salesforce retains historical data for the previous three months, plus the current month. (The amount of historical data you can work
with in practice depends on your organization’s data design and use patterns.) You can select up to five date snapshots in that span to
compare, using up to four historical filters.
Longer durations than days or weeks are not recommended. They may result in reports timing out and not returning. For small organizations
with fewer records, month-to-month trend reporting may work, but this is not what historical trend reporting is designed for.
Note: Historical trend reports are also called historical tracking reports.
Tip: You can also create and customize historical trend reporting reports via the Metadata API and the Reports and Dashboards
REST API.
Track Changes in Your Sales Pipeline

A historical report can help you monitor your company’s sales pipeline to make sure it contains enough activity to meet current and
future sales goals. For example, focus on deals whose value grew or shrank in the last three months, or deals that moved into or out
of a given target period.
111
See How Forecast Amounts Have Changed

Let's build a historical report, in matrix format, of the amounts your team members have assigned to each forecast category. Changes
in those amounts can reveal how accurately your team is forecasting.
Track History for Cases
Monitor activity across cases and identify your case status changes in the last three months of a case’s life cycle.
Limitations on Historical Trend Reporting
Historical trending in Salesforce is subject to certain limits on the time during which data is tracked, the number of rows of data, and
the fields and objects you can track. These limits are designed to restrict the data set so that reports return data quickly.
Filter Historical Report Data
When you filter on a historical field in a historical trending report, you specify a past date or date range in addition to an operator
and value. Results are returned if the filter criteria are true during the historical date range.
Track Changes in Your Sales Pipeline

A historical report can help you monitor your company’s sales pipeline to make sure it contains enough activity to meet current and
future sales goals. For example, focus on deals whose value grew or shrank in the last three months, or deals that moved into or out of
a given target period.
Compare historical and current values of key attributes of opportunities such as dates, amounts, and status, to see how your pipeline
has changed over time. For example, this Lightning Experience report points out opportunity amounts and close dates that have changed
since 3 months ago.
• Snapshot up to five dates to track day-to-day or week-to-week trends.
• Current and historical values are shown side by side for easy comparison.
• Changed dates and amounts are highlighted in red or green.
1. Watch Your Pipeline Change Over Time

Let’s say you want to know how the total value of your pipeline today compares with its value yesterday. Create a simple report to
compare the two dates.
2. Identify Historical Deals Over a Given Value
Suppose you want to focus only on deals in your pipeline worth more than $5,000, but you’re not concerned about today’s fluctuations.
Use a historical trending report that filters out any deal with a value that was below $5,000 yesterday.
3. Find Deals that Have Been Pushed Out
To focus on deals that are taking more time to close than expected, create a historical trending report that finds deals in your pipeline
that have had their close dates moved to a later date.
112
4. Identify Shrinking Deals

Historical trending analysis can help you prioritize by quickly identifying deals that are at risk. For example, target the deals in your
pipeline that have decreased in value since yesterday. Use a historical trending report that gives you the deals whose value yesterday
was greater than their value today.
Watch Your Pipeline Change Over Time

Let’s say you want to know how the total value of your pipeline today compares with its value
EDITIONS
yesterday. Create a simple report to compare the two dates.
To see Opportunities with Historical Trending, enable Historical Trend Reporting for Opportunities Available in: Lightning
in Setup. For more information, seeSet Up Historical Trend Reporting in Salesforce Help. Experience
1. Create an opportunity history report. Available in: Enterprise,
a. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report. Performance, Unlimited,
b. Select Select Report Type > Opportunities > Opportunities with Historical Trending.
To see Opportunities with Historical Trending, enable Historical Trend Reporting for
Folder Sharing
Opportunities in Setup. For more information, see Set Up Historical Trend Reporting in
Salesforce Help.
USER PERMISSIONS
c. Click Continue.
2. Extend the report to all opportunities and a date range of interest. reports:
Tip: To select all opportunities click All Opportunities when the report first opens, or • Legacy Folder Sharing
click Filters and then click Show Me to make your selection. To change the time Create and
Customize Reports
range for the close date comparison, click Close Date.
AND
3. Click Outline. Report Builder
The default value in the Snapshot Dates is Yesterday, and the Amount Enhanced Folder
(Historical) field shows yesterday’s date. Sharing
Create and
Tip: “Yesterday” is a rolling date value, meaning that it points to a date that is relative to Customize Reports
today’s date. If you run this same report tomorrow, Amount (Historical) shows
AND
today’s date.
Report Builder
4. To add a different start date for the snapshot comparison, click + and select the date. To remove
a snapshot date, click X.
5. In the report table, click the down arrow in the headers of the Amount (Historical) and the Amount columns. Click
Summarize, then select Sum.
6. In the report table, click the down arrow in the header of the Amount column. Click Show Change, then select Value.
7. Click Run Report.
8. In the Change column, observe the difference between the total value of the Amount (Historical) column and that of
the Amount column.
Tip: You can see changes at a glance by looking for values that are colored green or red.
113
You’ve created a simple historical trending report that can help you analyze your pipeline’s behavior.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunities with Historical Trending Report
Identify Historical Deals Over a Given Value

Suppose you want to focus only on deals in your pipeline worth more than $5,000, but you’re not
EDITIONS
concerned about today’s fluctuations. Use a historical trending report that filters out any deal with
a value that was below $5,000 yesterday. Available in: Lightning
1. Create an opportunity history report. Experience
a. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report. Available in: Enterprise,
b. Select Select Report Type > Opportunities > Opportunities with Historical Trending. Performance, Unlimited,
If you don’t see the Opportunities with Historical Trending report type, enable Historical
Trend Reporting for Opportunities in Setup. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
c. Click Create or Continue.
2. Select the option to show All Opportunities. USER PERMISSIONS

3. Filter for historical values over $5,000.
a. (Lightning Experience) Open the Filters pane. Click Add Filter and select Amount reports:
(Historical). For the date, select Yesterday. For the operator, select greater • Legacy Folder Sharing
than. Click , select Value, and enter $5000. Create and
Customize Reports
b. (Salesforce Classic) Click Add and select Historical Field Filter. Select Amount
AND
(Historical). For the date, select Yesterday. For the operator, select greater
Report Builder
than. Click , select Value, and enter $5000.
Enhanced Folder
4. Run the report. Sharing
Create and
5. In the finished report, observe that all the deals in the Amount — Historical column Customize Reports
are worth more than $5,000. AND
Tip: Values in the Amount, Close Date and Stage fields are shown in green or red to Report Builder
indicate the direction of change. You can reverse the colors by clicking the down arrow
in the column header.
You’ve created a simple report that pulls out all the deals that have were worth more than a given amount as of a given historical snapshot
date.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up Historical Trend Reporting
114
Find Deals that Have Been Pushed Out

To focus on deals that are taking more time to close than expected, create a historical trending
EDITIONS
report that finds deals in your pipeline that have had their close dates moved to a later date.
1. Create an opportunity history report. Available in: Lightning
Experience
a. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report.
b. Select Select Report Type > Opportunities > Opportunities with Historical Trending. Available in: Enterprise,
To see Opportunities with Historical Trending, enable Historical Trend Reporting for
Opportunities in Setup. For more information, see Set Up Historical Trend Reporting in
Salesforce Help. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
c. Click Create.
2. For Show, select All Opportunities. USER PERMISSIONS

3. Filter for close dates that are later now than they were in the past.
a. Click Add and select Historical Field Filter. reports:
b. Set Close Date (Historical) to Feb. 1, 2013.
Create and
Tip: Use the calendar under Fixed Days to select the date. Customize Reports
AND
c. Click OK.
Report Builder
4. Click the down arrow in the header of the Close Date column and select Show Changes. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
5. Click Run Report.
Create and
6. For each deal in the report, compare the date in the Close Date — Historical Customize Reports
column with the date in the Close Date — Today column. AND
Tip: You can see changes at a glance by looking for values that are colored green or red. Report Builder
SEE ALSO:
115
Identify Shrinking Deals

Historical trending analysis can help you prioritize by quickly identifying deals that are at risk. For
EDITIONS
example, target the deals in your pipeline that have decreased in value since yesterday. Use a
historical trending report that gives you the deals whose value yesterday was greater than their Available in: Lightning
value today. Experience
1. Create an opportunity history report.
a. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report. Performance, Unlimited,
b. Select Select Report Type > Opportunities > Opportunities with Historical Trending. and Developer Editions
If you don’t see the Opportunities with Historical Trending report type, enable Historical Available in: Enhanced
Trend Reporting for Opportunities in Setup. Folder Sharing
c. Click Create or Continue.

USER PERMISSIONS
2. Select the option to show All Opportunities.
3. Filter out any deal that wasn’t worth more yesterday than today. reports:
a. (Lightning Experience) Open the Filters pane. Click Add Filter and select Amount • Legacy Folder Sharing
(Historical). For the date, select Yesterday. For the operator, select greater Create and
than. To compare yesterday’s Amount value with today, click , and select Field. Customize Reports
AND
b. (Salesforce Classic) Click Add and select Historical Field Filter. Select Amount
(Historical). For the date, select Yesterday. For the operator, select greater Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
than. To compare yesterday’s Amount value with today, click , and select Field.
Sharing
Create and
4. Run the report.
Customize Reports
You’ve created a simple report that flags deals that have shrunk since yesterday. All the results in AND
the Amount — Today column are shown in red, to indicate decreases in value.
Report Builder
Tip: To change the color-coding for amount changes, click the down arrow above the Change
column and click Reverse Colors.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up Historical Trend Reporting
116
See How Forecast Amounts Have Changed

Let's build a historical report, in matrix format, of the amounts your team members have assigned
EDITIONS
to each forecast category. Changes in those amounts can reveal how accurately your team is
forecasting. Available in: both Lightning
For this example, assume you're about a month into the current fiscal quarter. Experience and Salesforce
Classic
1. Create a forecast history report.
a. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Report, or on the Reports tab, click New Report. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Essentials,
b. Find a select the report type Forecasting Items with Historical Trending. Before you can Professional, Enterprise,
select this report type, your org must have enabled Historical Trending for Forecasting Performance, Unlimited,
Items. If you don’t see the report type listed, contact your administrator. and Developer Editions
c. Click Create. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
2. In the Filters area, choose Show > All forecasting items, then set up your filters.
a. For Date Field, choose End Date. For Range, choose Current FQ. The From and To date
fields automatically get the beginning and end dates for the current quarter. USER PERMISSIONS
b. For Historical Date, choose 3 Months Ago, 2 Months Ago, then 1 Month To create, edit, and delete
Ago from the dropdown menu. Each date you select is added to the field. reports in private folders:
Reports
reports in public and private
folders:
Builder (Lightning
Experience)
Filter for the historical data you want.
Tip: To move Yesterday to the right side of the field, delete it, and then add it again from the dropdown menu.
If you’re using multiple forecast types, add a filter for Forecasting Type: API Name to prevent duplicate values from appearing
on the report.
3. Choose the data you want to monitor for historical changes. In this case, we're interested in the category in which the changes were
made and how the forecast amount changed.
a. In the Preview pane, change Tabular Format to Matrix Format.
b. To create a row grouping, drag the Owner: Full Name field from the Field area to the Preview pane.
c. Drag the Forecast Category field over to the right of Owner: Full Name to create another row grouping.
d. Drag the Forecast Amount (Historical) field to the matrix area of the Preview pane, below the yellow bar. In the
Summarize dialog, select Sum.
117
Select the fields that contain the data you want to track.
Columns appear for each of the historical dates you chose in the filters area that contain records.
4. The see what data you’ve gathered so far, click Run Report. Then click Customize to keep adjusting your filters and fields if necessary.
5. After you’ve defined the data you want to track, create a chart to show it graphically.
a. In the Preview area, click Add Chart and select the line chart icon.
b. On the Chart Data tab, choose Sum of Forecast Amount (historical) for the Y-Axis and Snapshot Date
for the X-Axis.
c. For Group By, choose Forecast Category, and select Cumulative.
d. Click OK, then click Run Report again.
6. Click Save As. Choose a name and folder for the report and click Save.
Track History for Cases

Monitor activity across cases and identify your case status changes in the last three months of a case’s life cycle.
1. One way to optimize contact center operations is to observe the Status field over time, watching for cases that move backward
to a previous status. This can help reveal ways to resolve cases more effectively.
2. For another example, try analyzing historical values of the Priority field to identify cases that may have been incorrectly classified
when they were opened. Watching for frequent changes in priority may also lead to ways to improve the handling of complex cases.
Limitations on Historical Trend Reporting

Historical trending in Salesforce is subject to certain limits on the time during which data is tracked, the number of rows of data, and the
fields and objects you can track. These limits are designed to restrict the data set so that reports return data quickly.
• Salesforce retains historical data for the previous three months, plus the current month.
• Up to 5 million rows of historical trending data can be stored for each object. Historical data capture stops when the limit is exceeded.
Email is sent to the admin when any object reaches 70 percent of the limit, and again if the limit is exceeded. Alerts continue until
the percentage is reduced below 70.
• Each historical trend report can contain up to 100 fields. In Opportunities reports, the fields include the standard preselected fields,
which can't be disabled.
• Formula fields aren't supported.
• Row limit filters aren't supported.
• The summary report format isn't supported.
• You can specify up to five historical snapshot dates in each historical trend report.
• You can use up to four historical filters on each historical trend report.
• These field types are supported: Number, Currency, Date, Picklist, Lookup.
118
• Dynamic exchange rates aren’t supported. When you run a historical trend report, it uses a static exchange rate, which could be
outdated.
• Internet Explorer 6 isn't supported.
• You can’t subscribe to historical trend reports in Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic. For matrix reports in Salesforce Classic,
the UI provides settings to subscribe, but the subscription emails aren't sent.
• The Report Wizard isn't supported. Historical trend reports can only be created with the Report Builder.
• Historical trend reporting with charts is supported in Lightning Experience, but tabular views of historical trend reports aren’t available.
• When you enable historical trending, data collection starts from when the record was last modified.
Important: If a picklist field is already being used in a historical trending data filter, think hard before changing any of its values.
You could make that field less useful for historical reporting in the future.
Filter Historical Report Data

When you filter on a historical field in a historical trending report, you specify a past date or date range in addition to an operator and
value. Results are returned if the filter criteria are true during the historical date range.
Example:
This report filter returns all records where 1 month ago the Close Date field had the value NEXT 30 DAYS.
119
If Any Snapshot Date is selected for the historical date, then the filter returns results when the filter criteria are true for all of the snapshot
dates that are specified on the Outline tab under Snapshot Dates.
Example:
A Historical Opps report has two snapshot dates specified: Yesterday and 1 Month Ago.
120
For this report, the following report filter returns all records that had Probability greater than 80% in the Yesterday and 1 Month Ago
snapshots.
121
Report on Historical Data with Reporting Snapshots

A reporting snapshot lets you report on historical data. Authorized users can save tabular or summary
EDITIONS
report results to fields on a custom object, then map those fields to corresponding fields on a target
object. They can then schedule when to run the report to load the custom object's fields with the Available in: both Salesforce
report's data. Reporting snapshots enable you to work with report data similarly to how you work Classic (not available in all
with other records in Salesforce. orgs) and Lightning
After you set up a reporting snapshot, users can: Experience
• Create and run custom reports from the target object. Available in: Professional,
• Create dashboards from the source report. Enterprise, Performance,
• Define list views on the target object, if it's included on a custom object tab. Editions
For example, a customer support manager could set up a reporting snapshot that reports on the
open cases assigned to his or her team everyday at 5:00 PM, and store that data in a custom object
to build a history on open cases from which he or she could spot trends via reports. Then the customer support manager could report
on point-in-time or trend data stored in the custom object and use the report as a source for a dashboard widget. For the total number
of reporting snapshots you can create, see Salesforce Limits.
Note: Reporting snapshots don't support row-level formula fields.
1. Prepare Reporting Snapshots

To set up a reporting snapshot, you need a source report and a target object with fields to contain the data in the source report.
122
2. Define a Reporting Snapshot

After you create a source report, target object, and target object fields, you can define your reporting snapshot. You define a reporting
snapshot by naming it and choosing the source report that will load report results into the target object you specify when the
reporting snapshot runs.
3. Map Reporting Snapshot Fields
After you create a source report, target object, target object fields, and define your reporting snapshot, you can map the fields on
your source report to the fields on your target object. You map source report fields to target object fields so that when the report
runs, it automatically loads specific target object fields with data from specific source report fields.
4. Schedule and Run a Reporting Snapshot
After you create a source report, target object, target object fields, define your reporting snapshot, and map its fields, you can schedule
when it runs. You can schedule a reporting snapshot to run daily, weekly, or monthly so that data from the source report is loaded
into the target object when you need it.
5. Manage Reporting Snapshots
After you set up a reporting snapshot, you can view details about it and edit and delete it. From Setup, enter Reporting
Snapshots in the Quick Find box, then select Reporting Snapshots to display the Reporting Snapshots page, which
shows the list of reporting snapshots defined for your organization.
6. Troubleshooting Tips for Reporting Snapshots
The Run History section of a reporting snapshot detail page displays if a reporting snapshot ran successfully or not. When a reporting
snapshot fails during a scheduled run, the failure is noted in the Result column. To view the details of a run, click the date and
time of the run in the Run Start Time column.
SEE ALSO:
Build a Salesforce Classic Dashboard
Create a Custom Report in Accessibility Mode
123
Prepare Reporting Snapshots

To set up a reporting snapshot, you need a source report and a target object with fields to contain
EDITIONS
the data in the source report.
To set up a reporting snapshot: Available in: both Salesforce
• Create a new custom report that includes the fields you want to load as records into a target
orgs) and Lightning
object.
Experience
• Create a new custom object in which to store the records loaded from the source report.
• Create fields on the target object that will receive the source report's results when the reporting
snapshot runs.
Editions
Tips on Source Reports for Reporting Snapshots
• If you save a tabular source report with its details hidden, the report will not be available to USER PERMISSIONS
include in a reporting snapshot. Furthermore, if you hide the details of a tabular source report
included in a reporting snapshot, the reporting snapshot will fail when it runs. To verify that To create, save, and
schedule a reporting
the details of the tabular source report are not hidden, view the report, click Show Details, and
snapshot:
save the report. The Show Details button only displays if the report's details are hidden.
• Manage Reporting
• When creating the source report for your reporting snapshot, note the names of the fields you Snapshots
added to the report, as those field names may be useful to you when you create fields on the To run a reporting snapshot
target object in which to store the report results. as a running user and add
• You can choose any custom tabular or summary report as the source report, except legacy the results to a custom
forecast reports, Quota vs Actual reports, and Leads by Source reports. The Source Report object, the running user
drop-down list does not display standard reports.. must have:
• Run Reports
• You can include up to 100 fields in your source report.
AND
• You can delete the schedule of when a reporting snapshot runs. You can’t stop or pause a
Create on the target
reporting snapshot when it is running, nor can you delete its source report. To delete the source
object
report, you must first remove the report from the reporting snapshot by changing the report
in the Source Report drop-down list..
• If you select Load No Data in the Fields from Source Report column, no data will load into the
corresponding field in the Fields in Target Object column when the reporting snapshot runs. .
• The (No fields with compatible data type) field displays in the Fields from Source Report column when a field
on the target object does not match the data type of a field on the source report..
Tips on Target Objects for Reporting Snapshots

Consider the following when setting up target objects for reporting snapshots:
• In Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer Editions, use field-level security to make the target object's fields
visible to the appropriate users.
• You can’t delete a custom object if it’s a target object in a reporting snapshot.
• The fields on the target object determine field mapping availability. For example, your source report may include ten fields, but if
your target object includes one field, then you can only map one field in your reporting snapshot.
• You can add up to 100 fields to the target object.
• Target objects cannot contain validation rules or be included in a workflow.
• Reporting snapshots cannot contain target objects that trigger Apex code to run when new records are created..
124
• When a reporting snapshot runs, it can add up to 2,000 new records to the target object. If the source report generates more than
2,000 records, an error message is displayed for the additional records in the Row Failures related list. You can access the Row Failures
related list via the Run History section of a reporting snapshot detail page.
Tips on Reporting Snapshots

• Be aware of the type of license your Running User has. For example, if the Running User of a reporting snapshot has a
Salesforce license, users who have Lightning Platform or Salesforce Platform One licenses will not be able to view it. Alternatively, if
the Running User has a Lightning Platform or Salesforce Platform One license, users who have Salesforce licenses will be able
to see the reporting snapshot. If you have users with Lightning Platform or Salesforce Platform One licenses, we recommend creating
a separate reporting snapshot for them with a Running User that has a Lightning Platform or Salesforce Platform One user
license.
• You can only map fields with compatible data types. For example, you can map a currency field to a number field.
• If you change the source report or target object on a reporting snapshot with existing field mappings, the field mappings are deleted
when you save the reporting snapshot. You can also view Summary Fields in Source Report and Fields in
Target Object to see the number of summary or target fields, respectively..
• You must map at least one field from the source report to one field on the target object or data will not load from the source report
to the target object when the reporting snapshot runs.
• When a reporting snapshot is defined, deleted, or its source report or target object is changed, it is tracked in your organization's
setup audit trail history.
• The Run History section on a reporting snapshot detail page displays details on when the reporting snapshot ran. Details include:
– The date and time at which the reporting snapshot ran
– The name of the source report, target object, and running user
– The time it took for the reporting snapshot to run
– The total number of detail or summary rows in the source report, depending on the report type
– The number of records created in the target object
– Whether or not the reporting snapshot ran successfully
SEE ALSO:
125
Define a Reporting Snapshot

After you create a source report, target object, and target object fields, you can define your reporting
EDITIONS
snapshot. You define a reporting snapshot by naming it and choosing the source report that will
load report results into the target object you specify when the reporting snapshot runs. Available in: both Salesforce
1. From Setup, enter “Reporting Snapshots” in the Quick Find box, then select Reporting Classic (not available in all
Snapshots. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
2. Click New Reporting Snapshot.
3. Enter a name, unique name, and description for your reporting snapshot. Available in: Professional,
4. Choose a user in the Running User field by clicking the lookup icon. Unlimited, and Developer
The user in the Running User field determines the source report's level of access to data. Editions
This bypasses all security settings, giving all users who can view the results of the source report
in the target object access to data they might not be able to see otherwise. USER PERMISSIONS
Only users with the “Modify All Data” permission can choose running users other than
To create, save, and
themselves.
schedule a reporting
5. Select a report from the Source Report drop-down list. snapshot:
• Manage Reporting
The report you choose determines the report results that will load as records into the target Snapshots
object when the reporting snapshot runs.
To run a reporting snapshot
You can choose any custom tabular or summary report as the source report, except legacy as a running user and add
forecast reports, Quota vs Actual reports, and Leads by Source reports. The Source Report the results to a custom
drop-down list does not display standard reports. object, the running user
must have:
6. Select a custom object from the Target Object drop-down list. • Run Reports
The custom object you choose will receive the source report's results as records when the AND
reporting snapshot runs. Create on the target
object
If a record used for an reporting snapshot has no record type associated with it, the record type
of the running user is associated with the reporting snapshot by default.
7. Click Save to save the definition of your reporting snapshot, or click Save & Edit Field Mappings
to save your reporting snapshot and map its fields.
8. Map the fields on the source report to the fields on the target object.
SEE ALSO:
126
Map Reporting Snapshot Fields

After you create a source report, target object, target object fields, and define your reporting
EDITIONS
snapshot, you can map the fields on your source report to the fields on your target object. You map
source report fields to target object fields so that when the report runs, it automatically loads specific Available in: both Salesforce
target object fields with data from specific source report fields. Classic (not available in all
1. From Setup, enter Reporting Snapshots in the Quick Find box, then select orgs) and Lightning
Reporting Snapshots. Experience
2. Select the name of the reporting snapshot whose fields you want to map. Available in: Professional,
3. Click Edit on the Field Mappings section.
4. For summary reports, select the Grouping Level at which summary data is extracted Editions
from the source report. Data loaded into the target object is taken from summary fields at the
grouping level you specify. The Grand Summary summarizes on the total for all grouping
levels.
USER PERMISSIONS
5. In the Fields from Source Report column, click a Load No Data drop-down list and select To create, save, and
a field from the source report to map to a custom object field in the Fields in Target Object schedule a reporting
column. Only summary fields can be mapped for reporting snapshots based on summary snapshot:
reports. Note that the fields for summary reports may vary depending on the grouping level • Manage Reporting
Snapshots
selected.
6. Click Quick Save to save field mappings and continue mapping fields, or click Save to save as a running user and add
field mappings and return to the reporting snapshot's detail page. the results to a custom
7. Next, schedule the reporting snapshot to run. object, the running user
must have:
Consider these tips for mapping reporting snapshot fields. • Run Reports
• You must map at least one field from the source report to one field on the target object or data AND
will not load from the source report to the target object when the reporting snapshot runs. Create on the target
• You can only map fields with compatible data types. For example, you can map a currency field object
to a number field.
• A custom summary formula can be mapped only if the grouping level in the reporting snapshot
and the grouping level in the custom summary formula match.
• If you select Load No Data in the Fields from Source Report column, no data will load into the corresponding field in the Fields in
Target Object column when the reporting snapshot runs..
• The (No fields with compatible data type) field displays in the Fields from Source Report column when a field
on the target object does not match the data type of a field on the source report.
• The fields on the target object determine field mapping availability. For example, your source report may include ten fields, but if
your target object includes one field, then you can only map one field in your reporting snapshot.
• You cannot map fields from the source report to the following fields on the target object: Created By, Last Modified
By, Created Date, and Last Modified Date.
• When you map fields from the source report to the target object, some data may lose its context when loaded to the target object.
For example, if you map a date and time field from the source report to a text field on the target object, the date and time load to
the target object without the time zone.
• When executing a reporting snapshot, if the running user does not have “read” or “write” access to a mapped field in the target
object, that field is dropped from the mapping, but does not cause the execution to fail. If a required field in the target object is not
mapped, the execution fails. To ensure that fields are always mapped, make them required or set default values for them.
127
• To map a field in the source report to a lookup field on the target object, you must map to the ID of the object associated with the
lookup. For example, to map to an opportunity lookup field, you must map to the Opportunity ID. To get the Opportunity
ID in the source report, you may need to use a custom report type to include ID and other related fields.
SEE ALSO:
Schedule and Run a Reporting Snapshot

After you create a source report, target object, target object fields, define your reporting snapshot,
EDITIONS
and map its fields, you can schedule when it runs. You can schedule a reporting snapshot to run
daily, weekly, or monthly so that data from the source report is loaded into the target object when Available in: both Salesforce
you need it. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Important: Where possible, we changed noninclusive terms to align with our company
Experience
value of Equality. We maintained certain terms to avoid any effect on customer
implementations. Available in: Professional,
The number of reporting snapshots you can schedule to run is determined by your Edition. After a Enterprise, Performance,
reporting snapshot has run, you can send an email notification to yourself and other users that Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
includes details about the reporting snapshot run, such as the date and time it ran, whether it ran
successfully, and how many records were loaded into the target object from the source report.
Also, the notification includes a link to the reporting snapshot detail page in Salesforce. USER PERMISSIONS
1. From Setup, enter “Reporting Snapshots” in the Quick Find box, then select Reporting
To create, save, and
Snapshots. schedule a reporting
2. Select the name of the reporting snapshot that you want to schedule to run. Reporting snapshots snapshot:
run as scheduled only if the user in the Running User field has access to the folder in • Manage Reporting
which the source report is stored. Snapshots
If the running user becomes inactive, the report doesn’t run. Salesforce sends an email To run a reporting snapshot
notification to either activate the user, delete the report schedule, or change the running user as a running user and add
to an active one. Salesforce sends the notification to users with the “Manage Users,” “Modify the results to a custom
object, the running user
All Data,” and “Manage Billing” permissions. If no user has all these user permissions, Salesforce
must have:
sends the notification to users with the “Manage Users” and “Modify All Data” user permissions.
• Run Reports
3. Click Edit on the Schedule Reporting Snapshot section. The Schedule Reporting Snapshot AND
section on a reporting snapshot detail page displays details on when the reporting snapshot
Create on the target
is scheduled to run.
object
4. Select a notification setting to send an email when the reporting snapshot finishes running:
• Click Me to send an email to the email address specified on your Salesforce user record.
• Click Others... to send an email to additional users. You can only send reporting snapshot notifications to email addresses
included on Salesforce user records. You can only select Users and Public Groups in the Search drop-down list. You can only
share with internal users, not external users (such as Experience Cloud site users).
5. Schedule the reporting snapshot to run. If you schedule multiple report snapshots for the same time slot (for example, from multiple
browsers), the report snapshot jobs may fail.
• In the Frequency field, select the frequency at which the reporting snapshot runs. When you click the Daily, Weekly,
or Monthly fields, more options display that allow you to refine frequency criteria.
128
If you schedule a reporting snapshot to run on a specific day of every month, the reporting snapshot will only run on months
that have that specific day. For example, if you schedule a reporting snapshot to run on the 31st day of every month, then the
reporting snapshot will only run on months that have 31 days. If you want a reporting snapshot to run on the last day of every
month, choose last from the On day of every month drop-down list.
• In the Start and End fields, specify the dates during which you wish to schedule the reporting snapshot to run.
• In the Preferred Start Time drop-down list, click the Find available options... link to choose a preferred start time
for the reporting snapshot to run.
– Your preferred start time may not be available if other users have already selected that time to run a reporting snapshot or
your organization has reached its reporting snapshot limit.
– Reporting snapshots run in the time zone of the user who schedules the run. For example, if the Time Zone field on your
user record is set to Pacific Standard Time, and you schedule a reporting snapshot to run every day at 2:00 PM, then the
reporting snapshot will run every day at 2:00 PM Pacific Standard Time.
– If you view and save a schedule in a time zone different from the one in which it was previously scheduled, the time slot
could potentially change.
– The reporting snapshot runs within an hour of the time you select in the Preferred Start Time drop-down list.
For example, if you select 2:00 PM as your preferred start time, the reporting snapshot may run any time in between 2:00
PM or 2:59 PM, depending on how many other reporting snapshots are scheduled to refresh at that time.
6. Click Save to schedule the reporting snapshot to run. When the reporting snapshot runs, it adds new records to the target object.
Optionally, once you have scheduled a reporting snapshot to run, you can perform the following actions after you click Edit on the
Schedule Reporting Snapshot section of a reporting snapshot detail page:
• Click Edit to update the notification and frequency settings of the reporting snapshot.
• Click Delete to permanently delete the existing schedule of when the reporting snapshot runs.
A reporting snapshot will fail during a scheduled run if:
• The source report includes more than 100 fields.
• The source report was changed from summary to tabular.
• The selected grouping level for a summary source report is no longer valid.
• The running user does not have access to the source report.
• The running user does not have the “Run Reports” permission.
• The target object has more than 100 custom fields.
• The target object contains validation rules.
• The target object is included in a workflow.
• The target object is a detail object in a master-detail relationship.
• The target object runs an Apex trigger when new records are created on it.
• The running user does not have the “Create” permission on the target object. If the target object's status is In Development,
the running user must have the “Customize Applications” permission.
• The reporting snapshot is scheduled with frequency set as Monthly and the run date is changed after the snapshot has run for the
current month. The snapshot doesn't run on the new day for the current month unless the snapshot frequency is changed to Daily.
To unschedule a reporting snapshot from Setup, enter “Reporting Snapshots” in the Quick Find box, then select Reporting Snapshots.
Click Edit for the snapshot and then click Unscheduled Snapshot. After unscheduling, you can set up another schedule as needed.
129
Manage Reporting Snapshots

After you set up a reporting snapshot, you can view details about it and edit and delete it. From
EDITIONS
Setup, enter Reporting Snapshots in the Quick Find box, then select Reporting
Snapshots to display the Reporting Snapshots page, which shows the list of reporting snapshots Available in: both Salesforce
defined for your organization. Classic (not available in all
From the Reporting Snapshots page, you can: orgs) and Lightning
Experience
• Select a list view from the View drop-down list to go directly to that list page, or click Create
New View to define your own custom view. Available in: Professional,
• Define a new reporting snapshot by clicking New Reporting Snapshot. Enterprise, Performance,
• Update the reporting snapshot name, description, running user, source report, and target object Editions
by clicking Edit next to its name. Only users with the “Modify All Data” permission can choose
running users other than themselves. If you have the “Customize Application” permission, enter
a unique name to be used by the API and managed packages. USER PERMISSIONS
If you change the source report or target object on a reporting snapshot with existing field To create, save, and
mappings, the field mappings are deleted when you save the reporting snapshot. You can also schedule a reporting
view Summary Fields in Source Report and Fields in Target Object snapshot:
to see the number of summary or target fields, respectively. • Manage Reporting
Snapshots
• Delete a reporting snapshot by clicking Del next to its name. After the reporting snapshot is
deleted, it cannot be restored from the Recycle Bin. as a running user and add
When you delete a reporting snapshot, the source report and target object aren’t deleted; the results to a custom
however, when the source report runs, it won’t load the target object with data. object, the running user
You can delete the schedule of when a reporting snapshot runs. You can’t stop or pause a must have:
• Run Reports
reporting snapshot when it is running, nor can you delete its source report. To delete the source
report, you must first remove the report from the reporting snapshot by changing the report AND
in the Source Report drop-down list. Create on the target
object
• Display detailed information about a reporting snapshot and customize it further by clicking
its name. Then you can:
– Click links in the Identification section that redirect you to the reporting snapshot running user, source report, and target object.
In addition, you can view the preferred date and time at which the reporting snapshot will approximately run next in the Next
Run field, and view the date and time at which it last ran in the Last Run field.
– Click Edit in the Field Mappings section to further customize the fields mapped from the source report to the target object.
The Reporting Snapshot Field Mappings section displays which source report fields are mapped to the target object's fields. You
can view the number of fields in the source report available for mapping to the target object in the Columns in Source
Report field. Also, you can view the number of fields available for mapping in the target object in the Fields in Target
Object field.
– Click Edit in the Schedule Reporting Snapshot section to schedule when to run the reporting snapshot.
The Schedule Reporting Snapshot section displays details about when the reporting snapshot is currently scheduled to run.
– The Run History section displays details about when the reporting snapshot ran. Details include:
• The date and time at which the reporting snapshot ran
• The name of the source report, target object, and running user
• The time it took for the reporting snapshot to run
• The total number of detail or summary rows in the source report, depending on the report type
130
• The number of records created in the target object

• Whether or not the reporting snapshot ran successfully
Up to 200 records are stored in the Run History section. After 200 records are stored, the oldest record is automatically deleted
and cannot be retrieved from the Recycle Bin.
SEE ALSO:
Troubleshooting Tips for Reporting Snapshots

The Run History section of a reporting snapshot detail page displays if a reporting snapshot ran
EDITIONS
successfully or not. When a reporting snapshot fails during a scheduled run, the failure is noted in
the Result column. To view the details of a run, click the date and time of the run in the Run Available in: both Salesforce
Start Time column. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
value of Equality. We maintained certain terms to avoid any effect on customer
implementations. Available in: Professional,
• If the Total Row Number is blank, the run failed before the report was completed (for Enterprise, Performance,
example, the report was invalid or the running user is inactive).
Editions
• When a reporting snapshot runs, it can add up to 2000 new records to the target object. If there
are more than 2000 new records, the additional records are not recorded, and the notification
indicates that some rows failed. USER PERMISSIONS
• The details of a failed run are available on the Row Failures related list for 14 days before they To create, save, and
are automatically deleted. You can't retrieve details about row failures from the Recycle Bin. schedule a reporting
• If you have a unique field in the target object, and records in the report have more than one of snapshot:
the same value in the column mapped to that unique field, duplicate records are not added. • Manage Reporting
The run history indicates when records are not added to the reporting snapshot. Snapshots
• If field mappings failed, the snapshot still runs, but the run history shows that there was a partial To run a reporting snapshot
as a running user and add
error.
the results to a custom
A reporting snapshot could fail during a scheduled run for a number of reasons. This table lists the object, the running user
errors a failed run may display and how the errors can help you troubleshoot the reporting snapshot must have:
so that it will run successfully. • Run Reports
AND
Error Description Create on the target
object
Running user does not have The user in the Running User field does not have the
permission to run reports. “Run Reports” or “Create and Customize Reports”
permission. Choose a user with the appropriate permissions
or enable the appropriate permissions for the running user.
Cannot run reporting snapshot The report in the Source Report field was deleted
because source report has been and no longer available to run. Choose another source
deleted. report for your reporting snapshot or restore the deleted
report from the Recycle Bin.
131
Error Description
Running user does not have permission to access The user in the Running User field does not have access to the folder in
source report. which the source report is stored. Choose a user with access to the source report
or provide the existing running user with access to the folder in which the source
report is stored.
Source report definition is obsolete. The report in the Source Report field references a custom or external object
that is no longer available for reports or the relationships between the objects in
the report have changed.
Source report definition is invalid. The report in the Source Report field can't run because it contains invalid
formulas or filter criteria. Update the report so that it can run without errors.
Running user does not have permission to access The user in the Running User field does not have permission to access a
report type. report type associated with the report in the Source Report field. Choose
a running user that has the correct permissions or provide the existing running
user with the appropriate permissions.
Source report must be tabular. The report in the Source Report field is no longer in tabular format. Choose
a new source report or update the existing source report's format to tabular.
Source report last saved with details hidden on The report in the Source Report field was saved with its details hidden. To
report results. display the details of the source report, view the report, click the Show Details
button, and save the report.
Target object has been deleted or is inaccessible to The custom object in the Target Object field has been deleted or the user
running user. in the Running User field does not have permission to access the target
object. Restore the deleted custom object, choose a new target object, or provide
the existing running user with “Create” permissions to the custom object in the
Target Object field. Note that if the custom object's status is In
Development, the running user must have the “Customize Application”
permission to access the target object.
Running user does not have permission to edit The user in the Running User field does not have “Create” permissions on
target object. the custom object in the Target Object field. Choose a running user that
has such permissions or provide the existing running user with “Create”
permissions to the custom object in the Target Object field.
Target object must not be a detail object in a The custom object in the Target Object field is a detail object in a
master-detail relationship. master-detail relationship, meaning that a master object controls certain behaviors
on the target object's records. Choose a target object that is not included in a
master-detail relationship.
Target object must not be included in a workflow. The custom object in the Target Object field is included in a workflow.
Choose a target object that is not included in a workflow.
Target object must not include an insert trigger. An Apex trigger runs when new records are created for the custom object in the
Target Object field. Remove the Apex trigger or choose a target object for
which an Apex trigger does not run when new records are created.
Target object must not include validation rules. The custom object in the Target Object field contains validation rules.
Choose a target object that does not contain validation rules or delete validation
rules from the existing target object.
132
Error Description
Running user is inactive. The user in the Running User field is no longer active. Choose an active user.
One or more required fields on the target object are One or more required fields on the target object are not mapped. Map all required
not mapped. fields on the target object to fields on the source report.
Source report contains too many fields, has a The report in the Source Report field contains too many fields, criteria, or
formula field with too many functions, or contains functions within a formula field. Remove any unnecessary fields, criteria and
too many criteria. functions within formula fields from the source report.
Source report cannot have more than 100 selected The report in the Source Report field contains more than 100 fields. Remove
columns. any unnecessary fields from the source report.
Target object cannot have more than 100 custom The custom object in the Target Object field contains more than 100
fields. custom fields. Remove any unnecessary fields from the target object.
Your report exceeded the time limit for processing. The report in the Source Report field may contain too much data to process.
Reduce the amount of data the report processes when running by limiting the
report's date range and remove any unnecessary fields from the source report.
This Reporting Snapshot Unique Name already The new snapshot you are trying to create has the same unique name as that of
exists. Please choose a unique name. a existing snapshot.
A summary field did not return a valid number. A summary field in the results has not returned a valid number. For example, the
field may have attempted to divide by 0. Check your formulas and test for 0 and
“null” in calculations if they appear in your data.
There is a problem with this reporting snapshot. The The source report format was changed from tabular to summary, which made
source report format was changed from tabular to the field mappings in the reporting snapshot incorrect. To fix this error, either
summary. The field mappings in the reporting change the report format back to tabular or update the field mappings in the
snapshot are no longer correct. You can change the snapshot definition. This error only applies to reporting snapshots with summary
report format back to tabular or update the field reports.
mappings in the snapshot definition.
There is a problem with this reporting snapshot. The source report format must be either tabular or summary. Reports grouped
Source report must be tabular or summary. by rows and columns (matrix) can't be used with reporting snapshots.
The grouping level you specified in the reporting This error may result when the running user no longer has access to the field
snapshot is no longer valid. The running user may specified in the grouping level, or the grouping level was removed from the source
no longer have access to that field, the grouping report or was never set. This error only applies to reporting snapshots with
level may have been removed from the source summary reports. Make sure the running user has access to all necessary fields.
report, or the grouping level was never set.
A record cannot contain multiple fields with This error message is expected when records within the source report for a
different currency codes. Verify that all currency reporting snapshot contain multiple currencies. To prevent this snapshot failure,
fields in the source report rows have the same replace the Amount field with the Amount Converted field. To track a currency
currency code. field, always use the converted version of a field.
SEE ALSO:
133
Report Type Reference

The report type you choose determines which records and fields appear in your report. For example, the Opportunities report type gives
you access to Opportunity records and fields like Amount, Stage, and Opportunity Owner.
There are two kinds of report types: standard report types and custom report types.
Standard report types give you access to most Salesforce data. For example, the Opportunities report type gives you access to Opportunity
records and fields. If you’re going to report on Opportunity Amounts or Probability, then Opportunities is the report type for you.
Custom report types give you access to custom objects in Salesforce, or custom views of standard objects (like Opportunities), which your
administrator configures. For example, your administrator can create a custom report type that gives access to Opportunities, plus related
fields from Products. That way, you can report on Opportunities for a given product.

Salesforce provides a rich collection of standard report types that you can tailor to your unique requirements. You rarely need to
create a brand-new report.
Pre-Designed Custom Report Types
Some Salesforce features come with custom report types that are designed for you in advance, so you don't have to create a new
report.

Salesforce provides a rich collection of standard report types that you can tailor to your unique
EDITIONS
requirements. You rarely need to create a brand-new report.
Tip: You may not see some of these folders if your administrator has customized the visibility Available in: both Salesforce
of the Report tab folders. Classic and Lightning
Experience
If you can’t find a report to customize for your own needs, you can also create a custom report to
access exactly the right information. Available in: All Editions
except Database.com (The
edition determines which
1. Account and Contact Reports reports you see.)
Use account and contact reports to learn about active, neglected, or new accounts, as well as
accounts by account owner or partner. The two standard contact reports let you create a mailing
list of contacts or track opportunities by contact role. USER PERMISSIONS
2. Activity Reports To run reports:

Activity reports are useful for gathering information about open activities, completed activities, • Run Reports
multi-person events, or pending approval requests for which you're a delegated approver. To schedule reports:
3. Administrative Reports • Schedule Reports
Administrative reports help you analyze your Salesforce users, documents, and pending approval To create, edit, and delete
requests. You can report on the active Salesforce users and see who has been logging in. reports:
4. Campaign Reports Reports
Use campaign reports to analyze your marketing efforts. You can report on the ROI of your
AND
campaigns, track who you targeted with your campaigns and who has responded, or analyze
which opportunities resulted from your campaigns. Report Builder
5. File and Content Reports

Run File and Content reports to analyze how users are engaging with files and Salesforce CRM
Content.
134
6. Sales Engagement Reports

Sales Engagement reports give you information about your inside sales efforts. As your reps work through cadences, you can evaluate
how your prospects become qualified leads and which cadence step is most effective. You can also examine phone call statistics
for your reps, which reps are converting the most prospects, and more.
7. Lead Reports
Use lead reports to show information about the source and status of leads, how long it takes to respond to leads, neglected leads,
and the history of lead fields.
8. Opportunity Reports
Opportunity reports provide information about your opportunities, including owners, accounts, stages, amounts, and more. The
default settings show you the most commonly used information from each object, but you can customize a report to view other
information, such as primary campaign source, forecast category, and synced quote.
9. Product and Asset Reports
Use product and asset reports to view information about the products your users currently have installed. Find out what assets your
customers have, list the cases filed for a particular asset, or identify assets that aren’t associated with a product.
10. Self-Service Reports
Self-Service reports help you analyze the effectiveness of your Self-Service portal. Find out how many cases are being viewed, how
many customers are logging in, or what customers think of the solutions you’re offering.
11. Reporting on Support Activity
Use support reports to track the number of cases created, case comments, case emails, case owners, case contact roles, cases with
solutions, the length of time since the case last changed status or owner, and the history of cases.
SEE ALSO:
Search for Reports and Dashboards in Lightning Experience
Search for Reports and Dashboards from the Reports Tab in Salesforce Classic
Account and Contact Reports

Use account and contact reports to learn about active, neglected, or new accounts, as well as accounts by account owner or partner.
The two standard contact reports let you create a mailing list of contacts or track opportunities by contact role.
Standard Report: Field History
If your organization tracks field history on accounts or contacts, you can report on that information using the account history or
contact history report.
Standard Report: Person Accounts
If your organization uses person accounts, fields specific to person accounts are available and prefixed with Person Account:
in account reports. In addition, you can include the Is Person Account field in both account and contact reports. Your
administrator may have given a different label to Person Account.
Mass Mail Merge
You can also create a report of your contact information, export that data to Microsoft® Excel®, and then do a mass mail merge using
Microsoft® Word®.
View Filter for Account Reports
The standard View filter for account reports allows you to limit your account data according to the following options. These options
vary depending on your organization’s edition and setup.
• My accounts: Shows accounts that you own.
135
• My account team accounts: Shows accounts where you are on the account team.
• My account team and my accounts: Shows accounts you own and those where you are on the account team.
• My team’s accounts: Shows your accounts and accounts owned by all of your subordinates in the role hierarchy.
• My territories: For organizations that use territory management, this option shows accounts that belong to the territories to
which you are assigned.
• My territory team’s accounts: For organizations that use territory management, this option shows accounts that belong to your
territories and your territories’ descendants.
• My team’s account team and their own accounts: For users who report to you in the role hierarchy, shows accounts they own
or for which they are on the account team.
• All visible accounts: Shows all accounts that you can view, as determined by your sharing model.
• Customer Portal: If your organization uses a Salesforce Customer Portal, add the Customer Portal Account field to
your account reports to view which accounts have contacts enabled to use the portal.
SEE ALSO:
Activity Reports
Activity reports are useful for gathering information about open activities, completed activities, multi-person events, or pending approval
requests for which you're a delegated approver.
Standard activity reports allow you to select the date range and status of the activities you want included. The standard activity reports
list your tasks and appointments for a selected date range or events with all invitees.
You can also create custom reports for activities by clicking the Reports tab, New Report, and choosing Activities as the type of data
on which to report.
Note: Click Show Hierarchy to see your org’s role hierarchy above the report results. You can use the role hierarchy to share
report data with people at different levels in the hierarchy. For example, if you see CEO > VP of Global Sales > Sales Operations
Director, you’re viewing data for the Sales Operations Director role. Click any role name to see and share the data that’s visible to
people in that role.
Special Features of Activity Reports

Consider the following when running activity reports:
Standard Reports
• Choose the HTML Email Status report if you have HTML email tracking enabled. This report covers anything in the HTML Email
Status related list of the leads and contacts that you sent.
• Choose the Events with Invitees report to include only multi-person events in your report. The standard filters for events with
invitees are:
– Assigned to...—Shows only multi-person events that you own.
– Assigned to the team of...—Shows multi-person events that anyone in your team owns.
– Invitee is...—Shows only multi-person events that list you as an invitee.
– Invitee is in the team of...—Shows the multi-person events that show anyone on your team as an invitee.
• The My Delegated Approval Requests report lists all the approval requests for which you're the approval proxy.
Note: The All Pending Approval Requests report is listed in the Activity Reports folder.
136
• In Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer Edition organizations, to show the activities for users who
report to you, use the Hierarchy links in the Tasks and Appointments report.
Note: You can view only your own activities and activities owned by users below you in the role hierarchy.
• If your organization uses Shared Activities, reports (including custom report types and Tasks and Events reports) display different
results depending on your permissions. Say you’re reporting on events, and your report results include an event that is related
to two or more contacts and also has invitees. If you're an administrator, your report results show an event for the primary contact
plus a separate event for each invitee. If you're not an administrator, your report results show just one event, for the primary
contact.
A user can access an activity’s child event when one of the following guidelines is met:
– The user is the owner of the activity or higher up in the hierarchy than the owner.
– The user can access the who (parent record or contact) and the who count is one.
Report Types
• Using report builder, you can create activity reports that show activities related to another type of record. For example, a custom
Activity with Leads report shows activities associated with leads.
• Activities with Leads reports don't display data for the Address Line 1, Address Line 2, and Address Line
3 fields.
• When shared activities is enabled, custom reports created using Activities—such as Activities with Contact—don’t show child
event records because the report considers who relations only.
Reports such as Tasks and Events return both parent and child event records because the report considers all records, including
child events.
Tips for Activity Reports

• Set a search criteria of “Event Invitation equals 0” to filter out events that are meeting invites sent to users for a multi-person
event.
• Archived activities aren’t included in reports. Events and closed tasks older than a year are archived. However, open tasks aren’t
archived. You can still see archived activities for a record by selecting View All in the Activity History section of a
record’s detail page.
• Activities for private contacts are displayed only in reports for the contact owner.
• The standard filters for activity reports allow you to limit your report results using the following options. Some of these options
aren’t visible, depending on your edition.
– My Activities—Shows activities that you own.
– My Delegated Activities—Shows activities that you created but that someone else owns. That owner is in the same role as
you, or below, in the role hierarchy.
– My Team's Activities—Shows activities owned by users who report to you in the role hierarchy.
– All Activities—Shows all activities that you can view, as determined by your sharing model.
• If you receive an error message that your activity report has too many results, customize the report to include a filter on a picklist,
text, or date field. Alternatively, rerun the report using a different activity data type such as “Activities with Accounts” or “Activities
with Opportunities.”
137
• Activities that are captured using Einstein Activity Capture aren't included in the reports that you create on the Reports tab. To
view the activities that are captured with Einstein Activity Capture, open the Activities dashboard in CRM Analytics.
SEE ALSO:
Administrative Reports
Administrative reports help you analyze your Salesforce users, documents, and pending approval
EDITIONS
requests. You can report on the active Salesforce users and see who has been logging in.
Note: You can see the Administrative Reports folder on the Reports tab only if you have the Available in: Salesforce
“View Setup and Configuration” permission. You don't need this permission to view the Classic
Administrative Reports report type—all users can view it and manage any document reports Available in: Essentials,
associated with that type. To view other types of reports associated with that type, such as Group, Professional,
user and approval request reports, you must have the permission. Enterprise, Performance,
Editions
Special Features of Administrative Reports
Consider the following when running administrative reports:
Standard Reports
• The All Active Users report lists the active users in your organization and when they last logged in.
• The Users Logged in This Week report lists all of the users who have logged in to Salesforce in the past seven days. If Communities
is enabled, you can add a Community column so that you can see which communities users have logged in to as well.
• The Documents report lists the documents within each document folder.
• The All Pending Approval Requests report lists the approval requests awaiting approval for each approval process. The My
Delegated Approval Requests report is listed in the Activity Reports folder.
• If your organization uses territories, the User Territory Report in the Territory Reports folder summarizes the territories to which
users have been assigned.
Report Types
• Create a custom report that lists your organization’s reports and the last time each report was used. Choose Administrative
Reports and select Reports as the report type.
• If your organization uses Communities, you can report on login history for external members of your communities.
1. Create a custom report.
2. Choose Administrative Reports.
3. Select Users as the report type.
4. Add Community to your report columns.
5. Add a filter that includes profiles of community users.
• If your organization uses a Salesforce Customer Portal, you can report on Customer Portal users:
1. Create a custom report.
2. Choose Administrative Reports.
3. Select Users as the report type.
138
4. Add License Type, Profile, and Role to your report columns. You can’t report on roles for high-volume portal
users because they don’t have roles.
Note: Permission sets aren't supported.
You can also add the Customer Portal Account field to your account reports to view which accounts have contacts
enabled to use the portal.
• You can create custom report types from which users can report on your organization's reports and dashboards. When defining
a custom report type, select Reports or Dashboards from the Primary Object dropdown list on the New Custom Report Type
page.
Tips for Administrative Reports
• Users with the “Manage Internal Users” permission can create a custom user report that lists the details of users' login attempts.
The relevant fields—such as Login Date/Time, Source IP Address, and Login Status—are grouped in the
Login History section of the Select Columns step. The Client Type field shows whether the user logged in via a Web browser
or an alternate interface such as Connect for Lotus Notes or a partner portal. You can also see which users have never logged in
by setting report criteria: choose the Login Date/Time field and the “equals” operator and leave the third value blank.
SEE ALSO:
Campaign Reports
Use campaign reports to analyze your marketing efforts. You can report on the ROI of your campaigns, track who you targeted with your
campaigns and who has responded, or analyze which opportunities resulted from your campaigns.
Special Features of Campaign Reports

Consider the following when running Campaign Reports:
Standard Reports
• On the Campaign Detail custom report and the Campaign ROI Analysis report, you can include campaign-hierarchy statistics
that provide aggregate values for a parent campaign and all the campaigns below it in the campaign hierarchy. If your campaigns
include a custom picklist that indicates hierarchy level (for example, “tactic,” “program,” and “initiative”), you can run a report
that summarizes data at any hierarchy level across all campaigns.
• Use the Campaign Leads or Campaign Contacts reports to list the leads or contacts associated with your campaigns.
• Use the Campaign Member Report for a list of campaign members by campaign.
• Use the Campaign Member Analysis report to summarize information about who has responded to campaigns.
• Use the Campaign Revenue Report to analyze which opportunities have resulted from your campaigns. In Enterprise, Unlimited,
Performance, and Developer Editions, you can also analyze products, quantity schedules, and revenue schedules in this report.
• The Campaign ROI Analysis Report calculates the return on investment (ROI) and average costs for your campaigns. The ROI is
calculated as the net gain (Total Value Won Opps - Actual Cost) divided by the Actual Cost. The ROI result
is expressed as a percentage.
• Use the Campaigns with Influenced Opportunities report to view opportunities that have been influenced by multiple campaigns.
Note: The Campaigns with Influenced Opportunities report respects sharing rules on accounts, contacts, and campaigns.
Objects with sharing rules set to private will not display in the report.
139
Report Types
• Use the Campaigns with Campaign Members custom report type to create a report that contains information about the leads
and contacts on multiple campaigns. Use the Campaign Call Down report to see contacts and leads for a specific campaign.
These reports are only available to users that have the “Read” permission on both contacts and leads.
• Use the Campaigns with Leads and Converted Lead Information report to view lead lifetime information sorted by a campaign
or campaigns.
• Use the Campaigns with Influenced Opportunities report to view opportunities that have been influenced by multiple campaigns.
Tips for Campaign Reports
• Some reports allow you to limit the data to one campaign by using the lookup icon to select a campaign. If the user running a
report no longer has access to view the selected campaign, the report does not show any results. This report behavior is similar
to what happens when a campaign is deleted.
• Member Status is the status of a lead or contact in reference to the campaign. The campaign owner can create up to 50
member status values. Sample Member Status values include, “Planned,” “Sent,” or “Attended.” Additionally, you can now add
the Member First Associated, Responded, and Member First Responded fields to campaign reports.
These fields allow you to see the date the member was added to the campaign, whether the member responded to the campaign,
and the date the member initially responded to the campaign.
• The Last Activity of a campaign is the most recent due date of an activity on the record. The following past or future
activities set this date:
– Any event
– Closed tasks
SEE ALSO:
File and Content Reports

Run File and Content reports to analyze how users are engaging with files and Salesforce CRM Content.
Standard File and Content Reports

Run these prebuilt reports about files and content.
Content Authors
View how many files, content packs, Google Docs, and Web links each author has published in Salesforce CRM Content.
Content Publication Time Frame
Determine how many files, content packs, Google Docs, and Web links were published in a library during a given time frame.
File and Content Downloads
See which users downloaded what files, and when they downloaded the files.
File and Content Engagement
See the number of times a file has been downloaded, shared, liked, and commented on.
File and Content Links
See which files users are sharing using content deliveries or Share via link. See when each link was created, when it expires, when
it was last accessed, whether it’s password protected, and the total number of times the link has been accessed. Each of the links in
this report can be accessed by users outside of your organization.
140
Library Administrators
View the number of files, content packs, Google Docs, and Web links in each library as well as the total amount of file storage used
by each library.
Library Content
View the number of files, content packs, Google Docs, and Web links in each library as well as the total amount of file storage used
by each library.
Most Content Downloads
Determine which files and content packs are downloaded most frequently and which Web links and Google Docs are opened most
frequently.
Most Content Subscriptions
Determine which files, content packs, Google Docs, and Web links have the most subscribers.
Stale Content
Determine which files haven’t been downloaded or revised recently.
File and Content Report Types

Build standard reports about files and content.
Content Report
Generate a report about Salesforce CRM Content.
Field Description
Archived Flag that indicates whether a file has been archived. Archiving a file removes it from its library
but doesn’t permanently delete the file from Salesforce CRM Content. Archived files can be
restored as needed.
Content Created By Contributor who published the file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link.
Content ID Identifier that enables you to group by file rather than version. The Content Title isn’t
guaranteed to be unique because multiple versions of the same file can have different titles.
Content Published Date Date a file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link was first published.
Content Title Title of a file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link.
Record Type Title of the record type associated with the file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link.
Featured Content Flag that indicates whether a piece of content is featured.
Individual Content Size Size of an individual file, exclusive of other versions of the same file.
(MB)
Last Subscribed Date Date on which the content was subscribed to most recently.
Num Downloads Number of times a file has been downloaded or the total number of downloads in a library.
The number of times a Google Doc or Web link has been opened is also included in this
count.
Tip: To see which users have downloaded a certain file, go to the file’s content details
page and click the Downloads tab.
Num Negative Ratings Number of thumbs-down votes.
141
Field Description
Num Positive Ratings Number of thumbs-up votes.
Num Subscriptions Number of users who are subscribed to a file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link, or the
total number of subscriptions in a library.
Num Versions Number of times a new version of a file has been published.
Overall Rating The number of positive votes minus the number of negative votes. For example, if a file has
two positive votes and no negative votes, its Overall Rating is 2.
Tag Salesforce CRM Content tag assigned to a file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link.
Total Content Size (MB) Size of a file, inclusive of all the file's versions.
Version Revised Date Date and time a new version of the file was published.
Version Revised By Contributor who published the file version.
Library Name Name of the library.
Library Created Date Date and time the library was created.
Library and User Report

Generate a list of users who are assigned to libraries.
Field Description
Administrator Flag that indicates whether the user is a library administrator.
Group Flag that indicates whether the library member is a single user or a public group.
Library Created Date and time the library was created.
Library Name Name of the library.
Member Name First and last name of the library member.
File and Content Report

Generate a report about files uploaded to your organization.
Field Description
Archived Flag that indicates whether a file has been archived. Archiving a file removes it from its library
but doesn’t permanently delete the file from Salesforce CRM Content. Archived files can be
rested as needed.
Title Title of a file, content pack, Google doc, or Web link.
Created By User who uploaded the file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link.
Download Date Date of the first file download.
Downloaded By User who downloaded the file.
142
Field Description
Download User Type Profile type of the user who downloaded the file.
File Type MIME type of the uploaded file.
ID Identifier that enables you to group by file rather than version. The Title isn’t guaranteed
to be unique because multiple versions of the same file can have different titles.
Last Revised By Last user to edit or upload a new version of the file.
Last Revised Date Date of last file revision.
Likes Number of times file posts have been liked. This number doesn’t count likes applied to
comments on the file post.
Links Number of external file links that have been generated. External links are generated when a
user shares a file using Share via link or when a user shares content from a library using a
content delivery.
Post Comments Number of comments made on file posts in feeds.
Posts Number of times the file has been posted to a feed. This number doesn’t count the number
of times the file has been attached to comments on posts.
Published Date Date a file, content pack, Google Doc, or Web link was first published or uploaded.
Shares Number of times the file has been posted to a user’s feed, shared using Share with people,
and shared using Share with groups.
Size (MB) Size of the most recent file version in megabytes.
Total Downloads Number of times the file has been downloaded.
Total Size (MB) Combined Size of all uploaded file versions.
Versions Number of uploaded file versions.
Tips for Using File and Content Reports

• Salesforce CRM Content users who have the Manage Content option checked in their library permission can sort report data
by the library they have access to (“My Libraries”) or by all the libraries in an organization (“All Libraries”). Users without the Manage
Content option can only sort data by the libraries they have access to.
• Sort custom reports by Library Name to view data for individual files as well as library summaries, such as total storage used
and total number of downloads.
• Sort according to the Content ID to view data for a particular document.
• If you have Customer Portal or partner portal users with the “Create Libraries” user permission, run the Library Administrators report
to determine which new libraries have been created by portal users.
SEE ALSO:
143
Sales Engagement Reports

Sales Engagement reports give you information about your inside sales efforts. As your reps work
EDITIONS
through cadences, you can evaluate how your prospects become qualified leads and which cadence
step is most effective. You can also examine phone call statistics for your reps, which reps are Available in: Lightning
converting the most prospects, and more. Experience
Once sales reps take some prospects through a cadence, six included reports provide managers
Available with Sales
with insights into the performance of their cadences, how their team is doing, and where they can
Engagement, which is
improve. available for an extra cost
Cadence Completion Reason in: Enterprise, Performance,
For cadences that had contacts or leads added within the past 30 days, this report shows the and Unlimited Editions
percentage of cadence completions, by completion reason. The completion reason field is
empty until a cadence is completed.
Note: If you increase the report’s time span and your company contains many leads or contacts in each cadence, the report
may take longer to run. To improve the performance, use filtering to limit the result set returned by the report. For instance,
reduce the time span to cadences less than the default 30-day setting.
Cadence Engagement
Shows which cadence and which outreach step is the most effective for each type of prospect engagement, such as total calls or
email delivery rate.
Lead Conversion
Shows how many leads sales reps are converting, the dollar value of the related opportunities, and who the top sales performer is.
Call Activity
Shows which sales reps are making the most phone calls, and what the results are.
Call Script Engagement
Shows how prospects responded to calls based on your call scripts. See exactly how many calls were successful.
Email Template Engagement
Shows how prospects responded to emails based on your email templates. See exactly how many prospects replied to each email.
Lead Reports
Use lead reports to show information about the source and status of leads, how long it takes to respond to leads, neglected leads, and
the history of lead fields.
Special Features of Lead Reports

Consider the following when running lead reports:
Standard Reports
Choose the Lead History report type to track the history of standard and custom fields on leads where field histories are set to tracked.
Use this report to see tracked fields' old and new values.
Tip: If you have the “Create and Customize Reports” permission, you can use the View drop-down on a Lead History Report to
view lead history data by My Leads, My Team's Leads, User Owned Leads, Queue Owned Leads, and All Leads.
Tips for Lead Reports

• Limit your report view to “My team’s leads” to see leads owned by users who report to you in the role hierarchy.
144
• Lead reports can show all leads, both converted and unconverted. To limit your report to just unconverted leads, enter filter criteria
of “Converted equals 0.”
• The Last Activity of a lead is the most recent due date of an activity on the record. The following past or future activities set
this date:
– Any event
– Closed tasks
• You can create a report of your lead information, export that data to Excel, and then do a mass mail merge using Microsoft® Word.
Lead Report Limitations

• You can't use filter conditions to search the results of the Old Value and New Value fields.
• You can’t use filter logic if you are filtering by Field/Event.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunity reports provide information about your opportunities, including owners, accounts, stages, amounts, and more. The default
settings show you the most commonly used information from each object, but you can customize a report to view other information,
such as primary campaign source, forecast category, and synced quote.
1. Tips for Working with Opportunity Reports

Opportunity reports can include all opportunity fields plus some extra columns for more detail.
2. Standard Opportunity Reports
Standard opportunity reports help you report on your opportunity pipeline and history, opportunity sources, opportunity types, and
more.
3. Opportunity Report Types
Report types provide a report template that you can customize to capture the unique data you’re after without creating a report
from scratch. Many of the opportunities custom report types include information from associated objects, such as products, partners,
and quotes.
SEE ALSO:
Tips for Working with Opportunity Reports

Opportunity reports can include all opportunity fields plus some extra columns for more detail.
• You can use the following columns to provide more detail:
– Age—Age counts the number of days passed between opportunity open date and close date. On a given day, it's possible for
opportunity A to have been closed for 0:00 - 23:59 hours (which appears as 0) and opportunity B to have been closed for 24:00
hours or more (which appears as 1).
– Stage Duration—The number of days the opportunity was in the stage listed in the Stage column. You can run the Opportunity
Stage Duration report to see how much time an opportunity spent at different stages.
145
– Last Activity—The most recent due date of an activity on the opportunity record, including any opportunity event or closed
task.
• Not all Opportunity Product fields are available in report filters. For example, the Product Family field is not available in
Opportunity Product report filters because it is related to that object through the Pricebook Entry object. To make the Product
Family field available in Opportunity Product report filters—for cross-sell or upsell reporting—create a custom formula field to
store its contents and use that formula field in your filter. From the object management settings for opportunities, go to the fields
area, then create a custom field of type Formula, making sure to use Text for your formula return type and
TEXT(PricebookEntry.Product2.Family) for your formula.
• In Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, and Developer edition organizations, the Hierarchy links let you browse report
results based on the role or territory hierarchies.
• You can include the Primary Campaign Source field on all standard opportunity reports. This field is controlled by field-level
security.
• Use the View filter to limit your opportunity report results. View options vary depending on your organization's Edition and setup.
– My opportunities—Shows only your opportunities.
– My team-selling opportunities—Shows opportunities for which you are on the opportunity team.
– My team-selling and my opportunities—Shows your opportunities and opportunities for which you are on the opportunity
team.
– My team’s opportunities—Shows your opportunities and opportunities owned by all of your subordinates in the role hierarchy.
– My team’s team-selling and their opportunities—For users who report to you in the role hierarchy, this shows opportunities
that they own or for which they are on the opportunity team.
– My territories—For organizations that use Enterprise Territory Management, this option shows opportunities that belong to the
territories to which you are assigned.
– My territories’ opportunities—For organizations that use Enterprise Territory Management, this option shows opportunities that
belong to the territories to which you are assigned.
– My territory team’s opportunities—For organizations that use Enterprise Territory Management, this option shows opportunities
that belong to the territories to which you are assigned and their child territories.
– All opportunities—Shows all opportunities that you can view.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunity Report Types
Standard Opportunity Reports
Standard Opportunity Reports

Standard opportunity reports help you report on your opportunity pipeline and history, opportunity sources, opportunity types, and
more.
1. In the Folders pane on the Reports tab, select Opportunity Reports.
2. Click the report you want.
Report Name Description

Closed Opportunities Won opportunities
Opportunities by Type Types of available opportunities.
146

Opportunity Field History Field history on opportunities. Available only if your organization
tracks this information.
Opportunities with Opportunity and Product Splits Opportunities with opportunity split rollups and product split
details for opportunity team members.
Custom fields are included for Opportunity Line Item Split records,
but not for Opportunity Split records. The Split Owner Team Role
field is available only for Opportunity Split records.
Opportunity History Status changes on opportunities. Available only if your

organization tracks this information.
Opportunity Pipeline Trend A historical snapshot of your opportunities; opportunity amounts

are grouped by historical stage for specified months. This report
is available in Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance,
and Developer Edition organizations only.
Opportunity Pipeline Opportunities by stage.
Opportunity Pipeline with Splits Opportunities summarized by split information such as assigned
user and percentage.
Opportunity Product Opportunities by month and product.
Opportunity Product Report with Splits Split assignments and percentages for each product. You can
also summarize information by these fields:
• Split Total Price–Split percentage multiplied by
Total Price.
• Split Expected Product Amount–Split Total
Price multiplied by Probability.
Opportunity Product Schedules with Opportunity and Product Opportunity splits by month, including opportunity rollup split
Splits percentages and product split percentages for opportunity team
members. To access this report, product schedules must be
enabled for your organization.
Custom fields are included for Opportunity Line Item Split records,
but not for Opportunity Split records. The Split Owner Team Role
field is available only for Opportunity Split records.
Opportunity Schedule Report with Splits Opportunities by month, including split percentages for the
opportunity team. To access this report, product scheduling must
be enabled for your organization.
You can also summarize information by these fields:
• Split Total Price–Split percentage multiplied by
Total Price.
• Split Schedule Amount–Split percentage multiplied
by Schedule Amount.
147

• Split Expected Product Amount–Split Total
Price multiplied by Probability.
• Split Expected Schedule Amount–Split
Schedule Amount multiplied by Probability.
Opportunity Sources Sources of your opportunities.
Opportunity Stage Duration Duration of an opportunity at each stage.
Opportunity Teams Information about opportunities and opportunity teams to which

you belong.
Partner Opportunities All partners associated with an opportunity or the primary

partners only. To limit your results to primary partners, customize
the report and enter Primary equals True on the criteria
page of the report wizard.
Stuck Opportunities Open opportunities grouped by stage and then sorted by age.
3. Run the report.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports

Report types provide a report template that you can customize to capture the unique data you’re after without creating a report from
scratch. Many of the opportunities custom report types include information from associated objects, such as products, partners, and
quotes.
Opportunities Reports
View standard information about your opportunities, including owners, accounts, stages, amounts, and more. The default settings
show you the most commonly used information from each object, but you can customize the report to view other information, such
as primary campaign source, forecast category, and synced quote.
Opportunities with Contact Roles Report
View information about the contacts associated with your opportunities, including name, title, and role.
Opportunities with Contact Roles and Products Report
View information about the contacts and opportunities associated with a selected product. You must select a product to filter results
by when you run the report. This report isn’t supported in Lightning Experience. In Lightning Experience, select a different report
type.
Opportunities with Competitors Report
View information about your company's competitors for opportunities, including their strengths and weaknesses.
148

The Opportunities with Historical Trending report is a custom report type designed to help you analyze historical trends in your sales
pipeline.
Opportunity Field History Report
View information about the change history of key opportunity fields, including old and new values and the dates edits were made.
Opportunity History Report
View information about the history of your opportunities, including stages and close date.
Opportunities with Opportunity Teams Report
View information about the members of your opportunity teams and their roles, organized by opportunity.
Opportunities with Opportunity Teams and Products Report
View information about your opportunity team members and their products, organized by opportunity. You must specify either a
product or an opportunity team member to filter results by when you run the report.
Opportunities with Partners Report
View information about the partners you team with on your opportunities, including opportunity name, amount, and partner role.
Opportunities with Products Report
View information about the products associated with your opportunities, including product name and opportunity stage.
Opportunity Trends Report
View information about trends shared by the opportunities in your pipeline.
Opportunities with Quotes and Quote PDFs Report
View details about the quote PDFs created for each quote associated to an opportunity. The default settings show you the most
commonly used information from each object, but you can customize the report to view other information, such as who created or
last modified each listed quote PDF.
Opportunities with Quotes and Quote Line Items Report
View details about the quotes associated with opportunities, and the line items for each quote. The default settings provide the
most commonly used information from each object, but you can customize the report to see any opportunity, quote, or quote line
item field.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities Reports
View standard information about your opportunities, including owners, accounts, stages, amounts, and more. The default settings show
you the most commonly used information from each object, but you can customize the report to view other information, such as primary
campaign source, forecast category, and synced quote.
Note: Click Show Hierarchy to see your org’s role hierarchy above the report results. You can use the role hierarchy to share
report data with people at different levels in the hierarchy. For example, if you see CEO > VP of Global Sales > Sales Operations
Director, you’re viewing data for the Sales Operations Director role. Click any role name to see and share the data that’s visible to
people in that role.
The default settings for this report are:
Format
Tabular
149
Selected Columns
Object Information Type Columns

Opportunity Information • Opportunity Name
• Amount
• Close Date
• Stage
• Age
• Type
• Probability (%)
• Lead Source
• Fiscal Period
• Next Step
• Created Date
Opportunity Owner Information • Opportunity Owner

• Owner Role
Account Information • Account Name
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Contact Roles Report
View information about the contacts associated with your opportunities, including name, title, and role.
Format
Tabular
Selected Columns

Account: General Information • Account Name
Contact Role: General Information • Title

• First Name
150

• Last Name
Contact Role: Phone/Fax/Email • Phone

• Email
Contact Role: Address • Mailing Street

• Mailing City
• Mailing State/Province
• Mailing ZIP/Postal Code
• Mailing Country
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Contact Roles and Products Report
View information about the contacts and opportunities associated with a selected product. You must select a product to filter results
by when you run the report. This report isn’t supported in Lightning Experience. In Lightning Experience, select a different report type.
The default settings for this report are as follows.
Format
Tabular
Selected Columns

Opportunity: Information • Opportunity Name
Product Information • Product Name
Contact Role: General • Title

• First Name
• Last Name
Contact Role: Phone/Fax/Email • Phone

• Email
Contact Role: Address • Mailing Street
151

• Mailing City
• Mailing State/Province
• Mailing ZIP/Postal Code
• Mailing Country
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Competitors Report
View information about your company's competitors for opportunities, including their strengths and weaknesses.
Format
Summary
Selected Columns

• Close Date
• Amount
Competitor Information • Competitor Name

• Strengths
• Weaknesses
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
The Opportunities with Historical Trending report is a custom report type designed to help you analyze historical trends in your sales
pipeline.
We've selected some of the most useful Opportunity fields for you in the default report:
Amount
Estimated total sale amount. For organizations using multiple currencies, the amount is shown in your personal currency by default.
Change the Opportunity Currency picklist to track the amount in another currency.
152
Close Date
Date when you plan to close the opportunity. You can enter a date, or choose a date from the calendar that displays when you put
your cursor in the field.
Stage
Current stage of opportunity based on selections you make from a predefined list, for example, Prospect or Proposal.
Probability
Percentage of estimated confidence in closing the opportunity.
Forecast Category
Forecast category name that is displayed in reports, opportunity detail and edit pages, opportunity searches, and opportunity list
views. The setting for an opportunity is tied to its Stage.
Note: If you edit this report type, it is no longer automatically updated. If you remove this report type, it will not be regenerated.
Opportunity Field History Report

View information about the change history of key opportunity fields, including old and new values and the dates edits were made.
Note: You must enable and set up field history tracking and select fields in order to use the Field History Tracking report.

Format
Tabular
Selected Columns

History Data • Edit Date
• New Value
• Edited By
• Field/Event
• Old Value
Opportunity Fields • Opportunity Name
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunity History Report
View information about the history of your opportunities, including stages and close date.
Format
Summary
153
Selected Columns

Opportunity Owner Information • Owner
Opportunity History Information • From Stage

• Amount
• Last Modified
• To Stage
• Probability (%)
• Last Modified By
• Close Date
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Opportunity Teams Report
View information about the members of your opportunity teams and their roles, organized by opportunity.
To be able to use this report, enable team selling.
Format
Tabular
Selected Columns

Opportunity information • Opportunity Name
Team member information • Team Member Name

• Team Role
If your admin has created custom opportunity team fields, you can include them in this report.
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Opportunity Teams and Products Report
154
View information about your opportunity team members and their products, organized by opportunity. You must specify either a product
or an opportunity team member to filter results by when you run the report.
Format
Tabular
Selected Columns

Team Member Information • Team Member Name

• Team Role
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Partners Report
View information about the partners you team with on your opportunities, including opportunity name, amount, and partner role.
Format
Summary
Selected Columns

• Close Date
• Amount
Partner Information • Partner Owner

• Partner Role
• Partner
Account Information • Account Owner
155

• Account Name
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Products Report
View information about the products associated with your opportunities, including product name and opportunity stage.
Format
Matrix
Summary Fields
Total Price (sum)
Selected Columns

• Amount
• Close Date
• Stage
• Age
• Type
• Probability
• Created Date

• Product Code
• Quantity
• Active Product
• Sales Price
• Product Date
• Product Description
• Total Price
• Product: Month
• List Price

• Owner Role
156

SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunity Trends Report
View information about trends shared by the opportunities in your pipeline.
Format
Matrix
Groupings
The default report shows rows grouped by Historical Stage and columns grouped by As of Date.
Note: The As of Date on an Opportunity Trends report is a snapshot of Opportunity data taken at 0:00 GMT on the last
day of every month for the following month. This functionality cannot be adjusted. To view specific snapshot dates, consider
setting up historical trending Set Up Historical Trend Reporting as an alternative to the Opportunity Trends Report.
Summary Fields
Historical Amount (sum)
Selected Columns

Opportunity Trend Information • Historical Amount

• As of Date
• Historical Stage
Opportunity Owner Information • Opportunity Owner Alias
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Quotes and Quote PDFs Report
View details about the quote PDFs created for each quote associated to an opportunity. The default settings show you the most commonly
used information from each object, but you can customize the report to view other information, such as who created or last modified
each listed quote PDF.
Format
Summary
157
Grouping
The default report shows quotes and quote PDFs grouped by Opportunity Name.
Selected Columns

Quote Information • Quote Name

• Syncing
Quote PDF Information • Quote PDF: Created Date

• Quote PDF: Name
• Quote PDF: Discount
• Quote PDF: Grand Total
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Opportunities with Quotes and Quote Line Items Report
View details about the quotes associated with opportunities, and the line items for each quote. The default settings provide the most
commonly used information from each object, but you can customize the report to see any opportunity, quote, or quote line item field.
If your organization uses multicurrency or advanced currency management, you have additional options for customizing this report.
When you select report columns, you can select the “converted” version of an amount or total column to show its value converted to a
different currency. Select the currency you want to convert to under Advanced Settings when you select your report criteria.
Format
Summary
Summary Fields
Amount (sum)
Quote Discount (sum)
Groupings
The default report shows you results grouped first by Opportunity Name and then by Quote Name. Each quote line item
is listed beneath its associated quote.
Selected Columns

• Amount
Quote Information • Quote Name
158

• Discount
• Syncing
• Status
Quote Line Item Information • Quote Line Item: Discount

• Product: Product Name
• Line Item Number
• Sales Price
• List Price
• Quote Line Item: Subtotal
• Quote Line Item: Total Price
SEE ALSO:
Opportunity Reports
Product and Asset Reports

Use product and asset reports to view information about the products your users currently have installed. Find out what assets your
customers have, list the cases filed for a particular asset, or identify assets that aren’t associated with a product.
Special Features of Product and Asset Reports

Consider the following when running product and asset reports:
Standard Reports
Use the Assets without Products report, available from the “Products and Asset Reports” folder to list the assets that are not associated
with a product. Depending on how you use assets, these assets can represent your competitor’s products.
Report Types
• To create a custom report showing what assets your customers have, click New Report from the Reports tab and choose the
Accounts with Assets or Contacts with Assets report type from the Accounts & Contacts report type category.
• To view a list of the cases filed for a particular asset, click New Report from the Reports tab and choose the Assets with Cases
report type from the Price Books, Products and Assets option.
SEE ALSO:
159
Self-Service Reports
Self-Service reports help you analyze the effectiveness of your Self-Service portal. Find out how
EDITIONS
many cases are being viewed, how many customers are logging in, or what customers think of the
solutions you’re offering. Available in: Salesforce
Note: Starting with Spring ’12, the Self-Service portal isn’t available for new Salesforce orgs. Classic
Existing orgs continue to have access to the Self-Service portal. Available in: Professional,
Standard Reports Enterprise, Performance,
• The Self-Service Usage Report gives you information on how many cases are viewed and Editions
logged, the number of comments that have been added, and the number of searches
Self-Service users have performed.
• The Self-Service User Report provides information about the customers who are logging into your Self-Service portal, including
the associated account and last login date. You can also include Self-Service fields in any custom contact report.
• The Helpful Solutions report displays statistics from Self-Service portals that display solutions. On each Self-Service solution page,
customers can indicate whether the solution is helpful. You can use the results of this survey when choosing the top five solutions
for your Self-Service Home page and to verify that customers are able to find the solutions they need.
SEE ALSO:
Reporting on Support Activity

Use support reports to track the number of cases created, case comments, case emails, case owners, case contact roles, cases with
solutions, the length of time since the case last changed status or owner, and the history of cases.
You can also report on the solutions for your organization, including solution history, the languages in which solutions have been written,
and whether translated solutions are out of date. If you have enabled the Self-Service portal, you can run reports to track usage of your
Self-Service portal.
1. Fields Available for Case Reports

You can report on a number of key case fields in addition to the ones that are included in the standard and custom report types.
2. Fields Available for Solution Reports
You can report on a number of key solution fields in addition to the standard and custom fields.
SEE ALSO:
Fields Available for Case Reports

You can report on a number of key case fields in addition to the ones that are included in the standard and custom report types.
Cases
Field Description
Last Activity This field for the Cases report type is populated from the Last Activity field in
the Contacts object. The Cases report type doesn't include a Last Activity field
from the Cases object.
160
Cases
Field Description
# Cases Submitted The number of cases submitted by Self-Service users via the Self-Service portal.
(Self-Service Usage Report)
# Cases Viewed The number of cases viewed by Self-Service users via the Self-Service portal.
# Comments Added The number of comments added to all cases by Self-Service users via the Self-Service
portal.
Entitlement Process Start The time the case entered an entitlement process.
Time This field displays if an entitlement process applies to the case.
Entitlement Process End Time The time the case exited an entitlement process.
This field displays if an entitlement process applies to the case.
Super User A contact enabled to view case information, add comments, and upload attachments
for all cases anyone in the company submitted via the Self-Service portal.
(Self-Service User Report)
Self-Service Commented A checkbox showing a comment was added to a case via the Self-Service portal.
New Self-Service Comment A checkbox showing someone added a comment to a case via the Self-Service that the
case owner didn’t review yet.
Is Incoming A checkbox showing a case was received by email via the Email-to-Case or On-Demand
Email-to-Case feature.
(Cases with Emails Report)
Age The age of an open case is the elapsed time from creation to the present. The age of a
closed case is the elapsed time from creation to the closing time of the case. Age can
be expressed in days, hours, or minutes. Note that the age of a case does not take into
account any holidays that are associated with the case's business hours. Holidays
suspend business hours during specified dates and times.
Closed A checkbox showing a case has a closed status.
Escalated A checkbox showing a case was escalated by an escalation rule.
Public Case Commented A checkbox showing a case has comments that may be displayed via the Self-Service
portal.
Has Attachment A checkbox showing a case with emails has attachments.

(Cases with Emails Report)
161
Cases
Field Description
Old Value The value in a tracked case or solution field before it was changed.
(Case History Report and Solution History Report)
New Value The value in a tracked case or solution field after it was changed.
Business Hours The number of business hours that have elapsed since a case was last updated. Note
that holidays are not taken into account for this field. Holidays suspend business hours
during specified dates and times.
(Case History Report)
Business Hours Since Similar The number of hours that elapsed since the same field on a case was last updated. Note
Change that holidays are not taken into account for this field. Holidays suspend business hours
during specified dates and times.
(Case History Report)
History ID The unique identifier for each change tracked on a specified case or solution field.
Account Name The account associated with the contact on the case.
Parent Case ID The ID of a parent case, which can be used to access a parent case via the API.
Fields Available for Solution Reports

You can report on a number of key solution fields in addition to the standard and custom fields.
Field Description
# Solution Searches The number of solution searches performed by Self-Service users via the Self-Service
portal.
Self-Service Access Count The number of times a solution was viewed in the Self-Service portal.
Self-Service Answer Count The number of times the survey question “Does this Solution help you answer your
question?” is answered, either positively or negatively, on a solution in the Self-Service
portal.
Self-Service Positive Count The number of times the survey question “Does this Solution help you answer your
question?” is answered positively on a solution in the Self-Service portal.
Author The name of the user who originally created the solution.
Num Related Cases The number of cases associated with the solution.
Reviewed Checkbox that indicates whether the solution has a reviewed status.
162
Field Description
Old Value The value in a tracked case or solution field before it was changed.
New Value The value in a tracked case or solution field after it was changed.
History ID The unique identifier for each change tracked on a specified case or solution field.
Language The language in which the master solution is written.
Translation Language The language in which the translated solution is written.

(Translated Solutions report)
Solution ID The unique identifier for each solution.

Out of Date Checkbox that indicates that the translated solution may need translating to match its
master solution.
Master Solution Title The title of the master solution. Displays up to 250 characters.
Translated Solution Title The title of the translated solution. Displays up to 250 characters.
Master Solution Details The solution details of the master solution. Displays up to 1000 characters.
Translated Solution Details The solution details of the translated solution. Displays up to 1000 characters.
163
Pre-Designed Custom Report Types

Some Salesforce features come with custom report types that are designed for you in advance, so
EDITIONS
you don't have to create a new report.
Note: Pre-designed custom report types are not the same as standard report types. Available in: both Salesforce
Experience
1. Salesforce CRM Call Center Reports
Call Center reports help you analyze the Salesforce CRM Call Center phone calls that were Group (View Only),
handled by you and your team. Professional, Enterprise,
2. Create a Custom Report Type for Approval History Performance, Unlimited,
Before you can run reports on executed and in-progress approval processes and their steps, and Developer Editions
you must create a custom report type for approval process instances. Available in: Enhanced
3. Create a Custom Report Type in Collaborative Forecasts Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
To make a forecasting report available to users, administrators must create a custom report
type. A report type defines the set of records and fields available to a report based on the
relationships between a primary object and its related objects. Reports display only records USER PERMISSIONS
that meet the criteria defined in the report type.
4. Preparing Sales Leaders to Report on Forecasts reports:
Unlock details about forecasts with and without adjustments, overall planned revenue, and • Legacy Folder Sharing
quota attainment when you create custom report types for Collaborative Forecasts. When you
Create and
create a custom report type, choose the primary and related objects carefully, because they Customize Reports
determine the forecast types you can report on.
AND
5. Idea Reports
Report Builder
Create custom report types so users can create reports about ideas, idea comments, and votes.
Enhanced Folder
6. Report on Salesforce Knowledge Articles Sharing
Use Salesforce Knowledge custom reports to track how articles are created, maintained, and Create and
delivered. Customize Reports
AND
7. Chat Session Reports
Use Chat Session reports to consolidate data about agents’ activities while they chat with Report Builder
customers–for example, how long agents are online or how many chat requests are assigned to run reports:
to them. • Legacy Folder Sharing
8. Report on Partners Run Reports
Some opportunities involve partner relationships. Use this report to identify and analyze those Enhanced Folder
relationships. Sharing
9. Enable the Account Owner Report Run Reports
The Account Owner report lists all accounts and who owns them.
10. Report on File Search Activity
Use a report to determine the top 300 search term queries for file searches and to identify which content is missing or needs to be
renamed based on users’ search terms and the click-rank.
11. Report on Chatter Top 100 Feed Item Views with Interaction Count Report
Get a report on the top 100 feed item views in your organization or community with the primary object Interaction Count Report.
Knowing the posts that people are looking at most is a great way to get insight into current Chatter trends. Actions counted as views
include liking, commenting, and viewing a feed item detail. View counts aren’t unique. For example, a user can add three comments
to a post, and that is counted as three views. After you set up the report, it’s run weekly.
164
12. Related Articles and Questions Reports

Create custom report types so users can report on click-through rates on related articles and questions. Salesforce Einstein suggests
related articles and questions in communities. Use the click-through rates reports to create content around the most accessed articles
and questions, empowering your customers to find the information they need.
13. Community Case Deflection from Discussions and Articles
Get insight into how well the Contact Support Form and Case Deflection components actually deflect cases from being created.
Using the Case Deflection Dashboard, get real-time metrics on potential and confirmed case deflections, the most helpful articles
and discussions, and the least helpful articles and discussions.
14. Report on External Documents Attached to Cases
Create a report to see how many and which specific external documents are being attached to cases. Use this information to see
which external sources have the most impact on closing cases. This report is helpful when you have set up Salesforce Federated
Search, which gives users access to external search results when using the Knowledge One Widget. Users can attach external
documents to cases only if Chatter is enabled.
Salesforce CRM Call Center Reports

Call Center reports help you analyze the Salesforce CRM Call Center phone calls that were handled
EDITIONS
by you and your team.
Special Features of Call Center Reports Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Consider the following when running call center reports: Experience
Standard Reports
• The My Team's Calls This Week gives you information about the calls that were handled by Professional, Enterprise,
the call center users on your team during the past week, including associated records and Performance, Unlimited,
the result of each call. and Developer Editions
• The My Calls Today report gives you information about the calls that you initiated or received
during the past day, including associated records and the result of each call. USER PERMISSIONS
• The My Calls This Week report gives you information about the calls that you initiated or
received during the past week, including associated records and the result of each call. To run reports:
• Run Reports
AND
Read on the records
included in report
165
Create a Custom Report Type for Approval History

Before you can run reports on executed and in-progress approval processes and their steps, you
EDITIONS
must create a custom report type for approval process instances.
1. From Setup, enter Report Types in the Quick Find box, then select Report Types. Available in: both Salesforce
2. Click New Custom Report Type.
orgs) and Lightning
3. Fill out the fields. Experience

For this field... Do this action...
Primary Object Select Process Instance. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
A process instance represents one instance of
an approval process. A new process instance
is created each time a record is submitted for USER PERMISSIONS
approval.
To create, update, and
Report Type Label Enter a label. Users see this label when they delete custom report types:
create reports. • Manage Custom Report
Types
Example: Approval Process
Instances
Report Type Name Enter a unique name for the report type.
Description Enter a description. Users see this label when

they create reports.
Store in Category Select Administrative Reports.

If you like, you can select a different category.
Selecting a category determines in which
folder your users find the custom report type
when they create approval history reports.
Deployment Status When you're ready to let all users access the
report type, select Deployed.
4. Click Next.
5. Click the box under the primary object.
6. Select Process Instance Node.
A process instance node represents an instance of an approval step. A new process instance node is created each time a record
enters a step in an approval process. No process instance node is created when the record doesn’t meet the step criteria or if the
approval process instance is otherwise completed without entering the step.
7. For the A to B relationship, select one of these options.
166
Option Description
Each "A" record must have at least one related The report includes only process instances that enter at least one approval step
"B" record. to create a process instance node.
The report excludes process instances for records that were submitted for
approval but that didn't meet any step criteria.
"A" records don't always have related "B" records. The report includes all process instances.
8. Click Save.
After the report type is deployed, notify the relevant users with the names of the category folder and the custom report type, so that
they can start creating and running approval history reports.
SEE ALSO:
Approval History Reports
Create a Custom Report Type
Create a Custom Report Type in Collaborative Forecasts

To make a forecasting report available to users, administrators must create a custom report type.
EDITIONS
A report type defines the set of records and fields available to a report based on the relationships
between a primary object and its related objects. Reports display only records that meet the criteria Available in: both Salesforce
defined in the report type. Classic (not available in all
1. Start creating a custom report type from Setup by entering Report Types in the Quick orgs) and Lightning
Find box, then selecting Report Types and New Custom Report Type. Experience
2. For Primary Object, select Forecasting Items or Forecasting Quotas. Available in: Professional,
Performance, and
3. For Store in Category, select Forecasts.
Developer Editions and in
4. Let your reps know the locations and names of the report types. Enterprise and Unlimited
Editions with the Sales Cloud
USER PERMISSIONS

delete custom report types:
• Manage Custom Report
Types
167
Preparing Sales Leaders to Report on Forecasts

Unlock details about forecasts with and without adjustments, overall planned revenue, and quota
EDITIONS
attainment when you create custom report types for Collaborative Forecasts. When you create a
custom report type, choose the primary and related objects carefully, because they determine the Available in: both Salesforce
forecast types you can report on. Classic (not available in all
This table lists the forecasting custom report types that you can create. When you create a custom orgs) and Lightning
report type, choose the primary and related objects carefully, because they determine the forecast Experience
types you can report on. Available in: Professional,
Performance, and
Primary Object Use to Create a Report for... Developer Editions and in
Forecasting Custom Viewing external data that’s added to a custom column. We recommend Enterprise and Unlimited
Editions with the Sales Cloud
Data including all the default fields in the report type.
Forecasting Custom Viewing the forecast compared to external data that’s available in a custom
Data with Forecasting forecast column. For example, create a report that shows how your sales
Items as a related team is performing versus last year’s performance. Create a custom field
object that contains data about last year’s total revenue, and select that field in
a custom column for your active forecast type. Create the custom report
type that uses Forecasting Custom Data as the primary object and uses
Forecasting Items as a related object. When you create the report, include
the forecast owner, the team’s commit value, closed value, and the custom
column.
Forecasting Items Viewing information about forecasts, including adjustment information.

If you use a forecast type based on revenue, we recommend using these
default fields in the report type.
• Owner Only Amount—The sum of a person’s revenue opportunities,
without adjustments. For example, if you own two opportunities, each
worth $10,000, the Owner Only Amount is $20,000.
• Amount Without Adjustments—The sum of a person’s owned revenue
opportunities and the person's subordinates’ opportunities, without
adjustments. Subordinates include everyone reporting up to a person
in the forecast hierarchy. This amount is visible only on reports. For
example, if the sum of the amount of all opportunities that you own
is $20,000, and the sum of the amount of your subordinates’
opportunities is $55,000, the Amount Without Adjustments is $75,000.
• Amount Without Manager Adjustments—The forecast number as
seen by the forecast owner. This amount is the sum of the owner’s
revenue opportunities and the owner’s subordinates’ opportunities,
including adjustments made by the forecast owner on the owner’s or
subordinates’ forecasts. It doesn’t include adjustments made by
forecast managers above the owner in the forecast hierarchy. For
example, Anne has an Amount Without Adjustments of $75,000, made
up of $20,000 of her own opportunities and $55,000 of opportunities
owned by Ben, her subordinate. She adjusts Ben’s amount to $65,000
for a total of $85,000. If you adjust Anne’s number from $85,000 to
$100,000, you see $85,000 in Amount Without Manager Adjustments
because that’s the amount Anne sees. Anne can’t see your adjustments
168
Primary Object Use to Create a Report for...

because you’re her manager. To see the amount that includes your adjustment to $100,000, look
at Forecast Amount.
• Forecast Amount—The revenue forecast from the forecast manager’s perspective and the sum of
the owner’s and subordinates’ opportunities, including all forecast adjustments. For example,
you’re a forecast manager and have another forecast manager reporting to you who has an Amount
Without Manager Adjustment totaling $85,000. If you adjust the forecast to $100,000, the Forecast
Amount is $100,000.
If you use a forecast type based on quantity, use these default fields in the report type.
• Owner Only Quantity, Quantity Without Adjustments, Quantity Without Manager Adjustments,
and Forecast Quantity
Regardless of whether you forecast based on revenue or quantity, add these fields.
• Has Adjustment—A checkbox that indicates whether a manager adjustment was made on an
owner’s forecast.
• Has Owner Adjustment—A checkbox that indicates whether a forecast user has adjusted the user’s
own forecast.
If you use cumulative forecast rollups, add this field to your report.
• ForecastingItemCategory—This field indicates which rollup each forecast is for: Open Pipeline,
Best Case Forecast, Most Likely Forecast, Commit Forecast, Closed Only, Pipeline, Best Case, Most
Likely, Commit, or Closed. If you changed the forecast category cumulative rollup names, those
changes appear in the ForecastingItemCategory values.
If you group your forecasts using custom picklists, add these fields in the report type.
• Group Value: API Name—The developer name of the custom picklist value that’s selected in the
forecast type.
• Group Value: Translated Name—The translated value of the custom picklist value selected in the
forecast type.
Forecasting Items with Viewing opportunity revenue or quantity forecasts. View opportunity information for specific forecasting
Opportunities as a related line items. For example, you can create a summary report for each of your subordinates that includes
object the opportunity names and last activity dates for their forecasting items and final forecasts. To include
forecast adjustments, either use the Forecasting Items report type, or use the Forecasting Item with
or without opportunities option.
For opportunities with no opportunity products specified, this report type includes two forecasting
items: one for the opportunity revenue forecast type and one with product family grouping. These
product family forecasting items roll up into the Products Not Specified row of the product family
forecast.
Forecasting Items with Viewing opportunity splits or custom split field forecasts. View opportunity split or custom split field
Opportunity Splits as a related information for specific forecasting line items. For example, you can create a summary report for each
object of your subordinates that includes the opportunity split amounts and percentages for their forecasting
items, with adjustment information and final forecast amounts.
Forecasting Items with Viewing product family forecasts. View product family information for specific forecasting line items.
Opportunity Product as a For example, you can create a summary report for each of your subordinates that includes the product
related object
169
Primary Object Use to Create a Report for...

families and total price for their forecasting items, with adjustment information and final forecast
amounts.
This report type shows forecasting items for product family revenue, product family revenue by territory,
and product family quantity forecast types. It includes opportunities with and without opportunity
products specified.
Forecasting Items with Viewing opportunity product split forecasts that contain items that aren’t split. For example, create a
Product Splits: Items with summary report for each of your subordinates that shows the opportunities included in a forecast that
Products No Split and don’t include split amounts or percentages.
Opportunity Product Splits as To see the entire product splits forecasts, create a joined report that includes this report type and these
related objects report types.
• Forecasting Items as the primary object with Product Splits: Items without Products as a related
object
• Forecasting Items as the primary object with Product Splits: Items with Product Splits and
Opportunity Product Splits as related objects
Forecasting Items with Viewing opportunity product splits forecasts that contain items that are split. For example, create a
Product Splits: Items with summary report for each of your subordinates that includes the opportunity product split amounts
Product Splits and and percentages for their forecasting items, with adjustment information and final forecast amounts.
Opportunity Product Splits as To see the entire opportunity product splits forecasts, we recommend creating a joined report that
related objects includes this report type and these report types.
• Forecasting Items as the primary object with Product Splits: Items with Products No Splits and
Opportunity Product Splits as a related object
• Forecasting Items as the primary object with Product Splits: Items without Products as a related
object
Forecasting Items with Viewing opportunity product split forecasts that contain items that don’t include a product designation.
Product Splits: Items without For example, create a summary report for each of your subordinates that shows the opportunities
Products as a related object included in a forecast that aren’t grouped with a product.
To see the entire product splits forecasts, create a joined report that includes this report type and these
report types.
• Forecasting Items as the primary object with Product Splits: Items with Products No Splits and
Opportunity Product Splits as related objects
• Forecasting Items as the primary objects with Product Splits: Items with Product Splits and
Opportunity Product Splits as a related object
Forecasting Quotas Viewing data about individual or team quotas. We recommend including all the default fields in the
report type. For example, you can include lookup fields, such as the full name of the owner. When
running the report, you can filter by your name to see quotas that you created and their related accounts
and owners.
Forecasting Quotas with Viewing quota attainment. For example, you can use Forecasting Quotas and Forecasting Items to
Forecasting Items as a related create the custom report type. Then, when you create the report, include a team’s quotas and forecast
object revenue for closed forecasts, and create a formula field to show the attained quota percentage.
170
Note: If you delete a forecast type, reports that use that forecast type don’t run.
Idea Reports
Create custom report types so users can create reports about ideas, idea comments, and votes.
EDITIONS
As an administrator, you can create custom report types so users can analyze what happens to
ideas. Custom report types are the only way to make idea reports available for your users—Salesforce Available in: Salesforce
does not provide sample idea reports or a standard report folder for ideas. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
To create a folder of idea reports for your users:
1. Create a custom report type for ideas. If you create a custom report type that uses Ideas as the Available in: Professional,
primary object and Votes as the secondary object, child (merged) ideas will not appear in the Enterprise, Performance,
report unless you select "A" records may or may not have related "B"
Editions
records. Child ideas have no votes because their votes are transferred to the master idea.
This means child ideas do not appear in a report if the Votes object is required.
2. Create a new public folder for idea reports. This step requires the “Manage Public Reports” USER PERMISSIONS
permission. To create, update, and
3. Using your custom report type, create one or more new custom reports for ideas. Assign the delete custom report types:
reports to the new idea reports folder you created. • Manage Custom Report
Types
After completing these steps, a folder of idea reports will be available to your users on the Reports
home page.
171
Report on Salesforce Knowledge Articles

Use Salesforce Knowledge custom reports to track how articles are created, maintained, and
EDITIONS
delivered.
As an administrator, you can create custom report types so agents can create reports on Salesforce Available in: Salesforce
Knowledge articles. Custom report types are the only way to make reports about articles available Classic (not available in all
for your readers. Salesforce does not provide sample article reports or a standard report folder for orgs) and Lightning
articles. Experience
Tip: The Knowledge Base Dashboards and Reports AppExchange package provides over two Salesforce Knowledge is
dozen reports that help you monitor the knowledge base and analyze usage metrics. available in Essentials and
the Unlimited Edition with
Service Cloud.
1. Create a Folder for Article Reports
Create a public folder where you can store article reports for your users. Salesforce Knowledge is
available for an additional
2. Create a Report Type for Article Reports cost in: Professional,
Create a custom report type to report on Salesforce Knowledge article data. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Create an Article Report and Developer Editions. For
more information, contact
Run your custom report on your Salesforce Knowledge articles and save them to your article
your Salesforce
reports folder.
representative.
4. Fields Available on Salesforce Knowledge Reports
The fields you can use in a knowledge report depend on the type of information you are reporting
USER PERMISSIONS
on.
To create or update custom
report types:
Types
To create a public reports
folder:
• Manage Public Reports
172
Create a Folder for Article Reports

Create a public folder where you can store article reports for your users.
EDITIONS
1. In the Report Folder section of the Reports tab, click Create New Folder.
2. Enter Article Reports in the Folder Label field.
3. Optionally, modify the Group Unique Name. orgs) and Lightning
4. Choose a Public Folder Access option. Experience
Select read/write if you want users to be able to add and remove reports.
Salesforce Knowledge is
5. Choose a folder visibility option. available in Essentials and
the Unlimited Edition with
6. Click Save. Service Cloud.
Reports you store in this folder are available on the Reports tab. Salesforce Knowledge is
cost in: Professional,
and Developer Editions. For
your Salesforce
representative.
USER PERMISSIONS

report types:
Types
To create a public reports
folder:
• Manage Public Reports
173
Create a Report Type for Article Reports

Create a custom report type to report on Salesforce Knowledge article data.
EDITIONS
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types then select Report Types.
See Create a Custom Report Type. orgs) and Lightning
3. In the Primary Object dropdown menu, select the article-related object you want to report on. Experience
Primary Object Related Objects Description
available in Essentials and
Knowledge Compare information, such as creation Unlimited Editions with
• Knowledge Versions
(Lightning dates, audience visibility, and the Service Cloud.
• Feed: Knowledge
Knowledge) number of associated cases across record Salesforce Knowledge is
types. To access history and custom available for an additional
fields, add Knowledge Versions as a cost in: Professional,
secondary object. Enterprise, Performance,
If you changed the name of your
knowledge base, the custom label shows
your Salesforce
here.
representative.
Knowledge Articles • Knowledge Article Report on information about individual

Versions published articles, such as their creation USER PERMISSIONS
date and published channels. When you
• Article View Statistics To create or update custom
build this custom report type, you can
• Article Vote Statistics report types:
include article view statistics, article vote
• Case Article statistics, and case associations. In
Types
reports using the Knowledge Articles
– Articles To create a public reports
primary object, each article has five
– There are many folder:
records (rows), one for each channel (All
additional • Manage Public Reports
Channels, Internal App, Customer,
relationships from Partner, and Public Knowledge Base).
Case Article, including
Work Orders and Case
Comments.
Knowledge Article • Article View Statistics Compare information about individual

Versions versions and translations, such as their
• Article Vote Statistics
creation date, published channels, and
• Case Article number of associated cases. If you
– Articles choose this custom report type, you can
also include article view and vote
– There are many
statistics.
additional
relationships from
Case Article, including
Work Orders and Case
Comments.
174
Primary Object Related Objects Description

Article types (Knowledge in • Article Type Versions Compare information, such as creation dates, published
Salesforce Classic) channels, and number of associated cases, for your
You can then choose a relationship to custom article type, such as an FAQ. To access version
Article history and custom fields, add the article type’s version
Type_DataCategorySelection. as a secondary object.
If you have multiple article types, each is listed separately,
for example FAQs, Issues, and Procedures.
Report types for the search, view, vote, and version history objects don’t have secondary relationships.
Table 2: Report Types for Search, Views, Votes, and Version History
Primary Object Description
Knowledge Search Activity • Analyze the number of searches per day, month, or year for
each channel and language.
• For each search, see the date, ID, and title of the article that
was clicked.
• See which keywords users are looking for in your knowledge
base.
• For each keyword, see the average number of results, and
articles that appear in the search results.
• For each article, see the average number of clicks, and unique
users who clicked it.
Knowledge Keyword Search See which keywords users are looking for in your knowledge
base. Keyword data is only available for Salesforce Classic.
Article Version History Compare information about individual article versions, such as
their creation dates, published channels, and number of
associated cases.
Knowledge Article Views Analyze the number of views per day, month, or year for each
channel and role.
Knowledge Article Votes Analyze the number of votes per day, month, or year for each
channel and role.
Knowledge Article Searches Analyze the number of searches per day, month, or year for each
channel and role. Searches aren’t differentiated between internal
and external, and all searches are logged as Internal App. Searches
in Experience Cloud sites aren’t checked.
Knowledge Article Searches’ report results are limited to searches
performed using Classic Knowledge.
4. Complete the required fields and click Save.
175
In the Store in Category dropdown menu, we recommend choosing Customer Support Reports or Other Reports. This category
is where users find the custom report type on the Reports tab.
5. Make your choices on the Define Report Records Set page.

6. Click Save.
7. As needed, remove, and rearrange fields from your report layout.
To learn which fields are available on each primary object, see Fields Available on Salesforce Knowledge Reports on page 178.
Note: An article’s score is calculated slightly differently in the API than it is in a custom report. We recommend standardizing on
one or the other and not attempting to use both.
Limitations and Considerations
• It takes 24 hours for a report to generate.
• Based on relevancy, your report only shows up to 300 results daily and up to the past 30 days of the current month. See How Search
Results are Ordered.
– After a new month, past daily data aggregates to the top 300 results per month for the current year. After a new year, past
monthly data aggregates to the top 300 results per year.
• Fields and custom report types are supported for Knowledge Search Activity. See Fields Available on Salesforce Knowledge Reports
• You can add and remove fields in custom reports. See Design the Field Layout for Reports Created from Your Custom Report Type
176
Create an Article Report

Run your custom report on your Salesforce Knowledge articles and save them to your article reports
EDITIONS
folder.
Using your custom report types, create article reports and save them to your article reports folder. Available in: Salesforce
1. On the Reports tab, click New Report.
orgs) and Lightning
2. Choose the category where your custom report types are stored, for example, Customer Experience
Support Reports or Other Reports.
The Cases with Articles report is available by default in the Customer Support Reports folder. Salesforce Knowledge is
3. Find your report type and click Create. Unlimited Editions with
4. When viewing your report, click Save As and save it in the new Article Reports folder to make Service Cloud.
the report available to other users. Salesforce Knowledge is
Note: cost in: Professional,
• In reports using the Knowledge Article custom report type, there are at least five rows Enterprise, Performance,
per article, one for each channel, including All Channels. and Developer Editions. For
• Daily values are reported independently for the last 90 days and monthly values for the
your Salesforce
last 18 months. After those time periods, use the monthly aggregate and yearly aggregate
representative.
values, respectively.
• In reports using the Knowledge Article Votes, Knowledge Article Views, or Knowledge
Article Searches custom report types, each row represents a day, channel, and role USER PERMISSIONS
combination. For example, if a user with the Kingmaker role views articles in the internal
app and the next day the same reader views more articles in the internal app, the Article report types:
Views report has two rows: one for each unique date. • Manage Custom Report
• In reports using Knowledge Article Version (KAV), except Knowledge Article Version Types
History, you can filter by data category. You can add up to four filters and set their logic To create a public reports
to AT, ABOVE, BELOW, or ABOVE OR BELOW. The logic between filters is OR. You can use folder:
the same category group multiple times,but you must use the same operator each time. • Manage Public Reports
• To report on Approval Processes for Knowledge Articles, use Process Instance and
Process Instance Node when creating a custom report type. Then filter the report on
object type, which is the article type.
• You can create a custom report type for a Case by cross-filtering for Cases with and without
articles. If you do, then when you archive an article, case records linked to that article no
longer list the article information in the report. This limitation happens if the user doesn’t
have access to all the data categories in the category group.
177
Fields Available on Salesforce Knowledge Reports

The fields you can use in a knowledge report depend on the type of information you are reporting
EDITIONS
on.
Important: Where possible, we changed noninclusive terms to align with our company Available in: Salesforce
value of Equality. We maintained certain terms to avoid any effect on customer Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
implementations.
Experience
The following tables list the available fields by primary object for Salesforce Knowledge reports.
Fields Available on Article types (Knowledge in Salesforce Classic) Reports Salesforce Knowledge is
The Article Type primary object allows you to add a secondary object of the article type version. the Unlimited Edition with
Service Cloud.
Table 3: Article Type Report Primary Object Fields
Field Description
Archived By User who archived the article. cost in: Professional,
Archived Date Date the article was archived. and Developer Editions. For
Article Number Unique number automatically assigned to the article.
your Salesforce
Article Type ID The ID associated with the article type. representative.
Case Association Number of cases attached to the article.

Count USER PERMISSIONS
Created By User who created the article. To create or update custom

report types:
Created Date Date the current article version was created. If the article has been • Manage Custom Report
published more than one time, Created Date is the latest draft Types
date. To create reports that use the original article creation date, first To create a public reports
create a Custom Report Type that joins the Knowledge Article (__ka) folder:
and Knowledge Article Version (__kav) objects for a given article type • Manage Public Reports
to allow for use of the created date on the record in the Knowledge
Article object, rather than the one for the Knowledge Article Version
record.
Custom fields Any custom fields created on the article types. Add the article type's
version as a secondary object to access any custom fields for the
article type.
First Published Date the article was originally published.

Date
Knowledge Article The article's version number.

Version
Last Modified By User who changed the article most recently.
Last Modified Date the article was last changed. The last modified date of a draft
Date article is the time the draft was saved. The last modified date of a
published article is time the article was most recently published.
Last Published Date the article was last published.

Date
178
Field Description
Next Review Date The date when the article must next be reviewed for accuracy.
Primary Language The original language of the article.
Note: Currently you can’t use Knowledge Article Version and Last Modified Date in the same report.
Table 4: Article Type Report Secondary Object Fields

Field Description
Archived By User who archived the article.
Article Type The article type associated with the article.
Created By User who created the article.
Created Date Date the current article version was created. If the article has been published more than one
time, Created Date is the latest draft date. To create reports that use the original article
creation date, first create a Custom Report Type that joins the Knowledge Article (__ka) and
Knowledge Article Version (__kav) objects for a given article type to allow for use of the created
date on the record in the Knowledge Article object, rather than the one for the Knowledge
Article Version record.
Custom fields Any custom fields created on the article types. Add the article type's version as a secondary
object to access any custom fields for the article type.
File fields aren't supported for reports and report types with Knowledge.
Is Latest Version Indicates if the article is the most recent version.
Is Primary Language Indicates that the article is not a translation, but the original article.
Knowledge Article Unique ID automatically assigned to the article translation.

Version ID
Language The article's language.
Last Modified Date Date the article was last changed. The last modified date of a draft article is the time the draft
was saved. The last modified date of a published article is time the article was most recently
published.
Out of Date Indicates that the primary article has been updated since this translation was published.
Publication Status Indicates whether the article or translation is in progress (draft), published, or archived.
Summary Description of the article provided by the author.
Title The article's title.
Translation Completed Date the translation was completed.

Date
179
Field Description
Translation Exported Date the article was exported for translation.
Date
Translation Imported Date the translation was imported.

Date
URL Name Text used as hyperlink for the article.
Validation Status Indicates if the article is valid or not.
Version Number The version number of the article.
Visible in Customer Indicates that the article is published in the Customer Portal.
Visible in Internal App Indicates that the article is published in the internal app (Articles tab).
Visible in Partner Indicates that the article is published in the partner portal.
Visible in Public Indicates that the article is published in the public knowledge base.
Knowledge Base
Fields Available on Knowledge Articles Reports
Field Description
Case Association Count Number of cases attached to the article.
First Published Date Date the article was originally published.

Version ID
published.
Last Published Date Date the article was last published.
180
Field Description
Published Version Owner The user or queue that owns the published version of an article.
Knowledge Base
Fields Available on Knowledge Article Searches Reports
Field Description
Channel The channel that’s applicable to the article. Possible values are All Channels, Internal
App, Customer, Partner, and Public Knowledge Base.
Count The number of article searches applicable to the duration shown (day, month, or year).
Cumulative Count The total number of article searches for the history of the record.
Date Last date on which an article search took place for the record. All rows represent a date, channel,
and role combination.
Duration The time period the search count is applied to. Possible values are Daily, Monthly, and
Yearly. For example, a record where the Count is 70 and the Duration is Monthly indicates
that 70 searches took place over the past month. Totals are aggregated daily for the current
month, monthly from the past full month through the past full year, and yearly beyond that.
Related Role Name of the role that applies to the record. Each row in the report represents searches per
channel per role.
Fields Available on Knowledge Article Versions Reports
Field Description
Archived By User who archived the article.
Archived Date Date the article was archived.
181
Field Description
Case Association Count Number of cases attached to the article.
External Reference The ID of the article in the external system
First Published Date Date the article was originally published.
Is External Data Indicates that the article came in from (or: was sourced from) an external system.
Is Primary Language Indicates that the article is not a translation, but the original article.

Version ID
Language The article's language.
published.
Date the article was last published. Date the article was last published.
Next Review Date The date when the article must next be reviewed for accuracy.
Primary Language The original language of the article.
Out of Date Indicates that the primary article has been updated since this translation was published.
Owner The user or queue that owns a published, draft, or archived version of an article.
Publication Status Indicates whether the article or translation is in progress (draft), published, or archived.
Translation Completed Date the translation was completed.

Date
Translation Exported Date the article was exported for translation.

Date
182
Field Description
Translation Imported Date the translation was imported.
Date
Knowledge Base
Fields Available on Knowledge Article Views Reports

You can add up to six of these eight fields.
Field Description
Count The number of article views applicable to the duration shown (day, month, year).
Cumulative Count The total number of article views for the history of the record.
Date Last date on which an article view took place for the record. All rows represent a date, channel,
Related Role Name of the role that applies to the record.
Score The article's average view rating. Scores take into account a half-life calculation. Every 15 days,
if an article has not been viewed its average rating moves up or down. This calculation ensures
that over time, older or outdated articles don't maintain artificially high or low ratings compared
to newer, more frequently viewed articles.
Total Views Number of times a published article has been viewed.
Fields Available on Knowledge Article Votes Reports
183
Field Description
Count The number of article votes applicable to the duration shown (day, month, year).
Cumulative Count The total number of article votes for the history of the record.
Date Last date on which an article vote took place for the record. All rows represent a date, channel,
Related Role Name of the role that applies to the record.
Fields Available on Knowledge Keyword Search Reports

Knowledge Keyword Search reports are designed for use with the Salesforce Knowledge in Salesforce Classic data model. These reports
include searches from the Knowledge One widget.
Field Description
Count The number of keyword searches applicable to the duration shown (day, month, year).
Date Last date on which a keyword search took place for the record. All rows represent a date, channel,
Found Indicates whether the keyword shown was found during a search of the knowledge base.
Keyword Search term used to search published articles in the knowledge base.
Fields Available on Knowledge Search Activity Reports
Field Description
Average Click Rank The order in which the article appeared in search results when results are sorted by relevance
and when readers clicked it from the list of results.
Clicked Article Title The title of the clicked article taken when the search results are sorted by relevance by the reader.
184
Field Description
Activity totals are collected nightly and aren’t in real time.
Language The language filter that’s applied to the reader’s search.
Number of Results The number of search results that were returned for the search term. If Duration is also included,
this value is aggregated based on the time period specified.
Number of Searches The number of searches for the duration that’s shown (day, month, or year).
Number of Users The number of individual users who clicked the article.
Search Date The date of the search.
Search Term The first 100 characters of the search term that was used to search published articles in the
knowledge base.
Chat Session Reports

Use Chat Session reports to consolidate data about agents’ activities while they chat with
EDITIONS
customers–for example, how long agents are online or how many chat requests are assigned to
them. Available in: Salesforce
A report type defines the set of records and fields available to a report based on the relationships Classic and Lightning
between a primary object and its related objects. Reports display only records that meet the criteria Experience
defined in the report type. You can create a custom report type for Chat sessions to aggregate data
Available in: Performance
about your agents’ activity while they support customers. These reports include data for all of the Editions and in Developer
chats that occurred during a specific Chat session. Edition orgs that were
Customize Chat session reports to include columns of information about any of the following created after June 14, 2012
categories, as well as any custom fields related to Chat sessions: Available in: Essentials,
Unlimited, and Enterprise
Column Name Description Editions with Service Cloud
or Sales Cloud
Agent: Full Name Name of the agent associated with the session.
Assistance Flags Lowered Number of times an agent lowered an assistance flag during a
(Agent) Chat Session.
Assistance Flags Lowered Number of times a supervisor lowered an assistance flag during
(Supervisor) an agent’s Chat Session.
Assistance Flags Raised Number of times an agent raised an assistance flag during a Chat
Session.
Chat Requests Assigned Number of chat requests assigned to an agent.
Chat Requests Declined Number of chat requests declined manually by an agent.

(Manually)
185
Chat Requests Declined (Push Timeout) Number of chat requests that timed out while assigned to an agent.
Chat Requests Engaged Number of chats in which an agent was engaged during the session.
Created By: Full Name Full name of the creator of the session record.
Created Date Date the session record was created.
Last Modified By: Full Name Full name of the person who last modified the session record.
Last Modified Date Date the session record was last modified.
Chat Session ID ID of the Chat session record.
Chat Session Name Automatically generated ID of the Chat session.
Login Time Time and date the agent logged in to the session.
Logout Time Time and date the agent logged out of the session.
Time Idle Total amount of time in seconds an agent was not engaged in chats during a session. The
following formula indicates how an agent’s idle time is calculated: (Time Spent Online +
Time Spent Away) - Time Spent in Chats = Time Idle.
Time Spent at Capacity Total amount of time in seconds in which an agent’s queue was full.
Time Spent Away Total amount of time in seconds an agent spent in “Away” status.
Time Spent in Chats Total amount of time in seconds an agent spent engaged in chats.
Time Spent Online Total amount of time in seconds an agent spent online.
Report on Partners
Some opportunities involve partner relationships. Use this report to identify and analyze those
EDITIONS
relationships.
To report on all partnerships or primary partnerships within opportunities: Available in: Salesforce
Classic
1. From the Reports tab, choose the Partner Opportunities report.
2. Choose Customize to change the report and view only primary partner relationships. Add a Available in: Essentials,
field filter where Primary equals 1. Professional, Enterprise,
In any other opportunity report, when you customize the report to display the Partner column, only and Developer Editions
the primary partner displays.
You can also run the Partner Accounts report to analyze the partnerships of your accounts.
USER PERMISSIONS
To report on partners:
• Read on accounts or
opportunities
AND
Run Reports
186
Enable the Account Owner Report

The Account Owner report lists all accounts and who owns them.
EDITIONS
Organizations that have their organization-wide sharing access level set to Private for accounts may
want to restrict users from running the Account Owner report. Available in: both Salesforce
To show or hide this report:
Experience
1. From Setup, enter Account Owner Report in the Quick Find box, then select
Account Owner Report. This option is available only in organizations that have a private Available in: Professional,
account sharing model. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Select the checkbox to allow all users to run this report. If you leave the box unchecked, only Editions.
administrators and users with the “View All Data” permission can run this report.
3. Click Save. USER PERMISSIONS
To show or hide account

owner report:
• Customize Application
Report on File Search Activity

Use a report to determine the top 300 search term queries for file searches and to identify which
EDITIONS
content is missing or needs to be renamed based on users’ search terms and the click-rank.
Available in: both Salesforce
User Permissions Needed Classic (not available in all
To create or update custom report types: “Manage Custom Report Types” orgs) and Lightning
Experience
To create a public reports folder: “Manage Public Reports” Salesforce Files available in:
To run the File Search Activity report: “Run Reports” AND “View All Data” OR “Content All Editions, except
Customer Portals
Administrator”. Users with “Manage Library” for
the library don’t need the “View All Data” or
“Content Administrator” permissions to run the
report.
Custom report types are the only way to make reports about file search activity available for your users—Salesforce does not provide
sample file search activity reports or a standard report folder.
Note: Activity totals are collected nightly and aren’t in real time.
Primary Object for File Search Activity Report

When you create a custom report type, select File Search Activity for the Primary Object.
Available File Search Activity Report Fields

The following table lists the available fields for File Search Activity reports.
187
Field Description
Average Click Rank The order in which the file appeared in search results when users
clicked it from the list of results.
Average Number of Results The number of search results that were returned for the search
term. If Duration is also included, this value is aggregated based
on the time period specified.
Duration The time period the search count is applied to. Possible values are
Daily, Monthly, and Yearly. For example, a record where the Count
is 70 and the Duration is Monthly indicates that 70 searches took
place over the past month. Totals are aggregated daily for the
current month, monthly from the past full month through the past
full year, and yearly beyond that.
Language The language filter that’s applied to the user’s search.
Number of Searches The number of searches for the duration that’s shown (day, month,
or year).
Number of Users The number of individual users who clicked the file.
Search Date The date of the search.
Search Terms The first 100 characters of the search term that was used to search
published files.
SEE ALSO:
Access to Report Folders
Creating and Editing Folders
Create a Custom Report Type
Build a Report
Report on Chatter Top 100 Feed Item Views with Interaction Count Report
Get a report on the top 100 feed item views in your organization or community with the primary
EDITIONS
object Interaction Count Report. Knowing the posts that people are looking at most is a great way
to get insight into current Chatter trends. Actions counted as views include liking, commenting, Available in: Salesforce
and viewing a feed item detail. View counts aren’t unique. For example, a user can add three Classic (not available in all
comments to a post, and that is counted as three views. After you set up the report, it’s run weekly. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
User Permissions Needed
To create or update custom report types: “Manage Custom Report Types” Group, Professional,
To create a public reports folder: “Manage Public Reports” Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Custom report types are the only way to make reports about the 100 top feed item views. Salesforce
doesn’t provide sample top view activity reports or a standard report folder.
188
Note: Reports on feed activities don’t include information about system-generated posts, such as feed tracked changes.
Primary Object for Interaction Count Report

When you create a custom report type, select Interaction Count Reports for the Primary Object.
Available Interaction Count Report Fields

The following table lists the available fields for Interaction Count reports.
Field Description
Comment Count The number of comments on a post
Count The number of views on a post
Days for interval How often the report is run—currently 7, for every seven days
(fixed value)
FeedElement parent The ID of the group, profile, record, or other entity that is the parent
to the feed where the content is posted
Feed Item ID The ID of the post
Like Count The number of likes on the post
NetworkScope The scope of the network where this feed item is available.
This field always has a value. For the default network, it’s
00000000000000. If it’s posted in a community, it has the ID of the
community (also known as the NetworkId). If the value contains
an "I," the post is parented by a record, like an account, an
opportunity, or some other record type.
Start interval Date The date that marks the start of the seven-day run interval
SEE ALSO:
Characteristics of Chatter Counts
189
Related Articles and Questions Reports

Create custom report types so users can report on click-through rates on related articles and
EDITIONS
questions. Salesforce Einstein suggests related articles and questions in communities. Use the
click-through rates reports to create content around the most accessed articles and questions, Available in: both Salesforce
empowering your customers to find the information they need. Classic (not available in all
As an admin, you can create custom report types so users can analyze which related articles and orgs) and Lightning
questions are most clicked in a community. Experience
To create a folder of reports for your users: Available in: Enterprise,

1. Create a custom report type using Related Content Metrics as the primary object.
2. Create a public folder for related content metric reports. This step requires the Manage Public
Reports permission.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. Using your custom report type, create one or more new custom reports. For example, you can
make specific reports on related questions click-through rates and related articles click-through To create, update, and
rates. Assign the reports to the new reports folder you created. delete custom report types:
After completing these steps, a folder of related content metrics reports is available to your users
Types
on the Reports home page.
Community Case Deflection from Discussions and Articles

Get insight into how well the Contact Support Form and Case Deflection components actually
EDITIONS
deflect cases from being created. Using the Case Deflection Dashboard, get real-time metrics on
potential and confirmed case deflections, the most helpful articles and discussions, and the least Available in: both Salesforce
helpful articles and discussions. Classic (not available in all
As an admin, you can create custom report types so users can analyze which articles and discussions orgs) and Lightning
are most useful in deflecting cases in a community. Experience
To create a folder of reports for your users: Available in: Enterprise,

1. Create a custom report type using Community Case Deflection Metrics as the primary object.
2. Create a public folder for the reports. This step requires the Manage Public Reports permission.
3. Using your custom report type, create one or more new custom reports. For example, you can USER PERMISSIONS
make specific reports on which articles and discussions helped deflect cases, and which ones
were unsuccessful at deflecting cases. Assign the reports to the new reports folder you created. To create, update, and
delete custom report types:
After completing these steps, a folder of community case deflection metrics reports is available to
your users on the Reports home page.
Types
190
Report on External Documents Attached to Cases

Create a report to see how many and which specific external documents are being attached to
EDITIONS
cases. Use this information to see which external sources have the most impact on closing cases.
This report is helpful when you have set up Salesforce Federated Search, which gives users access Available in: Salesforce
to external search results when using the Knowledge One Widget. Users can attach external Classic (not available in all
documents to cases only if Chatter is enabled. orgs)
1. From Setup, enter Report Types in the Quick Find box, then select Report Types.
2. Click New Custom Report Type. available in Essentials and
3. Select Cases as the Primary Object for your custom report type. the Unlimited Edition with
Service Cloud.
4. Enter the Report Type Label. For example, Cases with External Documents. The
Report Type Name automatically fills. Salesforce Knowledge is
5. Enter a description for your custom report type. For example, Reports on the external cost in: Professional,
documents attached to cases. Enterprise, Performance,
6. To indicate where to store the custom report type, select the Other Reports category. and Developer Editions. For
7. Select the deployment option of your choice. Click Next.
your Salesforce
8. On the next page, Define Report Records Set, relate another object and create an A to B representative.
Relationship. Select External Documents as the child object for your custom report type. Leave
Each “A” record must have at least one related “B” record selected. Click Save.
USER PERMISSIONS
9. Leaving Setup, click the Reports tab.
10. Click New Report. From the Other Reports folder, select Cases with External Documents, or
delete custom report types
the name of the report you created.
11. Click Create. Types
12. If they’re not already included, from the Cases object in the left pane, drag and drop the Case To run reports
ID and Case Number fields onto the report. From the External Object: Object Name object, • Run Reports
drag and drop the Display URL and Title fields. Drag and drop other fields that you want to To create, edit, and delete
include in the report. reports
13. Click Run Report. Save the report. • Create and Customize
Reports
191
Turn Automatic Updates to the Report Preview On or Off

Edit reports faster by turning off automatic preview updates. When off, you can make multiple edits
EDITIONS
without waiting for the preview to refresh after each edit. When you’re ready to preview data,
manually refresh the report preview. Or, see sample records returned after each edit by keeping Available in: Lightning
automatic previews on. Experience
To turn automatic preview updates on or off flip the Update Preview Automatically switch on
or off.
1. Edit or create a report. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Click Update Preview Automatically. The switch switches on or off.
Editions
When on, the report preview updates automatically after each edit you make to the report.
When off, a message tells you whether the preview shows your most recent edits and provides USER PERMISSIONS
the option to refresh the preview. When hiding recent edits, the preview turns gray.
To turn automatic updates
to the report preview on or
off while editing a report
saved in a private folder:
Reports
To turn automatic updates
to the report preview on or
off while editing a report
saved in a private or public
folder:
Builder (Lightning
Experience)
192
3. To refresh out-of-date data, click Refresh (1).
The preview reloads to show your edits.
193
The Update Preview Automatically switch doesn’t affect the report run page.
Customize Report Views in the Run Page

Use the power of Lightning Experience when you review and analyze your report records in the
USER PERMISSIONS
run page.
To run reports:
Available in: Lightning Experience • Run Reports
Available in: Essentials, Group, Professional, Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and To run reports in shared
folders:
Developer Editions
• Run Reports AND Access
Available in: Enhanced Folder Sharing to the shared folder
Review key report metrics in the header of the report run page in Lightning Experience. The Lightning Experience report header displays
up to 8 metrics, in the order that they appear in the report, from left to right. These metrics include summaries such as average amounts,
grand totals, subtotals, record counts, and formula column results.
194
To quickly view or hide a report’s count of rows, detail rows, subtotals, or grand total record, use the toggles in the report footer. For
reports grouped by rows and columns (matrix), the footer includes the option to switch between stacked and unstacked summaries
view. Stacked summaries appear together, whereas unstacked summaries appear in distinct columns.
Get even more done with the tools in the report header. Using the tools, you can:
195
• trend a report (available with CRM Analytics license)

• show or hide a chart
• add, remove, or modify report filters
• collaborate with others on the report feed
• refresh the report
Viewing jumbo-sized reports in the run page? Column headers are sticky, so, they don’t go out of sight as you page through report
records.
You can further customize how the records in the report display. From a column’s action menu, you can sort and group records, and
even remove the column. You can also sort by various metrics from a grouping column.
196
Want to take a closer look at records from a report that's grouped by rows (summary) or grouped by rows and columns (matrix)? On the
report run page, select the box next to a primary grouping value you want to drill down. Click Drill Down. Specify the field you want to
group the results by, and click Apply.
197
You can also view the record detail rows behind a report that's grouped by rows and columns (matrix). To do so, click the appropriate
record in the summary table on the report run page. You can even click in the Total row.
Let’s say you’re looking at the Accounts grouped by Industry report in the run page. If you want to review the records for just a specific
industry, click the count for that industry in the summary table.
Want a more convenient view of summarized metrics in reports that are grouped by rows and columns (matrix)? For a viewer-friendly
version of the report with less scrolling required, enable Stacked Summaries in the report footer.
198
To resize a column width, hover over the column header’s right edge. When the resize cursor appears, drag the edge until the data fits
right for you. When you’re done, click the cursor to set the new width.
199
Updating Multiple Fields Inline on the Report Run Page in Lightning Experience
Keep records up to date by editing field values directly on tabular, summary, and matrix reports.
EDITIONS
A column is editable when these conditions are met for Object Permissions, Field Level Security,
and Page Layout. Available in: Lightning
Experience
• You have edit access to the associated object.
• You have edit access to the associated field. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Essentials,
• The associated field is included and editable in the page layout assigned to your profile.
Inline editing isn’t supported for these columns. Performance, Unlimited,
• Opportunity Amount and Developer Editions
• Polymorphic fields, such as an Owner field, fields from a Person Account record, or an activity’s Available in: Enhanced
Related To field Folder Sharing
• Columns associated with objects that Record Types aren’t available for, such as User
• Lookup fields that are entirely null (have no values) in the report results USER PERMISSIONS
• Columns that are directly associated with junction objects
These data types are supported. reports in private folders:
• Text
Reports
• Text Area
• Phone reports in public and private
• Email folders:
• URL
Builder (Lightning
• Checkbox Experience)
• Number
• Percent
• Currency
• Date
• Picklist
• Picklist (Multi-select)
These guidelines apply when editing field values inline.
• To enable inline editing on the report run page, select Enable Field Editing.
• When you apply an edit to a cell, the background color changes to indicate that a new value is stored locally. Change one or more
values, and then save your changes.
• You can edit a maximum of 100 values at one time across multiple rows and columns.
• In each row, you can edit a maximum of 12 report columns at one time.
• There can be additional restrictions on inline editing of multiple fields based on the underlying Salesforce objects, custom settings,
and dependencies among the fields you’re modifying.
• Lookup filters aren’t applied to picklist field values. Be sure to select values that are valid for the record that you’re editing.
• You can edit state and country/territory fields if state and country/territory picklists are enabled. See Enable and Disable State and
Country/Territory Picklists.
• If you edit a cell that has related cells and the report requires a refresh to obtain up-to-date values, the related cells are marked
Pending. When you save your changes, the cells update with the new values.
200
• If you change a field value and then change another value that’s related to the first value through a lookup, a warning message
appears. It indicates that if you continue, you overwrite your first change.
For example in this Opportunities report, the number of employees changed for the Acme Threads account.
You realize that the account name isn’t correct, and enter an inline edit to change it.
201
With this change, there’s a conflict between the modified number of employees and the number of employees associated with the
new account name. A message window shows you that if the edits are saved, the original change in the number of employees is
discarded.
Filter Report Data

What if your report gives you more data than you need? Use filters to pare down your report until
EDITIONS
it only shows the data that you want.
Filter Reports by Values Classic and Lightning
Filter a report by value when you want to define the filter criteria yourself. For example, filter Experience
for opportunities worth more than $50,000.00, cases that mention word "widgets" in the subject, Available in: Essentials,
or Accounts located in California. Group, Professional,
Filter Reports Using Field Comparisons with Field-To-Field Filters Enterprise, Performance,
Field-to-field filters let you filter a report by comparing the values of two different report fields. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
For example, see cases modified after closing date by filtering on cases with a last modified
date after the closed date. Available in: Enhanced
Add Filter Logic Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
Filter logic governs how and when filters apply to your report.
Use a cross filter to fine-tune your results by including or excluding records from related objects and their fields, without having to
write formulas or code. You can apply cross filters by themselves, or in combination with field filters.
202
Filter Report Data by Role Hierarchy

You can view records based on org structure or job function? Get records owned by everyone in a job role (like sales manager) and
their subordinate roles (such as sales person) by filtering your report on a role.
Filter Reports with URL Parameters in Lightning Experience
When linking to or bookmarking a report, add filter value parameters to the URL to customize how the report appears when opened.
For example, bookmark your opportunities report and add a filter to specify whether you see New Business or Existing Business.
Filter Field History Reports by Old and New Values
Field history reports let you track changes in fields by adding an “Old Value” and a “New Value” column. With a field history report,
each report row represents a change to a record. By filtering a field history report, you can answer questions like “Which opportunities
have we closed so far this financial quarter?”
Filter Knowledge Reports by Category
Return information about entire categories and subcategories of knowledge articles with category filters.
Filters Type Reference
Several different types of filters help you scope your report data: standard filters, field filters, cross filters, and row limit filters. Each
filter type filters your report in different ways. This list of filter types helps you choose the right filter types for your report.
Filter Operators Reference
The operator in a filter is like the verb in a sentence. Operators specify how filter criteria relate to each other. Refer to this list of filter
operators when setting filters on list views, reports, dashboards, and some custom fields.
Relative Date Filter Reference
Relative date filters let you filter on date fields using easy-to-understand, human-speech-inspired syntax.
Notes about Filtering on Types of Fields and Values
Keep these tips in mind when filtering on text fields, date fields, numeric values, picklist values, and blank or null values.
Tips for Filtering on Multiple Currencies
Tips for filtering on currency fields when your organization uses multiple currencies.
203
Filter Reports by Values

EDITIONS

Experience

Editions

Folder Sharing
204
Filter a report by value when you want to define the filter criteria yourself. For example, filter for
USER PERMISSIONS
opportunities worth more than $50,000.00, cases that mention word "widgets" in the subject, or
Accounts located in California. To add or edit a filter:
In Salesforce Classic, filter your report from the report builder. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create and
In Lightning Experience, there are two ways to filter reports: either from the Report Builder or while
Customize Reports
viewing a report. To add or edit report filters, use the Report Builder. To edit existing, unlocked
report filters while you’re reading a report, run the report and then edit filters directly from the filters AND
pane ( ). You can edit existing filters from the filters pane, but you can’t add new ones. Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Each report supports up to 20 field filters.
Sharing
Note: In Lightning Experience, these filters are available in the Report Builder, but aren’t Create and
Customize Reports
shown in the filter panel when viewing a report. Even though the filters aren’t shown, they
still filter the report. AND
• Row limit filters Report Builder
• Historical field filters To lock or unlock filters so

These filters appear in the filter panel when viewing a report but aren’t editable. that users can’t edit them
while viewing a report in
• Cross filters Lightning Experience:
• Chart filters • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create and
1. From the Lightning Experience report builder, click Filters. Then, choose a field from the Customize Reports
Add filter... picklist. AND
From the Salesforce Classic report builder, open the Add dropdown menu and select a filter Report Builder
type: Enhanced Folder
• Field Filter to filter on fields. For example, use a field filter to filter by Account Name Sharing
equals Acme. Create and
Customize Reports
In Lightning Experience, you can personalize field filters for user fields such as Account
AND
Owner or Created By. To restrict the results to the currently sign-in user, select the relative
value option. Report Builder
• Filter Logic to customize how existing filters apply to your report. Each filter is assigned a To edit a filter while viewing
a report in Lightning
number. To get your report to return records that meet the criteria of Filter 1 and either
Experience:
Filter 2 or Filter 3, use this filter logic: Filter 1 AND (Filter 2 OR Filter
• Run Reports
3). Filter logic requires at least one field filter.
To add filter logic in the Lightning Experience report builder, click > Add Filter Logic.
• Cross Filter to filter on one object’s relationship to another object. Cross filter on Accounts with Opportunities
so that your report only returns Accounts that have Opportunities. Add a subfilter to a cross filter to further filter by the second
object. For example, the Opportunity subfilter Amount greater than 50000 causes your report to return Accounts
that have Opportunities worth more than $50,000.00.
Cross filters aren’t available in the Lightning Experience report builder.
• Row Limit to limit the number of report results in tabular reports. To see which five Accounts have the largest annual revenue,
set a row limit of Top 5 Accounts by Annual Revenue.
Row limit filters aren’t available in the Lightning Experience report builder.
205
Standard filters, such as date filters, are applied by default to most objects. Look for them underneath the Add dropdown menu and
customize them as necessary. Different objects have different standard filters.
2. Enter filter criteria.

For help with entering filter criteria, see Filter Operators and Filter Logic.
3. Optionally, to prevent people from editing a field filter while reading your report in Lightning Experience, check Locked.
4. Click Save.
5. To read your filtered report, click Run Report.
Example: Say that you want your team to call new leads at companies with more than 100 employees located in California,
Arizona, or Nevada. You have a leads report with fields like Lead Status, Number of Employees, and State. Your
report gives a complete overview of your entire company’s leads. But you only want to see new leads that have more than 100
employees and are located in California. Apply these filters to your report:
1. Lead Status equals New
2. Number of Employees greater than 100
3. State includes California, Arizona, Nevada
Now your leads report returns only the leads you need.
206
Filter Reports Using Field Comparisons with Field-To-Field Filters

EDITIONS

Experience

Editions

Folder Sharing
207
Field-to-field filters let you filter a report by comparing the values of two different report fields. For
USER PERMISSIONS
example, see cases modified after closing date by filtering on cases with a last modified date after
the closed date. To add or edit a filter:
Add a field-to-field filter while editing a report. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create and
1. From the Lightning Experience report builder, click Filters. Then, choose a field from the Customize Reports
Add filter... picklist.
AND
2. If the field you chose to filter on supports field-to-field filters, then set the Type dropdown to Report Builder
Field. If the field doesn’t support field-to-field filtering, then the Type dropdown doesn’t appear.
Enhanced Folder
3. Enter filter criteria. Sharing
For help with entering filter criteria, see Filter Operators and Filter Logic. Create and
Customize Reports
4. Optionally, to prevent people from editing a field filter while reading your report in Lightning AND
Experience, check Locked. Report Builder
5. Click Save.
To lock or unlock filters so
6. To read your filtered report, click Run Report. that users can’t edit them
Report data filters based on the criteria you set.
Lightning Experience:
Example: Say that you want opportunities worth less than projected. You have an • Legacy Folder Sharing
opportunity report with fields like Amount and Projected Amount, and State. Create and
Apply a field-to-field filter to your report that compares values between Amount and Projected Customize Reports
Amount. AND
1. Click Add filter.... Report Builder
2. Select Amount. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
3. Set Operator to less than, Type to Field, and Value to Projected Amount. If necessary, Create and
clear the default Value by clicking X. Customize Reports
4. Click Apply. AND
5. Click Save. Report Builder
Now your report has a field-to-field filter (1) that returns opportunities worth less than projected To edit a filter while viewing
(2). a report in Lightning
Experience:
• Run Reports
208
Get the Most out of Field-To-Field Filters Tips, Limits, and Limitations
As you get ready to add field-to-field filters, review these tips, limits, and limitations.
• Each report supports up to 4 field-to-field filters.
• Field-to-field filters only support these field types:
– Date
– Datetime
– Numeric
Note: Currency fields are numeric, but if your org has enabled multiple currencies, then you can’t use currency fields
(such as Amount) in field-to-field filters.
• Field-to-field filters are unavailable in report types that:

– Reference an external object
– Have a "with or without" (outer join) relationship between objects
• Field-to-field filters only compare fields of the same data type. For example, a datetime field can only be compared with another
datetime.
• Don’t use the Equals or Not Equals to filter standard date fields such as Closed Date. The field values are stored with precise date
and timestamps, and comparisons of the values often yield unexpected results.
• Joined reports don’t support field-to-field filters. To convert a report with field-to-field filters into a joined report, first remove the
field-to-field filter.
• Historical tracking reports support field-to-field filters, but the filter must be based on a history field.
• Field-to-field filters must compare two different fields.
• When a field-to-field filter compares a null value with a non-null value, it returns false or 0. If two null values are compared, then
the filter returns true or 1.
209
• Field-to-field filters aren't available in Salesforce Classic. You can't run or edit reports with field-to-field filters in Salesforce Classic.
Add Filter Logic

Filter logic governs how and when filters apply to your report.
EDITIONS
After adding a filter to your report, the filter is numbered. Your first filter becomes Filter 1 and your
second filter becomes Filter 2. You apply filter logic based on these numbered filters. Available in: both Salesforce
For example, let’s say you have a report of Accounts with fields like State, Annual Revenue, and
orgs) and Lightning
Industry. Your report has these filters:
Experience
• State includes California, Arizona, Nevada
• Industry equals Banking Group, Professional,
• Annual Revenue greater than 1000000 Enterprise, Performance,
These three filters cause your report to return Accounts in California, Arizona, or Nevada in the Unlimited, and Developer
Banking industry with annual revenue greater than $1,000,000. But what if you want Accounts only Editions
in California, Arizona, or Nevada AND in the Banking industry, OR with annual revenue greater than
$1,000,000.00? Add filter logic to your report. USER PERMISSIONS
1. From the Lightning Report Builder, click Filters > > Add Filter Logic. To create, edit, and delete
From the Salesforce Classic Report Builder, click Add > Filter Logic. reports:
2. Enter each filter line number, separated by a filter logic operator. Reports
For example, (1 AND 2) OR 3 finds records that match both Filter 1 and Filter 2, or Filter AND
3. Report Builder
Here’s a complete table of filter logic operators: To create custom list views:
• Read on the type of
Operator Definition record included in the list
AND Finds records that match both values. To create, edit, or delete
public list views:
1 AND 2
• Manage Public List
Views
OR Finds records that match either value.
1 OR 2
NOT Finds records that exclude values.

For example, Filter 1 is Industry equals
“Biotechnology”. You set filter logic as
Not 1. Your report returns records that
aren’t equal to Biotechnology.
3. Click Save.
Now your report shows Banking industry Accounts in California, Arizona, and Nevada with any amount of revenue, and any Account
with annual revenue above $1,000,000.00.
Note:
• Filter logic isn't available for all filters. For example, you can’t use a filter for rollup summary fields.
210
• On reports where object A may or may not have object B, you can't use the OR condition to filter across multiple objects. For
example, if you select Account Name starts with M OR Contact First Name starts with M, an
error message informs you that your filter criteria are incorrect.
• You can't use filter logic if your field filters use these fields:
– Topics
– Description
– Any Address Line 1, Address Line 2, or Address Line 3 fields
– Forecast Category
– Campaign: Member Type
– User: Profile Name
– Login Status
– Custom long-text area fields
– Old Value or New Value fields
– Composite fields, such as Full Name
SEE ALSO:
211

Use a cross filter to fine-tune your results by including or excluding records from related objects
EDITIONS
and their fields, without having to write formulas or code. You can apply cross filters by themselves,
or in combination with field filters. Available in: both Salesforce
Watch a video: How to Use Cross Filters (Lightning Experience) Classic and Lightning
Experience
To see which accounts have escalated cases, create an accounts report and add a cross filter. Set
the cross filter to show accounts with cases. Then, filter cases for status equals escalated. Available in: Enterprise,
1. Create a Cross Filter
Use cross filters to include or exclude records in your report results based on related objects Available in: Enhanced
and their fields. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
2. Edit a Cross Filter
To change how a cross filter filters the primary or secondary object, edit it.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. Delete a Cross Filter
When you no longer need a cross filter, or a subfilter in a cross filter, delete it. To add edit, or delete a
cross filter in private reports:
4. Example: Use WITH in Cross Filters
Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using WITH conditions. For example,
Create and
filter a report to show just accounts with cases.
Customize Reports
5. Example: Use WITHOUT in Cross Filters Enhanced Folder
Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using WITHOUT conditions. For Sharing
example, filter a report to show just contacts without activities. Create and
Customize Reports
6. Example: Multiple Cross Filters and a Subfilter
Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using both WITH and WITHOUT To add edit, or delete a
conditions. For example, filter a report to show accounts that have cases but don’t have activities. cross filter in private and
public reports:
7. Cross Filter Considerations and Limits
As you create and work with cross filters, take note of these considerations and limits.
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
212
Create a Cross Filter

Use cross filters to include or exclude records in your report results based on related objects and
EDITIONS
their fields.
Watch a video: How to Use Cross Filters (Lightning Experience) Available in: both Salesforce
To see which accounts have escalated cases, create an accounts report and add a cross filter. Set Experience
the cross filter to show accounts with cases. Then, filter cases for status equals escalated.
Cross filters are available in both Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic. Cross filters that you
create in Lightning Experience work in Salesforce Classic, and vice versa.
The steps for creating a cross filter are a little different depending on whether you’re using Lightning
Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re using the Lightning
Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder.
Folder Sharing
Create a Cross Filter in the Lightning Experience Report Builder
1. Edit or create a report. USER PERMISSIONS
2. From the FILTERS tab, click > Add Cross Filter. To add edit, or delete a
3. Choose whether to show your primary object with or without a secondary object. Then, cross filter in private reports:
choose the secondary object. • Legacy Folder Sharing
4. Click Apply. Create and

Customize Reports
5. Optionally, to add a filter to the secondary object, click Add Secondary Object Filter,
Enhanced Folder
where Secondary Object is the name of the secondary object. Sharing
a. Choose a field from the secondary object. Create and
Customize Reports
b. Specify an operator and values for the secondary object filter.
To add edit, or delete a
c. Click Apply.
cross filter in private and
6. Click Save. public reports:
Create a Cross Filter in the Salesforce Classic Report Builder
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
2. From the Filters pane, click Add > Cross Filter. Sharing
3. Select a parent object from the dropdown list. Your choice determines which related objects Report Builder OR
you see in the child object list. Report Builder
(Lightning
Tip: In report types based on Campaigns, the parent object can be the secondary Experience)
object in the report type. For example, in a “Campaigns with Leads” report, the parent
object can be Campaigns or Leads.
4. Choose with or without.

5. Select a child object from the dropdown or search by its name. The dropdown list contains all eligible child objects of your
selected parent object.
6. Optionally, to add filters on the secondary object, add subfilters:
a. Click Add Secondary Object Filter, where Secondary Object is the name of the secondary object.
b. Select a field. The fields are determined by the child object in the cross filter. For example, if your cross filter is Accounts
with Cases, you can use case fields for your subfilter.
c. Choose a filter operator.
213
d. Enter a value.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save.
The report filters based on the primary-secondary object relationship and any additional filters on the secondary object.
Note: In Lightning Experience, although cross filters still filter the report, they don’t appear in the Filters panel on the report run
page. If you have permission to edit a report, you can view cross filters in the report builder.
SEE ALSO:
Example: Multiple Cross Filters and a Subfilter
Example: Use WITH in Cross Filters
Example: Use WITHOUT in Cross Filters
214
Edit a Cross Filter

To change how a cross filter filters the primary or secondary object, edit it.
EDITIONS
create in Lightning Experience work in Salesforce Classic, and vice versa. You can edit cross filters Available in: both Salesforce
in either builder. Classic and Lightning
Experience
The steps for editing a cross filter are a little different depending on whether you’re using Lightning
Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re using the Lightning Available in: Enterprise,
Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder. Performance, Unlimited,
Edit a Cross Filter in the Lightning Experience Report Builder
1. Edit a report. Available in: Enhanced
2. From the FILTERS tab, under Cross Filters, find the cross filter you want to edit. Folder Sharing
3. To edit the primary or secondary object, click the cross filter.
a. From the Show Me dropdown, change the primary object. USER PERMISSIONS
b. From the Operator dropdown, choose whether to show your primary object with or
without a secondary object. Then, choose the secondary object. cross filter in private reports:
c. From the Secondary Object dropdown, change the secondary object. • Legacy Folder Sharing
d. Click Apply. Create and
Customize Reports
4. To edit a subfilter on the secondary object, click the sub filter. Enhanced Folder
a. From the Edit Filter menu, change operator and values. Sharing
Create and
b. To change the field of the subfilter, remove the subfilter by clicking X. Then, add another Customize Reports
subfilter based on the desired field.
c. Click Apply. cross filter in private and
public reports:
Edit a Cross Filter in the Salesforce Classic Report Builder
Report Builder
1. Edit a report.
Enhanced Folder
2. From the Filters pane, click find the cross filter you want to edit. Click Edit. Sharing
a. Change primary object, operator, or secondary object. Report Builder OR
Report Builder
b. Edit subfilters by changing field, operator, and value.
(Lightning
c. To delete a subfilter, click Remove. Experience)
d. To add another subfilter, click Add Secondary Object Filter, where
Secondary Object is the name of the secondary object.
3. Click OK.
The report filters based on the primary-secondary object relationship and any additional filters on the secondary object.
Note: In Lightning Experience, although cross filters still filter the report, they do not appear in the Filters panel on the report run
page. If you have permission to edit a report, you can view cross filters in the report builder.
215
Delete a Cross Filter

When you no longer need a cross filter, or a subfilter in a cross filter, delete it.
EDITIONS
delete in Lightning Experience are also deleted in Salesforce Classic, and vice versa. Available in: both Salesforce
The steps for deleting a cross filter are a little different depending on whether you’re using Lightning
Experience
Experience or Salesforce Classic. Follow the instructions based on whether you’re using the Lightning
Experience or the Salesforce Classic report builder. Available in: Enterprise,
Delete a Cross Filter in the Lightning Experience Report Builder Performance, Unlimited,
1. Edit a report.
2. From the FILTERS tab, under Cross Filters, find the cross filter you want to delete. To delete Folder Sharing and Legacy
the cross filter, and all its subfilters, click X. Folder Sharing
3. To delete a subfilter on the cross filter, but not the cross filter, find the subfilter you want
to delete. From the subfilter, click X.
USER PERMISSIONS
Delete a Cross Filter in the Salesforce Classic Report Builder cross filter in private reports:
1. Edit a report. • Legacy Folder Sharing
2. From the Filters pane, find the cross filter you want to delete. To delete the cross filter, and Create and
all its subfilters, click Remove. Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
3. To delete a subfilter on the cross filter, but not the cross filter, click Edit.
Sharing
a. Find the subfilter you want to delete, and click Remove. Create and
Customize Reports
b. Click OK.
4. To save the report, click Save. cross filter in private and
The report filters based on the primary-secondary object relationship and any additional filters on public reports:
the secondary object. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Note: In Lightning Experience, although cross filters still filter the report, they do not appear Report Builder
in the Filters panel on the report run page. If you have permission to edit a report, you can Enhanced Folder
view cross filters in the report builder. Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
216
Example: Use WITH in Cross Filters

Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using WITH conditions. For example,
EDITIONS
filter a report to show just accounts with cases.
Let's say a recent campaign in California won you many new customers. You want to ensure that Available in: both Salesforce
their customer cases get resolved quickly. You can create a report to see which of those accounts Classic and Lightning
currently have cases. Experience
Find Accounts with Cases in the Lightning Experience Report Builder Available in: Enterprise,
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type. Performance, Unlimited,
2. Create a filter where Billing State/Province equals CA and click OK.
Now your report shows all accounts in California. To see Californian accounts with cases, Folder Sharing and Legacy
let’s add a cross filter: Accounts with Cases. Folder Sharing
3. Click > Add Cross Filter.
USER PERMISSIONS
4. From the Show Me dropdown, select Accounts.
5. From the Operator dropdown, select with. To add edit, or delete a
6. From the Secondary Object dropdown, select Cases. • Legacy Folder Sharing
7. Click Apply. Create and
8. Click Save. Customize Reports
Enhanced Folder
Find Accounts with Cases in the Salesforce Classic Report Builder
Sharing
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type. Create and
Customize Reports
2. Create a field filter where Billing State/Province equals CA and click OK.
Now your report shows all accounts in California. To see Californian accounts with cases, To add edit, or delete a
let’s add a cross filter: Accounts with Cases.
public reports:
3. From the Filters pane, click Add > Cross Filter. • Legacy Folder Sharing
4. From the Primary Object dropdown (left of the operator), choose Accounts. Report Builder
5. From the operator dropdown, choose with. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
6. From the Secondary Object dropdown (right of the operator), choose Cases.
Report Builder OR
7. Click OK. Report Builder
8. Click Save. (Lightning
Experience)
When you run the report, the results include only California accounts with associated cases.
SEE ALSO:
217
Example: Use WITHOUT in Cross Filters

Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using WITHOUT conditions. For example,
EDITIONS
filter a report to show just contacts without activities.
Let's say that you've imported a list of California accounts and you want to find which ones are Available in: both Salesforce
missing contacts before you assign owners: Classic and Lightning
Experience
Find Accounts with Missing Contacts in the Lightning Experience Report Builder
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type. Available in: Enterprise,
2. Create a filter where Billing State/Province equals CA and click OK. and Developer Editions
Now your report shows all accounts in California. To see Californian accounts without
contacts, let’s add a cross filter: Accounts without Contacts. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
4. From the Show Me dropdown, select Accounts.
USER PERMISSIONS
5. From the Operator dropdown, select without.
6. From the Secondary Object dropdown, select Contacts. cross filter in private reports:
7. Click Apply. • Legacy Folder Sharing
8. Click Save. Create and
Customize Reports
Find Accounts with Missing Contacts in the Salesforce Classic Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type. Sharing
Create and
2. Create a field filter where Billing State/Province equals CA and click OK.
Customize Reports
Now your report shows all accounts in California. To see Californian accounts without
contacts, let’s add a cross filter: Accounts without Contacts. To add edit, or delete a
3. From the Filters pane, click Add > Cross Filter. public reports:
4. From the Primary Object dropdown (left of the operator), choose Accounts.
5. From the operator dropdown, choose without. Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
6. From the Secondary Object dropdown (right of the operator), choose Contacts.
Sharing
7. Click OK. Report Builder OR
8. Click Save. Report Builder
(Lightning
When you run the report, the results include only California accounts without an associated contact. Experience)
SEE ALSO:
218
Example: Multiple Cross Filters and a Subfilter

Use cross filters to filter a report by an object's child objects using both WITH and WITHOUT
EDITIONS
conditions. For example, filter a report to show accounts that have cases but don’t have activities.
Say you’re a salesperson who wants to see which customer accounts have unresolved escalations Available in: both Salesforce
because you want to ensure that your support team takes care of them. Classic and Lightning
Experience
Find Accounts with Escalated Cases and without Activities in the Lightning Experience
Report Builder Available in: Enterprise,
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type. Performance, Unlimited,
3. From the Show Me dropdown, select Accounts. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
4. From the Operator dropdown, select with.
5. From the Secondary Object dropdown, select Cases.
USER PERMISSIONS
6. Click Apply.
The report now shows Accounts that have Cases. To add edit, or delete a
7. Refine the cross filter so that the report shows Accounts that have Escalated Cases: • Legacy Folder Sharing
a. Click Add Cases Filter. Create and
Customize Reports
b. Select Status.
Enhanced Folder
c. Select Escalated. Sharing
Create and
d. Click Apply.
Customize Reports
Now, add another cross filter so that the report shows only Accounts without Activities.
8. Click cross filter in private and
> Add Cross Filter.
public reports:
9. From the Show Me dropdown, select Accounts. • Legacy Folder Sharing
10. From the Operator dropdown, select without. Report Builder
11. From the Secondary Object dropdown, select Activities. Enhanced Folder
12. Click Apply. Sharing
Report Builder OR
13. Click Save.
Report Builder
Find Accounts with Escalated Cases and without Activities in the Salesforce Classic Report (Lightning
Builder Experience)
1. Edit or create a report based on the Accounts report type.
2. From the Filters pane, click Add > Cross Filter.
4. From the operator dropdown, choose with.
6. Refine the cross filter so that the report shows Accounts that have Escalated Cases:
a. Click Add Cases Filter.
b. From the Case Field dropdown, select Status.
c. From the Operator dropdown, select equals.
219
d. From the picklist lookup, enter or select Escalated.
7. Click OK.
Now, add another cross filter so that the report shows only Accounts without Activities.
8. From the Filters pane, click Add > Cross Filter.

10. From the operator dropdown, choose with.
12. Click Save.
When you run the report, it includes only customer accounts with escalated cases and without activities.
SEE ALSO:
220
Cross Filter Considerations and Limits

As you create and work with cross filters, take note of these considerations and limits.
EDITIONS
Considerations
• Adding cross filters can potentially slow down your report. To avoid having the report or
preview time out, limit the data returned by setting filters. For example, select My
Experience
opportunities for Show and Current FQ for Range instead of viewing all
opportunities for all time. Available in: Enterprise,
• Since the objects available in cross filters depend on the parent object of the report type Performance, Unlimited,
you choose, consider the related child objects before selecting a report type. For example, and Developer Editions
choose the Accounts report type to filter on Accounts with Partners because Available in: Enhanced
Partner is a child object of Account. Folder Sharing and Legacy
• Cross filters work in conjunction with your report type selection. Cross filters have an AND Folder Sharing
relationship with the report type you select. Choosing a report type of Accounts with Partners
and adding a cross filter for Accounts without Partners will yield no results. USER PERMISSIONS
• In Lightning Experience, although cross filters appear on the run page, you cannot change
their values on the run page. If you have permission to edit a report, you can change cross To add edit, or delete a
filter values in the report builder. cross filter in private reports:
• When you filter on a Salesforce object ID, the ID must be 15 or 18 characters in length and
the ID is not case-sensitive. Create and
Customize Reports
Limits
Enhanced Folder
• Each report can have up to 3 cross filters. Sharing
Create and
• Each cross filter can have up to 5 subfilters.
Customize Reports
• Filter logic doesn’t apply to cross filters.
SEE ALSO: public reports:
Example: Multiple Cross Filters and a Subfilter • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create a Cross Filter Report Builder
Example: Use WITH in Cross Filters Enhanced Folder
Example: Use WITHOUT in Cross Filters Sharing
Report Builder OR
Report Builder
(Lightning
Experience)
221
Filter Report Data by Role Hierarchy

You can view records based on org structure or job function? Get records owned by everyone in a
EDITIONS
job role (like sales manager) and their subordinate roles (such as sales person) by filtering your
report on a role. Available in: both Salesforce
For example, to see opportunities owned by sales team members in California, filter your opportunity Classic (not available in all
report by the role Sales Manager - California. Optionally, drill down on opportunities owned by a orgs) and Lightning
specific sales manager in California, narrow your results by a specific person in the role. Experience
Note: Role hierarchy filters are available for reports based on these standard report types: Available in: Essentials,
• Activity Enterprise, Performance,
• Task Unlimited, and Developer
• Event Editions
• Campaigns with Opportunities

• Forecasts USER PERMISSIONS
• Opportunity, except for: To add or edit a filter
– Opportunities with Competitors • Create and Customize
Reports
– Opportunities with Contact Roles
AND
– Opportunities with Contact Roles and Products
Report Builder
– Opportunity History
– Opportunities with Partners To lock or unlock filters so
that users can’t edit them
– Opportunities with Teams while viewing a report in
– Opportunities with Teams and Products Lightning Experience
Reports
Filter by Role Hierarchy in Lightning Experience AND
In Lightning Experience, you can filter by role hierarchy while reading or editing a report. Report Builder
While Editing a Report in the Lightning Experience Report Builder To edit a filter while viewing
Experience
2. From the FILTERS tab, click Show Me. • Run Reports
3. From the Show Me menu, filter by a role.
4. Further filter the report by narrowing the results by a person in your selected role. Narrowing by a person shows records that
belong to that person, and to people in roles that report to that person.
5. To reset your selection, click Clear Selection.
6. Click Done.
7. Click Save.
While Viewing a Report
1. To filter a report, on the report run page, click to open the Filters panel.
2. In the Filters panel, click Role Hierarchy, and filter by a role.
If you select a role above your role in the hierarchy, such as CEO, the report results doesn’t show records that you don’t have
permission to view. You only see records you’re allowed to view based on your role.
222
3. Further filter the report by narrowing the results by a person in your selected role. Narrowing by a person shows records that
belong to that person, and to people in roles that report to that person.
Filter by Role Hierarchy in Salesforce Classic

1. From the report run page, click Show Hierarchy.
2. Drill down to a role.
3. If you want the report to open already filtered by a role, drill down to the role and click Customize to open the report builder. Then,
click Report Properties and check Save Hierarchy Level. From Report Properties, click Save, then from the report builder click
Save again.
This behavior applies when using custom report types in Salesforce Classic. If you previously saved a report without selecting a role, the
report is filtered by your role when you run it. If you don’t have an assigned role, the report is filtered by the topmost role.
Note: If you remove the View Roles and Role Hierarchy permission, users can still view the hierarchy information in Salesforce
Classic reports.
Filter Reports with URL Parameters in Lightning Experience

When linking to or bookmarking a report, add filter value parameters to the URL to customize how
EDITIONS
the report appears when opened. For example, bookmark your opportunities report and add a filter
to specify whether you see New Business or Existing Business. Available in: Lightning
1. Start with a report that includes the filters and values that you want to make available using Experience
the custom URL.
2. Obtain the base URL for the filtered report in either of the following ways: Group, Professional,
Starting from What to do
Analytics tab Open the report from the Analytics tab. Click Editions
Share . A window opens to show the

URL. Select the URL text and copy it to a text USER PERMISSIONS
file.
To filter a report in Lightning
Reports tab Open the report. Copy the URL from your Experience:
browser’s address bar and paste it into a text • Run Reports
file.
3. Append &fv0=Filter Value to the end of the report’s URL, substituting your parameters.
a. The & indicates a new parameter in the URL. If the base URL doesn’t already include a ? to indicate other parameters, use ?
instead of &.
b. For fv0, substitute 0 for the numerical order in which the filter appears in the report.
The first filter is 0, the second filter is 1, and so on. For example, to set the value of the fifth filter in the report, specify fv4. For
all reports, the first three filters are standard filters. However, you can’t filter standard filters with URL parameters, so they don’t
count in this order.
The order in which filters appear in Lightning Experience on the report run page isn’t necessarily the order that filters appear in
the report. Locked filters are listed beneath unlocked filters on the run page, but aren't necessarily ordered after all the unlocked
filters. To see the order of filters in your report, check their order in the report builder. Alternatively, make a GET call to
/services/data/v39.0/analytics/reports/<report ID>/describe and note their order in the JSON
response.
223
c. For Filter Value, enter the criteria that the filter operates on.
The filter value must be URI encoded, so certain characters (such as spaces) must be written in a format that URLs can understand.
For example, a space is %20 when URI encoded.
4. Navigate to the report’s URL with the parameter appended.

When the report opens, the filters are applied as specified in the URL.
Example: To stay on top of your opportunities, you check your report periodically throughout the day. You always open the
report and edit a filter to show either Existing Business or New Business. (The Type filter includes these filters by default.)
Each time that you check you have to load the report, edit the filter, and reload the report. Instead, to save time, create two URLs
that you can bookmark: one with the filter value parameter set to New Business, and another with the filter value parameter set
to Existing Business.
To set up the filter URL, identify the URL for the report. This example URL is from a report that’s opened from the Reports tab.
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/lightning/r/Report/00OB0000003TFr2MAG/view?queryScope=userFolders
Edit the URL to set the Type filter value to New Business by appending the parameter &fv0=New%20Business. Use
URI encoding for the parameter value. For example, here the space between "New" and "Business" is written as %20. The complete
bookmarked URL reads:
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/lightning/r/Report/00OB0000003TFr2MAG/view?queryScope=userFolders&fv0=New%20Business
When you navigate to your opportunity report using the URL, the report opens filtered and ready to read.
224
These limitations apply to report filter URLs:

• Only field filters can have parameters included in a URL. The first field filter is fv0, the second is fv1, and so on. The following
filter types aren’t supported in URLs and aren’t assigned an fv number:
– Standard filters (role hierarchy filters, scope filters, date filters)
– Cross filters
– Row-limit filters
– Chart filters
– Locked filters
• Only the equals operator is supported. You can't create filter URLs with operators such as less than, starts with,
or contains.
• You can’t change the field being filtered using URL parameters.
• You can assign at most one value per filter. For example, you can include fv0=Acme in a filter URL but not
fv0=Acme&fv0=Universal.
• You can't add new filters to reports using filter value URL parameters. You can only modify existing filters.
• You can’t delete filters from reports using filter value URL parameters. Setting a blank value removes the filtering from the URL,
but doesn’t delete the filter.
• You can’t use filter value URL parameters with historical tracking reports.
• Report filter URLs aren't supported in Salesforce Classic.
225
Filter Field History Reports by Old and New Values

EDITIONS

Experience


Folder Sharing
226
Field history reports let you track changes in fields by adding an “Old Value” and a “New Value”
USER PERMISSIONS
column. With a field history report, each report row represents a change to a record. By filtering a
field history report, you can answer questions like “Which opportunities have we closed so far this To add or edit a filter:
financial quarter?” • Legacy Folder Sharing
Before filtering on Old Value and New Value, ensure that field tracking is turned on for your Salesforce Create and
org. If you don’t see any field history report types (such as Opportunity Field History), or if your field Customize Reports
history report isn’t returning any records even though you know that records have changed, then AND
ask your admin to turn on field history tracking. For information about field tracking, including how Report Builder
to set it up, see Field History Tracking in Salesforce help.
Enhanced Folder
All filters on the Old Value and New Value fields are text filters, which sometimes means that special Sharing
consideration is needed. Even if New Value captures a change to, say, a numeric field - like Amount Create and
- it captures the number as text. That means that filter operators like “greater than” and “less than” Customize Reports
won’t work like you’d expect. If a field is represents a currency - like USD 1,000.50 - and you filter AND
the report to show New Value equals USD 1,000.50, then the filter may not return Report Builder
any records for a colleague who works in a different locale. For example, for your colleague in Paris
to get the same report results, the filter would probably need to read New Value equals To lock or unlock filters so
USD 1 000,50 because numer formats vary widely by locale. that users can’t edit them
To see which opportunities closed this financial quarter, create an report based on the report type Lightning Experience:
Opportunity Field History, then add these filters: • Legacy Folder Sharing
• Ensure that the Edit Date standard filter is set to Current FQ. Create and
Customize Reports
• New Value contains Closed
AND
• Old Value does not contain Closed
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
To edit a filter while viewing

Experience:
• Run Reports
227
Filter Knowledge Reports by Category

EDITIONS

Experience
Available in:
Unlimited Editions with
Service Cloud.
cost in: Professional,
your Salesforce
representative.
228
Return information about entire categories and subcategories of knowledge articles with category
USER PERMISSIONS
filters.
Say you have categories defined by geographic region. The root category lists countries like United To add or edit a filter:
States, Mexico, and Canada. Under United States, categories include individual states like Arizona, • Legacy Folder Sharing
California, and Oregon. Under each state, categories include cities. Category filters have their own Create and
operators: Customize Reports
• at—Return knowledge articles in the specified category. AND
• above—Return knowledge articles above and in the specified category. Report Builder
• below—Return knowledge articles below and in the specified category. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
• above or below—Return all knowledge articles above, below, and in the specified category. Create and
If there is more than one root category, then the filter returns only knowledge articles that are Customize Reports
part of the parent root category. AND
So with a category filter on United States below Arizona, your report returns knowledge Report Builder
articles about cities like Tucson and Phoenix. Or, with a category filter on United States
above Arizona, your report instead excludes knowledge articles about cities in Arizona. To lock or unlock filters so
that users can’t edit them
Add a category filter while editing a Knowledge report. while viewing a report in
1. From the Lightning Experience report builder, open the filter menu by clicking Lightning Experience:
Filters.
2. Click > Add Category Filter (1). Create and
Customize Reports
A category filter section appears in the filter pane (2).
AND
3. Choose a category to filter by (3). Report Builder
4. Choose an operator. Options are: Enhanced Folder
• at—Return knowledge articles in the specified category. Sharing
Create and
• above—Return knowledge articles above and in the specified category. Customize Reports
• below—Return knowledge articles below and in the specified category. AND
• above or below—Return all knowledge articles above, below, and in the specified category. Report Builder
5. Click Apply. To edit a filter while viewing

6. To save and read your filtered report, click Save & Run.
Experience:
Report data filters based on the criteria you set. • Run Reports
Note: Data category filters are only available on report types that include the Knowledge
object, such as Knowledge Articles or Knowledge with Cases.
Filters Type Reference

Several different types of filters help you scope your report data: standard filters, field filters, cross filters, and row limit filters. Each filter
type filters your report in different ways. This list of filter types helps you choose the right filter types for your report.
Filter Type Description

Standard Filter Standard filters are applied by default to most objects. Different objects have different standard
filters, but most objects include the standard filters Show Me and Date Field. Show
Me filters the object around common groupings (like “My accounts” or “All accounts”). Date
229
Filter Type Description

Field filters by a field (such as Created Date or Last Activity) and a date range
(such as “All Time” or “Last Month”).
Field Filter Field filters are available for reports, list views, workflow rules, and other areas of the application.
For each filter, set the field, operator, and value. For all report types except joined reports, you
can add a report filter by dragging a field from the Fields pane to the Filters pane.
Filter Logic Add Boolean conditions to control how field filters are evaluated. Add at least 1 field filter before
applying filter logic.
Cross Filter Filter a report by the child object using WITH or WITHOUT conditions. Add subfilters to further
filter by fields on the child object. For example, if you have a cross filter of Accounts with
Opportunities, click Add Opportunity Filter and create the Opportunity Name
equals ACME subfilter to only include those opportunities.
Row Limit For tabular reports, select the maximum number of rows to display, then choose a field to sort
by and the sort order. You can use a tabular report as the source report for a dashboard table
or chart widget, if you limit the number of rows it returns.
To add a report with a row limit filter, specify a "name" and "value" in Dashboard Settings in the Report Builder.
Example: Using Row Limits in Report Filters

Here is where you can see a sample of a report filter using a field filter, filter logic, and a row limit.
230
Example: Using Row Limits in Report Filters

Here is where you can see a sample of a report filter using a field filter, filter logic, and a row limit.
EDITIONS
Say you are a sales executive who wants to see which California accounts currently have the most
potential to generate revenue: Available in: Salesforce
1. Click New Report from the Reports tab.
orgs)
2. Open the Accounts & Contacts report type, choose Accounts, and click Create.
3. To find California accounts that either have over $10 million in revenue or are public companies, Essentials, Professional,
click Add > Field Filter and create these filters: Enterprise, Performance,
a. Billing State/Province equals CA Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
b. Annual Revenue greater than 10000000
c. Ownership equals Public
4. To ensure that your results include all California accounts with $10 million in revenue OR that Folder Sharing
are public, click Add > Filter Logic and enter 1 AND (2 OR 3).
5. To limit the number of results for a tabular report to 10, click Add > Row Limit and enter 10. USER PERMISSIONS
Choose your sort field and sort order. Click OK.
When you click Run Report, your results will contain ten rows and include public companies in reports:
California with revenues of more than $10 million. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Create and
SEE ALSO: Customize Reports
Filters Type Reference AND
Limit Report Results Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Filter Operators Reference Create and
The operator in a filter is like the verb in a sentence. Operators specify how filter criteria relate to Customize Reports
each other. Refer to this list of filter operators when setting filters on list views, reports, dashboards, AND
and some custom fields. Report Builder
Operator Uses
equals Use for an exact match. For example, “Created equals today.”
less than Use for results that are less than the value you enter. For example, “Quota less
than 20000” returns records where the quota field ranges from 0 to 19,999.99.
greater than Use when you want results that exceed the value you enter. For example, “Quota
greater than 20000” returns records where the quota amount begins at 20,000.01.
less or equal Use for results that match or are less than the value that you enter.
greater or Use for results that match or exceed the value that you enter.
equal
231
Operator Uses
not equal to Shows results that don’t have the value that you enter. This operator is useful for eliminating empty fields. For
example, “Email not equal to <blank>.”
If evaluating more than one value, none of the specified values can exist on the record. For example, if you
specify not equal to A & C, only records where the value is neither A nor C are returned.
contains Use for fields that include your search string, but sometimes also include other information. For example,
“Account contains California” finds California Travel, California Pro Shop, and Surf California. Keep in mind that
if you enter a short search string, it can match a longer word. For example, “Account contains pro” finds California
Pro Shop and Promotions Corporation. This operator isn’t case-sensitive except when it's used in roll-up summary
(RSF) field filters. For example, you have this filter criteria for an RSF field: Opportunity name contains widgets.
The query that creates the RSF field value only returns records with a name value that contains widgets. Records
with name values that contain Widgets or WIDGETS aren’t included.
does not contain Eliminates records that don’t contain the value you enter. For example, “Mailing Address Line 2 does not contain
P. O. Box.”
When specifying filter criteria on roll-up summary fields, does not contain uses “or” logic on
comma-separated values. On list views, reports, and dashboards, does not contain uses “and” logic.
This operator isn’t case-sensitive except when it's used in roll-up summary (RSF) field filters.
starts with Use when you know what your value starts with, but not the exact text. This operator is a narrower search term
than “contains.” For example, if you enter “Account starts with California,” you find California Travel and California
Pro Shop, but not Surf California.
includes Available when you choose a multi-select picklist as the selected field. Use this operator to find records that
include one or more of the values that you enter.
For example, if you enter “Interests includes hockey, football, baseball,” you find records that have only hockey
selected, and records that have two or three of the values entered. Results don’t include partial matches of
values.
excludes Available when you choose a multi-select picklist as the selected field. Use this operator to find records that
don’t contain any values that match the ones entered.
For example, if you enter “Interests exclude wine, golf,” your report lists records that contain any other values
from that picklist, including values that are blank. Results don’t include partial matches of values.
Enter values on separate lines.
between Available for dashboard filters only. Use to filter on ranges of values. For each range, the filter returns results
that are greater than or equal to the minimum value and less than the maximum value.
For example, if you enter “Number of Employees from 100 through 500,” your results include accounts with
100 employees up to those with 499 employees. Accounts with 500 employees aren’t included in the results.
within Available when you create list views based on a geolocation custom field. Shows results that are within the
specified radius from a fixed latitude and longitude. For example, if you enter “Warehouse location within 50
miles 37.775° –122.418°,” your list view includes all warehouses within a 50–mile radius of San Francisco,
California.
232

Relative date filters let you filter on date fields using easy-to-understand, human-speech-inspired syntax.
For example, instead of filtering on Close Date greater than Jan 1, 2017, filter using a relative date: Close Date
equals this year.
For Enterprise, Unlimited, Performance, Professional, and Developer Editions, the week is defined by the Locale dropdown list on your
personal information page. For Contact Manager, Group, and Personal Editions, the week is defined by the Locale setting in the company
profile. For example, when the locale is US English, a week runs Sunday to Saturday, whereas with UK English, a week spans Monday to
Sunday.
Capitalization doesn't matter in relative date filter operators. THIS YEAR works, as do This Year and this year.
Notes:
• Standard filters and custom field filters interpret relative date filters that begin with NEXT n DAYS - differently. Standard date filters
return records that are time-stamped on the day that the report is run continuing for n days. Custom field filters return records
time-stamped on the day after the day the report is run continuing for n days.
For example, say that your opportunity report's standard date filter is CLOSE DATE equals NEXT 5 DAYS and you run it
on October 24. The report returns opportunities that close sometime between October 24 through October 28.
Say that your opportunity report has a custom field filter (instead of a standard date filter) for CLOSE DATE equals NEXT
5 DAYS and you run it on October 24. The report returns opportunities that close sometime between October 25 through October
29.
• The drill down option for reports in Lightning Experience works only if the date field is grouped by any of the options available in
the list of relative date filters in the following table. For example, if the date field on the report is grouped by Fiscal Period or Fiscal
Week, you cannot drill down in the report.
Relative Date Value Range

YESTERDAY Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the day before the current day and continues for 24 hours.
TODAY Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the current day and continues for 24 hours.
TOMORROW Starts at 12:00:00 AM. on the day after the current day and continues for 24 hours.
LAST WEEK Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the week before the current week and
continues for seven days.
THIS WEEK Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the current week and continues for seven
days.
NEXT WEEK Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the week after the current week and
continues for seven days.
LAST n WEEKS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the week that started n weeks before the
current week, and continues up to 11:59 PM on the last day of the week before
the current week.
NEXT n WEEKS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the week after the current week and
continues for n times seven days.
n WEEKS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the week that started n weeks before the
start of the current week and continues for seven days.
233

LAST MONTH Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the month before the current month and
continues for all the days of that month.
THIS MONTH Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the current month and continues for all
the days of that month.
NEXT n MONTHS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the month after the current month and
continues until the end of the nth month.
LAST n MONTHS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the month that started n months before
the current month and continues up to 11:59 PM on the last day of the month
before the current month.
n MONTHS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the month that started n months before
the start of the current month and continues for all the days of that month.
NEXT MONTH Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the month after the current month and
continues for all the days of that month.
LAST n DAYS Starts at 12:00:00 AM n days before the current day and continues up to the
current second. (The range includes today. Using this date value includes records
from n + 1 days ago up to the current day.) In standard filters, n can be 7, 30,
60, 90, or 120.
NEXT n DAYS For standard date filters, starts at 12:00:00 AM on the day that the report is run
and continues for n days. (The range includes today.) In standard filters, n can be
7, 30, 60, 90, or 120.
For custom field filters, starts at 12:00:00 AM on the next day and continues for
the next n days. (The range does not include today.)
n DAYS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the day n days before the current day and continues for
24 hours. (The range does not include today.)
LAST QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the calendar quarter before the current
calendar quarter and continues to the end of that quarter.
THIS QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the current calendar quarter and continues
to the end of the quarter.
NEXT QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the calendar quarter after the current
calendar quarter and continues to the end of that quarter.
LAST n QUARTERS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the calendar quarter n quarters ago and
continues to the end of the calendar quarter before the current quarter. (The range
does not include the current quarter.)
NEXT n QUARTERS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the calendar quarter after the current
quarter and continues to the end of the calendar quarter n quarters in the future.
(The range does not include the current quarter.)
n QUARTERS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the calendar quarter n quarters before
the current calendar quarter and continues to the end of that quarter.
234

LAST YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on January 1 of the year before the current year and continues
through the end of December 31 of that year.
THIS YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on January 1 of the current year and continues through the
end of December 31 of the current year.
NEXT YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on January 1 of the year after the current year and continues
through the end of December 31 of that year.
n YEARS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on January 1 of the calendar year n years before the current
calendar year and continues through the end of December 31 of that year.
LAST n YEARS Starts at 12:00:00 am on January 1, n+1 years ago. The range ends on December
31 of the year before the current year.
NEXT n YEARS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on January 1 of the year after the current year and continues
through the end of December 31 of the nth year.
LAST FISCAL QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal quarter before the current fiscal
quarter and continues through the last day of that fiscal quarter. The fiscal quarter
is defined on the Fiscal Year page in Setup.
Note: None of the FISCAL literal date values are supported when creating
mobile custom views.
THIS FISCAL QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the current fiscal quarter and continues
through the end of the last day of the current fiscal quarter. The fiscal quarter is
defined on the Fiscal Year page in Setup.
NEXT FISCAL QUARTER Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal quarter after the current fiscal
quarter and continues through the last day of that fiscal quarter. (The range does
not include the current quarter.) The fiscal quarter is defined on the Fiscal Year
page in Setup.
LAST n FISCAL QUARTERS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal quarter n fiscal quarters ago and
continues through the end of the last day of the previous fiscal quarter. (The range
does not include the current fiscal quarter.) The fiscal quarter is defined on the
Fiscal Year page in Setup.
NEXT n FISCAL QUARTERS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal quarter after the current fiscal
quarter and continues through the end of the last day of the nth fiscal quarter.
(The range does not include the current fiscal quarter.) The fiscal quarter is defined
on the Fiscal Year page in Setup.
n FISCAL QUARTERS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal quarter n fiscal quarters before
the current fiscal quarter and continues through the end of the last day of that
fiscal quarter.
LAST FISCAL YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal year before the current fiscal year
and continues through the end of the last day of that fiscal year. The fiscal quarter
235

THIS FISCAL YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the current fiscal year and continues
through the end of the last day of the fiscal year. The fiscal quarter is defined on
the Fiscal Year page in Setup.
NEXT FISCAL YEAR Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal year after the current fiscal year
and continues through the end of the last day of that fiscal year. The fiscal quarter
LAST n FISCAL YEARS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal year n fiscal years ago and
continues through the end of the last day of the fiscal year before the current fiscal
year. (The range does not include the current fiscal year.) The fiscal quarter is
defined on the Fiscal Year page in Setup.
NEXT n FISCAL YEARS Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal year after the current fiscal year
and continues through the end of the last day of the nth fiscal year. (The range
does not include the current fiscal year.) The fiscal quarter is defined on the Fiscal
Year page in Setup.
n FISCAL YEARS AGO Starts at 12:00:00 AM on the first day of the fiscal year n fiscal years ago and
continues through the end of the last day of that fiscal year.

Keep these tips in mind when filtering on text fields, date fields, numeric values, picklist values, and blank or null values.
Filtering on Text Fields

• Separate search terms by commas to filter by more than one value. For example, to search for accounts in California, New York, or
Washington, use State contains CA,NY,WA.
• Filtering isn't case-sensitive. For example, searching State contains ID returns all matches for “ID”, but also returns any
instances of “Florida” and “Idaho” because they contain “id” in their names.
• When you filter on standard long text area fields, such as Description or Solution Details, only the first 1000 characters of the field
are searched for matches in reports. Only the first 255 characters are shown for custom long text area fields in list views.
• If your org has Enable Middle Names for Person Names turned on, which adds a "Middle Name" field to standard objects like
users, leads, and contacts, then you may notice that the "Full Name" field on reports excludes middle names.
For example, if a user's first, middle, and last name are Nadia Nancy Smith, then in reports the full name appears as "Nadia Smith".
As a work-around, consider adding a person's middle name to their "First Name" field; "Nadia" would become "Nadia Nancy".
A missing middle name could cause issues if you’re filtering reports on the "Full Name" field, because filtering by Full Name
equals Nadia Nancy Smith doesn't return the user. Instead, filter the report by Full Name equals Nadia
Smith or add three filters:
– First Name equals Nadia
– Middle Name equals Nancy
– Last Name equals Smith
Note: Case reports and Lead reports are affected by the discrepancy between Full Name and Middle Name described
in this article. Other reports may also be affected, but not all reports are.
236
• Field formatting for names in list view differs between Classic and Lightning. In Classic, names use the format "Lastname,
Firstname". In Lightning, names use the format Firstname Lastname.
Filtering on Date Fields

• If entering a date, use the format allowed by your Locale setting. You can also use special date values like TODAY, NEXT WEEK,
NEXT YEAR, LAST <number> DAYS, and so on.
• The standard Birthdate field allows you to filter the birthdate based only on the month and day, ignoring the year. The year is always
included when you filter on any custom date fields.
Filtering on Numeric Values

• Place quotation marks around numbers or other data that includes commas. For example Amount equals "10,000" returns
records that have an amount of $10,000 but Amount equals 10,000 returns $10,000 as well as $10 and $0.
• To search for phone numbers, include the exact phone number formatting or example, Phone starts with (561).
Filtering on Picklist Values

• When filtering on multi-select picklist fields, use a semicolon between values to specify an exact match.
For example, selecting the “equals” operator and a semicolon between two values includes records with both values specified,
excluding all other values.
• If your organization uses record types, the lookup dialog lists picklist values for all record types. Use the “equals” or “not equal to”
operators for these filters.
Note: If you change the label for a picklist value that’s used as a filter criterion, the picklist value is automatically removed
from the filter criteria. For example, if your report contains a filter where Lead Source equals Email or Web and
you change the picklist value Web to Referral, your report filter changes to Lead Source equals Email. If the changed
picklist value was the only value specified for a particular filter, it continues to show up in your filters, but an error appears.
Filtering on Blank or Null Values

• When you use the “less than,” "greater than,” “less or equal,” or “greater or equal” operators on fields that have numeric values, records
with blank or “null” values are returned as if their value is zero (0). For example, if you create a workflow rule or a lead assignment
rule for accounts with the criteria Annual Revenue less than 100000, account records match if their Annual
Revenue is blank.
However, records with blank field values aren’t considered matches in report filters, custom list views, and account assignment rules
(which assign accounts to territories).
• To limit results to records that are blank or contain “null” values for a particular field, choose the field and the “equals” or “not equal
to” operators, leaving the third field blank. For example, Amount equals returns records with blank amount fields. You can
search for blank values or other specified values at the same time. For example, Amount equals 1,,2 returns records where
the Amount is blank or contains the value “1” or “2”.
SEE ALSO:
237
Tips for Filtering on Multiple Currencies

Tips for filtering on currency fields when your organization uses multiple currencies.
EDITIONS
If your organization uses multiple currencies, follow these tips to create more effective filters:
• Use the Currency field to find items with a particular currency. For example, Opportunity
Currency equals AUD finds opportunities with amounts in Australian dollars.
Experience
• Prefix currency amounts with a currency code, such as Annual Revenue greater
than USD 50000000. Available in: Essentials,
Without the currency code, all amounts are assumed to be in the user's currency. For example, Enterprise, Performance,
if the user's currency is U.S. dollars, Annual Revenue greater than 50000000 Unlimited, and Developer
means 50 million U.S. dollars. Editions
If the user's currency is invalid, the corporate currency is used.
From Setup, enter Manage Currencies in the Quick Find box, then select Manage
Currencies to obtain the currency codes.
• All amounts are converted to the corporate currency for comparison. For example, Annual Revenue greater than USD
50000000 finds accounts with revenue greater than 50 million U.S. dollars. This would include an account with revenue of 114
million Australian dollars, which is the equivalent of 60 million U.S. dollars, assuming a conversion rate of 1.9.
• Amounts in reports are shown in their original currencies, and report totals are displayed in your personal currency. You can change
the currency used for report totals by clicking Show > Currencies. For any amount, you can also choose to display the “converted”
column (for example, “Annual Revenue (converted)”), which will show amounts in the currency you select from the Display Currencies
Using drop-down list.
SEE ALSO:

Receive notifications that keep you informed about metrics you care most about without having
EDITIONS
to manually run reports. In Salesforce Classic, you can specify criteria that trigger report notifications.
Watch a video: Available in: both Salesforce
• Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning Experience) Experience
• Report Notifications (Salesforce Classic)
• Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic) Group, Professional,
Subscribe to Reports in Lightning Experience Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Instead of manually running and emailing a report to your team, you can subscribe to a report.
Subscribe yourself and other users, groups, or roles to receive refreshed report results by email
on a schedule that you set.
Get Notified When Report Conditions Are Met
Set report conditions so that recipients are notified when a total in your Salesforce report reaches a meaningful threshold.
Attach Files to Report Subscriptions
When subscribing to a report, choose to receive report results as a formatted spreadsheet (.XLSX) or a comma-separated (.CSV)
file attached to the subscription email.
238
Subscribe to Get Report Notifications in Salesforce Classic

In Salesforce Classic, subscribe to a report to receive report notifications periodically when the metrics you care about most meet
certain conditions. Set the conditions that trigger notification, and specify if you want to be notified via Salesforce app notifications,
Chatter, or email.
Report on Subscriptions and Notifications
Combine subscriptions, actions, and conditions in a single joined report that shows who set up each subscription, the schedule and
conditions, and the recipients and actions. Learn about the objects used in subscription reporting and the cron expressions for
subscription schedules.
Schedule Reports in Salesforce Classic
You can set up a report to run itself daily, weekly, or monthly and send the results automatically to the people who need them. That
way, you don’t have to remember to log in and do it yourself.
Subscribe to Reports in Lightning Experience

Instead of manually running and emailing a report to your team, you can subscribe to a report.
EDITIONS
Subscribe yourself and other users, groups, or roles to receive refreshed report results by email on
a schedule that you set. Available in: Lightning
Watch a video: Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning Experience) Experience
1. From the Reports tab or from the report run page, select Available in: Essentials,
> Subscribe.
Group, Platform,
2. In the Edit Subscription window, set the subscription schedule. Professional, Enterprise,
3. To have the report results delivered as an attached file, click Attach File. Performance, Unlimited,
a. Select Formatted Report (.xlsx format) or Report Details (.csx format). For .csx attachments,
it’s optional to change the encoding type.
USER PERMISSIONS
b. Click Save.
To subscribe to reports:
4. Add recipients or remove yourself.
• Subscribe to Reports
You’re automatically added as a recipient.
To subscribe other people to
a. Click Edit Recipients. reports:
b. Select from the available entity types and start typing to see all the matching names. • Subscribe to Reports:
Add Recipients
Only the users, groups, or roles with permission to access the report are listed.
c. Select from the matching options and click Add. reports by groups or roles:
• Subscribe to Reports:
d. Close the Edit Recipients window. Send to Groups and
When the subscription emails the refreshed report to each recipient, it sends it to the email Roles
address set in Settings > Email > My Email Settings. If no email is set in My Email Settings To specify who runs the
the refreshed report is sent to the recipient’s email address set on their Salesforce User record. report in a report
subscription:
5. Under Run Report As, specify whose perspective is used when running the report. • Subscribe to Reports: Set
• Me—You run the report, and recipients see the same report data that you see. Running User
• Another Person—Recipients see the same report data as the person you select. The person
must have permission to run reports and have access to this report.
Important: Recipients see the same report data as the person running the report. It’s possible that they see more or less data
than they normally see in Salesforce.
239
6. Optionally, add conditions. The conditions are evaluated when the report is run according to the schedule you set. The report is
emailed only if all conditions are met. For each condition, select an aggregate measure, an operator, and a value to match. You can
add up to 5 conditions.
7. Click Save.
The report subscription starts, and recipients begin receiving report results by email according to the schedule and conditions you set.
For considerations, review Reports and Dashboards Limits and Allocations on page 464.
240
Get Notified When Report Conditions Are Met

Set report conditions so that recipients are notified when a total in your Salesforce report reaches
EDITIONS
a meaningful threshold.
1. From the Reports tab or from the report run page, select Available in: Lightning
> Subscribe.
Experience
2. In the Schedule area of the setup screen, set the schedule for updating your report.
3. In the Conditions area, select Add conditions to this report. Group, Professional,
4. Select the aggregate to which the threshold applies, such as Record Count. Enterprise, Performance,
5. Select the operator for comparison, such as Greater Than.
Editions
6. Enter the threshold value, such as 400.
7. To add additional conditions, click + Add Condition. USER PERMISSIONS
With multiple conditions, the threshold is met if all conditions are met (AND match).
To subscribe to reports:
8. To send a summary of the conditions that were met plus the full report, select Summary + • Subscribe to Reports
Report. To send only a summary of the conditions that were met, select Summary only.
9. In the Edit Recipients select the users, groups, or roles to receive the notifications. reports:
• Subscribe to Reports:
10. Click Save.
Add Recipients
Each time your report runs, the report conditions are checked. If the threshold conditions are met, To specify who runs the
email is sent to the specified recipients with a summary of the conditions that were met. If you report in a report
select Summary + Report, a copy of the full report is sent along with a summary of the conditions subscription:
that were met. • Subscribe to Reports: Set
Running User
Attach Files to Report Subscriptions

USER PERMISSIONS EDITIONS
To subscribe to reports: Subscribe to Reports Available in: Lightning

Experience
To subscribe other people to reports: Subscribe to Reports: Add Recipients
To subscribe other people to reports by Subscribe to Reports: Send to Groups and
groups or roles: Roles
To specify who runs the report in a report Subscribe to Reports: Set Running User Unlimited, and Developer
subscription: Editions
To attach files to report subscriptions Export Reports
When subscribing to a report, choose to receive report results as a formatted spreadsheet (.XLSX) or a comma-separated (.CSV) file
attached to the subscription email.
1. From the Reports tab or from the report run page, click > Subscribe.
2. Click Attach File.
3. Choose to attach a Formatted Report (.XLSX) or a Details Only (.CSV) file.
4. If attaching a details only (.CSV) file, optionally choose an encoding.
241
5. Click Save.
The Edit Subscription menu shows that report results are included as an attachment.
6. Click Save.
The subscription email arrives with an attached file containing report results.
Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
The attached report can include up to 15,000 rows, 30 columns, and 3-MB file size. Extra data is clipped or not sent. To view the
entire report in Salesforce, click the report title in the formatted report email or sign in to Salesforce and search for the report.
SEE ALSO:
Let Users Attach Files to Report Subscriptions

In Salesforce Classic, subscribe to a report to receive report notifications periodically when the
EDITIONS
metrics you care about most meet certain conditions. Set the conditions that trigger notification,
and specify if you want to be notified via Salesforce app notifications, Chatter, or email. Available in: Salesforce
For example, you could subscribe to an open-issue report and get notified every morning if there Classic
are over 20 open issues. You can subscribe to notifications for up to five reports.
Watch a demo: Report Notifications (Salesforce Classic) Platform, Professional,
Note: Report Notifications doesn’t appear as an available option for unsaved reports. Save Unlimited, and Developer
the report before subscribing to it. Editions
Personal Report Notifications aren’t related to the Schedule Future Runs feature, which enables
you to email reports at specified times without specifying conditions. To schedule emailed
USER PERMISSIONS
reports, select Schedule Future Runs from the Run Report dropdown menu.
To subscribe to reports in
1. On the Report Run page, click Subscribe. Salesforce Classic:
2. On the Report Subscription page, choose whether to be notified each time conditions are met • Run Reports
or only the first time. To enable or disable
3. Specify each condition in three parts: aggregate, operator, value. Salesforce Classic report
notification subscriptions:
For example, trigger notifications whenever the sum of amount is less than $1 million. • Customize Application
• Aggregate is the metric that’s the basis of your condition. It can be Record Count, Average
Amount, Smallest Amount, Largest Amount, or Sum of Amount.
• Operator is the basis of comparison, such as Equal, Not Equal, Greater Than, and so on.
• Value is the number that you want the aggregate compared to.
Your conditions are evaluated when the report is run. If all conditions are met (up to five conditions per report), notifications are
sent,
4. Schedule how often (every weekday, daily, or weekly) and when to evaluate for your conditions.
For example, run the report every weekday at 7 a.m.
5. Select one or more notification types.

• Send a Salesforce in-app notification
• Post to Chatter
• Send an email notification
242
• Execute a custom Apex action, such as creating tasks or escalating cases

For more information about developing a custom Apex class, see the Apex Developer Guide.
6. Make sure that the subscription is active if you’re ready to start receiving notifications.
7. To schedule the notifications, click Save.
Example: A report is scheduled to be run every weekday at 7 a.m. If the sum of the amount is less than 1,000,000, a Salesforce
app notification is sent and a Chatter post is made.
SEE ALSO:

Combine subscriptions, actions, and conditions in a single joined report that shows who set up each subscription, the schedule and
conditions, and the recipients and actions. Learn about the objects used in subscription reporting and the cron expressions for subscription
schedules.
SEE ALSO:
Combine Subscriptions, Actions, and Conditions in One Report
Subscription Reporting Objects
Cron Expressions for Subscription Schedules
243
Combine Subscriptions, Actions, and Conditions in One Report
To create, update, and delete custom report Manage Custom Report Types Available in: Salesforce
types: Classic and Lightning
Experience
To view Lightning Report subscriptions: Subscribe to Reports
To view Lightning Dashboard subscriptions: Subscribe to Dashboards
To view CRM Analytics lens, dashboard Subscribe to CRM Analytics Assets Enterprise, Performance,
widget, and collection subscriptions: Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
To view Einstein Discovery model quality Manage Einstein Discovery
notifications: CRM Analytics lens,
dashboard widget, and
collections are available with
To view the details of analytic subscriptions, create a joined report that shows the subscription CRM Analytics, which is
available for an extra cost in
owners, schedules, recipients, and triggering conditions. The joined report is based on two custom
report types. You can filter the report by subscription and notification source.
and Unlimited Editions. Also
Several objects are involved when reporting on subscriptions. available in Developer
• The Analytic Notification object contains information about subscriptions and their owner, Edition.
source, schedule, and the user they’re running as. Einstein Discovery model
• The Analytic Notification Action Configurations object includes details about subscription quality notifications are
recipients, attachments, and actions. available with CRM Analytics
Plus or Einstein Predictions,
• The Analytic Notification Conditions object stores the trigger conditions for subscriptions and
which are available for an
notifications.
extra cost in Enterprise,
To include all the details, two custom report types are needed. Combine these custom report types Performance, and
in a joined report to create a resource for subscription management. Unlimited Editions. Also
available in Developer
Edition.
SEE ALSO:
Create a Subscription Actions Report Type

Find which users, groups, and roles are subscribed to a report or dashboard by creating a subscription actions report type. Use this report
type to review details about subscription attachments and the types of actions that a subscription triggers.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types, and then select Report Types.
a. For Primary Object, select Analytic Notifications, enter the information, and click Next.
244
b. For Object B, select Analytic Notification Thresholds and select Each “A” record must have at least one related “B” record.
c. For Object C, select Analytic Notification Actions and select Each “B” record must have at least one related “C” record.
d. For Object D, select Analytic Notification Action Configurations and select “C” records may or may not have related “D”
records.
245
e. Save your changes.
3. Add the analytic subscription’s owner’s ID to the layout.

a. Click Edit Layout.
b. With View set to Analytic Notifications Fields, click Add fields related via lookup.
c. Select Owner » User ID and click OK.
4. Save your work.
Create a Subscription Conditions Report Type

Review the conditions that trigger subscriptions and notifications. Combine this with the subscription actions report type for a complete
view of your subscriptions.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Report Types, and then select Report Types.
a. For Primary Object, select Analytic Notifications, enter the information, and click Next.
b. For Object B, select Analytic Notification Thresholds and select Each “A” record must have at least one related “B” record.
c. For Object C, select Analytic Notification Conditions and select “B” records may or may not have related “C” records.
246
d. Save your changes.
3. Add the analytic subscription’s owner’s id to the layout.

a. Click Edit Layout.
b. With View set to Analytic Notifications Fields, click Add fields related via lookup.
c. Select Owner » User ID, and click OK.
4. Save your work.
Create a Joined Subscriptions Report

Join the subscription actions and the subscription conditions report types to see all the subscription details in one place.
1. Join the reports.
a. Create a report.
b. Select the subscription actions report type that you previously created, and click Start Report.
c. Click Report, select Joined Report, and click Apply.
247
d. Click Add Block, and select the subscription conditions report type that you previously created.
e. Click Add Block.
2. Configure the report structure.

a. For the Show Me filter, select All analytic notifications.
b. For the Created Date filter, select All Time.
c. Add the Owner: User Id and Analytic Notification Id columns to group across blocks.
d. Add the Owner: Full Name, Source, Threshold Type, Action Type, and Schedule Cron Expression
columns to the Actions block.
e. Add the Aggregate Column Name, Operation, and Value columns to the Conditions block.
f. Deselect Subtotals and Grand Total.
3. Click Save.
4. Enter a name, description, and folder
248
5. Click Save.
Use the Subscription Report

Customize the joined report to address your subscription management needs.
Find report or dashboard details
Add fields from the report or dashboard object via lookup to find details about the Lightning reports and dashboards your subscriptions
are tied to.
Monitor subscription limits
Filter Source by Lightning Report Subscription or Lightning Dashboard Subscription.
• There’s a limit on how many subscriptions a user can set up for Lightning reports and Lightning dashboards. To find which subscriptions
are consuming that limit for a particular user filter Owner User Id by their User Id.
• There’s a limit to how many subscriptions can be set for per hour. Find subscriptions that start at the same hour by sorting the results
by Schedule Cron Expression.
Review recipients
Add the Recipient User, Recipient Group, Recipient User Role, and Recipient Collaboration Room columns to the Action block. To find
subscriptions for a particular recipient, filter those fields.
Maintain data security
Add the Type column to the Action block to find subscriptions that send an attachment.
Troubleshoot missing subscriptions
Add the Deactivate When Triggered, Error Email Count, and Is Inactive fields to investigate subscriptions that may be disabled or
encountering errors.
Subscription Reporting Objects

Understand the structure and metadata of subscriptions and notifications.
Subscriptions
Subscriptions are built from five related objects.
Analytic Notification
The primary notification object.
Analytic Entity
Depending on which analytic entity a subscription is associated with, a value populates one of these report columns.
• Analytic Asset Collection
• Dashboard
• Discovery Goal
• Lens
• Report
Analytic Notification ID
The ID of the notification.
249
Deactivate When Triggered

Boolean. True if the notification only triggers one time.
Description
The description of the subscription.
Error Email Count
If the notification fails, this field tracks the number of error emails sent.
Is Inactive
Boolean. True if the subscription is inactive.
Owner
The user who owns the subscription. This is the user for whom the subscription counts against the limit of subscriptions per user.
Run As User
The running user for a Lightning report, Lightning dashboard, or Classic report.
Schedule Cron Expression
The schedule of the subscription, as a cron expression. To interpret this expression, see Cron Expressions for Subscription Schedules.
Source
The source of the notification.
• Classic Report Schedule
• Lightning Report Subscription
• Lightning Dashboard Subscription
• CRM Analytics Widget Notification
• CRM Analytics Dashboard Subscription
• Analytics Collection Subscription
• CRM Analytics Slack Dashboard Subscription
• CRM Analytics Watchlist Notification
• Model Quality Notification
Analytic Notification Threshold

The junction object linking Analytic Notifications with Actions and Conditions.
Threshold Type
The trigger threshold for the Notification.
• On Schedule—Subscription runs on schedule.
• On Error—Notification triggers on error.
• On Condition—Notification triggers when specified conditions are true.
Analytic Notification Action

The action that the notification triggers.
Action Type
The type of action.
• Notify Me
• Post to Chatter
250
• Post to Slack
• Send Email
• Watchlist Results
• Execute Custom Apex
Configuration Data
If the Action Type is Execute Custom Apex, this field contains the Apex class.
Analytic Notification Action Configuration

The configuration details of an action.
Action
The action that this configuration is related to.
Recipient
Depending on which recipients a subscription is associated with, a value populates one or more of these report columns.
• Recipient User
• Recipient Group
• Recipient User Role
• Recipient Collaboration Room (Slack channel name)
Attachment Type
The type of attachment.
• Excel
• CSV
Attachment Encoding
The encoding of the attachment.
Exclude Snapshot
Boolean. If the Action Type is Post to Slack, this is TRUE when the subscription is set to “Don’t include an image.”
Team Key
If the Action Type is Post to Slack, this is the Slack workspace identifier.
Include Subordinates
Boolean.
Type
Describes the aspect of the action that this configuration relates to.
• User
• Group
• Role
• Roles and Subordinates
• Roles and Internal Subordinates
• Slack Channel
• Summary
• Attachment
251
Analytic Notification Condition

The conditions that trigger the notification.
Aggregate Column Name
The column or field being evaluated.
Operation
The logical operation.
• Equal
• Not Equal
• Greater Than
• Less Than
• Greater Than or Equal
• Less Than or Equal
Value
The value that the operation is evaluated against.
Considerations
You can add fields from Reports and Dashboards by lookup from the Analytic Notification object. You can’t add fields from CRM Analytics
or Einstein Discovery objects by lookup.
SEE ALSO:
Cron Expressions for Subscription Schedules

Subscription schedules are shown as a cron expression. Learn the basics of reading these statements.
A subscription’s cron expression consists of six statements separated by spaces using this syntax: Seconds Minutes Hours
Day_of_month Month Day_of_week. Each statement describes a part of the schedule.
Parts of a Cron Expression
Cron Statement Values Special Characters

Seconds 0–59 none
Always 0 in subscriptions
Minutes 0–59 none
Hours 0–23 , - * /
Day_of_month 1–31 , - * ? / L
Month 1–12 , - * /
Designates Jan–Dec
252
Cron Statement Values Special Characters

Day_of_week 1–7 , - * ? / L #
Designates Sun–Sat
Special Characters
Character Function Example

, Delimits a value. 0 0 12 ? * 2,4,6 means “12:00 PM on Monday,
Read as “and.” Wednesday, and Friday.”
- Specifies a range. 0 0 8-14 ? * 1 means “each hour from 8:00 AM to 2:00 PM

Read as “from... to...” on Sunday.”
* Specifies all values. 0 0 12 * * * means “12:00 PM every day.”

Read as “every.”
? Specifies no specific value. 0 0 12 1 * ? means “12:00 PM on the first of every month”

Read as “any.” (whatever day of the week that is).
Appears only in Day_of_month and

Day_of_week when a value is specified for one
and not the other.
/ Specifies increments. 0 0 3/6 * * * in Hours means “every 6 hours starting at

The number before the slash specifies when the 3:00 AM every day.”
interval begins. The number after the slash is the
interval.
L Specifies the end of a range. 0 0 12 L */1 ? means “12:00 PM on the last day of the
Read as “last”. month” (*/1 means that this repeats on a monthly cycle).
Only appears in Day_of_month and

Day_of_week. In Day_of_month, L means
the last day of the given month.
In Day_of_week, L by itself is always Saturday.
If combined with a number, it means the last of that
type of day in the month. For example, 5L means
the last Thursday of the month.
253
Character Function Example

# Specifies the nth weekday of the month. 0 0 12 ? * 5#2 means “12:00 PM on the second Thursday
The value before the number sign is the weekday. of every month.”
The value after is the occurrence.
SEE ALSO:

You can set up a report to run itself daily, weekly, or monthly and send the results automatically to
EDITIONS
the people who need them. That way, you don’t have to remember to log in and do it yourself.
Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic) Available in: Salesforce
orgs)
1. Schedule a Report for Refresh
Schedule a report to run daily, weekly, or monthly. An HTML version of the report can be sent Available in: Professional,
by email to users in your organization. Enterprise, Performance,
2. View a Report's Schedule Editions
View a report's schedule on the Schedule Report page or from the Reports tab. View all report
schedules for the organization under Setup. Available in: Enhanced
3. Manage a Report’s Schedule Folder Sharing
Create, change, view, or delete a scheduled report from the Schedule Report page.
4. Change a Report's Schedule USER PERMISSIONS
You can change an already scheduled report on the Schedule Report page.
5. Delete a Report's Schedule
reports:
Select a scheduled report and unschedule it to delete its scheduled run. • Legacy Folder Sharing
6. Tips on Scheduling Reports Schedule Reports
Some tips to keep in mind about timings, limits, and email notifications when scheduling a Enhanced Folder
report. Sharing
Schedule Reports
SEE ALSO:
Schedule a Report for Refresh
Change a Report's Schedule
Delete a Report's Schedule
Manage a Report’s Schedule
Tips on Scheduling Reports
View a Report's Schedule
254

Schedule a report to run daily, weekly, or monthly. An HTML version of the report can be sent by
EDITIONS
email to users in your organization.
Watch a Demo: Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic) Available in: Salesforce
1. On the Reports tab, click a report name.
orgs).
2. Click Schedule Future Runs from the Run Report dropdown menu.
If you’re creating a report, you’re asked to save the report in a folder before scheduling. If the Enterprise, Performance,
report folder is shared with a group, you can schedule the report only for the entire group. To Unlimited, and Developer
schedule the report for an individual group member, share the report folder with that member. Editions. Not available to
3. On the Schedule Report page, specify a running user who has access to the folder where the Salesforce Platform users.
report is stored. Available in: Enhanced
The access level of the running user determines what other users, including portal users, see Folder Sharing and Legacy
when they receive the scheduled report run results. Not all users can see every field, and it's Folder Sharing
possible for the running user to see fields that others can't see. When it’s sent, the report indicates
which fields the running user can see that can’t be viewed by others. You need the “View All USER PERMISSIONS
Data” permission to specify a running user other than yourself.
Note: If the running user becomes inactive, the report doesn’t run. Salesforce sends an reports:
email notification to either activate the user, delete the report schedule, or change the • Legacy Folder Sharing
running user to an active one. Salesforce sends the notification to users with the “Manage
Schedule Reports
Users,” “Modify All Data,” and “Manage Billing” permissions. If no user has all these user
permissions, Salesforce sends the notification to users with the “Manage Users” and Enhanced Folder
Sharing
“Modify All Data” user permissions.
Schedule Reports
4. Select an email setting.
Select To
To me Send the report to your email address specified on your
user profile.
To me and/or others Email the report to additional users.
You can send reports only to email addresses included on Salesforce user records. When portal users receive emailed reports, they
see the same data as the running user set in the report schedule. If you have information you’d rather not share, schedule the report
to run with a portal user as the running user.
Note: Portal users receive report and dashboard refresh email notifications when the Allow Reports and
Dashboards to Be Sent to Portal Users option is enabled.
5. Set the frequency, duration, and time for running the report:
• In the Frequency field, select Daily, Weekly, or Monthly and then refine the frequency criteria.
• Using the Start and End fields, specify the dates during which you want to schedule the report. To enter the current date,
click the link showing the date.
• Next to Preferred Start Time, click Find available options to choose a start time.
Your preferred start time isn’t available if other users have already selected that time to schedule a report.
6. Click Save Report Schedule. You can choose:
255
Choose To
Save report modifications with this schedule Save both the report schedule and changes you made to the report.
Discard report modifications Save the schedule only. Changes you made to the report are discarded.
Report recipients can click the report name in emailed reports to log in to Salesforce and view the report directly.
Example: Example
A report is scheduled to run every Friday at midnight, and its results are emailed to a selected group and user.
1. All users, including portal users, viewing the scheduled report see the report data that Sales Director Chet’s access level allows.
2. Report run results are set to be emailed to a public user group calledAll Internal Users and the admin user. You can only send
emails to users and groups with access to the report folders. The Search dropdown displays all available categories based
on your search criteria in the Running User field.
3. The report is scheduled to run every Friday.
4. The report run is scheduled to start on the current date.
5. The schedule is saved without saving prior changes made to the report.
SEE ALSO:
256
View a Report's Schedule

View a report's schedule on the Schedule Report page or from the Reports tab. View all report
EDITIONS
schedules for the organization under Setup.
Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic) Available in: Salesforce
•
To see the schedule for a report on the Reports tab, hover over in the column. orgs)
To see the icon and information, users need the Schedule Reports permission. Available in: Professional,
• To see a report's run schedule on the Schedule Report page: Unlimited, and Developer
1. Click a scheduled report name on the Reports tab. Editions
2. Click Schedule Future Runs from the Run Report dropdown menu.. Available in: Enhanced
• To see all scheduled reports for your organization, from Setup, enter Scheduled Jobs in
Folder Sharing
the Quick Find box, then select Scheduled Jobs.
Only users with the “View Setup and Configuration” permission can view this information.
USER PERMISSIONS
SEE ALSO: To create, edit, and delete

reports:
Manage a Report’s Schedule • Legacy Folder Sharing
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports
257

Create, change, view, or delete a scheduled report from the Schedule Report page.
EDITIONS
Tips for Scheduling Reports (Salesforce Classic)
On the Schedule Report page you can:
• Schedule a new or existing report to run in the future and have its results emailed to others. orgs)
• Change the schedule on a previously scheduled report.
• View scheduled jobs for all reports in your organization or view the schedule for just a selected Enterprise, Performance,
report. Unlimited, and Developer
• Delete a scheduled run for a selected report. Editions
Additional scheduled reports are sometimes available for purchase. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
SEE ALSO:
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports
258
Change a Report's Schedule

You can change an already scheduled report on the Schedule Report page.
EDITIONS
1. On the Reports tab, click the name of the scheduled report.
2. Click Schedule Future Runs from the Run Report dropdown menu. orgs)
3. Make the required changes on the Schedule Report page. Available in: Professional,
4. Click Save Report Schedule. Enterprise, Performance,
Editions
SEE ALSO:
Manage a Report’s Schedule Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports
259
Delete a Report's Schedule

Select a scheduled report and unschedule it to delete its scheduled run.
EDITIONS
1. On the Reports tab, click the name of the scheduled report.
2. Click Schedule Future Runs from the Run Report dropdown menu. orgs)
3. Click Unschedule Report. Available in: Professional,
The run schedule for the report is canceled and not sent to the Recycle Bin. Enterprise, Performance,
Editions
SEE ALSO:
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports
Tips on Scheduling Reports

Some tips to keep in mind about timings, limits, and email notifications when scheduling a report.
EDITIONS
Scheduling Report Runs Available in: Salesforce

• orgs)
On the Reports tab, hover over in the schedule column ( ) to view a report’s schedule.
To see the icon and information, users must have Schedule Reports permission. Available in: Professional,
• You can’t create schedules for joined reports. Enterprise, Performance,
• Your org can schedule up to 200 reports. If your org has the maximum number of reports Unlimited, and Developer
scheduled, you can’t edit the schedule or add or remove recipients for currently scheduled Editions
reports. Instead, unschedule the report and then schedule it again with the changes. Daily and Available in: Enhanced
hourly limits differ by edition. See Reports and Dashboards Limits, Limitations, and Allocations. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Additional scheduled reports are sometimes available for purchase. Folder Sharing
• Scheduled reports run in the time zone of the user who set up the schedule. For example, if
the Time Zone field on your user record is set to Pacific Standard Time (PST), and you
schedule a report to run every day at 2:00 PM, the report runs every day between 2:00 PM and 2:29 PM PST.
• If you view and save a schedule in a time zone different from the one in which it was previously scheduled, the time slot could
potentially change.
• If you schedule a report to run on a specific day of every month, the report runs only on months that have that specific day. For
example, if you schedule a report to run on the 31st day of every month, then the report runs only on months that have 31 days. To
schedule a report on the last day of every month, select from the On day of every month dropdown list.
260
• The report runs within 30 minutes of the time you select for Preferred Start Time. For example, if you select 2:00 PM as
your preferred start time, the report runs anytime between 2:00 PM and 2:29 PM, depending on how many other reports are scheduled
at that time.
• Scheduling reports isn’t tracked in the audit trail history.
Emailing Scheduled Reports

• You can't email scheduled reports to Chatter Free users.
Note: Previously, Chatter Free users could receive scheduled reports by email, even though they can’t access the report in
Salesforce. Scheduled reports that were set up to email Chatter Free users continue to email to Chatter Free users.
• Emailed reports don’t include report charts. To email a chart of the report, create a dashboard and schedule a dashboard refresh.
• Reports display only the first 2,000 records (same as in a browser).
• Outlook 2007 limitation: Report emails containing tables more than 22 inches (56 cm) wide or with more than 63 columns don’t
always display properly.
• The maximum size for emailed reports is 10 MB. Try the following techniques to reduce the amount of data in your report:
– Filter for your own records, rather than all records.
– Limit the scope of the data to a specific date range.
– Exclude unnecessary columns from your report.
– Hide the report details.
SEE ALSO:
Schedule a Dashboard Refresh in Salesforce Classic
Export and Connect Reports to Other Tools

Export or connect a report to another tool, such as Quip, to work with report data outside of
EDITIONS
Salesforce.
Export a Report Classic (not available in all
You can export report data to a spreadsheet. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Salesforce Reports in Quip
Work with connected report data in a document to collaborate on live Salesforce data in context. Available in: Essentials,
@Mention colleagues to discuss data inline or in the document conversations pane. Update Group, Professional,
filter values from Quip to customize your Salesforce report views without altering the base Enterprise, Performance,
report in Salesforce.
Editions
View Your Reports on Mobile with Enhanced Reports
Enhanced Reports enables you to view your Lightning reports in a mobile-friendly interface
without reconfiguring report formats. Creating new reports and editing reports are still done
Folder Sharing
on the full desktop site, with those changes automatically rendering on mobile.
261
Export a Report
You can export report data to a spreadsheet.
EDITIONS
• When exporting a report in Salesforce Classic using the Details Only option or in Lightning
Experience as an .xls or .csv file, you can export an unlimited number of rows and columns. Available in: Salesforce
However, most spreadsheet tools have row and column limits. Common limits are 1,048,576 Classic (not available in all
rows by 16,384 columns, or 65,536 rows by 256 columns. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
• When exporting a report in Lightning Experience using the Formatted Report option or as
an .xlsx file using the Details Only option, you can export up to 100,000 rows and 100 columns. Available in: Essentials,
Long text and rich text fields are truncated to 255 characters. The performance for a large export Group, Professional,
varies depending on where your org resides, the time of the day, the CPU utilization, and the Enterprise, Performance,
characteristics of the report. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
SEE ALSO:
Attach Files to Report Subscriptions USER PERMISSIONS
Run Reports in the Background To export reports:
Print a Report • Export Reports
Export a Report in Lightning Experience

1. From the Reports or Analytics tab or from the report run page, click and select Export.
2. Select an export view.
Option Description
Formatted Report Export the report as it appears in Salesforce, with the report header, groupings, and filter details.
You can export the data only to an .xlsx file.
Details Only Export each row without formatting. Use this option if you want to do calculations in the
spreadsheet.
If you're exporting to an .xls or .csv file, select the encoding option appropriate for your language
and locale.
3. Click Export.
If you don't have the export option, ask your Salesforce admin for help.
4. If prompted, select a location and save the file.
Export a Report in Salesforce Classic

1. From Reports, next to the report that you want to export, click , and select Export.
If you set the “Don't save encrypted pages to disk” option in Internet Explorer, you can’t open your report online in Excel. Instead,
save the exported report to your computer, and then open it in Excel. To change this setting in Internet Explorer, deselect “Don't
save encrypted pages to disk” under Internet options.
2. Select an encoding appropriate for your language.

3. Select the file type that you want to export to.
262
4. Click Export.
If you don't have the export option, ask your Salesforce admin for help.
5. If prompted, select a location and save the file.
Salesforce Reports in Quip

Work with connected report data in a document to collaborate on live Salesforce data in context.
EDITIONS
@Mention colleagues to discuss data inline or in the document conversations pane. Update filter
values from Quip to customize your Salesforce report views without altering the base report in Available in: Lightning
Salesforce. Experience
Apply your Salesforce report’s custom filters to tailor your report view in Quip. Use filters to sort
your reps’ open opportunities by region or track your reps’ progress. You can even dynamically filter
live Salesforce reports added to a document based on the record it’s embedded in. Unlimited, and Developer
To add a Salesforce report to a document, enter @Salesforce Report and select your report. Editions
For Salesforce Classic users, click Open in Quip from the report in Salesforce to open your report
in a new document.
View Your Reports on Mobile with Enhanced Reports

Enhanced Reports enables you to view your Lightning reports in a mobile-friendly interface without
EDITIONS
reconfiguring report formats. Creating new reports and editing reports are still done on the full
desktop site, with those changes automatically rendering on mobile. Available in: Lightning
Experience
SEE ALSO:
View Optimized Lightning Reports with Enhanced Reports Group, Essentials,

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To view Lightning reports:

• Run Reports
263
Drill Down into Your Reports to Learn Even More

Drill-down helps you take a closer look at records in a report. For example, as a sales manager,
EDITIONS
drill-down can help you track the progress of just a few of your reps or review the breakdown of
current opportunities based on type. Available in: Lightning
The drill-down feature is available on the reports run page for all reports with row groupings Experience
(summary and matrix reports). When you drill down into a grouped column, the report filters by
that column. You can also modify the primary report grouping when you select drill-down options.
To drill down into a report: Enterprise, Performance,
1. Run a report that includes at least one-row grouping.
Editions
2. On the report run page, select checkboxes for the particular values that you want to drill in to.
You can only drill in to values from the primary row grouping.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. Click Drill Down.
To drill down into a report
Note: The number on the Drill Down button indicates the number of values you selected. from the reports run page:
• Run Reports
4. The primary row group for your report is preselected in the Group by field. To change the
To specify settings for the
grouping, click X and select a different field.
report:
5. Click Apply. • Create and Customize
Reports
The report now displays data only for the values and grouping that you specified. If you edit the
report and open the Filters tab, you can see that a filter was added for the values you selected. To
revert to the original report, or to select another value to filter by, delete the filter that was added.
Organize Reports
Keep your reports at your fingertips by sorting them into folders and deleting unused reports. If
EDITIONS
you have a lot of reports, you can use the search field to find the one you need.
1. Search for Reports and Dashboards in Lightning Experience Classic (not available in all
When using the report and dashboard search in Lightning Experience, look for a report by name. orgs) and Lightning
To refine your results, sort or search within a selected folder. Experience
2. Search for Reports and Dashboards from the Reports Tab in Salesforce Classic Available in: Essentials,
When using the report and dashboard search, look for a report by name, description, or who Group, Professional,
created it or modified it last. Filter, sort, or search within a selected folder to refine your results. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Get the Information You Need from the Reports Tab List View in Salesforce Classic Editions
You can resize, hide, reorder, and sort columns, and select the number of records to display in
your list view on the Reports tab.
4. Customize Report and Dashboard Lists in Lightning Experience Folder Sharing
You can customize the columns in the list on the Reports or Dashboards tab.
5. Rename a Report
What’s in a name? A report by any other name still answers your business questions. When it’s time to change the name of a report,
do so from report properties.
6. Describe a Report
Give your report a description to help people (and yourself) distinguish it.
264
7. Print a Report
Print a report from the run page of a report using your browser’s print function.
8. Keep Favorite Report Folders in View
Pin your most-used report and dashboard folders to the top of the folder list so you don’t have to scroll down every time you need
them.
9. Hide Unused Report Types
If your users use only a subset of the available standard report types, you can hide the ones they don’t need.
10. Run Reports in the Background
Run large reports in the background so you can keep working in Salesforce without waiting for results to display. This is a good way
to run data-intensive reports that might otherwise time out due to the large number of report results.
11. Deliver Your Report
To get the information in your report to the people who need it, you can share the report’s URL, make the report available for Chatter
feeds, or export the data to another tool, such as Excel. You can also set the report to run on a schedule so that viewers always have
the latest information.
12. Embedded Report Charts
Typically, users have had to navigate to the Reports tab to find data. But you can give them valuable information directly on the
pages they visit often. To do that, embed report charts in detail pages for objects. When users see charts on pages, they can make
decisions based on the data they see in the context of the page without going elsewhere. For example, an opportunity record shows
important data directly on its detail page.
13. Delete a Report
You can delete a selected report from the Reports tab or from its run page.
Search for Reports and Dashboards in Lightning Experience

When using the report and dashboard search in Lightning Experience, look for a report by name.
EDITIONS
To refine your results, sort or search within a selected folder.
Search doesn't find partial strings within a longer word or number except at the start of the word Available in: Lightning
or number. A word or number starts at the beginning of the field label or following a space. For Experience
example:
• Searching on “commun” finds “Edge Communications” but searching on “dge” or “cation” Professional, Enterprise,
doesn't. Performance, Unlimited,
• Searching on “12” finds “Leads Report 12” but not “Leads Report-12”. and Developer Editions

Folder Sharing
265
Search for Reports and Dashboards from the Reports Tab in Salesforce Classic
When using the report and dashboard search, look for a report by name, description, or who created
EDITIONS
it or modified it last. Filter, sort, or search within a selected folder to refine your results.
1. On the Reports tab, type in the search box below All Folders. Available in: Salesforce
Search looks up all folders. Filters are set to All Items and All Types to display all the
orgs)
folder’s contents.
Salesforce searches these fields: Name, Description, Last Modified By, or Created By. Results Available in: Group,
are based on an exact match of what you typed with those fields. Professional, Enterprise,
If tagging is enabled and added to a custom report or dashboard, search by its tag in the global and Developer Editions
search box at the top of every page.
2. Refine results using these options: USER PERMISSIONS
To refine results by Do this To search for reports:

Type Select a filter: Run Reports
• All Types Enhanced Folder
Sharing
• Reports
Run Reports AND
• Dashboards access to the reports
folder
Type filters don’t apply to report templates in standard report folders.
View Select a filter:

• All Items
• Recently Viewed
• Items I’m Following
• Items I Created
• Items I’m Subscribed to
View filters.
A selected folder Select a folder, then type in the search box.

Filters are set to All Items and All Types to display all the
folder’s contents.
Sorting Click for the column and select Sort Ascending or Sort
Descending. Sorting applies to all items in the list view, including
the ones on subsequent pages.
266
Get the Information You Need from the Reports Tab List View in Salesforce Classic
You can resize, hide, reorder, and sort columns, and select the number of records to display in your
EDITIONS
list view on the Reports tab.
• Customize your list view as follows: Available in: Salesforce
Option Description orgs)

To resize a column Click and drag its right margin to the preferred size.
To hide a column Click > Columns on any column and deselect the column and Developer Editions
you want to hide. Available in: Enhanced
To reorder a column Drag it to where you’d like it to appear. Folder Sharing
To sort a column Click for the column and select Sort Ascending or Sort USER PERMISSIONS
Descending. Sorting applies to all items in the list view, including
the ones on subsequent pages. To view the Reports tab:
To change the number of Click in the lower left corner of the list and select the desired
Run Reports
records displayed per page setting. You can view 10, 25, 50, 100, or 200 records at a time.
When you change this setting, you return to the first page of list Enhanced Folder
results. Sharing
Run Reports in Public
After the setting is applied, you view the same number of records Folders
throughout the list. The record display setting on the Reports
tab doesn’t affect list views elsewhere in Salesforce.
Customize Report and Dashboard Lists in Lightning Experience

You can customize the columns in the list on the Reports or Dashboards tab.
EDITIONS
Report Last Run Date
Report Last Run Date is now included as a default column on the Reports tab, so you can easily
Experience
determine when each report was last run.
Sort on a Selected Column Available in: Essentials,
To see the current sort order for a column, move your cursor to the column header. An up arrow Performance, Unlimited,
indicates A to Z or lowest to highest ordering; a down arrow indicates the reverse. To change the and Developer Editions
sort order for a column, click the column header.
Resize Columns Folder Sharing and Legacy
You can resize columns in either of the following ways: Folder Sharing
• Move your cursor to the column divider and drag the divider to the left or right.
• Click the gear icon and choose Select Fields to Display. Then move your cursor to the column divider and drag the divider to the
left or right. Your changes are retained if you leave the page and return later.
Note: If you’ve resized the columns in the Reports or Dashboards list, scroll to the right if necessary see .
267
Wrap or Clip Column Text

Some columns have an option to choose how content is displayed if it extends beyond the column width. Click the down arrow in the
column header and select one of the following options:
• WRAP TEXT. Continue text on additional lines as needed so all content is shown.
• CLIP TEXT. Display only the content that fits in the column.
Select Columns to Display
Click the gear icon and choose Select Fields to Display.
Select columns on the left and click the right-facing arrow to move them to the Visible Fields area on the right. To hide a field, select
it in the Visible Fields area and click the left-facing arrow to move it to the Available Fields area on the left.
Click Save to save the changes and redisplay the Reports or Dashboards list. Your changes are retained if you leave the page and return
later.
Rename a Report
What’s in a name? A report by any other name still answers your business questions. When it’s time
EDITIONS
to change the name of a report, do so from report properties.
1. Edit a report. Available in: both Salesforce
2. Open the properties menu.
Experience
In Lightning Experience, next to the Save button, click > Properties.
In Salesforce Classic, click Report Properties. Essentials, Professional,
3. Under Report Name, enter a new name for the report. Unlimited, and Developer
4. Click Save. Editions
The report is renamed. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To rename private reports:

Reports
To rename public or private
reports:
• Report Builder or Report
Builder (Lightning
Experience)
268
Describe a Report
Give your report a description to help people (and yourself) distinguish it.
EDITIONS
1. Edit a report.
2. Open the properties menu.
In Lightning Experience, next to the Save button, click > Properties. Experience
In Salesforce Classic, click Report Properties. Available in: Group,
Essentials, Professional,
3. Under Report Description, give your report a helpful description. Enterprise, Performance,
Editions
The report’s description is updated.
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To describe private reports:

Reports
To describe public or private
reports:
• Report Builder or Report
Builder (Lightning
Experience)
269
Print a Report
Print a report from the run page of a report using your browser’s print function.
EDITIONS
• Click Printable View from the report’s run page.
• From the browser dialog, do one of the following: Available in: Salesforce
– Open the report with your browser and use your browser’s print function. orgs)
– Save the file in Excel and use the print option in Excel.
SEE ALSO: Enterprise, Performance,
Export a Report
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To print reports:
Run Reports
AND
Export Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports
AND
Export Reports
Keep Favorite Report Folders in View

Pin your most-used report and dashboard folders to the top of the folder list so you don’t have to
EDITIONS
scroll down every time you need them.
1. In the list of report and dashboard folders, hover over any folder, then click . Available in: Salesforce
orgs)
Available in: All Editions
270
2. Select Pin to top.

Your folder moves to the top of the folders list.
Each new folder that you pin goes to the top of the list, above any folders you have already pinned. To move a pinned folder back to
the top, pin it again.
Hide Unused Report Types

If your users use only a subset of the available standard report types, you can hide the ones they
EDITIONS
don’t need.
1. On the Reports tab, click New Report. Available in: Salesforce
2. Select Select Report Types to Hide.
orgs)
The green check mark next to a report means it’s visible to everyone.
3. To hide the report type, click the check mark to change it to an X. Essentials, Professional,
Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To hide unused reports:

Manage Custom
Report Types
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Manage Custom
Report Types
271
Hidden report types don’t show up when you use the search box on the Create New Report page.
If you hide all the report types in a folder, the folder is also hidden. However, if you later unhide the report type in the “Select Report
Types to Hide” dialog box, users can see the folder.
272
Run Reports in the Background

Run large reports in the background so you can keep working in Salesforce without waiting for
EDITIONS
results to display. This is a good way to run data-intensive reports that might otherwise time out
due to the large number of report results. Available in: Salesforce
Reports exported to the background run sequentially, one at a time. Therefore, the latest report Classic (not available in all
exported to the background runs after all reports previously exported to the background finish orgs)
running.
You can export an unlimited number of reports to the background. Essentials, Professional,
Note: Running reports in the background is only supported in the Report Wizard. The Report Unlimited, and Developer
Builder doesn’t support running reports in the background. Editions
1. Export a Report to Run in the Background USER PERMISSIONS

To set up a report to run in the background, you have to export it in a special way.
To export reports to the
2. View and Manage Background Reports
background:
After you've set up a report to run in the background, you can view and manage it from the • Background Report
background report exports list. Export
To view reports exported to
SEE ALSO: the background by other
users:
• Background Report
Build a Report Export
Customizing Reports in Salesforce Classic AND
Export a Report View All Data
To manage reports exported

to the background by other
users:
Export
AND
Modify All Data
273
Export a Report to Run in the Background

To set up a report to run in the background, you have to export it in a special way.
EDITIONS
Note: Running reports in the background is only supported in the Report Wizard. The Report
Builder doesn’t support running reports in the background. Available in: Salesforce
Classic
1. Create a report in the Report Wizard.
Available in: All editions
2. Click Export Details and choose Run Background Export from the drop-down button.
except Database.com
Tip: When running an existing report, click this button to avoid waiting for report results
to display. USER PERMISSIONS
3. Select a file encoding setting and a file format in which to export the report. To export reports to the
4. Choose how to save the report parameters. background:
• Click Save revisions to save any parameter changes you made to the report before
Export
exporting. Selecting this option overwrites the parameters of the original report.
To view reports exported to
• Click Save revisions to a copy to create a new report before exporting. If you the background by other
select this option, enter a name and description for the report, and choose a report folder users:
in which to save the report parameters. • Background Report
Export
Note: Only parameters are saved, not results. To view report results, you must view
report details from the background report exports list. AND
View All Data
5. Click Start Background Export.
To manage reports exported
When your report has finished running and its results are ready for viewing, a link to the report to the background by other
details is emailed to you. You can download report results from the report exports list. You can only users:
download data that you have permission to view. • Background Report
Export
Note: If commas aren’t appropriate for your locale, use a tab or other delimiter. Specify your
delimiter in Data Loader Settings (Settings | Settings). AND
Modify All Data
In the unlikely event that a background export of a report fails, an email notification is sent to you.
Reports exported to the background can fail for a number of reasons. For example, between the
time you exported the report and the export process began, fields may have been deleted from
the report, the report may have been deleted, or the status of the custom report type from which the report was created may have been
changed to “In Development.”
View and Manage Background Reports

After you've set up a report to run in the background, you can view and manage it from the background report exports list.
Note: Running reports in the background is only supported in the Report Wizard. The Report Builder doesn’t support running
reports in the background.
1. From Setup, enter Background Report Exports in the Quick Find box, then select Background Report Exports.
The background report exports list appears.
2. View the details of a report exported to the background, such as its name, status, and location, by clicking the name of a report in
the Job Name column.
3. To cancel a pending export or to delete a report from the background report exports list, click Cancel or Del next to the name of a
report .
274
When a report exported to the background finishes running, it’s available for viewing in the background report exports list for 48
hours. After 48 hours, the report is automatically deleted.
Important: Reports deleted from the background report exports list are permanently deleted and not sent to the Recycle
Bin.
4. To view any reports that have been exported to the background since you began viewing the background report exports list, click
Refresh List .
Deliver Your Report

To get the information in your report to the people who need it, you can share the report’s URL, make the report available for Chatter
feeds, or export the data to another tool, such as Excel. You can also set the report to run on a schedule so that viewers always have the
latest information.
Administrators, or users with the “Manage Public Reports” and “Create and Customize Reports” permissions, can create custom reports
that all users can view. They can also organize reports by creating custom report folders and configuring which groups of users have
access to them.
To make a report public, run the report and click Save As. Give the report a name and choose a public report folder.
SEE ALSO:
Export a Report
Embedded Report Charts

Typically, users have had to navigate to the Reports tab to find data. But you can give them valuable information directly on the pages
they visit often. To do that, embed report charts in detail pages for objects. When users see charts on pages, they can make decisions
based on the data they see in the context of the page without going elsewhere. For example, an opportunity record shows important
data directly on its detail page.
275
1. Add a Report Chart to a Page Layout

To embed a report chart on object pages, edit the object’s page layout with the enhanced page layout editor, then add the chart.
2. Customizing a Report Chart in a Page Layout
After you add a report chart to a page, you can customize it in the Chart Properties dialog box on the page layout editor.
3. Example of Report Charts on an Account Page
In this example, we've embedded two report charts on an important account page that show deals in the pipeline and open support
cases for the account. From looking at the charts, the account executive can quickly gauge the account’s activity and health.
4. Limits on Report Charts in Pages
Consider these limits when embedding charts in detail pages.
Add a Report Chart to a Page Layout

To embed a report chart on object pages, edit the object’s page layout with the enhanced page
EDITIONS
layout editor, then add the chart.
Before you add a chart, check that: Available in: Salesforce
• Its source report is in a folder that’s shared with users who need access. Reports in personal
orgs) and Lightning
report folders are unavailable to add to a page.
Experience
• The source report format is summary or matrix.
• The source report has a chart.
1. Go to the page layout editor for the object that you’re adding a chart to. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Click Edit next to the page layout. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
3. Click Report Charts.
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
276
4. In the Quick Find box, type the name of the report and click to find and select the report chart.
You can browse up to 200 recently viewed reports by chart type in the Report Charts palette.
5. Drag the chart to a new or existing section of the layout.

6.
To customize a chart, click on the chart.
7. Click Save.
The Preview As option is unavailable for report charts.
SEE ALSO:
Customizing a Report Chart in a Page Layout
Example of Report Charts on an Account Page
Limits on Report Charts in Pages
Find Object Management Settings
Page Layouts
277
Customizing a Report Chart in a Page Layout

After you add a report chart to a page, you can customize it in the Chart Properties dialog box on
EDITIONS
the page layout editor.
1. Hiding a Report Chart That Shows an Error Classic (not available in all
A chart can sometimes, for whatever reason, show an error on the detail page instead of data. orgs) and Lightning
Since a chart with an error isn’t that useful, you have the option to hide it from viewers. Experience
2. Filtering Report Charts to Show Data Relevant to the Page Available in: Essentials,
Charts usually filter to show relevant data when the chart’s report type has a matching ID field Group, Professional,
for the record, such as Account ID for an account record. Occasionally, charts show data Enterprise, Performance,
unfiltered. But you can set up a chart to be filterable if its report type has a lookup to the
Editions
matching ID field.
3. Refreshing Report Chart Data Available in: Enhanced
Normally, charts refresh data once every 24 hours. But you can change a chart to refresh each
Folder Sharing
time someone opens the page it’s on. The refresh option is under the Chart Properties dialog
box of the page layout editor. However, we recommend daily refresh over selecting the option,
because users will soon reach the refresh limit or will wait for chart data to show until refresh USER PERMISSIONS
is complete.
reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
278
Hiding a Report Chart That Shows an Error

A chart can sometimes, for whatever reason, show an error on the detail page instead of data. Since
EDITIONS
a chart with an error isn’t that useful, you have the option to hide it from viewers.
To hide such a chart, select Hide chart with error from the Chart Properties dialog box in the page Available in: Salesforce
layout editor. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Experience

Editions

Folder Sharing
A chart can show an error on a page for one or more of these reasons.
• The viewer doesn’t have access to the field that’s used for filtering. USER PERMISSIONS
• The viewer doesn’t have access to the report folder. To create, edit, and delete
• The report chart has been deleted from the report. reports:
• The report definition has changed.
Create and
• The report itself is no longer available.
Customize Reports
AND
Filtering Report Charts to Show Data Relevant to the Page
Report Builder
Charts usually filter to show relevant data when the chart’s report type has a matching ID field for Enhanced Folder
the record, such as Account ID for an account record. Occasionally, charts show data unfiltered. But Sharing
you can set up a chart to be filterable if its report type has a lookup to the matching ID field. Create and
Customize Reports
Make a Chart Filterable AND

Report Builder
When the chart's report type doesn't have a matching ID field for the record, the chart isn’t filtered.
Instead, it shows all data.
A report chart on open cases shows information for all accounts on an account record. To make
the chart filterable, edit the layout of the chart’s cases custom report type, and add the Account ID field via lookup. Now when you
view an account record, the chart is filtered.
Pick a Relevant Filter

Sometimes when there are multiple ID fields available to filter, the chart doesn’t show any data. In such situations, select the most relevant
ID field from the Filtered by dropdown in the Chart Properties dialog box. A chart on open opportunities on account records is filtered
by Partner Account ID, which isn’t that useful. But we can edit the chart properties and choose Account ID from the
dropdown to filter by the account record.
279
Note: Charts can’t filter for relevant data if the source report has reached the limit of 20 field filters.
280
Refreshing Report Chart Data

Normally, charts refresh data once every 24 hours. But you can change a chart to refresh each time
EDITIONS
someone opens the page it’s on. The refresh option is under the Chart Properties dialog box of the
page layout editor. However, we recommend daily refresh over selecting the option, because users Available in: Salesforce
will soon reach the refresh limit or will wait for chart data to show until refresh is complete. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Daily Refresh Experience
Charts refresh data once every 24 hours. If within that time users want the latest, they can click Available in: Essentials,
Refresh on the chart. Group, Professional,
Refresh When User Opens the Page Editions
To change a chart’s normal refresh, select Refresh each time a user opens the page in the Chart Available in: Enhanced
Properties dialog box of the page layout editor. This option triggers a chart refresh each time Folder Sharing and Legacy
someone opens the page the chart is on. Selecting the option is not recommended for two reasons. Folder Sharing
• There’s a risk of reaching the chart refresh limit faster. Refreshes count towards the hourly limit
for each user and organization.
USER PERMISSIONS
• For reports that take longer to run, selecting this option can make users wait to see chart data.
reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
281
Example of Report Charts on an Account Page

In this example, we've embedded two report charts on an important account page that show deals
EDITIONS
in the pipeline and open support cases for the account. From looking at the charts, the account
executive can quickly gauge the account’s activity and health. Available in: Salesforce
orgs) and Lightning
Experience

Editions

Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
282
Report Charts on an Account Page
1. The pipeline chart shows opportunities for the account in various stages including two that were won. The account executive can
hover on the chart to get the value of each opportunity (Values are highlighted if the source report chart has hover enabled). She’s
able to click the chart, go to the report, and get more details for these opportunities.
2. From the charts on open cases, she can see there are a couple of unresolved support issues for the account. She can click the chart,
drill into the report for case details and follow up with the support engineers to get them resolved before a crucial meeting with the
client.
283
Limits on Report Charts in Pages

Consider these limits when embedding charts in detail pages.
EDITIONS
• An embedded report chart is a visual representation of the report table and can be different
from the chart that’s added in the report builder. Available in: Salesforce
• You can have two report charts per page. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
• You can only add report charts from the enhanced page layout editor. The mini console and Experience
the original page layout editor aren’t supported.
• For historical trend reports in Lightning Experience, you must set snapshot date as the primary
row grouping.
• In Lightning Experience, embedded report charts display the source report table’s groupings, Unlimited, and Developer
not the report chart’s. In Salesforce Classic, embedded report charts display the source report Editions
chart's grouping, not the report table's groupings.
• On detail pages, users can refresh up to 100 report charts every 60 minutes.
• Your org can refresh up to 3,000 report charts every 60 minutes. Folder Sharing
SEE ALSO: USER PERMISSIONS

Add a Report Chart to a Page Layout
Example of Report Charts on an Account Page reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
284
Delete a Report
You can delete a selected report from the Reports tab or from its run page.
EDITIONS
1. Delete a report.
Option Description Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
To delete from the Reports tab Next to the report, select > Delete. Experience
To delete from the report’s run page Click Delete. Available in: Essentials,
2. Click OK.
Deleted reports are moved to the Recycle Bin. You can’t delete reports in other’s personal folders. Editions
You also can’t delete reports used by dashboard widgets or reporting snapshots unless you
first delete the dashboard widget or reporting snapshot.
USER PERMISSIONS
To delete reports in My
Personal Custom Reports
folder:
Reports
To delete reports in public
folders:
Public Folders
Analyze Reports with Einstein Discovery for Reports

Einstein Discovery for Reports (previously known as Einstein Data Insights) scans your report data
EDITIONS
- quickly and thoroughly - using artificial intelligence and comprehensive statistical analysis. Einstein
Discovery for Reports goes deep into the report data, explores underlying patterns, identifies insights, Available in Lightning
and surfaces those insights with charts and explanations that are easy to understand. Einstein Experience
Discovery for Reports works with Tabular and Summary reports.
Available in Enterprise,
Note: Performance, and
• Einstein Data Insights has a new name. Say “Hello,” to Einstein Discovery for Reports. Unlimited Editions. Also
Everything about how it works stays the same—plus we've added the ability to compare available in Developer
analyses between report runs. Edition.
• Einstein Discovery for Reports produces descriptive insights for report data in Tabular and Note: Einstein Discovery for
Summary reports. To make predictions and improvements, or to analyze CRM Analytics Reports requires the CRM
datasets, see Explain, Predict, and Take Action with Einstein Discovery. Analytics Plus license, which
is available for an extra cost.
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem.
Represented exclusively by Greenlight.
Set Up Einstein Discovery for Reports

Einstein Discovery for Reports is available after you enable CRM Analytics and assign the Can Run Einstein Discovery for Reports
permission to users. Can Run Einstein Discovery for Reports is included with several standard permission sets, which come with
various Salesforce licenses. Or you can assign the permission to users individually.
285
Analyze Report Data

Let Einstein Discovery for Reports augment your report with AI and comprehensive statistical analysis to produce Einstein
Discovery-powered insights into your data. Einstein does the analytic heavy lifting for you. Your efforts aren’t required to group
report data, or summarize it, or chart it (unless you really want to).
Report Tips for Einstein Discovery for Reports
Consider these tips to optimize your report analysis. To learn more, see Einstein Discovery for Reports: Limits and Allocations on page
296.
Einstein Discovery for Reports: Limits and Allocations
Learn about the limits, allocations, and considerations for Einstein Discovery for Reports.
Monitor Usage Statistics for Einstein Discovery for Reports
Einstein Discovery for Reports monitors usage statistics in real time. You can view the usage statistics in your org.
Set Up Einstein Discovery for Reports

Einstein Discovery for Reports is available after you enable CRM Analytics and assign the Can Run
EDITIONS
Einstein Discovery for Reports permission to users. Can Run Einstein Discovery for Reports is included
with several standard permission sets, which come with various Salesforce licenses. Or you can Available in Lightning
assign the permission to users individually. Experience
1. Verify that the Enable CRM Analytics setting is turned on for your users.
Available with CRM Analytics
See Basic CRM Analytics Setup. Plus in Developer Edition,
and for an extra cost in
2. Assign a permission set to users that includes the Can Run Einstein Discovery for Reports
permission.
and Unlimited Editions.
See Manage Permission Set Assignments.
Available with Sales Cloud
Option Description Einstein in Performance and
Unlimited Editions, and for
The standard permission set CRM Analytics Available with the CRM Analytics Plus
an extra cost in Enterprise
Plus User license. Enterprise.
The standard pemission set CRM Analytics Available with the CRM Analytics Plus
Plus Admin license. USER PERMISSIONS
Any standard Sales Cloud Einstein See Select Who Can Use Sales Cloud
To set up Einstein Discovery
permission set Einstein. for Reports:
• Manage CRM Analytics
After enabling CRM Analytics and assigning permission sets, users have access to Einstein Discovery To assign a permission set
for Reports. The next time they run a report with sufficient data, they’ll see the Analyze button, and to users:
they’ll be able to start an analysis. • Assign Permission Sets
To create a custom
permission set:
• Manage Profiles and
Permission Sets
286
Analyze Report Data

Let Einstein Discovery for Reports augment your report with AI and comprehensive statistical analysis
EDITIONS
to produce Einstein Discovery-powered insights into your data. Einstein does the analytic heavy
lifting for you. Your efforts aren’t required to group report data, or summarize it, or chart it (unless Available in Lightning
you really want to). Experience
Note: Available in Enterprise,
• For an introduction, check out the Einstein Data Insights: Quick Look Trailhead module. Performance, and
Unlimited Editions. Also
• Consider Report Tips for Einstein Discovery for Reports on page 294. available in Developer
Edition.
To get insights into your report data:
1. Run a Tabular and Summary report that has at least 2 columns and 50 rows of data.
USER PERMISSIONS
For help with building a report, see Build a Report in Salesforce Help.
To start an analysis:
2. In the Toolbar, click Analyze.
• Can Run Einstein
Discovery for Reports
Note: If the Analyze button is visible but disabled, then be sure to enable Detail Rows at the bottom of the run page. The
Insights button is enabled only when Detail Rows is enabled.
If there are no existing analyses on a report, Einstein Discovery for Reports automatically runs an initial analysis. Einstein counts the
number of values (frequency count) in the report and looks for statistically significant occurrences of values in the report data.
Einstein displays the results of its Occurrences analysis.
287
You can initiate a new insight by clicking the Einstein icon and move on to Step 3.
Otherwise, you can filter to a specific insight by clicking it.
288
When you finish scrolling through the Occurrences insights, click Home on the toolbar to create other analyses.
The Einstein Discovery for Reports panel appears.
289
If you see a My Past Analyses for this report, you can click one to run a past analysis, and then skip the next two steps.
3. If you want, change the focus of Einstein’s analysis. From I Want to Analyze, select a different outcome from the list of candidate
report columns, or select Occurrences if you want to analyze the number of times (frequency count) a value has occurred. From
with a goal to dropdown, select whether you want Einstein’s analysis to Maximize or Minimize the outcome. If you can’t find the
variable you want, edit the report and add the desired column. Outcomes can be numeric fields (measures) or text fields with two
values (such as w/lost, churn/not-churn, or public/private).
4. Click Create Analysis.
Einstein begins analyzing your report data. When finished, Einstein shows you a summary of the findings (1) and the report columns
(2), ranked by correlation to the goal you selected.
290
• If this analysis was run previously, Einstein displays a change summary that shows you the net difference between versions. To
compare versions side-by-side, click the summary.
• The higher the correlation, expressed as a percentage, the stronger the statistical relationship, and the more likely it's worth a
closer look.
291
Note: Keep in mind that correlation is not causation. Correlation merely describes the strength of association between
variables, not whether they causally affect each other.
5. Scroll down to review the list of insights that Einstein uncovered in its analysis.
Einstein lists insights in order of statistical significance, starting with the insights that have the highest impact on the goal.
292
6. Click an insight that you're interested in learning more about.
Each insight contains a name, a chart, a summary headline, and descriptive text (insight title and supporting details).
To display details about a particular segment in the chart, hover over it.
293
7. You can filter the insights list in several ways:

• To filter by keyword, enter text in the search box.
• To filter the insights list by impact (positive or negative) on the goal you selected for analysis, click
• By default, the only insights you see are the most statistically significant insights. To see all insights, scroll to the bottom of the
insights list, and click Show insights that are not significant.
8. To refresh your analysis and create an analysis version, click the refresh button.
Einstein begins analyzing your report data. When finished, Einstein updates the list of insights resulting from its analysis.

Consider these tips to optimize your report analysis. To learn more, see Einstein Discovery for Reports: Limits and Allocations on page
296.
294
Suggestions for Report Columns and Rows

To get the best results for your analysis, consider the following suggestions:
• Avoid using report columns that contain unique ID fields, data with high cardinality (over 100 unique values), and data with high
correlations (greater than 90%) to the selected analytical outcome.
• Exclude rows that haven’t yet reached an outcome. For example, use closed opportunities or cases only.
Capabilities
Einstein Discovery for Reports can analyze up to 500,000 rows and 50 columns of report data.
Minimum Requirements and Qualified Data

Einstein requires a report with at least 50 qualified rows and 2 qualified columns. When you first open a report, you see the Analyze
button if the report contains 50 rows and 2 columns, whether they are qualified or not.
During analysis, Einstein Discovery for Reports reviews your data to determine which rows and columns are suitable for analysis.
• Rows are disqualified if the outcome field selected for analysis is null.
• Columns are disqualified if a column contains only one value, contains no values (all values are null), or has too many unique values
with very little repetition (for example, unique identifier fields).
If your data contains fewer than 50 qualified rows or 2 qualified columns, Einstein Discovery for Reports displays an error indicating
insufficient data.
Additional Processing Considerations for Report Columns

• If a non-outcome column contains null values, Einstein Discovery for Reports categorizes the null values into a separate group
(Null/Unspecified).
• If a numeric column contains 10 or fewer unique values, Einstein Discovery for Reports treats the data as text, and applies the
qualification requirements described for text fields.
Report Scope
Einstein Discovery for Reports analyzes:
• All the data in your report, not just the maximum of 2,000 rows that are displayed.
• All the data within the scope of your report, and ignores any data that is outside of its scope. Therefore, be sure to include everything
you’re interested in. For example, if you create a report that evaluates all opportunities, then Einstein analyzes all opportunities as
well. If you filter the report so that it doesn’t return open opportunities, then Einstein doesn’t analyze open opportunities.
Other Considerations
• You can encounter NaN in place of numerical values, indicating that the value is “Not a Number”. This value is often returned when
Einstein’s calculation produces an undefined number, like dividing a number by 0.
• Einstein Discovery for Reports is supported on Summary and Tabular reports. It is not currently supported on Matrix reports or Joined
reports.
• Trend Reports are shown on a monthly basis. They are currently not shown by fiscal quarter, fiscal year, or other time period.
295
• Localization is currently not supported.
SEE ALSO:

Learn about the limits, allocations, and considerations for Einstein Discovery for Reports.
Limits
Limit Number
Maximum number of report rows analyzed 500,000
Minimum number of report rows required for an analysis 50
Maximum number of report columns analyzed 50
Minimum number of report columns required for an analysis 2
Allocations
Allocation Number
Maximum number of EDR analysis creations per person per day 50
Maximum number of EDR analysis creations per org per day 1,000
Maximum number of concurrent EDR analyses per org 10
If you have questions about your allocations, contact your Salesforce representative.
Usage Statistics
Einstein monitors usage statistics in real time. To learn more, see Monitor Usage Statistics for Einstein Discovery for Reports on page 297.
SEE ALSO:
296

Einstein Discovery for Reports monitors usage statistics in real time. You can view the usage statistics
EDITIONS
in your org.
Note: Before you begin, Analytics must be enabled in your org. To enable Analytics, see Available in Lightning
Basic Analytics Platform Setup on page 664. Experience
To view usage statistics: Available in Enterprise,

Performance, and
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Discovery.
Unlimited Editions. Also
2. Under Einstein Discovery and Einstein Discovery for Reports, select Usage. available in Developer
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To monitor Einstein
Discovery for Reports usage
statistics:
Note: Times and dates are based on your org’s default time zone.
Statistic Description
Number of analysis created today Total number of analyses created in your org since 12:00am
today.
Number of analysis currently being created Total number of analyses that are currently being run in your
org.
SEE ALSO:
297
Use these tips to help solve problems that arise when you’re working with reports.
EDITIONS
1. Why can’t I run a report on a custom or external object? Available in: Salesforce
Sometimes an object, its report types, or your access isn’t set up completely. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
2. Why do my chart labels overlap? Experience
Sometimes the labels for your charts can overlap and be difficult to read. There can be too much
data in the same space, or the segments or wedges of the chart can be too small. Available in: Essentials,
3. Why doesn’t my report return any data? Enterprise, Performance,
Check with your administrator to make sure that you have access to the records you’re trying Unlimited, and Developer
to report on. If you’re still not seeing any results in your report, try casting a wider net. Editions
4. Why can't I see formula options in report builder? Available in: Enhanced
If you can't see the Add Formula or Add Summary Formula option in the Fields pane of the Folder Sharing and Legacy
report builder, add a row grouping to the report. (In Salesforce Classic, change your report Folder Sharing
format to summary, matrix, or joined.) Formulas require at least one row grouping.
5. Why doesn’t my report return the data I expect?
Check your filters, groupings, fields, report type, and role or user hierarchy to make sure that you are asking the right questions of
your data.
6. What are some common report limits?
Here’s a full list of limits that apply to reports and dashboards.
7. Why am I getting an “obsolete report” error message?
It’s possible that you’re trying to report on data that isn't available.
8. Why is an old role name appearing in the "role hierarchy" trail of my report?
Changes to role names aren't automatically updated in reports. To see the latest role name, change the Role name as
displayed on reports field for the role record.
9. Why aren't middle names appearing in full name fields on reports?
If your org has Enable Middle Names for Person Names turned on, which adds a "Middle Name" field to standard objects like
users, leads, and contacts, then you may notice that the "Full Name" field on reports excludes middle names.
SEE ALSO:
Reports
Why can’t I run a report on a custom or external object?

Sometimes an object, its report types, or your access isn’t set up completely.
If you can’t run a report on a custom or external object, check with your admin that these conditions are true.
• Reports are enabled on the custom or external object.
• You have access to the object and its records.
• The object and its custom report types are deployed.
298
Why do my chart labels overlap?

Sometimes the labels for your charts can overlap and be difficult to read. There can be too much data in the same space, or the segments
or wedges of the chart can be too small.
To fix overlapping labels, try these solutions.
• Enlarge the chart.—Change the chart size in the report to large or extra large or make the dashboard column wider.
• Remove extra grouping levels—Reduce the number of grouping levels by using a different chart type. For example, horizontal bar
charts have fewer values than grouped horizontal bar charts.
• Use horizontal charts—Horizontal charts use different spacing than vertical charts. The advantage of the horizontal bar charts is that
the chart can be extended vertically to show numerous groupings, though the width is fixed. Depending on chart settings, you can
also display Chatter photos.
• Change the scale—Set the chart to use larger units. For example, show values as multiples of 1000 or 1000000.
• Group small values—Select the Combine Small Groups into 'Others' option for pie, donut, and funnel charts.
Why doesn’t my report return any data?

Check with your administrator to make sure that you have access to the records you’re trying to report on. If you’re still not seeing any
results in your report, try casting a wider net.
• Show more than your own records. For example, select Show > All accounts.
• Expand your time frame filters. For example, select All Time for Range, or select a broader custom range.
• Choose field filter operators carefully. If you select Account Owner equals John James, you limit potential results to
exactly “John James.” If you don't see the results you expect, consider expanding the selection by using Account Owner
contains James instead.
• Check your filter logic. Make sure your combination of conditions isn't excluding all data.
Limiting your report can improve performance, but make sure you're not filtering out the data you want to see.
If your report includes an external object, the results probably don’t reflect the full dataset. External objects behave similarly to custom
objects, except that they map to data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org. A report that includes an external object fetches up to
20,000 records for the primary object and can encounter callout limits while fetching external object data. If the report results in few or
no rows, try customizing the report to obtain more relevant external object rows.
Why can't I see formula options in report builder?

If you can't see the Add Formula or Add Summary Formula option in the Fields pane of the report builder, add a row grouping to
the report. (In Salesforce Classic, change your report format to summary, matrix, or joined.) Formulas require at least one row grouping.
Why doesn’t my report return the data I expect?

Check your filters, groupings, fields, report type, and role or user hierarchy to make sure that you are asking the right questions of your
data.
Table 5: Command Center Glossary

Feature What to look out for
Filters Make sure to include all the data you want.
To change a report filter, hover over it and click Edit or Remove. Your filters display when you run your
report; click Edit on that page to make additional changes.
299
Feature What to look out for

Groupings When you group by a field, you remove it from the details of the report. If you export the report, you see
the field, though it doesn’t appear in the detail area.
Fields After checking your groupings, check your fields. If your report contains multiple related records—for
example, an account, its opportunities, and their products—look at the detail pages for the account record,
opportunity record, and product line item to ensure that the fields contain data. If the data isn't available
in the format you want, work with your Salesforce administrator to add formula fields to get the data. When
formula fields are added to an object, they appear in record detail pages and in reports.
Report Type The report type selected isn't appropriate or the records anticipated don't share the relationship between
objects required for the report type. When choosing a report, be sure you understand which fields are
available in the report type.
If your report type includes both parent and child objects, but no child fields are used in a report, the report
shows parent records whether they have a child record or not.
Hierarchy Hierarchy options let you drill down to different datasets based on the role or user hierarchy. The selected
hierarchy level, or its default role, can affect the data shown.
Hierarchy applies to activity and opportunity reports.
External Objects If your report includes an external object, the results probably don’t reflect the full dataset. External objects
behave similarly to custom objects, except that they map to data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org.
A report that includes an external object fetches up to 20,000 records for the primary object and can
encounter callout limits while fetching external object data. If the report results in few or no rows, try
customizing the report to obtain more relevant external object rows.
What are some common report limits?

Here’s a full list of limits that apply to reports and dashboards.
Salesforce Reports and Dashboards Allocations
Feature Personal Contact Group Professional Enterprise Unlimited Developer

Edition Manager Edition Edition Edition and Edition
Performance
Edition
Custom report types
(Limits apply to all custom
50 200 2,000 400
report types regardless of N/A
development status.)
Dashboard filters 3 per dashboard
Dynamic dashboards per org N/A Up to 5 Up to 10 Up to 3
Field filters per report1 20
Formulas per report 5
300

Performance
Edition
Reporting snapshots per org N/A 200
Reporting snapshots 134 1 2 134

N/A
scheduled per time period
Scheduled dashboard
N/A 12 22 N/A
refreshes
Scheduled reports per hour

(Emailed reports can be up N/A 1235 12 22 1235
to 10 MB.)
1
These allocations apply to the report builder. If you’re using the report wizard, the allocation is 10.
2
Up to 200 total.
3
Off-peak hours (between 6 PM and 3 AM local time) only.
4
Limited to one preferred start time per day.
5
Limited to three preferred start times per day.
Salesforce retains historical data for the previous three months, plus the current month.
The following Salesforce Reports and Dashboards limits, limitations, and allocations apply to all supported editions.
Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• The report builder preview shows a maximum of 20 rows for summary reports (grouped by rows) and matrix reports (grouped by
columns), and 50 rows for tabular reports (no groupings).
• In Salesforce Classic, you can’t have more than 250 groups or 4,000 values in a chart. If you see an error message saying that your
chart has too many groups or values to plot, adjust the report filters to reduce the number. In combination charts, all groups and
values count against the total.
• In Lightning Experience, a report chart can have at most 2000 groups. If a report has more than 2000 groups, the action 'Combine
Small Groups into Others' applies only to the small groups within the 2000 that are included in the report chart. Any additional small
groups are ignored.
• If a report has more than 2,000 rows, the report chart doesn’t use the colors selected for picklist values in Object Manager. Instead,
the chart uses the system-generated colors. To reduce the number of rows, apply filters or hide details.
• Reports display a maximum of 2,000 rows. To view more rows, export the report to Excel or use the printable view for tabular and
summary reports. For joined reports, printable view displays a maximum of 20,000 rows. Printable view is only available in Salesforce
Classic.
– Summary reports (grouped by rows) and matrix reports (grouped by columns) display the first 2,000 groupings when Show
Details is disabled.
– Matrix reports display a maximum of 400,000 summarized values.
– Matrix reports display a maximum of 2,000 groupings in the vertical axis when Show Details is disabled. If there are more than
400,000 summarized values, rows are removed until the 2,000 groupings limit is met. Then columns are removed until the
number of summarized values moves below 400,000.
301
– Matrix reports that return more than 2,000 rows don’t show details. If you click Show Details, nothing happens. You can only
view the report with details hidden.
– Because a matrix report includes multiple groupings, the maximum of 2,000 values is typically reported in fewer than 2,000
groups.
– Row counts and summaries can be inaccurate in a joined report with more than 2,000 rows, where one of the blocks takes up
most of the rows.
• Up to five metrics display in the Lightning Experience report header. Metrics such as summarized fields appear in the order that they
appear in the report, left to right. The grand total, when shown, always displays.
• When reports that have groupings are viewed in the Salesforce mobile app, they’re converted to tabular reports.
• The Salesforce mobile app supports a maximum of 25 report columns.
• By default, reports time out after 10 minutes.
• In a non-joined report, if you click a bar in a report chart, the report results are filtered according to the selected bar. In a joined report,
clicking a bar doesn’t apply the filter.
• When searching for reports, if you filter on a long text area field, such as Description or Solution Details, only the first 1,000 characters
of the field are searched.
• Some filters, such as date range, are constructed using multiple custom filters, each of which counts toward the total of 20.
• You can enter up to 1,333 characters for filter criteria, including commas used as OR operators.
• Field-to-field filtering isn’t available on currency fields for orgs that have multiple currencies enabled.
• The first 999 characters in a standard rich text area or a long text area are displayed in a report. For custom fields, only the first 255
characters are displayed.
• Summary fields on tabular, summary, and matrix reports can display up to 21-digits.
• You can’t filter reports by custom long text area fields.
• Filter logic doesn’t support locked filters. If you apply filter logic to a locked filter, the lock is removed.
• Forecast reports include only opportunities that are set to close within the forecast period.
• The maximum value allowed for report metrics is 999999999999999. The minimum value allowed is -99999999999999.
• The State/Province picklist filter converts the selected state or province to a two-digit code (example: MO for Missouri). If a state or
province in another country covered by the report has the same code (example: MO for Morales, Mexico), filtering on one of the
states or provinces can return data for the other.
• HTML code isn’t supported in report charts.
Dashboard Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

In Unlimited Edition, Lightning dashboard components are now called widgets.
• A dashboard filter can have up to 50 values.
• Each dashboard can have up to 20 components.
• Filtering is restricted in some dashboards that contain multiple components based on different report types:
– If a dashboard has a component based on Cases or Leads and another component based on a different report type, you can’t
filter the dashboard on the Case Owner or Lead Owner field. In addition, filtering on other Owner fields doesn’t display Case
Owner or Lead Owner as equivalent fields.
– If a dashboard has a component based on the Tasks and Events, Activities with Accounts, or Activities with Contacts report type
and another component based on a different report type, you can’t filter the dashboard on the Assigned field.
• A dashboard table or chart can display up to 20 images.
302
• Wait at least 1 minute between dashboard refreshes.

• Downloaded and shared images of dashboard component tables have a maximum height of 3000 pixels or approximately 100 rows.
Rows beyond the limit are clipped. To avoid clipping, filter the chart to fewer than 100 rows.
• Each Financial Services Cloud org includes 10 licenses for dynamic dashboards, which is in addition to the licenses that are provided
in your Salesforce edition.
• Each Enablement license add-on includes one additional dynamic dashboard.
Custom Report Type Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• A custom report type can contain up to 60 object references. For example, if you select the maximum limit of four object relationships
for a report type, you can select fields via lookup from an extra 56 objects.
• If a user runs a report from a custom report type and the report has columns from more than 20 different objects, an error occurs.
• You can add up to 1,000 fields to each custom report type. A counter at the top of the Page Layout step shows the current number
of fields. If you have too many fields, you can’t save the layout.
• You can’t add these fields to custom report types:
– Product schedule fields
– History fields
– The Age field on cases and opportunities
• Custom report types based on the Service Appointments object don’t support these fields:
– Parent Record
– Owner
• Object references can be used as the main four objects, as sources of fields via lookup, or as objects used to traverse relationships.
Each referenced object counts toward the maximum limit even if no fields are chosen from it. For example, if you do a lookup from
account to account owner's role, but select no fields from account owner, all the referenced objects still count toward the limit of
60.
• Reports run from custom report types that include cases don’t display the Units dropdown list, which lets users view the time values
of certain case fields by hours, minutes, or days.
• Report types associated with custom objects in the Deleted Custom Objects list count against the maximum number of custom
report types you can create.
• Reports on feed activities don’t include information about system-generated posts, such as feed tracked changes.
• Custom report type names support up to 50 characters. If you enter a name that is longer than 50 characters, the name gets truncated.
• Custom report type descriptions support up to 255 characters. If you enter a name that is longer than 255 characters, the name gets
truncated.
• When a lookup relationship is created for a standard or custom object as an Opportunity Product field, and then a custom report
type is created with that primary object, Opportunity Product isn’t available as a secondary object for that custom report type.

• Joined reports require that the new user interface theme is enabled. Users without the new theme are unable to create, edit, or run
joined reports.
• In a joined report, each block can have up to 100 columns. A joined report can have up to five blocks.
• When you add a block to a joined report and the block has multiple entities in common with the report, only the first entity (in
alphabetical order) is shown. Only the fields from the first entity are shown in the common fields area.
303
summary formulas.
• You can add the chart from a joined report as a dashboard component, but you can’t add the full report. Filtering isn’t supported
for components with a joined report chart.
• Internet Explorer 6 isn’t supported for joined reports.
Reporting Snapshot Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• The maximum number of rows that you can insert into a custom object is 2,000.
• The maximum number of runs that you can store is 200.
• The maximum number of source report columns that you can map to target fields is 100.
Cross Filter Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• Each report can have up to three cross filters.
• Each cross filter can have up to five subfilters.
• Filter logic applies only to field filters, not cross filters.
Embedded Report Charts Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• You can have two report charts per page.
• You can only add report charts from the enhanced page layout editor. The mini console and the original page layout editor aren’t
supported.
• In Lightning Experience, embedded report charts display the source report table’s groupings, not the report chart’s. In Salesforce
Classic, embedded report charts display the source report chart’s grouping, not the report table’s groupings.
• Your org can refresh up to 3,000 report charts every 60 minutes.
Bucket and Bucket Field Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• Each report can include up to five bucket fields.
• Bucket fields are available for use only in the report where they’re generated. To use a bucket in multiple reports, create the field for
each report, or create a separate formula field for the object that’s dependent on the bucket.
Note: These limits don’t apply to the use of Other as permitted within the bucket field’s setup.
• If a bucket field’s source column has a custom index, and you filter by the bucket field, then the performance gains from the custom
index are lost.
• You can add a report with a bucket field to a dashboard, but you can’t filter on the field that’s bucketed.
Historical Trend Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

• Salesforce retains historical data for the previous three months, plus the current month.
304
• Up to 5 million rows of historical trending data can be stored for each object. Historical data capture stops when the limit is exceeded.
The admin is alerted by email when any object reaches 70 percent of the limit, and again if the limit is exceeded.
• Each historical trend report can contain up to 100 fields. In Opportunities reports, the fields include standard preselected fields, which
can’t be disabled.
• For historical trend reports in Lightning Experience, you must set the snapshot date as the primary row grouping.
• Formula fields aren’t supported.
• Row limit filters aren’t supported.
• The summary report format isn’t supported.
• You can use up to four historical filters on each historical trend report.
outdated.
• Internet Explorer 6 isn’t supported.
• You can’t subscribe to historical trend reports.
• The Report Wizard isn’t supported. Historical trend reports can only be created with the Report Builder.
• Historical trend reporting with charts is supported in Lightning Experience, but tabular views of historical trend reports aren’t available.
• Historical trending reports can’t be exported.
Limitations When Running Reports and Dashboards in Different Locales

When the running user and viewing user are in different locales, there are some differences in how reports and dashboards are presented.
• With reports, the locale of the viewing user is respected. The report contents are always presented relative to the viewing user’s
locale.
• With static (not dynamic) dashboards, all date/time fields are presented in the locale of the running user, not the viewing user.
• With dynamic dashboards, the running user can specify how the viewing user sees the dashboard: as the running user, the dashboard
viewer, or another person.
External Object Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

objects, except that they map to data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org. A report that includes an external object fetches up to
20,000 records for the primary object and can encounter callout limits while fetching external object data. If the report results in few or
no rows, try customizing the report to obtain more relevant external object rows.
Why am I getting an “obsolete report” error message?

It’s possible that you’re trying to report on data that isn't available.
Data can be unavailable because:
• An object in the report isn't enabled for reporting anymore.
• A lookup relationship used by objects in the report has been deleted or modified.
• An object in the report has been deleted.
• You don't have “View” permissions for an object in the report.
305
Why is an old role name appearing in the "role hierarchy" trail of my report?
Changes to role names aren't automatically updated in reports. To see the latest role name, change the Role name as displayed
on reports field for the role record.
Why aren't middle names appearing in full name fields on reports?

If your org has Enable Middle Names for Person Names turned on, which adds a "Middle Name" field to standard objects like users,
leads, and contacts, then you may notice that the "Full Name" field on reports excludes middle names.
For example, if a user's first, middle, and last name are Nadia Nancy Smith, then in reports the full name appears as "Nadia Smith".
As a work-around, consider adding a person's middle name to their "First Name" field; "Nadia" would become "Nadia Nancy".
A missing middle name could cause issues if you are filtering reports on the "Full Name" field, because filtering by Full Name
equals Nadia Nancy Smith doesn't return the user. Instead, filter the report by Full Name equals Nadia Smith
or add three filters:
1. First Name equals Nadia
2. Middle Name equals Nancy
3. Last Name equals Smith
Note: Case reports and Lead reports are affected by the discrepancy between Full Name and Middle Name described
in this article. Other reports may also be affected, but not all reports are.
Improve Report Performance

If your report is running slowly, it’s generally because it’s processing a lot of data, which can be
EDITIONS
reduced with filters and other methods. Review these best practices and recommendations to
optimize your report and help it run faster. Available in: Salesforce
1. Use Filters Efficiently orgs) and Lightning
Adding filters to remove unnecessary data and limit the number of records returned, can speed Experience
up generating a report. However, filters with complex logic can also slow down report generation Available in: Essentials,
because each record must be evaluated against the defined criteria. To optimize report Group, Professional,
performance, filter records by a specific value, field, or date range. You can also improve speed Enterprise, Performance,
by using exact value operators. Unlimited, and Developer
2. Remove Columns and Hide Row Details Editions
Many report templates include a dozen or more columns. When creating a report, remove the
columns that you don’t need. You can also remove unneeded default columns from commonly
used report types. If your report has grouped data, you can hide the detail rows. The individual records aren’t displayed in the report,
but you still see details like groupings, totals, subtotals, and record counts.
3. Write Efficient Formulas
Formulas are powerful tools for evaluating report data, but if a formula is written inefficiently, it can slow down report runs. Here are
a few tips for optimizing report formula performance.
4. Bucket Data Sparingly
A bucket evaluates every record returned by a report to determine whether the record belongs in the bucket. If your report is running
slowly, redesign it to use fewer buckets.
306
5. Simplify Sharing Rules Throughout Salesforce

Sharing rules govern access to objects that reports use. A complex sharing rule can slow down a report because sharing rule has to
be evaluated each time the report gets data from an object.
6. Hard Delete Records
After you delete a record in Salesforce, it remains in the recycle bin for up to 1 month in case you want to restore it. If the recycle bin
contains many deleted records, report query performance can be slow. Improve report performance by emptying the recycle bin.
7. Run Slow Reports During Off-Peak Hours
If a report is still taking a long time to run, schedule it to run during less busy times. If you subscribe to the report, Salesforce emails
it to you and your team when it’s ready. Salesforce caches recently run report data, so you can view the report data without rerunning
the report.
Use Filters Efficiently

Adding filters to remove unnecessary data and limit the number of records returned, can speed up generating a report. However, filters
with complex logic can also slow down report generation because each record must be evaluated against the defined criteria. To optimize
report performance, filter records by a specific value, field, or date range. You can also improve speed by using exact value operators.
• Narrow standard filters—Most report templates include a Show Me filter and a Date filter. Reduce the number of records the report
evaluates by refining the scope of these filters.
• Filter with exact values—When filtering for specific values, using an operator that compares exact values, such as equals or does
not equal, instead of contains or does not contain, improves performance. When you use contains or does not
contain, the report has to execute more steps to return the data.
• Define date ranges—An open-ended date filter, such as Close date greater than 7 days ago, can also slow down
a report. Instead, use a defined date range, such as Close date equals this week.
For example, your sales team wants to see how many opportunities each person has. You build a report that returns all opportunities
in your company. Now you have all the data that you need, but also some that you don’t, and your report takes a long time to run. To
run your report faster, filter it so that it returns only opportunities assigned to your team (1). If you want your report to run even faster,
filter by time, such as for a particular quarter (2).
307
SEE ALSO:
Filter Report Data
Filter Operators Reference
Remove Columns and Hide Row Details

Many report templates include a dozen or more columns. When creating a report, remove the columns that you don’t need. You can
also remove unneeded default columns from commonly used report types. If your report has grouped data, you can hide the detail
rows. The individual records aren’t displayed in the report, but you still see details like groupings, totals, subtotals, and record counts.
To hide report details, at the bottom of the report, switch off Detail Rows.
SEE ALSO:
Build a Report in Lightning Experience
Design the Field Layout for Reports Created from Your Custom Report Type
Write Efficient Formulas

Formulas are powerful tools for evaluating report data, but if a formula is written inefficiently, it can slow down report runs. Here are a
few tips for optimizing report formula performance.
• Add formula fields to the report type—When you run a report, summary and row-level formulas are evaluated, which extends the
run time. However, a formula field runs with a workflow and doesn’t slow down a report at run time. If a report with formulas is
taking a long time to run, move the formula from the report builder into the report type using a formula field.
• Don’t reference objects that aren’t included in the report type—When a formula field reference an object outside of a report’s type,
it can slow down a well-structured report. Rather than reference an outside object in a formula field, create a report type that joins
the objects together, and add your formula field.
308
For example, you have a report that lists accounts and you want to add a formula field that calculates the average number of cases
per account. Before adding the formula field, check whether the report type includes the Cases object. If it doesn’t, add the formula
field to a report type that has both Accounts and Cases. Then create a report using that report type.
• Use row-level formulas sparingly—A row-level formula is a good tool for evaluating each record in a report, but it can slow down
processing. If you have a slow-running report that has a row-level formula, redesigning the report without a row-level formula can
improve performances.
If you have a slow-running report that groups by row-level formulas, speed it up by removing the row-level formula groups.
Filtering by a row-level formula also slows down reports. You can improve performance by removing row-level formula filters.
In addition, some common equations are built into the report builder and don’t require row-level formulas. For instance, finding the
sum, min, max, or average value doesn’t require a row-level formula. You can add a summary function from the column heading
dropdown. Or, if a more sophisticated formula is needed, consider adding a formula field to the report type.
SEE ALSO:
Calculate Field Values with Formulas
Set Up a Custom Report Type
Evaluate Each Record in Reports with Row-Level Formulas
Workflow Rules
Bucket Data Sparingly

A bucket evaluates every record returned by a report to determine whether the record belongs in the bucket. If your report is running
slowly, redesign it to use fewer buckets.
SEE ALSO:
Categorize Data with Bucket Columns
Simplify Sharing Rules Throughout Salesforce

Sharing rules govern access to objects that reports use. A complex sharing rule can slow down a report because sharing rule has to be
evaluated each time the report gets data from an object.
Common ways that a sharing rule becomes complicated include:
• Giving each user permission its own permission set and then assigning each user multiple permission sets. Instead, combine as
many user permissions as possible in a permission set, and assign fewer permission sets to users.
• Adding complex sharing and access rules on objects. Instead, keep rules simple for performance and ease of maintenance.
SEE ALSO:
Control Who Sees What
Hard Delete Records

After you delete a record in Salesforce, it remains in the recycle bin for up to 1 month in case you want to restore it. If the recycle bin
contains many deleted records, report query performance can be slow. Improve report performance by emptying the recycle bin.
309
In some cases, even if records have been emptied from the recycle bin, a log of the deleted records still exists, and reports can query it.
If many records have been recently deleted, querying this log could slow report performance.
SEE ALSO:
Knowledge Article: Delete Unwanted Data in an Organization
Run Slow Reports During Off-Peak Hours

If a report is still taking a long time to run, schedule it to run during less busy times. If you subscribe to the report, Salesforce emails it to
you and your team when it’s ready. Salesforce caches recently run report data, so you can view the report data without rerunning the
report.
SEE ALSO:
310
Analyze Your Data Creating a Custom Report

You can customize standard reports, or you can build custom reports from scratch to suit the exact
EDITIONS
needs of your organization.
Users with the Manage Custom Report Types permission can define custom report types that extend Available in: both Salesforce
the types of reports from which all users in their organization can create or update custom reports. Classic (not available in all
A report type defines the set of records and fields available to a report based on the relationships orgs) and Lightning
between a primary object and its related objects. Reports display only records that meet the criteria Experience
defined in the report type. Salesforce provides a set of pre-defined standard report types; Available in: Essentials,
administrators can create custom report types as well. Group, Professional,
Users with the Manage Reporting Snapshots permission can create and schedule snapshots. A Enterprise, Performance,
reporting snapshot lets you report on historical data. Authorized users can save tabular or summary Unlimited, and Developer
report results to fields on a custom object, then map those fields to corresponding fields on a target Editions
object. They can then schedule when to run the report to load the custom object's fields with the Available in: Enhanced
report's data. Reporting snapshots enable you to work with report data similarly to how you work Folder Sharing and Legacy
with other records in Salesforce. Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To run reports:
Run Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports
Schedule Reports
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Schedule Reports

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
311
Analyze Your Data Create a Custom Report in Accessibility Mode

You can create a custom report using the custom report wizard.
EDITIONS
value of Equality. We maintained certain terms to avoid any effect on customer Available in: Salesforce
implementations. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Note: This topic only applies if you're not using report builder. Report builder is a visual editor Experience
for reports.
1. From the Reports tab, click Create New Custom Report. Group (View Only),
2. Select the type of data for the report, and click Next. Professional, Enterprise,
To create reports on custom objects, choose the Other Reports report type category, unless and Developer Editions
the custom object has a relationship with a standard object. When the custom object has a
master-detail relationship with a standard object or is a lookup object on a standard object,
select the standard object for the report type category instead. USER PERMISSIONS
To create reports on an external object, choose the Other Reports category. To create reports To create, edit, and delete
on an external object with a child standard or custom object, select the category containing reports:
the custom report type that you created for that relationship. • Create and Customize
Reports
3. Choose the report format. AND
4. Follow the steps of the wizard using the Next button. For each report, customize the following: Report Builder
• Specify Row and Column Headers—On the Select Grouping page for summary and matrix
reports, choose the fields by which you want to group and subtotal the data. In a summary
report, choosing more than one sort field allows you to subsort your data. For matrix reports, select summary fields for the row
labels and column headings. When grouping by a date field, you can further group the data by a specific time period such as
days, weeks, or months.
Note: On the Select Grouping page, if you set Group Dates By to "Calendar Month in Year" or "Calendar Day in
Month," you can’t drill down to those date groupings in reports or dashboards. Users are taken to the unfiltered report
instead.
• Summarize Data—On the Select Columns to Total page, choose the types of summary information to display for numeric fields.
• Build Custom Summary Formulas—On the Select Columns to Total page for summary and matrix reports, create custom summary
formulas to calculate additional totals based on existing report summaries. A formula is an algorithm that derives its value from
other fields, expressions, or values. See Add a Summary Formula Column to a Report on page 77.
• Choose Fields—On the Select Columns page, choose the fields to display in the report. You can display only those fields that
are visible in your page layout and field-level security settings. If you choose the Description field or any other long text
field, only the first 255 characters are displayed.
• The first 999 characters in a standard rich text area or a long text area are displayed in a report. For custom fields, only the first
255 characters are displayed. If you download the report as Details Only, the entire field is available.
• Order Columns—On the Order Columns page, select the order for displaying the chosen fields.
• Limit Report Results—On the Select Criteria page, choose the appropriate settings from the dropdown lists, then use the filter
options to limit the report to records with specific data.
The report wizard supports up to 10 filters. On reports with more than 10, additional filters are dropped and the report shows
an error for any filter logic.
312
Analyze Your Data Edit a Numeric Bucket Field
Tip: To use a tabular report on a dashboard, first limit the row count by setting the Rows to Display option, the
sort column, and the order on the Select Criteria page of the report. You can't use gauge or metric widgets on dashboards
using tabular reports.
• Chart Settings—On the Select the Chart Type and Report Highlights step of the report wizard, set chart properties to display
your report data in a chart. Charts are available only for summary and matrix reports.
5. Click Run Report to view the report, or click Export Details to save the report as an Excel file or other format.
Tip: Customizing your reports can require running them a few times as you adjust the report criteria and options. We recommend
using a filter that gives you a smaller sampling of data until you’re finished customizing the report and ready to save.
Edit a Numeric Bucket Field

A numeric bucket helps you sort data that can be described in terms of numbers.
EDITIONS
In the Edit Bucket Field overlay for a numeric field:
1. For Source Column, select the field you want to bucket.
2. Enter a bucket field name, which appears as the column name in the report. orgs) and Lightning
A bucket field is intended to have multiple buckets (known as “ranges” in numeric bucket fields) Experience
within it. A good bucket field name describes the scope of the ranges. For example, a bucket
field named “Size” could have ranges of “Small,” “Medium,” and “Large”. Performance, Unlimited,
3. Define your ranges by entering a number and a name. The range names appear as values in and Developer Editions
your new column. Available in: Enhanced
Each range is greater than the lower number up to and including the higher number. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
To remove all ranges and start over, click Clear All.
4. To move all empty values to the bucket containing the value zero, enable Treat empty USER PERMISSIONS
source column values in the report as zeros.
If this setting is disabled, unbucketed values appear as a dash (-) in the column. To create, edit, and delete
reports:
5. Click OK. • Legacy Folder Sharing
In a report, numeric bucket columns are sorted by range values. Create and
Customize Reports
SEE ALSO: AND
Numeric Bucketing Example: Deal Size Report Builder

Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
313
Analyze Your Data Numeric Bucketing Example: Deal Size
Numeric Bucketing Example: Deal Size

To gain insight into your deals, use bucketing to group by deal size instead of looking at individual
EDITIONS
deals. This lets you concentrate on the large deals that affect your quota the most.
1. Create or edit a standard opportunity report. Available in: Salesforce
2. In the Fields pane of the report builder, double-click Add Bucket Field or drag it into the report.
orgs) and Lightning
3. For Source Column, select Amount. Experience
4. For Bucket Field Name, enter Deal Size. Available in: Enterprise,
5. Under Define Ranges, enter 1000 in the first row. This represents the maximum for a small Performance, Unlimited,
deal. Name this range Small. and Developer Editions
6. Click Add and enter 25000 in the second row. This represents the maximum for a medium-size Available in: Enhanced
deal. Name this range Medium. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Folder Sharing
7. By default, the last range is any amount over the previous range. You don’t need to enter a
number for this range. Name this range Large.
8. Click OK. USER PERMISSIONS
With numeric bucket fields, each range is greater than the lower number, up to and including the To create, edit, and delete
higher number. Once you’ve set up this bucket field, amounts will be bucketed as follows: reports:
Amounts Bucket Create and
Customize Reports
1000 or less Small
AND
1001 to 25000 Medium Report Builder
25001 or more Large Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
314
Analyze Your Data Numeric Bucketing Example: Deal Size
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Numeric Bucket Field
315
Analyze Your Data Edit a Picklist Bucket Field
Edit a Picklist Bucket Field

A picklist bucket field contains items that can be selected from a list.
EDITIONS
Note: The following picklist types can’t be bucketed.
• Record types Classic (not available in all
• Divisions orgs) and Lightning
• Multi-value picklists Experience
• The Type picklist in Activity reports Available in: Enterprise,

In the Edit Bucket Field overlay for a picklist field: and Developer Editions
2. Enter a bucket field name. This appears as the column name in the report. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Since a bucket field is intended to have multiple buckets within it, a good name for a bucket Folder Sharing
field describes the scope of the buckets. For example, a bucket field named “Priority” could
have “High,” “Medium,” and “Low” buckets. USER PERMISSIONS
Important: Picklist bucket names must include one or more letters or symbols. If a picklist To add, edit, or delete a
bucket field includes a bucket whose name contains only numbers, the bucket field bucket column in private
cannot be saved. reports:
3. To create a bucket, click New Bucket and enter a bucket name. Create multiple buckets to
Create and
group your report records.
Customize Reports
4. To find a particular value in the list of values, type the first few characters of its name in the Enhanced Folder
Quick Find box. As you type, items that match your search terms appear in the menu. Sharing
5. Select values and drag them into a bucket. Alternatively, select values, click Move To, and select Create and
Customize Reports
a bucket or enter a new bucket name.
While you’re bucketing values, use these functions as needed: To add, edit, or delete a
• To show all the values in the report, click All Values.
private reports:
• To show the values for a particular bucket, click the bucket name. • Legacy Folder Sharing
• To remove values from a bucket, select the values and drag them to another bucket, or
Report Builder
drag them to Unbucketed Values.
Enhanced Folder
Note: You can bucket only active picklist values. Inactive picklist values aren’t shown. Sharing
Report Builder OR
6. To move all unbucketed values into a bucket named “Other”, enable Show unbucketed Report Builder
values as “Other”. If this is disabled, unbucketed values appear in the bucket column (Lightning
with the value name. Experience)
7. Click OK.
In a report, picklist bucket columns are sorted by the bucket position as shown in the Edit Bucket Field dialog box, followed by “Other”
if Show unbucketed values as “Other” is enabled, or the unbucketed picklist item names if Show unbucketed
values as “Other” is disabled.
SEE ALSO:
Picklist Bucketing Example: Industry Types
316
Analyze Your Data Picklist Bucketing Example: Industry Types
Picklist Bucketing Example: Industry Types

Use a picklist bucket field to sort your accounts by their industry.
EDITIONS
1. Create or edit a standard accounts report, making sure at least a few records appear in the
report. Available in: Salesforce
orgs) and Lightning
3. For Source Column, select Industry. Experience
4. For Bucket Field Name, enter Industry Types. Available in: Enterprise,
5. Click New Bucket and name the bucket IT. Performance, Unlimited,
6. Click New Bucket and name the bucket Bio Tech.
7. Click New Bucket and name the bucket Telecom. Available in: Enhanced
8. Select values and drag them into the appropriate buckets. Folder Sharing
9. Enable Show unbucketed values as “Other”.
10. Click OK. USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
317
Analyze Your Data Picklist Bucketing Example: Industry Types
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Picklist Bucket Field
318
Analyze Your Data Edit a Text Bucket Field
Edit a Text Bucket Field

A text bucket helps you sort out values that consist of words or phrases.
EDITIONS
Note: The following text types can’t be bucketed.
• Text area Classic (not available in all
• Text area—long orgs) and Lightning
• Text area—rich Experience
• Text area—encrypted Available in: Enterprise,

• URL Performance, Unlimited,
• Date
• Date/Time Available in: Enhanced
In the Edit Bucket Field overlay for a text field: Folder Sharing
2. Enter a bucket field name. This appears as the column name in the report. USER PERMISSIONS
Since a bucket field is intended to have multiple buckets within it, a good name for a bucket To create, edit, and delete
field describes the scope of the buckets. For example, a bucket field named “Region” could reports:
have “East,” “West,” and “Central” buckets. • Legacy Folder Sharing
3. To create a bucket, click New Bucket and enter a bucket name. Create multiple buckets to Create and
Customize Reports
group your report records.
AND
4. To find a particular value in the list of values, type all or part of its name in the Search for
values... box and click Search, or leave the box empty and click Search. Report Builder
The search returns up to 200 values. Enhanced Folder

Sharing
5. Select values and drag them into a bucket. Alternatively, select values, click Move To, and select Create and
a bucket or enter a new bucket name. Customize Reports
While you’re bucketing values, use these functions as needed: AND

Report Builder
• Use Enter Values to enter the exact name of a value you want to bucket, or to bucket values
that may appear in your report later.
• To show the values for a particular bucket, click the bucket name.
• To remove values from a bucket, select the values, select Move To, and select a bucket or enter a new bucket name.
6. To move all unbucketed values into a bucket named “Other,” enable Show unbucketed values as “Other”. If this is
disabled, unbucketed values appear in the bucket column with the value name.
7. Click OK.
In a report, text bucket columns are sorted in alphanumeric order.
SEE ALSO:
Enter Values for Text Buckets
Text Bucketing Example: Strategic Accounts
319
Analyze Your Data Enter Values for Text Buckets
Enter Values for Text Buckets

A text bucket field needs a descriptive name and two or more buckets containing text strings.
EDITIONS
If you know the exact value you want to bucket, you can use the Enter Values function to quickly
bucket it without searching. This is useful if your report has a large number (such as millions) of Available in: Salesforce
values and searching for a value is slow. You can also use this method to enter and bucket values Classic (not available in all
that may appear in your report later. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
In the Edit Bucket Field overlay for a text field:
1. Click Enter Values. Available in: Enterprise,
2. Select the bucket where you want to move the values. If you select New Bucket, enter a name and Developer Editions
for the bucket.
3. Type one or more values in the box. Enter multiple values on separate lines. Folder Sharing and Legacy
4. Click Move. Folder Sharing
SEE ALSO: USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
320
Analyze Your Data Text Bucketing Example: Strategic Accounts
Text Bucketing Example: Strategic Accounts

Use a text bucket to sort accounts into general categories that you can act on.
EDITIONS
1. Create or edit a standard account report, making sure at least a few records appear in the report.
3. For Source Column, select Account Name. orgs) and Lightning
4. For Bucket Field Name, enter Strategic. Experience
5. Click New Bucket and name the bucket IBM. Available in: Enterprise,
6. Click New Bucket and name the bucket Dell.
7. Click New Bucket and name the bucket HP.
8. To show the available values, leave the Search for values... box empty and click Search. Folder Sharing and Legacy
9. Select values and drag them into the appropriate buckets. Folder Sharing
10. Enable Show unbucketed values as “Other”.

11. Click OK.
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
321
Analyze Your Data Text Bucketing Example: Strategic Accounts
SEE ALSO:
322
Analyze Your Data Use a Summary Function in a Custom Summary Formula
Use a Summary Function in a Custom Summary Formula

Summary functions let you use grouping values in custom summary formulas for summary, matrix,
EDITIONS
and joined reports. There are two summary functions: PARENTGROUPVAL and PREVGROUPVAL.
1. Double-click Add Formula in the Fields pane. Available in: Salesforce
2. In the Custom Summary Formula dialog, under Functions, select Summary.
orgs) and Lightning
3. Select PARENTGROUPVAL or PREVGROUPVAL. Experience
4. Select the grouping level and click Insert. Available in: Essentials,
5. Define the formula, including where to display the formula. Group, Professional,
6. Click OK.
Editions
SEE ALSO:
Evaluate Groups and Totals with Summary Formulas Folder Sharing and Legacy
PARENTGROUPVAL and PREVGROUPVAL Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

reports:
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Create and
Customize Reports
AND
Report Builder
323
Analyze Your Data Run and Read a Report
Run and Read a Report

Click on a report’s name to run it. After running a report, there are a series of tools you can use to
EDITIONS
help you read the information.
From the report run page in Lightning Experience, you can: Available in: Salesforce
• Show or hide a report chart.
orgs) and Lightning
• Edit report filters (except for locked filters). Experience
• Launch the report builder to edit the report.
• Refresh the report. Group, Professional,
• Subscribe to the report. Enterprise, Performance,
• Export the report. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
• Delete the report.
From the report run page in Salesforce Classic, you can:
• Display a Chatter feed of updates and posts about the report. Folder Sharing
• View Report Generation Status.
• Choose hierarchy options. USER PERMISSIONS
• Change top-level groupings using the Summarize information by drop-down.
To run reports:
• Change Time Frame and View options. • Legacy Folder Sharing
• Click Run Report to immediately run or schedule the report. Run Reports
• Click Show Details to view all data or Hide Details to show only summary information. Enhanced Folder
• Click Customize to open the report in report builder. Sharing
Run Reports
• Print or export the report.
• Click Subscribe to set up report notifications, which notify you whenever certain metrics in To view reports:
the report meet your conditions. • Legacy Folder Sharing
• Click Edit next to the chart to change its properties, or click Large, Medium, or Small to change View All Data
its size. Enhanced Folder
• Sort report results. Sharing
View Reports in
• Edit or clear applied filter criteria. Public Folders
• For summary and matrix reports, filter selected rows by a particular field. Select the rows you
want to view, choose a field to group by, then click Drill Down. For example, if you created an
opportunity report that displays deals by industry, you can select the industries that are doing well and group by Product Name
to see which products are selling in that industry. Click Clear to remove the drill-down filter.
Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards: Limits and Limitations

These limits and limitations apply to Data Cloud reports and dashboards.
Data Cloud Reports Limits

Feature Limits
Number of Rows Displayed Reports display a maximum of 2,000 rows in run mode.
324
Analyze Your Data Considerations for Data Cloud Reports on Calculated Insights
Feature Limits
Row-level Formulas Each Data Cloud report supports 5 row-level formulas.
Report Features Not Available

• Matrix reports
• Custom report types on Calculated Insights
• Stacked summaries
• Change the granularity level on grouped date fields
• Standard filters, cross filters, filter by scope, filter by dimension values
• Inline editing
• Open report in Quip
• Einstein Discovery for Reports
• Reports on Experience Cloud Sites
• Subscribe to Data Cloud reports in Slack
• Joined reports
• Bucket column
• Support for multiple currencies
• Support for custom fiscal periods
• Row limit filters in a tabular report
• Historical trending
• Trend in Wave report snapshots
Functions Not Available

• These logical functions aren’t supported in formulas: ISCLONE, ISNEW, ISNULL, ISNUMBER, NOT, NULLVALUE, OR, PARENTGROUPVAL,
PREGROUPVAL, PRIORVALUE.
• Date and time functions in row-level and summary formulas
Considerations When Using Data Cloud Reports

• Subtotals are included in the row limit.
• Data Cloud reports show totals and subtotals based on all report data.
• You can’t export a details only report as a .xlsx file.
• Users with Salesforce Identity licenses don’t have access to Data Cloud reports.
• Static formulas and grouped columns aren't supported in custom summary formulas.
Considerations for Data Cloud Reports on Calculated Insights

Keep these considerations in mind when working with Data Cloud reports on calculated insights.
325
Calculated Insights Reports

Keep these considerations in mind when building reports on Calculated Insights.
• Measures are treated as aggregates and dimensions are treated as groupings, and they aren’t interchangeable. All possible aggregates
(measures) and groupings (dimensions) are added to reports by default.
• A Calculated Insights report must have at least one aggregate measure and one grouping. You can’t create reports on calculated
insight that don’t have measures or dimensions.
• To include non-aggregatable measures in a report, first include all the dimensions from the calculated insight.
• A calculated insight report displays as a summary reports without details.
• A calculated insight report doesn’t show grand totals and row count.
• You can’t add row-level and summary formulas to a column.
• You can’t perform aggregates, such as sum, min, max, and average on a measure.
• Non-aggregatable measures in a report don’t show subtotals.
• To build a report on calculated insights with more than three dimensions, include at least one aggregatable measure in the report.
• For calculated insights with more than three dimensions and both aggregatable and non-aggregatable measures, you can build
reports with up to three dimensions and all aggregatable measures. To add a dimension when three dimensions are present, delete
an existing dimension from the report.
• You can’t remove a grouping from a report with only non-aggregatable measures.
• When you remove a dimension from the report, all non-aggregatable measures are also removed. When you add a dimension back
to the report, you must add the measures you want.
• You can’t export a calculated insight report using the Details Only option.
Charts in Calculated Insights Reports

Keep these considerations in mind when adding charts to a Calculated Insights report.
• When you remove a dimension or measure from the report that is included in its chart, the chart refreshes to display valid data if
possible. Otherwise, the report doesn’t display the chart anymore and you can’t add another chart to the report.
• You can’t add non-aggregatable measures to the report’s chart until you add all the dimensions to the chart.
• Data Cloud dashboards have all the restrictions that a report chart has. Additionally, the tabular, metric, and gauge components
aren’t available for a Calculated Insights report.
This table shows different scenarios for working with charts in Data Cloud reports and the considerations to keep in mind for each of
the scenarios.
Number of Number of Type of Measure Default Behavior Unavailable Considerations

Dimensions in the Dimensions in in the Report Chart Types
Report the Chart
1 dimension 1 dimension Non-aggregatable The chart displays • Stacked bar
measures and the
• Stacked column
aggregatable non-aggregatable
measures measure. Both
aggregatable and
non-aggregatable
measures are
available in the chart
editor.
326

Report the Chart
2 dimensions 1 dimension Non-aggregatable The chart displays • Donut You can’t remove the
measures only both dimensions. dimensions from the
• Funnel
chart.
2 dimensions 1 dimension Non-aggregatable The chart displays You can’t add

measures and the non-aggregatable
aggregatable aggregatable measure measures to the chart
measures by default. until you add the
second dimension.
2 dimensions 2 dimensions Non-aggregatable • If you remove a

measures and dimension from
aggregatable the table or the
measures chart when the
chart includes a
non-aggregatable
measure, an
aggregatable
measure replaces
the
non-aggregatable
measure in the
chart.
• If you remove all
aggregatable
measures from
the chart, and not
all dimensions are
present in the
chart, the chart
refreshes and
displays both
the dimensions
and only
non-aggregatable
measures. To
revert the change,
click Undo.
3 or more dimensions Non-aggregatable You can’t add a chart

measures only to the report.
3 or more dimensions Non-aggregatable The chart displays • You can’t add

measures and the aggregatable non-aggregatable
aggregatable measure. Only measures to the
measures aggregatable chart.
327
Analyze Your Data Billing for Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

Report the Chart
measures are • If you remove all
available in the chart aggregatable
editor. measures from
the chart, the
report doesn’t
display the chart
anymore and you
can’t add another
chart to the
report.
Calculated Insights Reports in Dashboards

Keep these considerations in mind when adding a Calculated Insights report and chart to a dashboard.
• All Calculated Insight report and chart behavior applies to the dashboard components using them.
• Tabular, metric, and gauge components aren’t available.
Billing for Data Cloud Reports and Dashboards

When you use Data Cloud reports and dashboards, your data is stored and processed in Data Cloud. Using Data Cloud features for reports
and dashboards has billing implications.
Data Cloud services and usage impacts the consumption of credits used for billing. For more information about usage types, see Data
Cloud Usage Types.
Type Description
Data Queries Usage is calculated based on the number of records processed.
For more information on how Data Cloud usage is billed, refer to your contract or contact your account executive.
328
Analyze Your Data Dashboards
Dashboards
Dashboards help you visually understand changing business conditions so you can make decisions
EDITIONS
based on the real-time data you’ve gathered with reports. Use dashboards to help users identify
trends, sort out quantities, and measure the impact of their activities. Before building, reading, and Available in: Salesforce
sharing dashboards, review these dashboard basics. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Note: Dashboards don’t support localization.
Experience
As you prepare to curate your Salesforce data with dashboards, keep these tips in mind:
• Reports provide all the data shown in a dashboard. Dashboards can show data from more than Group (View Only),
one report. Professional, Enterprise,
• When refreshing a dashboard, all the data-providing reports must run. If the reports take a long Performance, Unlimited,
time to run, then the dashboard does too.
• Dashboards are shared via folders. Whomever has permission to the folder your dashboard is
saved in also has access to your dashboard. Ensure that you save your dashboard in an appropriate folder.
Before creating or reading a dashboard, familiarize yourself with these features and concepts.
Dashboard Editor
The Dashboard Editor is a visual, drag-and-drop tool, which you use to create dashboards and edit existing ones. The Dashboard
Editor is where you add, edit, and arrange dashboard widgets.
To launch the Dashboard Editor, click New Dashboard.
Widgets
Dashboards are made up of widgets. Each widget contains a chart or metric that shows data from one report. Different widgets can
show data from different reports. In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components.
Running User (Viewing As)
In Salesforce, different users have different permissions to access data. A dashboard only displays data that the dashboard’s running
user can access.
For example, say you’re viewing a dashboard describing Leads. Emily is a sales operations manager who sees all Leads, and Marcus
is a direct sales specialist who sees only the leads he owns. If Emily is the dashboard’s running user, then the dashboard shows data
about all the Leads in Salesforce. If Marcus is the running user, then the dashboard only shows data about Leads that Marcus owns.
1. Build a Dashboard
When you’re ready to share Salesforce data with colleagues, build a dashboard. Dashboards let you curate data from reports using
charts, tables, and metrics. If your colleagues need more information, they can view your dashboard’s data-supplying reports.
2. Filter a Dashboard
Dashboard filters make it easy for users to apply different data perspectives to a single dashboard. Filtering rules apply to fields from
the dashboard’s source reports. After filters are defined, a user viewing the dashboard can select a filter to visualize the data of most
interest. The filtered view is remembered - the next time the user visits the dashboard, the same filtered view is shown.
3. Control Dashboard Data Visibility
A dashboard displays data from each widget’s source report. You can control which data is visible based on the running user.
4. Subscribe to or Schedule Dashboards
Set up automatic dashboard refreshes and receive refreshed dashboard results by email on a schedule that you set. If you start your
week by reviewing your Sales Overview dashboard, expedite your morning by subscribing to the dashboard. After subscribing, you
can have it automatically refreshed and in your email inbox each Monday morning at 8:00 AM.
329
5. Link from Dashboard Widgets in Lightning Experience

A sales overview dashboard is a great way for teams to collaborate on opportunities because it provides a complete picture of your
pipeline. Dashboard widgets already link to source reports, so you can get more details. Link to other destinations to take action on
the data.
6. Work with Dashboards
Click a dashboard’s name to run it. Dashboard charts are interactive, so hover and click them to get more information. From refreshing
dashboard data to sharing dashboard widgets, there are lots of ways to use dashboards to keep yourself and your team informed
and collaborating.
7. Organize Dashboards
Keep your dashboards at your fingertips by embedding them around Salesforce, printing them, or deleting dashboards that you
don’t need anymore.
8. Post Lightning Dashboards to Slack
Share analytics with colleagues across your Slack workspaces and channels. Recipients can view dashboard details, share, subscribe,
view a real-time snapshot of the dashboard, and quickly open the dashboard in Salesforce.
9. Why Doesn't My Dashboard Display the Data I Expect?
If you’re not seeing the data that you expect, refresh for the latest data, check that you have the right running user, and verify your
dashboard data sources.
10. Improve Dashboard Performance: Best Practices
If a dashboard is running slowly, it likely because of inefficient source reports or because many people are refreshing it at once. By
optimizing source reports and planning dashboard refreshes, a slow dashboard can be sped up. Follow the tips in this guide to speed
up sluggish dashboards!
11. Improve Dashboard Performance
Dashboard refresh times can vary based on available resources. Since Salesforce is built on a multi-tenant structure, dashboard
refreshes are processed in a queue. Refreshes tend to complete faster off peak hours, when more resources are available. Other
factors like caching can also affect dashboard refresh times.
Build a Dashboard
When you’re ready to share Salesforce data with colleagues, build a dashboard. Dashboards let you
EDITIONS
curate data from reports using charts, tables, and metrics. If your colleagues need more information,
they can view your dashboard’s data-supplying reports. Available in: Salesforce
1. Build a Lightning Experience Dashboard orgs) and Lightning
Build a Lightning Experience dashboard to provide a graphical view of the Salesforce data in Experience
reports. Available in: Essentials,
2. Build a Salesforce Classic Dashboard Group (View Only),
Build a dashboard to provide a graphical view of the data in your reports. Professional, Enterprise,
USER PERMISSIONS
To build a dashboard:
• Drag-and-Drop
Dashboard Builder
330
Build a Lightning Experience Dashboard

To create dashboards: Run Reports AND Create and Customize Available in: Lightning
Dashboards Experience
To edit and delete dashboards you created: Run Reports AND Create and Customize Available in: Essentials,
Dashboards Group (View Only),
To edit and delete dashboards you created Edit My Dashboards
in public folders:
To edit and delete dashboards you didn’t Manage Dashboards in Public Folders
create in public folders:
To create, edit, and delete dynamic Manage Dynamic Dashboards

dashboards:
Build a Lightning Experience dashboard to provide a graphical view of the Salesforce data in reports.
Dashboards are built with source reports, filters, and widgets
Source reports are reports that provide data for widgets. Each widget has one source report. Different widgets can have different source
reports. The fields available for dashboard filters are the fields available in the objects that source reports are based on. Create source
reports in the Report Builder.
Filters let dashboard readers refine the data they see in the dashboard to a particular view.
Widgets are the visual “blocks” of a dashboard. Each widget is a chart, gauge, metric, table, text, or image.
Note: You can add the chart from a joined report as a dashboard widget, but you can’t add the full report. Filtering isn’t supported
for widgets with a joined report chart.
Use a chart when you want to show data graphically. You can choose from a variety of
chart types.
Use a gauge when you have a single value that you want to show within a range of
custom values
Use a metric when you have one key value to display.
Use a table to show a set of report data in column form.
This topic is about creating dashboards for reports in Lightning Experience. For information on creating dashboards in Salesforce Classic
or CRM Analytics, review these articles:
• Build a Salesforce Classic Dashboard
• Build CRM Analytics Dashboards
Tip: You can clone a dashboard to quickly create a dashboard with the same properties and widgets as the one you're viewing.
Click Save As (or Clone), modify the dashboard settings, and save.
331
1. If necessary, create the source reports containing the data you want to display.
Important: Be sure to store these reports in folders that intended dashboard viewers can access.
2. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Lightning > Dashboard, or on the Dashboards tab, click New Dashboard.
3. Name the dashboard.
Optionally, provide a short description. Then, place the dashboard in a folder. Private Dashboards is the default folder.
4. To add a widget to the dashboard, click + Widget.

a. Choose a source report for the widget, then click Select.
b. Customize how the widget displays data, then click Add.
c. Arrange and resize the widget as necessary.
d. To edit an existing widget, click . To remove a widget, click .
5. To add a filter to the dashboard, click + Filter.

a. From the Field dropdown, select a field to filter on. The dropdown shows fields that can be used to filter all the dashboard’s
widgets. If there are equivalent fields for your selection, hover over to see them.
b. Give the filter a display name to identify it. If the filter has many equivalent fields, consider using a name that works for all widgets.
c. Assign values to the filter by clicking Add Filter Value.
6.
To specify who people view the dashboard as, click to open the Properties menu.
a. Under Name, optionally rename the dashboard.
b. Under Description, optionally describe the dashboard.
c. Under Folder, optionally move the dashboard into another folder. Click Select Folder, navigate to the new folder, and then
click Select Folder.
d. Under View Dashboard As, choose who people view the dashboard (and all source reports) as. People could see more or less
data than they normally see elsewhere in Salesforce. Be careful not to reveal sensitive information to too broad an audience.
e. Click Save.
7.
To customize dashboard theme or color palette, open the Properties menu by clicking .
Customize colors in your dashboard by choosing a light or dark theme and one of 14 color palettes. Themes and color palettes help
you organize and curate data in your dashboard. For example, highlight a set of summary metrics by giving them a dark theme and
setting them against a light-themed dashboard.
a. From Dashboard Theme, choose Light or Dark to set the theme for the entire dashboard. To set a single widget’s theme, edit
the widget by clicking .
b. From Dashboard Palette, choose one of 14 color palettes. Wildflowers is the default color palette. If you need an accessible
color palette, choose Mineral.
c. Click Save.
8.
To switch between a 12-column and 9-column layout, open the Properties menu by clicking .
a. Under Dashboard Grid Size, choose 12 columns or 9 columns.
b. Click Save.
332
9. Click Save, then click Done.

Your dashboard is done. Review and admire your handiwork!
Edit and Customize Lightning Experience Dashboard Widgets

Get your Lightning Experience dashboard widgets to show exactly what you want.
Sort Data in Dashboard Widgets
Sort dashboard widgets by groups and measures. Sort ascending or descending. Dashboard widgets support two-level sorting. So
you can sort by Stage and then by Sum of Amount, or by Average Age and then Record Count.
Color Dashboard Data with Themes and Palettes
Customize the colors in your dashboard by choosing a light or dark theme and one of 14 color palettes. Themes and color palettes
help you organize and curate data in your dashboard. For example, highlight a set of summary metrics by giving them a dark theme
and setting them against a light-themed dashboard.
Add a Report to a Dashboard from the Report
Reading a report that you would like to add to a dashboard? Go from report to dashboard with only a few clicks!
Use Source Report Charts in Dashboard Widgets
You’ve already charted data just the way you like in a report. Instead of re-creating the chart, use it in a dashboard widget.
Show Tabular Information with a Lightning Table
Show up to 200 records and 10 columns and from any field in a source report’s report type. After grouping data in a Lightning table,
you can add measures (sum, average, minimum, and maximum) to the grouped data. If a Lightning table's source report has a
summary formula column, then you can show it on the Lightning table.
Set Decimal Places for Numbers in Dashboard Charts, Tables, and Metrics
Because 14.11B is greater than 14B and the difference between 90%, 90.1%, and 90.10001% matters, choose how many decimal
places appear after numbers in dashboard widgets.
Set the Axis Range for a Dashboard Chart
Choose the range of the x- and y-axes on dashboard charts, or let Salesforce automatically set them.
Switch Between a 12- or 9-Column Dashboard Layout
Both the 12-column and 9-column dashboard gives you plenty of room to lay out data in easy-to-consume ways.
Edit Dashboards with Keyboard Shortcuts in Lightning Experience
From the Dashboard tab, you can create, edit, or delete a dashboard using nothing but your keyboard. Use keystrokes to edit
dashboards quickly and easily in Lightning Experience.
Edit and Customize Lightning Experience Dashboard Widgets
To edit and delete dashboards that you Run Reports AND Create and Customize Available in: Essentials,
created: Dashboards Group (View Only),
To edit and delete dashboards that you Edit My Dashboards
created in public folders:
To edit and delete dashboards that you Manage Dashboards in Public Folders
didn’t create in public folders:
333
To create, edit, and delete dynamic dashboards: Manage Dynamic Dashboards
Get your Lightning Experience dashboard widgets to show exactly what you want.
1. Add a dashboard widget by clicking + Widget, or edit an existing one by clicking on the widget.
2. Set dashboard widget properties.
3. If adding a widget, click Add. Or, if editing an existing widget, click Update.
4. Click Save.
For help with setting up dashboard widget properties, refer to this table.
Widget Description
Bar Charts Use

A bar chart shows values as horizontal lengths, so this format can be good for comparing
distance or time. Use a bar chart when you have a summary report with a single grouping,
or you only want to display one grouping.
For example, to see the amount in each sales stage in a report, select Sum of Amount
as the X-axis and Stage as the Y-axis. The chart displays 1 bar for each stage, with
the length proportional to the total opportunity amount.
Properties
• Use chart settings from report – Display the source report’s chart. To customize the
chart, either deselect Use chart settings from report or edit the report chart.
• Y-Axis and X-Axis – Choose a group (horizontal bar charts) or a measure (vertical bar
chart) to display on each axis. If applicable, click + Group or + Measure to chart more
groups or measures.
• Display Units – Choose how to display values. Shortened Number automatically chooses
a unit appropriate for your data and abbreviates it. Shorten numbers to display
approximations that take up less space (for example, 1,876 becomes 1.9k), or view the
full number for to-the-digit accuracy. Full Number displays the actual values. Other options
are Hundreds, Thousands, Millions, Billions, and Trillions. Choose what makes most sense
for your data.
• Show Values – Specify whether chart segments display values, or not.
• Show Chatter Photos (Horizontal bar charts only) – Choose whether to display Chatter
photos, or not. Table must be grouped by a user or group name field, such as Opportunity
Owner.
• Y-Axis Range or X-Axis – Set the axis range. To let Salesforce automatically set axis range,
select Automatic. To set your own range, select Customize and then enter the range
limits in Min and Max.
• Decimal Places – Choose how many decimal places appear on numbers. To let Salesforce
automatically set how many decimal places appear, select Automatic. To set your own,
choose a number from 0 through 5.
• Sort By – Choose how to sort groups or measures displayed in the bar chart. Click the
arrow icon to change sort direction between ascending ( ) and descending ( ).
334
Widget Description
• Then Sort By – If applicable, choose how to sort second-level groups or measures
displayed in the bar chart. Click the arrow icon to change sort direction between ascending
( ) and descending ( ).
• Custom Link – Link from a dashboard widget to a Salesforce Record or another website.
For more information, see Link a Dashboard Component to a Website or Salesforce Record
in Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the bar chart.
• Title – Give the chart a title.
• Subtitle – Give the chart a subtitle.
• Footer – Give the chart a footer.
• Component Theme – Choose a Light or a Dark theme. Customize chart colors from
the dashboard properties menu. Individual widgets support unique themes, but colors
are only customizable from the dashboard properties menu.
Stacked Bar Charts Use

Use a stacked bar chart when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the
proportions between values in each grouping and each grouping's total.
For example, compare the status of leads by campaign, and also to compare the totals for
each status. Set record count as the X-axis, status as the Y-axis, and campaign as the
Stack By value. The chart displays a single bar for each status, broken down by campaign,
with each campaign shown in a different color.
Properties
• Y-Axis and X-Axis– Choose a group (horizontal bar charts) or a measure (vertical bar
chart) to display on each axis. If applicable, click + Group or + Measure to chart more
groups or measures.
• Stack By – Choose which group to stack by.
for your data.
• Stack to 100% – Specify whether to stack the bar chart to 100%, or not.
Stack to 100% when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions
between values in each grouping and each grouping's total.
• Y-Axis Range or X-Axis – Set the axis range. To let Salesforce automatically set axis range,
select Automatic. To set your own range, select Customize and then enter the range
limits in Min and Max.
335
Widget Description
For more information, see Link a Dashboard Widget to a Website or Salesforce Record in
Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the bar chart.
Line Charts Use

Line charts are good for showing changes in the value of an item over a series of points in
time, such as week to week. Use a line chart when you have one important grouping
representing an ordered set of data and one value to show.
Line charts are useful for showing data over time. For example, to see the numbers of leads
created each month in a report, set record count as the Y-axis and created month for the
X-axis. The chart displays a line connecting the record count totals for each month.
Salesforce doesn't plot missing (null) values.
Properties
• X-Axis – Choose a group to display on the x-axis. If applicable, click + Group to chart
another group.
• Y-Axis – Choose a measure to display on the y-axis. If applicable, click + Measure to
chart another measure.
• Cumulative – Specify whether the line chart is cumulative, or not.
Use a cumulative line chart when you have one important grouping representing an
ordered set of data and one value to show, summed over time.
For example, see the total number of closed opportunities by day for each of the last three
months. Set amount as the Y-axis, closing day as the X-axis, and closing month
as the Group value. The chart displays a line for each month, with the line’s height
representing the cumulative number of closed opportunities up to and including that
day.
336
Widget Description
for your data.
• Y-Axis Range – Set the axis range. To let Salesforce automatically set axis range, select
Automatic. To set your own range, select Customize and then enter the range limits in
Min and Max.
• Show Values – Specify whether points on the line display values, or not.
Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the line chart.
Donut Charts Use

Use a donut chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show both the proportion
of a single value for each grouping against the total, and the total amount itself.
For example, see the breakdown of your case queue by case status in a report, and the total
number of cases. Set record count for Value and status for Sliced By. The chart displays
a donut made up of wedges, each wedge representing a case status. Wedge size is proportional
to the numbers of cases. The total number of cases for all statuses is shown in the middle.
Properties
• Value – Choose a measure to display on the donut chart.
• Sliced By – Choose a group to slice the donut by.
337
Widget Description
for your data.
• Show Values – Show values on each donut group (slice). Each value is representative of
a summary value, like average or record count, for the group.
• Show Percentages – Show percentages on each donut group (slice).
• Combine Small Groups into “Others” – Show each group (slice) that represents 3%
or less of the total as a new group called “Others”.
• Show Total – Display a total in the center of the donut chart.
• Label Groups – Specify whether to label sliced wedges with values, percentages, or no
labels.
Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the donut chart.
Funnel Charts Use

Use a funnel chart when you have multiple groupings in an ordered set and want to show
the proportions among them.
For example, to see the number of opportunities in each stage in a report, set amount for
Value and stage for Color By. Since the Opportunity: Stage field is an ordered
picklist, the stages are sorted in the same order as the picklist. Funnel charts are useful for
showing the flow of opportunities through the stages; a substantially larger segment can
indicate a bottle-neck at that stage.
Properties
• Value – Choose a measure to display on the funnel chart.
338
Widget Description
for your data.
• Color By – Choose a group to display in the funnel chart.
• Label Groups – Specify whether to label sliced wedges with values, percentages, or no
labels.
• Show Values – Specify whether chart segments display values, or not.
• Show Percentages – Specify whether chart segments display percentages, or not.
• Combine Small Groups into “Others” – Show each group (slice) that represents 3%
or less of the total as a new group called “Others”.
Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the funnel chart.
Scatter Charts Use

Use scatter charts to show meaningful information using one or two groups of report data
plus measures.
For example, see how stage duration correlates with the number of activities for opportunities.
Group your report by Opportunity Name. Then set X-Axis on the chart to Record
Count and Y-Axis to Stage Duration. The chart shows a dot for each opportunity.
At a glance, you can tell if the stage duration is shorter for opportunities that have more
activities.
Properties
• X-Axis – Choose a measure for the x-axis.
• Y-Axis – Choose a measure for the y-axis.
339
Widget Description
• Detail – Choose a group to plot on the scatter chart.
for your data.
• Add – Choose a second group to plot on the scatter chart.
Salesforce Help.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the scatter chart.
Gauge Charts Use

A gauge is used to see how far you are from reaching a goal. It displays a single value, such
as closed deals.
For example, use a gauge to see how close you’re to meeting your target revenue.
Properties
• Measure – Choose a measure for the gauge chart.
for your data.
• Shorten Number – Choose whether to shorten numbers, or not.
340
Widget Description
Shorten numbers to display approximations that take up less space (for example, 1,876
becomes 1.9k), or view the full number for to-the-digit accuracy.
• Show Range – Choose whether to show or hide a range.

• Segment Ranges – Choose breakpoints and colors for segments on the gauge.
Salesforce Help.
Metric Components Use

For example, show the total number of customer support cases filed today.
Properties
• Measure – Choose a measure for the metric chart.
for your data.
• Shorten Number – Choose whether to shorten numbers, or not.
Shorten numbers to display approximations that take up less space (for example, 1,876
becomes 1.9k), or view the full number for to-the-digit accuracy.
• Show Range – Choose whether to show or hide a range.

• Segment Ranges – Choose breakpoints and colors for segments on the component.
Salesforce Help.
341
Widget Description
• Title – Give the component a title.
• Subtitle – Give the component a subtitle.
• Footer – Give the component a footer.
Lightning Dashboard Table Use

Show up to 200 records and 10 columns and from any field in a source report’s report type.
The available fields in a Lightning dashboard table come from the source report’s report type,
so you can show fields as columns in Lightning dashboard tables that aren’t included as
columns in the source report.
Lightning tables aren’t available in Salesforce Classic. You can’t add them from the Classic
dashboard builder, nor can you see them when you view a dashboard in Salesforce Classic.
If a dashboard hasn’t been refreshed for 7 days, then Lightning dashboard tables display no
data. Instead, they prompt dashboard viewers to refresh the dashboard. After refreshing the
dashboard the Lightning dashboard table shows data as normal.
Properties
• Columns – Choose columns from fields in the source report’s report type. To add a
column, search for it and select it from the Add column field.
To reorder columns, drag them up or down. The top columns appear on the left-hand
side of the table, and the bottom columns appear on the right.
To remove a column, find it in the Columns list and click . To remove all columns, click
.
for your data.
• Show Chatter Photos – Choose whether to display Chatter photos, or not. Table must
be grouped by a user or group name field, such as Opportunity Owner.
• Show Total – For numeric columns, Display the sum of all rows in the table.
342
Widget Description
• Show Subtotal – Available when tables have at least two groups. Show subtotals of
first-level groups.
• Add Conditional Highlighting – Highlight values in the table based on breakpoints
and colors set in segment ranges. Click each color to customize it.
• Max Values Displayed – Specify how many groups display in the table.
• Title – Give the table a title.
• Subtitle – Give the table a subtitle.
• Footer – Give the table a footer.
Rich Text Use

Use text widgets to help viewers navigate and understand your dashboards. Add section
titles, provide annotations for charts and tables, and include narrative text for background
and context.
Properties
• Rich text controls – Set the font color, size, treatment, and alignment.
Images Use
Spice up your dashboards with images and animated gifs. Add logos for instant recognition,
arrows that draw the viewer’s eye to key elements, and flow diagrams for greater insight.
Properties
• Scale – Choose how to scale the image. Original maintains the image’s original size.
Stretch adjusts the dimensions to match the widget’s aspect ratio. Fit width resizes the
image to fit the widget’s width without modifying the aspect ratio. If the uploaded image
is smaller than the widget area, Tile fills the widget with multiple copies of the image.
• Tooltip - Enter text that briefly describes the image to the user.
• Alternate text - For accessibility, enter text that describes the image for a screen reader.
Dynamic Gauge Charts in Lightning Experience Dashboards

A gauge chart shows how close you are to reaching a goal or target. The chart target is the maximum value in the chart. The chart
measure is the current status or performance, as indicated by the pointer. The segment ranges green, yellow, and red correspond
to excellent, fair, and poor performance.
343
Dynamic Gauge Charts in Lightning Experience Dashboards
created: Dashboards Group (View Only),

dashboards:
A gauge chart shows how close you are to reaching a goal or target. The chart target is the maximum value in the chart. The chart
measure is the current status or performance, as indicated by the pointer. The segment ranges green, yellow, and red correspond to
excellent, fair, and poor performance.
The dashboard builder supports two modes for creating gauge charts:
• In standard mode, you select a metric from the report (such as Sum of Amount) as the chart target, and then enter numeric values
for the segment ranges.
• In dynamic mode, the chart target and chart measure are report measures and field values that respond dynamically to changes in
business conditions and goals.
Before adding a dynamic dashboard gauge chart, make sure that your source report is set up for the data that you want to chart. Add
the metric that you want to track, apply appropriate filters, and include at least one grouping.
Then set up these gauge properties in the dashboard’s Add Component window.
• Report metric: A metric that’s defined in the source report, such as Record Count or Sum of Amount.
• Field: The field value from a selected Salesforce object and record.
By default, the report metric is used as the chart measure (the pointer) and the field value is used as the chart target (the maximum value
in the gauge).
For example, the chart measure for this chart is the annual contract value (ACV) for a company’s Singapore subsidiary, $150k. The chart
target is the ACV for the overall business, $640k. To be in the green, excellent range, the subsidiary must account for at least 50% of the
company’s total ACV. The actual performance is now in the red zone, so the team in Singapore has work to do. Because the chart is
dynamic, any improvements in the Singapore team’s performance are automatically reflected in the chart.
344
We created this chart using an Accounts report as the source. The report is grouped by Account Name with Sum of ACV added as a
metric. The report is filtered to show only the Singapore subsidiary.
For the gauge chart setup, the chart measure is Sum of ACV (1). The chart target is the Account object (2), with the corporate account
selected as the record (3) and ACV as the field (4).
To complete the chart, we set the ranges for the red, yellow, and green segments as percentages of the target.
When the widget and dashboard are saved, everything’s set. As the ACV for the subsidiary and the overall business changes, the dashboard
refreshes with the latest and greatest information.
Sometimes it makes more sense for the target to be a field value and the pointer value to be a report metric. No problem. To switch the
chart target and chart measure settings, click Swap.
345
If you’re working with the User object, there’s even more flexibility. You can select a specific user, or you can source the data from the
user who’s running the dashboard.
For successful dynamic gauge charts, keep these points in mind:

• Your source reports must be set up with the groupings, metrics, and filters that you want to reflect in the gauge charts.
• For standard gauge charts, the segment values are numbers. For a dynamic gauge chart, the segment values are percentages.
Sort Data in Dashboard Widgets
created: Dashboards Professional, Enterprise,
346
Sort dashboard widgets by groups and measures. Sort ascending or descending. Dashboard widgets support two-level sorting. So you
can sort by Stage and then by Sum of Amount, or by Average Age and then Record Count.
To sort data in a dashboard widget, edit the dashboard widget.

1. To set the first-level sorting behavior, choose an eligible group or measure from the Sort By dropdown (1).
Note: If you don't see the group or measure that you want to sort by, make sure that it’s in the widget.
2. To change sort direction (2) between ascending ( ) and descending ( ), click the arrow icon.
3. If you’re working with a new widget, click Add. If you’re working with an existing widget, click Update.
4. To save the dashboard, click Save.
The table sorts data as you specified.
As you get ready to sort dashboard data, review these notes and limitations:
• To apply two-level sorting in a dashboard, the source report must have groupings.
• Two-level sorting isn’t available in Salesforce Classic. When you view a dashboard with two level sorting in Salesforce Classic,
components with two-level sorting sort by label ascending. Existing components keep their original sort order.
• In table widgets with no groups, you can sort by any column added to the table.
• Charts with two grouping levels always default to sorting by the sum of values, not by the labels for the secondary grouping.
• You can sort only by groups and measures that are visible in the dashboard widget. For example, say that a source report is grouped
by type, stage, and lead source and measured by record count and sum of amount. If the component only shows type, stage, and
record count, then you can't sort by lead source and sum of amount.
• These widgets don't support dashboard sorting:
347
– Metric
– Gauge
• Two-level sorting is available only for dashboard widgets that can show two groups or measures:
– Bar charts
– Line charts
– Scatter charts
– Tables
• You can sort by summary formulas, but keep these considerations in mind.
– If a summary formula is evaluated on a specified group in the source report, the order of the groupings in the dashboard widget
must match the order of groups in the source report. Otherwise, the summary formula isn't sortable.
For example, say that there are two summary formulas in a dashboard widget’s source report. One is applied to Stage and one
is applied to Type. The dashboard widget is grouped first by Stage and then by Type. The first level sorting can use the summary
formula that applies to Stage but not the summary formula that applies to Type.
– If a source report is grouped by rows and columns (matrix report) and it has a summary formula that applies to a specific group,
then sorting behavior in the widget editor preview is incorrect. A warning in the editor appears noting that the preview is
incorrect. After you save and refresh the dashboard, sorting behaves as expected.
– If a dashboard table's source report is grouped by both rows and columns (matrix report), then only summary formulas applied
at all summary levels are sortable. But, if you add a summary formula to the table, then no summary formulas are sortable and
only groups appear as sort options.
Note:
A Word about Sorting Behavior Past and Present
For dashboard widgets created before the Summer ’19 release, there’s an extra sort option: Report Grouping. The primary
purpose of the Report Grouping option is to provide forwards compatibility for existing dashboards without disrupting how
each widget is sorted. Choosing to sort by Report Grouping ascending ( ) means "match the sort order of the source
report". Choosing to sort by Report Grouping descending ( ) means "invert the sort order of the source report".
Report Grouping isn't available for dashboard widgets created in Summer ’19 and later. If you change the sort order from
Report Grouping to a named group or measure and save the dashboard, then the Report Grouping sort option disappears.
If a source report has a row limit filter (only available in Salesforce Classic), then the Report Grouping option is always available.
348
Color Dashboard Data with Themes and Palettes

Customize the colors in your dashboard by choosing a light or dark theme and one of 14 color
EDITIONS
palettes. Themes and color palettes help you organize and curate data in your dashboard. For
example, highlight a set of summary metrics by giving them a dark theme and setting them against Available in: Lightning
a light-themed dashboard. Experience

Group (View Only),
USER PERMISSIONS
To set dashboard color

themes and palettes:
• Change Dashboard
Colors
1. Edit a dashboard.
2.
To change the color theme for the entire dashboard, open the properties menu by clicking .
3. From Dashboard Theme, choose Light or Dark.
4. From Dashboard Palette, choose one of 14 color palettes. Wildflowers is the default color palette. If you need an accessible color
palette, choose Mineral.
349
5. To change the color theme for an individual widget, edit the widget by clicking . Scroll through the settings and select the Light
or Dark Component Theme. Click Update.
Individual widgets don’t support unique color palettes.
6. Save the dashboard.

If you subscribe to a dashboard that contains a custom color palette or theme, the dashboard subscription email doesn’t display the
custom palette or theme.
Add a Report to a Dashboard from the Report

Reading a report that you would like to add to a dashboard? Go from report to dashboard with only
EDITIONS
a few clicks!
User Permissions Needed Experience
To add a report to a dashboard: Create and Customize Dashboards Available in: Essentials,
To add a report to a dynamic dashboard: Manage Dynamic Dashboards
1. On the Analytics tab, Reports tab, or report run page, select > Add to Dashboard.
2. Choose whether to add the report to an existing dashboard or create a dashboard from the report. If necessary, name, describe, and
choose a folder for the new dashboard.
3. Click Add.
4. Customize the dashboard widget.
5. Click Add.
6. Optionally, continue customizing the dashboard.
7. Click Save.
Use Source Report Charts in Dashboard Widgets

dashboards:
You’ve already charted data just the way you like in a report. Instead of re-creating the chart, use it in a dashboard widget.
350
1. Create or edit a dashboard.

2. Click + Widget and select Chart or Table, or edit an existing one by clicking on the widget.
3. From the Add Component or Edit Component menu, select Use chart settings from report.
The dashboard widget displays the source report chart. To customize the chart, deselect Use chart settings from report or edit the
report chart.
Note: Dashboard charts and report charts have certain differences. For example, report charts display more data points than
dashboard charts. Dashboard charts are still subject to dashboard-specific limitations even when using chart settings from a source
report.
Show Tabular Information with a Lightning Table

dashboards:
Show up to 200 records and 10 columns and from any field in a source report’s report type. After grouping data in a Lightning table,
you can add measures (sum, average, minimum, and maximum) to the grouped data. If a Lightning table's source report has a summary
formula column, then you can show it on the Lightning table.
Ungrouped Lightning tables display detail columns, but not measure or formula columns. Grouped Lightning tables display measure
and formula columns, but not detail columns.
Detail columns show per-record information about each individual record. The available fields in a Lightning dashboard table come from
the source report’s report type. You can show fields as detail columns in Lightning dashboard tables that aren’t included as columns in
the source report.
Measure columns display either the sum, average, maximum, or minimum value of grouped records. Because measure columns are the
result of mathematics, they're always based on numeric fields.
Formula columns let you show a summary formula column from the Lightning table's source report on the Lightning table. If a source
report's summary formula column is evaluated at All Summary Levels or Grand Total Only, it's compatible with all Lightning tables.
If a summary formula column is evaluated at Specific Groups, group data in the Lightning table the same way as the source report to
show the formula column.
Reports support up to four groups, but Lightning tables support two groups. So, you can't add a formula column based on the third or
fourth grouping of a report. Lightning tables with source reports grouped by both rows and columns only support formula columns
based on the report's first-level row and column groupings.
To add a Lightning table to a dashboard, or to edit one:
351

2. Add or edit a widget. In the Edit Component window, click .
3. Choose which columns to add.
4. Select a field to group by.
You can group the table by any field from the source report type. Group by a field even if it isn’t part of the report.
After grouping, detail columns disappear and measure columns appear. To display record-level detail columns again, ungroup the
table by clicking X or .
5. To add a measure or formula column, choose a field from Add measure column.... After adding a measure column, click it and
choose up to four measures: Sum, Average, Max, or Min. You can't add measures to formula columns.
Add up to 9 measure and formula columns. Remember, you can only measure numeric fields, so date, text, picklist, and Boolean
fields aren’t available.
Formula columns are listed before measure columns. Formula columns are identifiable by the formula icon that appears before their
name ( ).
Note:
• The default measure column is record count. You can’t remove record count, but after adding another measure column,
you can hide it by clicking the eye icon ( ).
• Lightning table dashboard widgets don't support unique counts.
6. When satisfied with the Lightning table, click Add or Update.

7. To save the dashboard, click Save.
For example, as seen on the left-hand side of this Sales Overview dashboard, you can use a Lightning table to list details about individual
opportunity records. The right-hand Lightning table, grouped by stage, provides a handy reference of key metrics like average probability
and sum of amount. The right-most column is a formula column, showing percent of total.
352
Show Subtotals on First-Level Groups in Lightning Tables

Lightning tables are a powerful tool for summarizing data on a dashboard. Second-level groups automatically show subtotals for
each measure column. Show subtotals to add subtotals for each measure column to first-level groups.
Show Subtotals on First-Level Groups in Lightning Tables

dashboards:
Lightning tables are a powerful tool for summarizing data on a dashboard. Second-level groups automatically show subtotals for each
measure column. Show subtotals to add subtotals for each measure column to first-level groups.
To show subtotals on a Lightning table, edit the widget.

1. If necessary, group data and add measure columns. To show subtotals, the table requires at least two groups.
2. Select Show Subtotals (1).
353
Note: Subtotals always match the summary type of their associated metric column. If the metric column is sum of
amount, the subtotal is a sum (2).
3. Click Update.
4. Click Save.
The table now features subtotals for the first-level group.
Depending on how summary formulas are applied to source report data, you can show subtotals for summary formulas that appear on
Lightning table as metric columns. Here are the conditions.
• If a summary formula is applied at all levels, then subtotals can be applied.
• If a summary formula is applied to a specific group, then subtotals can be applied if the table also has the specific group. If the specific
group is a second-level group, then the table must match both the source report's first-level and second-level groups. Because
Lightning tables support up to two groups, summary formulas applied to third and fourth-level groups can’t be subtotaled.
For example, say that a source report is grouped first by Type and then by Stage. It has a summary formula applied to Stage. The
summary formula is able to be subtotaled only on Lightning tables grouped first by Type and then by Stage. If you reverse the group
order in the Lightning table - grouping first by Stage and then by Type, the subtotal is "Incalculable" because the group order prevents
the summary formula from running.
• If a summary formula is applied only to the grand total, then subtotals can’t be applied.
Set Decimal Places for Numbers in Dashboard Charts, Tables, and Metrics

dashboards:
Because 14.11B is greater than 14B and the difference between 90%, 90.1%, and 90.10001% matters, choose how many decimal places
appear after numbers in dashboard widgets.
1. Edit or create a dashboard.
2. Edit a dashboard widget, or add one by clicking + Widget.
3. For Decimal Places, select a number from 0 through 5. To let Salesforce set the decimal precision, selectAutomatic. Some widgets,
such as donut charts, have the option to display percentages. Setting decimal places doesn’t change how many decimal places
appear after these percentages.
4. Click Update. (If you're adding a widget, click Add.)
5. Click Save.
354
The dashboard widget now displays up to 5 decimal places.
Some charts may display shortened numbers with a unit symbol.
Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
355
Symbol Unit Example

z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
Set the Axis Range for a Dashboard Chart

dashboards:
Choose the range of the x- and y-axes on dashboard charts, or let Salesforce automatically set them.
Some charts only let you customize the x- or y-axis. For example, horizontal bar charts only let you customize the range of the x-axis.
You can only set custom ranges on axes that display a numeric field.
1. Edit or create a dashboard.
2. Edit a dashboard widget, or add one by clicking + Widget.
3. To set the axis range, from X-Axis Range or Y-Axis Range, select Custom. Then set a minimum range in Min and a maximum
range in Max. To let Salesforce set the axis range for you, choose Automatic.
Note: Optionally, set only a Min or a Max range and Salesforce chooses the corresponding range.
4. Click Update. (If you're adding a widget, click Add.)

5. Click Save.
The dashboard widget displays the data within the range you set.
356
Switch Between a 12- or 9-Column Dashboard Layout

Both the 12-column and 9-column dashboard gives you plenty of room to lay out data in
EDITIONS
easy-to-consume ways.
To switch between a 12-column and 9-column Create and Customize Dashboards Available in: Essentials,
dashboard: Professional, Enterprise,
To switch between a 12-column and 9-column Manage Dynamic Dashboards
dynamic dashboard:
Any dashboard can have 12 or 9 columns.

When switching to a 9-column dashboard from a 12-column dashboard, even with 12 widgets in a single row, the dashboard updates
its layout. No need to remove or move widgets before switching.
When switching to a 12-column dashboard from a 9-column dashboard, three empty columns appear on the right side of the dashboard.
2.
To switch between a 12-column and 9-column layout, open the Properties menu by clicking .
a. Under Dashboard Grid Size, choose the number of columns.
b. Click Save.
357
3. Click Save.
The dashboard layout updates.
Edit Dashboards with Keyboard Shortcuts in Lightning Experience

From the Dashboard tab, you can create, edit, or delete a dashboard using nothing but your keyboard.
EDITIONS
Use keystrokes to edit dashboards quickly and easily in Lightning Experience.
Use these handy keyboard shortcuts while building or editing a dashboard. Available in: Lightning
Experience
Keyboard Shortcut Description Available in: Essentials,
Tab Focus on next item in the dashboard Group (View Only),
Shift+Tab Focus on previous item in the dashboard Performance, Unlimited,
Spacebar Select a widget to move or a widget corner to
resize
Arrow keys Move or resize a widget
Enter Click a button
Ctrl+Z Undo
Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+S Save
Ctrl+N Add widget
Esc Cancel pending widget move or resize
As you tab through dashboard widgets, notice that the option to have a screen reader read each chart’s dataset appears.
For more information about using screen readers with Salesforce, see Recommendations for Salesforce Accessibility in Salesforce Help.

To create dashboards: Run Reports AND Create and Customize Available in: Salesforce
Dashboards Classic (not available in all
orgs)
To edit and delete dashboards that you Run Reports AND Create and Customize
created: Dashboards Available in: Group (View
Only), Professional,
To edit and delete dashboards that you Manage Dashboards in Public Folders Editions

dashboards:
358
Build a dashboard to provide a graphical view of the data in your reports.

This topic is about creating dashboards from reports in Salesforce Classic. For information on creating dashboards in Salesforce Classic
or CRM Analytics, review these articles:
• Build a Lightning Experience Dashboard
• Build CRM Analytics Dashboards
Tip: You can clone a dashboard to quickly create a dashboard with the same properties and components as the one you're
viewing. Click Clone, modify the dashboard settings, and save.
1. Create the custom reports containing the data you want to display.
Important: Be sure to store these reports in folders that your intended dashboard viewers can access.
2. Click the Dashboards tab.

3. Click Go To Dashboard List.
4. Click New Dashboard.
To modify an existing dashboard, click its name from the list.
5. Customize your dashboard and click Save.
Salesforce Classic Dashboards

A dashboard shows data from source reports as visual components, which can be charts, gauges, tables, metrics, or Visualforce pages.
The components provide a snapshot of key metrics and performance indicators for your organization.
Edit Dashboards in Accessibility Mode in Salesforce Classic
In Salesforce Classic, you can edit dashboards in Accessibility mode.
SEE ALSO:
Delete a Dashboard
Install the CRM Sample Dashboards from AppExchange
Salesforce Classic Dashboards
orgs)

dashboards:
359
The components provide a snapshot of key metrics and performance indicators for your organization.
Dashboard builder is a drag-and-drop interface for creating and modifying dashboards. You can use it to customize the entire dashboard,
a column in the dashboard, or a component in the dashboard.
Tip: Dashboard builder uses a compressed page header to let you see more of the screen. To view your application tabs, simply
close the builder or click the Salesforce logo.
To customize a dashboard, view it and click Edit.
Add a Dashboard Component in Salesforce Classic

Add components by dragging a component type onto the dashboard, then dropping a data source (report, s-control, or Visualforce
page) onto it.
Modify a Dashboard Component in Salesforce Classic
A dashboard component is a visual representation of the data in a report. You can change where the component’s data comes from,
what the data looks like in the component, and what kind of component it is.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Dashboard Filter
Add a Dashboard Component in Salesforce Classic
orgs)

dashboards:
Add components by dragging a component type onto the dashboard, then dropping a data source (report, s-control, or Visualforce
page) onto it.
1. On the dashboard where you want to add a component, click Edit.
You can continue to edit the dashboard while components and data sources are loading.
2. Drag the component type you want from the Components tab onto your dashboard.
You can also drop the data source first, then drop a component type onto it. To select the kind of component you need, consider
the type of data you’re showing and the uses it serves.
360
Use a chart when you want to show data graphically. You can choose from a variety
of chart types.
Use a gauge when you have a single value that you want to show within a range of
custom values

• Enter metric labels directly on components by clicking the empty text field next
to the grand total.
• Metric components placed directly above and below each other in a dashboard
column are displayed together as a single component.
Use a table to show a set of report data in column form.
Visualforce Page Use a Visualforce page when you want to create a custom component or show
information not available in another component type.
Visualforce Pages are only available in Salesforce Classic.
Custom S-Control Custom s-controls can contain any type of content that you can display in a browser.
Examples: a Java applet, an Active-X control, an Excel file, or a custom HTML Web form.
Custom S-Controls are only available in Salesforce Classic.
3. Drag a report from the Data Sources tab onto the component you just dropped on the dashboard.
• You can show a joined report that includes a chart on a dashboard. Edit the joined report dashboard component and select Use
chart as defined in the source report.
• If the dashboard has a filter, the data source must contain the filter field or an equivalent. If it doesn't, it’s possible for the filter
not to work.
• Some custom forecast and lead reports aren't available for dashboards.
• For Visualforce components, the data source must be a Visualforce page.
Each folder can contain up to 200 data sources. To focus on the right data source quickly, try Quick Find or the Recent, My, and All
filters.
4. Click on your dashboard component.

5. On the Component Data tab, choose which summary fields and groupings in the underlying report you want to display in your
component.
Make more fields available for a dashboard component by adding them to the source report chart. For example, create a combination
chart on the report using vertical columns and lines. The additional groupings in the report chart are available to use in dashboard
components.
6. On the Formatting tab, specify how your component shows its data.
Your formatting choices depend on the component type you choose. For Visualforce pages and s-controls, set the Height.
7. Click OK.
8. Drop and click to rearrange components on the dashboard.
361
• Grab components by the header bar and drag them to the right location on the dashboard.
• Click for a data source to remove it from the component.
• Click for a component to remove it from the dashboard.
• Click component header, title, and footer fields to edit them.
• Change colors for picklist values displayed in dashboard components. You need the “Customize Application” permission to
update picklists.
• Optionally, for filtered dashboards, choose a different field in the Filtered By dropdown.
orgs)

dashboards:
A dashboard component is a visual representation of the data in a report. You can change where the component’s data comes from,
what the data looks like in the component, and what kind of component it is.
Note: If you are using legacy folder sharing, you might see the Edit option for dashboards that you are not permitted to edit. To
resolve this issue, turn on enhanced folder sharing on page 440.
Dashboard builder is a drag-and-drop interface for creating and modifying dashboards. Drop and click to rearrange components on the
dashboard. Hover details and drill-down are available when you view and not when you edit a dashboard.
1. Make Fields Available in a Dashboard Component

Make more fields available for a dashboard component by adding them to the source report chart.
2. Choose Where Users Go When Clicking a Dashboard Component
You can edit a dashboard component so that when users click the component, they can drill down to the source report, filtered
report, record detail page, or other URL.
3. Custom Four-Column Table
Table visuals are useful to list values of several items against some criteria. The fields you add to the source report chart are the ones
available for the table columns in dashboards.
4. Dashboard Component Types
Dashboard components can be charts, tables, gauges, metrics, or other components that you can create with VisualForce.
362
5. Chart Types
You can show data in reports and dashboards in the form of bars, columns, lines, shapes, or other elements. Which is right depends
on what the data is about and what you want to show with it.
6. Data Settings for Dashboard Chart Components
Choose the data you want to show on your report or dashboard chart. The chart automatically selects groupings and summary
values from your report. You can override some of those choices to focus on the data you need to share.
7. Visual Settings for Dashboard Chart Components
Choose the type of chart that fits the data you are sharing, then apply the visual settings that will communicate the data most
effectively.
SEE ALSO:
Make Fields Available in a Dashboard Component

Make more fields available for a dashboard component by adding them to the source report chart.
For example, create a combination chart on the report using vertical columns and lines. The additional groupings in the report chart are
available to use in dashboard components.
Choose Where Users Go When Clicking a Dashboard Component

You can edit a dashboard component so that when users click the component, they can drill down to the source report, filtered report,
record detail page, or other URL.
Edit a component and set the Drill Down to option on the Component Data tab. Choose one of these options.
• Source Report—Takes the user to the full source report for the dashboard component.
• Filtered Source Report—When users click individual groups, X-axis values, or legend entries, they are taken to the source report
filtered by what they clicked.
For example, if you had a stacked vertical column chart of opportunities grouped by stage, with months as the X-axis, you could
click an individual stage in a bar, a month on the X-axis, or a legend entry for a stage to drill down to the filtered source report. (Not
available for gauges, metrics, or tables.)
• Record Detail Page—When users click chart or table elements, axis values, or legend entries, they are taken to the detail page for
that record. You can only choose this option for tables and charts that use a source report grouped by record name, record owner,
or feed post. (Not available for gauges or metrics.)
• Other URL—Takes the user to the URL that you specify. You can't add URLs that begin with “mailto:” or “javascript:” to dashboard
components.
Custom Four-Column Table

Table visuals are useful to list values of several items against some criteria. The fields you add to the source report chart are the ones
available for the table columns in dashboards.
Tables show two columns of data by default. They can show totals and up to four columns of data if you customize. You can also
personalize the table and show users’ Chatter photos as long as the table doesn’t have more than 20 rows.
Before you customize a table, make sure your source report is in matrix or summary format and contains a chart.
• To create a four-column table, edit a table component on a dashboard and click the Customize Table link . Customized tables allow
null values in the results. Default two-column tables do not.
363
• Which fields you can use in the table depends on the fields you picked in the source report chart:
– The chart must contain groupings and at least one summary.

– The first grouping in the report chart becomes the first column of the table. To show a different field as the first column in the
table, select the desired grouping in the report chart.
– Use a combination vertical bar or a scatter chart in the report to make more fields available for the table.
Example
You can use a table to show:
• Top sales reps for the quarter with the number of opportunities each won.
• Number of cases by product in the last three months.
• Number of accounts by region, the total number of opportunities available, and those won.
Look at this customized four-column table that shows the top sales reps by region with the number and value of opportunities they
won.
364
Dashboard Component Types

orgs)

dashboards:
Dashboard components can be charts, tables, gauges, metrics, or other components that you can create with VisualForce.
Component Type Image Description

Chart Use a chart when you want to show data graphically. You can choose from a variety of chart types.
Gauge Use a gauge when you have a single value that you want to show within a range of custom values.
For example, to create a dashboard that measures where your current closed opportunity amounts
fall within a range of values, set the Minimum Value, Breakpoint #1 Value,
Breakpoint #2 Value, and Maximum Value for the gauge. The ranges that you set
can indicate poor, acceptable, and good performance. Set appropriate colors for each of these
ranges to visually indicate progress. To create a gauge with only two ranges, leave Breakpoint
#2 Value blank.
Select Show Percentage or Show Total to display those values on the gauge. Values
exceeding the maximum are shown as greater than 100%.
Metric Use a metric when you have one key value to display. For example, if you have a report showing
the total amount for all opportunities in the Closed, Commit, and Base Case stages in
the current month, you can name that value and use it as a revenue target for the month displayed
on the dashboard.
Table Use a table to show a set of report data in column form. For example, to see the top 20
opportunities by amount, set Maximum Values Displayed to 20. Then click Customize
Table and select opportunity name, amount, and other columns to display, choose the sort order,
and set conditional highlighting. Available columns include all chart groupings and report summary
fields, as well as the second-level grouping defined in the report.
Visualforce Page N/A Use a Visualforce page when you want to create a custom component or show information not
available in another component type. For example, a Visualforce page can display data from an
external system or show Salesforce data in a custom way. Visualforce pages must meet certain
requirements to be displayed in dashboards; otherwise, they don't appear in the Visualforce
Page dropdown list. See Creating Visualforce Dashboard Components.
365
Component Type Image Description

Custom S-Control N/A Custom s-controls can contain any type of content that you can display in a browser. Examples
include a Java applet, an Active-X control, an Excel file, or a custom HTML Web form.
Important: Visualforce pages supersede s-controls. Organizations that haven’t previously

used s-controls can’t create them. Existing s-controls are unaffected, and can still be edited.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types
You can show data in reports and dashboards in the form of bars, columns, lines, shapes, or other elements. Which is right depends on
what the data is about and what you want to show with it.
1. Bar Charts
A bar chart shows values as horizontal lengths, so this format can be good for comparing distance or time. Use a bar chart when
you have a summary report with a single grouping, or you only want to display one grouping.
2. Column Charts
A column chart is very much like a bar chart, but it can be a better format for showing relative counts of things, such as leads or
dollars. Use a column chart when you have a summary report with a single grouping, or you only want to display one grouping.
3. Line Charts
Line charts are good for showing changes in the value of an item over a series of points in time, such as week to week or quarter to
quarter. Use a line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set of data and one value to show.
4. Pie Charts
Use a pie chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show the proportion of a single value for each grouping against the
total.
5. Donut Charts
Use a donut chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show not only the proportion of a single value for each grouping
against the total, but also the total amount itself.
6. Funnel Charts
Use a funnel chart when you have multiple groupings in an ordered set and want to show the proportions among them.
7. Scatter Charts
Use scatter charts to show meaningful information using one or two groups of report data plus summaries.
SEE ALSO:
Scatter Charts
Data Settings for Dashboard Chart Components
Visual Settings for Dashboard Chart Components
366
Bar Charts
A bar chart shows values as horizontal lengths, so this format can be good for comparing distance
EDITIONS
or time. Use a bar chart when you have a summary report with a single grouping, or you only want
to display one grouping. Available in: Salesforce
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
For example, to see the amount in each sales stage in a report, select Sum of Amount as the
X-axis and Stage as the Y-axis. The chart displays one bar for each stage, with the length Available in: Group,
proportional to the total opportunity amount. Professional, Enterprise,
The advantage of the horizontal bar charts is that the chart can be extended vertically to show and Developer Editions
numerous groupings, though the width is fixed. Depending on chart settings, you can also display
Chatter photos.
1. Grouped Bar Charts

Use a grouped bar chart when you have multiple groupings, and you want to compare values within a secondary grouping, but not
the totals.
2. Stacked Bar Charts
Use a stacked bar chart when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions between values in each grouping,
as well as each grouping's total.
3. Bar Charts Stacked to 100%
Use a bar chart stacked to 100 percent when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions between values in
each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
SEE ALSO:
Data Settings for Dashboard Bar and Column Chart Components
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Bar Chart Components
Grouped Bar Charts
Use a grouped bar chart when you have multiple groupings, and you want to compare values
EDITIONS
within a secondary grouping, but not the totals.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to compare the amount of deals closed each month by lead source in a report, set Experience
amount as the X-axis, source as the Y-axis, and closing month as the Groupings value.
The chart displays a set of bars for each source, one bar for each month. The monthly differences Available in: Group,
within a particular source are easy to compare. Professional, Enterprise,
You can also compare a given month across sources, but comparing the total number of leads for and Developer Editions
each source may be difficult.
Tip: Use a stacked chart to compare totals.
Stacked Bar Charts
367
Use a stacked bar chart when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions
EDITIONS
between values in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to compare the status of leads by campaign in a report, and also to compare the totals Experience
for each status, set record count as the X-axis, status as the Y-axis, and campaign as the
Groupings value. The chart displays a single bar for each status, broken down by campaign, Available in: Group,
with each campaign shown in a different color. Professional, Enterprise,
The proportion of each campaign in each status is easy to compare, as are the totals for each status, and Developer Editions
but comparing a single campaign’s contribution to different statuses, or to the total, may be difficult.
Bar Charts Stacked to 100%

Use a bar chart stacked to 100 percent when you have multiple groupings and are interested in
EDITIONS
the proportions between values in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
orgs) and Lightning
Column Charts
A column chart is very much like a bar chart, but it can be a better format for showing relative counts
EDITIONS
of things, such as leads or dollars. Use a column chart when you have a summary report with a
single grouping, or you only want to display one grouping. Available in: Salesforce
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
For example, to see the number of leads by lead source in a report, set record count as the Y-axis
and source as the X-axis. The chart displays one column for each source, with the height Available in: Group,
proportional to the total number of leads. The width of column charts is constrained by dashboard Professional, Enterprise,
column size and report chart size. Horizontal bar charts may be better for large numbers of groupings.
Column charts are good when showing values by date, since dates traditionally run along the X-axis.
1. Grouped Column Charts

Use a grouped column chart when you have multiple groupings, and you want to compare values within a secondary grouping,
but not the totals.
2. Stacked Column Charts
Use a stacked column chart when you have multiple groupings and you’re interested in the proportions between values in each
grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
3. Stacked Bar Charts
Use a stacked bar chart when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions between values in each grouping,
as well as each grouping's total.
368
4. Column Chart Stacked to 100 Percent

Use a column chart stacked to 100 percent when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions between values
in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
Grouped Column Charts
Use a grouped column chart when you have multiple groupings, and you want to compare values
EDITIONS
within a secondary grouping, but not the totals.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to compare the number of opportunities created each month by campaign source Experience
in a report, set record count as the Y-axis, created month as the X-axis, and source as the
Groupings value. The chart displays a set of bars for each month, one bar for each campaign Available in: Group,
source. The differences between sources within a particular month are easy to compare. Professional, Enterprise,
You can also compare a particular source across months, but comparing the total number of and Developer Editions
opportunities for each month may be difficult.
Tip: Use a stacked chart to compare totals.
Stacked Column Charts

Use a stacked column chart when you have multiple groupings and you’re interested in the
EDITIONS
proportions between values in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
orgs) and Lightning
in a report, and also to compare the totals for each month, set record count as the Y-axis, created
month as the X-axis, and source as the Groupings value. The chart displays a single bar for Available in: Group,
each month, broken down by source, with each source shown in a different color. Professional, Enterprise,
The proportion of each source in each month is easy to compare, as are the monthly totals, but and Developer Editions
comparing a single source’s contribution to different months, or to the total, may be difficult.
Stacked Bar Charts

Use a stacked bar chart when you have multiple groupings and are interested in the proportions
EDITIONS
between values in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
orgs) and Lightning
Column Chart Stacked to 100 Percent
369
Use a column chart stacked to 100 percent when you have multiple groupings and are interested
EDITIONS
in the proportions between values in each grouping, as well as each grouping's total.
orgs) and Lightning
in a report, and also to compare the totals for each month, set record count as the Y-axis, created
month as the X-axis, and source as the Groupings value. The chart displays a single bar for Available in: Group,
each month, broken down by source, with each source shown in a different color. The proportion Professional, Enterprise,
of each source in each month is easy to compare, as are the monthly totals, but comparing a single
source’s contribution to different months, or to the total, may be difficult.
Line Charts
Line charts are good for showing changes in the value of an item over a series of points in time,
EDITIONS
such as week to week or quarter to quarter. Use a line chart when you have one important grouping
representing an ordered set of data and one value to show. Available in: Salesforce
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Line charts are useful for showing data over time. For example, to see the numbers of leads created
each month in a report, set record count as the Y-axis and created month for the X-axis. Available in: Group,
The chart displays a line connecting the record count totals for each month. Salesforce does not Professional, Enterprise,
plot missing (null) values.
If a missing value occurs in the middle of a data set, Salesforce displays a gap in the line.
1. Grouped Line Charts

Use a grouped line chart when you have multiple groupings—each with one important secondary grouping representing an ordered
set of data—and one value to show.
2. Cumulative Line Charts
Use a cumulative line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set of data and one value to show,
summed over time.
3. Grouped Cumulative Line Charts
Use a cumulative line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set of data and one value to show,
summed over time.Use a grouped line chart when you have multiple groupings—each with one important secondary grouping
representing an ordered set of data—and one value to show.
Grouped Line Charts
Use a grouped line chart when you have multiple groupings—each with one important secondary
EDITIONS
grouping representing an ordered set of data—and one value to show.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see monthly leads by lead source in a report, set record count as the Y-axis, Experience
created month as the X-axis, and source as the Groupings value. The chart displays a line
for each source, connecting that source's record count totals for each month. Each line spans the Available in: Group,
earliest to the latest month containing data. Comparing the total numbers for each month may be Professional, Enterprise,
difficult.
370
Salesforce does not plot missing (null) values. If a missing value occurs in the middle of a data set, Salesforce displays a gap in the line.
Cumulative Line Charts
Use a cumulative line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set
EDITIONS
of data and one value to show, summed over time.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see the total amount of closed opportunities by day in the current month in a Experience
report, set amount as the Y-axis and closing day as the X-axis. The chart displays one line,
with the line’s height representing the cumulative amount of closed opportunities up to and Available in: Group,
including that day. You can't see the amount for any single day—only the cumulative amount. Professional, Enterprise,
If the data set contains a missing (null) value, Salesforce continues the line using the previous value and Developer Editions
in the data set.
Grouped Cumulative Line Charts

Use a cumulative line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set
EDITIONS
of data and one value to show, summed over time.Use a grouped line chart when you have multiple
groupings—each with one important secondary grouping representing an ordered set of data—and Available in: Salesforce
one value to show. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
For example, to see the total amount of closed opportunities by day for each of the last three months Available in: Group,
in a report, set amount as the Y-axis, closing day as the X-axis, and closing month as the Professional, Enterprise,
Groupings value. The chart displays a line for each month, with the line’s height representing
the cumulative amount of closed opportunities up to and including that day.
Pie Charts
Use a pie chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show the proportion of a single
EDITIONS
value for each grouping against the total.
orgs)
For example, to see the breakdown of your case queue by case status in a report, set record count
for Values and status for Wedges. The chart displays a circle made up of wedges, each wedge Available in: Group,
representing the cases in a case status. Wedge size is proportional to the numbers of cases. Professional, Enterprise,
Pie charts are not ideal for comparing values that are close together or numerous small values. and Developer Editions
Select Show Labels, Show Values, or Show Wedge % to include that information on
the chart. (Only available with Chart Analytics 2.0.)
Donut Charts
371
Use a donut chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show not only the proportion
EDITIONS
of a single value for each grouping against the total, but also the total amount itself.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see the breakdown of your case queue by case status in a report, as well as the total Experience
number of cases, set record count for Values and status for Wedges. The chart displays a donut
made up of wedges, each wedge representing a case status. Wedge size is proportional to the Available in: Group,
numbers of cases. The total number of cases for all statuses is shown in the middle. Professional, Enterprise,
Select Show Labels, Show Values, Show Wedge %, or Show Total to include that and Developer Editions
information on the chart.
Funnel Charts
Use a funnel chart when you have multiple groupings in an ordered set and want to show the
EDITIONS
proportions among them.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see the amount of opportunities in each stage in a report, set amount for Values Experience
and stage for Segments. Since the Opportunity: Stage field is an ordered picklist, the
stages are sorted in the same order as the picklist, with each segment representing the amount for Available in: Group,
that stage. Funnel charts are useful for showing the flow of opportunities through the stages; a Professional, Enterprise,
substantially larger segment may indicate a bottle-neck at that stage.
Select Show Labels, Show Values, or Show Segment % to include that information
on the chart.
Scatter Charts
Use scatter charts to show meaningful information using one or two groups of report data plus
EDITIONS
summaries.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see how stage duration correlates with the number of activities for opportunities, Experience
group your report by Opportunity Name and plot the scatter chart by the grouping. Then Available in: Group,
set X-Axis on the chart to Record Count and Y-Axis to Stage Duration. The Professional, Enterprise,
chart will show a dot for each opportunity. You can tell at a glance if the stage duration is shorter Performance, Unlimited,
for opportunities that have more activities. and Developer Editions
Because a scatter chart shows data grouped by summarized values, you need at least one grouping
in your report. Choose a report format that allows groupings, such as, summary, matrix, or joined.
You also need at least one summarized field in the report to show data on the axes of the chart. Otherwise, the chart will show record
count on the axes. Scatter charts automatically show data from the source report or you can manually choose what information to
display for groupings and summaries.
If your source report has The X-axis automatically displays The Y-axis automatically displays
No summary fields Record count. Record count.
One or more summary fields First summary. • Either record count or the second
summary in report charts.
372
• The first summary in dashboard charts

even if the source report has multiple
summaries. But you can manually
choose a different summary to show on
the axis.
This is a report on closed won opportunities grouped by account and opportunity owner. A scatter chart can reveal the potential for
tapping into accounts with a higher annual revenue.
This chart builds on some key fields:

1. Plot By automatically chooses the first report grouping. We manually chose the second grouping to show opportunities won by
Account Name.
2. X-axis shows record count when there are no summarized fields or autoselects the first summary field. Since summary is more
useful, the chart shows Sum of Won Amount.
3. Y-axis here shows a manually selected summary field, Average Annual Revenue.
4. Group By is not set by default. Since the report has another grouping, the chart groups data further by the manually selected
Opportunity Owner grouping. The colored dots in the chart and legend show this grouping.
373
The scatter chart component type in dashboards has these limitations:

• It doesn't show tabular reports.
• You can't sort by labels or values.
• You can only change how Y-axis units are displayed.
• You can manually define the range for Y-axis alone.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types
Data Settings for Dashboard Scatter Chart Components
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Scatter Chart Components
Data Settings for Dashboard Chart Components

Choose the data you want to show on your report or dashboard chart. The chart automatically selects groupings and summary values
from your report. You can override some of those choices to focus on the data you need to share.
1. Scatter Charts
Use scatter charts to show meaningful information using one or two groups of report data plus summaries.
2. Data Settings for Dashboard Bar and Column Chart Components
Horizontal bar and vertical column charts are useful for comparing the values of one or more report groupings. Use the Component
Data tab to select the groupings and summaries you want your bar or column chart to display.
3. Data Settings for Dashboard Funnel Chart Components
Funnel charts are useful for showing the flow of opportunities through stages.
4. Data Settings for Dashboard Scatter Chart Components
Scatter charts are useful to show one or two groups of report data plus summaries. These data settings for the scatter chart are
available in the dashboard component editor under Component Data.
5. Data Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components
A gauge is used to see how far you are from reaching a goal. It displays a single value, such as closed deals.
6. Data Settings for Dashboard Line Chart Components
Line charts are useful for showing data over time.
7. Data Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
The settings on the Component Data tab define how your dashboard metric component gets and manages the data it displays.
8. Data Settings for Dashboard Pie and Donut Chart Components
A pie chart or a donut chart is good for showing the relative shares of different quantities. Use the component data tab to select the
values your pie or donut chart will compare.
9. Data Settings for Dashboard Table Components
A table component shows columns of data from a custom report in a dashboard. The settings on the Component Data tab control
how a table component gets and manages the data it displays.
Scatter Charts
374
Use scatter charts to show meaningful information using one or two groups of report data plus
EDITIONS
summaries.
orgs) and Lightning
For example, to see how stage duration correlates with the number of activities for opportunities, Experience
group your report by Opportunity Name and plot the scatter chart by the grouping. Then Available in: Group,
set X-Axis on the chart to Record Count and Y-Axis to Stage Duration. The Professional, Enterprise,
chart will show a dot for each opportunity. You can tell at a glance if the stage duration is shorter Performance, Unlimited,
for opportunities that have more activities. and Developer Editions
Because a scatter chart shows data grouped by summarized values, you need at least one grouping
in your report. Choose a report format that allows groupings, such as, summary, matrix, or joined.
You also need at least one summarized field in the report to show data on the axes of the chart. Otherwise, the chart will show record
count on the axes. Scatter charts automatically show data from the source report or you can manually choose what information to
display for groupings and summaries.
If your source report has The X-axis automatically displays The Y-axis automatically displays
No summary fields Record count. Record count.
One or more summary fields First summary. • Either record count or the second
summary in report charts.
• The first summary in dashboard charts
even if the source report has multiple
summaries. But you can manually
choose a different summary to show on
the axis.
This is a report on closed won opportunities grouped by account and opportunity owner. A scatter chart can reveal the potential for
tapping into accounts with a higher annual revenue.
375
This chart builds on some key fields:

1. Plot By automatically chooses the first report grouping. We manually chose the second grouping to show opportunities won by
Account Name.
2. X-axis shows record count when there are no summarized fields or autoselects the first summary field. Since summary is more
useful, the chart shows Sum of Won Amount.
3. Y-axis here shows a manually selected summary field, Average Annual Revenue.
4. Group By is not set by default. Since the report has another grouping, the chart groups data further by the manually selected
Opportunity Owner grouping. The colored dots in the chart and legend show this grouping.
The scatter chart component type in dashboards has these limitations:
• It doesn't show tabular reports.
• You can't sort by labels or values.
• You can only change how Y-axis units are displayed.
376
• You can manually define the range for Y-axis alone.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types
Data Settings for Dashboard Bar and Column Chart Components
orgs)

dashboards:
Horizontal bar and vertical column charts are useful for comparing the values of one or more report groupings. Use the Component
Data tab to select the groupings and summaries you want your bar or column chart to display.
Choose what values to display on the axes of your chart. Depending on the chart type, axis values can be record count, summary fields,
or groupings defined in the report. For example, to see the amount in each sales stage in a report, select Sum of Amount as the
X-axis and Stage as the Y-axis. The chart displays one bar for each stage, with the length proportional to the total opportunity
amount.
Setting Description
X-Axis Choose what values to display on the horizontal axis of your bar, column, scatter, or line chart. Depending on the
chart type, axis values can be summary fields or groupings. To use the second grouping or summary field defined in
the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the chart.
If the X-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula that has the Where Will this Formula Be
Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than All summary levels, then the Y-axis and Groupings
selection must correspond to that custom summary formula's grouping level.
Y-Axis Choose what values to display on the vertical axis of your bar, column, scatter, or line chart. Depending on the chart
type, axis values can be summary fields or groupings. To use the second grouping or summary field defined in the
source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the chart. If the
Y-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula that has the Where Will this Formula Be
377
Setting Description
Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than All summary levels, then the X-axis and Groupings
selection must correspond to that custom summary formula's grouping level.
Group By Choose how to group information on your chart. This option is available only if the underlying report has more than
one grouping. To use the second grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto.
Combination Select this option to plot additional values on this chart. The chart type you chose must allow combination charts.
Chart
Display Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies only to the first column.
Units For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate units.
Drill Select where users go when they click a dashboard component: the full source report for the dashboard component;
Down to the source report filtered by the group, X-axis value, or legend entry they clicked; the detail page for a chart or table
element, axis value, or legend entry; or a URL that you specify. (You can't use URLs that begin with “mailto:” or
“javascript:”.) Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled when viewing dashboard charts with more than
200 values.
SEE ALSO:
Data Settings for Dashboard Funnel Chart Components
orgs)

dashboards:
Funnel charts are useful for showing the flow of opportunities through stages.
Choose what values to display on the axes of your chart. Depending on the chart type, axis values can be record count, summary fields,
or groupings defined in the report.
Setting Description
Display Units Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies only to the first column.
For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate units.
Drill Down to Select where users go when they click a dashboard component: the full source report for the dashboard
component; the source report filtered by the group, X-axis value, or legend entry they clicked; the detail page
378
Setting Description
for a chart or table element, axis value, or legend entry; or a URL that you specify. (You can't use URLs that begin
with “mailto:” or “javascript:”.) Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled when viewing dashboard
charts with more than 200 values.
Values Choose what to display as values for your pie chart, donut chart, funnel chart, gauge, or metric. To use the second
grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart,
Auto picks the values used by the chart. In gauges and metrics, Auto shows the value of the first summary field.
Segments Choose what to display as segments for your funnel chart. To use the second grouping or summary field defined
in the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the
chart.
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Funnel Dashboard Components
orgs)
Available in: both Legacy
To create, edit, and delete dynamic Manage Dynamic Dashboards Folder Sharing and
dashboards: Enhanced Folder Sharing
Scatter charts are useful to show one or two groups of report data plus summaries. These data settings for the scatter chart are available
in the dashboard component editor under Component Data.
Group and set the scale to help users make sense of the data you are displaying.
Setting Description
Plot By Choose the grouping to display on your chart. To always use the first grouping or use what’s in the source
report’s chart, pick Auto.
X Axis Choose the values to display on the horizontal axis.
Y Axis Choose what values to display on the vertical axis of your bar, column, scatter, or line chart. Depending on
the chart type, axis values can be summary fields or groupings. To use the second grouping or summary
field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the
values used by the chart. If the Y-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula that has the Where
Will this Formula Be Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than All summary
379
Setting Description
levels, then the X-axis and Groupings selection must correspond to that custom summary formula's grouping
level.
Group By Choose how to group information on your chart. This option is available only if the underlying report has
more than one grouping. To use the second grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart,
select Auto.
Display Units Change the measure for values displayed on the Y-axis of the chart.
Drill Down Select where users go when they click the chart. Options include the source report, the filtered source
report, record detail page, or a URL you specify. Filtered report and record detail page options are unavailable
when the chart has more than 200 values.
SEE ALSO:
Scatter Charts
Data Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components
orgs)

dashboards:
A gauge is used to see how far you are from reaching a goal. It displays a single value, such as closed deals.
Setting Description
380
Setting Description
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components
Data Settings for Dashboard Line Chart Components
orgs)

dashboards:
Line charts are useful for showing data over time.

For example, to see the numbers of leads created each month in a report, set record count as the Y-axis and created month for the
X-axis. The chart displays a line connecting the record count totals for each month.
Setting Description
Y-Axis Choose what values to display on the vertical axis of your bar, column, scatter, or line
chart. Depending on the chart type, axis values can be summary fields or groupings. To
use the second grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart, select
Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the chart. If
the Y-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula that has the Where Will this
Formula Be Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than All
summary levels, then the X-axis and Groupings selection must correspond to that
custom summary formula's grouping level.
X-Axis Choose what values to display on the horizontal axis of your bar, column, scatter, or line
chart. Depending on the chart type, axis values can be summary fields or groupings. To
use the second grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart, select
Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the chart. If the
X-axis corresponds to a custom summary formula that has the Where Will this
Formula Be Displayed? option set to a grouping level other than All
summary levels, then the Y-axis and Groupings selection must correspond to that
custom summary formula's grouping level.
381
Setting Description
Group By Choose how to group information on your chart. This option is available only if the
underlying report has more than one grouping. To use the second grouping or summary
field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto.
Combination Chart Select this option to plot additional values on this chart. The chart type you chose must
allow combination charts.
Display Units Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies
only to the first column. For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate
units.
Drill Down to Select where users go when they click a dashboard component: the full source report for
the dashboard component; the source report filtered by the group, X-axis value, or legend
entry they clicked; the detail page for a chart or table element, axis value, or legend entry;
or a URL that you specify. (You can't use URLs that begin with “mailto:” or “javascript:”.)
Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled when viewing dashboard charts
with more than 200 values.
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Line Chart Components
Data Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
orgs)

dashboards:
The settings on the Component Data tab define how your dashboard metric component gets and manages the data it displays.
Setting Description
382
Setting Description
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
Data Settings for Dashboard Pie and Donut Chart Components
orgs)

dashboards:
A pie chart or a donut chart is good for showing the relative shares of different quantities. Use the component data tab to select the
values your pie or donut chart will compare.
Use a pie chart when you have multiple groupings and want to show the proportion of a single value for each grouping against the
total.
For example, to see the breakdown of your case queue by case status in a report, set record count for Values and status for Wedges.
The chart displays a circle made up of wedges, each wedge representing the cases in a case status.
Setting Description
Values Choose what to display as values for your pie chart, donut chart, funnel chart, gauge, or metric. To use the
second grouping or summary field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report
has a chart, Auto picks the values used by the chart. In gauges and metrics, Auto shows the value of the
first summary field.
Wedges Choose what to display as wedges for your pie or donut chart. To use the second grouping or summary
field defined in the source report’s chart, select Auto. When the source report has a chart, Auto picks the
values used by the chart.
Display Units Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies only to the first
column. For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate units.
383
Setting Description
component; the source report filtered by the group, X-axis value, or legend entry they clicked; the detail
page for a chart or table element, axis value, or legend entry; or a URL that you specify. (You can't use URLs
that begin with “mailto:” or “javascript:”.) Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled when
viewing dashboard charts with more than 200 values.
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Pie and Donut Dashboard Components
Data Settings for Dashboard Table Components
orgs)

dashboards:
A table component shows columns of data from a custom report in a dashboard. The settings on the Component Data tab control how
a table component gets and manages the data it displays.
Setting Description
Display Units Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies only to the first
column. For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate units.
for a chart or table element, axis value, or legend entry; or a URL that you specify. (You can't use URLs that
begin with “mailto:” or “javascript:”.) Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled when viewing
dashboard charts with more than 200 values.
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Table Components
Visual Settings for Dashboard Chart Components

Choose the type of chart that fits the data you are sharing, then apply the visual settings that will communicate the data most effectively.
384
1. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Bar Chart Components

Horizontal bar and vertical column charts are useful for comparing the values of one or more report groupings. Set the scale and
sorting to help you make sense of the data you are displaying.
2. Formatting Settings for Funnel Dashboard Components
Use color to show the status of a value through stages in a funnel chart.
3. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Scatter Chart Components
Scatter charts are useful to show one or two groups of report data plus summaries. These settings for the scatter chart are available
in the dashboard component editor under Formatting.
4. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components
Set the breakpoints and colors on your gauge component to help users interpret the current value of the field you are tracking.
5. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Line Chart Components
Line charts are useful for showing data over time. Use sorting and scale to help your users make sense of the data on your line chart.
6. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
A metric component displays one value at a point in time. Use color to help users make sense of the data in the metric component.
7. Formatting Settings for Pie and Donut Dashboard Components
A pie chart is good for showing the relative shares of different quantities. Use the formatting tab to choose how to configure and
label the divisions in your pie chart.
8. Formatting Settings for Dashboard Table Components
A table component shows columns of data from a custom report in a dashboard. You can use color and scale to help users interpret
the report data the table displays.
orgs)

dashboards:
Horizontal bar and vertical column charts are useful for comparing the values of one or more report groupings. Set the scale and sorting
to help you make sense of the data you are displaying.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Choose a sorting element to determine what element you want displayed first in the horizontal axis of any
horizontal chart or the vertical axis of any vertical chart. For a table, choose the sort order for the default
two-column table to be ascending or descending by row labels or values.
385
Setting Description
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of elements to include in the top-level grouping of the horizontal axis of a
Displayed horizontal chart, vertical axis of a vertical chart, or selected axis of a stacked bar chart. For a table, set the
maximum number of rows to include. For example, if you want to list only your top five salespeople, create
an opportunity report that lists total opportunity amounts by owner and enter 5 in this field.
Show Chatter Display Chatter photos for up to 20 records in a horizontal bar chart component whose source report is
Photos grouped by a user or group name field. If there are more than 20 records with photos, record names are
shown instead of photos. Set Grouping Display to None to show photos. Set the Drill Down to
option to Record Detail Page to take users directly to user profile or group pages when they click
photos. Chatter must be enabled for photos to be displayed. Depending on your organization's setup, you
may not see photos on tables and charts.
Show Values Display the values of individual records or groups on the chart. This only applies to certain chart types.
Enable Hover Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart type.
Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled if your chart has more than 200
data points.
Formatting Settings for Funnel Dashboard Components

orgs)

dashboards:
Use color to show the status of a value through stages in a funnel chart.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Choose a sorting element to determine what element you want displayed first in the horizontal axis
of any horizontal chart or the vertical axis of any vertical chart. For a table, choose the sort order for
the default two-column table to be ascending or descending by row labels or values.
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of elements to include in the top-level grouping of the horizontal axis of
Displayed a horizontal chart, vertical axis of a vertical chart, or selected axis of a stacked bar chart. For a table,
set the maximum number of rows to include. For example, if you want to list only your top five
386
Setting Description
salespeople, create an opportunity report that lists total opportunity amounts by owner and enter 5
in this field.
Combine Small Groups Click this link to create a custom table. The Maximum Values Displayed field is populated with the
into “Others” value you entered, and the first two columns are prepopulated with the default columns. To customize
a table, the source report must be summary or matrix format and contain a chart.
Enable Hover Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart
type. Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled if your chart has more
than 200 data points.

orgs)

dashboards:
Scatter charts are useful to show one or two groups of report data plus summaries. These settings for the scatter chart are available in
the dashboard component editor under Formatting.
Tweak data displayed on the dashboard scatter chart using these settings.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Currently sorting is unavailable.
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of dots to show on the chart. When set to 5 for example, the chart shows 5 dots.
Displayed These are the top 5 ascending values in the grouping used by the Plot By field of the scatter chart.
Axis Range Keep automatic or choose manual to enter minimum and maximum values for the Y-axis range. If there
are values outside the manual range, Y-axis automatically extends to include them.
387
Setting Description
Show Details on Display values or labels when hovering over charts.
Hover
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components

orgs)

dashboards:
Set the breakpoints and colors on your gauge component to help users interpret the current value of the field you are tracking.
Optionally, set conditional highlighting by defining up to three value ranges and colors. You need to also set the minimum and maximum
for the scale. You must set highlighting to follow a component and receive alerts in your Chatter feed when the value crosses a threshold.
Setting Description
Minimum The lowest value on the chart.
Low Range Select a color to represent the low range, up to the first breakpoint.
Color
Breakpoint 1 The value that separates the low and mid range colors on the dashboard.
Middle Range Select a color to represent the middle range, between the first and second breakpoints.
Color
Breakpoint 2 The value that separates the middle and high range colors on the dashboard.
High Range Select a color to represent the high range, above the second breakpoint.
Color
Maximum The highest value on the chart.
Show % Display the percentage value for each wedge of pie and donut charts, or for each segment of funnel charts. On
a gauge, show the percentage value of the point where the needle is pointing.
388
Setting Description
Show Total Display the total value for the chart. For a table, include the sum total for number and currency summary fields.
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Line Chart Components
orgs)

dashboards:
Line charts are useful for showing data over time. Use sorting and scale to help your users make sense of the data on your line chart.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Choose a sorting element to determine what element you want displayed first in the horizontal axis of any
horizontal chart or the vertical axis of any vertical chart. For a table, choose the sort order for the default
two-column table to be ascending or descending by row labels or values.
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of elements to include in the top-level grouping of the horizontal axis of a
Displayed horizontal chart, vertical axis of a vertical chart, or selected axis of a stacked bar chart. For a table, set the
maximum number of rows to include. For example, if you want to list only your top five salespeople, create
an opportunity report that lists total opportunity amounts by owner and enter 5 in this field.
Y Axis Range Choose a manual or automatic axis range for the vertical axis of a bar, line, or column chart. If you choose
manual, enter numbers for the minimum and maximum axis values to be displayed. If there are data points
outside the range that you set, the axis automatically extends to include those values when you generate
the chart.
Enable Hover Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart type.
Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled if your chart has more than 200
data points.
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
389
orgs)

dashboards:
A metric component displays one value at a point in time. Use color to help users make sense of the data in the metric component.
Optionally, set conditional highlighting by defining up to three value ranges and colors. You must set highlighting to follow a component
and receive alerts in your Chatter feed when the value crosses a threshold.
Note:
• Enter metric labels directly on components by clicking the empty text field next to the grand total.
• Metric components placed directly above and below each other in a dashboard column are displayed together as a single
component.
• If you don't define breakpoint values or if you leave them blank, alerts won't be sent for the component.
Setting Description
Color
Breakpoint 1 The value that separates the low and middle range colors on the dashboard.
Middle Range Select a color to represent the middle range, between the first and second breakpoints.
Color
Breakpoint 2 The value that separates the middle and high range colors on the dashboard.
High Range Select a color to represent the high range, beyond the second breakpoint.
Color
SEE ALSO:
Formatting Settings for Pie and Donut Dashboard Components
390
orgs)

dashboards:
A pie chart is good for showing the relative shares of different quantities. Use the formatting tab to choose how to configure and label
the divisions in your pie chart.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Choose a sorting element to determine what element you want displayed first in the horizontal axis
of any horizontal chart or the vertical axis of any vertical chart. For a table, choose the sort order for
the default two-column table to be ascending or descending by row labels or values.
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of elements to include in the top-level grouping of the horizontal axis of
Displayed a horizontal chart, vertical axis of a vertical chart, or selected axis of a stacked bar chart. For a table, set
the maximum number of rows to include. For example, if you want to list only your top five salespeople,
create an opportunity report that lists total opportunity amounts by owner and enter 5 in this field.
Combine Small Groups Combine all groups less than or equal to 3% of the total into a single “Others” wedge or segment.
into “Others” Deselect to show all values individually on the chart. This only applies to pie, donut, and funnel charts.
This option is on by default for pie and donut charts, and off for funnel.
Show % Display the percentage value for each wedge of pie and donut charts.
Enable Hover Display values, labels, and percentages when hovering over charts. Hover details depend on chart
type. Percentages apply to pie, donut, and funnel charts only. Hover is disabled if your chart has more
than 200 data points.
Show Total Display the total value for the chart. For a table, include the sum total for number and currency summary
fields.
Formatting Settings for Dashboard Table Components
391
orgs)

dashboards:
A table component shows columns of data from a custom report in a dashboard. You can use color and scale to help users interpret the
report data the table displays.
You can use the default two-column table or create a custom table with up to four columns and totals.
The default two-column table uses the first grouping and summary field from the chart in the source report. If the report has no chart,
default columns are based on the first grouping and summary field in the report.
Customized tables allow null values in the results. Default two-column tables do not.
To use a tabular report as the source report, Rows to Display must be set for that report.
Optionally, set conditional highlighting by defining up to three value ranges and colors. Highlighting only applies to the first summary
field column in the table.
Setting Description
Sort Rows By Choose a sorting element to determine what element you want displayed first in the horizontal
axis of any horizontal chart or the vertical axis of any vertical chart. For a table, choose the sort
order for the default two-column table to be ascending or descending by row labels or values.
Maximum Values Set the maximum number of elements to include in the top-level grouping of the horizontal
Displayed axis of a horizontal chart, vertical axis of a vertical chart, or selected axis of a stacked bar chart.
For a table, set the maximum number of rows to include. For example, if you want to list only
your top five salespeople, create an opportunity report that lists total opportunity amounts
by owner and enter 5 in this field.
Show Chatter Display Chatter photos for up to 20 records in a table component whose source report is
Photos grouped by a user or group name field. If there are more than 20 records with photos, record
names are shown instead of photos. Set Grouping Display to None to show photos.
Set the Drill Down to option to Record Detail Page to take users directly to
user profile or group pages when they click photos. Chatter must be enabled for photos to
be displayed. Depending on your organization's setup, you may not see photos on tables and
charts.
Customize Click this link to create a custom table. The Maximum Values Displayed field is populated with
Table the value you entered, and the first two columns are prepopulated with the default columns.
392
Setting Description
To customize a table, the source report must be summary or matrix format and contain a
chart.
Table Columns Specify up to four columns to display in the table. Available columns can be any grouping or
summary field used in the chart. Update the report's chart or groupings to make more columns
available for the dashboard table.
Sort Ascending Sort the custom table in A-to-Z or smallest-to-largest order in a column. You can't sort on
second-level groupings.
Sort Sort the custom table in Z-to-A or largest-to-smallest order in a column. You can't sort on
Descending second-level groupings.
Show Total Display the total value for the chart. For a table, include the sum total for number and currency
summary fields.
Reset Table to Go back to the default two-column table.

Defaults
Color
Breakpoint 1 The value that separates the low and middle range colors on the dashboard.
MIddle Range Select a color to represent the middle range, between the first and second breakpoints.
Color
Breakpoint 2 The value that separates the middle and high range colors on the dashboard. Breakpoint 2
High Range Select a color to represent the high range, beyond the second breakpoint.
Color
SEE ALSO:
Edit Dashboards in Accessibility Mode in Salesforce Classic
orgs)
393
In Salesforce Classic, you can edit dashboards in Accessibility mode.
Important: This topic applies only if you're not using the dashboard builder. Dashboard builder is a drag-and-drop interface for
creating and modifying dashboards.
To customize a dashboard, view it and click Edit.
From the Dashboard Edit page, you can:
• See the running user for the dashboard in the Displaying data as field.
• Click Dashboard Properties to change the title, folder, running user, and more.
• Click Done to view the dashboard. All changes you make to the dashboard are saved as you make them.
• Click the Delete button to delete the entire dashboard.
• Click Add Component in any column.
• Click Narrow, Medium, or Wide to set a column's width. If your component is a pie or donut chart with Show Values or Show
Percentages enabled and Legend Position set to Right, the dashboard column width must be Wide for values and
percentages to show on the dashboard.
• Click Edit to modify component properties like the component type, display units, source report, and more.
• Click Delete to remove a component from the dashboard. Deleted components don't get stored in the Recycle Bin.
• Click a dashboard component or its elements to drill down to the source report, filtered report, record detail page, or other URL. If
you drill down on a filtered component, the dashboard filters are applied to the source report.
1. Set Dashboard Properties in Accessibility Mode

Edit dashboard properties like visibility and preview settings.
2. Adding and Editing Dashboard Components in Accessibility Mode
Use the information in this topic if you are adding dashboard components in accessibility mode.
3. Dashboard Component Properties in Accessibility Mode
View detailed information about dashboard components.
SEE ALSO:
Adding and Editing Dashboard Components in Accessibility Mode
Set Dashboard Properties in Accessibility Mode
394
Set Dashboard Properties in Accessibility Mode

Edit dashboard properties like visibility and preview settings.
EDITIONS
Important: This topic applies only if you're not using the dashboard builder. Dashboard
builder is a drag-and-drop interface for creating and modifying dashboards. Available in: Salesforce
1. Edit a dashboard and click Dashboard Properties. orgs)
2. Enter a title and description for the dashboard. If you have the “Customize Application”
Available in: Group (View
permission, enter a unique name to be used by the API and managed packages.
3. Select the number of columns for this dashboard. Each dashboard can have two or three Enterprise, Performance,
columns. Before removing a column, move its components to another column; otherwise, Unlimited, and Developer
they're not visible. Editions
4. Select a folder to store the dashboard. The folder should be accessible by all of your intended
viewers. USER PERMISSIONS
5. Choose the Dashboard Running User to set visibility settings for the dashboard.
To create dashboards:
6. Select Run as specified user and set the Running User field to show all • Legacy Folder Sharing
dashboard users the same data, regardless of their personal security settings. If you don’t have Run Reports AND
“View All Data,” you can only choose yourself. Manage
7. Select Run as logged-in user to show data to each user according to his or her Dashboards
access level. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
8. Set the View Edit Page as field to preview the dashboard edit page from the point of Run Reports AND
view of the selected user. Create and
If you have the “View My Team's Dashboards” or “View All Data” permission, select Let Customize
authorized users change running user to enable those with permission to Dashboards
change the running user on the dashboard edit page. Users with “View My Team's Dashboards”
can view the dashboard as any user below them in the role hierarchy. Users with “View All Data” dynamic dashboards:
can edit the dashboard and view it as any user in their organization. • Legacy Folder Sharing
9. Under Component Settings, select the title color and size, text color, and background fade. If Manage Dynamic
you don't want a gradient, choose the same color for both Starting Color and Ending Dashboards
Color. Enhanced Folder
10. Click Save. Sharing
Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
SEE ALSO:
To enable choosing a
Create a Dynamic Dashboard in Salesforce Classic
different running user for the
Configure Dashboard Data Visibility in Salesforce Classic dashboard:
• View My Team's
Dashboards OR View All
Data
395
Adding and Editing Dashboard Components in Accessibility Mode
orgs)

dashboards:
Use the information in this topic if you are adding dashboard components in accessibility mode.
The components provide a snapshot of key metrics and performance indicators for your organization. Each dashboard can have up to
20 components.
To add a dashboard component:
2. Click Add Component from the top of any column and define component properties.
3. Choose the Custom Report to use for your dashboard. If you chose the Visualforce Page, or Custom S-Control
component, select a page or s-control and enter the display height. You can show a joined report that includes a chart on a dashboard.
Edit the joined report dashboard component and select Use chart as defined in the source report.
Note:
• Custom forecast and lead reports that you created using a standard report may not be available in the Custom Report
list.
• To use a tabular report on a dashboard, first limit the row count by setting the Rows to Display option, the sort
column, and the order on the Select Criteria page of the report. You can't use gauge or metric widgets on dashboards
using tabular reports.
4. Enter the appropriate settings for the component type you selected:Choose settings on the Formatting tab for the component type
you selected:
• Formatting Settings for Dashboard Bar Chart Components
• Formatting Settings for Dashboard Scatter Chart Components
• Formatting Settings for Dashboard Gauge Components
• Formatting Settings for Dashboard Metric Components
• Formatting Settings for Dashboard Table Components
396
5. Click Save.
Note: Metric components placed directly above and below each other in a dashboard column are displayed together as a single
component.
SEE ALSO:
Chart Types
Dashboard Component Properties in Accessibility Mode
orgs)

dashboards:
View detailed information about dashboard components.
The following settings can vary according to the component type you select.
Field Description
Component Type Select vertical or horizontal bar chart, line chart, pie or donut chart, table, metric, gauge,
Visualforce page, or custom s-control.
Header Enter text to display at the top of the dashboard component.
Footer Enter text to display at the bottom of the dashboard component.
Title Enter a title to identify the dashboard component.
Display Units Choose a scale for displaying your chart values. For table components, this setting applies only
to the first column. For best results, choose Auto to let Salesforce select appropriate units.
Drill Down to Select what happens when users click a dashboard component:
• Source Report—Takes the user to the full source report for the dashboard component.
• Filtered Source Report—When users click individual groups, X-axis values, or legend entries,
they are taken to the source report filtered by what they clicked.
397
Field Description
For example, if you had a stacked vertical column chart of opportunities grouped by stage,
with months as the X-axis, you could click an individual stage in a bar, a month on the X-axis,
or a legend entry for a stage to drill down to the filtered source report. (Not available for
gauges, metrics, or tables.)
• Record Detail Page—When users click chart or table elements, axis values, or legend entries,
they are taken to the detail page for that record. You can only choose this option for tables
and charts that use a source report grouped by record name, record owner, or feed post.
(Not available for gauges or metrics.)
• Other URL—Takes the user to the URL that you specify. You can't add URLs that begin with
“mailto:” or “javascript:” to dashboard components.
Filtered and record detail page drill-down are disabled for dashboard charts with more than
200 values.
Drill Down URL Specify the URL that users go to when they click the dashboard component. Use this option to
send users to another dashboard, report, record detail page, or other system that uses a Web
interface.
SEE ALSO:
Dashboard Component Types
Filter a Dashboard
Dashboard filters make it easy for users to apply different data perspectives to a single dashboard.
EDITIONS
Filtering rules apply to fields from the dashboard’s source reports. After filters are defined, a user
viewing the dashboard can select a filter to visualize the data of most interest. The filtered view is Available in: both Salesforce
remembered - the next time the user visits the dashboard, the same filtered view is shown. Classic (not available in all
For example, filters for a Global Sales Overview dashboard can allow users to visualize results for orgs) and Lightning
individual sales regions. Or a Cases Overview dashboard filter can allow users to visualize only the Experience
data for escalated cases. Available in: Essentials,
Each filter has a name, a filter operator, and up to 50 values. You can filter on text, numeric, date, Group (View Only),
and datetime fields and on picklists, lookups, and checkboxes. Professional, Enterprise,
When you change filters on a dashboard, the dashboard shows previously cached data, if it exists.
If no data exists, the dashboard fetches the latest. Either way, the dashboard’s Last Refreshed date
shows you the timestamp for the data you’re viewing. To get the most recent data, click Refresh.
As you prepare to filter dashboards, keep these considerations in mind.
• Fields that are used in a dashboard filter must be included in the source report’s layout.
• You can’t add filters to dashboards that contain Visualforce or s-control widgets.
• You can’t filter on bucket fields, but you can use a source report that's filtered on a bucket field in your dashboard.
• Filters aren’t applied when you schedule or email a dashboard.
• Filtering isn’t supported for widgets created from a joined report chart.
• You can’t use custom summary formulas in dashboard filters.
398
• Filters aren’t applied in dashboard subscription emails. If you subscribe to a filtered dashboard, the emailed dashboard is displayed
without any filtering.
1. Add a Dashboard Filter

To create a dashboard filter, select a field that contains the information that you want to filter, then specify the values that you want
your filter to match.
2. Apply a Dashboard Filter
Filter a dashboard to analyze the information interactively. After you filter a dashboard, the filtered view is preserved so that the next
time you see the dashboard, data is filtered in the same view.
3. Filter Dashboards with URL Parameters in Lightning Experience
There’s no need to set up the same filters each time you view your dashboard in Lightning Experience. Create a custom URL that
includes the filter values. Then when you access the URL, your dashboard opens with the filters already set. For example, you can
customize your Opportunity Stages dashboard with a different URL for each account owner. Or you can create a URL to zero in on
the closed deals for a particular account.
4. Dashboard Filter Examples
You can view dashboard data from different perspectives by applying filters. A single dashboard with well-chosen filters can do the
work of several dashboards. When you apply a dashboard filter, the view is preserved. The next time you view the dashboard, the
data is filtered in the same way. To provide the filtered dashboard view to others, you can create a URL to post or email.
399

To create a dashboard filter, select a field that contains the information that you want to filter, then
EDITIONS
specify the values that you want your filter to match.
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. Available in: both Salesforce
For flexibility in dashboard filtering, Salesforce uses equivalent fields, which are fields taken from
orgs) and Lightning
the same underlying object. For example, Account Owner in the Accounts object and Case Last
Experience
Modified By in the Cases object are equivalent because they both draw their values from the same
field in the Users object. Equivalent fields allow you to filter on fields that are similar but not the Available in: Essentials,
same, and to change the equivalent field selection for individual widgets. Group (View Only),
1. Edit a dashboard, and then click + Filter in Lightning Experience or Add Filter in Salesforce
Classic.
2. From the Field dropdown, select a field to filter on. The dropdown shows fields that can be
used to filter all the dashboard’s widgets. If there are equivalent fields for your selection, hover
USER PERMISSIONS
over ( ) to see them.
3. Give the filter a display name or label to identify it. If the filter has many equivalent fields, consider To add filters to dashboards
using a name that works for all widgets. that you created:
• Run Reports AND Create
4. Assign values to the filter. and Customize
In Lightning Experience, click Add Filter Value, choose an operator, and set a value. Optionally, Dashboards
modify the custom display text. Then click Apply. To add filters to dashboards
that you created in public
folders:
• Edit My Dashboards OR
Manage Dashboards in
Public Folders
To add filters to dashboards
that you didn’t create:
Public Folders
To add filters to dynamic
dashboards:
• Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
400
In Salesforce Classic, under Filter Options, select an operator and provide one or more values to filter by.
Note: If you create a filter on a text field using the equals operator, enclose any filter values that include a comma in
double quotes. For example, to filter on the Account Name Acme, Inc, enter the filter value "Acme, Inc".
5. In Lightning Experience, click Add. In Salesforce Classic, click OK. If equivalent fields are available for a widget, you can select which
one to use to filter the widget.
6. Save the dashboard and close the dashboard builder.
To apply the filter while viewing the dashboard, select a value from the filter’s dropdown list.
In Lightning Experience, to modify an existing filter, click . To delete an existing filter, click .
In Salesforce Classic, to modify or delete an existing filter, from the filter dropdown, select Edit Filter or Remove Filter.
Equivalent Fields in Dashboard Filters

Fields that you select for a dashboard filter often have equivalent fields, which are derived from the same field on the underlying
Salesforce object.
SEE ALSO:
401

Fields that you select for a dashboard filter often have equivalent fields, which are derived from the
EDITIONS
same field on the underlying Salesforce object.
For example, equivalent fields for the Account Name field in the Account object include Available in: both Salesforce
• Contact Account Name and Parent Account in the Cases object
orgs) and Lightning
• Parent Account and Primary Partner in the Opportunities object Experience
Equivalent fields add flexibility to your filtering options. You can filter on fields that are similar but
not the same, and you can apply different equivalent field filters to individual widgets. In Salesforce Group (View Only),
Classic, widgets are called components. Professional, Enterprise,
When defining a filter, if the field you select has equivalent fields, hover over ( ) to see them. Performance, Unlimited,
The default equivalent field that’s selected for the filter match is determined automatically for each component. But you can change
the default field for individual widgets as needed. For example, this dashboard has one widget based on the Accounts object, one based
on the Cases object, and one based on the Opportunities object. An Account Name filter was added.
To see which equivalent field is selected for the match in the widget, click .
402
For the widget based on the Accounts object, the default field for the Account Name filter is Account Name. If you change it to Parent
Account, then when a user applies the Account Name filter on the dashboard, this widget is filtered by Parent Account.
For the widget based on the Cases object, Account Name is the default field, but you can change it to Parent Account or Contact Account
Name.
For the widget based on Opportunities, Primary Partner is the default field, but you can change it to Account Name or Parent Account.
403
SEE ALSO:
Apply a Dashboard Filter

Filter a dashboard to analyze the information interactively. After you filter a dashboard, the filtered
EDITIONS
view is preserved so that the next time you see the dashboard, data is filtered in the same view.
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. Available in: both Salesforce
Note: All widgets on the dashboard aren’t necessarily filtered on the same field. The person orgs) and Lightning
who creates or edits the dashboard specifies which field to use. Experience
1. Open a dashboard.
2. Select a dashboard filter from the dropdown list in Lightning Experience. Group (View Only),
Each filter has one or more options that you can choose to narrow your selection. Professional, Enterprise,
USER PERMISSIONS
To view, refresh, and apply

filters to dashboards that
you created:
• Run Reports
To view, refresh, and apply
filters to dashboards in
public folders:
• Run Reports AND View
Dashboards in Public
Folders
404
3. To see data unfiltered, from the filter dropdown, select Clear Filter or All.
405
Filter Dashboards with URL Parameters in Lightning Experience

There’s no need to set up the same filters each time you view your dashboard in Lightning
EDITIONS
Experience. Create a custom URL that includes the filter values. Then when you access the URL,
your dashboard opens with the filters already set. For example, you can customize your Opportunity Available in: Lightning
Stages dashboard with a different URL for each account owner. Or you can create a URL to zero in Experience
on the closed deals for a particular account.
1. Start with a dashboard that includes the filters and values that you want to make available using
the custom URL. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Obtain the base URL for the filtered dashboard in either of the following ways: Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Starting from What to do
Analytics tab Open the dashboard from the Analytics tab.

USER PERMISSIONS
Click Share . A window opens to show
the URL. Select the URL text and copy it to a To add filters to dashboards
you created:
text file.
• Run Reports AND Create
Dashboards tab Open the dashboard. Copy the URL from your and Customize
browser’s address bar and paste it into a text Dashboards
file. To add filters to dashboards
you created in public folders:
• Edit My Dashboards OR
3. Add the filter to the end of the URL. For example, the following URL sets Stage (the first filter,
Manage Dashboards in
or fv0) to Closed Won and Account Name (the second filter, or fv1) to Acme. Public Folders
To add filters to dashboards
you didn’t create:
Public Folders
To add filters to dynamic
dashboards:
• Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/lightning/r/Dashboard/01ZRM0000005jrv2AA/view?queryScope=userFolders&fv0=Closed%20Won&fv1=Acme
a. The & indicates a new parameter in the URL. If the base URL doesn’t already include a ? to indicate other parameters, use ?
instead of &.
b. fv0 — fv stands for "filter value." The number represents the order in which the filter appears in the dashboard. The first filter is
0, the second filter is 1, and the third is 2.
c. =Closed%20Won — Specifies the filter value. The parameter value must be URI encoded, which means that certain characters
(such as spaces) must be written in a format that URLs can understand. For the filter value “Closed Won”, the space (' ') between
"Closed" and "Won" becomes %20 when it’s URI encoded.
4. Navigate to the dashboard URL with the parameter appended.

When the dashboard opens, it opens with filter values applied.
These limitations apply to dashboard filter URLs:
• Dashboard filter URLs with the equals operator are supported, but you can't create filter URLs with other operators such as less
than, starts with, or contains.
406
• You can’t change the field being filtered using URL parameters.
• You can assign at most one value per filter. For example, you can include fv0=Acme in a filter URL but not fv0=Acme&fv0=Universal.
• You can't add new filters to dashboards using filter value URL parameters. You can only modify existing filters.
• You can’t delete filters from dashboards using filter value URL parameters. Setting a blank value filters by no text or numerals, but
doesn’t remove the filter.
• Dashboard filter URLs aren't supported in Salesforce Classic.
Dashboard Filter Examples

You can view dashboard data from different perspectives by applying filters. A single dashboard
EDITIONS
with well-chosen filters can do the work of several dashboards. When you apply a dashboard filter,
the view is preserved. The next time you view the dashboard, the data is filtered in the same way. Available in: both Salesforce
To provide the filtered dashboard view to others, you can create a URL to post or email. Classic (not available in all
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Multiple Dashboard Views from a Single Source Report Available in: Essentials,
Group (View Only),
This sales pipeline dashboard visualizes the data from an Opportunities source report. By including
filters, this single dashboard can provide a personalized view for each member of the sales team. Performance, Unlimited,
With the Opportunity Owner filter, the viewer can see the pipeline for each team member. Vertical and Developer Editions
sales managers can focus on prospects in a selected industry using the Industry filter. This one
dashboard works for the entire sales organization.
407
Dashboard Filter with Relative Dates

To keep dashboard date filters current, use relative dates, such as next month or next week, instead of calendar dates. This dashboard
includes a Close Date filter to focus on expected results for the next few months. Because the filter uses relative dates, it continues to
work over time without requiring updates.
408
Equivalent Fields and Different Filtering Results

Equivalent fields are derived from the same field on the underlying Salesforce object. By assigning different equivalent fields on a per
component basis, you can affect the data that’s presented in a filtered dashboard.
This Sales Manager’s View dashboard is built from Cases and Opportunities source reports and includes an Account Name filter. The
funnel chart is based on an Opportunity report. In the Opportunity object, Account Name has the equivalent fields Account Name, Parent
Account, and Primary Partner.
409
If Account Name is selected as the equivalent field for the filter, the funnel chart is filtered on the Account Name field when the filter is
applied.
410
If Parent Account is selected as the equivalent field and the same Account Name filter is applied, the funnel chart is filtered on the Parent
Account field and the results are different.
Control Dashboard Data Visibility

A dashboard displays data from each widget’s source report. You can control which data is visible based on the running user.
Dashboard Data Visibility Considerations

A dashboard viewer sees data based on the assigned privileges and access of the dashboard’s running user. A static dashboard
displays data using the configured user’s privileges. A dynamic dashboard displays data based on the logged-in user.
Configure Dashboard Data Visibility in Lightning Experience
You can change the running user to control which data is visible to viewers.
Configure Dashboard Data Visibility in Salesforce Classic
To specify which data to display in a dashboard, select a running user.
Dynamic Dashboards
To provide individualized views of data without configuring separate dashboards and folders, create a dynamic dashboard. A dynamic
dashboard shows each user only the data that they have access to.
Dashboard Data Visibility Considerations

A dashboard viewer sees data based on the assigned privileges and access of the dashboard’s running user. A static dashboard displays
data using the configured user’s privileges. A dynamic dashboard displays data based on the logged-in user.
411
Because the privileges of the running user determine the data displayed in the dashboard, it’s possible to give dashboard viewers access
to more data than they normally have. For example, if the running user is an admin or an internal user, viewers could see personally
identifiable information (PII).
When setting the running user, users with View My Team’s Dashboards permission can view the dashboard as any user below them in
the role hierarchy. Users with View All Data permission can edit the dashboard and view it as any user in the organization.
A user with one of these licenses can’t view a static dashboard if the running user has a different license type.
• Chatter
• Force.com Lightning Platform
• Customer Community
• Partner Community
A user can’t view a dynamic dashboard if the dashboard creator or initial running user has a different license type. To allow visibility,
change the dashboard’s running user to a user with the same license type or grant the viewing user the Manage Dashboards in Public
Folders permission.
If a dashboard widget uses Visualforce, the running user’s permissions aren’t considered. The content displays only if the viewing user
has access to the Visualforce page.
Locale Considerations
If the running user and the viewer are in different locales, report content is presented based on the viewer’s locale. However, for a static
dashboard, the date/time fields use the running user’s locale. For a dynamic dashboard, date/time fields are localized depending on the
dashboard’s configuration.
These examples show how the viewing perspective can vary for users in different locales.
Data Context Running User Toni (in Viewing User Mia (in New Viewing User Sri (in India)
California) York)
Report 11 AM (PT) 2 PM (ET) 11:30 PM (IT)
Static dashboard 11 AM (PT) 11 AM (PT) 11 AM (PT)
Dynamic dashboard (View 11 AM (PT) 11 AM (PT) 11 AM (PT)

dashboard as me, the running
user)
412
Data Context Running User Toni (in Viewing User Mia (in New Viewing User Sri (in India)
California) York)
Dynamic dashboard (View 11:30 PM (IT) when viewing the 11:30 PM (IT) 11:30 PM (IT)
dashboard as another person, dashboard
Sri)
Dynamic dashboard (View 11 AM (PT) 2 PM (ET) 11:30 PM (IT)

dashboard as the dashboard
viewer)
Configure Dashboard Data Visibility in Lightning Experience

USER PERMISSIONS
To create, edit, and delete dashboards created by you in a Run Reports AND Create and Customize Dashboards AND
public folder: Edit My Dashboards
To edit and delete dashboards that you didn’t create in a Manage Dashboards in Public Folders
public folder:
To specify a running user: View My Team's Dashboards OR View All Data
You can change the running user to control which data is visible to viewers.
Available in: Lightning Experience
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
1.
Edit a dashboard, and click to open the Properties menu.
2. Under View Dashboard As, select the running user.
Running User Visibility
Me You’re the dashboard creator, and any viewer sees data in the
dashboard according to your access to data.
For example, if you can see opportunities only in Canada, the
dashboard viewer only sees data about opportunities in Canada.
413
Another person The dashboard viewer sees data in the dashboard according to
the data access level of the person that you specify.
For example, if you choose someone who can see opportunities
from any country, the dashboard viewer sees data about
opportunities from all countries.
The dashboard viewer The dashboard viewer sees data based on their own access to
data. This type of dashboard is called a dynamic dashboard
because it changes based on the viewer’s privileges.
3. To enable viewers with appropriate user permissions to choose who they view the dashboard as, select Let dashboard viewers
choose whom they view the dashboard as. If the viewer has View My Team’s Dashboards permission, they can view the dashboard
as themselves or as anyone beneath them in the role hierarchy. If the viewer has View All Data permission, they can view the
dashboard as anyone.
4. Click Save, and from the Dashboard Builder, click Save again.
When a user opens your dashboard, they see data as the person that you specified.

To specify which data to display in a dashboard, select a running user.
USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Salesforce Classic (not available in all orgs) To choose a different
running user for a
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions dashboard:
• View My Team’s
Dashboards OR View All
Data
2. Next to View dashboard as, click .
3. Select a running user type.
Run as specified user The dashboard uses the security settings of the specified user.
All viewers with access to the dashboard see the same data,
regardless of their own security settings.
To see all available users, enter *.
Run as logged-in user The dashboard viewer sees data based on their own access to
data. This type of dashboard is called a dynamic dashboard
because it changes based on the viewer’s privileges.
If you don’t have Manage Dynamic Dashboards permission, you
can’t select this option.
4. To enable viewers with permission to change the running user on the dashboard view page, select Let authorized users change
running user.
414
5. Click OK.
6. For View dashboard as, enter a running user.
7. Save your changes.
Dynamic Dashboards
To provide individualized views of data without configuring separate dashboards and folders, create
USER PERMISSIONS
a dynamic dashboard. A dynamic dashboard shows each user only the data that they have access
to. To create, edit, and delete
dynamic dashboards:
Available in: Both Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience • Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions
You can also add filters to a dynamic dashboard to tailor the data displayed. For example, to let a sales manager view their reps’
performance collectively as well as individually, create an organization-wide sales scorecard that contains sales rep and product filters.
The sales manager can then also view sales by product to understand which products each rep is or isn’t selling.
Managers with View My Team’s Dashboards or View All Data permission can set an option to preview the dashboard from the point of
view of users under them in the role hierarchy.
You can have up to 5 dynamic dashboards for Enterprise Edition, 10 for Unlimited and Performance Editions, and 3 for Developer Edition.
Keep these considerations in mind when creating a dynamic dashboard.
• You can’t save a dynamic dashboard in a private folder.
• You can’t schedule refreshes for dynamic dashboards. They must be refreshed manually.
• Deleted dashboards that are in the recycling bin count toward the dynamic dashboard limit. A dashboard must be permanently
deleted to not count toward the limit.
• You can’t subscribe to a dynamic dashboard.
Create a Dynamic Dashboard in Lightning Experience

Provide users with individualized views of data by creating a dynamic dashboard.
To provide individualized views of data, create a dynamic dashboard.
SEE ALSO:
Filter a Dashboard
415
Create a Dynamic Dashboard in Lightning Experience

Provide users with individualized views of data by creating a dynamic dashboard.
EDITIONS
1. To store the dynamic dashboard and corresponding source reports, create a dashboard folder
and a report folder from the Dashboards, Reports, or Analytics tabs. Share these folders with Available in: Lightning
the intended audience. Experience
2. On the Analytics or Dashboards tab, create a dashboard or edit an existing one. Available in: Enterprise,
3. Performance, Unlimited,
Open the properties menu by clicking . and Developer Editions
4. Under View Dashboard As, select The dashboard viewer.
5. To let users change the dashboard’s running user, select Let dashboard viewers choose USER PERMISSIONS
whom they view the dashboard as.
6. Click Save. dynamic dashboards:
7. Save your dashboard. • Manage Dynamic
Dashboards

To provide individualized views of data, create a dynamic dashboard.
USER PERMISSIONS
Available in: Salesforce Classic To create, edit, and delete
dynamic dashboards:
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, Unlimited, and Developer Editions • Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
1. To store the dynamic dashboard and corresponding source reports, create a dashboard folder
and a report folder from the Dashboards and Reports tabs. Share these folders with the intended audience.
2. On the Dashboards tab, create a dashboard or edit an existing one.
3. Next to View Dashboard as, click and select Run as logged-in user.
4. To let users change the dashboard’s running user, select Let authorized users change running user on the dashboard view page.
5. Click OK.
6. For View dashboard as, enter a running user.
7. Save your dashboard.
8. Set the appropriate Show option on the report run page.
For example, if you select My Team’s Opportunities, each viewer can see all opportunities for their team.
To avoid restricting the dashboard's view of the data, don’t include specific record owners in an advanced filter, such as Opportunity
Owner equals Frank Smith. When saving an opportunity report, don’t click Save Hierarchy Level.
SEE ALSO:
Dynamic Dashboards
416
Subscribe to or Schedule Dashboards

Set up automatic dashboard refreshes and receive refreshed dashboard results by email on a
EDITIONS
schedule that you set. If you start your week by reviewing your Sales Overview dashboard, expedite
your morning by subscribing to the dashboard. After subscribing, you can have it automatically Available in: both Salesforce
refreshed and in your email inbox each Monday morning at 8:00 AM. Classic and Lightning
Watch a video: Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning Experience) Experience
1. Do this Available in: Essentials,

• Choice A
Editions
Subscribe to Dashboards in Lightning Experience
Rather than manually refreshing a dashboard, you can subscribe to it. Subscribe yourself and
other users, groups, or roles to receive refreshed dashboard results by email on a schedule that
you set.
Schedule dashboards to refresh them on a schedule that you set (daily, weekly, or monthly), and receive refreshed dashboards results
by email.
Subscribe to Dashboards in Lightning Experience

Rather than manually refreshing a dashboard, you can subscribe to it. Subscribe yourself and other
EDITIONS
users, groups, or roles to receive refreshed dashboard results by email on a schedule that you set.
Watch a video: Subscribe to Reports and Dashboards (Lightning Experience) Available in: Lightning
Experience
1. Open the Lightning dashboard and click Subscribe, or on the Dashboards tab, select >
Subscribe.
2. In the Edit Subscription window, set the subscription schedule. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Add recipients or remove yourself. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
You’re automatically added as a recipient.
a. Click Edit Recipients.
USER PERMISSIONS
b. Select from the available entity types and start typing to see all the matching names.
Only the users, groups, or roles with permission to access the dashboard are listed. To subscribe to dashboards:
• Subscribe to
c. Select from the matching options and click Add. Dashboards
d. Close the Edit Recipients window. To subscribe other people to
dashboards:
e. If you want to refresh your dashboard on a schedule without emailing it to recipients,
• Subscribe to
deselect Receive new results by email when dashboard is refreshed Dashboards: Add
When the subscription emails the refreshed dashboard to each recipient, it sends it to the email Recipients
address set in Settings > Email > My Email Settings. If no email is set in My Email Settings To subscribe other people to
the refreshed dashboard is sent to the recipient’s email address set on their Salesforce User dashboards by group or role
record. • Subscribe to
Dashboards: Send to
Important: Recipients see the same report data as the person running the report. It’s Groups and Roles
possible that they see more or less data than they normally see in Salesforce.
417
4. Click Save.
The dashboard subscription starts, and recipients begin receiving dashboard results by email according to the schedule and conditions
you set. For considerations, review Reports and Dashboards Limits and Allocations on page 464.

Schedule dashboards to refresh them on a schedule that you set (daily, weekly, or monthly), and
EDITIONS
receive refreshed dashboards results by email.
Note: Available in: Salesforce

• Users with the “View Setup and Configuration” permission can view all the dashboards orgs)
scheduled to refresh for your organization on the All Scheduled Jobs page. To view the
All Scheduled Jobs page, from Setup, enter Scheduled Jobs in the Quick Find Available in: Enterprise,
box, then select Scheduled Jobs. Users with “Modify all Data” permission can click Del Performance, and
next to a specific scheduled dashboard refresh to permanently delete all instances of the Unlimited Editions
scheduled refresh.
USER PERMISSIONS
You can also set up Salesforce to send an email with an HTML version of the dashboard when the
refresh completes. For email applications that don't support HTML, the email includes text and a To schedule and email a
link to the dashboard. dashboard refresh:
1. On the Dashboards tab, select a dashboard using the View Dashboard field. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Schedule
2. Click Refresh and choose Schedule Refresh
Dashboards
Filters aren’t applied when you schedule or email a dashboard.
Enhanced Folder
Each dashboard has a running user, whose security settings determine which data to display in Sharing
a dashboard. Schedule
Dashboards
Note: If the running user becomes inactive, the dashboard doesn’t run.
To delete the schedule to
refresh a dashboard:
3. Select notification settings.
• Click To me to send an email to your user's address.
Modify All Data
• Click To others... to send an email to additional Salesforce users.
Enhanced Folder
Note: Portal users receive report and dashboard refresh email notifications when Sharing
Modify All Data
the Allow Reports and Dashboards to Be Sent to Portal
Users option is enabled.
• Dashboard refresh notifications may not display properly in Outlook 2007.

• In HTML-formatted dashboard refresh notifications, users can click the name of the dashboard to log in to Salesforce and view
the dashboard.
• To send a dashboard refresh notification to other users, store the dashboard in a public folder with access granted to others.
Other users can't access dashboards in your personal folders. To add a dashboard to a public folder, edit the dashboard properties.
• Users can click components in a dashboard refresh notification to view the source report in Salesforce.
• Dashboard components that include Visualforce pages and s-controls may not display in dashboard refresh notifications. Users
must view them in Salesforce.
• Dashboard refresh notifications can be viewed offline in email clients.
• If a dashboard has filters, only the unfiltered version is emailed.
418
• By default, Salesforce sends images in dashboard emails as .png (Portable Network Graphic) files, which are not supported in
Lotus Notes. When you enable the Use Images Compatible with Lotus Notes in Dashboard Emails
> option, Salesforce uses .jpg images, which Lotus Notes supports, when sending dashboard emails. The “Schedule Dashboard”
permission is required to view this option.
Note: Dashboard emails that contain images compatible with Lotus Notes are substantially larger and the image quality
can be lower.
4. Schedule the refresh.

a. Set the Frequency field.
Click the Daily, Weekly, or Monthly fields to show more options.
The total number and frequency of your scheduled dashboard refreshes depends on your Salesforce edition. Enterprise, Unlimited,
and Performance Editions can have up to 200 scheduled dashboard refreshes. Unlimited and Performance Edition users can
schedule up to two dashboard refreshes an hour per day. Enterprise Edition users can schedule up to one dashboard refresh an
hour per day. Additional scheduled dashboards may be available for purchase. Contact your Salesforce representative for
information.
b. Specify dates in the Start and End fields.

Dashboards refresh in the time zone of the user who scheduled the refresh. For example, if the Time Zone field on your user
record is set to Pacific Standard Time (PST), and you schedule a dashboard to refresh every day at 2:00 PM, then the dashboard
will refresh every day between 2:00 PM and 2:29 PM PST.If you view and save a schedule in a time zone different from the one
in which it was previously scheduled, the time slot could potentially change.
c. Under Preferred Start Time, click Find available options... to choose a time.
The dashboard refresh runs within 30 minutes of your preferred start time. For example, if you select 2:00 PM, the refresh may
happen any time between 2:00 PM and 2:29 PM, depending on availability.
Note: Your preferred start time may not be available if other users have already selected it.
• If you schedule a dashboard to refresh on a specific day of every month, it only refreshes on months that have that specific day.
For example, if you schedule a refresh for the 31st of every month, the dashboard won't refresh on 30-day months. To refresh
on the last day of every month, choose “Last” from the On day of every month drop-down list.
• Dashboards won't refresh as scheduled if the running user doesn't have access to the dashboard folder.
• If a dashboard has filters, only the unfiltered version is refreshed.
• You can't schedule refreshes for dynamic dashboards. They must be refreshed manually.
5. Click Save.
To delete a scheduled dashboard refresh, click Refresh > Schedule Refresh > Unschedule Dashboard.
The scheduled refresh is permanently deleted, and not sent to the Recycle Bin. Deleting the scheduled refresh does not affect the
dashboard itself.
SEE ALSO:
Apply a Dashboard Filter
Refresh Dashboard Data
419
Link from Dashboard Widgets in Lightning Experience

A sales overview dashboard is a great way for teams to collaborate on opportunities because it
EDITIONS
provides a complete picture of your pipeline. Dashboard widgets already link to source reports, so
you can get more details. Link to other destinations to take action on the data. Available in: Lightning
Experience
1. Link a Dashboard Widget to a Website or Salesforce Record
After giving dashboard viewers insights about their business, drive them to take the next step Professional, Enterprise,
by providing one-click access to Salesforce records or websites. Performance, Unlimited,
2. Visit a Link from a Dashboard Widget and Developer Editions
Dashboard builders can link dashboard widgets to Salesforce records or other websites. Visit a
link to act on dashboard insights!
Link a Dashboard Widget to a Website or Salesforce Record

After giving dashboard viewers insights about their business, drive them to take the next step by
EDITIONS
providing one-click access to Salesforce records or websites.
To link from dashboard widgets: Create and Customize Dashboards Available in: Essentials,
To link from dashboard widgets in dynamic Manage Dynamic Dashboards
dashboards:
Linking from dashboard widgets helps viewers turn insights into actions.
1. Add a dashboard widget by clicking + Widget, or edit an existing one by clicking on the widget.
2. From the Add Component or Edit Component menu, in Custom Link, enter a link destination.
Important: Depending on whether you link to a destination in Salesforce or to another website, the destination you enter
in Custom Link must follow certain conventions. Unless you append https:// or http:// or www., the destination
you enter gets pasted to the end of your Salesforce org’s domain (for example,
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/). If you enter abc, then your component links to
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/abc. Appending https:// or http:// or www. lets
Salesforce recognize that you intend to link to a specific website.
This convention means that linking to heroku.com doesn’t take you to the Heroku website. Instead, it navigates you to
https://MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com/heroku.com. To navigate to the Heroku website, enter
https://www.heroku.com/.
Example: Link Somewhere Inside Salesforce

To link to the Opportunities tab, enter /lightning/o/Opportunity/list.
Example: Link to Another Website
To link to Heroku, as described in the prior note, enter https://www.heroku.com/.
3. If adding a widget, click Add. Or, if editing an existing widget, click Update.
4. Click Save.
After dashboard viewers expand your linked widget, they can visit the link by clicking .
420
Visit a Link from a Dashboard Widget

Dashboard builders can link dashboard widgets to Salesforce records or other websites. Visit a link
EDITIONS
to act on dashboard insights!
To visit a dashboard widget link: Run Reports Available in: Essentials,
1. Open a dashboard. and Developer Editions
2. Expand a widget. Hover over a widget and click .
A larger version of the dashboard widget overlays the dashboard.
3. Visit the link. From the expanded widget, click >.

The linked widget’s destination opens.
Work with Dashboards

Click a dashboard’s name to run it. Dashboard charts are interactive, so hover and click them to get
EDITIONS
more information. From refreshing dashboard data to sharing dashboard widgets, there are lots of
ways to use dashboards to keep yourself and your team informed and collaborating. Available in: Salesforce
1. Refresh Dashboard Data orgs) and Lightning
To get the most current data, you can refresh a dashboard at any time. When you refresh a Experience
dashboard, the results update for every user who has access to the dashboard. Changing filters Available in: Essentials,
on a dashboard refreshes the dashboard unless previously cached data exists. When a dashboard Group (View Only),
is viewed in an Experience Cloud site, it shows current data automatically. The dashboard’s Last Professional, Enterprise,
Refreshed date shows the timestamp for the data that you’re viewing. Performance, Unlimited,
2. Expand Dashboard Widgets to See a Larger Version in Lightning Experience and Developer Editions
Sometimes a chart or table is just a little too small. Open it in a window so you can see all the
details.
3. Share an Image of a Dashboard Widget on Chatter in Lightning Experience
Start the conversation by sharing images of dashboard widgets on Chatter.
4. View Filtered Source Reports in Lightning Experience
Want to know more about the data shown in a dashboard chart? Click a chart segment, axis label, or legend to view a filtered version
of the source report.
5. Resize Columns in Lightning Tables
If a Lightning table column feels a bit cramped, you can resize it.
421
Refresh Dashboard Data

To get the most current data, you can refresh a dashboard at any time. When you refresh a dashboard,
EDITIONS
the results update for every user who has access to the dashboard. Changing filters on a dashboard
refreshes the dashboard unless previously cached data exists. When a dashboard is viewed in an Available in: both Salesforce
Experience Cloud site, it shows current data automatically. The dashboard’s Last Refreshed date Classic (not available in all
shows the timestamp for the data that you’re viewing. orgs) and Lightning
1. Click Refresh. Experience
2. While the dashboard data is being updated, the Refresh button changes to Refreshing. You can Available in: Essentials,
leave the dashboard and work on other things in Salesforce while the data refreshes. Group (View Only),
Take note of these considerations.
• If your dashboard data doesn't refresh after 10 minutes, the refresh automatically stops. If and Developer Editions
necessary, click Refresh again.
• Additional refreshes submitted during a refresh and up to 1 minute after the completion of a USER PERMISSIONS
refresh are ignored.
• In the Salesforce mobile app, Pull-to-Refresh doesn’t trigger a dashboard refresh. To refresh a To refresh dashboards:
dashboard, click Refresh. You receive a notification when the dashboard finishs refreshing. • Run Reports AND access
to dashboard folder
Expand Dashboard Widgets to See a Larger Version in Lightning Experience

Sometimes a chart or table is just a little too small. Open it in a window so you can see all the details.
EDITIONS
2. Hover over a widget and click .
Experience
A larger version of the dashboard widget overlays the dashboard. Optionally, click the left and right
arrows to cycle through expanded versions of the dashboard’s widget. Available in: Essentials,
Group (View Only),
USER PERMISSIONS
To expand dashboard
widgets:
• Run Reports
422
Share an Image of a Dashboard Widget on Chatter in Lightning Experience

Start the conversation by sharing images of dashboard widgets on Chatter.
EDITIONS
1. View a dashboard.
2. Find the widget that you want to share, and expand it by clicking .
Experience
3. In the expanded widget, click .
The Chatter menu opens. You can compose your post and view the dashboard feed by scrolling Group, Professional,
down. Enterprise, Performance,
4. Compose your post. You can @mention people and groups, and format with rich text.
Editions
5. Click Share.
The dashboard widget image posts to the Dashboard feed. To view the dashboard feed, and your USER PERMISSIONS
post, click .
To share images of
Note: If you can’t post images of dashboard widgets on Chatter, ask your Salesforce admin dashboard widgets on
to turn on feed tracking for dashboards. Chatter:
• Run Reports
Downloaded and shared images of dashboard widget tables can be up to 3000 pixels in
height or approximately 100 rows. Rows beyond the limit are clipped. To avoid clipping, filter
the chart to fewer than 100 rows.
View Filtered Source Reports in Lightning Experience

Want to know more about the data shown in a dashboard chart? Click a chart segment, axis label,
EDITIONS
or legend to view a filtered version of the source report.
For example, click the Prospecting segment of an opportunity pipeline funnel chart to open and Available in: Lightning
filter the source report by Stage equals Prospecting. Experience
1. Open a dashboard. Available in: Essentials,
2. Click a chart segment, axis label, or legend. Group (View Only),
The source report opens. The segment you click (plus any applied dashboard filters) appear as linked Performance, Unlimited,
filters when the report opens. and Developer Editions
Note: Linked filters don't persist after you leave the report and you can't edit them directly.
USER PERMISSIONS
To open the filtered source report in a new tab, hold down CTRL on Windows® or Command on
MacOS® and click a chart segment.
To view filtered source
If a chart displays one of these types of data, the source report doesn’t filter: reports:
• Encrypted strings • Run Reports
• Dates fields with month-in-year or day-in-month granularity
423
Resize Columns in Lightning Tables


dashboards:
If a Lightning table column feels a bit cramped, you can resize it.
Resize a Lightning table column from the Edit Component preview or while reading a dashboard.
You can resize columns, but not rows.
When you resize a column, you don't resize it for other dashboard viewers.
Columns don't retain their sizes, so next time you open the dashboard you'll have to resize the column again.
1. Open the table that you want to resize.
2. Drag the edge of the column that you want to
.eziser
424
Organize Dashboards
Keep your dashboards at your fingertips by embedding them around Salesforce, printing them, or
EDITIONS
deleting dashboards that you don’t need anymore.
1. Embed Dashboards on the Home Tab and in Lightning Apps Classic (not available in all
Embed dashboards to surface insights right where people work. orgs) and Lightning
Experience
2. Change Dashboard Owner
Transfer dashboard ownership if responsibilities change or the current dashboard owner leaves Available in: Essentials,
your organization. The new owner has full control over the dashboard contents. You can change Group (View Only),
ownership of one or more dashboards at a time. You must have edit access to the folder that Professional, Enterprise,
contains the dashboard. The new owner is granted edit access to the dashboard folder.
3. Print a Dashboard
Print dashboards using your browser’s print option.
4. Download a Dashboard to a PNG File
Download your dashboard as a PNG file that you can embed in presentations or refer to wherever you are.
5. Delete a Dashboard
It’s a good idea to delete dashboards that you no longer need.
6. Install the CRM Sample Dashboards from AppExchange
Use these dashboards from the AppExchange as a starting point for building dashboards that meet your business needs.
7. Install the Preconfigured Sales Cloud Dashboards from AppExchange
The preconfigured Sales Cloud dashboards and underlying reports are based on Sales Cloud objects and fields. Use these dashboards
to track key performance metrics for your executives, sales managers, sales reps, and other team members.
Embed Dashboards on the Home Tab and in Lightning Apps

Embed dashboards to surface insights right where people work.
EDITIONS
For example, add the Sales Pipeline dashboard to the Home tab to give your sales team the
information they need when they log in to Salesforce. Available in: Lightning
Experience
Embedded dashboards are fully interactive. Refresh them, apply filters, and click chart segments to
drill into filtered reports. Available in: Essentials,
Dashboards need space to display charts and tables. If an embedded dashboard is squished into Group (View Only),
too small a space, then a collapsed version displays instead of the full dashboard. The collapsed Professional, Enterprise,
version links back to the full dashboard.
1. From Setup, enter App Builder in the Quick Find box, and then select Lightning App
Builder.
USER PERMISSIONS
2. Click New.
3. Choose where to embed the dashboard. (Record pages don’t support embedded dashboards.) To embed dashboards on
the Lightning Home tab and
• To embed a dashboard on an app page, select App Page.
in Lightning apps:
• To embed a dashboard on the Home tab, select Home Page.
Click Next.
4. Give your app page or home tab layout a label. Then, click Next.
425
5. Choose a layout. Then, click Done.

6. Drag and drop the Dashboard component into place.
7. From the Dashboard dropdown list, choose a dashboard to embed.
8. Optionally, specify a maximum height and choose to show or hide the dashboard if an error prevents it from loading.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Activate.
SEE ALSO:
Activate Lightning Experience Home Pages
426
Change Dashboard Owner

Transfer dashboard ownership if responsibilities change or the current dashboard owner leaves
EDITIONS
your organization. The new owner has full control over the dashboard contents. You can change
ownership of one or more dashboards at a time. You must have edit access to the folder that Available in: Lightning
contains the dashboard. The new owner is granted edit access to the dashboard folder. Experience
Change Ownership of a Single Dashboard
1. On the Analytics tab or the Dashboards tab, find the dashboard. Group, Professional,
2. Select Enterprise, Performance,
> Change Owner. Unlimited, and Developer
3. Select the new owner. Editions
4. To send an email notification to the new owner, select Send Email Notification.
5. Click Submit. USER PERMISSIONS
Change Ownership of Multiple Dashboards To change the dashboard

owner to anyone in your org:
1. On the Analytics tab, click Browse and then Dashboards.
• View All Data
2. Select the dashboards.
To change the dashboard
3. Select Manage Items owner from and to anyone
> Change Owner.
who rolls up to you in your
4. Select the new owner. team’s Role Hierarchy:
5. To send an email notification to the new owner, select Send Email Notification. • Manage My Team’s
Dashboards
6. Click Submit.
To be assigned as the
owner of a dashboard:
• Edit My Dashboards
AND
Create Customize
Dashboards
AND
Manage Dashboards
For dynamic
dashboards, add:
Manage Dynamic
Dashboards
AND
View My Team's
Dashboards (for
Dynamic Dashboards
with Run As Selected
User specified)
427
Print a Dashboard
Print dashboards using your browser’s print option.
EDITIONS
• Set the paper orientation to landscape so that it’s wide enough for all the columns of dashboard
widgets. Available in: both Salesforce
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
• If necessary, resize your columns. Experience
Note: As an alternative to using browser print in Lightning Experience, use the Download Available in: Essentials,
option to download a PNG image of the dashboard. Group (View Only),
USER PERMISSIONS
To print dashboards:
• Run Reports AND access
to dashboard folder
Download a Dashboard to a PNG File

Download your dashboard as a PNG file that you can embed in presentations or refer to wherever
EDITIONS
you are.
• From the dashboard, click Available in: Lightning
> Download.
Experience
• A PNG image of your dashboard is saved to your selected download location.
Group (View Only),
USER PERMISSIONS
To download dashboard
images:
• Run Reports AND access
to dashboard folder
428
Delete a Dashboard
It’s a good idea to delete dashboards that you no longer need.
EDITIONS
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components.
Deleting a dashboard also deletes the widgets within it. However, the custom reports that the
widgets use aren’t deleted.
orgs) and Lightning
Deleted dashboards are moved to the Recycle Bin. Experience
Note: Deleted dashboards that are in the Recycle Bin count toward the five dynamic Available in: Essentials,
dashboard limit. They must be permanently deleted from the Recycle Bin to not count toward Group (View Only),
the limit. Professional, Enterprise,
To delete a dashboard in Lightning Experience:
• On the Analytics tab or the Dashboards tab, find the dashboard you want to delete and select
> Delete. USER PERMISSIONS
• Open the dashboard you want to delete and select > Delete.
To delete dashboards:
To delete a dashboard in Salesforce Classic: • Run Reports AND Create
and Customize
1. Click the Dashboards tab.
Dashboards (If the
2. Click Go To Dashboards List. dashboard is in a private
folder.)
3. Choose the folder where the dashboard is stored.
Edit My Dashboards (If
4. Click Del next to the name of the dashboard. the dashboard is in a
shared folder.)
Note: In Lightning Experience, if you restore a deleted dashboard from the recycle bin, it’s
converted to a Salesforce Classic dashboard. The grid is reset to the default Salesforce Classic To delete dashboards
layout. created by another user:
Public Folders
Install the CRM Sample Dashboards from AppExchange

Use these dashboards from the AppExchange as a starting point for building dashboards that meet
EDITIONS
your business needs.
The CRM sample dashboards package from AppExchange offers best-practice dashboards with Available in: both Salesforce
underlying reports that are based on your organization’s standard objects and fields. You can use Classic (not available in all
these sales, marketing, service, and support dashboards to track business processes and key orgs) and Lightning
performance metrics for yourself, your team, and your company. Dashboards in this package include: Experience
• Sales & Marketing Dashboards Available in: Essentials,

Group (View Only),
– Marketing Executive Dashboard
– Sales Executive Dashboard Performance, Unlimited,
– Sales Manager Dashboard and Developer Editions
– Salesperson Dashboard
• Customer Service Dashboards USER PERMISSIONS
– Agent Supervisor Overview Dashboard To install packages:

– Service Executive Overview Dashboard • Download AppExchange
Packages
429
– Service KPIs Dashboard
1. In AppExchange, search for “Salesforce CRM Dashboards” and click Get It Now.
2. To install the sample dashboards, install the package.
Install the Preconfigured Sales Cloud Dashboards from AppExchange

The preconfigured Sales Cloud dashboards and underlying reports are based on Sales Cloud objects
EDITIONS
and fields. Use these dashboards to track key performance metrics for your executives, sales
managers, sales reps, and other team members. Available in: Lightning
1. In AppExchange, search for Preconfigured Sales Cloud Dashboards. Experience
2. Click Get It Now. Available in: Essentials,
3. Install the package. Group (View Only),
USER PERMISSIONS
To install packages:
• Download AppExchange
Packages
Post Lightning Dashboards to Slack

Share analytics with colleagues across your Slack workspaces and channels. Recipients can view
EDITIONS
dashboard details, share, subscribe, view a real-time snapshot of the dashboard, and quickly open
the dashboard in Salesforce. Available in: Lightning
To set up the Post to Slack feature, complete these steps. Experience
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Slack, and then select Initial Slack Setup. Available in: Essentials,
2. At step 2, click Accept to agree to the Terms and Conditions. Group (View Only),
3. In the left navigation panel, select CRM Analytics for Slack and click Agree and enable Slack Performance, Unlimited,
integration. For more information, see Enable Salesforce for Slack Integrations. and Developer Editions
4. Each user must then add CRM Analytics for Slack to their personal Slack sidebar and connect The CRM Analytics for Slack
their Salesforce account. See Add Apps in Your Personal Slack Sidebar. app is available for use
After setting up the feature, the Post to Slack icon appears on Lightning dashboards. where approved by a
workspace admin and
installed in Slack.
USER PERMISSIONS
To use CRM Analytics for

Slack:
• Connect Salesforce with
Slack
430
Click the icon to select the Slack workspace and channels where you want to share the dashboard. Optionally, type a message to
accompany your post.
Note: The maximum number of channels available within the Post to Slack dialog box is 1000.
The post appears in the channels that you selected. Click the dashboard name to go to the dashboard in Salesforce.
Or click View Details to see more and access the Share, Subscribe, and View Snapshot actions.
431
Note: View Snapshot runs the dashboard in the background and creates a screenshot .png file. If you share your snapshot, keep
in mind that others can see and share your personal view of your data.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Analytics for Slack
Why Doesn't My Dashboard Display the Data I Expect?

If you’re not seeing the data that you expect, refresh for the latest data, check that you have the right running user, and verify your
dashboard data sources.
If your dashboard data doesn't look as you expect, check the following:
• Running user: Remember that you're viewing the dashboard from the perspective of the running user. What you see is based on
that user's access rights. For dynamic dashboards, you can only see what you yourself can access.
• Refresh Dashboard: If you’re viewing old data, click Refresh to refresh your dashboard.
• Data sources: Verify that your data sources (reports, s-controls, or Visualforce pages) contain the information you want displayed in
the dashboard.
For further information regarding dashboard running user and dashboard refresh, review the articles Choose a Dashboard Running User
on page 414 and Refresh Dashboard Data on page 422.
Improve Dashboard Performance: Best Practices

If a dashboard is running slowly, it likely because of inefficient source reports or because many
EDITIONS
people are refreshing it at once. By optimizing source reports and planning dashboard refreshes, a
slow dashboard can be sped up. Follow the tips in this guide to speed up sluggish dashboards! Available in: Salesforce
In Salesforce Classic, widgets are called components. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Use Efficient Source Reports
When you refresh a dashboard, all the source reports run. If source reports take a long time to run, Group (View Only),
then dashboards based on them take a long time to refresh. Professional, Enterprise,
Here's how you can optimize source report performance to make dashboards refresh fast. Performance, Unlimited,
432
Create source reports that run fast

The best way to speed up a slow dashboard is to speed up its source reports. The faster source reports run, the faster the dashboard
refreshes!
There are lots of ways to speed up a slow source report.
• Filter report data efficiently
• Remove unnecessary columns
• Hide detail rows
• Write efficient formulas
For a complete guide to improving report performance, see Improve Report Performance on page 306.
Base your dashboard on as few source reports as possible
Ideally, base your dashboard on a single source report.
Each dashboard widget gets data from one source report, but multiple dashboard widgets can get data from the same source report.
Dashboards based on fewer source reports refresh faster than dashboards based on many. The fewer source reports, the fewer
reports have to run for the dashboard to gather its data. The fastest refreshing dashboards are based on only one source report.
As a best practice, create one source report that returns lots of data, and then divvy up that data among the dashboard widgets.
For example, say you're creating a sales overview dashboard that shows details on open opportunities and closed opportunities.
You could create two source reports, one that returns open opportunities and one that returns closed opportunities. But then your
dashboard would have to run two source reports when refreshed. Instead, create a single source report that returns all opportunities
and group by status. Now you can create the dashboard using a single source report, which refreshes more quickly than a dashboard
with two source reports.
Note: Source reports refresh asynchronously. That means that when you refresh a dashboard, Salesforce queues each source
report to run and then runs them alongside any number of other processes.
Depending on its place in the queue, sometimes a dashboard with only one source report loads a little slower than a dashboard
with two source reports. Salesforce must sometimes update a case status, create an account, and send a batch of emails before
it can run your dashboard's source report.
Some reports take longer to run than others. A slow source report sometimes takes longer to run than two similar fast source
reports.
Sometimes refreshing a dashboard that has only one source report can result in multiple runs of the same source report.
Including dashboard widgets with different groupings, applying dashboard filters, and changing a dashboard's running user
can all cause the same source report to run multiple times. In these scenarios, having fewer source reports isn't necessarily
faster.
In general, dashboards with fewer source reports refresh more quickly than dashboards with lots of source reports.
SEE ALSO
• Build a Dashboard
• Edit and Customize Lightning Experience Dashboard Widgets
Refresh Dashboards Sparingly

Refreshing a dashboard queues several processes that Salesforce runs resulting in up-to-date data. Each source report runs, filters are
applied, charts are drawn, and so forth. Salesforce limits the number of times each user can refresh a dashboard to one time per minute.
This limit ensures that Salesforce doesn't queue the same report runs repeatedly, which also lets other important processes run, like
updating cases or creating accounts.
433
But what happens if many different people refresh the same dashboard all at the same time?
Salesforce limits the number of dashboard refreshes to 200 per hour per org. Even with this limit slow-running dashboards can cause
busier-than-necessary background process queues, forcing other people to wait. What if 200 people refresh a dashboard and the org
limit is reached? Because 200 people refreshed the same dashboard, the other team now must wait up to an hour to refresh theirs.
Salesforce remembers dashboard filter settings for each user. To apply user-specific filter settings, if someone refreshes a filtered dashboard
then the dashboard refreshes anew when anyone who has applied a dashboard filter opens it. Filtered dashboards are therefore especially
susceptible to reaching the 200 dashboard refresh per hour org limit.
Imagine a scenario in which 10,000 people refresh a dashboard that queues 10 source report runs. Theoretically, 10,000 x 10 = 1,000,000
reports run in the background, but because of the 200 refresh per hour per org limit, 200 x 10 = 2,000 background report runs. Even
with quick-running reports, that could take a while!
Instead of having lots of people refresh dashboards at the same time, subscribe to a dashboard. When you subscribe to a dashboard,
you set a schedule and set recipients. Salesforce refreshes the dashboard when you schedule it to and then sends the results to the
recipients by email. Salesforce caches the data. When people open the dashboard, they see up-to-date data as of the last scheduled
refresh and don't need to refresh it again.
1. From the Dashboards tab, click > Subscribe.
2. From the Edit Subscription menu, set a refresh schedule.
3. Under Send To, you’re automatically selected as a recipient. To add others or to remove yourself, click Edit Recipients. Only people
who have permission to access the dashboard are shown.
4. Select recipients and click Add.
5. Click Save.
The dashboard subscription starts and the dashboard refreshes according to the schedule you set.
For example, suppose that you refresh your opportunity overview dashboard each Monday morning. Instead of manually refreshing the
dashboard, subscribe to it and have it emailed to you and the entire sales team each Monday at 8:00 AM (1). By the time you sit down
at your desk at 9:00 AM, a recently refreshed dashboard is waiting for you.
434
SEE ALSO
• Refresh Dashboard Data
• Subscribe to or Schedule Dashboards
Remove Unnecessary Dashboard Widgets

Just as efficient source reports run faster than inefficient ones, dashboards with fewer widgets tend to run faster than dashboards with
lots.
Combine multiple widgets into one
Sometimes you can show the data in two or more widgets in one widget. Merging multiple widgets into one means fewer source
reports run, which means the dashboard refreshes more quickly.
For example, say that you have a dashboard that has two bar charts. One shows sum of opportunity amount by type, the other
shows average opportunity amount by type. Instead of separating these related metrics in two bar charts, consolidate them on a
single chart. The dashboard still graphs both sum and average opportunity amount by type, but because it has to render only one
widget, it loads faster.
Split a dashboard in two
If you have a dashboard with many widgets that takes a long time to refresh, consider splitting the dashboard in two.
435
Analyze Your Data Report and Dashboard Folders
Say that you have one dashboard summarizing both opportunities and cases. Splitting the dashboard in to, one for opportunities
and one for cases means faster refreshing dashboards. Using a custom link, you can even link back and forth between dashboards
for easy navigation.
Here's how to link from one dashboard to another.
1. From the dashboard builder, edit a widget by clicking .
2. From the Edit Component menu, enter /lightning/r/Dashboard/dashboard_id/view, where dashboard_id
is the id of the destination dashboard.
To get the destination dashboard id, open the dashboard and copy the id from the URL. The entry for a destination dashboard
with the id 01ZRM0000005KO62AM is /lightning/r/Dashboard/01ZRM0000005KO62AM/view.
3. Click Update.
4. Click Save.
Now dashboard viewers can navigate from one dashboard to another with direct links.
SEE ALSO
• Link from Dashboard Widgets in Lightning Experience
• Visit a Link from a Dashboard Widget
Improve Dashboard Performance

Dashboard refresh times can vary based on available resources. Since Salesforce is built on a multi-tenant structure, dashboard refreshes
are processed in a queue. Refreshes tend to complete faster off peak hours, when more resources are available. Other factors like caching
can also affect dashboard refresh times.
Dashboard performance depends mainly on the performance of its source reports. If a dashboard is refreshing slowly, examine each
report to find the ones that are running slowly.
A performance degradation can also affect the Dashboard performance. These degradations are instance-specific and can be checked
at status.salesforce.com/status.
Dashboard widgets that include Visualforce pages can cause performance issues. To identify widgets that use Visualforce pages, edit
them. Widgets using Visualforce pages have Visualforce Page as the chart type.
Report and Dashboard Folders

Use report and dashboard folders to organize your reports and dashboards. To share reports and
EDITIONS
dashboards, you share the folder, not the report or dashboard itself.
Watch a video: Manage Report and Dashboard Folders (Lightning Experience) Available in: both Salesforce
For several releases we’ve been phasing out Legacy Folder Sharing in favor of Enhanced Folder Experience
Sharing, which has an improved UI and more fine-grained access control. Legacy Folder Sharing is
available only for orgs created before Summer ‘13. For instructions on transitioning to Enhanced Available in: Essentials,
Folder Sharing, see Transition Your Org to Enhanced Folder Sharing on page 440. Group, Professional,
Notes about folder sharing: Unlimited, and Developer
• When you save a report or dashboard, it goes by default into your private reports or dashboards Editions
folder. To save to a public or custom folder, select the folder in the Save dialog box.
• To open a report or dashboard, you need:
436
– Access to the folder in which the report or dashboard is saved

– The necessary user permission
• For example, to run a report you need access to the folder in which it's saved and the "Run Reports" user permission.
• The concept of shared or not shared folders is different from the concept of public and private folders:
– The reports or dashboards in a private folder are always invisible to everyone except the person who created the folder.
– The reports or dashboards in any folder that isn’t private are visible to everyone who has permission to view the reports or
dashboards. The following folder names are different in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience, but the folders are the same.
• The following folder names are different in Salesforce Classic and Lightning Experience, but the folders are the same.
Salesforce Classic Lightning Experience
Unfiled Public Reports Public Reports
My Personal Custom Reports Private Reports
My Personal Dashboards Private Dashboards
Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders

Each user, group, or role can have its own level of access to a report and dashboard folder. Viewers
EDITIONS
can see the data. Editors can determine what data is shown. Managers can control access.
Tip: If you’re not ready to share a report or dashboard, keep it in a personal folder that only Available in: Salesforce
you can access. The My Personal Custom Reports folder and the My Personal Dashboards Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
folder are already set up for you. Create more folders if you need them. When you create a
Experience
folder, it is accessible only to you and to users with administrative permissions, until you share
it. Available in: Essentials,
1. Viewer Access to Report and Dashboard Folders
Viewer access allows you to view the reports or dashboards in a folder, but doesn't determine
Editions
access to folder contents. Permissions set for the reports and dashboards themselves determine
your access to the contents. For example, if you have Viewer access to a reports folder and Available in: Enhanced
Create and Customize Reports permission to a report in the folder, you can rename or delete Folder Sharing and Legacy
the report. Folder Sharing
2. Editor Access to Report and Dashboard Folders

Editor access allows you to view and save the reports or dashboards in a folder, but doesn't determine access to folder contents.
Permissions set for the reports and dashboards themselves determine your access to the folder contents. For example, if you have
Editor access to a folder and Run Reports permission to a report in the folder, you can run the report but not make changes.
3. Manager Access to Report and Dashboard Folders
Manager access allows you to view, share, save, rename, and delete the reports or dashboards in a folder, but does not determine
access to folder contents. Permissions set for the reports and dashboards themselves determine your access to the folder contents.
For example, if you have Manager access to a folder and Run Reports permission to a report in the folder, you can run the report,
but not edit or delete it.
437
4. Compare Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders

Use this chart for a quick view of what Viewer, Editor, and Manager access enables users to do with enhanced folder sharing for
report and dashboard folders.
5. Enhanced Folder Sharing for Reports and Dashboards
Enhanced folder sharing introduces new user permissions and changes each user’s access to existing reports and dashboards.
6. Access to Dashboard Folders
Permissions control folder access. Users must have certain permissions to access public, hidden, or shared dashboard folders.
7. Access to Report Folders
Folder access is controlled by permissions. Users must have certain permissions to access public, hidden, or shared report folders.
8. User Permissions for Sharing Reports and Dashboards
Each level of access to a report or dashboard folder consists of a combination of user permissions. As an administrator, you can
further fine-tune users’ access to dashboards and reports by assigning or removing one or more permissions.
Viewer Access to Report and Dashboard Folders

Viewer access allows you to view the reports or dashboards in a folder, but doesn't determine access
EDITIONS
to folder contents. Permissions set for the reports and dashboards themselves determine your
access to the contents. For example, if you have Viewer access to a reports folder and Create and Available in: Salesforce
Customize Reports permission to a report in the folder, you can rename or delete the report. Classic (not available in all
All users have at least Viewer access to report and dashboard folders that have been shared with orgs) and Lightning
them. Some users have administrative user permissions that give them greater access. Guest users Experience
and Community Portal users can’t access report and dashboard folders. Available in: Essentials,
View access is useful in a case such as the following. Samir is a sales rep who likes to start his day Group, Professional,
by checking his position on the sales leader board, which appears on the Master Sales dashboard. Enterprise, Performance,
He has to refresh the dashboard to get the latest standings, so he must view the data in the Unlimited, and Developer
underlying reports. But he doesn’t want to edit the reports or the dashboard. All he needs is Viewer Editions
access to the folder that contains the Master Sales dashboard. Available in: Enhanced
Folder Sharing
438
Editor Access to Report and Dashboard Folders

Editor access allows you to view and save the reports or dashboards in a folder, but doesn't determine
EDITIONS
access to folder contents. Permissions set for the reports and dashboards themselves determine
your access to the folder contents. For example, if you have Editor access to a folder and Run Reports Available in: Salesforce
permission to a report in the folder, you can run the report but not make changes. Classic (not available in all
Editor access is useful in a case such as the following. Allison, a sales manager, wants to provide a orgs) and Lightning
different sales dashboard for each of the three regional teams. Editor access to the folder that Experience
contains the Master Sales dashboard allows her to move the underlying reports into the correct Available in: Essentials,
folders and then modify them to show the appropriate data. Group, Professional,
Note: You can’t give Editor access to standard report folders. By default, all users get Viewer Enterprise, Performance,
access to these folders.
Editions

Folder Sharing
Manager Access to Report and Dashboard Folders

Manager access allows you to view, share, save, rename, and delete the reports or dashboards in
EDITIONS
a folder, but does not determine access to folder contents. Permissions set for the reports and
dashboards themselves determine your access to the folder contents. For example, if you have Available in: Salesforce
Manager access to a folder and Run Reports permission to a report in the folder, you can run the Classic (not available in all
report, but not edit or delete it. orgs) and Lightning
Manager access is useful in a case such as the following. Alan is a sales administrator who manages Experience
too many reports to pay attention to them all individually. He creates a report folder called Regional Available in: Essentials,
Reports. As the creator, he has Manage rights to the folder. He gives Sales Reps, a public group, Group, Professional,
Viewer access. And he makes Allison, the sales manager, another Manager on the folder. Enterprise, Performance,
Note: You can’t give Manager access to standard report folders. By default, all users get
Editions
Viewer access to these folders.
Folder Sharing
439
Compare Access Levels for Report and Dashboard Folders

Use this chart for a quick view of what Viewer, Editor, and Manager access enables users to do with
EDITIONS
enhanced folder sharing for report and dashboard folders.
View Edit Manage Classic (not available in all
View reports or dashboards in the folder orgs) and Lightning
Experience
See who has what level of access to the folder
Save a report or dashboard in the folder Group, Professional,
Rename a report or dashboard in the folder Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
Delete a report or dashboard from the folder
Share a folder Folder Sharing
Change the folder’s name
Change the folder’s sharing settings
Delete a folder
Working with reports and dashboards requires user permissions in addition to folder permissions. For information about required user
permissions, see User Permissions for Sharing Reports and Dashboards.
SEE ALSO:
Enhanced Folder Sharing for Reports and Dashboards

Enhanced folder sharing introduces new user permissions and changes each user’s access to existing reports and dashboards.
What’s Different in Enhanced Folder Sharing?
Enhanced folder sharing is different from legacy folder sharing in the way you define folders and how access to reports and dashboards
is determined. And some of the permissions for report and dashboard folders change in enhanced folder sharing.
Creating a Folder
It’s simpler to create a folder in enhanced folder sharing.
Legacy Folder Sharing Enhanced Folder Sharing
Enhanced folder sharing When creating a folder, you specify only the name. The folder doesn’t carry any
special properties for visibility or type of access.
When creating a folder, you specify:
• Folder label: name
• Public folder access: read-only or read-write
• Folder visibility: accessible by all users, hidden from
all users, or accessible to specified groups and
roles.
440
Accessing the Reports and Dashboards in a Folder

Three access levels in enhanced folder sharing determine how you can interact with the reports and dashboards in a shared folder.
Legacy Folder Sharing Enhanced Folder Sharing
When creating a folder, you specify the folder as When sharing a folder, on page 453 you specify View, Edit, or Manage access
read-only or read-write and assign it one of these for the selected users, groups, or roles, or a combination.
access types: Depending on user permissions, some users can do more than is indicated by
• Accessible by all users the access level that they’re granted when a folder is shared. See Permissions
• Hidden from all users for Reports and Dashboards on page 441.
• Accessible only to specified public groups, roles, The following table lists the capabilities for each access level.
and roles and subordinates
Folder Access Capabilities in Enhanced Folder Sharing
View Edit Manage

View reports or dashboards in the folder
See who has what level of access to the folder
Save a report or dashboard in the folder
Rename a report or dashboard in the folder
Delete a report or dashboard from the folder
Share a folder
Change the folder's name
Change the folder's sharing settings
Delete a folder
Permissions for Reports and Dashboards

Some user permissions are different in enhanced folder sharing. When enhanced folder sharing is enabled, Salesforce updates the
permissions as the following table shows. For a full list of permissions for reports and dashboards, see User Permissions for Sharing
Reports and Dashboards on page 447.
Legacy Folder Sharing Enhanced Folder Sharing What you can do with this permission
in enhanced folder sharing
Manage Public Reports AND View Manage Reports In Public Folders Perform all Manage actions in Folder Access
All Data Capabilities in Enhanced Folder Sharing on
page 441 for all folders except others’ private
folders.
441
Manage Reports in Public Folders also

includes these permissions:
• Create and Customize Reports
• Create Report Folders
• Edit My Reports
• View Reports in Public Folders
Manage Public Reports Create Report Folder AND Edit My Reports Create report folders. Perform all Manage
actions in Folder Access Capabilities in
Enhanced Folder Sharing on page 441 for
all folders that you create.
Edit, move, save, and delete reports that you
create. Save your reports to a shared folder,
even if you only have View access to the
folder.
Manage Dashboards AND View All Manage Dashboards In Public Folders Perform all Manage actions in Folder Access
Data Capabilities in Enhanced Folder Sharing on
page 441 for all folders except others’ private
folders.
Manage Dashboards in Public Folders also
includes these permissions:
• Create and Customize Dashboards
• Create Dashboards Folders
• View Dashboards in Public Folders
Manage Dashboards Edit My Dashboards AND Create and Customize Edit, move, save, and delete dashboards that
Dashboard you create. Save your dashboards to a
shared folder, even if you only have View
access to the folder.
View All Data View Reports In Public Folders AND View Dashboards View the reports and dashboards in all
In Public Folders folders except the private folders of other
users.
Special Folders
The following folders are equivalent in legacy folder sharing and enhanced folder sharing. Only the names are different. Users who have
access to the legacy folders continue to have the same access after the upgrade to enhanced folder sharing.
Folder Name in Legacy Folder Sharing Folder Name in Enhanced Folder Sharing
Unfiled Public Reports Public Reports
My Personal Custom Reports Private Reports
442
My Personal Dashboards Private Dashboards
Company Dashboards Company Dashboards
What Happens with Enhanced Folder Sharing Enabled?

When enhanced folder sharing is enabled,
• All users get View access to the report and dashboard folders that are shared with them.
• Users with Manage Reports in Public Folders or Manage Dashboards in Public Folders can manage all dashboard or report folders
(except for others’ private folders) even if no folder is explicitly shared with them or they have only View access.
• Users who don’t get Edit My Reports or Edit My Dashboards permission as part of the upgrade can no longer edit the reports and
dashboards in folders that are shared with them. To restore edit access, a company admin who has Manage Reports in Public Folders
or Manage Dashboards in Public Folders permission can assign Manage access to users for particular folders. Those users can then
assign View, Edit, or Manage access to those folders to other users.
Changes in Folder Access
The following table summarizes the changes in folder access when enhanced folder sharing is enabled.
For a legacy folder that has read-only or The following occurs after upgrading to enhanced folder sharing
read-write public access and is...
Accessible by all users The folder is shared with the public group All Internal Users. The group has
View access to the folder.
If the Customer Portal is enabled in your org, then All Customer Portal Users
and All Partner Portal Users also get View access to the folder.
Hidden from all users The folder isn’t shared with anyone. Users with View Reports in Public Folders
or View Dashboards in Public Folders permission can view the folder contents.
Users with Manage Reports in Public Folders or Manage Dashboards in Public
Folders permission can edit and manage the folder.
Accessible only to specified Public Groups, Roles, and The folder is shared with each group and role. The groups and roles receive
Roles and Subordinates View access.
Examples
These examples show how enhanced folder sharing works relative to legacy folder sharing.
Restoring Edit Access to a Report or Dashboard
In legacy folder sharing, Sally had the user permissions Manage Dashboards and View All Data, but Tim had only View All Data. Sally and
Tim built a dashboard that’s saved in a Read-Write folder. With enhanced folder sharing, Sally automatically has the user permissions
Manage Dashboards in Public Folders and Create Dashboard Folders. Tim only has the user permission View Dashboards in Public Folders.
Sally can view and edit the dashboard that she and Tim created, but Tim can only view it. Because Sally has Manage access to the folder,
she’s able to grant Edit access to him. The two can now continue to collaborate on the dashboard.
Uninterrupted Edit Access
Tara had the user permission Manage Dashboards in legacy folder sharing. She created and saved a dashboard in a read-write folder. In
enhanced folder sharing, Tara has the user permission Edit My Dashboards. She’s still able to edit her dashboard in the folder even though
443
she has only View access. She can also save any new dashboards that she creates in the folder. But she can’t edit anyone else’s dashboards
that are saved in the folder.
SEE ALSO:
User Permissions for Sharing Reports and Dashboards
Access to Dashboard Folders

Permissions control folder access. Users must have certain permissions to access public, hidden, or
EDITIONS
shared dashboard folders.
Public Folders Available in: both Salesforce
The following permissions apply to folders with these visibility settings: Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
• This folder is accessible by all users, including portal
Experience
users
• This folder is accessible by all users, except for portal Available in: all editions
users except Database.com
Report folders not available
Access Level Permissions Needed to Access Permissions Needed to Access in: Contact Manager,
Read-Only Folders Read/Write Folders Essentials, Group, and
Personal Editions
Read Run Reports Run Reports
Write New All of the following: Both of the following:

• Run Reports • Run Reports
• Manage Dashboards • Manage Dashboards
• View All Data
Modify/Delete All of the following: All of the following:

• View All Data • View All Data
Hidden Folders
The following permissions apply to folders that have this visibility setting:
• This folder is hidden from all users
Access Level Permissions Needed to Access Read-Only Permissions Needed to Access Read/Write
Folders Folders
Read Both of the following: Both of the following:
444
Folders Folders
Write New All of the following: All of the following:

Shared Folders
Folders Folders
Read Run Reports Run Reports
Write New All of the following: Both of the following:

• View All Data

Access to Report Folders

Folder access is controlled by permissions. Users must have certain permissions to access public,
EDITIONS
hidden, or shared report folders.
The following tables show the permissions that users must have to access the three different types Available in: both Salesforce
of report folders: public, hidden, and shared. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Note: The “View Reports in Public Folders” permission is available only in organizations with Experience
enhanced sharing for reports and dashboards. Organizations without enhanced sharing for
reports and dashboards use “View All Data.” Available in: all editions
except Database.com
Public Folders
The following permissions apply to folders with these visibility settings: Report folders not available
in: Contact Manager,
• This folder is accessible by all users, including portal Essentials, Group, and
users Personal Editions
445
• This folder is accessible by all users, except for portal users
Access Level Permissions to Access Read-Only Folders Permissions to Access Read/Write Folders
Read Any of the following: Any of the following:
• “View Reports in Public Folders” • “Run Reports”
• “Run Reports” • “Manage Public Reports”
• “Manage Public Reports” • “View All Data”
• “View All Data”
Write New “Manage Public Reports” “Create and Customize Reports”
Modify/Delete “Manage Public Reports” “Manage Public Reports”
Hidden Folders
The following permissions apply to folders that have this visibility setting:
• This folder is hidden from all users
Read Any of the following: “View All Data”
• “View Reports in Public Folders”
Write New “Manage Public Reports” “Manage Public Reports”
Note: The Hidden Folders setting is available only in organizations without enhanced sharing for reports and dashboards.
The equivalent for organizations with enhanced sharing for reports and dashboards is a folder with no sharing settings set,
that is, a folder that’s not explicitly shared with anyone.
Shared Folders
Read Any of the following: Any of the following:
• “View Reports in Public Folders” • “Run Reports” (for shared users)
• “Run Reports” (for shared users) • “Manage Public Reports” (for shared users)
• “Manage Public Reports” • “View All Data”
Write New “Manage Public Reports” “Create and Customize Reports” (for shared users)
446
SEE ALSO:

Each level of access to a report or dashboard folder consists of a combination of user permissions.
EDITIONS
As an administrator, you can further fine-tune users’ access to dashboards and reports by assigning
or removing one or more permissions. Available in: Salesforce
When enhanced folder sharing is enabled, all users get Viewer access to report and dashboard Classic (not available in all
folders, except users with higher administrative permissions. To give users broader privileges, assign orgs) and Lightning
Editor or Manager folder access and give report and dashboard user permissions as needed. Experience

User Permission Description Group, Professional,
Create and Customize Dashboards Create, edit, and delete dashboards in the My Personal
Dashboards folder. Create dashboards and save to any
Editions
shared folder if sharing rights allow.
Create and Customize Reports Create, edit, and delete reports in the My Personal
Folder Sharing
Custom Reports folder. Create reports and save to any
shared folder if sharing rights allow.
Create Dashboard Folders Create dashboard folders and manage them if sharing
rights allow.
Create Report Folders Create report folders and manage them if sharing rights
allow.
Edit My Dashboards Edit, move, save, and delete dashboards that you created
in shared folders.
Edit My Reports Edit, move, save, and delete reports that you created in
shared folders.
Manage All Private Reports and Allow user to delete reports and dashboards from
Dashboards personal or private folders.
Manage Dashboards in Public Folders Create, edit, and delete dashboards,1 and manage their
sharing in all public dashboard folders. This permission
does not extend to others’ personal folders. This
permission allows users to edit and share dashboards in
all folders, including hidden folders. They also get these
permissions:
• Create and Customize Dashboards
• Create Dashboard Folders
447
• View Dashboards in Public Folders

(1 To edit a dynamic dashboard, users also need Manage Dynamic Dashboards
and View My Team’s Dashboards permissions.)
Manage Reports in Public Folders Create, edit, and delete reports, and manage their sharing in all public report
folders. This permission does not extend to others’ personal folders. This
permission allows users to edit and share reports in all folders, including hidden
folders. They also get these permissions:
• Create and Customize Reports
• Edit My Reports
• View Reports in Public Folders
View Dashboards in Public Folders View dashboards in public dashboard folders. This permission does not extend
to others’ personal folders.
View Reports in Public Folders View reports in public report folders. This permission does not extend to others’
personal folders.
SEE ALSO:
Share a Report or Dashboard Folder in Salesforce Classic
Create a Lightning Report or Dashboard Folder

You can create folders to organize Lightning reports and dashboards.
EDITIONS
1. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Lightning > Folder, or on the Reports or Dashboards
tab, click New Folder. Available in: Lightning
Experience
2. Name the folder. The folder name must be unique across all report and dashboard folders.
3. Click Save. Available in: Professional,
SEE ALSO: Editions
Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To create report folders:

To create dashboard
folders:
• Create Dashboard
Folders
448
Create a Report or Dashboard Subfolder in Lightning Experience

You can create report or dashboard folders within other report or dashboard folders in Lightning
EDITIONS
Experience. Up to 3 subfolder levels are allowed.
1. Open the parent folder on the Analytics, Reports, or Dashboards tab. Available in: Lightning
Experience
2. On the Analytics tab, select Create > Lightning > Folder, or on the Reports or Dashboards
tab, click New Folder. Available in: Professional,
3. Name the subfolder. The name must be unique. You can’t have more than one report or Enterprise, Performance,
dashboard folder with the same name as another report or dashboard folder. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
4. Click Save.
The subfolder is created and added to the list of items in the folder you started from. You can select Folder Sharing
the subfolder when saving a report or dashboard.
USER PERMISSIONS
SEE ALSO:
Manage Your Reports and Dashboards on Analytics Home To create report folders:
permission and manage
access for the root folder
in the tree
To create dashboard
folders:
• Create Dashboard
Folders permission and
manage access for the
root folder in the tree
Global Search for Folders

You can search for Lightning report or dashboard folders using global search. Global search for
EDITIONS
folders isn’t supported in the mobile version of Salesforce.
Select Folders from the ALL SEARCHABLE ITEMS list in the global search area. Available in: Lightning
Experience

Editions
449
Start typing the folder name in the Global Search box to see a list of matching names to select from, or press Return to see the matching
results.
If the folder you’re looking for doesn’t appear in the search results, click Show More on the left side of the page, and select Folders to
display the matching folders.
450
If the Folders object is already selected on the left side, the search options include searching only within Folders.
SEE ALSO:
Quick Search for Folders

Quick search allows you to find folders within the Lightning Reports tab, Dashboards tab, or selected
EDITIONS
folder context.
Use global search when you want to find folders across your entire org. Use quick search when you Available in: Lightning
want to find folders within the select context. Experience
Find the quick search box at the top of each report, dashboard, and folder page. Select a scope on Available in: Professional,
the side menu [1] and the search context instantly changes to that scope.[2] Enterprise, Performance,
Editions
451
Start entering text to see the list of matches within the selected scope.
Here are some things to remember about quick search:

• Quick search shows only the first 20 results. A message indicates if there are more results that aren’t showing.
• The context is always what is selected on the side menu.
• Quick search on folders finds all folders and subfolders, but not the reports and dashboards in the folders.
• The options to customize columns and create folders are disabled during quick search.
• Quick search keeps the current custom column selections and sorting.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Report or Dashboard Folder as a Favorite

Add a Lightning report or dashboard folder as a favorite to quickly access the folders you’re interested
EDITIONS
in.
On the Analytics, Reports, Dashboards tab, find the folder you want to add as a favorite and select Available in: Lightning
Experience
> Favorite.
Editions
452
To display a favorite folder, select it from the Favorites list on the Analytics tab or the All Favorites list on the Reports or Dashboards
tab.
SEE ALSO:

Use enhanced folder sharing to share a report or dashboard folder with users, groups, roles, or
EDITIONS
territories. Enhanced folder sharing is the default option for all orgs created after 2013.
You can share a report or dashboard folder with up to 25 users, groups, roles, or territories from the Available in: Lightning
UI. To share a folder with up to 500 users, groups, roles, or territories, use the folder sharing REST Experience
API.
1. Open the folders list on the Analytics, Reports, or Dashboards tab. Enterprise, Performance,
• On the Analytics tab, click Browse and then click Folders. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions
• On the Reports or Dashboard tab, select a folder view from the left panel.
2. Find the folder in the list, click , and select Share. Folder Sharing
3. From the Share With dropdown, select who you want to share with.
USER PERMISSIONS
To share report folders:

Public Folders
To share dashboard folders:
Public Folders
4. For Name, enter the name you want to match. The name must match the category (such as user, group, or role). For example, if
you select User as the category, specify the name of a user.
5. Select the folder access level for the user, role, group, or territory.
453
Note: The Analytics tab doesn’t support sharing with partner roles. To share with a partner role, access the Share Folder
window from the Reports or Dashboards tab.
6. Click Share. The sharing setting is applied to the Who Can Access list. Continue to add entries as needed. You can share with users,
groups, roles, territories, or a combination. If a user is identified in more than one entity, the greatest permission is granted. For
example, a group is added with view only, but a user in the group is also added with edit or manage permissions. In this case, the
edit or manage permissions apply to that user. To delete a Who Can Access entry, click X to the right of the entry. To modify the
access level for an entry, select a new access level.
7. When you’re done, click X in the upper corner of the dialog box to close it and return to the page you were on.
454
The folder is now available on the Folders list for organizing your Lightning reports or dashboards.
SEE ALSO:
Rename a Report or Dashboard Folder in Lightning Experience

You can rename report and dashboard folders and subfolders in Lightning Experience.
EDITIONS
1. Open the folder on the Analytics, Reports, or Dashboards tab.
2. On the Analytics tab, click and select Edit, or on the Reports or Dashboards tab, click
Experience
and select Rename.
3. Enter the new name. Available in: Professional,
The folder name is updated. Editions

SEE ALSO: Folder Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS
To create report folders:

• Manage access for the
specific folder
To create dashboard
folders:
specific folder
455
Move Dashboards Between Folders in Lightning Experience

Move dashboards between folders to organize the dashboards and control access.
EDITIONS
1. Find the dashboard on the Analytics tab or Dashboard tab.
2. Select the Move row level action.
Experience
3. Select the target folder or subfolder.
• Search for folders by name, or select a folder on the left and scroll to find the target folder Group (View Only),
on the right. Professional, Enterprise,
• To locate a subfolder, continue to navigate to the right. Performance, Unlimited,
• To create a folder for the dashboard, click New Folder. Enter a name for the folder and click and Developer Editions
Save to create the folder and select it.
• You can use the breadcrumb links above the search box to navigate back to parent folders. USER PERMISSIONS
• When you select a folder, the Select button changes to include the folder name.
4. After selecting the target folder, click Select. public dashboard folders:
The dashboard is saved to the specified folder. • Create Dashboard
Folders
To move dashboards you
created from one folder to
another in Lightning
Experience:
To move dashboards you
didn’t create from one folder
to another in Lightning
Experience:
Public Folders
456
Move Reports Between Folders in Lightning Experience

Move reports between folders to organize the reports and control access.
EDITIONS
1. Find the report on the Analytics tab or Reports tab.
2. Select the Move row level action.
Experience
3. Select the target folder or subfolder.
• Search for folders by name, or select a folder on the left and scroll to find the target folder Group, Professional,
on the right. Enterprise, Performance,
• If you’re looking for a subfolder, continue to navigate to the right if necessary to find the Unlimited, and Developer
subfolder. Editions
• If you would like to use a new folder for the report, click New Folder. Enter a name for the Available in: Enhanced
folder and click Save to create the folder and select it. Folder Sharing on page 440
• You can use the breadcrumb links above the search box to navigate back to parent folders.
• When you select a folder, the Select button changes to include the folder name. USER PERMISSIONS

public report folders:
To move reports you created
from one folder to another
in Lightning Experience:
• Edit My Reports
To move reports you didn’t
create from one folder to
another in Lightning
Experience:
Public Folders
457
4. After selecting the target folder, click the Select button.

The report is moved to the new folder.
458
Share a Report or Dashboard Folder in Salesforce Classic

Enhanced folder sharing is the default option for all orgs created after the Summer ’13 Salesforce
EDITIONS
release. If you have orgs created before Summer ’13 and don’t want to reassign permissions for
legacy reports and dashboards, use legacy folder sharing in Salesforce Classic. Available in: Salesforce
Note: To give access to a folder, you must have Manager access to that folder, the Manage Classic (not available in all
orgs)
Reports in Public Folders permission (for report folders), or the Manage Dashboards in Public
Folders permission (for dashboard folders). Available in: Group,
When you create a folder, you’re its manager. Only you and others with administrative permissions Professional, Enterprise,
can see it. Performance, Unlimited,
If a folder doesn’t have Manager access, it’s public, and users with the View Reports in Public Folders
permission can view it. Depending on their object access, these users can also run the report. Available in: Legacy Folder
Sharing
You can share a report or dashboard folder with up to 25 users, groups, roles, or territories at one
time. You can share a folder with up to 100 users, groups, roles, or territories using the folder sharing
REST API. USER PERMISSIONS
To share a report folder with

public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
OR Manage Reports in
Public Folders
To share a dashboard folder
with public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
Share your folder by user, by user group, role, or by territory (1). Choose the access level you want each user, group, role, or territory to
have (2). Stop sharing the folder with the user, group, role, or territory (3).
SEE ALSO:
459
Share a Report or Dashboard Folder with an Individual User in Salesforce Classic

Enhanced folder sharing is the default option for all orgs created beginning with the Summer ’13
EDITIONS
Salesforce release. Legacy folder sharing, as described in this topic, is supported only for orgs created
before the Summer ‘13 release. Available in: Salesforce
1. On the Reports tab, hover over a report folder in the left pane, click , and then select Share. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
2. Select Internal Users.
Note: Internal users don’t include customer portal or partner portal users. Professional, Enterprise,
3. Find the user you want, click Share, and choose an access level. and Developer Editions
4. Click Done, review your changes, and click Close. Available in: Legacy Folder
Sharing
USER PERMISSIONS

public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
with public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
460
Share a Report or Dashboard with a Group in Salesforce Classic

EDITIONS
1. On the Reports tab, hover over a report folder in the left pane, click , and then select Share. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
2. Select Public Groups.
3. Find the group you want, and click Share. Professional, Enterprise,
4. Choose the sharing level you want to give this group. Performance, Unlimited,
Note: Portal users can only have Viewer access to reports, and they can’t use dashboards.
Available in: Legacy Folder
Sharing
5. Click Done, review your changes, and click Close.
USER PERMISSIONS

public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
with public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
461
Share a Report or Dashboard by Role in Salesforce Classic

EDITIONS
You can give report or dashboard folder access to users in a role, or to those users plus users in roles Classic (not available in all
subordinate to that role. orgs)
For example, suppose the VP of Sales role and its subordinates have Viewer access to a dashboard Available in: Group,
folder, while the role itself (VP of Sales) has Manager access. In this case, a user in the VP of Sales Professional, Enterprise,
role has greater control than someone with a role that’s lower in the role hierarchy. If the VP of Sales Performance, Unlimited,
leaves the company, whoever next assumes that role can manage dashboards in the folder. and Developer Editions
1. On the Reports tab, hover over a report folder in the left pane, click , and then select Share. Available in: Legacy Folder
Sharing
2. Select Roles or Roles and Subordinates.
• To give access to all users who have the role, select Roles.
USER PERMISSIONS
• To give access to those users plus everyone with a role below them in the role hierarchy,
select Roles and Subordinates. To share a report folder with
public groups:
3. Find the role you want, click Share, and choose a level of access. • Run Reports AND
4. Click Done, review your changes, and click Close. Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
with public groups:
• Run Reports AND
Manage Dashboards
Public Folders
462
Move a Report or Dashboard Between Folders in Salesforce Classic

It’s a good practice to keep reports and dashboards organized in folders that reflect their function
EDITIONS
and audience. You can drag reports and dashboards from one folder to another.
Note: You need edit access to folders before moving items between them. Moving items Available in: Salesforce
using drag-and-drop isn’t supported in accessibility mode. Classic (not available in all
orgs)
Move a report or dashboard between folders by dragging them from the list view to a report or
dashboard folder on the Folders pane. Available in: Group,
1. On the Reports tab list view, click and hold an item. Performance, Unlimited,
2. Drag the item to its destination folder in the Folders pane. and Developer Editions
As you drag an item across a folder, a green check mark indicates that the item can be moved Available in: Enhanced
into the selected folder. means that the item can’t be moved into the selected folder. Folder Sharing and Legacy
Keep the following in mind when moving items. Folder Sharing
• Drag one item at a time.

USER PERMISSIONS
• You can’t move items from installed AppExchange packages or standard report folders into
other folders. To move reports:
• Move reports into report folders and dashboards into dashboard folders. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Edit My Reports
Delete Report or Dashboard Folders

Some rules apply to deletion of report and dashboard folders.
EDITIONS
• You can delete an empty leaf folder or empty folder tree in Lightning Experience. An empty
leaf folder is a folder that doesn’t contain any reports or dashboards and doesn’t have any Available in: Lightning
subfolders. An empty folder tree is one with no reports or dashboards in the root folder or in Experience
any of the subfolders.
• If you want to delete a non-empty folder, either move the reports or dashboards in the folder Enterprise, Performance,
to another folder, or delete the reports or dashboards. Then permanently delete the reports Unlimited, and Developer
and dashboards from the Recycle Bin. Editions
• You can’t delete empty folders from managed packages. To delete the folder, uninstall the Available in: Enhanced
managed package or contact the package provider for help. Folder Sharing
1. On the Analytics tab or the Reports or Dashboards tab, find the report or dashboard you want
to delete and select the Delete row level action.
USER PERMISSIONS
2. Click Delete to confirm.
To delete report folders:
The folder is deleted.
specific folder
To delete dashboard folders:
specific folder
463
Analyze Your Data Report and Dashboard Limits, Limitations, Allocations, and
Technical Requirements
Report and Dashboard Limits, Limitations, Allocations, and Technical

Requirements
As you report on your Salesforce data and build dashboards, be aware of these limits, limitations,
EDITIONS
and allocations. If you experience slow load times or sluggish interactions with reports and
dashboards, verify that your network and device meet the minimum recommended technical Available in: Salesforce
requirements for Lightning reports and dashboards. Classic (not available in all
orgs) and Lightning
Reports and Dashboards: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile App Experience
Find out more about when to use reports, dashboards, and charts in the Salesforce Mobile App. Available in: Essentials,
Lightning Reports and Dashboards Technical Requirements Group, Professional,
Review these recommended technical requirements to get the best performance out of Enterprise, Performance,
Salesforce reports and dashboards.
Editions
Reports and Dashboards Limits and Allocations

As you report on your data, be aware of these limits and allocations.
EDITIONS
Salesforce Reports and Dashboards Allocations Available in: Salesforce

orgs) and Lightning
Experience
Performance Available in: Essentials,
Edition Group, Professional,
Custom report types Enterprise, Performance,
(Limits apply to all Editions
custom report types
50 200 2,000 400
regardless of —
development
status.)
Dashboard filters 3 per dashboard
Dynamic — Up to 5 Up to 10 Up to 3
dashboards per org
Field filters per 20

report1
Formulas per report 5
Reporting
— 200
snapshots per org
Reporting 134 1 2 134

snapshots
—
scheduled per time
period
464

Performance
Edition
Scheduled dashboard
— 12 22 N/A
refreshes
Scheduled reports per hour

(Emailed reports can be up — 1235 12 22 1235
to 10 MB.)
1
These allocations apply to the report builder. If you’re using the report wizard, the allocation is 10.
2
Up to 200 total.
3
Off-peak hours only, between 6 PM and 3 AM local time.
4
Limited to one preferred start time per day.
5
Limited to three preferred start times per day.
Salesforce retains historical data for the previous 3 months, plus the current month.
These limits, limitations, and allocations apply to all supported editions.
Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• The report builder preview shows a maximum of 20 rows for summary reports (grouped by rows) and matrix reports (grouped
by columns), and 50 rows for tabular reports (no groupings).
• In Salesforce Classic, you can’t have more than 250 groups or 4,000 values in a chart. If you see an error message saying that your
chart has too many groups or values to plot, adjust the report filters to reduce the number. In combination charts, all groups
and values count against the total.
• In Lightning Experience, a report chart can have at most 2,000 groups. If a report has more than 2,000 groups, the action Combine
Small Groups into Others applies only to the small groups within the 2,000 that are included in the report chart. Any additional
small groups are ignored.
• If a report has more than 2,000 rows, the report chart doesn’t use the colors selected for picklist values in Object Manager. Instead,
the chart uses the system-generated colors. To reduce the number of rows, apply filters or hide details.
• Reports display a maximum of 2,000 rows. To view more rows, export the report to Excel or use the printable view for tabular
and summary reports. For joined reports, the printable view displays a maximum of 20,000 rows. The printable view is only
available in Salesforce Classic.
– Summary reports (grouped by rows) and matrix reports (grouped by columns) display the first 2,000 groupings when Show
Details is disabled.
– A matrix report with one summary formula can show a maximum of 400,000 summarized values, with up to 2000 rows and
200 columns. Each summary formula you add reduces the number of values, rows, and columns the report shows. For
example, with two summary formulas, the maximum decreases to 200,000 values in 1,414 rows and 141 columns. Three
summary formulas reduce the maximum results shown to 133,333 values in 1,154 rows and 115 columns.
– Matrix reports that return more than 2,000 rows don’t show details. If you click Show Details, nothing happens. You can
only view the report with details hidden.
– Because a matrix report includes multiple groupings, the maximum of 2,000 values is typically reported in fewer than 2,000
groups.
465
– Row counts and summaries can be inaccurate in a joined report with more than 2,000 rows, where one of the blocks takes
up most of the rows.
• Up to 5 metrics display in the Lightning Experience report header. Metrics such as summarized fields appear in the order that
they appear in the report, left to right. The grand total, when shown, always displays.
• When reports that have groupings are viewed in the Salesforce mobile app, they’re converted to tabular reports.
• The Salesforce mobile app supports a maximum of 25 report columns.
• By default, reports time out after 10 minutes.
• In a non-joined report, if you click a bar in a report chart, the report results are filtered according to the selected bar. In a joined
report, clicking a bar doesn’t apply the filter.
• When searching for reports, if you filter on a long text area field, such as Description or Solution Details, only the first 1,000
characters of the field are searched.
• Some filters, such as date range, are constructed using multiple custom filters, each of which counts toward the total of 20.
• You can enter up to 1,333 characters for filter criteria, including commas used as OR operators.
• Field-to-field filtering isn’t available on currency fields for orgs that have multiple currencies enabled.
• The first 999 characters in a standard rich text area or a long text area are displayed in a report. For custom fields, only the first
255 characters are displayed.
• Summary fields on tabular, summary, and matrix reports can display up to 21 digits.
• You can’t filter reports by custom long text area fields.
• Filter logic doesn’t support locked filters. If you apply filter logic to a locked filter, the lock is removed.
• Forecast reports include only opportunities that are set to close within the forecast period.
• The maximum value allowed for report metrics is 999999999999999. The minimum value allowed is -99999999999999.
• The State/Province picklist filter converts the selected state or province to a two-digit code (example: MO for Missouri). If a state
or province in another country covered by the report has the same code, for example, MO for Morales, Mexico, filtering on one
of the states or provinces can return data for the other.
• HTML code isn’t supported in report charts.
Dashboard Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• A dashboard filter can have up to 50 values.
• Each dashboard can have up to 25 widgets, including a maximum of 20 charts and tables, 3 images, and 25 rich text widgets.
• A dashboard component can calculate up to 1,000 groupings. Aggregated totals only reflect the values in the first 1,000 groupings.
• Filtering is restricted in some dashboards that contain multiple components based on different report types.
– If a dashboard has a widget based on Cases or Leads and another widget based on a different report type, you can’t filter
the dashboard on the Case Owner or Lead Owner field. In addition, filtering on other Owner fields doesn’t display Case Owner
or Lead Owner as equivalent fields.
– If a dashboard has a widget based on the Tasks and Events, Activities with Accounts, or Activities with Contacts report type
and another widget based on a different report type, you can’t filter the dashboard on the Assigned field.
• A dashboard table or chart can display up to 20 images.

• Wait at least 1 minute between dashboard refreshes.
• Downloaded and shared images of dashboard widget tables have a maximum height of 3,000 pixels or approximately 100 rows.
Rows beyond the limit are clipped. To avoid clipping, filter the chart to fewer than 100 rows.
466
• Each Financial Services Cloud org includes 10 licenses for dynamic dashboards, which is in addition to the licenses that are
provided in your Salesforce edition.
• Each Enablement license add-on includes one additional dynamic dashboard.
• You can’t follow individual dashboard widgets in Lightning Experience.
• You can’t follow individual widgets in a dynamic dashboard.
• You can change ownership of up to 50 dashboards at one time.
Custom Report Type Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• A custom report type can contain up to 60 object references. For example, if you select the maximum limit of four object
relationships for a report type, you can select fields via lookup from an extra 56 objects.
• If a user runs a report from a custom report type and the report has columns from more than 20 different objects, an error occurs.
• You can add up to 1,000 fields to each custom report type. A counter at the top of the Page Layout step shows the current
number of fields. If you have too many fields, you can’t save the layout.
• You can’t add these fields to custom report types:
– Product schedule fields
– History fields
– The Age field on cases and opportunities
• Custom report types based on the Service Appointments object don’t support these fields.
– Parent Record
– Owner
• Object references can be used as the main four objects, as sources of fields via lookup, or as objects used to traverse relationships.
Each referenced object counts toward the maximum limit even if no fields are chosen from it. For example, if you do a lookup
from account to account owner’s role, but select no fields from account owner, all the referenced objects still count toward the
limit of 60.
• Reports run from custom report types that include cases don’t display the Units dropdown list, which lets users view the time
values of certain case fields by hours, minutes, or days.
• Report types associated with custom objects in the Deleted Custom Objects list count against the maximum number of custom
report types you can create.
• Reports on feed activities don’t include information about system-generated posts, such as feed tracked changes.
• Custom report type names support up to 50 characters. If you enter a name that is longer than 50 characters, the name gets
truncated.
• Custom report type descriptions support up to 255 characters. If you enter a name that is longer than 255 characters, the name
gets truncated.
• When a lookup relationship is created for a standard or custom object as an Opportunity Product field, and then a custom report
type is created with that primary object, Opportunity Product isn’t available as a secondary object for that custom report type.
• To report on gender-related data, make sure that the top-level object in the report is Contact, Lead, or Person Account. For
example, a report with Campaign as the top-level object doesn’t have the GenderIdentity field available.
• Joined reports require that the new user interface theme is enabled. Users without the new theme are unable to create, edit, or
run joined reports.
• In a joined report, each block can have up to 100 columns. A joined report can have up to 5 blocks.
• When you add a block to a joined report and the block has multiple entities in common with the report, only the first entity, in
alphabetical order, is shown. Only the fields from the first entity are shown in the common fields area.
467
summary formulas.
• You can add the chart from a joined report as a dashboard widget, but you can’t add the full report. Filtering isn’t supported for
widgets with a joined report chart.
• Internet Explorer 6 isn’t supported for joined reports.
Reporting Snapshot Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• The maximum number of rows that you can insert into a custom object is 2,000.
• The maximum number of runs that you can store is 200.
• The maximum number of source report columns that you can map to target fields is 100.
Cross Filter Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• Each report can have up to 3 cross filters.
• Each cross filter can have up to 5 subfilters.
• Filter logic applies only to field filters, not cross filters.
Embedded Report Charts Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• You can have two report charts per page.
• You can only add report charts from the enhanced page layout editor. The mini console and the original page layout editor
aren’t supported.
• In Lightning Experience, embedded report charts display the source report table’s groupings, not the report chart’s. In Salesforce
Classic, embedded report charts display the source report chart’s grouping, not the report table’s groupings.
• Your org can refresh up to 3,000 report charts every 60 minutes.
Bucket and Bucket Field Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• Each report can include up to 5 bucket fields.
• Bucket fields are available for use only in the report where they’re generated. To use a bucket in multiple reports, create the field
for each report, or create a separate formula field for the object that’s dependent on the bucket.
Note: These limits don’t apply to the use of Other as permitted within the bucket field’s setup.
• If a bucket field’s source column has a custom index, and you filter by the bucket field, then the performance gains from the
custom index are lost.
• You can add a report with a bucket field to a dashboard, but you can’t filter on the field that’s bucketed.
Historical Trend Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
• Salesforce retains historical data for the previous 3 months, plus the current month.
• Up to 5 million rows of historical trending data can be stored for each object. Historical data capture stops when the limit is
exceeded. The admin is alerted by email when any object reaches 70 percent of the limit, and again if the limit is exceeded.
• Each historical trend report can contain up to 100 fields. In Opportunities reports, the fields include standard preselected fields,
which can’t be disabled.
• For historical trend reports in Lightning Experience, you must set the snapshot date as the primary row grouping.
468
• Formula fields aren’t supported.

• Row limit filters aren’t supported.
• The summary report format isn’t supported.
• You can use up to 4 historical filters on each historical trend report.
outdated.
• Internet Explorer 6 isn’t supported.
• You can’t subscribe to historical trend reports.
• The Report Wizard isn’t supported. Historical trend reports can only be created with the Report Builder.
• Historical trend reporting with charts is supported in Lightning Experience, but tabular views of historical trend reports aren’t
available.
• Historical trending reports can’t be exported.
Limitations When Running Reports and Dashboards in Different Locales
When the running user and viewing user are in different locales, there are some differences in how reports and dashboards are
presented. For examples, see Configure Dashboard Data Visibility in Lightning Experience on page 413.
• With reports, the locale of the viewing user is respected. The report contents are always presented relative to the viewing user’s
locale.
• With static (not dynamic) dashboards, all date/time fields are presented in the locale of the running user, not the viewing user.
• With dynamic dashboards, the running user can specify how the viewing user sees the dashboard: as the running user, the
dashboard viewer, or another person.
External Object Report Limits, Limitations, and Allocations
objects, except that they map to data that’s stored outside your Salesforce org. A report that includes an external object fetches up
to 20,000 records for the primary object and can encounter callout limits while fetching external object data. If the report results in
few or no rows, try customizing the report to obtain more relevant external object rows.
Lightning Experience Report and Dashboard Subscriptions
• Each user in an Unlimited Edition org can subscribe to up to 15 reports and 15 dashboards. Users in other orgs can subscribe to
up to 7 reports and 7 dashboards.
• Subscription recipients aren’t listed on the subscription emails.
• For Platform users, the admin must enable subscriptions.
• Experience Cloud partner users don’t receive subscription emails.
• To subscribe a user, group, or role to a report or dashboard, the folder containing the report or dashboard must be shared with
the user, group, or role.
• When the subscription emails the refreshed report or dashboard to each recipient, it sends it to the email address set in Settings >
Email > My Email Settings. If no email is set in My Email Settings, the report or dashboard is sent to the recipient’s email address
set on their Salesforce User record.
• Each subscription supports up to 500 recipients, and each user counts as a recipient, whether added as a single user or in a role
or group. Roles, roles and subordinates, and groups can each have more than 500 users, but each subscription sends a maximum
of 500 emails. If the total number of users exceeds 500, some users don’t receive the subscription emails.
If a subscription has more than 500 users as recipients, they’re prioritized by how they were added.
469
1. Users
2. Roles
3. Roles and subordinates
4. Groups
Each time the subscription sends an email, the recipients are chosen again. They can be different each time that the subscription
email is sent.
For example, a subscription has 100 recipients: 98 users, 1 role that includes 500 users, and one group that includes 400 users.
The total number of users associated with the subscription is 998. When the subscription email sends, 98 users from the role
don’t receive subscription emails and none of the 400 users in the group receive emails.
• Each Salesforce org can schedule up to 500 dashboard subscriptions and 500 report subscriptions on a given hour of a given
day, such as Monday at 9:00 AM.
Report Subscription Limitations
• A file attachment for a report subscription is limited to 15,000 rows, 30 columns, and 3 MB. Extra data is clipped or not sent.
• A Lightning Experience report subscription doesn’t support these features:
– Historical trending reports
– Joined reports
– Conditional highlighting. You can subscribe to reports with conditional highlighting, but conditional highlighting doesn’t
appear in the subscription email.
– Images specified in custom formula fields
Dashboard Subscription Limitations

• Dashboard filters aren’t applied to emailed dashboards. When you open the email, the dashboard is displayed without filters.
• Dashboard subscription emails don’t reflect changes made to the color palette and theme.
• You can’t subscribe to a dynamic dashboard.
• For funnel charts, the total value isn’t included in the subscription email.
• If the dashboard references a report that has a unique count or a field-to-field filter, the subscription doesn’t refresh the dashboard.
Lightning Experience on Apple® iPad® Safari®
When you build or edit reports with Lightning Experience on Apple iPad Safari, you can’t drag fields and columns in the Fields and
Overview panes. As a workaround, add columns using the Add column lookup. To reorder columns, remove them from the report
and then add them back in the order you prefer.
When you build or edit dashboards with Lightning Experience on Apple iPad Safari, you can’t drag widgets to reposition or resize
them. We recommend that you use Lightning Experience on a desktop to reposition or resize dashboard widgets.
Reports and Dashboards API Limits, Limitations, and Allocations

These limits, limitations, and allocations apply to both the Reports and Dashboards REST API and Reports and Dashboards API via Apex.
• Cross filters, standard report filters, and filtering by row limit are unavailable when filtering data.
• Historical trending reports are only supported for matrix reports.
• Subscriptions aren’t supported for historical tracking reports.
• The API can process only reports that contain up to 100 fields selected as columns.
• A list of up to 200 recently viewed reports can be returned.
• Your org can request up to 500 synchronous report runs per hour.
470
• The API supports up to 20 synchronous report run requests at a time.

• A list of up to 2,000 instances of a report that was run asynchronously can be returned.
• The API supports up to 200 requests at a time to get results of asynchronous report runs.
• Your organization can request up to 1,200 asynchronous requests per hour.
• Asynchronous report run results are available within a 24-hour rolling period.
• The API returns up to the first 2,000 report rows. You can narrow the results using filters.
• You can add up to 20 custom field filters when you run a report.
• If a report is run on a standard or custom object as an automated process user from an Apex test class, only the required custom
fields are returned. Non-required custom fields aren’t shown in the results.
• – Your org can request up to 200 dashboard refreshes per hour.
– Your org can request results for up to 5,000 dashboards per hour.
SEE ALSO:
Reports and Dashboards: What’s Different or Not Available in Lightning Experience
Report Export Limits and Considerations

When exporting report data, keep these limits and considerations in mind.
Limits
• When you export a report with a date/time field using the Formatted Report option, the field in the exported report shows only the
date, not the time. To include the time information, add a row level formula field or custom formula field.
• Sometimes reports with lots of rows and columns can take a few minutes to export. If a report takes 10 minutes to export, the export
times out and fails. However, a report export with fewer than 100,000 rows and 100 columns can also time out due to performance
issues. If a report export times out, create a copy of the report. Filter both reports so that they each return half the data of the original.
Then export each report.
• A user can export up to five reports at once. Formatted report exports from Lightning Experience don’t count against this limit.
• You can’t export historical trending reports.
Considerations
• When exporting a report to a .csv file, the locale settings on your user detail page determine the field separator (delimiter) included
in the exported file. For example, if your locale setting is English (United States), then the field separator is a comma (“,”). If your locale
setting is French (France), then the field separator is a semicolon (“;”).
• Excel doesn’t display the field separator in CSV format. To work with a CSV file in Excel, set your locale in Salesforce to match your
Regional Options setting in Windows.
• A joined report always exports as a formatted report. A joined report export can have up to 20,000 rows.
Reports and Dashboards: What’s Different or Not Available in the Salesforce Mobile
App
Find out more about when to use reports, dashboards, and charts in the Salesforce Mobile App.
471
Reports
Considerations When Using Reports in the Salesforce Mobile App
Feature Notes about Salesforce Mobile App Availability

Number of Rows Displayed Reports display a maximum of 2,000 rows, same as on the
desktop Salesforce site.
Groupings When you view a report with groupings, the groupings are
displayed as columns at the end of the report.
Report Formats Reports that are grouped by rows (summary) or rows and
columns (matrix) are displayed without the groupings. Joined
reports aren’t available.
Conditional Highlighting You can’t view reports that show conditional highlighting.
Filters When you open a report from the Reports tab, you can't filter
the report.
When you tap a dashboard widget to open the source report,
you can filter the report by tapping a value on the chart. If the
source report is a tabular or joined report, then you can’t filter it.
Report Features Not Available

• Create, edit, or delete reports
• Export
• Print
• Feed
• Schedule report refreshes
• Subscribe
• Joined reports
• Historical trend reports
• Add to campaign
• Role hierarchy
• Custom summary formula fields
• Folders
• Hide details
• Summary information (such as grand totals, subtotals, summarized fields, and record counts)
Other Notes about Using Reports
• You can’t drill into reports that have more than three checkbox fields.
• When you view a report with more than 25 summary fields, you receive an error message.
• The Salesforce mobile app can’t render reports via URLs that use dynamic parameter values. If you modify a URL to pass parameters
into reports, the app shows a blank screen (a report record with no returned results).
472
Dashboards
Considerations When Using Dashboards
Feature Notes about Salesforce Mobile App Availability

View As As in the desktop Salesforce site, you can only run dashboards
as a user in your role hierarchy. However, in the Salesforce mobile
app you can choose from all users in your organization. If you
select a user outside your role hierarchy, you get an error.
Dashboard Layout Dashboards display in a single-column layout on phones, and

up to a two-column layout on tablets.
Dashboards Features Not Available

• Create, edit, or delete dashboards
• Feed
• Schedule
• Link from a dashboard widget to a website or email address
• Visualforce widgets on dashboards
• Folders
• Text widget
• Image widget
Other Notes about Using Dashboards
In some situations, data displayed in a dashboard widget can get out of sync with data in the report that's displayed on the same
page. When a dashboard widget’s data doesn’t match the report, one of these things is happening.
• The dashboard is being refreshed as the configured user or the running user, while a report is always run as the current user.
• The report was refreshed more recently than the dashboard. A report is refreshed every time you look at it (assuming you aren’t
working offline). But a dashboard widget is refreshed only when the dashboard it belongs to is refreshed.
To refresh a dashboard in the Salesforce mobile app, click Refresh. Pull-to-Refresh doesn’t trigger a dashboard refresh.
The same temporary mismatch can occur in the desktop site, but there you see reports and dashboard charts on separate pages.
Charts
Other Notes about Using Charts
• Report charts are available only after drilling into a dashboard widget’s report. Report charts aren’t available from the Reports
tab.
• Embedded report charts don’t link to the source report.
Lightning Reports and Dashboards Technical Requirements

Review these recommended technical requirements to get the best performance out of Salesforce reports and dashboards.
These technical requirements are provided to help you predict whether your hardware and network can provide an acceptable and
productive user experience. Salesforce strongly recommends testing the actual end-user experience with a configuration identical to
what you expect to use in production. Test using the same geographic location, hardware, browser, network settings, and the expected
473
concurrent users for shared hardware like virtual desktops. In Lightning Experience, page load times can be captured using Lightning
Component Debug Mode, or by appending ?eptVisible=1 to your URL.
https://myDomainName.lightning.force.com/one/one.app?eptVisible=1
For the fastest and most stable experience, we recommend:
• An Octane 2.0 score of 30,000
• Network latency of 150 ms or lower
• Download speed of 3 Mbps or higher
• At least 8 GB of RAM, with 3 GB available for Salesforce browser tabs
Minimum requirements are:
• An Octane 2.0 score of 20,000
• Network latency of 200 ms or lower
• Download speed of 1 Mbps
Based on our lab tests, the minimum requirements result in 50% slower page load times and login load times versus the recommended
specifications. Users that use over 1,000 records a day are more likely to have their browser tab crash when using the minimum
requirements due to memory limits.
To get your Octane 2.0 score, latency, and download speed, append speedtest.jsp to your org’s domain.
https://MyDomainName.lightning.force.com/speedtest.jsp
We recommend running this test on the same hardware, network, physical location, and browser as your users. For virtual environments,
such as VDI, run all tests from within that virtual environment.
Improving Page Load Times

The most important factors in predicting page load times are Octane 2.0 score, network latency, download speed, and the amount of
customization on a given page. See this knowledge article for more information on how to improve performance.
Improving Octane 2.0 Scores

Octane 2.0 is a benchmark developed by Google that measures JavaScript performance. A higher Octane 2.0 score correlates to faster
page load times. Octane 2.0 factors in your computer hardware and browser choice.
• Using newer-generation hardware with faster CPUs generates higher Octane 2.0 scores.
• Using the latest version of Salesforce-supported browsers generates higher Octane 2.0 scores.
IE11 results in low Octane 2.0 scores and slower page load speeds.
Improving Tab Longevity

The amount of RAM available has a significant impact on browser tab longevity. Having enough RAM helps prevent crashes. Insufficient
RAM can also negatively impact page load times with older browsers.
474
Analyze Your Data Explore Data and Take Action with CRM Analytics
Improving Virtual Desktop Environment Performance

Virtual desktop environments often have older processors and are shared by many users, resulting in slower page load times. To predict
how a virtual desktop performs with Lightning Experience, run performance tests from within the virtual environment. Use as many
concurrent users as expected in production, and take their usage patterns into account. Run speedtest.jsp to determine the
Octane 2.0 score during concurrent use, and test page load times during concurrent use using Lightning Component Debug Mode or
the eptVisible=1 URL parameter.
If your Octane 2.0 score is below 20,000, or you have slow page load times, Salesforce recommends upgrading your hardware, reducing
the number of users per environment, or using dedicated desktops.
Explore Data and Take Action with CRM Analytics

CRM Analytics is a cloud-based platform for connecting data from multiple sources, creating interactive views of that data, and sharing
those views in apps. CRM Analytics is a better way to distribute insight to business users so they can understand and act on changing
information.
Main Pathways Into CRM Analytics
Get Started Enable & Integrate Build & Produce

CRM Analytics for Business Users Set Up the Platform Explore & Visualize Data
CRM Analytics on Mobile Prepare & Integrate Data Build CRM Analytics Dashboards
CRM Analytics for Slack Unlock CRM Analytics Insights on Data
Cloud
Manage & Share CRM Analytics in Apps
Add Intelligence
Extend & Develop Learn More... ...and More

Embed & Customize CRM Analytics Trailhead Trailblazer Community
Deploy CRM Analytics Prebuilt Apps In-App Video Series Live Training
Develop on the Platform Self-Serve Academy Best Practices
Training Videos Trailblazer Groups, Blogs, and Channels
Webinar Recordings
475
Top Resources for Every Step Along Your Path
Get Started
Get To Know CRM Analytics Personalize Your Experience Take Actions & Share
CRM Analytics Home Overview Watchlist: Quick Look
Take Action from CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics Basics Subscriptions: Quick Look
Converse with Your Data Collaborate with Annotations
Home Page Actions
Filter & Take Action within CRM Analytics
Present Live Dashboards
Learn What You Can Do with CRM
Save Your Filtered View of a
Analytics
Dashboard Set & Send Smart Notifications
Run Apps
Favorite Assets in CRM Analytics Share Dashboards, Widgets, & Lenses
Dashboard Navigation Basics Home
Download & Share Images & Data
Curate and Share Insights with
Collections Create PDFs & Print Dashboards
Go Mobile with CRM Analytics

CRM Analytics Mobile Exploration
Get Started with Mobile Analytics
Mobile Experience Guide
CRM Analytics for iOS
CRM Analytics for Android
476
Enable & Integrate

Enable CRM Analytics Bring In Your Data Prepare Your Data
Learn CRM Analytics Admin Basics Data Integration Basics Dataflow or Recipe: Help Me Choose
Enable CRM Analytics Features About Datasets Prepare & Load Data into Datasets
Integrate Local & Remote Data with Recipes & Dataflows
Get Started with Data Prep
Bring in External Data
Customize Dataset Fields & Values
Bring in Data with Connectors Add Data in a Recipe
Connect to External Data
Apply Transformations in a Dataflow
Bring in Salesforce Data with Dataset
Builder
Optimize Dataflows with Data Sync
Set Up Access & Security Monitor & Manage Your Datasets
Grant Access & Permissions to Users Monitor Dataflows
Apply Security & Sharing Inheritance Schedule Dataflows
Security Implementation Guide
Build & Produce

Explore & Visualize Your Data Build CRM Analytics Dashboards Organize & Share CRM Analytics Apps
Introduction to CRM Analytics Explorer Quick Start: CRM Analytics
Put It All Together with Apps
Desktop Exploration CRM Analytics Dashboard Building Basics
Analytics App Design
Series: Build Interactive Dashboards
Visualize & Explore Your Data
Organize Apps to Control Navigation
Explore Multiple Datasets within a
Query App-Level Sharing
Create Dashboards from Templates
Trend Report Data
Explore Salesforce Direct Data
Build Advanced CRM Analytics
Choose the Right Charts Dashboards
Create a Waterfall Chart Provide Onboarding within Dashboards
Add Icons to CRM Analytics Dashboards
Create Custom Maps
Unleash the Power of Compare Tables
477
Build & Produce

Get to Know the Dataset Fields Panel
Create & Format Derived Measures
Accelerate with App Templates Customize the CRM Analytics Experience

Customize Dashboards with the
All CRM Analytics Templates Advanced Editor
Sales Analytics App Customize Dataset Metadata
Service Analytics App Customize Dashboard JSON
Event Monitoring Analytics App Customize Widget Interactivity

Get to Know the Query Editor
B2B Marketing Analytics
Analytics App Templates Customize Queries
Get Started Fast with the Design SAQL Developer Guide

Template
Extend & Develop

Embed CRM Analytics in Salesforce Embed CRM Analytics in Your Own Apps Add Custom Actions
Embed Dashboards in Lightning The Analytics SDK Perform Actions on a Salesforce

Pages Record
Embed Dashboards in Lightning Analytics SDK Developer Guide
Experience Perform Bulk Actions on Multiple
Salesforce Records
Add Dashboards to Visualforce Pages
Share CRM Analytics with

Communities
Develop & Package Apps on the Platform Set Up CRM Analytics for Mobile
CRM Analytics App Template
Development Supported Features for iOS & Android
CRM Analytics Templates Developer Connected App for CRM Analytics on

Guide Mobile
CRM Analytics Migration, Packaging, Generate Unique Dashboard Layouts

& Distribution for Different Devices
Enable Push Notifications
478
Analyze Your Data Get Started Using CRM Analytics
Extend & Develop
CRM Analytics REST API Developer Customize Login Options

Guide
Launch CRM Analytics from the iOS
CRM Analytics Dashboard App
Component Developer Guide
Analytics CLI Plugin Command

Reference
SEE ALSO:
Get Started Using CRM Analytics

With just a few clicks, you can run CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, and lenses.
Learn What You Can Do with CRM Analytics

Introduce yourself to the CRM Analytics way of data exploration.
Open CRM Analytics
Access all your analytics from the Analytics tab within Salesforce. Alternatively, go to your home page by opening the app menu or
App Launcher in the Salesforce header and then finding and opening CRM Analytics Studio.
Unify and Manage Your Analytics
Your analytics are now together in an intuitive and personalized home page that you can experience in Analytics Studio and the
Analytics Tab. On this centralized home page, you can see the latest changes for your CRM Analytics assets, and dashboards and
reports. You can also customize the home page with items you build for quick access, along with better organization, and a powerful
search experience.
Collections enable you to curate analytics to create a more personalized experience that makes it easier to find and use the information
that matters most to you. Your analytics can be drawn from different apps and folders into a single collection that brings together
all items in one place. In addition, collections can be used to personalize the home page and save you time and effort in finding the
information you need.
View, Collaborate, and Take Action from Einstein CRM Analytics
View conversational explorations of your data, and personalize your CRM Analytics experience with saved dashboard views. Collaborate
with features such as notifications, annotations, presentation mode, and downloading filtered data from CRM Analytics. Use custom
menus in lenses and dashboards to take action in Salesforce directly from CRM Analytics.
Learning Resources
In addition to these Help pages, CRM Analytics has a variety of in-app assistance, and there’s more educational content on Trailhead
and other websites.
Analytics Glossary
Familiarize yourself with common Analytics terminology.
479
Learn What You Can Do with CRM Analytics

Introduce yourself to the CRM Analytics way of data exploration.
Explore and Visualize Your Data Interactively

Data exploration is an iterative process. It typically involves these steps: view, explore, refine, save, and share.
Collections of Data in CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics collects and organizes your data in datasets, lenses, dashboard, and apps. These collections, also known as “CRM
Analytics assets,” represent levels of data refinement—from raw data that’s uploaded from your source systems to highly curated,
packaged views of your data.
Data Exploration Concepts
As you learn how to explore and visualize your data, it’s helpful to review key concepts such as visualization, measure, and dimension.
What Is a Dashboard?
A CRM Analytics dashboard is a collection of widgets that work together to tell a data story from multiple angles. Depending on
what you want the dashboard to show or how to behave, you can add different widgets, such as key performance indicators, charts,
tables, filters, and images.
Key Elements of a CRM Analytics Dashboard
A dashboard isn’t just for reading. It’s for carrying on a conversation based on one or more datasets that matter to your company.
Don’t only look at the pictures—use the tools on the dashboard to dive deeper into the data that you care about. Go ahead, click
around, and explore!
Query Your Data to Know Your Business
It’s great to have a gut feeling about how well your business is doing. However, before you take action, test the feeling against your
data. Ask your data questions.
SEE ALSO:
Converse with Your Data
Learn to Explore Data
Create and Share CRM Analytics Apps to Give Business Users a Big Data Picture

480
• View—View the dataset.

• Explore—Get to know the boundaries and shape of your data. Play with different views, zoom in and zoom out, and see what you
get with different charting options.
• Refine—Narrow your view to the most important data. Decide the level of detail and categorization that’s easiest for your colleagues
to understand. Choose the most appropriate chart visualization.
• Save—Save your work.
• Share—Share your view with others. For a more packaged presentation, use your visualization to build a dashboard.

CRM Analytics collects and organizes your data in datasets, lenses, dashboard, and apps. These collections, also known as “CRM Analytics
assets,” represent levels of data refinement—from raw data that’s uploaded from your source systems to highly curated, packaged views
of your data.
• A dataset contains a set of source data, specially formatted and optimized for interactive exploration.
• A lens is a particular view into a dataset's data. It’s where you do exploratory analysis and visualization.
• A dashboard is a curated set of charts, metrics, and tables based on the data in one or more lenses.
• An app is a purpose-built set of analytics and answers about a specific area of your business. With apps, you can provide pathways
through your data, plus powerful tools for spontaneous, deep explorations. After creating dashboards, lenses, and datasets, organize
apps to present dashboards in relevant order, and then share apps with appropriate groups.

A visualization is commonly a chart or graph, such as a bar chart, donut chart, timeline, or heat map. It can also be data in tabular form,
such as a comparison table or pivot table. Every visualization has an underlying query, which is how CRM Analytics retrieves information
from the source data.
A measure is a quantitative value that contains numerical data like revenue and exchange rate. You can do math on measures, such as
calculating the total revenue and minimum exchange rate. Measures have names (revenue) and values ($1,000,000). When you’re
viewing a chart visualization in CRM Analytics, it’s important to remember:
• The chart either shows a slice of your data based on the number of or amount of something, or it shows tabular data.
• A measure is typically aggregated in some way, which means that it’s displayed with some math already applied to it. For example,
when you first view a dataset, you often see a simple aggregation such as the count of the number of rows. You typically aggregate
by a different method—sum, average, maximum, and so on—as you explore and change or add measures, but you always specify
how you want to aggregate at the time when you select the measure.
• You can identify measures by their position (the far left items in the top left corner of a lens) and by the text that indicates the
aggregation method (such as Sum of Revenue).
Warning: If you perform a query that aggregates measures—like sum or group by—and the resulting value exceeds the maximum
for a numeric field (36,028,797,018,963,967), the value overflows and CRM Analytics returns an incorrect result.
A dimension is a qualitative value that usually contains categorical data, such as Product Category, Lead Status, and Case Subject.
Dimensions are handy for grouping and filtering your data. Unlike measures, you can’t perform math on dimensions. Like measures,
dimensions also have names (region) and values (northeast). Time is usually considered a dimension rather than a measure.
481
What Is a Dashboard?
A CRM Analytics dashboard is a collection of widgets that work together to tell a data story from multiple angles. Depending on what
you want the dashboard to show or how to behave, you can add different widgets, such as key performance indicators, charts, tables,
filters, and images.
When you share CRM Analytics data via a dashboard, you’re setting up your audience members to do some exploring of their own,
without turning them loose on the whole dataset.
One use of a dashboard is to provide a focus for your audience. A dataset can contain vast amounts of data. Some of that data is relevant
to specific questions that your audience has; some of that data is irrelevant noise. Data that’s critical to one set of questions is sometimes
noise in relation to another set of questions.
Keep in mind that even though we call it a dashboard, we’re actually doing much more with this interface than we do with a traditional
dashboard in a car. This dashboard doesn’t only tell us what’s changed; it invites us to dig deeper into the underlying data. It’s like using
the speedometer in a car to tell us not just how fast we’re going but how our speed has changed at various points in our trip, how traffic
conditions ahead of us are changing, and how those changes affect our arrival time.
Key Elements of a CRM Analytics Dashboard

A dashboard isn’t just for reading. It’s for carrying on a conversation based on one or more datasets that matter to your company. Don’t
only look at the pictures—use the tools on the dashboard to dive deeper into the data that you care about. Go ahead, click around, and
explore!
You read a Salesforce CRM Analytics dashboard interactively by clicking its displayed elements. Every element is a picture of a live, filtered
query.
Selection-Based Filters
A selection-based filter lets you apply whatever filters you wish while viewing the dashboard. For example, set the minimum and
maximum values in a range widget to make the dashboard show the amounts that fall within that range. These types of filters are often
tied to each other so that you can progressively drill deeper. For example, use one filter to look at sales of a product. Then use the next
to filter sales by region. Finally, use another to filter sales by account. The dashboard shows the results based on all three filters. Dashboard
482
selections automatically reset each time you change a query grouping. There are different types of selection-based filter widgets: date,
list, range, toggle, and charts.
Key Performance Indicators

Some information is best measured by a single number, also known a key performance indicator. Some number elements can be filtered
based on selections in charts and filters. For example, in a bar chart that shows individual salespeople’s pipelines, click a bar to focus on
a particular person’s pipeline. Notice that the number changes from showing the total value for all salespeople to show the value for
the selected person.
Charts
A rich variety of charts shows you data from multiple angles. Many parts of a chart are interactive. For example, click a bar in a bar chart
and watch what happens. Clicking a bar filters the query that the bar chart represents. Your revision changes other values in this chart,
values in other charts, and number displays.
Tables
A table provides the record-level details. For example, a chart can show you a performance summary for each region, but the table can
show you the opportunity-specific details. You can sort tables to show the top and bottom records. You can also create calculated
columns in tables to compute values based on existing data.
Query Your Data to Know Your Business

It’s great to have a gut feeling about how well your business is doing. However, before you take action, test the feeling against your data.
Ask your data questions.
The easiest method for asking questions about data in datasets is to explore it in a lens. You ask questions in the form of queries. Use
the left panel (1) of the lens to create your query. You can perform calculations (referred to as measures), like sum of amount or average
case duration. To break down the measure across different areas, group it by descriptive fields (known as dimensions), like region or
owner. To find the top or bottom performers, sort the measure in descending or ascending order. Then, if needed, apply filters to focus
on a subset of the results.
483
The middle panel (2) shows a visual representation of the query results. You can display the results as a chart or table. When in chart
mode ( ), you can choose which chart type to use—CRM Analytics offers many. In table mode ( ), you can display the dataset
records as a values table or create calculated fields and display them in a compare table. And, yes, pivot tables are also possible.
The right panel (3) shows the visualization properties—configure them to modify the appearance of the chart or table. For instance,
you can remove the legend, change the axis scale, or add a title. To view this panel, click .
If you’re more advanced, write your own custom queries using Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL) notation. In SAQL mode
( ), you have more flexibility to write robust queries, like ones that span multiple datasets or have modified query limits. For example,
if the results are sorted in descending order, you set the limit to 5, and click Run Query, the query returns only the top five accounts.
484
Monitor Your Business Regularly with CRM Analytics Dashboards

CRM Analytics dashboards are populated with your data based on queries that you define. To continually get answers to common
questions, save and organize your queries in interactive CRM Analytics dashboards. Each time you open the dashboard, the queries
get the latest results based on the available data.
Answer Ad Hoc Questions with CRM Analytics Lenses
Dashboards are great for answering common questions, but sometimes you don’t have a question in mind. You want to poke around
your data and ask questions as you notice things. To explore your data, open a dataset and create ad hoc queries. To revisit the query
later, save it as a lens. The lens includes the query and the visualization—how the results appear. Like dashboards, lenses can be
shared.
Monitor Your Business Regularly with CRM Analytics Dashboards

CRM Analytics dashboards are populated with your data based on queries that you define. To continually get answers to common
questions, save and organize your queries in interactive CRM Analytics dashboards. Each time you open the dashboard, the queries get
the latest results based on the available data.
As the sales executive, the start of your day might include a cup of coffee and the following sales leader dashboard. Each component is
based on a query. For example, the timeline chart component shows the cumulative opportunity amount for each week of this quarter.
The leaderboard in the left column ranks reps by sales (closed won opportunities).
485
Because of built-in dashboard interactivity, you don’t have to add more queries to ask follow-up questions. For example, to focus on an
individual’s performance, select the rep’s donut chart in the leader panel on the left. CRM Analytics filters the dashboard results based
on the selected rep. Behind the scenes, CRM Analytics modifies the underlying queries, filtering the results to get the specific rep’s
opportunities.
If the dashboard can’t be used to answer a question, hover over a dashboard component and click Explore to create a new query based
on the same dataset.
486
SEE ALSO:
Manage Queries for Widgets
Answer Ad Hoc Questions with CRM Analytics Lenses

Dashboards are great for answering common questions, but sometimes you don’t have a question in mind. You want to poke around
your data and ask questions as you notice things. To explore your data, open a dataset and create ad hoc queries. To revisit the query
later, save it as a lens. The lens includes the query and the visualization—how the results appear. Like dashboards, lenses can be shared.
When you open a dataset, the lens shows the number of dataset rows as a bar chart, by default.
To change the query, add measures, groupings, and filters to the Measures, Group by, and Filter by boxes. To represent the results as a
different chart type, click . To represent the results as a table or to create calculated fields based on existing fields, click . If you’re
more advanced and want a more robust way to create SAQL queries, click to manually enter the query.
487
To add a query to a dashboard, click to clip it.
SEE ALSO:
Explore and Visualize Your Data in CRM Analytics
488
Open CRM Analytics

Access all your analytics from the Analytics tab within Salesforce. Alternatively, go to your home
EDITIONS
page by opening the app menu or App Launcher in the Salesforce header and then finding and
opening CRM Analytics Studio. Available in Salesforce
• To access your unified analytics in CRM Analytics Studio, from the App Launcher, find and open Classic and Lightning
CRM Analytics Studio. Experience.
• To start in the Analytics tab, find and open the Analytics item. Each environment allows easy Available with CRM
movement to the other. When you opened the App Launcher, if you clicked View All, you can Analytics, which is available
click the CRM Analytics Studio tile (1) or the Analytics item (2). for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To access Analytics:
If you don’t see the Analytics tab, ask your admin to set it up like any new tab.
489

Your analytics are now together in an intuitive and personalized home page that you can experience
EDITIONS
in Analytics Studio and the Analytics Tab. On this centralized home page, you can see the latest
changes for your CRM Analytics assets, and dashboards and reports. You can also customize the Available in: Lightning
home page with items you build for quick access, along with better organization, and a powerful Experience
search experience.
Use search (1) and browse (2) to locate your items through keyword search and filters. For You (3)
Group, Enterprise,
organizes analytics to help you find what you’re looking for quickly. Go to My Analytics (4) to access Professional, Unlimited,
content from a chronological listing or go to Favorites (5) to open commonly used items. Use and Developer Editions.
Collections (6) to curate and organize analytics across different apps and folders and share them
with other users. Also available with CRM
Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
To access Analytics home:

Run Reports AND
Manage
What’s the Difference Between Analytics Tab and Analytics Studio?
Dashboards
With CRM Analytics, you can take either a business user path or a builder path, depending on
Enhanced Folder
what you want to do, and you can switch paths at any time.
Sharing
Find Analytics and Insights Run Reports AND
The analytics home page provides easy access to all of your apps, dashboards, lenses, reports, Create and
Customize
and more. With a variety of filter and search options, you can find those analytics fast. And with
Dashboards
Ask Data for Salesforce, you can answer your own data questions and get insights using
intelligent, self-service analytics. To access CRM Analytics
items in Analytics home:
Run a CRM Analytics App to View Dashboards and Lenses
You can run an app in the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio.
Favorite Your Analytics
Your analytics can be favorited for quick access. Favorite items are easily accessible from My Analytics and the global header in the
Analytics tab and Analytics studio.
Set and Send Smart Notifications
Set up CRM Analytics to notify you about changes to your important business metrics, when and where you choose. Attach notification
criteria to widgets in dashboards, and select when to run the queries. You can see notifications in CRM Analytics, Lightning Experience,
CRM Analytics for iOS, and email. Add recipients from your org to the email’s distribution list to notify colleagues at the same time
as yourself.
Get Scheduled Updates with Email Subscriptions
Subscribe to lenses and dashboard widgets and receive a daily or weekly email with updates on your most important charts and
metrics, and table data in .csv attachments.
490
Monitor Important Metrics with the CRM Analytics Watchlist

The CRM Analytics Watchlist gives users the advantage of capturing and tracking up to 20 KPIs across different dashboards, plus
historical trending. No more switching between dashboards to see what has changed, and track your metrics all in one place.
What’s the Difference Between Analytics Tab and Analytics Studio?

With CRM Analytics, you can take either a business user path or a builder path, depending on what you want to do, and you can switch
paths at any time.
Analytics Tab Two Paths Analytics Studio

Stay in Salesforce Go to Analytics > >
Run and explore apps

Browse and build assets
l ba T
The business user path, generally for those with Use CRM Analytics permission, leads to ready-to-explore dashboards and lenses in
curated apps. For this path, work in the CRM Analytics tab to run apps and collaborate with coworkers over dashboards.
The builder path, generally for those with permission to create CRM Analytics assets, leads to ready-to-explore datasets and ready-to-edit
apps, dashboards, and lenses. For this path, work in the CRM Analytics Studio to browse your assets and build new ones.
This table summarizes the differences between the Analytics tab in Salesforce and the Analytics Studio.
Action Analytics Tab Analytics Studio

(Run and Collaborate) (Browse and Build)
Create
Annotate
Set Notification
Watchlist
Collections
Favorite
Edit
Full Screen
Clip to Designer
491
Action Analytics Tab Analytics Studio

(Run and Collaborate) (Browse and Build)
Clone in New Tab
Save
Share
Delete
This table details the differences in behavior and functionality between the Analytics tab in Salesforce and the Analytics Studio.
CRM Analytics Tab Analytics Studio

Analytics
Asset
Apps
What Runs app Browses app

happens
when you
click an app
name or icon
on the home
page
App actions Browse; Share; Open in Analytics Studio; Add to Collection; Run App; Share; Favorite
on home Favorite
page tile or
list entry
Actions on Run App; Tile/List View; Share Create; Run App; Tile/List View; Share; Delete
the Browse
App page
492

Analytics
Asset
Dashboards
Dashboard Share; Open in Analytics Studio; Add to Collection; Favorite Edit; Share; Delete; Add to Collection; Favorite
actions on
home page
tile or list
entry
Lenses
Lens actions Share; Open in Analytics Studio; Add to Collection; Favorite Share; Delete; Add to Collection; Favorite
on home
page tile or
list entry
Datasets
Dataset N/A Edit; Create Story; Favorite

actions on
493

Analytics
Asset
home page
tile or list
entry
Note: Actions are available depending upon user permissions and app sharing access.
Find Analytics and Insights

The analytics home page provides easy access to all of your apps, dashboards, lenses, reports, and
EDITIONS
more. With a variety of filter and search options, you can find those analytics fast. And with Ask Data
for Salesforce, you can answer your own data questions and get insights using intelligent, self-service Available in Salesforce
analytics. Classic and Lightning
The analytics home page surfaces items suggested for you, based on your usage and your org, as Experience.
well as providing quick access to your recent and favorite items. All of the lists are dynamic and
Available with CRM
update automatically as you work. In the For You section, Jump Back In and Discover New Items Analytics, which is available
use intelligence to pinpoint your important analytics, show what’s currently popular, and increase for an extra cost in
discoverability of analytics you haven’t seen before. For more information, see Smart Enterprise, Performance,
Recommendations on page 498. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
Browse
Browse has primary filters (1) that set the context and determine what other filters are available.
USER PERMISSIONS
Use the secondary filters (2) for further refinement by properties such as Created By, Last Modified
On, Created On, and Last Modified By. To find analytics:
494
These filters enable one-click access to both run and browse actions, as well as other actions if appropriate for the item.
Relevant timestamps are provided depending on the item. Use the Last Modified By and Created By filters to locate items created by
you or shared with you. Use the Last Modified On and Created On filters to locate recent items or to search by a custom date.
Search
Search in CRM Analytics lets you choose your path to the analytics you want, whether that’s traditional keyword search, semantic (data
match) search, or natural language querying.
In the search bar, enter search terms or ask a question about your business. You don’t have to know the type of search because CRM
Analytics gives you options, but here are general guidelines:
• For a keyword search, enter words from the name of the item.
• For semantic search, enter specific sObject or dataset fields. For more information, see Find Dashboards and Datasets by Field Using
Semantic Search on page 499.
• For natural language querying, enter any question about your business data. For more information, see Get Data Answers While You
Search with Ask Data for Salesforce on page 500.
Note: The Ask Data for Salesforce service is enabled by default in production orgs with 1,000 or more reports and active use
of the Analytics Home page. The service is also available for Full sandboxes upon request. If you’ve fewer than 1,000 reports
but you want to try Ask Data for Salesforce, contact Salesforce Support.
Depending on what you enter in the search field, the Search page can have two sections: Search results that are keyword matches, and
recommended top insights based on the data selected to answer your question.
To open the Keyword Results page, click View All. Access the full list of results or continue with keyword searching. Filter using the
options at the top. To go back to the main Search page, click Search in the page title.
If you have Recommended Insights, click the arrows to explore recommendations based on different datasets. You can also see more
about the data, select a different dataset, and give feedback. To open the Insights page, click More Insights. Work with the recommended
top insight (1) to map your natural language to data fields and values, and adjust the data that was selected to answer your question
(2). The Insights page also has the recommended next best insights section (3), a prediction service that suggests ideas for further
exploration with additional and related groupings of the data.
495
Take action from any insight. Click Share to post to Chatter, export to Quip, or download the insight. Click Explore to open
the insight in lens mode, where you can change the visualization. If you’re in Analytics Studio, you can also save it or clip it to a dashboard.
To open the Data Match page, enter semantic search terms in the search bar. To learn more about semantic search, see Find Dashboards
and Datasets by Field Using Semantic Search on page 499.
496
Lightning Experience Search

If you’re working in Lightning Experience, you can use the global search box to quickly find and view lenses and dashboards. The search
box dropdown list includes analytics among its suggestions. Selecting an item from the list runs it in the Analytics tab.
Or start typing and press Enter to see a page of found resources. To narrow the search results to only CRM Analytics lenses and dashboards,
click Analytics Apps or Analytics Dashboards in the left panel. From the results, you can click to run the item in the Analytics tab.
497
Smart Recommendations
The CRM Analytics home page surfaces lists of items suggested for you based on your usage and your org, and the lists are dynamic
and update automatically as you work. Two of the lists employ CRM Analytics intelligence and unique view of your org to pinpoint
your important analytics, show what’s currently popular, and increase discoverability of analytics you haven’t seen before.
Find Dashboards and Datasets by Field Using Semantic Search
Uncover CRM Analytics items beyond just those matching exact keywords. Semantic search boosts searching with a behind-the-scenes
view of object fields and dataset columns across all your org’s data. You can ask to see dashboards using specific sObject or dataset
fields, or ask for datasets containing specific sObject fields. Semantic search inspects all your data, but the search results are tailored
for you, adhering to user access, sharing rules, and row-level security.
Get Data Answers While You Search with Ask Data for Salesforce
Answer your own data questions with intelligent, self-service analytics directly on the CRM Analytics home page. Ask Data for
Salesforce learns your business vocabulary and finds the right data to answer natural language questions. It provides automatically
generated data visualizations, smart recommendations of related analytics items, and suggestions for the next best data explorations.
All of these features work together to make it easy and fun to discover data insights.
Smart Recommendations
The CRM Analytics home page surfaces lists of items suggested for you based on your usage and your org, and the lists are dynamic and
update automatically as you work. Two of the lists employ CRM Analytics intelligence and unique view of your org to pinpoint your
important analytics, show what’s currently popular, and increase discoverability of analytics you haven’t seen before.
Smart recommendations appear as soon as you start working in CRM Analytics, if your org has multiple people using dashboards. If you
haven’t used CRM Analytics in your org in the past month, some lists don't appear. After you’ve started searching and querying, CRM
Analytics learns what to recommend.
498
Note: Recommendations adhere to CRM Analytics user sharing rules and row-level security. Smart recommendation cards show
only dashboards that you can access.
• Jump Back In lists dashboards you viewed lately that are also popular with colleagues in your org. The dashboards are listed in
most viewed order, providing insight into what people with usage patterns similar to yours are viewing.
• Discover New Items lists dashboards you haven’t seen but could be relevant to you, based on their popularity over the last 30 days.
If colleagues are viewing them, these dashboards could have insights for you.
Find Dashboards and Datasets by Field Using Semantic Search

Uncover CRM Analytics items beyond just those matching exact keywords. Semantic search boosts searching with a behind-the-scenes
view of object fields and dataset columns across all your org’s data. You can ask to see dashboards using specific sObject or dataset
fields, or ask for datasets containing specific sObject fields. Semantic search inspects all your data, but the search results are tailored for
you, adhering to user access, sharing rules, and row-level security.
To initiate semantic search, use this syntax in the home page search bar:
targetAssetType sourceAssetType:fieldName1,fieldName2
The targetAssetType can be dashboard or dataset. The sourceAssetType can be object-field or

dataset-field. The fieldName must be the developerName of the field. For example:
• To list dashboards using the activity.ActivityName sObject field, enter dashboard
object-field:activity.ActivityName
499
• To list dashboards using the Opportunity.Amount dataset field, enter dashboard dataset-field:Opportunity.Amount
• To list datasets containing the case.CaseNumber sObject field, enter dataset object-field:case.CaseNumber
Answer your own data questions with intelligent, self-service analytics directly on the CRM Analytics
EDITIONS
home page. Ask Data for Salesforce learns your business vocabulary and finds the right data to
answer natural language questions. It provides automatically generated data visualizations, smart Available in CRM Analytics
recommendations of related analytics items, and suggestions for the next best data explorations. in Salesforce Classic and
All of these features work together to make it easy and fun to discover data insights. Lightning Experience.
Note: The Ask Data for Salesforce service is enabled by default in production orgs with 1,000 CRM Analytics is available
or more reports and active use of the Analytics Home page. The service is also available for for an extra cost in
Full sandboxes upon request. If you have fewer than 1,000 reports but you want to try Ask Enterprise, Performance,
Data for Salesforce, contact Salesforce Support. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Discover insights across all your org’s data using your own natural language. Ask Data for Salesforce
Edition
uses machine learning to understand your question and locate the data that has your answer. Get
immediate answers to your data questions and stay in the flow of analysis. Answers are presented Available with the CRM
as Search Insights--charts, tables, or metrics--and as a list of dashboards related to the data. Analytics Plus license.
Start by asking a question
In the search bar on Analytics Home, start typing a question about your business. The search bar menu opens with suggested recent
searches, search results, fields, values, data, and data queries. If you see what you’re looking for in the search bar menu, you can select
it there. Or, keep typing and then press Enter. For more information, see What Questions Can You Ask? on page 506.
View Recommended Insights on the Search page
The Search page returns insights based on the top datasets that Ask Data for Salesforce identified as best answering your question. Click
the arrows to explore recommendations based on different datasets.
500
The insights show your question turned into a data query and an automatically generated visualization or metric. Part of the process is
identifying the best data to answer your question. Click See more about the data to view details that can help you determine if an
insight is using the data that you want. You also get a list of dashboards that use the data, where you can find additional, prebuilt
explorations of your question.
Did you find a helpful insight? Give us feedback about it. Click Great Insight, and Ask Data for Salesforce remembers the dataset to use
the next time that you ask the same question. Click Needs Work to improve the insight by selecting another dataset.
501
Go to the Insights page

Click More Insights to open the Insights page. Here you can further explore your top recommended insight (1) and the data that was
selected to answer your question (2). Check out the recommended next best insights (3), an analytics prediction service that suggests
ways to dive deeper into the data.
502
Consider next best insights

The additional and related answers in Recommended Next Best Insights reveal other angles on the data, based on past queries against
the selected dataset. These insights can help you with the next questions to ask and introduce new areas to explore.
• Additional groupings take the top insight and drill in deeper by applying other meaningful groupings. For example, if you’re
looking at data grouped by region, a next best insight could show you data grouped by region and ZIP code.
• Related groupings start with the top insight but use different relevant fields for grouping. For example, if the top insight has data
grouped by month, a next best insight could show you data grouped by quarter.
Keep in mind that this service follows the top insight, and it can take longer for next best insights to appear. Sometimes your top insight
answers a new question for your org. Asking related questions can help Ask Data for Salesforce to learn meaningful next queries.
Understand the data
The Data Used for Insights panel shows three groups of datasets. The groups are based on report type clusters associated with common
object fields in your data and identified as the best data to answer your question. The dataset queried is selected. Click the name of
another dataset to use it as the basis of the query. Automatically, the top insight and next best insights are reconfigured to show answers
using the data that you select.
503
In the Data Used for Insights panel, you can also click the confidence level on a dataset to view more information about it. Confidence
is determined by algorithm scores for data matches, popularity measures, and natural language interpretation. The dataset details and
related objects could help you to verify that we’re using the data you expect.
504
Specify data for natural language search

If you know the dataset or object you want to query, you can provide a cue by including its developerName. In cases where the dataset
confidence score is low or we used the wrong data, you can override our dataset selection with a cue. Cues also work well for queries
against external data.
Add a cue by adding dataset:[developerName] or object:[developerName] to your question in the search bar.
You can also change the data in the search bar menu by selecting a scope hint or Query All Data.
505
Teach us your language

Notice that some words in your question are highlighted. Highlighted words are associated with a field or value in the data we’re using
to answer your question. If you want to change the association, click the word to open the menu.
In the menu, the field with a checkmark is the one used in the data query configured from your question. Each time you or anyone in
your org selects a field or value to associate with a word or phrase, Ask Data for Salesforce learns your business’s language. The numbers
next to some fields indicate how many times people in your org have associated them with the highlighted word. These numbers can
help you make the right selection.
Note: Any word in your question can be associated with a data element. You can also select more than one word and assign the
phrase to a data element.
What questions can you ask?
506
Build a question by identifying the data you’re interested in and what you want to narrow in on. Say you want to know about your sales
this month in Iowa. You can simply type sales by product this month Iowa into the search bar, and Ask Data for Salesforce
can identify the dataset that includes monetary amounts, dates, and geographical locations.
In addition, with the word “sales,” you’ve specified the sum of the amount. With the words “by product,” you’ve specified grouping the
data into product categories. With the words “this month,” you’ve asked for the data to be filtered by date. And with the word “Iowa,”
you’ve also filtered or narrowed down the data by location. Ask Data for Salesforce can take it from there to locate the correct data and
apply your query.
Use this chart as a guide for the types of questions to ask.
Example Language Example Questions

Aggregation number, count, sum, average What is average deal size
Sum of sales
Count of customers
Grouping Categories such as account owner, product family, Deals by region

lead status. Open cases by account name
Dates such as year, quarter, month (fiscal or calendar). Deals by close date quarter
Grouping phrases use the word “by”.
Filtering ==, !=, >, <, >=, <= Numerical filters such as “sum of sales > $2,000” or
between x and y, over, above, greater than, more “prices between $10 and $20”
than, below, under, less than, fewer than Scope filters such as "Smith’s opportunities"
this, last, next, previous, current (relative to now) Relative date range filters such as “incidents in current
and previous FQ” or “cases last week”
Sorting top, bottom, most, least top 5 opportunities by sum of sales

top 10 cars sold last year
bottom product by average profit
Keep in mind
If no measure is specified in a question, the results are aggregated by count of rows.
507
If a date increment isn’t specified in a date-related question, the default is "year". For example, "my deals by close date" is interpreted as
"my deals grouped by close date year".
Shortened values like "1K" or "2B" aren’t supported.
What questions can’t you ask?
These types of questions aren’t supported in Ask Data for Salesforce.
Calculations What is my win rate? What is the sum of profit / revenue?
Comparison Over Time How many cases closed YTD? Week over week, year over year?
Explanation Why did CSAT drop this month?
Prediction How many opportunities will close next month?
Take action from any insight

After you have an insight that answers your question, go to the next level. You can take action right from the insight with the Explore
and Share icons.
•
Click Share to post to Chatter, export to Quip, or download the insight.
• Click Explore to open the insight in lens mode, where you can change the visualization. If you’re in Analytics Studio, you can
also save it or clip it to a dashboard.
Use Recommended Groupings when exploring
In addition to the grouping options with Recommended Next Best Insights, CRM Analytics shows you recommended groupings for
charts and tables in a lens or dashboard. Using AI, CRM Analytics recommends up to three date or dimension fields that can help reveal
patterns in your data when you group by them.
When exploring data in a lens or a dashboard, click + under Bars. Select one of the recommended groups from the displayed list.
508
Give Feedback, Get Help

To give feedback about Ask Data for Salesforce, open the Salesforce Help menu by clicking ?, and select Give Feedback to Salesforce.
Click Give Feedback, and select Tableau CRM. Then enter your feedback and attach an image, if applicable.
Considerations and limitations

Take the following into consideration.
• The Ask Data for Salesforce service works best in orgs where more than 10 datasets, 10 dashboards, and 2000 Salesforce reports are
in active use. The service works best with datasets created from connected Salesforce data.
• Ask Data for Salesforce services become available 24 hours after it's enabled.
• Ask Data for Salesforce learns from your questions. Predictions for next best insights depend on queries against the selected dataset
by you and others in your org.
509
• Character-based and right-to-left languages aren't supported in Ask Data for Salesforce.
• Sort by, limit, absolute date range filters, trending, functions, and formulas aren’t supported.
• The time zone feature isn’t supported.
• Word associations (synonyms) and observations of query interpretations are saved in standard Salesforce objects. Admins with
correct permissions can export and delete synonyms and observations.
• The same data governance that you expect from Salesforce is built into Ask Data for Salesforce. Security and sharing rules are fully
respected. All models are built specifically for each Salesforce org and only that org. Your data never leaves our secure data centers.
• Ask Data for Salesforce services don’t impact your org limits for data or API usage.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Search Insights (Ask Data for Salesforce)
Run a CRM Analytics App to View Dashboards and Lenses

You can run an app in the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio.
1. Select Browse and then Apps.
If you can't find your app, enter part of its title in search.
2. Next to the app name, click the arrow and select Run App.
The app opens in a tab in presentation mode, displaying the first dashboard or lens on your navigation list.
From the running app, you can:
• Present full screen
• Share
• Set and manage notifications
• Subscribe to widgets and lenses (if you have permission)
• Annotate dashboard widgets
• View exploration history
• Print
• Open dashboards in the dashboard designer to edit them on page 1405 (if you have permission and access)
510
Favorite Your Analytics

Your analytics can be favorited for quick access. Favorite items are easily accessible from My Analytics
EDITIONS
and the global header in the Analytics tab and Analytics studio.
Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To favorite items:
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
To favorite CRM Analytics

items:
511
Set and Send Smart Notifications

Set up CRM Analytics to notify you about changes to your important business metrics, when and
EDITIONS
where you choose. Attach notification criteria to widgets in dashboards, and select when to run
the queries. You can see notifications in CRM Analytics, Lightning Experience, CRM Analytics for Available in Salesforce
iOS, and email. Add recipients from your org to the email’s distribution list to notify colleagues at Classic and Lightning
the same time as yourself. Experience.
To set up a CRM Analytics notification, follow these steps.
Available with CRM
1. Locate a dashboard widget that shows information you want to be notified about. You can set Analytics, which is available
notifications on any chart except timeline or values table. If needed, you can use the dashboard’s for an extra cost in
selectors to create a more personalized query of your data. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Select Set Notification from the widget’s dropdown list.
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To set notifications on CRM

Analytics dashboard
widgets:
Run Reports
To email additional
recipients:
• Add Recipients to CRM
3. In the Notifications panel, enter a name for your notification, if needed. Analytics Notifications
512
4. Set the value that you want to know about as soon as your widget query returns it. Depending on the chart, the panel provides
relevant options to select for creating a notification. You can include up to four groupings. If the chart has multiple measures, select
the one you want from the list of options.
For example, if you wanted to know when your team has reached 75% of quota, you’d click Set Notification on the Quota Attainment
number widget. In the Notifications panel, you’d select Equals or is greater than from the dropdown list and enter 75 for the
threshold value.
Notifications read roughly like a sentence. For example, “Notify me when any channel’s sum of open cases is less than 20.” Or, “Notify
me when any product or reason count of cases is greater than 30.”
5. Select the frequency and time when you want the query to run.
6. If the dashboard is in a shared app, then you can add people to your email distribution list. Click Edit Recipients to add users who
have access to the dashboard.
7. Test your notification on the spot with Save and Run, or simply click Save.
A tracking tile appears in the Notifications section of your CRM Analytics home page.
513
When the conditions you’ve set for the notification are met, you get the message on the tile. You’re also notified via email, and in CRM
Analytics and Lightning Experience, the bell icon ( ) alerts you with a number in red.
In CRM Analytics, the dropdown list from the bell includes the option to open the Manage CRM Analytics Notifications dialog box. You
can also manage notifications on the dashboard. The bell icon with the plus ( ) opens the All Notifications panel and shows numbers
in blue ( ) on widgets that have notifications. In the All Notifications panel, each notification has a dropdown action list for editing
and deleting the notification.
Clicking the link in a notification email, the notification manager, or a notification tile on your CRM Analytics home page, takes you to
the dashboard view relevant for the notification. You immediately see the dashboard page with your filters and selections, and with the
notification set up in the side panel. If you want to make any changes, click the Edit button. In edit mode, you can also activate or
deactivate the notification, and select whether to show the tracking tile on the CRM Analytics home page.
Take note of these considerations for CRM Analytics notifications.
• Each user can set up to 10 notifications.
• Notifications are available on all widgets except timeline charts and values tables.
• A notification is based on a snapshot of the query behind the widget. If the dashboard is later edited, the notification isn’t automatically
updated. The notification continues to use the query as it was at the time when the notification was set.
• For queries with groupings, all results are evaluated for the notification criteria, not just the first row.
• Notifications for widgets with queries based on results bindings aren’t supported, including dynamic widget titles.
• Notifications for widgets based on SOQL, Apex, Salesforce Direct, and CRM Analytics Direct queries, such as direct queries on Salesforce
objects, CDP, Snowflake, and Google BigQuery, aren’t supported.
• Notifications aren't supported in dashboards that were created in orgs enabled with CRM Analytics Time Zones.
• If a notification is created in the Analytics Studio, the link in the notification email opens the dashboard in Analytics Studio. If a
notification is created on an embedded dashboard or in Analytics Tab, the link in notification email navigates the user to the Analytics
Tab.
514
• Notification tracking is available in the CRM Analytics app for iOS, but it isn’t available in the CRM Analytics app for Android or in the
Salesforce mobile app.
• Notification tracking tiles use flat gauge or bar chart visualizations to show progress toward the conditions set in the notifications.
The tiles are separate from the dashboard and don’t use the dashboard’s chart types and widget properties.
• Adding recipients doesn’t create personal notifications for them. The added recipients don’t get in-app notification via the bell icon,
and they don’t see the notification on their home page. Recipients get the notification email sent from the email address of the user
who set up the notification.
• Once added to the notification email distribution list, recipients can’t remove themselves and must ask the email sender to be
removed.
• If a notification is on a widget that's based on a SAQL query or a compare table, and filters have been applied, the filters aren’t listed
in the Notifications panel.

Subscribe to lenses and dashboard widgets and receive a daily or weekly email with updates on
EDITIONS
your most important charts and metrics, and table data in .csv attachments.
To set up an email subscription, follow these steps. Available in Salesforce
1. Locate a dashboard widget or a lens with information you want delivered to you with regular
Experience.
email updates.
• For a widget, you can use the dashboard’s filters and selectors to create a more personalized Available with CRM Analytics
view of your data. in Enterprise, Performance,
and Unlimited Editions for
• For a lens, be sure to save before subscribing. an extra cost. Also available
in Developer Edition.
2. Select Subscribe from the menu on a dashboard widget, or from a lens, click the Show
Subscriptions icon ( ).
USER PERMISSIONS
3. The first time you subscribe, you’re asked to set the schedule for your subscription email. Select
the frequency and timing, and click Save. To set subscriptions on CRM
Analytics lenses and
Important: The hour options are Pacific Time. Convert to your time zone when selecting dashboard widgets:
hours. For example, if you want your subscription to arrive at 10:00 AM Eastern Time, • Subscribe to CRM
select 7:00 AM. Analytics Assets
4. Enter a title for the subscription, and click Subscribe. The subscription appears in the To subscribe to tables and
receive email with table data
Subscriptions panel.
in attached .csv files:
That’s it! All subscriptions arrive together in one email. • Download CRM
Analytics Data
Here’s more you can do with subscriptions.
• When viewing a dashboard, click the envelope ( ) to open the Subscriptions panel and show
numbers in blue ( ) on widgets that have subscriptions.
• To view the filters on a widget subscription, click the subscription tile in the dashboard Subscriptions panel.
515
Note: Filters in SAQL queries aren’t listed in the Subscriptions panel but are referenced as “custom.”
• To see a preview of your subscription, click Subscriptions on the CRM Analytics home page and select Widget Subscriptions. In
the Subscription Preview, click the title of a subscription to go to its dashboard or lens.
• In the Subscription Preview, you can arrange the order of your subscriptions. Newly subscribed widgets and lenses are added last
by default. To reorder subscriptions, use the arrow buttons and actions in the menu next to the title. You see the new order in the
Subscription Preview immediately and in your subscription email when it next arrives in your inbox.
• To take action from the Subscription Preview, open the menu on the chart or table.
516
Note: When you subscribe to a table, the Subscription Preview shows the first rows of the table and you can scroll to see
succeeding rows. The subscription email body contains a placeholder for the table and a .csv file of the table data is attached.
• To change the frequency or timing of subscription emails, click Edit on the Subscription Preview.
Note: To receive emails, Enabled must be selected.
• To delete a subscription, select Delete from the menu on the subscription in the Subscriptions panel of the dashboard or lens. To
remove an item from the Widget Subscriptions in the Subscription Preview, select Delete from the menu next to the title of the
widget or lens. You can also delete all Widget Subscriptions from the menu at the top of the Subscription Preview.
517
Take note of these considerations for CRM Analytics subscriptions.

• Set up subscriptions in the CRM Analytics Studio, the Analytics tab, and in embedded CRM Analytics dashboards.
• You can schedule one Widget Subscriptions email with up to 20 subscriptions. You can also subscribe to 4 collections. For more
information about collections, see Subscribe to Multiple Shared Collections on page 535. The maximum number of subscriptions
per hour per org is 100.
• To limit email size, charts are rendered within defined width and height.
• Table data .csv attachments can be up to 3 MB each, with total attachments per email up to 15 MB.
• Subscriptions are available on all widgets and lenses except maps.
• You can subscribe to any lens that is saved in SAQL format in CRM Analytics. If you must convert a lens to SAQL, we let you know
when you try to subscribe. To convert to SAQL, open Query Mode, click Run Query, and then save the lens.
• A lens subscription is dynamic, which means that any change saved to a subscribed lens is automatically reflected in the subscription
email and preview. Because a lens subscription is dynamically in sync with its lens, you can’t delete a lens while there’s a subscription
to it.
• A widget subscription is based on a snapshot of the query at the time you subscribed, and the subscription isn’t automatically
updated when the dashboard is edited. After a subscription is set, any change to the dashboard or update to the query or widget
properties doesn’t change the subscription. Conditional formatting, measure formats, and column names in compare tables are
captured when a subscription is created and aren’t automatically updated.
• If a widget’s query includes results from another query, the outside query is run only at the time that the subscription is created.
Queries with dependencies can cause subscription emails to become inaccurate over time. Before subscribing, consider revising a
widget’s query to remove its dependencies.
• You can subscribe to the same widget multiple times to get updates with different filtered views. Each subscription captures the
state of the widget with any dashboard filters or selections you’ve applied.
• Subscriptions to widgets based on SOQL, Apex, Salesforce Direct, and CRM Analytics Direct queries, such as direct queries on Salesforce
objects, CDP, Snowflake, and Google BigQuery, aren’t supported.
• Subscriptions aren't supported in dashboards that were created in orgs enabled with CRM Analytics Time Zones.
• Custom tooltips on number widgets aren’t included in subscription preview or email.
518
• If a subscription is based on a SAQL query or a compare table, and filters have been applied, the filters aren’t listed in the Subscriptions
panel.
SEE ALSO:
Subscribe to Multiple Shared Collections
Enable Downloading Data from CRM Analytics
Secure Image Sharing and Downloading
Monitor Important Metrics with the CRM Analytics Watchlist

The CRM Analytics Watchlist gives users the advantage of capturing and tracking up to 20 KPIs
EDITIONS
across different dashboards, plus historical trending. No more switching between dashboards to
see what has changed, and track your metrics all in one place. Available in Salesforce
Note: Enable Dashboard Views on page 674 must be on to use Watchlists. The feature is Classic and Lightning
Experience.
enabled by default. Review the referenced document for more information about the feature.
1. Access the Watchlist. The Watchlist (1) is located on the CRM Analytics Home page where you Available with CRM
get a full, personalized list of metrics. Click any metric to view its values (2), and timeline chart Analytics, which is available
(3). for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To manage a watchlist:
2. Add a dashboard item to the Watchlist. Each user can save up to 20 metrics to their Watchlist.
a. Open the dashboard that contains the item to watch.
b. Locate the item’s dashboard widget.
c. Click the widget dropdown menu and click Add to Watchlist.
d. Type in name for the Watchlist metric.
e. Under Change Format, click the radio button to define how changes are tracked.
f. Click Save.
519
3. Delete a Watchlist metric. You have the control to remove metrics from the Watchlist when they’re no longer needed.
a. On the Watchlist, click the metric dropdown menu.
b. Click Delete from the menu.
c. Click Delete on the confirmation screen.
520
4. Edit a Watchlist metric. Watchlist metric properties can be modified at any time.
b. Click Edit from the menu.
c. Make changes to the metric.
d. Click Save.
5. Get item information from a Watchlist. Watchlist metrics also include last snapshot date, snapshot frequency, date metric was added,
and source dashboard.
b. Click Show Details from the menu.
c. Click the X to close the Show Details window when finished.
6. Changing metric order. You can organize Watchlist metrics in any desired order. This is especially useful when viewing metrics from
My Analytics.
a. Click the Watchlist tab from CRM Analytics home.
b. Click Change Order at the bottom of the metrics listing.
c. Click and hold a metric, and drag it to its new position.
d. Release the metric.
e. Click Save.
521
Manage and Track Your Metrics: Tips, Limits, and Limitations

Add and monitor dashboard items on the Watchlist while keeping these tips and limitations in mind.
• Watchlist metrics can only come from dashboards you have access to.
• The Watchlist can only display an item’s metric value starting from the time it was added.
• If access to a dashboard is lost, then restored, your metric remains on the Watchlist but it doesn’t fill in any gaps.
Proactively Monitor Data You Care About with Analytics Watch

View daily changes and trends in your data. Select your metrics to watch and the Analytics Watch feed provides trending and anomaly
detection. Analytics Watch removes the energy and time required to check dashboards manually to see changes and trends, increasing
the likelihood of identifying critical details among the noise.
To get started with Analytics Watch, go to the Analytics Watch User Guide.
522

Collections enable you to curate analytics to create a more personalized experience that makes it
EDITIONS
easier to find and use the information that matters most to you. Your analytics can be drawn from
different apps and folders into a single collection that brings together all items in one place. In Available in: Lightning
addition, collections can be used to personalize the home page and save you time and effort in Experience
finding the information you need.
Group, Enterprise,

Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
Create a Collection
Create collections of important items to personalize the home page and have quick access to To use a collection:
them. • Legacy Folder Sharing
Add Items to a Collection Run Reports AND
Curate analytics items for your collection. Items can exist simultaneously in multiple collections. Manage
Dashboards
Preserve and Share CRM Analytics Dashboard Views in a Collection
Enhanced Folder
Create dashboard views with selected filters and options then add them to your collections to Sharing
share a specific view of the dashboard with others. Run Reports AND
Share a Collection Create and
Customize
Curate a collection and share it with your colleagues to contribute content. Dashboards
Pin and Hide a Collection
To use a collection with CRM
End users can pin and hide their collections giving them more options with customizing their Analytics items:
homepage. Admins and managers have the option to pin collections to end-user homepages • Use CRM Analytics
and promote trusted content among groups and teams.
Edit Collections
You can edit your collection properties, such as name and description, and also delete the collection altogether. Shared users with
the Manager role can also edit and delete the collection.
Arrange Items in a Collection
Organize items in your collection to your liking.
Remove Items from a Collection
Easily remove items that are no longer relevant from a collection.
Add Collections to Lightning Pages
Insert and display collections to your Lightning pages using the CRM Analytics Collection component.
Subscribe to collections of lenses and receive a daily or weekly email with updates on your most important charts and metrics, and
table data in .csv attachments. Subscribe to as many as four collections that you created or that were shared with you. Each
collection subscription has its own schedule for when you receive CRM Analytics email.
523
Create a Collection
Create collections of important items to personalize the home page and have quick access to them.
EDITIONS
1. Click the + on the left of the home page.
Experience

Group, Enterprise,
2. Type in a name for the collection in the Name field. and Developer Editions.

Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a collection:
3. Type in a description in the Description field.
Run Reports AND
4. Click the Color dropdown menu to color code your collection for display on the home page. Manage
5. Click Save. Click Cancel to start over. Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Note: Each user can have up to 100 collections. You can delete one of your collections Sharing
when the limit is reached. Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
To create a collection with

524
Add Items to a Collection

Curate analytics items for your collection. Items can exist simultaneously in multiple collections.
EDITIONS
1. Add items to an empty collection.
a. Click Search for items or Add.
Experience

Group, Enterprise,

b. Type in at least two characters in the search bar to locate an item. Filter search results by Performance, Enterprise,
adding more characters to your search. Unlimited, and Developer
Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
To manage a collection:
c. Click the + next to the item you want to add to your collection. Run Reports AND
Manage
d. Click the Save. Dashboards
2. Add items to an existing collection. Enhanced Folder
Sharing
a. Open your collection. Run Reports AND
b. Click Add. Create and
Customize
c. Type in at least two characters in the search bar to locate an item. Filter search results by Dashboards
adding more characters to your search.
d. Click the + next to the item you want to add to your collection. CRM Analytics items:
e. Click the Save. • Use CRM Analytics
3. Add items from the home page.

a. Click the action menu next to the item on the home page.
b. Click Add to Collection then click your collection.

c. You can also click New Collection to create a new collection and add the item there.
4. Add an open dashboard to a collection.

a.
Click while in an open CRM Analytics dashboard.
525
b. Select the view you want to add to the collection: Default adds the dashboard in its original form to a collection, Current View
adds the dashboard view with applied filters and menu selections.
c. To add the dashboard, select the collection or click Create Collection to start a new one.
d. Click Save.
5. Add a collection item to another collection. Collection items can exist in multiple collections.
a. Open your collection.
b. Click the action menu next to the item in the collection.
a. Click Add to Collection then click the collection. You can also click New Collection to create a collection and add the item
there.
SEE ALSO:
526

Create dashboard views with selected filters and options then add them to your collections to share
EDITIONS
a specific view of the dashboard with others.
1. Open a dashboard. Available in Salesforce
2. Make selections or change dashboard filters to get the view of the data you want.
Experience.
3. Click the Add to Collection button.
Available with CRM
Edition.
4. Select the view you want to add to the collection: Default adds the dashboard in its original USER PERMISSIONS
form—without filters or menu selections, Current View adds the dashboard view with applied
filters and options. To manage a collection:
5. Select one or more collections or click Create Collection to start a new one.
6. Click Save.
Note: Updates to the dashboard definition, such as changes to the layout, widget, or query, are reflected in the dashboard view
with exception of the following.
• If initial filter selections are changed the selections aren’t reflected if a user navigates to the dashboard through a dashboard
view from a collection.
• A similar behavior can be expected when a dashboard component’s default landing page is updated.
527
Share a Collection
Curate a collection and share it with your colleagues to contribute content.
EDITIONS
1. Open a collection.
2. Click the Share button.
Experience

Group, Enterprise,

Editions.
3. Use the Group dropdown menu to filter your search by user, group, or role.
USER PERMISSIONS
To use collections:
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
4. Type in a name in the User field. Click the match that it finds. Customize
5. Assign a role by clicking the Role dropdown menu. Dashboards
To access CRM Analytics

Collection Roles items in a collection:
Viewer View contents of the collection.
Editor Add, remove, and reorder items in the

collection.
Manager Change sharing settings, edit collection

properties, and delete the collection.
6. Click Add.
7. Click Save.
528
Pin and Hide a Collection

End users can pin and hide their collections giving them more options with customizing their
EDITIONS
homepage. Admins and managers have the option to pin collections to end-user homepages and
promote trusted content among groups and teams. Available in: Lightning
1. Pin a collection to your home page. Experience
a. Click the gear icon in the Collections panel on your homepage. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Enterprise,

Editions.
b. Locate the collection you want to pin on the Manage Collections page and click the checkbox
in the Pinned column for the collection. USER PERMISSIONS
To pin and hide a collection:

Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards
c. Click Save. To pin and hide a collection

2. Hide a collection from your home page. • Use CRM Analytics
a. Click the gear icon in the Collections panel on your homepage. Pin and hide a collection for
another end user:
b. Locate the collection you want to hide and uncheck the checkbox in the Show column.
c. Click Save.
3. Pin or hide a collection for another end user. Requires the Manage Analytics user permission.
a. Open a collection.
b. Click the Share button.
529
c. Use the Group dropdown menu to filter your search by user, group, or role.
d. Type in a name in the User field. Click the match that it finds.
e. Assign a role by clicking the Role dropdown menu.
Collection Roles
Viewer View contents of the collection.
Editor Add, remove, and reorder items in the collection.
Manager Change sharing settings, edit collection properties, and delete

the collection.
f. Click Add.
g. Click the Pin to Home checkbox. To hide a collection that’s already pinned, you can uncheck Pin to Home to remove the
collection from the end user’s home page.
530
h. Click Save.
Edit Collections
You can edit your collection properties, such as name and description, and also delete the collection
EDITIONS
altogether. Shared users with the Manager role can also edit and delete the collection.
1. Edit a collection. Available in: Lightning
Experience
a. Open a collection.
b. Click the dropdown menu and click Edit. Available in: Essentials,
Group, Enterprise,

c. Add your changes in the Edit Collection window.
Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
d. Click Save. Run Reports AND
Create and
2. Delete a collection.
Customize
a. Open a collection. Dashboards
b. Click the dropdown menu and click Delete. To manage a collection with
c. Click Delete again to confirm your action. CRM Analytics items:
531
Arrange Items in a Collection

Organize items in your collection to your liking.
EDITIONS
2. Click and hold the item to move.
Experience
3. Drag the item to its new location and release.
Group, Enterprise,

Editions.
USER PERMISSIONS
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards

532
Remove Items from a Collection

Easily remove items that are no longer relevant from a collection.
EDITIONS
2. Click the action menu next to the item to remove.
Experience

Group, Enterprise,

Editions.
3. Click Remove from Collection. The item is immediately removed from the collection. USER PERMISSIONS
Run Reports AND
Manage
Dashboards
Enhanced Folder
Sharing
Run Reports AND
Create and
Customize
Dashboards

533
Add Collections to Lightning Pages

Insert and display collections to your Lightning pages using the CRM Analytics Collection component.
EDITIONS
1. Open an existing Lightning page or create a one in the Lightning App Builder.
2. Drag the CRM Analytics Collection (1) component to the canvas.
Experience
3. Use the carousel buttons (2) to navigate through the collection.
4. Save the page when finished. Group, Enterprise,

SEE ALSO: Editions.
Create an App Home Page with the Lightning App Builder
USER PERMISSIONS
To add a collection to a
Lightning page:
534

Subscribe to collections of lenses and receive a daily or weekly email with updates on your most
EDITIONS
important charts and metrics, and table data in .csv attachments. Subscribe to as many as four
collections that you created or that were shared with you. Each collection subscription has its own Available in Salesforce
schedule for when you receive CRM Analytics email. Classic and Lightning
To subscribe to a collection, follow these steps. Experience.
1. Click the collection on the CRM Analytics home page. Available with CRM
2. Arrange the collection so that it’s in the order you want. The first 20 lenses are included in the Analytics, which is available
subscription.
3. Select Subscribe in the menu. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To set subscriptions on CRM

Analytics lenses and
dashboard widgets:
• Subscribe to CRM
Analytics Assets
To subscribe to tables and
receive email with table data
in attached .csv files:
• Download CRM
Analytics Data
4. Set the schedule for your subscription email, and click Save to start the subscription at the next
occurrence of your specified time. Or click Save and Run to start it immediately and then
continue at the set time and frequency.
Subscription emails include a link to the collection on the CRM Analytics home page and direct links to each lens.
Note: Lenses created using Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL) appear as charts and tables in the email. If a lens isn’t in
SAQL format, the email provides only the link to view the lens within CRM Analytics.
To see a preview of your subscription, click Subscriptions on the CRM Analytics home page and select your collection. In the Subscription
Preview, click the title of a lens to open it in lens mode.
To take action from the Subscription Preview, open the menu on the chart or table.
Note: When you subscribe to a table, the Subscription Preview shows the first rows of the table and you can scroll to see succeeding
rows. The subscription email body contains a placeholder for the table and a .csv file of the table data is attached.
To change the frequency or timing of subscription emails, go to Subscriptions on the CRM Analytics home page, select your collection,
and click Edit.
Note: To receive emails, Enabled must be selected.
535
To delete your subscription to a collection, select Delete from the menu on the Subscription Preview.
Take note of these considerations for CRM Analytics subscriptions.

• You can subscribe to as many as 4 collections, each with its own schedule. Each subscription email can include up to 20 lenses. The
maximum number of users per org with the same schedule is 100.
• Dashboards within a collection don’t appear in the subscription email. Lenses in Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL) format
appear as charts and tables in the email. If a lens isn’t in SAQL format, the email provides only the link to the lens within CRM Analytics.
To convert a lens to SAQL, open the lens in the Query Mode, run the query, and then save.
• A collection subscription is dynamic, which means that adding, reordering, or deleting lenses in the collection is automatically
reflected in the subscription email and preview. A lens subscription is dynamic, which means that any change saved to a subscribed
lens is automatically reflected in the subscription email and preview.
• Unlike Widget Subscriptions, the order of lenses in a collection subscription can’t be changed in the Subscription Preview. To reorder
subscription email, rearrange your collection. The first 20 lenses of the collection are included in the subscription email.
• Unlike Widget Subscriptions, the titles of lenses within a collection subscription aren’t editable.
• Unlike Widget Subscriptions, individual lenses in a collection can’t be deleted in the Subscription Preview. To remove a lens from
the subscription, delete it from the collection.
• Deleting a collection also deletes the subscription to that collection.
• Subscriptions can include all lenses except maps.
• Table data .csv attachments can be up to 3 MB each, with total attachments per email up to 15 MB.
536
• When creating collections for others to subscribe to, save your lenses in SAQL format and be sure that users have access to them.
SEE ALSO:
View, Collaborate, and Take Action from Einstein CRM Analytics

View conversational explorations of your data, and personalize your CRM Analytics experience with saved dashboard views. Collaborate
with features such as notifications, annotations, presentation mode, and downloading filtered data from CRM Analytics. Use custom
menus in lenses and dashboards to take action in Salesforce directly from CRM Analytics.

Ask data questions using non-technical language, and view answers in automatically configured charts. Start with a common word
or two, and CRM Analytics provides relevant suggestions that you can accept or edit.
Save Your Filtered View of a Dashboard
No need to reselect the filters every time you open a dashboard because you don’t have permission to save the selections permanently.
Change the filters and save your own view. Only you can see your views—other users still see the original dashboards.
Control Who Sees What in an App with Asset Visibility
App Managers and Editors can use the Asset Visibility feature to control the visibility of select assets. Asset visibility is limited for users
that are assigned ‘Viewer’ sharing access. Assets remain visible to app Managers and Editors regardless of the asset’s status.
Collaborate with Dashboard Annotations
Annotate dashboard widgets with comments posted in the dashboard and in Chatter. With annotations, you can hold conversations
about your data and how it’s visualized, with the dashboard right there for reference.
Present Live, Interactive Dashboards
Conduct meetings directly from CRM Analytics by presenting dashboards in running apps. With dashboards instead of slides with
static images, you have real-time access to your data, and you can showcase dynamic visualizations.
Share Dashboards, Widgets, and Lenses
Share a dashboard, widget, or lens with your colleagues by posting it to Chatter or copying its unique URL. A Chatter post provides
an image and a link to the asset in CRM Analytics. Colleagues with the link and access to the asset can drill in and explore the
information that’s presented. You can also export snapshot images of CRM Analytics assets to Quip. An exported image is published
to a new Quip document.
Gain insights on Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server data from the comfort of CRM Analytics Home. Easily publish Tableau Cloud and
Tableau Server dashboards, sheets, and stories to a CRM Analytics app or Lightning page without first embedding Tableau views or
installing additional software. You can seamlessly combine Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server views with CRM Analytics content in
a single dashboard, apply Tableau filters to it, and share it with colleagues who need to stay on top of the same data. To access the
published Tableau content more easily, favorite the dashboard in Analytics Home.
Download CRM Analytics Images and Export Filtered Data
Extract detailed insights from CRM Analytics that support collaboration and informed decision-making. You can download images
and filtered data from lens explorations and dashboard widgets. Download formats include image (.png), Microsoft® Excel® (.xls),
and comma-separated values (.csv) files. With the .xls format, there's also an option to include query metadata.
Create PDF Files and Print Your Dashboards
Dashboards are printer-friendly, and you can print or save PDF files of dashboards from your browser.
537
Perform Salesforce Actions Directly from CRM Analytics

Take action on your insights directly from CRM Analytics. Perform custom and mass quick actions from charts and tables in lenses
and dashboards.

Ask data questions using non-technical language, and view answers in automatically configured charts. Start with a common word or
two, and CRM Analytics provides relevant suggestions that you can accept or edit.
To start a conversation:
1. For a dashboard, open the conversations panel by selecting Conversations from the dropdown menu in the icon bar. For a lens,
locate the text entry box with the icon.
2. Click in the text entry box.
3. Select a suggestion, or type your own question.
4. (Optional) When you have the chart that answers your question, click an action icon or the dropdown menu in the upper right
corner. Available actions, such as clip, explore, save, and share, depend on the context.
How does it work? The conversational auto-suggestions are based on fields in the available datasets. To see which datasets are
open for conversational exploration, look for the purple hexagons ( ). For a lens, click Fields to view the available fields to ask
about. For a dashboard, if the suggestions don’t include the words you expect, click Add Dataset to expand your exploration.
What kinds of questions can you ask? Question are built with measures and dimensions from your data combined with keywords,
such as “show me” and “by.” Typically, measures are aggregated and dimensions are grouped to show meaningful information.
Filters are applied to narrow the focus of the question.
Example Conversational Queries
Aggregations and Limits Measures Dimensions Filters

top 3 account owner
average CSAT this week (Created Date)
538
Aggregations and Limits Measures Dimensions Filters

bottom 5 amount by account owner and stage for closed equals (true)
unit price and shipping cost by product family between 10000 and 100000
show me industry
agent and case origin
percentage change by segment previous cy (Close Date)
revenue, csat by agent, state, product
percentage breakdown of amount by opportunity name
rank number of records by industry for industry equals (Agriculture,

Biotechnology,
Communications)
max number for account type contains (cust)

and amount > 10000
What if my question doesn’t include a measure? When no measure is specified, the response is aggregated by count of rows.
What if I don’t get a chart? Sometimes your question isn’t phrased properly and you see a red error message. In that case, try using
the auto-suggestions to help rephrase your question. Sometimes you’ve asked a valid question but no results are returned. Try a
wider filter or a different group. For more about what to type, see the following tables.
Elements of Conversational Exploration
Question Elements Keywords and Symbols

Measures (numerical or aggregated) count, number, sum, avg, max, min, median, first, last, unique, top,
bottom, stddev, stddevp, var, varp, percentage breakdown,
percentage change, rank
Groups by, and
Filters (By dimension values) for, in/equals, not in/not equals, contains,
top, bottom, without, filter out, exclude (for multiple values, use
commas and parentheses, for example “(v1, v2, v3)”)
(By measure ranges) with, equal, =, greater than, >, less than, <,
between, top, bottom
(By relative date ranges) today, tomorrow, yesterday,
current/next/previous/last, year, quarter, month, week, day (for full
list, see Relative Date Filters)
Question words show me, show the, what is, what are
Shortcuts that depend on your dataset deal, lead conversion, time to close, win rate (for more information,
see Shortcuts)
539
Relative Date Filters
Relative date units Keywords

Fiscal Year Current FY, Previous FY, Previous 2 FY, 2 FY Ago, Next FY, Current and Previous
FY, Current and Previous 2 FY, Current and Next FY
Fiscal Quarter Current FQ, Current and Next FQ, Current and Previous FQ, Next FQ, Previous
FQ, Current and Next 3 FQ
Calendar Year Current CY, Previous CY, Previous 2 CY, 2 CY Ago, Next CY, Current and
Previous CY, Current and Previous 2 CY, Current and Next CY
Calendar Quarter Current CQ, Current and Next CQ, Current and Previous CQ, Next CQ, Previous
CQ, Current and Next 3 CQ
Calendar Month Last Month, This Month, Next Month, Current and Previous Month, Current
and Next Month
Calendar Week Last Week, This Week, Next Week
Day Yesterday, Today, Tomorrow, Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, Last 60 Days, Last 90
Days, Last 120 Days, Next 7 Days, Next 30 Days, Next 60 Days, Next 90 Days,
Next 120 Days
Shortcuts
Keywords Functions Requirements Examples

deals sum Amount by opportunity Opportunities dataset that “top 10 deals last month” or
Name includes “name” dimension and “show me deals that have
“amount” measure moved out this quarter
(createdDate)”
lead conversion rate total leads divided by converted Leads dataset that includes “lead conversion rate by rep last
lead ("isConverted"=true) "IsConverted" dimension month (Created Date)”
closed, won, lost (filters) "isClosed"=true; “isWon”=true; Opportunities dataset that “amount won last month (Close
“isWon”=false includes “isClosed” and “isWon” Date)”
Tip: If you’re curious about how a question is translated into a query, open the chart in lens mode and click SAQL Mode ( ).
Take the following into consideration:
• Conversational exploration requires the CRM Analytics Platform permission set license. It isn’t available in embedded dashboards,
mobile apps, Experience Cloud sites, or standalone CRM Analytics apps, such as the Sales Analytics app.
• Admin setup is required.
• Conversational exploration is available only in the dashboard designer, the lens, and running apps.
• Some advanced functions aren’t supported.
• The time zone feature isn’t supported.
540
• If you have more than one dataset open in lens mode, conversational exploration is disabled.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Conversational Exploration
Save Your Filtered View of a Dashboard

No need to reselect the filters every time you open a dashboard because you don’t have permission to save the selections permanently.
Change the filters and save your own view. Only you can see your views—other users still see the original dashboards.
You can create up to 10 views per dashboard and choose one as the default that shows when you open the dashboard. All your saved
views are listed in the view menu.
1. To create a view, open the dashboard in view mode, make your selections, and click Save View.
The saved view includes all selections that you made to the current page in list, toggle, range, date, chart, compare table, and global
filter widgets.
Note: In the CRM Analytics mobile app, you can access saved dashboard views, toggle between saved views, and share links
to different views, but managing and saving views aren’t supported.
2.
To remove your changes to a dashboard or view, including selections, click .
When you open a view and change a selection, an asterisk appears next to the view name to indicate that it’s been modified. When
you change a selection while viewing a dashboard without a view, Modified appears. In either case, you can save the current selections
as a new view or overwrite an existing one.
3. To remove the view applied to a dashboard so you can view the original dashboard, click Clear View in the view menu.
4. To set your default view or delete a view, click Manage Views.
5. To share your view with others, open the view and select Share > Get URL.
When users open the link, they see your view of the dashboard. If they want, they can save it as one of their own views.
541
Considerations When Opening a Dashboard View

There are special cases when a view doesn’t open or isn’t applied completely.
Considerations When Opening a Dashboard View

There are special cases when a view doesn’t open or isn’t applied completely.
If you open a dashboard that has external selections or filters, the default view isn’t applied. If you open a view, the external selections
and filters are removed. If steps or widgets in your dashboard have errors, views aren’t applied properly.
A dashboard maintains existing selections and filters when you use a link or navigation widget to switch between pages of a multi-page
dashboard. If you use a saved view to switch between pages, any previous selections and filters are removed and the state from the
saved view is applied.
If you open a view and CRM Analytics can’t display all the criteria defined in a view, it displays what it can and shows a warning next to
the view name.
CRM Analytics can’t display all view criteria for these cases.
• CRM Analytics ignores selections and filters that no longer apply to the dashboard. For example, CRM Analytics ignores references
to datasets, fields, field values, and steps that no longer exist. These issues arise when the dashboard or data changes but the view
isn’t updated.
• If a view includes a selection on a widget that doesn’t exist in a layout, CRM Analytics ignores the selection. A view applies to all
layouts defined in the dashboard.
• If a view is created based on a dashboard page that has since been deleted, CRM Analytics shows the view based on the first page
defined for the dashboard.

1. Hide an asset in an app.
542
a. Open the app and locate the asset to update.

b. Click the row level action dropdown menu.
c. Change the asset’s visibility by clicking Hide.
Hidden assets display a transparent state giving app managers an at-a-glance view of an asset’s status. Asset status is also available
in the asset tooltip.
2. Show an asset in an app.

c. Change the asset’s visibility to visible by clicking Show.
As an app manager, the asset visibility settings go beyond the shared app and impact other areas of CRM Analytics for app members
with Viewer status. Consider the following before updating asset status.
Analytics Studio
• Hidden assets aren’t available in CRM Analytics Home, which includes Recent Dashboards, Favorites, Created by Me, Shared with
Me
• Hidden assets can’t be browsed, seen in All Items, or any other list
• Hidden assets don’t appear in a search’s Recents listing
• Hidden assets don’t appear in search results, including pop-over and the full search results page
• URLs associated with a hidden dashboard or lens are blocked
• Users can access hidden dashboards that are embedded (included in a Salesforce page or report)
• If the dashboard is embedded users can add items from a hidden dashboard to a watchlist
• Users receive a “Resource not found” error while navigating to a hidden source dashboard from watchlist or notification
543
• Users can define notifications and subscriptions using items from a hidden dashboard that’s embedded
Analytics Tab
• Hidden assets aren’t available in Recents
• Hidden assets don’t appear in a search’s most recently used (MRU) pop-over
• Access is blocked to hidden assets in Salesforce global search results, including pop-over and the full search results page
CRM Analytics Mobile

• Hidden assets aren’t accessible at all for users with Viewer status
Salesforce Mobile
• Users can access hidden dashboards that are embedded in a Salesforce page
Asset Types
• Asset visibility can be managed for datasets, lenses, and dashboards

Annotate dashboard widgets with comments posted in the dashboard and in Chatter. With
EDITIONS
annotations, you can hold conversations about your data and how it’s visualized, with the dashboard
right there for reference. Available in Salesforce
To create an annotation, select Annotate from the dropdown menu on any dashboard widget. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Note: Annotations on dashboards in the Private App aren’t available unless you have the
View All Data user permission. If you don’t see the Annotate option, try moving the dashboard Available with CRM
to another app. Analytics, which is available
To open the Annotations panel, click the speech bubble icon ( ) in the dashboard control bar. Enterprise, Performance,
When the panel is open, widgets with annotations show a blue square ( ) with the number of and Unlimited Editions. Also
open annotations. CRM Analytics saves both open and resolved annotations. And if you delete a available in Developer
Edition.
widget, its open annotations are saved as detached annotations. You can access detached
annotations from the blue circle at the bottom of the dashboard.
Click a blue square or circle to open an annotation for comments. USER PERMISSIONS
To annotate CRM Analytics

dashboard widgets:
544
Important: Although you can @mention anyone in your org, your security setup is what controls access to the dashboard. In
contrast, if you include a screenshot, an image of the dashboard appears in the annotation’s Chatter post and could be visible to
users without access the dashboard.
CRM Analytics dashboard annotations are natively integrated with Chatter, and comments on dashboards also appear as Chatter posts.
Clicking the link included in a Chatter post opens the dashboard view just as it was set up at the time you posted. In addition, the
Annotations panel opens with the relevant Chatter feed. When colleagues click your annotation, they see the dashboard page with all
of your filters and selections applied, and they can easily respond in the Annotations panel.
On an open annotation, you can refresh the feed or close the annotation and go back to the list of all annotations in the dashboard.
In the dashboard panel, each annotation has a dropdown menu for resolving or deleting the annotation.
545
To receive all posts on a dashboard, click its button.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Annotations on Dashboard Widgets
Present Live, Interactive Dashboards

Conduct meetings directly from CRM Analytics by presenting dashboards in running apps. With
EDITIONS
dashboards instead of slides with static images, you have real-time access to your data, and you
can showcase dynamic visualizations. Available in Salesforce
Start a presentation by clicking the Full Screen icon ( ) in the control bar of a running app or Classic and Lightning
dashboard. Experience.
During the presentation, you can use all the CRM Analytics functionality, such as filtering, faceting, Available with CRM
and exploring lenses. In addition, the presentation has a control bar. You can share, set notifications, Analytics, which is available
and collaborate in a dashboard’s feed with annotations. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To present from CRM

Analytics:
To move to another dashboard or lens, click next to the title to open the navigation list and select the next asset to present.
546

Share a dashboard, widget, or lens with your colleagues by posting it to Chatter or copying its
EDITIONS
unique URL. A Chatter post provides an image and a link to the asset in CRM Analytics. Colleagues
with the link and access to the asset can drill in and explore the information that’s presented. You Available in Salesforce
can also export snapshot images of CRM Analytics assets to Quip. An exported image is published Classic and Lightning
to a new Quip document. Experience.
Note: Export to Quip is available in CRM Analytics tabs and embedded CRM Analytics Available with CRM
dashboards. The feature isn’t available in the Analytics Studio. Analytics, which is available
1. Click Share. for an extra cost in
Edition.
2. Click the tab for the sharing method that you want. Post to Feed posts an image and link in
Chatter. Export to Quip publishes an image in a new Quip document. Get URL provides a
USER PERMISSIONS
unique URL to the asset.
a. If you’re posting to Chatter, select User or Group feed, enter the name, and then type your To view visualizations:
comment. You can also remove the image from your post by hovering over it and clicking • Use CRM Analytics
the X. Note: Posted images could be visible to users without access the lens or dashboard.
b. If you’re exporting to Quip, and you’re not already connected, click Connect to Quip and then click Publish. Note: After
publishing a CRM Analytics snapshot, other Quip users in your org can view the data in the image, including confidential data.
c. If you’re getting the unique URL, select the link to the Analytics tab in Lightning Experience or the link to the Analytics Studio.
Copy the link and then paste it wherever you want to share it.
Tip: Dashboard links shared from Analytics Studio can include views with selections and filters applied. To generate a URL
with page and view specifications, either use Get URL or remove the image from Post to Feed by hovering over the image
and clicking the X.
3. If applicable, click Give Access to set the level of sharing access.

4. Click Done.
Note: For colleagues to use the link to a dashboard or lens, you must give them access to the app that contains it. Lenses,
datasets, and dashboards within the default Shared App are accessible to all CRM Analytics users, unless administrators have
restricted access. All other apps are private unless someone with Manager access to the app has shared it with a specific user,
group, or role.
SEE ALSO:
547

Gain insights on Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server data from the comfort of CRM Analytics Home. Easily publish Tableau Cloud and
Tableau Server dashboards, sheets, and stories to a CRM Analytics app or Lightning page without first embedding Tableau views or
installing additional software. You can seamlessly combine Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server views with CRM Analytics content in a
single dashboard, apply Tableau filters to it, and share it with colleagues who need to stay on top of the same data. To access the
published Tableau content more easily, favorite the dashboard in Analytics Home.
Prerequisites for Tableau Views in CRM Analytics

Publishing Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server content to CRM Analytics and viewing it requires the appropriate licenses, org and
user account setup, and permissions assigned to user accounts and apps.
Publish Tableau Content to CRM Analytics
Easily publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server dashboards, sheets, and stories to a CRM Analytics app or Lightning page without
first embedding Tableau views or installing additional software.
Add Tableau View to a Dashboard
Compare and review Tableau and CRM Analytics data side by side in a CRM Analytics dashboard. Embed a published Tableau Cloud
or Tableau Server view in a CRM Analytics dashboard to analyze your data without switching between two accounts. For example,
keep tabs on your shipment trends from Tableau in the same CRM Analytics dashboard that you track sales orders.
Add Filters to Explore Tableau Views
Add filters to explore Tableau content and unlock additional insights.
Manage Tableau View Filters
You can edit parameters to make minor adjustments, change for a different use, or delete them when they’re no longer needed.
Prerequisites for Tableau Views in CRM Analytics

Publishing Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server content to CRM Analytics and viewing it requires the appropriate licenses, org and user
account setup, and permissions assigned to user accounts and apps.
License Requirements
To publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server views to CRM Analytics, these licenses must be provisioned.
• Creator or Explorer (can publish) license for Tableau
• CRM Analytics Plus license or CRM Analytics Growth license
Version Requirements
To publish Tableau Server visualizations, Tableau Server users must install Release 2022.3 or higher.
548
Configure Publishing Settings in Tableau

To let users publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server content to CRM Analytics, ask your Tableau
EDITIONS
admin to complete these steps in the Tableau site.
1. Select Settings > Integrations. Available in Salesforce
2. In the Publish to Salesforce section, select Let users publish Tableau views to CRM Analytics.
Experience.
Available with CRM

Let Users Publish Tableau Content
Configure your Salesforce org to let users publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server dashboards, for an extra cost in
sheets, and stories to a CRM Analytics app or Lightning page. Enterprise, Performance,
User Permissions Needed available in Developer
Edition.
To modify settings: Manage CRM Analytics
1. Enable Tableau Cloud content publishing for users.

a. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings.
b. Select Allow Users to publish content from Tableau to CRM Analytics (Beta).
c. Click Save.
2. Enable Tableau View Embedding.

a. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Tableau, and then select Tableau Embedding.
b. Select Turn on Tableau View Lightning Web Component.
c. Click Save.
3. Grant users access to the CRM Analytics apps and dashboards that they’ll publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server content to.
Alternatively, users can create a blank app or dashboard and publish Tableau views to it.
Publish Tableau Content to CRM Analytics

Easily publish Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server dashboards, sheets, and stories to a CRM Analytics
EDITIONS
app or Lightning page without first embedding Tableau views or installing additional software.
To use this feature, Enable Publishing Tableau Views on page 549. Available in Salesforce
1. In Tableau Cloud or Tableau Server, select the view that you want to publish to CRM Analytics.
Experience.
If the view doesn’t appear in the list of recently viewed visualizations, use the Search bar to
locate it. Available with CRM
2. From the More Actions menu ( ), select Publish to Salesforce. for an extra cost in
Edition.
549
3. Click Connect to Salesforce and specify the Salesforce credentials that you want to use for publishing.
4. In the Publish to Salesforce dialog box, select the destination app that you want to publish the Tableau view to, and then click
Publish.
5. Click the published Tableau content to review it in CRM Analytics.

You can save, favorite, delete, or remove a published view from its action menu.
550
If you remove a view from CRM Analytics, it’s still available in Tableau. But, when you delete a view from Tableau, the published view no
longer shows any data in Salesforce. We recommend that you remove the view from CRM Analytics when you no longer need it.
To see a published Tableau view embedded in a Lightning page, users need access to the Tableau view. To see the Tableau view in a
CRM Analytics dashboard, users need access to both the Tableau view and the CRM Analytics app to which it’s published.
Publishing Tableau Cloud and Tableau Server views to CRM Analytics mobile apps isn’t supported.
Add Tableau View to a Dashboard

Compare and review Tableau and CRM Analytics data side by side in a CRM Analytics dashboard.
EDITIONS
Embed a published Tableau Cloud or Tableau Server view in a CRM Analytics dashboard to analyze
your data without switching between two accounts. For example, keep tabs on your shipment Available in Salesforce
trends from Tableau in the same CRM Analytics dashboard that you track sales orders. Classic and Lightning
To see a published Tableau view in a CRM Analytics dashboard, users must have access to both the Experience.
Tableau view and the CRM Analytics app to which it’s published.
Available with CRM
1. Open the dashboard that contains the sales order data. Analytics, which is available
2. To add the Tableau view, drop a component widget ( ) onto the dashboard and click Enterprise, Performance,
Component. and Unlimited Editions. Also
3. In the Select Component window, select the Tableau view from the Tableau Dashboard available in Developer
Components list. Edition.
551
4. Save your dashboard and then preview it.
SEE ALSO:
Embed Tableau Views into Salesforce
552
Add Filters to Explore Tableau Views

Add filters to explore Tableau content and unlock additional insights.
EDITIONS
1. Select the Tableau view and click the Parameter tab.
2. Click Add Parameter.
3. Click Filter Field and select a Tableau dimension field as the filter. Experience.
4. Add a name to Parameter Name. Available with CRM
5. Click Value Type then specify how to use values for the filter. Analytics, which is available
a. Select Static to add static values.
b. Select Dynamic to filter values using a CRM Analytics dashboard filter. and Unlimited Editions. Also
6. Click Save. Edition.
Example: Dashboard stakeholders are asking to focus on the metrics for the city of San
Diego in a Tableau sales view. Instead of updating in Tableau, you can add a static parameter
while in CRM Analytics as a filter.
Follow steps 1 through 4 outlined at the beginning of this document to create the parameter.
Select Static in the Value Type menu, then type San Diego in the text field. Click Save.
553
The view is filtered with the city value San Diego.
Note: Only text strings are supported. The values must exist in the Tableau field and follow the field format.
To filter an array of values, separate each value with a comma, then click Use values in an array.
554
Note: The first value is used in the filter if Use values in an array isn’t checked.
The view is filtered with the city values of San Diego and Los Angeles.
Dashboard stakeholders are requesting to update the view as needed by customer segment. Add a filter to the CRM Analytics
dashboard with customer segment values then set up a dynamic parameter that links the filter to the Tableau view.
555
Create a custom query filter with display and values for customer segment.
Note: Values must exist in the Tableau field and follow the field format.
Follow steps 1 through 4 outlined at the beginning of this document to create the parameter.
Select Dynamic in the Value Type menu, then select the filter query as the Data Source, the filter value as the New Value, and the
filter interaction type. Click Save.
The view now updates by selections from the filter.
To filter as an array, select Multiple selection as the dashboard filter’s Selection Type. Click Include all values in the parameter.
556
Note: The first filter interaction is used if Include all values isn’t checked.
The view updates by multiple selections from the filter.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Analytics Dashboard JSON Overview
Manage Tableau View Filters

You can edit parameters to make minor adjustments, change for a different use, or delete them when they’re no longer needed.
1. Edit a parameter
a. Edit the component with the Tableau view and click the Parameters tab.
b. Click the pencil icon next to the parameter.
c. Add your changes .
d. Click Update.
2. Delete a parameter
a. Edit the component with the Tableau view and click the Parameters tab.
b. Click the trash can icon next to the parameter.
557

Extract detailed insights from CRM Analytics that support collaboration and informed
EDITIONS
decision-making. You can download images and filtered data from lens explorations and dashboard
widgets. Download formats include image (.png), Microsoft® Excel® (.xls), and comma-separated Available in Salesforce
values (.csv) files. With the .xls format, there's also an option to include query metadata. Classic and Lightning
Select Share from the menu on a dashboard widget, or from a lens, click the Share icon. In the Experience.
Share dialog, select the Download tab. Available with CRM Analytics
in Enterprise, Performance,
an extra cost. Also available
USER PERMISSIONS
To download data from

widgets and lenses using
the CRM Analytics user
interface:
• Download CRM
Analytics Data
To share images of
dashboards and widgets
when Secure Image Sharing
and Downloading is
enabled:
• Share CRM Analytics
Images
Take note of these considerations when downloading data in Excel or CSV format.
558
• The Excel and CSV options download the results of a displayed query (or step). The query limit determines the number of rows in
the .xls or .csv file.
• The Download in Excel Format with Metadata option can include the name of the user, the date and time of the export, dashboard
and widget titles, groups and filters in the query, and the number of records downloaded.
• Downloading data isn't supported for lenses based on SQL queries or on direct data queries, such as direct queries on Salesforce
objects, CDP, Snowflake, and Google BigQuery.
• For table data downloads, text wrapping within tables, hidden columns, grouped column order, and merged cells aren’t supported.
• For tables based on queries with bindings, downloads show the columns as projected in the query.
• For pivot tables, queries customized with SAQL union statements download as raw data instead of in pivot table format.
• If a measure field has a multiplier of “0”, downloaded data shows all values for that field displaying as “0”.
SEE ALSO:
Create PDF Files and Print Your Dashboards

Dashboards are printer-friendly, and you can print or save PDF files of dashboards from your browser.
EDITIONS
Printing is available in the dashboard preview mode in CRM Analytics Studio.
1. Click to open the menu, and select Print Preview.
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To print CRM Analytics

dashboards:
559
A snapshot of your dashboard opens.
2. Click Print to open your browser’s print dialog, where you can send the image to your printer or save it as a PDF file. To include
background color or images, click More settings and select Background graphics.
The Cancel button closes the print preview and returns you to the running dashboard.
When printing a dashboard, consider the following.

• Printing is supported in Chrome browsers only.
• The Print action is not included with embedded dashboards.
• The print is a snapshot of the dashboard with your current filters and selections. If a widget is scrollable, only the current view of the
widget prints. If the dashboard has multiple pages, only the currently open page prints.
• Colors and page orientation are based on your print settings.
Perform Salesforce Actions Directly from CRM Analytics

Take action on your insights directly from CRM Analytics. Perform custom and mass quick actions
EDITIONS
from charts and tables in lenses and dashboards.
Perform object-specific actions and global actions that are defined on Salesforce objects directly Available in Salesforce
from CRM Analytics. You can invoke these actions to create, update, and interact with Salesforce Classic and Lightning
records. For example, you can create cases, update accounts, and post to Chatter. You can also use Experience.
defined List View actions to perform mass quick actions on up to 100 Salesforce records at once.
Available with CRM
Take Control of Your Experience with CRM Analytics Custom Actions Menus for an extra cost in
CRM Analytics custom actions menus in charts and tables let you take advantage of Salesforce Enterprise, Performance,
actions. With action menus, you can post to Chatter, create an event or opportunity, update a and Unlimited Editions. Also
record, or open a Salesforce record directly. available in Developer
Edition.
Take Action on Multiple Records with Mass Action Links in CRM Analytics
Mass action links in CRM Analytics let you take advantage of Salesforce mass quick actions by
performing an action on a list of up to 100 Salesforce records. USER PERMISSIONS
To use custom actions

menus:
• “Use CRM Analytics”
560
Take Control of Your Experience with CRM Analytics Custom Actions Menus
CRM Analytics custom actions menus in charts and tables let you take advantage of Salesforce actions. With action menus, you can post
to Chatter, create an event or opportunity, update a record, or open a Salesforce record directly.
With custom actions menus, you can use quick actions that were added to Salesforce objects—directly from CRM Analytics dashboards
and lenses. You can also open records from Salesforce or elsewhere on the Web through the menus.
You can access actions menus from these parts of charts and tables in CRM Analytics:
• Value labels on charts (such as Opportunity for Pearson in the preceding image).
• Legend value labels in table cells.
561
• Values in table cells.
Hover over the labels to see if an actions menu is available. Click the value, cell, or legend to see the menu’s contents, and then select
an action or open a record. Records open in new Lightning Experience tabs unless your admin sets them to open in new browser tabs.
For dimensions in lenses and dashboards, you can use the Actions menu in the lens to set how one-click actions behave on a table’s
dataset fields. For more efficiency, you can select the record action you want to invoke for all records in a dimension column. Or, for
greater flexibility, you can choose to view all available one-click actions when you click a column’s records.
For example, imagine that you want to update opportunity records when you click the Opportunity Name field in the Opportunities
dataset. After your Salesforce admin has configured actions for this field, open the Opportunities dataset.
1. With Opportunity Name selected in the table mode, in the Column Properties panel, scroll to the Actions section.
2. Select Set up one-click actions.
3. Enable Select an Action. Alternatively, to view all available actions when you click an opportunity name, select Open Actions
Menu
4. From the Salesforce Actions list, select Update Opportunity.
Optionally set a hyperlink color for the Opportunity Name field.
Note: Custom actions menus and one-click actions are only supported on a dimension when its field name matches its projected
name in the custom query.
To learn more, see Enable Actions for CRM Analytics Lenses and Dashboards
562
Take Action on Multiple Records with Mass Action Links in CRM Analytics
Mass action links in CRM Analytics let you take advantage of Salesforce mass quick actions by performing an action on a list of up to 100
Salesforce records.
With mass quick action links, you can use quick actions that were added to Salesforce objects List View layouts, directly from Analytics
dashboards. You can perform a mass action on up to 100 records at once, using Analytics filtering to target the list of records you want
to perform the action on.
Access mass quick actions by clicking the mass action link on the dashboard.
• Filter your records.

• View the list of records in the table. In this example, there are 29 accounts of the industry type banking.
• To perform the mass quick action on all 29 account records, click Mass Update.
Each mass action has a custom window that opens when the link is clicked. The window is the same as you see when you take the mass
action in the record list view of Lightning Experience. As you fill in the fields, the Fields to update section updates. When you have the
action completed, click Save.
The mass action confirmation dialog shows how many records the action is performed on and which fields are updated. If more than
100 records are in the list, the dialog informs you that only 100 records are updated. Click OK to perform the action.
Note: The update to the records is immediately visible in the Salesforce records, but the Analytics dataset must be updated to
reflect the record updates. Your dashboard gets the updated record data the next time the dataflow or recipe runs.
SEE ALSO:
Configure Mass Quick Actions on Multiple Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics Dashboards
563
Learning Resources
In addition to these Help pages, CRM Analytics has a variety of in-app assistance, and there’s more educational content on Trailhead and
other websites.
Get Started, Educate Yourself, and Stay Informed in the Learning Center
The Learning Center is the home of assistance resources in the CRM Analytics Analytics Studio. With getting started experiences and
continuing educational content, there’s learning for all users, anywhere along their analytics journey.
Access Assistance When and Where You Need It
In-app assistance includes the welcome mat, help menus, point-in-time videos, and widget-specific learning resources.
Learn CRM Analytics Through Video
Sometimes it’s easier to understand how things work when you see them in action. Check out these video playlists for all areas of
CRM Analytics. Video playlists are available in Help Menus, and most videos are also available from in-app video icons in context
throughout CRM Analytics.
Learn CRM Analytics with In-App Examples
The CRM Analytics Learning Adventure app walks you through best practice examples for designing just the right visualizations and
for building powerful dynamic apps. Hands-on examples are presented in dashboards that show you how to build dashboards.
Because it's an app, you can look under the hood and see the JSON used to build each dashboard.
Find the Right Learning Resource for Each Step of the CRM Analytics Journey
The CRM Analytics landing page in Help gives you a list of key resources for each action in every stage of your Analytics journey. It’s
part map and part clearinghouse to you see the places you can go with CRM Analytics.
Learn CRM Analytics with Trailhead
Trailhead is the fun and free way to learn Salesforce. Get acquainted with CRM Analytics through Trailhead using a special CRM
Analytics-enabled Developer Edition org.
Watch CRM Analytics Learning Days Webinars
Learn directly from expert trainers. The Learning Days webinars cover a range of topics on CRM Analytics and Einstein Discovery,
with deep dives into use cases, common questions, and best practices to inspire and guide you to create great analytics
implementations.
Learn Best Practices from the Experts
Apply best practices throughout your CRM Analytics journey. Learn from Salesforce experts as they tackle topics from project planning
to performance to dashboard design best practices.
Take Tips from Trailblazers
The community of CRM Analytics power users grows daily, and they love to share their knowledge. Check out this treasure trove of
blogs and channels by Trailblazers across the community. Thank you, Trailblazers!
Get Started, Educate Yourself, and Stay Informed in the Learning Center
The Learning Center is the home of assistance resources in the CRM Analytics Analytics Studio. With getting started experiences and
continuing educational content, there’s learning for all users, anywhere along their analytics journey.
Travel along guided learning journeys in the Start Your Analytics Adventure section. Click a tile to open a fast-paced journey through
key product areas. Take an entire journey at once, or stop anywhere along the way and later pick up where you left off. You never lose
your place because we’re tracking each step. The available journeys depend on your permissions.
564
In-app badges reward completion of the learning journeys. Four in-app badges are available, depending on your permissions. The
badges appear in your Trailhead profile.
Data Integration in CRM Data Exploration in CRM App Creation in CRM Analytics Einstein Discovery Intelligence
Analytics Analytics
Refer to the Extended Learning section for links to important user assistance resources.
Raise your CRM Analytics education to the next level with the Popular Topics section. Links to Help, video, and Trailhead resources are
arranged by function.
565
Learn about top features and general updates each release in the What's New section.
Access Assistance When and Where You Need It

In-app assistance includes the welcome mat, help menus, point-in-time videos, and widget-specific learning resources.
Once you’re up and running with CRM Analytics, in-app resources support you along the way. First thing you’ll notice after login to CRM
Analytics Studio is the welcome mat. We’ve packed it with videos, trails, and documentation to get you started. If you click out of it, you
can always get it back from the help menu.
566
That little question mark ( ) in the upper right corner opens context-aware, persistent help menus that provide relevant help topics
targeted for the page you’re on. You can preview the Help page right in the menu, and even pin it to the bottom of the page to reference
while working.
In-app video icons ( ) throughout CRM Analytics launch a video or video series that teaches about the feature you're working with.
Videos play in a draggable, resizable frame. Put the frame wherever you want so the video never blocks the product screen while you
watch. You can even interact with the product as you follow along step-by-step tutorials.
If your dashboard is configured with the Learn option, select it to open the draggable, resizable frame loaded with customized,
widget-specific content.
567
When you have at least one widget with the Learn option, the Learning Resources icon appears. Click the icon to open and close the
Learning Resources panel. When the panel is open, hover on a learning resource to highlight the chart that goes with it. Each learning
resource is numbered and the numbers appear on the charts for easy reference.
SEE ALSO:
Customize Onboarding with In-Dashboard Instructional Content
Learn CRM Analytics Through Video

Sometimes it’s easier to understand how things work when you see them in action. Check out these video playlists for all areas of CRM
Analytics. Video playlists are available in Help Menus, and most videos are also available from in-app video icons in context throughout
CRM Analytics.
All videos are in English.
• CRM Analytics Studio Home Page Series
Learn your way around the CRM Analytics Studio home page, and get to know basic dashboard operations, favorites, sharing, and
more.
• Navigate CRM Analytics Dashboards Series

Learn your way around CRM Analytics dashboards, and get to know conversational exploration, notifications, annotations, and more.
• Einstein Analytics Explorer Series

Learn to uncover data insights in CRM Analytics using conversational queries, compare tables, SAQL editor, and more.
• Build Interactive CRM Analytics Dashboards Video Series

Learn the basics of building CRM Analytics designer dashboards, including information about widget types, building steps, creating
dashboards from templates, generating custom layouts for different devices, and making dashboards interactive with faceting and
bindings.
• Einstein Analytics Data Manager Series
568
Gain access to data inside and outside Salesforce with connections. If needed, prepare the data before loading it into CRM Analytics
datasets. Data preparation is the process of transforming your data into a form that’s meaningful and valuable to the people consuming
it.
• Einstein Analytics Recipe Editor Series

Recipes are a great way to prepare data in CRM Analytics, but where do you start? Join us for a quick tour of where the magic happens:
the recipe editor, also known as "Data Prep." Learn how to set up your data preview, transform fields with smart suggestions, and
get intelligent insights about your data with the column profile.
• Getting Started series

– Getting Started: Bring in Data
– Getting Started: Explore Data
– Getting Started: Build an App
• Training Video Series

– Full product walkthroughs: CRM Analytics Training Seminars
– Use cases and best practices: CRM Analytics Learning Days Webinars
Learn CRM Analytics with In-App Examples

The CRM Analytics Learning Adventure app walks you through best practice examples for designing
EDITIONS
just the right visualizations and for building powerful dynamic apps. Hands-on examples are
presented in dashboards that show you how to build dashboards. Because it's an app, you can look Available in: Salesforce
under the hood and see the JSON used to build each dashboard. Classic and Lightning
With the CRM Analytics Learning Adventure app, you learn as you play with example charts and Experience.
dynamic visualizations. Some things you can expect to get out of this Learning Adventure:
Available for an extra cost in
• Learn how to choose the right visualization for your data, and your audience. Enterprise, Performance,
• Explore real examples of comparison, trending, relationship, composition, distribution, metrics, and Unlimited Editions. Also
and location charts – see what's possible! available in: Developer
Edition.
• Understand the power of tables and learn how to take advantage of the rich features across
table types.
• Write customized queries with help from the SAQL examples.
USER PERMISSIONS
• View the code behind dynamic visualizations (bindings) – explained in plain English! – and To install the Learning
apply it yourself with step-by-step instructions. Adventure App in CRM
Analytics Studio:
If you have newly enabled CRM Analytics, the app is created for you by default. If you have already
enabled CRM Analytics for your org, you can install it manually using the instructions below, or you Templated Apps
can enable auto-installation in the Settings menu.
To access the Learning
Note: To see the status of your auto-installed app, go to Setup > Feature Settings > Adventure App after it’s
Analytics > Analytics > Auto-Installed Apps. This app auto-upgrades when the template installed:
is updated. To learn about auto-upgrade, see Auto-Installed Apps on page 1666. • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
To add the Learning Adventure App to CRM Analytics Studio, click the Create button and select
App. Or click Template Gallery in the left panel of the CRM Analytics Studio home page. Then in
the gallery, select Learning Adventure.
569
Find the Right Learning Resource for Each Step of the CRM Analytics Journey
The CRM Analytics landing page in Help gives you a list of key resources for each action in every stage of your Analytics journey. It’s part
map and part clearinghouse to you see the places you can go with CRM Analytics.
With so many resources out there—trails, documentation, videos, webinars—how do you know where to look? We created the Help
page at https://help.salesforce.com/articleView?id=sf.bi.htm to address just that. We scoured all of our educational resources, pulled
together the best content, and organized it by area of product engagement to make it easier to find the right help at the right time.
570
Start at the top for a streamlined map (1) of top-level Help pages, arranged by jobs to be done, plus links to Trailhead, in-app videos,
and all the training videos, webinars, and best practices blogs by CRM Analytics experts. Scroll down for learning resources that cover
every aspect of CRM Analytics (2). The lists of learning resources aren’t exhaustive, but they provide entry points to content that can
point you in the right direction.
571
Learn CRM Analytics with Trailhead

Trailhead is the fun and free way to learn Salesforce. Get acquainted with CRM Analytics through Trailhead using a special CRM
Analytics-enabled Developer Edition org.
For the CRM Analytics trails, you can’t use an old Developer Edition org. You must sign up for the special Developer Edition that comes
with a limited CRM Analytics license and contains sample data required for the CRM Analytics trails.
Learn CRM Analytics with trails, quick looks, projects, modules, and superbadges:
Trails
• Discover CRM Analytics
• Explore with CRM Analytics
• Build and Administer CRM Analytics
• Accelerate CRM Analytics with Apps
• Gain Insight and Improve Outcomes with Einstein Discovery
Quick Looks
• CRM Analytics: Quick Look
• CRM Analytics Subscriptions: Quick Look
• CRM Analytics Watchlist: Quick Look
• Einstein Discovery: Quick Look
• Ethical Model Development with Einstein Discovery: Quick Look
• Einstein Discovery for Reports: Quick Look
Projects
• Quick Start: CRM Analytics
• Integrate Local and Remote Data in CRM Analytics
• Build a Gauge Chart That Visually Identifies Regional Data
• Create a Custom Map for CRM Analytics Charts
• Create a Product Pipeline Dashboard with CRM Analytics Charts
• Build Advanced CRM Analytics Dashboards
• Customize a Dashboard with CRM Analytics Advanced Editor
• Embed a CRM Analytics Dashboard in Lightning Experience
• Best Practices for Building Datasets with CRM Analytics
Modules about CRM Analytics Apps
• CRM Analytics Administration for Consumer Goods Cloud
• CRM Analytics Administration for Manufacturing Cloud
• CRM Analytics Customer Lifecycle Analytics
• CRM Analytics for Consulting Partners
• CRM Analytics Dashboards for Consumer Goods Cloud
• CRM Analytics for Healthcare Administration
• CRM Analytics for Healthcare Dashboards
• CRM Analytics for Sales Agreements and Forecasting
• Introduction to Revenue Intelligence for Sales Cloud
572
• AppExchange Partner Intelligence Basics

• Donor Insights with Education Cloud
• Data Insights for Student Recruitment and Admissions
Superbadges and Credentials
• CRM Analytics Data Preparation Specialist
• CRM Analytics and Einstein Discovery Insights Specialist
• CRM Analytics & Einstein Discovery Consultant
• Study for the CRM Analytics and Einstein Discovery Consultant Exam
SEE ALSO:
CRM Analytics Limits
Watch CRM Analytics Learning Days Webinars

Learn directly from expert trainers. The Learning Days webinars cover a range of topics on CRM Analytics and Einstein Discovery, with
deep dives into use cases, common questions, and best practices to inspire and guide you to create great analytics implementations.
Watch Learning Days recordings (all videos are in English):
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Best Practices
This series presents best practices for designing solutions in CRM Analytics.
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Prepare and Integrate Data

This series has webinars on data preparation and data integration.
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Build and Produce Dashboards

This series presents processes to follow for creating effective dashboards.
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Add Intelligence

This series has webinars on Einstein Discovery and AI in CRM Analytics.
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Extend Dashboard Functionality

This series includes webinars on advanced dashboard design, features, and use cases.
• CRM Analytics Learning Days - Thought Leadership

This series features presentations with insights and guidance about analytics in general.
SEE ALSO
CRM Analytics Training Seminars (Video Series)
Learn Best Practices from the Experts

Apply best practices throughout your CRM Analytics journey. Learn from Salesforce experts as they tackle topics from project planning
to performance to dashboard design best practices.
Take your skills to the next level with these best practice resources.
573
Project Planning
•
Upgrading to CRM Analytics Plus
• Delivering Successful CRM Analytics Projects
•
Resource Recommendations for a CRM Analytics Engagement
•
Typical CRM Analytics Asset Life Cycle
•
Developing and Managing CRM Analytics Assets in Production
•
Developing and Managing CRM Analytics Assets in Sandbox
•
Uncovering Deployment Techniques for CRM Analytics
Data and Setup
• How to Enable CRM Analytics
• Connect Data Sources
•
Data Orchestration in CRM Analytics
• Dataset Configuration & Data Schema
• Datasets, Grain Level, and Joins
• Security Predicate & Flatten Transformations
•
Practical Approach to Converting Dataflows to Recipes
Performance
•
Optimizing Long-Running Dataflows
• Dataflow Performance Optimization
• Dashboard Performance Optimization
•
Best Practices for Faster Dashboards
•
Efficient Queries for Faster Dashboards
•
Faster Dashboards: Network to the Rescue
Building Dynamic Dashboards
• Advanced Interaction Editor & Faceting
• Dashboard Pages
•
All You Need to Know About Bindings
•
A Binding Decision Tree
• SAQL and Bindings Use Cases
•
SAQL Simply Explained and Use Cases
574
Mobile
•
Get Beta Access to CRM Analytics Mobile Apps
•
CRM Analytics Best Practices for Mobile
Miscellaneous Pro Tips
•
Territory Management in CRM Analytics
• Custom Fiscal Calendar
•
How to Handle Common Date Challenges
• Multi-Language and Multi-Currency Projects
• Multi-Currency Implementation with Dated Exchange Rates
•
Timeseries Analysis
•
Data Acquisition & Heroku
• Custom Maps
• Commanding CRM Analytics with Salesforce CLI
Master the Platform
• CRM Analytics Data Preparation Specialist Superbadge
• CRM Analytics and Discovery Insights Specialist Superbadge
• CRM Analytics Training Seminars (Video Series)
• CRM Analytics and Discovery Consultant Credential
Take Tips from Trailblazers

The community of CRM Analytics power users grows daily, and they love to share their knowledge. Check out this treasure trove of blogs
and channels by Trailblazers across the community. Thank you, Trailblazers!
For community groups, meetups, blogs, and channels, go to the CRM Analytics Trailblazer Content Center.
Analytics Glossary
App
An app contains dashboards, lenses, and datasets in any combination that makes sense for sharing your data analysis with colleagues.
Apps are like folders. They allow users to organize their data projects—private and shared—and to control sharing.
App template
An app template is a ready-made dashboard package that is automatically populated with Salesforce data.
575
Binding
A binding is an expression to reference information in a query via string replace. Bindings allow for setting dynamic variables for chart
and query configurations.
Column Chart
A column chart is a name for a vertical bar chart.
Co-group
A co-group is used to combine data from two or more data streams. The data streams can be joined using common fields.
Component
A component is a widget that contains other widgets and pages. Use components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters,
text, and more in multiple dashboards.
Connected data
Connected data is an object or file from a data source that is synced. This data isn’t queryable until it’s converted into a dataset.
Dashboard
A dashboard is a curated set of charts, metrics, and tables based on the data in one or more lenses.
Dashboard JSON file

A dashboard JSON file defines the components that a dashboard contains and describes how they’re connected.
Data Monitor
The data monitor tool allows you to monitor dataflow and system jobs. You can also use it to start, stop, reschedule, download, and
upload dataflows.
Dataflow
A dataflow is a set of instructions that specifies what data to extract from Salesforce objects or datasets, how to transform the datasets,
and which datasets to make available for querying.
Dataflow definition file

A dataflow definition file is a JSON file that contains transformations that represent the dataflow logic.
Dataflow job
A dataflow job processes the logic in a dataflow.
576
Dataset
A dataset is a collection of related data that is stored in a denormalized, yet highly compressed form that is optimized for interactive
exploration.
Dataset builder
The dataset builder is a point-and-click user interface that allows you to easily select and extract data from related Salesforce objects to
create a single dataset.
Data sync
A data sync is the method used to refresh connected data in Analytics.
Date
A date can be represented as a day, month, year, and, optionally, time. You can group, filter, and perform math on dates.
Designer
Designer is the interface where you create dashboards.
Derived dimensions
A derived dimension is a qualitative value that is not part of a dataset, but is instead calculated in a query.
Derived measures
A derived measure is a quantitative value that is not part of a dataset, but is instead calculated in a query.
Dimension
Dimensions are handy for grouping and filtering your data. Unlike measures, you can’t perform math on dimensions.
Digest
The digest transformation extracts data from connected objects in a dataflow. Use it to extract synced data from your local Salesforce
org or remote connections to include in a dataset.
Extended metadata (XMD)

Extended metadata (XMD) allows you to customize the formatting of many dashboard elements in Analytics.
External data
External data is data that resides outside of Salesforce, such as data from outside applications and spreadsheets.
External Data API

Use the External Data API to upload external data files to Analytics to create datasets.
577
Lens
A lens is a view into a dataset used in an exploratory mode or to get insight to a specific business question. The lens can be saved and
shared independently. It can also be clipped to a dashboard.
Measure
calculating the total revenue and the minimum exchange rate.
Metadata file
A metadata file is a JSON file that describes the structure of an external data file.
Model
A model is the output of Einstein Discovery's comprehensive statistical analysis of past outcomes in an Analytics dataset to predict future
outcomes. A model represents a collection of insights around a metric (outcome) that highlights any of the following: important trends,
explanations on what influenced those trends, comparisons between factors, predictions on future outcomes, and suggested actions
that can improve outcomes.
Page
A page is a dashboard tab that contains distributed dashboard content, such as widgets and filters. There can be multiple pages. Pages
make dashboards easier to digest with content organized into multiple areas.
Predicate
See security predicate.
Query
A query retrieves data from one or more data sources, including datasets, Salesforce objects, user-defined data, or external data. The
query results can be displayed in different formats (such as a table or chart) or used as input to another query.
Note: Before the Winter '20 release, queries were called steps.
Recipe
A recipe is a user-interface tool that lets you take data from your existing datasets and connected objects, apply transformations, and
the output the results to a new dataset.
Register
The sfdcRegister transformation saves the transformed data as a dataset, which can then be queried in Analytics. Users can't view or run
queries against unregistered datasets.
Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL)

Use SAQL to access and analyze data in Analytics datasets.
578
Security Predicate
A security predicate is a filter condition that defines row-level access to records in a dataset.
Step
A step retrieves data from one or more data sources, including datasets, Salesforce objects, user-defined data, or external data. The step
results can be displayed in different formats (such as a table or chart) or used as input to another step.
Note: As of the Winter '20 release, steps are called queries.
Story
See model.
Transformation
A transformation refers to the manipulation of data. You can add transformations to a dataflow to extract data from Salesforce objects
or datasets, transform datasets that contain Salesforce or external data, and register datasets.
Trellis
A trellis is the name for a grid (horizontal, vertical, or both) of visualizations. A trellis is also known as small multiples and lattice.
Unit symbol (for measures)

A unit symbol represents the unit of a shortened number that appears in a chart or number widget. Analytics uses the following symbols.
Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
579
Analyze Your Data Access Insights from the Analytics Mobile App
Symbol Unit Example

z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
Visualization
such as a comparison table or pivot table. Every visualization has an underlying query, which is how Analytics retrieves information from
the source data.
Widget
A widget is used to display data on a dashboard, such as key performance indicators, and data visualizations. Data in a widget comes
from a query. A widget determines how to use or display the results returned by a query.
Access Insights from the Analytics Mobile App

Analytics on mobile gives you a fast, fluid way to discover the compelling insights within your data and to share the right visuals wherever
you are. This page has resources for Analytics in the Salesforce app and Analytics for iOS and Android.
Which Analytics Mobile Experience Do I Use?

CRM Analytics gives you multiple ways to get insights on the go: CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app and CRM Analytics for iOS and
Android. Find out which mobile experience is right for you.
CRM Analytics Mobile Features
CRM Analytics is available as a downloadable app on iOS and Android devices. This table details supported CRM Analytics features
in the mobile apps.
Download CRM Analytics for Mobile
Click the link to download CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app, or CRM Analytics for iOS and Android.
Integrate Dashboards Into Your Mobile Users’ Workflow
CRM Analytics in the Salesforce mobile app gives you several ways to access and interact with dashboards.
Learn How to Use CRM Analytics for iOS
Access your data anywhere with the CRM Analytics for iOS mobile app.
Learn How to Use CRM Analytics for Android
Access your data anywhere with the CRM Analytics for Android mobile app.
Set Up and Manage CRM Analytics on Mobile
Optimize dashboard layouts for mobile devices, and administer CRM Analytics for mobile.
Limitations of CRM Analytics on iPhone and iPad
Be aware of these mobile-specific limitations.
Limitations of CRM Analytics on Android Devices
580

CRM Analytics gives you multiple ways to get insights on the go: CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app and CRM Analytics for iOS and
Android. Find out which mobile experience is right for you.
The right mobile analytics experience depends on what you want to do.
• For the best mobile analytics experience in the CRM workflow, use CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app, which features embedded
dashboards and record actions.
• For the most focused analytics on-the-go experience, use CRM Analytics for iOS or Android and its advanced features like lenses,
notifications, and offline data access.
Check out this breakdown of key CRM Analytics features based on business needs.
Business Need CRM CRM Salesforce

Analytics Analytics app (iOS
for iOS for Android and
Android)
Want to add mobile-optimized insights to a record page?

Put relevant insights where they matter most: directly in a Salesforce record. To optimize
CRM workflow with embedded insights, use CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app.
Want to take action on insights directly from CRM Analytics?

To create, update, and interact with Salesforce records from charts and tables in
dashboards, we recommend CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app. While CRM Analytics
for iOS and Android support some record actions, CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app is
optimized for turning your insights into actions, all in one place. Learn more about enabling
actions for analytics users on page 1616.
Want to launch analytics dashboards from a Salesforce record page?

If you want to fast-track how mobile users access dashboards from records, use CRM
Analytics in the Salesforce app. For example, create a custom quick action on an account
record so account owners can launch a sales metrics dashboard with relevant filters
applied directly from the record.
Want to explore data and uncover key business insights on your mobile device?
If you want to use a lens to dive into the details in your data and build an on-the-go query,
use CRM Analytics for iOS or Android. They’re optimized for exploration beyond
visualizations like charts and tables.
Want to launch analytics assets directly from your own custom mobile app?
To open a specific dashboard from your custom mobile app or apply filters to a dashboard
when it’s launched, use CRM Analytics for iOS or Android. They support deep linking,
which lets you launch a dashboard from a third-party or web application. Learn more
about deep linking on page 654.
Want to view and analyze data when internet access isn’t available?
581
Business Need CRM CRM Salesforce

Analytics Analytics app (iOS
for iOS for Android and
Android)
If you need your data any time and any place, use CRM Analytics for iOS. It lets you access
important insights even when you’re offline. Learn more about offline access on page
646.
Want to track important metrics in your Watchlist?

A Watchlist is your one-stop hub for tracking trends across multiple dashboards. If you
love your watchlist in CRM Analytics desktop, you can access it in CRM Analytics for iOS.
Want to get notified when a metric reaches a goal or dips below a specified amount?
If on-the-go alerts and notifications are important to your business needs, use CRM
Analytics for iOS. Learn more about push notifications on page 653.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Analytics Mobile Features

CRM Analytics is available as a downloadable app on iOS and Android devices. This table details supported CRM Analytics features in
the mobile apps.
Feature CRM Analytics for iOS CRM Analytics for

Android
General
Local playground
Filter list views (by asset)
Search
App navigation list
Offline mode
Access to app sharing controls
View favorite dashboards, lenses, datasets, and apps
Add dashboards, lenses, datasets, and apps to favorites
Push notifications
Track notifications
Custom bulk actions (via Visualforce)
582

Android
CRM Analytics REST API
Support for Experience Cloud sites
Explore Salesforce objects from the dashboard designer with Salesforce Direct
Connect external data to CRM Analytics with Salesforce Direct for Snowflake
Data
Actions
View asset information
View, filter, and facet dashboards and lenses
Drill in and get details from lenses and widgets
Explore datasets, lenses, and widgets
Create and edit dashboards
Save and delete lenses and dashboards
Create apps
Import data (from CSV, TSV, XLSX files)
Delete datasets and apps
Post images or links to Chatter
Copy link to dashboard or lens
Open Salesforce records directly from dashboards
Use external links to other sources
Open to asset from link in external app
Annotate dashboard widgets
Do Salesforce actions from custom action menus
Access and share saved dashboard views
Add to or edit saved dashboard views
Create subscriptions to lenses and dashboards
Exploration and Queries (Steps)
Apply aggregation functions on datasets
Apply groupings on datasets
Filter by measures, dimensions, and absolute or relative dates
View lenses using SAQL or SOQL step types
583

Android
View lenses using Apex step types (beta)
Support for query results limits
Natural language search/query with Ask Data for Salesforce
Charts and Tables
Bar
Column
Stacked Bar
Stacked Column
Scatter Plot
Donut
Heat Map
Line
Horizontal/Vertical Dot Plot
Timeline
Time Bar
Time Combo
Waterfall
Stacked Waterfall
Combo (Bar and Line)
Funnel
Origami
Sankey
Metrics Radar
Map
Bubble Map
Custom Map
Geo Map
Pyramid
Stacked Pyramid
584

Android
Gauge
Polar Gauge
Flat Gauge
Rating
Matrix
Tree Map
Calendar Heat Map
Parallel Coordinates
Values Table
Compare Table
Pivot Table
Totals (supported in tables)
Subtotals (supported in tables)
Chart and Table Properties
Title, subtitle customization
Border customization
Text customization
Number customization
Conditional formatting/styling options
Images in charts
Table column and cell customization
Images in tables
Themes in tables
Trellis
Reference lines
Selection of multiple chart elements
Focus on multiple sections
Table sorting
Dashboard Widgets
585

Android
Container
Dashboard components
Dashboard Navigation
Date Range selector
Global filters
Image (except .svg files)
Lightning components
Link
List selector
Number (view only)
Open as lens
Range
Repeater
Text
Text Tooltip
Toggle
Dashboard Properties
Custom background images
Themes
Gutter color options
Dynamic start values
User tokens in queries
Static step, selection, and result bindings
Nested bindings
Bindings using the visualizationType widget property (dynamic chart types)
Connected data sources
Customized display values
Image tooltips
Access and Security
586

Android
Configure connections to multiple instances from the login page
Switch between multiple Salesforce accounts without logging out
Control app access with a security passcode
Forget all trusted domains
Use Connected App security settings to meet industry compliance regulations
Get enhanced security with Mobile Device Management (MDM)
Miscellaneous
Developer mode
Spotlight search

Click the link to download CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app, or CRM Analytics for iOS and Android.
For CRM Analytics in the Salesforce app, go to Download and Log In to the Salesforce Mobile app.
For CRM Analytics for iOS, go to iTunes.
For CRM Analytics for Android, go to Google Play.
SEE ALSO:

CRM Analytics in the Salesforce mobile app gives you several ways to access and interact with dashboards.
Use dashboards as you interact with Salesforce records.
• To make an important dashboard prominent and visible whenever you open a record, embed it directly on a record layout.
• To make a dashboard available from a record without showing it every time you open the record, embed it on a record page tab.
• To create a link from a record to a dashboard so the dashboard opens with filters already applied, use actions, links, and buttons.
Use dashboards in any context with pages and tabs.
• To make a dashboard available along with other Lightning components from outside the Salesforce record context, add your
dashboard to a Lightning page.
• To make a dashboard available as its own navigation item on mobile, use web tabs. Dashboards in web tabs are instantly interactive
in the Salesforce mobile app. They’re also integrated into your users’ app navigation for seamless access.
Access Dashboards on Record Layouts

Embed a dashboard on a record layout when you want to show an important insight every time your users open a record.
587
Access Dashboards on Record Page Tabs

Embed a dashboard on a record page tab when it’s an optional part of your users’ workflow.
Access Dashboards from a Record with Actions, Buttons, and Links
Use actions, buttons, and links on records to give your users quick access to a dashboard with filters already applied.
Access Dashboards on a Lightning Page
Add your dashboard to a Lightning page, along with other relevant components, so your users can access it from outside the
Salesforce record context.
Access Dashboards Instantly as Navigation Items
Add a dashboard to your users’ navigation so they can interact with it in any context.
Get Additional Insights from a Dashboard Widget
Get interactive navigation from a static dashboard widget with a same single-click.
Considerations When Viewing Dashboards in a Mobile Web Browser
When you access dashboards in a mobile browser outside the Salesforce mobile app, keep these limitations in mind.
Access Dashboards on Record Layouts

Embed a dashboard on a record layout when you want to show an important insight every time your users open a record.
When you embed a dashboard on a record page (1), users tap to open the dashboard (2). When the dashboard opens (3), users can
interact.
To learn more about adding dashboards to record pages, see Embed Dashboards in Lightning Pages on page 1594.
588
To add a dashboard to a record without showing it every time your users open the record, add it to a record page tab. To learn more,
see Access Dashboards on Record Page Tabs on page 589.
SEE ALSO:
Create Page Layouts
User Interface Elements for the Enhanced Page Layout Editor
Access Dashboards on Record Page Tabs

Embed a dashboard on a record page tab when it’s an optional part of your users’ workflow.
When you embed a dashboard on a record page tab, users tap on the tab (1), and then tap to open the dashboard (2). When the
dashboard opens (3), users can interact.
To learn more, see Build a Custom Record Page for Lightning Experience and the Salesforce Mobile App.
SEE ALSO:
Create Page Layouts
User Interface Elements for the Enhanced Page Layout Editor
Access Dashboards from a Record with Actions, Buttons, and Links

Use actions, buttons, and links on records to give your users quick access to a dashboard with filters already applied.
589
When you add an action, button, or link from a record to a dashboard, users tap the action, button, or link (1) to go directly to the
dashboard (2).
Create custom URLs so your users can open a dashboard with relevant filters already applied.
1. To create a custom URL to a dashboard so it opens in a specific state, use the Share (3) and GET URL (4) option in CRM Analytics.
590
2. Add the dashboardState parameter to the URL to pass the record ID and other filters to the dashboard. Use this syntax for the
custom link URL.
https://domain.my.salesforce.com/analytics/wave/dashboard?assetId={dashboardID}&orgId={orgID}&loginHost={loginHost}&urlType=sharing&dashboardState={URL-encoded
dashboard state}
To learn more about dashboard URL syntax, see Launch CRM Analytics Assets with URLs on page 654.
3. In Setup, add the custom link URL to a record page in the Object Manager. For example, create an Account Insights (5) link so account
owners can launch a sales metrics dashboard with relevant filters applied directly from a record.
SEE ALSO:
Custom Buttons and Links
Perform Actions on a Salesforce Record from CRM Analytics
Access Dashboards on a Lightning Page

Add your dashboard to a Lightning page, along with other relevant components, so your users can access it from outside the Salesforce
record context.
To add a dashboard to a Lightning page, first create a dashboard layout that’s optimized for your device. To learn more about layouts,
see Generate Unique CRM Analytics Dashboard Layouts for Different Devices on page 1574.
When you add a dashboard to a Lightning page (1), users tap on the dashboard (2) to open it. When the dashboard opens (3), users can
interact. To learn more, see Lightning Pages.
591
SEE ALSO:
Create a Custom App Page: The Big Picture
Access Dashboards Instantly as Navigation Items

Add a dashboard to your users’ navigation so they can interact with it in any context.
When you make your dashboard into a navigation item, your users tap (1) and start interacting with the dashboard without waiting for
it to launch.
592
1. To turn your dashboard into a navigation item, create a Lightning web tab, add your dashboard URL, and then add the tab to your
users’ navigation.
2. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Tabs, then select Tabs. Create and customize a web tab. For example, create a Sales
Insights tab so your Sales team can access your interactive sales opportunity dashboard.
3. Add your dashboard URL to the web tab. To get the dashboard URL, open it in desktop, select Share, and then select GET URL.
4. Paste the URL into your web tab, and then change analyticsContext from analyticsTab to webtab (2).
593
5. Add the tab to your users’ navigation in Lightning App Builder. Now your users can instantly interact with the dashboard.
SEE ALSO:
Create Web Tabs
Lightnint App Navigation Bar Items
Get Additional Insights from a Dashboard Widget

Get interactive navigation from a static dashboard widget with a same single-click.
Open a dashboard, tap a metric in a chart, then tap Interact.
Tap the view you want to open.
594
Considerations When Viewing Dashboards in a Mobile Web Browser

When you access dashboards in a mobile browser outside the Salesforce mobile app, keep these
EDITIONS
limitations in mind.
• You can access dashboards in the Salesforce mobile app from record layouts, within a Lightning Available in Salesforce
page tab, and via custom links and buttons. Viewing embedded dashboards on mobile browsers Classic and Lightning
isn’t supported. Experience.
• Dashboards with multiple scrolling charts aren’t optimized for mobile browsers. Available with CRM
• Users can view saved dashboard views on mobile, but the menu for managing saved views Analytics, which is available
isn’t accessible due to space constraints. for an extra cost in
• When adding list selectors to dashboards, make them wide enough to render on mobile.
• Dashboard links that are set to open in a new window open the CRM Analytics mobile app. available in Developer
• Widget dropdown menus aren’t supported, which means Explore, Share, Details, Annotate, Set Edition.
Notification, and bulk actions, if configured, aren’t available.
• Sharing actions aren’t available.
• Record-level actions and bulk actions on tables aren’t supported.
• Global filters can’t be adjusted.
• Charts don’t include hover-over information (tooltips).
• Some filters, such as range selectors, aren’t optimized for mobile touch behavior.
SEE ALSO:
Learn How to Use CRM Analytics for iOS

Access your data anywhere with the CRM Analytics for iOS mobile app.
595
Log In from CRM Analytics for iOS

Log in to Salesforce to explore data from your org.
Learn Your Way Around CRM Analytics for iOS
Explore your data using the control bar at the bottom of the screen and a few simple gestures.
Understanding Data Exploration and Best Practices
Before diving into your data, familiarize yourself with useful tips, learn about different kinds of data collections, and review important
data exploration concepts.
Add Your Data
Import your raw data files, such as CSV files, onto your local device. Each imported data file becomes a dataset.
Explore Your Data
See what unexpected insights you can surface by interactively exploring and visualizing your data.
Notifications
Create and manage notifications right from your device. Receive push notifications to stay informed when your business reaches a
milestone or experiences critical changes.
Notifications
CRM Analytics Settings
CRM Analytics settings include a preference setting for event logs, Developer Mode, and links to app information.
Requirements and Limits for CRM Analytics for Android
Be aware of requirements and limitations while working with your data in Salesforce CRM Analytics for Android.
Log In from CRM Analytics for iOS

EDITIONS
1. Tap the icon in the upper left corner to open the Select Account screen.
2. Tap Add New Account.
3. (Optional) To connect to a sandbox instance or to add a new connection, tap . Experience.
4. Enter your user name and password, and then tap Log In. Available with CRM
5. Tap Allow to grant permission to CRM Analytics on mobile. Analytics, which is available
CRM Analytics reloads on your device, and you’ll see your pinned apps on the home screen! for an extra cost in
Learn Your Way Around CRM Analytics for iOS available in Developer
Edition.
Explore your data using the control bar at the bottom of the screen and a few simple gestures.
CRM Analytics Screen
When viewing the CRM Analytics screen, tap the header to view Recents, Alphabetical, and USER PERMISSIONS
Pinned Apps. On the bottom of the CRM Analytics screen, choose Analytics, Tracking, or
To log in to Salesforce from
Notifications. CRM Analytics for iOS or
Notice that each asset has . Tap it to open a panel where you can see information such as Android:
the asset’s dataset or which app it’s in. From the panel, you can also mark as “Favorite,” Open, • Use CRM Analytics
Get Link, or Delete, depending upon the asset and your access to it.
596
Tap the tile to open the app’s browse screen and access the app’s assets. Or, tap on the tile to open the info/action panel. App
actions can include Browse ( ), Run ( ), Pin( ), and Get Link ( ).
Customize your CRM Analytics screen by pinning your favorite and often used apps. Whether you pin apps on mobile or in CRM
Analytics on desktop, you’ll see the same pinned apps on your CRM Analytics screen.
If you’ve marked assets as “Favorite,” they have a blue star ( ), and a Favorites filter appears.
Viewing Dashboards
When viewing a dashboard, tap the down arrow ( ) in the header next to the dashboard’s name to open a dropdown list and
select another dashboard in the app. To refresh a dashboard and return to its default state, tap and then tap the curved arrow
( ).
Tracking
Open the notifications tracking screen by tapping . When you set notifications in CRM Analytics, the tiles for tracking progress
appear here. Tap a tile to go directly to the dashboard that contains the notification.
Notifications
Open the push notifications screen by tapping . When you set notifications in CRM Analytics, the notifications will appear here.
Tap a tile to go directly to the dashboard that contains the notification.
Note: To enable push notifications, open the device Settings, tap Notifications, and allow notifications for CRM Analytics.
Search
Tap the in the upper right corner of the screen. Search Favorites, Apps, Dashboards, Lenses, or Datasets to find an asset.
Settings
Open Settings by tapping the icon in the upper left corner of the screen. Tap in the upper right corner of the screen. The Settings
screen is where you can:
• Switch on Presentation Mode.
• Add data to CRM Analytics.
• Change settings, send feedback, get help, and share the CRM Analytics App.
• Log out of your org.
A Few Simple Gestures
These gestures help you quickly navigate through CRM Analytics.
Gesture Result
Swipe up Scroll down lists and dashboard.
Swipe down • Scroll up lists and dashboard.

• Refresh lists when at the top of the list.
• When creating a filter in a lens, pull down to open the text
entry field for the “Contains” option.
Swipe left • When in a paginated dashboard, navigate between screens.

• When on the home screen, navigate between asset filters.
• If you have permission, swiping left on an app, lens,
dashboard, or dataset reveals buttons to run, pin, share,
favorite, or delete, depending on the asset.
597
Gesture Result
• While adding measures, filters, or groupings to a lens, swipe

left over an applied condition to reveal a delete button.
Swipe right • When in a paginated dashboard, navigate between screens.

• When on the home screen, navigate between asset filters.
Press (for devices with 3D Touch) • On the device’s Home screen, press the CRM Analytics app
icon to open the shortcuts menu. The menu lets you share,
search within CRM Analytics, or go directly to the two most
recently viewed assets.
• On a dashboard or lens, press lightly to peek at the asset,
and press deeper to pop it open.


Analytics Glossary
Analytics Glossary

598


of your data.

599
Analytics Glossary
App
App template
Binding
Column Chart
Co-group
Component
Connected data
Dashboard
Dashboard JSON file

600
Data Monitor
upload dataflows.
Dataflow

Dataflow job
Dataset
exploration.
Dataset builder
Data sync
Date
Designer
Derived dimensions
Derived measures
Dimension
601
Digest

External data
External Data API

Lens
Measure
Metadata file
Model
Page
Predicate
Query
602
Recipe
Register

Security Predicate
Step
Story
See model.
Transformation
Trellis

Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
603
Symbol Unit Example

T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
Visualization
the source data.
Widget
Add Your Data

Import your raw data files, such as CSV files, onto your local device. Each imported data file becomes
EDITIONS
a dataset.
As you prepare to import data, keep these limits and tips in mind: Available in Salesforce
• Only CSV, TSV, and XLSX files, and ZIP files containing these types, can be imported as dataset.
Experience.
• Imported dataset aren’t available in CRM Analytics on the Web. They are only available on your
mobile device in the playground. Available with CRM
• Imported dataset aren’t encrypted.
Two Approaches for Importing Data and Unlimited Editions. Also
Create dataset from external files or via a URL from inside CRM Analytics. available in Developer
Edition.
604
Two Approaches for Importing Data

Create dataset from external files or via a URL from inside CRM Analytics.
Import from an external file
In iOS, there are many places from which you can import a data file, such as an email app or a Web browser. Depending on where you
import a data file from, the way in which you access it differs. Look for prompts to Open in... or for sharing icons ( ). These prompts
and icons allow you to open the data file in CRM Analytics, which launches the data import process.
1. Locate a CSV, TSV, or XLSX data file, or a ZIP file containing multiple data files.
2. Tap either Open in... or the share icon ( ).
3. To begin importing data, tap the Analytics icon ( ).
Import via a URL from inside CRM Analytics
In the Playground, tap the settings icon ( ) and tap Add Your Data. Then tap Add Data from a Remote Source and enter the URL
for your data file. To paste a URL, touch and hold the text box. Then tap Import Data.
The CRM Analytics Data Connector guides you to create a dataset
With either approach, CRM Analytics launches the CRM Analytics Data Connector, which guides you through the rest of the data import
process. Depending on your data file, the import process can include selecting the sheets to import from an XLSX file and mapping the
data fields.
You’ll find your new dataset in a new CRM Analytics app in the navigation menu.
Explore Your Data

View Data in a Dashboard

A dashboard tells you a specific, focused story about data by using a curated set of lenses and widgets. For example, a dashboard
can effectively summarize your company’s support cases.
605
View Your Data in a Lens

When you look at data in an exploratory mode, you do so in a lens. A lens has several aspects: it’s how you view data in a dataset,
it’s the place where you explore the data graphically, and it’s the basis for building any dashboard.
Group Your Data into Categories
Group data to organize it so that the data is displayed in useful categories.
Change Measures
Your choice of measure defines your entire visualization and determines the overall scope of your exploration.
Change the Sort Order
Choose whether data in your chart visualization is sorted ascending, sorted descending, or unsorted.
Filter Your Data
Apply global filters in a dashboard to focus on the subset of data that’s most relevant for your business unit, project, or management
team.
Change the Chart Type
Switch between chart types to see which visualization options tell the most compelling story for your data.
Return to the Initial View
Exploring your data can lead you down many paths. Not all of them are fruitful, and that’s OK. To go back to the dashboard’s original
state, or just see those nifty animations again, you can use the reset option to quickly return to the initial view.
Switch between Apps
Change apps to explore a different collection of lenses and dashboard.
Switch between Apps

A dashboard tells you a specific, focused story about data by using a curated set of lenses and widgets. For example, a dashboard can
effectively summarize your company’s support cases.
A quick glance at this dashboard shows that 17 cases across all account regions are escalated:
606
Dashboard are interactive. You can tap charts, buttons, and other elements to dynamically filter and drill into data.
Let’s see how many escalated cases originate from North America. Directly under Account Region, tap All, and then select AMER. Note
how all the data in the dashboard is instantly updated to represent the North American region and that 11 cases originating from North
America are escalated:
607
Next, let’s get more information about the escalated cases from North America. Tap the Escalated data bar. Note how the entire dashboard
is updated again:
608
Now let’s get specific information about these North American escalated cases. Double-tap the chart to view it in full screen mode:
609
While in full screen mode, you can explore the chart in a lens.
• Tap Deselect to explore all of the data in the lens.
• Tap Details to see a table of data about the escalated cases.
• Tap Drill In to chart information about the escalated cases. Drilling in filters by escalated cases, then lets you group by other
dimensions.
Most of what you see in a dashboard is interactive or dynamic. Try tapping around and see what happens!
Filter Your Data

team.

When you look at data in an exploratory mode, you do so in a lens. A lens has several aspects: it’s how you view data in a dataset, it’s the
place where you explore the data graphically, and it’s the basis for building any dashboard.
1. You can continue exploring data in a saved lens or start exploring data in a new lens.
a. To continue exploring data in a saved lens, tap Lenses, and then select a lens.
The lens opens and shows data that might have applied measures, groupings, filters, and chart types.
b. To start exploring data in a new lens, tap Datasets, and then select a dataset.
A new lens opens and shows the dataset’s total count of rows.
610
2.
Explore by tapping Build and adding measures and groupings.

Change Measures

1.
While viewing data in a lens, tap Build.
2.
Next to the chart element that you want to represent the group, tap . Note that the chart elements vary for different charts.
611
3. Under Add a Group, tap one of the dimensions to assign it to the chart element. For example, in a bar chart, each bar could be a
member of the group.
The dimensions in your dataset determine which categories you can group by.
The visualization in your lens changes to show the data grouped by the dimension that you selected.
612
Change Measures
1.
2.
To change a measure, tap it. To add another measure, tap next to the chart element you want to represent the measure. Note
that the chart elements vary for different charts.
3. Choose an aggregation function, such as count or sum.
4. Choose a field or value to aggregate by.
613

1.
2. From left of the measure you want to sort by, sort Ascending, Descending, or Off.
614
Filter Your Data

team.
1. If global filters are set up for your dashboard, tap to open the Global Filters panel.
2. Tap a filter to open the filter configuration panel.
3. Change the filter settings, and tap Done.
The visualizations in your dashboard change to show the data through the filter you created.

1.
While viewing data in a lens, tap View.
A gallery of chart types appears. You can slide the lower portion of the window up to see more chart types, and down to see your
chart.
615
2. Select a chart type.

The chart visualization changes to match your selection.

1. Explore your dashboard by setting filters and tapping chart elements.
2. To reset the dashboard to its initial state, tap .
Switch between Apps

1. Tap the APPS tab.
2. Select an app.
The app opens, granting access to its collection of dashboards and lenses.
Notifications
Set Notifications
Create and set notifications right from your device. Receive push notifications to stay informed when your business reaches a
616
Track and Manage Notifications

Track and manage notifications right from your device. Stay informed when your business reaches a milestone or experiences critical
changes.
Set Notifications
changes.
Set Notifications
Create and set notifications right from your device. Receive push notifications to stay informed when your business reaches a milestone
or experiences critical changes.
To set notifications, follow these steps:
1. Select the chart or number for which you want to receive notifications.
A toolbar displays at the bottom of the screen.
2. Tap Set Notification ( ).
3. Enter information for the new notification.
4. In the upper right corner, tap Save.
The new notification appears on the Tracking screen. You can set up to ten notifications at a time.

changes.
After you’ve set notifications, you can track, edit, and manage them.
2. In the upper right corner, tap .
3. Tap Notifications ( ).
4. Select the notification you want to modify.
5. Edit the notification, activate or deactivate it, or turn Notification Tracking off or on.
Notifications
Set Notifications
617

changes.
Set Notifications
changes.
Set Notifications
Create and set notifications right from your device. Receive push notifications to stay informed when your business reaches a milestone
or experiences critical changes.
To set notifications, follow these steps:
1. Select the chart or number for which you want to receive notifications.
A toolbar displays at the bottom of the screen.
2. Tap Set Notification ( ).
3. Enter information for the new notification.
The new notification appears on the Tracking screen. You can set up to ten notifications at a time.

changes.
After you’ve set notifications, you can track, edit, and manage them.
2. In the upper right corner, tap .
3. Tap Notifications ( ).
4. Select the notification you want to modify.
5. Edit the notification, activate or deactivate it, or turn Notification Tracking off or on.

Tap to open the navigation menu, and select Settings.
• Send Event Logs: Option to send event logs automatically from your default email address to Salesforce.
• Developer Mode: This setting enables features for dashboard designers, including notifications about auto-formatting when
dashboards open. When Developer Mode is on, the designer control appears in the lower left corner of the dashboard ( ). Tap
it to set Developer Mode to show widget names.
618

Requirements for Using CRM Analytics for Android

CRM Analytics has some requirements.

Supported Devices
You can use CRM Analytics on Android devices running Android 5 or later.
Salesforce Editions and Licenses
For information about which Salesforce editions and licenses you need to log in to a Salesforce org from CRM Analytics, see Licenses
for CRM Analytics in the Salesforce help.
Wireless Connection
A Wi-Fi® or cellular network connection is required to communicate with Salesforce. For the best performance, we recommend using
Wi-Fi.
Locales and Languages
CRM Analytics is available in all supported languages, with these limitations:
• We don’t support right-to-left languages, such as Arabic and Hebrew.
• A subset of error messages are available in English only.

General Limitations
Feature Limitations
Layout Landscape mode is supported only for iPad®. Portrait mode is supported for both iPad and iPhone®. Split
screen isn’t supported.
Share You can’t create, edit, or delete sharing permissions for apps.
Delete • Deleting a dashboard or lens in CRM Analytics on your mobile device also deletes it in your Salesforce
org on the Web.
• After it’s deleted, a dashboard or lens can’t be recovered. The only exception is the playground sample
data, which can be restored from the Settings screen.
619
Feature Limitations
• Datasets can’t be deleted from your mobile device.
Playground Imported or created data, lenses, and dashboards aren’t backed up in a device backup. Playground sample
data can be restored from the Settings screen.
Favorites Pinned apps are shared across all your logged in devices. Favorites of dashboards, lenses, and datasets are
stored locally on your mobile device and aren’t synced to other devices.
Other Features • Creating apps and dashboards isn’t supported.

• Custom bulk actions via Visualforce aren’t supported.
Data Exploration and Visualization Limitations
Feature Limitations
Charts and Tables • Charts don’t support multiple selection actions such as copy and focus.
• Frozen table columns in dashboards don’t stay frozen when viewed on CRM Analytics for iOS using any
iOS device.
Widgets Image
The image widget doesn’t support .svg files.
Number
Exploring a number widget isn’t supported.
Queries • If more measures or groupings are added to a chart than the chart type supports, then the chart becomes
a Compare Table.
• The maximum results returned by a query vary based on its type. For example, the default query limit for
an aggregate query with multiple groupings is 500, so just the first 500 records are displayed by default.
The default can be changed in the dashboard designer in CRM Analytics Studio.
• Apex steps (beta) aren’t supported on mobile.
Dashboards designed • CRM Analytics dashboards designed in your Salesforce org on the Web can be viewed in CRM Analytics
in the CRM Analytics for iOS on your local device. Some widgets appear different on mobile.
Studio
• To optimize dashboards for mobile, generate a layout for phone or tablet in the dashboard designer.
• Gutter color options aren’t supported.
Data Import Limitations
Feature Limitations
CRM Analytics Data • Only CSV, TSV, and XLSX files, and ZIP files containing these types, can be imported as dataset.
Connector
620
Feature Limitations
• Imported datasets aren’t available in CRM Analytics on the Web. They’re only available on your mobile
device in the playground.
• Imported datasets aren’t encrypted.
Date Formats Dates can be imported as any of these formats:

• YYYY
• YYYY-MM
• YY-MM
• YYYY-MM-DD
• YY-MM-DD
• YYYYMMDD
• YYMMDD
• YYDDMM
• MM/DD/YY
• DD/MM/YY
• YY/MM/DD
• YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
• YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
• YYMMDDHHMMSS
• YY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SSZ
• YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYMMDDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYMMDDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYDDMM
• YYYY/MM/DD
• YYYY/DD/MM
• DD/MM/YYYY
• MM/DD/YYYY
• YYYY-DD-MM
• DD-MM-YYYY
• MM-DD-YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY HH:MM:SS
• DD.MM.YY HH:MM:SS
• MM.DD.YYYY
621
Feature Limitations
• DD-Mon-YY
• DD-Mon-YYYY
• DD-Mon-YYYY HH:mm
• YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS
• YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS
• YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM
• DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH:MM:SS
• MM-DD-YYYYTHH:MM:SS
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH:MM
• MM-DD-YYYYTHH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS-HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS+HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSTZD
• YYYYMMDDTHH:MM:SS
• HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YYYY
622
Feature Limitations
• HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH
Learn How to Use CRM Analytics for Android

Access your data anywhere with the CRM Analytics for Android mobile app.
Log In from CRM Analytics for Android

Learn Your Way Around CRM Analytics for Android
Explore your data in Android using the toolbar and a few simple gestures to create meaningful visualizations, and and analyze your
data in new ways.
Explore Your Data
Share a Visualization
Share a visualization by sending a link to your colleagues.
623
Log In from CRM Analytics for Android

EDITIONS
1. CRM Analytics opens to the log in screen. If you are already logged in and want to change to
another org, tap to open the navigation menu. Then tap Log out. Available in Salesforce
2. Enter your user name and password, and then tap Log In.
Experience.
3. Tap Allow to grant permission to CRM Analytics on mobile.
CRM Analytics reloads on your device, and you’ll see your pinned apps on the home screen! Available with CRM
Learn Your Way Around CRM Analytics for Android Enterprise, Performance,
Explore your data in Android using the toolbar and a few simple gestures to create meaningful
visualizations, and and analyze your data in new ways.
Edition.
Home Screen
The Home Screen is the first thing that you see when you open CRM Analytics on your mobile
USER PERMISSIONS
device. The Home Screen consists of the header and a list of CRM Analytics assets.
In the header, you can access: To log in to Salesforce from
CRM Analytics for iOS or
• The lists of your apps, dashboards, lenses, and datasets —in most recently used order. Android:
• Navigation ( ) to change settings, get help, and log out.

• Search ( ).
Navigation Menu
Open the navigation menu from the home screen by tapping . The navigation menu is where you can:
• Change settings.
• Send feedback.
• Get help.
• Log out of your org.
Lens/Dataset Exploration
At the bottom of the lens screen, you can access the toolbar to explore and filter data in lenses with the new build, filter, view, and
actions tools for data insights.
624
A Few Simple Gestures

These gestures help you quickly navigate through CRM Analytics.
Gesture Result
Swipe up Scroll down lists and dashboard.
Swipe down • Scroll up lists and dashboard.

• Refresh lists when at the top of the list.
Swipe left • When in a paginated dashboard, flip between screens.

• When on the home screen, flip between asset filters.
Swipe right • When in a paginated dashboard, flip between screens.

• When on the home screen, flip between asset filters.
Scroll Use one finger to scroll a dashboard or a scrolling widget; use

two fingers to scroll the dashboard when directly over a scrolling
widget.


625

Analytics Glossary
Analytics Glossary


626

of your data.

Analytics Glossary
App
App template
627
Binding
Column Chart
Co-group
Component
Connected data
Dashboard
Dashboard JSON file

Data Monitor
upload dataflows.
Dataflow

Dataflow job
Dataset
exploration.
628
Dataset builder
Data sync
Date
Designer
Derived dimensions
Derived measures
Dimension
Digest

External data
External Data API

Lens
629
Measure
Metadata file
Model
Page
Predicate
Query
Recipe
Register

Security Predicate
630
Step
Story
See model.
Transformation
Trellis

Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
631
Visualization
the source data.
Widget
Explore Your Data


Change Measures
Filter Your Data
team.
Switch between Apps
Switch between Apps
632

A dashboard tells you a specific, focused story about data by using a curated set of lenses and widgets. For example, a dashboard can
effectively summarize your company’s support cases.
A quick glance at this dashboard shows that 17 cases across all account regions are escalated:
Dashboard are interactive. You can tap charts, buttons, and other elements to dynamically filter and drill into data.
Let’s see how many escalated cases originate from North America. Directly under Account Region, tap All, and then select AMER. Note
how all the data in the dashboard is instantly updated to represent the North American region and that 11 cases originating from North
America are escalated:
633
Next, let’s get more information about the escalated cases from North America. Tap the Escalated data bar. Note how the entire dashboard
is updated again:
634
Now let’s get specific information about these North American escalated cases. Double-tap the chart to view it in full screen mode:
635
While in full screen mode, you can explore the chart in a lens.
• Tap Deselect to explore all of the data in the lens.
• Tap Details to see a table of data about the escalated cases.
• Tap Drill In to chart information about the escalated cases. Drilling in filters by escalated cases, then lets you group by other
dimensions.
Most of what you see in a dashboard is interactive or dynamic. Try tapping around and see what happens!
Filter Your Data

team.
Filter Your Data

team.
1. If global filters are set up for your dashboard, tap to open the Global Filters panel.
2. Tap a filter to open the filter configuration panel.
3. Change the filter settings, and tap Done.
The visualizations in your dashboard change to show the data through the filter you created.

1. Explore your dashboard by setting filters and tapping chart elements.
2. To reset the dashboard to its initial state, tap .

When you look at data in an exploratory mode, you do so in a lens. A lens has several aspects: it’s how you view data in a dataset, it’s the
place where you explore the data graphically, and it’s the basis for building any dashboard.
1. You can continue exploring data in a saved lens or start exploring data in a new lens.
a. To continue exploring data in a saved lens, tap Lenses, and then select a lens.
The lens opens and shows data that might have applied measures, groupings, filters, and chart types.
636
b. To start exploring data in a new lens, tap Datasets, and then select a dataset.
A new lens opens and shows the dataset’s total count of rows.
2.
Explore by tapping Build and adding measures and groupings.
637

Change Measures

1.
2.
Next to the chart element that you want to represent the group, tap . Note that the chart elements vary for different charts.
3. Under Add a Group, tap one of the dimensions to assign it to the chart element. For example, in a bar chart, each bar could be a
member of the group.
638
The visualization in your lens changes to show the data grouped by the dimension that you selected.
Change Measures
1.
2.
To change a measure, tap it. To add another measure, tap next to the chart element you want to represent the measure. Note
that the chart elements vary for different charts.
3. Choose an aggregation function, such as count or sum.
4. Choose a field or value to aggregate by.
639

1.
2. From left of the measure you want to sort by, sort Ascending, Descending, or Off.
640

1.
While viewing data in a lens, tap View.
A gallery of chart types appears. You can slide the lower portion of the window up to see more chart types, and down to see your
chart.
641
2. Select a chart type.

The chart visualization changes to match your selection.
Switch between Apps

1. Tap the APPS tab.
2. Select an app.
The app opens, granting access to its collection of dashboards and lenses.
Share a visualization by sending a link to your colleagues.
Keep in mind that lenses and dashboards within the CRM Analytics Shared App are accessible to everyone in your organization. All users
can at least view the contents of the Shared App, unless you restrict access. All other apps—and the lenses and dashboards that they
contain—are private unless you explicitly share an app with a specific user, group, or role. To manage access to apps, open CRM Analytics
in a desktop Web browser.
To share a visualization, follow these steps.
1.
While viewing a lens or dashboard, tap Actions.
2. Select one of the options for sharing a link.
642

Tap to open the navigation menu, and select Settings.
• Send Event Logs: Option to send event logs automatically from your default email address to Salesforce.
• Developer Mode: This setting enables features for dashboard designers, including notifications about auto-formatting when
dashboards open. When Developer Mode is on, the designer control appears in the lower left corner of the dashboard ( ). Tap
it to set Developer Mode to show widget names.



Supported Devices
You can use CRM Analytics on Android devices running Android 5 or later.
Salesforce Editions and Licenses
For information about which Salesforce editions and licenses you need to log in to a Salesforce org from CRM Analytics, see Licenses
for CRM Analytics in the Salesforce help.
Wireless Connection
A Wi-Fi® or cellular network connection is required to communicate with Salesforce. For the best performance, we recommend using
Wi-Fi.
643
Locales and Languages

CRM Analytics is available in all supported languages, with these limitations:
• We don’t support right-to-left languages, such as Arabic and Hebrew.
• A subset of error messages are available in English only.

General Limitations
Feature Limitations
Layout Landscape mode is supported only for tablets. Portrait mode is supported for both tablets and phones. Split
Save and clone You can’t save or clone lenses.
Delete You can’t delete datasets or lenses from your mobile device.
Import You can’t import data to your mobile device.
Playground Local playground data isn’t supported.
Links You can link to external sites from CRM Analytics assets but not from external sites.

• Offline mode isn’t available.
• To switch orgs, you need to log out first.
• You can’t view item metadata.
Feature Limitations
• Pivot tables aren’t supported.
• Sankey charts aren’t supported.
• Rating charts aren’t supported.
Widgets Image
644
Feature Limitations
Number
a Compare Table.
in the CRM Analytics for Android on your local device. Some widgets appear different on mobile.
Studio
• To optimize dashboard for mobile, generate a layout for phone or tablet in the dashboard designer.
Set Up and Manage CRM Analytics on Mobile

Optimize dashboard layouts for mobile devices, and administer CRM Analytics for mobile.
Access Data When You’re Offline

View and analyze data on your mobile device when internet access isn’t available.
Generate Unique CRM Analytics Dashboard Layouts for Different Devices
After you add widgets to a dashboard, optimize it for viewing on smaller screens. For example, remove widgets from a layout for
on-the-go mobile users, and rearrange widgets for users with tablet-sized screens.
Connected App for CRM Analytics on Mobile
Install the CRM Analytics App Package to allow your mobile clients to easily connect to your org. This package contains the Connected
App component that gives you control over who’s logging in and how your mobile clients share images and links.
Connected App for Wave Web
Use the Wave Web App Package when you want to manage how web clients like mobile browsers and apps display CRM Analytics
content. This package contains the Wave Web Connected App component, which gives you access to and control of the CRM
Analytics REST API endpoints that the app uses.
Enable CRM Analytics App Push Notifications
Push notifications let your users know when their data conditions have been met. For example, push notifications let users know
when a number goal was reached or when it dipped below a specified amount.
Customize CRM Analytics for iOS using Mobile SDK
Set custom login servers and manage access to settings on CRM Analytics for iOS.
Launch CRM Analytics Assets with URLs
The CRM Analytics mobile app supports deep linking URL schemes, which allow a user to launch the app from a third-party or web
application.
645
Access Data When You’re Offline

View and analyze data on your mobile device when internet access isn’t available.
EDITIONS
Tip: Control whether offline access is available to mobile users. From Setup, enter
Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Select or deselect Enable Mobile Available in: Available in
Offline, and then click Save. Salesforce Classic and
When you have internet access, set up Mobile Offline. Tap the three dots next to the name of a
dashboard, lens, or dataset to view its details panel. Then tap Make Available Offline (1). When Available with CRM
the asset finishes downloading (2), you’re ready to take data analysis anywhere you want to go. Analytics, which is available
Edition.
Analytics uses live data whenever you have internet access. Also, offline assets aren’t automatically updated when internet access is
available. Keep your offline data fresh by tapping Refresh Offline Data (3) when internet access is available.
To see all assets available for offline access, tap the filter icon (4), and then select Offline (5).
646
To remove offline access for a specific asset, open the details panel, and then tap the check mark above Available Offline (6). To remove
all offline access, go to Settings, tap Offline, and then tap Remove all offline data (7).
647
Keep these considerations in mind when using Mobile Offline.

• To save on mobile data costs, offline data is downloaded using Wi-Fi only. To download data using both Wi-Fi and cellular networks,
go to Settings, tap Offline, and then turn off Wi-Fi Only.
• If assets exceed 750 MB or the storage capacity of the device, they aren’t available for offline access.
• Mobile Offline settings apply to individual mobile devices and aren’t synced across multiple devices.
• When removing offline data, all data used by an asset is removed unless another offline asset uses the same data.
• All offline data is removed from the device when you log out or uninstall the app.
• Offline-enabled assets are stored on the device using Salesforce encryption standards for mobile devices. Unencrypted data is never
stored on a device at any time.
• Some features aren’t supported for offline dashboards and lenses.
– Custom maps
– Linking
– Personal views
– Save, Save As
– Post to Chatter, Share via Email
– APEX, SOQL
648

After you add widgets to a dashboard, optimize it for viewing on smaller screens. For example, remove widgets from a layout for on-the-go
mobile users, and rearrange widgets for users with tablet-sized screens.
When you generate a new layout, widgets from the currently selected layout can be automatically added to the new layout or you can
add widgets manually. If the current layout contains multiple pages, CRM Analytics also copies the pages to the new layout. You can
also add and rearrange widgets in one layout without affecting other layouts.
Note: Use Manage Layouts to enable or disable synchronization between layouts.
2. To create a layout, click Add Layout (1). To open an existing layout, select it from the list (2).
3. Add and rearrange widgets, and choose other layout properties. The designer updates the preview in real time so that you can see
how your changes affect the display.
General
Set the layout name, grid settings, and background color. The designer previews the dashboard and layout based on the layout
property settings.
Device
Specify information about the devices that can use this layout. For more information about how CRM Analytics uses these
properties to choose the right layout, see Rules for Choosing a Layout for a Device.
Background Image
To apply a background image to the entire dashboard when this layout is used, enter the details about the background image.
You don’t have to include a background image.
649
Unused Widgets
To add an unused widget to the layout, drag the widget from the Unused Widgets section to the canvas.
Note: CRM Analytics also adds the widget to other layouts if layout synchronization is on and the layouts were created
with Copy Content enabled.
Theme
Themes enable you to create and apply aesthetic properties for dashboard widgets all at once. For more information, see Manage
Widget Properties with Themes.
4. To save your layout changes, save the dashboard.

To edit a layout name or delete a layout, click Manage Layouts.
Layout Properties for Analytics Dashboard

Layout properties specify the layout name, designer grid settings, background settings, and requirements for devices that can use
this layout. The properties apply only to dashboards created in the dashboard designer.
Rules for Choosing a Layout for a Device
If multiple layouts are defined for a dashboard, CRM Analytics chooses the optimal layout when displaying the dashboard on a
device. To determine the optimal layout, CRM Analytics uses the device properties specified for each layout.
Manage Widget Properties with Themes
Themes enable you to create and apply uniform color and style properties for dashboard widgets.

Install the CRM Analytics App Package to allow your mobile clients to easily connect to your org.
EDITIONS
This package contains the Connected App component that gives you control over who’s logging
in and how your mobile clients share images and links. Available in Salesforce
1. While logged in as an admin, navigate to: Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Production
https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tB0000000cHCH Available with CRM
Sandbox Analytics, which is available
https://test.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tB0000000cHCH
2. Select Install for All Users. and Unlimited Editions. Also
If you install the Connected App only for certain roles, then only those clients are subject to
Edition.
your policies.
3. Click Done, then click the Salesforce Analytics App Package and then View Components.
USER PERMISSIONS
4. Select iOS or Android. To configure policies and other settings, click Edit. When you’re finished,
save your changes. To install and configure
For more information about Connected App settings, see Edit a Connected App. Connected App:
5. If you want to disable sharing options for mobile users, click New in the Custom Attributes
section.
All sharing options are enabled by default. To disable an option, add its attribute key and enter “false” for the attribute value.
See the table for the supported attribute keys.
650
Attribute Key Mobile clients can Mobile Device

CACHE_QUERY_RESULTS Store query cache results to disk iOS
OFFLINE_BETA Store data for offline access iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_AIRDROP Share images via AirDrop iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_CAMERAROLL Share images to Camera Roll iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_OPEN Share images to other apps and activities iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_S1 Share images to Salesforce iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_EMAIL Share images via email iOS
SHARE_LINK_NFC Share links via Near Field Communication Android

(NFC)
SHARE_LINK_BLUETOOTH Share links via Bluetooth Android
SHARE_LINK_AIRDROP Share links via AirDrop iOS
SHARE_LINK_CLIPBOARD Share links to Clipboard iOS and Android
SHARE_LINK_S1 Share links to Salesforce iOS and Android
SHARE_LINK_EMAIL Share links via email iOS and Android
SPOTLIGHT_SEARCH See CRM Analytics assets in Spotlight iOS

search results
Note: To apply custom attributes to connected users, you can revoke them and ask them to reconnect.
6. To view and control how mobile clients connect to your CRM Analytics-enabled org, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter
Connected Apps, and then select Connect Apps OAuth Usage.
You can block user sessions, revoke individual users, and drill in to user details. For more information, see Monitoring Usage for a
Connected App.
Note: For certificate-based authentication, users must set their desktop browsers to allow cookies.
For extra security, use Mobile Device Management (MDM) with the option to show only authorized hosts. The "OnlyShowAuthorizedHosts"
key allows you to hide the “Add New Account” plus sign in the mobile app. For more information, see Using MDM with Salesforce Mobile
SDK Apps.
651
Connected App for Wave Web

Use the Wave Web App Package when you want to manage how web clients like mobile browsers
EDITIONS
and apps display CRM Analytics content. This package contains the Wave Web Connected App
component, which gives you access to and control of the CRM Analytics REST API endpoints that Available in Salesforce
the app uses. Classic and Lightning
1. The Wave Web Connected App is installed automatically when CRM Analytics is enabled. To Experience.
install the app, log in as an admin and navigate to:
Available with CRM
Production: https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tj00000000YSf Analytics, which is available
Sandbox: https://test.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tj00000000YSf
Edition.
your policies.
3. Click Done, then click the Wave Web App Package and then View Components. The app
USER PERMISSIONS
package contains the Wave Web Connected App.
4. Use the App Manager to change the Wave Web Connected App configuration. To install and configure the
Connected App:
For more information about Connected App settings, see Edit a Connected App. • Manage CRM Analytics
5. To view and control how clients connect to your CRM Analytics-enabled org, from Setup, in
the Quick Find box, enter Connected Apps, and then select Connect Apps OAuth
Usage.
Connected App.
Warning: For this connected app, the only supported refresh token type is the default type, Refresh token is valid until
revoked. If you change the refresh token from the default, session validation in CRM Analytics can fail with Session expired
or invalid errors. For more information, see Manage OAuth Access Policies for a Connected App.
For issues with loading CRM Analytics dashboards in the Salesforce Mobile app when continuous IP restrictions are enabled, you can
relax the IP restrictions for the Wave Web Connected App. Relaxing the app’s IP restrictions allows users to interact with CRM Analytics
regardless of IP restrictions set for the user’s profile. For more information, see Connected App IP Relaxation and Continuous IP Enforcement.
652
Enable CRM Analytics App Push Notifications

Push notifications let your users know when their data conditions have been met. For example,
EDITIONS
push notifications let users know when a number goal was reached or when it dipped below a
specified amount. Available in Salesforce
To enable full content for notifications, follow these steps: Classic and Lightning
Experience.
1. Install the latest Connected Apps package for CRM Analytics Mobile. For more information, see
Connected App for CRM Analytics on Mobile. Available with CRM
Note: Even if you have a previous version of the Connected Apps package installed, you for an extra cost in
must install the latest version to get Push Notifications. Enterprise, Performance,
2. From Setup, enter Connected Apps in the Quick Find box, then select Manage Connected
Apps.
Edition.
3. Choose the Connected App you want to edit. If your org uses multiple Connected Apps, complete
the steps for each one.
4. If you’re authorized to do so for your company, select Display full content push notifications.
5. Click Save.
Note: Advise users to enable push notifications by opening the device Settings, tapping Notifications, and allowing notifications
for Analytics.
These types of notifications can appear to CRM Analytics app users.

• Push Notifications: Alerts that appear on a mobile device when a user has installed CRM Analytics and CRM Analytics for iOS but isn’t
using it. These alerts can consist of text, icons, and sounds, depending on the device type. If an administrator enables push notifications
for your organization, users can choose individually whether to receive push notifications on their devices.
• In-app Notifications: Alerts that keep users aware of relevant activity while they’re using the CRM Analytics app. By tapping ,a
user can view the 20 most recent notifications received within the last 90 days.
• Tracking Screen: Screen where you can see progress toward goals. When setting notifications on dashboard widgets, enable tracking
to view charts on this screen.
Note: Notifications may include text about a certain metric and its current and threshold values. To ensure that sensitive information
isn’t distributed through a third-party service without proper authorization, push notifications include minimal content unless you
enable full content in push notifications.
For example, suppose an in-app notification reads: “‘Quota Remaining’ met conditions: Amount is 265K and is greater than 250K”
By default, the equivalent push notification would be “Notification conditions met.” However, if you enabled full content in push
notifications, this push notification would include the same (full) content as the in-app notification.
Customize CRM Analytics for iOS using Mobile SDK

Set custom login servers and manage access to settings on CRM Analytics for iOS.
The following set up options are available for CRM Analytics for iOS.
Set Custom Login Servers
Manage Access to Settings
653
Launch CRM Analytics Assets with URLs

The CRM Analytics mobile app supports deep linking URL schemes, which allow a user to launch the app from a third-party or web
application.
An administrator or developer can customize a URL scheme to perform one of the following actions when the app launches:
• View a particular asset type in the CRM Analytics app (dashboard, lens, or application)
• Apply a runtime state (selections and filters)
For example, you can create a deep link to a dashboard in the CRM Analytics app. Then when users receive the link in an email, they can
click it to go directly to the dashboard.
Note: Some deep link scheme features, such as passing filters and selections, apply only to dashboards. Support is only for
dashboards that are built using the dashboard designer.
URL Scheme Format
Use the following format to make a request to a CRM Analytics app.
<scheme_name>://<assetType>/<assetID>?orgId=<orgId>&loginHost=<loginHost>&dashboardState=<url-encoded
json>
The following parameters are supported.
Variable Type Description Required

scheme_name String The value must be sfanalytics. Yes
assetType String Supported values: Yes

dashboard
lens
application
assetID String Unique asset identifier. The identifier is the 18-character Yes
code beginning with 0FK found in the asset URL.
orgID String ID of the organization that contains the content. If users Yes
are logged in to the same org ID, they are directed to the
content. If users are not logged in to the same org ID, they
are redirected to the login screen.
loginHost String URL that displays the login screen when the user is not Yes
logged in to the application.
dashboardState String Available only when assetType is dashboard. No

State of the dashboard and all its datasets. The state
depends on user selection, start values, global filters, and
external or initial filters that are applicable to the dataset.
Example (not including dashboardState):

sfanalytics://dashboard/0FKB00000006TFVOA2?orgId=00DB00000000XXX&loginHost=cs4.salesforce.com
Refer to the information in the following tables when constructing the JSON string for dashboardState.
654
dashboardState
Property Name Type Description

datasets Map<String, state[]> The list of datasets for which a specific state is applied. The key string
is the API name of the dataset.
state

fields String[] The list of dimension or measure fields for which selection or filtering
is applied.
filter dashboardFilter The filter that is applied to the dashboard.
selection String[] The list of values that is selected.
dashboardFilter

operator String Supported operators for dimensions: “in”, “not in”, “matches”
Supported operators for measures: “==”, “!=”, “>=”, “>”, “<=”, “<”
values String[] or Double[] The list of dimension or measure values corresponding to the fields.
JSON Examples
The following syntax causes value1 and value2 to be selected on field1. It also filters on field2 based on operator1
with values3 and values4.
{'datasets' : {'dataset1': [ {'fields': ['field1'], 'selection': ['$value1', '$value2']},
{'fields': ['field2'], 'filter': { 'operator': 'operator1', 'values': ['$value3',
'$value4']}}]}}
Example of the dashboardState JSON.

{
"datasets": {
"Opportunities": [
{
"fields": ["OpptyName"],
"selection": ["RelateIQ", "BeyondCore"],
"filter": {
"operator": "not in",
"values": ["Salesforce"]
}
},
{
"fields": ["State", "Country"],
655
"selection": [["TX", "US"]],

"filter": {
"operator": "in",
"values": [["TX, US"], ["AL", "DE"]]
}
}
],
"Accounts": [
{
"fields": ["Revenue"],
"selection": [],
"filter": {
"operator": ">=",
"values": [[1000000]]
}
}
]
}
}
The JSON must be rewritten with no whitespace characters.

{"datasets":{"Opportunities":[{"fields":["OpptyName"],"selection":["RelateIQ","BeyondCore"],"filter":{"operator":"not
in","values":["Salesforce"]}},{"fields":["State","Country"],"selection":[["TX","US"]],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":[["TX,
US"],["AL","DE"]]}}],"Accounts":[{"fields":["Revenue"],"selection":[],"filter":{"operator":">=","values":[[1000000]]}}]}}
Finally, the JSON must be rewritten with URL encoding.

%
7
B
%2d
a
t
as
e
t
s%
2%
3
A
%7
B
%
2O
po
r
t
un
i
t
ie
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%7
B
%
2f
i
el
d
s
%2%
3
A
%5
B
%
2O
pt
y
N
am
e
%
2%
5
D%
2
C
%2s
e
l
ec
t
i
on
%
2%
3
A
%5
B
%
2R
e
la
t
e
IQ
%
2%
2
C
%2B
e
y
on
d
C
or
e
%
2%
5
D%
2
C
%2f
i
l
te
r
%
2%
3
A%
7
B
%2o
p
e
ra
t
o
r%
2%
3
A
%2n
o
t
%2
0
i
n%
2%
2
C
%2v
a
l
ue
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%2S
a
l
es
f
o
rc
e
%
2%
5
D%
7
D
%7
D
%
2C
%
7
B%
2f
i
e
ld
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%2S
t
a
te
%
2%
2
C
%2C
o
u
nt
r
y
%2%
5
D
%2
C
%
2s
e
le
c
t
io
n
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%5
B
%
2T
X
%2%
2
C
%2U
S
%
2%
5
D%
5
D
%2
C
%
2f
i
lt
e
r
%2%
3
A
%7
B
%
2o
p
er
a
t
or
%
2%
3
A
%2i
n
%
2%
2
C%
2v
a
l
ue
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%5
B
%
2T
X
%2
C
%
20
U
S
%2%
5
D
%2
C
%
5B
%
2A
L
%
2%
2
C%
2D
E
%
2%
5
D%
5
D
%7
D
%
7D
%
5
D%
2
C
%2A
co
u
n
ts
%
2%
3
A
%5
B
%
7B
%
2f
i
e
ld
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%2R
e
v
en
u
e
%2%
5
D
%2
C
%
2s
e
le
c
t
io
n
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%5
D
%
2C
%
2f
i
l
te
r
%
2%
3
A%
7
B
%2o
p
e
ra
t
o
r%
2%
3
A
%2%
3
E
%3
D
%
2%
2
C%
2v
a
l
ue
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
1000%
5
D
%7
D
%
7D
%
5
D%
7
D
%7
D
With this URL encoded JSON, the example earlier in this topic is modified as follows.
sfanalytics://dashboard/0FKB00000006TFVOA2?orgId=00DB00000000XXX
&
l
o
g
in
H
o
st
=
c
s
4.
s
a
le
s
f
o
rc
e
.
co
m
&
d
as
h
b
oa
r
d
S
ta
t
e
=%
7
B
%
2d
a
ta
s
e
t
s%
2%
3
A
%
7B
%
2O
po
r
t
u
ni
t
i
es
%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
7
B%
2f
i
e
l
ds
%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
2O
pt
y
N
a
me
%
2%
5
D
%
2C
%
2s
e
l
e
ct
i
o
n%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
2R
e
l
a
te
I
Q
%2%
2
C
%
2B
e
yo
n
d
C
or
e
%
2%
5
D
%2
C
%
2f
i
l
te
r
%
2%
3
A
%7
B
%
2o
p
e
ra
t
o
r
%2%
3
A
%
2n
o
t%
2
0
i
n%
2%
2
C
%
2v
a
lu
e
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%
2S
a
le
s
f
o
rc
e
%
2%
5
D
%7
D
%
7
D%
2
C
%7
B
%
2f
i
e
ld
s
%
2%
3
A
%5
B
%
2S
t
a
te
%
2%
2
C
%
2C
o
un
t
r
y
%2%
5
D
%
2C
%
2s
e
l
e
ct
i
o
n%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
5
B%
2T
X
%
2%
2
C
%2U
S
%
2%
5
D
%5
D
%
2
C%
2f
i
l
t
er
%
2%
3
A
%
7B
%
2o
p
e
r
at
o
r
%2%
3
A
%
2i
n
%2%
2
C
%
2v
a
lu
e
s
%
2%
3
A%
5
B
%
5B
%
2T
X
%
2
C%
2
0
US
%
2%
5
D
%
2C
%
5
B%
2A
L
%
2%
2
C
%2D
E
%
2%
5
D
%5
D
%
7
D%
7
D
%5
D
%
2
C%
2A
co
u
n
t
s%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
7
B%
2f
i
e
l
ds
%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
2R
e
v
e
nu
e
%
2%
5
D
%2
C
%
2s
e
l
ec
t
i
o
n%
2%
3
A
%
5B
%
5
D%
2
C
%
2f
i
lt
e
r
%
2%
3
A%
7
B
%
2o
p
er
a
t
o
r%
2%
3
A
%
2%
3
E%
3
D
%
2%
2
C%
2v
a
l
u
es
%
2%
3
A
%
5B
1
000%
5
D
%
7D
%
7
D%
5
D
%
7D
%
7
D

General Limitations
Feature Limitations
Layout Landscape mode is supported only for iPad®. Portrait mode is supported for both iPad and iPhone®. Split
Delete • Deleting a dashboard or lens in CRM Analytics on your mobile device also deletes it in your Salesforce
org on the Web.
• After it’s deleted, a dashboard or lens can’t be recovered. The only exception is the playground sample
data, which can be restored from the Settings screen.
656
Feature Limitations
• Datasets can’t be deleted from your mobile device.
Playground Imported or created data, lenses, and dashboards aren’t backed up in a device backup. Playground sample
data can be restored from the Settings screen.

Feature Limitations
• Frozen table columns in dashboards don’t stay frozen when viewed on CRM Analytics for iOS using any
iOS device.
Widgets Image
Number
a Compare Table.
in the CRM Analytics for iOS on your local device. Some widgets appear different on mobile.
Studio
• To optimize dashboards for mobile, generate a layout for phone or tablet in the dashboard designer.
Data Import Limitations
Feature Limitations
CRM Analytics Data • Only CSV, TSV, and XLSX files, and ZIP files containing these types, can be imported as dataset.
Connector
657
Feature Limitations
• Imported datasets aren’t available in CRM Analytics on the Web. They’re only available on your mobile
device in the playground.
• Imported datasets aren’t encrypted.
Date Formats Dates can be imported as any of these formats:

• YYYY
• YYYY-MM
• YY-MM
• YYYY-MM-DD
• YY-MM-DD
• YYYYMMDD
• YYMMDD
• YYDDMM
• MM/DD/YY
• DD/MM/YY
• YY/MM/DD
• YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
• YYMMDDHHMMSS
• YY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SSZ
• YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYMMDDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYMMDDTHH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SSZ
• YYYYDDMM
• YYYY/MM/DD
• YYYY/DD/MM
• DD/MM/YYYY
• MM/DD/YYYY
• YYYY-DD-MM
• DD-MM-YYYY
• MM-DD-YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY
• DD.MM.YYYY HH:MM:SS
• DD.MM.YY HH:MM:SS
• MM.DD.YYYY
658
Feature Limitations
• DD-Mon-YY
• DD-Mon-YYYY
• DD-Mon-YYYY HH:mm
• YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS
• YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS
• YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM
• MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM
• DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS
• DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• DD-MM-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• MM-DD-YY HH:MM:SS AM/PM
• YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM
• DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM
• MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH:MM:SS
• MM-DD-YYYYTHH:MM:SS
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH:MM
• MM-DD-YYYYTHH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS-HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS+HH:MM
• YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SSTZD
• YYYYMMDDTHH:MM:SS
• HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YYYY
659
Feature Limitations
• HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YYYYTHH

General Limitations
Feature Limitations
Layout Landscape mode is supported only for tablets. Portrait mode is supported for both tablets and phones. Split
Save and clone You can’t save or clone lenses.
Delete You can’t delete datasets or lenses from your mobile device.
Import You can’t import data to your mobile device.
Playground Local playground data isn’t supported.
Links You can link to external sites from CRM Analytics assets but not from external sites.

• Offline mode isn’t available.
• To switch orgs, you need to log out first.
• You can’t view item metadata.
Feature Limitations
• Pivot tables aren’t supported.
• Sankey charts aren’t supported.
• Rating charts aren’t supported.
660
Analyze Your Data Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform
Feature Limitations
Widgets Image
Number
a Compare Table.
in the CRM Analytics for Android on your local device. Some widgets appear different on mobile.
Studio
• To optimize dashboard for mobile, generate a layout for phone or tablet in the dashboard designer.
Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform

Set up your organization to use CRM Analytics and assign basic permission sets or create and assign
EDITIONS
your own custom permission sets.
The information here describes how to set up your organization to use CRM Analytics and CRM Available in Salesforce
Analytics templated apps and Apps. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
1. Learn about CRM Analytics Platform Licenses and Permission Sets Available with CRM
Introduce yourself to CRM Analytics setup fundamentals, which apply to both basic and advanced Analytics, which is available
setup procedures. for an extra cost in
2. Learn about Internal Analytics Users and Unlimited Editions. Also
Analytics uses internal users, Integration User and Security User, to access Salesforce data, available in Developer
preview data in Data Prep recipes, and enforce row-level security on datasets. Edition.
3. Basic CRM Analytics Platform Setup
Follow these few steps to give users in your organization access to CRM Analytics platform,
templates, and apps quickly. Basic setup uses permission sets included with the CRM Analytics Plus or CRM Analytics Growth licenses,
which cover the majority of most organizations’ analytics needs.
4. Advanced CRM Analytics Platform Setup
Follow these steps to learn the details of CRM Analytics permissions and to create and assign your own custom permission sets.
5. Complete Setting Up the CRM Analytics Platform
After assigning permission sets with either basic or advanced setup, follow these optional procedures to enhance the CRM Analytics
experience and fine-tune CRM Analytics access to Salesforce data.
6. CRM Analytics Requirements
This section provides requirements for using CRM Analytics.
661
7. CRM Analytics Limits

When using CRM Analytics, keep these limits in mind.
8. CRM Analytics Limitations
CRM Analytics differs from other Salesforce features in some ways.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up the Analytics Platform with Licenses Purchased Before October 20, 2015
Migrating From CRM Analytics Licenses Purchased Before 10/20/2015 to New CRM Analytics Platform Licenses
CRM Analytics Requirements
CRM Analytics Limitations
Learn about CRM Analytics Platform Licenses and Permission Sets

Introduce yourself to CRM Analytics setup fundamentals, which apply to both basic and advanced setup procedures.
Each CRM Analytics Growth and CRM Analytics Plus license is a single-user license that provides access to CRM Analytics. The license
limits your instance of the CRM Analytics to 1 billion rows of data. If you require more data, you can purchase CRM Analytics - Additional
Data Rows, which entitles you to 100 million more rows.
Important:
• CRM Analytics license data storage limits are contractual, not technical. Licensee agrees to strictly monitor its total number of
data rows.
• If you purchased a CRM Analytics Growth license before October 20, 2015 with Analytics Cloud Builder or Analytics Cloud
Explorer permission set licenses: Read Set up the CRM Analytics Platform With Licenses Purchased Before October 20, 2015. If
you’re migrating users from Builder or Explorer licenses to the new CRM Analytics Growth license: See Migrating From CRM
Analytics Licenses Purchased Before 10/20/2015 to New CRM Analytics Platform Licenses before you start the setup process
for those users.
• If you disable CRM Analytics, user permissions are removed from each defined permission set. If you re-enable CRM Analytics
later, you must define the permission sets again.
CRM Analytics License Permission Sets

The CRM Analytics Growth license includes two prebuilt permission sets:
• CRM Analytics Growth Admin enables all permissions required to administer the CRM Analytics platform, including permissions to
create and manage CRM Analytics templated apps and Apps.
• CRM Analytics Growth User enables all permissions required to use the CRM Analytics platform and CRM Analytics templated apps
and Apps.
The CRM Analytics Plus license includes two prebuilt permission sets:
• CRM Analytics Plus Admin enables all permissions required to administer the CRM Analytics platform and Einstein Discovery, including
permissions to create and manage CRM Analytics templated apps and Apps, and Einstein Discovery for Reports.
• CRM Analytics Plus User enables all permissions required to use the CRM Analytics platform, Einstein Discovery, and CRM Analytics
templated apps and Apps, and Einstein Discovery for Reports.
Basic setup involves choosing and assigning the prebuilt permission sets. To create your own custom CRM Analytics permission sets,
use advanced setup.
662
When you assign any CRM Analytics permission set to users in your org, Salesforce auto-assigns the CRM Analytics Growth permission
set license to that user.
Note: For efficiency, you can assign a permission set to groups of users. You can also assign multiple permission sets to a user.
You can assign a CRM Analytics permission set license along with any of the following Salesforce user licenses:
• Lightning Platform (app subscription)
• Lightning Platform (one app)
• Full CRM
• Salesforce Platform
• Salesforce Platform One
SEE ALSO:
Learn about Internal Analytics Users

Analytics uses internal users, Integration User and Security User, to access Salesforce data, preview data in Data Prep recipes, and enforce
row-level security on datasets.
Analytics uses the permissions of the Integration User to extract data from Salesforce objects and fields when a dataflow or recipe job
runs. Because the Integration User has View All Data access, consider restricting access to particular objects and fields that contain
sensitive data. If the dataflow or recipe is configured to extract data from an object or field on which the Integration User does not have
permission, the job fails. The Integration User permissions restrict the data extracted from Salesforce only—they don’t affect access to
the data in datasets. To restrict user access to data in datasets, set up row-level security.
To enable the interactive preview in recipes, Data Prep uses the Security User. When a user previews the results of a recipe, Data Prep
shows only the results that the logged-in user has permission to access. The permissions of the Security User don’t affect the data shown
in the preview.
When you query a dataset that has row-level security based on the Salesforce User object, Analytics uses the permissions of the Security
User to access the User object and its fields. The Security User must have at least read permission on each User object field included in
a predicate. (A predicate is a filter condition that defines row-level security for a dataset.) By default, the Security User has read permission
on all standard fields of the User object. If the predicate is based on a custom field, then grant the Security User read access on the field.
If the Security User does not have read access on all User object fields included in a predicate expression, an error appears when you try
to query the dataset using that predicate.
Important: Because Analytics requires the Integration User and Security User to access Salesforce data and preview recipe changes
to data, do not delete either of these users.
SEE ALSO:
Control Access to Salesforce Objects and Fields
Set Up Dataset Security to Control Access to Rows
663
Basic CRM Analytics Platform Setup

Follow these few steps to give users in your organization access to CRM Analytics platform, templates, and apps quickly. Basic setup
uses permission sets included with the CRM Analytics Plus or CRM Analytics Growth licenses, which cover the majority of most organizations’
analytics needs.
Set Up the CRM Analytics Admin
1. In Salesforce Setup, select Users.
2. Select Permission Sets.
3. Select one of the following prebuilt permission sets that is on your org.
• CRM Analytics Growth Admin enables all permissions required to administer the CRM Analytics platform, including permissions
to create and manage creating CRM Analytics templated apps and Apps.
• CRM Analytics Plus Admin enables all permissions required to administer the CRM Analytics platform and Einstein Discovery,
including permissions to create and manage CRM Analytics templated apps and Apps.
That opens the page for the selected permission set.
4. Click Manage Assignments.

5. Click Add Assignments.
6. Select the CRM Analytics admin user by checking the box next to their name in the left-hand column.
7. Click Assign.
You see a page that tells you if the permission set has been assigned. If permission set didn’t succeed for one or more users, Salesforce
tells you why. You can fix the problem and try again.
Enable CRM Analytics
1. Go to Salesforce Setup and enter Analytics in the Quick Find / Search field.
2. Select Getting Started.
3. Click Enable CRM Analytics.
Select and Assign User Permission Sets
1. In Salesforce Setup, select Users.
2. Select Permission Sets.
3. Select one of the following prebuilt permission sets that is on your org.
• CRM Analytics Growth User enables all permissions required to use the CRM Analytics platform and CRM Analytics templated
apps and Apps.
• CRM Analytics Plus User enables all permissions required to use the CRM Analytics platform, Einstein Discovery, and CRM
Analytics templated apps and Apps
That opens the page for the selected permission set.
4. Click Manage Assignments. The next page shows the users already assigned the selected permission set.
5. To see all the users in your org click Add Assignments.
6. Select one or more users by checking the box next to their name in the left-hand column.
7. Click Assign.
You see a page that tells you if the permission set has been assigned. If permission set didn’t succeed for one or more users, Salesforce
tells you why. You can fix the problem and try again.
664
Advanced CRM Analytics Platform Setup

Follow these steps to learn the details of CRM Analytics permissions and to create and assign your own custom permission sets.
Tip: For best results, follow the steps in the order shown.
1. Learn about CRM Analytics Permission Set Licenses and User Permissions
When you create your own CRM Analytics permission sets, you start by selecting the CRM Analytics Growth permission set license
instead of using the prebuilt permission sets. The permission set license includes the user permissions required to explore data with
and manage the CRM Analytics platform.
2. Identify CRM Analytics Platform User Types
Identifying types of CRM Analytics platform users helps assure that custom permission sets meet your team’s analytics needs.
3. Enable CRM Analytics and Create Permission Sets
After identifying user types, create your permission sets then enable CRM Analytics in your org.
4. Assign CRM Analytics Permission Sets to Users
Assign custom permission sets to one or more users—either one at a time, or in bulk—to give them access to CRM Analytics
functionality.
Learn about CRM Analytics Permission Set Licenses and User Permissions
When you create your own CRM Analytics permission sets, you start by selecting the CRM Analytics Growth permission set license instead
of using the prebuilt permission sets. The permission set license includes the user permissions required to explore data with and manage
the CRM Analytics platform.
• Each CRM Analytics platform user needs a CRM Analytics Growth permission set license to use the CRM Analytics platform. Creating
a permission set and assigning it to a user auto-assigns the CRM Analytics platform permission set license to that user. You can also
manually assign permission set licenses to users.
• Experience Cloud site users need a CRM Analytics for Communities permission set license to view CRM Analytics apps shared via
dashboards embedded in sites or Visualforce pages.
The CRM Analytics Growth permission set license enables the following permissions, except Manage CRM Analytics Private Assets.
User Permission What It Enables
Access Analytics SAQL Editor (Pilot Feature) This user permission is no longer used and will be removed in a future release.
Add CRM Analytics Remote Connections Add connections to access data from external data sources.
Adoption Analytics Templates and Apps Create and use apps based on the Adoption Analytics template.
Create CRM Analytics Apps Create, edit, delete, and share CRM Analytics applications.
Create and Edit CRM Analytics Dashboards Create, edit, and delete CRM Analytics dashboards.
Download CRM Analytics Data Download screenshots and data in tabular format through the CRM Analytics
user interface.
Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows Edit, delete, and use remote connections; add and remove connected objects;
run and schedule data sync; create, edit, delete, run, schedule, and monitor
dataflows and recipes. Use discretion when assigning this user permission
because it enables access to all Salesforce object data to which the Integration
User has access. See Salesforce Data Access in CRM Analytics.
665
Edit Dataset Recipes Create, edit, and run recipes to create datasets. Monitor dataflow and system
jobs in the monitor. Doesn’t enable editing security predicates in existing
recipes.
Manage CRM Analytics Private Assets Delete datasets from another user’s My Private App. See Delete a Dataset
This user permission isn’t included in any of the packaged permission sets.
You have to manually assign it to a permission set. To add this user permission
to a permission set in a Sandbox org, the permission set can’t have a license
assigned to it.
If a license is assigned to the permission set, the Manage CRM Analytics Private
Assets user permission doesn’t appear when adding user permissions to
permission set.
Manage CRM Analytics Access all CRM Analytics features. Provides CRM Analytics administrator-level
capabilities.
Manage CRM Analytics Custom Maps Add, edit, and delete maps, and upload geoJSON files.
Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps Create and manage apps based on CRM Analytics Templates. Edit CRM Analytics
dataflows. Edit recipes. Monitor dataflow and system jobs in the monitor. Some
templates require extra permissions. See the help for each template.
Trend Report Data in CRM Analytics Trend the data of a report with a CRM Analytics dataflow.
Upload External Data to CRM Analytics Upload external data to CRM Analytics to create a dataset. Monitor dataflow
and system jobs in the monitor.
Use CRM Analytics Open CRM Analytics; run CRM Analytics apps to which you have access; view
their datasets, lenses, and dashboards; and create and edit lenses.
Use CRM Analytics Templated Apps Use apps based on CRM Analytics Templates. Can also create, edit, and delete
CRM Analytics dashboards. Some templates require extra permissions. See the
help for each template.
You create your own permission sets based on these permissions.
Note: When you create permission sets for CRM Analytics users, selecting any CRM Analytics permission automatically enables
the “Use CRM Analytics” permission as well. Also, the type of access granted on an app controls the actions that can be performed
666
on its datasets, lenses, and dashboards. For example, if a user has the “Use CRM Analytics” permission, the user must also have
Viewer access on an app to view its datasets, lenses, and dashboards.
The CRM Analytics for Communities permission set license enables the “View CRM Analytics on Experience Cloud pages” permission.
That permission enables external users to view CRM Analytics dashboards embedded in their Experience Cloud sites. See Enable CRM
Analytics for Experience Cloud Sites on page 672.
Identify CRM Analytics Platform User Types

Identifying types of CRM Analytics platform users helps assure that custom permission sets meet
EDITIONS
your team’s analytics needs.
The CRM Analytics Growth license includes the permissions that enable users in your organization Available in Salesforce
to import, work with, and explore data using the CRM Analytics platform. The license also includes Classic and Lightning
permissions that let administrators manage CRM Analytics. To set up CRM Analytics in the most Experience.
useful way, think through the different ways people access CRM Analytics features and categorize
Available with CRM
them into user types. Here are a few examples. Analytics, which is available
Most people on your team fall into two basic categories: for an extra cost in
• Users, who view CRM Analytics dashboards, lenses, and datasets and occasionally import data
to CRM Analytics.
• Administrators or managers, who access to the full range of CRM Analytics functionality to Edition.
create apps, dashboards, lenses, and datasets, edit data, and otherwise customize the CRM
Analytics experience.
Accordingly, when you set up the CRM Analytics platform, creating two basic permission sets can meet the needs of most of your
organization:
• A “view” permission set that contains the permissions needed by most basic-level users when they access CRM Analytics.
• A “manage” permission set that’s reserved for a select few administrators and managers and contains permissions to use all CRM
Analytics features
You can set up CRM Analytics however you want, defining other user types and permissions sets based on the needs of users in your
organization. For example, you can create a “superuser” permission set for users who create and share apps and dashboards. Or, a “data
wizard” permission set would enable other users to work closely with datasets.
We focus on two main types of people on your team -- users and administrators -- in the example permission sets we describe in our
detailed setup instructions.
Enable CRM Analytics and Create Permission Sets

After identifying user types, create your permission sets then enable CRM Analytics in your org.
Create Permission Sets
Create permission sets made up of CRM Analytics user permissions. We show you how to create two permission sets:
• Manage CRM Analytics permission set, for users who administer CRM Analytics.
• View CRM Analytics permission set, for users who explore app dashboards and datasets.
Note:
• Customers who purchased CRM Analytics before October 20, 2015: See Set up the CRM Analytics Platform With Licenses
Purchased Before October 20, 2015 before following the instructions here.
667
• The Manage CRM Analytics permission set enables the equivalent functionality provided by the previous Analytics Builder
license (purchased before October 20, 2015). If you have a Builder license or you’re migrating to the current CRM Analytics
platform license, follow these steps to create a permission set with the same functionality.
• The View CRM Analytics permission set enables the equivalent functionality provided by the previous CRM Analytics Explorer
license (purchased before October 20, 2015). If you have an Explorer license or you’re migrating to the current CRM Analytics
platform license, follow these steps to create a permission set with the same functionality.
1. In the Setup menu, click Users | Permission Sets and then click New.
2. Enter Manage CRM Analytics or View CRM Analytics in the Label field, as appropriate. This automatically creates
the API name as well. You can change it if you like, but it can’t include spaces, end with an underscore, or have two consecutive
underscores.
3. For License, select the license to associate with this permission set.
When you select a specific permission set license, any user assigned to the permission set is auto-assigned the permission set license.
If you select --None--, you must manually assign the permission set license to users before you can add them to the new permission
set.
4. Click Save. The Permission Set Overview page shows the new permission set. Now add user permissions to the set.
5. Click System Permissions to open the list of user permissions enabled by the CRM Analytics license. Then click Edit.
6. Do one of the following.
• If you're creating the Manage CRM Analytics permission set, select "Manage CRM Analytics" user permissions and click Save
then Save again to confirm settings. You’ve successfully created a permission set that enables access to all CRM Analytics features.
You don’t have to select any of the other individual permissions. Assign this permission set sparingly because it provides access
to all CRM Analytics features, many of which are inappropriate for most analytics users.
• If you're creating the View CRM Analytics permission set, select "Use CRM Analytics" and "Upload External Data to CRM Analytics"
user permissions and click Save. You’ve successfully created a permission set that enables a user to view the CRM Analytics
datasets, lenses, and dashboards that they have permission to view, and to upload data files from outside Salesforce.
668
7. You can now assign your new permission set to users, which is covered in Assign Permission Sets to Users. Repeat these steps for
every user in your organization who requires access to CRM Analytics.
8. Enable CRM Analytics
a. Go to Salesforce Setup and enter Analytics in the Quick Find / Search field.
b. Select Getting Started.
c. Click Enable CRM Analytics.
Assign CRM Analytics Permission Sets to Users

Assign custom permission sets to one or more users—either one at a time, or in bulk—to give
USER PERMISSIONS
them access to CRM Analytics functionality.
1. In the Setup menu, click Users | Permission Sets and then click New. To assign a permission set
to users:
2. Click the permission set you want to assign to users. If you’ve followed the instructions in Enable • Assign Permission Sets
CRM Analytics and Create Service Analytics Permission Sets on page 667, select either the
Manage CRM Analytics or View CRM Analytics permission sets.
3. Click Manage Assignments and click Add Assignments.
4. Select the users who need access to CRM Analytics, and click Done. When you assign the permission set to users, Salesforce
auto-assigns the CRM Analytics Cloud - CRM Analytics Platform permission set license to those users.
Assign the Manage CRM Analytics permission set sparingly, since it provides access to all CRM Analytics features. Assign it only to users
who administer or manage the CRM Analytics platform.
Complete Setting Up the CRM Analytics Platform

After assigning permission sets with either basic or advanced setup, follow these optional procedures to enhance the CRM Analytics
experience and fine-tune CRM Analytics access to Salesforce data.
Enable Previews for All Assets

Make it easier for users to browse analytics assets in collections. Replace generic icons with preview thumbnails of your CRM Analytics
contents and Lightning reports and dashboards, including those that have row-level security restrictions.
Enable CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud Sites
Securely share CRM Analytics apps with an Experience Cloud site partner and customer users.
Quickly query and visualize data in guided, natural language conversations.
Bring intelligent, self-service analytics to the CRM Analytics Home page with Ask Data for Salesforce and Search Insights.
Enable Direct Data in CRM Analytics
Run queries directly against external data sources with Direct Data.
Enable the CRM Analytics REST API
You can access CRM Analytics datasets and lenses programmatically using the CRM Analytics REST API. Selecting this option overrides
the "APIEnabled" permission for individual users and gives all CRM Analytics users (including Experience Cloud sites users) access to
the API.
669
Enable Dashboard Views

Enable this feature to allow each CRM Analytics user to create their own unique views of a dashboard. By default, this feature is
enabled for your org. If the feature is disabled and you re-enable it, all previously created views are available.
Annotate dashboard widgets with comments posted in the dashboard and in Chatter.
Enable Unified Analytics
Enable this feature to unify your reports and dashboards and CRM Analytics items on the Analytics tab in Salesforce and Analytics
Studio.
Enable CRM Analytics Watchlist
Enable this feature to capture and track up to 20 KPIs across different dashboards, plus historical trending. No more switching between
dashboards to see what has changed, and track your metrics all in one place.
Enable users to download the results from lens explorations and dashboard widgets as Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) or comma-separated
values (.csv) files. Enable users to subscribe to tables and receive email with the table data in attached .csv files.
Control who shares dashboard and lens images to prevent users or profiles from sharing sensitive images. By default, all users can
share images of lenses, dashboard widgets, and whole dashboards that contain your org’s data.
Enable Null Measure Handling in Orgs Created Before Spring ’17
Use null measure handling to specify null as the default value for numeric columns in your recipes, dataflows, and CSV uploads.
When another default value isn’t specified for a numeric column and null measure handling is enabled, CRM Analytics replaces a
blank with a null value. If CRM Analytics was initially set up in your org after the Spring ’17 release, null measure handling is enabled
and you can’t disable it.
Open Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics dashboards in New Browser Tabs
By default, selecting a Salesforce record action in a CRM Analytics dashboard opens the record in a new Lightning Experience tab.
To change the default behavior, so that selecting an action opens the record in a new browser tab, enable this setting. The setting
applies to dashboards in the CRM Analytics tab and dashboards embedded in Salesforce pages.
Enable Custom Fiscal Year Support
To inherit custom fiscal years in CRM Analytics, first enable the setup option for your org.
Enable Data Manager (Legacy)
To update and create dataflows as you migrate them to data prep recipes, first enable Data Manager (Legacy).
Enable Custom Time Zones
Time zone support lets you view time-specific data on dashboards in a time zone that you specify for your org. By default, Analytics
datasets are in GMT. When you enable time zone support, Analytics converts date-time values in your datasets to the time zone
selected. You can then create time zone enabled dashboards to display these converted date-time values.
Disable Input Caching for Recipes
When you first run a recipe, Data Prep caches the input data, storing a copy of the source data in cached files, by default. To save
time during subsequent recipe runs, Data Prep uses the cached data instead of extracting the same data again. To use input caching,
the recipe must extract data from all fields in the source.
Control Which Analytics Tab Users Access the Analytics Studio
Specify who can create apps and edit and delete datasets and dashboards by making Analytics Studio invisible to Analytics Tab users
on a per profile basis. When you remove Analytics Studio visibility from a profile, Analytics tab users with the profile don’t see Analytics
Studio in the App Launcher. They also don’t have the Open in Analytics Studio action in asset menus and dashboard headers.
670

Install the CRM Analytics App Package to allow your mobile clients to easily connect to your org. This package contains the Connected
App component that gives you control over who’s logging in and how your mobile clients share images and links.
CRM Analytics Security Implementation Guide
CRM Analytics has different levels of security that your organization can implement to ensure that the right user has access to the
right data.
Salesforce Data Access in CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics requires access to Salesforce data when extracting the data and also when the data is used as part of row-level security.
CRM Analytics gains access to Salesforce data based on permissions of two internal CRM Analytics users: Integration User and Security
User.
Set Up an Allowlist of Trusted Sites for Embedded CRM Analytics Dashboards
Specify your trusted sites in the CRM Analytics allowlist, you can include embedded CRM Analytics dashboards in websites and apps
outside of Salesforce servers.
CRM Analytics Encryption
The CRM Analytics Encryption solution enhances security for Salesforce customers by extending encryption capabilities to the data
at rest that is stored on the Salesforce file system.
Enable Previews for All Assets

Make it easier for users to browse analytics assets in collections. Replace generic icons with preview
EDITIONS
thumbnails of your CRM Analytics contents and Lightning reports and dashboards, including those
that have row-level security restrictions. Available in Salesforce
Asset preview images are generated and refreshed when the asset is saved. Images are generated Classic and Lightning
and refreshed if the image is missing or older than 30 days for users with Edit access to an item. Experience.
Asset previews always appear for CRM Analytics assets with no security predicate. However, a setting
Available with CRM
must be turned on to enable asset previews for all Lightning assets, and CRM Analytics assets that Analytics, which is available
have a security predicate. for an extra cost in
1. CRM Analytics Assets Enterprise, Performance,
a. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings.
b. Select Show preview thumbnails for secure lenses and Edition.
dashboards.
c. Click Save.
USER PERMISSIONS
Important: Even if row-level security applies to the dataset used by a lens or
dashboard, the preview thumbnail could expose data from restricted rows. Row-level To modify settings:
security restrictions take effect only after you’ve clicked through to the lens or • Manage CRM Analytics
dashboard.
2. Lightning Assets
a. From Setup, enter Reports in the Quick Find box, then select Reports and Dashboards Settings.
b. Select Show preview thumbnails for reports and Lightning dashboards.
c. Click Save.
671
Enable CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud Sites

Securely share CRM Analytics apps with an Experience Cloud site partner and customer users.
EDITIONS
Note: Only users with a Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, or Lightning External
Apps Plus license can use this feature. This feature is supported in sites but not in portals. Available in Salesforce
To enable CRM Analytics for sharing in Experience Cloud sites, complete these steps. Experience.
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Select
Share Analytics with Communities.
2. In Setup, assign your community members the CRM Analytics for Communities permission set and Unlimited Editions. Also
license. available in: Developer
Edition
3. In Setup, create a permission set that includes the View CRM Analytics on Experience Cloud
pages permission and assign it to your community members.
4. Continue setting up CRM Analytics for Communities with Step 2 in Share CRM Analytics in USER PERMISSIONS
Experience Cloud Sites . To modify settings:
To view CRM Analytics
dashboards and lenses:
• View CRM Analytics on
Experience Cloud pages

Quickly query and visualize data in guided, natural language conversations.
EDITIONS
To set up CRM Analytics to explore data using conversations, complete the following steps.
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings.
2. Select Enable Conversational Exploration. Experience.
3. Click Save. Available for an extra cost
in: Enterprise, Performance,
SEE ALSO: and Unlimited Editions. Also
available in: Developer
Edition
USER PERMISSIONS
To view visualizations:
672

Bring intelligent, self-service analytics to the CRM Analytics Home page with Ask Data for Salesforce
EDITIONS
and Search Insights.
Ask Data for Salesforce is enabled by default in production orgs with 1,000 or more reports, plus Available in CRM Analytics
active use of the Analytics Home page. It's also available for Full sandboxes upon request. in Salesforce Classic and
If Ask Data for Salesforce was disabled at some point and now you want to enable it, complete the
following steps. CRM Analytics is available
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. for an extra cost in
2. Select Enable Search Insights. and Unlimited Editions. Also
3. Click Save. available in Developer
Edition
Note: Ask Data for Salesforce becomes available 24 hours after it’s enabled.
Available with the CRM
Analytics Plus license.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Direct Data in CRM Analytics

Run queries directly against external data sources with Direct Data.
EDITIONS
To run queries against external data sources with Direct Data, first enable Explore External Data
Directly for your Salesforce org. Then complete these steps. Available in: Salesforce
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, and select Settings.
Experience.
2. Select Enable Analytics Direct Data for external sources.
Available for an extra cost
3. Click Save. in: Enterprise, Performance,
When you make a direct data reference, no data is stored in CRM Analytics. Each time a recipe uses and Unlimited Editions. Also
direct data, a query gets the current data. In Data Manager, SFDC_Local connections represent data available in: Developer
stored in CRM analytics. Therefore, direct data references aren’t included in SFDC_Local connections. Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To view CRM Analytics

Dashboards and lenses:
673
Enable the CRM Analytics REST API

You can access CRM Analytics datasets and lenses programmatically using the CRM Analytics REST
EDITIONS
API. Selecting this option overrides the "APIEnabled" permission for individual users and gives all
CRM Analytics users (including Experience Cloud sites users) access to the API. Available in Salesforce
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. Select Grant all users access to Wave API.
3. Click Save. Available with CRM
For complete information about the API, see the CRM Analytics REST API Developer Guide. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To modify settings:
Enable Dashboard Views

Enable this feature to allow each CRM Analytics user to create their own unique views of a dashboard.
EDITIONS
By default, this feature is enabled for your org. If the feature is disabled and you re-enable it, all
previously created views are available. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
2. Select Enable dashboard saved views, and then click Save.
Available with CRM
Edition.
674

Annotate dashboard widgets with comments posted in the dashboard and in Chatter.
EDITIONS
To enable annotations, complete the following steps.
1. From Setup, enter Feed Tracking in the Quick Find box, and then select Feed
Tracking under Chatter.
Experience.
2. Scroll down and select Analytics Asset.
Available with CRM
3. Select Enable Feed Tracking. Analytics, which is available
4. Click Save. for an extra cost in
SEE ALSO: available in Developer
Collaborate with Dashboard Annotations Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To modify settings:
Enable Unified Analytics

Enable this feature to unify your reports and dashboards and CRM Analytics items on the Analytics
EDITIONS
tab in Salesforce and Analytics Studio.
Unified Analytics supports reports and dashboard, and CRM Analytics, and can be enabled or Available in: Lightning
disabled from each of their settings. For example, if you disable Unified Analytics in reports and Experience
dashboards settings, it’s disabled for CRM Analytics too.
1. Enabling Unified Analytics from reports and dashboard settings. Group, Enterprise,
a. From Setup, enter Reports in the Quick Find box, then select Reports and Professional, Unlimited,
Dashboards Settings.
b. Select Enable the Unified Experience for Analytics Home, and then click Save. Also available with CRM
2. Enabling Unified Analytics from CRM Analytics settings. for an extra cost in
a. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings.
b. Select Enable the Unified Experience for Analytics Home, and then click Save. Editions.
SEE ALSO:
675

Enable this feature to capture and track up to 20 KPIs across different dashboards, plus historical
EDITIONS
trending. No more switching between dashboards to see what has changed, and track your metrics
all in one place. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
2. Select Enable Watchlist, and then click Save.
Available with CRM
Edition.

Enable users to download the results from lens explorations and dashboard widgets as Microsoft®
EDITIONS
Excel® (.xls) or comma-separated values (.csv) files. Enable users to subscribe to tables and
receive email with the table data in attached .csv files. Available in Salesforce
To set up users to download data from CRM Analytics, complete the following steps. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
1. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, and then select Permission Sets.
2. Select the CRM Analytics permission set where you want to add the permission, and click Edit. Available with CRM
3. Select System Permissions. for an extra cost in
4. Select Download CRM Analytics Data. Enterprise, Performance,
5. Click Save. available in Developer
Note: Complete dashboards can be downloaded only as images. Edition.
Note: To subscribe to tables and receive email with table data in attached .csv files, users
need both the Download CRM Analytics Data and the Subscribe to CRM Analytics Assets USER PERMISSIONS
permissions.
To modify settings:
SEE ALSO:
676

Control who shares dashboard and lens images to prevent users or profiles from sharing sensitive
EDITIONS
images. By default, all users can share images of lenses, dashboard widgets, and whole dashboards
that contain your org’s data. Available in Salesforce
To block image downloads and shares for everyone in your org, complete the following steps. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. Select Secure Image Sharing and Downloading. Available for an extra cost in
3. Click Save. and Unlimited Editions. Also
To grant image sharing to select users or profiles, complete the following steps. available in: Developer
Edition
a. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, and then select Permission Sets.
b. Select the CRM Analytics permission set where you want to add the permission, and click
Edit. USER PERMISSIONS
c. Select System Permissions. To share CRM Analytics
d. Select Share Analytics Images. images:
e. Click Save.
With the Share Analytics Images user permission enabled, users can do the following actions with
images of lenses, dashboard widgets, and whole dashboards.
• Download .png images
• Export images to Quip
• Post images to Chatter
• Include images in annotations
• Share images from conversational explorations and subscription previews
• Use the Analytics Download API
SEE ALSO:
Enable Null Measure Handling in Orgs Created Before Spring ’17

Use null measure handling to specify null as the default value for numeric columns in your recipes,
USER PERMISSIONS
dataflows, and CSV uploads. When another default value isn’t specified for a numeric column and
null measure handling is enabled, CRM Analytics replaces a blank with a null value. If CRM Analytics To enable null measure
was initially set up in your org after the Spring ’17 release, null measure handling is enabled and handling:
you can’t disable it. • Customize Application
If CRM Analytics was initially set up in your org before Spring ’17, contact Salesforce Customer
Support.
After Salesforce makes null measure handling available in your org, you can enable it from Setup. In the Quick Find box, enter Analytics,
and select Settings. Select Allow null measure handling in datasets, and then click Save.
677
If you’ve used zeros to replace blank values, you might need to perform additional steps because null measure handling can’t retroactively
change zeros to nulls.
After enabling null measure handling, review your dataflows and take these steps as needed.
1. Update your dataflow definition files to use null instead of 0 in the defaultValue attributes for measure fields in these
transformations.
computeExpression defaultValue: "null"
computeRelative defaultValue: "null"
dim2mea measureDefault: "null"
sfdcDigest defaultValue: "null"
2. Create instances of long-lived datasets used as a source for dataflows using a null defaultValue for measure fields.
A long-lived dataset is typically a reference dataset that isn’t updated through a dataflow and is used to augment data in other
datasets. For example, you could use a geolocation dataset to augment lead information based on ZIP codes.
3. If you have incrementally built datasets in which the source data is no longer available, use a custom dataflow to manually convert
0 values to null.
An incrementally built dataset is created over time by appending rows, such as logs.
4. Reimplement delta transformations in your dataflows using computeRelative and computeExpression

transformations. The delta transformation isn’t supported when null measure handling is enabled. Dataflows containing delta
transformations fail.
In this example, the delta transformation calculates the difference between an opportunity amount and its previous amount.
The computeRelative and computeExpression transformations calculate the previous amount and its difference to
the current amount, respectively.
delta Transformation computeRelative and computeExpression

Transformations
"Calculate_Delta": { "Compute_Previous": {
"action": "delta", "action": "computeRelative",
"parameters": { "parameters": {
"dimension": "OpportunityId", "partitionBy": [
"epoch": "CreatedDate_day_epoch", "OpportunityId"
],
"inputMeasure": "Amount", "orderBy": [
"outputMeasure": "DeltaAmount", {
"source": "name": "CreatedDate",
"Extract_Opportunity_History" "direction": "asc"
} }
}, ],
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "PrevAmount",
"expression": {
"sourceField": "Amount",
"offset": "previous()",
678
delta Transformation computeRelative and computeExpression

Transformations
"default": "current()"
}
}
],
"source":
"Extract_Opportunity_History"
}
},
"Compute_Delta": {
"action": "computeExpression",
"parameters": {
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "DeltaAmount",
"type": "Numeric",
"precision": 18,
"defaultValue": 0,
"scale": 2,
"saqlExpression": "Amount -
PrevAmount"
}
],
"source": "Compute_Previous"
}
},
SEE ALSO:
computeRelative Transformation
computeExpression Transformation
679
Open Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics dashboards in New Browser Tabs
By default, selecting a Salesforce record action in a CRM Analytics dashboard opens the record in
EDITIONS
a new Lightning Experience tab. To change the default behavior, so that selecting an action opens
the record in a new browser tab, enable this setting. The setting applies to dashboards in the CRM Available in: Salesforce
Analytics tab and dashboards embedded in Salesforce pages. Classic and Lightning
To set up CRM Analytics dashboards to open records in new browser tabs, complete the following Experience.
steps.
Available for an extra cost
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. in: Enterprise, Performance,
2. Select Open Salesforce records in new browser tabs.
3. Click Save. Edition
USER PERMISSIONS
To subscribe to widgets:
Enable Custom Fiscal Year Support

To inherit custom fiscal years in CRM Analytics, first enable the setup option for your org.
EDITIONS
2. Select Inherit the custom fiscal year defined in Salesforce Setup, and then click Save.
When selected, CRM Analytics displays fiscal date values and filters based on the custom fiscal
Experience.
year defined in Salesforce Setup. When unselected, CRM Analytics bases date values and filters
on a standard fiscal year. Available with CRM
3. Choose which date to base fiscal year on. Analytics, which is available
a. End Date—If your fiscal year starts in April 2020 and ends in March 2021, your fiscal year Enterprise, Performance,
is 2021. and Unlimited Editions. Also
b. Start Date—If your fiscal year starts in April 2020 and ends in March 2021, your fiscal year available in Developer
is 2020. Edition.
4. Click Save.
CRM Analytics inherits the custom fiscal years defined in Salesforce. Custom fiscal year data and functionality, including fields suffixed
_Fiscal, becomes available on a per-dataset basis after each dataset’s dataflow runs. After inheriting custom fiscal years, users can
work with fiscal data in SAQL queries and new fiscal filter and group options appear in Dashboards, like “Fiscal Year” and “Fiscal Quarter”.
680

To update and create dataflows as you migrate them to data prep recipes, first enable Data Manager
EDITIONS
(Legacy).
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Available in Salesforce
2. Select Allow users to access Data Manager (Legacy), and then click Save.
Experience.
When selected, CRM Analytics displays the Manage Dataflows option in Data Manager. Use
Manage Dataflows to update, add, and monitor dataflows. Available with CRM
Edition.
Enable Custom Time Zones

Time zone support lets you view time-specific data on dashboards in a time zone that you specify
EDITIONS
for your org. By default, Analytics datasets are in GMT. When you enable time zone support, Analytics
converts date-time values in your datasets to the time zone selected. You can then create time Available in Salesforce
zone enabled dashboards to display these converted date-time values. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
What Happens When You Enable Time Zone Support Available for an extra cost in
This table summarizes what happens when you enable time zone support, the actions you Enterprise, Performance,
must take to update assets or stop using the feature. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Custom Time Zone Considerations available in: Developer
Edition
Keep these considerations in mind when working with custom time zones.
SEE ALSO:
Time Zone Date Functions
Enable Time Zone Support

2. Select Enable CRM Analytics Time Zones.
3. From the Org Supported Timezone picklist, select the time zone for CRM Analytics. CRM Analytics converts date-time values in
your datasets from GMT to the time zone that you select.
The Internal Time Zone, GMT, is the assumed time zone for date-time values before conversion.
4. From the Default Dashboard Timezone picklist, select the time zone to use for date-time values in time zone enabled dashboards.
You can choose between the CRM Analytics supported time zone or GMT.
5. Select GMT if you don’t want to convert date-time values in time zone enabled dashboards.
6. To have all new dashboards and lenses default to the time zone enabled date syntax, select Enable new date version for dashboard
or lens.
Existing dashboards and lenses must be recreated to use the new date syntax. See the considerations on page 685 before enabling
this setting.
681
7. Click Save.
Sync Connected Objects and Refresh Datasets

1. Run a full Data Sync of your connected objects after you enable time zone support. This data refresh ensures that datasets created
from these objects in dataflows and recipes are time zone enabled. See Run Data Sync Manually.
2. To refresh the datasets created from recipes, run your recipes. See Run a Recipe Manually.
3. To refresh the datasets created from dataflows, run your dataflows. See Run a Dataflow Manually.
4. Replace the data in datasets created from .csv files. See Edit a Dataset.
Date values in .csv data is assumed to be GMT unless you select a different source time zone when you upload the file. See Set a
Source Time Zone for .CSV Data. To learn more about custom time zone support, see Handle Custom Time Zone Values.
What Happens When You Enable Time Zone Support

This table summarizes what happens when you enable time zone support, the actions you must
EDITIONS
take to update assets or stop using the feature.
This table summarizes what happens when you enable time zone support, the actions you must Available in Salesforce
take to update assets or stop using the feature. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Feature Time Zone Time Zone Actions to Front-End Revert Available for an extra cost in
Support Off Support Upgrade Enterprise, Performance,
Enabled Assets
Data Sync Salesforce Date Existing Run data sync No changes. Time zone fields available in: Developer
and Date Time connected to update are still generated. Edition
fields objects connected
generated as continue to Salesforce
type Date work. objects.
When data
sync runs,
Salesforce Date
and Date Time
fields are auto
mapped to
type DateOnly
or DateTime.
Input date
values
assumed to be
GMT.
Remote All date fields When sync Run data sync No changes. Time zone fields
Connections generated as runs, Date to update are still generated.
type Date. fields auto connected
mapped to external
type DateOnly objects.
or DateTime.
Input date
682
Feature Time Zone Time Zone Actions to Front-End Revert

Support Off Support Enabled Upgrade Assets
values assumed to be
GMT.
Data Prep Recipes Salesforce Date and Existing dataflows Run dataflows and No changes. Time zone fields are still
and User Dataflows Date Time fields and Data Prep Data Prep Recipes to generated.
generated as type Recipes continue to update datasets.
Date work, and generate Warnings prompt
time zone enabled optional action.
datasets.
Some nodes have
Data Sync on: Date new parameter
fields inherit type dateSyntax, which
DateTime or determines what
DateOnly from syntax is used in their
connected objects. SAQL expressions.
Data Sync off:
Salesforce Date and
Date Time fields auto
mapped to type
DateOnly or
DateTime.
Registered datasets
with legacy Date
type fields fetched in
“edgemart” nodes are
converted to datasets
with DateTime type
at runtime.
File Uploads All date fields Automated uploads No required action. No changes. Time zone fields are still
generated as type continue to work, and Warnings prompt generated.
Date. generate time zone optional action.
enabled datasets.
UI uploads generate
time zone enabled
datasets.
Date field type auto
detected and
mapped to type
DateOnly or
DateTime.
If auto detect not
possible, Date field
type mapped to
DateTime.
683
Feature Time Zone Time Zone Actions to Front-End Revert

Support Off Support Enabled Upgrade Assets
Input date values
assumed to be GMT.
In UI uploads, user
can change
auto-detected date
field types and source
timezone (if not
GMT).
Dashboards All date fields Existing dashboards Users can choose to Users must revert dashboards to use
generated as type continue to work and build new time zone previous syntax and delete time zone
Date. are enabled dashboards, enabled dashboards.
backwards-compatible which use the Default Time zone enabled dashboards continue
with time zone Dashboard Timezone to work.
enabled datasets. set in CRM Analytics No option to create time zone enabled
settings. dashboard or lenses from the Spring ’18
New SAQL syntax release.
must be used with
time zone enabled
Dashboards.
If a step references a
non-time zone
enabled dataset, it
fails at runtime, but
the rest of the
dashboard loads.
Date field formats are
standardized, rather
than displaying the
date as ingested. The
date format can be
changed by
converting the date
to a string in the
SAQL expression or
by adding a string
field of the full date to
the dataset.
684
Custom Time Zone Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when working with custom time zones.
EDITIONS
Create Data Source Links in a Time Zone Enabled Dashboard
You can create data source links using date fields (DateOnly and DateTime) in time zone enabled Available in Salesforce
datasets. If two datasets are linked using the parent date field (such as CreateDate), all Classic and Lightning
components of the date field (such as year and year-month) are automatically linked. Experience.
Data source links between a static step and an individual date component of a DateOnly or Available for an extra cost in
DateTime field aren’t supported. Enterprise, Performance,
Bind Dates in a Time Zone Enabled Dashboard
When binding dates in a time zone enabled dashboard, you refer to date fields differently. Note
Edition
the following differences between GMT-only dashboards and time zone enabled dashboards.
GMT-Only Dashboards Time Zone Enabled Dashboards

cell(myStep.selection, 0, cell(myStep.selection, 0,
"CloseDate_year") "year_CloseDate")
cell(myStep.selection, 0, cell(myStep.selection, 0,
"CloseDate_year~~~CloseDate_month") "year-month_CloseDate")
asEquality("CreateDate_year", asEquality(["year",
"Region") "CreateDate"], "Region")
asDateRange("CreateDate('year', asDateRange("CreateDate")
'month', 'day')")
Use Compact Form Queries in a Time Zone Enabled Dashboard

When adding dates in compact form queries, the syntax is different in time zone supported dashboards. Note the following differences
between GMT-only dashboards and time zone supported dashboards.
Query Component GMT-only Dashboards Time Zone Supported Dashboards

Date Measure
"measures": [ "measures": [
["sum", ["sum",
"Ship_Date_day_epoch"] ["epochDay","Ship_Date"]]
] ]
Group by Date
"groups": [ "groups": [
"CloseDate_Year" ["year", "CloseDate"]
] ]
Group by Date
"groups": [ "groups": [
[ ["year-quarter",
"CloseDate_Year", "CloseDate"]
]
"CloseDate_Quarter"
685
Query Component GMT-only Dashboards Time Zone Supported Dashboards
]
]
Filter by Date
"filters": [ "filters": [
[ [
"Created Date", "Created Date",
[ [
[ [
1359504000000, "2013-01-30
1486425600000 00:00:00",
] "2017-02-02
], 23:59:59"
">=<=" ]
] ],
] ">=<="
]
]
Filter by Date Unchanged

"filters": [
[
"Opportunity.CloseDate",
[
[
[
"quarter",
-2
],
[
"quarter",
0
]
]
],
">=<="
]
]
Order by Date
"Order": [ "order": [
[ [
"CreateDate_year", ["year", "CreateDate"],
{ {
"ascending": true "ascending": true
} }
] ]
] ]
686
Other Considerations
You can’t view converted date-time values in a lens.
Time zone enabled dashboards don’t support these features:
• Notifications
• Subscriptions
• Watchlists
• Natural language queries
• Data source connections between a static step and a dataset date field
• Displaying month names, such as “Jan” and “Feb” (months display as numbers only, such as “01” and “02”)
• Remote text-based search on date fields in list widgets
Disable Input Caching for Recipes

When you first run a recipe, Data Prep caches the input data, storing a copy of the source data in
EDITIONS
cached files, by default. To save time during subsequent recipe runs, Data Prep uses the cached
data instead of extracting the same data again. To use input caching, the recipe must extract data Available in Salesforce
from all fields in the source. Classic and Lightning
When the option is enabled, recipe runtime varies based on whether the source data is cached and Experience.
the cache is used. If the recipe doesn’t extract data from all fields in the source, caching doesn’t
happen. If the data is older than 45 days, the disk usage exceeds 70%, or the source data changed Enterprise, Performance,
since the last recipe run, cached data isn’t used. If needed, you can disable input caching to get and Unlimited Editions. Also
more consistent recipe runtimes. available in: Developer
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Edition
2. Select Disable Recipe Input Dataset Caching.

3. To have more consistent recipe runtimes, you can disable this option.
687
4. Click Save.
688
Control Which Analytics Tab Users Access the Analytics Studio

Specify who can create apps and edit and delete datasets and dashboards by making Analytics
EDITIONS
Studio invisible to Analytics Tab users on a per profile basis. When you remove Analytics Studio
visibility from a profile, Analytics tab users with the profile don’t see Analytics Studio in the App Available in Salesforce
Launcher. They also don’t have the Open in Analytics Studio action in asset menus and dashboard Classic and Lightning
headers. Experience.
To restrict access to the Analytics Studio within the Analytics tab, complete the following steps.
Available with CRM
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Manager. Analytics, which is available
2. In the App Manager, open the Analytics Studio menu and select Edit.
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To modify settings:
3. To restrict access to the Analytics Studio for a profile, clear its check from the Visible column in the Assign to Profiles section.
689
Important: Although disabling visibility removes UI links to Analytics Studio within the Analytics tab, any URL to the Studio version
of an asset always opens it in Studio. The Studio version URL is available in the Share dialog and is provided in notification and
subscription emails. However, for notifications created on embedded dashboards and in Analytics Tab, links in notification emails
navigate the user to the Analytics Tab.
Note: The Visible setting applies to the Analytics tab only. Access to Analytics Studio from embedded dashboards is controlled
through the component’s attributes.
690

Install the CRM Analytics App Package to allow your mobile clients to easily connect to your org.
EDITIONS
This package contains the Connected App component that gives you control over who’s logging
in and how your mobile clients share images and links. Available in Salesforce
1. While logged in as an admin, navigate to: Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Production
https://login.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tB0000000cHCH Available with CRM
Sandbox Analytics, which is available
https://test.salesforce.com/packaging/installPackage.apexp?p0=04tB0000000cHCH
Edition.
your policies.
3. Click Done, then click the Salesforce Analytics App Package and then View Components.
USER PERMISSIONS
4. Select iOS or Android. To configure policies and other settings, click Edit. When you’re finished,
save your changes. To install and configure
For more information about Connected App settings, see Edit a Connected App. Connected App:
5. If you want to disable sharing options for mobile users, click New in the Custom Attributes
section.
All sharing options are enabled by default. To disable an option, add its attribute key and enter “false” for the attribute value.
See the table for the supported attribute keys.

CACHE_QUERY_RESULTS Store query cache results to disk iOS
OFFLINE_BETA Store data for offline access iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_AIRDROP Share images via AirDrop iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_CAMERAROLL Share images to Camera Roll iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_OPEN Share images to other apps and activities iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_S1 Share images to Salesforce iOS
SHARE_IMAGE_EMAIL Share images via email iOS
SHARE_LINK_NFC Share links via Near Field Communication Android

(NFC)
SHARE_LINK_BLUETOOTH Share links via Bluetooth Android
SHARE_LINK_AIRDROP Share links via AirDrop iOS
SHARE_LINK_CLIPBOARD Share links to Clipboard iOS and Android
SHARE_LINK_S1 Share links to Salesforce iOS and Android
SHARE_LINK_EMAIL Share links via email iOS and Android
691

SPOTLIGHT_SEARCH See CRM Analytics assets in Spotlight iOS
search results
Note: To apply custom attributes to connected users, you can revoke them and ask them to reconnect.
6. To view and control how mobile clients connect to your CRM Analytics-enabled org, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter
Connected Apps, and then select Connect Apps OAuth Usage.
Connected App.
For extra security, use Mobile Device Management (MDM) with the option to show only authorized hosts. The "OnlyShowAuthorizedHosts"
key allows you to hide the “Add New Account” plus sign in the mobile app. For more information, see Using MDM with Salesforce Mobile
SDK Apps.
CRM Analytics Security Implementation Guide

CRM Analytics has different levels of security that your organization can implement to ensure that the right user has access to the right
data.
• The administrator can implement object-level and field-level security to control access to Salesforce data. For example, the administrator
can restrict access to prevent the dataflow from loading sensitive Salesforce data into datasets. This document describes how CRM
Analytics uses object-level and field-level security on Salesforce data and how to configure permissions on Salesforce objects and
fields.
• Dataset owners can implement row-level security on each dataset that they create to restrict access to it’s records. If a dataset does
not have row-level security, users who have access to the dataset can view all records. This document describes how to configure
row-level security on datasets and provides some sample implementations based on datasets created from Salesforce data and
external data.
• App owners, administrators, and users granted manager access to an app control access to datasets, lenses, and dashboards within
apps. This document describes the different levels of access for apps and how to share datasets, lenses, dashboards in an app with
other users.
692
Note: CRM Analytics supports security predicates, a robust row-level security feature that enables you to model many different
types of access controls on datasets. Also, CRM Analytics supports sharing inheritance, to synchronize with sharing that’s
configured in Salesforce, subject to certain limitations. If you use sharing inheritance, you must also set a security predicate to
take over in situations when sharing settings can’t be honored.
For complete information about implementing CRM Analytics security, see CRM Analytics Security Implementation Guide.
Salesforce Data Access in CRM Analytics

CRM Analytics gains access to Salesforce data based on permissions of two internal CRM Analytics users: Integration User and Security
User.
CRM Analytics uses the permissions of the Integration User to extract data from Salesforce objects and fields when a dataflow job runs.
Because the Integration User has View All Data access, consider restricting access to particular objects and fields that contain sensitive
data. If the dataflow is configured to extract data from an object or field on which the Integration User does not have permission, the
dataflow job fails.
When you query a dataset that has row-level security based on the User object, CRM Analytics uses the permissions of the Security User
to access the User object and its fields. The Security User must have at least read permission on each User object field included in a
predicate. A predicate is a filter condition that defines row-level security for a dataset. By default, the Security User has read permission
on all standard fields of the User object. If the predicate is based on a custom field, then grant the Security User read access on the field.
If the Security User does not have read access on all User object fields included in a predicate expression, an error appears when you try
to query the dataset using that predicate.
Important: Because CRM Analytics requires the Integration User and Security User to access Salesforce data, do not delete either
of these users.

Configure the permissions of the Integration User on Salesforce objects and fields to control the dataflow’s access to Salesforce data.
Configure the permissions of the Security User to enable row-level security based on custom fields of the User object.

CRM Analytics requires access to Salesforce data when extracting the data and also when the data
USER PERMISSIONS
is used as part of row-level security. Configure the permissions of the Integration User on Salesforce
objects and fields to control the dataflow’s access to Salesforce data. Configure the permissions of To clone a user profile:
the Security User to enable row-level security based on custom fields of the User object. • Manage Profiles and
Permission Sets
When configuring permissions for the Integration User or Security User, edit a cloned version of the
user profile. To edit object permissions:
1. From Setup, enter Profiles in the Quick Find box, then select Profiles, and then • Manage Profiles and
select the user profile. Permission Sets
For the Integration User, select the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. For the Security AND
User, select the Analytics Cloud Security User profile. Customize Application
2. Click Clone to clone the user profile.
3. Name and save the cloned user profile.
4. Click Object Settings.
693
5. Click the name of the Salesforce object.

6. Click Edit.
a. To enable permission on the object, select Read in the Object Permissions section.
b. To enable permission on a field of the object, select Read for the field in the Field Permissions section.
Note: You can’t change the permissions on standard fields of the User object.
7. Save the object settings.

8. Assign the cloned user profile to the Integration User or Security User.
a. From Setup, enter Users in the Quick Find box, then select Users.
b. Select the user to which you want to assign the user profile.
c. Click Edit.
d. In the Profile field, select the user profile.
e. Click Save.
9. Verify that the Integration User or Security User has the right permissions on fields of the objects.
Set Up an Allowlist of Trusted Sites for Embedded CRM Analytics Dashboards

Specify your trusted sites in the CRM Analytics allowlist, you can include embedded CRM Analytics
EDITIONS
dashboards in websites and apps outside of Salesforce servers.
To set up an Analytics allowlist, complete the following steps. Available in Salesforce
1. From Setup, enter Allowlist in the Quick Find box, then select Allowlist under
Experience.
Analytics.
2. On the Allowlist for Embedding Dashboards page, click New. Available with CRM
3. On the Allowed Site Edit page, enter the information for the site you want to add to the CRM for an extra cost in
Analytics allowlist. Enterprise, Performance,
4. Click Save. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
The CRM Analytics Encryption solution enhances security for Salesforce customers by extending
encryption capabilities to the data at rest that is stored on the Salesforce file system. USER PERMISSIONS
If digital data is in transit, currently being processed, or stored in memory, that data is considered To modify settings:
to be in use. By contrast, digital data is considered at rest if it is stored physically in persistent storage • Manage CRM Analytics
but is not currently in use. CRM Analytics Encryption is for encrypting registered datasets in CRM
Analytics. To encrypt data at rest and preserve functionality, CRM Analytics Encryption services are
built natively into the CRM Analytics platform. The solution applies strong, probabilistic encryption on data stored at rest. Platform
encryption is based on the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with 256-bit keys using CTR mode for every write.
All operations, including sort and group-by, function the same as without encryption (except for key management functions, as noted
in this topic).
How CRM Analytics Encryption Works
694
As a prerequisite to CRM Analytics Encryption, you must be approved by the CRM Analytics Encryption Product Manager. Your org must
have a Shield Platform Encryption tenant secret. (CRM Analytics Encryption uses PE key management, so it’s not necessary to encrypt
objects and fields in core Salesforce.)
When using CRM Analytics with your encryption-enabled instance, data read from and written to disk is automatically encrypted with
the unique key for your account. For more information about the encryption technology, refer to the Shield Platform Encryption
Architecture white paper. To verify that encryption is enabled, go to the Analytics Settings page in the Setup UI.
For CRM Analytics Encryption to function properly, you must define IP ranges for the Analytics Cloud Integration and Analytics Cloud
Security user profiles as documented in Best Practices: Manage Integration and Security Users in CRM Analytics. Also, add designated
Salesforce IPs to your allowlist, Salesforce IP Addresses and Domains to Allow.
Features
Key export, Bring Your Own Key, key rotation, key revocation, and key import are available.
All CRM Analytics features are supported, with the following exceptions:
• Pre-existing data is not encrypted.
• Data that was in CRM Analytics before encryption was enabled is not encrypted.
• If pre-existing data is imported from Salesforce objects through the dataflow, the data becomes encrypted on the next dataflow
run.
• Other pre-existing data (such as CSV data) must be reimported to become encrypted.
• Although pre-existing data is not encrypted, it is still accessible and fully functional in its unencrypted state when encryption is
enabled.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is data encrypted in transit? Yes. However, encryption in transit is different from encryption at rest. This feature covers encryption at rest.
Can CRM Analytics bring in data encrypted with Shield Platform Encryption? Yes. CRM Analytics reads platform encrypted data in the
same way that any user reads platform encrypted data. The data is then written and encrypted in CRM Analytics. It is not required that
data be encrypted with Shield Platform Encryption to be encrypted in CRM Analytics. It’s only required that a Tenant Secret exists for
the org.
Can I mask my data? No. Masking data is not currently available and it does not fall under the CRM Analytics scope.
Are the keys different for Shield Platform Encryption and CRM Analytics Encryption? Yes, although Shield and CRM Analytics use the
same key management technology, they use different keys.
695
Do mobile dashboards still work with encryption? Yes. All CRM Analytics functionality, including support for mobile devices, works with
encryption enabled. All data stored on mobile (mainly JSON code and thumbnails) is AES 256 encrypted.
Is there any impact on application performance? The CRM Analytics Encryption solution is designed to have at most a minimal performance
impact on your CRM Analytics application experience.
CRM Analytics Requirements

This section provides requirements for using CRM Analytics.
Supported Browsers
CRM Analytics supports all browsers supported by Lightning Experience.
Data Manager
Lightning Web Components must be enabled to use all Data Manager features.
Browser Zoom
Browser zoom settings other than 100% aren’t supported for CRM Analytics.
Screen Resolution
The minimum screen resolution required to support all Salesforce features is 1024 x 768 pixels.
Supported Mobile Devices

CRM Analytics for iOS: Apple® devices running iOS 16.0 or later.
CRM Analytics for Android: Android™ devices running Android 5 or later.
To optimize your implementation, review the minimum and recommended technical requirements for CRM Analytics. These technical
requirements help you predict whether your hardware and network can provide an acceptable and productive user experience. We
strongly recommend testing the actual end-user experience with a configuration identical to what you expect to use in production. Test
using the same geographic location, hardware, browser, network settings, and the expected concurrent users for shared hardware like
virtual desktops.
Load times are measured in Experienced Page Time (EPT). Dashboard EPT measures how long it takes for a dashboard to load, where
the page fully renders and is responsive to user interaction.
For the fastest and most stable experience, we recommend:
• An Octane 2.0 score of 30,000 or greater
• Network latency of 150 ms or less
• Download speed of 3 Mbps or greater
Minimum requirements are:
• An Octane 2.0 score of 20,000 or greater
696
• Network latency of 200 ms or less

• Download speed of 1 Mbps or greater
Based on our lab tests, the minimum requirements result in 50% slower page load times and login load times versus the recommended
specifications.
You can find your Octane 2.0 score, latency, and download speed by running the Salesforce Performance test. To run the test, append
speedtest.jsp to your org’s domain.
https://MyDomainName.lightning.force.com/speedtest.jsp
We recommend running this test on the same hardware, network, physical location, and browser as your users. For virtual environments,
such as VDI, run all tests from within that virtual environment.
Octane 2.0 is a benchmark developed by Google that measures JavaScript performance. A higher Octane 2.0 score correlates to faster
page load times. Octane 2.0 factors in your computer hardware and browser choice:
• Using newer-generation hardware with faster CPUs generates higher Octane 2.0 scores.
• Using the latest version of Salesforce-supported browsers generates higher Octane 2.0 scores.
• IE11 results in low Octane 2.0 scores and much slower page load speeds.
For information, see Improve Speed and Performance in Lightning Experience.

When using CRM Analytics, keep these limits in mind.
API Call Limits

These limits apply to all supported editions.
API Call Limit

Maximum concurrent CRM Analytics API calls per org 100
Maximum CRM Analytics API calls per user per hour 10,000
Dataset Row Storage Allocations per License

In Salesforce org, your total row storage limit for all registered datasets combined depends on your license combination. Each license
allocates a different number of rows.
Baseline Row Allocation Allocated Rows

CRM Analytics Plus 10 billion
CRM Analytics Growth 100 million
Sales Analytics 25 million
Service Analytics 25 million
Event Monitoring Analytics 50 million
B2B Marketing Analytics 25 million
697
Baseline Row Allocation Allocated Rows

CRM Analytics for Financial Services Cloud 25 million
CRM Analytics for Health Cloud 25 million
Extra Data Rows license 100 million
Your total row storage limit is a combination of your active licenses. For example: Because the CRM Analytics Plus license includes the
Sales Analytics and Service Analytics licenses, your total row allocation remains 10 billion. Similarly, the CRM Analytics Growth license
includes the Sales Analytics and the Service Analytics licenses, so your total row allocation remains 100 million. However, if you obtain
another Sales Analytics or Services Analytics license, your row limit increases by 25 million for each added license.
Dataset Row Limits

Each dataset supports up to 2 billion rows. If your Salesforce org has less than 2 billion allocated rows, each dataset supports up to your
org’s allocated rows.
Dataset Field Limits
Value Limit
Maximum number of fields in a dataset 5,000 (including up to 1,000 date fields)
Maximum number of decimal places for each value in a numeric 17 decimal places
field in a dataset (overflow limit)
When a value exceeds the maximum number of decimal places,
it overflows. Both 100,000,000,000,000,000 and
10,000,000,000,000,000.0 overflow because they use more than
17 decimal places. A number also overflows if it’s greater (or less)
than the maximum (or minimum) supported value.
36,028,797,018,963,968 overflows because its value is greater than
36,028,797,018,963,967. -36,028,797,018,963,968 overflows because
it’s less than -36,028,797,018,963,967.
When a number overflows, the resulting behavior in CRM Analytics
is unpredictable. Sometimes CRM Analytics throws an error.
Sometimes it replaces a numeric value with a null value. And
sometimes mathematical calculations, such as sums or averages,
return incorrect results. Occasionally, CRM Analytics handles
numbers up to 19 digits without overflowing because they are
within the maximum value for a 64-bit signed integer (263 - 1). But
numbers of these lengths aren’t guaranteed to process.
As a best practice, stick with numbers that are 17 decimal places
or fewer. If numbers that would overflow are necessary, setting
lower precision and scale on the dataset containing the large
numbers sometimes prevents overflow. If your org hasn’t enabled
the handling of numeric values, the maximum number of decimal
places for each value in a numeric field in a dataset is 16. All orgs
created after Spring ’17 have Null Measure Handling enabled.
698
Value Limit
Maximum value for each numeric field in a dataset, including 36,028,797,018,963,967
decimal places For example, if three decimal places are used, the maximum value
is 36,028,797,018,963.967
Minimum value for each numeric field in a dataset, including -36,028,797,018,963,968

decimal places For example, if five decimal places are used, the minimum value
is -36,028,797,018,9.63968
Maximum number of characters in a field 32,000
Data Sync Limits

If you extract more than 100 objects in your dataflows, contact Salesforce Customer Support before you enable data sync.
Value Limit
Maximum number of concurrent data sync runs 3
Maximum number of objects that can be enabled for data sync, 100
including local and remote objects
Maximum amount of time each data sync job can run for local 24 hours
objects
Maximum amount of time each data sync job can run for remote 12 hours
objects
Data sync limits for each job: Up to 100,000 rows or 500 MB per object, whichever limit is reached
• Marketo Connector (Beta) first
• NetSuite Connector
• Zendesk Connector
Data sync limits for each job: Up to 1 million rows or 1 GB per object, whichever limit is reached
• Analytics MuleSoft Microsoft SQL Server Connector first
• Analytics MuleSoft MySQL Connector

• Analytics MuleSoft Oracle Connector
Data sync limits for each job: Up to 10 million rows or 5 GB per object, whichever limit is reached
• Amazon Athena Connector first
• AWS RDS Oracle Connector

• Databricks Connector
• Google Analytics Connector
• Google Analytics Core Reporting V4 Connector
• Oracle Eloqua Connector
• SAP HANA Cloud Connector
699
Value Limit
• SAP HANA Connector
Data sync limits for each job*: Up to 20 million rows or 10 GB per object, whichever limit is
• AWS RDS Aurora MySQL Connector reached first
• AWS RDS Aurora PostgresSQL Connector

• AWS RDS MariaDB Connector
• AWS RDS MySQL Connector
• AWS RDS PostgreSQL Connector
• AWS RDS SQL Server Connector
• Google Cloud Spanner Connector
• Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics Connector
• Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector
• Salesforce External Connector
• Salesforce Marketing Cloud Contacts Connector
• Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 Connector
Data sync limits for each job*: Up to 100 million rows or 50 GB per object, whichever limit is
• Amazon Redshift Connector reached first
• Amazon S3 Connector
• Customer 360 Global Profile Data Connector (Beta)
• Google BigQuery for Legacy SQL Connector
• Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connector
• Heroku Postgres Connector
• Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connector
• Snowflake Input Connector
*When using these connectors, Salesforce Government Cloud org data is protected in transit with advanced encryption and can sync
up to 10 million rows or 5 GB for each connected object, whichever limit is reached first.
Note: When using a Salesforce local input connection, CRM Analytics bulk API usage doesn’t count towards Salesforce bulk API
limits. Use of the external Salesforce connection and output connection impacts your limits.
The dataflow submits a separate bulk API call to extract data from each Salesforce object. The dataflow uses a batch size of
100,000–250,000, depending on whether the dataflow or the bulk API chunks the data. As a result, to extract 1 million rows from
an object, the dataflow creates 4–10 batches.
Recipe and Dataflow Limits

Important: In Winter ‘24, recipe runs over 2 minutes are counted against the limit. Previously, the recipe run counts weren’t
correct. For more information, see Known Issue - Recipe runs are not counting towards the daily maximum run limit.
700
Value Limit
Maximum amount of time each recipe or dataflow can run 48 hours
Maximum number of recipes 1,000
Maximum number of dataflows definitions (with data sync enabled) 100
Maximum number of dataflow and recipe runs in a rolling 24-hour 60

period Dataflow and recipe runs that take less than 2 minutes (and data
sync) don’t count toward this 24-hour run limit. However, if you
reach the 24-hour run limit, you can't run a dataflow, recipe, or
data sync job, regardless of size. CSV uploads don’t count towards
this limit. You can use Salesforce Data Pipelines to increase your
recipes limit (not dataflow). For more information, see Salesforce
Data Pipeline Limits and contact your Account Executive.
Maximum number of concurrent recipe runs 3

To allow up to 3 concurrent recipe runs, admins can select Enable
concurrency limit sharing between dataflows and recipes in
Analytics Settings for a production org with the CRM Analytics Plus
platform license.
Maximum number of concurrent dataflow runs 2 for a production org with the CRM Analytics Plus platform license
1 for a sandbox org or a production org with the CRM Analytics
Growth platform license
Maximum dependent jobs for an event-based schedule 5
Maximum number of Data Prep previews per hour per user 4,000
Timeout for data load jobs (dataflows, CSV uploads, recipes, and 5 minutes
data sync) that have been scheduled but not executed
Maximum length of a dataflow definition file 1,000,000 characters
Trending Data Limits

Trended datasets count toward the overall CRM Analytics platform limits, including total number of rows.
Value Limit
Maximum number of trended datasets per user 5
Maximum number of rows per snapshot 100,000
Maximum number of rows in the report to be trended 500,000 for admins, 100,000 for non-admins
Maximum total number of rows in a trended dataset 5,000,000
Maximum monthly number of rows for all snapshots per org 40 million
701
External Data Limits
Value Limit
Maximum file size per external data uploads 40 GB
Maximum file size for all external data uploads in a rolling 24-hour 50 GB
period
Maximum number of external data jobs per dataset that can be 50

run in a rolling 24-hour period
Maximum number of characters in a field 32,000
Maximum number of fields in a record 5,000 (including up to 1,000 date fields)
Maximum number of characters for all fields in a record 400,000
Output Connector Limits
Value Limit
Maximum data written to Salesforce 100 MB per recipe run per output connector
100 MB per rolling 24-hour period
Maximum data written to Azure Data Lake 100 MB per recipe run per output connector
100 MB per rolling 24-hour period
Maximum data written to Amazon S3 10 GB, or 10 million rows of data per recipe run per output
connector
50 GB, or 50 million rows per rolling 24-hour period (combined*)
12-hour maximum amount of time each job can run.
Maximum data written to Snowflake through recipe or sync out 10 GB, or 10 million rows of data per recipe run per output
connector
50 GB, or 50 million rows per rolling 24-hour period (combined*)
Maximum data written to Tableau Online 1 GB, or 1 million rows of data per recipe run per output connector
1 GB, or 1 million rows per rolling 24-hour period
*The limit for Snowflake Output or sync out and Amazon S3 Output connectors is a combined 50 GB, or 50 million rows per rolling
24-hour period. For example, if you push 40 GB of data from CRM Analytics to Snowflake, 10 GB of allotted data remains to push to
Amazon S3.
702
Story Creation and Prediction Limits

For limits on story creation and predictions, see Einstein Discovery Limits.
Sales Analytics and Service Analytics App Limits

The Sales Analytics and Service Analytics apps limit custom object support a maximum of 10 custom objects and one dataflow per app.
These limits are contractual, not technical.
Security Predicate Limit

This limit applies to all supported editions.
Value Limit
Maximum number of characters in a security predicate 5,000
CRM Analytics Developer Edition Limits

CRM Analytics is built on the Lightning Platform and is subject to the Lightning Platform limits. For example, the SOQL query limit (100,000
characters) controls the number of fields that the sfdcDigest transformation can extract data from. If you exceed a Lightning Platform
limit, an error occurs. See Lightning Platform limits.
Value Limit
Maximum number of data rows 250,000
Maximum number of concurrent queries 5
Lens and Dashboard Limits

These limits apply to the creation and use of lenses and dashboards.
Value Limit
Maximum JSON file size per dashboard 4 MB
Maximum number of dashboard components per dashboard 20
Character limit for description fields 1000
Default number of rows in a compare table 2000 (To set a different value, use the SAQL limit statement)
Default number of rows in a values table 100 (To set a different value, use the SAQL limit statement)
Maximum file size for geojson 10 MB
Maximum number of notifications per user 10
Maximum number of recipients per notification email 500
Maximum number of subscriptions per user 20
Maximum number of subscriptions to collections per user 4
703
Value Limit
Maximum number of subscriptions per hour per org 100
Maximum number of data columns that can be downloaded in 16383

Excel format from a lens or widget
Analytics Download Limits

These limits apply to the download of Analytics assets as images or PDFs using the Analytics Download API. Analytics assets available
for download include CRM Analytics dashboards and lenses and Lightning Experience dashboards and reports.
Value Limit
Maximum concurrent Analytics Download API calls per user 3
CRM Analytics Query Limits

Be aware of these limits as you work with CRM Analytics queries.
Query Limits
Limit Value
Maximum concurrent queries per organization 50 per platform
Maximum concurrent queries per user 10
Maximum number of rows returned per query 25,000*

25,000 is the default maximum value. To set a different value,
use the SAQL limit statement
Query timeout 2 minutes
*The maximum results returned by a query vary based on the query’s type and whether it’s executed from a desktop or the mobile
app.
Query Type Desktop Default Limit Mobile Default Limit

aggregateflex 2,000 500
grain (for values tables only) 100 100
saql 2,000 2,000
soql See SOQL and SOSL Reference. See SOQL and SOSL Reference
staticflex n/a n/a
704
Tip: To see the limit for a given query, click in the lens. If it’s not set, CRM Analytics returns up to 10,000 results. To
change the limit, edit the SAQL or SOQL query. The higher you increase the limit, the longer the query runs. For more information
about SAQL queries, see the Analytics SAQL Developer Guide. For information about SOQL queries, see Salesforce Object Query
Reference.
The limit only affects the number of records returned for display; it doesn’t affect calculations across all dataset records. For instance,
say that a query groups by account name and the dataset contain 1 million account names. With a limit of 20, CRM Analytics only
returns 20 results for display, but the summary row adds up all 1 million records.
CRM Analytics Direct Data Query Limits
These limits apply to Direct Data for Snowflake and Direct Data for Google BigQuery.
Limit Value
Maximum concurrent queries per organization 25
Maximum concurrent queries per user 5
Maximum number of rows returned per query 5,000
Query timeout 2 minutes
SEE ALSO:
How Salesforce Data Pipelines and CRM Analytics Work Together

CRM Analytics differs from other Salesforce features in some ways.
Update Schedule
All customers receive CRM Analytics updates on the same schedule, regardless of instance.
Localization and Internationalization

CRM Analytics is localized with these exceptions.
• You can’t use right-to-left languages, such as Arabic and Hebrew.
• A subset of error messages is available only in English.
• The mobile iOS app includes only English versions of sample datasets and dashboards.
CRM Analytics provides internationalization support with these exceptions.
• To see translated labels, set both the locale and language.
• Data within datasets isn’t modified for localization or internationalization.
• Each dataset can have a single locale specified in the metadata. The metadata locale isn’t overridden by individual user locale settings.
All users see the same date, time, and number formats and dimension names, regardless of their locale and language settings.
• Search in filters isn’t case-sensitive.
• Multiple currencies aren’t supported. When CRM Analytics extracts your default currency, it uses that currency for monetary values
and doesn’t convert to another currency.
705
Field-Level Security
Field-level security isn’t available for external data that is uploaded via files. Field-level security implemented in the original database or
Salesforce object isn’t preserved when the data is loaded into a CRM Analytics dataset. For more information, see the CRM Analytics
Security Implementation Guide.
Set Salesforce field-level security to enable the CRM Analytics Integration User to see all fields used in your app—default fields and any
fields selected in the configuration wizard. Integration users run the dataflow. If they don’t have appropriate field-level security permissions,
the dataflow fails.
SAQL Query Limitations

The timeseries function requires a CRM Analytics Platform license.
Lenses Limitations
You can't filter or group by the hour, minute, or second components of a date field.
You can’t filter on values containing HTML-encoded text.
Because dates are sorted lexicographically, changing the date format also changes the sort order.
Embedded CRM Analytics Dashboards

Limitations for embedded CRM Analytics dashboards are covered in Embed Dashboards Everywhere.
CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites

Limitations for CRM Analytics within Experience Cloud are covered in Share CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites .
CRM Analytics on Mobile Devices

To view CRM Analytics on a mobile device, connect to Salesforce using the native CRM Analytics mobile app for Android or iOS. For
limitations of the CRM Analytics mobile apps, refer to the See Also links at the end of this page.
Outside of the native CRM Analytics mobile app, the only supported mobile device access to CRM Analytics is via Lightning app pages
viewed in the Salesforce mobile app. Embedded CRM Analytics dashboards accessed via mobile browsers aren't supported.
Limitations for the Wave Dashboard component in a Lightning app page in the Salesforce mobile app are covered in View Embedded
Dashboards on Mobile Devices .
CRM Analytics Smart Dashboard and App Templates

Using the SAQL timeseries feature in the Time Series smart dashboard template requires a CRM Analytics Platform license.
Limitations for most CRM Analytics app templates are covered in the Help topic for each template.
Sales Analytics Limitations

These limitations apply to Sales Analytics.
• Sales Analytics Data Requirements:
Sales Cloud data must meet these requirements for Sales Analytics dashboards to function correctly.
– Use standard sales objects.
706
– Have at least one event and one task connected with an opportunity.
– Enable history tracking for Amount, Stage, and CloseDate fields on the Opportunities object.
– Cases must be connected to Accounts if you choose to import Cases data to Sales Analytics using the configuration wizard.
– There are two requirements if you choose to import Leads data to Sales Analytics using the configuration wizard.
• At least one lead must be converted to an opportunity.
• The lead must be connected to an account.
– There are two requirements if you choose to import Campaigns data to Sales Analytics using the configuration wizard.
• At least one opportunity must be connected to a campaign.
• At least one campaign member must be connected to a campaign.
– There are two requirements if you choose to import opportunity record types to Sales Analytics using the configuration wizard.
• At least one opportunity record type must be defined.
• The opportunity record type must be connected to at least one opportunity.
• Sales Analytics Support for Salesforce Objects and Fields:

Sales Analytics supports all Salesforce standard and custom objects and data. To add custom objects or fields not included when
you created the app, update the Sales Analytics dataflow. See Design Datasets with Dataflows and the Dataset Builder.
When you create the app, it includes only a predefined set of objects and fields. Sales Analytics creates a dataflow that exposes
selected fields from these standard Salesforce objects:
– Accounts
– Users
– Roles
– Opportunities
– Products (Opportunities line item)
– Tasks
– Events
The fields provided are determined by the answers that you provide when you create the app using the built-in configuration wizard.
Sales Analytics supports standard and custom fields on standard Sales Cloud objects. The fields provided are determined by the
answers that you provide when you create the app using the built-in configuration wizard.
• Sales Analytics Support for External Data

Sales Analytics doesn’t support external data sources, except a CSV file that contains quota data at the user level. Importing other
external data requires an extra license. See your Salesforce representative for details.
To include data about quotas in Sales Analytics, upload a CSV file with the details. Sales Cloud Einstein customers who use Sales
Analytics must use Collaborative Forecasts to see quota data. You can’t edit the quota dataset. See Collaborative Forecasting and
Quotas Data in Sales Analytics.
• Other Contractual Sales Analytics Considerations:

The Sales Analytics Apps license doesn’t support using CRM Analytics platform bulk actions or Apex steps. This limitation is contractual,
not technical. The licensee agrees to strictly monitor its use of CRM Analytics platform features.
• Sales Analytics Limitations for Sales Cloud Einstein and CRM Analytics Growth or Plus (Platform) Customers:
Sales Analytics is available through these licenses.
707
Standalone Sales Cloud Einstein CRM Analytics Growth or

Plus
Data sources Salesforce data and CSV file for Salesforce data Salesforce and external data
quotas data (see Sales Analytics
Support for External Data)
Object support Standard and custom objects Standard objects Standard and custom objects
Data volume 25 million rows 25 million rows – CRM Analytics Plus: 10

billion rows
– CRM Analytics Growth: 100
million rows
Can customize existing Yes Yes Yes

dashboards?
Can create dashboards? Yes No Yes
Can customize existing Yes No Yes

datasets?
Can create datasets? Yes (using standard Salesforce No Yes

objects and up to 10 custom
objects)
Can create custom CRM No No Yes

Analytics apps?
Supports Einstein Discovery No No Yes

and Experience Cloud
integration?
Supports bulk actions and Apex No No Yes

steps?
Supports Sales Cloud Einstein No Yes No

AI?
Supports Salesforce Inbox? No Yes No
Service Analytics Limitations

These limitations apply to Service Analytics.
• Service Analytics Data Requirements:
Service Cloud data must include at least one each of the following for Service Analytics dashboards to function correctly.
– Events
– Tasks
– Closed cases
– Published articles attached to a case or an opportunity
708
It also requires that your org has at least one contact ID associated with a case.
Custom formula fields on the Cases object must exist or be created for the SLA missed (text) and FCR (Boolean) fields.
• Service Analytics Support for Salesforce Objects and Fields:

Service Analytics supports all Salesforce standard and custom objects and data. When you first create the app by default it includes
only a predefined set of objects and fields. The app creates a dataflow that exposes selected fields from these Salesforce objects.
– Account
– Cases
– Contact
– User
– UserRole
– Task
Service Analytics also uses fields from these options depending on the answers you select in the configuration wizard.
– Customer satisfaction (CSAT)
– Knowledge
– Business hours
– Case history
– Case record types
– Queues
– Opportunities
– Opportunity record types
– Events
– Telephony
– Chat
– Omni-Channel
Service Analytics supports standard and custom fields on standard Salesforce objects. The fields provided are determined by the
answers you provide when you create the app using the built-in configuration wizard.
Service Analytics limits custom objects support to no more than 10 custom objects for each org that implements Service Analytics.
This limitation is contractual, not technical.
To add custom objects or extra fields not included when you first create the app, you must update the Service Analytics dataflow.
For details, see Design Datasets with Dataflows and the Dataset Builder.
• More Service Analytics Limitations:

Service Analytics doesn’t support external data sources or registering new datasets from the app-generated dataflow.
Including CSAT score in dashboards or dataflows is optional. The app configuration wizard lets you associate CSAT from a custom
case field or Custom Object related to the Cases object.
You must manually add security predicates or other dataset filters to the app dataflow.
The app doesn't support multi-hierarchy (team and manager) when you create it. You can manually add that functionality.
The Knowledge Usage dashboard reports on a single Article Type, which you select when you use the configuration wizard.
709
Analyze Your Data Set Up the Analytics Platform with Licenses Purchased Before
October 20, 2015
Adoption Analytics Limitations

These limitations apply to Adoption Analytics.
• Datasets created for the app count against row limits for your CRM Analytics license.
• Includes only CRM Analytics logs. For any Salesforce logs, use Event Monitoring.
• The first time you use Adoption Analytics, it can take 24 hours for data to collect in event logs before it can be registered in the app’s
datasets and dashboard.
• Salesforce stores event log data for 30 days.
• CRM Analytics stores event log data in a dataset for up to 365 days, which counts against your license’s row limit.
Client Segmentation App Limitations

Using the Client Segmentation App is covered by a restricted use license created for Financial Services Cloud customers. Using the Client
Segmentation App is limited to:
• Salesforce data only
• Standard and custom objects
• 10 million rows of data
For access to additional CRM Analytics capabilities, purchase a CRM Analytics Growth, CRM Analytics Plus, or Einstein Predictions license.
Government Cloud Limitations

Only Government Cloud users can create recipes with Data Prep Classic. All other users, including those using Government Cloud Plus,
must use Data Prep to create a recipe.
Marketing Cloud Limitations

Data sync for the JourneyActivity object isn’t supported. To bring in data from the JourneyActivity object, you can query the JourneyActivity
view and add that data into a data extension. You can then import the data extension into CRM Analytics and sync it. If the JourneyActivity
object contains a large amount of data, create multiple data extensions for import into CRM Analytics. For more information, see Salesforce
Data Extensions in Marketing Cloud Connect.
SEE ALSO:
Tradeoffs and Limitations of Shield Platform Encryption
Set Up the Analytics Platform with Licenses Purchased Before October 20,
2015
If you purchased an Analytics Cloud Builder or Analytics Cloud Explorer license before October 20, 2015, you can continue to use your
licenses to set up the Analytics platform for users in your organization or you can migrate to the new single-user Analytics Growth license.
Note: This information applies only to customers who purchased Analytics licenses before October 20, 2015, and continue to
use the Analytics Cloud Builder or Analytics Cloud Explorer licenses after that without migrating to the new Analytics Growth
license. If you purchased Analytics on or after October 20, 2015, go to Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform.
710
Analyze Your Data Set Up the Analytics Platform with Licenses Purchased Before
October 20, 2015
Important: If you’re migrating from the previous Analytics Cloud Builder or Analytics Cloud Explorer platform licenses to the
single-user Sales Analytics Apps license, read Migrating From Analytics Licenses Purchased Before 10/20/2015 to New Analytics
Platform Licenses.
The Analytics Growth License

An Analytics license purchased before October 20, 2015 enables you to turn on CRM Analytics for your organization. Each previous
Analytics Growth license is contractually limited to a maximum of 400 users. If you need more than 400 users, you can purchase additional
Analytics licenses.
Each previous Analytics license enables you to:
• Store up to 250 million rows in your final registered datasets.
• Run up to 50 concurrent queries in Analytics.
The Analytics Cloud Permission Set License

Each user needs one of two Analytics permission set licenses to use the product. The permission set license defines what user permissions
can be assigned to the user. The administrator assigns permission set licenses to users.
For Analytics licenses sold before October 20, 2015, Salesforce provided the following permission set licenses:
• Analytics Cloud Builder permission set license enables users to access all CRM Analytics features.
• Analytics Cloud Explorer permission set license enables users to upload external data to Analytics and explore data.
Here are Analytics user permissions included with each permission set license.
User Permission Included in Explorer or Builder What It Enables

Permission Set License?
“Create and Edit Analytics Dashboards” Builder only Creating and editing Analytics dashboards.
“Create Analytics Apps” Builder only Creating and sharing Analytics applications.
“Edit Analytics Dataflows” Builder only Downloading, uploading, starting, stopping,

and rescheduling the dataflow. Viewing
dataflow and system jobs in the data
monitor.
“Manage Analytics” Builder only Accessing all Analytics features. Provides

Analytics administrator-level capabilities.
“Upload External Data to Analytics” Builder and Explorer Uploading external data to Analytics to
create a dataset. Viewing dataflow and
system jobs in the data monitor.
“Use Analytics” Builder and Explorer Using Analytics, and viewing the datasets,
lenses, and dashboards that the user has
permission to view. Automatically enabled
when you select any other Analytics
permission.
711
Analyze Your Data Migrating From CRM Analytics Licenses Purchased Before
10/20/2015 to New CRM Analytics Platform Licenses
Note: When you create permission sets for Analytics users, selecting any of the other CRM Analytics permissions automatically
enables the “Use Analytics” permission.
You can assign previous Analytics permission set licenses along with any of the following Salesforce user licenses:
• Lightning Platform (app subscription)
• Lightning Platform (one app)
• Full CRM
• Salesforce Platform
• Salesforce Platform One
SEE ALSO:
Migrating From CRM Analytics Licenses Purchased Before 10/20/2015 to New CRM Analytics Platform Licenses
Migrating From CRM Analytics Licenses Purchased Before 10/20/2015 to

New CRM Analytics Platform Licenses
To complete migration from previous Analytics Cloud Builder and Analytics Cloud Explorer licenses
EDITIONS
purchased before October 20, 2015, to the new CRM Analytics Growth license, you may need to
set up CRM Analytics users in your organization with new permission sets. Available in Salesforce
When Salesforce provisions your organization with the new CRM Analytics Growth license, you may Classic and Lightning
have to set up some users with the new license. Experience.
• Analytics Cloud Builder license users. Users who access CRM Analytics with the Analytics Cloud Available with CRM
Builder license should be able to continue to use the CRM Analytics platform without any Analytics, which is available
additional setup. The Builder license is simply renamed CRM Analytics Growth, and you’ll see for an extra cost in
that permission set license in Salesforce Setup. Enterprise, Performance,
• Analytics Cloud Explorer license users. During the new license provisioning process, Salesforce
may remove the Analytics Cloud Explorer license from your org. If that’s the case, you’ll see the
Edition.
new CRM Analytics Growth license instead of the Explorer license and you have to set up users
with that license. If the Explorer permission set license is still visible, you do not have to repeat
the setup process for Explorer users.
If users in your organization require you to set them up with the new CRM Analytics Growth license—even if they used CRM Analytics
with a previous license—follow the steps in CRM Analytics Platform Setup on page 661. You need to assign them the new permission
set license, create one or more new permission sets, and assign the permission sets to users.
Collaborative Forecasting and Quotas Data in Sales Analytics

Sales Analytics gives you a choice for how to include your team’s quotas depending on whether
USER PERMISSIONS
you use the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature to store quotas data.
To create and manage CRM
Note: Sales Cloud Einstein customers who use Sales Analytics must use Collaborative Forecasts
Analytics apps:
to see quota data. They can't edit the quota dataset. • Manage CRM Analytics
You have the following options for including quotas data in Sales Analytics. Templated Apps
• Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
712
Analyze Your Data Collaborative Forecasting and Quotas Data in Sales Analytics
Table 6: Sales Analytics Quotas Data Options

Option Sales Cloud Settings Configuration Wizard Additional Setup
Settings Requirements
1 • Sales Cloud Collaborative Select Collaborative Forecasting None. Sales Analytics
Forecasts enabled in first wizard screen that lets automatically adds quota data
you add objects. from the Forecasts object.
• Collaborative Forecasts
includes forecast quota data.
2 • Sales Cloud Collaborative Select Collaborative Forecasting Create .CSV file with quotas data,
Forecasts enabled in first wizard screen that lets upload to CRM Analytics, rerun
you add objects. dataflow. See next instructions.
• Collaborative Forecasts does
not include forecast quota
data.
3 Sales Cloud Collaborative No setting available. Wizard Create .CSV file with quotas data,
Forecasts not enabled does not give you the option of upload to CRM Analytics, rerun
adding Collaborative Forecasts dataflow. See next instructions.
data.
Note: Selecting both Opportunity Splits and Collaborative Forecasting pulls in quota data for the split type you've selected in
your org.
Wizard settings are optional, depending on whether you want to include Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts data in your app.
With Option 1, Sales Analytics automatically adds quotas data to your app and its dashboards. With Options 2 and 3, add quotas data
to your app by following these instructions.
Note: When you work with .CSV files you want to import to Sales Analytics, create and open them using only a UTF-8-compliant
text editor. Opening them in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software reformats .CSV files and makes them unusable in Sales
Analytics
Important: When you create the .CSV file, be sure it contains these fields, in this order, with exactly these names. Field names
are case-sensitive.
1. StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format)
2. QuotaAmount
3. OwnerName
4. Username
1. Create a .CSV file to include the fields just described, that is StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format), QuotaAmount, OwnerName, Username.
For an example, see Sales Analytics Example .CSV File.
2. Save the file to a location that you can easily remember.
3. In Salesforce, go to the CRM Analytics home page and find the Quota dataset.
4. Click the arrow at the upper right corner of the dataset panel and select Edit.
713
5. Salesforce displays the dataset editing screen for the Quota dataset. Look for Replace Data in the upper right corner and click it.
6. In the dialog box that opens, navigate to the .CSV file you created in Step 1, and double-click it.
7. Click Next to open the Replace Dataset Data page.
8. If your fiscal period is different than the calendar period, that is if it starts on a date other than January 1, update the Quota Metadata
file. If your fiscal period starts on January 1, skip to the next step.
a. Copy the JSON from Sales Analytics Quota Dataset JSON File and paste it into a text editor of your choice.
b. Change the value of "fiscalMonthOffset" from 4 to a number that represents the month your fiscal period starts. In
Sales Analytics metadata, the numeral “0” stands for January, “1” stands for February, and so on up to “11,” which stands for
December. Save the file to your desktop.
c. In CRM Analytics Studio, go to the Replace Dataset Data page and locate the Data Schema File area of the page. Click the arrow
next to Quota .JSON file, select Replace File, find the file you saved and upload it to CRM Analytics.
9. On the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next to open the Edit Field Attributes page. The first column —QuotaAmount— must be
selected. If not, select it. In the Field Attributes panel on the right, make sure Field Type is set to Measure.
714
10. Click Upload. You’re asked to confirm that you want to replace the file. Click Replace to upload the file.
11. After uploading your quota data, rerun the dataflow to update the dashboards.
a. Click the Gear menu at the upper right of the Sales Analytics screen and select Data Manager.
b. Select Dataflow view from the menu at the top left of the Data Manager screen.
715
Analyze Your Data Sales Analytics Example .CSV File
c. Find your app; which can mean scrolling down the page. Open the menu on the far right of the screen next to the app icon and
name, and click
Sa.tr Thsa’t
it. The dataflow assures that Sales Analytics has your company’s latest sales data. You can learn more about dataflows from
Schedule the Sales App Daily Dataflow.
Edit the Forecast Dashboard Data Source Connection Make Sure Quotas Data Is Accurate
If Sales Analyticsquotas numbers look higher than expected in the Forecast dashboard, it can be because the app counts some
quotas twice. To make sure that the dashboard accurately reflects your team’s quotas, specify the dataset field the dashboard uses
as its data source
Sales Analytics Example .CSV File
Here’s an example of the .CSV file you create to update the Sales Analytics Quota (Target) dataset.
Sales Analytics Quota Dataset JSON File
Use this file to update the Sales Analytics Quota dataset with your fiscal year start date if it’s not January 1.
Sales Analytics Example .CSV File

Here’s an example of the .CSV file you create to update the Sales Analytics Quota (Target) dataset.
Note: This file is for example purposes only. Create a unique .CSV file with quota data for members of your team including the
following fields:
• QuotaAmount
• StartDate
• OwnerName
• Username
Save the .CSV file in UTF-8 format. Field names are case-sensitive and must appear in your file exactly as shown here.
Important: Do not open the .CSV file with Microsoft Excel or another spreadsheet application, which can corrupt the file format.
716
Analyze Your Data Sales Analytics Quota Dataset JSON File
Example:
QuotaAmount,StartDate,OwnerName,Username
150000,2016-01-01,Chris Riley,trailhead9.ub20k5i9t8ou@example.com
150000,2016-01-01,Harold Campbell,trailhead14.jibpbwvuy67t@example.com
150000,2016-01-01,Jessica Nichols,trailhead19.d1fxj2goytkp@example.com
150000,2016-01-01,Catherine Brown,trailhead16.kojyepokybge@example.com
150000,2016-01-01,Kelly Frazier,trailhead7.zdcsy4ax10mr@example.com
150000,2016-01-01,Dennis Howard,trailhead4.wfokpckfroxp@example.com
Sales Analytics Quota Dataset JSON File

Use this file to update the Sales Analytics Quota dataset with your fiscal year start date if it’s not January 1.
Copy the contents of this file into an editor of your choice and change the “fiscalMonthOffset” value (shown in bold) to the
month your fiscal period begins. In metadata, the numeral “0” stands for January, “1” stands for February, and so on, up to “11”, which
stands for December. In the code below, the number is set to “4”, which stands for May. Use the number that represents the month your
fiscal period begins. Then save the file and upload it to Sales Analytics following the instructions in Collaborative Forecasting and Quotas
Data in Sales Analytics.
{
"objects": [
{
"connector": "CSV",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Quota_csv",
"label": "Quota.csv",
"name": "Quota_csv",
"fields": [
{
"fullyQualifiedName": "QuotaAmount",
"name": "QuotaAmount",
"type": "Numeric",
"label": "QuotaAmount",
"precision": 18,
"defaultValue": "0",
"scale": 0
},
{
"fullyQualifiedName": "StartDate",
"name": "StartDate",
"type": "Date",
717
Analyze Your Data Integrate and Prepare Data for Analysis
"label": "StartDate",
"format": "yyyy-MM-dd",
"fiscalMonthOffset": 4,
"isYearEndFiscalYear": true
},
{
"fullyQualifiedName": "OwnerName",
"name": "OwnerName",
"type": "Text",
"label": "OwnerName"
},
{
"fullyQualifiedName": "Username",
"name": "Username",
"type": "Text",
"label": "Username"
}
]
}
]
}
Integrate and Prepare Data for Analysis

You can use CRM Analytics lenses and dashboards to analyze your data. To prepare the data for analysis and increase performance when
processing large amounts of data, first load, clean, and transform the data into datasets.
Data Manager
The data manager is where you monitor your data jobs, prepare datasets with recipes and dataflows, and connect to data.
Get Started with Data Integration
In CRM Analytics, data integration involves gathering and preparing the Salesforce and external data you want to analyze. External
data is data that resides outside of the Salesforce org that you use for Analytics, such as data from another Salesforce org, outside
applications, spreadsheets, and databases. After integrating the data, you prepare it into datasets. Data preparation is the process
of transforming your data into a form that’s meaningful and valuable to the people consuming it. For example, you can define data
preparation logic that combines data from two data sources and cleans up inconsistencies, such as differently formatted dates and
codes. Users then explore and visualize datasets through CRM Analytics lenses and dashboards.
Connect and Sync Your Data to CRM Analytics
CRM Analytics connectors give you an easy way to connect data inside and outside of Salesforce with CRM Analytics. CRM Analytics
provides a prebuilt connector for data in your local org and a range of configurable connectors for remote data in external Salesforce
orgs, apps, data warehouses, and database services.
Clean, Transform, and Load Data with Data Prep
Data Prep provides an intuitive, visual interface in CRM Analytics that allows you to easily point-and-click your way to build recipes
that prepare data and load it into a target. Use the graph of a recipe to see at a glance where the data comes from and how it flows
through the recipe to the target. To validate the recipe as you build, preview how raw data is transformed at every step of the way.
Manage Recipes
After you create a recipe, use the Recipes tab to edit and delete them.
718
Run Data Sync and Recipes to Create and Refresh Datasets

Whether you use local Salesforce data or pull data from an external source, you must set up CRM Analytics to load the data, make
it available to CRM Analytics, and keep it up to date.
Other Ways to Integrate Data
Dataflows and recipes can integrate most data from internal to external data sources. However, CRM Analytics provides additional
ways to integrate data that are more effective for specific use cases. For example, if you don’t have to transform data before loading
it into a dataset, you can import data directly from CSV or Excel files. If you need to transform it, you can upload the file to create an
intermediate dataset, and then use a recipe or dataflow to change that data before loading the results into another dataset. Or, to
analyze Salesforce report data over time, you can create a dataset and dashboard that trends the report with just a few clicks. With
trending, CRM Analytics creates a dataset based on snapshots of your Salesforce report data.
Get Started Faster with Data Templates
Salesforce Data Pipelines use purpose built data templates for common use case data tasks to accelerate your ROI. These data
templates generate the necessary data connectors, data prep recipes, and queries for apps that can be scheduled to run regularly.
Manage Datasets
Edit a dataset to update its data, change its extended metadata, apply row-level security, or restore the dataset to a previous version.
Data Integration Best Practices
Review these tips to improve the performance of your recipes, speed up the editing of large recipes, and streamline data sync.
Data Integration Troubleshooting
Use these tips to resolve problems with data integration issues in CRM Analytics.
Data Manager
The data manager is where you monitor your data jobs, prepare datasets with recipes and dataflows, and connect to data.
To open the data manager in CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then click Data Manager.
The Data Manager consists of multiple tabs.
Note: If you purchased CRM Analytics and Data Pipelines, use the dropdown menu to switch between the two. For example, to
view and create recipes for Data Pipelines, select Data Pipelines first.
Use these Data Manager tabs to perform various tasks.
Tab Usage
Jobs Monitor Monitor and troubleshoot jobs, like recipes that are currently running.
719
Tab Usage
Data Assets View data sources, including datasets and connected objects, that you can use in recipes. Upload CSV files to get
access to other data sources that don’t have prebuilt connectors.
Recipes View, edit, delete, and run recipes. You can also access Data Prep to create a recipe from this tab.
Usage Monitor Data Pipeline usage and limits. View data about the number of rows in all datasets, the output to
Salesforce and CSVs, the number of external data uploads, the combined number of dataflow and recipe runs
in a 24-hour period, and more. You can also view this information on the Getting Started page in setup. The limits
vary based on your licenses.
Connections Create, edit, and delete connections to different source and target systems. A connection enables recipes to
access data in that system. Data Pipelines provides out-of-the-box connectors that allow you to quickly create
connections.
Data Templates Create common use case data tasks from templates to accelerate your data pipeline experience.
On the Jobs Monitor tab, the number of jobs is limited to 500 rows. Use the Search bar to find older jobs as needed.
SEE ALSO:
Monitor

In CRM Analytics, data integration involves gathering and preparing the Salesforce and external data you want to analyze. External data
is data that resides outside of the Salesforce org that you use for Analytics, such as data from another Salesforce org, outside applications,
spreadsheets, and databases. After integrating the data, you prepare it into datasets. Data preparation is the process of transforming
your data into a form that’s meaningful and valuable to the people consuming it. For example, you can define data preparation logic
that combines data from two data sources and cleans up inconsistencies, such as differently formatted dates and codes. Users then
explore and visualize datasets through CRM Analytics lenses and dashboards.
For faster queries when using large amounts of data involving millions or billions of rows, load the data into datasets. A dataset is a
collection of related data that is stored in an indexed, denormalized, and highly compressed form.
Recipes allow you to prepare your data before loading it into datasets. For example, with a recipe, you can perform data preparation
tasks before loading it into a dataset. You can clean, aggregate, and transform your data. You can also create columns based on calculations
of existing data. However, CRM Analytics offers multiple ways to load your data into datasets, like .csv upload and dataflows—choose
the approach that best meets your needs.
Recipes follow an extract-transform-load process for preparing data using the Data Prep tool. To speed up the process of getting data
into datasets, a data sync pulls data from the data source in advance and stores it in connected objects inside CRM Analytics. A recipe
then uses the connected objects as sources, prepares that data, and then loads the results into one or more datasets.
720
To set up access to source data, create a connection. When you create a connection, select objects and columns to pull data from. You
can add a filter to the connection to extract a subset of all rows. In the connection properties, you also specify a user account that
determines what data the connection can access. For example, to access data in Amazon S3, specify an Amazon S3 user account. If the
user account doesn’t have access to an object, the connection can’t pull data from that object.
After you create a connection, run its data sync to extract the data from each selected object in the data source and store it in the
corresponding CRM Analytics connected object. After you run a data sync for the first time, you can add the connected objects as sources
for recipes. In data prep, you can add transformations to prepare the data in the connected objects and output the results into datasets.
Run the recipe to create datasets. Continue to run them to refresh the data. You can run data sync and recipes on demand. You can also
schedule them to run on an ongoing basis. To ensure that your recipes use the latest data, schedule data sync jobs to complete before
dependent recipes run.
721
Tip: With Salesforce Direct Data, you don’t need to load Salesforce data into a dataset to analyze it in an Analytics dashboard.
Instead, a dashboard widget can query a Salesforce object directly. Direct Data queries are especially useful when a dataset can’t
be refreshed fast enough, such as when you want to analyze data every 2 minutes, but the dataset refreshes every 15 minutes.
However, it’s important to monitor query performance when using Direct Data on large objects. If the Salesforce object contains
millions of records, sometimes queries can be faster on a dataset than direct queries on the Salesforce object.
About Datasets
A CRM Analytics dataset is a collection of related data that can be viewed in a tabular format. The data can come from many sources,
including Salesforce objects, external data sources, and even other datasets.
Ways to Get Data from Data Sources Into Datasets
To populate datasets with data from data sources, you can import the data directly from the source. Or, you can extract the data
from the source and prepare it before loading it into a dataset.
Plan for Your Data Integration Project
Before you build your data integration solution, think about the use case you want to analyze and the data you need to get you
there.
Considerations Before Integrating Data into Datasets
This section covers expected behavior and limitations to consider before integrating data into datasets.
SEE ALSO:
Why Should I Use Recipes Instead of Dataflows?
About Datasets
A CRM Analytics dataset is a collection of related data that can be viewed in a tabular format. The data can come from many sources,
including Salesforce objects, external data sources, and even other datasets.
Columns and Rows in Datasets

A dataset is analogous to a table in a database. It organizes data by columns and rows.
Column Types in Datasets
Datasets support the following column types: dates, dimensions, and measures.
System Columns in Datasets
System columns are dataset columns that don’t appear in the CRM Analytics user interface, such as lenses or Dashboard Designer.
For example, to enable dataset security based on the Salesforce role hierarchy, the Flatten transformation generates columns that
store the role hierarchy details. To prevent a CRM Analytics user from seeing and querying these columns, flag them as system
columns.
Denormalized Data
The data in Salesforce objects is normalized, meaning that it’s stored efficiently in a collection of related tables to minimize redundancy,
enhance consistency, and ensure data integrity. In contrast, data in datasets is denormalized, where it’s stored in an optimal format
for querying. All the work required to combine the data from multiple sources is done ahead of time. The data is centralized,
compressed, and ready to be analyzed.
722
Dataset Security
For each dataset that you create, you can apply security to restrict access to sensitive rows in the dataset.
Columns and Rows in Datasets

A dataset is analogous to a table in a database. It organizes data by columns and rows.
A dataset stores data in a file storage system, where data is organized by strings (dimensions) and numbers (measures). To make it easier
to visualize, you can think of a dataset as a table, where the fields are columns and the values are rows.
Note: In a dataset, columns are analogous to fields in Salesforce objects and rows are analogous to records. However, when
talking about datasets, we always use the terms column and row.
• A column represents a category of information, such as an opportunity source or account name. Each column has a name, a data
type, and other properties.
• A row represents an instance of data in the dataset. Rows can contain transactional data, such as individual invoices, or they can
contain summary data, such as weekly invoice totals. What’s important is that rows in a dataset must contain the same level of
granularity, such as all invoice transactions or all weekly totals, rather than mixed levels.
Column Types in Datasets

Datasets support the following column types: dates, dimensions, and measures.
Type Description
Date Can be represented as a day, month, year, and, optionally, time. You can group, filter, and perform
math on dates.
Dimension A qualitative value that usually contains categorical information (text), such as Product Category, Lead
Status, and Case Subject. Dimensions are useful for grouping and filtering your data. Unlike measures,
you can’t perform math on dimensions. To increase query performance, CRM Analytics indexes all
dimension columns in datasets.
723
Type Description
Measure A quantitative value that contains numerical data, such as revenue or exchange rate. You can do math
on measures, such as calculating the total revenue or the minimum exchange rate.
System Columns in Datasets

System columns are dataset columns that don’t appear in the CRM Analytics user interface, such as lenses or Dashboard Designer. For
example, to enable dataset security based on the Salesforce role hierarchy, the Flatten transformation generates columns that store the
role hierarchy details. To prevent a CRM Analytics user from seeing and querying these columns, flag them as system columns.
Denormalized Data
The data in Salesforce objects is normalized, meaning that it’s stored efficiently in a collection of related tables to minimize redundancy,
enhance consistency, and ensure data integrity. In contrast, data in datasets is denormalized, where it’s stored in an optimal format for
querying. All the work required to combine the data from multiple sources is done ahead of time. The data is centralized, compressed,
and ready to be analyzed.
Dataset Security
For each dataset that you create, you can apply security to restrict access to sensitive rows in the dataset.
SEE ALSO:

To populate datasets with data from data sources, you can import the data directly from the source. Or, you can extract the data from
the source and prepare it before loading it into a dataset.
Import Data
You can import data from Excel spreadsheets (via a connector) and CSV files directly into a dataset. This approach populates the dataset
without modifying the data.
724
Prepare and Load Data

If you want to make any changes to the data, you can use recipes and dataflows. Recipes and dataflows are powerful features that you
can use to cleanse, prepare, and optimize your data for analysis. You can use these tools to extract data from different data sources, both
inside and outside of Salesforce.
SEE ALSO:
Plan for Your Data Integration Project

Before you build your data integration solution, think about the use case you want to analyze and the data you need to get you there.
Define What You Want To Analyze and Why

Begin by clarifying the purpose of your analysis. What area of your business do you want to target? What specific improvements do you
want to make in this area? What KPIs can help you measure improvements? Understand what you want to learn from your data. That
way, you can focus your efforts on what’s most important.
Define the Data Elements Needed for Your Analysis

What objects and fields are the most relevant? Start with the obvious ones, and then consider some that aren’t so obvious. Design the
dataset that supports the analysis you want to conduct.
Identify the Best Data Source for Each Data Element

For each element, what is its data source? A Salesforce object? An external data source? Some data integration solutions merge data
from multiple sources into a single dataset.
Investigate Details About Individual Data Elements

Drill down into these details so that you understand what data cleansing tasks, if any, are required to prepare your data for analysis. For
each data element, determine how it is defined in the data source. What is its datatype? How is it formatted? How frequently do format
inconsistencies occur? What is its default value, if any? Are null values allowed and, if so, how frequently do null values occur? How
accurate are the values? How frequently do inaccuracies occur? Are values written once, or are they subsequently updated and, if so,
how often?
725
Determine What Data You Need for Your Analysis

To yield credible results from your analysis, do you need all rows of data from the data source, or can you filter on a specific segment
(subset)? For example, does your analysis target business activity in all countries or just certain ones? Are you focusing on a particular
demographic or a range of values, such as customers with a total sales above 100,000?
Determine the Time Window for Your Data

How far back in time do you want to go for your analysis? Two years? Six months? Last week? Filter out any data that is outside your
time range. And try to filter data as early as possible to minimize unnecessary data processing.
Commit to Continuous Improvement

We all learn as we go. As you test your data integration and review the results, you can discover ways to improve your outcomes. Perhaps
you reconsider previous assumptions, change data sources, add or drop columns, or filter out extraneous rows to focus on just a particular
segment. CRM Analytics tools can help you adapt to changes quickly so that you can make incremental improvements while keeping
the solution in place.

This section covers expected behavior and limitations to consider before integrating data into datasets.
Handle Numeric Values

CRM Analytics internally stores numeric values in datasets as long values. For example, CRM Analytics stores the number 3,200.99
with a scale of 2 as 320099. The user interface converts the stored value back to decimal notation to display the number as 3200.99.
Handle Date Values
When CRM Analytics loads dates into a dataset, it breaks up each date into multiple columns, such as day, week, month, quarter,
and year, based on the calendar year. For example, if you extract dates from a CreateDate column, CRM Analytics generates
columns such as CreateDate_Day and CreateDate_Week. If your fiscal year differs from the calendar year, you can enable
CRM Analytics to generate fiscal date columns as well.
Handle Custom Time Zone Values
Time zone support lets you view time-specific data on dashboards in a time zone that you specify for your org. By default, CRM
Analytics datasets aren’t time-zone aware, so CRM Analytics treats all date-time values as being in GMT. The data you see on your
dashboards is in GMT, regardless of your local time zone. When you enable time zone support, CRM Analytics converts date-time
values in your datasets to the time zone selected for CRM Analytics. You can then create time zone enabled dashboards to display
these converted date-time values. Users see dashboard data in the single custom time zone you set, not their personal timezone
specified in Salesforce. Recipe formulas and filters with date-time fields operate in GMT.
Handle Text Values
Confirm that text values in a column are uniform in formatting, spelling, and language. Inconsistencies can occur within data sources
and after merging data from multiple data sources.
Handle Missing Values
Gaps in your data can throw off analysis. Missing values are best fixed in the source application by, for example, making it a required
field. However, if you can’t do that, you can use CRM Analytics to fill in missing data.
Dataset Capacity and Limits
Before you create any datasets, review the limits. For example, each Salesforce org has a maximum number of rows for all datasets
in the org. There are also limits on the number of columns in a dataset and characters in a column.
726
Reserved Dataset Field Names

CRM Analytics data prep doesn’t support using some reserved keywords as field names in lenses and dashboards.
How CRM Analytics and Salesforce Data Pipelines Work Together
CRM Analytics and Salesforce Data Pipelines are unique products, but settings, limits, and assets sometimes are shared or interrelated
when you use both products. These features are shared when you use CRM Analytics.
Handle Numeric Values

CRM Analytics internally stores numeric values in datasets as long values. For example, CRM Analytics stores the number 3,200.99 with
a scale of 2 as 320099. The user interface converts the stored value back to decimal notation to display the number as 3200.99.
Range Limits for Numeric Values

The maximum numeric value that can be stored in a dataset is 36,028,797,018,963,967 and the minimum numeric value is
-36,028,797,018,963,968.
Considerations for Numeric Values
Confirm that numeric values in a column are uniform in granularity and units. Inconsistencies can occur within a data source and
after merging data from multiple data sources.
Handle Null Numeric Values
When you create or update a dataset through your dataflow, recipe, or a CSV upload, for example, CRM Analytics replaces blank
numeric values with the specified default value. When no default value is specified, CRM Analytics replaces blanks in numeric columns
with 0 or null based on whether you enable null measure handling.
Range Limits for Numeric Values

The maximum numeric value that can be stored in a dataset is 36,028,797,018,963,967 and the minimum numeric value is
-36,028,797,018,963,968.
Warning: If a numeric value is not within this range, you can receive unexpected results. For example, if you try to load the value
3.7E-16 with a scale of 16 into a dataset, CRM Analytics tries to store the value as 37000000000000000. However, because this
value exceeds the maximum, CRM Analytics fails to load the entire row. In addition, if you perform a query that aggregates measures
(such as a sum or group by) and the resulting value exceeds the maximum, the value overflows and CRM Analytics returns an
incorrect result.
Considerations for Numeric Values

Confirm that numeric values in a column are uniform in granularity and units. Inconsistencies can occur within a data source and after
merging data from multiple data sources.
• Use the same granularity. Don’t mix aggregate totals with transaction values in the same column. For example, if you have a column
that contains invoice charges, make sure that the values in that column are all at the same level of detail: either the total invoice
charge or charges for individual line items, but not both. Similarly, don’t mix values from different time intervals, such as weekly and
monthly totals.
• Standardize on a single unit of measure. If a column contains numeric values represented by different units of measure, such as
currencies, weights, or dimensions, consider creating a calculated column and converting those numbers into a common unit of
measure. That way, you compare apples to apples, not apples to oranges to lemons.
• Use a consistent numeric precision or scale. If you have long numbers or numbers with many decimal places, consider creating a
calculated column that simplifies the values by rounding or dividing by a multiple of 10.
727

When you create or update a dataset through your dataflow, recipe, or a CSV upload, for example, CRM Analytics replaces blank numeric
values with the specified default value. When no default value is specified, CRM Analytics replaces blanks in numeric columns with 0 or
null based on whether you enable null measure handling.
Note: Null measure handling is enabled in orgs created after the Spring ’17 release and can’t be disabled. To enable this feature
in other orgs, see Enable Null Measure Handling in Orgs Created Before Spring ’17 .
CRM Analytics replaces blanks with:
• 0 when null measure handling is disabled and no default value is specified
• null when null measure handling is enabled and no default value is specified
This behavior is important because CRM Analytics treats null and 0 differently. They aren’t the same. Null means that no value exists. 0
represents a value. Math operations performed on null results in null. For example,
10 + null = null
To return 0 instead of null in a math operation, you can use an expression similar to this one: 10 + coalesce(null,0). For
example, 10 + coalesce('Amount', 0), where Amount is null.
Aggregate functions—such as sum, average, count, min, and max—exclude null values from calculations. To understand how 0 and
null are treated differently with aggregate functions, consider the following customer satisfaction scores, where one score is missing for
Customer2.
When CRM Analytics replaces the blank value with a zero, the average and minimum calculations are incorrect. When the replacement
is null, the average and minimum calculations are correct.
Null measure handling allows the use of null values in these dataflow transformations.
append CRM Analytics can append datasets with different measure columns. For example, one dataset has an Amount
column that is not present in a second dataset. After the append, the new dataset has an Amount column
containing nulls in rows from the second dataset. Without null measure handling, appending datasets is not
possible when measure columns are different.
augment When the left key is null or has no match on the right, CRM Analytics inserts nulls in the columns added from the
right. Without null measure handling, CRM Analytics inserts zeros for measures.
computeExpression The defaultValue attribute for a computed column accepts a value of null. For example:
"SAQLNode": {
"parameters": {
"source": "extractOpp",
728
"mergeWithSource": true,
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "Amount2",
"type": "Numeric",
"precision": 18,
"defaultValue": "null",
"scale": 5,
"saqlExpression": "Amount+Amount"
}
computeRelative The defaultValue attribute for a computed column accepts a value of null. When a value can’t be calculated,
such as when previous() or next() has no value, CRM Analytics uses this default. For example:
"computeTrending": {
"action": "computeRelative",
"parameters": {
"partitionBy": ["OpportunityId"],
"orderBy": [
{
"name":"CreatedDate",
"direction":"asc"
}
],
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "AmountPrev",
"defaultValue" : "null",
"expression": {
"default": "null"
}
}
dim2mea The measureDefault parameter accepts a value of null. CRM Analytics uses this value when it can’t convert
a dimension to a valid numeric value. When no default is specified, CRM Analytics uses a value of null. For example:
"Create_Measure_From_Dimension": {
"action": "dim2mea",
"parameters": {
"dimension": "StageVal__c",
"measure": "StageValue",
"measureDefault": "null",
"source": "Extract_Opportunities"
}
}
sfdcDigest The defaultValue attribute for a column accepts a value of null. When no default is specified, CRM Analytics
uses a value of null. For example:
Sample Sfdc-digest :{
"Extract_Opportunities": {
729
"action": "sfdcDigest",
"parameters": {
"object": "Opportunity",
"fields": [
{
"name": "Amount",
"defaultValue": "null",
"precision":18
"scale":2
}
Update CRM Analytics can update non-null values with nulls.
Note: The delta transformation is not supported when null measure handling is enabled and dataflows containing delta
transformations fail. To calculate changes in measure values over time, use computeRelative and computeExpression
transformations instead. For an example, see Handle Null Numeric Values .
Handle Date Values

When CRM Analytics loads dates into a dataset, it breaks up each date into multiple columns, such as day, week, month, quarter, and
year, based on the calendar year. For example, if you extract dates from a CreateDate column, CRM Analytics generates columns
such as CreateDate_Day and CreateDate_Week. If your fiscal year differs from the calendar year, you can enable CRM Analytics
to generate fiscal date columns as well.
Standard Date Fields

CRM Analytics generates the following date columns.
Field Name Field Type Description

<date field name>_Second Text Number of seconds. If the date contains no
seconds, value is 0.
<date field name>_Minute Text Number of minutes. If the date contains no

minutes, value is 0.
<date field name>_Hour Text Number of hours. If the date contains no

hours, value is 0.
<date field name>_Day Text Day of the month.
<date field name>_Week Text Week number in calendar year.
<date field name>_Month Text Month number in calendar year.
<date field name>_Quarter Text Quarter number in calendar year.
<date field name>_Year Text Calendar year.
<date field name>_Week_Fiscal Text Week number in fiscal year.
<date field name>_Month_Fiscal Text Month number in fiscal year.
730

<date field name>_Quarter_Fiscal Text Quarter number in fiscal year.
<date field name>_Year_Fiscal Text Fiscal year.
<date field name>_sec_epoch Numeric Number of seconds that have elapsed since
January 1, 1970 (midnight UTC).
<date field name>_day_epoch Numeric Number of days that have elapsed since
January 1, 1970 (midnight UTC).
Inherited Custom Fiscal Years Fields

After you have defined a custom fiscal year in Salesforce and enabled the setting in CRM Analytics (see Custom Fiscal Year Support on
page 735), have CRM Analytics inherit the custom fiscal year so your users can work with custom fiscal year data in SAQL queries and
dashboards.
When CRM Analytics loads dates into a dataset as part of a dataflow, it generates multiple fields that describe periods of time, such as
day, week, and month. For example, when CRM Analytics loads a date field called CreatedDate, it generates fields like
CreatedDate_Day, CreatedDate_Week, and CreatedDate_Month.
After CRM Analytics inherits custom fiscal years from Salesforce, CRM Analytics generates more fields that describe the inherited custom
fiscal years. The custom fiscal year fields are named with the suffix _Fiscal. Continuing with the CreatedDate example, CRM
Analytics generates fields like CreatedDate_Week_Fiscal, CreatedDate_Month_Fiscal, and
CreatedDate_Quarter_Fiscal.
Note: If CRM Analytics custom fiscal years were previously defined using the standard fields (not inherited), then those fields are
overwritten with data inherited from the custom fiscal years defined in Salesforce.
Here are the Fiscal fields CRM Analytics generates for each date field.

<date field name>_Week_Fiscal Text Week number in fiscal year.
<date field name>_Month_Fiscal Text Month number in fiscal year.
<date field name>_Quarter_Fiscal Text Quarter number in fiscal year.
<date field name>_Year_Fiscal Numeric Fiscal year.
Considerations for Date Columns

Confirm that date values in a column are uniform in format and time zone. Inconsistencies can occur within a data source and after
Date Formats and Fiscal Dates for Source Data
You can set metadata attributes to control how dates are loaded into CRM Analytics and to enable CRM Analytics to generate fiscal
date columns.
Considerations for Date Columns

Confirm that date values in a column are uniform in format and time zone. Inconsistencies can occur within a data source and after
731
Perform the following tasks for date columns.

• Ensure consistent date formats. When combining data from different data sources, sometimes dates are stored in different formats,
such as MM-dd-yyyy and yy-MM-dd’T’HH:mm:ss’Z’. Use the Format Date transformation to make the formats consistent.
• Fix time zone differences in datetime columns. CRM Analytics doesn’t officially support multiple time zones. If a column contains a
mix of time zones, consider creating a calculated column with the Formula transformation to add or subtract hours to datetime
values to ensure a single time zone.
Note: All date column labels in a dataset must be unique.
Date Formats and Fiscal Dates for Source Data

You can set metadata attributes to control how dates are loaded into CRM Analytics and to enable CRM Analytics to generate fiscal date
columns.
You set the metadata attributes in the sfdcDigest transformation parameters for Salesforce data or in the metadata file for external CSV
data.
Keep the following tips in mind when setting the metadata attributes for date columns:
• You can’t configure dates that are obtained from external data via connectors.
• Before loading dates from an external data file, confirm that the date format meets the requirements specified here.
• Confirm that the column names in the external data file don’t conflict with the generated date column names. For example, if you
load a CSV with column Create_Date, CRM Analytics generates the Create_Date_Year column in the dataset. If the CSV
also has a column named Create_Date_Year, CRM Analytics throws an error.
Fiscal Periods in CRM Analytics

If the calendar and fiscal year differ, you can enable CRM Analytics to generate the fiscal date columns in the dataset, in addition to
calendar date columns. To enable CRM Analytics to generate fiscal date columns, set the fiscalMonthOffset attribute to a value
other than 0. Set this attribute for each date column that you want to generate fiscal date columns for. If you set the offset to 0 or you
don’t specify a value, CRM Analytics doesn’t generate any fiscal date columns.
Note:
• Check out Inherit Custom Fiscal Years from Salesforce to learn how CRM Analytics can apply your Salesforce org’s custom fiscal
calendar settings automatically.
• Check out Data Prep's Fiscal Year Configuration to learn how you can define a fiscal year for only your Data Prep data in CRM
Analytics.
Additionally, to configure the fiscal periods, set the following metadata attributes for each date column.
• fiscalMonthOffset
In addition to enabling fiscal date columns, this attribute also determines the first month of the fiscal year. Specify the difference
between the first month of the fiscal year and first month of the calendar year (January) in fiscalMonthOffset. For example,
if your fiscal year begins in April, set fiscalMonthOffset to 3.
• isYearEndFiscalYear
Because the fiscal year can start in one calendar year and end in another, you must specify which year to use for the fiscal year. The
isYearEndFiscalYear attribute indicates whether the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year ends or begins. For
example, if isYearEndFiscalYear = true or you don’t specify this attribute, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal
year ends. As shown in the following diagram, any dates between 4/1/2015 and 3/31/2016 are part of the fiscal year 2016 because
the fiscal year ends in 2016.
732
If isYearEndFiscalYear = false, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year begins. As shown in the following
diagram, any dates between 4/1/2015 and 3/31/2016 are part of the fiscal year 2015 because the fiscal year begins in 2015.
Week Numbering in CRM Analytics

For each date loaded into a dataset, CRM Analytics generates the corresponding week number for the calendar year and, if applicable,
fiscal year. Similar to the SOQL function WEEK_IN_YEAR, week 1 in CRM Analytics is January 1–7. (This is different from the UTC
week() calculation.)
If needed, you can configure the week to start on a particular day of the week by setting the firstDayOfWeek attribute. For example,
if January 1 is a Saturday and you configure the week to start on a Monday, then week 1 is January 1–2. Week 2 starts on Monday, January
3. Week 3 starts January 10, the following Monday. Notice that week 1 can be a short week to ensure that the subsequent weeks start
on the specified day of the week.
Data Prep Date Configuration

Use Data Prep’s date configuration to analyze your CRM Analytics data according to a custom year. Date configurations are automatically
applied to Data Prep recipe data. Date configurations are ideal for orgs that want to analyze by a custom week start, or by a fiscal
year without manually configuring the fiscal month offset or applying a fiscal year to the entire org.
Data Prep Date Configuration

Use Data Prep’s date configuration to analyze your CRM Analytics data according to a custom year.
EDITIONS
Date configurations are automatically applied to Data Prep recipe data. Date configurations are
ideal for orgs that want to analyze by a custom week start, or by a fiscal year without manually Available in Salesforce
configuring the fiscal month offset or applying a fiscal year to the entire org. Lightning Experience.
This feature isn’t available for orgs with:
Available with CRM
• An org-wide custom fiscal year defined in the company profile. Analytics, which is available
• The Custom Fiscal Year Support in CRM Analytics enabled in Analytics settings. for an extra cost in
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, then select Data Prep Settings. and Unlimited Editions. Also
2. Turn on Date Configurations. available in Developer
Edition.
3. To create a Date Configuration, click Create Date Configuration.
733
4. Define your calendar settings, and click Save.

• Label: Enter a name for your fiscal year configuration.
• Fiscal Year Start: Select the month your fiscal year starts.
• Fiscal Year is Based On: Select how to base your fiscal year. For example, if your fiscal year starts in April 2020 and ends in March
2021, select to base your fiscal year on The starting month for your fiscal year to be 2020. Or, select to base your fiscal year on
The ending month for your fiscal year to be 2021.
• Week Start: Select the day your week starts.
• Default: Select whether this configuration is the default to automatically apply to all datasets created by recipes.
The Default checkbox isn’t available upon creation. The first date configuration is automatically set as the default. If multiple date
configurations, mark the default by editing the date configuration.
734
5. Optionally, if there are multiple date configurations you can manually change the date configuration to apply. To change the recipe’s
date configuration, use Date Configuration in an Output node or in the date extract function in a Transform node, and click Apply.
6. Save the recipe.

CRM Analytics applies the date configuration to your CRM Analytics data only. Custom fiscal year data and functionality, including fields
suffixed _Fiscal, become available on a per-dataset basis after each Data Prep recipe runs. In addition, CRM Analytics users can work
with fiscal data in SAQL queries, fiscal filters, and fiscal group options in dashboards and exploration, like “Fiscal Year” and “Fiscal Quarter”.
The default date configuration automatically applies only to datasets run by Data Prep recipes. To apply the fiscal year configuration to
datasets from dataflows, csv uploads, or connected data, add the dataset to a Data Prep recipe.
Inherit Custom Fiscal Years from Salesforce

If your company uses a custom fiscal year, and has defined the custom fiscal year in Salesforce, then CRM Analytics can inherit the
custom fiscal year definition from Salesforce. Once inherited, the custom fiscal year is available for use throughout CRM Analytics.
For example, a dashboard filter can return opportunities from this fiscal quarter.
Inherit Custom Fiscal Years from Salesforce
735
If your company uses a custom fiscal year, and has defined the custom fiscal year in Salesforce, then CRM Analytics can inherit the custom
fiscal year definition from Salesforce. Once inherited, the custom fiscal year is available for use throughout CRM Analytics. For example,
a dashboard filter can return opportunities from this fiscal quarter.
Before inheriting a custom fiscal year from Salesforce, you must define one in Salesforce Setup. If you have already defined one or more
custom fiscal years in Salesforce, then you are ready for CRM Analytics to inherit custom fiscal years.
To learn how to define a custom fiscal year in Salesforce, see Define your Fiscal Year.
To learn how to turn on custom fiscal year inheritance for CRM Analytics, see
Enable Custom Fiscal Year Support.
To learn about the new fields CRM Analytics generates for each date field, see Handle Date Values on page 730.
Custom Fiscal Years Inheritance Troubleshooting and Considerations

When you inherit custom fiscal year settings from Salesforce to CRM Analytics, use these tips for troubleshooting and keep these
considerations in mind.
Custom Fiscal Years Inheritance Troubleshooting and Considerations
When you inherit custom fiscal year settings from Salesforce to CRM Analytics, use these tips for troubleshooting and keep these
considerations in mind.
Troubleshoot Custom Fiscal Years in CRM Analytics
Why don’t my datasets have custom fiscal year support?
If your datasets don’t support fiscal periods after you inherit custom fiscal years from Salesforce, run the dataset’s dataflow or recipe.
Support begins after the dataflow finishes running.
Why doesn’t my dashboard filter have custom fiscal year options?
If your dashboard filter doesn’t give you the option of filtering by fiscal periods, run the dataflow for each dataset in the dashboard.
Support begins after each dataflow finishes running.
It’s a new fiscal year, and suddenly CRM Analytics returns null for all dates?
If a date is out of range of a defined fiscal year inherited from Salesforce, CRM Analytics returns null. Define a custom fiscal year in
Salesforce, then have CRM Analytics inherit it. Finally, run each dataset’s dataflow. After the dataflows finish running, CRM Analytics once
again returns data instead of null values.
Considerations and Limitations
• Custom Fiscal Years are not compatible with these SAQL Statements:
– fill
– timeseries
Handle Custom Time Zone Values

Time zone support lets you view time-specific data on dashboards in a time zone that you specify for your org. By default, CRM Analytics
datasets aren’t time-zone aware, so CRM Analytics treats all date-time values as being in GMT. The data you see on your dashboards is
in GMT, regardless of your local time zone. When you enable time zone support, CRM Analytics converts date-time values in your datasets
to the time zone selected for CRM Analytics. You can then create time zone enabled dashboards to display these converted date-time
values. Users see dashboard data in the single custom time zone you set, not their personal timezone specified in Salesforce. Recipe
formulas and filters with date-time fields operate in GMT.
736
Why Is Time Zone Support Important?

Time zone support lets your dashboard viewers see data in a time zone that’s relevant to them. Here’s an example.
Example: The customer service operations manager at a California-based company monitors daily case creation on a Service
Operations dashboard. Here’s what she sees today, Wednesday August 22, before time zone support is enabled in her org.
The dashboard chart shows the number of cases created so far this week. But it also shows cases created tomorrow, Thursday
23rd. The customer service operations manager is in the PDT time zone, but the dashboard shows data in GMT, which is 8 hours
ahead. So, any cases created after 4:00pm in PDT appear as being created the next day when displayed in GMT.
If these 932 cases were created in a GMT location, then the chart would be accurate. But the company has customer service agents
only in California, so the widget isn’t helpful. What’s more, cases created on the last day of a reporting period can end up in the
wrong month, quarter, or even year.
With time zone support enabled, and the supported time zone set to the company’s local timezone of PDT, the customer service
operations manager gets a much more accurate view of case creation this week.
737
How Does Time Zone Support Work?

When you enable time zone support, you select a supported time zone for CRM Analytics. CRM Analytics converts date-time values in
your datasets or connected objects from GMT to your selected time zone. When you create a dashboard, you have the option to create
a time zone enabled dashboard. Time zone enabled dashboards use the converted date-time values from datasets, instead of the original
values.
Note: Connected objects are objects that sync with Salesforce or external data sources through data sync.
Let’s take a closer look at how CRM Analytics converts date-time values. After you enable time zone support, you have to refresh your
connected objects and datasets. Refresh connected objects by syncing them, and refresh datasets by running the related recipe or
dataflow, or uploading the .csv file. During the refresh, CRM Analytics runs this process:
• CRM Analytics maps each Date field in the dataset or connected object to a new DateOnly or DateTime field, depending on whether
the field values have a time component.
• Values in the new DateTime field are assumed to be GMT, and are converted to the time zone selected for CRM Analytics.
Note: Dates from .csv-sourced datasets are assumed to be GMT unless you select a different source time zone when you
upload the file. See Set a Source Time Zone for .Csv data.
738
• The DateTime field generates fields in the new time zone and GMT (the original version), which are added to the updated dataset
or connected object. The GMT field is included to ensure the dataset still works with your existing dashboards.
Note: To enable custom time zone support, see Enable Custom Time Zones Support.
Handle Text Values

Confirm that text values in a column are uniform in formatting, spelling, and language. Inconsistencies can occur within data sources
and after merging data from multiple data sources.
To ensure that your data is grouped properly during analysis, standardize the text strings used for dimensions.
• Use the Bucket transformation to replace similar values with a consistent value. For example, replace abbreviations with full text
strings, or replace text strings with abbreviations.
• Fix other spelling inconsistencies, such as typographical errors, plurals, uppercase and lowercase characters, and so on.
• Use a column profile in CRM Analytics to review string length. For example, some column values require the same length, such as
a 5-digit zip code or 10-digit phone number.
Handle Missing Values

Gaps in your data can throw off analysis. Missing values are best fixed in the source application by, for example, making it a required
field. However, if you can’t do that, you can use CRM Analytics to fill in missing data.
If your data has columns with missing values:
• Use a column profile in a recipe to determine if a column contains missing values and, if so, how many.
• Add the Predict Missing Values transformation to a recipe to fill in missing dimension column values.
• If possible, set a default value for null measures.
• Enable Null Measure Handling to properly handle null numeric values in source data.
SEE ALSO:
Profile Columns to Understand Data in a Data Prep Recipe
Predict Missing Values Transformation: Fill In Missing Values
Dataset Capacity and Limits

Before you create any datasets, review the limits. For example, each Salesforce org has a maximum number of rows for all datasets in
the org. There are also limits on the number of columns in a dataset and characters in a column.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
Reserved Dataset Field Names

CRM Analytics data prep doesn’t support using some reserved keywords as field names in lenses and dashboards.
Table 7: Data Prep Reserved Keywords in Lenses and Dashboards
all
739
ALL
count
How CRM Analytics and Salesforce Data Pipelines Work Together

CRM Analytics and Salesforce Data Pipelines are unique products, but settings, limits, and assets sometimes are shared or interrelated
when you use both products. These features are shared when you use CRM Analytics.
Unique or Shared Features by Product
Unique or Shared per Product* Notes

Limits Some unique, some shared, some pooled CRM Analytics Limits
(contributory). See Limits pages for details. Data Pipelines Limits
Datasets (including staged data) Shared Datasets generated in one product can be
used in the other. Users with only one
license type don’t see the other license
type’s datasets. Datasets generated with the
Data Pipelines license and used in
conjunction with CRM Analytics support
sharing inheritance & security predicates.
Datasets generated with the Data Pipelines
license and used outside of CRM Analytics
don’t support sharing inheritance or security
predicates. Exercise caution when using
them to avoid exposing data to users that
shouldn’t have access. If users have both
license types, sharing inheritance and
security predicates are supported.
Input and Output Connections Shared Connections built for one product can be
used in the other.
Synced Data Shared Input, output, and synced out data from one
product can be used in the other.
Recipes Unique A recipe built in one product can be

reassigned to the other. During recipe
creation, the user selects the product that
the recipe is saved to, which determines
which product’s limits and resource
allocations to use. After the recipe is
complete, the user can reassign the license
as needed.
Licenses Unique A license providing access to one product

doesn’t grant access to the other.
740
Unique or Shared per Product* Notes

Data Monitoring and Asset Visibility Shared Users with access to both products can see
job details, recipes, and data assets from
both products. In some pages the user
switches the product to see the other asset.
Use Data Between Data Pipelines and CRM Analytics

Use Data Between Data Pipelines and CRM Analytics
When using both CRM Analytics and Data Pipelines, select which product’s limits you want a recipe’s run and dataset to use. Use either
product’s datasets as inputs when you build recipes to avoid recreating and updating recipes in both products.
• When saving a recipe for the first time, select either product. The product determines which limits and queue are used and which
users have access to the data. For example, a recipe is associated with Data Pipelines. The recipe uses your Data Pipelines allotted
monthly job runtime, and its dataset isn’t available to CRM Analytics users unless they also have a Data Pipelines license.
• To use data from a CRM Analytics or Data Pipeline recipe in the other product’s recipe, add the dataset as an input node. Reassign
the license on the recipe as needed. You must have a CRM Analytics and a Data Pipeline permission set to see datasets from both
products.
• Manage and track the product associated with recipes and datasets on the Data Manager. On the Recipes tab, sort the recipes by
product (1), or change the association with the recipe’s License dropdown (2).
• On the Data Assets tab, view the data associated with each product by using the product dropdown (1).
Before you click New Dataset (2) to upload a local file, use the product dropdown to set which product’s limits and resources to
use.
741

CRM Analytics connectors give you an easy way to connect data inside and outside of Salesforce with CRM Analytics. CRM Analytics
provides a prebuilt connector for data in your local org and a range of configurable connectors for remote data in external Salesforce
orgs, apps, data warehouses, and database services.
Watch a Demo: Connect to External Data (English Only)
After you use a connector to create the connection to a data source, configure data sync to extract the needed source data into connected
objects. You can then prepare the data in these connected objects using a recipe to create your final dataset.
Connect to Local Salesforce Data

Use the Salesforce Connector to manage the data synced between your local Salesforce org and CRM Analytics. Filter data synced
to CRM Analytics, create more connections using the Salesforce Local connector, manage objects between connections, and add
or remove objects and fields from sync. Use the Salesforce External connector to sync data from a remote Salesforce org.
Connect to Data Outside of Salesforce
Create a remote connection to sync external data with CRM Analytics. For each connector, we provide information on how to create
the connection, configure its properties, and track important considerations.
Pre-Pull Data for Recipes with Data Sync
Use data sync to pull data to CRM Analytics on a regular schedule. By scheduling sync from Salesforce and remote systems ahead
of time, your recipes have less to do and run faster. To lighten the load even more, CRM Analytics can sync supported local Salesforce
data incrementally by default, meaning that only data that’s changed gets synced.
Connect to Local Salesforce Data

Use the Salesforce Connector to manage the data synced between your local Salesforce org and CRM Analytics. Filter data synced to
CRM Analytics, create more connections using the Salesforce Local connector, manage objects between connections, and add or remove
objects and fields from sync. Use the Salesforce External connector to sync data from a remote Salesforce org.
Add and Remove Local Salesforce Objects and Fields from Data Sync
Update data sync to keep up with your changing business by adding local Salesforce objects, removing objects, and managing
which fields are synced. Synced data is stored in CRM Analytics as objects that you can use in recipes.
Create Another Salesforce Local Data Connection
Create connections using the Salesforce Local connector to strategically manage when your Salesforce data syncs to CRM Analytics
using individually scheduled local connections. A local connection, SFDC_LOCAL, is included when CRM Analytics is activated.
742
Move Salesforce Objects Between Local Connections

You can reassign objects from one local connection to another local connection.
Filter Local Data Synced to CRM Analytics
Exclude unnecessary or sensitive data from syncing to CRM Analytics with data sync filters. Filters run on the source object and speed
up data sync by pulling only the data you need into CRM Analytics. If you want to use excluded data in the future, use a dataflow or
recipe filter to limit the data shown in a dataset instead of a data sync filter.
Salesforce Connector for Local Salesforce Data Considerations
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Salesforce Connector.
Add and Remove Local Salesforce Objects and Fields from Data Sync
Update data sync to keep up with your changing business by adding local Salesforce objects, removing objects, and managing which
fields are synced. Synced data is stored in CRM Analytics as objects that you can use in recipes.
Note: For help with managing data sync for remote objects, see Add and Remove Remote Objects and Fields from Data Sync on
page 822.
1. From Data Manager, click the Connections tab. All objects configured to sync are listed under their connection name. The default
local connection is SFDC_LOCAL.
2. To add an object and its fields:
a. Click the dropdown next to a local connection. An object’s associated connection determines its sync schedule.
b. Select Edit Objects.
c. Find the object to add by scrolling or using the search bar. Select the checkbox next to the object.
d. Select the checkbox next to the fields that you want to sync.
e. Optionally, edit the field’s attributes with or filter the data synced to CRM Analytics from Data Sync Filter.
f. Click Save.
3. To add or remove a field from data sync for an object already configured for sync:
a. From the Connections tab, select the connection associated with the object. Use the search bar to find the connection and
object if you have many connections. The connection's associated objects are listed.
b. Click the name of the object to see its columns. Fields already included for sync are selected.
c. To add a field, select the checkbox next to the field. To remove a field, deselect the checkbox next to the field.
Note: If you delete any sync-enabled field or make any sync-enabled field inaccessible to the Analytics Integration User
profile, an object's data sync fails. Undelete the field, restore access for the Analytics Integration User profile, or deselect
the field from data sync to ensure that sync runs successfully.
d. Click Save.
4. To remove, or disconnect, an object from data sync:

object if you have many connections. The connection's associated objects are listed.
b. Click the menu to the right of the object you want to remove.
c. Click Disconnect Object.
d. Click Disconnect.
743
Note: Remove the object from all recipes before you disconnect. Data sync stops pulling data from the data source to
CRM Analytics when you disconnect an object. This impacts recipes and other assets that use this synced data.
Note: The most recently saved local Salesforce object field attributes are applied to the database. Field attributes can be modified
in data manager or using a dataflow's SFDCdigest node. If you use dataflows, check both places before saving to avoid overwriting
the field metadata.
Create Another Salesforce Local Data Connection

Create connections using the Salesforce Local connector to strategically manage when your Salesforce data syncs to CRM Analytics
using individually scheduled local connections. A local connection, SFDC_LOCAL, is included when CRM Analytics is activated.
1. From Data Manager, click the Connections tab.
2. Click New Connection.
3. Click Salesforce Connector and Next.
4. Enter the connection settings.
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the connections. Use a convention that lets you easily
distinguish between different connections. SFDC_LOCAL_ is
automatically added to the beginning of the connection name
after save. For example, if you assigned the connection name
Hourly_Sales, you see the connection
SFDC_LOCAL_Hourly_Sales added to your list. The SFDC_LOCAL_
can be edited or removed after the first save.
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name can’t include spaces.
The API name is used in your recipes to reference data extracted
through this connection. You can’t change the developer name
after you create the connection.
Description Description for the connection, used to remind you why you
added the connection or what it’s used for.
5. After you finish entering the settings, save your changes.

With the local connection created you can add new objects to sync, move existing objects from another local connection, or filter which
data is synced. When you use data from multiple local connections in a recipe, event-based scheduling will run only after all local
connections are synced. For example, if one local connection is scheduled to sync hourly and another syncs daily, an event-based
scheduled recipe using data from both runs one time daily.
Move Salesforce Objects Between Local Connections

You can reassign objects from one local connection to another local connection.
1. From the Data Manager's Connections tab, select the connection associated with the object. Use the search bar to find the connection
and object if you have many connections. The connection's associated objects are listed.
2. Click the menu to the right of the object you want to remove.
744
3. Click Switch Connection. This option is available after you’ve created another local connection.
4. Click the connection to associate this object with and click Switch Connection.
An object that is moved to another connection runs data sync when next used by a dataflow.
Filter Local Data Synced to CRM Analytics

up data sync by pulling only the data you need into CRM Analytics. If you want to use excluded data in the future, use a dataflow or
recipe filter to limit the data shown in a dataset instead of a data sync filter.
1. From the Data Manager's Connections tab, select the connection associated with the object to filter. Use the search bar to find the
connection and object if you have many connections. The connection's associated objects are listed.
2. Click the name of the object to filter.
3. Click Data Sync Filter.
4. Enter the filter.
5. Click Save.
For example, Salesforce local object filters use the SOQL WHERE clause expression as described in the SOQL and SOSL Reference. For
example, "(FiscalQuarter = 2 OR FiscalQuarter = 3) AND Amount > 1000 AND Amount <= 20000".
Salesforce Connector for Local Salesforce Data Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Salesforce Connector.
You can save up to 10 Salesforce local connections.
• Maximum number of characters in a field is 32,000.
• Maximum number of concurrent data sync runs is 3.
• You can sync data from up to 100 objects in CRM Analytics. This total includes local and external objects.
• Connected object names must start with a letter and contain only letters, digits, or underscores. Object names can’t end with an
underscore.
• Queries that take longer than 10 minutes to return initial data to CRM Analytics causes a “timeout exceeded” error message. The
best practice in this situation is to simplify or segment your queries.
745
Connect to Data Outside of Salesforce

Create a remote connection to sync external data with CRM Analytics. For each connector, we
EDITIONS
provide information on how to create the connection, configure its properties, and track important
considerations. Available in Salesforce
Important: These connectors sync data from cloud-based systems. You can’t use them to Classic and Lightning
Experience.
sync data from an on-premises system.
Available with CRM
Salesforce Connectors Analytics, which is available
Use these connectors to sync your data in systems that are part of the Salesforce ecosystem,
including external Salesforce orgs, to CRM Analytics.
Application Connectors available in Developer
Use these connectors to sync data from your external applications to CRM Analytics. Edition.
Database Connectors
Use these connectors to sync data from your external database services to CRM Analytics. USER PERMISSIONS
Analytics Mulesoft Connectors To create a remote
Pull your cloud-based data via CloudHub into CRM Analytics without code using Analytics connection:
Mulesoft connectors for CRM Analytics. After the connection to your data source via CloudHub • Add CRM Analytics
is configured, choose the objects to sync to CRM Analytics. In CRM Analytics, your data can be Remote Connections,
analyzed independently and with other synced data from your Salesforce org or other remotely Edit CRM Analytics
connected data sources. Dataflows, and Use CRM
Analytics
Object Store and No SQL Connectors
To use, edit, or delete a
Use these connectors to sync data from your object store and non-SQL services to CRM Analytics. remote connection:
Pilot and Beta Connectors • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows and Use CRM
You can use these connectors as a pilot or beta feature to sync external data with CRM Analytics.
Analytics
Before choosing a connector, review its pilot or beta instructions.
Output Connectors
Use output connectors to push data from CRM Analytics to the remote system. Output connectors can push as part of a data prep
output node, and some can also push out unprepared data using sync.
Add and Remove Remote Objects and Fields from Data Sync
Update data sync for connected external data sources to keep up with your changing business by adding objects, removing objects,
and managing which fields are synced. Synced data is stored in CRM Analytics as objects that can be used in recipes.
New Connector Version Upgrades and Considerations
The remote connectors that you use to sync data to CRM Analytics have new versions. Customers new to CRM Analytics after August
1, 2021 use only the new connector versions, while customers before August 1 can choose when to upgrade. If you choose to be
an early adopter, you can switch over to the new connector versions and try them out now. During the Spring ’22 release, we plan
to auto-switch customers to the new connector version when it reaches or exceeds the level of functionality and performance of
the legacy connector version. We plan to finish the auto-switching during the Summer ’22 release.
Salesforce Connectors
Use these connectors to sync your data in systems that are part of the Salesforce ecosystem, including external Salesforce orgs, to CRM
Analytics.
746
Salesforce External Connection

Create a remote connection using the Salesforce External connector to sync data from another Salesforce org to CRM Analytics.
Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 Connection
Create a remote connection using the Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 connector to sync data from Marketing Cloud to CRM
Analytics.
Tableau Online Connection
Create a remote connection using the Tableau Online connector to sync data sources embedded in a workbook from Tableau Online
to CRM Analytics.
Customer 360 Global Profile Data Connection (Beta)
Use the Customer 360 Global Profile Data connector to access global profile data from connected orgs, along with other Salesforce
and remote data, for integration into Salesforce Data Pipelines.
Salesforce External Connection

Create a remote connection using the Salesforce External connector to sync data from another Salesforce org to CRM Analytics.
Note: Use Salesforce Output Connection on page 812 to push data from CRM Analytics to a Salesforce org.
Restricted API access isn't supported for Salesforce Output and External connectors. Enable the Use Any API Client permission for
the user creating the connector. For more information, see Manage API Access.
Create the Connection

1. On the Data Manager Connections tab, click New Connection.
2. Click the name of the connector, and click Next.
3. Enter the connector settings.
4. To validate your settings and attempt to connect to the source, click Save & Test. If the connection fails, CRM Analytics shows
possible reasons.
All settings require a value, unless otherwise indicated.
Connection Setting Description

distinguish between different connections.
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name can’t include spaces. The
API name is used in your recipes to reference data extracted
Description Description
Username User name used to connect to external Salesforce org for sync of
objects and fields.
API Type The API to use. The options are SOAP for SOAP API (default) or
BULKV2 for Salesforce Bulk API 2.0. Use Salesforce Bulk API 2.0 if
you encounter issues with larger data objects timing out with SOAP
API.
747

Service URL Login URL for the external org. The default value uses the generic
Salesforce login URL for your org. For an added layer of security,
update this field to use your org’s My Domain login URL. For a
production org, use the
format:https://<MyDomainName.my
.salesforce.com/services/Soap/Identifier/VersionNumber.0
For example:
https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com/services/Soap/u/34.0
Password Password for the user specified in Username. Depending on your

security settings, append the user’s security token to the end of
the password. For more information about obtaining a security
token, see Reset Your Security Token.
Filter Data Synced to CRM Analytics

Exclude unnecessary or sensitive data from syncing toCRM Analytics with data sync filters. Filters run on the source object and speed
up data sync by pulling only the data you need into CRM Analytics.
Note: If you might use excluded data in the future, use a recipe filter to limit the data written to a dataset instead of a data sync
filter.
2. Select the connection associated with the object to filter.
6. Click Save.
For the Salesforce External connector, enter a filter using a SOQL WHERE clause expression as described in the SOQL and SOSL Reference.
For example, "(FiscalQuarter = 2 OR FiscalQuarter = 3) AND Amount > 1000 AND Amount <=
20000".
Salesforce External Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Salesforce External connector.
underscore.
• This connector can sync up to 20 million rows or 10 GB per object, whichever limit it reaches first. When using this connector,
Salesforce Government Cloud org data is protected in transit with advanced encryption and can sync up to 10 million rows or 5 GB
for each connected object, whichever limit is reached first.
• The security settings of the user that you use to connect determine the objects and fields available for sync in the external org.
• Standard objects available in API versions 34.0 to 46.0 are eligible for data sync with this connector.
748
• To troubleshoot connectivity issues between Salesforce orgs, review your org IP address restrictions and consider disabling the
setting "Lock sessions to the IP address from which they originated" in both orgs. See this knowledge article for more information.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce External Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 Connection

Create a remote connection using the Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 connector to sync data from Marketing Cloud to CRM
Analytics.

possible reasons.
Marketing Cloud packages using a tenant-specific endpoint and OAuth 2.0 authentication are required for this connector. Package
permissions must be at least:
• Read for “List and Subscribers”
• Read and write for “Data Extensions”
• Read and write for “Marketing Cloud Connect”
• Read for “Accounts”
• Read for “Users”
The security settings of the user that you use to connect determine the objects and fields available for sync.

Description Description of the connection for internal use.
ClientSecret The client secret of Salesforce Marketing Cloud required to generate

a valid access token.
ClientId The client ID of Salesforce Marketing Cloud required to generate

a valid access token.
749

Salesforce Marketing Cloud Url The URL used to connect to the Salesforce Marketing Cloud WSDL.
To build the URL replace the “mcxxx” in the default
https://mcxxx.soap.marketingcloudapis.com/etframework.wsdl with
your SOAP Base URI. To retrieve the SOAP Base URI:
1. Log into Marketing Cloud
2. Open Setup
3. Click Platform Tools
4. Click Apps
5. Click Installed Packages
6. Select your target package from the list to open its details.
Copy the SOAP Base URI from the details.
For example, if your SOAP Base URI is
mc7f4m1tsgmxz8862chq5qar2k4q, your Salesforce Marketing
Cloud Url value is
https://mc7f4m1tsgmxz8862chq5qar2k4q.soap.marketingcloudapis.com/etframework.wsdl
UTC Offset Optional setting. Used to read data from Salesforce Marketing
Cloud in a UTC offset time zone.
Display Child Data Extensions Optional setting. Displays top-level and child business unit MID
information in the MID object using the format
Parentname_childnameID. The current business unit’s Data
Extensions are displayed with and without a suffix, with identical
data for both.

filter.
6. Click Save.
For the Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 Connector, enter a filter in SQL syntax equivalent to the Marketing Cloud’s Filterpart help. Filters can
include boolean statements (AND, OR), numerical comparisons (>, >=, <, <=), equality (=, !=), and LIKE operators. Filtering is only
supported for SOAP objects.
For a simple example, return entries where the Name field is Marc with the filter Name="Marc". Use this type of simple filter for
optimal performance and query response. For more complex situations, combine two filter parts with an AND or an OR logical operator,
750
for example (Name="Marc") AND (Age=57). You can also nest filters in parentheses, for example (Name="Marc") AND
((Age=57) OR (Age=37)).
To filter with dates, store date data in a Marketing Cloud-supported format. For example, column_date >
'2010-12-31T22:00:00.000Z'
Salesforce Marketing Cloud OAuth 2.0 Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Salesforce Marketing Cloud connector.
underscore.
• This connector can sync up to 20 million rows or 10 GB per object, whichever limit it reaches first.
• Standard Marketing Cloud and custom objects are supported, but may be not be available due to your package access or permissions
configuration.
Note: The JourneyActivities object is not available.
• Don’t overwrite Data Extensions during data sync. Marketing Cloud's SOAP API can return incomplete data from a Data Extension
read operation if that Data Extension is being concurrently overwritten.
• This connector can't read hexadecimal character data (such as 0x1B) stored in Marketing Cloud and will generate an HTTP 302 error.
To bring in the column, remove all hexadecimal values.
• When viewing Marketing Cloud Data Extensions, names have the text “Ungrouped__”, with a double underscore, added to the
beginning. For example, data extension MC_East will appear as Ungrouped__MC_East.
Important: There’s a new codebase version of this connector available with the Summer ‘21 release. To learn how the new
connector version impacts your existing connections, the connection upgrade path to the new version, and considerations when
creating connections, see this release note. Here's some differences and improvements to consider.
• The new version makes more Marketing Cloud object data accessible.
• The new version names some fields differently than the legacy version. Data extensions won’t be impacted.
• You can now sync up to 20 million rows or 10 GB per object with the new version of the connector. Due to technical constraints,
the legacy version can't fully use this improved limit.
• Top-level and child business unit MID information is now available in the MID object using the format Parentname_childnameID.
We also show the current business unit’s Data Extensions with and without a suffix, with identical data for both. Enable the
connector property Display Child Data Extensions to view this information. The legacy version does not use the Display Child
Data Extensions property.
Tableau Online Connection

Create a remote connection using the Tableau Online connector to sync data sources embedded in a workbook from Tableau Online
to CRM Analytics.
Important: If you want to sync data from CRM Analytics to Tableau Online, use the Tableau Online Output Connecion.
Connection Details
Before using this connector, assemble your data in Tableau Online.
1. Decide which tables to include. Table names must be alphanumeric, with no special characters, and start with a letter.
• In CRM Analytics, each table is represented as an individual object.
751
2. Publish an extract data source of your tables. Only extract data is supported. For best results, leave the default schema “extract.”
You’ll use the data source name when configuring the connector.
• This connector syncs the entire data source. To sync a subset of data, generate a different data source containing only the needed
information.
3. Create a workbook including this data source. You’ll use the workbook name when configuring the connector.
4. Publish the workbook to a project. You’ll use the project name when configuring the connector.
The Tableau Online account used to create this connection must have at least Site Explorer role.
possible reasons.
Setting Description
Server URL The base URL for your Tableau Online server, including the pod
name. To isolate the Server URL, sign into Tableau Online and pull
the bolded portion of your URL:
https://us-west-5a.online.tableau.com/#/site/exampleurl5a/home
Username Optional setting*. User name for the Tableau Online account.
Content URL The subpath portion of your Tableau Online URL. To isolate the
Content URL, sign into Tableau Online and pull the bolded portion
of your URL:
Password Optional setting*. Password for your Tableau Online account.
Authentication Type The variety of authentication used for this connection. Accepted
values are "Password" or "PersonalAccessToken". If you use
Password, enter a value in the Username and Password fields. If
you enter PersonalAccessToken, enter values in the Personal Access
Token Name and Personal Access Token Secret fields.
752
Setting Description
Personal Access Token Name Optional setting*. The name associated with a personal access
token from your Tableau Online account. Learn more about
personal access tokens, including their 15 day expiration when
unused, in Tableau's PAT documentation.
Personal Access Token Secret Optional setting*. The secret code associated with a personal access
token from your Tableau Online account.
Project Name The name of the Tableau Online project that contains your
workbook to sync. This property defaults to “default.”
Workbook Name The name of the published Tableau Online workbook containing
the data sources to sync to CRM Analytics.
Datasource Name The name of the data source containing data to sync to CRM
Analytics.
Schema Name The type of operation allowed by the project. This property defaults
to “extract,” the default Tableau Online setting.
*Enter the Username & Password or the Personal Access Token Name & Personal Access Token Secret fields.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Tableau Online connector.
underscore.
• This connector can sync up to 100,000 rows or 500 MB per object, whichever limit it reaches first.
• This connector can only read data from a published workbook.
• When configuring the fields to sync, data preview will not fill with example data. You are still able to select and configure fields.
Customer 360 Global Profile Data Connection (Beta)

Use the Customer 360 Global Profile Data connector to access global profile data from connected orgs, along with other Salesforce and
remote data, for integration into Salesforce Data Pipelines.

possible reasons.
Before you can use this connector, connect a Salesforce org with CRM Analytics as a data source in Customer 360 Data Manager. Create
and load a data file from your connected data source into Customer 360 Data Manager for processing into global profiles. Then export
the global profile data so that it can be pushed to CRM Analytics.
Select one or more objects that you want to sync to CRM Analytics. From this preview, you can view field attributes for all the files that
you’re loading from the folder.
753
Enable Customer 360 Global Profiles and Data

To set up CRM Analytics to include Customer 360 global profiles and data, complete the following steps.
2. Select Enable Data Sync and Connections.
3. Select Create dashboards from Customer 360 Data Manager global profile data.
4. Click Save.

Master Symmetric Key Salesforce uses this master symmetric key to enable client-side
data encryption.
Secret Key This Salesforce-managed secret access key is a read-only field.
Region Name Region of your Salesforce service. This field is read-only.
Folder Path Path to the folder that Salesforce connects to. This field is read-only.
AWS Access Key ID A Salesforce-managed, read-only bucket access key ID.
Connector Considerations
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with this connector.
underscore.
• Disabling the connector on the CRM Analytics Settings page removes the connection. You can disable the connector only if it isn’t
in use.
creating connections, see this release note.
Application Connectors
Use these connectors to sync data from your external applications to CRM Analytics.
754
Google Analytics 4 Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics 4 connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.
Google Analytics Connection
Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.
Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connection
Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.
Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales Connection
Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales connector to sync sales data from your Microsoft Dynamics
365 account to CRM Analytics.
NetSuite Connection
Create a remote connection using the NetSuite connector to sync data from NetSuite to CRM Analytics.
Oracle Eloqua Connection
Create a remote connection using the Oracle Eloqua connector to sync data from Oracle Eloqua to CRM Analytics.
Google Analytics 4 Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics 4 connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.

possible reasons.
Connection Details
Use a Google service account instead of a user account to grant access to your Google Analytics data. For more information, see
Understanding Service Accounts.
Generate a JSON file containing the required client email and private key from the IAM & Admin page in the Google Cloud Platform
Console.
Connection Settings
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the connection. Use a naming convention that lets you
easily distinguish between different connections.
through this connection. You can’t change the name after you
create the connection.
755
Setting Description
Client Email Enter the client_email value from the JSON file.
Private Key Enter the private_key value from the JSON file.
Don’t include "private_key": "-----BEGIN PRIVATE
KEY-----" at the start of the key and \n-----END
PRIVATE KEY-----\n" at the end.
Advanced Object Properties

Each time you connect to an object with a Google Analytics connection, you also provide advanced properties for the object. The Google
Analytics Data API uses these properties to query the object in Google Analytics. All settings require a value.
Property Value
StartDate The start date of the date range that you want to sync.
Enter YYYY-MM-DD, or use a relative date keyword, such as today, yesterday, or
NdaysAgo, where N is a positive integer.
EndDate The end date of the date range that you want to sync.
Enter YYYY-MM-DD, or use a relative date keyword, such as today, yesterday, or
NdaysAgo, where N is a positive integer.
PropertyID The Property ID for the Google Analytics account, which determines which data is available
for sync. You can find the Property ID on the Admin page in Google Analytics. For more
information, see [GA4] Navigate to your account and property.
Note: For more information about supported StartDate and EndDate values, see Google’s Analytics Data API Overview.
Google Analytics 4 Connector Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when working with the Google Analytics 4 connector.
• A connected object name must start with a letter and can contain only letters, digits, or underscores. The name can’t end with an
underscore.
756
• Custom fields aren’t supported.
• Google Analytics stores your website data as a binary large object (blob). It uses SQL views to query the blob to create virtual objects
that you can connect to.
• Knowledge of Google Analytics Data API is necessary when selecting which virtual objects to connect to. Google Analytics Data API
rules for allowed object and metric interactions, described in Dimensions & Metrics Explorer, impact connecting to CRM Analytics.
When troubleshooting, use the Google Analytics Query Explorer to confirm that the fields that you intend to query are valid.
• You can select up to 9 dimensions for each virtual object that you connect to per connection. Create another connection with the
same properties to add more dimensions.
• You can sync up to one million rows for each virtual object. To sync more than one million rows for an object, consider using the
Google BigQuery connector.
• Some tables have special conditions. For more information, see GoogleAnalytics4 Data Model.
• Your Google service account must be set up and enabled to work for this connector.
– Set up OAuth 2.0 for service accounts with Using OAuth 2.0 for Server to Server Applications.
– Save the credentials created by this process. The credentials are used for the GA4 Connector Private Key setting.
– Add your service account to your Google Analytics account with Add, edit, and delete users and user groups.
– Enable the Google Analytics Admin API using the Enable and disable APIs reference.
Google Analytics Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.
Note: As of July 1, 2023, Google Analytics has been deprecated in favor of Google Analytics 4. For more information, see Google
Analytics 4 has replaced Universal Analytics.
possible reasons.
Use a Google service account instead of a user account to grant access to your Google Analytics data. For more information about Google
service accounts, see Understanding Service Accounts.
Console.

757

APIVersion Version of the Google Core Reporting API used for the connection.
The Google Analytics connector uses Core Reporting API v3. This
value is populated for you.
For information about limits associated with Core Reporting API
v3, see Google’s Limits and Quotas on API Requests guide.

Core Reporting API uses these properties to query the object in Google Analytics. All settings require a value.
Property Value
Enter in the format YYYY-MM-DD, or use a relative date keyword, such as today,
yesterday, or NdaysAgo, where N is a positive integer.
ViewID The View ID for the Google Analytics account, which determines which data is available for
sync. You can find the View ID in the account’s View Settings in Google Analytics.
758
Property Value
Note: For more information about supported StartDate and EndDate values, see Google’s Core Reporting API Reference Guide.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Google Analytics connector.
underscore.
• Google Analytics limits the number of rows that you can sync for each object to 1 million. When you sync more than 1 million rows,
CRM Analytics aggregates data from the extra rows and syncs it as a row marked “Others.”
• Custom fields aren’t supported.
• Google Analytics stores your website data as a binary large object (blob). It uses SQL views to query the blob to create 32 virtual
objects that you can connect to.
Note: Knowledge of Google Analytics Reporting API is necessary when selecting which virtual objects to connect to. Google
Analytics Reporting API rules for allowed object and metric interactions, described in the Dimensions & Metrics Explorer, impact
connecting to CRM Analytics. When troubleshooting, use the Google Analytics Query Explorer to confirm that the fields that
you intend to query are valid.
• CRM Analytics creates a GLOBAL_ACCESS_OBJECT virtual object containing fields from the other virtual objects. Use this object to
prepare datasets for more complex scenarios.
• Eight of the virtual objects contain only dimensions. You can't connect to these objects.
• The Google Core Reporting API includes these limits.
– You can select up to seven dimensions and 10 measures for each virtual object that you connect to per connection. Create
another connection with the same properties to add more dimensions or measures.
– You can sync up to one million rows for each virtual object. When you sync more than one million rows, CRM Analytics aggregates
the data from the extra rows and syncs the data as a row marked “Others.” To sync more than one million rows for an object,
consider using the Google BigQuery connector.
Note: There’s a new codebase version of this connector available with the Summer ‘21 release. To learn how the new connector
version impacts your existing connections, the connection upgrade path to the new version, and considerations when creating
connections, see this release note. There are two options for this connector; manually upgrade to Google Analytics Core Reporting
v4 Connection on page 760 (recommended), or deselect the Legacy Connection toggle. If you choose to deselect the Legacy
Connection toggle, you must still manually upgrade to the improved V4 version before July 2023 when Google retires Universal
Analytics. To manually migrate, create a Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connection on page 760 mirroring the settings of
your legacy connection and any new required properties. Then, update your recipes and dataflows to use the external objects
759
from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection for troubleshooting. We recommend that you complete the
migration and test soon, as we’ll retire legacy connector versions beginning with the Summer ‘22 release.
SEE ALSO:
Google Analytics Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 connector to sync Google Analytics data to CRM Analytics.

possible reasons.
Use a Google service account instead of a user account to grant access to your Google Analytics data. For more information about Google
service accounts, see Understanding Service Accounts.
Console.


Core Reporting API uses these properties to query the object in Google Analytics. All settings require a value.
760
Property Value
ViewID The View ID for the Google Analytics account, which determines which data is available for
sync. You can find the View ID in the account’s View Settings in Google Analytics.
Note: For more information about supported StartDate and EndDate values, see Google’s Core Reporting API Reference Guide.
Google Analytics Core Reporting V4 Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Google Analytics Core Reporting V4 connector.
underscore.
• Enable Google Analytics Reporting API v4 before using this connector. To confirm you’re using this version of the API, from the
Google console, search for and open the Google Analytics Reporting API page. If the page describes the API as
enabled, continue to use the connector. If the page prompts you to enable the API, do so.
• Google Analytics stores your website data as a binary large object (blob). It uses SQL views to query the blob to create 32 virtual
objects that you can connect to.
761
Note: Knowledge of Google Analytics Reporting API is necessary when selecting which virtual objects to connect to. Google
Analytics Reporting API rules for allowed object and metric interactions, described in the Dimensions & Metrics Explorer, impact
connecting to CRM Analytics. When troubleshooting, use the Google Analytics Query Explorer to confirm that the fields that
you intend to query are valid.
• CRM Analytics creates a GLOBAL_ACCESS_OBJECT virtual object containing fields from the other virtual objects. Use this object to
prepare datasets for more complex scenarios. All other objects must be self-contained to be supported.
• Google Analytics limits the number of rows that you can sync for each object to 1 million. When you sync more than 1 million rows,
CRM Analytics aggregates data from the extra rows and syncs it as a row marked “Others.”
• The Google Core Reporting API includes these limits.
– You can select up to seven dimensions and 10 measures for each virtual object that you connect to.
– You can sync up to one million rows for each virtual object. When you sync more than one million rows, CRM Analytics aggregates
the data from the extra rows and syncs the data as a row marked “Others.” To sync more than one million rows for an object,
consider using the Google BigQuery connector.
connections, see this release note. There are two connector options, this Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connector and the
legacy Google Analytics Connection on page 757. These connectors won’t use the legacy connector toggle. To migrate, create a
connection with the connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection and any new required properties. Then, update
your recipes and dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection for
troubleshooting. We recommend that you complete the migration and test soon, as we’ll retire legacy connector versions beginning
with the Winter ‘22 release.
Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales Connection

Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales connector to sync sales data from your Microsoft Dynamics 365
account to CRM Analytics.

Important: This connector syncs data from cloud-based systems. You can’t use it to sync data from an on-premises system.

possible reasons.

762

Organization URL URL of your Microsoft Dynamics 365 organization.

Enter a URL in the format:
https://<OrgName>.crm.dynamics.com
For example:
https://abc123.crm.dynamics.com
Azure Tenant The Microsoft Online tenant being used to access data, for example
contoso.onmicrosoft.com. Alternatively, specify the
tenant Id. This value is the directory Id found in your Azure portal’s
Azure Active Directory in the Properties section.
For example:
x0xxx10-xx01-01x0-xx11-x0x10x0110
OAuth Client ID The client Id assigned when you register your application with an
OAuth authorization server. After registering with an OAuth
application, you will receive this value described as the
OAuthClientId or consumer key.
OAuth Client Secret The client secret assigned when you register your application with
an OAuth authorization server. After registering with an OAuth
application, you will receive this value described as the
OAuthClientSecret, client secret, or consumer secret.
Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales connector.
underscore.
• The security settings of the user that you use to connect determine the data available for sync.
• This connector is tested for connecting with and syncing data from Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales. Other Microsoft Dynamics 365
products are not supported.
SEE ALSO:
Microsoft Dynamics 365 Sales Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
763
NetSuite Connection
Create a remote connection using the NetSuite connector to sync data from NetSuite to CRM Analytics.


possible reasons.
NetSuite connections use token-based authentication to access NetSuite. To create access tokens, first create an integration in the
NetSuite account and enable token-based authentication for it. You can then create access tokens for this integration.

Consumer Secret Client password associated with the NetSuite account. Generated
when you create an integration and enable token-based
authentication in NetSuite.
Consumer Key Client key associated with the NetSuite account. Generated when
you create an integration and enable token-based authentication
in NetSuite.
Account ID NetSuite account ID. Find this ID in Web Service Preferences in your
NetSuite account.
Rest Domain Rest domain name. Enter a URL in the format: https://<Rest
Domain Name>.netsuite.com
The rest domain name value depends on your environment or
account. Valid options are:
• rest.na1.beta for a beta environment
• rest.sandbox for a sandbox account
• rest or rest.na1 for a production account
For example:
https://rest.netsuite.com
764

Token ID Token ID for the access token generated in NetSuite.
Token Secret Token secret for the access token generated in NetSuite.
When working with the Netsuite connector, keeps these behaviors in mind.
underscore.
• Use English alphanumeric characters A-Z, a-z, and 1-9, in object names. Other characters, including multibyte characters, are replaced
with an underscore.
When using the legacy connector version, before you connect to a NetSuite account, you must install the NetSuite V2 bundle in
the account.
• Log in to NetSuite using a Full Access account.
• Go to Customization > SuiteBundler > Search and Install Bundles.
• In the KEYWORDS field, enter Netsuite_V2_Bundle and click Search.
• Click the Netsuite_V2_Bundle link.
• Click Install and complete the installation.
SEE ALSO:
Netsuite Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Oracle Eloqua Connection

Create a remote connection using the Oracle Eloqua connector to sync data from Oracle Eloqua to CRM Analytics.

possible reasons.

765

Base URL URL to connect to the Eloqua application. Enter in the format
https://<Base Name>.eloqua.com
The data center that hosts your Eloqua account determines the
base URL. For help with finding your account’s base URL, see
Determining base URLs in the Oracle Eloqua Developer Help Center.
For example:
https://secure.s04.eloqua.com
Username User name for the Eloqua account.
Time Zone Offset Time zone in the Eloqua system settings relative to GMT.
For example, if the Eloqua system time zone is GMT-06:00, enter
-06:00
Domain Name Company name for the Eloqua account, used at Eloqua sign-in.
Password Password for the Eloqua account.
Oracle Eloqua Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Oracle Eloqua connector.
underscore.
• Object names must not contain special characters, such as spaces.
• You can select up to 250 fields for each connected object.
• You can export up to 5 million activity records from Oracle Eloqua. For more information, see the Oracle Eloqua export limits.
connections, see this release note. The new version currently uses different field names and includes more objects than the legacy
version. To migrate, create a connection with the connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection. Then, update your
recipes and dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection for
troubleshooting. We recommend that you complete the migration and test soon, as we’ll retire legacy connector versions beginning
with the Winter ‘22 release.
SEE ALSO:
Oracle Eloqua Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
766
Database Connectors
Use these connectors to sync data from your external database services to CRM Analytics.
Amazon Athena Connection

Sync Amazon Athena to CRM Analytics by creating a remote connection.
Amazon RDS Connection
Create a remote connection using one of the Amazon RDS connectors to bring data managed on the Amazon Relational Database
Service into CRM Analytics.
Amazon Redshift Connection
Create a remote connection using the Amazon Redshift connector to sync data from Amazon Redshift to CRM Analytics.
Databricks Connection
Sync Databricks to CRM Analytics by creating a remote connection..
Google BigQuery for Legacy SQL Connection
Create a remote connection using the Google BigQuery connector to sync data from Google BigQuery to CRM Analytics
Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connection
Bring your large volumes of Google BigQuery data with standard SQL support into CRM Analytics using the Google BigQuery Standard
SQL connector.
Google Cloud Spanner Connection
Create a remote connection using the Google Spanner connector to sync data from Google Cloud Spanner to CRM Analytics.
Heroku Postgres Connection
Create a remote connection using the Heroku Postgres connector to sync Heroku Postgres data to CRM Analytics.
Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics Connection
Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics connector to sync data from Azure Synapse Analytics or
dedicated SQL pool (formerly SQL DW) to CRM Analytics. To connect to SQL databases on Azure, add an Azure SQL Database
Connection instead of this one.
Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connection
Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Azure SQL Database connector to sync data from Microsoft Azure SQL Database to
CRM Analytics. To connect to Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics or a dedicated SQL pool (formerly SQL DW), add a Microsoft Azure
Synapse Analytics Connection instead of this one.
SAP HANA Connection
Create a remote connection using the SAP HANA connector to sync data from cloud-based SAP HANA to CRM Analytics.
SAP HANA Cloud Connection
Create a remote connection using the SAP HANA Cloud connector to sync data from cloud-based SAP HANA to CRM Analytics.
Snowflake Connection
Create a remote connection using the Snowflake connector to sync data from Snowflake to CRM Analytics.
Zendesk Connection
Create a remote connection using the Zendesk connector to sync data from Zendesk to CRM Analytics.
Amazon Athena Connection

Sync Amazon Athena to CRM Analytics by creating a remote connection.
767

possible reasons.
Connection Settings
Setting Description
Connection Name Use a name that lets you easily distinguish between different
connections.
Developer Name The developer name is used in your recipes to reference data
extracted through this connection. The name can't include spaces.
After you create the connection, you can’t change the developer
name.
Description Connection description.
AWS Access Key Access key associated with your AWS root account. You can find
it on your AWS Management console in the Security Credentials
Access Keys section.
AWS Secret Key Secret key associated with your AWS root account. You can find it
on your AWS Management console in the Security Credentials
Access Keys section.
AWS Region Region name where your Amazon Athena data is hosted. Valid
values are:
• bahrain
• beijing
• capetown
• central
• frankfurt
• govcloudeast
• govcloudwest
• hongkong
• ireland
• jakarta
• london
• milan
• mumbai
• ningxia
• northerncalifornia
768
Setting Description
• northernvirginia
• ohio
• oregon
• osaka
• paris
• saopaulo
• seoul
• singapore
• stockholm
• sydney
• tokyo
• uae
• zurich
Database Name of the Amazon Athena database.
S3 Staging Directory Folder in S3 where you want to store the results of queries.
Datasource Name of the Amazon Athena data source to connect to.
Note: The connector uses AwsRootKeys for the AuthSchema value, so make sure to use the AWS root key values.
For more information, see CData JDBC Driver for Amazon Athena and AWS security credentials.
Connection Considerations
When working with the Amazon Athena connector, keep these behaviors in mind.
underscore.
• This connector can sync up to 10 million rows or up to 5 GB per job, whichever limit it reaches first.
Amazon RDS Connection

Create a remote connection using one of the Amazon RDS connectors to bring data managed on the Amazon Relational Database
Service into CRM Analytics.
Available Amazon RDS Connectors

• AWS RDS Aurora MySQL
• AWS RDS Aurora PostgreSQL
• AWS RDS MariaDB
• AWS RDS MySQL
• AWS RDS Oracle
769
• AWS RDS PostgreSQL

• AWS RDS SQL Server
Note: Only SSL-enabled Amazon RDS instances are supported.

possible reasons.
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the connections. Use a convention that lets you easily distinguish between
different connections.
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name can’t include spaces. The API name is used in
your recipes to reference data extracted through this connection. You can’t change the
developer name after you create the connection.
Database Name of the database that you’re connecting to.
JDBC Connection URL URL schema for the database. The port isn’t optional. If no port is specified, the default
port is used. Enter in the format:
<prefix>.<hostname>.<cluster>.rds.amazonaws.com:<port>
For example:
analyticsaws.csg5yuelzxbf.us-west-2.rds.amazonaws.com:5407
Username User name to connect to the database.
Schema Schema name for the database. Required if the JDBC connection URL doesn’t provide
This setting is available for MariaDB and enough context. Otherwise, this setting is optional.
MySQL connections. • Microsoft SQL Server—Use the schema name to specify the correct object.
• PostgreSQL—Use the schema name to specify the correct object.
Password Password to connect to the database.

Note: If you plan to use excluded data in the future, use a recipe filter to limit the data written to a dataset instead of a data sync
filter.
770

6. Click Save.
To filter an Amazon AWS RDS connector, enter a filter using the syntax described in its help.
• AWS RDS Aurora MySQL Help
• AWS RDS Aurora PostgreSQL Help
• AWS RDS MariaDB Help
• AWS RDS MySQL Help
• AWS RDS Oracle Help
• AWS RDS PostgreSQL Help
• AWS RDS SQL Server Help
Amazon RDS Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with an Amazon RDS connector.
underscore.
for each connected object, whichever limit is reached first. The AWS RDS Oracle connector can sync up to 10 million rows or 5 GB
per object, whichever limit it reaches first.
• The AWS RDS SQL Server connector isn’t available to sync Salesforce Government Cloud org data.
• Columns of datatype JSON are not supported.
creating connections, see this release note
SEE ALSO:
Amazon RDS Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Amazon Redshift Connection

Create a remote connection using the Amazon Redshift connector to sync data from Amazon Redshift to CRM Analytics.
Connection Requirements
Before you create an Amazon Redshift connection, ensure that the Redshift cluster that you’re connecting to is SSL enabled. For more
information about using SSL, see Configure Security Options for Connections in Amazon Web Services documentation.
Note: SHA256 encryption isn't supported for the certificate bundle. You must use MD5 encryption.
771

possible reasons.
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the connections. Use a convention that lets you easily distinguish between different connections.
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name can’t include spaces. The API name is used in your recipes to
reference data extracted through this connection. You can’t change the developer name after you create
the connection.
Username User name for your Amazon Redshift account.
Number Of Nodes in The number of nodes in the Amazon Redshift cluster.

Cluster
Schema Your Amazon Redshift schema name. Only objects that exist within this schema are available for sync.
Cluster Node Type Node type of the Amazon Redshift cluster.
JDBC URL Your Amazon Redshift connection URL. Enter in the format:
jdbc:redshift://<cluster>.<hostname>.<region>.redshift.amazonaws.com:<port>/<database>
For help finding your URL, see Amazon Web Services’ Obtain the JDBC URL. Use the exact URL specified in
the cluster database properties. For example:
jdbc:redshift://examplecluster.cke7ebis04kb.us-west-2.redshift.amazonaws.com:5631/dev
Serverless JDBC URLs are also supported. For example:

jdbc:redshift:User=admin;Password=admin;Server=default.xxxxxxxxxx.us-east.2.redshift-serverless.amazonaws.com;Port=5439;Database=dev;
Password Password for your Amazon Redshift account.
S3 Bucket Name The name of your Amazon S3 bucket. Optional.

Note: If you expect to use excluded data in the future, use a recipe filter to limit the data written to a dataset instead of a data
sync filter.
772

6. Click Save.
For the Amazon Redshift connector, enter a filter in the syntax described in the Amazon Redshift help.
Amazon Redshift Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Amazon Redshift connector.
underscore.
• Ensure that the Redshift cluster that you’re connecting to is SSL enabled. For more information about using SSL, see Configure
Security Options for Connections in Amazon Web Services documentation.
• While connecting to a Redshift view, the field picker appears empty when a field’s length exceeds 32,000 characters and the source
data table and view are in different database schemas. Decrease the field length in Redshift, or move the table and view to the same
schema.
• When syncing a Redshift object, the job quits when the query takes longer than the 60-minute threshold.
• Your Redshift node must be available to Salesforce data centers with these IP ranges. Nodes in a VPC or behind a firewall aren’t
supported.
When you run a sync job on a Redshift object using the legacy connector, the Redshift data is first staged in an Amazon S3 bucket
and then pulled from the S3 bucket into CRM Analytics. To enable the connector to access the data, specify the name of the bucket,
its secret access key, and its access key ID in the connection settings. You can only sync data included in the specified Amazon S3
bucket. The new connector version doesn’t use Amazon S3.
Table 8: Additional Settings Required for Legacy Connector

Setting Description
Master Symmetric Key Optional. Your Amazon S3 master symmetric key used to enable
client-side data encryption. This must be a 256-bit AES encryption
key in Base64 format.
AWS Secret Access Key Your Amazon secret access key.
AWS Access Key ID Your Amazon S3 bucket access key ID.
773
Setting Description
S3 Bucket Name The name of your Amazon S3 bucket. Required when using the
legacy version of this connector.
SEE ALSO:
Amazon Redshift Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Databricks Connection
Sync Databricks to CRM Analytics by creating a remote connection..

possible reasons.
Connection Settings
Setting Description
Connection Name Use a name that lets you easily distinguish between different
connections.
Developer Name The developer name is used in your recipes to reference data
extracted through this connection. The name can't include spaces.
After you create the connection, you can't change the developer
name.
Description Connection description.
Token Personal access token for Databricks. You can find it on your
Databricks User Settings page on the Access Tokens tab.
Server Server hostname of the Databricks cluster.
HTTPPath HTTP path of the Databricks cluster.
Database Name of the Databricks database.
For more information, see Establishing a Connection.
Connection Considerations
When working with the Databricks connector, keep these behaviors in mind.
774
• Connected object names must start with a letter and contain only letters, digits, or underscores. Object names can't end with an
underscore.
• This connector can sync up to 10 million rows or up to 5 GB per job, whichever limit it reaches first.
Google BigQuery for Legacy SQL Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google BigQuery connector to sync data from Google BigQuery to CRM Analytics
Important: Use the Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connection instead of this connector if using standard SQL or when querying
partitioned tables. For more information on the limitations with legacy SQL and partitioned tables, see Google’s Introduction to
Partitioned Tables.
The service account that you use to connect to Google Big Query must have the standard role "BigQuery Data Viewer" and a custom
role with these permissions.
• bigquery.jobs.create
• bigquery.jobs.get
• bigquery.jobs.list
• bigquery.jobs.listAll
• bigquery.jobs.update
• bigquery.tables.create
• bigquery.tables.delete
• bigquery.tables.update
• bigquery.tables.updateData
• storage.buckets.list
Account creation generates a JSON file of account properties. Most of the necessary connection settings are in this file. For more
information about viewing and downloading service account details, see Google’s Creating and managing service account keys
documentation.
Create Connection
possible reasons.

775

Schema Name of the Google BigQuery Dataset ID you’re connecting to.
KEY-----" at the start of the key, and \n-----END
Region Id Optional setting. Enter the data location of the Google BigQuery
dataset if the location isn’t in North America. The dataset data
location is found in the BigQuery console in the Dataset Info section.
For example, asia-northeast1.
Project ID Enter the project_id value from the JSON file.

If you have multiple projects with the same service account, enter
the ID of the project containing the dataset that you want to
connect to.
Extract Mode Optional setting. Enter one of the following modes to extract data
from Google BigQuery. Direct is the default if a mode isn’t specified.
Direct: Use this mode to extract small data volumes. The connector
extracts the data directly from Google BigQuery.
Staging: Use this mode to extract large data volumes, such as 10
million records. To increase performance when handling large data
volumes, the connector stages the data in the specified Google
Cloud storage path and then extracts the data from the storage
path. If a direct extract fails, try using this extract mode.
Use Storage API Optional setting. If True, uses the Google BigQuery Storage Read
API. See Google’s BigQuery Storage Read API documentation to
understand your expected consumption, and Google’s data
extraction pricing for additional cost information. If False, uses
Direct extract mode.

filter.
776

6. Click Save.
For the Google BigQuery connector, enter a filter in the syntax described in Google’s BigQuery Help.
Google BigQuery Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Google BigQuery connector.
underscore.
• BigQuery tables using data integrated from Google Drive aren’t supported. The Google Drive data must be moved into BigQuery.
Nested and Repeated Fields
The connector flattens nested fields and syncs them as separate fields. In addition, the connector generates new rows for repeated
fields. Let’s look at an example. The contact data in this JSON file contains the current and previous address for each contact. The
addresses field has nested status, street, city, and state fields. These nested fields appear twice for each contact:
first for the current address, and then for the previous address.
{"id":"1","name":"James Park","addresses":[{"status":"current","street":"1 Harper
Alley","city":"Toledo","state":"OH"},{"status":"previous","street":"392 Parkside
Street","city":"Seattle","state":"WA"}]}
{"id":"2","name":"Lori Carr","addresses":[{"status":"current","street":"7501 Talisman
Court","city":"Fort Worth","state":"TX"},{"status":"previous","street":"3368 Anderson
Lane","city":"Moreno Valley","state":"CA"}]}
If you include the addresses field for sync, each nested field appears as a separate field in each row of the synced connected
object. The repeated address fields result in two rows for each contact: one row for the current address, and one row for the previous
address.
id name addresses.status addresses.street addresses.city addresses.state

1 James Park current 1 Harper Alley Toledo OH
1 James Park previous 392 Parkside Street Seattle WA
2 Lori Carr current 7501 Talisman Court Fort Worth TX
2 Lori Carr previous 3368 Anderson Lane Moreno Valley CA
Temporary Destination Tables

The connector creates temporary destination tables in BigQuery to stage data before serving it to the client. The connector names
these tables in the format EA_TEMP_<5-character random string>_<objectName>. Tables are usually deleted
automatically. To avoid incurring extra data storage costs on Google BigQuery, check that all temporary tables have been deleted,
and manually delete any tables that haven’t been deleted.
777
Table Support
The Google BigQuery for Legacy SQL connector supports Standard SQL Tables, Legacy SQL Tables, and Legacy SQL Views, but doesn’t
support Standard SQL Views.
connections, see this release note. The new version of this connector uses the Google BigQuery Storage Read API for increased
throughput, and may impact your Google billing. You may see a nominal cost increase per TB if you're not on a flat-rate plan. See
Google’s BigQuery Storage Read API documentation to understand your expected consumption, and Google’s data extraction
pricing for additional cost information.

Setting Description
Storage Path Applicable only to the legacy connector version. Required when
using the Staging extract mode. Path in Google Cloud Storage
where a local stage file is created to store the data temporarily.
Enter the bucket name or the bucket name and folder name. For
example, enter <bucket_name> or
<bucket_name>/<folder_name>.
To write files to this staging area, the user specified in Client Email
must have the list, read, and write permissions on the bucket.
SEE ALSO:
Google BigQuery Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles

Bring your large volumes of Google BigQuery data with standard SQL support into CRM Analytics using the Google BigQuery Standard
SQL connector.
Important: Use the Google BigQuery for Legacy SQL Connection instead of this connector if using legacy SQL.
Create Connection
possible reasons.

778

Schema Name of the Google BigQuery Dataset ID you’re connecting to.
KEY-----" at the start of the key, and \n-----END
Region Id Optional setting. Enter the data location of the Google BigQuery
dataset if the location isn’t in North America. The dataset data
location is found in the BigQuery console in the Dataset Info section.
For example, asia-northeast1.

connect to.
Use Storage API Optional setting. If True, uses the Google BigQuery Storage Read
API. See Google’s BigQuery Storage Read API documentation to
understand your expected consumption, and Google’s data
extraction pricing for additional cost information. If False, uses
Direct extract mode.
Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Google BigQuery Standard SQL connector.
underscore.
• Staging mode is supported. Direct mode isn’t supported.
• BigQuery tables using data integrated from Google Drive aren’t supported. The Google Drive data must be moved into BigQuery.
• The connector doesn’t flatten nested fields. When previewing nested data before load, only the top-level fields are shown.
Temporary Destination Tables
The connector creates temporary destination tables in BigQuery to stage data before serving it to the client. The connector names
these tables in the format EA_TEMP_<5-character random string>_<objectName>. Tables are usually deleted
779
automatically. To avoid incurring extra data storage costs on Google BigQuery, check that all temporary tables have been deleted,
and manually delete any tables that haven’t been deleted.
Table Support
The Google BigQuery Standard SQL connector supports Standard SQL Tables, Legacy SQL Tables, and Standard SQL Views, but
doesn’t support Legacy SQL Views.
connections, see this release note. The new version of this connector uses the Google BigQuery Storage Read API for increased
throughput, and may impact your Google billing. You may see a nominal cost increase per TB if you're not on a flat-rate plan. See
Google’s BigQuery Storage Read API documentation to understand your expected consumption, and Google’s data extraction
pricing for additional cost information.

Setting Description
Storage Path Applicable only to the legacy connector version. Path in Google
Cloud Storage where a local stage file is created to store the data
temporarily. Enter the bucket name or the bucket name and folder
name. For example, enter <bucket_name> or
<bucket_name>/<folder_name>.
To write files to this staging area, the user specified in Client Email
must have the list, read, and write permissions on the bucket.
Google Cloud Spanner Connection

Create a remote connection using the Google Spanner connector to sync data from Google Cloud Spanner to CRM Analytics.
A Google Cloud Spanner connection requires a private key and client email. You can generate a JSON file containing this information
from the IAM & Admin page in the Google Cloud Platform Console.
Create Connection
possible reasons.

780

Instance Id Enter the instance ID of the Google Cloud Spanner instance.
Database Enter the database ID of the Google Cloud Spanner database.

connect to.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with a Google Cloud Spanner connector.
underscore.
SEE ALSO:
Google Cloud Spanner Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Heroku Postgres Connection

Create a remote connection using the Heroku Postgres connector to sync Heroku Postgres data to CRM Analytics.
To access Heroku Postgres in Heroku Private Spaces, complete these steps before you create the connection.
1. Contact Heroku Support to activate Trusted IP ranges for data services in the space. Trusted IP ranges for data services is a beta
feature.
781
2. Add the Salesforce IP ranges to the Trusted IP ranges in the space. See the Salesforce IP Addresses and Domains to Allow knowledge
article for a list of Salesforce IP ranges. To use this connector with Hyperforce, use the IPs listed in Hyperforce External IPs.

possible reasons.
All settings require a value, unless otherwise indicated. Go to the database in Heroku and click View Credentials... to access the values
for the connection settings.

JDBC Connection URL URL schema for the database. Enter in the format:
jdbc:postgresql://<host>:<port>/<database>
Look for the host, port, and database details in the database
credentials. For example:
jdbc:postgresql://ec1-23-45-67-89.compute-2.amazonaws.com:5112/a1b2c3
Username The database user, found in the database credentials.
Schema The name of the schema you want to use for the database. If no
schema names have been specified for the database, you can enter
public.
Password The database password, found in the database credentials.

up data sync by pulling only the data you need into CRM Analytics. If you plan to use excluded data in the future, use a recipe filter to
limit the data written to a dataset instead of a data sync filter.
782

6. Click Save.
For the Heroku Postgres connector, enter a filter using the syntax described in the Heroku Postgres Help and your version of Postgres’s
Help.
Heroku Postgres Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Heroku Postgres connector.
underscore.
• The data available for sync is determined by the security settings of the user that you use to connect.
• This connector is available to Heroku Private Spaces users that are also Hyperforce customers.
SEE ALSO:
Heroku Postgres Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics Connection

Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics connector to sync data from Azure Synapse Analytics or
dedicated SQL pool (formerly SQL DW) to CRM Analytics. To connect to SQL databases on Azure, add an Azure SQL Database Connection
instead of this one.

possible reasons.
Setting Description
783
Setting Description
Azure DW JDBC URL URL schema for the database. Enter in the format: <host
name>:<port>
To form the host name, append .sql.azuresynapse.net
or .database.windows.net to the server name. The server
name is found by following Microsoft’s documentation. For
example, if your server’s name is Blue_server, the host name is
Blue_server.sql.azuresynapse.net. The default port is 1433.
Azure DW JDBC URL example:
Blue_server.sql.azuresynapse.net:1433
Azure DW JDBC Password Password to connect to the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics
account.
Azure Blob Account Name Name of the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics Storage account
to stage the files.
Database Name of the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics database that you’re
connecting to.
Azure DW JDBC Username User name to connect to the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics
account.
Azure Blob Account Key Microsoft Azure Storage access key to stage the files.
Azure DW Schema Name Name of the schema in Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics.

6. Click Save.
For the Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics connector, enter a filter in the syntax described in the Azure SQL Database and Dynamic SQL
documentation.
784
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with an Azure Synapse Analytics connector.
underscore.
When using the legacy connector version, the user that you use to connect to Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics must have the
db_owner privilege.
SEE ALSO:
Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connection

Create a remote connection using the Microsoft Azure SQL Database connector to sync data from Microsoft Azure SQL Database to CRM
Analytics. To connect to Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics or a dedicated SQL pool (formerly SQL DW), add a Microsoft Azure Synapse
Analytics Connection instead of this one.

possible reasons.

Database Microsoft Azure SQL database name.
785

JDBC Connection URL URL schema for the database. Enter in the format: <host
name>:<port>
To form the host name, append .database.windows.net
to the server name. The server name is found by following
Microsoft’s documentation. For example, if your server’s name is
Blue_server, the host name is Blue_server.database.windows.net.
The default port is 1433.
URL example:
Blue_server.database.windows.net:1433
Username User name for the database login.

Enter in the format: <username>@<host name>
To form the host name, append .database.windows.net
to the server name. The server name is found by following
Microsoft’s documentation. For example, if your server’s name is
Blue_server, the host name is Blue_server.database.windows.net.
Schema Schema name for the database. You must enter a schema name
if the JDBC connection URL doesn’t provide enough context.
The default value is dbo
Password Password for the database login.

6. Click Save.
For the Microsoft Azure SQL Database connector,enter a filter in the syntax described in the Azure SQL Database and WHERE documentation.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Microsoft Azure SQL Database connector.
underscore.
786
SEE ALSO:
Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
SAP HANA Connection

Create a remote connection using the SAP HANA connector to sync data from cloud-based SAP HANA to CRM Analytics.
connections, see this release note. There are two connector options, the new SAP HANA Cloud Connection on page 788 and this
legacy SAP HANA Connection. These connectors don’t use the legacy connector toggle. To migrate, create a connection with the
connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection and any new required properties. Then, update your recipes and
dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection for troubleshooting.
We recommend that you complete the migration and test soon, as we retire legacy connector versions beginning with the Winter
‘22 release.
Connection Settings
Setting Description
API name is used in your dataflows to reference data extracted
URL SAP HANA database connection string. Must end in .xsodata.

Enter in the format: https://<Database
Name>.ondemand.com/<Service Definition
Path>
For example:
https://connectorshanatp.hanatrial.ondemand.com/Package/ProductODataService.xsodata
Password Password to connect to the SAP HANA database.
Username User name to connect to the SAP HANA database.
787
SAP HANA Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the SAP HANA connector.
• When using this connector, Salesforce Government Cloud org data is protected in transit with advanced encryption and can sync
up to 10 million rows or 5 GB for each connected object, whichever limit is reached first.
• It’s an OData-based connector.
• Connection to on-premises SAP HANA is not supported.
• Maximum number of characters in a field is 32,000.
• Maximum number of concurrent data sync runs is 3.
• You can sync data from up to 100 objects in CRM Analytics. This total includes local and external objects.
underscore.
• Queries that take longer than 10 minutes to return initial data to CRM Analytics causes a “timeout exceeded” error message. The
best practice in this situation is to simplify or segment your queries.
SEE ALSO:
SAP HANA Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
SAP HANA Cloud Connection

Create a remote connection using the SAP HANA Cloud connector to sync data from cloud-based SAP HANA to CRM Analytics.
connections, see this release note. There are two connector options, this SAP HANA Cloud Connection and the legacy SAP HANA
Connection on page 787. These connectors won’t use the legacy connector toggle. To migrate, create a connection with the
connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection and any new required properties. Then, update your recipes and
dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep the legacy version of the connection for troubleshooting.
We recommend that you complete the migration and test soon, as we’ll retire legacy connector versions beginning with the
Winter ‘22 release.

possible reasons.
Setting Description
788
Setting Description
Server The name of the SAP HANA database server.

For example:
a230u4b3-8136-439b-174e-g39669ch71c5.hana.trial-us10.hanacloud.ondemand.com
Username User name to connect to the SAP HANA database.
Port The specified server port for your SAPA Hana database. For example,
556.
Schema Schema name for the database. The default value is DBADMIN.
Database SAP HANA database name. For example, L99.
Password Password to connect to the SAP HANA database. Salesforce

Government Cloud customers with FIPS 140-2 encryption must
have a password of at least 14 characters.

6. Click Save.
For the SAP HANA Cloud connector, enter a SQL filter with quotes around object names. For more information, see SAP HANA’s WHERE
documentation.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the SAP HANA connector.
underscore.
• This is a JDBC-based connector.
• Connection to on-premises SAP HANA isn’t supported.
789
Create a remote connection using the Snowflake connector to sync data from Snowflake to CRM Analytics.
Note: If you want to sync data from CRM Analytics to Snowflake, use the Snowflake Output Connector on page 817 or Sync Out
for Snowflake on page 834 instead.
Connect to Snowflake with OAuth

To use the CRM Analytics Snowflake connector with an OAuth connection, you must configure Snowflake, Salesforce, CRM Analytics,
and an external OAuth authorization server.
Note: You can’t use a custom authorization provider.
These high-level instructions help you navigate the steps involved. Remember to contact your Network Security or IT department for
help with configuration consistent with your organization’s security requirements.
1. Configure Snowflake and your selected external authorization server. Here’s Snowflake's help, with detailed instructions for connecting
to services like Okta and Microsoft Azure AD.
2. With the authorization server is configured, follow the steps under Define an Authentication Provider in Salesforce from Configure an
Authentication Provider Using OpenID Connect.
• If you’re using Okta, here are Okta's instructions for adding their service to Salesforce.
3. With the authentication provider added to Salesforce, define a named credential in Salesforce. Select the OAuth 2.0 authentication
protocol and Named Principal identity type.
4. Add the Snowflake connection. For Authentication Type setting, enter OAuth.
Note: OAuth 2.0 is the industry-standard protocol for authorization, however we’re unable to test every possible combination of
services. Log a case with Salesforce Customer Support if your service can’t connect with the Authentication Provider system.
Connection Details
Generate your Snowflake private key and private key passphrase using the Snowflake Private Key documentation. If you opt to rotate
your Snowflake private key manually, update the connection properties with the new key.
possible reasons.
Setting Description
790
Setting Description
Username User name for the Snowflake account.
Password Optional setting*. Password for your Snowflake account.
Authentication Type The type of authentication used for this connection. Accepted
values are "OAuth", "Password", or "PrivateKey".
• If you use OAuth, enter a value in the Named Credential field.
• If you use Password, enter a value in the Username and
Password fields.
• If you use PrivateKey, enter a value in the Username, Private
Key, and Private Key Passphrase fields.
Named Credential The Name field from a named credential stored in your Salesforce
org.
Private Key Optional setting*. A private key associated with your Snowflake
account.
Don’t include -----BEGIN ENCRYPTED PRIVATE
KEY----- at the start of the key, and -----END
ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY----- at the end.
Private Key Passphrase Optional setting*. The passphrase associated with your specified
private key.
Account Name of your Snowflake account.

The account name is the first segment in the domain in your
Snowflake URL. For example, 123abc is your account name in
https://123abc.snowflakecomputing.com.
Warehouse Snowflake warehouse name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter

the value exactly as it appears in Snowflake.
Role Optional setting. Snowflake role assigned to the user that you’re
using to connect.
Additional JDBC URL Parameters Optional setting. One or more JDBC connection parameters. Enter
in the format
parameter1=value;parameter2=value;parameter3=value
For example:
user=joates;warehouse=mywh;db=mydb&schema=public
Database Snowflake database name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter

Schema Snowflake schema name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter

791
*Enter the Password or both the Private Key and Private Key Passphrase. Learn more about private keys in the Snowflake Private Key
documentation.

up data sync by pulling only the data you need into CRM Analytics. If you expect to use excluded data in the future, use a recipe filter to
6. Click Save.
For the Snowflake connector, enter a SQL filter as described in the Snowflake WHERE documentation.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Snowflake connector.
underscore.
• A Snowflake warehouse can be set to automatically resume or suspend. Review the Snowflake documentation for information about
the optimal use of these features.
• The named credential must use the identity type Named Principal and have the status Authenticated.
• When using the legacy version of the Snowflake connector, the settings Private Key and Private Key Passphrase aren't used. The
Password property is required.
SEE ALSO:
Snowflake Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Zendesk Connection
Create a remote connection using the Zendesk connector to sync data from Zendesk to CRM Analytics.

792
possible reasons.

Username User name for the Zendesk account.
URL Complete URL of the Zendesk account. Enter in the format: <http
or https>://<Instance
Name>.zendesk.com/<Instance Details>
For example:
https://blueskysystems.zendesk.com/api/v3
Password Password for the Zendesk account.
When working with the Zendesk connector, keeps these behaviors in mind.
underscore.
Analytics Mulesoft Connectors

Pull your cloud-based data via CloudHub into CRM Analytics without code using Analytics Mulesoft connectors for CRM Analytics. After
the connection to your data source via CloudHub is configured, choose the objects to sync to CRM Analytics. In CRM Analytics, your data
can be analyzed independently and with other synced data from your Salesforce org or other remotely connected data sources.
How Analytics Mulesoft Connectors Work

When you create an Analytics Mulesoft connection, Salesforce generates a template in the associated CloudHub account. CloudHub is
the integration platform as a service component of Mulesoft’s Anypoint Platform, described further in Mulesoft’s CloudHub documentation.
The template selects the data source-specific driver and generates API calls that perform actions to securely connect with the source
system. With the connection established, the metadata pull, sample data pull, and full data pull are available for CRM Analytics to configure
the data sync.
793
Important: These connectors sync data from cloud-based systems. You can’t use these connectors to sync data from an on-premises
system.
Analytics Mulesoft Microsoft SQL Connector

Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft Microsoft SQL Server connector to sync data from Microsoft SQL Server on
AWS RDS to CRM Analytics through Mulesoft.
Analytics Mulesoft MySQL Connector
Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft MySQL connector to sync data from MySQL (in AWS RDS) to CRM Analytics
through Mulesoft.
Analytics Mulesoft Oracle Connector
Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft Oracle connector to sync data from Oracle to CRM Analytics through
Mulesoft.
Analytics Mulesoft Microsoft SQL Connector

Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft Microsoft SQL Server connector to sync data from Microsoft SQL Server on
AWS RDS to CRM Analytics through Mulesoft.
A Mulesoft license, purchased or acquired separately, is required. The 30-Day Mulesoft Trial license is supported. Ask your Mulesoft admin
for CloudHub credentials with access to deploy.

possible reasons.
Setting Description
To simplify AnyPoint management, the application name of the
Mule instance initiated by this connector is automatically added
to the end of your Connection Name. For example, if you assigned
the connection name ABC_Systems and the Mule's
autogenerated name is MyMulesoft-tzflx, the connection
ABC_Systems (mule:MyMulesoft-tzflx) is added
to your list.
794
Setting Description
Database Port Network port number used to connect to the database server.
CloudHub Env Name CloudHub environment name where the connection is deployed.
Typical values are Sandbox, Design, or Production.
Database Schema Schema name for the database.
Database Username User name to connect to the database.
CloudHub Username User name to connect to the Mulesoft Anypoint account containing
the CloudHub instance.
Database Name Name of the Microsoft SQL Server database that you are connecting
to.
Database Password Password for the Microsoft SQL Server database.
CloudHub Password Password to connect to the Mulesoft Anypoint account containing

Database Host URL schema for the database. Enter in the format:
<prefix>.<hostname>.<cluster>.rds.amazonaws.com
For example:
myrdssqlmule.ast7yapjzxxq.us-west-2.rds.amazonaws.com
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Analytics Mulesoft Microsoft SQL Server connector.
underscore.
• Your CloudHub administrator manages your CloudHub resources. If you’re running multiple concurrent syncs or larger volumes of
data, inform your CloudHub administrator so they can manage CloudHub allocations.
• Saving the connector prompts Anypoint to generate a Mule for the connection. Mule generation can take up to two minutes. If you
attempt to open the new connection during Mule generation, an error message says that objects can’t be retrieved. You can check
Mule status in Anypoint.
Analytics Mulesoft MySQL Connector

Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft MySQL connector to sync data from MySQL (in AWS RDS) to CRM Analytics
through Mulesoft.
795

possible reasons.
Setting Description
to your list.
Database Name Name of the MySQL database that you are connecting to.
Database Password Password for the MySQL database.

For example:
mysqlmule.ast7yapjzxxq.us-west-2.rds.amazonaws.com
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Analytics Mulesoft MySQL connector.
796
underscore.
Analytics Mulesoft Oracle Connector

Create a remote connection using the Analytics Mulesoft Oracle connector to sync data from Oracle to CRM Analytics through Mulesoft.
possible reasons.
Setting Description
to your list.
Database Schema Schema name for the database.
797
Setting Description
Database Name Name of the Oracle database that you are connecting to.
Database Password Password for the Oracle database.

For example:
oracledbmule.ast7yapjzxxq.us-west-2.rds.amazonaws.com
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Analytics Mulesoft Oracle connector.
underscore.
Object Store and No SQL Connectors

Use these connectors to sync data from your object store and non-SQL services to CRM Analytics.
Amazon S3 Connection
Create a remote connection using the Amazon S3 connector to sync CSV data from an S3 bucket to CRM Analytics.
Amazon S3 Connection
Create a remote connection using the Amazon S3 connector to sync CSV data from an S3 bucket to CRM Analytics.
Note: If you want to write from CRM Analytics to Amazon S3, use an Amazon S3 Output Connection on page 809 instead.
Connection Details
Knowing your S3 bucket folder hierarchy is important to configuring this connector. Set the S3 bucket settings and parent’s folder path
when creating the connection. Then select one or more objects, which are the subfolders under the parent’s folder path, that contain
the CSV files you want to sync to CRM Analytics. When you sync the connected object, CRM Analytics looks for a CSV file called
schema_sample.csv to detect the schema of the CSV data in the folder and to display a data preview. From this preview, you can
view and change field attributes for all the files that you’re loading from the folder.
798
CRM Analytics loads all CSV files in the subfolder that have the same fields as the schema_sample.csv and appends the rows in
a single object.
The permissions for the Amazon S3 account used to create this connection must include ListBucket and GetObject. Permissions must
include resource grants to the bucket and either "any object" or, if you chose to be specific, the appropriate ARNs that represent the
path and objects being referenced. For example:

799

possible reasons.
Setting Description
Master Symmetric Key Optional setting for managing client-side encryption. You can
connect to objects encrypted with customer master keys stored
in the AWS Key Management Service or a customer-generated key
in the 256-bit AES format. See Amazon’s documentation for details.
Secret Key Your Amazon secret access key.
Region Name Region of your S3 service, for example EU (Ireland). For the
list of region names, see the S3 Region Names in CRM Analytics
below.
Folder Path Path to the folder that you want to connect to. The path must start
with the bucket name and can’t include the name of the subfolder
whose data you want to sync.
AWS Access Key ID Your Amazon S3 bucket access key ID.
Table 11: Amazon Region Names in CRM Analytics

Region Name Amazon Code
US East (Ohio) us-east-2
US East (N. Virginia) us-east-1
US West (N. California) us-west-1
US West (Oregon) us-west-2
Africa (Cape Town) af-south-1
Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) ap-east-1
Asia Pacific (Mumbai) ap-south-1
Asia Pacific (Osaka) ap-northeast-3
Asia Pacific (Seoul) ap-northeast-2
800
Region Name Amazon Code

Asia Pacific (Singapore) ap-southeast-1
Asia Pacific (Sydney) ap-southeast-2
Asia Pacific (Tokyo) ap-northeast-1
Canada (Central) ca-central-1
China (Beijing) cn-north-1
China (Ningxia) cn-northwest-1
EU (Frankfurt) eu-central-1
EU (Ireland) eu-west-1
EU (London) eu-west-2
Europe (Milan) eu-south-1
EU (Paris) eu-west-3
EU (Stockholm) eu-north-1
Middle East (Bahrain) me-south-1
South America (Sao Paulo) sa-east-1
AWS GovCloud (US-East) us-gov-east-1
AWS GovCloud (US-West) us-gov-west-1
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Amazon S3 connector.
underscore.
• To avoid Amazon S3 connector setup timeout, choose a Folder Path with fewer than 5,000 entry options. An entry is the folder you
intend to sync, the files within the folder, as well as all subfolders and subfiles. Recommended best practice is to create a bucket or
folder within the bucket dedicated to Data Sync, populated with only the files to sync.
• Surround fields that contain quotes and commas in double quotes. Some CSV generators automatically double quote text fields
when needed, while others do not. Due to inconsistent generator behavior, we recommend you surround all text fields in double
quotes to ensure characters such as ' or , do not cause data sync issues
• The folder path that you specify in the connection settings must start with the bucket name and the parent folder. Don’t include
the folder that you want to connect to. Let’s look at an example. You want to load files from the Call_Back_Logs_2018_Jan in S3.
The folder path appears above the folder when you open it in S3.
801
The folder path in S3 starts with the bucket name (1), followed by a folder name (2). In this example, subfolder (3) contains CSV data
that you want to sync. When you specify this connection’s folder path setting, you include only the bucket (1) and parent folder (2),
not the subfolder (3) that you’re syncing. After you create the connection, all subfolders directly under the parent folder (2), including
Call_Back_Logs_2018_Jan, appear as possible objects that you can sync using this connection.
• Folder names in S3 must follow developer naming conventions, with no spaces or special characters.
• Rename one of the files in the subfolder to schema_sample.csv. CRM Analytics uses this file to detect the schema of the CSV
data.
• Remove all empty rows from the schema_sample.csv file.
802
• Each file that you want to load from the S3 subfolder must have a file name ending in .csv. Each file must also have a header row
and the same fields as the schema_sample.csv file. A file can have extra fields, but these fields aren’t loaded. CRM Analytics
ignores files that don’t meet these requirements.
• Field names in the header row of each file must follow developer naming conventions, with no spaces or special characters. The
header rows in your schema file and data files are case-sensitive, so use the same capitalization throughout.
• You can load only whole files, not parts of files.
Connection Example
To better understand how the S3 connector works under more complex scenarios, consider the following hierarchy in S3. The hierarchy
has two buckets: Quarterly_Financial_Data and Call_Logs. The first bucket has one level of folders. The second bucket has two levels:
parent folders and subfolders. Here’s the S3 hierarchy.
• Quarterly_Financial_Data
– 2018
• 2018_quarter1_results.csv
– 2019
• Call_Logs
– 2018_Call_Logs
• Q1_2018
– call_logs_2018_01.csv
• Q2_2018
• Q3_2018
• Q4_2018
803
Let’s look at how you can set up connections and connected objects to accomplish the following goals.
Goal Action
Extract data from multiple buckets into CRM Analytics. Because each connection is associated with a single bucket, create
a separate connection for each bucket.
For example, to extract data from the Quarterly_Financial_Data
and Call_Logs buckets, create two connections, one for
Quarterly_Financial_Data and another for Call_Logs. For each
connection, set the appropriate bucket name in the Folder Path
connection property.
Extract specific folders, but not all subfolders, from a parent folder. Create a connection for the parent folder, and then use the
connection to connect to specific subfolders.
For example, to extract call logs from Q1_2018 and Q2_2018
folders, create one connection with folder path
Call_Logs/2018_Call_Logs. Then create connected
objects for Q1_2018 and Q2_2018.
Extract data from a subset of the CSV files under a folder. Move the subset of files into a subfolder, create the connection on
the parent folder, and then use the connection to connect to the
subfolder.
For example, to extract data from call_logs_2018_11.csv and
call_logs_2018_12.csv, move these CSV files under a new subfolder
under Q4_2018. Next, create a connection with folder path
Call_Logs/2018_Call_Logs/Q4_2018. Finally, create
a connected object based on the new subfolder.
creating connections, see this knowledge article.
• The legacy version supports connecting to objects encrypted with a customer-generated key in the 256-bit AES format. See
Amazon’s documentation for details.
• The legacy version of connector is not supported when your data is client-side encrypted with an AWS KMS managed key.
804
SEE ALSO:
Amazon S3 Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Pilot and Beta Connectors

You can use these connectors as a pilot or beta feature to sync external data with CRM Analytics. Before choosing a connector, review
its pilot or beta instructions.
Hubspot Connection (Beta)

Pull your marketing, sales, and customer service data from HubSpot into Data Manager using the HubSpot connector for CRM
Analytics.
Marketo Connection (Beta)
Create a remote connection using the Marketo connector to sync data from Marketo to CRM Analytics.
Hubspot Connection (Beta)

Pull your marketing, sales, and customer service data from HubSpot into Data Manager using the HubSpot connector for CRM Analytics.
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customer may opt to try such Beta Service in its sole discretion. Any use of the Beta Service
is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided at Agreements and Terms.
To use the CRM Analytics HubSpot connector with an OAuth connection, you must configure HubSpot for OAuth, Salesforce, and CRM
Analytics.
1. Configure HubSpot for OAuth using the HubSpot OAuth Quickstart Guide.
2. With HubSpot OAuth configured, follow the steps under Define an Authentication Provider in Salesforce from Configure an Authentication
Provider Using OpenID. Here’s some of the field mapping between Hubspot and Salesforce:
• Copy the Hubspot Client ID to the Salesforce Consumer Key.
• Copy the Hubspot Client secret to the Salesforce Consumer Secret.
• The Authorization Endpoint URL is https://app.hubspot.com/oauth/authorize
• The Token Endpoint URL is https://api.hubapi.com/oauth/v1/token
• After the auth provider is saved, copy the Callback URL from Salesforce to the Redirect URL in HubSpot’s OAuth configuration.
4. Add the HubSpot connection. For Authentication Type, enter OAuth.
805

possible reasons.
Setting Description
values are "OAuth" or "Token".
• If you use Token, enter a value in the API Key and Schema.
org.
API Key Your Hubspot account’s API key. See Hubspot’s help for more
details.
Schema The Hubspot API version. Assign the value HUBSPOT to use the
HubSpot CRM API v2, or set it to HUBSPOTV3 to use the HubSpot
CRM API v3.

6. Click Save.
For the Hubspot connector, enter a filter using the syntax described in the Hubspot Get Table Help.
806
When working with the Hubspot connector, keeps these behaviors in mind.
underscore.
• The named credential must use the identity type Named Principal and have the status Authenticated.
Marketo Connection (Beta)

Create a remote connection using the Marketo connector to sync data from Marketo to CRM Analytics.
The Marketo connector accesses Marketo data using REST API. You need a Marketo custom service’s Client ID, Client Secret, and your
Marketo REST API endpoint for authentication. Ask your Marketo administrator or track down the credentials and endpoint in Marketo.
1. In Marketo, create a role with Access API permission and assign it to a user.
2. Create a custom service using the user’s credentials.
3. Record the custom service’s Client ID and Client Secret credentials. For instructions on generating the credentials, see Client ID and
Client Secret credentials.
4. Record the REST API endpoint from the Web Services section. To locate your Marketo endpoint, see REST API endpoint.

possible reasons.

Rest API URL Marketo web services connection REST API endpoint string. Enter
in the format: https://<Database
Name>.mktorest.com
Example: https://123-ABC-456.mktorest.com
807

Grant Type Generates a token to access Marketo data. The value is
prepopulated.
The prepopulated client_credentials is the only valid
option.
Client Secret Generated by the Marketo custom service.
Client Id Generated by the Marketo custom service.

6. Click Save.
You can filter on select fields from these listed objects. Supported objects have a True in the Filterable column of the Columns table for
each object’s linked CDATA documentation.
• CustomObjects (Object Names that start with CustomObject_)
• Emails
• Folders
• Leads
• NamedAccounts
• Opportunities
• OpportunityRoles
• Programs
• SalesPersons
• SmartCampaigns
As an example, for the Leads object you can filter on several columns, including Id, Email, and ProgramId. To sync rows with a specific
Id, enter the filter specifying the values in the filter for the Leads object, for instance Id IN (2, 5, 10). Now, each data sync of
Leads will only include the rows with the Id 2, 5, or 10.
Note: Based on the Marketo API design, adding a filter is recommended for better performance.
When working with the Marketo connector, keeps these behaviors in mind.
808
underscore.
• You can extract up to 300 lead records at a time from Marketo when using the Filter Field and Filter Values properties.
• If your Marketo instance is synced with a CRM, Marketo disables connections to the Company, Opportunity, OpportunityRole,
SalesPerson, and custom objects. If you try to extract from one of these objects when synced with a CRM, an error saying that the
object API is disabled appears.
SEE ALSO:
Marketo Connector Known Issues and Knowledge Articles
Output Connectors
Use output connectors to push data from CRM Analytics to the remote system. Output connectors can push as part of a data prep output
node, and some can also push out unprepared data using sync.
Amazon S3 Output Connection

Create a remote connection using the Amazon S3 output connector to write .csv data from CRM Analytics to an Amazon S3 bucket
when using Data Prep.
Azure Data Lake Output Connection (Beta)
Create a remote connection using the Azure Data Lake output connector to write .csv data from CRM Analytics to Microsoft Azure
Data Lake Storage Gen2 when using Data Prep.
Salesforce Output Connection
Push your prepared dataset data into any Salesforce org from CRM Analytics Salesforce Output connector and Data Prep. With your
prepared data back in Salesforce, you can integrate external data, apply the suite of Salesforce automation tools to act on the data,
and allow non-CRM Analytics users access to the data through reports and dashboards.
Snowflake Output Connection
Create a remote connection using the Snowflake output connector to write data from CRM Analytics to a Snowflake table. Then,
use Sync Out to push raw data from CRM Analytics to Snowflake, or a Data Prep recipe output node to push transformed data.
Tableau Online Output Connection
Push your prepared data from CRM Analytics into Tableau Online with the Tableau Online Output connector and Data Prep recipes.
Your transformed, merged, and cleaned data is pushed to Tableau Online as a .hyper file for further analysis. For example, prepare
historical Opportunity data for struggling products in CRM Analytics, and then use Tableau Online’s analytics tools to identify helpful
trends to optimize deals.
Amazon S3 Output Connection

Create a remote connection using the Amazon S3 output connector to write .csv data from CRM Analytics to an Amazon S3 bucket
when using Data Prep.
Note: If you want to sync data from an Amazon S3 bucket to CRM Analytics, use an Amazon S3 Connection on page 798 instead.
809
How CRM Analytics Output Connectors with Output Nodes Work

With CRM Analytics connectors, you can write the outcome of a recipe to an external system for further analysis, business automation,
and storage. After you configure an output connector to the data source and folder path using the steps in this guide, create a recipe
using Data Prep. Add an Output node to the recipe and select to write to the output connection. Select the S3 connection you configured,
and choose which S3 object will contain the output data. When the recipe runs, CRM Analytics writes data to the specified object in the
folder path within the directory. For example, if you specified the folder path ...support/servicedata and chose the object
APAC, we write to the folder APAC at the path ...support/servicedata/APAC. The folder contains these files:
• The output dataset .csv file, with the naming standard folderpath_0.csv. In our example, the output is APAC_0.csv. For
larger datasets, CRM Analytics automatically partitions the data into multiple .csv files with increasing numbers appended to the
name. In our example, there could be a APAC_1.csv, a APAC_2.csv, and more until all data is written. This file doesn’t have
a header row.
• The metadata file schema.json, with information on each column including the name, data type, and precision.
• The _SUCCESS file, generated when the .csv is completely written.
When you run the recipe again, the files previously generated are deleted and the new version of the files are written.
Enable and Add the Amazon S3 Output Connector

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, select Analytics, and then Settings.
2. Select Enable Amazon S3 output connection and then save your changes.
3. In the Data Manager, click the Connections tab.
5. Click Output.
6. Click the connector’s icon and enter its settings, as described in the Connection Settings section.
7. Click Save & Test. Save & Test validates your settings by attempting to connect to the source. If the connection fails, CRM Analytics
shows possible reasons.

Connection Name Identifies the connection. Use a convention that lets you easily
Developer Name API name for the connection. The developer name can’t include
spaces, and you can’t change it after you create the connection.
Secret Key Your Amazon secret access key.
Region Name Region of your S3 service. The default region is US East(N. Virginia).
For the list of region names, see the AWS service endpoints
documentation.
Folder Path Path to the folder that you want to connect to. The path must start
with the bucket name and can’t include the name of the subfolder
whose data you want to sync.
Access Key Your Amazon S3 bucket access key ID.
810
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Amazon S3 output connector.
• You can use an output connection more than once per recipe, but each output node must use a different object. Each output node
can use up to the connector's per-run limit independently, but is still subject to the rolling 24 hour limit.
• Output connections are only available for recipes built with Data Prep.
• Each output connection only supports one folder path. To output to another folder path, create another output connection.
• When the prior run’s files are deleted in preparation for the current run, the earlier version of an output dataset is inaccessible. Set
up a process to copy or use the output after each run, and use the _SUCCESS file as an indication that the write is complete.
• Null values are output to AWS as null-[token], where the token is a string of characters. For example,
null-OrJLA4JEfCjToa4DDN or null-PaKIW3MEfCaQou9WXM. To interpret the null values, you may need to implement
post-processing using AWS CLI or on the target where data is consumed.
SEE ALSO:
Output Node: Write Recipe Results to a Dataset or External System
Azure Data Lake Output Connection (Beta)

Create a remote connection using the Azure Data Lake output connector to write .csv data from CRM Analytics to Microsoft Azure Data
Lake Storage Gen2 when using Data Prep.
Note: If you want to sync data from Microsoft Azure Synapse Analytics or dedicated SQL pool to CRM Analytics, use an Azure
Synapse Analytics Connection instead. Or, to sync data from Microsoft Azure SQL Database to CRM Analytics, use an Azure SQL
Database Connection.
How Azure Data Lake Output Connection Works

With CRM Analytics connectors, you can write the outcome of a recipe to an external system for further analysis, business automation,
and storage. After you configure an output connector to the data source and folder path using the steps in this guide, create a recipe
using Data Prep. Add an Output node to the recipe and select to write to the output connection. Select the Azure Data Lake connection
you configured, and choose which object will contain the output data. When the recipe runs, CRM Analytics writes data to the specified
object in the folder path within the directory. For example, if you specified the folder path support/servicedata and chose the
object APAC we write to the folder APAC at the path ...support/servicedata/APAC. The folder contains these files:
• The output dataset .csv file, with the naming standard folderpath_0.csv. In our example, the output is APAC_0.csv. For
larger datasets, CRM Analytics automatically partitions the data into multiple .csv files with increasing numbers appended to the
name. In our example, there could be a APAC_1.csv, a APAC_2.csv, and more until all data is written. This file doesn’t have
a header row.
• The metadata file schema.json, with information on each column including the name, data type, and precision.
• The _SUCCESS file, generated when the .csv is completely written.
When you run the recipe again, the files previously generated are deleted and the new version of the files are written.
Enable and Add the Azure Data Lake Output Connector

2. Select Enable Azure Data Lake output connection and then save your changes.
811

5. Click Output.

Developer Name API name for the connection. The developer name can’t include
spaces, and you can’t change it after you create the connection.
Access Key Your Azure Data Lake access key. To learn more, see Microsoft’s
Azure Data Lake Help
Account Your Azure Data Lake account name.
Container The name of the Azure Data Lake container that the connector will
write to.
Folder Path Path to the folder that you want to connect. There must be a
subfolder within the specified folder. For example, to write to
support/servicedata, specify support for the folder
path property in the connection then choose servicedata when
configuring the recipe output node.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Azure data lake output connector.
can use up to the connector's per-run limit independently, but is still subject to the rolling 24 hour limit.
• Each output connection only supports one folder path. To output to another folder path, create another output connection.
• When the prior run’s files are deleted in preparation for the current run, the earlier version of an output dataset is inaccessible. Set
up a process to copy or use the output after each run, and use the _SUCCESS file as an indication that the write is complete.
Salesforce Output Connection

Push your prepared dataset data into any Salesforce org from CRM Analytics Salesforce Output connector and Data Prep. With your
prepared data back in Salesforce, you can integrate external data, apply the suite of Salesforce automation tools to act on the data, and
allow non-CRM Analytics users access to the data through reports and dashboards.
Note: Use the Salesforce External Connection on page 747 to sync data from another Salesforce org to CRM Analytics.
Restricted API access isn't supported for Salesforce Output and External connectors. Enable the Use Any API Client permission for
the user creating the connector. For more information, see Manage API Access.
812
How the Salesforce Output Connector with Output Node Works

The CRM Analytics Salesforce Output connectors allow you to write the outcome of a recipe to any Salesforce org for further analysis,
business automation, and expanded access. After you configure an output connector to the Salesforce org, create a recipe using Data
Prep. Add an Output node to the recipe, select the Salesforce Output connection, and configure the node with the object, mapping,
and other settings. When the recipe runs, CRM Analytics can INSERT, UPDATE, or UPSERT the output dataset to supported objects.
Add the Salesforce Output Connector

3. Click Output.

Developer Name API name for the connection. This name can’t include spaces. You
can’t change the developer name after you create the connection.
Username User name used to connect to external Salesforce org for sync of
objects and fields.
Service URL Login URL for the external org. The default value uses the generic
Salesforce login URL for your org. For an added layer of security,
update this field to use your org’s My Domain login URL. For a
production org, use the
format:https://<MyDomainName.my
.salesforce.com/services/Soap/Identifier/VersionNumber.0For
example:
https://mycompany.my.salesforce.com/services/Soap/u/34.0
Password Password for the user specified in Username. Depending on your

security settings, append the user’s security token to the end of
the password. For more information about obtaining a security
token, see Reset Your Security Token.
Push Data to Salesforce

With the Salesforce Output Connector configured, build a Data Prep recipe that merges and transforms the data to push to a Salesforce
org. Add an output node and configure it to use the Salesforce Output connector.
813
1. Select to write to an Output Connection (1).

2. Select the connection name of the Salesforce Output connection you created (2).
3. Select the destination Salesforce object (3). Objects available to the User ID used to configure the connector are listed. Supported
objects are listed in Considerations.
4. Choose whether to INSERT (add new records), UPDATE (change data of existing records), or UPSERT (add new records and update
existing records). (4)
5. If you UPSERT, select a field from the destination object for the External ID to act as the unique record identifier. (5) The default
External ID is the connected object’s ID field.
6. Map recipe columns to their equivalent Salesforce object columns. (6) All columns must be mapped to apply the output node. Id is
only mapped for UPDATE and UPSERT.
7. Select Apply.
8. Save the recipe.
Salesforce Output Connector Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Salesforce output connector and using a Data Prep recipe output node.
814
• To troubleshoot unsuccessful or partial failed runs, see Investigate Unsuccessful Salesforce Output Connector Runs.
can use up to the connector's per-run limit independently, but is still subject to the rolling 24-hour limit.
• This connector doesn’t support objects that are the parent or child in a parent-child relationship. If there are two custom objects
with a dependency, manually insert the header record, get the header ID, then insert the detail record with those details.
• Sharing descriptors, the ID of any user or group that has access to a record, aren’t included in the output from the source org to the
target org.
• This connector supports INSERT, UPDATE, and UPSERT to custom objects, these supported Salesforce objects:
– Account
– AccountContactRelationship
– AccountForecast
– AccountProductForecast
– AccountProductPeriodForecast
– AccountForecastPeriodMetrics
– AccountTeamMember
– Activities
– AdvAccountForecastFact
– AdvAccountForecastSetPartner
– Asset
– Campaign
– CampaignMember
– Cases
– ContactPointAddress
– ContactPointEmail
– ContactPointPhone
– Contacts
– CurrencyType
– Event
– Leads
– ObjectTerritory2Association
– Opportunity
– OpportunityLineItem
– OpportunityLineItemSchedule
– OpportunityTeamMember
– Order
– OrderItem
– Product2
– ProgramRebateTypPayoutSrc
– RebateMemberProductAggregate
– RebateProgramMemberPayout
815
– RebateProgramPayoutPeriod
– Task
– TransactionJournal
and these Salesforce Industries objects:
– AccountServicePreference (Health Cloud)
– Claim (Automotive Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, and Manufacturing Cloud)
– ClaimItem (Automotive Cloud, Financial Services Cloud, and Manufacturing Cloud)
– QuoteLineItem (Commerce Cloud)
– SalesAgreement (Manufacturing Cloud)
– Visit (Consumer Goods Cloud)
• To output null measure values to Salesforce, see Enable Null Measure Handling. To output null dimension values, add a bucket
transformation for each dimension column with nulls, select Bucket null values, and set the value N/A.
Troubleshoot an Unsuccessful Salesforce Output Connector Run

The CRM Analytics Salesforce Output Connector pushes data from CRM Analytics into a Salesforce org as a Bulk API job. If a portion
of the data push fails, use Salesforce Setup and the Workbench to troubleshoot.
Troubleshoot an Unsuccessful Salesforce Output Connector Run

The CRM Analytics Salesforce Output Connector pushes data from CRM Analytics into a Salesforce org as a Bulk API job. If a portion of
the data push fails, use Salesforce Setup and the Workbench to troubleshoot.
1. From Setup in the Salesforce org that initiated the job, in the Quick Find box, enter Bulk Data, and then select Bulk Data Load
Jobs.
2. Select the job corresponding to your data push.
3. From the information displayed, copy the Job ID and API version. You use this information later to find the failed rows.
4. In the Auto-Chunked Batches section, check the Records Failed column and use the API to investigate the failed records.
A row fails because its data couldn’t create or update a record in Salesforce. Several issues can cause this failure, including incorrect
date formatting or a mismatch between the source row’s and record field’s datatype.
5. To find which rows failed, create this API URI using your API version and Job ID:
/services/data/vXX.X/jobs/ingest/jobID/failedResults/.
For example, /services/data/v51.0/jobs/ingest/751B000000JLPLt/failedResults/For more information,
see Get Job Failed Record Results.
6. Execute the API call in Postman or using cURL.
816
The end of the raw response has a representation of your failed rows starting with sf__Id. The text after the row names is the
error reason. For example, here’s a raw response.
"sf__Id","sf__Error",Id,Account__c,Checkbox__c,Date__c,Text__c,Currency__c
"","ENTITY_IS_DELETED:entity is
deleted:--","a1h5G0000000OhEXTJ","003M000000YAEHJLA5","false","","","41040.0"
The error component is ENTITY_IS_DELETED:entity is deleted.
7. To find successful rows, create the URI based on the instructions in Get Job Successful Record Results.
For more information on Salesforce Bulk API and Postman, see the Use Bulk API Trailhead module.
Snowflake Output Connection

Create a remote connection using the Snowflake output connector to write data from CRM Analytics to a Snowflake table. Then, use
Sync Out to push raw data from CRM Analytics to Snowflake, or a Data Prep recipe output node to push transformed data.
Note: Use Sync Out for Snowflake on page 834 to push raw data from CRM Analytics to Snowflake after setting up the connection.
If you want to sync data from Snowflake to CRM Analytics, use the Snowflake Connection on page 790 instead.
How CRM Analytics Output Connectors with Output Nodes Work

CRM Analytics connectors allow you to write the outcome of a recipe to an external system for further analysis, business automation,
and storage. After you configure an output connector to the data source, create a recipe using Data Prep. Add an Output node to the
recipe, select the Output connection, and choose the Snowflake table name from the list of objects. When the recipe runs, CRM Analytics
writes the output dataset to the selected table. When you run the recipe again, the data previously written is deleted and the new data
is written.Generate your Snowflake private key and private key passphrase using the Snowflake Private Key documentation. If you opt
to rotate your Snowflake private key, manually update the connection properties with the new key.

Authentication Provider Using OpenID.
817
Enable and Add the Snowflake Output Connector

2. Select Enable Snowflake output connection and then save your changes.
5. Click Output.

Authentication Type The type of authentication used for this connection. Accepted
values are "OAuth", "Password", or "PrivateKey".
• If you use Password, enter a value in the Username and
Password fields.
• If you use PrivateKey, enter a value in the Username, Private
Key, and Private Key Passphrase fields.
org.
Username User name for the Snowflake account.
Password Optional setting*. Password for your Snowflake account.
Account Name of your Snowflake account. The account name is the first
segment in the domain in your Snowflake URL. For example,
123abc is your account name in
https://123abc.snowflakecomputing.com.
Warehouse Snowflake warehouse name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter

Role Optional setting. Snowflake role assigned to the user that you’re
using to connect.
Database Snowflake database name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter

818

Schema Snowflake schema name. This setting is case-sensitive, so enter
Private Key Optional setting*. A private key associated with your Snowflake
account. Don’t include -----BEGIN ENCRYPTED PRIVATE
KEY----- at the start of the key, and -----END
ENCRYPTED PRIVATE KEY----- at the end.
Private Key Passphrase Optional setting*. The passphrase associated with your specified
private key.
*Enter the Password or both the Private Key and Private Key Passphrase. Learn more about private keys in the Snowflake Private Key
documentation.
Push Data to Snowflake

With the Snowflake Output Connector configured, you have two options to push data to Snowflake from CRM Analytics. To push
augmented and transformed data, build a Data Prep recipe that merges and transforms the data to push to Snowflake. Add an output
node and configure it to use the Snowflake Output connector.
1. Select to write to an Output Connection.
2. Select the connection name of the Snowflake Output connection you created.
3. Select Apply.
4. Save the recipe.
To push raw data, without augmentation or transformation, use Sync Out for Snowflake. Data is pushed with each Data Sync run. You
don’t use a Data Prep recipe. Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Snowflake output connector and using a Data Prep
recipe output node.
• You can use an output connection more than once per recipe, but each output node must use a different object. The connector's
per-run limit applies to each output node, and each output node is subject to the rolling 24-hour limit. To push again from the same
recipe, add another connection with the same credentials
• When the prior run’s data is deleted in preparation for the current run, the earlier version of an output dataset is inaccessible. Set up
a process to copy or use the output after each run.
SEE ALSO:
Tableau Online Output Connection

Push your prepared data from CRM Analytics into Tableau Online with the Tableau Online Output connector and Data Prep recipes. Your
transformed, merged, and cleaned data is pushed to Tableau Online as a .hyper file for further analysis. For example, prepare historical
Opportunity data for struggling products in CRM Analytics, and then use Tableau Online’s analytics tools to identify helpful trends to
optimize deals.
Important: If you want to sync data from Tableau Online to CRM Analytics, use the Tableau Online Connection.
819
How the Tableau Online Output Connector Works

The Tableau Online Output connector, from CRM Analytics, allows you to write the outcome of a recipe to a Tableau Online project as
a .hyper file. After you configure an output connector to Tableau Online, create a recipe using Data Prep. Add an Output node to the
recipe, select the Tableau Online Output connection, and configure the node with the object (Tableau Online project). When the recipe
runs, CRM Analytics writes the output dataset as a .hyper file to the selected project. When the recipe runs again we overwrite the .hyper
file, but you can view the historical versions of files in Tableau Online.The credentials used to create the Tableau Online output connection
must use the Creator license. The Creator role provides needed access.
Enable and Add the Tableau Online Output Connector

2. Select Enable Tableau Online output connection and then save your changes.
5. Click Output.
All settings require a value, unless otherwise indicated
.
Setting Description
Username Optional setting*. User name for the Tableau Online account.
Password Optional setting*. Password for your Tableau Online account.
values are "Password" or "PersonalAccessToken". If you use
Password, enter a value in the Username and Password fields. If
you enter PersonalAccessToken, enter values in the Personal Access
Token Name and Personal Access Token Secret fields.
Personal Access Token Name Optional setting*. The name associated with a personal access
token from your Tableau Online account. Learn more about
personal access tokens, including their 15 day expiration when
unused, in Tableau's PAT documentation.
Personal Access Token Secret Optional setting*. The secret code associated with a personal access
token from your Tableau Online account.
820
Setting Description
Content URL The subpath portion of your Tableau Online URL. To isolate the
Content URL, sign into Tableau Online and pull the bolded portion
of your URL:
Server URL The base URL for your Tableau Online server, including the pod
name. To isolate the Server URL, sign into Tableau Online and pull
the bolded portion of your
URL:https://us-west-5a.online.tableau.com/#/site/exampleurl5a/home
*Enter the Username & Password or the Personal Access Token Name & Personal Access Token Secret fields.
Push Data to Tableau Online

With the Tableau Online Output Connector configured, build a Data Prep recipe that merges and transforms the data to push to Tableau
Online. Add an output node and configure it to use the Tableau Online Output connector.
1. Select to write to an Output Connection (1).

2. Select the connection name of the Tableau Online Output connection you created (2).
3. Select the destination Tableau Online project as the Object Name (3). Projects available to the username used to create the output
connector are listed.
4. Optionally, specify the .hyper file name in the Hyper File field. If you don't specify a file name, the file will is named Extract.hyper.
5. Select Apply.
821
6. Save the recipe.

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Tableau Online output connector and using a Data Prep recipe output node.
can use up to the connector's per-run limit independently, but is still subject to the rolling 24 hour limit.To push again from the
same recipe, add another connection with the same credentials
• The Free Trial version of Tableau Online isn’t supported by this connector.
• This connector requires the presence of your Tableau Online default project.
• The output file uses the column label as the header. All column labels must be unique, or the output fails and no data writes to
Tableau Online. To customize column labels, add a transform node and use the Edit Attributes transformation.
• If a job run takes longer than 12 hours, the Tableau Online security token may reset and cancel the run. Before the 12th hour, to
prevent reset of the security token, sign into Tableau Online with the credentials used to configure the connector.
Update data sync for connected external data sources to keep up with your changing business by
EDITIONS
adding objects, removing objects, and managing which fields are synced. Synced data is stored in
CRM Analytics as objects that can be used in recipes. Available in Salesforce
Note: For help with managing data sync for local Salesforce objects, see Add and Remove Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Local Salesforce Objects and Fields from Data Sync on page 743.
1. From Data Manager, click the Connections tab. All objects configured to sync are listed under Available with CRM
their connection name. Analytics, which is available
2. To add an object and its fields: Enterprise, Performance,
a. Click the dropdown next to the connection. An object’s associated connection and Unlimited Editions. Also
determines its sync schedule. available in Developer
Edition.
b. Select Edit Objects.
c. Find the object to add by scrolling or using the search bar. Select the checkbox next to the
object.
USER PERMISSIONS
d. Select the checkbox next to the fields that you want to sync. To create a connection:
e. Optionally, edit the field's attributes with .
Dataflows
f. If you’re using a connector that supports filtering the data synced to CRM Analytics, use the
Data Sync Filter.
g. Click Save.
3. To add or remove a field from data sync for an object already configured for sync:
object if you have more than one connection. The connection's associated objects are listed.
b. Click the name of the object to see its columns. Fields already included for sync are selected.
c. To add a field, select the checkbox next to the field. To remove a field, deselect the checkbox next to the field.
d. Click Save.
Important: Only field names with combinations of alphanumeric, dot, underscore, or dash characters are supported. If a
connector includes field names that contain other special characters, like brackets, the sync fails.
822
4. To remove, or disconnect, an object from data sync:

object if you have more than one connection. The connection's associated objects are listed.
b. Click the menu to the right of the object you want to remove.
c. Click Disconnect Object.
d. Click Disconnect.
Note: Before you disconnect, remove the object from all recipes. Data sync stops pulling data from the data source to
CRM Analytics when you disconnect an object. This impacts recipes and other consumers of this synced data.
Note:
• Only field label changes appear in the preview data.
• The default value and precision must be consistent between combined data sources. Review other data sources’ configuration
when changing the value and precision.
• For existing non-S3 connected objects, you can change measure and date field types to text. If you change a field to text and
want to change it back, return to the field selection screen. Deselect the field, and select the field again. The field’s original
type is restored when you continue to the preview screen.
• For new S3 connected objects, you can change any field type to any other field type. For existing connected S3 objects, you
can change field types if you remove the object and fields then recreate them, or transform them after extraction.
• If the connection with your remote system times out, no rows load in the data preview. You can continue to edit field attributes
and save, or cancel and try again to see if we're able to pull the data.
Important: Connected objects are synced the next time the sync runs for the connection. To make the data immediately available
in a recipe, sync manually.
SEE ALSO:
Verify the Incremental Sync Settings for Salesforce Data
Schedule, Run, and Monitor Data Sync
New Connector Version Upgrades and Considerations

The remote connectors that you use to sync data to CRM Analytics have new versions. Customers new to CRM Analytics after August 1,
2021 use only the new connector versions, while customers before August 1 can choose when to upgrade. If you choose to be an early
adopter, you can switch over to the new connector versions and try them out now. During the Spring ’22 release, we plan to auto-switch
customers to the new connector version when it reaches or exceeds the level of functionality and performance of the legacy connector
version. We plan to finish the auto-switching during the Summer ’22 release.
Upgradable Connectors
Your existing connections created with one of these connectors stay on the legacy version until you upgrade using the connector’s
legacy toggle.
Connector Notes
Amazon Redshift Connector The new version doesn’t use Amazon S3. The Master Symmetric
Key, AWS Secret Access Key, AWS Access Key ID, and S3 Bucket
Name settings aren’t used.
823
Connector Notes
Amazon S3 Connector The new version supports connecting to objects encrypted with
customer master keys stored in the AWS Key Management Service
or a customer-generated key in the 256-bit AES format.
AWS RDS Aurora MySQL Connector
AWS RDS Aurora PostgresSQL Connector
AWS RDS MariaDB Connector
AWS RDS MySQL Connector
AWS RDS PostgreSQL Connector
AWS RDS SQL Server Connector
Google BigQuery Legacy SQL Connector BigQuery Storage Read API is now supported, which can increase
throughput. Set the new version’s Use Storage API property to true
to use BigQuery Storage API. The new version doesn’t use the
staging environment.
Google BigQuery Standard SQL Connector BigQuery Storage Read API is now supported, which can increase
throughput. Set the new version’s Use Storage API property to true
to use BigQuery Storage API. The new version doesn’t use the
staging environment.
Heroku Postgres Connector
Microsoft Azure SQL Database Connector
Microsoft Synapse Analytics Connector
NetSuite Connector The new version names objects differently than the legacy version.
Update your recipes and dataflows with the new object names
after upgrading.
Salesforce External Connector
Salesforce Marketing Cloud Contacts OAuth 2.0 Connector The new version makes more Marketing Cloud data accessible
through expanded Data Extension support.
Snowflake Connector
Zendesk Connector
Upgrade path for existing connections We recommend that you upgrade and fully test the new connector version in your Sandbox org.
Make the switch, run data sync, then run the recipes and dataflows that use the data. Check the data to confirm data is transmitting and
populating correctly. To switch back from the new version to legacy connector, select Use legacy connector.
• Select Connect to Data on the Connect tab of the Data Manager.
• Select the connection’s menu (1) and click Edit Connection (2).
824
• Deselect Use legacy connector to activate the new version.
Note: If you don’t see this option, you’re likely already on the new version. Contact Salesforce Customer Support to discuss
if your connection is eligible to revert to the legacy version.
• Fill in new properties as required.

• Click Save and Test.
Manually Migrated Connectors

Your existing connections created with one of these connectors stay on the legacy version until you manually migrate to the new version.
Connector Notes
Google Analytics Core Reporting v4 Connector The new version supports custom objects. Using core reporting
API v4.0 provides additional Google Analytics options. You need
to enable v4.0.
Marketo Connector There are two connector options, Marketo Connector and Marketo
Legacy Connector, that reflect the new or legacy version. These
connectors don‘t use the legacy connector toggle. The new
connector version supports filtering on select objects.
Oracle Eloqua Connector The new version currently uses different field names, includes more
objects than the legacy version and doesn’t yet support the Activity
object.
SAP HANA Connector There are two connector options, SAP HANA Cloud Connector and
SAP HANA Connector, reflecting the new or legacy version. These
connectors don’t use the legacy connector toggle. The new
connector version supports filtering, uses different connection
properties, and is JDBC-based.
Upgrade path for existing connections To migrate, create a connection with the connector mirroring the settings of your legacy connection
and any new required properties. Then, update your recipes and dataflows to use the external objects from the new connection. Keep
the legacy version of the connection for troubleshooting. When you create a connection from the manually migrated group, it always
uses the new version.
825
Your connector upgrade strategy is based on the complexity of your sources and data. Generally, you can do a Sandbox comparison or
build mirror connections, then generate sync objects that you can compare. Database-based connectors are inherently less complicated
and are more likely to have parity. Some of the API-based connectors, such as Marketing Cloud, Netsuite, and Eloqua, have complexities
that require more attention to reach parity.
Pre-Pull Data for Recipes with Data Sync

Use data sync to pull data to CRM Analytics on a regular schedule. By scheduling sync from Salesforce and remote systems ahead of
time, your recipes have less to do and run faster. To lighten the load even more, CRM Analytics can sync supported local Salesforce data
incrementally by default, meaning that only data that’s changed gets synced.
Use Data Sync with Recipes

Recipes can use data previously synced to CRM Analytics or unsynced, direct data. For help understanding when to use data sync or
direct data, see Pull Data Directly into Recipes. To expand the synced data available when you build and run a recipe, add objects and
fields to data sync on page 827.
Use Data Sync with Dataflows

Data sync makes your dataflow runs faster. Without data sync, a dataflow performs a separate extract each time it needs data from a
Salesforce object. Let’s look at an example. Imagine your organization has three dataflows, extracting data from Salesforce objects as
follows:
Accounts Contacts Opportunities Campaigns Leads Cases Users

Default
Dataflow
Sales Analytics
App Dataflow
Service
Analytics App
Dataflow
Every time these dataflows run, they must extract all this Salesforce data. And the more data there is, the longer the dataflow takes to
run. In addition, the dataflows perform separate, duplicate, extracts from the same object. For example, all three dataflows extract
Accounts data.
With data sync, all of these extracts are performed as a separate process, which you can schedule to take place before your dataflows
run.
Accounts Contacts Opportunities Campaigns Leads Cases Users

Data Sync
This synced data is then available to all your dataflows, which run faster because they no longer have to extract any data—just load and
transform.
826
Add, Remove, and Manage the Objects and Fields That Sync to CRM Analytics
As your analytics and business needs change, the data synced to CRM Analytics change, too. Add, remove, and change the settings
for the objects and fields included in data sync.
In CRM Analytics, you can schedule sync to run automatically, manually run a sync, and monitor a sync's progress, all in the data
manager.
Verify the Incremental Sync Settings for Salesforce Data
Before you run or schedule data sync, specify whether the sync extracts incremental changes or all records from each Salesforce
object. By default, Salesforce Data Pipelines performs an incremental sync. An incremental sync runs faster because it extracts only
the latest changes to the Salesforce object.
Enable Data Sync and Connections
Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release. If you turned on CRM Analytics before
the Winter ’20 release, manually enable Data Sync and Connections to optimize your dataflows and connect to external data.
Sync Out for Snowflake
Sync Out for Snowflake exports your raw local Salesforce data via CRM Analytics to Snowflake using the CRM Analytics output
connector for Snowflake. With Sync Out for Snowflake, keep your Salesforce data in Snowflake up to date using scheduled Data Sync
without the need for a third-party ETL tool. Fresh Salesforce data is vital if you maintain a central Snowflake data lake for processing,
analysis, business automation, or storage. For example, give your shipping logistics team the freshest data by merging your account
data from your system of record, Salesforce, with your ERP’s shipping data in your data lake.
Data Sync Limits and Considerations
Here are some things to consider when you’re working with data sync.
Add, Remove, and Manage the Objects and Fields That Sync to CRM Analytics
As your analytics and business needs change, the data synced to CRM Analytics change, too. Add, remove, and change the settings for
the objects and fields included in data sync.
For help with managing data sync for local Salesforce objects, see Add and Remove Local Salesforce Objects and Fields from Data Sync
on page 743.
For help with managing data sync for remote objects, see Add and Remove Remote Objects and Fields from Data Sync on page 822.
SEE ALSO:
Configure the Dataflow Through the Definition File
sfdcDigest Transformation

In CRM Analytics, you can schedule sync to run automatically, manually run a sync, and monitor a sync's progress, all in the data manager.
Important: If you manually enable Data Sync, run sync for your Salesforce objects, and make sure that it completes before your
dataflow’s next run. Dataflows with sfdcDigest nodes fail until sync has run for the first time.
Run Data Sync Manually

Run data sync manually the first time to make the data available in CRM Analytics to build recipes. Schedule subsequent syncs to
regularly update the data.
827
Schedule Data Sync to Run Automatically

To ensure that the latest source data is loaded into datasets, schedule data syncs to pull data into CRM Analytics before the
corresponding recipes. You schedule data sync for each connection, where all objects under the connection sync at the specified
time, and not individual objects. To sync objects from the same data source on different intervals, create multiple connections to
the data source, and set a unique schedule for each connection.
Monitor a Data Sync Job
Monitor the progress of CRM Analytics data syncs in Data Manager.
Set Data Sync Notifications
Set Data Sync notifications to receive an email notification when a CRM Analytics sync job has warnings, when sync fails, or every
time the sync finishes.

Run data sync manually the first time to make the data available in CRM Analytics to build recipes.
EDITIONS
Schedule subsequent syncs to regularly update the data.
Note: Data sync jobs don’t count towards your daily recipe run limit. Available in Salesforce
1. In data manager, click the Connections tab to display the list of objects enabled for sync Experience.
grouped by connection.
Available with CRM
2. To show and hide the list of objects, click the connection name. Analytics, which is available
3. To run sync for all objects in a connection, click to the right of the connection name, and for an extra cost in
select Run Now. The connection is queued to sync.
4. To run sync for a single remote object, click to the right of the object name, and select Run available in Developer
Data Sync. Edition.
5. To run sync for a single local Salesforce object, first select the connection mode you want to
use. Click to the right of the local object name, and select Edit Connection Mode. USER PERMISSIONS
6. Choose from the following:
To run sync:
a. Incremental Sync updates only rows that changed since the last sync. It’s the fastest • Edit CRM Analytics
option. Dataflows
b. Periodic Full Sync updates rows incrementally and periodically overwrites all rows with
records in the Salesforce object.
c. Full Sync updates all rows with records in the Salesforce object.
7. Click Save.
8. Click again, and select Run Data Sync. Use the Jobs Monitor tab of Data Manager to see the status of your sync.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
828

To ensure that the latest source data is loaded into datasets, schedule data syncs to pull data into
EDITIONS
CRM Analytics before the corresponding recipes. You schedule data sync for each connection,
where all objects under the connection sync at the specified time, and not individual objects. To Available in Salesforce
sync objects from the same data source on different intervals, create multiple connections to the Classic and Lightning
data source, and set a unique schedule for each connection. Experience.
Note: Data sync jobs don’t count towards your daily recipe run limit. To ensure that sync Available with CRM
completes before the recipe starts, use event-based scheduling for the recipe. Analytics, which is available
1. In data manager, click the Connections tab to display the list of objects enabled for sync for an extra cost in
grouped by connection. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Click to the right of the connection that you want to schedule, and select Schedule. The available in Developer
scheduler appears. Edition.
3. Select the time to run the recipe. You can schedule it to run by minute, hour, week, or month.
CRM Analytics runs the data sync according to the time zone of the user who set the schedule. USER PERMISSIONS
4. If you schedule the recipe to run by minute or hour, select Stop queuing at a specific time
to stop the recipe from running after a certain time. For example, to restrict runs to office hours, To schedule sync:
set a job to start at 8:00 am, run every hour, and stop at 6:00 pm. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
5. Click Save. Schedule information for the connection displays in the connection header.
Schedules for data sync, dataflow, and recipes are removed 30 days after the last save in Sandbox
and Developer edition orgs, and 10 days after the last save in Trial orgs. Users subscribed to notifications receive an email when a schedule
is removed. Set the schedule again at any time.
The scheduler provides details on who created or modified the schedule and when the schedule was created or last modified.
When you deactivate a user who scheduled a data sync, the schedule is deleted and the data sync is unscheduled.
Tip: If you have a CRM Analytics Plus license, you can set the schedule to run every 5, 15, 20, or 30 minutes. This feature isn’t
available in sandbox orgs.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
829

EDITIONS
1. In data manager, click the Jobs Monitor tab to display the list of jobs.
2. Data sync jobs are marked with (Replication).
Experience.
SEE ALSO:
Available with CRM
Why are my data sync and recipe runs getting canceled? Analytics, which is available
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To monitor sync:
Dataflows
Set Data Sync Notifications

Set Data Sync notifications to receive an email notification when a CRM Analytics sync job has
EDITIONS
warnings, when sync fails, or every time the sync finishes.
1. In data manager, click the Connections tab to view all your local and remote connections. Available in Salesforce
2. On the right of the connection, click and select Notifications. Experience.
3. From the Notify Me About picklist, select what you want to be notified about.
Available with CRM
Note: By default, email notifications are sent only to the person setting the notifications. Analytics, which is available
Other people with the Edit Analytics Dataflows permission can subscribe to a data sync for an extra cost in
by setting notifications. Enterprise, Performance,
Verify the Incremental Sync Settings for Salesforce Data Edition.
Before you run or schedule data sync, specify whether the sync extracts incremental changes or all
records from each Salesforce object. By default, Salesforce Data Pipelines performs an incremental sync. An incremental sync runs faster
because it extracts only the latest changes to the Salesforce object.
Note: During the first sync of an object, CRM Analytics always performs a full sync. Switching the site or migrating the org also
triggers the object to undergo a full sync.
1. In Data Manager, click the Connections tab.
2.
From a local connection, such as SFDC_LOCAL, click to the right of the Salesforce object that you want to sync, and then select
Edit Connection Mode.
Note: Connection mode doesn’t apply to objects with other connection types.
3. Select one of these modes.
830
Connection Mode Description

Incremental Sync Pulls only new, updated, and soft-deleted records to match the
changes in the Salesforce object since the previous sync. Use
this method to run faster syncs.
Incremental sync doesn’t update records that are excluded
through Data Sync filters, and it doesn't remove hard-deleted
records.
Periodic Full Sync Runs an incremental sync on each scheduled sync. Also runs a
full sync on the first sync that happens after Friday 11 PM in your
org’s time zone.
Full Sync Pulls all records from the Salesforce object and overwrites the
records from the previous sync.

Considerations When Syncing Data Incrementally
• Incremental sync isn’t supported for Salesforce big objects or these objects.
– CallCenter
– CaseTeamMember
– CategoryNode
– CollaborationGroup
– CollaborationGroupMember
– CollaborationGroupMemberRequest
– Division
– Domain
– DomainSite
– Group
– GroupMember
– ModelFactor
– Profile
– Site
– Territory
– Topic
– User
– UserRole
– UserTerritory
• Even if incremental sync is enabled, CRM Analytics performs a full sync at runtime for these objects.
– The object performs hard deletes or cascade hard deletes on records.
– The object is known to fail when queried without a specific filter or where condition.
– The object doesn’t have a datetime system field.
831
– The object has fields or field attributes (such as scale and precision) specified for the sync that don't match the previously synced
dataset. If you make field changes in an sfdcDigest dataflow node, such as adding or removing fields, or changing attributes,
CRM Analytics triggers a full sync the next time that sync runs.
– The object is configured for a periodic full sync.
• Some objects, like ContentVersion, delete records without notifying the incremental mechanism, which can result in data drift. Data
drift is the potential for records to be included or excluded due to operations that run during a data sync run. For example, adding
a record during a sync isn't always included or a hard record delete between incremental runs can be ignored. Selecting periodic
full sync performs the reset required to keep the data sync object true to what appears in Salesforce.
• Verify that your org doesn’t have conflicting sync settings for the same object. For example, if incremental sync is turned off in an
sfdcDigest node and not turned on in later nodes for the same object in the same dataflow, then a full sync is performed. To enable
incremental sync, set the incremental parameter to true in the dataflow JSON.
• If multiple dataflows have conflicting sync settings for the same object, CRM Analytics uses the object’s sync settings from the last
saved dataflow.
• Run full sync for objects containing formula fields. With incremental sync, formula fields can become out of sync with your synced
object.
• Run a full sync manually if incremental sync fails for objects that have many updates. If incremental syncs continue to fail, set the
object’s connection mode to Full Sync.
• To ensure that all updates are included, set the object's connection mode to Periodic Full Sync.
Enable Data Sync and Connections

Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release. If you
EDITIONS
turned on CRM Analytics before the Winter ’20 release, manually enable Data Sync and Connections
to optimize your dataflows and connect to external data. Available in Salesforce
Important: Before you enable Data Sync, we recommend that you read Understand What Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Happens When you Enable Data Sync and Connections.
1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box, then select Settings. Available with CRM
2. Select Enable Data Sync and Connections. for an extra cost in
3. Save your changes. Enterprise, Performance,
Important: After you enable Data Sync and Connections, make sure that you run data sync available in Developer
before your dataflows next run. Dataflows with sfdcDigest nodes fail until data sync has run Edition.
and completed for the first time.
USER PERMISSIONS
Understand What Happens When You Enable Data Sync and Connections
Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release. If To enable data sync and
you turned on CRM Analytics before the Winter ’20 release, you can manually enable Data Sync. connections:
When you enable the Data Sync and CRM Analytics Connections setting, CRM Analytics looks • Customize Application
at the sfdcDigest nodes in your existing scheduled dataflows to see which Salesforce objects
and fields you’re currently extracting. Using this information, CRM Analytics enables sync for
each object to extract the data separately. Understanding exactly what happens when you enable Data Sync helps you identify other
actions to consider to ensure that your sync runs successfully.
832
Understand What Happens When You Enable Data Sync and Connections
Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release. If you turned on CRM Analytics before the
Winter ’20 release, you can manually enable Data Sync. When you enable the Data Sync and CRM Analytics Connections setting, CRM
Analytics looks at the sfdcDigest nodes in your existing scheduled dataflows to see which Salesforce objects and fields you’re currently
extracting. Using this information, CRM Analytics enables sync for each object to extract the data separately. Understanding exactly what
happens when you enable Data Sync helps you identify other actions to consider to ensure that your sync runs successfully.
Here’s what happens, and the action we recommend that you take.
Your Existing Dataflows Are Validated

Because data sync is based on your existing dataflows, CRM Analytics validates your scheduled dataflows to ensure that they are error
free. Although dataflows with errors are not considered for data sync, CRM Analytics alerts you to any errors in sfdcDigest nodes when
you enable data sync.
We recomment that before you enable Data Sync, review your scheduled dataflows for errors. In particular, look for incorrect object or
field names in sfdcDigest nodes. If you see errors displayed when you enable Data Sync, fix them in your dataflows before you continue.
When you fix errors in a dataflow, CRM Analytics considers it for a sync when you save the dataflow or upload the definition file.
CRM Analytics doesn’t consider unscheduled dataflows when you enable Data Sync. Make sure that any dataflow that you want to be
considered is scheduled. See Schedule a Dataflow to Run Automatically.
All Fields in Multiple sfdcDigest Nodes for an Object Are Included in Data Sync
If your dataflows have multiple sfdcDigest nodes for the same object, each with a different set of fields, a superset of all these fields is
included in data sync. In addition, if the same field has different attributes, such as type or isMultivalue, the attributes from the
most recently created dataflow are used for data sync. Consider the following example dataflows, each containing an sfdcDigest node
for the Opportunity object:
Dataflow A (Created 08/01/2016) Dataflow B (Created 08/15/2016)
{ {
"Extract_OpportunitiesA": { "Extract_OpportunitiesA": {
"action": "sfdcDigest", "action": "sfdcDigest",
"parameters": { "parameters": {
"object": "Opportunity", "object": "Opportunity",
"fields": [ "fields": [
{ "name": "Id"}, { "name": "Id"},
{ "name": "Name" }, { "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "StageName" }, { "name": "StageName" },
{ "name": "CloseDate", { "name": "CloseDate",
"fiscalMonthOffset": 9 }, "fiscalMonthOffset": 3 }
{ "name": "AccountId" }, ]
{ "name": "OwnerId" } }
] }
}
}
In the resulting data sync settings for this object, the Id, Name, StageName, CloseDate, AccountId, and OwnerId are included. The
fiscalMonthOffset attribute for CloseDate is set to 3 from the most recently created dataflow.
833
We recommend that you review the fields in the sfdcDigest nodes of your dataflows. If the resulting data sync settings include fields
that you don’t require, you can disable them in the settings for that object. If you have field attribute conflicts, ensure that the attributes
you want to use for data sync are in the most recently created dataflow.
Advanced Filters on sfdcDigest Nodes Are Included in Data Sync

If an sfdcDigest node includes a complexFilterConditions parameter to apply an advanced filter, CRM Analytics adds this
filter to the data sync settings for that object. When there are multiple sfdcDigest nodes with complex filters for the same object, only
the filter from the most recently created or updated dataflow is added to the data sync settings. CRM Analytics ignores structured filters
applied through filterConditions parameters.
We recommend that after you enable Data Sync, review each object’s data sync settings to verify that filters have been applied correctly.
To use multiple filters for an object, we recommend that you remove any filter from data sync settings, and add the filters to the
corresponding dataflow using the filter transformation (see filter Transformation).
SEE ALSO:
Filtering Records Extracted from a Salesforce Object
Sync Out for Snowflake

Sync Out for Snowflake exports your raw local Salesforce data via CRM Analytics to Snowflake using
EDITIONS
the CRM Analytics output connector for Snowflake. With Sync Out for Snowflake, keep your Salesforce
data in Snowflake up to date using scheduled Data Sync without the need for a third-party ETL tool. Available in Salesforce
Fresh Salesforce data is vital if you maintain a central Snowflake data lake for processing, analysis, Classic and Lightning
business automation, or storage. For example, give your shipping logistics team the freshest data Experience.
by merging your account data from your system of record, Salesforce, with your ERP’s shipping
data in your data lake. Available with CRM
Note: Use the Snowflake Output Connection on page 817 to push transformed data from for an extra cost in
CRM Analytics to Snowflake using a Data Prep output node. If you want to sync data from Enterprise, Performance,
Snowflake to CRM Analytics, use the Snowflake Input Connection on page 790 instead. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Warning: The full Salesforce object data synced to CRM Analytics is pushed to Snowflake Edition.
with Sync Out. Update your Snowflake access controls to manage data access.
Enable Sync Out

1. From Setup, enter Analytics in the Quick Find box.
2. Select Settings under Analytics.
3. Select Enable Snowflake output Connection and Save.
4. Turn on and configure the Snowflake output connector as described in Snowflake Output Connection. The output connection
is used to linkCRM Analytics to Snowflake. You don’t add or update a Data Prep recipe output node to use Sync Out, as the push
happens during Data Sync.
Note: The Snowflake account used for the output connection needs privileges to create and own tables; insert, update,
truncate, and merge data; and create temporary stages.
834
Configure Sync Out for a Salesforce Local Connection

1. On the Connections (Beta) tab of the Data Manager, select the down arrow next to the Salesforce Local Connection you want to use
with Sync Out.
Tip: Do you want to sync out only some of this connection’s objects? Add another local connection, then reassign the objects
for sync out objects to the local connection.
2. Click Sync Out.

3. Click the slider to enable Sync Out.
4. Choose the target connection.
5. Select Save.
With Sync Out enabled, data writes to Snowflake with each manual or scheduled run of Data Sync. You don’t set up or modify a Data
Prep recipe.

Authentication Provider Using OpenID.
Turn Off Sync Out for a Salesforce Local Connection

1. On the Connect tab of the Data Manager, select the down arrow next to the Salesforce Local Connection you want to turn off Sync
Out.
2. Select to disable Sync Out.
3. Select Save.
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the Snowflake output connector and using a Data Prep recipe output node.
• Sync Out is only available for your local Salesforce objects. To sync data from other objects, use the Snowflake output connection
and a Data Prep recipe.
• Sync Out for Snowflake extends Data Sync runs. Evaluate your Data Sync run times, then update scheduled recipes to begin after
Data Sync completes.
835
• When the prior run’s data is deleted in preparation for the current run, the earlier version of the data becomes inaccessible. Set up
a process to copy or use the output after each run.
• Don’t modify or delete the Snowflake schema. Sync Out creates and manages the tables in Snowflake. Tables are recreated with
each full sync.
• Use periodic full sync to avoid data drift.
• Object data pushed in Sync Out uses Salesforce’s field attributes, like precision and scale, instead of the attributes defined in Data
Sync.
• To investigate Sync Out run status, expand the Data Sync nodes on the Monitor page.
• To receive updates about Sync Out, change your Data Sync Notifications to All instead of Warning.
• A Sync Out failure doesn’t always cause the Data Sync run to fail. View the Sync Out status and message on the Monitor page by
expanding the Data Sync job.
• To remove a field from Sync Out, remove it from Data Sync.
• When you access your Snowflake table, reserved keywords are shown in uppercase and double quotes. This presentation includes
all Snowflake reserved keywords except those described as “Can’t be used as an identifier in a SHOW command (for example, ‘SHOW
… IN <identifier>’).”
• When you use Sync Out for an incrementally updated object, there could be a discrepancy in the pushed rows between CRM Analytics
(viewed in the Monitor tab) and Snowflake (viewed in the Snowflake History interface in the [ROWS] column). Depending on your
Snowflake setup, inserting one row could impact a partition with thousands of rows, so reporting doesn’t show a direct one-to-one
relationship. To verify the rows sent and processed in Snowflake, examine the Profile off of the Query ID.
Data Sync Limits and Considerations

Here are some things to consider when you’re working with data sync.
• You can include up to 100 objects for sync. If you are currently extracting more than 100 objects in your dataflows, contact Salesforce
Customer Support before you enable data sync.
• Data Sync only performs one sync per object. Keep this limit in mind if you must perform multiple syncs from the same object. For
example, when you sync filtered and unfiltered data from an object.
Considerations When Creating or Updating Dataflows with Data Sync

Keep these behaviors in mind when creating or updating a dataflow with Data Sync enabled. Data Sync is enabled by default if you
turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release.
Considerations When Using CRM Analytics Templated Apps with Data Sync
If you use template-based CRM Analytics apps, such as Sales Analytics or Service Analytics, here are some things to consider before
and after you enable Data Sync. Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release.
Considerations When Creating or Updating Dataflows with Data Sync

Keep these behaviors in mind when creating or updating a dataflow with Data Sync enabled. Data Sync is enabled by default if you
turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release.
• When you upload a dataflow definition file or update a dataflow in the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics validates the definition file or
dataflow. If you see errors displayed, correct them, and upload the file or update the dataflow again.
• Dataflow definition file uploads can take longer because CRM Analytics is validating the file and using the sfdcDigest nodes to define
sync settings.
• When you remove an object’s sfdcDigest node from the definition file, sync is not disabled for that object. If necessary, disconnect
the object from sync on the Connect tab of the data manager.
836
• When you remove a field from an sfdcDigest node, the field is still included for sync. If necessary, exclude the field in the objects
sync settings.
• When you add a field in an sfdcDigest node, the field is included for data sync and a sync is triggered for the object when the dataflow
next runs.
• When you unschedule the dataflow, CRM Analytics does not disconnect the Salesforce objects and fields from sync.
Considerations When Using CRM Analytics Templated Apps with Data Sync
If you use template-based CRM Analytics apps, such as Sales Analytics or Service Analytics, here are some things to consider before and
after you enable Data Sync. Data Sync is enabled by default if you turned on CRM Analytics after the Winter ’20 release.
Enabling Data Sync When You’re Already Using CRM Analytics Templated Apps
If you already have CRM Analytics apps when you enable Data Sync, it’s important that the sync includes all the Salesforce objects and
fields used in these apps. If it doesn’t, the affected CRM Analytics app dataflows fail. Before enabling Data Sync, ensure that all the required
objects and fields are included.
• Before you enable Data Sync, set a recurring schedule on each CRM Analytics app dataflow. When you first enable Data Sync, CRM
Analytics considers objects and fields only in scheduled dataflows.
• After you enable Data Sync, check sync settings to verify that all the required objects and fields are included. See Add and Remove
Local Salesforce Objects and Fields from Data Sync.
• Run sync to ensure that all objects and fields in the CRM Analytics app dataflows have been synced.
• Run your CRM Analytics app dataflows, and verify that they run to completion.
• Schedule sync to run before all your dataflows to keep your CRM Analytics app data up to date.
Creating a CRM Analytics Templated App After Enabling Data Sync

When you create a CRM Analytics templated app, objects and fields from the new dataflow are included for sync, if they’re not already
included. Complete these steps after you create a CRM Analytics app.
• Check sync settings, and verify that all the required objects and fields are included. See Add and Remove Local Salesforce Objects
and Fields from Data Sync.
• Run sync, and ensure that all objects in the new dataflow synced.
• Run the new CRM Analytics app dataflow.
• Schedule the new CRM Analytics app dataflow to run after sync.

Data Prep provides an intuitive, visual interface in CRM Analytics that allows you to easily point-and-click your way to build recipes that
prepare data and load it into a target. Use the graph of a recipe to see at a glance where the data comes from and how it flows through
the recipe to the target. To validate the recipe as you build, preview how raw data is transformed at every step of the way.
Watch a Demo: Introducing Data Prep (English Only)
In Data Prep, a recipe consists of nodes. You can add different types of nodes to a recipe to bring in, manipulate, and write data to a
target. Data Prep displays a graph of the recipe and its nodes in the Graph area.
837
A Data Prep graph doesn’t show every transformation. It shows only inputs (source data), appends, aggregates, filters, joins, and the
output (where the data is written). It also shows transforms, which are groups of transformations that change the raw data, such as
concatenation and column type conversions. By hiding lower-level data changes, the graph provides a higher-level, easier-to-read view
of the flow of data. We call each object shown in the graph a node. A recipe can have multiple Input, Append, Aggregate, Filter, Join,
Transform, and Output nodes.
Although the graph doesn’t show individual data transformations, you can select a Transform node (1) in the Graph area to see its
transformations in the Details area (2).
838
You can select a transformation step in the left panel of the Details area to preview the results of that transformation in the Preview tab.
Similarly, you can select any node in the graph to preview the results of that node.
When you run a recipe, CRM Analytics applies the function of each node on the input data, and then outputs the results to the specified
target. If the target is a dataset, you can then use that dataset as input to other recipes.
Data Prep Access Based on Your User Type

Not all Data Prep users in CRM Analytics need access to all data prep features. For example, a business analyst doesn’t need to change
dataset security to grant themselves and others access to more data. To support advanced and limited Data Prep user types, CRM
Analytics comes with two user permissions: Edit Analytics Dataflows and Edit Dataset Recipes.
Create a Recipe with Data Prep
Use a Data Prep recipe in CRM Analytics to clean, transform, and enrich data before loading data into one or more targets. To ensure
you’re building the right logic, preview the results as you build it. When you’re done, run the saved recipe to write the results to the
targets.
Preview Results in a Data Prep Recipe
As a best practice in CRM Analytics, catch mistakes early by reviewing the results of each node and transformation that you add to
a Data Prep recipe.
In CRM Analytics, run column profiling on sample data to estimate key stats about columns, such as the frequency of values and
percent of columns with missing values. Column profiling is especially useful when you are combining data from different sources,
where inconsistencies are often introduced. Column profiles are available only for columns shown in preview.
Limitations When Using Data Prep
Consider the following Data Prep limitations before building recipes.
SEE ALSO:
Data Prep Access Based on Your User Type

Not all Data Prep users in CRM Analytics need access to all data prep features. For example, a business analyst doesn’t need to change
dataset security to grant themselves and others access to more data. To support advanced and limited Data Prep user types, CRM Analytics
comes with two user permissions: Edit Analytics Dataflows and Edit Dataset Recipes.
To have full access to data prep features, you must be assigned the Edit Analytics Dataflows user permission. Among other things, it
enables you to change dataset security on datasets, allowing you to grant yourself and other users access to more Salesforce data in
datasets.
839
If you’re assigned the Edit Dataset Recipes user permission, you have limited access, including:
• When you create a recipe, you can’t use datasets with security predicates as a source for the recipe.
• To prevent you from granting yourself access to rows that you currently don't have permission to see, you can’t add or change
security predicates on target datasets.
• You can’t create, edit, run, or schedule recipes that have target datasets defined with security predicates.
• To prevent you from seeing data that you don’t have access to view, you can’t view connected objects on the Data tab or preview
them as sources in a recipe.
To understand all differences between the user permissions, check out this table.
Action Edit Dataset Edit Analytics

Recipes Dataflows
View, create, edit, and delete local connections. Creating a local connection includes X
adding connected objects. Editing a local connection includes changing the connected
objects, moving objects between local connections, and filtering rows from connected
objects.
View, create, edit, and delete output connections. To create an output connection, X
the org admin must enable the output connection in setup, and you need the Edit
Analytics Dataflows and Add Remote Connections user permissions.
Run, schedule, unschedule, and set notifications for data syncs. You can also change
the schedule and disconnect an object from a data sync.
Add a local or remote connected object as a source to a recipe. X
Write recipe results to a CSV. X X
Write recipe results to multiple output nodes X
Write recipe results to an output connection. You must create the output connection X
before you can select it in an output node of a recipe.
Sync out—exports local Salesforce data from a connected object to a remote X

connection. To sync out data, the org admin must enable the output connection in
setup, and you need the Edit Analytics Dataflows and Add Remote Connections user
permissions.
Preview recipe data from a remote input or output connection in Data Prep. X
Add, change, and remove security predicates for datasets that contain Salesforce X
data.
View, create, edit, delete, run, schedule, unschedule, and set notifications for a X
dataflow.
View, create, and delete a recipe. X X
Edit, run, schedule, unschedule, and set notifications for a recipe that writes to a X X
dataset without a security predicate.
Edit, run, schedule, unschedule, and set notifications for a recipe that writes to a X
dataset with a security predicate.
840
Action Edit Dataset Edit Analytics

Recipes Dataflows
Monitor a dataflow or recipe job. Download the dataflow error log for the job. If you X
don’t own the dataflow, you also need the View All Data profile permission to
download the error log.
SEE ALSO:

Use a Data Prep recipe in CRM Analytics to clean, transform, and enrich data before loading data into one or more targets. To ensure
you’re building the right logic, preview the results as you build it. When you’re done, run the saved recipe to write the results to the
targets.
Watch a Demo: Create a Data Prep Recipe (English Only)
1. From Data Manager, click Recipes or Dataflows & Recipes.
2. To create a recipe, click Create Recipe.
3. Review the Data Prep welcome mat, and then click X to close it.
Optionally, click Learn More to get more information about Data Prep.
841
4. To choose the initial input data for the recipe, click Select Data.
5. Select the checkbox next to each dataset, connected object, or direct data that you want to add as input for the recipe.
A direct data reference doesn’t store data in CRM Analytics. Each time a recipe uses direct data, a query gets the current data, In Data
Manager, SFDC_Local connections represent data stored in CRM analytics. Therefore, direct data references aren’t included in
SFDC_Local connections.
You can’t use a trended dataset as input data for a recipe. If needed, you can add more data to the recipe later.
6. In the Selected Columns area on the right, choose either Custom Columns to include selected input data or All Columns to automatically
update every available column when the recipe syncs.
By default, up to 50 columns are selected. If you added multiple data source objects, select each row, one at a time, to choose its
columns. The Selected Columns area shows columns for the highlighted row only.
842
7. Click Next.
Data Prep adds a separate Input node to the graph for each input data selection.
8. To add a node to the recipe, click the Add Node button ( ) between two nodes or at the end of the recipe, and then select the
node type. To show the Add Node button between two nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
To transform, filter, aggregate, join, and append data, add nodes.
Note: if you want to flatten your hierarchy (flatten transformation), do so before you join datasets. If you flatten after the join,
the transformation doesn’t create the flatten hierarchy data you expect.
9. To ensure you’re adding the right data prep logic, preview the results of each node and transformation that you add to the recipe.
To preview the results, select the node or transformation in the graph.
For example, selecting an Aggregate node shows the following preview results.
843
10. To edit or delete a node, select the node, click , and then select the appropriate action.
11. To edit or delete a transformation in a Transform node, select the Transform node, select the transformation step, and then click
or .
12. To split the recipe into two branches, hover the cursor over the node where the branch begins, click , and then select the node
type to start the new branch.
You can branch a recipe to write results to multiple output nodes or to transform some of the rows before appending or joining
them together again later.
844
13. To connect, join, or append nodes in the graph, drag the Add Node button (+) next to a node or Branch button ( ) on top of
another node in the recipe graph. Then select one of the Connect Nodes option.
14. End the recipe with one or more Output nodes to tell the recipe where to write the results.
15. To undo or redo an action, click the Undo or Redo button.
You can undo all actions since the last save. Use redo to restore a recipe state that was undone.
Tip: You can also use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+Z (Windows) and Cmd+Z (MacOS) for undo, and Ctrl+Y (Windows) and
Cmd+Y (MacOS) for redo.
16. To save the recipe, click Save.

17. Enter a recipe name and description, and then click Save again.
18. To change the recipe name, click the Edit Recipe Name button (pencil icon) and enter a new label.
845
As you build recipes, feel free to share your feedback with us. Click Got Feedback in Data Prep to tell us what’s on your mind.
Nodes for Data Prep Recipes

In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides nodes that allow you to bring in data, transform it, and write the results to a target. For example,
you can use a Join node to add columns from a related object to a recipe. You add nodes in the Graph area of Data Prep. You can
string together multiple nodes to sequentially change the flow of the data.
Transformations for Data Prep Recipes
In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides transformations that allow you to prepare, clean, and transform your data. For example, you
can use a transformation to create a calculated column based on a formula. You add transformations inside a Transform node. You
can string together multiple transformations to manipulate data sequentially.
Connect and Reorganize Nodes or Branches in a Recipe
In CRM Analytics, connect disconnected nodes or branches to join or append data from any node to any other node in a Data Prep
recipe. You can also create a branch at an intermediate node, and join or append it to another path in the recipe.
Copy and Paste a Recipe
In CRM Analytics, use the toolbar or keyboard shortcuts to copy and paste nodes within a single recipe or across multiple ones. To
use this feature, enable clipboard access permissions in your browser.
846
Keyboard Shortcuts for Building Data Prep Recipes

Perform basic actions from your keyboard in CRM Analytics.
SEE ALSO:
Run a Recipe
Open and Edit a Recipe
Delete a Recipe
Nodes for Data Prep Recipes

In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides nodes that allow you to bring in data, transform it, and write the results to a target. For example,
you can use a Join node to add columns from a related object to a recipe. You add nodes in the Graph area of Data Prep. You can string
together multiple nodes to sequentially change the flow of the data.
A recipe can have multiple Input, Append, Aggregate, Filter, Join, Transform, Update, and Output nodes.
Input Node: Add Data to the Recipe

Although you choose input data when you create a recipe, if needed, you can add more data to an existing recipe. In CRM Analytics,
Data Prep shows a separate Input node for each set of data that you add to the recipe.
Aggregate Node
Use an Aggregate node in CRM Analytics to roll up data. You can aggregate to a higher level of granularity or roll up hierarchical
data.
847
Append Node: Stack Rows from Different Sets of Data

Use an Append node in a Data Prep recipe in CRM Analytics to stack rows from multiple sets of input data into one dataset. For
example, use this node to combine sales records from two different Salesforce orgs, each containing sales transactions from a specific
region.
Filter Node: Filter Rows
In CRM Analytics, use a Filter node to remove rows that you don’t need in your target. For example, you can filter case records to
focus on escalated cases only. Filter values are case-sensitive. Filter nodes next to a direct data input node speed up recipe runs by
reducing the number of records pulled into the recipe.
Join Node: Add Related Columns of Data to the Recipe
Use a join node in CRM Analytics to add columns of data from related objects to existing data in a recipe. When working with CRM
Analytics datasets and external objects, add a join node on the recipe canvas. When working with Salesforce objects, you can either
create a join on the recipe canvas or join the data when you first create your dataset on the Add Input Data screen.
Transform Node: Transform the Data Before Loading It Into a Target
Use a Transform node in CRM Analytics to manipulate data based on the transformations added to the node. You can add one or
more transformations to each Transform node. For example, you can add transformations to concatenate two columns, standardize
the formats in a date column, and detect the sentiments of comments in a Feedback column. Each transformation modifies the data
in a unique way. To manipulate data at multiple stages of a recipe, add a separate Transform node at each stage.
Update Node: Swap Column Values
In CRM Analytics, you can swap column values with data from another data source when key pairs match with the Update node.
For example, to update selected account names after a series of recent acquisitions and mergers, replace the name from an uploaded
spreadsheet based on matching account IDs. Processing time is minimized by only changing column values with matching key
pairs, instead of every value in the column.
In CRM Analytics, use Output nodes with Data Prep recipes to write recipe results to a target, such as a dataset, staged data, .csv, or
remote location like Amazon S3. A recipe can have more than one Output node. If the recipe writes to a dataset, you can change
the API name and label of the dataset in the Output node. If an existing dataset uses the specified API name, the recipe overwrites
the existing dataset when it runs.
Input Node: Add Data to the Recipe

Although you choose input data when you create a recipe, if needed, you can add more data to
USER PERMISSIONS
an existing recipe. In CRM Analytics, Data Prep shows a separate Input node for each set of data
that you add to the recipe. To manage and create a
1. recipe:
In the recipe, select the Add Data button ( ). • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
2. Select the input data (1) and then choose which columns to include (2). You can select a CRM Dataset Recipes
Analytics dataset, external connected objects, or Salesforce objects as the input data.
Direct data refers to all Salesforce objects that aren’t synced. If you bypass the sync step, the
recipe can still access the data directly from the Salesforce object. All Salesforce objects and fields that aren’t synced are available as
direct data. A field added as direct data uses its API name as its label. To use the defined label, add the field to sync. You can’t use a
trended dataset as input data for a recipe.
By default, the Custom Columns option is selected from the dropdown next to the list of column names. Custom Columns allows
you to manually select which columns to include in your recipe. If you select multiple sets of input data, select each row, one at a
time, to choose its columns. The Selected Columns area shows columns for the selected row only. For instances when you want to
automatically update every available column, use the All Columns option.
848
3. Click Next.
Data Prep adds a separate Input node to the graph for each input data selection. If an input source has more than 100 columns, the
first 100 columns are automatically shown in preview by default. If needed, you can show more columns in preview.
4. Save the recipe.

When you add an Input node to a Data Prep recipe, all columns after the first 100 are hidden from preview, by default. If needed, you
can unhide them to preview them.
Data Preview Sampling

In CRM Analytics, use data preview sampling to see a more accurate picture of your data at each node in Preview. By widening the
sample size and selecting the mode to arrange your data, data sampling helps prevent working without preview data. Select Filtered
Rows to isolate specific values. Select All Column Values to populate a sample when you need to see all column values, such as
when creating a bucket.
Pull Data Directly into Recipes
Direct data for recipes in CRM Analytics lets your recipes access data in Salesforce objects that you don’t sync. When you use direct
data, the latest data is pulled directly from the Salesforce object with each recipe run, bypassing the data sync step. Direct data is
designed to access a small number of objects instead of optimizing for performance as is the case with data sync connected objects.
After you decide to use direct data, you can use it in recipes, add filtering, and switch the data to be connected instead.
Data Preview Sampling

In CRM Analytics, use data preview sampling to see a more accurate picture of your data at each
USER PERMISSIONS
node in Preview. By widening the sample size and selecting the mode to arrange your data, data
sampling helps prevent working without preview data. Select Filtered Rows to isolate specific To manage and create a
values. Select All Column Values to populate a sample when you need to see all column values, recipe:
such as when creating a bucket. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
Note: This feature is available for direct data only. Dataset Recipes
849
1. In a Data Prep recipe input node, under Data Preview Sampling, select a Sample Size, the number of rows to include in Preview.
2. Under Sampling Mode, select the mode that best fits the needs of your data. Select All Column Values to populate a sample when
you need to see all column values, such as when creating a bucket. Select Filtered Rows to isolate specific values.
3. If you choose the Filtered Rows sampling mode, click the + under Filter and choose the column value to filter on. Select the values
to include in your filtered results.
850
4. Click Apply.
Pull Data Directly into Recipes

Direct data for recipes in CRM Analytics lets your recipes access data in Salesforce objects that you don’t sync. When you use direct data,
the latest data is pulled directly from the Salesforce object with each recipe run, bypassing the data sync step. Direct data is designed
to access a small number of objects instead of optimizing for performance as is the case with data sync connected objects. After you
decide to use direct data, you can use it in recipes, add filtering, and switch the data to be connected instead.
851
Decide Whether to Use Direct Data or Connected Object Data

There are distinct benefits and limitations to consider when you build recipes for direct data and data sync-connected objects. To achieve
faster recipe runtimes, use connected objects instead of direct data when multiple recipes access the same object or when a single
recipe accesses multiple objects. Recipes with connected objects run faster because data is synced in advance. They also run faster
because multithreading is enabled for connected objects where multiple, simultaneous Bulk API calls are made to process data in parallel.
Unlike connected objects, direct data uses single threading, where Data Prep extracts data from one source object at a time. For example,
if you have 4 recipes, each with 5 source objects, Data Prep pulls data from one object in one recipe while the other 19 source objects
wait in the queue.
Factor Direct Data Connected Object

Data volume: How many rows of the Low: Fewer than 200,000 rows. Supports High: Greater than 200,000 rows. Supports
object’s data are used? filtering to reduce pulled rows. Direct data filtering to reduce the number of rows
pulls data with each recipe run, with larger synced. By separating the sync from the
data volumes adding to the run time. recipe run, higher data volumes can be used
without slowing down either step.
Access frequency: How often is this data Low: One recipe uses this data one time a High: Multiple recipes use this data, or it’s
pulled? week used multiple times per day
Incremental support: Can only changed and None Most objects (see Verify the Incremental
new records be pulled? Sync Settings for Salesforce Data for list)
Rate of change: How often do the object High frequency (recipe can be scheduled Low frequency (data sync can be scheduled
records change? up to every 15 minutes, with no reliance on up to every 15 minutes, followed by the
data sync’s schedule) recipe run)
Preview size: How many rows do you want Max 2,000 rows Max 10,000 rows
to see in data preview?
Use Direct Data in Recipes

When you add an input node to a recipe, you can select direct data in addition to datasets and connected objects.
In the Location column, Salesforce direct data is distinguished by a gray Salesforce cloud icon. Salesforce connected objects are
distinguished by a blue Salesforce cloud icon.
Note: As direct data doesn’t store data in CRM Analytics, references to direct data aren’t included in SFDC_Local connections.
852
Filter Data Pulled into Recipes

Filter the data pulled into the recipe by adding a Filter node next to the direct data input node. Use this push-down filter to limit the
volume or type of data that is pulled with each recipe run. If you later add this object to data sync, the direct data filter is converted
automatically to a standard filter node.
Switch Object Between Direct Data and Connected

A recipe’s object data can be connected data with data pulled by data sync. Or it can be direct data that’s pulled directly with each recipe
run. To convert an object from direct to connected, add the connection to data sync, follow these directions on page 743. If you had a
filter on the direct data input node, it’s automatically converted to a standalone filter node.
To switch an object from connected to direct, skip to step 5 of these directions on removing an object from data sync on page 743.
Disable Direct Data for Recipes
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings.
2. Deselect Allow recipes to use direct data.
853
Aggregate Node
Use an Aggregate node in CRM Analytics to roll up data. You can aggregate to a higher level of
USER PERMISSIONS
granularity or roll up hierarchical data.
To manage and create a
recipe:
Aggregate Node: Roll Up Data to a Higher Level
Use an Aggregate node to roll up data to a higher granularity in CRM Analytics. You can Dataflows OR Edit
aggregate using: unique, sum, average, count, maximum, and minimum. You can group by Dataset Recipes
any dimension or date column. You can also pivot dimensions as columns. For example, you
can group opportunities by account to get account-level details, like total opportunity amount,
average number of cases, and the average days to close an opportunity for each account. You can then pivot on account type to
analyze each combination of account and account type.
Aggregate Node: Hierarchical Aggregation
Use Hierarchical Aggregation in CRM Analytics to sum measures across multilevel data. For example, you can roll up revenues, assets,
or liabilities for companies and their subsidiaries. Or, you can roll salesperson data up the management chain to see aggregates by
team, region, area, and beyond. Hierarchical Aggregation requires rows with an ID and a parent ID. Many rows can have the same
parent ID, or the parent ID can be empty. Some rows can even share an ID, such as a record with multiple parents. You can also use
the optional roll up percentage to apply percentage splits to allocate portions to different parents, such as commission among
members of the sales team.
SEE ALSO:

Use an Aggregate node to roll up data to a higher granularity in CRM Analytics. You can aggregate
USER PERMISSIONS
using: unique, sum, average, count, maximum, and minimum. You can group by any dimension or
date column. You can also pivot dimensions as columns. For example, you can group opportunities To manage and create a
by account to get account-level details, like total opportunity amount, average number of cases, recipe:
and the average days to close an opportunity for each account. You can then pivot on account type • Edit CRM Analytics
to analyze each combination of account and account type. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1. In a Data Prep recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button ( )
between two nodes or at the end of the recipe. To show the Add Node button between two
nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node dialog box, select Aggregate.
854
3. Add at least one aggregate.

Before you can add a grouping, add an aggregate. You can select one of the following aggregate functions.
Aggregate Function Description

Unique Counts only unique values in the selected column.
Sum Calculates the total by adding all values in the selected column.
Average Calculates the average value of the selected column.
Count Counts all values in the selected column.
Maximum Calculates the maximum value of the selected column.
Minimum Calculates the minimum value of the selected column.
Stddevp Calculates the population standard deviation. Population standard deviation measures the spread
of data distribution—the typical distance between each data point and the average.
Stddev Calculates the sample standard deviation. Sample standard deviation measures the spread of data
distribution for a given sample. Use sample standard deviation to estimate the population standard
deviation based on a sample.
Varp Calculates the population variance. Population variance indicates how spread out data points are in
a specific population.
Var Calculates the sample variance. Sample variance indicates how spread out data points are for a given
sample. Use sample variance to estimate the population variance based on a sample.
855
4. To group rows, add one or more dimension or date columns in the Group Rows field.
For example, you can group by account name.
5. To pivot dimensions as columns, add up to two dimension columns in the Group Columns field, select the values for each dimension
column, and click Apply. For direct datasets and datasets, you can search for all column values. Otherwise, you are limited to preview
data. If a value doesn’t appear in the list, adjust your sample size or refine your search. Then, click Add new value and enter the
value.
For example, you can group columns by opportunity type. Each combination of opportunity type and aggregate appears as a separate
column.
856
6. To add the Aggregate node to the recipe, click Apply.

7. Save the recipe.
Note: Because pivoting increases the number of columns, keep in mind that the Aggregate node can create up to 5,000 columns.
If the node exceeds the maximum, you can reduce the number of columns by changing the aggregates or row and column
groupings.
Your values that aren’t picked are automatically included in an Other column when you pivot with the Data Prep aggregate node.
For example, you can group columns by opportunity type, select your most important types, and let the rest be grouped as Other.
SEE ALSO:

Use Hierarchical Aggregation in CRM Analytics to sum measures across multilevel data. For example,
USER PERMISSIONS
you can roll up revenues, assets, or liabilities for companies and their subsidiaries. Or, you can roll
salesperson data up the management chain to see aggregates by team, region, area, and beyond. To manage and create a
Hierarchical Aggregation requires rows with an ID and a parent ID. Many rows can have the same recipe:
parent ID, or the parent ID can be empty. Some rows can even share an ID, such as a record with • Edit CRM Analytics
multiple parents. You can also use the optional roll up percentage to apply percentage splits to Dataflows OR Edit
allocate portions to different parents, such as commission among members of the sales team. Dataset Recipes
Note: If the data has duplicate rows with the same record ID and parent ID, you must clean
the data. Run a standard aggregation before running the hierarchical aggregation.
1. In a Data Prep recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button ( ) between two nodes or at the end
of the recipe. To show the Add Node button between two nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node dialog box, select Aggregate.
857
3. In the Aggregate settings panel, turn on Hierarchical Aggregation.
4. Add at least one Aggregate, such as the sum of a measure or count of rows.
858
5. Select the Record ID Column. The record ID can be any dimension in the dataset that defines the row, such as salesperson or
account name.
6. Specify the Parent ID Column. The parent ID identifies which record each row rolls up to. This can be any dimension in the dataset
that has not been selected as the record ID, such as the manager or parent account. Not every record needs to have a parent, for
instance if it’s at the top of a hierarchy.
859
Note: Null values are accepted in the parent ID column.
7. Optionally, select a Roll-Up Percentage Column to apply a percentage split. The aggregated value is multiplied by the number in
this column. For example, your records have more than one parent, and you want to roll them up differently based on the parent.
8. To add the Hierarchical Aggregation to the recipe, click Apply.
860
9. Save the recipe.

With hierarchical aggregation you can automatically sum values at each level of the relationship instead of calculating values manually.
861
Note: In the following examples, Amount is the aggregated column.
Example 1: Simple hierarchy such as region and country.

This example shows:
• Multiple records with the same parent
• Mix of records with and without a parent
• A record outside of the hierarchy
• Parent with individual value
Without Hierarchical Aggregation With Hierarchical

Aggregation
Record ID Parent ID Amount Record ID Amount
A01 100 A01 600
A02 A01 200 A02 200
A03 A01 300 A03 300
A04 400 A04 400
Example 2 Intermediate hierarchy such as an org chart.

This example shows:
• Parent without individual value
• Multiple hierarchies
862

Aggregation
Record ID Parent ID Amount Record ID Amount
A01 100 A01 1200
A02 A01 200 A02 800
A03 A01 300 A03 300
A04 A05 400 A04 400
A06 A02 600 A05 400
A07 700 A06 600
A07 700
Example 3 Complex hierarchy such as subsidiary ownership with split percentages.

This example shows:
• Parent without individual value
• Multiple hierarchies
• Records with multiple parents
Note: A record has a row per each parent.
• Roll-up percentage values (percentage splits)
863

Aggregation
Record ID Parent ID Amount Percentage Record ID Amount
A01 100 A01 1375
A02 A01 200 1.00 A02 350
A03 A01 300 0.50 A03 1850
A03 A10 300 0.50 A04 1290
A04 A05 400 1.00 A05 1290
A06 A02 600 0.25 A06 600
A06 A03 700 0.75 A07 700
A07 A08 890
A08 A04 1.00 A09 900
A09 A08 0.10 A10 1925
A10 A11 1100
A11 A03 1.00
SEE ALSO:
864
Append Node: Stack Rows from Different Sets of Data

Use an Append node in a Data Prep recipe in CRM Analytics to stack rows from multiple sets of
USER PERMISSIONS
input data into one dataset. For example, use this node to combine sales records from two different
Salesforce orgs, each containing sales transactions from a specific region. To manage and create a
Let’s look at an example of how you can use append in a recipe. Imagine you’re a company that recipe:
uses separate Salesforce orgs for your APAC and Africa sales, but you want to report on worldwide
Dataflows OR Edit
sales. You sync the APAC opportunities to CRM Analytics, add the data to a recipe, then use an Dataset Recipes
Append node to combine it with the Africa sales data. After you match the columns from both sets
of input data, both sets of sales records are combined into the same worldwide opportunity dataset.
Tip: If a recipe column contains unique IDs that identify each row, you must ensure that the appended data doesn't duplicate
the IDs. The Append node doesn't remove duplicate records or validate the uniqueness of columns.
1. In a Data Prep recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button ( ) between two nodes or at the end of
the recipe. To show the Add Node button between two nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node box, select Append.
865
3. Select the data to append (1), and then choose which columns to include (2).
4. Click Next.
Data Prep automatically maps columns from both sets of input data based on matching column names. These mappings are based
on API names. You can change the mappings, manually map unmapped columns, or leave columns unmapped. To continuously
map all columns as your recipe updates, turn on Map all columns in the node details section. To map all columns that don't have
corresponding API names, select Allow schema merge.
Note: Map all columns is available for datasets only. It is not available for direct data, staged, or connected datasets.
866
If a column is mapped for one source and not the other, the Append node inserts null values for all source rows to which the column
doesn’t apply. For example, the Product ID and Region columns aren’t mapped to Legacy Sales Data source. As a result, the preview
shows nulls for these columns for all rows coming from Legacy Sales Data (1). If the reverse is true, and Legacy Sales Data contains
rows that aren’t mapped to the recipe columns Product ID and Region, then preview inserts null values in those columns for all rows
coming from Legacy Sales Data.
Note: If a measure column isn’t mapped to a source and null measure handling isn’t enabled, the Append node inserts zeroes
instead of nulls for those source rows.
5. To map two columns, enter the column name from the appended rows next to its corresponding recipe column.
6. To add a column from the appended rows that doesn’t exist in the recipe, click + (below the mapped columns) and select the
column. Leave the recipe column blank.
7. Click Apply to add the node to the recipe.
8. Save the recipe.
When you run the recipe, the Append node combines rows from both sets of input data into the same dataset.
Filter Node: Filter Rows

In CRM Analytics, use a Filter node to remove rows that you don’t need in your target. For example,
USER PERMISSIONS
you can filter case records to focus on escalated cases only. Filter values are case-sensitive. Filter
nodes next to a direct data input node speed up recipe runs by reducing the number of records To manage and create a
pulled into the recipe. recipe:
1. In the recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button ( ) between
Dataflows OR Edit
two nodes or at the end of the recipe. To show the Add Node button between two nodes, Dataset Recipes
hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node dialog box, select Filter.
867
A filter node adjacent to a direct data input node is marked with a lightning bolt. This direct data filter limits the number of records
loaded into the recipe.
868
3. Click the + to add a standard filter. A standard filter uses conventional filter operators—equals, does not equal, less than, and so on.
For more granularity in your filter options, such as access to string and math functions, select Add Custom Filter Expression from
the dropdown next to Filters. Filter values for both options are case-sensitive.
If you define a filter condition on a dimension column, you can select a filter value from a list of values in your dataset. For direct
datasets and datasets, you can search for all values. Otherwise, you are limited to preview data. If a value doesn’t appear in the list,
adjust your sample size or refine your search. Then, click Add new value and enter the value.
Note: Column search results display up to 250 values for direct datasets and 2000 for datasets.
4. Click Apply.
5. To display the current standard filter logic click and Add Standard Filter Logic.
The default AND logic is shown, and each filter component is assigned a number.
6. To edit the logic, click the pencil icon ( ).
869
7. Build the filter logic with parenthesis and the AND, OR, and NOT Boolean operators.
870
8. Click Apply.
9. Save the recipe.

Use a join node in CRM Analytics to add columns of data from related objects to existing data in a recipe. When working with CRM
Analytics datasets and external objects, add a join node on the recipe canvas. When working with Salesforce objects, you can either
create a join on the recipe canvas or join the data when you first create your dataset on the Add Input Data screen.
Use a Join Node in the Recipe Canvas

In CRM Analytics, create joins between Salesforce objects, external objects, and CRM Analytics datasets in a recipe.
Use a Join Node on the Add Input Data Screen (Salesforce Objects Only)
When working with Salesforce objects in CRM Analytics, you can create your dataset and join data source in one step on the Input
Data screen. Add Input Data also recommends columns that match each of your data sources and can serve as join keys.
Join Operations
Data Prep supports these join operations.
Use a Join Node in the Recipe Canvas

In CRM Analytics, create joins between Salesforce objects, external objects, and CRM Analytics
USER PERMISSIONS
datasets in a recipe.
1. In a Data Prep recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button ( ) To manage and create a
recipe:
from a single node or between two nodes or at the end of the recipe. To join a node to itself,
drag the Add Node button to the node and select the join node. To show the Add Node button Dataflows OR Edit
between two nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line. Dataset Recipes
871
2. In the Add Node box, select Join.
3. Select the data to join (1), and then choose which columns to include (2).
4. Click Next.
5. Choose the join type.
By default, Lookup is selected.
872
6. If needed, change the join keys.

Data Prep adds suggested join keys from both sets of input data. If needed, use multiple keys to match records. For example, imagine
you’re adding contact information to lead data. Using names alone to match can result in duplicate matches when different leads
have the same name. Use two keys to match on name and company to ensure you’re matching the right data. You can use up to 5
keys.
Important: CRM Analytics datasets contain date and time component fields (such as Year, Quarter, and Month) that are
derived automatically from existing date and time fields. You can’t use these component fields as join keys.
7. To prevent API name conflicts between columns in the left and right data sources, enter a prefix for columns coming from the right
data source.
The Join node prepends the prefix to the API names of all columns from the right. For example, if you specify Case as the prefix, all
right column API names begin with “Case.”
8. If you chose the Lookup join type, select Lookup Multiple Values for the lookup to return all matching rows from the right data
stream. If you don’t select this option, the lookup returns only one of the matching rows.
873
For more information about single-match and multiple-match lookups, see Lookup.
9. In the Columns tab in the right panel, select the columns to include in the recipe. The Source column in the table shows the object
where each column comes from.
By default, the recipe only adds the join key columns. If a join key column isn’t included in the recipe, you can’t apply the transformation
to the recipe.
10. To preview columns and their data, click Preview.

The joined columns show in Preview.
11. If needed, you can show additional columns or hide existing ones from preview. To hide columns, click the Hide button ( ). To
show columns, click the Show button ( ).
The preview can display up to 100 columns. Hiding columns from the preview doesn’t affect whether the columns are included in
the recipe.
12. Click Apply to add the node to the recipe.
874
13. Save the recipe.
Use a Join Node on the Add Input Data Screen (Salesforce Objects Only)
When working with Salesforce objects in CRM Analytics, you can create your dataset and join data
USER PERMISSIONS
source in one step on the Input Data screen. Add Input Data also recommends columns that match
each of your data sources and can serve as join keys. To manage and create a
1. From the Add Input Data screen of a Data Prep recipe, select an object. This object is the left recipe:
side of the join operation.
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
2. In the right pane, the Related Objects tab lists the columns that have other objects related by a matching column. The selected
related object is the right side of the join operation. When you select one, a number appears in the left column to indicate the order
in which it was joined.
875
3. Click Next.
4. The recipe displays the joined objects.
876
Join Operations
Data Prep supports these join operations.
Lookup
In CRM Analytics, a lookup returns all rows from the left data stream (recipe data) and only matching rows from the right data stream
(lookup source). If multiple matches are found in the right data stream, you can set the lookup to return either a single row or all
matching rows. To ensure that the grain of the results doesn’t change, the lookup outputs one row for each row in the left data
stream.
877
Left Join
Like a lookup, a left join in CRM Analytics includes all rows from the left (recipe data) and only matching rows from the right. Unlike
a lookup, a join includes all matched rows in the target when multiple rows match.
Right Join
A right join in CRM Analytics includes all rows from the right and only matching rows from the left (recipe data). The join includes
all matched rows in the target when multiple rows match.
Inner Join
In CRM Analytics, an inner join includes only matching rows from the left (recipe data) and right. The join includes all matched rows
in the target when multiple rows match.
Full Outer Join
In CRM Analytics, a full outer join includes all rows from the left (recipe data) and right, regardless of whether they have matches.
The join includes all matched rows in the target when multiple rows match.
Cross Join
In CRM Analytics, a cross join combines unrelated records and includes all rows from the left (recipe data) and the right. Unlike other
joins that use keys to find matches, the cross join pairs every row from one dataset with every row of another dataset (known as the
Cartesian Product).
Considerations When Using Joins
In CRM Analytics, unlike a lookup, a join creates a separate record for each match in the target dataset when multiple rows match.
Before using a join, ensure that you understand the implications of duplicate rows.
Lookup
In CRM Analytics, a lookup returns all rows from the left data stream (recipe data) and only matching
EDITIONS
rows from the right data stream (lookup source). If multiple matches are found in the right data
stream, you can set the lookup to return either a single row or all matching rows. To ensure that Available in Salesforce
the grain of the results doesn’t change, the lookup outputs one row for each row in the left data Classic and Lightning
stream. Experience.
Example
Available with CRM
Our company's marketing team captures demographic data in an external data source for Analytics, which is available
opportunities stored in Salesforce. To help create more targeted campaigns, the team is building for an extra cost in
a dashboard that segments our current opportunities by the customer demographics. Let’s use a Enterprise, Performance,
lookup to add the demographic data to each opportunity record. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Consider the following two data streams. The left data stream contains opportunity records. The
Edition.
right contains demographic data. To illustrate how the lookup handles special cases, both data
streams contain unmatched rows and duplicate keys.
878
If the lookup is configured to return a single match when multiple matches are found, the lookup produces the following results based
on the matching keys.
All rows from the left, including rows without a match, are included in the results. Although Cust_ID 1 has two matches on the right,
the lookup returns only the first matching record. Also, because Cust_ID 4 doesn’t have a match, the Cust_id and Education Level columns
are null and Average Income is 0 for that record. Unmatched dimensions are set to null. Unmatched measures are set to 0.
If the lookup is configured to return all matching values when multiple matches are found, the lookup produces the following results
based on the matching keys.
A multiple-match lookup returns the same results as the single-match lookup, except for left rows that have multiple matches. Unlike
a single-match lookup, a multiple-match lookup returns all matches and combines them. For dimension columns, it generates a multivalue
column with all dimension values—notice how High School and Secondary School are both in the Education Level column for Cust_ID
1. For measure columns, it adds the measure values from all matched records. For Cust_ID 1, the Avg Income column is 98,000 (50,000
+ 48,000).
Note: The Preview tab doesn’t show all values in a multivalue column. Instead, it shows the first value only. Keep this behavior
in mind when you preview the results of a multiple-match lookup. In the example, notice that the Preview tab shows only High
School in the Education Level column even though the column contains High School and Secondary School.
SEE ALSO:
Left Join
879
Like a lookup, a left join in CRM Analytics includes all rows from the left (recipe data) and only
EDITIONS
matching rows from the right. Unlike a lookup, a join includes all matched rows in the target when
multiple rows match. Available in Salesforce
Example Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Our company's marketing team captures demographic data in an external data source for
opportunities stored in Salesforce. To help create more targeted campaigns, the team is segmenting Available with CRM
our current opportunities by the Education Level demographic. Let’s use a left join to add Analytics, which is available
demographic data to the opportunity data. for an extra cost in
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. To illustrate how this
recipe function handles unmatched rows and duplicate keys, we included them in both data streams.
Edition.
After performing the left join based on the matching keys, the recipe produces the following target dataset.
All rows from the left, including rows without a match and rows with multiple matches, are included in the target. Because Opp_ID 1
has two matches on the right (High School and Secondary School), the target contains a separate record for each education level. Also,
because Opp_ID 4 doesn’t have a match, the Opp_id and Education Level columns are null for that record.
SEE ALSO:
Right Join
880
A right join in CRM Analytics includes all rows from the right and only matching rows from the left
EDITIONS
(recipe data). The join includes all matched rows in the target when multiple rows match.
Example Available in Salesforce
Experience.
opportunities stored in Salesforce. To help create more targeted campaigns, the team is segmenting
our current opportunities by the Education Level demographic. Let’s use a right join to add the Available with CRM
opportunity data to the demographic data. Analytics, which is available
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. To illustrate how this
Edition.
After performing the right join based on the matching keys, the recipe produces the following target dataset.
All rows from the right, including rows without a match and rows with multiple matches, are included in the target. Because Opp_id 2
has two matches on the left (Amy and Bob), the target contains a separate record for each of them. Also, because Opp_id 5 doesn’t have
a match, the Opp_ID and Customer Name columns are null for that record.
Warning: If duplicate records contain measures (as shown for Opp_id 1 in the following screenshot), don’t double count the
measures when aggregating the records. To prevent duplicate records, use a lookup instead of a join.
881
SEE ALSO:
Inner Join
In CRM Analytics, an inner join includes only matching rows from the left (recipe data) and right.
EDITIONS
The join includes all matched rows in the target when multiple rows match.
Example Available in Salesforce
Experience.
opportunities stored in Salesforce. To compare opportunities by education level of the customer,
let’s first combine both sets of data into a dataset using an inner join. Available with CRM
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. To illustrate how this Analytics, which is available
Edition.
After performing the inner join based on the matching keys, the recipe produces the following target dataset.
882
All rows that have a match are included in the target. Because of multiple matches, you see two records with Opp_ID 2 (Amy and Bob)
and two records with Opp_id 1 (High School and Secondary School). Notice also that Opp_ID 4 and Opp_id 5 are excluded from the
target because neither have a match.
SEE ALSO:
Full Outer Join
In CRM Analytics, a full outer join includes all rows from the left (recipe data) and right, regardless
EDITIONS
of whether they have matches. The join includes all matched rows in the target when multiple rows
match. Available in Salesforce
Example: Our company's marketing team captures demographic data in Redshift for Classic and Lightning
Experience.
opportunities stored in Salesforce. To help create more targeted campaigns, the team is
segmenting our current opportunities by the Education Level demographic. Let’s use a full Available with CRM
outer join to combine the opportunity and demographic data. Analytics, which is available
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. To illustrate for an extra cost in
how this recipe function handles unmatched rows and duplicate keys, we included them in Enterprise, Performance,
both data streams.
Edition.
After performing the full outer join based on the matching the keys, the recipe produces the
following target dataset.
883
All rows—matched or not—are included in the target. Because of multiple matches, you see two records with Opp_ID 2 (Amy
and Bob) and two more records with Opp_id 1 (High School and Secondary School). Opp_ID 4 and Opp_id 5 are also included
despite not having a match.
By including unmatched left records, we now know that we have to find out David’s education level to complete this dataset. By
including unmatched right records, we see that no customers have a PhD.
SEE ALSO:
Cross Join
In CRM Analytics, a cross join combines unrelated records and includes all rows from the left (recipe
EDITIONS
data) and the right. Unlike other joins that use keys to find matches, the cross join pairs every row
from one dataset with every row of another dataset (known as the Cartesian Product). Available in Salesforce
Tip: When designing a cross join, use the larger dataset first (left) and then join the smaller Classic and Lightning
Experience.
dataset (right). For example, join a:
• 10,000-row dataset (left) with a 1,000-row dataset (right) Available with CRM
• 20,000-row dataset (left) with a 500-row dataset (right)
• 40,000-row dataset (left) with a 250-row dataset (right) Enterprise, Performance,
• 100,000-row dataset (left) with a 100-row dataset (right) and Unlimited Editions. Also
Example Edition.
A company sells products at various locations. To assist with stock tracking, use a cross join to
combine the product and store datasets to find all the possible pairs of product and store.
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. To illustrate how this join combines unrelated records,
row number is included for reference but isn’t needed in the data.
884
After performing the cross join, the recipe produces this target dataset.
885
Limitations for Cross Join

Because a cross join creates a larger dataset than either of the source datasets, it has some limitations. Keep these points in mind when
designing and testing your cross join.
• Only one cross join per recipe
• Cross join results maximum of 10 million
• Left dataset column maximum of 8 and row maximum of 100,000
• Right dataset column maximum of 8 and row maximum of 1,000
• Doesn’t support mulit-value columns
SEE ALSO:
886

In CRM Analytics, unlike a lookup, a join creates a separate record for each match in the target
EDITIONS
dataset when multiple rows match. Before using a join, ensure that you understand the implications
of duplicate rows. Available in Salesforce
Review the following tips. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Don’t double count measures when aggregating records from a join.
Consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. Both input data Available with CRM
streams have duplicate key values. Analytics, which is available
Edition.
A left join duplicates the Opp_ID 1 record in the left data stream because it has multiple matches in the right data stream.
Notice that the duplicated records repeat the opportunity amount for Alice. If you added all opportunity amounts to get the total, double
count the amount for Alice. To prevent duplicate records, use a lookup instead of a join.
Refrain from using joins when the join keys have a many-to-many relationship.
When the join keys have a many-to-many relationship, the target dataset can become significantly larger than the input data streams.
For instance, if four records on the left and five records on the right have the same key value, the join adds 20 (4*5) records to the target
dataset. In a more extreme case, if 10,000 records on the left and 5,000 on the right share a key value, the join creates 50 million records
in the target dataset.
To illustrate why this occurs, consider the following two data streams that feed the recipe’s target dataset. Both input data streams have
duplicate key values.
887
A left join duplicates each record in the left data stream five times because it has five matches in the right data stream.
To prevent duplicate records, use a lookup instead of a join. If you must use a join, try adding more key fields to make the keys have
more unique values.
888
Transform Node: Transform the Data Before Loading It Into a Target

Use a Transform node in CRM Analytics to manipulate data based on the transformations added
USER PERMISSIONS
to the node. You can add one or more transformations to each Transform node. For example, you
can add transformations to concatenate two columns, standardize the formats in a date column, To manage and create a
and detect the sentiments of comments in a Feedback column. Each transformation modifies the recipe:
data in a unique way. To manipulate data at multiple stages of a recipe, add a separate Transform • Edit Dataset Recipes
node at each stage.
Watch a Demo: Prep Your Data with the Transform Node (English Only)
1. In the recipe, select the Add Node button ( ) between two nodes or at the end of the recipe. To show the Add Node button between
two nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node dialog box, select Transform.
3. In the Preview tab of the details section, select one or more columns for which you want to transform their data.
4. Use the Transform toolbar (1) to add a transformation based on the selected columns .
Each time you add a transformation to the Transform node, it appears in the left panel (2). We refer to each card in the left panel as
a step.
889
5. To preview the results of a transformation in the Preview tab, select the step in the left panel.
6. To view the Graph area, click the Collapse button ( ).

7. If needed, select a node in the graph to preview the results of the node.
It’s always a great idea to preview results to ensure that each node and transformation returns expected results.
8. If needed, add more transformations to the Transform node.

9. Save the recipe.
SEE ALSO:
Update Node: Swap Column Values

In CRM Analytics, you can swap column values with data from another data source when key pairs
USER PERMISSIONS
match with the Update node. For example, to update selected account names after a series of
recent acquisitions and mergers, replace the name from an uploaded spreadsheet based on matching To manage and create a
account IDs. Processing time is minimized by only changing column values with matching key recipe:
pairs, instead of every value in the column. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataset Recipes
1. In a Data Prep recipe that already has at least one Input node, select the Add Node button
between two nodes or at the end of the recipe. To show the Add Node button between two
nodes, hover the cursor on the connecting line.
2. In the Add Node dialog, select Update.
890
3. Choose the data source containing the update data.
891
Alternatively, if the original and update data are already added as input nodes, drag the Add Node button ( ) from one to the
other and click Update. The two inputs are used as the source and update location.
4. Choose which key pair values must match between the original and update data (1).
892
5. Choose the columns to update (2). If all key pairs match for a row, the column value is updated.
6. Click Apply. When the recipe runs, the update node contains the original data with updated column values.
7. Save the recipe.
893

In CRM Analytics, use Output nodes with Data Prep recipes to write recipe results to a target, such
USER PERMISSIONS
as a dataset, staged data, .csv, or remote location like Amazon S3. A recipe can have more than one
Output node. If the recipe writes to a dataset, you can change the API name and label of the dataset To manage and create a
in the Output node. If an existing dataset uses the specified API name, the recipe overwrites the recipe:
existing dataset when it runs. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataset Recipes
1. In the recipe, select the Add Node button ( ) at the end of the recipe.
2. In the Add Node dialog box, select Output.
3. Fill in the target details. For example, you can fill in the label, API name, and app of the dataset.
894
You can also output to a remote system using an output connection or to Salesforce as a .csv file.
Note: The Dataset API Name can contain only underscores and alphanumeric characters. It also must be unique, must begin
with a letter, can’t include spaces, can’t end with an underscore, and can’t contain two consecutive underscores. If the specified
API name is already used by a dataset in the same app, the dataset is overwritten. If the name is used by a dataset in a different
app, you must choose a different, unique name. If an API name isn’t specified, a unique API Name is generated.
4. Optionally, if using sharing inheritance, select a Sharing Source to apply sharing rules.
5. Optionally, add a security predicate to restrict access to records with row-level security.
Note: If the dataset exists, changes to its security settings must be done directly by editing the dataset. After a dataset is
created, changes to security settings in the dataflow (rowLevelSharingSource or rowLevelSecurityFilter) or recipe (Security
Predicate) have no effect.
6. Click Apply.
7. Save the recipe.
Run the recipe to create the dataset. As you create more datasets, keep in mind that your org has a row limit for all datasets in your org.
Running Sequential Recipes with Staged Data Output

When your data strategy involves multiple recipes, you can reduce processing time by using staged data instead of datasets. Reduce
repeated steps into a single recipe that outputs results as staged data. Subsequent recipes can then use the staged data as input
nodes to do other work. For example, rather than merge account and opportunity data in each region-specific forecasting recipe,
merge just one time, output the results as staged data, and use this data in the other recipes.
895
Recipe Output to CSV

Use the Data Prep output node in CRM Analytics to save your prepared data as a data and schema file in a Salesforce BPO (storage
database). You can then download the data locally using the public API as a CSV file. Use the CSV file to transfer prepared, cleaned,
and improved data into your system for analysis, storage, or to inform business processes.
SEE ALSO:
Run a Recipe
CRM Anaytics Limits
Running Sequential Recipes with Staged Data Output

When your data strategy involves multiple recipes, you can reduce processing time by using staged data instead of datasets. Reduce
repeated steps into a single recipe that outputs results as staged data. Subsequent recipes can then use the staged data as input nodes
to do other work. For example, rather than merge account and opportunity data in each region-specific forecasting recipe, merge just
one time, output the results as staged data, and use this data in the other recipes.
Note: Staged data isn’t available if you have Shield Platform enabled.
Staged data can’t be used in dataflows, dashboards, or lenses.
Build your recipe with Data Prep and add an output node. Write the output node to Staged Data.
After you save the output, you can’t change the type. To change from staged data to a dataset or a dataset to staged data, create another
output node.
Build your second recipe. When you add the input data, select the staged data from your first recipe.
Continue to build and save your recipe. When the recipe sequence runs, the staged data is used as an input source.
Staged data is retained for 7 days and its rows are counted in the row limits for recipes during that period.
896
Recipe Output to CSV

Use the Data Prep output node in CRM Analytics to save your prepared data as a data and schema file in a Salesforce BPO (storage
database). You can then download the data locally using the public API as a CSV file. Use the CSV file to transfer prepared, cleaned, and
improved data into your system for analysis, storage, or to inform business processes.
Push Data to the Salesforce Database
1. Build your recipe with Data Prep and add an output node.
2. Write the output node to CSV.
3. Enter the user who downloads the file.
4. (Optional) To output more information in the header, select Use fully qualified names in CSV header.
The fully qualified name has more information about the source object to help you understand the data lineage, usually in the format
[ObjectName].[APIName]. For example, the CSV header uses the fully qualified name Account.BillingCity instead of the column label
BillingCity.
5. (Optional) To set the maximum file size and maximum number of rows per partitioned section, select Specify CSV partition settings.
6. Click Apply and save the recipe.
Pull Data from the Salesforce Database
To retrieve the data from the Salesforce database, use a tool to find the dataset ID. Download the file using the Salesforce CLI. Work with
your Salesforce developer about using these tools and consult this Salesforce blog for a similar process.
CSV Output Considerations
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with the CSV output from the Data Prep recipe output node.
• An output connection is available only for recipes built with Data Prep.
• Stored data is removed after 48 hours.
• If the data exceeds the maximum file size or number of rows specified in the output node’s partition settings, more than one CSV
file is created. All partitioned CSV files can function independently, and you can download and merge the files to recreate the dataset.
• The maximum size of an export job is 40 GB.
• The maximum export data size per day (sum of all exports) is 50 GB.
Exporting a Dataset
When you export a dataset, a DatasetExportEvent is generated. You can subscribe to receive DatasetExportEvents. See Subscribing to
Platform Events. For event reference, see DatasetExportEvent.

In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides transformations that allow you to prepare, clean, and transform your data. For example, you can
use a transformation to create a calculated column based on a formula. You add transformations inside a Transform node. You can string
together multiple transformations to manipulate data sequentially.
Bucket Transformations: Categorize Column Values

With CRM Analytics Data Prep, you can bucket your numbers, text, and date fields to group and organize data.
Cluster Transformation: Segment Your Data
In CRM Analytics, use the Cluster transformation in a Data Prep recipe to segment rows of data into distinct clusters based on common
characteristics. For example, you can cluster accounts based on number of employees, numerical rating, and annual revenue. Using
the clusters, you can identify products and services to upsell to each account based on other accounts in the same cluster, apply
different service handling or marketing campaigns based on cluster, or define different metrics and KPIs for analysis.
897
Data Type Conversion Transformations: Convert Column Types

In CRM Analytics, the data type of a dataset column determines how you can query that column’s data. For example, you can filter
and group by a text or date column, or perform calculations on a number column. When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics
sometimes tags a dataset field with the wrong type. If needed, use the column-type conversion transformations in a Data Prep recipe
to convert columns to the correct types.
Date and Time Transformations: Calculate on Date Fields
In CRM Analytics, your date fields are key to understanding trends over time or keeping teams aware of upcoming milestones and
deadlines. Use the Date and Time transformations to calculate based on dates or make them more helpful to your analysis. With the
Now option, you can insert a column with the current date and time in a specified format. Use Date Difference to calculate
the duration between two selected date columns as days, months, or years. And use the Add or Subtract Days or
Months function to add or subtract days or months from a date column.
Detect Sentiment Transformation: Determine the Sentiment of Text
In CRM Analytics, text fields show valuable information such as product reviews and social media posts. Use the Detect Sentiment
transformation in a Data Prep recipe to quickly categorize text into sentiments. Choose whether you want sentiment results as a
decimal value on a 5-point scale, with 5 as the most positive, or as labels of Positive, Negative, and Neutral. For example, detect the
sentiment of survey responses to evaluate how customers feel about your product support. If more than a certain percentage—say
30%—of the comments are negative, escalate the feedback to support management.
Drop Columns Transformation: Drop Columns from the Recipe
In CRM Analytics, drop unwanted columns from a Data Prep recipe. For example, you can add a Drop Columns transformation after
a Formula transformation to drop input columns used for a calculated column.
Discovery Predict Transformation: Get Einstein Discovery Predictions
In CRM Analytics, use the Discovery Predict transformation to populate your datasets with predictive and prescriptive intelligence.
When you run a Data Prep recipe with a Discovery Predict node, Einstein calculates and saves predicted outcomes on a row-by-row
basis. You can optionally store descriptions of top predictors and improvements. With the Discovery Predict node, you can quickly
evaluate predictions across a large set of data, assess multiple models before deploying them into production, and aggregate this
information in a dashboard.
Extract Transformation: Get a Date Component
In CRM Analytics, use the Extract transformation in a Data Prep recipe to pull a selected component from a date field into a new
field. For example, extract the hour component from the Case Created Date column to analyze case creation by hour of the day.
Edit Attributes Transformation: Change the Column Names and Value Formats
In CRM Analytics, to make column names more descriptive and apply consistent formats to column values, use the Edit Attributes
transformation in a Data Prep recipe. You can set the labels and API names of all columns. You can also set the precision and scale
for number columns, character length for text columns, and date formats for date columns.
Flatten Transformation: Flatten Hierarchies
In CRM Analytics, the Flatten transformation flattens hierarchical data. For example, you can flatten the Salesforce role hierarchy to
implement row-level security on a dataset based on the role hierarchy.
Format Dates Transformation: Standardize the Date Format in a Column
In CRM Analytics, if a text column contains dates in different formats, use the Format Dates recipe transformation in a Data Prep
recipe to standardize the format for all dates in the column. A consistent format enables you to correctly filter and group records by
date, including filtering by date component, such as month. It also ensures you can successfully convert the column type from text
to date. Optionally, you can convert the column type from Text to Date.
898
Formula Transformation: Create a Calculated Column Based on an Expression

In CRM Analytics, create a column in a Data Prep recipe that displays values based on a formula calculation. The calculation can
include input from other fields in the same row or across rows. For example, you can create a Profit column based on input from
Revenue and Cost columns. Enter formulas in EA-SQL format. EA-SQL is a collection of standard and custom functions for numeric,
string, and date data.
In CRM Analytic, use the Predict Missing Values transformation in a Data Prep recipe to complete your data by filling in missing values
in a text column. CRM Analytics Intelligently predicts values based on values in other strongly correlated columns in your data.
Split Transformation: Break Up Column Values
In CRM Analytic, you can split the strings in a text column into two values by specifying a delimiter. To split column values into more
than two parts, add multiple instances of the Split transformation. For instance, you can use 3 Split transformations in a Data Prep
recipe to split the full address into the following components: street address, city, state, and zip code.
Time Series Forecasting Transformation: Forecast Measures
In CRM Analytic, make decisions today based on forecasts about tomorrow with time series forecasting. A time series forecast takes
an ordered series of points and intelligently forecasts the next values. For example, estimate units sold for the next 4 quarters based
on the last 5 years of sales. Use the Time Series Forecasting transformation in a Data Prep recipe to run forecasts based on historical
data and seasonality.
Bucket Transformations: Categorize Column Values

With CRM Analytics Data Prep, you can bucket your numbers, text, and date fields to group and organize data.
Categorize Date Column Values into Buckets

In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides transformations that allow you to prepare, clean, and transform your data. For example, you
can use a transformation to create a calculated column based on a formula. You add transformations inside a Transform node. You
can string together multiple transformations to manipulate data sequentially.
Categorize Dimension Column Values into Buckets
In CRM Analytics, use a bucket column in a Data Prep recipe to categorize and organize text values. For example, you can create
buckets West, Central, and East to group regions.
Categorize Measure Column Values into Buckets
In CRM Analytics, use a bucket column in a Data Prep recipe to categorize and organize numeric values. For example, you can create
buckets High, Middle, Low to group numbers of cases per account.

In CRM Analytics, Data Prep provides transformations that allow you to prepare, clean, and transform
USER PERMISSIONS
your data. For example, you can use a transformation to create a calculated column based on a
formula. You add transformations inside a Transform node. You can string together multiple To manage and create a
transformations to manipulate data sequentially. recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the date column in the Preview tab. Dataset Recipes
2.
In the Transform toolbar, click the Bucket button ( ) to define the buckets.
3. Select whether to use absolute or relative dates.
Absolute dates are defined dates on a calendar, like July 25, 2023. Relative dates are a time period in relation to the day the data is
viewed, like last quarter, or next month.
899
4.
Select .
5. Enter a label for the first bucket.
The first bucket is for the earliest date range. Each subsequent bucket must have a later date range than the previous bucket.
6. Select the date range for this bucket.

7. Click Add.
8.
To create another bucket with a later date range, click and specify the details.
9. To place null values into their own bucket, select Bucket null values.
900
10. Under Show Results In, select whether the new bucket values appear in a new column and what happens to the original column.
11. If you elect to create a column, set its label under Column Label.
12. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node. The Preview tab shows the new bucket column.
After you run the recipe, you can view the bucket assigned to each row in the bucket column.
Categorize Dimension Column Values into Buckets

In CRM Analytics, use a bucket column in a Data Prep recipe to categorize and organize text values.
USER PERMISSIONS
For example, you can create buckets West, Central, and East to group regions.
Categorize Text Column Values into Buckets To manage and create a
In CRM Analytics, use a bucket column in a Data Prep recipe to categorize and organize text recipe:
(dimension) values. For example, you can create buckets West, Central, and East to group regions.
Dataflows OR Edit
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column in the Preview Dataset Recipes
tab.
2.
3.
Click .
901
4.
Enter a label for the bucket.

5. In the Values Included in Bucket box, search for and select the values to be assigned to this bucket. For direct datasets and datasets,
you can search for all values. Otherwise, you are limited to preview data. If a value doesn’t appear in the list, adjust your sample size
or refine your search. Then, click Add new value and enter the value.
6. Click Add.
7.
To create more buckets, click and select a label and the values to assign to the bucket.
9. To place values not otherwise bucketed together in a bucket, select Bucket remaining values then specify the name for this group.
10. To bucket similarly spelled values together, select Apply smart bucketing. To change the edit distance, use the Distance Threshold
slider. Einstein uses the Levenshtein distance for fuzzy matching. The default edit distance is set to 1, which means that a
single-character edit is allowed for text matching. For example, with an edit distance of 2, variations such as flavor, Flavor, flavour,
and flavors can all belong in the same bucket. By default, differences in uppercase and lowercase characters are ignored.
11. Under Show Results In, select whether the buckets appear in a new column and what happens to the original column.
12. If you elect to create a column, set the label under Column Label.
Categorize Measure Column Values into Buckets

In CRM Analytics, use a bucket column in a Data Prep recipe to categorize and organize numeric
USER PERMISSIONS
values. For example, you can create buckets High, Middle, Low to group numbers of cases per
account. To manage and create a
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the number (measure) column in the Preview recipe:
tab.
Dataflows OR Edit
2. Dataset Recipes
902
3. For Range 1, enter a value and label for the first bucket. Rows with values below the Range 1 value are assigned to this bucket.
4. If your bucket column has more than two buckets, click Add Range>> to add a middle range.
5. For each additional middle range you add, enter the range of values and the bucket label.
Rows with values greater than or equal to the first value and less than the second value are assigned this bucket.
6. For the final range, enter a value and bucket label. Rows with values greater than or equal to this value are assigned to this bucket.
903
8. Under Show Results In, select whether the buckets appear in a new column and what happens to the original column.

In CRM Analytics, use the Cluster transformation in a Data Prep recipe to segment rows of data into
USER PERMISSIONS
distinct clusters based on common characteristics. For example, you can cluster accounts based
on number of employees, numerical rating, and annual revenue. Using the clusters, you can identify To create a recipe:
products and services to upsell to each account based on other accounts in the same cluster, apply • Edit CRM Analytics
different service handling or marketing campaigns based on cluster, or define different metrics and Dataflows OR Edit
KPIs for analysis. Dataset Recipes

1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select any column in the Preview tab.
2. To add a Cluster transformation to the Transform node, click the Cluster button ( ).
904
3. In Number of Clusters, enter the number of clusters to create, from 2–20, inclusive.
4. Select Use optimal number of clusters and we evaluate all options 25% above and below your base Number of Clusters to find
the best data organization where data groupings are most like each other.
For example, if you enter 20, we evaluate scenarios from 15—25 and show data for the optimum number of clusters in that range.
If you select to detect the optimal number of clusters without a starting point, we evaluate each clustering scenario from 2–50. This
evaluation takes more time than if you enter a starting number of clusters, but it can reveal a data relationship you weren’t aware
of.
5. In Columns Used to Determine Clusters, select the text (dimension) columns to determine the clusters.
The clustering algorithm determines clusters by comparing the values for all selected columns. For example, if the number of
employees and annual revenues don’t fall into the same ranges determined by the algorithm, accounts with the same industry and
rating can be placed in different clusters.
6. Select an option under Scale Number to rescale the data. For example, comparing between differently scaled data easier by rescaling
each column’s data values from 0 through 1 with the Min-Max scaling option.
7. If needed, change the label of the cluster column, which stores the cluster for each row.
8. To add the transformation to the Transform node, click Apply.
Preview shows sample cluster values you can use when building other recipe transformations. These values are just samples—they
can change after the recipe runs.
905

11. Run the recipe to assign and view a cluster for each row.
To process billions of rows, the Cluster transformation uses the K-Means clustering algorithm. The clusters are detected dynamically
during the recipe job’s runtime, but aren’t persisted. The clusters can change between recipe runs even if the data and the clustering
configuration doesn’t change.
Example: For months, you’ve noticed that some accounts have lots of deals with lower average opportunity amounts and other
accounts that have larger deals, but fewer of them. To find ways to drive larger deal sizes and more deals, you decide to cluster
your accounts.
You use the Cluster transformation to create three clusters based on the account industry, number of employees, rating, and
annual revenue.
While analyzing the clusters in a dashboard, you notice that Cluster 3 has the highest average annual revenue (about $40 billion),
but only three accounts are in that cluster.
Why doesn’t Cluster 3 have more deals? Is it due to repeat business? Let’s find out.
906
Use the Aggregate node to group total spend by account and pivot the results by opportunity type: Add-On Business, New Business,
Renewal, and Services.
Looking at spend by opportunity type for Cluster 2, we see lots of repeat business. Great!
But Cluster 3 has new business only. These accounts buy one time and don’t return for additional business—hence the lower
number of deals.
We found gold! To increase the number of deals from Cluster 3 accounts, we can push renewals, services, and add-on business.
907
Data Type Conversion Transformations: Convert Column Types

In CRM Analytics, the data type of a dataset column determines how you can query that column’s data. For example, you can filter and
group by a text or date column, or perform calculations on a number column. When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics sometimes
tags a dataset field with the wrong type. If needed, use the column-type conversion transformations in a Data Prep recipe to convert
columns to the correct types.
Text to Date Transformation: Convert the Column Type

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a date column as a text (dimension) if it contains unexpected string values
or dates in different formats. To use date functionality, such as grouping by month, use the Text To Date transformation to change
the Text column type to Date.
Text to Number Transformation: Convert the Column Type
When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a number (measure) column as text (a dimension) if it contains unexpected
strings or characters. To perform a calculation on the column, such as calculating the average, use the Text To Number transformation
to change the Text column type to Number. You can perform calculations on number columns only.
Number to Text Transformation: Convert the Column Type
When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a text (dimension) column as a number (measure) column if it contains only
numbers. For example, CRM Analytics tags a numerical Room Number column as the number type, even though it’s text that identifies
rooms. To group and filter by a number column, use the Number To Text transformation to change a Number column type to Text.
You can group and filter by text columns only.
Text to Date Transformation: Convert the Column Type

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a date column as a text (dimension) if it
USER PERMISSIONS
contains unexpected string values or dates in different formats. To use date functionality, such as
grouping by month, use the Text To Date transformation to change the Text column type to Date. To create a recipe:
Text to Date Transformation: Convert the Column Type • Edit Analytics Dataflows
OR Edit Dataset Recipes
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column you want to
convert to the Date column type.
For example, you standardized the dates in a text column and now want to convert the column type to Date.
2. In the Transform toolbar, select Text to > Date.
908
3. In the Date Format field, select the date format to display the dates.
4. Under Show Results In, select whether the new values appear in a new column and whether to keep the original column.
909
6. To change more column attributes, click the Column Attributes box, change them, and click Apply.
7. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node. The Preview tab shows the new date component column.
9. Save the recipe.
Run the recipe to convert the column type to Date and the date values to the specified format. If the transformation can’t parse a date
value, it replaces the value with null.
910

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a number (measure) column as text (a
USER PERMISSIONS
dimension) if it contains unexpected strings or characters. To perform a calculation on the column,
such as calculating the average, use the Text To Number transformation to change the Text column To manage and create a
type to Number. You can perform calculations on number columns only. recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
During the column type conversion, the Text to Number transformation rounds decimals to the Dataset Recipes
nearest whole number. For example, 300.2939 becomes 300.
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column you want to
convert to the Number (measure) column type.
2. In the Transform toolbar, select Text to > Number.
911
Based on the output column’s datatype, you can set these attributes.
Attribute Description
API Name The API name of the column. The column API name can each be up to 255 characters. The API name must
also be unique within the recipe.
Precision The maximum number of digits in a numeric (measure) column. Includes all numbers to the left and to the
right of the decimal point (but excludes the decimal point character). Enter an integer from 1 through 18,
inclusive. If a numeric value exceeds the specified precision, the value is set to 0 or null, depending on
whether null measure handling is enabled. For example, if precision is set to 5 and null measure handling
is enabled, the numeric value 123456.78 is replaced with null.
Scale The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in a numeric column. Enter an integer from 0 through
17, inclusive. The scale must be less than the precision. For example, if the numeric value is 123456.789 and
you set the scale to 2, the number appears as 123456.78.
Length The maximum number of characters in a text (dimension) column. Enter an integer from 1 through 32000,
inclusive. The default length is 255 characters.
Date Format The date format of a date column.
For more guidelines, see the “Field Name Restrictions” section in this help topic.
6. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node. The Preview tab shows the number column.
8. Save the recipe.
Run the recipe to convert the column type to number.
912
Number to Text Transformation: Convert the Column Type

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a text (dimension) column as a number
USER PERMISSIONS
(measure) column if it contains only numbers. For example, CRM Analytics tags a numerical Room
Number column as the number type, even though it’s text that identifies rooms. To group and filter To manage and create a
by a number column, use the Number To Text transformation to change a Number column type recipe:
to Text. You can group and filter by text columns only. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
Number to Text Transformation: Convert the Column Type Dataset Recipes
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the number (measure) column you want to
convert to the Text (dimension) column type.
2. In the Transform toolbar, select Number to > Text.
913
Based on the output column’s datatype, you can set these attributes.
API Name The API name of the column. The column API name can each be up to 255 characters. The API name must
also be unique within the recipe.
914
6. To add the transformation to the Transform node, click Apply. The Preview tab shows the text column.
8. Save the recipe.
Run the recipe to convert the column type to Text.
Date and Time Transformations: Calculate on Date Fields

In CRM Analytics, your date fields are key to understanding trends over time or keeping teams aware of upcoming milestones and
deadlines. Use the Date and Time transformations to calculate based on dates or make them more helpful to your analysis. With the
Now option, you can insert a column with the current date and time in a specified format. Use Date Difference to calculate the
duration between two selected date columns as days, months, or years. And use the Add or Subtract Days or Months
function to add or subtract days or months from a date column.
Add or Subtract Days or Months

In CRM Analytics, return the column date with the specified days or months added or removed.
Date Difference
In CRM Analytics, calculate the duration between two selected date columns as days, months, or years.
Now
In CRM Analytics, create a column in a Data Prep recipe that displays the current date and time in a specified format.

In CRM Analytics, return the column date with the specified days or months added or removed.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select one date column in the Preview tab.
2. Select the Formula button ( ) in the Transform toolbar. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
3. Select Add or Subtract Days or Months.
4. Configure the transformation.
915
a. Start Date Column is automatically filled with the date column you previously chose. Cancel and restart to choose a different
Start Date.
b. Choose Days or Months to add or subtract.
c. Select the number to add or subtract with the plus and minus buttons.
d. Choose the date format of the output column.
5. Optionally, change the label of the column that stores the result data in the Column Label field.
6. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node.
The Preview tab shows the new calculated date column.

8. Save the recipe.
916
Date Difference
In CRM Analytics, calculate the duration between two selected date columns as days, months, or
USER PERMISSIONS
years.
Date Difference To create a recipe:
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select one date column in the Preview tab. Dataflows OR Edit
2. Select the Formula button ( ) in the Transform toolbar. Dataset Recipes
3. Select Date Difference.

4. Configure the transformation.
a. Start Date is automatically filled with the date column you previously chose. Cancel and restart to choose a different Start Date.
b. End Date is the value used to calculate the duration from the start date. Choose a date column from your data or the Now option
to use the current date and time.
c. Select whether to return duration as days, months, or years. Days are rounded up to the nearest value, while months and years
include the selected number of decimal places.
5. Optionally, change the label of the column that stores the result in the Column Label field.
The Preview tab shows the new Now column.
917

8. Save the recipe.
After you run the recipe, you can view the calculated duration. The Now option uses the date and time when the recipe last ran, based
on UTC timezone.
Now
In CRM Analytics, create a column in a Data Prep recipe that displays the current date and time in
USER PERMISSIONS
a specified format.
Now To create a recipe:
This transformation works without interacting with any other columns. Dataflows OR Edit
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the Formula button ( ) in the Transform Dataset Recipes
toolbar.
2. Select Now.
3.
Select the date format.

4. Optionally, change the label of the column that stores the Now data in the Column Label field.
The Preview tab shows the new Now column.
918

7. Save the recipe.
The Now option uses the date and time when the recipe last ran, based on UTC timezone.

In CRM Analytics, text fields show valuable information such as product reviews and social media
USER PERMISSIONS
posts. Use the Detect Sentiment transformation in a Data Prep recipe to quickly categorize text into
sentiments. Choose whether you want sentiment results as a decimal value on a 5-point scale, with To create a recipe:
5 as the most positive, or as labels of Positive, Negative, and Neutral. For example, detect the • Edit CRM Analytics
sentiment of survey responses to evaluate how customers feel about your product support. If more Dataflows OR Edit
than a certain percentage—say 30%—of the comments are negative, escalate the feedback to Dataset Recipes
support management.

This transformation works on a text (dimension) column and supports English text only. It processes non-English text as English and
ignores images, including emoji. If the input value is null or an empty string (''), the transformation assigns the sentiment as Neutral or
with a value of 2.5, depending on the output type. Applying Detect Sentiment on text such as IDs, nouns, addresses, or alphanumeric
values) can return unexpected results.
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column that contains the text for sentiment analysis in the
Preview tab.
2. In the Transform toolbar, click the Detect Sentiment button ( ).
919
3. Optionally, use More Options in the setup panel to change the output type or to show sentiment scores.
Options Description
Output Type Results of the sentiment analysis in a new column in the dataset.
Text (default) shows detected sentiment as Positive, Neutral, or Negative.
Number shows detected sentiment as a decimal value on a scale of from 1 through 5, with 5 as the most
positive.
When determining sentiment, Detect Sentiment classifies the text into groups from 1 through 5.
When output is Text, the sentiment values are mapped to the numbers as follows:
• Positive is >3.50 and <= 5.00
• Neutral is >= 2.50 and < 3.5
• Negative is >= 1.00 and < 2.50
When output is Number, the sentiment is calculated as a weighted sum of the number probabilities.
920
Options Description
Show Sentiment Einstein self-assesses its confidence in the accuracy of each sentiment option. Sentiment scores are decimal
Score values that add up to 1 and that can be used in formulas. For example, trigger a support case when an online
review is negative with a strong sentiment score.
None (default) shows the detected sentiment column only. No sentiment scores are added to the dataset.
All Sentiments shows the detected sentiment column and sentiment score columns in the dataset.
• If output type is Text, sentiment scores appear in three columns for Positive, Neutral, and Negative.
• If output type is Number, sentiment scores appear in five columns for 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
4. Optionally, to change the label of the column that stores the detected sentiments, go to Column
Label.
The Preview tab shows the new sentiment column. The column shows the temporary value Sentiment TBD. To see the detected
sentiment results, run the recipe.
6. To collapse the view and see the graph, click ( ).

7. Save the recipe.
After you run the recipe, you can view the detected sentiments in the sentiment column.
921
Detect Sentiment Model Card

In CRM Analytics, the Detect Sentiment transformation uses the model to determine whether the sentiment of text is positive,
negative, or neutral. Use this model card to better understand the model, how it’s trained, its capabilities, its intended use, and its
limitations.

In CRM Analytics, the Detect Sentiment transformation uses the model to determine whether the sentiment of text is positive, negative,
or neutral. Use this model card to better understand the model, how it’s trained, its capabilities, its intended use, and its limitations.
Get basic information about the Detect Sentiment model. This table provides details about the current model.
Detail Description
Model Developer CRM Analytics
Model Date August 12, 2020
Model Version 4
Model Type Sentiment Analysis
Model Input Text (dimension) column
Model Output For each field in a text (dimension) column of a Data Prep recipe,
the model returns the sentiment: positive, negative, or neutral. The
model returns null if the input is null and returns neutral if the input
is an empty string ('').
License Detect Sentiment is available to customers with any CRM Analytics

user license.
Minor changes to the model can occur throughout the release. Major changes can occur and are communicated via Release Notes.
Model Training
We trained the Detect Sentiment model based on the GloVe dictionary and training data. To learn sentiments of text, we used the GloVe
dictionary to convert text from the training data to word vectors, and then identified the sentiment based on the rating associated with
each comment in the training data.
We used the following process to train the model.
1. Gather the training data. The training data consists of product review comments and their ratings, like 4 stars out of 5.
2. Use a preprocess to massage the training data into the format required by GloVe.
3. Run the training data through GloVe to convert it to vectors. We used the Wikipedia 2014 + English Gigaword Fifth Edition GloVe
dictionary to convert each string to a vector.
922
4. Pass the vectors and their associated ratings through a Multilayer Perceptron (MLP) neural network model to train the model to
predict the sentiment of text.
For more information about the GloVe dictionary, see this website.
The GloVe dictionary is made available under the Public Domain Dedication and License v1.0 whose full text can be found at:
http://opendatacommons.org/licenses/pddl/1.0/.
Use Cases
Understand the primary intended and out-of-scope use cases associated with the Detect Sentiment model.
The primary use case is to detect the sentiment of unstructured text passed to the Detect Sentiment transformation in a Data Prep recipe.
Unstructured text can include customer surveys, product and service feedback, and unstructured communication, such as chat messages,
text messages, email correspondence, and social media posts.
These use cases are out of scope:
• The Detect Sentiment transformation can’t be invoked outside of Data Prep recipes.
• The input text can’t bypass Salesforce data centers. The data must be available in Salesforce to be evaluated by the Detect Sentiment
transformation.
• Detect Sentiment doesn’t support non-English input text. It processes non-English text as English and ignores images, including
emoji.
Factors
After considering the deep-learning and lexicon-based approaches for sentiment analysis, we decided to use a hybrid of both approaches
to mitigate bias in the sentiment model.
We chose to train the model using publicly available, labeled product review datasets over other datasets because of its relevance to
business use cases. Other publicly available, labeled datasets, such as movie reviews or social media posts, are generally not as relevant
and can hamper accuracy. Because the sentiment model is trained on specific sets of data, the accuracy of the sentiment can vary based
on how similar your data is to the training data. Also, because the training data currently is in English, the Detect Sentiment model
supports only English text at this time.
To learn how well the model works with different domains of data, check out the accuracies and F1 scores. When we evaluated the
model based on product reviews and customer service survey responses, the model achieved sentiment accuracy between 69.09%-83.12%
and an F1 score from 0.34 through 0.9. When we performed biased testing, the model achieved 92.31% accuracy and an F1 score of 0.9.
If you’re curious why the results vary, it’s because each data domain can have unique terms that weren’t used to train the Detect Sentiment
model. As a result, the model’s accuracy can vary based on the domain of the data.
The model is trained using 80% of openly available product review data, which consists of about 100,000 ratings and reviews. The
sentiments of the training data are determined based on the ratings. For example, highly rated comments are considered positive. To
evaluate the model, we compared the generated sentiments of the remaining 20% of the product reviews against their actual ratings.
We also evaluated the model using proprietary survey responses.
Ethical Considerations
We have taken additional measures and precautions to correct bias against terms representing gender identity, sexual orientation,
religious affiliation, and race. Eleven identity terms were included in this mitigation (atheist, queer, gay, lesbian, homosexual, feminist,
black, white, heterosexual, islam, muslim, and bisexual). Using synthetic data, we trained the model to always predict neutral sentiments
for these terms. Although text surrounding these identity terms can change the sentiment, these terms alone have a neutral sentiment.
With the introduction of mostly handcrafted, high-quality data, we were able to reduce bias for the specified terms to a great extent
without harming model performance. We recognize that the list of identity terms included in this mitigation is not exhaustive, and that
future work must be undertaken to expand the list to be more inclusive of a broader range of stakeholders.
The model typically generates the correct sentiments, but the results can vary based on the data. For example, the model doesn’t
accurately process new language, slang, or sarcasm. It also returns unexpected results for text without sentiment, such as IDs, nouns,
923
addresses, and alphanumeric values. Because the accuracy can vary, consider making decisions based on trends in sentiment scores
over time rather than on scores at a particular moment in time.
For more details about the Detect Sentiment model card, check out the following resources.
• GloVe: Global Vectors for Word Representation
Drop Columns Transformation: Drop Columns from the Recipe

In CRM Analytics, drop unwanted columns from a Data Prep recipe. For example, you can add a
USER PERMISSIONS
Drop Columns transformation after a Formula transformation to drop input columns used for a
calculated column. To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Drop Columns Transformation: Drop Columns from the Recipe Dataset Recipes
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the column in the Preview tab.
2. In the Transform toolbar, click the Drop Columns button ( ).
The dropped column appears in the Drop Columns step.
3. Alternatively, to keep the columns selected instead of removing them click Keep.
924
4. To include additional columns, enter their label in the Select Columns to Drop/Keep field.
5. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform
node.
7. Save the recipe.
From this point forward, dropped columns can’t be used in recipe transformations and nodes. They also no longer appear in Preview.

In CRM Analytics, use the Discovery Predict transformation to populate your datasets with predictive
USER PERMISSIONS
and prescriptive intelligence. When you run a Data Prep recipe with a Discovery Predict node,
Einstein calculates and saves predicted outcomes on a row-by-row basis. You can optionally store To create a recipe:
descriptions of top predictors and improvements. With the Discovery Predict node, you can quickly • Edit Analytics Dataflows
evaluate predictions across a large set of data, assess multiple models before deploying them into OR Edit Dataset Recipes
production, and aggregate this information in a dashboard. To view predictions,
improvements, and related
details:
• View Einstein Discovery
1. Edit a Data Prep recipe. Recommendations (see
Assign Einstein
2. Where you want to insert the node, click Add Node (+) and choose Discovery Predict.
Discovery Permission
Sets to Users)
925
3. Select a deployed prediction, then click Next.
4. Map all fields from the prediction to the recipe.

This example shows all fields from all active models, as well as segmentation filters.
926
5. If you want to include prediction and improvement text in the dataset, click the Options subtab.
927
Issue Description
Top predictors Enable Top predictors and specify the number of entries you want to save to the dataset.
Top improvements Enable Top improvements and specify the number of entries you want to save to the dataset.
This option is available only for predictions that use:
• numeric or binary classification models, and
• the Generalized Linear Model (GLM) algorithm
If the selected prediction uses a multiclass classification model, or if it uses a different algorithm, then
getting top improvements is not an available option. To learn more about algorithms in Einstein Discovery
story settings, see Edit Story Settings.
6. Click Apply.
928
Einstein adds the Discovery Predict node to your recipe.
7. Save the recipe.

Run the recipe to get predictions.
Extract Transformation: Get a Date Component

In CRM Analytics, use the Extract transformation in a Data Prep recipe to pull a selected component
USER PERMISSIONS
from a date field into a new field. For example, extract the hour component from the Case Created
Date column to analyze case creation by hour of the day. To manage and create a
recipe:
Extract Transformation: Get a Date Component Dataflows OR Edit
1. In the Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the date column you want to extract a Dataset Recipes
component from.
2.
In the Transform toolbar, click the Extract button ( ) to set the extract settings.
3. Select which date component to extract.
6. Click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node. The Preview tab shows the new date component column.
8. Save the recipe.
After you run the recipe, the selected date component is extracted in the specified text (dimension) column.
In CRM Analytics, to make column names more descriptive and apply consistent formats to column
USER PERMISSIONS
values, use the Edit Attributes transformation in a Data Prep recipe. You can set the labels and API
names of all columns. You can also set the precision and scale for number columns, character length To create a recipe:
for text columns, and date formats for date columns. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the column in the Preview tab.
2.
In the Transform toolbar, click the Edit Attributes button ( ).
929
3. Change the column attributes.

Based on the column datatype, you can set these attributes.
Label The display label for the column, the one that appears in charts and dashboards. Column labels can each
be up to 255 characters.
API Name The API name of the column. The column API name can each be up to 255 characters. The API name
must also be unique within the recipe.
Precision The maximum number of digits in a numeric (measure) column. Includes all numbers to the left and to
the right of the decimal point (but excludes the decimal point character). Enter an integer from 1 through
18, inclusive. If a numeric value exceeds the specified precision, the value is set to 0 or null, depending
on whether null measure handling is enabled. For example, if precision is set to 5 and null measure
handling is enabled, the numeric value 123456.78 is replaced with null.
Scale The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in a numeric column. Enter an integer from 0
through 17, inclusive. The scale must be less than the precision. For example, if the numeric value is
123456.789 and you set the scale to 2, the number appears as 123456.78.

If applicable, Preview shows the new column label.

6. Save the recipe.
930
Flatten Transformation: Flatten Hierarchies

In CRM Analytics, the Flatten transformation flattens hierarchical data. For example, you can flatten
USER PERMISSIONS
the Salesforce role hierarchy to implement row-level security on a dataset based on the role hierarchy.
To create a recipe:
Flatten Transformation: Flatten Hierarchies • Edit Analytics Dataflows
When you configure the Flatten transformation, you specify the field that contains every node in
the hierarchy and the field that contains their corresponding parent based on the hierarchy. The
Flatten transformation generates one record for each hierarchy node, which we refer to as the record ID (also known as the child node).
After you run the recipe, each record contains two generated columns that store the hierarchy for each record ID. One column contains
a list of all ancestors for each node in the hierarchy. The other column contains the hierarchy path.
Important: The source dataset row maximum is 20 million.
Consider the number of levels you’re flattening with the row size of your dataset. The Flatten transformation can flatten:
• Up to 300 levels with a < 1million-row dataset.
• Up to 100 levels with a 15 million-row dataset.
• Up to 50 levels with a 20 million-row dataset.
See the Roles and Role Path columns in the following flattened dataset to see how ancestors are stored.
Record ID (child Role Name Parent Record ID Roles Role Path

node)
1 Salesperson 1 10 10, 20, 30 /10/20/30
2 Salesperson 2 10 10, 20, 30 /10/20/30
3 Salesperson 3 11 11, 20, 30 /11/20/30
10 Regional Manager 1 20 20, 30 /20/30
11 Regional Manager 2 20 20, 30 /20/30
20 Vice President 1 30 30 /30
21 Vice President 2 30 30 /30
30 CEO Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
You can also configure the Flatten transformation to include the record ID in the generated hierarchy columns. The following dataset
shows the record ID in bold.

node)
1 Salesperson 1 10 1, 10, 20, 30 /1/10/20/30
2 Salesperson 2 10 2, 10, 20, 30 /2/10/20/30
3 Salesperson 3 11 3, 11, 20, 30 /3/11/20/30
10 Regional Manager 1 20 10, 20, 30 /10/20/30
931

node)
11 Regional Manager 2 20 11, 20, 30 /11/20/30
20 Vice President 1 30 20, 30 /20/30
21 Vice President 2 30 21, 30 /21/30
30 CEO Not applicable 30 30
If a hierarchy is incomplete or contains a circular relationship, the Role and Role Path values aren’t calculated. For example:
• If Regional Manager 1 isn’t present in the dataset, a flattened hierarchy isn’t generated for Salesperson 1 and Salesperson 2.
• If Salesperson 1 reports to Regional Manager 1, who reports to Vice President 1, who reports to Salesperson 1, a flattened hierarchy
isn’t generated for these roles.
To create a flatten transformation:
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column that contains all the record IDs (or child nodes) in the
hierarchy. The record ID column can’t contain null
values.
2. In the Transform toolbar, click the Flatten button ( ).
3. Enter the following transformation details.
Property Description
Record ID Column Column that identifies each record. Also known as the child node.
Parent ID Column Column that contains the parent of each node in the hierarchy. For example, the Regional
Manager 1 role is the parent of the Salesperson 1 role in a role hierarchy.
Include Record ID Column Value Indicates whether to include the record ID column value in the generated hierarchy nodes
and path columns.
Hierarchy Nodes Column Label Name of the multivalue output column that contains a list of all ancestors in the hierarchy,
in order from the lowest to the highest level. The Flatten transformation creates this column
and generates the list of ancestors for each node in the hierarchy. For example, for
Salesperson 1 role, the hierarchy of ancestors is:
932
Sales Manager 1, Regional Manager 1,Vice President 1, CEO
. To hide this column from queries and dataset exploration, select Is a system column. By
default, this column isn’t created as a system column.
Hierarchy Path Column Label String that contains the hierarchical path of all ancestors in the hierarchy, in order from the
lowest to the highest level. Nodes are separated by forward slashes. The Flatten
transformation creates this output column and generates the ancestry path for each node
in the hierarchy. For example, for a salesperson role in a role hierarchy, the value is:
Sales Manager 1/Regional Manager 1/Vice President 1/CEO
. To hide this column from queries and dataset exploration, select Is a system column. By
default, this column isn’t created as a system column.
4. Preview the transformation results to check that the flattened hierarchy is right.
Preview shows only the record ID and its parent in the hierarchy nodes column and only the record ID in the hierarchy path column.
You have to run the recipe to see all ancestors in both columns.
933

6. To collapse the view and see the Graph area, click the Collapse button ( ).
Run the recipe to generate the hierarchy nodes and hierarchy path columns in the dataset. Only the first value in the hierarchy nodes
column appears when exploring the dataset in a lens. In general, a lens shows only the first value of a multivalue column.

In CRM Analytics, if a text column contains dates in different formats, use the Format Dates recipe
USER PERMISSIONS
transformation in a Data Prep recipe to standardize the format for all dates in the column. A consistent
format enables you to correctly filter and group records by date, including filtering by date To create a recipe:
component, such as month. It also ensures you can successfully convert the column type from text • Edit Analytics Dataflows
to date. Optionally, you can convert the column type from Text to Date. OR Edit Dataset Recipes
934

In CRM Analytics, if a text (dimension) column contains dates in different formats, use the Format Dates recipe transformation in a Data
Prep recipe to standardize the format for all dates in the column. A consistent format enables you to correctly filter and group records
by date, including filtering by date component, such as month. It also ensures you can successfully convert the column type from text
(dimension) to date. Optionally, you can convert the column type from Text to Date.
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column that contains dates in the Preview tab.
2.
In the Transform toolbar, click the Format Dates button ( ).
3. Enter the original date formats in the selected column.
Note: The order of the date formats in the Original Formats box matters. For example, if a date is 01/06/2011, the date format
could be dd/MM/yyyy or MM/dd/yyyy. The Date Format transformation assumes the first matching format shown the Original
Date Format box is the right one.
4. Select the desired date format in the Change To field.

5. To convert a text (dimension) column with dates to a Date column type, select Convert column type to Date.
When you run the recipe, the transformation replaces the dates in the existing column with dates in the specified format. If the date's
original format can't be determined or the date doesn’t have a value for a date component, the transformation replaces the date with
null. For example, if you standardize on the MM/dd/yyyy:hh:mm:sssz format and a date value doesn’t have the seconds date
component (sssz), then the transformation replaces the date with null.

In CRM Analytics, create a column in a Data Prep recipe that displays values based on a formula
USER PERMISSIONS
calculation. The calculation can include input from other fields in the same row or across rows. For
example, you can create a Profit column based on input from Revenue and Cost columns. Enter To create a recipe:
formulas in EA-SQL format. EA-SQL is a collection of standard and custom functions for numeric, • Edit CRM Analytics
string, and date data. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes

1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select a column in the Preview tab.
2. To create the formula for the calculated column, select the Formula button ( ) in the Transform toolbar and select Custom Formula.
935
3. In the formula editor, enter the formula and add parameters using the correct syntax.
As you type in the formula editor, functions and columns matching the name appear for you to select to add to the formula.
936
Note: The best practice is to use double quotes around all column names. For a value that is a string literal, use single quotes.
.
Double quotes are required when referencing dataset columns that share a name with reserved keywords.
To get help, check out all functions and columns in the Functions and Columns tabs. To add one to the formula, select it and click
+.
Functions are listed in the Functions tab by category: Window Functions, String Functions, Numeric Functions, Date/Time Functions,
and Additional Functions. To view the window functions, enable Multiple row formula.
4. For formulas with window functions, specify the column used to partition the rows in Partition By, column used to sort the data
in Order By, and sort direction in Sort Direction.
For example, set Partition By to Opportunity Name, Order By to Last Modified Date, and Sort Direction to Ascending. Based on these
settings, the transformation combines all records into partitions (think buckets) based on the same opportunity name. It then sorts
the records in each partition in ascending order based on the last modified date.
5. Identify each column in the formula by its API name. Type in the API name or select the column from the Columns tab.
6. In Output Type, select whether the calculated column’s data is text, numeric, date, or datetime.
7. Based on the output type, you can set these attributes.
937
8. In Default Value, choose the value to show if your expression returns no results.
9. If needed, you can change the label of the calculated column.
10. To add the formula as a step in the Transform node, click Apply.
The calculated column appears in the recipe preview.

You can bucket a formula column or reference it in later formulas defined in the recipe. Common functions have their own buttons in
the Transform toolbar that automatically fill in the formula with the column and predefined syntax. The toolbar shows appropriate
functions based on the type and number of selected columns. To use one, click the function button in the Transform toolbar (1). The
formula is started for you (2), using the column and function you selected.
938
Date Functions for Formulas

In CRM Analytics, use date functions to adjust or calculate values from dates in your recipe. For example, you can add time, find time
until, and extract a day of the week from date fields. The arguments for date functions are date columns.
Numeric Operators and Functions for Formulas
In CRM Analytics, use numeric functions to calculate values from numbers in your recipe. For example, you can round, truncate, and
determine the absolute value of a number. The arguments for numeric functions can be number values or columns.
String Functions for Formulas
In CRM Analytics, use string functions to create values based on other strings. For example, you can change the casing of text strings,
concatenate values from multiple columns, and replace values. The arguments for string functions must be text strings or fields.
Window Functions for Formulas
In CRM Analytics, use window functions in a Data Prep recipe to perform calculations across rows. For each row of input data, perform
a calculation on a selection—or window—of related rows. Unlike aggregation that groups rows, window functions return a result
for each row. For example, you can calculate the changes to the opportunity amount throughout the stages of each opportunity to
see if you can hit your sales target.
Multivalue Functions for Formulas
In CRM Analytics, use multivalue functions with your multivalue data. For example, look for a specific value, count how many values
there are, create a new multivalue by combining other text, convert a multivalue to a string, or split a string and return a multivalue.
The arguments for multivalue functions must be text strings or fields.
Additional Functions for Formulas
In CRM Analytics, these versatile functions can be used with the data types text, number, date_only, and datetime to build logic into
your formulas.
Upgrade or Edit Formulas for Converted Recipes
You see a different formula editor if your recipe was converted from Data Prep Classic to Data Prep and your formulas couldn’t
automatically upgrade. You’re still able to edit and use these formulas, but to get the most formula options through EA-SQL and
best experience, recreate the formula in the Data Prep recipe editor.

In CRM Analytics, use date functions to adjust or calculate values from dates in your recipe. For example, you can add time, find time
until, and extract a day of the week from date fields. The arguments for date functions are date columns.
When entering a formula use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. The parameters section is surrounded by
parentheses. For example, you can enter the following expression.
datediff(ClosedDate, CreatedDate)
Date Function Description Syntax

add_months Returns the date with the specified add_months(startDate,num_months)
number of months after the start date. startDate is the date field calculated on.
num_months is the number of months added to the
startDate.
current_date Returns the current date. current_date()
current_timestamp Returns the current date and time. current_timestamp()
939

datediff Returns the number of days between start datediff(endDate,startDate)
date and end date. endDate is the later of the two dates you are finding the
difference between.
startDate is the earlier of the two dates you are finding
the difference between.
date_add Returns the date with the specified date_add(startDate,num_days)

number of days after the start date. startDate is the date field calculated on.
num_days is the number of days added to the startDate.
date_format Converts the timestamp to a specified date date_format(field,'format')

format. field is a date field/timestamp or string to be converted
to the given format.
'format' is the date and time format pattern to follow.
Example:
date_format('2016-04-08', 'y')
returns 2016
date_sub Removes the specified number of days date_sub(startDate,num_days)

from the start date. startDate is the date field calculated on.
num_days is the number of days subtracted from the
startDate.
date_trunc Resets the specified part of the timestamp, date_trunc('format',timestamp)

and all portions after it, to zero (or 01 for 'format' is the date and time format pattern to follow.
date and year). Specify the portion of the
timestamp, fmt, with ‘year’, ‘quarter’, timestamp is a date/timestamp or string that’s returned
‘month’, ‘week’, ‘day’, ‘hour’, ‘minute’, or as a UNIX timestamp.
‘second’. For example, dateTrunc for ‘year’ Example:
of 2019-05-01 12:31:32 returns 2019-01-01
date_trunc('week',CloseDate)
00:00:00. If your data is date and not
datetime, use the trunc function instead. returns the Monday of the week of the Close Date.
day Returns the day of the month component day(date)

of the date/timestamp. date is the date field to extract the day of the month from.
dayofmonth Returns the day of the month component dayofmonth(date)

of the date/timestamp. date is the date field to extract the day of the month from.
dayofweek Returns the day of the week component dayofweek(date)

of the date/timestamp. 1 = Sunday, 2 = date is the date field to extract the day of the week from.
Monday, ..., 7 = Saturday.
940

dayofyear Returns the day of year component of the dayofyear(date)
date/timestamp. date is the date field to extract the day of the year from.
months_between Returns the number of months between months_between(timestamp2,timestamp1,roundOff(optional))

two timestamps. Calculates the difference timestamp2 is one of the timestamps to compare.
based on 31 days per month rounded to
8 digits unless roundOff=false. If timestamp1 is the other timestamp to compare.
timestamp1 is later than timestamp2, the roundOff(optional) is a boolean that determines
result is positive. If timestamp1 and whether to round the result. This parameter is optional.
timestamp2 are on the same day of the
month, or both are the last day of the
month, the result is an integer and the
time of day is ignored.
now Returns the current date and time in the now()

specified format.
to_date Converts the date string to the specified to_date(field,'format(optional)')

date format. Returns null with invalid input. field is a date string field you want to convert.
'format(optional)' is the date and time format

pattern to follow. This parameter is optional. The function
follows casting rules to a date if format isn’t included.
to_timestamp Converts the timestamp string to the to_timestamp(field,'format(optional)')

specified timestamp format. field is a timestamp string field you want to convert.
'format(optional)' is the timestamp format
pattern to follow. This parameter is optional. The function
follows casting rules to a timestamp if format isn’t included.
to_unix_timestamp Returns the UNIX timestamp of the to_unix_timestamp(timestamp,format(optional))

specified time. timestamp is a date/timestamp or string that’s returned
as a UNIX timestamp.
format(optional) is the date/time format pattern
to follow. format(optional) is ignored if
timestamp is not a string. Default value is "yyyy-MM-dd
HH:mm:ss". This parameter is optional.
Example:
to_unix_timestamp('2016-04-08',
'yyyy-MM-dd')
returns
1460098800
941

trunc Replaces the specified portion of the trunc(field,'format(optional)')
timestamp, and all portions after, with field is a timestamp field.
zeroes.
'format(optional)' specifies the part of the
timestamp to truncate. Accepted values are "YEAR", "YYYY",
"YY", "MON", "MONTH", "MM", "DAY", "DD", "HOUR",
"MINUTE", "SECOND", "WEEK", and "QUARTER".
Example:
trunc('2015-03-05T09:32:05.359', 'MM')
returns
2015-03-01T00:00:00
Keep these behaviors in mind when working with date and time functions.
• These functions are relative to when the job runs.
– now
– current_date
– current_timestamp
– to_unix_timestamp
• All date and datetime functions are based on the UTC time zone.
• When Custom Time Zone Support is enabled, date functions and date-time functions are separated. When it’s disabled, the functions
are grouped together.

In CRM Analytics, use numeric functions to calculate values from numbers in your recipe. For example, you can round, truncate, and
determine the absolute value of a number. The arguments for numeric functions can be number values or columns.
When entering a formula, use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. The parameters section is surrounded by
parentheses. For example, you can enter the following expression.
round(Total_Amount/Unit_Price, 2)
You can use the following math operators.
Operator Description
+ Calculates the sum of two values.
- Calculates the difference between two values.
* Multiplies the two values.
/ Divides the first value by the second.
942
() Specifies that the expressions within the parentheses are evaluated first. All other expressions are
evaluated using standard operator precedence.
You can also use the following numeric functions in an expression.
Numeric Function Description Syntax

abs Calculates the absolute value of a number. abs(field)
The absolute value of a number is the field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
number without its positive or negative determine the absolute value of.
sign.
Example: abs(Amount)
ceil Rounds a number up to the nearest ceil(field)

integer. field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
round up to the nearest integer.
exp Returns a value for e raised to the power exp(field)

of a number you specify. field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
raise by e.
floor Returns a number rounded down to the floor(field)

nearest integer. field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
round down to the nearest integer.
format_number Formats a number by rounding to the format_number(expr,format)

specified number of decimal places or by expr is a number value or (measure) field you want to
applying a certain format, for example change the format of.
#,###,###.##.
format is the new format to be applied to the numbers
in the column. The parameter can be in the format
composed as '#,###,###.##' or actual numerals like
‘12,332.1235’. This parameter is optional. If you don’t specify
a format, the field is truncated to an integer.
Example: format_number(12332.123456,
'###,###,###,###,###,###.###') returns
12,332.123
log Returns the logarithm of the number in log(value,field)

the base you specify. value is a number value or (measure) field used as the
base of the logarithm.
field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
take the logarithm of.
943

power Raises a number to the power of another power(field,value)
number. field is a number value or field you want to raise to the
specified power.
value is a number value or (measure) field that is the
power you want to raise the number to.
round Returns the nearest number to a number round(field,numberOfDigits)

you specify, constraining the new number field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
by a specified number of digits. round.
numberOfDigits is a number value or (measure) field
that specifies the number of digits to round the number
to.
sqrt Returns the positive square root of a given sqrt(field)

number. field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
find the square root of.
truncNumber Truncates the specified number of decimal truncNumber(field,scale)

values from the number, or converts to an field is a number value or (measure) field you want to
integer. truncate.
scale is the number of digits you want to the right of
the decimal point. This parameter is required. If you don’t
specify want any decimal values, use a 0.
Example: scale(13.111, 1) returns 13.1

In CRM Analytics, use string functions to create values based on other strings. For example, you can change the casing of text strings,
concatenate values from multiple columns, and replace values. The arguments for string functions must be text strings or fields.
When you enter a formula, use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. The parameters section is surrounded by
parentheses. Also, text strings must be enclosed in single straight quotes ('This is a string.').
For example, you can nest string functions in an expression to combine the sales territory and country into a column. Then you can apply
title casing to the results. title(concat(Sales_Territory, ' ',Country))
You can use the following string functions in a formula expression.
String Description Syntax

Function
char_length Returns the number char_length(field)
of characters in the field is the text (dimension) field or string to measure.
specified string.
944

Function
Leading and trailing Example: A point-of-service checkout tool generates receipts with a maximum number of
whitespace characters. Evaluate your product names to see their length.
characters are
char_length(product_name)
included in the
length returned.
concat Returns a string by concat(field1,field2,...fieldN)

merging the values of field1 is the first text (dimension) field or string to include in the concatenated value.
the specified columns
and input strings. field2 is the second text (dimension) field or string to include.
fieldN is any number of extra text (dimension) fields or strings to include.
Example: To create the full name, concatenate the first and last names with a space in between
them.
concat("OwnerId.FirstName",' ',"OwnerId.LastName")
endsWith Returns true if the ends_with(fieldName,literal)

specified string is fieldName is the text (dimension) field to search.
found at the end of
the column value. literal is the value to search for at the end of the field.
This function is only
supported in case
functions because it
returns as a boolean.
instr Returns the (1-based) instr(field, searchString, [position, [occurrence]])

first location of the field is the text (dimension) field or string that is being evaluated to find the
value 'searchString' in searchString.
the specified 'field'
column. Optionally, searchString is the text (dimension) field or string that is being searched for in the field.
start the search at a position is the start location in field where the search begins. This parameter is optional.
different location If you don't specify a position, the search begins at position 1.
with 'position', or
occurrence is the specific instance of the searchString to return. This parameter is
return the location of
optional. Use position, too, if you use this parameter. If you don't specify a position, the
a different
search begins at position 1.
searchString instance
with 'occurrence'. Example: Evaluate a string for an exclamation point.
instr('123!456!78!', !)
--The result is 4
instr('123!456!8!', !, [4])
--The result is 7
instr('123!456!8!', !, [4, [2]])

--The result is 9
945

Function
lower Returns the string lower(field)
with all characters in field is the text (dimension) field or string to convert to lowercase.
lowercase. If the
input string is null, Example: The Account.Industry column uses different casing for industries, like “Media” and
then the result is null. “media.” To apply consistent casing to the columns values, convert them to lowercase.
lower("Account.Industry")
ltrim Removes the ltrim(field,valueToBeRemoved)

specified substring field is the text (dimension) field or string to remove the leading spaces or specified substring
from the beginning from.
of a string. If no
substring is provided, valueToBeRemoved is the value to remove from the string. This parameter is optional. If
remove the leading you don't specify a valueToBeRemoved, the transformation removes the leading spaces.
space characters from Example: Trim the leading space characters from a string.
a string.
ltrim(' 5 Spaces Before')
replace Replaces a substring replace(field,searchString,replacementString)

with another string. If string is the text (dimension) field or string that contains the substring to be replaced.
any of the arguments
are null, then the searchString is the substring to replace. If searchString is an empty string, the function
function returns null. returns null.
This function is replacementString is the value that replaces the substring.
case-sensitive.
Example: Change the account name from “salesforce.com” to “Salesforce” in the Account_Name
column.
replace(Account_Name,'salesforce.com','Salesforce')
rtrim Removes the rtrim(field,valueToBeRemoved)

specified substring field is the text (dimension) field or string to remove the trailing spaces or specified substring
from the end of a from.
string. If no substring
is provided, remove valueToBeRemoved is the value to remove from the string. This parameter is optional. If
the trailing space you don't specify a valueToBeRemoved, the transformation removes the trailing spaces.
characters from the Example: Trim the 2 trailing space characters from a string.
end of a string.
rtrim('2 Spaces After ')
startsWith Returns true if the startsWith(fieldName,literal)

specified string is fieldName is the text (dimension) field to search.
found at the
beginning of the literal is the value to search for at the beginning of the field.
column value. This
function is only
supported in case
946

Function
functions because it
returns as a boolean.
string Converts the date or string(expression)

number value to a expression is the date or number (measure) field to convert.
string data type.
substr Returns characters substr(field,position,len)

from the string, field is the text (dimension) field or string to extract the substring from.
starting at the
specified position and position is the starting character position of the substring. The first character in a string is
of the specified at position 1. If position is negative, then the position is relative to the end of the string. A
length. Also called position of -1 denotes the last character.
substring. len is the length, or number of characters, to return. If len is 0, the output is an empty string.
If len is negative, then the function returns null. This parameter is optional.
Example: Return the 13th, 14th, and 15th character from each account ID.
substr(Account_Id,13,3)
title Returns the string title(field)

with the initial field is the text (dimension) field or string on which to apply title casing.
character of every
word in uppercase Example: Apply title casing on the opportunity names to ensure consistent casing on these
and the remaining values.
characters in title(Opp_Name)
lowercase. For
example, “united
states” becomes
“United States.”
trim Removes the trim(field,valueToBeRemoved)

specified substring field is the text (dimension) field or string to remove the specified substring from.
from the beginning
and end of a string. If valueToBeRemoved is the value removed from the string. This parameter is optional. If
no string is specified, you don't specify a valueToBeRemoved, the transformation removes the leading and trailing
remove the space spaces.
characters from the Example: Remove the two leading spaces before and after a string.
beginning and end of
trim(' Spaces Before and After ')
a string.
upper Returns the string upper(field)

with all characters in field is the text (dimension) field or string to convert to uppercase.
uppercase. If string is
null, then the result is Example: You have a column First_Name that accepts freeform entry for users to enter their
null. first name. As a result, some names are in uppercase, some in lowercase, and others in mixed
case. Convert them to all to uppercase characters to make the casing consistent.
upper(First_Name)
947
Note: Functions that don't handle null values explicitly don’t convert NULL values to be empty (for strings) or 0 (for numerics).
For example, a concat output returns NULL if any of the concatenated fields have a null value on that row. So if the formula
looks like concat(first_name, last_name), the returned data with a NULL value for last_name is:
First Name | Last Name | Output
Alice | Smith | Alice Smith
Bob | NULL | NULL
To handle null values, you can use the concat function with another function. For example: concat(first_name,
coalesce(last_name, ''))
Notation for String Formulas

In CRM Analytics, use formulas to create custom calculations. If you manually type your formulas, use single quotes ' for string
literals and double quotes " for joined fields with dot notation or reserved keywords. If you use the recipe builder tool instead of
typing, the correct single or double quote is automatically used.
Reserved Keywords in Formulas
In CRM Analytics, Data Prep has reserved keywords that need special handling when manually writing formulas. Use double quotes
" when referencing dataset columns that share a name with reserved keywords. To avoid cross-referencing your column names
to this list, the best practice is to use double quotes around all column names.
In CRM Analytics, use formulas to create custom calculations. If you manually type your formulas, use single quotes ' for string literals
and double quotes " for joined fields with dot notation or reserved keywords. If you use the recipe builder tool instead of typing, the
correct single or double quote is automatically used.
Here are some examples of when to use single and double quotes. In the first example there are no quotes around StageName. In
contrast, in the second example there are double quotes enclosing "Opportunity.StageName", because the field has dot notation to
indicate it’s joined data.
Character Description Example

' Single quote. Use for string literals, such as case
field values.
when StageName = 'New'
then 'High'
else 'Low'
end
" Double quote. Use for column names with case

dot notation.
when "Opportunity.StageName"= 'New'
then 'High'
else 'Low'
end
" Double quote. Use for columns that share case

a name with reserved keywords. More Info
when "month"= 'New'
948
Character Description Example

then 'High'
else 'Low'
end
SEE ALSO:
In CRM Analytics, Data Prep has reserved keywords that need special handling when manually writing formulas. Use double quotes "
when referencing dataset columns that share a name with reserved keywords. To avoid cross-referencing your column names to this
list, the best practice is to use double quotes around all column names.
Enclose dataset columns that share a name with a reserved keyword in double quotes. For example, if your dataset has a column named
Month, you can enter this expression:
case when "Month" = ‘New’ then ‘High’ else ‘Low’
Table 12: Data Prep Reserved Keywords
ABS ENDSWITH QUARTER

ADD_MONTHS EXP REPLACE
AND FALSE ROUND
ARRAY FROM RTRIM
ARRAY_JOIN FLOOR SECOND
ARRAY_CONTAINS FORMAT_NUMBER SIZE
BETWEEN FROM_UNIXTIME SPLIT
CASE HOUR SQRT
CEIL IN STRING
CHAR_LENGTH INTERVAL SUBSTR
COALESCE IS SUBSTRING
CONCAT ISNTR STARTSWITH
CONTAINS LAST_DAY THEN
CURRENT_DATE LIKE TITLE
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP LOG TO
DATE_ADD LOWER TO_DATE
DATEDIFF LTRIM TO_TIMESTAMP
DATE_FORMAT MINUTE TO_UNIX_TIMESTAMP
DATE_SUB MONTH TRIM
DATE_TRUNC MONTHS_BETWEEN TRUE
949
DAY NEXT_DAY TRUNC

DAYOFMONTH NOW TRUNCNUMBER
DAYOFWEEK NOT UPPER
DAYOFYEAR NULL WHEN
DISTINCT NULLIF WEEK
ELSE OR WEEKOFYEAR
END POWER YEAR
These additional keywords are reserved in formulas with the Multiple row formula turned on. Use double quotes " when referencing
dataset columns that have any of these names.
• CURRENT
• DENSE_RANK
• FIRST_VALUE
• LAG
• LAST_VALUE
• LEAD
• RANK
• ROW_NUMBER
• SUM
SEE ALSO:

In CRM Analytics, use window functions in a Data Prep recipe to perform calculations across rows. For each row of input data, perform
a calculation on a selection—or window—of related rows. Unlike aggregation that groups rows, window functions return a result for
each row. For example, you can calculate the changes to the opportunity amount throughout the stages of each opportunity to see if
you can hit your sales target.
When entering a formula, use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. Surround the parameters with parentheses.
You can use the following window functions in a formula expression.
String Function Description Syntax

current Returns the value current(field)
from the current field is the field you want to get the current value from.
record in the
partition. Example: Get the value of the Amount field for the current row.
current(Amount)
950

dense_rank Returns the rank of dense_rank()
each record in the Example: Calculate the dense rank for rows within each partition.
partition based on
order. Ranks are dense_rank()
consecutive—they
don’t repeat when
the values match.
For example, if the
first three rows
have the same
value, then the first
four ranks are 1, 1,
1, and 2.
first_value Returns the value first_value(field)

from the first field is the field you want to get the first value from.
record in the
partition. Example: Get the original quote value for the Quote column.
first_value(Quote)
lag Returns the value lag(field)

from the previous field is the field for which you want to obtain the previous value.
record in the
partition. Example: Calculate the percentage change in profit between the current and previous
records.
(((current(Profit)-lag(Profit)))/current(Profit))*100
last_value Returns the value last_value(field)

from the last field is the field you want to get the last value from.
record in the
partition. Example: Calculate the difference between the original quote and final quote.
first_value(Quote)-last_value(Quote)
lead Returns the value lead(field)

from the next field is the field for which you want to obtain the next value.
record in the
partition. Example: Get the next value for the Stage column.
lead(Stage)
rank Returns the rank of rank()

each record in the Example: Rank the records in each partition.
partition based on
order. Repeats the rank()
rank when the
values are the
same, and skips as
951

many on the next
non-match. For
example, if the first
three rows have
the same value,
then the first four
ranks are 1, 1, 1,
and 4.
row_number Returns the row row_number()

number in the Example: Assign a row number to each record in each partition.
partition.
Increments by 1 for row_number()
every row in the
partition. For
example, if the first
three rows have
the same value,
then the first four
ranks are 1, 2, 3,
and 4.
sum Returns the sum()

cumulative sum Example: Track the cumulative number of monthly units shipped tied to a specific sales
from groups of agreement.
values.
sum()
collect_list Returns a collect_list(field)

multivalue field is the field for which you want all the values for.
containing
duplicates. Example: Return all the values from the Owner ID column.
collect_list(OwnerId)
collect_set Returns a collect_set(field)

multivalue without field is the field for which you want to remove duplicate values from.
duplicates.
Example: Return only the unique values from the Owner ID column.
collect_set(OwnerId)
Multivalue Functions for Formulas

In CRM Analytics, use multivalue functions with your multivalue data. For example, look for a specific value, count how many values
there are, create a new multivalue by combining other text, convert a multivalue to a string, or split a string and return a multivalue. The
arguments for multivalue functions must be text strings or fields.
952
When you enter a formula, use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. The parameters section is surrounded by
parentheses. Also, text strings must be enclosed in single straight quotes ('This is a string.').
You can use the following multivalue functions in a formula expression.
Multivalue Function Description Syntax

split Splits a string at the specified delimiter and split(field,delimiter,
returns a multivalue. If limit is specified, limit(optional))
then returns at most the number of field is the text (dimension) field or string to be
specified number of splits. converted to a multivalue.
• Input: text, text delimiter is the value to separate the elements in the
• Output: multivalue string. It can be a field or a text string.
limit is the maximum number of elements returned in
the multivalue. This parameter if optional. It can be a field
or a number.
array_join Converts the multivalue to a string with array_join(mvField,delimiter,nullReplacement(optional))

elements separated by the specified mvField is the multivalue text column to be converted
delimiter. If no string is specified for to a string.
nullReplacement, nulls are ignored.
delimiter is the value to separate the elements in the
• Input: multivalue, text string. It can be a field or a text string.
• Output: text
nullReplacement is the value that replaces the nulls.
This parameter is optional. It can be a field or a text string.
array_contains Returns TRUE if the specified string is found array_contains(mvField,literal)

in the multivalue. mvField is the multivalue field or column to be searched.
• Input: multivalue, text literal is the value to search for at the beginning of
• Output: text (true/false) the field. It can be a field or a text string.
size Returns the number of elements in the size(mvField)

multivalue. If the multivalue is null, returns mvField is the multivalue text field to measure.
-1.
• Input: multivalue
• Output: number
array Returns a multivalue containing unique array(field1,field2,...fieldN)

elements. field1 is the first text column or string to include in the
• Input: text concatenated value.
• Output: multivalue field2 is the second text (dimension) column or string
to include.
fieldN is any number of extra text (dimension) columns
or strings to include.
953
Multivalue Function Description Syntax

element_at Returns the element of a multivalue at the element_at(mvField, index)
given index. mvField is the multivalue field to return the element
• Input: multivalue, integer from.
• Output: text index is the index to use in the array.
array_distinct Removes duplicates from the multivalue. array_distinct(mvField)

• Input: multivalue mvField is the multivalue field to remove duplicates
• Output: multivalue from.

In CRM Analytics, these versatile functions can be used with the data types text, number, date_only, and datetime to build logic into
your formulas.
When entering a formula use the API name of the column in the expression, not the label. The parameters section is surrounded by
parentheses.
The case function handles if/then logic for formulas. This function can be used with TEXT, NUMBER, DATE_ONLY, and DATETIME data.
The syntax is:
case primary_expr(optional)
when condition
then result_expr
...
else
default_expr
end
The syntax includes these keywords and parameters:

• case and end keywords begin and close the expression
• when and then keywords define a conditional statement. You can include one or more conditional statements.
• condition is a logical expression that can be evaluated to true or false. Construct this expression with any values, identifiers,
logical operator, comparison operator, or scalar functions (including date and math functions) supported by EA SQL. Example:
eg xInt < 5 or price > 1000 and price <= 2000
• result_expr is an expression that can be evaluated by the EA SQL engine. You can include values, identifiers, and scalar
functions, including date and math functions. The expression can evaluate to any data type, but the data type must be consistent
among all conditional expressions. So if result_expr is of NUMERIC type, then result_expr2 … result_exprN must also be of NUMERIC
type. Example:
abs(price)
• else allows a default expression to be specified. The else statement must follow the conditional when/then statement. There
can be only one else statement. This parameter is optional.
• default_expr is an expression that can be evaluated by the EA SQL engine. The outcome if the condition expression evaluates
as false.
954
Here’s a case function example. Type is a field in the dataset. “New Business” and “Existing Business” are values of the Type field.
case
when Type = 'New Business'
then 'NB'
when Type = 'Existing Business'
then 'EB'
else
Type
end
The coalesce function returns the first non-null value in an expression. Otherwise, returns null. This function can be used with TEXT,
NUMBER, DATE_ONLY, and DATETIME data. The syntax is: coalesce(expr1,expr2)
The syntax includes these parameters:
• expr1 is the first field or text string to search for a non-null value
• expr2is the next field or text string to search for a non-null value
Upgrade or Edit Formulas for Converted Recipes

You see a different formula editor if your recipe was converted from Data Prep Classic to Data Prep
USER PERMISSIONS
and your formulas couldn’t automatically upgrade. You’re still able to edit and use these formulas,
but to get the most formula options through EA-SQL and best experience, recreate the formula in To create a recipe:
the Data Prep recipe editor. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
1. In a Data Prep recipe that was converted from Data Prep Classic to Data Prep, select a
Dataset Recipes
transformation with a formula.
A formula that was not converted automatically looks like this. Continue to use these instructions
to upgrade or edit your formula.
955
If the editor instead looks like this one, your formula was converted successfully and you use the Data Prep recipe formula editor
instructions instead.
2. To upgrade your formula:
956
a. Copy and save your original formula and select Switch To SQL Editor. The Data Prep recipe formula editor opens.
b. Recreate your original formula using the correct syntax described in the Data Prep recipe formula editor instructions.
3. To edit your formula without upgrading, make your edits following the same syntax used when the formula was originally written.
Do not select to switch to the SQL editor.
4. If needed, change the label of the calculated column.
5. When you have completed the formula, click Apply to add the transformation to the Transform node.
The new formula column appears in the recipe preview.
7. Save the recipe.
Numeric Operators and Functions for Unconverted Formulas

Use numeric functions to calculate values from measures in your recipe. For example, you can round, truncate, and determine the
absolute value of a number. The arguments for numeric functions can be numbers or measure columns. If your recipe was upgraded
to Data Prep, but your recipe doesn’t convert, this topic is for your unconverted recipe.
String Functions for Unconverted Formulas
Use string functions to create values based on other strings. For example, you can change the casing of text strings, concatenate
values from multiple columns, and replace values. The arguments for string functions must be text strings or dimension columns.
If your recipe was upgraded to Data Prep, but your recipe doesn’t convert, this topic is for your unconverted recipe.
Numeric Operators and Functions for Unconverted Formulas
Use numeric functions to calculate values from measures in your recipe. For example, you can round, truncate, and determine the
absolute value of a number. The arguments for numeric functions can be numbers or measure columns. If your recipe was upgraded to
Data Prep, but your recipe doesn’t convert, this topic is for your unconverted recipe.
Note: To get a list of numeric functions for a Data Prep Classic recipe, see Numeric Functions for Formula Fields.
When entering a formula, column names must be enclosed in square brackets. Also, use the API name of the column in the expression,
not the label. For example, you can enter the following expression.
round([Total_Amount]/[Unit_Price], 2)
You can use these math operators.
+ Calculates the sum of two values.
- Calculates the difference between two values.
* Multiplies the two values.
/ Divides the first value by the second.
() Specifies that the expressions within the parentheses are evaluated first. All other expressions are
evaluated using standard operator precedence.
You can also use these numeric functions in an expression.
957

abs Calculates the absolute value of a number. abs(number)
The absolute value of a number is the number is a number or measure column that you want
number without its positive or negative to determine the absolute value of.
sign.
Example: abs([Amount])
ceil Rounds a number up to the nearest ceil(number)

integer. number is a number or measure column that you want
to round up to the nearest integer.
exp Returns a value of e raised to the exponent exp(number)

that you specify. number is a number or measure column to which you
want to raise e.
floor Returns a number rounded down to the floor(number)

nearest integer. number is a number or measure column that you want
to round down to the nearest integer.
log Returns the logarithm of the number in log(base,number)

the base that you specify. base is a number or measure column used as the base of
the logarithm.
number is a number or measure column that you want
to take the logarithm of.
power Raises a number to the power of another power(number,power)

number. number is a number or measure column that you want
to raise to the specified power.
power is a number or measure column that is the power
that you want to raise the specified number to.
round Returns the nearest number to a number round(number,numberOfDigits)

you specify, constraining the new number number is a number or measure column that you want
by a specified number of digits. to round.
numberOfDigits is a number or measure column that
specifies the number of digits to round the specified
number to.
sqrt Returns the positive square root of a given sqrt(number)

number. number is a number or measure column that you want
to find the square root of.
trunc Truncates a number to an integer. trunc(number)

number is a number or measure column that you want
to truncate to an integer.
958
String Functions for Unconverted Formulas

Use string functions to create values based on other strings. For example, you can change the casing of text strings, concatenate values
from multiple columns, and replace values. The arguments for string functions must be text strings or dimension columns. If your recipe
was upgraded to Data Prep, but your recipe doesn’t convert, this topic is for your unconverted recipe.
Note: To get a list of string functions for a Data Prep recipe, see String Functions for Formula Fields.
For example, you can nest string functions in an expression to combine the sales territory and country into a single column. Then you
can apply title casing to the results.
title(concat(Sales_Territory, ‘ ‘,Country))
When you enter a formula, text strings must be enclosed in single straight quotes (’This is a string.’). Column names must
be enclosed in square brackets ([Opportunity_Name]).
You can use these string functions in a formula expression.

Function
concat Returns a string by concat(string1,string2,...)
concatenating the string1 is the first dimension column or text string to include in the concatenated value.
values of the
specified columns string2 is the second dimension column or text string to include.
and input strings. For Example: To create the full name, concatenate the first and last names with a space in between
example, to display them.
the close date as
concat([OwnerId.FirstName],' ',[OwnerId.LastName])
MM-DD-YYYY,
concatenate the
Close_Date_Month
column,
Close_Date_Day
column, and
Close_Date_Year
column, and add a
dash between each
of them.
lower Returns a string with lower(string)

all characters from string is the dimension column or text string to convert to lowercase.
the input string in
lowercase. If the Example: The Account.Industry column uses different casing for industries, like “Media” and
input string is null, “media.” To apply consistent casing to the column values, convert them to lowercase.
then the result is null. lower([Account.Industry])
ltrim Removes the ltrim(string,[substring]

specified substring or string is the dimension column or text string to remove the leading spaces or specified
leading spaces from substring from.
the beginning of a
string. substring is the value to remove from the string. This parameter is optional. If you don’t
specify a substring, the transformation removes the leading spaces.
959

Function
Example: Trim the leading space characters from a string.
ltrim(' 5 Spaces Before')
replace Replaces a substring replace(string,searchString,replacementString)

with the specified string is the dimension column or text string that contains the substring to be replaced.
characters. If any of
the arguments are searchString is the substring to replace. If searchString is an empty string, the function
null, then the returns null.
function returns null. replacementString is the value that replaces the substring.
This function is
Example: Change the account name from “salesforce.com” to “Salesforce” in the Account_Name
case-sensitive.
column.
replace([Account_Name],'salesforce.com','Salesforce')
rtrim Removes the rtrim(string,[substring]

specified substring or string is the dimension column or text string to remove the trailing spaces or specified
trailing spaces from substring from.
the end of a string.
substring is the value to remove from the string. This parameter is optional. If you don’t
specify a substring, the transformation removes the trailing spaces.
Example: Trim the 2 trailing space characters from a string.
rtrim('2 Spaces After ')
substr Returns characters substr(string,position,[length])

from the string, string is the dimension column or text string to extract the substring from.
starting at the
specified position and position is the starting character position of the substring. The first character in a string is
of the specified at position 1. If position is negative, then the position is relative to the end of the string. A
length. position of -1 denotes the last character.
length is the number of characters to return. If length is 0, the output is an empty string. If
length is negative, then the function returns null. This parameter is optional.
Example: Return the 13th, 14th, and 15th character from each account ID.
substr([Account_Id],13,3)
title Returns the string title(string)

with the initial string is the dimension column or text string on which to apply title casing.
character of every
word in uppercase Example: Apply title casing on the opportunity names to ensure consistent casing on these
and the remaining values.
characters in title([Opp_Name])
lowercase. For
example, “united
states” becomes
“United States.”
960

Function
trim Removes the trim(string,[substring])
specified substring string is the dimension column or text string to remove the specified substring from.
(or leading and
trailing spaces) from substring is the value removed from the string. This parameter is optional. If you don’t
the string. specify a substring, the transformation removes the leading and trailing spaces.
Use the trim function Example: Remove the two leading spaces before and after a string.
in a SAQL query to trim(' Spaces Before and After ')
trim other types of
characters.
upper Returns the string upper(string)

with all characters in string is the dimension column or text string to convert to uppercase.
uppercase. If string is
null, then the result is Example: You have a column First_Name that accepts freeform entry for users to enter their
null. first name. As a result, some names are in uppercase, some in lowercase, and others in mixed
case. Convert them to all to uppercase characters to make the casing consistent.
upper([First_Name])

In CRM Analytic, use the Predict Missing Values transformation in a Data Prep recipe to complete
USER PERMISSIONS
your data by filling in missing values in a text column. CRM Analytics Intelligently predicts values
based on values in other strongly correlated columns in your data. To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Predict Missing Values Transformation: Fill In Missing Values Dataset Recipes
Consider these limitations before using this feature.
• If there aren’t enough rows to make accurate predictions, CRM Analytics doesn’t insert predicted
values.
• You can't apply transformations on predicted columns.
• Recipes that predict values can take longer to run.
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column with missing values in the Preview tab.
961
2. In the Transform toolbar, click the Predict Missing Values button
( ).
3. Select up to three text columns to use to predict the missing values for the selected column.
Tip: To make an accurate prediction, each column must have less than 200 unique values. Also, verify that these predictive
columns contain clean, quality data. For example, you have an Education predictive column that contains values such as
“Bachelors Degree” and “Bachelors.” Use the bucket transformation to bucket field values with the same meaning. Then use
the column with the clean data as a predictive column. For more information about bucketing, see Bucket Transformations
(see the following link).
4. If needed, change the column label. This label appears as the column header in the dataset.
The preview shows the original column with the missing values and the new column with “Predict” at the end of the header. The
preview shows “Prediction TBD” for predicted values in the new column. The predicted values don’t appear until after you run the
recipe.

Run the recipe to generate the predictions. You can view the dataset as a values table to see the predictions. If needed, add the Drop
Columns transformation after the Predict Missing Values transformation to drop the original column from the dataset.
962

In CRM Analytic, you can split the strings in a text column into two values by specifying a delimiter.
USER PERMISSIONS
To split column values into more than two parts, add multiple instances of the Split transformation.
For instance, you can use 3 Split transformations in a Data Prep recipe to split the full address into To create a recipe:
the following components: street address, city, state, and zip code. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, select the text (dimension) column in the Preview
tab.
2.
In the Transform toolbar, click the Split button ( ).
3. Select the delimiter in the Delimiter field.

For example, if address components are separated by a comma in the Address field, specify comma as the delimiter.
4. Specify the column labels for both new columns.

Going back to the address example, the Address field is split into two. The Split transformation splits the value at the first occurrence
of the delimiter. In this case, the first comma appears after the street address. So the full address is broken into the street address
and the rest (city, state, and ZIP code).
963
6. If needed, add the Split transformation again to further split the column values.
For example, to finish splitting the city, state, and ZIP code, we can add two more Split transformations.

8. Save the recipe.
If you don’t need the original column you split, add the Drop Columns transformation after the Split transformation to drop it from the
recipe. From that point, the original column doesn’t appear in Preview anymore.

In CRM Analytic, make decisions today based on forecasts about tomorrow with time series
USER PERMISSIONS
forecasting. A time series forecast takes an ordered series of points and intelligently forecasts the
next values. For example, estimate units sold for the next 4 quarters based on the last 5 years of To create a recipe:
sales. Use the Time Series Forecasting transformation in a Data Prep recipe to run forecasts based • Edit CRM Analytics
on historical data and seasonality. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes

1. In a Transform node of a Data Prep recipe, use the toolbar to click the Time Series Forecast button ( ).
964
2. In Columns to Forecast, select which columns to aggregate and forecast.

For example, sum and forecast opportunity Amount. You can also aggregate unique values of text (dimension) and dates. For
example, forecast count of unique Account Name.
965
3. Optionally, in Group Rows, select groups to forecast by. For example, forecast by region.
4. In Date for Time Series, select a date column and a date grouping. For example, Close Date year-month.
5. In Forecast Period, specify your forecast outlook.
Forecast Period Description

Fields
Time Period Choose what happens when data is incomplete, such as ignore a time period with only partial data. For
to Ignore example, ignore the last time period when forecasting by month while data for the current month is still
being collected so it doesn’t influence your forecast. Incomplete data can lead to a misleading forecast.
• None (Include all data) uses all data available.
• Last Time Period uses data up to—but not including—the last time period.
966
Forecast Period Description

Fields
Forecast Rolling sets forecast length starting at recipe run date, such as rolling 3 months.
Outlook
Forecast Specify length of forecast from recipe run date. Forecast length is the number of future time periods you want
Length to forecast for.
For example, if date grouping is year-month, then a rolling forecast length of 3 represents the next 3 months.
If date grouping is year, then a rolling forecast length of 3 represents the next 3 years.
More data is predicted if there’s a gap between the dataset’s most recent date and the current period. For
example, if your data isn’t updated for two months and you’re forecasting out 3 months, then 5 months of
data is predicted. Say your data hasn’t been updated since October and it’s now December, and you’re
forecasting out 3 months, then you’ll get a forecast until March of next year.
6. Optionally, use More Options to further modify the time series forecast.
Options Description
Seasonality Periodic fluctuations that occur around the same time every year.
• For example, if sales fluctuate quarterly, select 4 (quarters in a year) and use a date grouping of year-quarter.
• Choose Auto so Data Prep determines the best seasonality for you.
967
Options Description
• Choose None if seasonality doesn’t apply.
Model Model used to forecast values.

You can use one of these models.
• Additive uses Holt-Winters Additive method. Use this method when the seasonal variations are roughly
constant throughout the series.
• Multiplicative uses Holt-Winters Multiplicative method. Use this method when the seasonal variations
change proportionally to the average (level of the series).
• Auto selects the most accurate forecast method.
Generate To account for errors in forecasts, select an 80% or a 95% confidence interval.
Confidence
Interval A confidence interval provides a range of values for each forecast based on a certain level of confidence —
the higher the confidence level, the wider the range.
Creates two columns for the low and high values of the confidence interval. For example, the column names
for a 95% confidence interval are column_name (Low 95) and column_name (High 95).

9. Save the recipe.
Run the recipe to see forecasts. Each forecast column shows the results for every time period, including the historical ones. For example,
the Rows Forecast and the Sum of Amount Forecast columns show the forecasts. To combine the forecasts for future periods with the
historical values in a column, use a Coalesce formula for each number (measure)—similar to this one.
coalesce(COUNT_Rows, COUNT_Rows_forecast)
The historical values and forecasts appear in a column.
968

In CRM Analytics, connect disconnected nodes or branches to join or append data from any node to any other node in a Data Prep
recipe. You can also create a branch at an intermediate node, and join or append it to another path in the recipe.
1. To create a branch and join or append it to another path, hover over a node to see the Branch button ( ). Then drag the Branch
button on top of a node in the other path.
969
In the Connect Nodes box, select whether to join or append the data.
2. To join or append data to another node, drag the Add Node button ( ) for a node or a Branch button on top of the predecessor.
Then select whether to join or append the data in the Connect Nodes box. This graph joins aggregated account data back to the
account records.
970
3. To make the flow of data easier to view, reposition the recipe nodes in the graph.
Select and move individual nodes, or drag your mouse to select as many nodes as you want. Pull the group of nodes around to
rearrange, or delete them all at once.
971
972
For example, you can move upstream nodes after a downstream node in the graph, where nodes flow right to left.
Copy and Paste a Recipe

In CRM Analytics, use the toolbar or keyboard shortcuts to copy and paste nodes within a single recipe or across multiple ones. To use
this feature, enable clipboard access permissions in your browser.
1. In a Data Prep recipe, select one or more nodes to copy or cut.
973
2. From the toolbar, click or press Ctrl+c to copy, click or press Ctrl+x to cut, or click duplicate, which copies and pastes
in one step. To delete a node, click or press Ctrl+d.
3. Click or press Ctrl+v to paste.

The copied image displays below the original.
Keyboard Shortcuts for Building Data Prep Recipes

Perform basic actions from your keyboard in CRM Analytics.
Global Shortcuts Description
Ctrl+F (Windows) Move to the search bar.
974
Global Shortcuts Description

Cmd+F (macOS)
Ctrl+/ (Windows) Open or close Data Prep Keyboard Shortcuts.
Cmd+/ (macOS)
Ctrl+O (Windows) Add input data.
Cmd+O (macOS)
Ctrl+Z (Windows) Undo last action.
Cmd+Z (macOS)
Ctrl+Y (Windows) Redo last undone action.
Cmd+Y (macOS)
Ctrl+D (Windows) Toggle Data Preview on or off.
Cmd+D (macOS)
Ctrl+V (Windows) Open or close the Version History panel.
Cmd+V (macOS)
Ctrl+S (Windows) Save.
Cmd+S (macOS)
Recipe Graph Keyboard Shortcuts Description

Arrow key Move to the next outgoing node.
Arrow key Move to the closest incoming node.
Arrow key Move to the nearest node below.
Arrow key Move to the nearest node above.
Shift+B Open node’s Add Branch menu.
Tab Move to the next group of connected nodes.
Shift+C Move to the next outgoing link.
975

As a best practice in CRM Analytics, catch mistakes early by reviewing the results of each node and
USER PERMISSIONS
transformation that you add to a Data Prep recipe.
Watch a Demo: Preview Recipe Changes to Data (English Only) To create a recipe:
The preview shows a sample of the data—up to 5,000 rows. It shows the latest available data, Dataflows OR Edit
except when you preview a connected object. When previewing a connected object, the preview Dataset Recipes
might show outdated sample data. The sample data for a connected object updates when you run
data sync and the sample data is more than 24 hours old. For example, if the data sync just ran, but
your sample data isn’t more than 24 hours old, you won’t see the updated sample data right away.
Note: The column profile is also based on the sample data. It also doesn’t include changes to the connected object data within
the last 24 hours.
1. In the Data Prep recipe, select a node in the graph to view its results.
For example, selecting an Aggregate node shows the following preview results.
If you add a Filter node, the preview filters the currently sampled rows. For example, the recipe processes 20,000 rows. The preview
shows 5,000 sample rows for the Aggregate node. If you add a Filter node after the Aggregate node, you might see only 4,000 of
the same sampled rows. The preview doesn’t retrieve an updated sample of 5,000 rows for the Filter node.
2. If needed, edit the node to ensure it produces the correct results.

3. In a Transform node, select a transformation step.
For example, selecting a Formula transformation that concatenates the billing state and country shows the following results.
976
4. If needed, edit the transformation to ensure it produces the correct results. When the data preview for a node doesn’t complete
immediately, view the preview build status at a glance with the progress wheel. Mouse over the wheel to see the percent built.
5. To focus on columns that are impacted by a node or transformation, hide a column from the preview. Select a column in the Preview
tab and click Hide ( ). Hiding a column from preview doesn’t remove it from the recipe.
6. To view the columns only and hide the data, click the Columns tab.
7. To save the recipe, click Save.
Example: To increase performance when previewing results in Data Prep, hide columns that don’t require a preview, such as
columns that aren’t transformed by a node or transformation. By default, the first 100 columns of each source object in an input
node are shown in preview. To hide a column from preview, select it and then click the Hide button in the Transform toolbar.
To further increase preview performance, hide all unused columns. Click the Hide Unused button from the Transform toolbar.
If data preview is still delayed, disable data preview. You can always turn it back on when you want to see your progress.
977

In CRM Analytics, run column profiling on sample data to estimate key stats about columns, such as the frequency of values and percent
of columns with missing values. Column profiling is especially useful when you are combining data from different sources, where
inconsistencies are often introduced. Column profiles are available only for columns shown in preview.
Column profiling works on the latest available data, except when you profile columns from a connected object. If you profile a column
from a connected object, the profile can be based on outdated sample data. The sample doesn’t include changes to the connected
object data within the last 24 hours. The sample data for a connected object updates when you run data sync and the sample data is
more than 24 hours old. For example, if the data sync just ran, but your sample data isn’t more than 24 hours old, the sample data isn’t
updated right away.
To run a column profile, select the column in the Preview or Columns tab, and then click . The Profile tab shows different results
based on the data type of the column. Use the results to understand the shape of the data and identify potential data quality issues. The
statistics provided for column profiles are based on sample rows, not all rows in the recipe.
The Profile tab shows the following information.

• Valid values—Valid values are values that aren’t missing.
• Missing values—Missing values, which include nulls and empty strings (””), can lead to skewed calculations. For more information,
see Handle Missing Values.
• Zero values—For measures, the column profile shows the count of zeroes.
• Frequent values—The Frequent Values chart shows the top dimension values by count (based on the sample), sorted in descending
order. To see the percentage of the sample total, hover over a bar. In the following example, Florida (FL) represents 8.7% of all sample
values in the Billing State/Province column.
978
• Histogram—The histogram shows the shape of the sample data for measure and date columns. Shape refers to the distribution of
the data over equal-length ranges. Use the histogram to understand the shape of the data and identify outliers. Outliers are important
because they can distort calculation results. For a measure column profile, the histogram shows the count of rows, maximum value,
minimum value, median value, and average value for each range. To see the percentage of the sample total, hover over a bar. For a
date column profile, the histogram shows the count of rows for the selected date grouping. You can group by different time frames,
including Year-Month, Year-Quarter, Year, Quarter, and Month.
979
The Attributes tab shows the label, API name, and data type of the selected column. For measure columns, it also shows the scale. For
dimension columns, it also indicates whether the column contains multiple values.
Limitations When Using Data Prep

Consider the following Data Prep limitations before building recipes.
Some functionality isn’t available, including these features.
• You can’t use Data Prep Classic, the old version, to open recipes created with Data Prep.
Manage Recipes
After you create a recipe, use the Recipes tab to edit and delete them.

In CRM Analytics, open or edit recipes by selecting Edit from a recipe's action menu. By default, all recipes open with Data Prep.
When you edit a Data Prep Classic recipe, the recipe upgrades to and opens with Data Prep.
Restore a Previous Version of a Recipe
Test new ideas on recipes in CRM Analytics. If you break a recipe, you can revert to a previous version. For recipes with multiple
collaborators, each version displays the name of the contributor who made an update.
Revert a Data Prep Recipe to Data Prep Classic
By default, when you open a Data Prep Classic recipe, it upgrades to and opens in Data Prep. If the upgraded version has any issues,
you can revert it to the Data Prep Classic version. The recipe reverts to the last saved Data Prep Classic version. CRM Analytics also
creates a copy of the Data Prep recipe so you don’t lose changes made in Data Prep.
Delete a Recipe
In CRM Analytics, delete recipes that you no longer need. Deleting a recipe does not delete its target dataset.
980

In CRM Analytics, open or edit recipes by selecting Edit from a recipe's action menu. By default, all
EDITIONS
recipes open with Data Prep. When you edit a Data Prep Classic recipe, the recipe upgrades to and
opens with Data Prep. Available in: Salesforce
1. In Data Manager, click Recipes Classic and Lightning
Experience
2. To edit a recipe in Data Prep, click the actions button ( ) to the right of the recipe, and then
click Edit. Available for an additional
cost in: Enterprise,
Performance, and
Unlimited Editions
USER PERMISSIONS
To manage and create a

recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
3. Edit the recipe.

4. Save the recipe.
For information about editing recipes created with Data Prep Classic in Data Prep Classic, see Revert a Data Prep Recipe to Data Prep
Classic.
Restore a Previous Version of a Recipe

Test new ideas on recipes in CRM Analytics. If you break a recipe, you can revert to a previous version. For recipes with multiple collaborators,
each version displays the name of the contributor who made an update.
1.
To view a recipe’s version history, click the Version History button ( ).
981
2. To view a previous version, click the date of the version.

3. To make sure you don’t lose changes to a version, save the changes before switching to another version. Saving changes to an old
version makes it the current version.
4. To add a description to a version, click the down arrow ( ) next to the version date and click Add Description.
Example: Data Prep can store up to 20 versions for each recipe—10 with descriptions and 10 without. The latest versions are
always kept. For example, if there are 10 versions with descriptions and another version with a description is added, the oldest
one with a description is deleted.
982
Revert a Data Prep Recipe to Data Prep Classic

By default, when you open a Data Prep Classic recipe, it upgrades to and opens in Data Prep. If the
EDITIONS
upgraded version has any issues, you can revert it to the Data Prep Classic version. The recipe reverts
to the last saved Data Prep Classic version. CRM Analytics also creates a copy of the Data Prep recipe Available in: Salesforce
so you don’t lose changes made in Data Prep. Classic and Lightning
1. In CRM Analytics, click Data Manager in the left pane. Experience
Data manager opens in a new browser tab.
Available for an additional
2. In Data Manager, click Dataflows & Recipes. cost in: Enterprise,
Performance, and
3. In the Dataflows & Recipes tab, click Recipes.
Unlimited Editions
The Recipes subtab displays a list of existing recipes created in either Data Prep or Data Prep
Classic.
4. To revert a Data Prep recipe to Data Prep Classic, click the actions button ( USER PERMISSIONS
) to the right of
the recipe, and then click Revert to Data Prep Classic Recipe. To manage and create a
The Revert to Data Prep Classic Recipe option appears only for recipes that were created with recipe:
Data Prep Classic and upgraded to Data Prep. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
The reverted recipe opens in Data Prep Classic. This recipe version is the last saved recipe in Data Prep Classic—the one that was
previously upgraded to Data Prep. This version doesn’t contain changes made with Data Prep.
5. When you’re done, save the recipe in Data Prep Classic.
The Recipes subtab shows two versions of the recipe, one Data Prep Classic version (the reverted one) and one Data Prep version (a
backup copy). Both recipes have the same name. The recipe with the Information icon ( ) is the Data Prep Classic version.
983
6. To distinguish the two recipes, rename the Data Prep recipe. To change the name, edit it and rename it in Data Prep.
Both recipes also write to the same dataset. The dataset updates each time you run either recipe. Lenses and dashboards based on
this dataset show the latest data based on the last run recipe.
7. To edit the Data Prep Classic recipe in Data Prep Classic, click the actions button ( ) to the right of the recipe, and then click Open
with Data Prep Classic.
The Open with Data Prep Classic option appears only for recipes reverted to Data Prep Classic.
8. To edit the Data Prep Classic recipe with Data Prep, click the actions button ( ) to the right of the recipe, and then click Edit.
After you save the recipe in Data Prep, the recipe upgrades to Data Prep. You no longer see the Information icon because it’s no
longer a Data Prep Classic recipe. If you didn’t rename the previous Data Prep recipe, you now have two Data Prep recipes with the
same name.
984
If needed, you can revert the latest Data Prep recipe to Data Prep Classic.
Delete a Recipe
In CRM Analytics, delete recipes that you no longer need. Deleting a recipe does not delete its target dataset.
1. In Data Manager, click Recipes.
2. Click to the right of the recipe that you want to delete, and then select Delete.
Run Data Sync and Recipes to Create and Refresh Datasets

Whether you use local Salesforce data or pull data from an external source, you must set up CRM Analytics to load the data, make it
available to CRM Analytics, and keep it up to date.
To get the latest data, always run a data sync job to synchronize your data with the source before you run your recipe to load data into
the dataset. To run these jobs on an ongoing basis, schedule syncs and recipes to run automatically and as frequently as needed. As you
plan your strategy for loading and keeping data up to date, consider the CRM Analytics limits on your datasets and jobs.
Run Data Sync to Synchronize Source Data in CRM Analytics

Make sure that the data available to CRM Analytics matches the data in your source, whether its Salesforce or an external data source.
You can manually run or schedule each sync.
Run a Recipe
Run a CRM Analytics recipe for the first time to create the dataset it defines. Run a recipe again to update the dataset with the latest
synced data. You can run a recipe manually or on a schedule.
Run a Dataflow
Like recipes, you can run dataflows manually or schedule them to run automatically at regular intervals to create your datasets and
keep the data up to date. You can also stop a dataflow while it’s running.
985
Schedule Smarter with Priority Scheduling

Priority scheduling for CRM Analytics recipes automatically manages your run queue. It prioritizes smaller and faster runs while
ensuring that larger and longer runs are completed on time. Priority is automatically calculated based on factors such as historic
runtime, dataset input size, and CSV file size. Priority scheduling is most helpful to smooth out occasional queue-time spikes. If you
never or frequently see long queue times, then priority scheduling isn’t as helpful. Activate the feature in advance to manage your
queue, not during a problem when your queue is already overloaded. This feature doesn’t increase your maximum number of
concurrent runs.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
Run Data Sync to Synchronize Source Data in CRM Analytics

Make sure that the data available to CRM Analytics matches the data in your source, whether its Salesforce or an external data source.
You can manually run or schedule each sync.

Run data sync manually the first time to make the data available in CRM Analytics to build recipes. Schedule subsequent syncs to
regularly update the data.
To ensure that the latest source data is loaded into datasets, schedule data syncs to pull data into CRM Analytics before the
corresponding recipes. You schedule data sync for each connection, where all objects under the connection sync at the specified
time, and not individual objects. To sync objects from the same data source on different intervals, create multiple connections to
the data source, and set a unique schedule for each connection.
SEE ALSO:
986

Run data sync manually the first time to make the data available in CRM Analytics to build recipes.
EDITIONS
Schedule subsequent syncs to regularly update the data.
Note: Data sync jobs don’t count towards your daily recipe run limit. Available in Salesforce
1. In data manager, click the Connections tab to display the list of objects enabled for sync Experience.
grouped by connection.
Available with CRM
2. To show and hide the list of objects, click the connection name. Analytics, which is available
3. To run sync for all objects in a connection, click to the right of the connection name, and for an extra cost in
select Run Now. The connection is queued to sync.
4. To run sync for a single remote object, click to the right of the object name, and select Run available in Developer
Data Sync. Edition.
5. To run sync for a single local Salesforce object, first select the connection mode you want to
use. Click to the right of the local object name, and select Edit Connection Mode. USER PERMISSIONS
6. Choose from the following:
To run sync:
a. Incremental Sync updates only rows that changed since the last sync. It’s the fastest • Edit CRM Analytics
option. Dataflows
b. Periodic Full Sync updates rows incrementally and periodically overwrites all rows with
records in the Salesforce object.
c. Full Sync updates all rows with records in the Salesforce object.
7. Click Save.
8. Click again, and select Run Data Sync. Use the Jobs Monitor tab of Data Manager to see the status of your sync.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
987

To ensure that the latest source data is loaded into datasets, schedule data syncs to pull data into
EDITIONS
CRM Analytics before the corresponding recipes. You schedule data sync for each connection,
where all objects under the connection sync at the specified time, and not individual objects. To Available in Salesforce
sync objects from the same data source on different intervals, create multiple connections to the Classic and Lightning
data source, and set a unique schedule for each connection. Experience.
Note: Data sync jobs don’t count towards your daily recipe run limit. To ensure that sync Available with CRM
completes before the recipe starts, use event-based scheduling for the recipe. Analytics, which is available
1. In data manager, click the Connections tab to display the list of objects enabled for sync for an extra cost in
grouped by connection. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Click to the right of the connection that you want to schedule, and select Schedule. The available in Developer
scheduler appears. Edition.
3. Select the time to run the recipe. You can schedule it to run by minute, hour, week, or month.
CRM Analytics runs the data sync according to the time zone of the user who set the schedule. USER PERMISSIONS
4. If you schedule the recipe to run by minute or hour, select Stop queuing at a specific time
to stop the recipe from running after a certain time. For example, to restrict runs to office hours, To schedule sync:
set a job to start at 8:00 am, run every hour, and stop at 6:00 pm. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
5. Click Save. Schedule information for the connection displays in the connection header.
Schedules for data sync, dataflow, and recipes are removed 30 days after the last save in Sandbox
and Developer edition orgs, and 10 days after the last save in Trial orgs. Users subscribed to notifications receive an email when a schedule
is removed. Set the schedule again at any time.
When you deactivate a user who scheduled a data sync, the schedule is deleted and the data sync is unscheduled.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
988

EDITIONS
1. In data manager, click the Jobs Monitor tab to display the list of jobs.
2. Data sync jobs are marked with (Replication).
Experience.
SEE ALSO:
Available with CRM
Why are my data sync and recipe runs getting canceled? Analytics, which is available
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To monitor sync:
Dataflows
Run a Recipe
Run a CRM Analytics recipe for the first time to create the dataset it defines. Run a recipe again to
EDITIONS
update the dataset with the latest synced data. You can run a recipe manually or on a schedule.
Run a Recipe Manually Classic and Lightning
Run a CRM Analytics recipe for the first time to create the datasets it defines. Run it again to Experience.
update the dataset with the latest synced data. Available with CRM
Schedule a Recipe to Run Automatically Analytics, which is available
You can schedule a CRM Analytics recipe to run at a specific time or after an event. Use for an extra cost in
time-based scheduling to ensure that fresh data is available by a particular time or to run the Enterprise, Performance,
job during non-business hours. You can schedule a recipe to run hourly, weekly, monthly, or
on specific days of the week or dates. Use event-based scheduling to run a recipe after the sync
Edition.
runs to ensure that datasets include the latest data. If you split data prep across multiple recipes,
use event-based scheduling to chain these recipes together to obtain the desired outcome
automatically. USER PERMISSIONS
Monitor a Recipe Job To create a recipe:
The Jobs subtab on the Monitor tab shows the status of data sync and recipe CRM Analytics • Edit CRM Analytics
jobs. You can view error messages about a job, view the run-time details about every Dataflows OR Edit
transformation that is processed, and monitor the number of jobs remaining from your org’s Dataset Recipes
24-hour limit.
Set Recipe Notifications
Get notified when your scheduled recipe runs.
989
Run a Recipe Manually

Run a CRM Analytics recipe for the first time to create the datasets it defines. Run it again to update
EDITIONS
the dataset with the latest synced data.
1. In data manager, click the Recipes tab. Available in Salesforce
2. Click the triangle to the right of the recipe name you want to run, and select Run Now.
Experience.
Note: To secure access to sensitive data in datasets and connected objects, you also need
Available with CRM
the Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows user permission when working with recipes. With that
permission, you can: for an extra cost in
• Use connected objects in a recipe. Enterprise, Performance,
• Edit security predicates in existing recipes, which allows you to grant others, including and Unlimited Editions. Also
yourself, access to more rows in the dataset.
Edition.
• Run or schedule recipes that pull data from existing datasets with security predicates.
USER PERMISSIONS
Users with the Edit Dataset Recipes permission but without the Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows
permission can: To run a recipe:
• Edit Dataset Recipes OR
• Create a recipe that outputs datasets to their private app only.
Edit CRM Analytics
• Run and schedule recipes that write to datasets that don’t have security predicates. Dataflows
• Use a recipe to extract data from a dataset with a security predicate, but can’t change the
predicate on the resulting dataset.
SEE ALSO:
Monitor a Recipe Job
CRM Anaytics Limits
Why is my scheduled recipe not running as expected?
990
Schedule a Recipe to Run Automatically

You can schedule a CRM Analytics recipe to run at a specific time or after an event. Use time-based
EDITIONS
scheduling to ensure that fresh data is available by a particular time or to run the job during
non-business hours. You can schedule a recipe to run hourly, weekly, monthly, or on specific days Available in Salesforce
of the week or dates. Use event-based scheduling to run a recipe after the sync runs to ensure that Classic and Lightning
datasets include the latest data. If you split data prep across multiple recipes, use event-based Experience.
scheduling to chain these recipes together to obtain the desired outcome automatically.
Available with CRM
1. In Data Manager, on the Recipes tab, click the triangle next to the recipe name, and select Analytics, which is available
Schedule. for an extra cost in
2. To run the recipe at a specific time, under Schedule Mode, select Time-based. Enterprise, Performance,
a. Select the time to run the recipe. CRM Analytics runs the recipe according to the time zone
of the user who set the schedule.
Edition.
If you have a CRM Analytics Plus license, you can set the schedule to run every 5, 15, 20, or
30 minutes. This feature isn’t available in sandbox orgs.
USER PERMISSIONS
b. If you schedule the recipe to run by minute or hour, select Stop queuing at a specific
To run a recipe:
time to stop the schedule from adding more recipe runs to the queue after a certain time.
• Edit Dataset Recipes OR
For example, to restrict runs to office hours, set a job to start at 8:00 AM, run every hour,
Edit CRM Analytics
and stop at 5:00 PM. If you don’t select a time, the schedule stops adding recipe runs to the Dataflows
queue at 11:59 PM.
3. To schedule the recipe to run after its related data sync, external connection sync, CSV upload,
or another recipe finishes, under Schedule Mode, select Event-based.
a. Select the events to run the recipe schedule after. You can select one or more events. For example, if the recipe pulls data from
the Salesforce Accounts and Opportunities objects and uses data from an external connection, select both The Salesforce local
syncs and The Salesforce external connection syncs.
b. If you select The selected CSVs are updated or dataflow/recipes run, choose the CSVs, recipes, or dataflows from the list to
trigger this schedule. Use this option to wait for fresh data or to run another preceding recipe or dataflow first. You can make
multiple selections of different types, but each selection increases the complexity of the schedule. Only recipe runs that were
successful or completed with warnings trigger this schedule. Only CSVs that have been uploaded in the last 30 days are available
in the list. If you don’t see a CSV you need, upload it again. The maximum dependent jobs for an event-based schedule is 5.
c. An event-based schedule is triggered after a sync on objects from local Salesforce orgs, a sync on objects from external connections,
and uploads from CSVs. When you use data from multiple connections in a recipe or dataflow, event-based scheduling runs
after all the connected objects are synced. For example, if a local connection is scheduled to sync hourly and an external connection
syncs daily, an event-based scheduled recipe using data from both runs daily.
991
When using a single local connection, the job only waits for the objects used in the recipe to sync before it triggers the recipe
to run. It doesn't wait for any unrelated objects to complete their data sync.
4. Click Save.
Schedules for data sync, dataflow, and recipes are removed 30 days after the last save in Sandbox and Developer edition orgs, and
10 days after the last save in Trial orgs. Users subscribed to notifications receive an email when a schedule is removed. Set the
schedule again at any time.
If the schedule is deleted, the scheduler shows who unscheduled it and when. When you deactivate a user who scheduled a recipe, the
recipe schedule is deleted and the recipe is unscheduled.
Note: To secure access to sensitive data in datasets and connected objects, you also need the Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows user
permission when working with recipes. With that permission, you can:
• Use connected objects in a recipe.
992
• Edit security predicates in existing recipes, which allows you to grant others, including yourself, access to more rows in the
dataset.
Users with the Edit Dataset Recipes permission but without the Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows permission can:
• Create a recipe that outputs datasets to their private app only.
• Run and schedule recipes that write to datasets that don’t have security predicates.
• Use a recipe to extract data from a dataset with a security predicate, but can’t change the predicate on the resulting dataset.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits

The Jobs subtab on the Monitor tab shows the status of data sync and recipe CRM Analytics jobs.
EDITIONS
You can view error messages about a job, view the run-time details about every transformation
that is processed, and monitor the number of jobs remaining from your org’s 24-hour limit. Available in Salesforce
1. In data manager, click the Jobs Monitor tab. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2.
Click to see the latest status of a job. Each job can have one of these statuses.
Available with CRM
Status Description for an extra cost in
Running The job is running Enterprise, Performance,
Failed The job failed. available in Developer
Edition.
Successful The job completed successfully.
Warning The job completed successfully, but some USER PERMISSIONS

rows failed.
To monitor a recipe:
Queued The job is waiting for other jobs to complete
before it runs. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
3. If the job fails or completes with a warning, click the job name to get more details.
4. If there’s a problem with the recipe logic, edit the recipe and then run it again.
5. To get details about a running job, like progress, who started it, or why it was canceled, click the job ID.
SEE ALSO:
993

Get notified when your scheduled recipe runs.
EDITIONS
1. In data manager, click the Recipes tab.
2. Click the triangle to the right of the recipe name, and select Notification.
3. In the Notify Me About picklist, select what you want to be notified about. You can choose Experience.
warnings, failures, or all events.
Available with CRM
4. To receive a notification when the run takes longer than the specified time, select Elapsed Analytics, which is available
time notification, and then select the number of hours and minutes. for an extra cost in
Note: By default, email notifications are sent only to the person setting the notifications.
Other users with the Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows or Edit Dataset Recipes permission can
set up their own notifications.
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To set a recipe notification:

Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
Run a Dataflow
Like recipes, you can run dataflows manually or schedule them to run automatically at regular intervals to create your datasets and keep
the data up to date. You can also stop a dataflow while it’s running.
Run a Dataflow Manually

Run a dataflow for the first time to create the datasets it defines. Run it again to update the dataset with the latest synced data.
Schedule a Dataflow to Run Automatically
You can schedule a dataflow to run after an event, such as when a sync job completes. Or you can schedule it to run hourly, weekly,
monthly, or on specific days of the week or dates.
Monitor a Dataflow Job
In Data Manager, the Monitor's Dataflows tab shows status, start time, and duration of the last 10 dataflow jobs. It retains the last 7
days of job history. You can view error messages about each job, view the run-time details about every transformation that is
processed, monitor the number of jobs remaining from your org’s 24-hour limit, and download error logs.
Restore a Previous Version of a Dataflow
CRM Analytics uses version history to create copies of dataflows when you edit them so you can restore a previous version.
Set Dataflow Notifications
Set dataflow notifications to receive an email notification when a dataflow job finishes. You can be notified only when there are
warnings, only when the dataflow fails, or every time the dataflow finishes. You can also set an elapsed time notification to notify
you when a dataflow is still running after a specified length of time.
994

Run a dataflow for the first time to create the datasets it defines. Run it again to update the dataset
EDITIONS
with the latest synced data.
1. In CRM Analytics, click Data Manager in the left pane to open Data Manager. Available in Salesforce
Data Manager opens to the Monitor tab with the Jobs view selected. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. Click the Dataflows & Recipes tab.
Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To run a dataflow:
Dataflows
3. Click the triangle to the right of the dataflow you want to run, and select Run Now.
The dataflow job is added to the job queue. The Start action is grayed out while the dataflow job runs.
4. After the job completes, CRM Analytics sends an email notification to the user who created the dataflow.
The email notification indicates whether the job completed successfully. It also shows job details like start time, end time, duration,
and number of processed rows. If the job failed, the notification shows the reason for the failure.
Note: If the dataflow creator is not an active user, the notification is sent to the user who last modified the dataflow schedule
or definition file.
5.
To stop a dataflow job that is currently running, click next to the job status.
If you click Start to restart a stopped dataflow, the job starts over—the dataflow job does not resume from the point at which it
was stopped.
995
Note: A dataflow automatically restarts if it is forcibly terminated by an external process like patches to the OS or Maestro,
specifically bifrost.
You can monitor the dataflow job on the Monitor tab to determine when the dataflow completes. After the dataflow completes
successfully, refresh the CRM Analytics home page to view the registered dataset.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits

You can schedule a dataflow to run after an event, such as when a sync job completes. Or you can
EDITIONS
schedule it to run hourly, weekly, monthly, or on specific days of the week or dates.
Use event-based scheduling to run a dataflow after the sync runs to ensure that datasets include Available in: Salesforce
up-to-the-minute data. Use time-based scheduling to ensure that fresh data is available by a Classic and Lightning
particular time, or to run the job during non-business hours. Experience.
1. In Analytics, click Data Manager in the left pane to open Data Manager. Available for an extra cost in
Data Manager opens to the Monitor tab with the Jobs view selected. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Click the triangle to the right of the dataflow you want to run, and select Schedule. Edition
USER PERMISSIONS
To schedule a dataflow job:

Dataflows
The scheduler appears.

4. To schedule the dataflow to run after its related data sync, recipe, or dataflow finishes, choose Event-based under Schedule Mode.
996
a. Select the event-based scheduling mode that includes all sources of data that contribute to your dataflow. For example, if the
dataflow pulls data from the Salesforce Accounts and Opportunities objects, and uses data generated by another dataflow, select
The Salesforce local connections sync and the selected recipes or dataflows runs
b. If you selected an event-based scheduling mode that waits on recipes or dataflows to run, select up to 5 from the list. Use this
option to await fresh data or coordinate running another preceding recipe or dataflow first. Only runs that were successful or
completed with warnings trigger this run. To increase the number of prerequisite recipes or dataflows you can choose, contact
Salesforce Customer Support.
Note: Event-based schedules are triggered only by completed data sync of local objects in the dataflow’s sfdcDigest nodes
through a scheduled run, manual run, or another successful dataflow run. Data syncs from remote connections, including
Salesforce remote orgs, don’t trigger event-based schedules. When you use data from multiple local connections in a recipe
or dataflow, event-based scheduling will run only after all local connections are synced. For example, if one local connection
is scheduled to sync hourly and another syncs daily, an event-based scheduled recipe using data from both runs one time
daily.
5. To run the dataflow at a specific time, select Time-based under Schedule Mode. Select the time to run the dataflow. You can
schedule the dataflow to run by minute, hour, week, or month.
CRM Analytics runs the dataflow according to the time zone of the user who set the schedule.
6. If you schedule the dataflow to run by minute or hour, optionally select Stop queuing at a specific time to stop the schedule from
adding more dataflow runs to the queue after a certain time. For example, to restrict runs to office hours, set a job to start at 8:00
am, run every hour, and stop at 5:00 pm. If you don’t select a time, the schedule stops adding dataflow runs to the queue at 11:59
PM.
7. Click Save.
997
Schedules for data sync, dataflow, and recipes are removed 30 days after the last save in Sandbox and Developer edition orgs, and 10
days after the last save in Trial orgs. Users subscribed to notifications receive an email when a schedule is removed. Set the schedule
again at any time.
To cancel the scheduled dataflow, select Unschedule from the dataflow’s menu.
When you deactivate a user who scheduled a dataflow, the dataflow schedule is deleted and the dataflow is unscheduled.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits
998

In Data Manager, the Monitor's Dataflows tab shows status, start time, and duration of the last 10
EDITIONS
dataflow jobs. It retains the last 7 days of job history. You can view error messages about each job,
view the run-time details about every transformation that is processed, monitor the number of jobs Available in Salesforce
remaining from your org’s 24-hour limit, and download error logs. Classic and Lightning
1. On the Monitor tab of Data Manager, click Dataflows (1). Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To access the monitor:

Dataflows, Upload
External Data to CRM
Analytics, or Manage
CRM Analytics
To download an error log:
Dataflows and View All
Data
Note: The View
All Data
permission is
required to
download an
error log run by
another user. The
user who ran the
dataflow or
uploaded a CSV
is able to
download the
error log without
the View All Data
permission.
999
Note: Duration is calculated as the sum of the job queue time and job run time.
2. Monitor the flow indicator to see how many dataflow and recipe jobs can be run in a rolling 24-hour period.
Note: Runs less than 2 minutes in duration, and data sync, don’t count toward this limit. To request a higher 24-hour limit,
contact Salesforce Support.
3.
Click to see the latest status of a job.
Each job can have one of these statuses.
Status Description
Running The job is running.
Failed The job failed.
Warning The job completed successfully, but some rows failed.
4. If the dataflow job fails, expand the job node (2) to view the run-time details for every transformation that was processed.
5. If an error log is available for a node, click the download log button (3) to download a CSV file containing the failed rows.
1000
Note: Error logs display the data from rows that have failed to load. To maintain data security and prevent unauthorized
access to this data, only the dataflow owner or users with the View All Data permission can download an error log.
6. If there’s a problem with the dataflow logic, edit the dataflow and then run it again.
SEE ALSO:
Why are my data sync and recipe runs getting canceled?
Restore a Previous Version of a Dataflow

CRM Analytics uses version history to create copies of dataflows when you edit them so you can restore a previous version.
1. In CRM Analytics, click Data Manager in the left pane. Data Manager opens to the Monitor tab with the Jobs view selected.
3.
Open a dataflow, then click the history icon (1). All versions of the dataflow appear in the Versions panel (2), with the live version
on top.
4. Revert to a previous version by clicking its name, such as Change 2, then click Update Dataflow (3).
5. To delete a previous version, click the dropdown (4) and click Delete.
For details, see Backup and Restore Previous Versions of Analytics Assets with History API.

Set dataflow notifications to receive an email notification when a dataflow job finishes. You can be
USER PERMISSIONS
notified only when there are warnings, only when the dataflow fails, or every time the dataflow
finishes. You can also set an elapsed time notification to notify you when a dataflow is still running To set a dataflow
after a specified length of time. notification:
Important: By default, dataflow notifications are set to send warnings and failures to the Dataflows
dataflow creator. You must manually override the notification settings to prevent notifications
from being sent.
1.
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then click Data Manager.
The data manager opens on the Monitor tab, with the Jobs tab open by default.
1001
3. On the right of the dataflow, click and select Notifications.
4. From the Notify Me About picklist, select what you want to be notified about.
5. To receive an elapsed time notification, select All Events from the Notify Me About options. Then select Elapsed time notification
and select the number of hours and minutes.
1002
Note: By default, email notifications are sent only to the person setting the notifications. Other people with the Edit Analytics
Dataflows permission can subscribe to a dataflow by setting notifications.
Schedule Smarter with Priority Scheduling

Priority scheduling for CRM Analytics recipes automatically manages your run queue. It prioritizes
EDITIONS
smaller and faster runs while ensuring that larger and longer runs are completed on time. Priority
is automatically calculated based on factors such as historic runtime, dataset input size, and CSV Available in Salesforce
file size. Priority scheduling is most helpful to smooth out occasional queue-time spikes. If you never Classic and Lightning
or frequently see long queue times, then priority scheduling isn’t as helpful. Activate the feature in Experience.
advance to manage your queue, not during a problem when your queue is already overloaded.
This feature doesn’t increase your maximum number of concurrent runs. Available with CRM
For example, you schedule three recipes to run at the same time. One is larger with more rows and for an extra cost in
runs for 30 minutes. The other two are smaller with fewer rows and run for three minutes. The larger Enterprise, Performance,
recipe’s run request arrives a millisecond before the shorter requests. Without priority scheduling, and Unlimited Editions. Also
requested runs are queued first in, first out, so the smaller runs wait 30 minutes until the larger run available in Developer
finishes. With priority scheduling, the smaller recipes execute first because of their shorter run time, Edition.
followed by the larger run. If higher-priority runs continue to queue in front of the longer run, the
queue temporarily switches to first in, first out an hour after the scheduled request.
2. Select Use priority scheduling for recipe and dataflow requests.
3. Click Save.
Note: You can disable priority scheduling at any time to return to a first in, first out queue.
SEE ALSO:
Run a Recipe Manually
Schedule a Recipe to Run Automatically

Dataflows and recipes can integrate most data from internal to external data sources. However, CRM Analytics provides additional ways
to integrate data that are more effective for specific use cases. For example, if you don’t have to transform data before loading it into a
dataset, you can import data directly from CSV or Excel files. If you need to transform it, you can upload the file to create an intermediate
dataset, and then use a recipe or dataflow to change that data before loading the results into another dataset. Or, to analyze Salesforce
report data over time, you can create a dataset and dashboard that trends the report with just a few clicks. With trending, CRM Analytics
creates a dataset based on snapshots of your Salesforce report data.
Design Datasets with Dataflows and the Dataset Builder

Use a dataflow to create one or more datasets based on source data from existing datasets or synced data. A dataflow is a set of
instructions that specifies what input data to include, how to transform that data, and which datasets to load the transformed data
into.
1003
Clean, Transform, and Load Data with Data Prep Classic

Use a recipe to clean and combine data from multiple datasets or connected objects. Add bucket and formula fields, filter rows,
transform field values, convert field types, and standardize date formats. You can then output the results to a new target dataset.
Create Datasets from Uploaded CSV Files
Use the upload user interface to create a single dataset based on external .csv data. To refresh the data, you can overwrite the data
in the dataset by uploading a new .csv file.
Create Datasets Programmatically from CSV Files Using the External Data API
You can use the External Data API to create a single dataset based on external data in a .csv file. You can also use the API to edit the
dataset by uploading a new .csv file. When you edit the dataset, you can choose to overwrite all records, append records, update
records, or delete records.
Create Datasets Directly from Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets
The Salesforce CRM Analytics Connector for Excel makes it easy to import data from Microsoft Excel 2013 to CRM Analytics.
Creating Datasets and Trending Dashboards from Salesforce Reports
By creating trending CRM Analytics dashboards that track key metrics over time, you can make sense of your growing, ever-changing
datasets. Trending data in CRM Analytics helps you discover hidden insights and allows you to share them with colleagues. When
you create a trending dashboard based on a Salesforce report, CRM Analytics generates a dataset and a dashboard based on the
underlying Salesforce data.
SEE ALSO:

Use a dataflow to create one or more datasets based on source data from existing datasets or synced data. A dataflow is a set of instructions
that specifies what input data to include, how to transform that data, and which datasets to load the transformed data into.
To build a simple dataset from related Salesforce data, use Dataset Builder. To build more complex datasets that can include external
and transformed data, use Dataflow Editor. Both tools add the logic for building the datasets to a dataflow.
After you design a dataflow with either tool, run the dataflow to create the datasets. You can schedule a dataflow to refresh the data in
the datasets on a regular interval. You can create multiple dataflows if you want to run them on different intervals or break up the data
integration logic used to build your datasets. Just keep in mind that there’s a limit on the number of dataflows you can create in your
org.

Recipes and dataflows both prepare data. Compared to dataflows, recipes are newer and are recommended for functionality and
ease of use. Recipes allow you to preview the data as you transform it, while dataflows only show your node schema. For example,
recipes have more join types and transformations with built-in machine learning - such as Predict Missing Values and Detect Sentiment
- that aren’t available in dataflows. Recipes can also aggregate data to a higher level.
Converting a Dataflow to a Recipe
To use joins, aggregates, and sentiment detection in Data Prep, convert your dataflows to recipes with a click of a button. When you
generate a recipe, the original dataflow isn’t changed.
Design a Simple Dataset with Dataset Builder
Use Dataset Builder to create a single dataset based on data from one or more related Salesforce objects. Dataset Builder adds the
instructions for building the dataset to the specified dataflow. The dataset is created the next time the dataflow runs, and refreshes
each time the dataflow runs thereafter. To edit the dataflow, use the Dataflow Editor.
1004
Design Complex Datasets with Dataflow Editor

Use Dataflow Editor, a point-and-click interface, to build your dataflow logic from scratch. Add transformations to determine what
source data to use, how to transform that data, and which datasets to load the results into.
SEE ALSO:
CRM Anaytics Limits

Recipes and dataflows both prepare data. Compared to dataflows, recipes are newer and are recommended for functionality and ease
of use. Recipes allow you to preview the data as you transform it, while dataflows only show your node schema. For example, recipes
have more join types and transformations with built-in machine learning - such as Predict Missing Values and Detect Sentiment - that
aren’t available in dataflows. Recipes can also aggregate data to a higher level.
Note: Recipes and dataflows aren’t mutually exclusive. You can use both to meet more complex data preparation requirements.
For example, you can use a dataflow to generate an intermediate dataset, and then use that dataset as the source for a recipe to
perform additional transformations.
Recipe
Recipes are great for Salesforce admins and data experts who want to preview and transform data.
With a recipe you can:
• Work in an easy-to-use graphical interface.
• Preview your data and how it changes as you apply each transformation.
• Quickly remove columns or change column labels.
• Analyze the quality of your data with column profiles.
• Aggregate and join data.
• Use built-in machine learning such as detect sentiment, data clustering, and time series forecasting.
• Bucket values without having to write complex SAQL expressions.
• Create calculated columns with a visual formula builder.
• Use a point-and-click interface to easily transform values to ensure data consistency. For example, you can bucket, trim, split, and
replace values without a formula.
• See the history of all your changes, and back up or move forward to replay it.
• Push your prepared data to other systems with output connectors.
Dataflow
Dataflows are great for CRM Analytics developers who prefer to work in a visual editor and, if necessary, JSON.
With a dataflow you can:
• Design complex data preparation flows with the visual Dataflow Editor.
• Edit the underlying JSON for finer control.
• Perform calculations across rows to derive new data for trending analysis.
• Apply complex filters.
1005
Note: The end-of-life date for dataflows hasn’t been set yet. You can continue to use dataflows if they’re effective and don’t
require any of the advanced recipe features. If you’re starting a new data prep process, consider using recipes first.
Transformation Comparison at a Glance

Still unsure which tool to choose? Use this table to compare which transformations are available in recipes and dataflows.
Note: CRM Analytics currently supports two versions of Data Prep. Data Prep is the newest version that replaces the previous
version, Data Prep Classic.
Feature Recipe Dataflow

Aggregate
Append
Bucket
(computeExpression transformation)
Calculate Expressions (across rows)
(Formula transformation) (computeRelative transformation)
Calculate Expressions (same row)
(Formula transformation) (computeExpression transformation)
Cluster
Convert Column Types
Date and Time
Delta
Detect Sentiment
Drop Columns
(sliceDataset transformation)
Edit (Column) Attributes
Extract Date Component
Extract Dataset Data
(Input node) (edgemart transformation)
Extract Salesforce Data
(Input node) (sfdcDigest transformation)
1006
Feature Recipe Dataflow

Extract Synced Data
(Input node) (digest transformation)
Filter
Flatten Hierarchies
Format Dates
Join
Lookup
(augment transformation)
Predict Missing Values
Predict Values
(prediction transformation)
Profile Column
Split
Time Series Forecasting
Update Values
(update node) (update transformation)
SEE ALSO:
Converting a Dataflow to a Recipe

To use joins, aggregates, and sentiment detection in Data Prep, convert your dataflows to recipes with a click of a button. When you
generate a recipe, the original dataflow isn’t changed.
Considerations
• The original dataflow and its sync schedule are unchanged.
• You don’t need a dataflow to create a recipe. See Create a Recipe with Data Prep.
• Conversion creates one corresponding recipe per dataflow. A dataflow can be converted multiple times with each conversion
replacing the corresponding recipe. For example, converting a dataflow a second time overwrites the recipe created during the first
conversion; it doesn’t yield two recipes.
1007
Tip: If you edit a converted recipe, save it as a new recipe to avoid it being overwritten.
• Recipes have more features than dataflows, but some parameters aren’t supported or the differences require review or modification.
See Dataflow Conversion Mapping.
Convert to Recipe
• In Data Manager (Legacy), use the dataflow’s options to select Convert to Recipe.
Note: Conversion requires valid dataflow with available input data sources. Best practice is to only convert dataflows that
have recently run successfully. Converting an invalid dataflow isn’t recommended.
• View the new recipe. Review warnings and errors.
1008
• Save and run the recipe.
Replace the Dataflow

• Verify the conversion process. Review the recipe’s output datasets and check them against the dataflow’s datasets.
• Update references. To have all your dashboards and references use the recipe’s datasets, rename the recipe’s output dataset API
names to match the dataflow’s dataset API names. Alternatively, update all your dashboards and other references to the new recipe
datasets.
The converted recipe outputs datasets with a “_df2R3” added to the end of the name. As a result, each dataset has two versions that
can be used to verify the conversion. After verification, it’s recommended to maintain one version and delete the second.
• Manage data job schedules. Unschedule the dataflow and schedule the recipe.
Using Recipes
Note these features when using recipes:
• When you make a direct data reference in a recipe, no data is stored in CRM Analytics. Each time a recipe uses direct data, a query
gets the current data. In Data Manager, SFDC_Local connections represent data stored in CRM analytics. Therefore, a direct data
reference isn’t included in SFDC_Local connections.
• When a recipe runs, the last run datetime for any SFDC_Local objects it uses isn’t updated. If a recipe runs using SFDC_Local data,
the recipe uses the data saved in the object by the last sync. Therefore, schedule the local object to sync before the recipe runs, for
example, by using event scheduling.
Dataflow Conversion Mapping

During conversion, dataflow functionality is mapped to similar recipe functionality. Consider the mapping specifications when
evaluating the conversion of your dataflows to recipes.
1009
Dataflow Conversion Mapping

During conversion, dataflow functionality is mapped to similar recipe functionality. Consider the mapping specifications when evaluating
the conversion of your dataflows to recipes.
Dataflow Transformations
At a glance dataflow to recipe conversion mapping.
Dataflow Conversion Recipe

append Append
augment Join
computeExpression Transform (Custom formula)
computeRelative Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
see parameters
delta
digest Input
dim2mea Transform (Dimension to measure)
edgemart Input
export Output (as .csv)
see parameters
filter Filter
flatten Transform (Flatten)
prediction Discovery Predict
sfdcDigest Input and Transform
see parameters
sfdcRegister Output
sliceDataset Transform (Drop columns)
update Update
1010
append
Dataflow Parameter Conversion Supported in Recipe

sources Append
enableDisjointedSchemaMerge Append (Allow schema merge)
augment

operation Join (lookup)
left Join (lookup)
left_key Join (lookup)
right Join (lookup)
relationship Join (lookup)
right_select Join (lookup)
right_key Join (lookup)
computeExpression

mergeWithSource Transform (Drop columns)
saqlExpression Transform (SQL in custom formula)
format Transform (Custom formula)
fiscalMonthOffset
Tip: Use Data Prep Date Configurations
See Data Prep Fiscal Configuration
isYearEndFiscalYear
firstDayOfWeek
precision Transform (Custom formula)
scale Transform (Custom formula)
1011

defaultValue Transform (Custom formula)
Warning: The defaultValue in dataflows support function calls.

For example, now(). In recipes, function calls aren’t supported
and the defaultValue must be a literal.
computeRelative

partitionBy Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
orderBy Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.name Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.label Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.description
computedFields.expression.sourceField Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.expression.offset Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.expression.default Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.expression.saqlExpression Transform (Custom formula with SQL)
Warning: Self-referencing formulas don’t convert and aren’t

supported. For example, using computeRelative to create a field
“MyNewField”, which has SAQL expression referencing
previous(MyNewField).
Tip: Achieve similar results using recipes.

For example, if using computeRelative in dataflow to:
• Aggregate based on data grouping, try using recipe Aggregate.
• Concatenate a column’s multiple text values into a column
based on a data grouping, try using recipe Join lookup with
multivalue and Transformation custom formula with
array_join.
• Generate row numbers, try using recipe Transformation custom
formula with row_number.
• Be used in a filter to keep only the most recent records based
on a data grouping - such as the last activity record for an
account, try using recipe Aggregate and Filter.
computedFields.expression.type Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
computedFields.expression.scale Transform (Custom formula with multiple rows)
1012
delta
Delta transform isn’t supported in Recipes. To calculate changes over time, consider using a transformation node with windowing
functions in multiple row custom formulas.
digest

connectionName Input
object Input
fields Input
dim2mea

measureDefault Transform (Dimension to measure)
measureType
edgemart
To extract all columns in a dataset, use the Include All Fields option in the Input node.

alias Input
export

source Output (to .csv)
target
userId
filter

filter Filter
saqlFilter Filter (SQL filter expression)
Warning: SAQL like operator may not be converted

(depending on complexity) and isn’t supported.
1013
Tip: Use recipe Transformation custom formula with

startsWith, endsWith, or contains.
flatten

include_self_id Transform (Flatten)
self_field Transform (Flatten)
parent_field Transform (Flatten)
multi_field Transform (Flatten)
path_field Transform (Flatten)
prediction

predictionDefinitionName Discovery Predict
predictionColumnName Discovery Predict
predictionColumnLabel Discovery Predict
sfdcDigest
Other JSON key-values are not supported in recipes. The dataflow’s JSON is added to the recipe Input node for reference, but doesn’t
function. For example, pkchunking JSON is added as text in the recipe’s input node description, but it doesn’t impact bulk
queries.

object Input
incremental
fullRefreshToken
fields Input
filterConditions Filter (Filter logic)
complexFilterConditions
Tip: Use Filter (SQL expression)
1014
Dataflow Field Attributes Conversion Supported in Recipe

name Input
defaultValue
Tip: Use Transform (Custom formula with case or coalesce)
type
Tip: Use Transform (Replace or Custom formula)
fiscalMonthOffset
isYearEndFiscalYear
firstDayOfWeek
isMultiValue
Tip: Use Transform (Custom formula multivalue functions)
See Multivalue Functions for Formulas
multiValueSeperator
Tip: Use Transform (Custom formula multivalue functions)
See Multivalue Functions for Formulas
precision
Tip: Use Transform (Edit attributes)
See Edit Attributes Transformation
scale
Tip: Use Transform (Edit attributes)
See Edit Attributes Transformation
sfdcRegister

alias Output
name Output
source Output
1015

rowLevelSharingSource Output
rowLevelSecurityFilter Output
sliceDataset

source Transform (Drop columns)
mode Transform (Drop columns)
fields Transform (Drop columns)
update

left Update
right Update
left_key Update
right_key Update
update_columns Update
Dataflow SAQL
Dataflows use SAQL and recipes use SQL. During conversion, SAQL is changed to SQL whenever possible.
Warning: SAQL date filtering, relative date ranges, and references to date epochs are not supported. Recommendation is to
evaluate supported solutions to replace dataflow SAQL date capabilities.
Tip: In recipes, try using simple operators with Dates or DateTimes such as +,-,=,<,>,<=,>=. For example, add hours by
using (DateTime) + (TimeInterval).
Below are instances when SAQL is not automatically converted to SQL, and the recommended SQL alternative.
Note: In recipes, use SQL in a Transform custom formula.
Dataflow (SAQL) Recipe (SQL)

DateField_sec_epoch to_unix_timestamp(DateField)
DateField_day_epoch to_unix_timestamp(DateField) / (60 * 60 * 24)
DateField_Year format_number(year(DateField), '0000')
DateField_Quarter format_number(quarter(DateField), ‘0')
1016
Dataflow (SAQL) Recipe (SQL)

DateField_Month format_number(month(DateField), '00')
DateField_Week format_number(weekofyear(DateField), '00')
DateField_Day format_number(day(DateField), '00')
DateField_Hour format_number(hour(DateField), '00')
DateField_Minute format_number(minute(DateField), '00')
DateField_Second format_number(second(DateField), '00')
toDate() to_timestamp()
date_to_epoch() to_unix_timestamp()
month_first_day(toDate('CloseDate_sec_epoch')) date_trunc('month', CloseDate)
month_last_day(toDate('CloseDate_sec_epoch')) date_trunc('month', CloseDate) + INTERVAL 1 month - INTERVAL

1 day
week_first_day(toDate('CloseDate_sec_epoch')) date_trunc('week', CloseDate)
Note: This function always returns Sunday of the week Note: This function always returns Monday of the week
Other first_day or last_day functions Use date_trunc on the different parts: 'year', 'quarter', 'month',
'week'.
toString(toDate('CloseDate_sec_epoch'), "yyyy-MM-dd") date_format(CloseDate, 'yyyy-MM-dd')
date_to_string() date_format(CloseDate, 'yyyy-MM-dd')
date_diff("year", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), year(EndDate) - year(StartDate)

toDate(EndDate_sec_epoch))
date_diff("month", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), months_between(EndDate, StartDate)

date_diff("quarter", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), (year(EndDate)-year(StartDate))*4 + quarter(EndDate) -

toDate(EndDate_sec_epoch)) quarter(StartDate)
date_diff("week", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), floor(datediff(EndDate, StartDate) / 7)

date_diff("day", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), datediff(EndDate, StartDate)

date_diff("hour", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), (to_unix_timestamp(EndDate) -

toDate(EndDate_sec_epoch)) to_unix_timestamp(StartDate))/(60*60)
date_diff("minute", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), (to_unix_timestamp(EndDate) -

toDate(EndDate_sec_epoch)) to_unix_timestamp(StartDate))/(60)
date_diff("second", toDate(StartDate_sec_epoch), to_unix_timestamp(EndDate) - to_unix_timestamp(StartDate)

1017

Use Dataset Builder to create a single dataset based on data from one or more related Salesforce
EDITIONS
objects. Dataset Builder adds the instructions for building the dataset to the specified dataflow. The
dataset is created the next time the dataflow runs, and refreshes each time the dataflow runs Available in: Salesforce
thereafter. To edit the dataflow, use the Dataflow Editor. Classic and Lightning
1. On the home page or on an app page, click Create > Dataset. Experience
2. Click Salesforce Data. Available for an additional

The New Dataset dialog opens. cost in: Enterprise,
Performance, and
Unlimited Editions
USER PERMISSIONS
To access the dataset

builder:
Dataflows
3. Enter a name for the dataset.
Note: If you enter a dataset name that is already used, when you create the dataset, Dataset Builder appends a number to
the dataset name. For example, if you entered MyOpportunities, Dataset Builder creates MyOpportunities1. The dataset name
can’t exceed 80 characters.
4. Select a dataflow to add the transformations to. You can select an existing dataflow, or a new dataflow.
a. To add the transformations to an existing dataflow, select Add to existing dataflow, and then select the dataflow from the
list.
b. To add the transformations to a new dataflow, select Add to new dataflow, and then enter a name for the new dataflow.
Note: The option to add to a new dataflow is only available if you have enabled data sync in your org. See Enable Data Sync
and Connections.
5. Click Next.
Dataset Builder opens inside the Dataflow Editor.
1018
6. Select the root object.

The root object is the lowest level child object that you can add to the canvas. After you select the root object, you can add only
parent objects of the root object—you can’t add its child objects. To change the root object, refresh the page and start over.
7. Hover over the root object, and then click .

The Select Fields dialog box appears. By default, the Fields tab appears.
1019
Note: You can view this dialog box for any object included in the canvas.
8. In the Fields tab, select the fields from which you want to extract data.
To locate fields more quickly, you can search for them or sort them by name or type.
Important: Select at least one field for each object that you add to the canvas. If you add an object and don’t add any of its
fields, the dataflow fails at run time.
9. In the Relationships tab, click Join to add the related objects to the canvas.
When you add a related object, the related object appears on the canvas.
1020
10. To remove a related object, click Delete.
Warning: When you delete a related object, you also delete all objects that descend from the related object. For example,
if you delete Account shown below, you delete the branch that contains Account and User.
11. For each related object, select the fields from which you want to extract data.
12. To move the entire diagram, select a white space in the canvas and drag it.
If needed, move the diagram to view a different section.
13. When you finish adding objects and fields, click Next.
The transformations for the new dataset are added to the dataflow you selected.
1021
14. Select the app that will contain the dataset, if it’s not already selected.
15. To view or edit the dataflow, click Edit Dataflow.
Note: To edit the dataflow, you must select the Shared App for the dataset.
16. To run the dataflow and create the dataset, click Create Dataset.
SEE ALSO:
Run a Dataflow
Design Complex Datasets with Dataflow Editor

Use Dataflow Editor, a point-and-click interface, to build your dataflow logic from scratch. Add
EDITIONS
transformations to determine what source data to use, how to transform that data, and which
datasets to load the results into. Available in Salesforce
Tip: More advanced users can edit the underlying dataflow definition file. A dataflow definition Classic and Lightning
Experience.
file is a JSON file that contains transformations that represent the dataflow logic. See Configure
the Dataflow Through the Definition File on page 1109. Available with CRM
Dataflow Editor displays the dataflow you’re editing. Analytics, which is available
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To edit the dataflow:

Dataflows
1022
The canvas (1) shows the individual nodes in your dataflow and the links between them. If you can’t find a node, enter the node name
in the search box (2). The node palette (3) has buttons for each type of node. Click one to add it to the canvas. Use the buttons at the
top of the editor (4) to work with the dataflow JSON. Preview and download the underlying JSON or upload an existing JSON file to work
with it in the editor.
The dataflow in this example extracts data from the Salesforce Opportunity, Account, and User objects, augments it together, and creates
a registered dataset. If you also want to extract cases in this dataflow, augment them with case data, and register the result as a new
dataset. Let’s look at how you can use the editor to modify the dataflow.
1.
2. Click Manage Dataflows.
4. To create a dataflow from scratch, click Create Dataflow.
5. To edit an existing dataflow, click the actions button to the right of the dataflow that you want to edit, and select Edit.
1023
Dataflow Editor opens, displaying the nodes in the dataflow.

6. In the node palette, click the node that you want to add.
For example, to extract data from a Salesforce object, click the sfdcDigest node ( ).
7. Enter a name for the node.
Note: Node names must be unique within the dataflow and not contain spaces.
8. Enter the node attributes. In this example, you select Case as the source object, and the fields you need. You don’t need an incremental
update or filters.
Note: When you enter attributes that reference objects, fields, or other nodes, click inside the attribute field to see a list that
you can search. Then select from. To see the field list in sfdcDigest nodes, click Select Fields.
1024
9. Click Create.
The new node appears on the canvas.
Tip: To edit a node on the canvas, click it. To delete a node, hover over it and click the trash can.
10. In the node palette, click the next node you want to add. In this example, you want to augment the case data with user data, so click
the augment node ( ).

11. Enter the node name and attributes. In this example, you select the Extract Cases node as the left source. This node is the
one you want to add the user columns to. The Extract Users node contains the columns you want to add, so select it as the
right source. The left and right keys are the fields from each node that are used to match records. In this case, select the OwnerId
field on cases and the Id field on users.
12. Click Create.

The new node appears on the canvas, with lines showing the input of data from the source nodes.
1025
Tip: If a node isn’t where you want it, drag it to wherever you want on the canvas. If it gets crowded, use your scroll wheel to
zoom in and out if your browser supports it, or drag the canvas to move nodes into view.
13. In the node palette, click the next node you want to add. In this example, you want to make the augmented case and user data
available to use in a dataset, so click the sfdcRegister node ( ).

14. Enter the node name and attributes. In this example, you select the augment_Cases_Users node as the source. The Alias is
the API name of the registered dataset, and the Name is its display name.
15. Click Create.

The new node appears on the canvas, with a line showing the input of data from the source node.
Tip: You can drag the output arrow of a source node to draw a link to another node on the canvas.
1026
16. When you finish editing, click Update Dataflow to update the definition file with your changes.
17. In the Update dataflow dialog, enter a description in the Version History field.
18. Click Update Dataflow.
CRM Analytics validates your dataflow to ensure that you provided all the required attribute values. If there are errors, CRM Analytics
ensures that you can’t continue. Correct the errors it finds before trying again. After CRM Analytics validates the dataflow, it saves
the new version of the dataflow.
19. Click Run Dataflow to run the dataflow right away and create newly defined datasets. Alternatively, you can run the dataflow later
from the Dataflows & Recipes tab of Data Manager.
Plan the Dataflow

Before you start creating the dataflow, think about the dataflow design. Consider what data to make available for queries, where to
extract the data from, and whether you must transform the extracted data to get the data you want.
Transformations for CRM Analytics Dataflows
Edit Nodes in the Dataflow
When you edit a dataflow node, for example to change its name, or add or remove fields, consider that these changes can impact
downstream nodes. If you're manually editing nodes in the JSON dataflow definition file, make sure that your changes are reflected
in downstream nodes. If you're working in the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics propagates many of your changes to downstream
nodes for you.
You can configure the dataflow by adding transformations directly to the dataflow definition file.
SEE ALSO:
Run a Dataflow
Plan the Dataflow

Before you start creating the dataflow, think about the dataflow design. Consider what data to make available for queries, where to
extract the data from, and whether you must transform the extracted data to get the data you want.
To illustrate some key design decisions, let’s consider an example. In this example, the goal is to create a dataset called “Won Opportunities.”
The dataset contains opportunity details, including the account name for each opportunity.
To create this dataset, design this dataflow.
1027
The dataflow extracts opportunity data from the Opportunity object and extracts the account name from the Account object. For each
extracted object, the dataflow creates a dataset.
The dataflow then transforms the datasets created from the extracted data. First, the dataflow joins the opportunity and account data
into a new dataset. Next, the dataflow filters the records based on the opportunity stage so that the dataset contains only won opportunities.
Each time the dataflow transforms a dataset, it creates a dataset.
Note: If you want to flatten your hierarchy, do so before you join datasets. In this example that requirement means flattening the
Account dataset before joining the Opportunity dataset. If you flatten after the join, the transformation doesn't create the flatten
hierarchy data you expect.
Finally, because you want users to be able to query won opportunities only, you configure the dataflow to register the final dataset only.
However, if you wanted, you could register any dataset created by the dataflow and register as many datasets as you like.

For example, you can use transformations to join data from two related dataset and then register the resulting dataset to make it available
for queries.
append Transformation
The append transformation combines rows from multiple datasets into a single dataset.
augment Transformation
The augment transformation adds columns to a dataset from another related dataset. The resulting, augmented dataset enables
queries across both related input dataset. For example, you can augment the Account dataset with the User dataset to enable a
query to return account records and the full names of the account owners.
The computeExpression transformation enables you to add derived fields to a dataset. The values for derived fields aren’t extracted
from the input data source. Instead, CRM Analytics generates the values using a SAQL expression, which can be based on one or
more fields from the input data or other derived fields. For example, you can use an expression to assign a value to a field, concatenate
text fields, or perform mathematical calculations on numeric fields.
1028
You can use the computeRelative transformation to analyze trends in your data by adding derived fields to a dataset based on values
in other rows. For example, to analyze sales pipeline trends, create derived fields that calculate the number of days an opportunity
remains in each stage. You can also calculate the changes to the opportunity amount throughout the stages of the opportunity.
delta Transformation
The delta transformation calculates changes in the value of a measure (number) column in a dataset over time. The delta transformation
generates an output column in the dataset to store the delta for each record. Create deltas to make it easier for business analysts to
include them in queries.
digest Transformation
The digest transformation extracts synced connected data in a dataflow. Use it to extract data synced from an external Salesforce
org, or data synced through an external connection. Use the sfdcDigest transformation to extract from your local Salesforce org.
dim2mea Transformation
The dim2mea Transformation creates a new measure based on a dimension. The transformation adds the new measure column to
the dataset. The transformation also preserves the dimension to ensure that lenses and dashboards don’t break if they use the
dimension.
edgemart Transformation
The edgemart Transformation gives the dataflow access to an existing, registered dataset, which can contain Salesforce data, external
data, or a combination of the two. Use this transformation to reference a dataset so that its data can be used in subsequent
transformations in the dataflow. You can use this transformation and the augment transformation together to join an existing dataset
with a new dataset.
export Transformation
The export transformation creates a data file and a schema file from data in a specified source node in your dataflow. After the
dataflow runs, Einstein Discovery users can access these files through the public API.
filter Transformation
The filter transformation removes records from an existing dataset. You define a filter condition that specifies which records to retain
in the dataset.
flatten Transformation
The flatten transformation flattens hierarchical data. For example, you can flatten the Salesforce role hierarchy to implement row-level
security on a dataset based on the role hierarchy.
prediction Transformation
The prediction transformation produces an Einstein Discovery prediction for a dataset. Einstein Discovery uses predictive analytics,
which analyzes historical data (based on data mining, machine learning, and predictive statistical modeling) to identify patterns and
predict future outcomes.
phThe sfdcDigest transformation generates a dataset based on data that it extracts from a Salesforce object. You specify the Salesforce
object and fields from which to extract data. You can choose to exclude particular fields that contain sensitive information or that
aren’t relevant for analysis.
sfdcRegister Transformation
The sfdcRegister transformation registers a dataset to make it available for queries. Users can’t view or run queries against an
unregistered dataset.
sliceDataset Transformation
The sliceDataset transformation removes fields from a dataset in your dataflow, leaving you with a subset of fields for use in a new
dataset or in other transformations. This allows you to create multiple datasets, each with different sets of fields from a single dataset.
1029
update Transformation
The update Transformation updates the specified field values in an existing dataset based on data from another dataset, which we
call the lookup dataset. The transformation looks up the new values from corresponding fields in the lookup dataset. The transformation
stores the results in a new dataset.
Overriding Metadata Generated by a Transformation
Optionally, you can override the metadata that is generated by a transformation. You can override object and field attributes. For
example, you can change a field name that is extracted from a Salesforce object so that it appears differently in the dataset. To
override the metadata, add the overrides to the Schema section of the transformation in the dataflow definition file.
The append transformation combines rows from multiple datasets into a single dataset.
Note: To append rows in a Data Prep recipe, see Append Node: Stack Rows from Different Sets of Data. To do it in a Data Prep
Classic recipe, see Add Rows in a Recipe with Append.
Consider the following rules when using this transformation.
• This transformation does not remove duplicate records.
• All input dataset must have the same structure—the corresponding columns must be in the same order and have the same name
and field type.
Example: Let’s look at an example. Each month, you create a dataset that contains the month’s sales targets. Now, you want a
holistic view of sales targets for all months. To do that, you create the following dataflow to merge the existing dataset into a single
dataset.
Dataflow Append Node in Dataflow
Here’s the JSON dataflow.

{
"Extract SalesTargets_Month3": {
"action": "edgemart",
"parameters": {
"alias": "SalesTargets_Month3"
1030
}
},
"parameters": {
}
},
"parameters": {
}
},
"Append SalesTargets_Quarter1": {
"action": "append",
"parameters": {
"enableDisjointedSchemaMerge": false,
"sources": [
"Extract SalesTargets_Month1",
"Extract SalesTargets_Month2",
"Extract SalesTargets_Month3"
]
}
},
"Register AllSalesTargets": {
"action": "sfdcRegister",
"parameters": {
"name": "All Sales Targets",
"alias": "AllSalesTargets",
"source": "Append SalesTargets_Quarter1"
}
}
}
After you create the single dataset, you can use date filters to analyze the sales targets by month, quarter, or year.
Note: The append transformation doesn’t remove duplicate rows.
Append Datasets with Different Schema

By default, the input dataset must have the same structure—the corresponding columns must have the same name and field type. For
example, let's say you want to append your Canada opportunities to your U.S. opportunities.
US Sales Canada Sales
1031
Here, the column names are different, and the Canada data has a Currency column. For the dataflow not to fail, select Allow disjoint
schema in the append node in the dataflow editor. If you're working in the dataflow JSON, add the
enableDisjointedSchemaMerge parameter and set its value to true.
Append Node in Dataflow Editor Append Node in Dataflow JSON
"Append US & CA Sales": {

"action": "append",
"parameters": {
"enableDisjointedSchemaMerge": true,
"sources": [
"Extract US Sales",
"Extract CA Sales"
]
}
},
When you run the dataflow, the data is merged without the dataflow failing.
The append transformation adds all columns to the dataset and merges values in columns with the same name, such as Name. It also
adds null values in a column for rows that didn’t previously have that column, such as in the Currency column.
Note: If null measure handling in datasets isn’t enabled for your org, append adds zeros in a column for rows that didn’t previously
have that column.
append Parameters
When you define an append transformation in the dataflow JSON, you set the action attribute to append and specify the parameters.
append Parameters
When you define an append transformation in the dataflow JSON, you set the action attribute to append and specify the parameters.
1032
This table describes the settings for the append node in the dataflow editor.
Setting Required? Value

Sources Yes Nodes in the dataflow that identify the dataset that you want to
merge.
Allow disjoint schema No Select to allow appending of datasets with different schema. If
this setting isn’t selected, appending datasets with different
schemas causes the dataflow to fail.
This table describes the input parameters for the append transformation in the dataflow JSON.
Parameter Required? Value

sources Yes Nodes in the dataflow definition file that identify the dataset that
you want to merge.
enableDisjointedSchemaMerge No Indicates whether appending datasets with different schema is

allowed.
• To allow appending of disjoint schema, set to true.
• To prevent appending of disjoint schema, set to false. The
default is false.
Example:
"enableDisjointedSchemaMerge": true
If this parameter is set to false, appending datasets with different
schemas causes the dataflow to fail.
SEE ALSO:
The augment transformation adds columns to a dataset from another related dataset. The resulting, augmented dataset enables queries
across both related input dataset. For example, you can augment the Account dataset with the User dataset to enable a query to return
account records and the full names of the account owners.
Note: To add columns from a related object in a Data Prep recipe, see Join Node: Add Related Columns of Data to the Recipe. To
do it in a Data Prep Classic recipe, see Add More Data in a Recipe.
When you create the transformation, you identify each input dataset as the left or right dataset and specify the relationship between
them. CRM Analytics combines all the columns of the left dataset with only the specified columns from the right dataset. (Keep in mind
that each dataset can’t have more than 5,000 columns.) CRM Analytics adds the relationship to column names from the right dataset,
which is useful when the left and right dataset have columns with the same names.
For each record in the left dataset, the augment Transformation transformation performs a lookup to find a matching record in the right
dataset. To match related records, the augment Transformation transformation uses a match condition. You specify the match condition
based on a key from each dataset. A key must be a dimension. A key can be a single-column key or a composite key. For a match condition
based on a composite key, the keys for both dataset must have the same number of columns, specified in the same order.
1033
Tip: To augment three or more dataset, augment two dataset at a time. For example, to augment three dataset, augment the
first two dataset, and then augment the resulting dataset with the third dataset.
Example: Let’s look at an example of the augment Transformation transformation. In this example, you want to extract data from
the Opportunity and Accounts objects, and then match the data based on the account ID field.
1034
Dataflow Augment Node in Dataflow
Here’s the dataflow JSON.

{
"sfdcDigest_Account": {
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{"name": "Id"},
{"name": "Name"}
],
"object": "Account"
}
},
"sfdcDigest_Opportunity": {
1035
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{"name": "Id"},
{"name": "Name"},
{"name": "Amount"},
{"name": "StageName"},
{”name": "CloseDate"},
{"name": "AccountId"},
{"name": "OwnerId"}
],
"object": "Opportunity"
}
},
"augment_Oppt_Acct": {
"action": "augment",
"parameters": {
"operation": "LookupSingleValue",
"left": "sfdcDigest_Opportunity",
"left_key": [
"AccountId"
],
"relationship": "OpptyAcct",
"right": "sfdcDigest_Account",
"right_key": [
"Id"
],
"right_select": [
"Name"
]
}
},
"Create OpptsAccts": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Opportunity_Account",
"source": "augment_Oppt_Acct",
"name": "Opportunity_Account"
}
}
}
After you run the dataflow, CRM Analytics creates and registers the Opportunity_Account dataset. It also adds the relationship as
a prefix to all columns from the right dataset.
1036
Special Cases for Matching Records with the augment Transformation

For each record in the left dataset, the augment transformation performs a lookup to find a matching record in the right dataset.
However, it’s critical that you understand how the augment transformation handles special cases when matching records.
augment Parameters
When you define an augment transformation, you set the action attribute to augment and specify the parameters.
Special Cases for Matching Records with the augment Transformation
For each record in the left dataset, the augment transformation performs a lookup to find a matching record in the right dataset. However,
it’s critical that you understand how the augment transformation handles special cases when matching records.
Let’s look at some examples that illustrate some special cases.
Handling Null Keys
When a record in the left dataset contains a null key, CRM Analytics doesn’t perform a lookup to match the record. Instead, CRM Analytics
appends the right columns and inserts null for dimensions, including dates, and '0' for measures.
Let’s look at an example. You apply the augment transformation on the following datasets, set the relationship to "Price,", and match
the records based on the Id and ProdId fields.
CRM Analytics doesn’t match the last record because the product ID is null. Instead, CRM Analytics inserts a null for the
Price.Pricebook dimension and '0' for the Price.UnitPrice measure. Here’s the resulting dataset after the augment.
Handling Empty Keys
1037
CRM Analytics matches empty-value left keys and empty-value right keys.
CRM Analytics matches the last record in the Product dataset with the third record in the Price dataset because they both have empty
values (""). Here’s the resulting dataset after the augment.
Handling Non-Unique Keys

Although it’s recommended, the left key doesn’t have to be unique. If multiple records have the same left key, CRM Analytics creates
the same values for the appended columns.
CRM Analytics matches the records in the Product dataset with records in the Price dataset. Here’s the resulting dataset after the augment.
Handling No Match
If the left key doesn't have a match in the right data stream, CRM Analytics appends the right columns, inserting nulls for dimensions,
including dates, and sets measures based on whether null measure handling is enabled. If null measure handling is enabled, the augment
transformation sets the measures to null. Otherwise, it sets the measures to '0'.
Let’s look at an example where null measure handling isn’t enabled. You apply the augment transformation on the following datasets,
set the relationship to "Price,", and match the records based on the Id and ProdId fields.
1038
Because no keys match, CRM Analytics doesn’t match any records in the Product dataset with records in the Price dataset. Here’s the
resulting dataset after the augment.
If null measure handling was enabled, Price.UnitPrice is null, instead of 0.

Handling Multiple Matches
If the left dataset has a one-to-many relationship with the right dataset, CRM Analytics can find multiple matches for a left record. What
CRM Analytics does with multiple matches depends on the specified augment operation. You can specify one of these operations to
handle the multiple-match case.
• LookupSingleValue
The augment transformation returns results from a single row. CRM Analytics randomly selects one row from the list of matched
rows.
Note: Each time you run the dataflow, CRM Analytics can return different results depending on the returned row.
For example, you apply the augment transformation on these datasets, set the relationship to "Price," set the operation to
LookupSingleValue, and match the records based on the Id and ProdId fields.
Although there are multiple rows for Prod3 in the Price dataset, CRM Analytics randomly chooses one matching row and returns
values based on that row. Here’s the resulting dataset after the augment if CRM Analytics chooses the first Prod3 row.
• LookupMultiValue
CRM Analytics returns results from all matched rows.
For example, you apply the augment transformation on these datasets, set the relationship to "Price," set the operation to
LookupMultiValue, and match the records based on the Id and ProdId fields.
1039
Because the lookup returns multiple rows for Prod3, the dimension Price.Pricebook field in the resulting dataset becomes
a multivalue field, showing all dimension values. The measure field Price.UnitPrice contains 1500, which is the sum of 800
and 700. Here’s the resulting dataset after the augment.
Note: If you are augmenting date fields from the right dataset, the LookupMultiValue operation can lead to fields
containing multiple date values, which can give unexpected results. We recommend that you use the LookupSingleValue
operation when augmenting date fields, or augment the date fields in a separate LookupSingleValue augment node.
SEE ALSO:
augment Parameters
When you define an augment transformation, you set the action attribute to augment and specify the parameters.
The following table describes the input parameters.

operation No Indicates what the transformation does if it matches multiple rows in the right
dataset with a row in the left. Valid values:
• LookupSingleValue. Returns values from one of the matched rows.
If you don’t specify the operation parameter, the transformation uses
this operation.
• LookupMultiValue. Returns values from all matched rows.
For more information about each operation, see Special Cases for Matching
Records with the augment Transformation.
left Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the left dataset. This is one of
two input sources for this transformation.
left_key Yes Key column in the left dataset used to augment the dataset. If you use a
composite key, the left and right keys must have the same number of columns
in the same order. For a composite key, use the following syntax:
[ "Key Column1", "Key Column2", …, "Key ColumnN" ]
The left or right key can’t be a multivalue field. A key must be a dimension.
1040

right Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the right dataset. This is one
of two input sources for this transformation.
relationship Yes Relationship between the left and right dataset. The dataflow adds the
relationship to the beginning of the right column names in the output dataset
to make the column names unique and descriptive. Can contain only letters,
numbers, dots, underscores, and dashes.
right_select Yes An array of column names from the right dataset that you want to include in
the output dataset. The dataflow adds the relationship as a prefix to the column
name to determine the name of the right column in the output dataset.
right_key Yes Key column in the right dataset used to augment the dataset. If you use a
composite key, the left and right keys must have the same number of columns
in the same order.
The left or right key can’t be a multivalue field. A key must be a dimension.
SEE ALSO:
The computeExpression transformation enables you to add derived fields to a dataset. The values for derived fields aren’t extracted from
the input data source. Instead, CRM Analytics generates the values using a SAQL expression, which can be based on one or more fields
from the input data or other derived fields. For example, you can use an expression to assign a value to a field, concatenate text fields,
or perform mathematical calculations on numeric fields.
Note: To create a calculated column based on a formula in a Data Prep recipe, see Formula Transformation: Create a Calculated
Column Based on an Expression. To do it in a Data Prep Classic recipe, see Add a Formula Field in a Recipe.
The computeExpression transformation and computeRelative transformation are similar, but they have a key difference. The
computeExpression transformation performs calculations based on other fields within the same row. The computeRelative transformation
performs calculations based on the previous and next values of the same field in other rows.
Consider these guidelines when creating a computeExpression transformation.
• You can include only the following SAQL operators and functions in the expression:
– Arithmetic operators
– Case operator
– String operator
– Date functions
• Multivalue fields aren’t supported. The dataflow fails if you include a multivalue field in the SAQL Expression parameter.
• The values of the derived field must match its specified type. For example, set the type of the derived field to Text if the values
are strings.
1041
• CRM Analytics calculates the values of derived fields in the order in which they are listed in the JSON. Thus, if you create a derived
field based on other derived fields in the same computeExpression transformation, the input-derived fields must be listed first. For
example, Derived_A must be listed before Derived_B in the following computeExpression transformation JSON snippet:
"CreateDerivedFields": {
"parameters": {
"source": "sourceNode",
"mergeWithSource": false,
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "Derived_A",
"type": "Text",
"label": "Derived Field A",
"saqlExpression": "\"hello \""},
{
"name": "Derived_B",
"type": "Text",
"label": "Derived Field B Dependent on Field A",
"saqlExpression": "Derived_A + \"world\""}
]
}
}
• You can choose whether the resulting dataset includes only the derived fields, or includes the input and derived fields.
• If the expression produces an overflow value for a numeric field, the transformation sets the field value to the default value specified
for the column. If no default value is set and null handling is disabled, the field value is set to 0. If no default value is set and null
handling is enabled, it’s set to null. (See the documentation about null measure handling.) Also, if the expression defines multiple
columns and the expression produces an overflow value, all generated fields are set to the default value. To isolate the issue to the
field with the overflow value, create a separate computeExpression transformation for each defined column.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You want to create a dataset based on Salesforce opportunity data. You create a dataflow
that extracts the Id and Amount fields from the Opportunity object. In addition, you also want to add the following derived fields
to the dataset: ModifiedId, SalesTax, FinalPrice, and ValueCategory. For the derived fields, you:
• Append “SFDC” to each opportunity Id to get a new modified Id.
• Calculate the sales tax based on an 8% tax rate.
• Calculate the final price by adding the amount and sales tax.
• Categorize opportunities into low-, medium-, and high-value buckets based on the calculated final price.
You create the following dataflow definition.
{
"salesData": {
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{"name": "Amount"},
{"name": "Id"}]}},
"Derived_Fields": {
"parameters": {
"source": "salesData",
1042
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "ModifiedId",
"type": "Text",
"saqlExpression": "\"SFDC\" + Id"},
{
"name": "SalesTax",
"type": "Numeric",
"precision": 18,
"scale": 5,
"saqlExpression": "Amount * 0.08"},
{
"name": "FinalPrice",
"type": "Numeric",
"precision": 18,
"scale": 5,
"saqlExpression": "Amount + SalesTax"},
{
"name": "ValueCategory",
"type": "Text",
"saqlExpression": "case when FinalPrice < 1000 then \"Low\" when
FinalPrice >= 1000 and FinalPrice < 2000 then \"Medium\" else \"High\" end"}
]
}
},
"Register_CategorizedSales": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Categorized_Sales",
"name": "Categorized_Sales",
"source": "Derived_Fields" }
}
}
computeExpression Parameters
When you define a computeExpression transformation, you set the action attribute to computeExpression. You also specify
the parameters for the input source and the expression used to generate the values.
computeExpression Parameters
When you define a computeExpression transformation, you set the action attribute to computeExpression. You also specify the
parameters for the input source and the expression used to generate the values.
Parameters
You can specify parameters in the following sections of the computeExpression node: parameters and computedFields.
This table describes the parameters in the parameters section.
1043

source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the input source for this
transformation.
mergeWithSource No Indicates whether the input fields are included with the derived fields in the resulting
dataset. When true, the resulting dataset contains all input fields from the source
and the newly generated derived fields. When false, the resulting dataset contains
the derived fields only. Default is true.
computedFields Yes Attributes and expression used to generate derived fields in the dataset.
computedFields
This table describes the attributes in the computedFields section. It also describes optional attributes that you can provide to
override the field metadata to make the data appear differently in a dataset. For example, CRM Analytics can replace null values in a field
with a default value.
Attribute Required? Value

name Yes API name of the generated field. The API names must be unique. Otherwise, the
dataflow fails to run.
type Yes CRM Analytics field type associated with the field. Valid types are Text, Numeric, or
Date.
Example:
"type": "Text"
label No The display name of the generated field that appears in the CRM Analytics user
interface. Can be up to 255 characters. Defaults to input field name if not specified.
saqlExpression Yes SAQL expression used to calculate the value for the derived field. The expression
can be based on input fields or other derived fields in the transformation.
Example:
"saqlExpression":"toDate(birth_day, \"yyyy-M-d\")"
If a field name in a SAQL expression contains characters other than letters, numbers,
or underscores, enclose the name in single quotes. For example, field names resulting
from an augment are prefixed with the relationship name and a dot, and must be.
enclosed in single quotes.
"saqlExpression":"'AccountId.Sales_Q4__c'-'AccountId.Sales_Q3__c'"
The use of multivalue fields as input fields isn’t supported.
format Yes (for Date Format of the derived date field. For information about formats, see the Analytics
fields only) External Data Format Developer Guide.
fiscalMonthOffset No For date fields only. The difference, in months, between the first month of the fiscal
year and the first month of the calendar year (January). For example, if the fiscal
1044

year starts in January, the offset is 0. If the fiscal year starts in October, the offset is
9.
Example:
"fiscalMonthOffset": 9
When you set fiscalMonthOffset to a value other than 0, CRM Analytics
generates fields to show the fiscal week, month, quarter, and year that a date value
falls in. You can use these fields to group and filter by fiscal period in a dataset.
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different fiscalMonthOffset
values in the same dataset. Using different fiscalMonthOffset values can
produce unexpected results when you filter by relative fiscal date ranges. We
recommend that you set the same value for all fiscalMonthOffset attributes
in a dataset.
isYearEndFiscalYear No For date fields only, when fiscalMonthOffset is greater than 0. Indicates
whether the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year ends or begins. Because
the fiscal year can start in one calendar year and end in another, you specify which
year to use for the fiscal year.
• If true, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year ends. The default
is true.
• If false, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year begins.
Example:
"isYearEndFiscalYear": true
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different isYearEndFiscalYear
values in the same dataset. Using different isYearEndFiscalYear values
can produce unexpected results when you filter by relative fiscal date ranges. We
recommend that you set the same value for all isYearEndFiscalYear
attributes in a dataset.
firstDayOfWeek No For date fields only. The first day of the week for the calendar year and, if applicable,
the fiscal year. Use 0 to set the first day to be Sunday, 1 to set the first day to be
Monday, and so on. Use -1 to set the first day to be on January 1. The default is -1.
Example:
"firstDayOfWeek": 0
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different firstDayOfWeek values
in the same dataset. Using different firstDayOfWeek values can produce
unexpected results when you filter by relative week date ranges. We recommend
that you set the same value for all firstDayOfWeek attributes in a dataset.
precision Yes (for The maximum number of digits in a numeric value, or the length of a text value.
Numeric fields For numeric values: Includes all numbers to the left and to the right of the decimal
only) point (but excludes the decimal point character). Value must be from 1 to 16. For
text values: Value defaults to 255 characters, and must be from 1 to 32,000 characters.
1045

Example:
"precision": 10
scale Yes (for The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in a numeric value. Must be
Numeric fields less than the precision value. Value must be from 1 to 15 characters.
only) Example:
"scale": 2
defaultValue No For text and numeric fields that can be null. Default value that replaces a null value
for the specified field. Enter the default value as a string.
Example:
"defaultValue": "0"
SEE ALSO:
You can use the computeRelative transformation to analyze trends in your data by adding derived fields to a dataset based on values
in other rows. For example, to analyze sales pipeline trends, create derived fields that calculate the number of days an opportunity
remains in each stage. You can also calculate the changes to the opportunity amount throughout the stages of the opportunity.
Note: To create a calculated column across rows based on a formula in a Data Prep recipe, see Formula Transformation: Create
a Calculated Column Based on an Expression.
The computeExpression transformation and computeRelative transformation transformations are similar, but the computeExpression
transformation performs calculations based on fields within the same row. The computeRelative transformation performs calculations
based on the same field in other rows—particularly the current, first, previous, or next rows.
When you define a computeRelative transformation, you specify a source transformation as the input, partition the records, and sort the
records within each partition. For example, you can use sfdcDigest transformation to extract opportunity history records, and then use
computeRelative transformation to calculate changes in each opportunity over time. You can partition opportunity history records by
opportunity ID, and then chronologically sort records within each partition to correctly identify the previous and next values.
Note: Derived fields can be based on a source field or on a SAQL expression.
Example: Let’s look at an example. To perform trending analysis on the sales pipeline, create a dataflow that contains the following
transformations.
sfdcDigest transformation
Extracts the following data from the OpportunityHistory object.
1046
computeRelative transformation
Performs these tasks:
• Partitions the extracted records by opportunity ID.
• Within each partition, sorts the extracted records by CreatedDate in ascending order. Sorting by CreatedDate ensures that the
changes that occur for each opportunity are listed in chronological order.
• Adds the following derived fields to the final dataset.
– OpportunityCreatedDate
Determines the date that the opportunity was first created. You can use this date with the actual close date to determine
the number of days required to close the sale. The goal is to shorten the sales cycle to recognize revenue.
– AmountPrev
Determines the previous amount of the opportunity. You can use this field to determine if the values of opportunities are
increasing or decreasing, which can affect whether you hit your sales targets.
– CloseDatePrev
Determines the previous expected close date for the opportunity. You can use this field to analyze how the expected close
date changes over the sales cycle of the opportunity. If the expected close date keeps getting pushed out, identify the
issues that are causing the longer sales cycle.
– AmountChange
Uses a SAQL expression to calculate the percentage change of the opportunity amount from its previous amount.
– AmountChangeDirection
Uses a SAQL expression to generate a text value to show the direction in which an opportunity amount has changed: Up,
Down, or No Change.
sfdcRegister transformation
Registers the final dataset that contains the extracted fields from the sfdcDigest transformation and the derived fields from
computeRelative transformation.
You create this dataflow definition.
{
"extractOppHistory": {
"parameters": {
"object": "OpportunityHistory",
"fields": [
{"name": "OpportunityId"},
{"name": "CreatedDate"},
1047
{"name": "Amount"},
{"name": "CloseDate"}
]
}
},
"computeTrending": {
"action": "computeRelative",
"parameters": {
"source": "extractOppHistory",
"partitionBy": ["OpportunityId"],
"orderBy": [
{
"name": "CreatedDate",
"direction": "asc"
}
],
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "OpportunityCreatedDate",
"label": "Opportunity Created Date",
"description": "Determines the date that the opportunity was first created.",
"expression": {
"sourceField": "CreatedDate",
"offset": "first()",
}
},
{
"name": "AmountPrev",
"label": "Previous Amount",
"description": "Determines the previous amount of the opportunity",
"expression": {
"default": "null"
}
},
{
"name": "CloseDatePrev",
"label": "Previous Close Date",
"description": "Determines the previous expected close date for the
opportunity",
"expression": {
"sourceField": "CloseDate",
}
},
{
"name": "AmountChange",
"label": "Amount % Change",
"description": "Determines percentage change from previous amount",
"expression": {
1048
"saqlExpression": "(current(Amount)-previous(Amount))/previous(Amount)*100",
"type": "Numeric",
"scale": 2,
"default": "null"
}
},
{
"name": "AmountChangeDirection",
"label": "Amount Change Direction",
"description": "Determines text to indicate direction of change",
"expression": {
"saqlExpression": "case when current(Amount)>previous(Amount) then \"Up\"
when current(Amount)<previous(Amount) then \"Down\" else \"No Change\" end",
"type": "Text",
"default": ""
}
}
]
}
},
"Register_OppportunityHistory_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "SalesPipelineTrending1",
"name": "Sales Pipeline Trending1",
"source": "computeTrending"
}
}
}
The dataflow runs and creates the dataset with the new derived fields.
Notice that CRM Analytics partitions the records by opportunity ID and then sorts the records in ascending order based on the
CreatedDate field within each partition. CRM Analytics can now use the previous and next rows within each partition to determine
changes in field values in the dataset.
computeRelative Parameters
When you define a computeRelative transformation, you set the action attribute to computeRelative. You also specify the
parameters for the input source, partition-by field, sort field, and derived field definitions.
computeRelative Parameters
When you define a computeRelative transformation, you set the action attribute to computeRelative. You also specify the
parameters for the input source, partition-by field, sort field, and derived field definitions.
1049
Parameters
You can specify parameters in the following sections of the computeRelative node.
The following table describes the parameters in the parameters section.

source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the input source for this
transformation.
partitionBy Yes API name of the field used to partition the records in the dataset. Specify one
partition-by field only.
orderBy Yes Field used to sort the records within each partition and the sort order: ascending
(asc) or descending (desc). Specify one sort field only.
Example:
"orderBy": [
{
"name":"CreatedDate",
"direction":"asc"
}
]
computedFields Yes A list of definitions for derived fields. Derived fields can be based on a source
field or on a SAQL expression.
Example showing derived fields based on a source field and on a SAQL expression:
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "PreviousAmount",
"label": "Previous Amount",
"description": "Previous amount of
opportunity",
"expression": {
"default": "null"
}
},
{
"name": "AmountChange",
"label": "Amount % Change",
"description": "Percentage change from
previous amount",
"expression": {
"saqlExpression":
"(current(Amount)-previous(Amount))/previous(Amount)*100",
"type": "Numeric",
"scale": 2,
"default": "null"
}
1050
}
]
computedFields
The following table describes the attributes in the computedFields section.

name Yes API name of the derived field to add to the dataset. The name must be unique
in the dataset. If the name is not unique, the dataflow fails to run.
label No The display name of the derived field that appears in the CRM Analytics user
interface. Can be up to 255 characters. Defaults to the API name if not specified.
description No Description of the derived field for information only.
expression Yes Expression attributes used to calculate the value for the derived field. The
expression can be based on input fields or other derived fields in the
transformation.
Example:
"expression": {
"sourceField": "CloseDate",
"default": "01-01-1970"
expression
The following table describes the attributes in the expression section when creating a derived field based on a source field.

sourceField Yes API name of the input field from the source node that’s used in the expression.
offset Yes The function used in the expression. You can use the following functions:
current()
Gets the value from the current record.
Example:
"offset": "current()"
first()
Gets the value from the first record in the partition, like the first CreateDate
for an opportunity.
Example:
"offset": "first()"
1051
next()
Gets the value from the next record.
Example:
"offset": "next()"
previous()
Gets the value from the previous record.
Example:
"offset": "previous()"
Derived fields are computed in the order that they’re defined. The calculation
of a derived field can be based on the value from another derived field as long
as it has already been defined. For example, next() can’t access the value of
a derived field in the next row.
To get the correct results when using the previous() and next()
functions, the computeRelative transformation requires you to sort the records.
default Yes (for numeric fields The default value if one can’t be calculated. For example, you can specify a default
only) value when no previous or next value exists. You can insert a constant value or
current() as a default value.
Examples:
"default": "3000-01-01T00:00:00.000Z"
The following table describes the attributes in the expression section when creating a derived field based on a SAQL expression.

saqlExpression Yes SAQL expression used to calculate the value for the derived field. The expression
can be based on input fields or other derived fields in the transformation. You
can use the offset functions current(),first(),next(), and
previous() in the expression.
Example to calculate the percentage change from the previous amount to the
current amount:
"saqlExpression":
"(current(Amount)-previous(Amount))/previous(Amount)*100"
You can also use the SAQL case operator in the expression.
1052

Example to output Up, Down, or No Change values based on the change
from the previous amount to the current amount:
"saqlExpression": "case when
current(Amount)>previous(Amount) then \"Up\" when
current(Amount)<previous(Amount) then \"Down\"
else \"No Change\" end"
type Yes CRM Analytics field type associated with the field. Valid types are Date, Numeric,
and Text.
Example:
"type": "Text"
scale No The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in a numeric value.
Example:
"scale": 2
default Yes (for numeric fields The default value if one can’t be calculated.
only) Example:
"default": "null"
The delta transformation calculates changes in the value of a measure (number) column in a dataset over time. The delta transformation
generates an output column in the dataset to store the delta for each record. Create deltas to make it easier for business analysts to
include them in queries.
Note: The delta transformation isn’t supported when null measure handling is enabled and dataflows containing delta
transformations fail. Use computeRelative and computeExpression transformations instead in your dataflows, to
calculate changes in measure (number) values over time. For an example, see Enable Null Measure Handling in Orgs Created Before
Spring ’17.
The delta transformation calculates each delta value by comparing the value in each record with the value in the previous record. Because
records aren’t always sorted, the delta transformation orders the records before computing the delta values. To do this action, the
transformation sorts the data by the specified dimension (text column), and then by the specified epoch date column.
Note: When CRM Analytics processes dates, it creates the following epoch date columns for each date processed:
Epoch Time Column Description

<date_column_name>_sec_epoch For example, if the date column is CloseDate, the generated
epoch second column is CloseDate_sec_epoch. This column
provides the number of seconds that have elapsed since January
1, 1970 (midnight UTC/GMT).
1053
Epoch Time Column Description

<date_column_name>_day_epoch For example, if the date column is CloseDate, the generated
epoch day column is CloseDate_day_epoch. This column
provides the number of days that have elapsed since January
1, 1970 (midnight UTC/GMT).
Example: Let’s look at an example. You want to create an OppHistoryDelta dataset that contains opportunity history from the
OpportunityHistory object and also calculates the deltas for opportunity amounts.
The OpportunityHistory object contains the following data.
OpportunityId CloseDate StageName Amount

1 1/1/2014 New 100
2 1/1/2014 New 100
2 2/1/2014 ClosedWon 200
1 3/1/2014 ClosedWon 100

{
"parameters": {
"object": "OpportunityHistory",
"fields": [
{ "name": "OpportunityId" },
{ "name": "CloseDate" },
{ "name": "StageName" },
{ "name": "Amount" }
]
}
},
"Calculate_Delta": {
"action": "delta",
"parameters": {
"dimension": "OpportunityId",
"epoch": "CloseDate_day_epoch",
"inputMeasure": "Amount",
"outputMeasure": "DeltaAmount",
}
},
"Register_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "OppHistoryDelta",
"name": "OppHistoryDelta",
1054
"source": "Calculate_Delta"
}
}
}
To calculate the delta values for each opportunity amount, the delta transformation sorts the records by the dimension (text
column) (OpportunityId) first, and then by time (CloseDate_day_epoch) as shown here.
OpportunityID CloseDate StageName Amount

1 1/1/2014 New 100
1 3/1/2014 ClosedWon 100
2 1/1/2014 New 100
2 2/1/2014 ClosedWon 200
After the records are sorted, for each dimension (text column) (OpportunityId), the transformation compares the previous value
to the next value to determine the delta for each record. The transformation creates the following dataset.
OpportunityId CloseDate StageName Amount DeltaAmount

1 1/1/2014 New 100 0
1 3/1/2014 ClosedWon 100 0
2 1/1/2014 New 100 0
2 2/1/2014 ClosedWon 200 100
For the first record of each dimension (text column), the transformation inserts ‘0’ for the delta value.
Note: If an opportunity contains multiple changes on the same day, you must sort the records on a shorter time interval.
In this case, sort on CloseDate_sec_epoch column. Otherwise, records aren’t sorted correctly, which means delta values are
incorrect.
delta Parameters
When you define a delta transformation, you set the action attribute to delta and specify the parameters.
delta Parameters
When you define a delta transformation, you set the action attribute to delta and specify the parameters.
This table describes the input parameters.

dimension Yes Dimension column in the dataset used to
sort records when calculating the delta
values.
1055

epoch Yes Epoch date column in the dataset used to
sort records within each dimension when
calculating delta values.
inputMeasure Yes Measure column on which you want to

calculate the delta.
outputMeasure Yes Name of the output column that contains

the delta value.
source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that

contains the dataset to which you want to
add the delta column.
SEE ALSO:
digest Transformation
The digest transformation extracts synced connected data in a dataflow. Use it to extract data synced from an external Salesforce org,
or data synced through an external connection. Use the sfdcDigest transformation to extract from your local Salesforce org.
Example: Let’s say you extract opportunity data from your company’s org in Arizona using a Salesforce external connection. To
use this data in your dataflow, add a digest node specifying the connection name, object, and fields.
"Extract Arizona Opportunities": {
"action": "digest",
"parameters": {
"connectionName": "Arizona_Sales",
"fields": [
{"name": "CloseDate"},
{"name": "Amount"},
{"name": "Name"}
],
}
},
digest Parameters
When you define a digest transformation, you set the action attribute to digest and specify the parameters.
digest Parameters
When you define a digest transformation, you set the action attribute to digest and specify the parameters.
1056

connectionName Yes Name of the connection used to sync the
data.
object Yes The connected object that you want to

extract data from.
fields Yes An array of names of the fields that you

want to extract.
The dim2mea Transformation creates a new measure based on a dimension. The transformation adds the new measure column to the
dataset. The transformation also preserves the dimension to ensure that lenses and dashboards don’t break if they use the dimension.
Note: To convert a dimension to a measure in a Data Prep recipe, see Text to Number Transformation: Convert the Column Type.
To do it in a Data Prep Classic recipe, see Convert a Dimension Field Type to Measure.
During the column type conversion, the Dimension to Measure transformation rounds decimals to the nearest whole number. For
example, 300.2939 becomes 300.
If the transformation cannot create a measure from a dimension, the transformation populates the measure with the specified default
value. If no default value is provided, the transformation inserts ‘0.’
Example: Let’s look at an example. Your Opportunity object contains a custom text field called StageVal__c, which contains the
opportunity amount at a particular stage. Because this is a text field, CRM Analytics loads this data as a dimension. However, you’d
like to create a measure from this dimension to enable users to perform calculations on stage amount.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "Amount" },
{ "name": "AccountId" },
{ "name": "StageVal__c" }
]
}
},
"Create_Measure_From_Dimension": {
"action": "dim2mea",
"parameters": {
"dimension": "StageVal__c",
"measure": "StageValue",
"measureDefault": "0",
"measureType": "long",
}
1057
},
"Register_The_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "OpportunitiesWithConvertedMeasure",
"name": "OpportunitiesWithConvertedMeasure",
"source": "Create_Measure_From_Dimension"
}
}
}
dim2mea Parameters
When you define a dim2mea transformation, you set the action attribute to dim2mea and specify the parameters.
dim2mea Parameters
When you define a dim2mea transformation, you set the action attribute to dim2mea and specify the parameters.
The following table describes the input parameters:

dimension Yes Dimension column in the dataset from
which you want to create the measure.
measure Yes Name of the output measure. This column

name must be unique within the dataset.
Do not use the same name as the dimension
because the transformation preserves the
dimension in the dataset.
The measure name is also the new field's
API name, so it:
• Can contain only alphanumeric and
underscore characters.
• Must begin with a letter.
• Can’t end with an underscore.
• Can’t contain 2 consecutive underscore
characters, except when ending with
“__c” (case-sensitive).
measureDefault Yes Default value for the measure if the

transformation is unable to create a measure
from a dimension.
measureType Yes Type of measure. Valid value: “long”
1058

contains the dataset to which you want to
add the measure.
SEE ALSO:
The edgemart Transformation gives the dataflow access to an existing, registered dataset, which can contain Salesforce data, external
data, or a combination of the two. Use this transformation to reference a dataset so that its data can be used in subsequent transformations
in the dataflow. You can use this transformation and the augment transformation together to join an existing dataset with a new dataset.
Note: To pull data from an existing dataset in a Data Prep recipe, see Create a Recipe with Data Prep. To do it in a Data Prep Classic
recipe, see Create a Recipe with Data Prep Classic.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You would like to compare the final sales amount against the opportunity amount to determine
if heavy discounts were offered to close deals. You previously created and registered the FinalSales dataset. The FinalSales dataset
contains the final sale amount of each opportunity that was closed and won.
Table 13: FinalSales Dataset

OppID UpdateDate StageName SaleAmount
1 1/1/2014 ClosedWon 100,000
2 11/1/2013 ClosedWon 150,000
3 2/1/2014 ClosedWon 200,000
You would now like to create a dataset that contains opportunity information from the Opportunity object. Then, you would like
to join the data from the existing FinalSales dataset with the Opportunity dataset.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Extract_Final_Sales_Data": {
"parameters": { "alias": "FinalSales" }
},
1059
"Combine_Opportunities_FinalSales": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_Opportunities",
"left_key": [ "Id" ],
"relationship": "Opportunity",
"right": "Extract_Final_Sales_Data",
"right_key": [ "OppID" ],
"right_select": [ "SaleAmount" ]
}
},
"Register_Opportunity_FinalSales_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "OpportunityVersusFinalSales",
"name": "OpporunityVersusFinalSales",
"source": "Combine_Opportunities_FinalSales"
}
}
}
edgemart Parameters
When you define an edgemart transformation, you set the action attribute to edgemart and specify the parameters.
edgemart Parameters
When you define an edgemart transformation, you set the action attribute to edgemart and specify the parameters.
The following table describes the input parameter:

alias Yes API name of the dataset from which you
want to extract data. To determine the API
name of a dataset, edit the dataset and view
the system name.
SEE ALSO:
export Transformation
The export transformation creates a data file and a schema file from data in a specified source node in your dataflow. After the dataflow
runs, Einstein Discovery users can access these files through the public API.
Note: The export transformation is available in Salesforce orgs that have Einstein Discovery enabled.
When you add an export transformation to a dataflow, you specify a source and a target parameter. The source is the node in the dataflow
that outputs the data you want to export, and the target is Einstein Discovery. You also specify a user, which determines who can access
the data in Einstein Discovery. If the source is a dataset configured with a security predicate, CRM Analytics applies the predicate based
on the specified user. For example, if the security predicate allows the user to access only dataset records that they own, then only those
dataset records are exported to Einstein Discovery.
1060
Example: Here’s an example. Let’s say your dataflow contains an sfdcDigest node, ExtractOpportunities, which extracts
all fields from the Opportunity object. To make this data available in Einstein Discovery, add an export node to the dataflow,
specifying the source node and a target of EinsteinDiscovery.
export Node in Dataflow Editor export Node in Dataflow JSON
"ExportOpportunities": {
"action": "export",
"parameters": {
"source": "ExtractOpportunities",
"target": "EinsteinDiscovery",
"userId": "005R0000000IUNDIA4"
}
}
Note: When you add an export node in the dataflow editor, you can search for the user by name in the User field.
Note: Multivalue dimensions, for example, those used in multi-select picklists, are not included in the export file.
export Parameters
Add an export transformation to a dataflow either in the dataflow editor, or directly in the JSON dataflow definition file. The parameters
you specify are the same for both methods.
export Parameters
Add an export transformation to a dataflow either in the dataflow editor, or directly in the JSON dataflow definition file. The parameters
Note: The export transformation is available in Salesforce orgs that have Einstein Discovery enabled.
To add an export transformation in the dataflow editor, click .

To add an export transformation in the JSON definition file, add a node and set the action attribute to export.

In dataflow editor: Source Node Yes Node in the dataflow that identifies the dataset that you want to export.
Input source for this transformation.
1061

In dataflow JSON: source
In dataflow editor: Target Yes The destination for the exported data.
In dataflow JSON: target In the dataflow editor, select Einstein Discovery.
In the dataflow definition file, specify EinsteinDiscovery.
In dataflow editor: User Yes The Id of the user who can access the data in Einstein Discovery.
In dataflow JSON: userId In the dataflow editor, you can search for the user by name in this field.
The filter transformation removes records from an existing dataset. You define a filter condition that specifies which records to retain in
the dataset.
Note: To filter rows in a Data Prep recipe, see Filter Node: Filter Rows. To do it in a Data Prep Classic recipe, see Add a Filter in a
Recipe.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You want to create a dataset that contains only opportunities that were Closed Won. First,
you extract all opportunities from the Opportunity object. Next, you filter the records so that you only include opportunities with
a Closed Won stage name.
You create the following dataflow.
Dataflow Filter Node in Dataflow
Here’s the dataflow JSON.

{
"parameters": {
1062
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "OwnerId" }
]
}
},
"Filter_Opportunities": {
"action": "filter",
"parameters": {
"filter": "StageName:EQ:Closed Won",
}
},
"Register_My_Won_Oppportunities_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "MyWonOpportunities",
"name": "MyWonOpportunities",
"source": "Filter_Opportunities"
}
}
}
For more complex filters, you can use SAQL in a filter node.
Depending on your need, you can filter Salesforce object records at different levels:
• Transformation level: To filter a stream of data loaded into a dataset, add a filter transformation to the dataflow. Use a filter
transformation instead of an sfdcDigest transformation filter because complex filters in an sfdcDigest transformation impact
global filters. To reduce the amount of data processing downstream, add the filter transformation as early as possible in the
dataflow.
• Connection level: To prevent Salesforce records from being loaded into any dataset, add the filter on the connected object.
You can add a filter in the sync settings for the connected Salesforce object.
filter Transformation Parameters

When you define a filter transformation, you set the action attribute to filter Transformation and specify the parameters.
filter Expression Syntax
You create a filter expression in the filter transformation based on one or more dimensions in a dataset. You can use a standard filter
expression or a SAQL filter expression.
filter Transformation Parameters
When you define a filter transformation, you set the action attribute to filter Transformation and specify the parameters.
This table describes the settings for the filter node in the dataflow editor.
1063

Source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that
contains the dataset that you want to filter.
Use SAQL No Select whether to use a SAQL expression in

the filter.
Filter No Standard filter expression that specifies

which records to include in the new dataset.
See filter Expression Syntax.
This field is visible when the Use SAQL
option isn't selected.
SAQL Filter No SAQL filter expression that specifies which

records to include in the new dataset. See
filter Expression Syntax.
This field is visible when the Use SAQL
option is selected.
This table describes the input parameters for the filter transformation in the dataflow JSON.

filter No Filter expression that specifies which records
to include in the new dataset. See filter
Expression Syntax.
saqlFilter No SAQL filter expression that specifies which

records to include in the new dataset. See
filter Expression Syntax.

contains the dataset that you want to filter.
Note: You can include either the filter parameter or the saqlFilter parameter in a filter node in the dataflow JSON,
but not both.
SEE ALSO:
filter Expression Syntax
You create a filter expression in the filter transformation based on one or more dimensions in a dataset. You can use a standard filter
expression or a SAQL filter expression.
Note:
• String comparisons in a filter expression are case-sensitive.
1064
• When you filter on a Salesforce ID field extracted in an upstream sfdcDigest node, use 18-character ID values in your filter
expression. sfdcDigest nodes extract 18-character IDs, and the filter transformation performs string comparisons on ID fields.
Example: RecordTypeId:EQ:0126A0000016QfyQAE
To use a standard filter expression, deselect the Use SAQL option in the dataflow editor, or use the filter parameter in the dataflow
JSON. You can use these types of filter expressions.
Filter Expression Syntax Description

dim:EQ:value True if the dimension and value are equal.
Dataflow editor example: StageName:EQ:Closed Won
Dataflow JSON example: "filter":
"StageName:EQ:Closed Won"
dim:R:val0:val1 True if the left dimension falls within the specified range between
val0 and val1.
Dataflow editor example: EmployeeId:R:100:1000
"EmployeeId:R:100:1000"
dim:R:val true if the dimension is greater than or equal to the value based
on binary sort order. For example, value is true when the
dimension is 'City' and the value is 'Anderson' because ' 'City' >
'Anderson').
Dataflow editor example: LastName:R:Li
Dataflow JSON example: "filter": "LastName:R:Li"
dim:R::val True if the dimension is less than or equal to the value based on
binary sort order.
Dataflow editor example: LastName:R::Levy
"LastName:R::Levy"
dim:N:val True if the dimension and value are not equal.

Dataflow editor example: RoleName:N:Manager
"RoleName:N:Manager"
dim:EQ:val1|val2 True if the dimension equals values val1 or val2. This filter
expression uses the logical OR operator ( | ). You can compare the
dimension value against more than 2 values. For example, to
compare against 3 values, use the following syntax:
dim1:EQ:val1|val2|val3.
Dataflow editor example: Lead
Status:EQ:Open|Contacted
1065
Filter Expression Syntax Description

Dataflow JSON example: "filter": "Lead
Status:EQ:Open|Contacted"
dim1:EQ:val1,dim2:EQ:val2 True if dimension dim1 equals value val1 and dimension dim2
equals value val2. This filter expression uses the logical AND
operator ( , ). You can compare more than 2 dimensions. For
example, to compare 3 dimensions, use the following syntax:
dim1:EQ:val1,dim2:EQ:val2,dim3:EQ:val3.
Dataflow editor example: Lead
Status:EQ:Qualified,Rating:EQ:Hot
Dataflow JSON example: "filter": "Lead
Status:EQ:Qualified,Rating:EQ:Hot"
To use a SAQL filter expression, select the Use SAQL option in the dataflow editor, or use the saqlFilter parameter in the dataflow
JSON. Use the SAQL filter statement in your expression without the a = filter a by part. See
Example: This example returns rows where the Stage Name field contains Proposal/Price Quote or
Negotiation/Review.
Dataflow editor: StageName in ["Proposal/Price Quote", "Negotiation/Review"]
Dataflow JSON: "saqlFilter": "StageName in [\"Proposal/Price Quote\",
\"Negotiation/Review\"]"
Note: In the JSON, escape double quotes in the filter with \.
For complete information about SAQL operators, see Analytics SAQL Developer Guide.
SEE ALSO:
The flatten transformation flattens hierarchical data. For example, you can flatten the Salesforce role hierarchy to implement row-level
security on a dataset based on the role hierarchy.
Note: Flatten your hierarchy before you join datasets. For example, if you want a flattened hierarchy in data joined from Account
and Opportunity objects, flatten the Account dataset before joining the Opportunity dataset. If you flatten after the join, the
transformation doesn’t create the flatten hierarchy data you expect.
When you configure the flatten transformation to flatten a hierarchy, you specify the field that contains every node in the hierarchy and
the field that contains their corresponding parent based on the hierarchy. The flatten transformation generates one record for each
hierarchy node, which we refer to as the self-ID. Each record contains two generated columns that store the hierarchy for each self-ID
node. One column contains a comma-separated list of all ancestors for each node in the hierarchy. The other column contains the
hierarchy path.
To see how ancestors are stored, review the Roles and RolePath columns in the following flattened dataset.
1066
Role ID (Self-ID) Role Name Parent Role ID Roles RolePath

1 Salesperson 1 10 10, 20, 30 \10\20\30
2 Salesperson 2 10 10, 20, 30 \10\20\30
3 Salesperson 3 11 11, 20, 30 \11\20\30
10 Regional Manager 1 20 20, 30 \20\30
11 Regional Manager 2 20 20, 30 \20\30
20 Vice President 1 30 30 \30
21 Vice President 2 30 30 \30
30 CEO Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
You can also configure the flatten transformation to include the self-ID node in the generated hierarchy columns. The following dataset
shows the self-ID in bold.
Role ID (Self-ID) Role Name Parent Role ID Roles RolePath

1 Salesperson 1 10 1, 10, 20, 30 \1\10\20\30
2 Salesperson 2 10 2, 10, 20, 30 \2\10\20\30
3 Salesperson 3 11 3, 11, 20, 30 \3\11\20\30
10 Regional Manager 1 20 10, 20, 30 \10\20\30
11 Regional Manager 2 20 11, 20, 30 \11\20\30
20 Vice President 1 30 20, 30 \20\30
21 Vice President 2 30 21, 30 \21\30
30 CEO Not applicable 30 30
If a hierarchy is incomplete or contains a circular relationship, the Role and Role Path values aren’t calculated. For example:
• If Regional Manager 1 isn’t present in the dataset, a flattened hierarchy isn’t generated for Salesperson 1 and Salesperson 2.
• If Salesperson 1 reports to Regional Manager 1, who reports to Vice President 1, who reports to Salesperson 1, a flattened hierarchy
isn’t generated for these roles.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You want to create a dataset that contains all opportunities. For each opportunity, you want
to include user and role information about the opportunity owner. Also, to implement row-level security based on the role hierarchy,
each opportunity record must also contain a list of all ancestors above each opportunity owner based on the role hierarchy. To
generate the list of ancestors, use the flatten transformation to flatten the role hierarchy.
You create the following dataflow definition file:
{
"Extract_Opportunity": {
1067
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Extract_User": {
"parameters": {
"object": "User",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "Department" },
{ "name": "UserRoleId" }
]
}
},
"Extract_UserRole": {
"parameters": {
"object": "UserRole",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "ParentRoleId" }
]
}
},
"Flatten_UserRole": {
"action": "flatten",
"parameters": {
"source": "Extract_UserRole",
"self_field": "Id",
"parent_field": "ParentRoleId",
"multi_field": "Roles",
"path_field": "RolePath",
"include_self_id":false
}
},
"Augment_User_FlattenUserRole": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_User",
"left_key": [ "UserRoleId" ],
"relationship": "Role",
"right": "Flatten_UserRole",
"right_key": [ "Id" ],
1068
"right_select": [
"Id",
"Name",
"Roles",
"RolePath"
]
}
},
"Augment_Opportunity_UserWithRoles": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_Opportunity",
"left_key": [ "OwnerId" ],
"right": "Augment_User_FlattenUserRole",
"relationship": "Owner",
"right_select": [
"Name",
"Department",
"Role.Id",
"Role.Name",
"Role.Roles",
"Role.RolePath"
],
"right_key": [ "Id" ]
}
},
"Register_OpportunityWithRoles_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "OppRoles",
"name": "OppRoles",
"source": "Augment_Opportunity_UserWithRoles",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'Owner.Role.Roles' == \"$User.UserRoleId\" || 'OwnerId'
== \"$User.Id\""
}
}
}
To flatten the Salesforce role hierarchy, the flatten transformation uses these input fields from the UserRole object.
• Id—Id identifies each node in the Salesforce role hierarchy.
• ParentRoleId—ParentRoleId identifies the parent as defined in the role hierarchy.
After traversing through each parent-child relationship in the UserRole object, the flatten transformation generates one record for
each role ID. Each record contains all ancestor roles for each role in the hierarchy. The flatten transformation generates two output
columns—Roles and RolePath—to store all ancestor roles for each role.
flatten Transformation Parameters

When you define a flatten transformation, you set the action attribute to flatten Transformation and specify the
parameters.
When you define a flatten transformation, you set the action attribute to flatten Transformation and specify the parameters.
1069
The following table describes the input parameters:

include_self_id No Indicates whether to include the self ID node in the generated
multi_field and path_field columns. Valid values are false
(default) and true.
self_field Yes Name of the input field that identifies each node in the hierarchy.
parent_field Yes Name of the input field that identifies the direct parent of each
node in the hierarchy. For example, the Regional Manager 1 role
is the parent of the Salesperson 1 role in a role hierarchy.
multi_field Yes Name of the multivalue output field that contains a list of all
ancestors in the hierarchy, in order from the lowest to the highest
level. The flatten Transformation creates this field and generates
the list of ancestors for each node in the hierarchy. For example,
for Salesperson 1 role, the hierarchy of ancestors is: Sales
Manager 1, Regional Manager 1, Vice
President 1, CEO.
path_field Yes A string representation of the multi-field field, separated by

backslashes. This output field contains the hierarchical path of all
ancestors in the hierarchy, in order from the lowest to the highest
level. The flatten Transformation creates this field and generates
the ancestry path for each node in the hierarchy. For example, for
a salesperson role in a role hierarchy, the value is: Sales
Manager 1\Regional Manager 1\Vice President
1\CEO.
source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that contains the hierarchical
data that you want to flatten. This node is the input source for this
transformation and it must contain the input fields mapped to
self_field and parent_field.
Note: By default, the multi_field and path_field fields are created as system fields, which aren’t visible in the user interface. To
make the fields appear in the user interface, add a schema section to the flatten Transformation and set the IsSystemField
metadata attribute to false for each field in the transformation. The schema section is shown in bold in this sample JSON.
"schema": {
"objects": [
{
"label": "UserWithRoles",
"fields": [
{
"name": "Roles",
"label": "Roles",
"isSystemField": false
},
1070
{
"name": "RolePath",
"label": "RolePath",
}
]
}
]
},
"parameters": {
"source": "Extract_UserRole",
"self_field": "Id",
"include_self_id": false
}
},
For more information about overriding metadata using a schema section in a transformation, see Overriding Metadata Generated
by a Transformation.
SEE ALSO:
prediction Transformation
The prediction transformation produces an Einstein Discovery prediction for a dataset. Einstein
USER PERMISSIONS
Discovery uses predictive analytics, which analyzes historical data (based on data mining, machine
learning, and predictive statistical modeling) to identify patterns and predict future outcomes. To add a prediction node to
After you create an Einstein Discovery story, deploying its model (see Deploy a Model ) produces a dataflow:
a prediction definition. When you create the transformation, you identify the name of the prediction
Recommendations
definition to use. A prediction definition contains a model to use for predicting an outcome. Einstein permission
Discovery creates a special column in your dataset to contain the prediction score (the predicted
value of the outcome, such as the likelihood that a customer churns). You also specify the name To view predictions:
and display name of the new column.
Recommendations
Consider the following guidelines when creating a prediction transformation: permission (see Assign
Einstein Discovery
• To see the Prediction button in the toolbar, Einstein Discovery must be enabled in your org,
Permission Sets to Users)
and your user account must have the View Einstein Discovery Recommendations permission.
For instructions, see Set Up Einstein Discovery . zzz
• Before you can add a prediction transformation, you must deploy the model. For instructions, see Deploy a Model .
• Dataset column names must match the dataset column names that were used to create the story. Do not rename column names
in the dataflow. Renaming column names results in missing column warnings when the dataflow completes. Other columns are
ignored, such as fields created using computeExpression. The field mappings to a Salesforce object, specified when deploying the
model (see Deploy a Model), do not apply to predictions in dataflows.
• Use a prediction definition with one model. A prediction definition with multiple models (those deployed with filters) isn’t currently
supported in dataflows.
prediction Transformation Properties in the Dataflow Editor
1071
This table describes the settings for the prediction node in the dataflow editor.

Node Name Yes Unique name that identifies this node in the dataflow JSON. Use
this name to reference this node in other nodes.
Source Node Yes Dataflow node used as input for this transformation. The
prediction transformation generates the prediction score based
on the data provided by the input node.
Prediction Definition Yes Prediction definition to use. Click the field to select from a list of
deployed prediction definitions.
Prediction Output Field Name Yes Name of the new dataset column to contain the score.
Prediction Output Field Labels Yes Label of the new dataset column to contain the score.
prediction Transformation Parameters in the Dataflow JSON

When you define a prediction transformation in the dataflow JSON, you specify the node name, action, source dataflow node, and input
parameters for this transformation.
This table describes the JSON input parameters for the prediction transformation ("action": "prediction") in the dataflow.

predictionDefinitionName Yes Name of the prediction definition to use. The Model Manager
displays prediction definition Ids. See Manage Models and
Predictions .
predictionColumnName Yes Name of the new dataset column to contain the score.
predictionColumnLabel Yes UI label of the new dataset column to contain the score.
Example: Let's look at an example that predicts the likelihood that each customer churns and then compares the prediction
against the actual outcome.
{
"Customers": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Customers"
},
"edScore": {
"action": "prediction",
"parameters": {
"predictionDefinitionName": "How_to_min_pAw3D_7383",
"source": "Customers",
"predictionColumnLabel": "Likelihood to Churn",
"predictionColumnName": "attrition_score"
1072
},
"Predicted": {
"parameters": {
"source": "edScore",
"computedFields": [
"name": "PredictedChurn",
"saqlExpression": "case when 'attrition_score' > 0.4988 then \"true\"
else \"false\" end",
"label": "PredictedChurn",
"type": "Text"
],
"mergeWithSource": true
},
"Correct": {
"parameters": {
"source": "Predicted",
"computedFields": [
"name": "CorrectPrediction",
"saqlExpression": "case when 'PredictedChurn' == 'Churn__c' then
\"true\" else \"false\" end",
"label": "CorrectPrediction",
"type": "Text"
],
"mergeWithSource": true
},
"Register": {
"parameters": {
"name": "Customers with Score",
"alias": "CustomerWithScore",
"source": "Correct"
phThe sfdcDigest transformation generates a dataset based on data that it extracts from a Salesforce object. You specify the Salesforce
object and fields from which to extract data. You can choose to exclude particular fields that contain sensitive information or that aren’t
relevant for analysis.
Note: To access data in a Salesforce object in a Data Prep recipe, see Input Node: Add Data to the Recipe. To do it in a Data Prep
Classic recipe, see Create a Recipe with Data Prep Classic.
When you upload the dataflow definition file, CRM Analytics validates access to Salesforce objects and fields based on the user profile
of the Integration User. If the user profile does not have read access to a field or object, the upload fails.
1073
At run time, CRM Analytics runs the dataflow as the Integration User. Again, CRM Analytics validates access to the objects and fields
based on the profile of the Integration User. For example, if the dataflow tries to extract data from a custom field on which the Integration
User does not have read access, the dataflow job fails.
Note: The Integration User is a preconfigured user that is created when CRM Analytics is enabled in your organization. If you or
the Integration User need permission on a Salesforce object or field, ask the administrator to grant access.
For more information about preconfigured users in CRM Analytics, see the CRM Analytics Security Implementation Guide.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You want to create a dataset that contains all opportunities from the Opportunity object.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "OwnerId" },
{ "name": "OpportunitySupportTeamMembers__c" }
]
}
},
"Register_Opportunities_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Opportunities",
"name": "Opportunities",
}
}
}
Considerations When Using the sfdcDigest Transformation

• Consider dataset storage limits when extracting data. For example, a dataset can contain a maximum of 5,000 fields, so be selective
when choosing fields. See CRM Analytics Limits.
• The sfdcDigest transformation runs a SOQL query to extract data from a Salesforce object, and so is subject to SOQL limits. If the
query exceeds any of these limits, it returns no results or cause the dataflow job to fail. For example, The length of the SOQL query
cannot exceed 100,000 characters. To reduce the SOQL query length, consider breaking up the extract into two or more sfdcDigest
transformations and then use the augment transformation to combine the results. For example, you create one sfdcDigest
transformation to extract half of the fields and create another sfdcDigest transformation to extract the remaining fields. See SOQL
and SOSL Limits.
• The sfdcDigest transformation can extract data from Salesforce Big Objects, but incremental extract isn’t supported and filtering is
possible only on primary key fields.
1074

Add a filter to the sfdcDigest Transformation transformation to extract a subset of all records from a Salesforce object. You can filter
records to reduce the number of extracted and processed records, exclude records that contain irrelevant or sensitive data, and
increase dataflow performance.
Overriding Salesforce Field Metadata
You can override the field metadata that the sfdcDigest transformation extracts from a Salesforce object to make the data appear
differently in a dataset. For example, CRM Analytics can add a default value to records that have missing values for a field.
Salesforce Big Object Support in CRM Analytics
The sfdcDigest transformation can extract data from standard and custom big objects in Salesforce, with or without data sync
enabled. Consider these limitations for big objects before you configure extraction.
Unsupported Salesforce Objects and Fields in CRM Analytics
The sfdcDigest transformation and data sync can’t extract data from all Salesforce objects and fields. Before configuring extraction
and sync, review the unsupported objects and fields.
sfdcDigest Parameters
When you define an sfdcDigest transformation, you set the action attribute to sfdcDigest and specify the parameters for the
object and fields that you want to extract. Optionally, you can also specify parameters to filter the records extracted from the Salesforce
object.
Add a filter to the sfdcDigest Transformation transformation to extract a subset of all records from a Salesforce object. You can filter
records to reduce the number of extracted and processed records, exclude records that contain irrelevant or sensitive data, and increase
dataflow performance.
A filter consists of one or more filter conditions, where each filter condition compares a field value to a value. For example, Amount
>= 1000000. You can also apply SOQL functions on the field value in a filter condition, like CALENDAR_YEAR(CreatedDate)
= 2011. You can add multiple filter conditions using logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. You can also use a backslash (\) to escape
double quotes included in strings.
The sfdcDigest Transformation transformation extracts all records for which the filter is true. If you configured the sfdcDigest transformation
for incremental extraction, the filter applies to data extracted during the incremental run only—CRM Analytics doesn't apply the filter
to records that were previously loaded into the dataset. If you add an invalid filter, the dataflow fails at run time.
For each instance of sfdcDigest, you can use one of the following types of filters:
• Structured filter
• Advanced filter
Tip: Are you trying to decide whether to use a filter in the sfdcDigest Transformation transformation or use a filter Transformation
transformation? Use a filter Transformation transformation to filter records at any point in the dataflow. For example, you can add
it after the dataflow joins two datasets. However, to reduce the number of rows processed in the dataflow and optimize dataflow
performance, add the filter closest to the point at which records are extracted—when possible, add the filter in the sfdcDigest
Transformation transformation.
Note: Filtering records extracted from Salesforce Big Objects is supported only on primary key fields in the sfdcDigest Transformation
transformation.
Structured Filter in sfdcDigest Transformation

You define a structured filter using JSON syntax.
1075
Advanced Filter in sfdcDigest Transformation

You define an advanced filter using a Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) WHERE clause expression. Use an advanced filter
only if you are familiar with SOQL.
SEE ALSO:
Structured Filter in sfdcDigest Transformation
You define a structured filter using JSON syntax.
A structured filter uses the following JSON syntax for each filter condition.
{
"field": "<field name>",
"operator": "<operator>",
"value": "<value>"|"["<value 1>", "<value 2>"]",
"isQuoted": true|false}
The value can be a number, date, string, list of strings, or date literal. CRM Analytics automatically quotes strings unless you set isQuoted
to true, which indicates that the string is already quoted.
You can use one of the following operators in a filter condition.
Operator Comment
= Filter condition is true if the value in the field equals the specified
value. String comparisons using the equals operator are
case-insensitive.
Example:
"filterConditions": [
{
"field": "OwnerId",
"operator": "=",
"value": "0056A0000020jzDQAQ"
}
]
!= Filter condition is true if the value in the field does not equal the
specified value.
Example (using backslashes to escape double quotes in a string
value):
{
"field": "Nickname__c",
"operator": "!=",
"value": "\"Sammy\""
}
]
1076
Operator Comment
> Filter condition is true if the value in the field is greater than the
specified value.
Example:
{
"field": "Amount",
"operator": ">",
"value": "100000"
}
]
< Filter condition is true if the value in the field is less than the
specified value.
Example (using a date literal):
{
"field": "CloseDate",
"operator": "<",
"value": "THIS_MONTH",
"isQuoted": false
}
]
>= Filter condition is true if the value in the field is greater than or
equal to the specified value.
Example:
{
"field": "Amount",
"operator": ">=",
"value": "100000"
}
]
<= Filter condition is true if the value in the field is less than or equal
to the specified value.
Example (using a SOQL function):
{
"field": "CALENDAR_YEAR (CreatedDate)",
"operator": "<=",
"value": "2015",
"isQuoted": true
1077
Operator Comment
}
]
LIKE Filter condition is true if the value in the field matches the specified
value. The LIKE operator is similar to the LIKE operator in SQL; it
provides a mechanism for matching partial text strings and supports
wildcards.
• The % and _ wildcards are supported for the LIKE operator.
• The % wildcard matches zero or more characters.
• The _ wildcard matches exactly 1 character.
• The LIKE operator is supported for string fields only.
• The LIKE operator performs a case-insensitive match.
• The LIKE operator supports escaping of special characters %
or _. Use a backslash (\) to escape special characters.
Example:
{
"field": "FirstName",
"operator": "LIKE",
"value": "Chris%"
}
]
IN Filter condition is true if the value in the field equals any one of the
values in the specified list. You can specify a quoted or non-quoted
list of values. If the list is quoted, set isQuoted to true.
Example:
{
"field": "StageName",
"operator": "IN",
"value": ["Closed Won", "Closed Lost"]
}
]
NOT IN Filter condition is true if the value in the field does not equal any
of the values in the specified list.
Example:
{
"field": "BillingState",
"operator": "NOT IN",
"value": ["California", "New York"]
1078
Operator Comment
}
]
INCLUDES For picklist or multi-select picklist fields only. Filter condition is true
if the value in the picklist field includes the specified value.
Example:
{
"operator": "INCLUDES",
"value": ["California"]
}
]
EXCLUDES For picklist or multi-select picklist fields only. Filter condition is true
if the value in the picklist field excludes the specified value.
Example:
{
"operator": "EXCLUDES",
"value": ["California", "New York"]
}
]
Let’s look at a few examples of structured filters.
Example: Let’s look at an example with a basic structured filter. To perform pipeline analysis on opportunities in fiscal quarter 2
of fiscal year 2015, you create this dataflow definition file to create the relevant dataset.
{
"Extract_Filtered_Opportunities": {
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "FiscalYear" },
{ "name": "FiscalQuarter" },
{ "name": "SystemModstamp" }
1079
],
{
"field": "FiscalYear",
"operator": "=",
"value": "2015"
},
{
"field": "FiscalQuarter",
"operator": "=",
"value": "2"
}
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "Opportunities_2015Q2",
"name": "Opportunities_2015Q2",
"source": "Extract_Filtered_Opportunities"
}
}
}
Note: If you do not specify a logical operator for multiple filter conditions—as is the case in this example—CRM Analytics
applies AND between the conditions.
Example: Let's look at an example of a structured filter with a logical operator. To help forecast expected revenue, you create
this dataflow to view all opportunities that have either closed or have greater than 90% probability of closing.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "Probability" },
{ "name": "FiscalQuarter" }
],
{
"operator": "OR",
"conditions": [
{
1080
"operator": "=",
"value": "Closed Won"
},
{
"field": "Probability",
"operator": ">=",
"value": "90"
}
]
}
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "OpportunitiesExpectedToWin",
"name": "OpportunitiesExpectedToWin",
}
}
}
Example: Finally, let's look at an example of a structured filter with nested logical operators. You create this dataflow to view all
opportunities that closed in the current fiscal quarter and are owned by either one of your two direct reports.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "FiscalQuarter" }
],
{
"operator": "AND",
"conditions": [
{
"field": "CloseDate",
"operator": "=",
"value": "THIS_FISCAL_QUARTER",
"isQuoted": false
},
{
"operator": "OR",
1081
"conditions": [
{
"field": "OwnerId",
"operator": "=",
"value": "0056A0000020jzDQAQ"
},
{
"field": "OwnerId",
"operator": "=",
"value": "0056A0000020jzGQAQ"
}
]
}
]
}
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "DirectReport_Opportunities",
"name": "DirectReport_Opportunities",
}
}
}
Advanced Filter in sfdcDigest Transformation

You define an advanced filter using a Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) WHERE clause expression. Use an advanced filter only
if you are familiar with SOQL.
Note: When you add an sfdcDigest node filter with Data Sync enabled, that filter is added automatically to the SFDC_LOCAL
connection for that object. If you delete a filter from an sfdcDigest node, the SFDC_LOCAL connection filter isn’t changed. Manually
update the SFDC_LOCAL connection filter.
1082
Example: Let’s look at an example of an advanced filter. You want to extract only opportunity records that are owned by a specific
user and that have either high value or a high probability of closing. You create this dataflow in the dataflow editor and add a filter
in the Complex Filter Conditions field of the sfdcDigest node.
To add an advanced filter in the dataflow JSON, add a complexFilterConditions parameter in the sfdcDigest node.
{
"Extract_Filtered_Opportunities": {
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "Probability" },
1083
],
"complexFilterConditions": "OwnerId = '005460000022HhMAAU' AND (Amount >
100000 OR Probability > 75)"
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "FilteredOpportunities",
"name": "FilteredOpportunities",
"source": "Extract_Filtered_Opportunities"
}
}
}
Consider the following requirements for advanced filters.

• Always enclose OR conditions in parentheses in advanced filters, even if there are no other conditions. For example, to extract
only closed won or closed lost opportunities, use this advanced filter: (StageName = 'Closed Won' OR StageName
= 'Closed Lost'). Excluding parentheses causes the dataflow to fail.
• If incremental sync is enabled on the Salesforce object, you can’t use subqueries in an advanced filter.
Overriding Salesforce Field Metadata

You can override the field metadata that the sfdcDigest transformation extracts from a Salesforce object to make the data appear
differently in a dataset. For example, CRM Analytics can add a default value to records that have missing values for a field.
You can add these field parameters to the sfdcDigest transformation node to override the field metadata:
• defaultValue
• type
• fiscalMonthOffset
• isYearEndFiscalYear
• firstDayOfWeek
• isMultiValue
• multiValueSeparator (not available in dataflow editor)
• precision
• scale
For a description of each of these field parameters, see Field Parameters.
Custom Field Considerations
Your source data can include custom fields with different API names that share label values. To avoid confusion when viewing the fields
in the UI, you can:
• Ingest the fields with different label names.
• Use the computeExpression transformation to change the label values.
• Use dataset-level Analytics Extended Metadata (XMD) to modify the label values.
1084
Example: For example, you want to override metadata extracted from the Opportunity object.
To override field metadata from the Opportunity object, you add the bold text to the sfdcDigest node in the dataflow definition
file.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{
"name": "Amount",
"defaultValue":"0",
"precision":18,
"scale":2
},
{
"name": "CloseDate",
"fiscalMonthOffset":9,
"firstDayOfWeek":2,
"isYearEndFiscalYear":true
},
{ "name":"AccountId" },
{ "name":"OwnerId" },
{
"name": "OpportunitySupportTeamMembers__c",
"type":"Text",
"isMultiValue":true,
"multiValueSeparator":",",
"precision":255
}
]
}
},
"Register_Opportunities_Dataset":{
"action":"sfdcRegister",
"parameters":{
"alias":"Opportunities",
"name":"Opportunities",
"source":"Extract_Opportunities"
}
}
}
If you’re working in the dataflow editor, click the sfdcDigest node and then click next to the field that you want to change.
1085
Update the field attributes, and then click Save.
1086
Note: Changing a field’s type attribute to anything other than Text can result in an error in your dataflow or unexpected
values in your datasets. For example, if you change a text field to a numeric field, you see an error when you try to update
the dataflow.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Big Object Support in CRM Analytics
The sfdcDigest transformation can extract data from standard and custom big objects in Salesforce, with or without data sync enabled.
Consider these limitations for big objects before you configure extraction.
• Incremental data sync isn’t supported, so a full sync is performed every time data sync runs.
• Filtering is supported only on primary key fields.
• Custom big object names must end in __b
• These standard big objects are currently supported.
– ApiEvent
– BigObjectCounter
– BotAnalytics
– ChatbotAnalytics
– EngagementHistory
– FeedRead
– FeedSentimentAnalysis
– FeedSentimentFeedbacks
– LoginEvent
• The sfdcDigest transformation uses the Bulk API to extract data from Salesforce objects, and so it’s subject to Bulk API limits.
– When a large amount of data is extracted from a big object, a maximum of 15 result files are created. The Bulk Query stops when
this 15-file limit is reached, even if the extract isn’t complete. Each extracted file is limited to 1 GB of data.
– The total number of big object records that can be extracted from the Bulk API is currently limited to 70 million rows across all
files in the dataset. The number of rows varies based on the number and size of columns in the big object being queried.
– Each batch can run for up to 10 minutes or 1 GB of data, whichever limit is reached first.
Unsupported Salesforce Objects and Fields in CRM Analytics

The sfdcDigest transformation and data sync can’t extract data from all Salesforce objects and fields. Before configuring extraction and
sync, review the unsupported objects and fields.
For information about all Salesforce objects and fields, see the Object Reference for Salesforce and Lightning Platform.
Unsupported Objects
To extract fields, the object must be visible to the Integration User. If you can’t manage a field’s visibility in Setup, you can’t grant the
Integration User access to it.
If an object requires query clauses that aren’t used in this example, it probably isn’t supported.
SELECT fields
FROM object
WHERE Id > '0xx00000000xxxx'
AND Id <= '0xx00000000yyyy'
1087
ORDER BY Id
ASC LIMIT 1
OFFSET 249999;
SELECT and FROM define the fields and object to sync. The rest of the query controls batching. Bulk API processes batches of 10,000
records. The batch is determined by WHERE filtering and ORDER sorting of the record IDs. Clauses that limit the ability to use this query
structure, such as constraints on ORDER or WHERE, prevent CRM Analytics from querying the object for data sync or dataflows. For
more information, see the SELECT clause help page.
Some commonly encountered unsupported objects are:
• ActivityHistory
• ActivityMetric
• ApexEmailNotification
• AuthProvider
• BrandTemplate
• ChatbotMetric
• ChatterConversation
• ChatterConversationMember
• ChatterMessage
• ConnectedApplication
• ContentDocumentLink
• ContentFolderLink
• ContentFolderMember
• ContentWorkspace
• ContentWorkspaceDoc
• ContentWorkspaceMember
• ContentWorkspacePermission
• CopyExport
• CorsWhitelistEntry
• DataAssessmentFieldMetric
• DataAssessmentMetric
• DataAssessmentValueMetric
• DataHubSetupData
• DataHubSetupDefinition
• DirectMessage
• DirectMessageFeed
• DirectMessageMember
• EmailCapture
• EmailDomainKey
• EmailServicesAddress
• EmailServicesFunction
• EmailStatus
1088
• EmailTemplate
• EnvironmentHub
• EnvironmentHubInvitation
• EnvironmentHubMemberRel
• EventType
• EventTypeParameter
• ExternalString
• FeedLike
• FeedPollChoice
• FeedPollVote
• FieldDefinition
• LeadChangeEvent
• ListViewEvent
• LoginGeo
• LoginHistory
• NetworkActivityAudit
• NetworkModeration
• OpenActivity
• OrganizationProperty
• OrgWideEmailAddress
• PackageLicense
• PartnerNetworkSyncLog
• ReputationLevel
• ReputationLevelLocalization
• ReputationPointsRule
• S2XEventMap
• SalesforceIqUser
• SampledEntity
• SandOmInfo
• SandOmInfoDetail
• SandOmObserver
• ScoreIntelligence
• SearchPromotionRule
• SecurityCustomBaseline
• SelfServiceUser
• SsoUserMapping
• TenantSecret
• TwoFactorInfo
• TwoFactorTempCode
• UserPackageLicense
1089
• UserProvAccount
• UserProvAccountStaging
• UserProvisioningConfig
• UserProvisioningLog
• UserProvisioningRequest
• UserProvisioningRequestOwnerSharingRule
• UserProvisioningRequestShare
• UserProvMockTarget
• UserRecordAccess
• VerificationHistory
• VoiceUserLine
• VoiceUserLineOwnerSharingRule
• VoiceUserLineShare
• VoiceVendorLine
• VoiceVendorLineOwnerSharingRule
• VoiceVendorLineShare
• WebLink
• WebLinkLocalization
• UnifiedActivityInsightKeyword
• UnifiedActivityInsight
• UnifiedActivityEvent
• UnifiedActivityRelation
• UnifiedActivityParticipant
• UnifiedActivity
The sfdcDigest transformation can’t extract data from external objects created in Salesforce. External objects are similar to custom objects,
except that they map to data located outside Salesforce.
If you include an unsupported or inaccessible object in the sfdcDigest transformation, the dataflow fails at run time with an error message.
Unsupported Fields
The sfdcDigest transformation can’t extract data from these fields.
Object Unsupported Fields

Account CleanStatus
ActionPlanItem ItemId
AuthSession • LoginGeoId
• LoginHistoryId
Contact • CanAllowPortalSelfReg
• CleanStatus
ContentDocument ParentId
1090

CustomPerson__p Title
DocumentAttachmentMap ParentId
EmailMessage • ActivityId
• EmailTemplateId
EmailRoutingAddress EmailServicesAddressId
EnvironmentHubMember EnvironmentHubId
Event Attendees
ExternalEventMapping EventId
InstalledMobileApp ConnectedApplicationId
Lead CleanStatus
Network • CaseCommentEmailTemplateId
• ChangePasswordEmailTemplateId
• ForgotPasswordEmailTemplateId
• WelcomeEmailTemplateId
Organization • SelfServiceEmailUserOnCaseCreationTemplateId
• SelfServiceNewCommentTemplateId
• SelfServiceNewPassTemplateId
• SelfServiceNewUserTemplateId
• WebToCaseAssignedEmailTemplateId
• WebToCaseCreatedEmailTemplateId
• WebToCaseEmailTemplateId
• WebToLeadEmailTemplateId
PermissionSet • PermissionsEditEvent
• PermissionsEditTask
PermissionSetLicense • MaximumPermissionsEditEvent
• MaximumPermissionsEditTask
Profile • PermissionsEditEvent
• PermissionsEditTask
ThirdPartyAccountLink SsoProviderId
User • LastPasswordChangeDate
• ProfilePhotoId
1091
• UserPreferencesEnableVoicePilot
WorkBadge RewardId
WorkBadgeDefinition RewardFundId
If you include an unsupported field in the sfdcDigest transformation, the dataflow fails at runtime with an error message.
In addition, Salesforce recommends that you don’t extract data from the MayEdit field of the Account object. Extracting data from this
field significantly decreases performance and can cause the dataflow to fail.
Unsupported Field Types
The sfdcDigest transformation can’t extract data from fields with these field types.
• base64
• composite (like address and location)
• data category group reference
• encrypted string
If you include a field with an unsupported field type in the sfdcDigest transformation, the dataflow ignores the field.
SEE ALSO:
sfdcDigest Parameters
When you define an sfdcDigest transformation, you set the action attribute to sfdcDigest and specify the parameters for the object
and fields that you want to extract. Optionally, you can also specify parameters to filter the records extracted from the Salesforce object.
Parameters
You can specify parameters in the following sections of the sfdcDigest node: parameters, fields, and filterConditions.
This table describes the parameters in the parameters section.

object Yes API name of the Salesforce object from which you want to extract data. This object
is the input source for this transformation. The sfdcDigest transformation doesn’t
support extraction from all Salesforce objects.
incremental No Performs an incremental sync, which extracts only changes to the Salesforce object
since the last dataflow run. Valid values: true or false. Incremental sync:
• Is available if you have enabled data sync.
• Isn’t supported for Salesforce big objects.
fullRefreshToken No Performs a one-time full extraction to synchronize the data in the dataset with data
in the Salesforce object. Specify any value for this parameter.
After the full extraction, the dataflow performs an incremental extraction each time
thereafter even though the fullRefreshToken parameter is included in the
1092

dataflow definition. To run a full extraction again, change the value of the
fullRefreshToken parameter to a different value.
Incremental sync is available if you have enabled data sync.
fields Yes An array of names of all fields from which you want to extract data from the specified
Salesforce object. The sfdcDigest transformation doesn’t support extraction from
all field types.
See Field Attributes.
filterConditions No A filter that restricts the records extracted from the specified Salesforce object. The
sfdcDigest transformation extracts all records from the Salesforce object for which
the filter is true. You can specify a structured or advanced filter.
See Filter Conditions Parameters.
complexFilterConditions No For advanced filters only. A SOQL WHERE clause used to filter records extracted from
the specified Salesforce object.
Field Attributes
The following table describes the attributes in the fields section. It also describes optional attributes that you can provide to override
the field metadata. You can override the metadata that the sfdcDigest Transformation transformation extracts from a Salesforce object
to make the data appear differently in a dataset. For example, CRM Analytics can add a default value to records that have missing values
for a field. If you don’t override the values, CRM Analytics gets the values from Salesforce.

name Yes API name of the field in the Salesforce object that you want to include in the dataset.
You can specify multiple fields.
defaultValue No Used for text and numeric fields that can be null. Numeric fields can have a literal
null, while text fields can have “null”. A default value replaces a null value
for the specified field. Enter a string value.
Example: "defaultValue": "0"
type No CRM Analytics field type associated with the specified field. Valid types are Text,
Numeric, or Date. Any value, including numeric values, can be Text. For example,
by default, fiscal quarter from Salesforce objects is Number. However, you can
change it to Text. Specify a type to override the type determined by CRM Analytics.
Example: "type": "Text"
You can’t change a field’s type to Numeric or Date.
fiscalMonthOffset No For date fields only. The difference, in months, between the first month of the fiscal
year and the first month of the calendar year (January). For example, if the fiscal
year starts in January, the offset is 0. If the fiscal year starts in October, the offset is
9.
1093

Example: "fiscalMonthOffset": 9
This attribute also controls whether CRM Analytics generates fiscal date fields. To
generate fiscal date fields, set fiscalMonthOffset to a value other than 0.
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different fiscalMonthOffset
values in the same dataset. Using different fiscalMonthOffset values can
produce unexpected results when you filter by relative fiscal date ranges. We
recommend that you set the same value for all fiscalMonthOffset attributes
in a dataset.
isYearEndFiscalYear No For date fields only. Indicates whether the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal
year ends or begins. Because the fiscal year can start in one calendar year and end
in another, you must specify which year to use for the fiscal year.
• If true, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year ends. The default
is true.
• If false, then the fiscal year is the year in which the fiscal year begins.
Example: "isYearEndFiscalYear": true
This field is relevant only when fiscalMonthOffset is greater than 0.
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different isYearEndFiscalYear
values in the same dataset. Using different isYearEndFiscalYear values
can produce unexpected results when you filter by relative fiscal date ranges. We
recommend that you set the same value for all isYearEndFiscalYear
attributes in a dataset.
firstDayOfWeek No For date fields only. The first day of the week for the calendar year and, if applicable,
fiscal year. Use 0 to set the first day to be Sunday, 1 to set the first day to be Monday,
and so on. Use -1 to set the first day to be on January 1. The default is -1.
Example: "firstDayOfWeek": 0
CRM Analytics doesn’t support fields with different firstDayOfWeek values
in the same dataset. Using different firstDayOfWeek values can produce
unexpected results when you filter by relative week date ranges. We recommend
that you set the same value for all firstDayOfWeek attributes in a dataset.
isMultiValue No For text fields only. Indicates whether the specified field has multiple values.
Example: "isMultiValue": false
multiValueSeparator No For text fields only. Single character used to separate multiple values in the specified
field when isMultiValue equals true. This value defaults to a semicolon (;) if you do
not specify a value and isMultiValue equals true. Set to null when isMultiValue equals
false.
Example: "multiValueSeparator": ";"
precision No The maximum number of digits in a numeric value, or the length of a text value.
For numeric values: Includes all numbers to the left and to the right of the decimal
1094

point (but excludes the decimal point character). Value must be from 1 through 18,
inclusive. For text values: Value defaults to 255 characters, and must be from 1
through 32,000 characters, inclusive.
Example: "precision": 10
scale No The number of digits to the right of the decimal point in a numeric value. Must be
less than the precision value. Value must be from 0 through 17 characters, inclusive.
Example: "scale": 2
Filter Conditions Parameters

The following table describes the structured filter parameters in the filterConditions section. These parameters do not apply
to advanced filters.

field No The field in the Salesforce object on which you want to apply a filter condition. Each
filter condition in a structured filter uses the following syntax:
{
"field": "<field name>",
"operator": "<operator>",
"value": "<value>",
"isQuoted": true|false}
operator No The purpose depends on the context.

• operator can be used as a comparison operator–like =, <, and IN–that
compares the field value against a constant value.
• operator can also be used as a logical operator (AND, OR, or NOT) that links
multiple filter conditions together.
In the example below, the bold operator is the logical operator. The other
instances of operator are comparison operators.
{
"operator": "OR",
"conditions": [
{
"operator": "=",
"value": "Closed Won"
},
{
"field": "Probability",
"operator": ">=",
"value": "90"
}
1095
]
}
]
value No The value used in a filter condition.
isQuoted No Indicates whether you quoted the string value in a filter condition.
Example with quoted values:
{
"operator": "IN",
"value": "('Closed Won', 'Closed Lost')",
"isQuoted": true
}
]
Example with non-quoted values:

{
"operator": "IN",
"value": ["Closed Won", "Closed Lost"],
"isQuoted": false
}
]
If you don’t include isQuoted for a filter on a string value, CRM Analytics assumes
that the string value is not quoted and adds the quotes for you.
conditions No Use to specify a logical operator to link multiple filter conditions together.
SEE ALSO:
The sfdcRegister transformation registers a dataset to make it available for queries. Users can’t view or run queries against an unregistered
dataset.
The sfdcRegister transformation overwrites the current version of the dataset.
You don’t need to register all datasets. For example, you don’t need to register an intermediate dataset that is used to build another
dataset and doesn’t need to be queried. In addition, you don’t need to register datasets that are created when you upload external data
because CRM Analytics automatically registers these datasets for you.
Carefully choose which datasets to register because:
1096
• The total number of rows in all registered datasets can’t exceed 100,000 per platform license, or 250 million per platform license
purchased before October 20, 2015.
• Users that have access to registered datasets can query their data. But you can apply row-level security on a dataset to restrict access
to records.
Example: Let’s look at an example. You create a dataflow that extracts opportunities from the Opportunity object. To register
the dataset, name it "Opportunities," and apply row-level security on it, you add the sfdcRegister transformation as shown in the
following dataflow definition file.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Register_Oppportunities_Dataset": {
"parameters": {
"name": "Opportunities",
"source": "Extract_Opportunities",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'OwnerId' == \"$User.Id\""
}
}
}
sfdcRegister Parameters
When you define an sfdcRegister transformation, you set the action attribute to sfdcRegister and specify the parameters.
When you define an sfdcRegister transformation, you set the action attribute to sfdcRegister and specify the parameters.
This table describes the input parameters:

alias Yes API name of the registered dataset. This name can contain only underscores
and alphanumeric characters, and must be unique among other dataset
aliases in your organization. It must begin with a letter, not include spaces,
not end with an underscore, and not contain two consecutive underscores.
It also cannot exceed 80 characters.
1097

When the alias is unique, the sfdcRegister transformation registers a new
dataset with the alias. When an existing dataset has the alias, the
transformation overwrites the current version of that dataset.
name Yes Display name of the registered dataset. The name cannot exceed 80
characters. To change the name after you create the dataset, you must edit
the dataset.
source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the dataset that you want
to register. This node is the input source for this transformation.
rowLevelSharingSource No The API name of the object from which to inherit sharing. Used when
applying row-level security on the dataset when the dataset is first created.
Example: "rowLevelSharingSource": "Opportunity"
To change the sharing source after you create the dataset, you must edit
the dataset. For more information, refer to Add Row-Level Security by
Inheriting Sharing Rules.
rowLevelSecurityFilter No The predicate used to apply row-level security on the dataset when the
dataset is first created.
Example: "rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'OwnerId' == "$User.Id""
To change the predicate after you create the dataset, you must edit the
dataset.
When entering the predicate in the Register transformation of the dataflow
JSON, you must escape the double quotes around string values.
After the dataset is created, CRM Analytics ignores its security predicate
setting in the dataflow. To change the security predicate for an existing
dataset, edit the dataset in the user interface.
SEE ALSO:
sliceDataset Transformation
The sliceDataset transformation removes fields from a dataset in your dataflow, leaving you with a subset of fields for use in a new dataset
or in other transformations. This allows you to create multiple datasets, each with different sets of fields from a single dataset.
Note: To drop columns in a Data Prep recipe, see Drop Columns Transformation: Drop Columns from the Recipe.
The transformation includes the mode parameter, which lets you choose between two modes: drop or select. Set it to drop to
remove the fields you specify. Set it to select to keep the fields you specify.
Example: Here’s an example. Let’s say your dataflow contains an sfdcDigest node, ExtractOpportunities, that extracts
all fields from the Opportunity object. However, some of your users don’t want Id fields in their Opportunities dataset. You resolve
this by adding a sliceDataset node to your dataflow, specifying the source node, the fields you want to remove from that node,
and drop mode.
1098
sliceDataset Node in Dataflow Editor sliceDataset Node in Dataflow JSON
{
"RemoveFieldsFromExtractOpportunities":
{
"action": "sliceDataset",
"parameters": {
"source": "ExtractOpportunities",
"mode": "drop",
"fields": [
{
"name": "Id"
},
{
"name": "Pricebook2Id"
}
]
}
}
}
sliceDataset Parameters
Add a sliceDataset transformation to a dataflow either in the dataflow editor, or directly in the JSON dataflow definition file. The
parameters you specify are the same for both methods.
sliceDataset Parameters
Add a sliceDataset transformation to a dataflow either in the dataflow editor, or directly in the JSON dataflow definition file. The parameters
To add a sliceDataset transformation in the dataflow editor, click .

To add a sliceDataset transformation in the JSON definition file, add a node and set the action attribute to sliceDataset.

source Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that identifies the dataset that you want to
slice. Input source for this transformation.
mode Yes The action you want to take on the specified fields. Set it to drop to remove
the fields. Set it to select to keep the fields.
A dataset must have at least 1 dimension field. If a sliceDataset node removes
all dimension fields, the dataflow fails.
fields Yes An array of names of the fields that you want to drop or select from the specified
source node.
1099
The update Transformation updates the specified field values in an existing dataset based on data from another dataset, which we call
the lookup dataset. The transformation looks up the new values from corresponding fields in the lookup dataset. The transformation
stores the results in a new dataset.
Note: To update columns in a Data Prep recipe, see Update Node: Swap Column Values.
When you create the transformation, you specify the keys that are used to match records between the two datasets. To dictate which
field in the lookup dataset updates the field in the source dataset, you also map the corresponding fields from both dataset.
For example, you have an existing Accounts dataset that contains account information—Id, Name, and AnnualRevenue. Unfortunately,
some of the account names in the dataset are now incorrect because of a series of mergers and acquisitions. To quickly update the
account names in the dataset, you perform these tasks.
1. Create a .csv file that contains the new account names and associated account IDs for accounts that have name changes.
2. Upload the .csv file to create a dataset called UpdatedAccountNames.
3. Create a dataflow definition file to update account names in the Accounts dataset by looking up the new account names in the
UpdatedAccountNames dataset.
You create the following dataflow definition file.

{
"Extract_AccountDetails": {
"parameters": {
"object": "Account",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "AnnualRevenue" }
]
}
},
"Extract_UpdatedAccountNames": {
"parameters": { "alias": "UpdatedAccountNames" }
},
"Update_AccountRecords": {
"action": "update",
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_AccountDetails",
"right": "Extract_UpdatedAccountNames",
"left_key": [ "Id" ],
"right_key": [ "AccountID" ],
"update_columns": { "Name": "NewAccountName" }
1100
}
},
"Register_UpdatedAccountRecords": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Accounts",
"name": "Accounts",
"source": "Update_AccountRecords"
}
}
}
Let’s look at another example, where a composite key is used to match records between both datasets. In this case, you match records
using the account ID and account name fields.
You create the following dataflow definition file.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "AnnualRevenue" }
]
}
},
"Extract_UpdatedAccountNames": {
"parameters": { "alias": "UpdatedAccountNames" }
},
"Update_AccountRecords": {
"action": "update",
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_AccountDetails",
"right": "Extract_UpdatedAccountNames",
"left_key": ["Id","Name"],
"right_key": ["AccountId","NewAccountName"],
"update_columns": {
"Name": "NewAccountName",
"CreatedDate":"NewCreatedDate",
"AnnualRevenue":"NewAnnualRevenue"
}
},
"Register_UpdatedAccountRecords": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "Accounts",
"name": "Accounts",
"source": "Update_AccountRecords"
}
}
}
1101
update Parameters
When you define an update transformation, you set the action attribute to update and specify the parameters.
update Parameters
When you define an update transformation, you set the action attribute to update and specify the parameters.

left Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that
identifies the dataset that contains the
records that you want to update.
right Yes Node in the dataflow definition file that

identifies the lookup dataset that contains
the new values.
left_key Yes Key column in the left dataset used to match

records in the other dataset. If you use a
composite key, the left and right keys must
have the same number of columns in the
same order. For an example, see update
Transformation.
right_key Yes Key column in the right dataset used to

match records in the other dataset. If you
use a composite key, the left and right keys
must have the same number of columns in
the same order.
update_columns No An array of corresponding columns between

the left and right dataset. Use the following
syntax: "update_columns": {
"LeftColumn1":
"RightColumn1",
"LeftColumn2":
"RightColumn2",...
"LeftColumnN":
"RightColumnN" }. The value from
right column replaces the value from the
corresponding left column. The field types
of the left and right columns must match.
If you specify a column name that does not
exist, the dataflow fails.
If you do not specify this parameter, the
transformation updates the left dataset by
matching all columns in the right dataset
with the columns in the left. In this case, the
right column names must match exactly
1102

with the left column names. Otherwise, an
error occurs.
SEE ALSO:
Overriding Metadata Generated by a Transformation

Optionally, you can override the metadata that is generated by a transformation. You can override
EDITIONS
object and field attributes. For example, you can change a field name that is extracted from a
Salesforce object so that it appears differently in the dataset. To override the metadata, add the Available in: Salesforce
overrides to the Schema section of the transformation in the dataflow definition file. Classic and Lightning
In the Schema section, you can override the metadata attributes for one object only. Experience
The Schema section in this sample sfdcDigest transformation contains metadata overrides: Available for an additional
cost in: Enterprise,
Performance, and
Unlimited Editions
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Name" },
]
},
"schema": {
"objects": [
{
"label":"Sales Opportunities",
"fields": [
{
"name": "Amount",
"label": "Opportunity Amount"
}
]
}
]
}
}
Object Attributes
You can override the following object attributes.
1103
Object Attribute Type Description

label String The display name for the object. Can be up to 40 characters.
Example:
"label": "Sales Data"
description String The description of the object. Must be less than 1,000 characters.
Add a description to annotate an object in the dataflow definition file. This
description is not visible to users in the Analytics user interface.
Example:
"description": "The SalesData object tracks basic
sales data."
fields Array The array of fields for this object.
Field Attributes
You can override attributes of each specified dataset field.
Field Attribute Type Description

name String Name of the field in the dataset. Identifies the field that you want to override.
Examples:
"name": "Amount"
"name": "Role.Name"
label String The display name for the field. Can be up to 255 characters.
Example:
"label": "Opportunity Amount"
description String The description of the field. Must be less than 1,000 characters.
Add a description to annotate a field in the dataflow definition file. This description is not visible
to users in the Analytics user interface.
Example:
"description": "The Amount field contains the opportunity
amount."
isSystemField Boolean Indicates whether this field is a system field to be excluded from query results.
Example:
format String The display format of the numeric value.

Example:
1104
Field Attribute Type Description

"format": "$#,##0.00" (Numeric)
For more information about valid formats, see Numeric Formats.
Numeric Formats
An example of a typical numeric value is $1,000,000.99, which is represented as $#,##0.00 in the format field. You’re required to
specify the precision and scale of the number. The format is specified by using the following symbols:
Symbol Meaning
0 One digit. Use to add leading or trailing 0s, like #,###.00 for $56,375.00.
# Adds zero or one digit
. Default symbol used as the decimal separator. Use the decimalSeparator field to
set the decimal separator to a different symbol.
- Minus sign
, Grouping separator. Use the groupSeparator field to set the group separator to a
different symbol.
$ Currency sign. Use the currencySymbol field to set the currency indicator to a different
symbol.
Note: The format for numeric values when displayed in the UI defaults to No Format. Existing formatting is removed. Also, you
can’t override date formats.
Example: Let’s consider an example where you want to override the following object and field attributes that the sfdcDigest
transformation extracts from the Opportunity object.
Object/Field Attribute Changes

Opportunity object • Change the object label to "Sales Opportunities"
• Add an object description
Id field • Change the field label to "Opportunity Id"

• Hide the field from queries
Amount field • Change the field label to "Opportunity Amount"

• Change the format to $#,##0.00
CloseDate field • Change the field label to "Closing Date"
1105
To override the attributes, you add the Schema section with the override values to sfdcDigest in the dataflow definition file.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
},
"schema": {
"objects": [
{
"label":"Sales Opportunities",
"description": "These are all sales opportunities.",
"fields": [
{
"name": "Id",
"label": "Opportunity Id",
"isSystemField": true
},
{
"name": "Amount",
"label": "Opportunity Amount",
"format": "$#,##0.00"
},
{
"name": "CloseDate",
"label": "Closing Date"
}
]
}
]
}
},
"Register_Dataset_Opportunities": {
"parameters": {
"source": "Extract_Opportunities",
"name": "Opportunities"
}
}
}
Important: Analytics removes Schema sections from all transformations except sfdcDigest when you add a dataflow to a
package. If you intend to package a dataflow, we recommend that you specify field attributes in the transformation itself,
1106
instead of in a schema section. For example, this computeRelative transformation uses a label attribute to change a field’s
label.
"CalcAmountAfterdiscount": {
"parameters": {
"source": "getOpps",
"computedFields": [
{
"name": "DiscountedAmount",
"label": "Discounted Amount",
"type": "Numeric",
"saqlExpression": "Amount * Discount_Percentage__c",
"precision": 10,
"scale": 2
}
]
}
},
Edit Nodes in the Dataflow

When you edit a dataflow node, for example to change its name, or add or remove fields, consider that these changes can impact
downstream nodes. If you're manually editing nodes in the JSON dataflow definition file, make sure that your changes are reflected in
downstream nodes. If you're working in the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics propagates many of your changes to downstream nodes for
you.
Renaming Node Names

When you rename a node in the dataflow JSON, you need to manually check that the name is unique and change the name wherever
the node is referenced in downstream nodes.
In the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics validates that the new name is unique, and changes the name in downstream nodes for you.
Adding Fields in a Node

When you add a field to a node in the dataflow JSON, consider that you also need to add the field in these downstream nodes.
• augment: If you want to augment the new field on other data in the dataflow, add the field to the right_select parameter in
the corresponding augment node.
• sliceDataset: If there is a downstream sliceDataset node with the mode parameter set to select, add the new field to the fields
parameter to make sure it isn't dropped.
When you add a field to a node in the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics offers to propagate the field in downstream augment and sliceDataset
nodes. If you choose to propagate your changes, CRM Analytics adds the new field to:
1107
• The Right Fields attribute in downstream augment nodes.

• The Fields attribute in downstream sliceDataset nodes where the Mode attribute is set to Keep.
Removing Fields in a Node

When you remove a field in a node in the dataflow JSON, the dataflow can fail if you don’t also remove the field in these places:
• left_key, right_key, and right_select parameters in downstream augment nodes.
• The fields parameter in downstream sliceDataset nodes.
• Downstream computeExpression or computeRelative nodes that reference the field.
When you remove a field in a node in the dataflow editor, CRM Analytics offers to propagate the field in downstream augment and
sliceDataset nodes. If you choose to propagate your changes, CRM Analytics removes the field from:
• The Left Key, Right Key, and Right Fields attributes in downstream augment nodes.
• The Fields attribute in downstream sliceDataset nodes.
Note: The propagate option doesn’t remove fields from downstream computeExpression or computeRelative nodes that reference
it.
You see the propagate option whenever you add or remove fields from these types of nodes.
• sfdcDigest
• digest
• augment
• computeExpression
• computeRelative
• sliceDataset
1108

You can configure the dataflow by adding transformations directly to the dataflow definition file.
EDITIONS
A dataflow definition file is a JSON file that contains transformations that represent the dataflow
logic. The dataflow definition file must be saved with UTF-8 encoding. Available in Salesforce
Before you can configure a dataflow to process external data, you must upload the external data
Experience.
to CRM Analytics.
1. Available with CRM
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then click Data Manager. Analytics, which is available
2. Click Open Data Manager (Legacy). for an extra cost in
3. Click the Dataflows & Recipes tab. and Unlimited Editions. Also
4. Download the existing dataflow definition file by clicking Download in the actions menu. available in Developer
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To edit the dataflow

definition file:
Dataflows
5. Make a backup copy of the existing dataflow definition file before you modify it.
CRM Analytics doesn’t retain previous versions of the file. If you make a mistake, you can upload the previous version to roll back
your changes.
6. Add each transformation as a node in the dataflow definition file, using a JSON editor.
For example, based on the design in the previous stepprevious step, you can add the following transformation nodes:
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
1109
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" }
]
}
},
"Transform_Augment_OpportunitiesWithAccountDetails": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_Opportunities",
"left_key": [ "AccountId" ],
"relationship": "OpptyAcct",
"right": "Extract_AccountDetails",
"right_key": [ "Id" ],
"right_select": [
"Name"
]
}
},
"Transform_Filter_Opportunities": {
"action": "filter",
"parameters": {
"filter": "StageName:EQ:Closed Won",
"source": "Transform_Augment_OpportunitiesWithAccountDetails"
}
},
"Register_Dataset_WonOpportunities": {
"parameters": {
"alias": "WonOpportunities",
"name": "WonOpportunities",
"source": "Transform_Filter_Opportunities"
}
}
}
See Transformations for CRM Analytics Dataflows for more about each transformation and its JSON.
Note: The JSON keys and values are case-sensitive. Each bolded key in the example JSON is the node name for a transformation.
Each node contains an action value, which identifies the transformation type. The order in which you add the transformations
1110
to the dataflow definition file doesn’t matter. CRM Analytics determines the order in which to process the transformations by
traversing the dataflow to determine the dependencies among them.
Important: Node names must be unique in a dataflow definition file, and can’t contain space or tab characters. Consider that
node names are not treated as case sensitive, so names such as “Extract_Opportunities” and “extract_opportunities” aren’t
unique in the same definition file.
7. Before you save the dataflow definition file, use a JSON validation tool to verify that the JSON is valid.
An error occurs if you try to upload the dataflow definition file with invalid JSON. You can find JSON validation tools on the internet.
8. Save the dataflow definition file with UTF-8 encoding, and then close the file.
9. In the Dataflow view of the Monitor tab, click Upload from the action menu to upload the updated dataflow definition file.
Note:
• Uploading the dataflow definition file doesn’t affect any running dataflow jobs and doesn’t automatically start the dataflow
job.
• The maximum length of a dataflow definition file is 1,000,000 characters.
You can now start the dataflow on demand or wait for it to run on the schedule. Users can’t query the registered dataset until the dataflow
runs.
To create dataflows, you must have Data Sync enabled. If your org’s first license was provisioned before the Winter ’20 release, you can
manually enable Data Sync.
Clean, Transform, and Load Data with Data Prep Classic

Use a recipe to clean and combine data from multiple datasets or connected objects. Add bucket and formula fields, filter rows, transform
field values, convert field types, and standardize date formats. You can then output the results to a new target dataset.
Watch a Demo: Get Started with the Recipe Editor (English Only)
When you’re ready, follow these steps to create a recipe.
Should I Use Data Prep Classic or Data Prep?

CRM Analytics provides two versions of Data Prep: Data Prep Classic and Data Prep. Data Prep is the latest version that replaces the
previous version, Data Prep Classic. Recipes built in Data Prep can’t be opened in Data Prep Classic. When you open a Data Prep
Classic recipe, it is upgraded to and opens in Data Prep. As of the Winter ’21 release, you can no longer create recipes in Data Prep
Classic.
Create a Recipe with Data Prep Classic
Use a Data Prep Classic recipe to transform data before loading it into a dataset. Only Government Cloud users can create recipes
with Data Prep Classic. All other users, including those using Government Cloud Plus, must use Data Prep to create recipes.
Set Up the Preview in a Recipe
A recipe displays a preview of your data on the Preview tab as you work. You can set the columns and number of rows that appear
in this preview. If you are working with a large set of data, reducing the size of the preview speeds up the data refresh as you add
steps to your recipe.
Add More Data in a Recipe
You can add columns of data from related objects to existing data in a recipe. Depending on how you want to combine the new
data, use one of the following methods: lookup, left join, right join, inner join, or full outer join.
1111
Add Rows in a Recipe with Append

Use append to add rows to the data in your recipe from another dataset or connected object. Fields are mapped automatically, or
you can map them manually.
Clean and Prepare Data Intelligently with Column Profiles and Smart Suggestions
The column profile gives you key insights into the quality of your data and suggests additional transformations to help you clean
and prepare it. This profile is especially useful when you are combining data from different sources, where inconsistencies are often
introduced.
Add a Filter in a Recipe
Filter data in a recipe to remove rows that you don’t need in your target dataset.
Bucket a Measure Field in a Recipe
Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified measure field.
Bucket a Dimension Field in a Recipe
Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified dimension field.
Bucket a Date Field in a Recipe
Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified date field.
Add a Formula Field in a Recipe
Add a formula field to calculate new values from measures and dimensions in your recipe.
Aggregate and Group Data to a Different Grain
Large datasets can be hard to digest due to the amount of information and low-grain details. Aggregation allows these datasets to
be rolled up to a higher granularity, thus allowing users to create recurring summary statistics and join datasets with different
granularities. You can also aggregate data to perform calculations on grouped records without aggregating the measures. For
instance, group by website session IDs and then calculate the average time on each page and total number of clicks.
Transform Fields in a Recipe
Data is not always consistent, especially when you combine data from different sources. In a recipe, you can transform fields to
ensure that values are consistent in your target dataset. Change case, split values to get just the parts you need, and replace incorrect
values.
Standardize Date Formats
If a dimension field contains dates in different formats, use the Format Dates recipe transformation to standardize the format for all
values in the field. A consistent format enables you to correctly filter and group records by date, including filtering by date component,
such as month. It also ensures that you can successfully convert the field type from dimension to date.
Convert Field Types in a Recipe
The type assigned to a dataset field determines how you can query that field’s data. For example, you can filter and group by a
dimension or date field, or perform math calculations on a measure field. When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics sometimes
tags a dataset field with the wrong type. If needed, convert fields to the correct types.
Predict Missing Values in Dimension Columns
When a dataset or connected object has missing values in a dimension column, CRM Analytics can fill in missing values to complete
your data. CRM Analytics intelligently predicts values based on values in other strongly correlated columns in your data.
Navigate Columns in a Recipe
As you add data and transform fields, the number of columns in your recipe preview increases, which makes it harder to find the
columns that you want to work with. Use the column view to quickly find the columns that you need, and hide the ones you don't.
1112
Navigate and Edit Recipe Steps

As you prepare your data, each change you make appears as a recipe step on the left. Think of these steps as your recipe history.
You can move back and forward through this history to see how the data looks at different stages of the recipe. If you don’t like what
you see, you can edit or remove any step.
Save a Recipe
If you’re not ready to create the target dataset, save the recipe and come back to it later. That saves your steps without you having
to create the dataset.
Should I Use Data Prep Classic or Data Prep?

CRM Analytics provides two versions of Data Prep: Data Prep Classic and Data Prep. Data Prep is the latest version that replaces the
previous version, Data Prep Classic. Recipes built in Data Prep can’t be opened in Data Prep Classic. When you open a Data Prep Classic
recipe, it is upgraded to and opens in Data Prep. As of the Winter ’21 release, you can no longer create recipes in Data Prep Classic.
Create a Recipe with Data Prep Classic

Use a Data Prep Classic recipe to transform data before loading it into a dataset. Only Government
EDITIONS
Cloud users can create recipes with Data Prep Classic. All other users, including those using
Government Cloud Plus, must use Data Prep to create recipes. Available in Salesforce
Note: To start creating a Data Prep recipe, see Create a Recipe with Data Prep. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
1. In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then click Data Manager to open the data
Available with CRM
manager. Analytics, which is available
The data manager opens in a new browser tab. for an extra cost in
2. In the data manager, click the Dataflows & Recipes tab. Enterprise, Performance,
3. In the Dataflows & Recipes tab, click the Recipes subtab. available in Developer
The Recipes subtab displays a list of your existing recipes. Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
4. Click Create Recipe.

5. From the list of datasets, select the one that contains the data you want to prepare. Alternatively, you can click the Connected Data
tab to select a connected object if your org has Data Sync enabled.
1113
Note: Make sure the connected object that you select has synced and completed at least once.
You are prompted to enter a name for the recipe.

6. Enter a recipe name and then click Next.
Note: The recipe name you enter here is also used for the target dataset name.
The recipe page opens, displaying a preview of the data from your selected dataset or connected object.
Set Up the Preview in a Recipe

A recipe displays a preview of your data on the Preview tab as you work. You can set the columns and number of rows that appear in
this preview. If you are working with a large set of data, reducing the size of the preview speeds up the data refresh as you add steps to
your recipe.
Note: To speed up the preview when you create a recipe, multivalue fields aren’t included by default. The recipe editor hides
these fields from the preview because they sometimes cause recipes to yield unexpected results. For example, a recipe with
multivalue fields can result in query timeouts or fail to load or run. If needed, you can manually add these fields to the recipe.
If you’re working with a connected object of more than 10,000 rows, CRM Analytics loads a sample of 10,000 rows into the recipe. As
you work in a recipe, the sample size used in the preview is always visible at the top of the page. Use the selector to choose to see the
first 1000, 5000, or 10,000 rows.
Note: Filters that you add in a recipe only apply to the sample data. They don’t result in the recipe editor retrieving an updated
sample.
To help you distinguish between nulls and empty strings, the preview shows null values as “null” in gray italics and empty strings as
blank values.
1114
If you don’t need a column in your preview, select Hide Column from the column menu.
If you’re working with numerous columns, click the columns tab to work from a list view of columns without the data.
1115
All the columns included in your recipe appear first (1), color-coded by source, with their type, the dataset they come from, and a missing
values indicator. To find a column, start typing the name in the search box (2) to narrow down the list. To hide a column, click its menu
button and select Hide Column. Columns that you hide in the recipe appear in a separate list (4). To add one of these columns back,
select Add to Recipe from its menu (5).
To work on a column in either the Preview or Columns tab, click it. The column menu options and smart suggestions available are the
same on both tabs.
Note: The recipe preview can display up to 100 fields. If you remove a field from the preview, by default it’s not included in the
target dataset. However, you can reselect any field when you create the dataset.
Add More Data in a Recipe

You can add columns of data from related objects to existing data in a recipe. Depending on how
EDITIONS
you want to combine the new data, use one of the following methods: lookup, left join, right join,
inner join, or full outer join. Available in Salesforce
Note: To add columns from a related object in a Data Prep recipe, see Join Node: Add Related Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Columns of Data to the Recipe. To do it in a dataflow, see augment Transformation.
Watch a Demo: Add Data in a Recipe (English Only) Available with CRM
When you add data to a recipe, you select the dataset or connected object that contains the fields for an extra cost in
that you want to add. You also select the key fields to match the records between the existing and Enterprise, Performance,
new data streams. For example, to add User fields to Opportunity records, use the User Id field from and Unlimited Editions. Also
the User object and Opportunity Owner Id field from the Opportunity object as the keys. When available in Developer
defining the key, you can use a single field or, if necessary, multiple fields. Note that multivalue Edition.
fields can't be used as keys.
1116
Let’s look at an example to illustrate how you add data. Imagine you started a recipe from an opportunities dataset, and you want to
add more opportunity details from another dataset. You can use the opportunity ID field from each dataset as the keys.
1.
On the recipe page, click the Add Data button ( ).
2. Select either the Datasets or Connected Data tab, and click the dataset or object that you want to add.
3. Choose the join type. By default, Lookup is selected.
4. Select the keys from the left and right data streams. The left data stream is the existing data. The right is the new data that you want
to add. CRM Analytics suggests keys if it finds related fields.
1117
5. To select additional keys, click +Add Key Pair.

If needed, use multiple keys to match records. For example, imagine you’re adding contact information to lead data. Using names
alone to match can result in duplicate matches when different leads have the same name. Use two keys to match on name and
company to ensure you’re matching the right data. You can use up to 5 keys.
Important: CRM Analytics datasets contain date and time component fields, such as Year, Quarter, and Month, that are
derived automatically from existing date and time fields. Use of these component fields as keys isn’t supported.
6. In the Columns to Include section, select the columns to include in the recipe.
Only the key columns are selected by default. So make sure that you select all the columns that you need in the recipe. The columns
are color coded to indicate their source.
Note: The results preview can display up to 100 columns. Modify the preview or deselect columns to ensure that you can
see just the columns that you need.
7. Click Done.
Each time you add data, a new step is created in your recipe, and the added fields appear in your recipe preview. Hover over a step and
click to access the Edit and Remove options.
1118
SEE ALSO:
Lookup
Left Join
Right Join
Inner Join
Full Outer Join
Add Rows in a Recipe with Append

Use append to add rows to the data in your recipe from another dataset or connected object. Fields
EDITIONS
are mapped automatically, or you can map them manually.
Note: To append rows in a Data Prep recipe, see Append Node: Stack Rows from Different Available in Salesforce
Sets of Data. To do it in a dataflow, see append Transformation. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Let’s look at an example of how you can use append in a recipe. Imagine you’re a US company that
uses separate Salesforce orgs for its US and Canada operations. You sync the US opportunities in Available with CRM
your local org, and use a remote Salesforce connection to sync your Canada opportunities. You Analytics, which is available
want to combine these US and Canada opportunities to create a single North America opportunities for an extra cost in
dataset. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1119
You’ve already started the recipe from your synced US opportunities (1), to which you now want to append data from your synced
Canada opportunities dataset (2). Notice that the fields are not exactly the same. The US data has an Amount field and the Canada data
has a Value field. The US data has a Lead Source field, which the Canada data doesn’t have. These kinds of differences affect how appended
fields can be mapped to fields in the recipe.
• Appended fields are mapped automatically to recipe fields with the same name and type. You can change these mappings. In this
example, the Currency field will be mapped automatically.
• Appended fields with different names are not mapped automatically, but you can map them to any fields of the same type. In this
example, you have to manually map the Value field to the Amount field.
• Fields with different types can’t be mapped.
• Recipe fields that are not in the appended data are added to the appended rows and populated with nulls. In this example, the Lead
Source field will be added to the appended rows.
Note: If null measure handling in datasets isn’t enabled for your org, measure fields are populated with zeros when they’re
added to appended rows.
Follow these steps to append data in a recipe.

1.
On the recipe page, click the Append Data button ( ).
2. Select either the DATASETS or CONNECTED DATA tab, and click the dataset or object that you want to add. In our example, you
would select the Opportunity dataset from the CanadaOrg connection.
1120
3. On the map fields dialog, review how CRM Analytics has mapped the recipe fields in the first column to fields from the data to
append in the second column. Remember, fields with the same name and type are mapped automatically.
Note: By default, hidden fields in your recipe aren’t mapped. To map hidden fields, click the Show hidden fields link and
accept or change the mappings.
4. To change a field mapping, click the field in the FIELD TO APPEND column, and select a field. You can only select from fields of the
same type as the recipe field that you’re mapping to.
In our example, you don’t have a field to map to the Lead Source field, so you leave that as it is. The Amount field has not been
mapped because the corresponding field in the Canada data was named Value. So you map the Value field to the Amount field.
1121
5. When you finish mapping fields, click Continue.

6. On the confirmation message, click Append.
Note: Rows that you append in a recipe do not appear in the recipe preview, but are added to the target dataset when you
run the recipe.
When you append data, a new step is created in your recipe.
When you run the recipe, the rows are appended in the target dataset.
Here, the Lead Source field has been added to the Canada rows and populated with null values. The Value values from the Canada rows
now appear in the Amount column.
Clean and Prepare Data Intelligently with Column Profiles and Smart Suggestions
The column profile gives you key insights into the quality of your data and suggests additional transformations to help you clean and
prepare it. This profile is especially useful when you are combining data from different sources, where inconsistencies are often introduced.
1122
Note: To profile columns in a Data Prep recipe, see Profile Columns to Understand Data in a Data Prep Recipe.
Let’s look at an example of how you can use the profile to review the quality of data in a set of leads. Select the column you want to
analyze to see its profile on the right of the recipe editor. To open the column profile if it isn’t visible, click or select Show Profile
from the column’s menu.
Note: The sections that you see in the profile depend on the type of column.
Here are the sections that you see in the column profile.
Sample Size
This section shows the number of rows used to generate

the column profile data. To use a larger sample, click
Note: The option to use a larger sample of rows is available only for non-calculated dimension fields. The option doesn’t appear
if the sample size is greater than the number of rows in the recipe.
1123
Valid Values
This section gives you an idea of how the column is

populated. A high proportion of null values can indicate
lower quality data of limited usefulness in lenses and
dashboards.
Frequent Values
This section shows the count for each of the top five
values in the column. To see the count for all values in
the sample, click View More. This information gives you
a quick insight into the variation in your data.
This example shows different values for the same country,
which can impact grouping and filtering in a lens or
dashboard.
For dimension and date columns, click one or more bars to see suggested transformations for those values in the Suggestions bar. In
this example, if you select the US value, CRM Analytics suggests replacing it or filtering it out.
String Length (Dimension Columns Only)
This section gives you a breakdown of the number of

characters in dimension values. A wider variation than
expected can indicate inconsistencies with data from
mixed sources.
1124
Clusters (Dimension Columns Only)
Clusters are groupings of similar values presented as a

stacked bar. To see which value a segment represents,
hover over it.
In this example, CRM Analytics has found instances of
“USA” and “US”, and “UK” and “U/K” in the Country
column. These values can be genuinely different, but
they could also indicate inconsistencies in data from
different sources, or simply typos.
Note: Clustering works best with English language values. Values in other languages can produce unexpected results.
To help you with your data cleansing, CRM Analytics suggests the Bucket By Cluster transformation whenever it identifies clusters. This
transformation works just like regular bucketing, but gets you started by suggesting the buckets and values.
You can add the transformation as is, or add more buckets and values.
1125
Anomalies (Dimension Columns Only)
This section displays values that are not consistent with

other values in the column. In this example, CRM Analytics
has identified two values in a reference column that in
which most values are in the format 123-456-789.
Again, to help you clean your data, CRM Analytics suggests transformations when you click one or more bars. For example, you can
replace the values or filter them out.
Histogram (Measure and Date Columns Only)
The histogram shows the distribution of values in a

measure or date column. Each bar represents a
predefined range, and the bar height shows the
frequency of values falling within that range. Hover over
a bar to see the range and frequency of the values it
represents.
Use the histogram to see if the data falls within expected
ranges. Low-frequency outlying values could indicate
data inconsistencies or data that could impact aggregate
calculations.
Measure columns also display statistical information that you can use in your data preparation.
With date columns, you can select the time frame for grouping values by year or by quarter.
1126
Add a Filter in a Recipe

Filter data in a recipe to remove rows that you don’t need in your target dataset.
EDITIONS
Note: To filter rows in a Data Prep recipe, see Filter Node: Filter Rows. To do it in a dataflow,
see filter Transformation. Available in Salesforce
1. Experience.
On the recipe page, click .
Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1127
2. Click + and select the column to filter by.
3. Enter the filter condition.

For a dimension column, you can enter your own value instead of selecting an existing column value.
4. lick Apply.
5.
To enter another condition, click .
6. When you have added all your conditions, click Save.
The filter appears as a step in the left pane of the recipe.
1128
7. Save the recipe.
Note: Filters in recipes filter rows that meet all specified conditions.
Bucket a Measure Field in a Recipe

Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified measure field.
EDITIONS
Note: To bucket numeric values in a Data Prep recipe, see Categorize Measure Column
Values into Buckets. Available in Salesforce
A bucket field lets you create new values based on existing values in another field. For example, Experience.
use a bucket field to categorize households as small, medium, or large, based on the number of
people in the household. Available with CRM
No. of People in Household Size Category for an extra cost in
1–2 Small and Unlimited Editions. Also
3–5 Medium Edition.
6 or more Large
USER PERMISSIONS
1. To create a recipe:
On the column header of the measure field you want to bucket, click , and then select
Bucket. Dataflows OR Edit
Bucket settings appear in the Add Transformation panel below the preview data. Dataset Recipes
1129
2. For Range1, enter a value and name for the first bucket. Rows with values below the Range1 value are assigned this bucket name.
In this example, rows with values less than 3 are assigned a value of Small in the new bucket field.
The Range2 value populates with the value you enter for Range1.
3. If your bucket field has more than two buckets, click Add>> to add another range.
4. For each additional range you add, enter the range of values and the bucket name. Rows with values greater than or equal to the
first value, and less than the second value are assigned the bucket name. In this example, rows with values 3, 4, or 5 are assigned
a value of Medium in the new bucket field.
5. Repeat steps 4–5 to add any additional buckets that you need.
6. For the final range, enter a value and bucket name. Rows with values greater than or equal to this value are assigned this bucket
name. In this example, rows with values greater than or equal to 6 are assigned a value of Large in the new bucket field.
7. When you have completed all the ranges, click Add.

The new bucket field appears next to the source field in the recipe preview.
Tip: You can use a bucket field to filter rows in a recipe.
1130
Bucket a Dimension Field in a Recipe

Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified dimension field.
EDITIONS
Note: To bucket dimension values in a Data Prep recipe, see Categorize Dimension Column
Values into Buckets. Available in Salesforce
use a bucket field to categorize products in support cases according to their type.
Available with CRM
Product Product Category Analytics, which is available
HVAC Ctrl, HeatWave, Home A/C HVAC Enterprise, Performance,
Humidity Ctrl, Humidity Unit, Home Humidity Humidity
Compressor, Condenser, Thermostat Parts Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1.
On the column header of the dimension field you want to bucket, click , and then select
To create a recipe:
Bucket.
Bucket settings appear in the Add Transformation panel below the preview data. Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
2. In the Bucket1 field, enter a name for the first bucket.

3. In the Values for...box, enter the values to be assigned to this bucket. Press Tab after each value to enter the next.
In this example, rows containing HVAC Ctrl, HeatWave, or Home A/C product values are assigned a value of HVAC in the
new bucket field.
4.
To add more buckets, click and repeat steps 2–3.
1131
5. To bucket remaining values that you have not bucketed, select Bucket remaining values and enter a bucket for these values.
If you don’t select this option, rows with unbucketed values keep the same value in the new bucket field.
6. When you have completed all the buckets, click Add.
Bucket a Date Field in a Recipe

Add a field to a recipe to bucket values in a specified date field.
EDITIONS
Note: To bucket date values in a Data Prep recipe, see Categorize Date Column Values into
Buckets. Available in Salesforce
use a bucket field to categorize support cases according to the season they were opened.
Available with CRM
1.
On the column header of the date field you want to bucket, click , and then select Bucket. Analytics, which is available
Bucket settings appear in the Add Transformation panel below the preview data. The default for an extra cost in
mode is Absolute, which lets you specify a date range and name for each bucket. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1132
2. Enter a start date and end date for Bucket1, and enter a name for the bucket.
In this example, you want each bucket to be a season, so you enter the date range for winter and enter the bucket name.
3.
To add more buckets, click and repeat step 2.
4. To bucket remaining values that you have not bucketed, select Bucket remaining values and enter a bucket for these values.
If you don’t select this option, rows with unbucketed values keep the same value in the new bucket field.
5. When you have completed all the buckets, click Add.
In Relative mode, each bucket is a period of time relative to the date that the recipe runs. You can create bucket periods based on days,
weeks, months, quarters, or even years. For example, create a bucket field from the case created date to categorize cases by when they
were opened.
1133
When you create a relative date bucket field, manually enter the start and end of each period, or use the sliders.
Add a Formula Field in a Recipe

Add a formula field to calculate new values from measures and dimensions in your recipe.
EDITIONS
Note: To create a calculated column based on a formula in a Data Prep recipe, see Formula
Transformation: Create a Calculated Column Based on an Expression. To do it in a dataflow, Available in Salesforce
see computeExpression Transformation. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
A formula field lets you calculate new values based on existing values in fields. To help you, a formula
builder suggests fields and functions as you type. Available with CRM
1. To start creating a formula field, choose one of these methods. for an extra cost in
• Enterprise, Performance,
To create the formula from scratch, click on any field column header, and then select
Formula.
The formula builder appears in the Add Transformation panel below the recipe preview. Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a recipe:
Dataflows OR Edit
Dataset Recipes
1134
• To use a suggested function, click the field that you want to use in the recipe preview, and then click a function in the suggestions
bar below the preview.
The formula is started for you, using the field and function that you selected.
• To select multiple fields for use in your formula, while pressing Shift or Ctrl (Cmd on Mac), click the fields that you want to use
in the recipe preview. Then click an function in the suggestions bar below the preview.
The formula is started for you, using the fields and operator that you selected.
2. In the formula builder, enter the formula. If the formula has been started for you, you can edit it here.
1135
Note: Here are some tips for entering or editing your formula.
• Just start typing to see matching functions and fields.
• To select a match, either click it, or use your cursor up and down keys to select it and then press Enter or Tab.
• Use your keyboard to enter parentheses, arithmetic operators, and numbers as needed.
3. When you have completed the formula, click Add.

The new formula field appears in the recipe preview.
Tip: You can bucket a formula field or reference it in other formulas in the recipe.
Numeric Functions for Formula Fields

Use numeric functions to calculate new values from measures in your recipe. For example, you can round, truncate, and determine
the absolute value of a number. The arguments in each function can be numbers or measure columns.
String Functions for Formula Fields
Use string functions to create values in a formula field based on one or more dimension columns in your recipe or strings. For example,
you can change the casing of text strings, concatenate values from multiple columns, and replace values.
1136
Numeric Functions for Formula Fields

Use numeric functions to calculate new values from measures in your recipe. For example, you can
EDITIONS
round, truncate, and determine the absolute value of a number. The arguments in each function
can be numbers or measure columns. Available in Salesforce
Note: To get a list of numeric functions for a Data Prep recipe, see Numeric Operators and Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Functions for Formulas.
Available with CRM
abs Function Analytics, which is available
Calculates the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number is the number
without its positive or negative sign.
ceil Function available in Developer
Rounds a number up to the nearest integer. Edition.
exp Function
Returns a value for e raised to the power of a number you specify.
floor Function
Returns a number rounded down to the nearest integer.
log Function
Returns the logarithm of a number in the base you specify.
power Function
Raises a number to the power of another number.
round Function
Returns the nearest number to a number you specify, constraining the new number by a specified number of digits.
sqrt Function
Returns the positive square root of a given number.
trunc Function
Truncates a number to an integer.
abs Function
Calculates the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number is the number without
EDITIONS
its positive or negative sign.
Syntax Available in Salesforce
abs(number)
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
Argument Description
number Literal value or measure field of which you want Enterprise, Performance,
to determine the absolute value. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
1137
ceil Function
Rounds a number up to the nearest integer.
EDITIONS
Syntax
ceil(number)
Arguments Experience.
Available with CRM

number Literal value or measure field that you want to for an extra cost in
round up to the nearest integer. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
exp Function
Returns a value for e raised to the power of a number you specify.
EDITIONS
Syntax
exp(number)
Available with CRM

number Literal value or measure field to which you want for an extra cost in
to raise e. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
floor Function
Returns a number rounded down to the nearest integer.
EDITIONS
Syntax
floor(number)
Available with CRM

round down to the nearest integer. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
1138
log Function
Returns the logarithm of a number in the base you specify.
EDITIONS
Syntax
log(base, number)
Available with CRM

base Literal value or measure field used as the base for an extra cost in
of the logarithm. Enterprise, Performance,
number Literal value or measure field that you want to available in Developer
take the logarithm of. Edition.
power Function
Raises a number to the power of another number.
EDITIONS
Syntax
power(number, power)
Available with CRM

raise to the specified power. Enterprise, Performance,
power Literal value or measure field that is the power available in Developer
that you want to raise the specified number to. Edition.
round Function
Returns the nearest number to a number you specify, constraining the new number by a specified
EDITIONS
number of digits.
round(number, numberOfDigits)
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
number Literal value or measure field that you want to Enterprise, Performance,
round. and Unlimited Editions. Also
numberOfDigits Literal value or measure field that specifies the Edition.
number of digits to which the specified number
will be rounded.
1139
sqrt Function
Returns the positive square root of a given number.
EDITIONS
Syntax
sqrt(number)
Available with CRM

find the square root of. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
trunc Function
Truncates a number to an integer.
EDITIONS
Syntax
trunc(number)
Available with CRM

truncate to an integer. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
String Functions for Formula Fields

Use string functions to create values in a formula field based on one or more dimension columns
EDITIONS
in your recipe or strings. For example, you can change the casing of text strings, concatenate values
from multiple columns, and replace values. Available in Salesforce
Note: To get a list of string functions for a Data Prep recipe, see String Functions for Formulas. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
You can use a formula to manipulate strings, instead of dataflow transformations, to perform multiple
Available with CRM
string manipulations at the same time. For instance, you can nest string functions in the formula
editor to combine the sales territory and country into a single field and apply title casing to the for an extra cost in
values. Enterprise, Performance,
title(concat([Sales_Territory], " ",[Country])) and Unlimited Editions. Also
When entering a formula, text strings must be enclosed in double straight quotes ("This is
Edition.
a string."). Column names must be enclosed in square brackets ([Opportunity_Name]).
1140
concat Function
Returns a string by concatenating the values of the specified columns and input strings. For example, to display the close date as
MM-DD-YYYY, concatenate the Close_Date_Month column, Close_Date_Day column, and Close_Date_Year column, and add a
dash between each of them.
lower Function
Returns a string with all characters from the input string in lowercase. If the input string is null, then the result is null.
ltrim Function
Removes the specified substring from the beginning of a string. To remove leading spaces, do not specify a substring.
replace Function
Replaces a substring with the specified characters. If any of the arguments are null, then the function returns null. This function is
case-sensitive.
rtrim Function
Removes the specified substring from the end of a string. To remove trailing spaces, do not specify a substring.
substr Function
Returns characters from the string, starting at the specified position and of the specified length.
title Function
Returns the string with the initial character of every word in uppercase and the remaining characters in lowercase. For example,
“united states” becomes “United States.”
trim Function
Removes the specified substring from the beginning and end of a string. To remove leading and trailing spaces, do not specify a
substring.
upper Function
Returns the string with all characters in uppercase. If string is null, then the result is null.
concat Function
Returns a string by concatenating the values of the specified columns and input strings. For example,
EDITIONS
to display the close date as MM-DD-YYYY, concatenate the Close_Date_Month column,
Close_Date_Day column, and Close_Date_Year column, and add a dash between each of them. Available in Salesforce
Syntax Classic and Lightning
Experience.
concat(string1,string2,...)
Arguments Available with CRM
string1 First dimension field or text string to include in and Unlimited Editions. Also
the concatenated value. available in Developer
Edition.
string2 Second dimension field or text string to include.
Note: This function also appears in the Suggestion bar when you select multiple dimension columns in the recipe editor.
1141
Example: To create the full name, concatenate the first and last name with a space in between them as shown in the following
formula.
concat([OwnerId.FirstName]," ",[OwnerId.LastName])
1142
lower Function
Returns a string with all characters from the input string in lowercase. If the input string is null, then
EDITIONS
the result is null.
lower(string)
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
string Dimension field or text string to convert to Enterprise, Performance,
lowercase. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
Example: The AccountId.Industry column uses different casing for industries, like “Media”
and “media.” To apply consistent casing to the columns values, convert them to lowercase
using the following formula.
lower([AccountId.Industry])
1143
ltrim Function
Removes the specified substring from the beginning of a string. To remove leading spaces, do not
EDITIONS
specify a substring.
ltrim(string,[substring])
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
string Dimension field or text string to remove the Enterprise, Performance,
leading spaces or specified substring from. and Unlimited Editions. Also
substring Optional. The value removed from the string. Edition.
Example: You want to trim a string with 5 leading space characters.

ltrim(" 5 Spaces Before")
1144
replace Function
Replaces a substring with the specified characters. If any of the arguments are null, then the function
EDITIONS
returns null. This function is case-sensitive.
replace(string,searchString,replacementString)
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
string Dimension field or text string that contains the Enterprise, Performance,
substring to be replaced. and Unlimited Editions. Also
searchString Substring to replace. If searchString is an empty Edition.
string, the function returns null.
replacementString The value that replaces the substring.
Tip: To replace null values in a dimension or date column, use the Replace transformation and select the Search for null option.
Example: To change the account name from “salesforce.com” to “Salesforce” in the Account_Name column, use the following
formula.
replace([Account_Name],"salesforce.com","Salesforce")
1145
rtrim Function
Removes the specified substring from the end of a string. To remove trailing spaces, do not specify
EDITIONS
a substring.
rtrim(string,[substring])
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
string Dimension field or text string to remove the Enterprise, Performance,
trailing spaces or specified substring from. and Unlimited Editions. Also
substring Optional. The value to remove from the string. Edition.
Example: You want to trim the 2 trailing space characters from a string.
rtrim("2 Spaces After ")
1146
substr Function
Returns characters from the string, starting at the specified position and of the specified length.
EDITIONS
Syntax
substr(string,position,[length])
Available with CRM

string Dimension field or text string to extract the for an extra cost in
substring from. Enterprise, Performance,
position The starting character position of the substring. available in Developer
The first character in a string is at position 1. If Edition.
position is negative, then the position is relative
to the end of the string. So a position of -1
denotes the last character.
length Optional. The number of characters to return. If

length is 0, the output is an empty string. If
length is negative, then the function returns
null.
Example: You want to return the 13th, 14th, and 15th character from each account ID.
substr([Account_Id],13,3)
1147
title Function
Returns the string with the initial character of every word in uppercase and the remaining characters
EDITIONS
in lowercase. For example, “united states” becomes “United States.”
title(string)
Experience.
Arguments
Available with CRM
string Dimension field or text string on which to apply Enterprise, Performance,
title casing. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
Example: You want to apply title casing on the opportunity names to ensure consistent
casing on these values.
title([Opp_Name])
1148
trim Function
Removes the specified substring from the beginning and end of a string. To remove leading and
EDITIONS
trailing spaces, do not specify a substring.
Tip: Use the trim function in a SAQL query to trim other types of characters. Experience.
trim(string,[substring]) Available with CRM
Arguments Analytics, which is available
string Dimension field or text string to remove the available in Developer
specified substring from. Edition.
substring Optional. The value removed from the string.
Example: You want to remove the two leading spaces before and after a string.
trim(" Spaces Before and After ")
1149
upper Function
Returns the string with all characters in uppercase. If string is null, then the result is null.
EDITIONS
Syntax
upper(string)
Available with CRM

string Dimension field or text string to convert to for an extra cost in
uppercase. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
Example: You have a column Owner_First_Name that accepts freeform entry for users to
enter their first name. As a result, some names are in uppercase, some in lowercase, and others
in mixed case. To convert them to all uppercase characters to make the casing consistent,
use the following formula.
upper([Owner_First_Name"])
1150
Aggregate and Group Data to a Different Grain

Large datasets can be hard to digest due to the amount of information and low-grain details.
EDITIONS
Aggregation allows these datasets to be rolled up to a higher granularity, thus allowing users to
create recurring summary statistics and join datasets with different granularities. You can also Available in Salesforce
aggregate data to perform calculations on grouped records without aggregating the measures. Classic and Lightning
For instance, group by website session IDs and then calculate the average time on each page and Experience.
total number of clicks.
Available with CRM
Note: To aggregate rows in a Data Prep recipe, see Aggregate Node: Roll Up Data to a Higher Analytics, which is available
Level. for an extra cost in
You can add groups, aggregates, or both. Group by dimensions or date windows to roll up the Enterprise, Performance,
records to a higher grain. For example, group daily logs by month so you can join that data with
your monthly datasets. Aggregate measures to the new grouping granularity. You can use the
Edition.
following aggregate functions on measure columns: sum, unique, avg, count, max, and min.
Note: To prevent double counting, exclude aggregated values that don’t match the grain
of the dataset. For example, the following dataset’s grain is opportunity—each record
represents an opportunity. However, the grain of the Account Annual Revenue aggregated
value is account. If a user doesn’t know the dataset grain and adds all Account Annual Revenue
values, he would double count annual revenue for accounts with multiple records. To prevent
double counting, move Account Annual Revenue to a different dataset where the grain is
account.
1.
On the recipe page, click the Aggregation button ( ).
2. To change the granularity of the data, add groups. For example, group by account name to aggregate metrics by this dimension.
3. To view aggregated metrics for each grouping, add aggregates. For example, calculate the average age for opportunities to close,
total amounts, average amounts, and total number of deals. Because these opportunities are grouped by account name, these
aggregates provide key metrics about each account.
1151
4. Click Done.
Notice that the aggregates and group-by fields are the only fields included in the output. All other fields from the source dataset
are excluded—you can’t perform transforms on them in this recipe anymore.
5. Click Save > Save Recipe.
When you run the recipe, CRM Analytics generates a new dataset that contains the aggregates specified in the recipe and a grain
determined by the groups. In the example, we see the aggregates for each account.
Transform Fields in a Recipe

Data is not always consistent, especially when you combine data from different sources. In a recipe, you can transform fields to ensure
that values are consistent in your target dataset. Change case, split values to get just the parts you need, and replace incorrect values.
Note: To transform column values in a Data Prep recipe, see Formula Transformation: Create a Calculated Column Based on an
Expression. To accomplish these tasks in a dataflow, see computeExpression Transformation.
1152
When you transform a field, a new field is added with the new values to the right of the original field. You can choose to keep or remove
the original field.
To transform a field, click in the column header (1), and then click the transformation that you want to use. Alternatively, select a
transformation from the Suggestions bar at the bottom of the recipe.
Transformation settings appear in the Add Transformation panel below the preview data.
You can apply these field transforms.
Transform Description Example

Extract Extract the selected component from Extract the hour component from the case created date to
a date field into a new field. analyze case creation by hour of the day.
Lowercase Convert values in selected field to Correct lead email addresses captured at a trade show.
lowercase. JSMITH@FORRESTER.COM becomes
jsmith@forrester.com.
Replace Find a specific value in a field and Make country values consistent.
replace it with a new value. A new Find all instances of US and Replace them with USA.
field is created containing both
replaced and unchanged values.
You can also replace nulls with a
value. For example, to allow users to
group transactions that don’t have a
product, replace all nulls in the
Product field with “N/A”.
Split Divide values into multiple parts at Divide phone numbers into area code and number.
the delimiter and create a field for Select the - delimiter to split 925-900 2123 into two
each part. new values 925 and 900 2123.
Substring Starting at the character Position in Extract the month from date values.
a value, extract the number of Enter a Position of 4 and a Length of 2 to extract the
characters in Length into a new month value 10 from the month value 2016-10-23.
field.
1153
Transform Description Example

Trim Remove leading and trailing Remove whitespaces to ensure that values from one source
whitespaces. are consistent with values from another source.
“ CA “ becomes “CA”.
Uppercase Convert values in selected field to Correct US state values.

uppercase. ca becomes CA.
Important: CRM Analytics datasets contain date and time component fields, such as Year, Quarter, and Month, that are derived
automatically from existing date and time fields. Transformations on these component fields are not supported.
SEE ALSO:

If a dimension field contains dates in different formats, use the Format Dates recipe transformation
USER PERMISSIONS
to standardize the format for all values in the field. A consistent format enables you to correctly
filter and group records by date, including filtering by date component, such as month. It also To create a recipe:
ensures that you can successfully convert the field type from dimension to date. • Edit Analytics Dataflows
Note: To format dates in a Data Prep recipe, see Format Dates Transformation: Standardize
the Date Format in a Column.
1.
On the column header of the dimension field, click .
1154
2. Select Format Dates.

Analytics detects the formats of the dates in the field.
Note: The order of the date formats in the Original Formats box matters. For example, if a date is 01/06/2011, the date format
could be dd/MM/yyyy or MM/dd/yyyy. The Date Format transformation assumes the first matching format shown the Original
Date Format box is the right one.
3. If a date format isn’t detected, enter it in the Original Formats box.

4. To convert a dimension field with dates to a date field type, select Convert field type to date.
5. Select the desired date format in the Change To field.
6. Click Add and save the recipe.
When you run the recipe, the transformation creates a field with the dates standardized in the selected format. If CRM Analytics can’t
determine the original format or the date doesn’t have a value for a date component, the transformation replaces the date with null.
For example, if you standardize on the MM/dd/yyyy: hh:mm:sssz format and a date value doesn’t have the seconds date
component (sssz), CRM Analytics replaces the date with null.
Guidelines for Formatting Dates

Review these guidelines when working with dates.
Guidelines for Formatting Dates

Review these guidelines when working with dates.
• CRM Analytics supports these date formats. Formats are case sensitive.
Format Sample Value

yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss.SSS'Z' 2014-04-29T16:53:34.000Z
yy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss.SSS'Z' 14-04-29T16:53:34.000Z
yyyy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss'Z' 2014-04-29T16:53:34Z
yy-MM-dd'T'HH:mm:ss'Z' 14-04-29T16:53:34Z
yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss 2014-06-03 11:31:45
1155
Format Sample Value

yy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss 14-06-03 11:31:45
dd.MM.yyyy HH:mm:ss 03.06.2014 11:31:45
dd.MM.yy HH:mm:ss 03.06.14 11:31:45
dd/MM/yyyy HH:mm:ss 03/06/2014 11:31:45
dd/MM/yy HH:mm:ss 03/06/14 11:31:45
dd/MM/yyyy hh:mm:ss a 03/06/2014 11:31:45 AM
dd/MM/yy hh:mm:ss a 03/06/14 11:31:45 AM
dd-MM-yyyy HH:mm:ss 03-06-2014 11:31:45
dd-MM-yy HH:mm:ss 03-06-14 11:31:45
dd-MM-yyyy hh:mm:ss a 03-06-2014 11:31:45 AM
dd-MM-yy hh:mm:ss a 03-06-14 11:31:45 AM
MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss a 06/03/2014 11:31:45 AM
MM/dd/yy hh:mm:ss a 06/03/14 11:31:45 AM
MM-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss a 06-03-2014 11:31:45 AM
MM-dd-yy hh:mm:ss a 06-03-14 11:31:45 AM
HH:mm:ss dd/MM/yyyy 11:31:45 03/06/2014
HH:mm:ss dd/MM/yy 11:31:45 03/06/14
• When you configure the Format Dates transformation, CRM Analytics detects the formats of the dates in the column. The order of
the date formats listed in the Original Formats box matters. For example, if a date is 01/06/2011, the date format could be dd/MM/yyyy
or MM/dd/yyyy. The Date Format transformation assumes the first matching format shown the Original Date Format box is the right
one. If you want to use the other format, add it as the first date format in the box.
1156
• In the column profile, the histogram shows a bar for each date format. If applicable, the histogram also shows one extra bar for all
dates for which the format couldn't be determined. Notice that the column profile says that there are two different date formats,
even though there are three bars in the histogram.

The type assigned to a dataset field determines how you can query that field’s data. For example, you can filter and group by a dimension
or date field, or perform math calculations on a measure field. When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics sometimes tags a dataset
field with the wrong type. If needed, convert fields to the correct types.
Convert a Dimension Field Type to Date

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a date field as a dimension if it contains unexpected string values or dates in
different formats. To use date functionality, such as grouping by month, use the To Date transformation to change the dimension
field type to date.
Convert a Dimension Field Type to Measure
When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a measure field as a dimension if it contains unexpected strings or characters.
To use measure functionality, such as calculating the average, use the To Measure transformation to change the dimension field
type to measure.
Convert a Measure Field Type to Dimension
When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a dimension field as a measure if it contains only numbers. For example, CRM
Analytics tags a numerical Room Number field as a measure, even though it’s actually a dimension that identifies rooms. To use
dimension functionality, such as grouping and filtering by dimension fields, use the To Dimension transformation to change the
measure field type to dimension.
1157
Convert a Dimension Field Type to Date

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a date field as a dimension if it contains
USER PERMISSIONS
unexpected string values or dates in different formats. To use date functionality, such as grouping
by month, use the To Date transformation to change the dimension field type to date. To create a recipe:
• Edit Analytics Dataflows
Note: To convert a dimension column to date in a Data Prep recipe, see Text to Date OR Edit Dataset Recipes
Transformation: Convert the Column Type.
1.
On the column header of the dimension field, click , and then select To Date.
2. In the Date Format field, select the date format to display the dates.
1158

Run the recipe to create a new field with the date field type and convert the date values to the specified format. If the transformation
can’t parse a date value, it replaces the value with null.
Convert a Dimension Field Type to Measure

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a measure field as a dimension if it contains
USER PERMISSIONS
unexpected strings or characters. To use measure functionality, such as calculating the average,
use the To Measure transformation to change the dimension field type to measure. To create a recipe:
• Edit Analytics Dataflows
Note: To convert a dimension to a measure in a Data Prep recipe, see Text to Number OR Edit Dataset Recipes
Transformation: Convert the Column Type. To do it in a dataflow, see dim2mea Transformation.
During the column type conversion, the Dimension to Measure transformation rounds decimals to
the nearest whole number. For example, 300.2939 becomes 300.
1.
On the column header of the dimension field, click , and then select To Measure.

Run the recipe to create a new field with the measure field type.
Convert a Measure Field Type to Dimension

When you load data into a dataset, CRM Analytics tags a dimension field as a measure if it contains
USER PERMISSIONS
only numbers. For example, CRM Analytics tags a numerical Room Number field as a measure, even
though it’s actually a dimension that identifies rooms. To use dimension functionality, such as To create a recipe:
grouping and filtering by dimension fields, use the To Dimension transformation to change the • Edit Analytics Dataflows
measure field type to dimension. OR Edit Dataset Recipes
Note: To convert a measure to a dimension in a Data Prep recipe, see Number to Text
Transformation: Convert the Column Type.
1159
1.
On the column header of the measure field, click , and then select To Dimension.

Run the recipe to create a new field with the dimension field type.
Predict Missing Values in Dimension Columns

When a dataset or connected object has missing values in a dimension column, CRM Analytics can fill in missing values to complete
your data. CRM Analytics intelligently predicts values based on values in other strongly correlated columns in your data.
Note: To predict missing values in a Data Prep recipe, see Predict Missing Values Transformation: Fill In Missing Values.
Consider these limitations before using this feature.

• If there aren’t enough records to make accurate predictions, CRM Analytics doesn’t insert predicted values .
• You can't perform column profiling or transformations on predicted columns.
• Recipes that predict values can take longer to run.
To predict missing values in a dimension column:
1. On the dataset recipe page, click the dimension column.
2. In the Einstein Suggestions bar, click Predict Missing Values.
1160
3. Select up to three dimension columns to use to predict the missing values for the selected column.
Tip: To make an accurate prediction, each column must have less than 200 unique values. Also, verify that these predictive
columns contain clean, quality data. For example, you have an Education predictive column that contains values such as
“Bachelors Degree” and “Bachelors.” Use the bucket transformation to bucket field values with the same meaning. Then use
the column with the clean data as a predictive column. For more information about bucketing, see Bucket a Dimension Field
in a Recipe.
4. Click Add to confirm.

The preview shows the original column with the missing values and the new column with “predict” at the end. The preview shows
“Prediction TBD” for predicted values in the new column. The predicted values don’t appear until after you run the recipe.
1161
5. Click Save > Save Recipe.

When you run the recipe to create the dataset, you can include the original column and the new column with the predictions. To review
the predictions, view the dataset as a values table.
Navigate Columns in a Recipe

As you add data and transform fields, the number of columns in your recipe preview increases, which makes it harder to find the columns
that you want to work with. Use the column view to quickly find the columns that you need, and hide the ones you don't.
To open the column view, click the Columns tab at the top of the recipe editor.
1162
Columns are color-coded to distinguish columns from different sources. To quickly find a column, start typing its name in the Search
columns box (1) to narrow down the list of columns. When you see the column that you want, click it to see its column profile on the
right. To view or edit the column’s metadata, click Attributes (2) in the profile pane. Here you can edit the API names and labels of new
columns that you create in a recipe, and the labels of existing columns. If you decide that you don’t need the column in the recipe, select
Hide Column (3) from the column menu. Columns that you hide appear in a separate list (4). To add a hidden column to the recipe,
select Add to Recipe from its menu.
Note: If you hide a column in the navigator, by default it is not included when the recipe runs. However, you can choose to include
the column when you run the recipe.
Navigate and Edit Recipe Steps

As you prepare your data, each change you make appears as a recipe step on the left. Think of these steps as your recipe history. You
can move back and forward through this history to see how the data looks at different stages of the recipe. If you don’t like what you
see, you can edit or remove any step.
To access recipe step actions, hover over the step and click .
1163
Note: The actions available for each step depend on the step’s position.
Here’s what the actions do.
Action Description
Edit Edit the current step.
You can also edit a step by clicking any of the blue values.
Go to Start Display the preview data as it was at the start of the recipe, before you added any steps. This action is only available
for the first step.
Go to Display the preview data as it was at the current step, before you added any subsequent steps.
Remove Remove the current step.
Remove all Remove all steps after the current step.

Subsequent
Note: Removing a step can cause subsequent steps to stop working. For example, if you remove a formula field step that is used
in a later formula field, CRM Analytics can’t calculate the second formula. When this action happens, the affected step appears in
red, with an explanation of the error, alerting you to the need to edit the step.
1164
Save a Recipe
If you’re not ready to create the target dataset, save the recipe and come back to it later. That saves your steps without you having to
create the dataset.
To save a recipe, click Save.
You have two options when saving a recipe.

• Save Recipe—Save the recipe with its current name. The recipe does not run. Use this option to save your progress.
• Save As New...—Save a copy of your recipe with a new name. The copy opens in a new tab in the data manager. Use this option to
try out different transformations in a recipe, without changing your original recipe.
Open a saved recipe on the Dataflows & Recipes tab of the data manager to update it or run it. See Manage Recipes.
Create Datasets from Uploaded CSV Files

Use the upload user interface to create a single dataset based on external .csv data. To refresh the data, you can overwrite the data in
the dataset by uploading a new .csv file.
When CRM Analytics loads any data into a dataset, it also adds metadata about each column of data. For example, metadata can include
the field type, precision, scale, and default value.
When you upload a .csv file, CRM Analytics infers metadata about each column in the file. CRM Analytics previews all inferred settings.
If needed, you can change the metadata in the user interface before uploading the data.
Note: You can also specify the metadata in a metadata file. A metadata file is a JSON file that describes the structure of an external
data file. After you create a dataset based on an external data file, you can edit the dataset to apply a new metadata file. This
enables you to change the metadata attributes of each column. For more information about the metadata file, see the Analytics
External Data API Developer Guide .
CRM Analytics temporarily stores the uploaded CSV and metadata files for processing only. After a dataset is created, CRM Analytics
purges the files.
Upload a CSV File to Create a Dataset

You can upload external data in a .csv format through the user interface. When you upload a .csv file, CRM Analytics infers the
metadata about each column in the .csv file. Metadata describes the structure of the data in the file, like the data type, precision,
and scale. If you upload a .csv from the user interface, CRM Analytics automatically generates the metadata, which you can preview
and change.
Rules for Automatic Generation of a Metadata File
When you upload a CSV file from the user interface, Analytics automatically generates the metadata file as long as the CSV file meets
certain requirements.
Monitor an External Data Upload
When you upload an external data file, CRM Analytics kicks off a job that uploads the data into the specified dataset. You can use
the Monitor tab of the data manager to monitor and troubleshoot the upload job.
1165
Set a Source Time Zone for .CSV Data

When you upload .csv data to create or update a dataset, you can select the time zone of the data if it’s not GMT.
SEE ALSO:

You can upload external data in a .csv format through the user interface. When you upload a .csv
EDITIONS
file, CRM Analytics infers the metadata about each column in the .csv file. Metadata describes the
structure of the data in the file, like the data type, precision, and scale. If you upload a .csv from the Available in Salesforce
user interface, CRM Analytics automatically generates the metadata, which you can preview and Classic and Lightning
change. Experience.
Before uploading a .csv file:
Available with CRM
• Review the format requirements, like date formats, in the CRM Analytics External Data Format Analytics, which is available
Developer Guide. for an extra cost in
• Ensure that the column names in the external data file don’t conflict with the generated date Enterprise, Performance,
column names. For example, if you load a CSV with column Create_Date, CRM Analytics
generates the Create_Date_Year column in the dataset. If the CSV also has a column named
Edition.
Create_Date_Year, CRM Analytics throws an error because the names conflict.
When you upload the file, CRM Analytics temporarily stores it for processing only. After the dataset
is created, CRM Analytics purges the file. If you want to use the file again later, keep a copy. USER PERMISSIONS
1. On the CRM Analytics Studio home tab or an app page, click Create > Dataset, and select CSV To upload external data:
File. • Upload External Data to
CRM Analytics
2. Click Select a file or drag it here, then select the file and click Open.
3. Click Next.
4. In the Dataset Name field, enter a name for the dataset.
By default, CRM Analytics uses the file name as the dataset name. The name can’t exceed 80 characters.
5. Select the app where the dataset will be created.

By default, CRM Analytics selects your My Private App. To change an app, click the cross on it and select a different one.
6. In the File Properties Detected box, check that CRM Analytics has correctly identified the properties of your file.
Usually, CRM Analytics correctly identifies your file properties. If it doesn’t, your data may not load correctly and you will see unexpected
results when you preview the data on the next screen. To edit the file properties, click and select Edit.
Note: CRM Analytics also generates a metadata file for your data. This file contains properties such as field labels, field types,
and settings. You can view and change these schema properties when you preview the data on the next screen. However, if
you want to download the file first, or replace it with your own file, click in the Data Schema File field.
7. Click Next.
The Edit Field Attributes screen appears. Here, you can preview the data, and view or edit the attributes for each field.
1166
8. To view or change a field’s attributes, either click the field in the list on the left, or click the field’s column.
Field attributes appear in a panel on the right. The field attributes that you see are determined by the field type.
CRM Analytics detects the format for date fields based on a sample of values. If the sample contains values with unsupported formats
or a mixture of formats, CRM Analytics sets the field type to Text. If you change the date format that CRM Analytics detects, rows
with a different format will fail.
Consider this example data.
Row SIC Code SIC Description Last Updated

1 1110 Barley growing 1/10/17
2 1120 Rice growing 11/14/17
3 1130 Alliaceous vegetable growing 1/1/17
Consider this example data.CRM Analytics detects the date format for the Last Updated field as M/d/yy. This format displays months
and days below 10 without leading zeros, and years as 2 digits, as in 1/1/17. If you change the format to MM/dd/yy, rows 1 and
3 will fail because CRM Analytics expects the month and day parts of the date values to have 2 digits.
9. When you finish reviewing or editing field attributes, click Upload File.
CRM Analytics uploads the data, prepares and creates the dataset, and shows you progress as it happens.
1167
10. Choose one of these options while CRM Analytics creates the dataset.
a. To cancel the process and stop dataset creation, click Cancel on the progress dialog.
This option is available only when the data is uploading.
b. To close the progress dialog and leave the process running in the background, click Close.
c. To close the progress dialog but continue monitoring progress on the Monitor tab of Data Manager, click the Continue in the
background and check progress in the data monitor link.
d. Do nothing. When the dataset is created, you’re taken to the dataset’s edit page, where you can explore the data in a lens, prepare
it in a recipe, or create a story in Einstein Discovery.
Note: You can also use the External Data API to programmatically upload .csv files. Use the API to take advantage of more features,
like performing incremental extracts and performing append, delete, and upsert operations.
SEE ALSO:
Handle Date Values
Rules for Automatic Generation of a Metadata File

When you upload a CSV file from the user interface, Analytics automatically generates the metadata file as long as the CSV file meets
certain requirements.
To enable Analytics to generate the metadata file, a CSV file must meet the following requirements.
• The file type must be .csv, not .gz or .zip.
• The file must contain one row for the column header and at least one record.
1168
• The CSV file must meet all Analytics requirements as mentioned in the Analytics External Data Format Developer Guide.
Analytics generates the metadata attributes for each CSV column based on the first 100 rows in the CSV file. Analytics uses the following
rules to convert the CSV column names to field labels.
• Replaces special characters and spaces with underscores. For example, "Stage Name" becomes "Stage_Name."
• Replaces consecutive underscores with one underscore, except when column name ends with "__c." For example, "stage*&name"
becomes "stage_name."
• Prefixes the field label with "X" when the first character of the column name is numeric. For example, "30Day" becomes "X30Day."
• Replaces the field name with "Column" + column number when all characters in the column name are not alphanumeric. For
example, the fourth column name "*&^*(&*(%" becomes "Column4."
• Deletes underscores at the beginning and end of the field label to ensure that it doesn't start or end with an underscore.
• Increments the derived field label if the label is the same as an existing label. For example, if "X2" already exists, uses "X21," "X22,"
"X23."
Tip: You can download the generated metadata file to change the metadata settings, and then upload it to apply the changes.
You can download the metadata file when you create or edit a dataset.

When you upload an external data file, CRM Analytics kicks off a job that uploads the data into the
EDITIONS
specified dataset. You can use the Monitor tab of the data manager to monitor and troubleshoot
the upload job. Available in Salesforce
The Jobs subtab (1) of the Monitor tab shows the status, start time, and duration of each dataflow, Classic and Lightning
data sync, recipe, and external data upload job. It shows jobs for the last 7 days. Experience.
Note: Duration is calculated as the sum of the job queue time and job run time. Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To access the Monitor tab of

the data manager:
Dataflows, Upload
External Data to CRM
Analytics, or Manage
CRM Analytics
1169
1.
The data manager opens on the Monitor tab, with the Jobs subtab selected by default. It displays each upload job name as
<dataset_name upload flow>. You can hover a job to view the entire name.
Note: To view external data upload jobs in the Jobs view, make sure that the File Uploads selector (2) is set to Show. Show
is the default selection.
2.
To see the latest status of a job, click the Refresh Jobs button ( ).
Each job can have one of these statuses.
Status Description
Queued The job is in queue to start.
Running The job is running.
Failed The job failed.
Warning The job completed successfully, but some rows failed.
A message is displayed next to jobs with a status of Warning (3) or Failed . If you can’t see the complete message, click the message
to view all of it.
3. To view the run-time details for a job, expand the job node (4).
The run-time details display under the job. In the run-time details section, scroll to the right to view information about the rows that
were processed.
4. To troubleshoot a job that has failed rows, view the error message. If an error log is available, click the status text or download button
(5) to download the log.
Note: Only the user who uploaded the external data file can download the error log.
The error log contains a list of failed rows.
1170
5. To troubleshoot a failed job, view the error message and the run-time details.
Set a Source Time Zone for .CSV Data

When you upload .csv data to create or update a dataset, you can select the time zone of the data
EDITIONS
if it’s not GMT.
1. Upload your .CSV file to create a dataset. Available in Salesforce
2. At the page where you create a name and select an app for the dataset, specify the source and
Experience.
target time zone.
Available with CRM
Edition.
1171
From the Source File Time Zone picklist (1), select the time zone of the data. The Target Time Zone (2) is the time zone selected for
your org in settings. CRM Analytics converts date-time values in the file from the source time-zone to the target time zone in the
resulting dataset.
You can use the External Data API to create a single dataset based on external data in a .csv file. You can also use the API to edit the
dataset by uploading a new .csv file. When you edit the dataset, you can choose to overwrite all records, append records, update records,
or delete records.
When you upload a .csv file with the External Data API, you have to explicitly set the metadata attributes for each column in the .csv file.
For example, you can set the field type and default value for each column. You set the metadata attributes for a .csv file in its own
metadata file. A metadata file is a JSON file that describes the structure of an external data file. If no metadata file is provided when you
upload external data using the API, CRM Analytics treats every column as a dimension and sets the field type to 'Text.' The field type
determines the types of queries that can be placed on the column. For example, you can’t perform mathematical calculations on dataset
columns with a Text field type. You can perform mathematical calculations only on dataset columns with a Numeric field type.
For more information about the External Data API, see the Analytics External Data API Developer Guide .
Create Datasets Directly from Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets

The Salesforce CRM Analytics Connector for Excel makes it easy to import data from Microsoft Excel 2013 to CRM Analytics.
The CRM Analytics Connector for Excel is available as an add-in for Excel 2013 on the desktop and Excel Online in Office 365. The Connector
is available from the Office Add-In Store or your organization’s private add-in catalog. After you install the Connector just point and click
to import data from Excel to CRM Analytics.
Considerations When Using theCRM Analytics Connector for Excel

• To load Excel data when using a My Domain URL, such as MyDomainName.my.salesforce.com, save the data locally in
.csv format, and then use the CRM Analytics .csv upload tool to load the data.
• Null measure handling isn’t supported when you load data using the CRM Analytics Connector for Excel. Null measure values are
replaced with zeros in the resulting dataset, even if null measure handling is enabled in your org.
Install the CRM Analytics Connector for Excel

The Salesforce CRM Analytics Connector for Excel gives you a fast, easy way to import data from Excel 2013 into CRM Analytics.
Install the CRM Analytics Connector for Excel

The Salesforce CRM Analytics Connector for Excel gives you a fast, easy way to import data from
USER PERMISSIONS
Excel 2013 into CRM Analytics.
If you use Excel 2013 on the desktop or Office 365, the Office Online version of Excel, the CRM To import data from Excel
Analytics Connector for Excel gives you a great way to get your data into CRM Analytics. After 2013 to CRM Analytics:
• Upload External Data to
installing the Connector, you select data from Excel, click Submit Data, and the Connector does
CRM Analytics
the work for you, importing the data to CRM Analytics and creating a dataset.
Here’s how to install the Connector:
1. Open Excel, either on your desktop or in Office Online.
2. Click the Insert tab.
3. Click Store.
1172
4. Search for the CRM Analytics Connector for Excel, and click Add to install it.
5. Click Log in to Salesforce, and enter your Salesforce credentials to open the Connector.
When you’ve installed the Connector, follow the instructions in the Connector window to create a dataset from your Excel data. Opening
the Connector automatically logs you in to CRM Analytics. Click the Connector Help icon for complete information about using the app.
Creating Datasets and Trending Dashboards from Salesforce Reports

By creating trending CRM Analytics dashboards that track key metrics over time, you can make sense of your growing, ever-changing
datasets. Trending data in CRM Analytics helps you discover hidden insights and allows you to share them with colleagues. When you
create a trending dashboard based on a Salesforce report, CRM Analytics generates a dataset and a dashboard based on the underlying
Salesforce data.
Watch a Demo: Trend Report Data in Analytics (English Only)
Trending refers to data that is displayed over a timeline, allowing trends and patterns to emerge which can be difficult to recognize in
a sea of information. If the relevant data is plotted over time, questions on sales cycles, performance, comparisons, seasonality, and more
can be answered at a glance. Any data that can be visualized in time, such as opportunities or cases, can be trended. So can geographical
data, such as quarterly sales in specific regions. In fact, any regularly updated dataset that has dates associated with it (a date or timestamp
attribute for each row) can be trended.
Start Trending Salesforce Reports

To trend data in CRM Analytics, you trend a report that's collecting that data.
Guidelines for Trending Salesforce Reports
Review our guidelines when trending Salesforce Reports.
Stop Trending Salesforce Reports
The number of reports you can trend is limited. To remain under the limit so you can trend other reports, stop trending reports that
are no longer needed.
Share Trending Dashboards
You can share a trended dashboard just as you can with any CRM Analytics dashboard.
Limits and Limitations for Trending Data in Analytics
Trended datasets count toward the overall CRM Analytics platform limits, including total number of rows. To prevent the performance
of your org from degrading, certain limitations are placed on snapshot size and the number of trended datasets each user can create.
1173
Start Trending Salesforce Reports

To trend data in CRM Analytics, you trend a report that's collecting that data.
EDITIONS
Watch a Demo: Trend in CRM Analytics
To enable this feature, contact Salesforce Customer Support.
1. Create a dataset. Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To trend reports in CRM

Analytics:
• Use CRM Analytics OR
Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
AND
Trend Report Data in
CRM Analytics
2. Choose A Salesforce Report from the available data sources.

3. Select a report.
1174
If the report you want to trend doesn’t exist, you must create it first.
Note: Only the saved version of a report is trended. If you've made unsaved changes to a report, then trend the report, the
changes aren’t reflected in the trending dashboard.
4. Enter a title for the trending dashboard and the new trending dataset.
5. Set a schedule for updating the dashboard, which determines how often snapshots of report data are taken.
Note:
• After you set the schedule, it can't be changed.
• If you choose a schedule that updates on the 29th, 30th, or 31st of the month, no updates occur on months that have too
few days to meet that schedule.
• To avoid unwanted behavior during changes to daylight savings, don't choose 2 A.M. as an update time.
6. Choose a different app if you don’t want to save the trending dataset in My Private App.
If you save the dataset to a shared app, all users who can view that app can view the dataset.
7. Click Start Trending.
When the new trending dashboard is ready, you receive an email with a link. After the dashboard is ready, you can also begin to
explore the associated dataset, which appears in the CRM Analytics datasets list.
8. Connect to the new trending dashboard using the link in the notification email, or by going to the app in which you saved it (after
receiving the notification email).
At first, the trending dashboard displays only 1 data point. As snapshots are taken and added to the new CRM Analytics trending
dataset underlying the dashboard, more data points are added.
You can’t re-create a trended report. Therefore, it's recommended that you make a copy of the report to guard against data loss.
Note: Trend data stored by a copy of a report counts towards your dataset row limit.
You can also trend any report directly by clicking Trend on that report.
1175
In Lightning Experience:
In classic Salesforce:
After you start trending, the Trend button on the report becomes View Trend. If you click that button in Lightning Experience, an
embedded dashboard appears.
1176
To return to the report, click Back to Report View (1). To view the report in CRM Analytics, click the Analytics button (2).
Guidelines for Trending Salesforce Reports

Review our guidelines when trending Salesforce Reports.
EDITIONS
• Don’t attempt to trend matrix reports. These reports don’t have the required structure to be
trended. Available in Salesforce
• Choose reports that have changes on a frequency matching the trending schedule you set up. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
• Always clone the source reports into your personal folders. After you start trending, don’t edit
the reports. Keeping the report unchanged ensures a consistent view. If you plan to share Available with CRM
trending dashboards, save them to view-only apps. This approach keeps the data consistent Analytics, which is available
and prevents anomalies from appearing on the trending CRM Analytics dashboard. for an extra cost in
• To get focused, easily observable, and actionable insights, tightly scope source reports. For
example, trend only new business deals closing in the current quarter rather than all
opportunities. A broad scope makes it more difficult to spot trends.
Edition.
• Group and summarize your reports in the report builder with key information before you start
trending them.
• Don’t create joined reports just for trending. Trending dashboards can't be created from joined reports.
1177
Stop Trending Salesforce Reports

The number of reports you can trend is limited. To remain under the limit so you can trend other
USER PERMISSIONS
reports, stop trending reports that are no longer needed.
To stop trending from CRM Analytics, open the trending dataset by choosing to edit it, then click To trend reports in CRM
Stop Trending. Analytics:
Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
AND
CRM Analytics
To stop trending from Lightning Experience, go to the trending report and open the menu next to View Trend and choose Stop
Trending.
To stop trending from classic Salesforce, go to the trending report and click View Trend on the report to open a dialog, then click Stop
Trending.
Note: If you stop trending, you cannot restart where the trending left off (there is no pause button). Trending the same report
again creates a new dataset and a new trending dashboard.
1178
Share Trending Dashboards

You can share a trended dashboard just as you can with any CRM Analytics dashboard.
USER PERMISSIONS
You can share a trending dashboard just as you share any dashboard. You can post an image of it
to a feed, or download and share an image. You can also embed your trending CRM Analytics To trend reports in CRM
dashboard as you would any other dashboard. Analytics:
To share the dashboard directly using its URL, first share the trending dashboard’s underlying Use CRM Analytics
snapshots dataset by saving it to a CRM Analytics app that your target audience can access. Templated Apps
AND
CRM Analytics
Important: Sharing the trending CRM Analytics dashboard or the underlying dataset could expose data to users who normally
would not have access to that data.
It is possible to share trending CRM Analytics dashboards with users who would normally be prevented from seeing data based
on security settings. If you save a trending dashboard to any app that is not My Private App, then anyone with access to that app
(and the underlying dataset) can view all data in that CRM Analytics dashboard regardless of any sharing restrictions or field-level
security that has been set.
Limits and Limitations for Trending Data in Analytics

Trended datasets count toward the overall CRM Analytics platform limits, including total number of rows. To prevent the performance
of your org from degrading, certain limitations are placed on snapshot size and the number of trended datasets each user can create.
Check out the following limits on trending data.
1179
Value Limit
Maximum number of trended datasets per user 5
Maximum number of rows per snapshot 100,000
Maximum number of rows in the report to be trended 500,000 for admins, 100,000 for non-admins
Maximum total number of rows in a trended dataset 5,000,000
Maximum monthly number of rows for all snapshots per org 40 million
To control the impact that trended datasets have on general org-wide limits, configure these limits, available on the Analytics Settings
page:
• Max number of rows per snapshot is an option to control the maximum number of rows that a trended report can have when a
snapshot is taken. If the report exceeds the limit, the snapshot isn’t taken and an error email is sent to the user.
• Max total number of rows in a trended dataset is an option to limit the maximum number of rows that the Analytics dataset
containing the snapshots can have. If the dataset exceeds the limit, the oldest snapshot is deleted from the dataset.
• Enable automatic deletion of inactive datasets is an option that is on by default. Trending dashboards that aren't being updated
or accessed for the number of days configured in Number of days to keep inactive datasets are deleted. The default number of
days a trending dashboard can remain inactive is 100. The dashboard owner receives an email warning a week before deletion.
When the dashboard and dataset are deleted, the owner receives an email confirmation.
Roll out the capability gradually to your user base and observe data usage and performance. Stop trending datasets that are no longer
needed for active use and delete the underlying trended datasets to recover storage limits.
The best candidates for trending are reports that can be visualized in time and have some frequently changing values. Examples: open
opportunities pipeline or escalated cases.
You can’t use trended datasets as sources in recipes. To prepare data from trended datasets, use a dataflow.
Some situations can prevent a report that is trended in Analytics from successfully capturing the data for a particular run. These situations
include, but are not limited to: Jobs involving the User object, site switching, and instance maintenance. If a trended report attempts to
run under these conditions, it fails and the dataset does not have records added for that run. You can’t reschedule or run a trending job
again; however, future runs that are not subject to these conditions process as normal.
Users whose profiles have View Encrypted Data enabled can't create trended datasets because Analytics does not support encrypted
data.
Only the user who starts trending the report can stop trending it. The user can share the trending dashboard with other users. If another
user wants to trend the same report, the user must create a trend, which does not affect other trends for the report.
After trending begins, do not change access rights to the underlying report or add or delete dimensions and measures. Changing the
report or the access rights can cause an error or inaccuracies at the time a snapshot is taken.
If you modify a field in a report that is trended, the change is reflected in the associated dashboard from the time of the change onward.
If you change other aspects of the report, such as filters, those changes aren’t reflected in the associated dashboards.
Snapshots are taken every Sunday at midnight (local time), unless you set a different schedule when trending a report. Processing and
surfacing the data requires more time, which can delay snapshots.
If trending is stopped and then restarted, a new snapshot dataset is created, with a new trending dashboard. The previously trended
dataset isn’t included in the new dashboard. Data can be moved into the new dataset using the Salesforce data APIs.
Trended datasets are created in their own private folders. You can use the Update Dataset button to move the dataset from a private
to a public folder.
1180
The dataflow that creates a trended dataset is auto generated and can’t be viewed or modified. This restriction is required because the
underlying trending logic can be sensitive to changes in the dataflow.
You can’t customize the XMD of trended datasets. Customize Actions functionality aren't available for trended datasets.
The dashboard designer is enabled by default for most orgs. Make sure that it remains enabled for your org. To render, trending dashboards
rely on the dashboard designer being enabled.
Boolean fields in a trended report are treated both as a measure (for calculations) and a dimension (for sorting).
If you modify the dashboard for a trended report, the changes are reflected in the next trend update.
Get Started Faster with Data Templates

Salesforce Data Pipelines use purpose built data templates for common use case data tasks to
EDITIONS
accelerate your ROI. These data templates generate the necessary data connectors, data prep recipes,
and queries for apps that can be scheduled to run regularly. Available in Salesforce
Data templates are ready-made data manipulation processes ready to be deployed in a matter of Classic and Lightning
clicks. Data templates exist to provide customers with simple, straightforward ways to get the most Experience.
out of their data. They’re designed to do the heavy lifting for the most common data use cases so
Available with CRM
you can focus your attention on the results rather than the process. Data templates unlock the true Analytics, which is available
power of data for the customer to deliver immediate value and results. for an extra cost in
Data templates span clouds and verticals. Enterprise, Performance,
Data Template Scenarios Edition.
Scenario 1: Data Augmentation
A company uses Salesforce for CRM data and Workday for HR data. To create more comprehensive USER PERMISSIONS
datasets, the company wants to join some employee data from Workday with CRM data.
To view, edit, or delete
• Current Workflow: You export Salesforce data, export Workday data, and join them using SQL templated data assets:
or Excel. You repeat this process each time you want fresh data. • Analytics View Only
• New Workflow: You use a data template to generate data assets that combine the data. The Embedded App and
template uses Salesforce Data Pipelines to sync local Salesforce data, import Workday data via Analytics View Only User
a connector, and join the datasets in a Data Prep recipe. You schedule the local and remote
data sync, and recipe, for this dataset to update automatically.
Scenario 2: Metric Calculations
A company uses Salesforce to store opportunity and quota data. The company’s Sales Strategy team wants to calculate PipelinesCoverage,
which is defined as the amount of Open Pipe divided by the amount remaining to be Closed Won. The PipelinesCoverage metric is a
commonly used indicator for business health and result forecasting.
• Current Workflow: You export the Salesforce Open Pipe report, Salesforce Closed Won report, and quota file, and then calculate in
Excel or Google Sheets manually or with a cover sheet.
• New Workflow: You use a data template to generate data assets that import and calculate the data. The template imports the report
data and the quota file and uses a Data Prep recipe to join the data and calculate the PipelinesCoverage.
Scenario 3: Data Cleanup
A company switched over to using Salesforce as its CRM data system. Before the switch, the company kept all its contact data in Google
Sheets and Excel files, all with different owners, and maintained in different formats. You must get all the data into Salesforce in a clean
and uniform way.
• Current Workflow: You manually scrub the data using Excel and import using a tool like Data Loader.
1181
• New Workflow: You use a data template to generate data assets that import the data, use Data Prep recipes to clean the data, and
output the data to Salesforce.
To match the requirements of different use cases, data templates have three levels of functionality.
Level Description Use Cases

Basic Simple data editing and calculations • Data field cleanup
• Formula calculator
• Distribution bracketing
• Date conversion
Intermediate More advanced data manipulation • Salesforce report augmentation

• Data snapshot
• Hierarchy flattening
• Metric rollup summary
Advanced Ready made rigorous analysis • Sentiment analysis

• Account clustering
Data Template Features

Data templates are similar to app templates, with a few key differences.
Create Data Assets from a Data Template
Follow these general procedures when you create data assets from any data template. Before you use a template, see the help for
the Data Template that you want to use for requirements and instructions specific to that template.
Available Data Templates
Data templates provide simple data editing and calculations, advanced data manipulation, and rigorous analysis out of the box. To
get started, see the instructions and specific details for each template by following these links.
Data Template Features

Data templates are similar to app templates, with a few key differences.
Data templates can contain one or more of these assets: data connectors, data prep recipes, and datasets. Get Started with Data Integration.
For data template limits, see Data Pipelines Limits.
For data template limitations, see Data Pipelines Limitations
How are Data Templates different from App Templates

Data templates and app templates are designed to save you time with prepackaged assets and logic tailored for specific use-cases. Both
template types use the same internal framework, making them configurable and customizable.
Check out this breakdown of key template features:
1182
Template Feature App Template Data Template

Data sync
Data sync limits 100 mb/day 10 gb/day
Visualization assets: lens and dashboards
Data assets: recipes and datasets
Template Rules Engine
Monitor and troubleshoot templated app

creation
For more information on templates, see the Analytics Template Developer Guide.
Create Data Assets from a Data Template

Follow these general procedures when you create data assets from any data template. Before you use a template, see the help for the
Data Template that you want to use for requirements and instructions specific to that template.
Create the Data Assets
1. From the App Launcher, open the Data Manager.
2. Select the Data Template tab. This view shows the template gallery for available data templates.
3. Select a data template and click Next. If the template that you selected includes a configuration wizard, it opens now. Answer the
questions on each page of the wizard, setting up the workflow for importing and processing the data.
4. Name your data app, add a description for more information, and click Create.
Note: The use of “data app” is a reference to the collection of data assets created by the template.
View the Data Assets

In the Data Manager, on the Monitor tab, view the jobs run for the data assets. On the Recipes tab, view and schedule the Data Prep
recipes created by the template. Each data asset the template generates is appended with the app name that you specified in the
template configuration wizard.
For users with access to Analytics Studio, data apps show up on the Apps tab. From here, users with manage access to the app can
delete apps. App deletion removes all data assets created from the template and any customized assets that are associated with the
app.
1183
Available Data Templates

Data templates provide simple data editing and calculations, advanced data manipulation, and rigorous analysis out of the box. To get
started, see the instructions and specific details for each template by following these links.
Sentiment Analysis Template

Use the Sentiment Analysis data template to categorize selected text into sentiments quickly.
Sentiment Analysis Template

Use the Sentiment Analysis data template to categorize selected text into sentiments quickly.
Create the Sentiment Analysis Data Assets

Follow these steps to create sentiment analysis data assets to quickly detect sentiments from your customers.
The Sentiment Analysis Recipe and Dataset
The Sentiment Analysis template creates a recipe that performs sentiment analysis on the source object field that you selected in
the configuration wizard. This recipe outputs a dataset with the analysis results and any additional selected fields.
Schedule the Sentiment Analysis Recipe
The Sentiment Analysis template creates one recipe to perform the data analysis on the specified source object. To update the
analysis data, you must schedule the recipe for your app.
Create the Sentiment Analysis Data Assets

Follow these steps to create sentiment analysis data assets to quickly detect sentiments from your customers.
1. In Data Manager, select the Data Templates tab to open the template gallery for data templates.
2. Locate the Sentiment Analysis tile, select it, and click Next.
3. Answer the questions in configuration wizard.
a. Choose the source object for sentiment analysis. The default source object is the Case object.
b. Choose a text field from the source object to run the sentiment analysis on.
c. Select up to 20 additional fields from the source object to add to the dataset. These fields provide additional information for
each dataset entry.
4. Name your data app, add an optional description for more information, and click Create.
Note: The use of “data app” is a reference to the collection of data assets created by the template.
The data asset creation process takes some time to complete. You can view your app in progress on the Auto-Installed Apps page. To
view this page, from Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Auto-Installed Apps, and then select Auto-Installed Apps. For more
information on the Auto-Installed Apps page, see Monitor, Update, and Delete Auto-Installed Apps.
You can view detailed app creation information on the App Install History page. To view this page, from Setup, in the Quick Find box,
enter App Install History, and then select App Install History. Use the filter to select Data Templates. For more
information on the App Install History page, see Monitor and Troubleshoot Templated App Installations.
1184
The Sentiment Analysis Recipe and Dataset

The Sentiment Analysis template creates a recipe that performs sentiment analysis on the source object field that you selected in the
configuration wizard. This recipe outputs a dataset with the analysis results and any additional selected fields.
The recipe applies the detect sentiment transformation to the selected text field and assigns a value of Positive, Neutral, or Negative.
For more details, search for and open Detect Sentiment Transformation.
Note: Detect Sentiment works on a single dimension column and supports English only. It processes non-English text as English
and ignores images, including emoji. If the input value is null or empty string (‘’), the transformation assigns the sentiment as
Neutral or with a value of 2.5, depending on the output type. Applying Detect Sentiment on text such as IDs, nouns, addresses, or
alphanumeric values can return unexpected results.
The output dataset, SentimentData, contains the sentiment analysis result in the sentiment column, labeled with the field name
appended with Sentiment. All additional fields are also present in the output dataset.
You can customize the templated recipe in the recipe editor. If you make changes, it’s recommended that you save it as a new recipe.
Schedule the Sentiment Analysis Recipe

The Sentiment Analysis template creates one recipe to perform the data analysis on the specified source object. To update the analysis
data, you must schedule the recipe for your app.
1. In data manager, click the Recipes tab to display the list of recipes.
2. To the right of the recipe that contains the name of your app appended with Sentiment Analysis, Click , and select
Schedule.
3. Select the time to run the recipe. You can schedule the data to run by minute, hour, week, or month. For more details, search for
and open Schedule a Recipe to Run Automatically.
The recipe now runs at the scheduled day and time that you selected.
Manage Datasets
Edit a dataset to update its data, change its extended metadata, apply row-level security, or restore the dataset to a previous version.
You can manage your datasets on the Datasets tab of Data Manager.
Use the search box (1) to find datasets. Click a column header (2) to sort by that column. If you have the Manage Analytics permission,
datasets in users’ private apps are visible here.
1185

If a CRM Analytics user has access to a dataset, the user has access to all records in the dataset by default. To restrict access to records,
you can implement row-level security on a dataset when you use sharing inheritance and security predicates. Sharing inheritance
automatically applies a Salesforce object’s sharing logic to the dataset’s rows. A security predicate is a manually assigned filter
condition that defines dataset row access.
Edit a Dataset
Edit a dataset to change its name, app, security, or extended metadata (XMD). You can also replace data in a dataset, restore it to a
previous version, or delete it. The dataset edit page also provides key information about when the dataset was created and last
updated, and where it is used.
Delete a Dataset
Delete unnecessary datasets to reduce app clutter and avoid reaching your org's total row limit for all registered datasets. You can
delete datasets from shared apps on which you have at least Editor access, your My Private App, and, with a special user permission,
another user’s My Private App.

If a CRM Analytics user has access to a dataset, the user has access to all records in the dataset by default. To restrict access to records,
you can implement row-level security on a dataset when you use sharing inheritance and security predicates. Sharing inheritance
automatically applies a Salesforce object’s sharing logic to the dataset’s rows. A security predicate is a manually assigned filter condition
that defines dataset row access.
To implement effective dataset row-level security, most Salesforce orgs can use a combination of sharing inheritance and a backup
security predicate. Sharing inheritance provides the correct record access to your users who do not have many employees or shared
records. For users with access to many of their own or shared records, like a CEO or dashboard builder, a security predicate is set as
backup to sharing inheritance.
To get started, learn more about sharing inheritance and security predicates. Then turn on sharing inheritance and evaluate how well
sharing inheritance covers your users’ dataset access needs. Finally, set the dataset’s security predicate if needed and test.
Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate

Applying a predicate to a dataset is more than just defining the predicate expression. You must also consider how the predicate is
dependent on the information in the dataset and where to define the predicate expression.
Add Row-Level Security by Inheriting Sharing Rules
Use sharing inheritance to let CRM Analytics apply the same sharing setup for your datasets as Salesforce uses for your objects.
Sharing inheritance increases access accuracy and reduces the need for complicated security predicates for most objects and
situations. The tradeoff for applying sharing inheritance is an increase in the time to complete data syncs, dataflow and recipe jobs,
and queries. The more complicated the sharing settings, the more impact there is.
SEE ALSO:
Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate

Applying a predicate to a dataset is more than just defining the predicate expression. You must also consider how the predicate is
dependent on the information in the dataset and where to define the predicate expression.
1186
Define a predicate for each dataset on which you want to restrict access to records. A security predicate is a filter condition that defines
row-level access to records in a dataset.
When a user submits a query against a dataset that has a predicate, CRM Analytics checks the predicate to determine which records the
user has access to. If the user doesn’t have access to a record, CRM Analytics doesn’t return that record.
Note:
• If the dataset already exists, changes to its security settings must be done directly by editing the dataset. After a dataset is
created, changes to security settings in the dataflow (rowLevelSharingSource or rowLevelSecurityFilter) or recipe (Security
Predicate) have no effect.
• When sharing inheritance is enabled, you can set the security predicate to ‘false’ to block all users not covered by sharing. In
fact, this predicate is the default when sharing is enabled on existing datasets.
The predicate is flexible and can model different types of security policies. For example, you can create predicates based on:
• Record ownership. Enables each user to view only records that they own.
• Management visibility. Enables each user to view records owned or shared by their subordinates based on a role hierarchy.
• Team or account collaboration. Enables all members of a team, like an opportunity team, to view records shared with the team.
• Combination of different security requirements. For example, you can choose to define a predicate based on the Salesforce role
hierarchy, teams, and record ownership.
The type of security policy you implement depends on how you want to restrict access to records in the dataset.
Warning: If row-level security isn’t applied to a dataset, any user that has access to the dataset can view all records in the dataset.
You can create a predicate expression based on the user or information in the dataset. For example, to enable each user to view only
dataset records that they own, you can create a predicate based on a dataset column that contains the owner for each record. If needed,
you can load additional data into a dataset required by the predicate.
Important: Security predicates referencing $User information require a new user session before a new value is recognized.
The location where you define the predicate varies.

• To create a dataset with a security predicate from a dataflow, add the predicate in the rowLevelSecurityFilter field of the Register
transformation.
• To create a dataset with a security predicate from a recipe, use the Security Predicate field of the Output node.
• To create a dataset with a security predicate from an external data file, define the predicate in the rowLevelSecurityFilter field in
the metadata file associated with the external data file during upload.
Row-Level Security Example based on Record Ownership

Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on a CSV file and then implement row-level security based on record
ownership. In this example, you will create a dataset that contains sales targets for account owners. To restrict access on each record
in the dataset, you will create a security policy where each user can view only sales targets for accounts that they own. This process
requires multiple steps that are described in the sections that follow.
Row-Level Security Example based on Opportunity Teams
Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on Salesforce data and then implement row-level security based on an
opportunity team. In this example, you will create a dataset that contains only opportunities associated with an opportunity team.
To restrict access on each record in the dataset, you will create a security policy where only opportunity members can view their
opportunity. This process requires multiple steps that are described in the sections that follow.
1187
Row-Level Security Example based on Role Hierarchy and Record Ownership

Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on Salesforce data and then implement row-level security based on the
Salesforce role hierarchy and record ownership. In this example, you will create a dataset that contains all opportunities. To restrict
access on each record in the dataset, you will create a security policy where each user can view only opportunities that they own or
that are owned by their subordinates based on the Salesforce role hierarchy. This process requires multiple steps that are described
in the sections that follow.
Predicate Expression Syntax for Datasets
You must use valid syntax when defining the predicate expression.
Row-Level Security Example based on Record Ownership

Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on a CSV file and then implement row-level security based on record ownership.
In this example, you will create a dataset that contains sales targets for account owners. To restrict access on each record in the dataset,
you will create a security policy where each user can view only sales targets for accounts that they own. This process requires multiple
steps that are described in the sections that follow.
Note: Although this example is about applying a predicate to a dataset created from a CSV file, this procedure can also be applied
to a dataset that is created from Salesforce data.
1. Determine Which Data to Include in the Dataset

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create a Targets dataset that contains all
sales targets.
2. Determine Row-Level Security for Dataset
Now it’s time to think about row-level security. How will you restrict access to each record in this dataset?
3. Add the Predicate to the Metadata File
For a dataset created from a CSV file, you can specify the predicate in the metadata file associated with the CSV file or when you edit
the dataset.
4. Create the Dataset
Now that you updated the metadata file with the predicate, you can create the dataset.
5. Test Row-Level Security for the Dataset
You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see their own sales targets.
Determine Which Data to Include in the Dataset

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create a Targets dataset that contains all sales
targets.
You will obtain sales targets from the CSV file shown below.
AccountOwner Region Target TargetDate

Tony Santos Midwest 10000 1/1/2011
Lucy Timmer Northeast 50000 1/1/2011
Lucy Timmer Northeast 0 12/1/2013
Bill Rolley Midwest 15000 1/1/2011
Keith Laz Southwest 35000 1/1/2011
1188
AccountOwner Region Target TargetDate

Lucy Timmer Southeast 40000 1/1/2011
If you were to create the dataset without implementing row-level security, any user that had access to the dataset would be able to see
the sales targets for all account owners. For example, as shown below, Keith would be able to view the sales targets for all account
owners.
You need to apply row-level security to restrict access to records in this dataset.
Determine Row-Level Security for Dataset

You decide to implement the following predicate on the dataset.
'AccountOwner' == "$User.Name"
Note: All predicate examples in this document escape the double quotes because it’s required when you enter the predicate in
the Register transformation or metadata file.This predicate implements row-level security based on record ownership. Based on
the predicate, CRM Analytics returns a sales target record when the user who submits the query on the dataset is the account
owner.
Let’s take a deeper look into the predicate expression:
• AccountOwner refers to the dataset column that stores the full name of the account owner for each sales target.
• $User.Name refers to the Name column of the User object that stores the full name of each user. CRM Analytics performs a lookup
to get the full name of the user who submits each query.
Note: The lookup returns a match when the names in AccountOwner and $User.Name match exactly—they must have the same
case.
1189
Add the Predicate to the Metadata File

For a dataset created from a CSV file, you can specify the predicate in the metadata file associated with the CSV file or when you edit the
dataset.
You must escape the double quotes around string values when entering a predicate in the metadata file.
In this example, you add the predicate to the metadata file shown below.
{
"fileFormat": {
"charsetName": "UTF-8",
"fieldsDelimitedBy": ",",
"fieldsEnclosedBy": "\"",
"numberOfLinesToIgnore": 1 },
"objects": [
{
"name": "Targets",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Targets",
"label": "Targets",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'AccountOwner' == \"$User.Name\"",
"fields": [
{
"name": "AccountOwner",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Targets.AccountOwner",
"label": "Account Owner",
"type": "Text"
},
{
"name": "Region",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Targets.Region",
"label": "Region",
"type": "Text"
},
{
"name": "Target",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Targets.Target",
"label": "Target",
"type": "Numeric",
"precision": 16,
"scale": 0,
"format": null
},
{
"name": "TargetDate",
"fullyQualifiedName": "Targets.TargetDate",
"label": "TargetDate",
"description": "",
"type": "Date",
"format": "dd/MM/yy HH:mm:ss",
"isSystemField": false,
"fiscalMonthOffset": 0
}
]
}
1190
]
}
Create the Dataset

Now that you updated the metadata file with the predicate, you can create the dataset.
EDITIONS
Warning: If you wish to perform the steps in this sample implementation, perform the steps
in a non-production environment. Ensure that these changes do not impact other datasets Available in Salesforce
that you already created. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
To create the dataset, perform the following steps.
Available with CRM
1. In CRM Analytics, go to the home page.
2. Click Create > Dataset for an extra cost in
3. Click CSV.
The following screen appears. available in Developer
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To upload a CSV and

metadata file:
• Upload External Data to
CRM Analytics
4. Select the CSV file and metadata (schema) file.

5. In the Dataset Name field, enter “SalesTarget” as the name of the dataset.
6. Optionally, choose a different app where you want to store the dataset.
1191
7. Click Create Dataset.

CRM Analytics confirms that the upload is successful and then creates a job to create the dataset. You can view the SalesTarget
dataset after the job completes successfully.
8. To verify that the job completes successfully, perform the following steps:
a.
Click the gear icon ( ) and then select Data Monitor to open the data monitor.
By default, the Jobs View of the data monitor appears. It shows the statuses of dataflow and external data upload jobs.
b.
Click the Refresh Jobs button ( ) to view the latest statuses of the jobs.
Test Row-Level Security for the Dataset

You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see their own sales
EDITIONS
targets.
1. Log in to CRM Analytics as Keith. Available in Salesforce
2. Open the SalesTargets dataset.
Experience.
As shown in the following lens, notice that Keith can see only his sales target.
Available with CRM
Edition.
Row-Level Security Example based on Opportunity Teams

Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on Salesforce data and then implement row-level security based on an
opportunity team. In this example, you will create a dataset that contains only opportunities associated with an opportunity team. To
restrict access on each record in the dataset, you will create a security policy where only opportunity members can view their opportunity.
This process requires multiple steps that are described in the sections that follow.
1192

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create an OppTeamMember dataset that
contains only opportunities associated with an opportunity team.
2. Design the Dataflow to Load the Data
Now it’s time to figure out how the dataflow will extract the Salesforce data and load it into a dataset. You start by creating this
high-level design for the dataflow.
3. Determine Row-Level Security for the Dataset
4. Modify the Dataflow Based on Row-Level Security
It’s now time to add the predicate in the dataflow definition file.
Now that you have the final dataflow definition file, you can create the dataset.
You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see the appropriate opportunities.

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create an
EDITIONS
OppTeamMember dataset that contains only opportunities associated with an opportunity team.
You will obtain opportunities from the Opportunity object and the opportunity teams from the Available in Salesforce
OpportunityTeamMember object. Both are Salesforce objects. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
In this example, your Salesforce organization has the following opportunity team and users.
Available with CRM
Edition.
Your organization also contains the following opportunities, most of which are owned by Keith.
1193
Acc - 1000 Widgets is the only opportunity shared by an opportunity team. Bill is the Sales Manager for this opportunity. Tony is the
opportunity owner.
Design the Dataflow to Load the Data

Now it’s time to figure out how the dataflow will extract the Salesforce data and load it into a dataset.
EDITIONS
You start by creating this high-level design for the dataflow.
Experience.
Available with CRM

The dataflow will extract data from the Opportunity and OpportunityTeamMember objects, join available in Developer
the data, and then load it into the OppTeamMember dataset. Edition.
Now let’s implement that design in JSON, which is the format of the dataflow definition file. A
dataflow definition file contains transformations that extract, transform, and load data into a dataset.
Based on the design, you create the JSON shown below.
{
"Extract_OpportunityTeamMember": {
"parameters": {
"object": "OpportunityTeamMember",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "UserId" }
]
}
},
"parameters": {
1194
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Augment_OpportunityTeamMember_Opportunity": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_OpportunityTeamMember",
"left_key": [
"OpportunityId"
],
"relationship": "TeamMember",
"right": "Extract_Opportunity",
"right_key": [
"Id"
],
"right_select": [
"Name","Amount"
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "OppTeamMember",
"name": "OppTeamMember",
"source": "Augment_OpportunityTeamMember_Opportunity",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": ""
}
}
}
If you were to run this dataflow, CRM Analytics would generate a dataset with no row-level security. As a result, any user that has access
to the dataset would be able to see the opportunity shared by the opportunity team.
For example, as shown below, Lucy would be able to view the opportunity that belongs to an opportunity team of which she is not a
member.
1195
Determine Row-Level Security for the Dataset

Now it’s time to think about row-level security. How will you restrict access to each record in this
EDITIONS
dataset?
You decide to implement the following predicate on the dataset. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
'UserId' == "$User.Id"
This predicate compares the UserId column in the dataset against the ID of the user running a query against the dataset. The UserId
column in the dataset contains the user ID of the team member associated with each opportunity. To determine the ID of the user
running the query, CRM Analytics looks up the ID of the user making the query in the User object.
For each match, CRM Analytics returns the record to the user.
1196
Modify the Dataflow Based on Row-Level Security

It’s now time to add the predicate in the dataflow definition file.
EDITIONS
You add the predicate to the Register transformation that registers the OppTeamMember dataset
as shown below. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
{
"Extract_OpportunityTeamMember": {
"parameters": {
"object": "OpportunityTeamMember",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "UserId" }
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Augment_OpportunityTeamMember_Opportunity": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_OpportunityTeamMember",
"left_key": [
"OpportunityId"
],
"relationship": "TeamMember",
"right": "Extract_Opportunity",
"right_key": [
"Id"
1197
],
"right_select": [
"Name","Amount"
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"alias": "OppTeamMember",
"name": "OppTeamMember",
"source": "105_Augment_OpportunityTeamMember_Opportunity",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'UserId' == \"$User.Id\""
}
}
}
Create the Dataset

EDITIONS
Warning: If you wish to perform the steps in this sample implementation, verify that you
have all required Salesforce objects and fields, and perform the steps in a non-production Available in Salesforce
environment. Ensure that these changes do not impact other datasets that you already created. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Also, always make a backup of the existing dataflow definition file before you make changes
because you cannot retrieve old versions of the file. Available with CRM
To create the dataset, perform the following steps. Analytics, which is available
1. Enterprise, Performance,
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then select Monitor to open the monitor.
The Jobs view of the monitor appears by default. and Unlimited Editions. Also
2. Select Dataflow View. Edition.
3. Click the actions list (1) for the dataflow and then select Download to download the existing
dataflow definition file. USER PERMISSIONS
To download, upload, run,

and monitor a dataflow:
Dataflows
1198
4. Open the dataflow definition file in a JSON or text editor.

5. Add the JSON determined in the previous step.
An error occurs if you try to upload the dataflow definition file with invalid JSON. You can find JSON validation tool on the internet.
7. Save and close the dataflow definition file.

8. In the Dataflow View of the monitor, click the actions list for the dataflow and then select Upload.
9. Select the updated dataflow definition file and click Upload.
10. In the Dataflow View of the monitor, click the actions list for the dataflow and then select Run to run the dataflow job.
11.
Click the Refresh Jobs button ( ) to view the latest status of the dataflow job.
You can view the OppTeamMember dataset after the dataflow job completes successfully.
Note: If you are adding a predicate to a dataset that was previously created, each user must log out and log back in for the
predicate to take effect.

You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see the appropriate
EDITIONS
opportunities.
1. Log in to CRM Analytics as Lucy. Available in Salesforce
2. Open the OppTeamMember opportunity.
Experience.
Notice that Lucy can’t view the opportunity associated with the opportunity team anymore
because she is not a member of the team. Available with CRM
Edition.
1199
3. Log out and now log in as Bill.

Bill can view the opportunity that is shared by the opportunity team of which he is a member.
Row-Level Security Example based on Role Hierarchy and Record Ownership

Let’s look at an example where you create a dataset based on Salesforce data and then implement row-level security based on the
Salesforce role hierarchy and record ownership. In this example, you will create a dataset that contains all opportunities. To restrict access
on each record in the dataset, you will create a security policy where each user can view only opportunities that they own or that are
owned by their subordinates based on the Salesforce role hierarchy. This process requires multiple steps that are described in the sections
that follow.

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create the OppRoles dataset that contains
all opportunities as well as user details about each opportunity owner, such as their full name, division, and title.
2. Design the Dataflow to Load the Data
Now it’s time to figure out how the dataflow will extract the data and load it into a dataset. You start by creating this high-level
design for the dataflow.
3. Determine Row-Level Security for the Dataset
1200
4. Modify the Dataflow Based on Row-Level Security

Now it’s time to modify the dataflow definition file to account for the predicate.
You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see the appropriate opportunities.
SEE ALSO:

First, determine what data you want to include in the dataset. For this example, you will create the
EDITIONS
OppRoles dataset that contains all opportunities as well as user details about each opportunity
owner, such as their full name, division, and title. Available in Salesforce
You will obtain opportunities from the Opportunity object and user details from the User object. Classic and Lightning
Both are objects in Salesforce. Experience.
In this example, your Salesforce organization has the following role hierarchy and users. Available with CRM
Edition.
Also, your organization contains the following opportunities, most of which are owned by Keith.
1201
Design the Dataflow to Load the Data

Now it’s time to figure out how the dataflow will extract the data and load it into a dataset. You
EDITIONS
start by creating this high-level design for the dataflow.
Experience.
Available with CRM

The dataflow will extract data from the Opportunity and User objects, join the data, and then load available in Developer
it into the OppRoles dataset. Edition.
Now let’s implement that design in JSON, which is the format of the dataflow definition file. A
dataflow definition file contains transformations that extract, transform, and load data into a dataset.
Based on the design, you create the JSON shown below.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Extract_User": {
"parameters": {
"object": "User",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Username" },
{ "name": "LastName" },
{ "name": "FirstName" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "CompanyName" },
{ "name": "Division" },
{ "name": "Title" },
{ "name": "Alias" },
{ "name": "CommunityNickname" },
{ "name": "UserType" },
]
1202
}
},
"Augment_Opportunity_User": {
"parameters": {
"left_key": [
"OwnerId"
],
"right": "Extract_User",
"right_select": [
"Name"
],
"right_key": [
"Id"
]
}
},
"Register": {
"parameters": {
"name": "OppRoles",
"source": "Augment_Opportunity_User",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": ""
}
}
}
If you were to run this dataflow, CRM Analytics would generate a dataset with no row-level security. As a result, any user that has access
to the dataset would be able to view all opportunities. For example, as shown below, Bill would be able to view all opportunities, including
those owned by his manager Keith.
1203
Determine Row-Level Security for the Dataset

Now it’s time to think about row-level security. How will you restrict access to each record in this
EDITIONS
dataset?
You decide to implement the following predicate on the dataset. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
'ParentRoleIDs' == "$User.UserRoleId" || 'OwnerId' == "$User.Id"
Note: The current dataflow doesn’t contain logic to create a dataset column named “ParentRoleIDs.” ParentRoleIDs is a placeholder
for the name of a column that will contain this information. In the next step, you will modify the dataflow to add this column to
the dataset. This column name will change based on how you configure the dataflow.
Based on the predicate, CRM Analytics returns an opportunity record if:
• The user who submits the query is a parent of the opportunity owner based on the Salesforce role hierarchy. CRM Analytics determines
this based on their role IDs and the role hierarchy.
• Or, the user who submits the query on the dataset is the opportunity owner.
Let’s examine both parts of this predicate.
1204
Predicate Part Description

'ParentRoleIDs' == "$User.UserRoleId" • ParentRoleIDs refers to a dataset column that contains a
comma-separated list of role IDs of all users above the
opportunity owner based on the role hierarchy. You will create
this dataset column in the next section.
• $User.UserRoleId refers to the UserRoleId column of the User
object. CRM Analytics looks up the user role ID of the user who
submits the query from the User object.
'OwnerId' == "$User.Id" • OwnerId refers to the dataset column that contains the user
ID of the owner of each opportunity.
• $User.Id refers to the Id column of the User object. CRM
Analytics looks up the user ID of the user who submits the
query from the User object.
Modify the Dataflow Based on Row-Level Security

Now it’s time to modify the dataflow definition file to account for the predicate.
EDITIONS
In this scenario, you have to make changes to the dataflow based on the predicate.
• Add a column in the dataset that stores a comma-separated list of the role IDs of all parents for
each opportunity owner. When you defined the predicate in the previous step, you temporarily
Experience.
referred to this column as “ParentRoleIDs.” To add the column, you redesign the dataflow as
shown in the following diagram: Available with CRM
Edition.
The new dataflow design contains the following changes:

– Extracts the role IDs from the UserRole object.
– Uses the Flatten transformation to generate a column that stores a comma-separated list of the role IDs of all parents of each
user. When you determined the predicate in the previous step, you temporarily referred to this column as “ParentRoleIDs.”
1205
– Link the new column to the OppRoles dataset.
• Add the predicate to the Register transformation that registers the OppRoles dataset.
You modify the dataflow as shown below.
{
"parameters": {
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Name" },
]
}
},
"Extract_User": {
"parameters": {
"object": "User",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "Username" },
{ "name": "LastName" },
{ "name": "FirstName" },
{ "name": "Name" },
{ "name": "CompanyName" },
{ "name": "Division" },
{ "name": "Title" },
{ "name": "Alias" },
{ "name": "CommunityNickname" },
{ "name": "UserType" },
]
}
},
"Extract_UserRole": {
"parameters": {
"object": "UserRole",
"fields": [
{ "name": "Id" },
{ "name": "ParentRoleId" },
{ "name": "RollupDescription" },
{ "name": "OpportunityAccessForAccountOwner" },
{ "name": "CaseAccessForAccountOwner" },
{ "name": "ContactAccessForAccountOwner" },
{ "name": "ForecastUserId" },
{ "name": "MayForecastManagerShare" },
{ "name": "LastModifiedDate" },
1206
{ "name": "LastModifiedById" },
{ "name": "SystemModstamp" },
{ "name": "DeveloperName" },
{ "name": "PortalAccountId" },
{ "name": "PortalType" },
{ "name": "PortalAccountOwnerId" }
]
}
},
"parameters": {
"self_field": "Id",
"source": "Extract_UserRole"
}
},
"Augment_User_FlattenUserRole": {
"parameters": {
"left": "Extract_User",
"left_key": [
"UserRoleId"
],
"relationship": "Role",
"right": "Flatten_UserRole",
"right_key": [
"Id"
],
"right_select": [
"Roles",
"RolePath"
]
}
},
"Augment_Opportunity_UserWithRoles": {
"parameters": {
"left_key": [
"OwnerId"
],
"right": "Augment_User_FlattenUserRole",
"right_select": [
"Name",
"Role.Roles",
"Role.RolePath"
],
"right_key": [
"Id"
]
1207
}
},
"Register": {
"parameters": {
"name": "OppRoles",
"source": "Augment_Opportunity_UserWithRoles",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'Owner.Role.Roles' == \"$User.UserRoleId\" || 'OwnerId'
== \"$User.Id\""
}
}
}
Note: In this example, the dataset has columns Owner.Role.Roles and OwnerId. A user can view the values of these columns for
each record to which they have access.
Create the Dataset

EDITIONS
Warning: If you wish to perform the steps in this sample implementation, verify that you
have all required Salesforce objects and fields, and perform the steps in a non-production Available in Salesforce
environment. Ensure that these changes do not impact other datasets that you already created. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Also, always make a backup of the existing dataflow definition file before you make changes
because you cannot retrieve old versions of the file. Available with CRM
To create the dataset, perform the following steps. Analytics, which is available
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and then select Data Monitor to open the data
monitor. and Unlimited Editions. Also
The Jobs View of the data monitor appears by default.
Edition.
2. Select Dataflow View.
3. Click the actions list (1) for the dataflow and then select Download to download the existing USER PERMISSIONS
dataflow definition file.
To download, upload, run,
and monitor a dataflow:
Dataflows
1208
4. Open the dataflow definition file in a JSON or text editor.

5. Add the JSON determined in the previous step.
An error occurs if you try to upload the dataflow definition file with invalid JSON. You can find JSON validation tool on the internet.
7. Save and close the dataflow definition file.

8. In the Dataflow View of the data monitor, click the actions list for the dataflow and then select Upload.
9. Select the updated dataflow definition file and click Upload.
10. In the Dataflow View of the data monitor, click the actions list for the dataflow and then select Run to run the dataflow job.
11.
Click the Refresh Jobs button ( ) to view the latest status of the dataflow job.
You can view the OppRoles dataset after the dataflow job completes successfully.
Note: If you are adding a predicate to a dataset that was previously created, each user must log out and log back in for the
predicate to take effect.

You must verify that the predicate is applied properly and that each user can see the appropriate
EDITIONS
opportunities.
1. Log in to CRM Analytics as Bill. Available in Salesforce
2. Open the OppRoles opportunity.
Experience.
Notice that Bill can’t see his manager Keith’s opportunities anymore. Now, he can see only his
opportunity and his subordinate Tony’s opportunity. Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
•
•
1209
3. Log out and now log in as Keith.

As expected, Keith can still see all opportunities.
Predicate Expression Syntax for Datasets

You must use valid syntax when defining the predicate expression.
The predicate expression must have the following syntax:
1210
<dataset column> <operator> <value>

For example, you can define the following predicate expression for a dataset:
'UserId' == "$User.Id"
You can create more complex predicate expressions such as:

(‘Expected_Revenue’ > 4000 || ‘Stage Name’ == "Closed Won") && ‘isDeleted’ != "False"
Consider the following requirements for the predicate expression:

• The expression is case-sensitive.
• The expression cannot exceed 5,000 characters.
• There must be at least one space between the dataset column and the operator, between the operator and the value, and before
and after logical operators. This expression is not valid: ‘Revenue’>100. It must have spaces like this: ‘Revenue’ > 100.
If you try to apply a predicate to a dataset and the predicate is not valid, an error appears when any user tries to query the dataset.
Dataset Columns in a Predicate Expression

You include at least one dataset column as part of the predicate expression.
Values in a Predicate Expression
The value in the predicate expression can be a string literal or number literal. It can also be a field value from the User object in
Salesforce.
Escape Sequences
You can use the backslash character (\) to escape characters in column names and string values in a predicate expression.
Character Set Support
CRM Analytics supports UTF-8 characters in dataset column names and values in a predicate expression.
Special Characters
Certain characters have a special meaning in CRM Analytics.
Operators
You can use comparison operators and logical operators in predicate expressions.
Sample Predicate Expressions for Datasets
Review the samples to see how to structure a predicate expression.
Dataset Columns in a Predicate Expression

You include at least one dataset column as part of the predicate expression.
Consider these requirements for dataset columns in a predicate expression.
• Column names are case-sensitive.
• Column names must be enclosed in single quotes ('). For example, 'Region' == "South"
Note: A set of characters in double quotes is treated as a string rather than a column name.
• Single quotes in column names must be escaped. For example, 'Team\'s Name' == "West Region Accounts"
Values in a Predicate Expression

The value in the predicate expression can be a string literal or number literal. It can also be a field value from the User object in Salesforce.
1211
Consider the following requirements for each value type.
Value Type Requirements Predicate Expression Examples

string literal Enclose in double quotes and escape the • 'Owner' == "Amber"
double quotes.
• 'Stage Name' == "Closed
Won"
number literal Can be a float or long datatype. Do not • 'Expected_Revenue' >=

enclose in quotes. 2000.00
• 'NetLoss' < -10000
field value When referencing a field from the User • 'Owner.Role' ==

object, use the $User.[field] syntax. Use the "$User.UserRoleId"
API name for the field.
• 'GroupID' ==
You can specify standard or custom fields "$User.UserGroupId__c"
of type string, number, or multivalue picklist.
Note: Supported User object field
When you define a predicate for a dataset,
value types are string, number, and
you must have read access on all User object
multivalue picklist. Other types (for
fields used to create the predicate
example, boolean) are not
expression.
supported.
However, when a user queries a dataset that
has a predicate based on the User object,
CRM Analytics uses the access permissions
of the Insights Security User to evaluate the
predicate expression based on the User
object.
Note: By default, the Security User

does not have access permission on
custom fields of the User object.
To grant the Security User read
access on a field, set field-level
security on the field in the user
profile of the Security User.
Escape Sequences
You can use the backslash character (\) to escape characters in column names and string values in a predicate expression.
You can use the \’ escape sequence to escape a single quote in a column name. For example:
‘Team\’s Name’ == "West Region Accounts"
You can use the following escape sequences for special characters in string values.
Sequence Meaning
\b One backspace character
1212
Sequence Meaning
\n New line
\r Carriage return
\t Tab
\Z CTRL+Z (ASCII 26)
\” One double-quote character
\\ One backslash character
\0 One ASCII null character
Character Set Support

CRM Analytics supports UTF-8 characters in dataset column names and values in a predicate expression.
CRM Analytics replaces non-UTF-8 characters with the UTF-8 symbol ( ). If CRM Analytics has to replace a non-UTF-8 character in a
predicate expression, users may experience unexpected query results.
Special Characters
Certain characters have a special meaning in CRM Analytics.
Character Name Description

‘ Single quote Encloses a dataset column name in a
predicate expression.
Example predicate expression:
'Expected_Revenue' >=
2000.00
“ Double quote Encloses a string value or field value in a

'OpportunityOwner' ==
"Michael Vesti"
() Parentheses Enforces the order in which to evaluate a

('Expected_Revenue' > 4000
|| 'Stage Name' == "Closed
Won") && 'isDeleted' !=
"False"
1213
Character Name Description

$ Dollar sign Identifies the Salesforce object in a predicate
expression.
Note: You can only use the User

object in a predicate expression.
'Owner.Role' ==
"$User.UserRoleId"
. Period Separates the object name and field name

in a predicate expression.
'Owner' == "$User.UserId"
Operators
You can use comparison operators and logical operators in predicate expressions.
Comparison Operators
Comparison operators return true or false.
Logical Operators
Logical operators return true or false.
Comparison Operators
Comparison operators return true or false.
CRM Analytics supports the following comparison operators.
Operator Name Description

== Equals True if the operands are equal. String comparisons that use the equals operator are case-sensitive.
Example predicate expressions:
'Stage Name' == "Closed Won"
!= Not equals True if the operands are not equal. String comparisons that use the not equals operator are
case-sensitive.
'isDeleted' != "False"
< Less than True if the left operand is less than the right operand.
'Revenue' < 100
1214

<= Less or equal True if the left operand is less than or equal to the right operand.
> Greater than True if the left operand is greater than the right operand.
>= Greater or equal True if the left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand.
in Multivalue list filter True if the left operand exists in the list of strings substituted for a multivalue picklist (field value).
'Demog' in ["$User.Demographic__c"]
In this example, Demographic__c is of type multiPicklistField. During evaluation,
the multivalue picklist field is substituted by a list of strings, with 1 string per user-selected item.
Note: Comma-separated lists are not supported within the square-bracket construct.
You can use the <, <=, >, and >= operators with measure columns only.
Logical Operators
Logical operators return true or false.
CRM Analytics supports the following logical operators.

&& Logical AND True if both operands are true.
'Stage Name' == "Closed Won" &&
'isDeleted' != "False"
|| Logical OR True if either operand is true.

'Expected_Revenue' > 4000 || 'Stage Name'
== "Closed Won"
Sample Predicate Expressions for Datasets

Review the samples to see how to structure a predicate expression.
The samples are based on the following Opportunity dataset.
Opportunity Expected_Rev Owner OwnerRoleID Stage_Name IsDeleted

OppA 2000.00 Bill 20 Prospecting True
OppB 3000.00 Joe 22 Closed Won False
OppC 1000.00 可爱的花 36 Closed Won False
1215
Opportunity Expected_Rev Owner OwnerRoleID Stage_Name IsDeleted

OppD 5000.00 O’Fallon 18 Prospecting True
OppE Joe 22 Closed Won True
Let’s take a look at some examples to understand how to construct a predicate expression.
Predicate Expression Details

'OwnerRoleID' == "$User.UserRoleId" Checks column values in the User object.
'Expected_Rev' > 1000 && 'Expected_Rev' <=

3000
'Owner' = "Joe" || 'Owner' = "Bill"
('Expected_Rev' > 4000 || 'Stage Name' == Parentheses specify the order of operations.
"Closed Won") && 'isDeleted' != "False"
'Stage Name' == "Closed Won" &&

'Expected_Rev' > 70000
'Owner' == "可爱的花" String contains Unicode characters.
'Owner' == "O\’Fallon" Single quote in a string requires the escape character.
'Stage Name' == "" Checks for an empty string.
Add Row-Level Security by Inheriting Sharing Rules

Use sharing inheritance to let CRM Analytics apply the same sharing setup for your datasets as Salesforce uses for your objects. Sharing
inheritance increases access accuracy and reduces the need for complicated security predicates for most objects and situations. The
tradeoff for applying sharing inheritance is an increase in the time to complete data syncs, dataflow and recipe jobs, and queries. The
more complicated the sharing settings, the more impact there is.
As an admin for your Salesforce org, you likely use a combination of sharing settings to provide users access to Salesforce data appropriate
to their roles. Sharing settings include manual and rule-based sharing as well as role hierarchy, role, group, apex-managed, and team-based
sharing. For more information, see Sharing Settings.
For supported objects, you can enable sharing inheritance in CRM Analytics to use the Salesforce sharing settings in CRM Analytics.
When you create or edit datasets, specify the objects to inherit sharing from.
Enable Sharing Inheritance

Turn on sharing inheritance and select the objects to use as a sharing source. Sharing inheritance is on by default in new Salesforce
orgs.
Determine If Sharing Inheritance Will Work for You
To understand how well sharing inheritance can work for your dataset row-level sharing needs, review these supported objects,
maximum number of sharing descriptors, and considerations. Use the Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment tool to evaluate
and understand your object and user eligibility.
1216
Set Sharing Inheritance for a Data Prep Recipe

Specify the sharing inheritance settings when generating a dataset from a Data Prep recipe, then set a default security predicate.
Set Sharing Inheritance for a Dataflow
Specify which datasets inherit sharing settings and set a default security predicate.
Sharing Inheritance Limits and Considerations
Here are some things to consider when working with sharing inheritance.
Enable Sharing Inheritance

Turn on sharing inheritance and select the objects to use as a sharing source. Sharing inheritance is on by default in new Salesforce orgs.
Note: We recommend that you test in a sandbox environment before rolling out sharing inheritance to production. Test your
particular use cases against your org’s security model and data to make sure that sharing inheritance works for you.
Turn On Sharing Inheritance

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then click Settings.
2. Select Inherit sharing from Salesforce, and click Save.
Enable Sharing Inheritance for Synced Objects

If your org has Data Sync enabled, enable sharing inheritance for each object that you want to use as a sharing source.
1. In CRM Analytics Studio, click Data Manager.
2. In Data Manager, click Connect.
3. On the right end of the row for the object you want to enable, click the dropdown list.
4. Click Row Level Sharing.
5. Click Sharing inheritance on.
6. Click Save.
Determine If Sharing Inheritance Will Work for You

To understand how well sharing inheritance can work for your dataset row-level sharing needs, review these supported objects, maximum
number of sharing descriptors, and considerations. Use the Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment tool to evaluate and understand
your object and user eligibility.
Supported Objects for Sharing Inheritance

Which Salesforce object does your dataset inherit sharing from? Each dataset can inherit sharing settings from one object, regardless of
how many source objects are used to create it. Supported objects for sharing inheritance are:
• Account
• Case
• Contact
• Lead
• Opportunity
1217
Sharing Settings Change Frequency

How often do the sharing settings change for the source object (object selected to inherit sharing from), and how long can you wait for
sharing inheritance to catch the change? Each full data sync captures sharing setting changes, so evaluate your sync settings. For more
information, see Security Metadata Drift.
Run the Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment Report

Does your object have any records or users with more than your org’s maximum sharing descriptors? And what is your org’s maximum
sharing descriptors?
Note: A sharing descriptor is the ID of any user or group that has access to a record. Sharing descriptors, tracked by Salesforce in
the Object Sharing Table, ensure that only the listed users and groups can access the correct records. IDs are added to the sharing
table for many reasons including record ownership, sharing rules, and manual sharing.
After you turn on sharing inheritance, run the Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment report on an object. Then view the assessment’s
user coverage to investigate how well sharing inheritance will work for you.
Important: The Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment only evaluates active users assigned the “Use CRM Analytics” permission.
1. In the Salesforce Setup menu, under Analytics, select Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment.
2. In the Salesforce Objects tab, choose the object to evaluate (1).
1218
3. Select View Assessment (2). Records from the evaluated object with more than your org’s maximum descriptors (3) are found. The
top records with too many descriptors are listed along with their descriptor count.
If records exceed the limit, depending on your org’s sharing strategy flexibility, choose to reduce the number of descriptors per
record or contact Salesforce Support to evaluate whether higher limits are an option.
4. Select View User Coverage to see which users have more than the max descriptors on the selected object. The users not covered
by sharing inheritance, who need a security predicate to manage their row-level access, are listed.
Set Sharing Inheritance for a Data Prep Recipe

Specify the sharing inheritance settings when generating a dataset from a Data Prep recipe, then set a default security predicate.
particular use cases against your Salesforce org’s security model and data to make sure that sharing inheritance works for you.
Configure Data Prep Recipe

Before a dataset can inherit sharing, you must configure its recipe in Data Prep. Specify which source object to inherit sharing from and
the backup security predicate.
1. Enable sharing inheritance for your org and synced objects if you haven’t already. For more information, see Enable Sharing Inheritance.
2. Open the recipe in Data Prep. Sharing inheritance is not available for recipes built in Data Prep classic.
3. In the output node, configure the sharing inheritance settings. Set which object is the source of sharing rules (1).
1219
4. Optionally, add a security predicate in the Security Predicate field (2). Leaving this field empty is the same as “False,” so users not
covered by sharing inheritance have no record visibility. For syntax and more information, see Add Row-Level Security with a Security
Predicate on page 1186.
5. Click Apply.
Configure Datasets
Update the sharing inheritance settings for datasets on the edit dataset page.
Note: The settings in the dataset and recipe must match. If they don’t, you receive the warning, "The sharing source and security
predicate in this dataset version must be the same as in the recipe."
1. Edit the dataset. For more information, see Edit a Dataset.
2. Click the pencil under Sharing Source.
1220
3. Select the object to inherit sharing settings from. Only valid objects are displayed in the list. For example, the primary key of the
object must be a field in the dataset.
4. Optionally, click the pencil under Security Predicate. The security predicate is the row visibility fallback when you exceed sharing
inheritance limits, described here.
a. Add your security predicate in the syntax described in Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate. The default on existing
datasets is false, so users not covered by sharing inheritance have no record visibility.
Set Sharing Inheritance for a Dataflow

Specify which datasets inherit sharing settings and set a default security predicate.
particular use cases against your Salesforce org’s security model and data to make sure that sharing inheritance works for you.
Configure Dataflows
Update the dataflow that generates the datasets that you want to inherit sharing. Specify which source object to inherit sharing from
and the backup security predicate.
1. Enable sharing inheritance for your org and synced objects if you haven’t already. For more information, see Enable Sharing Inheritance.
2. If using the dataflow editor to specify the source object and backup security predicate:
a.
b. Click the Dataflows & Recipe tab.
c. Click the dataflow that you want to edit, or click the actions button and select Edit.
d. Click the sfdcRegister node.
e. Select the object to inherit sharing from in the Sharing Source field.
f. Optionally, add a security predicate in the Security Predicate field. No value is “False,” so users not covered by sharing inheritance
have no record visibility. For syntax and more information, see Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate on page 1186.
g. Click Save.
3. If configuring the dataflow through the definition file:

a. Add the rowLevelSharingSource parameter to the sfdcRegister node parameters for the dataset. For more
information, see sfdcRegister. The rowLevelSharingSource parameter takes a string, which is the API name for the
1221
object to inherit sharing from. In this example, the parameter specifies to inherit the Salesforce sharing settings on the Opportunity
object.
"reg": {
"parameters": {
"source": "Opportunity_final",
"name": "Opportunity w/ Account",
"alias": "Oppty_w_Acct",
"rowLevelSharingSource": "Opportunity",
"rowLevelSecurityFilter": "'OwnerId' == \"$User.Id\""
}
},
Note: Only inherit sharing settings from objects extracted using the sfdcDigest transformation.
b. Specify the security predicate in the rowLevelSecurityFilter parameter of the rowLevelSharingSource

parameter. In the example, when sharing limits are exceeded, users see only the opportunities that they own. Set the security
predicate to false to block all users not covered by sharing.
Configure Datasets
Update the sharing inheritance settings for datasets on the edit dataset page.
Note: The settings in the dataset and dataflow must match. If they don’t, you receive the warning, "The sharing source and security
predicate in this dataset version must be the same as in the dataflow."
1. Edit the dataset. For more information, see Edit a Dataset.
2. Click the pencil under Sharing Source.
3. Select the object to inherit sharing settings from. Only valid objects are displayed in the list. For example, the primary key of the
object must be a field in the dataset.
4. Optionally, click the pencil under Security Predicate. The security predicate is the row visibility fallback when you exceed sharing
inheritance limits, described here.
a. Add your security predicate in the syntax described in Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate. The default on existing
datasets is false, so users not covered by sharing inheritance have no record visibility.
1222
Sharing Inheritance Limits and Considerations

Here are some things to consider when working with sharing inheritance.
Sharing Inheritance Limits

• Sharing inheritance can be applied from a supported object if all object records have fewer than 400 sharing descriptors each.
Supported objects for sharing inheritance are:
– Account
– Case
– Contact
– Lead
– Opportunity
Note: Objects must be local and extracted using the sfdcDigest transformation. Enable sharing inheritance for each object as
described in Enable Sharing Inheritance on page 1217. All users on an unsupported object list as UNSUPPORTED on the Sharing
Inheritance Coverage Assessment Report, described here.
• Sharing inheritance covers a user if they have “View All Data” permission or their record access is granted by fewer than 3,000 sharing
descriptors. The backup security predicate takes effect for users with more than this number of sharing descriptors without the “View
All Data” permission. A sharing descriptor is record access granted through several methods, including:
– Owning the record
– Role hierarchy
– Sharing Rules
– Manual sharing
– Apex managed sharing
Note: You can’t easily count how many sharing descriptors are associated with a user or record without a developer’s help. Instead,
fetch the list of records or users not covered by sharing inheritance with the Sharing Inheritance Coverage Assessment Report.
Users with more than 3,000 sharing descriptors have the uncovered reason HIGH_VISIBILITY.
• Sharing inheritance only works for Salesforce users. It isn’t available for Experience Cloud Sites users and logins. To provide security
in Experience Cloud Sites, you must use security predicates.
General Considerations
• It's best practice to have a defined security predicate for datasets using inherited sharing. Without a security predicate, users not
covered by sharing inheritance see no data in the dataset because they have no dataset row-level access.
• Sharing isn’t automatically applied to datasets. You can apply sharing to each dataset manually.
• Sharing inheritance can affect the performance of queries, dataflows, and Data Prep recipes. If your requirements include the
best-possible performance, use security predicates instead of sharing inheritance. If not, enjoy the convenience of sharing inheritance.
• Changes to the rowLevelSharingSource or rowLevelSecurityFilter security settings in a dataflow only affect datasets created after
you save the change. Similarly, changes to a Data Prep recipe output node’s Sharing Source and Security Predicate fields only affect
datasets created after you save the change. Update those settings for existing datasets on the edit dataset page.
• For an object to appear in the security-sharing source list, the primary key of the custom object must be a field in the dataset. A
foreign key doesn’t satisfy this requirement. For example, if you have Opportunity.AccountId in your dataset but not Account.Id, you
can’t inherit sharing from the Account object.
1223
• Sharing inheritance uses your Salesforce org sharing settings. If you don’t want to apply incomplete Salesforce org sharing settings
to CRM Analytics, don't use sharing inheritance.
• Sharing inheritance isn't available for Data Prep Classic recipes.
Information Leak Considerations

When using sharing inheritance, consider these points to avoid data leaks to users who shouldn’t have access.
• A dataset can inherit sharing settings from only one object, regardless of how many source objects are used to create the dataset.
Because many objects comprise the dataset, each object can use a different security model.
• The computeRelative and delta dataflow transformations can merge information from records with different security.
• Calculated fields are treated as normal fields. Row-level security applied during the calculation in Salesforce is ignored.
• Security predicates referencing $User information require a new user session before a new value is recognized.
Important: If your dataflow doesn't do a full extraction each time it runs, evaluate whether security drift is a risk for the datasets
you bring into CRM Analytics. Consider whether to use periodic full sync. For more information, see Security Metadata Drift.
Security Metadata Drift

The data you use in CRM Analytics can come from Salesforce objects and fields. A dataflow job runs, and then you can analyze the
resulting dataset. In an ideal world, each object in your dataset would stay in perfect sync with its source object. In the real world,
the correctness of an object is only as good as the last update. The longer the time between updates, the greater the likelihood of
drift. The security metadata (predicates and descriptors) of a Salesforce object is subject to the same risk of drift.
Security Metadata Drift

The data you use in CRM Analytics can come from Salesforce objects and fields. A dataflow job runs, and then you can analyze the
resulting dataset. In an ideal world, each object in your dataset would stay in perfect sync with its source object. In the real world, the
correctness of an object is only as good as the last update. The longer the time between updates, the greater the likelihood of drift. The
security metadata (predicates and descriptors) of a Salesforce object is subject to the same risk of drift.
Data drift is inevitable in any system that uses batch updates. Whether security drift affects your dataset depends on many factors: how
often security permissions change, how often your dataflow runs, how sharing is configured, and whether your users have a range of
security permissions.
For example, if you replicate an Opportunity record in CRM Analytics and then remove a sharing permission for a user on that record in
Salesforce, your change doesn’t affect the copy in CRM Analytics until the next full sync. An incremental sync isn’t sufficient because
changing only a sharing permission isn’t considered to be a change to the record.
(However, if you remove the same user from a group that controls the same sharing permission, your change is effective immediately
— another good argument for using groups to define security.)
A user who has “View All Data” permission (or a user who has access to only a few thousand records) likely experiences little to no drift.
But just because an administrator can see a given record (thanks to “View All Data”) doesn’t mean that a user who experiences drift can
see the same record.
The question that you must answer for each of your datasets is whether drift is a reasonable tradeoff for being able to inherit security
metadata.
The only way to be certain that security metadata is up to date is to run full extracts as often as possible. Consider enabling periodic full
sync.
1224
Edit a Dataset
To view a dataset edit page: Use CRM Analytics AND Editor access to the Available in Salesforce
dataset’s app Classic and Lightning
Experience.
To update a dataset name, app, and Use CRM Analytics AND Editor access to the
extended metadata: dataset’s app Available with CRM
To upload and preview data: Upload External Data to CRM Analytics AND
Editor access to the dataset’s app
To edit a dataset security: Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows and Unlimited Editions. Also
To restore a dataset: Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows Edition.
Edit a dataset to change its name, app, security, or extended metadata (XMD). You can also replace data in a dataset, restore it to a
previous version, or delete it. The dataset edit page also provides key information about when the dataset was created and last updated,
and where it is used.
You can edit a dataset from CRM Analytics home or from the data manager.
• To edit a dataset from CRM Analytics home, follow these steps.
1. Click All Items in the left panel.
2. Click Datasets.
3.
On the right of the dataset, click .
4. Click Edit.
• To edit a dataset from the data manager, follow these steps.

1. In the data manager, click the Data tab.
2. Click the Datasets subtab.
3.
On the right of the dataset, click .
4. Click Edit Dataset.
• To replace the data in the dataset with CSV data, click .

• Edit the following settings, as needed.
Option Description
Dataset name Enter a new name if you’d like to change the name of the dataset. The name cannot
exceed 80 characters.
App Select a new app if you’d like to move the dataset to a different app.
Extended Metadata File Specify an extended metadata file if you’d like to customize the formatting of
dashboards associated with the dataset.
Refer to Extended Metadata (XMD) Developer Guide for information about extended
metadata files.
1225
Option Description
Sharing Source If you have enabled sharing inheritance, specify the object from which you want
to inherit sharing for this dataset. You can’t specify a sharing source for datasets
created from CSV files. When you select a sharing source, you must also add a
security predicate. CRM Analytics populates the Security Predicate field with the
value false.
See Salesforce Sharing Inheritance for Datasets.
Security Predicate Add a security predicate if you’d like to apply row-level security on the dataset.
For information about predicates, see Set Up Dataset Security to Control Access to
Rows.
Apply Extended Metadata to Change the Formatting of a Dataset

A dataset’s extended metadata (XMD) file allows you to customize the formatting of dashboards associated with the dataset. You
can update the XMD file through the dataset’s edit page.
Customize the Labels and Colors of Dataset Columns and Values
Choose what shows up in lenses and dashboards. Rename and hide dataset columns. Set the default columns that appear in tables.
Set the labels and default colors for dimension values.
Restore a Dataset Version
Restoring a dataset rolls back its data to a previous version. Restore a dataset to reverse a recent update or to undo the results of a
recipe or dataflow change.
1226
Apply Extended Metadata to Change the Formatting of a Dataset

A dataset’s extended metadata (XMD) file allows you to customize the formatting of dashboards
EDITIONS
associated with the dataset. You can update the XMD file through the dataset’s edit page.
Important: An XMD file must use XMD 2.0 syntax and be no greater than 5 MB. Refer to Available in Salesforce
Extended Metadata (XMD) Developer Guide for information about extended metadata files and Classic and Lightning
Experience.
XMD 2.0 syntax.
1. On the CRM Analytics page, click the Datasets tab. If you’re in the data manager, click the Available with CRM
Datasets tab there. Analytics, which is available
Hover over the dataset that you want to update, click , and then click Edit. If you’re in the
data manager, click Edit Dataset. and Unlimited Editions. Also
The dataset edit page opens. available in Developer
Edition.
3.
Under Extended Metadata File, click , and then select Download. Download the current
XMD file as a backup.
USER PERMISSIONS
4.
Under Extended Metadata File, click , and then select Replace. Select your new XMD file
and click Open. To update a dataset’s
extended metadata:
If the XMD file is not valid, you see an error message. Correct the syntax of the file and upload
• Use CRM Analytics AND
it again.
Editor access to the
Note: If the XMD file displays an error message when you open the dataset edit page, the dataset’s app
current file is not valid.
Perform step 3 to download the file, then convert it to XMD 2.0. Then perform step 4 to
reupload the converted file and update the dataset.
Refer to Extended Metadata (XMD) Developer Guide for information about converting extended
metadata files to XMD 2.0 syntax.
Customize the Labels and Colors of Dataset Columns and Values

Choose what shows up in lenses and dashboards. Rename and hide dataset columns. Set the default columns that appear in tables. Set
the labels and default colors for dimension values.
View and Configure Dataset Columns

You can view, hide, and rename dataset columns. Users with view-only access to the dataset can view the names and API names of
columns. You can also change the display format of measure columns.
Choose the Default Dataset Columns That Appear in a Table
Make tables your own by choosing the default columns. For example, show the most commonly used columns in a particular order.
If you don’t set the defaults, the first five measures and five dimensions are selected in alphabetical order.
1227
Change the Labels and Colors of Dataset Dimension Values

Change the display labels and default colors of dimension values to make them easier to understand and spot. The modifications
don’t alter the underlying data stored in the dataset or the API names of the columns. The changes affect only the appearance in
the user interface.
View and Configure Dataset Columns

You can view, hide, and rename dataset columns. Users with view-only access to the dataset can
EDITIONS
view the names and API names of columns. You can also change the display format of measure
columns. Available in Salesforce
1. To configure the dataset columns, click Fields while exploring the dataset. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
2. To reveal a column's context menu, hover over the right edge of the column.
1228
3. Click the arrow to reveal the context menu.
4. Select Rename to rename the column's visible name.

Instead of using the menu, you can click any column's name to edit it. You can copy the column's API name, but you cannot change
it. To display every column's API name in the Dataset Fields list of columns, click Show Field API Names.
5. To hide a column, select Hide from its context menu.

The column is hidden from the Dataset Fields list of columns, and hidden from users who explore the dataset, and hidden from all
lenses or dashboards that currently use the dataset. However, the column is still accessible via lens and dashboard JSON, Analytics
REST API, and SAQL queries. To view hidden columns in the Dataset Fields list, click Show Hidden Fields.
1229
6. For measures, you can choose to apply a number format.
7. Click Save to save the changes.
1230
Choose the Default Dataset Columns That Appear in a Table

Make tables your own by choosing the default columns. For example, show the most commonly
EDITIONS
used columns in a particular order. If you don’t set the defaults, the first five measures and five
dimensions are selected in alphabetical order. Available in Salesforce
1. To configure the dataset columns, click Fields while exploring the dataset. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
2. Click the dropdown arrow next to the dataset name, and click Default Fields.
3. Select the columns to show by default, use the up and down arrows to reorder them, and click Update.
1231
When you explore the dataset as a values table, the selected columns appear in the specified order.
You see the same table columns and order when you click View Data Table to view the data in a tabular format.
1232
Change the Labels and Colors of Dataset Dimension Values

Change the display labels and default colors of dimension values to make them easier to understand
EDITIONS
and spot. The modifications don’t alter the underlying data stored in the dataset or the API names
of the columns. The changes affect only the appearance in the user interface. Available in Salesforce
Because these changes are done at the dataset level, the changes affect all charts and tables that Classic and Lightning
use this dimension. Experience.
Note: You can override the default colors for a specific chart or table by setting conditional Available with CRM
formatting in the widget properties. Analytics, which is available
1. To change colors or labels for all charts that use a selected dimension, click Fields while exploring Enterprise, Performance,
a dataset as a lens. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
1233
2. Click the dropdown arrow next to the dimension, and select Edit Values.
3. To change the color, click the square icon on the right (1) and select the color (2).
1234
4. To change the label, click the text box and enter a new label.
If you change the colors of dimension values, the color doesn’t appear in a chart until you set up conditional formatting on the column
in the chart’s widget properties. For more information, see Automatically Highlight Data with Conditional Formatting
Restore a Dataset Version

Restoring a dataset rolls back its data to a previous version. Restore a dataset to reverse a recent
EDITIONS
update or to undo the results of a recipe or dataflow change.
Important: Restoring a dataset can impact the dashboards, lenses, recipes, and dataflows Available in Salesforce
that use it. Refer to the usage information on the dataset’s edit page to review the impacted Classic and Lightning
Experience.
assets before you restore.
1. From the Data Manager, click the Data tab. Available with CRM
2. for an extra cost in
Hover over the dataset that you want to restore, click , and then click Edit Dataset.
3.
Click the Restore Dataset button ( ). and Unlimited Editions. Also
4. Click the version you want to restore. Edition.
Note: The prior two versions are stored, with any older versions deleted after 24 hours.
In limited situations, a deleted version can be restored by Salesforce. Contact Salesforce
USER PERMISSIONS
Customer Support for recovery evaluation.
To restore a dataset:
5. Click Restore.
6. Click Restore again to confirm.
7. To view the restore data job, click the data monitor link.
You see the restore data job on the Monitor tab of the data manager. If CRM Analytics can’t restore the dataset, the job fails. Try
restoring a later version of the dataset.
1235
Important: Restoring a dataset has no effect on associated dataflows or recipes. It’s possible that when an associated dataflow
or recipe next runs, it can undo the results of a restore.
Delete a Dataset
Delete unnecessary datasets to reduce app clutter and avoid reaching your org's total row limit for
EDITIONS
all registered datasets. You can delete datasets from shared apps on which you have at least Editor
access, your My Private App, and, with a special user permission, another user’s My Private App. Available in Salesforce
Before you delete a dataset, consider the following guidelines. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
• You can’t recover a deleted dataset.
• Use the data manager to delete datasets from another user’s My Private App. You can’t see or Available with CRM
delete other users’ private datasets from the CRM Analytics home or app tabs. For security Analytics, which is available
reasons, you also can’t view the data in other users’ private datasets. for an extra cost in
• You also can’t delete a dataset that’s used in a dashboard, lens, or dataflow. Before you delete and Unlimited Editions. Also
a dataset, first remove references to it from dashboards or dataflow transformations, and delete available in Developer
associated lenses. Edition.
Tip: To see where a dataset is used, review the usage information on the dataset’s edit
page. USER PERMISSIONS
To delete a dataset:
• Use CRM Analytics AND
Editor access to the
dataset’s app
To delete a dataset in
another user’s My Private
App:
Private Assets
• Analytics doesn’t check or show if a dataset is used in recipes. Be sure to remove dataset
references from recipes as well. If you delete a dataset that's used in a recipe, the recipe fails
the next time it runs.
1. To locate the Delete Dataset button on the CRM Analytics home or an app page, follow these steps.
a.
Under the Datasets section, click next to the dataset that you want to delete.
b. Click Edit.
2. To locate the Delete Dataset button in the data manager, follow these steps.
a. In the data manager, click the Data tab.
b.
On the Datasets subtab, click next to the dataset that you want to delete.
c. Click Edit Dataset.
3.
On the dataset edit page, click the Delete Dataset button ( ).
If the dataset is in use, CRM Analytics stops the deletion and shows a list of assets that reference the dataset. Click Got It and resolve
these references before trying again.
4. Click Delete Permanently.
1236
Data Integration Best Practices

Review these tips to improve the performance of your recipes, speed up the editing of large recipes, and streamline data sync.
Improve Recipe Performance

In CRM Analytics, the amount of data added to a recipe impacts how fast Data Prep can preview the data and run the recipe. To improve
performance, consider these tips.
• Extract Only the Data Required—In the input nodes, extract data from only the columns you need for your visualizations or
computations. If needed, you can add more columns to an input node later. To add a column, in the input node, click Change
columns.
• Minimize the Number of Joins—Joins are expensive operations. To increase performance, limit join nodes to 30. Also, watch out for
exploding joins where the join produces more records than the right or left sources. See Considerations When Using Joins.
• Minimize the Number of Transformations—A recipe with large numbers of transform nodes or transformations in a transform node
takes longer to preview and run. Generally, don’t include more than 250 transformations in a recipe. For recipes requiring many
transformations, split them into multiple transform nodes. For recipes requiring lots of transform nodes, break them up into smaller
recipes if possible.
• Reduce the Number of Multivalue Columns—The size of a multivalue column can grow quickly. For example, if you have 100
multivalue columns and each column stores 1 GB of data, the recipe has to process 100 GB per row. To address this issue, minimize
the number of multivalue columns and the width of each multivalue column. For instance, to define a security predicate based on
multiple users, build a multivalue column based on groups instead of users. For instance, instead of adding 50 user IDs to a multivalue
column, add their group IDs to use a shorter column width.
• Use a computeExpression Transformation to Aggregate Multiple Criteria— You can use multiple filters and aggregates to accomplish
an “aggregate with where clause”, something like this:
1237
However, this method doesn’t perform well. Instead, use a computeExpression transformation to create columns to represent the
filters.
The aggregate node then uses the columns created for each set.
1238
• Don’t Use Compute Relative for Aggregation—Although compute relative supports aggregation, it doesn’t perform well when
aggregating data. Use an aggregate node instead.
• Don’t Use Filter Nodes for Conditional Logic—To implement conditional logic, use if or case statements in an SQL expression.
Simplify Editing Large Recipes

Increase your speed when building large recipes with these tips.
• Organize a Graph with the Cleanup Button—Introduce structure to a graph with the cleanup button. Cleanup organizes the node
branches horizontally, with inputs on the left and outputs on the right, minimizes the overlaps, and shortens connections as much
as possible.
• Speed Up Tasks with Keyboard Shortcuts—Use keyboard shortcuts instead of a mouse to work with elements in a graph.
• Change Your Perspective with Zoom—Zoom out to see all the nodes in your graph, or zoom in for greater detail. Click the percent
zoomed to expand or shrink the zoom controls.
1239
Streamline and Improve Data Sync

• Update Data Using Incremental Sync—To get your data faster, run syncs in incremental mode after synchronizing your data with a
full sync. However, not all objects support incremental mode.
If you’re concerned about drift, use the Periodic Full Sync option to benefit from incremental sync for most updates.
• Use Connections to Group Objects for Scheduling—To sync objects that are inputs to a dataflow or recipe, group the objects in a
connection. You can then schedule syncing the connection rather than the individual objects.
• Reduce the Number of Fields Being Synced—To improve the performance of your data syncs, remove the fields you don’t need in
the synchronized data. Keep the field count below 100 because performance optimizations are less effective when syncing more
than 100 columns.
• Don’t Refresh Your Data More Than You Need To—Consider how often your users must see updated data for each dataset. Schedule
associated data syncs and recipes to run only when required.
• Keep Within the External Data Sync Inbound Connector Limit—This limit is per run, there is no limit on the number or frequency of
inbound connector runs. To stay within the per run limit:
– Create a view on the remote system and use that in the connection.
– Set up the remote system to publish changed or incremental data since the last run. This approach also enables a faster sync
because it’s not moving all the data during every run. Use recipes to append incremental data to the local dataset.
Data Integration Troubleshooting

Use these tips to resolve problems with data integration issues in CRM Analytics.
Why am I receiving recipe errors?

These suggestions can help resolve recipe errors in CRM Analytics.
Tightly scheduled recipe or data sync jobs can result in canceled data sync and recipe runs because too many runs are queued. You
can usually avoid this situation by extending the time between a recipe’s or data sync’s scheduled runs.
Have I exceeded my dataset row limit, and what can I do about it?
All orgs have a dataset row limit. When you exceed this limit or create a recipe that can exceed this limit, you must reduce the number
of dataset rows used or increase your limit.
Why is my recipe or data sync job running out of time or being killed?
A recipe or data sync job can fail because the integration user can’t authenticate.
Why was a recipe unscheduled?
When a user is deactivated, the recipes in which they made the most recent modification are unscheduled to prevent unnecessary
runs.
1240
Why am I receiving a syntax error in the formula node?

You can perform several types of transformations on fields in Data Prep. However, some field API names are unavailable for these
transformations.
When recipes are chained together using event-based scheduling, unscheduling or manually running an upstream recipe or
connection can result in unexpected outcomes.
Why am I receiving recipe errors?

These suggestions can help resolve recipe errors in CRM Analytics.
When troubleshooting a recipe error, use the org where the error occurred. A recipe can work differently depending on the org. For
example, a recipe that works in a sandbox can work differently in production because that org can contain more data, different foreign
keys, or unexpected values.
Recipe Error Solution

Locating Unknown Errors
Hmm, that didn’t work. Please try running the recipe again.
When a recipe fails, but the error isn’t identified, like break the recipe into smaller recipes to
pinpoint where the error occurs. Fix the error and try again.
Triggered Object Data Sync If the recipe triggered an object data sync, check whether the data sync failed and, if it did,
review the errors.
Geolocation Fields Remove unused geolocation fields in data sync. This field contains three parts: latitude, longitude,
and a system field.
You include latitude and longitude in input nodes and the SFDC_LOCAL Data Sync connection.
They appear as GeolocationFieldName__Latitude__s and
GeolocationFieldName__Longitude__s. High-precision numbers can result in a
numeric overflow during ingestion and in computations.
Specify a precision metadata override to avoid numeric overflows and other unexpected
behaviors. Depending on your needs, set the precision to:
• 3 for locations accurate to within ~80 km.
• 5 for locations accurate to within ~800 m.
• 7 for locations accurate to within ~8 m. This precision is about the accuracy of most
commercial GPS devices.
• 10 for locations accurate to within less than a centimeter. This level of accuracy requires
specialized equipment.
Latitude values are between -90 and 90, and 0 is the equator. Longitude values are between
-180 and 180, and 0 is the prime meridian.
Numerical Overflows
The job completed, but some rows failed. Download the error log
from the data monitor to view the failed rows and the reasons
they failed.
1241
Recipe Error Solution

If you get a warning that some rows have failed, it could be due to numerical overflows. For
example, the numeric field value exceeds the maximum number of decimal places. Review the
error log to locate the failed rows.
To resolve a numeric overflow error:
• Remove the longitude or latitude fields from the data source, data sync, dataflow, or recipe
if they’re not functionally required.
• Adjust the numeric field’s precision and scale to accommodate the numeric value.
• Make sure that the field values are within the defined maximum and minimum values,
including decimal places.

Tightly scheduled recipe or data sync jobs can result in canceled data sync and recipe runs because too many runs are queued. You can
usually avoid this situation by extending the time between a recipe’s or data sync’s scheduled runs.
Unless you enable priority scheduling, CRM Analytics data sync and recipe jobs use asynchronous processing. Requests are processed
in a first-in, first-out order as server resources become available. The process prioritizes synchronous over asynchronous requests, so
asynchronous jobs sometimes pause as server resources reprioritize them. This behavior means that recipe, dataflow, and data sync jobs
have no expectations for queue or processing time and no SLA for completion.
The CRM Analytics scheduler allows any job to be simultaneously running and queued. When an earlier request is queued for a job,
attempting to run that job results in the scheduling system canceling the new job request.
CRM Analytics recipes and dataflows have a concurrency limit. If two recipes perform a write operation on a dataset, they don’t run
concurrently—one runs, and the other is queued. A sandbox environment is limited to a concurrency of 1, and no more than three data
sync jobs can run at the same time.
A delayed job run pushes back all other queued jobs of the same type. This behavior results in a cascade of delays that eventually leads
to cancellation messages. When viewing or exploring your data, you might notice your data is stale.
To avoid this issue:
• Schedule your recipe and data sync jobs with plenty of time between runs to allow for potential delays.
• Periodically review your job runs to see how long an average job takes, and update the schedule to allow for possible delays.
• Split large data sync jobs into smaller ones using additional remote or local connections to the same data source. You can set
more-frequent sync schedules for smaller groups of objects that require regular updates and infrequent sync schedules for less-updated
objects.
• Enable priority scheduling to automatically queue shorter or smaller runs before longer or larger ones.
SEE ALSO:
Have I exceeded my dataset row limit, and what can I do about it?
All orgs have a dataset row limit. When you exceed this limit or create a recipe that can exceed this limit, you must reduce the number
of dataset rows used or increase your limit.
1242
You can receive errors and warnings about exceeding this limit when:
• Creating or updating a recipe. You can receive a warning like this.
The dataflow job failed during completion. Run the dataflow again. If the job continues
to fail, contact Salesforce Customer Support.
• Running dataflows or syncing data sync. You can receive an error like these.
– Max_Data_Rows_Limit_Exceeded
– Your org reached its dataset row limit, with [numberofrows] rows used of your allotted
[#maxlimit]. You can't run recipes, dataflows, data sync, or upload files until you
reduce your rows below your org's limit.
Your allocation limit depends on your licenses. To confirm your row limit, in Data Manager, go to Usage. Under Rows in All Datasets,
review the number of rows used in all your datasets and the total rows allotted by your licenses. For more information, see Einstein
Discovery Capacities and Requirements.
To make more dataset rows available, try these suggestions.
Suggestion Description
Clean Out Unused In Data Manager, review the Data Assets page. Remove obsolete, outdated, unused, or duplicate datasets.
Datasets This screen also shows the number of rows each dataset generates. Use this information to identify datasets
that you can optimize.
If a dataset is stored in a Private App, only the user who owns the dataset can remove or modify it.
Filter Datasets Use filter transformation in recipes to remove unused rows from a dataset. An object can filter its connected
dataset to remove rows not used in the datasets referencing the object.
Modify Event Monitoring If your org uses the Event Monitoring Event Monitoring Analytics app, check its configuration and reduce
Configuration the types of events captured and their data retention period. Delete the app if it’s not being used.
Expand the Limit You can upgrade your license or purchase additional data rows. Contact your Account Executive.
Why is my recipe or data sync job running out of time or being killed?
A recipe or data sync job can fail because the integration user can’t authenticate.
If you receive one of these error messages, it typically indicates a temporary lack of server resources. Rerunning the job usually resolves
the issue.
• Queue wait time exceeded limit.
• Job killed due to inactivity.
However, if your jobs fail repeatedly, you could have an authentication issue with the integration user. If the integration user can’t
authenticate, the job waits in the queue until it expires or a cleanup process kills it. Authentication issues for the integration user can
also affect a dataflow.
To troubleshoot an authentication issue, check these settings.
1243
Setting Description
Analytics Cloud Integration User profile The integration user is associated with an Analytics Cloud Integration User profile. Make
settings sure that this profile doesn’t have login IP ranges, login hours, or multi-factor authentication
enabled or defined.
Insights app The integration user must have the Insights app in their OAuth apps list.
API client allowlisting If you’ve enabled For admin-approved users, limit API access to only allowlisted
connected apps, check that the integration user’s Analytics Cloud Integration User profile
has the Use Any API Client system permission.
If these checks don’t resolve your issue, look for other authentication restrictions in your org and ensure the integration user can
authenticate.
Why was a recipe unscheduled?

When a user is deactivated, the recipes in which they made the most recent modification are unscheduled to prevent unnecessary runs.
A recipe is automatically unscheduled when its Last Modified By user is deactivated. To avoid this situation, check the recipes’ Last
Modified By column in Data Manager before deactivating the user. Reschedule the recipes that the user modified. If a recipe is unscheduled,
create a schedule with an active user.
Unscheduling when a user is deactivated also affects dataflows.
Why am I receiving a syntax error in the formula node?

You can perform several types of transformations on fields in Data Prep. However, some field API names are unavailable for these
transformations.
If you receive an error similar to this, you could be using an unavailable API name.
There’s a syntax error in the formula node REPLACE0’s SQL expression. Update the formula’s
SQL syntax in target column Title_replace at row 1, column 14.
You can’t use these API names in a transformation.

• DAY
• DAYOFWEEK
• DAYOFMONTH
• DAYOFYEAR
• HOUR
• LAST_DAY
• MONTH
• SECOND
• TITLE
• WEEK
To use these fields, use an Edit Attributes transformation to change the field’s API name.
If you still receive an error, the cause could be another type of syntax error.
1244
Analyze Your Data Datasets

When recipes are chained together using event-based scheduling, unscheduling or manually running an upstream recipe or connection
can result in unexpected outcomes.
To check whether an unscheduled recipe is the cause:
• Open the recipe that’s not behaving as expected. If it isn’t scheduled, schedule it.
• If you don’t find an issue in the first recipe, check whether the preceding recipe is scheduled.
• Continue working back through the chain as needed.
If you find no unscheduled recipes in the chain, check that the data input sources are included in a scheduled connection.
If an unscheduled recipe or connection isn’t the cause, a manually run triggering recipe or connection could be the problem. To resolve
this situation:
• Wait until the manually run item is triggered automatically.
• Manually run all upstream triggers for the recipe, starting with the first recipe.
If you can’t find a cause, unschedule all the upstream recipes and connections and then reschedule them, starting with the first recipe.
This action resets the chain.
Datasets
A dataset is a collection of related data that is stored in a denormalized, yet highly compressed form. There are multiple ways to create
a dataset. You can also edit dataset after they’ve been created.
Tip: To ensure that you don’t reach the row limit for all registered dataset, delete unused dataset.
SEE ALSO:
Edit a Dataset
Delete a Recipe
Monitor
The monitor provides options for you to manage jobs.
SEE ALSO:
External Data
You can integrate external data into CRM Analytics to make the data available for queries from lenses and designer.
1245
Analyze Your Data Gain Insights on Data Directly at Source
The External Data API enables you to upload external data files to CRM Analytics. The External Data API can upload .csv files, and you can
optionally specify the structure of your data by defining metadata in JSON format.
The External Data API is available in API version 31 and later.
The high-level steps for uploading external data by using the API are:
1. Prepare your data in CSV format, and then create a metadata file to specify the structure of the data.
2. Connect programmatically to your Salesforce organization.
3. Configure the upload by inserting a row into the InsightsExternalData object, and then set input values such as the name of the
dataset, the format of the data, and the operation to perform on the data.
4. Split your data into 10-MB chunks, and then upload the chunks to InsightsExternalDataPart objects.
5. Start the upload by updating the Action field in the InsightsExternalData object.
6. Monitor the InsightsExternalData object for status updates, and then verify that the file upload was successful.
Gain Insights on Data Directly at Source

You can explore your data without loading it into CRM Analytics or preparing it in datasets. CRM Analytics Direct Data lets you analyze
and explore your data that resides in Salesforce objects, CDP, Snowflake, and Google BigQuery. You can run queries on the data in real
time and also build dashboard widgets based on the queries you run.
Unlock CRM Analytics Insights on Data Cloud

Analyze your unified customer info in Data Cloud. With CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud, you can operationalize data analysis
without first loading Data Cloud, prepping it, or creating live datasets. Embed Data Cloud records into CRM Analytics dashboards
for any Salesforce object and run queries on the data in real time using single sign-on across both platforms. You can filter Data
Cloud info, drill deeper, and act on your records directly from the dashboards. And, Accelerated Queries for CRM Analytics runs
queries on Data Cloud records faster. CRM Analytics ensures that account sharing rules are automatically applied when running
queries against Data Cloud. Also, our systems automatically reuse Data Cloud object names and field labels to maintain simplified
data mapping between Data Cloud and the dashboard assets.
Gain Insights on Data Directly in Snowflake
You can explore your data in a Snowflake warehouse without loading data into CRM Analytics or preparing it in datasets. CRM
Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake lets you set up a live connection to the Snowflake schema you want to explore. You can run
queries on the Snowflake schema associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based
on the queries you run on Snowflake data.
Gain Insights on Data Directly in Google BigQuery
You can explore your data in a Google BigQuery data warehouse without loading data into CRM Analytics or preparing it in datasets.
CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery lets you set up a live connection to the BigQuery schema you want to explore. You
can run queries on the schema associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based
on the queries you run on BigQuery data.
1246
Unlock CRM Analytics Insights on Data Cloud

Analyze your unified customer info in Data Cloud. With CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud, you can operationalize data analysis
without first loading Data Cloud, prepping it, or creating live datasets. Embed Data Cloud records into CRM Analytics dashboards for any
Salesforce object and run queries on the data in real time using single sign-on across both platforms. You can filter Data Cloud info, drill
deeper, and act on your records directly from the dashboards. And, Accelerated Queries for CRM Analytics runs queries on Data Cloud
records faster. CRM Analytics ensures that account sharing rules are automatically applied when running queries against Data Cloud.
Also, our systems automatically reuse Data Cloud object names and field labels to maintain simplified data mapping between Data
Cloud and the dashboard assets.
Basic CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud Setup

Using CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud requires the appropriate licenses, org and user account setup, and permissions
assigned to user accounts.
CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud Tips and Limitations
It helps to be familiar with these tips and limitations when working with Direct Data for Data Cloud.
Build Queries with Direct Data for Data Cloud
After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud lets you create and run queries on Data Cloud records in real
time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on these queries.
Launch Explorations for Data Cloud with a Single Click
Analyze and surface customer engagement patterns from Data Cloud records without switching to Analytics Studio and creating
dashboard queries. With CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud, you can now explore calculated insights, data lake objects, and
data models from the data object’s record page. Review, profile, and trend data in tables and charts, or run queries on Data Cloud
right in their business workflow.
Analyze Multiple Data Model Objects Using Joins (Beta)
To explore and draw insights from multiple related data model object (DMO) records simultaneously, join these objects in a single
dashboard query. Direct Data for Data Cloud supports four types of joins on data model objects with defined relationships between
them. You can also filter joined data and highlight the records that matter with conditional formatting.
Basic CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud Setup

Using CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud requires the appropriate licenses, org and user account setup, and permissions assigned
to user accounts.
License Requirements
To access CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud functionality in CRM Analytics, the following licenses must be provisioned in the
same Salesforce org.
• CRM Analytics Plus license or CRM Analytics Growth license
• Data Cloud license
For more information about CRM Analytics licenses, see Learn About CRM Analytics Platform Licenses and Permission Sets.
Enable CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud

• Set up Data Cloud in your Salesforce org.
• Assign Users Data Cloud Permission sets.
• Assign Users CRM Analytics Permissions.
1247
– Select the CRM Analytics Plus User or CRM Analytics Growth User permission sets for users to view data insights in CRM
Analytics Direct Data.
– Enable the Create and Edit CRM Analytics Dashboards permission for users to build dashboards and create insights in CRM
Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud.
Note: CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud isn’t supported in sandbox environments.
Direct Data for Data Cloud Limits
Query Limits
Limit Value
Maximum concurrent queries per tenant See Data Cloud API Limits for Profile, Query, and Calculated Insights.
Maximum number of API queries and SQL queries
Note: CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud uses the Connect REST API under the hood. Review the Connect REST API Limits.
SEE ALSO:
Data Cloud Usage Types
It helps to be familiar with these tips and limitations when working with Direct Data for Data Cloud.
Tips for Working with Direct Data for Data Cloud

To improve the performance of dashboards based on Data Cloud queries, apply these design principles:
• When possible, create a Data Cloud Calculated Insight for complex metrics before using them in Direct Data for Data Cloud. To avoid
additional query times processing joins, include all columns you plan to use in dashboard visualizations or tables.
• Limit the number of queries on a single dashboard page. Instead, spread queries across multiple pages.
• Avoid complex queries that can increase query times. You can also run the dashboard inspector to monitor and track query times.
Direct Data for Data Cloud Limitations

Keep these limitations in mind when working with CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud.
Query Building
• Advanced custom SQL queries containing sub-queries or Common Table Expressions doesn’t always work as expected.
1248
Other Features
These features aren’t available with Direct Data for Data Cloud.
• Downloads as CSV or Excel files
• Notifications, subscriptions, and CRM Analytics Watchlists
• Dataset actions
• Search insights with Ask Data for Salesforce
• Einstein Discovery

After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud lets you create and run queries on Data Cloud records in real time.
You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on these queries.
Let's say you created a CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud dashboard on the Accounts page that shows customer order insights.
To add a chart that shows customer orders by product category:
1. In the dashboard designer, click Create Query. Alternatively, add a chart widget to the dashboard and click it.
2. To build the query on a Data Cloud data source, click Salesforce Data Cloud.
3. Select a Data Cloud data source that contains order data. Data Cloud data is categorized into one of these source types.
• Data Lake Objects gives users access to data ingested by data streams. They're helpful when you want to analyze and monitor
raw data in Data Cloud.
• Data Models give users access to data that is already mapped onto standard information models, such as products, orders, and
user engagement.
• Calculated Insights are multidimensional metrics that are calculated in Data Cloud and can be pulled into CRM Analytics for
further analysis.
1249
4. In the lens that opens, group the orders by product category.

5. Add total spend and number of orders as measures in the chart.
6. Sort the chart by total spend.
7. To save your changes to the dashboard, click Done.
For advanced or custom queries, switch to Query mode and write your own custom SQL queries against Data Cloud records.
1250
Launch Explorations for Data Cloud with a Single Click

Analyze and surface customer engagement patterns from Data Cloud records without switching to Analytics Studio and creating
dashboard queries. With CRM Analytics Direct Data for Data Cloud, you can now explore calculated insights, data lake objects, and data
models from the data object’s record page. Review, profile, and trend data in tables and charts, or run queries on Data Cloud right in
their business workflow.
Let’s say you created a calculated insight on product clusters in a Data Cloud dashboard. To review spending by product categories in
a funnel chart in CRM Analytics:
1. In the Calculated Insights tab, click the insight built on product clusters.
2. From the insight’s record page, click Explore in Analytics.
3. From the chart gallery, select Funnel (1).
1251
4. Aggregate the data by amount spent (2).

5. Group data by product subcategory (3).
6. To clip your lens to a dashboard, switch to Analytics Studio (4).
Analyze Multiple Data Model Objects Using Joins (Beta)

To explore and draw insights from multiple related data model object (DMO) records simultaneously, join these objects in a single
dashboard query. Direct Data for Data Cloud supports four types of joins on data model objects with defined relationships between
them. You can also filter joined data and highlight the records that matter with conditional formatting.
Say you want to compare sales order data with product and customer’s annual income.
1. In the dashboard designer, create a query on the Sales Order DMO (1).
1252
2. In the lens mode, click Manage Data Sources (2).

The Manage Data Sources window displays a list of related data sources.
3. Add the related Individual and Product DMOs to the query (3).
By default, the DMOs are joined using a left join.
4. Apply your changes (4).
1253
5. Build your query on the joined DMOs in the dashboard lens.
Gain Insights on Data Directly in Snowflake

You can explore your data in a Snowflake warehouse without loading data into CRM Analytics or preparing it in datasets. CRM Analytics
Direct Data for Snowflake lets you set up a live connection to the Snowflake schema you want to explore. You can run queries on the
Snowflake schema associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the queries
you run on Snowflake data.
When to Use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake

To run analysis on your Snowflake data, you can use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake or Snowflake input connectors or a
combination of the two.
CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake Tips and Considerations
It helps to be familiar with these tips and considerations when working with Direct Data for Snowflake.
Create a Live Connection to Snowflake
Create a live connection to Snowflake warehouse to explore your data stored there.
1254
Explore Data Directly in Snowflake

After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake lets you run queries on the dataset associated with the connection
in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the queries you run on Snowflake data.
When to Use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake

To run analysis on your Snowflake data, you can use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake or Snowflake input connectors or a
combination of the two.
Refer to these guidelines to determine whether Direct Data for Snowflake meets your business needs.
With Direct Data for Snowflake, you can:
• Save time on setup and eliminate the need for data syncs, dataflows, or recipes to keep queries based on Snowflake data up to date.
• Eliminate the need to load and prepare large volumes of Snowflake data into CRM Analytics and manage its dataflows.
• Free up data pipelines for the resources and processes that require them.
• Get real-time metrics in dashboards and lenses with queries based on Snowflake data.
• Meet data residency requirements on Snowflake data but still analyze it to make business decisions.
• Maintain on-demand access to less frequently used data, such as order details, without having to load it into CRM Analytics.
• Incorporate data from Snowflake Data Marketplace for deeper insights on your Snowflake data.
• Take advantage of Snowflake’s native support for analytics on data in semi-structured data formats, such as JSON, Parquet, or XML.
• Quickly create and test which data models to use with your Snowflake data before connecting it to CRM Analytics. You can even
collaborate easily with other users during this process.
SEE ALSO:

It helps to be familiar with these tips and considerations when working with Direct Data for Snowflake.
Tips for Working with Direct Data for Snowflake

To improve the performance of dashboards based on Snowflake queries, it’s important to optimize their query times. Queries that run
faster reduce the possibility of reaching query concurrency limits. Applying sound dashboard design principles is also helpful in ensuring
that Snowflake-related dashboards run smoothly.
For optimized query times, keep these tips in mind.
• Work with your Snowflake administrator to optimize Snowflake warehouse and data for analytic queries.
• To make it easier for users to creating queries, consider creating SQL views of the Snowflake data for your users.
• Consider creating materialized views in Snowflake for most frequently run queries.
• For larger tables, create filtered views that focus on subsets of data.
• Run the dashboard inspector to monitor and track query times.
• To optimize query times:
– Select only the columns needed for your visualization.
– Apply filters to limit the number of rows.
1255
– Avoid grouping on high-cardinality fields.

– Avoid using the contains operator. Instead, use the equals operator.
Apply these design principles to dashboards based on Snowflake queries.

• To minimize the number of queries being executed, reuse the same query in multiple widgets whenever possible.
Direct Data for Snowflake Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake.
• Row-level security isn’t applied on Snowflake data. So, users with access to a live dataset can view and explore all data rows in the
associated Snowflake table or view.
• Dashboard widgets based on a live dataset appear blank to users without access to that dataset.
• The following features aren’t available with Direct Data for Snowflake:
– Drill, Focus, and View Data Table actions on lenses. As a workaround, add filters manually.
– Data-blended queries
– Downloads as CSV or Excel files
– Dataset actions. As a workaround, define actions directly on the chart or table.
– Notifications, subscriptions, and CRM Analytics Watchlists
• You can’t use live datasets as sources in dataflows or recipes.

• You can’t run join operations on live datasets.
For query limits, see CRM Analytics Direct Data Query Limits on page 704.
SEE ALSO:
Create a Live Connection to Snowflake

Create a live connection to Snowflake warehouse to explore your data stored there.
USER PERMISSIONS
Connect to Snowflake with OAuth (Beta)
To create live connections to
Note: This feature is a Beta Service. Customer can opt to try this Beta Service in its sole Snowflake:
discretion. Any use of the Beta Service is subject to the applicable Beta Services Terms provided • Enable CRM Analytics
at Agreements and Terms. Direct Data for external
data sources
To use the CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake with an OAuth connection, configure Snowflake,
Salesforce, CRM Analytics, and an external OAuth authorization server like Okta. These high-level To explore data directly in
Snowflake:
steps help you navigate the process, but contact your Network Security or IT department for help
• Explore External Data
with configuration consistent with your organization’s security requirements.
Directly
1. Configure Snowflake and your selected external authorization server. Here’s Snowflake's help,
with detailed instructions for connecting to services like Okta and Microsoft Azure AD.
2. With the authorization server configured, follow the steps under Define an Authentication Provider in Your Salesforce Org from
Salesforce Help.
protocol and Per User identity type.
1256
4. Add the live Snowflake connection. For Authentication Type setting, enter UserBasedOAuth.
Note: OAuth 2.0 is the industry-standard protocol for authorization, however we are unable to test every possible combination
of services. Log a case with Salesforce Customer Support if your service cannot connect with the Authentication Provider
system.
Create the Live Connection

1.
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and select Data Manager.
2. In the data manager, click the Connect tab.
3. Click Connect to Data.
4. Click Live Connections.
Note: If you don’t see the Live Connections tab, you need to enable Direct Data in CRM Analytics first.
5. Click Add Connection.

6. Click Snowflake Direct Connector and enter its settings, as described in the Connection Settings section.
7. When done, click Save or Save and Create Dataset.
Create Live Datasets for a Snowflake Source Table
After creating the live connection, create a live dataset that lets users explore Snowflake tables or views available with the connection.
Note: Live datasets are similar to CRM Analytics datasets, except that the data remains in an external data source.
After creating the live connection, enable a live dataset for the connection.
1. In the data manager, click the Data tab.
2. On the Live Datasets tab, click Create Dataset. Select the connection and enable a Snowflake source table that is available with the
connection.
3. Name the live dataset and assign it to a CRM Analytics app. Use the app to control which Salesforce users, roles, and groups have
access to explore Snowflake data with the connection.
4. When done, click Create Live Dataset.
To begin exploring, click the live dataset from the Datasets tab in CRM Analytics Studio.
Snowflake Live Connections Settings
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the live connection. Use a convention that lets you easily distinguish between
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name must be unique, begin with a letter, and can
only contain underscores and alphanumeric characters. This name can’t include spaces,
end with an underscore, or contain two consecutive underscores. You can’t change the
1257
Setting Description
Authentication Type The variety of authentication used for this connection. Accepted values are
UserBasedOAuth or Password.
• If you use Password, enter a value in the Username and Password fields.
Named Credential The Name field from a named credential stored in your Salesforce org. See Named
Credentials.
Schema Snowflake schema whose data you want to explore with the connection. You can either
add all the tables you want to explore to a single Snowflake schema or create a separate
connection for each schema.
To keep data secure, we recommend creating a separate Snowflake schema specifically
for Direct Data for Snowflake.
Password Password for the Snowflake user specified in Username.
Role Snowflake role assigned to the user you’re using to connect.

To keep data secure, we recommend connecting with a Snowflake user granted a read-only
role.
Warehouse Snowflake warehouse name.
Username Snowflake username to connect to the schema.
Account Name of your Snowflake account.
SEE ALSO:
Explore Data Directly in Snowflake

After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Snowflake lets you run queries on the
USER PERMISSIONS
dataset associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables
based on the queries you run on Snowflake data. To create live connections to
To begin exploring, click the live dataset from the Datasets tab in Analytics Studio. Snowflake:
• Enable CRM Analytics
Direct Data for external
data sources
To explore data directly in
Snowflake:
Directly
1258
Data stored in the Snowflake object opens in a lens, which you can interactively explore and visualize.
Gain Insights on Data Directly in Google BigQuery

You can explore your data in a Google BigQuery data warehouse without loading data into CRM Analytics or preparing it in datasets.
CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery lets you set up a live connection to the BigQuery schema you want to explore. You can
run queries on the schema associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the
queries you run on BigQuery data.
1259
When to Use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery

To run analysis on your Google BigQuery data, you can use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery or Google BigQuery input
connectors or a combination of the two.
CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery Tips and Considerations
It helps to be familiar with these tips and considerations when working with Direct Data for Google BigQuery.
Create a Live Connection to Google BigQuery
Create a live connection to Google BigQuery warehouse to explore your data stored there.
Explore Data Directly in Google BigQuery
After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery lets you run queries on the dataset associated with the
connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and tables based on the queries you run on Google BigQuery data.
When to Use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery

To run analysis on your Google BigQuery data, you can use CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery or Google BigQuery input
connectors or a combination of the two.
Refer to these guidelines to determine whether Direct Data for Google BigQuery meets your business needs.
With Direct Data for Google BigQuery, you can:
• Save time on setup and eliminate the need for data syncs, dataflows, or recipes to keep queries based on BigQuery data up to date.
• Eliminate the need to load and prepare large volumes of BigQuery data into CRM Analytics and manage its dataflows.
• Free up data pipelines for the resources and processes that require them.
• Get real-time metrics in dashboards and lenses with queries based on BigQuery data.
• Meet data residency requirements on BigQuery data but still analyze it to make business decisions.
• Maintain on-demand access to less frequently used data, such as order details, without having to load it into CRM Analytics.
• Quickly create and test which data models to use with your BigQuery data before connecting it to CRM Analytics. You can even
collaborate easily with other users during this process.
SEE ALSO:
It helps to be familiar with these tips and considerations when working with Direct Data for Google BigQuery.
Tips for Working with Direct Data for Google BigQuery

To improve the performance of dashboards based on BigQuery data, it’s important to optimize their query times. Queries that run faster
reduce the possibility of reaching query concurrency limits. Applying sound dashboard design principles is also helpful in ensuring that
BigQuery-related dashboards run smoothly.
For optimized query times, keep these tips in mind.
• Work with your BigQuery administrator to optimize the BigQuery warehouse and data for analytic queries.
• To make it easier for users to create queries, consider creating SQL views of the BigQuery data for your users.
• Consider creating materialized views in BigQuery for most frequently run queries.
1260
• For larger tables, create filtered views that focus on subsets of data.
• Run the dashboard inspector to monitor and track query times.
• To optimize query times:
– Select only the columns needed for your visualization.
– Apply filters to limit the number of rows.
– Avoid grouping on high-cardinality fields.
– Avoid using the contains operator. Instead, use the equals operator.
Apply these design principles to dashboards based on Google BigQuery data.

• To minimize the number of queries being executed, reuse the same query in multiple widgets whenever possible.
Direct Data for Google BigQuery Considerations

Keep these behaviors in mind when working with CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery.
• Row-level security isn’t applied on BigQuery data. So, users with access to a live dataset can view and explore all data rows in the
associated Google BigQuery table or view.
• Dashboard widgets based on a live dataset appear blank to users without access to that dataset.
• The following features aren’t available with Direct Data for Google BigQuery:
– Drill, Focus, and View Data Table actions on lenses. As a workaround, add filters manually.
– Data-blended queries
– Downloads as CSV or Excel files
– Dataset actions
– Notifications, subscriptions, and CRM Analytics Watchlists
• You can’t use live datasets as sources in dataflows or recipes.

• You can’t run join operations on live datasets.
For query limits, see CRM Analytics Direct Data Query Limits on page 704.
Create a Live Connection to Google BigQuery

Create a live connection to Google BigQuery warehouse to explore your data stored there.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create live connections to

Create the Live Connection
Google BigQuery:
• • Enable CRM Analytics
In CRM Analytics, click the gear icon ( ) and select Data Manager.
• Click Manage Dataflows. data sources
• In the data manager, click the Connect tab. To explore data directly in
• Click Connect to Data. Google BigQuery:
• Click Live Connections. Directly
Note: If you don’t see the Live Connections tab, you need to enable Direct Data in CRM
Analytics first.
• Click Add Connection.
1261
• Click Google BigQuery Direct Connector and enter its settings, as described in the Connection Settings section.
• When done, click Save or Save and Create Dataset.
Create Live Datasets for a Google BigQuery Source Table

After creating the live connection, create a live dataset that lets users explore Google BigQuery tables or views available with the
connection.
Note: Live datasets are similar to CRM Analytics datasets, except that the data remains in an external data source.
After creating the live connection, enable a live dataset for the connection.
• In the data manager, click the Data tab.
• On the Live Datasets tab, click Create Dataset. Select the Google BigQuery connection and enable a Google BigQuery source table
that is available with the connection.
• Name the live dataset and assign it to a CRM Analytics app. Use the app to control which Salesforce users, roles, and groups have
access to explore Google BigQuery data with the connection.
• When done, click Create Live Dataset.
To begin exploring, click the live dataset from the Datasets tab in CRM Analytics Studio.
Google BigQuery Live Connections Settings

All settings require a value, unless otherwise indicated. The service account that you use to connect to Google Big Query must have the
standard role "BigQuery Data Viewer." Account creation generates a JSON file of account properties. Most of the necessary connection
settings are in this file.
Setting Description
Connection Name Identifies the live connection. Use a convention that lets you easily distinguish between
Developer Name API name for the connection. This name must be unique, begin with a letter, and can
only contain underscores and alphanumeric characters. This name can’t include spaces,
end with an underscore, or contain two consecutive underscores. You can’t change the
Don’t include "private_key": "-----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----" at
the start of the key and \n-----END PRIVATE KEY-----\n" at the end.

If you have multiple projects with the same service account, enter the ID of the project
containing the live dataset that you want to create a connection to.
1262
Setting Description
Storage Path Optional setting. Path in Google Cloud Storage where a local stage file is created to store
the data temporarily. Enter the bucket name or the bucket name and folder name. For
example, enter <bucket_name> or <bucket_name>/<folder_name>.
To write files to this staging area, the user specified in Client Email must have the list,
read, and write permissions on the bucket.
Schema Google BigQuery schema whose data you want to explore with the connection. You can
either add all the tables you want to explore to a single Google BigQuery schema or create
a separate connection for each schema.
To keep data secure, we recommend creating a separate Google BigQuery schema
specifically for Direct Data for Google BigQuery.
Region ID Optional setting. Enter the data location of the live Google BigQuery dataset if the location
isn’t in North America.
Use Storage API Optional setting. If True, uses the Google BigQuery Storage Read API. See Google’s BigQuery
Storage Read API. If False, uses Direct extract mode.
Explore Data Directly in Google BigQuery

After you complete setup, CRM Analytics Direct Data for Google BigQuery lets you run queries on
USER PERMISSIONS
the dataset associated with the connection in real time. You can also build dashboard charts and
tables based on the queries you run on Google BigQuery data. To create live connections to
To begin exploring, click the live dataset from the Datasets tab in Analytics Studio. Google BigQuery:
• Enable CRM Analytics
data sources
To explore data directly in
Google BigQuery:
Directly
1263
Analyze Your Data Explore and Visualize Your Data in CRM Analytics
Data stored in the Google BigQuery object opens in a lens, which you can interactively explore and visualize.

When sifting through an overwhelming amount of business data, sometimes you know exactly what you’re looking for. Other times you
don’t, but you recognize it when you see it. Salesforce CRM Analytics gives you a fast, fluid way to discover the compelling stories within
your data and to create the right visuals to tell your story.
After your data is uploaded, explore freely. Drill through the data by using interactive visualizations. Surface unexpected insights that
can transform your business. Then let CRM Analytics do the work of producing dynamic charts that look sharp and communicate volumes.
1264

See what unexpected insights you can surface by interactively exploring and visualizing your data, using CRM Analytics tools.
Explore Data with Tables
You can use tables to get a view of the data that is close to the underlying dataset, and you can use tables to manipulate and extend
the data to expose fresh insights. With values, compare, and pivot tables, CRM Analytics gives you options for both of those goals.
Visualize Data With Charts
If your goal is to understand vast amounts of business data, and to communicate that understanding with coworkers, partners, and
customers, being able to visualize your data is critical. CRM Analytics provides a chart for every need, each a means for illustrating
key aspects of your business in just the right way.
Clone a Lens
Build upon a visualization by cloning its containing lens to a new tab where you can continue exploring. You can save the original
in its own tab.
Save a Visualization
Save your visualization as a lens.
Share a visualization with your colleagues by posting to Chatter, getting its unique URL, downloading a screenshot of it, or downloading
its filtered data. A Chatter post provides an image and a link to the asset—lens, dashboard, or app—in CRM Analytics. Colleagues
with the link and access to the asset can drill down and explore the information that’s presented. To share without giving access to
the asset, use the download options.
SEE ALSO:

See what unexpected insights you can surface by interactively exploring and visualizing your data,
EDITIONS
using CRM Analytics tools.
View Your Data in a Lens Classic and Lightning
When you look at data in an exploratory mode, you do so in a lens. A lens has several aspects: Experience.
it’s how you view data in a dataset, it’s the place where you explore the data graphically, and Available with CRM
it’s the basis for building any dashboard. Analytics, which is available
Group Your Data into Categories for an extra cost in
Group data to organize it so that the data is displayed in useful categories. You can group your Enterprise, Performance,
data by up to ten dimensions or date fields in charts and tables, except in blended queries.
Filter Your Data Edition.
Apply filters in a lens to unclutter your chart and focus on the subset of data that’s most relevant
for your business. You can create partial filters on measures and dimensions. You can also create
global lens filters on measures, dimensions, or dates and apply them to the compare table in USER PERMISSIONS
a single step. You can even apply filter logic to a lens or a dashboard step.
Change the Sort Order • Use CRM Analytics
Choose whether data in your chart visualization is sorted ascending, sorted descending, or
unsorted.
1265

Change Measures
Your choice of measure defines your entire visualization and determines the scope of your exploration. For example, change the
measure and the aggregation method from “Count of Opportunities” to “Sum of Amount.” Then add a second measure to see 2
visualizations side by side.
Format Numbers
Choose either preset or custom number formats. Specify custom formats for positive, negative, and zero values.
Drill Deeper Into Data
You can drill deeper into your data to explore the underlying information and surface hidden insights.
Focus on Selected Data
You can focus your exploration by changing the view to include only specific data from an existing table or chart.
Explore Multiple Datasets with a Single Query
Answers to business questions sometimes require context beyond the current dataset. Or, your dataset structure may not match
the way you want to explore your data. To surface insights that require data from disparate datasets, blend the data from multiple
datasets in a lens. Then query the blended data just as you would with a single dataset.
Change the Chart Scale
With some data, a chart displays values that range widely on an axis and make the visualization more difficult to understand. You
can constrict the range's scale by applying a logarithmic scale. Scaling is available for certain charts only.
Return to a Previous View by Using History
Exploring your data can lead you down many paths. Not all of them are fruitful, and that’s OK. CRM Analytics keeps a full history of
your activity in a lens. If you’ve changed your lens in undesired ways, or just want to see those nifty animations again, use history to
backtrack quickly to a previous state in your visualization.
Limit the Size of Your Query Results
Interested in reviewing just the top 10 accounts in your product pipeline—without excessive scrolling? To fast-track to meaningful
insights and for improved performance on your dashboards, you can limit the size of query results in a lens.
View the Query Behind Your Lens
CRM Analytics uses Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL) or Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) behind the scenes in
lenses and dashboards to gather data for visualizations. You can view and edit the underlying code that’s written as you explore, or
copy it for use elsewhere.
Clip a Lens to a Dashboard
To include the lens in a dashboard, clip it. When you clip the lens, CRM Analytics adds a query to all the open dashboards. If a
dashboard isn’t open, CRM Analytics adds the query to a new dashboard in dashboard designer. After you add the query to the
designer, you can apply it to a widget in the dashboard. The widget overrides the visualization settings of the lens—the widget
determines how to display the results of the query.
Create a Model from a Lens
Quickly create a model from a CRM Analytics lens. After creating a lens to explore your data, you can easily get insights directly from
the lens. Filters that are applied to the lens get persisted saving you time with model setup.
1266

When you look at data in an exploratory mode, you do so in a lens. A lens has several aspects: it’s
EDITIONS
how you view data in a dataset, it’s the place where you explore the data graphically, and it’s the
basis for building any dashboard. Available in Salesforce
From the home page, click a dataset or a lens. A lens opens in a new tab. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
• Use Analytics or
Analytics Templated
Apps
1267

Group data to organize it so that the data is displayed in useful categories. You can group your data
EDITIONS
by up to ten dimensions or date fields in charts and tables, except in blended queries.
For example, to look for seasonal patterns in your sales cycle, group opportunity data by the month Available in Salesforce
when deals close. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
1. Explore a dataset containing opportunity stages, pipeline amounts, and dates, setting the
measure to pipeline amount. Available with CRM
2. Click the Vertical Axis plus button, click the opportunity stage date, and then select month as Analytics, which is available
the dimension that you want to group by.
The dimensions in your data determine which categories you can group by. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
3. To find the second dimension that you want to group by, click the Vertical Axis plus button, then enter stage in the search field.
1268
4. Click Stage, the second dimension you want to group by.

Pipeline amounts are shown grouped by stages, and stages are shown grouped by month. In this dataset, closed amounts are shown
as negative numbers because those amounts fall out of the pipeline.
1269
5. Click the filters plus button, then click the stage dimension.
6. Set the filter to equal the closed stages only.
1270
The resulting bar chart shows the information you’re after, but it's not easy to interpret.
1271
7. Open the chart menu and select stacked waterfall.

The bar chart changes from a single bar to a waterfall chart that show the data grouped separately by month. It also provides an
overall total for the year. You can now easily see how much each month has contributed in both lost and won closed deals.
Considerations When Grouping Data in CRM Analytics

Keep these things in mind when you group data into categories.
When a dimension is grouped, that dimension's null records are excluded from results, which affects the count of rows in a lens. To
prevent the exclusion of null dimension records, assign a default value to those records.
A null dimension group can’t be renamed.
Grouping is supported on these Salesforce object field types:
• Checkbox (Boolean)
• Date (Date)
1272
• Direct cross-object references to groupable fields, up to 5 levels from the root object (SOQL limit). Both custom and standard
references are groupable.
• Email (String)
• Formulas of type Checkbox and Date, including cross-object formulas across standard and custom relationships
• ID (ID)
• Lookup (ID)
• Master Detail (ID)
• Picklist (String)
• Phone (String)
• Standard number fields with SOAP type int
• Text (String)
• Text Area (String)
• URL (String)
Filter Your Data

Apply filters in a lens to unclutter your chart and focus on the subset of data that’s most relevant
EDITIONS
for your business. You can create partial filters on measures and dimensions. You can also create
global lens filters on measures, dimensions, or dates and apply them to the compare table in a Available in Salesforce
single step. You can even apply filter logic to a lens or a dashboard step. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Tip: Don’t want filters to be applied to the dataset as you drill down? Then, define filters on
individual measures, which don’t persist. On the other hand, global lens filters are preserved Available with CRM
when you switch to View Details or the values table. Analytics, which is available
Here’s an example to limit the view of opportunities to the ones with a substantial amount in for an extra cost in
agriculture or healthcare. Enterprise, Performance,
1. On the Filters tab, click the filters plus button. available in Developer
In the filters dialog box, aggregated measures and measures are listed at the top, followed by Edition.
dates and dimensions.
2. In the filters dialog box, add the following filters: USER PERMISSIONS
• Industry equals Agriculture
• Amount greater than 100,000 • Use CRM Analytics
• Industry equals Healthcare
• Amount greater than 200,000.
1273
3.
To add filter logic, click in the Filters tab.
4. Select Add Filter Logic.
5. In Edit Filter logic, build the filter logic as follows: (1 AND 2) OR (3 AND 4) and click Apply.
1274
Normally, measure filters in multiple-column steps remain in the filter panel. However, in table mode, filters move to the measures to
which they apply.
If a calculated column is created in table mode, then filters remain with their measures even if the lens is set to chart mode.
1275
You can apply filters to new measures using their context menus.

EDITIONS
1. Click the actions menu for the measure you want to sort. For dimensions, click the actions menu
in chart, compare table, or pivot table mode. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1276
2. Select Sort descending or Sort ascending.

If the measure or dimension is already sorted, you can unsort it by selecting Clear sort.
Note: To show consistency across multiple bars in stacked charts, the stacked segments are always sorted alphabetically within
each bar. Stacked charts include stacked bar, stacked column, stacked pyramid, and stacked waterfall. To help you locate a segment
in a bar, the legend uses the same sort order as the bar segments.
1277
Note: Sorting isn’t supported on measures in pivot tables.
SEE ALSO:
Tips for Working with SAQL Queries in the Query Editor

Switch between chart types to see which visualization options tell the most compelling story for
EDITIONS
your data.
1. Available in Salesforce
Click the Charts icon ( ) in the quick access menu. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1278
A gallery of charts that are available for this lens is displayed.
2. Hover over a chart type to see how many measures and dimensions that type of visualization requires.
For example, a donut chart can have one measure and one or two dimensions.
3. Click a chart type, such as Stacked Bar.

The chart visualization changes.
1279
Change Measures
Your choice of measure defines your entire visualization and determines the scope of your
EDITIONS
exploration. For example, change the measure and the aggregation method from “Count of
Opportunities” to “Sum of Amount.” Then add a second measure to see 2 visualizations side by side. Available in Salesforce
1. To explore it in a lens, click a CRM Analytics dataset. Classic and Lightning
By default, the initial measure is Count of Rows. Experience.
Available with CRM

2. To open the Measures selection menu, click Count of Rows.
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1280
3. Click Sum, and click the measure you want to visualize.
Note: To count the number of unique occurrences of a measure or a dimension, click Unique, then select the measure or
dimension you want to count.
After you group the data, the chart displays the chosen measure by group value.
1281
Format Numbers
Choose either preset or custom number formats. Specify custom formats for positive, negative, and
EDITIONS
zero values.
1. Available in Salesforce
Click on any measure field. Experience.
2. Choose Format Numbers and choose a preset format.
Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
a. Click Custom… for more presets or to specify your own custom format.
1282
b. Use a preset or enter a custom string in the Format string.

For multiple formats, use this syntax: <POSITIVE_FORMAT>;<NEGATIVE_FORMAT>;<ZERO_FORMAT>.
The Format string always uses a comma (,) for the thousands separator and a period (.) for the decimal separator. Change the
separator in the Thousands or Decimal string to override the separator in the Format string. CSV downloads ignore the specified
separators and always use the default values of comma (,) for thousands and period (.) for decimal.
3. Click Done to save the format.
Note: In the Spring ’20 release we unified number behavior in charts, tables, and number widgets.
• 0 values follow formula logic. For example, a format string $#.## with a 0 value returns $0.00.
• Default behavior never returns a negative 0.
• Short numbers like 1.0x always return 1.0x, not 1x.
• Negative and zero formats are optional.
1283
Drill Deeper Into Data

You can drill deeper into your data to explore the underlying information and surface hidden
EDITIONS
insights.
1. Select the data you want to drill into by clicking datapoints in a chart or rows in a table. Available in Salesforce
For multiple selections, continue clicking, or click and drag to use a selection box. To deselect
Experience.
datapoints or rows, click them. To undo all selections, click the space just outside the datapoints
or table. Available with CRM
Note: Drill selections are not available in values tables. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
2.
To open the Drill Into This By... menu, right-click the data or click .
1284
3. To view the underlying data for a dimension, select it from the Drill Into This By... menu.
A new visualization grouped by the selected dimension and filtered by the selected data appears in place of the previous visualization.
To return to the previous table or visualization, click .
1285
Focus on Selected Data

You can focus your exploration by changing the view to include only specific data from an existing
EDITIONS
table or chart.
1. Select the data you want to focus on by clicking datapoints in a chart or rows in a table. Available in Salesforce
For multiple selections, continue clicking, or click and drag to use a selection box. To deselect
Experience.
datapoints or rows, click them. To undo all selections, click the space just outside the datapoints
or table. Available with CRM
Note: Focus selections are not available in values tables. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
2.
To open the Drill Into This By... menu, right-click the data or click .
1286
3. To view only the selected data, click Focus.

A new table or visualization based on the selected data appears in place of the previous table or visualization.
To return to the previous table or visualization, click .
Explore Multiple Datasets with a Single Query

Answers to business questions sometimes require context beyond the current dataset. Or, your dataset structure may not match the
way you want to explore your data. To surface insights that require data from disparate datasets, blend the data from multiple datasets
in a lens. Then query the blended data just as you would with a single dataset.
Data blending differs from a join operation in that data blending affects only the data visualization. With data blending, you can reveal
relationships across multiple datasets without altering the datasets.
For example, suppose that you want to see how sales for different product subcategories are doing relative to their targets. Here's how
you create a side-by-side comparison of product subcategory totals from the SuperStoreSales and SuperStoreTarget datasets.
1287
1. In CRM Analytics, open a lens for the primary SuperStoreSales dataset.

2. Click Add Dataset.
3. Add SuperStoreTarget as the secondary dataset.

The lens now includes data from both datasets. By default, the data is combined using a left blend. All data from the primary dataset
is included along with the data from the secondary dataset that matches the primary dataset.
To extend your exploration further, add more datasets. You can query up to four datasets in a single exploration.
4. To change the blend type:

a. Click Edit in the Datasets area.
b. Select the blend type.
c. Click Done.
Note: When a blend has more than 2 datasets, the same blend type is applied to all the datasets.
1288
5. To create a meaningful side-by-side comparison, select measures and the field to group by from each dataset.
When defining groups, measures, and filters, select fields from any of the blended datasets. This example includes Sum of Sales for
the SuperStoreSales dataset and Sum of Target for the SuperStoreTarget dataset. To group by product subcategories, select
Product_Sub_Category for each of the datasets.
The query result shows the relationship between Sum of Sales and Sum of Target for each product subcategory.
Limitations:
• You can blend up to six datasets.
• Add all datasets before beginning to explore them. The Add Dataset control is disabled when you add groupings, measures, or
filters.
1289
• You can add a dataset only once.

• These features aren't available: drill and focus, values table, windowing and timeseries functions, totals and subtotals, and Natural
Language Queries (NLQ).
• Faceting applies only to the primary dataset when you blend data from multiple datasets.
• Record-level actions work only with the primary dataset.
Change the Chart Scale

With some data, a chart displays values that range widely on an axis and make the visualization
EDITIONS
more difficult to understand. You can constrict the range's scale by applying a logarithmic scale.
Scaling is available for certain charts only. Available in Salesforce
1. To open the chart's properties, click Classic and Lightning
.
Experience.
2. Open the panel for the vertical axis, and click Log Scale.
Available with CRM
Depending on the type of chart being used, the vertical axis, or y axis, could also be called the
left or right axis. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1290
Return to a Previous View by Using History

Exploring your data can lead you down many paths. Not all of them are fruitful, and that’s OK. CRM
EDITIONS
Analytics keeps a full history of your activity in a lens. If you’ve changed your lens in undesired ways,
or just want to see those nifty animations again, use history to backtrack quickly to a previous state Available in Salesforce
in your visualization. Classic and Lightning
1. Experience.
Click the View History button in the header. Available with CRM
A sidebar lists a history of all the actions that you’ve taken in the lens. Analytics, which is available
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
2. Select any item in the list to view the exploration at that point. Or use the undo and redo buttons
(1) step backward and forward through the list.
Limit the Size of Your Query Results

Interested in reviewing just the top 10 accounts in your product pipeline—without excessive
EDITIONS
scrolling? To fast-track to meaningful insights and for improved performance on your dashboards,
you can limit the size of query results in a lens. Available in Salesforce
1. To set the limit for your query, click the gear icon, and then select Set Limit. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. Enter the size of the query result and click Apply.
If you edit your query in SAQL, you also need to set the query limit in SAQL. Available with CRM
Tip: For a smoother scrolling experience, we recommend using the query result limit along for an extra cost in
with a chart’s auto-fit feature. Enterprise, Performance,
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1291
View the Query Behind Your Lens

CRM Analytics uses Salesforce Analytics Query Language (SAQL) or Salesforce Object Query Language
EDITIONS
(SOQL) behind the scenes in lenses and dashboards to gather data for visualizations. You can view
and edit the underlying code that’s written as you explore, or copy it for use elsewhere. Available in Salesforce
1. Explore a dataset to get the visualization or table of data you want. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
2. Click Query Mode to view the query's SAQL or SOQL code.
1292
3. To change the query, edit the code and then click Run Query.
Query results appear in a table below the query editor.
For more information about SAQL, see the CRM Analytics SAQL Developer Guide.
Tips and Considerations when Working with Lens Queries

Keep these tips and considerations in mind when working with the queries behind your lenses.
• To work with multiple datasets simultaneously, reference them in the JSON editor for the currently running lens. To open the editor,
press Ctrl + E or Cmd + E and use the load statement to load each dataset you want to explore.
• If you run a query while exploring, the filters become read-only while in chart and table modes. To make the filters editable, click
and return to a point in the history before you ran the query.
• If you save the lens with filters in read-only mode, they remain in read-only mode. Your exploration history isn’t saved with the lens
and can’t be used to undo the read-only state.
• If you want to work in query mode and apply conditional or number formatting to a column, or rename the column, run the query
before making these changes.
1293
Clip a Lens to a Dashboard

To include the lens in a dashboard, clip it. When you clip the lens, CRM Analytics adds a query to
EDITIONS
all the open dashboards. If a dashboard isn’t open, CRM Analytics adds the query to a new dashboard
in dashboard designer. After you add the query to the designer, you can apply it to a widget in the Available in Salesforce
dashboard. The widget overrides the visualization settings of the lens—the widget determines Classic and Lightning
how to display the results of the query. Experience.
1. Open the lens.
Available with CRM
2. Analytics, which is available
Click .
CRM Analytics creates a query, and adds it to the query panel of the dashboard designer.
3. To save the query, save the dashboard. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Note: Changes to the query properties don’t affect the lens. Edition.
Create a Model from a Lens

Quickly create a model from a CRM Analytics lens. After creating a lens to explore your data, you can easily get insights directly from the
lens. Filters that are applied to the lens get persisted saving you time with model setup.
Note: Einstein Discovery stories are now models. We wish we could snap our fingers to update the name everywhere, but you
can expect to see the previous name in a few places until we replace it.
The Create Model button appears in your existing lens or in a new lens.
Refer to Create a Story from a Dataset to configure the settings for your model.
SEE ALSO:
1294
Explore Data with Tables

You can use tables to get a view of the data that is close to the underlying dataset, and you can use tables to manipulate and extend
the data to expose fresh insights. With values, compare, and pivot tables, CRM Analytics gives you options for both of those goals.
Manage the View of Data in a Values Table

The values table displays all the columns in your dataset. You can customize the view of columns in a values table, and you can sort
the row values using any column except for the index column.
Navigate Compare Table Columns
Create columns and navigate between existing ones using clicks or keystrokes.
Organize and Summarize Data in a Pivot Table
To identify patterns in large amounts of data quickly, arrange the data by a key dimension in a pivot table. For deeper comparative
analysis, you can group the pivoted data further and then add row and column totals, subtotals, and grand totals to the pivot table.
To evaluate data in a pivot table based on ranking, sort a measure for a pivoted dimension in ascending or descending order (beta).
Add Custom Formulas to Columns
Use the column editor to define custom formulas in compare tables or charts. View measures side by side, and perform math across
the table’s columns and rows. Use string values to create labels, concatenate dimension values, provide simple buckets, or add image
URLs.
Window Functions Available in the Compare Table
The compare table's function menu provides UI-based access to useful window functions, saving you the time of having to write
them in SAQL. Once you choose a function, you can edit the generated SAQL in the formula editor.
Use Raw Field Names in Query Formulas
When writing compare-table formulas, you can reference measure and group (dimension) columns by name. Referencing measure
and group columns by name lets you write more intuitive and easily understandable formulas. Even better, the formula editor
includes nifty function and formula pickers that save you time as you enter your SAQL formulas.
Table Properties
Use table properties to control a table's appearance.
Column Properties
The Column Properties panel lets you jazz up the columns you want in compare, values, and pivot tables. To highlight data that
meets specific criteria, set conditional formatting rules on a column. Or, highlight data based on conditions set on a reference column.
To make a column stand out without applying any conditions, you can use text alignment and text styles. In addition to displaying
data in the text format, you can set a measure column’s data type as a bar.
Manage the View of Data in a Values Table

The values table displays all the columns in your dataset. You can customize the view of columns in a values table, and you can sort the
row values using any column except for the index column.
On the left-hand side of the values table are measure and dimension (grouping) tiles representing all the visible columns in your dataset.
To move a measure or grouping, click and hold its tile, then drag the tile to a new position. Release the tile when the position indicator
is in the correct position (1).
1295
To remove a measure or grouping from the table, click the x button in its tile (1). To access the Edit Columns dialog, where you can hide
or show any column, click the pencil button (2). You can also add, edit, or remove filters (3). To sort the rows by a column, click its heading
cell until an arrow appears in the direction you want to sort (4).
Note: When sorting a values table by a column, that column’s null records are excluded from the table. To prevent the exclusion
of null records, assign a default value to those records.
Navigate Compare Table Columns

Create columns and navigate between existing ones using clicks or keystrokes.
You can navigate columns in the column editor using arrow buttons or your keyboard's left and right arrow keys.
When you reach the right-most column, the right arrow button becomes an add-column button. You can click the add-column button
or use your keyboard's Enter key to add a formula column.
1296
Note: You can add up to 26 columns in the Compare Table.
As you navigate through a compare table, you can freeze up to five columns while you scroll through the remaining data. From a column
header’s dropdown menu, select Freeze Columns Up to Here.
Alternatively, go to the Layout section in the table properties panel (1). Select Customize Frozen Columns in the Layout section (2)
and set the number of table columns to freeze (3). A dark gray line indicates the end of the freeze pane.
You can also delete columns from the compare table by selecting Delete in the context menu of any measure or dimension.
1297
Use the Close button to exit the column editor without applying changes to the column.
Organize and Summarize Data in a Pivot Table

To identify patterns in large amounts of data quickly, arrange the data by a key dimension in a pivot table. For deeper comparative
analysis, you can group the pivoted data further and then add row and column totals, subtotals, and grand totals to the pivot table. To
evaluate data in a pivot table based on ranking, sort a measure for a pivoted dimension in ascending or descending order (beta).
You can add row totals, column totals, or both to pivot tables with at least two groupings in a lens or dashboard. When you select row
and column totals, the pivot table also shows the row and column grand totals. To show subtotals and to sort by a measure, add at least
two groupings in addition to the pivoted dimension.
For example, your pivot table shows sales data pivoted on region and grouped by product category and subcategories. To see total sales
for each product category by region, click (1), and then select Show Column Totals (2). To see sales totals for each region across
all product subcategories, select Show Row Totals (3). To see sales subtotals by product subcategory across all regions, select Show
Subtotals (4).
1298
To hide the subtotal for a subgroup that you’re not interested in, select Hide Subtotals from its context menu.
To identify the product subcategory with the highest sales for a region, sort its Sum of Sales column. Click in the column header (1),
and then select Sort Descending (2). To find the product subcategory under furniture with the highest sales for the region, click Sort
Within Groups (Desc) (3).
1299
Pivot Table Limitations

Keep these limitations in mind when working with pivot tables.
• When using compact form 1.0, totals and subtotals aren't supported in time zone-enabled orgs.
• To view totals in a time zone-enabled org, pivot the table on a field other than the compound date.
• Subtotals are supported when sorting within groups but not when sorting across groups
• Row totals aren’t supported when the underlying query has an aggregate filter or window function formula.
• For accurate column totals, ensure that query limits are high enough to include all the records you want in your analysis.
• Totals and subtotals aren't supported in CRM Analytics Direct Data.
Add Custom Formulas to Columns

Use the column editor to define custom formulas in compare tables or charts. View measures side
EDITIONS
by side, and perform math across the table’s columns and rows. Use string values to create labels,
concatenate dimension values, provide simple buckets, or add image URLs. Available in Salesforce
1. In the lens, click the Table Mode icon and select Compare Table. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. On the Data tab, click under Measures.
3. Add dimensions by clicking in the Group by panel. Available with CRM
Null values that occur in the data are displayed as minus signs (-). for an extra cost in
4. Change the first measure by clicking the initial selection (Count of Rows). Add more measures Enterprise, Performance,
by clicking under Measures in the Data tab. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1300
5. To enter a custom formula, click under Measures and click Add Formula.
In the column editor, you can enter text string formulas, SAQL formulas, including math functions, or choose a windowing function
to calculate the values in the column. You can also name the column and choose a number format. If a formula contains division
by 0, the result is displayed as a minus sign (-).
1301
If you want to preserve an existing column, select Clone Column from the original column's action menu. You can edit the cloned
column instead of the original.
6. In the Formula field, create formulas using these operators.
Symbol Examples Calculation

+ A+B, A+100 Addition, applied per row.
- A-B, A-100 Subtraction, applied per row.
/ A/B, A/100 Division, applied per row.
* A*B, A*100 Multiplication, applied per row.
() (B-A)/(A*100) Parentheses for grouping operations.
Dimension columns are on the left and measure columns are on the right. The measure columns are identified in formulas as A, B,
C, and so on, with A being the far-left measure column.
You can also create string formulas. For example, this formula creates simple buckets.
1302
You can’t use columns based on string formulas as dimensions for grouping in charts, but you can use them to apply conditional
formatting in charts.
7. To use SAQL, enter it directly into the formula editor, and click Apply to see the result.
See the CRM Analytics SAQL Developer Guide for more information on writing SAQL.
Some SAQL functions can’t use letter references for columns, such as A, B, C. The percentile_desc and percentile_cont
functions, for example, require raw field names as arguments. See Use Raw Field Names in Query Formulas for more information.
1303
8. To use a function, choose the function editor and then choose a windowing function from the menu. After you configure the function,
click Apply to see the result.
Switch to the formula editor to see the SAQL generated by the chosen function. You can edit the SAQL in the formula editor after
generating it with a function as if you’d written it.
1304
Filters on formula columns aren’t supported.
9. To open a column's action menu, click the down arrow.
10. To change a column's name or formula, click Edit this Column.

Numeric formats use the period as a decimal separator and the comma as a grouping symbol. The currency formats are restricted to
dollars and cents.
1305
Window Functions Available in the Compare Table

The compare table's function menu provides UI-based access to useful window functions, saving you the time of having to write them
in SAQL. Once you choose a function, you can edit the generated SAQL in the formula editor.
Sliding Window
Applies an aggregate function to the current row with respect to a configurable range of rows. The function can be reset on a grouping
defined in the table. Use the sliding window for calculating values such as running totals and moving average.
Percentage of Group
Calculates the percentage each row is of its group total, or of the grand total. The function can be reset on a grouping defined in the
table.
Rank Within Group
1306
Provides rank, dense rank, cumulative distribution, and row-number functions. Ranking can be reset on a grouping defined in the table.
The Order menu determines the direction of ranking based on the values being ranked. Ascending ranks the lowest value as number 1,
while descending ranks the highest value as number 1.
Period Over Period
Compares periods of time to calculate changes in values. For example, year-over-year sales, or quarter-over-quarter closed opportunities,
can be calculated by choosing the column and setting the granularity of the time period.
1307
Always group data by year first, then (optionally) grouped by a finer granulation of time if available. Compound dates, if available, can
be used directly with the period-over-period function. Examples of compound dates include “2016-01” (month of January 2016) and
“2016-1” (first quarter of 2016). Comparisons can be shown as percentages or units.
Change from Previous

Compares the value of the current row with that of the previous row and calculates the difference. For example, to calculate the growth
in number of accounts between the first and fourth quarters, choose the column showing number of accounts from Column. To restrict
that calculation to each country, choose the country column from Reset Group.
Running Total
Calculates the total value of the current row summed with all previous rows. For example, to calculate the monthly total of closed
opportunities as a running total, choose the column showing closed opportunities from Column. To calculate that running total within
each region, choose the region column from Reset Group.
1308
Use Raw Field Names in Query Formulas

When writing compare-table formulas, you can reference measure and group (dimension) columns by name. Referencing measure and
group columns by name lets you write more intuitive and easily understandable formulas. Even better, the formula editor includes nifty
function and formula pickers that save you time as you enter your SAQL formulas.
You can use certain SAQL aggregate functions that require raw field names for arguments directly in the formula editor. These functions
include percentile_desc and percentile_cont. You can also use the date function daysBetween in the formula editor.
Note: In a compare-table formula, when you reference columns by default column names or user-defined column aliases, you
can’t use raw field names in that formula.
Note: You can use the date functions year_last_day, quarter_last_day, week_last_day, quarter_days,
day_in_week, and day_in_quarter in the SAQL editor. Click to access the SAQL editor.
See these examples for how to use SAQL functions with raw-field references in the formula editor. Also see the Analytics SAQL Developer
Guide for more information on SAQL functions.
sum(Amount)/100
percentile_cont(0.95) within group (order by 'LoadTime' asc)
regr_slope(Amount,Closed_On_epoch)
daysBetween(toDate(last(ModifiedDate_epoch), “yyyy-MM-dd”), now())
coalesce(sum(Amount), 0)
len(first(Description))
Table Properties
Use table properties to control a table's appearance.
1309
Display Totals and Subtotals
Add totals and subtotals to tables in the table properties panel or from the button.
Measure functions are calculated according to all data in the relevant subgrouping. For example, the Total of Max Annual Revenue returns
the maximum annual revenue of the entire column. If the formula for the column is A/B, the subtotal is the subtotal of A/subtotal of B.
Note: Groups can’t be sorted when subtotals are displayed. Measures can only be sorted within groups (inner sorts) when subtotals
are displayed.
Note: Totals and subtotals work by using the rollup statement to calculate totals of grouped data. For more information on
the functionality and limitations of totals and subtotals, refer to the rollup section of the group topic in the Analytics SAQL
Developer Guide.
If a time series, a window function, or an unsupported aggregate function is used on the data:
• Totals are determined using a window function grand total or weighted average calculation instead of the rollup.
• Subtotals aren’t calculated or displayed, the setting is ignored.
Because subtotals and grand totals use the rollup statement, which is computed before any aggregate filter is applied, subtotals
and totals amounts don’t reflect the filter. For example, if you filter out the rows where the sum or amount is greater than $1000,
you don’t see any rows greater than $1000, but the totals still include those rows in their value. An aggregate filter can also filter
out the total rows themselves. As a best practice, it’s not recommended to use aggregate filters with totals or subtotals.
Choose a Table Theme

Click a theme to apply it to a table.
1310
Set the Spacing for Columns and Rows

To increase or decrease the whitespace in all cells, click a Cell Padding tile.
To set column width, select an option from the Column Width dropdown menu, then enter a value or values in Width in Pixels. If you
choose Fit to Widget, all columns are brought into view.
Set Header Row Style

For the header row, you can set the cell background color, and the color and font size for text.
1311
Set Body Row Text Attributes

For body rows, you can set the font size and color for text, and the number of text lines each row displays.
1312
Note: The value you choose in the Number of Lines per Row dropdown menu doesn’t affect text wrapping. It sets the number
of lines each row displays regardless of the length of the text in each cell.
Set Border Styles

To style the table's external border, choose a thickness from Border Thickness and a color from Border Color. For the remaining cell
borders, choose colors from Major Gridlines Color and Minor Gridlines Color.
Choose Colors for Body Rows

To set a background color for body rows, choose a color from Table Background Color. To alternate row colors, click Alternate Row
Colors, then choose colors for the odd and even rows.
1313
Note: Rows in dimension columns retain the table background color even if you use alternate row colors.
Add an Index Column to Values Tables

To add or remove an index column from a values table, click Show Row Index Column.
1314
Dress Up Tables with Images

To add or remove an index column from a values table, click Show Row Index Column.
Include reps’ Chatter profile pictures next to their KPIs in leaderboards. Or, add flags to your compare table showing worldwide sales
data.
In the column you want to display images, include the Salesforce URLs that point to the images. In Column Properties, set the data type
to Image. If you set the cell height or width for this column, we ensure that the images maintain their aspect ratio.
Column Properties
The Column Properties panel lets you jazz up the columns you want in compare, values, and pivot tables. To highlight data that meets
specific criteria, set conditional formatting rules on a column. Or, highlight data based on conditions set on a reference column. To make
a column stand out without applying any conditions, you can use text alignment and text styles. In addition to displaying data in the
text format, you can set a measure column’s data type as a bar.
To set a column’s properties, select the column in the table or from the Choose Column list in Column Properties.
1315
You can also get to the Column Properties panel from a column’s context menu. To rename a measure or dimension column, select the
column in lens mode and click Rename Column from its context menu (1). Enter the new name (2) and apply your changes (3). The
new name displays in tables, charts, and filters that use the column. The name change also persists when you save the lens or clip it to
a dashboard, but it doesn’t appear in the data source or other queries using the same data source.
Dynamically renaming a column header using interactions isn’t supported in Compact form 2.0. As a workaround, switch to compact
form 1.0, or rename the column alias using interactions instead.
SEE ALSO:
Automatically Highlight Data with Conditional Formatting
1316
Visualize Data With Charts

If your goal is to understand vast amounts of business data, and to communicate that understanding with coworkers, partners, and
customers, being able to visualize your data is critical. CRM Analytics provides a chart for every need, each a means for illustrating key
aspects of your business in just the right way.
CRM Analytics charts are integrated with the CRM Analytics tools you already use to explore data. Start with a dataset, explore with a
lens, clip it to dashboard designer, and create a stunning dashboard.
Customize Charts with Chart Properties

To create the best visualizations for presenting your data, use chart properties to configure Analytics charts.
Bar Charts
CRM Analytics provides the following types of bar charts: Bar, Column, Stacked Bar, and Stacked Column. Use the Bar or Column
chart to provide a quick visual comparison of related values. Use the Stacked Bar or Stacked Column chart to show groups within
each bar.
Calendar Heat Map Charts
Calendar heat maps are useful for visualizing recurring discrete activities, such as closing accounts, over long periods of time. In this
chart, you can easily change the granularity of the time-based grouping, such as from month to week or day.
Column Charts
Use a column chart (also called vertical bar chart) to show relative counts of things, such as leads or dollars. Use a stacked column
chart to show groups within each bar.
Combo Charts
Use a combo chart to display at least two related series of data, such as discrete grouped values as vertical bars overlaid with a line
chart representing an average value.
Donut Charts
Use a donut chart when you have a grouping and want to show not only the proportion of a single value for each group member
against the total, but also the total amount itself. If you remove the donut's center by selecting 0% from the Center Size menu, this
visualization is commonly referred to as a pie chart.
Dot Plot Charts
Horizontal and vertical dot plots use the size and coloring of bubbles to display multiple dimensions and measures. Use dot plots
to visualize related data to compare performance or locate unusual values.
Funnel Charts
Use a funnel chart to visualize sequential data that can be broken up into stages, such as a sales cycle.
Gauge Charts
Use gauge charts to track progress along a single measure, such as how much revenue has been realized versus the target.
Bullet Charts
Bullet charts are perfect for comparing metrics against quantitative benchmarks and references, like current revenue with target
revenue.
Heat Maps
Use a heatmap to visually enhance high- and low-value data when there's a single measure and multiple dimensions.
Line Charts
Use a line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set of data and one or more values to show.
1317
Map Charts
Use a map if you have data with a geographical component. Maps can shade areas in proportion to mapped values, allowing for
visual pop-out of high-value areas. You can find the map chart in the dashboard designer.
Bubble Map Charts
Use a bubble map chart to visually indicate measure values in specified geographical areas.
Geo Map Charts
Geo maps allow you to visualize data that contains geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude). Using coordinates allows you
to place visual data elements more precisely on map charts.
Custom Map Charts
Use a custom map if you have data with a geographical component that doesn't match any of the standard maps provided by CRM
Analytics charts, such as custom regions. You can also use custom maps for areas that can be represented with polygons, such as
stadium seat sections, city blocks, or floor plans.
Matrix Charts
Use matrix charts to create a table that represents measures visually, allowing you to quickly spot extreme values.
Origami Charts
Use an origami chart to create a striking horizontal visualization for easily identifying high- and low-value data when there's a single
measure and a single grouping.
Parallel Coordinates Charts
Use a parallel coordinates chart when you have multiple measures and a single grouping. Parallel coordinate charts are useful for
displaying how data elements in a grouping stack up against each other.
Pyramid Charts
Use a pyramid chart to visually highlight relative sizes of stacked dimension values.
Radar Charts
Use radar charts to display a small dataset with one dimension and at least three measure columns.
Rating Charts
Use a rating chart to get a sense of how well a measured quality, such as customer satisfaction, is meeting expectations.
Sankey Charts
Use a sankey chart to visualize the distribution of a measure from one grouping to another grouping.
Scatter Charts
Use a scatter chart to visualize correlation between two groups of data.
Timeline Charts
A timeline chart is a line chart with one axis dedicated to a time dimension. Use a timeline chart to show how a value changes over
time.
Time Bar Charts
A time bar chart is a column chart with the horizontal axis showing a time dimension. Use a time bar chart to visualize changes over
time with vertical bars, which is a great way to illustrate relative changes over time and highlight missing data.
Time Combo Charts
A time combo chart shows two or more measures over time. You can display each measure as a line or bar. You can display the
charts on the same or separate axes.
Treemap Charts
Use treemaps to visualize hierarchical quantitative data, where containing rectangles designate relationship using color, and "leaf"
rectangles represent quantity using area.
1318
Waterfall Charts
Use a waterfall chart to show the cumulative effect of sequentially introduced positive or negative values with breakdowns of value
totals. Also known as "flying bricks" or "Mario" charts. To include breakdowns of value totals, use a stacked waterfall chart.
Customize Charts with Chart Properties

To create the best visualizations for presenting your data, use chart properties to configure Analytics charts.
To display the chart properties in the lens, click . The chart properties appear in the right panel and are grouped into sections. The
properties differ based on the chart type. Properties that are unique to a chart type are grouped in their own section. For example, the
map chart has the “Map” section.
If you add a chart to a dashboard, edit the dashboard and select the chart widget in the dashboard designer to change the chart properties
for the widget.
1319
Or, to change the chart properties at the query level, double-click the widget in the dashboard designer (which opens the query in lens
mode) and click . If the query powers multiple charts in the dashboard, changes to the chart properties at the query level only affect
chart that you double-clicked.
Use a Suggested Chart to Display Results

Using a sophisticated algorithm that analyzes your lens's composition, CRM Analytics suggests chart types that can better communicate
the essential message your data is communicating.
Format Numbers in Charts to Your Liking
Take advantage of formatting options for chart numbers in lenses and dashboards. Display the entire number value when precision
is important, or the compact version for improved readability, or a percentage relative to the total value represented in the chart for
easier comparisons.
Show Each Measure on a Separate Set of Axes
Charts that display multiple measures are sometimes hard to read. To fix that, display each measure separately.
Don’t delay important decisions because you miss critical changes in your data. With clicks, not code, add rules to automatically
format results to quickly catch changes and take immediate action. For example, highlight accounts in red in a bar chart when their
CSAT score drops below 80% so that you can get on the phone with those customers.
Set a Custom Domain to Focus the Results
If the domain on the chart is too large, chart elements can be difficult to view, like the bars in this chart.
Fill the Area Between Lines
You can shade the area between lines in line and timeline charts to accentuate the spread between two measures.
Use Dashed Lines for Effect
To differentiate a measure in a line or timeline chart, use a dashed line.
1320
Handle Missing Values in Line Charts

Charts can display gaps to highlight missing data. Or charts can ignore the missing data and show a continuous line that connects
the data points. For periods of missing data in timeline charts, you can make cumulative lines horizontal to indicate that no change
occurs.
Add Multiple Reference Lines to Charts
You can use any number of static or dynamic reference lines to mark up a chart, such as when you indicate points of reference on
a timeline before and after a predictive line. Dynamic reference lines are powered by existing queries in the dashboard.
Annotate Data Points with Tooltips and Markers
Create your own tooltips and markers in charts to show details about data points. Create a tooltip to specify which details appear
when you hover over any data point. To annotate a specific data point, add a marker and, to draw more attention, make it blink.
Compare Results for Different Groups with Trellis
Enable trellis on a chart to display a separate chart for each group. Because the charts in a trellis have the same scale, you can quickly
compare results across all groups.
Add Icons to CRM Analytics Charts
Bar charts (but not stacked bars), dot-plot charts, and line charts can have icons along with dimension values as labels. Polar gauge
charts can include icons in their centers.
SEE ALSO:
Widget Properties for Analytics Dashboard
Use a Suggested Chart to Display Results

Using a sophisticated algorithm that analyzes your lens's composition, CRM Analytics suggests chart types that can better communicate
the essential message your data is communicating.
To view suggested charts, click the gear menu in chart mode, then click Suggested Charts.
1321
Format Numbers in Charts to Your Liking

Take advantage of formatting options for chart numbers in lenses and dashboards. Display the
EDITIONS
entire number value when precision is important, or the compact version for improved readability,
or a percentage relative to the total value represented in the chart for easier comparisons. Available in Salesforce
1. In a lens, click the chart’s formatting panel. Or in a dashboard, click the chart widget’s properties Classic and Lightning
panel. Experience.
2. Click the chart’s properties section (1). Available with CRM

3. From the Show Value As menu, choose an option (2). Analytics, which is available
4. When you select the compact version, you can also specify the number of decimal places to Enterprise, Performance,
include (3). and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
When using this feature, number formats applied to a column are also respected.
Show Each Measure on a Separate Set of Axes

Charts that display multiple measures are sometimes hard to read. To fix that, display each measure separately.
1322
Select Small Multiples from Axis Mode to separate the measures and make the chart easier to understand.
Tip: While viewing the dashboard, click the title of a measure axis to sort the results. Each click cycles through the sort order
options: ascending, descending, and alphabetical. You can use this method to sort all charts with measure axes, except scatterplot
or charts that also have a time axis.

Don’t delay important decisions because you miss critical changes in your data. With clicks, not code, add rules to automatically format
results to quickly catch changes and take immediate action. For example, highlight accounts in red in a bar chart when their CSAT score
drops below 80% so that you can get on the phone with those customers.
1323
Use rules to automatically highlight charts and tables in a lens or dashboard as well as number widgets in your dashboard. Stay on top
of each KPI by highlighting the highs and lows based on ranges and colors that you specify. Or, distinguish each measure or dimension
value (group) by color-coding them.
For example, you can apply conditional formatting to accomplish the following goals.
• Determine how well you’re doing on a KPI by coloring the number widget based on its value.
• Distinguish each measure in a chart with a unique color.
1324
• Similarly, distinguish each dimension value.
• Determine your top and bottom performers by categorizing numeric values into colored bins. You can add up to 10 bins.
1325
• Focus on key table records by color-coding the text or background of a column’s cells. In the following example, the Customer Name
column is colored based on the value of the Sales field.
Set up conditional formatting in the widget properties panel. Although you set it up at the widget level, the formatting applies to the
underlying query. Conditional formatting affects all widgets that use the query. If you change the widget or chart type, the formatting
1326
is retained. A message appears if the formatting can’t be retained, like when changing between a table and chart widget. Conditional
formatting overrides colors set on dimension values in the dataset XMD.
For charts and number widgets, set up conditional formatting in the widget properties. Select Measures to apply a format to each
measure. Or select one measure or dimension to apply a format to each of its values.
Note: Each chart or number widget can have one conditional formatting rule.
For tables, in the Column tab of the widget properties, select the column that you want to format and then set the rule used to format
it. Each table can have multiple conditional formatting rules. You can apply only one rule for each style, like background color or text
color in a table.
For calculated dimensions, select the dimension and click Pick Values. For Select Values, you can choose previously defined values or
enter custom values.
1327
If you enter a custom value, then click to add it to the Select Values list.
Conditional Formatting Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when setting up conditional formatting.
1328
Set Up Complex Conditional Formatting

You can set up conditions based on a single reference column in the widget properties. However, sometimes, you have to create
more complex conditions. To set up rules based on multiple reference columns for number and table widgets, use SAQL.
SEE ALSO:
Column Properties
Conditional Formatting Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when setting up conditional formatting.
• Conditional formatting can cause deployment failures. Before deploying a dashboard, we recommend removing all conditional
formatting in the widget properties.
• You can’t apply conditional formatting to a query that contains a period (.) in the query ID. To apply it, modify the query ID.
• Each chart or number widget can have one conditional formatting rule.
• You can apply only one conditional rule to chart and number widgets with the same underlying query.
• In a pivot table, you can apply conditional formatting to all columns other than the pivoted dimension.
• Conditional formatting is removed if you manually change the query ID or dev column name in the dashboard JSON or SAQL, and
save the dashboard or clip the lens to a dashboard.
• Conditional formatting set in the widget properties doesn’t appear in the dashboard JSON. Any conditional formatting previously
set up in the dashboard JSON is retained.
Set Up Complex Conditional Formatting

You can set up conditions based on a single reference column in the widget properties. However, sometimes, you have to create more
complex conditions. To set up rules based on multiple reference columns for number and table widgets, use SAQL.
1. Set up the conditions in the SAQL query. Define the rules and output the colors to a new column. Specify the colors in hex codes
(like #CCCC00) or RGB codes (like rgb(255,255,255) or rgba(255,255,255,0)).
For example, the following query specifies the rule and outputs the hex color code for each condition in the “FormatColor” column.
"query": "q = load \"Sample_Superstore_with_Goals\";\n
result = group q by 'Segment';\n
result = foreach result generate
q.'Segment' as 'Segment',
sum(q.'Discount') as 'Discount',
sum(q.'Profit') as 'Profit',
sum(q.'Quantity') as 'Quantity',
sum(q.'Sales') as 'Sales',
(case
when Segment == \"Consumer\" and sum(q.'Discount') >= 1000 then \"#008000\"
when Segment == \"Consumer\" and sum(q.'Discount') < 1000 then \"#CCCC00\"
when Segment == \"Corporate\" and sum(q.'Discount') >= 500 then \"#008000\"
when Segment == \"Corporate\" and sum(q.'Discount') < 500 then \"#CCCC00\"
when Segment == \"Home Office\" and sum(q.'Discount') >= 200 then \"#008000\"
when Segment == \"Home Office\" and sum(q.'Discount') < 200 then \"#CCCC00\"
1329
else \"#000000\" end) as 'FormatColor';\n

result = order result by ('Sales' desc);\n
result = limit result 2000;",
2. To apply the text color to the Sales table column, select the new color column (“FormatColor”) in the Reference Column widget
property and then select Use Color in Reference Column in the Coloring Method option.
The following example conditionally colors the text in the Sales table column based on the logic used to determine the color in the
“FormatColor” reference column.
Set a Custom Domain to Focus the Results

If the domain on the chart is too large, chart elements can be difficult to view, like the bars in this chart.
1330
Set a custom domain to restrict the view to values that bring smaller values into view. Click Add custom domain, then set the domain's
bounds be entering minimum and maximum values.
1331
Fill the Area Between Lines

You can shade the area between lines in line and timeline charts to accentuate the spread between two measures.
To show the spread between minimum and maximum values of closed opportunities in a timeline chart, for example, click Shade Area.
Then choose the measures from the Measure 1 and Measure 2 menus, and pick a color for the shading from Color for Shading.
To focus on the shading, and not the lines, the chart hides the lines and legend for measures specified in Measure 1 and Measure 2,
unless you select them in the Color of Shading field.
Note: The colors of the measures are based on the theme in the legend. The measure colors can change when you select the
shade color or if lines are removed from the chart.
Use Dashed Lines for Effect

To differentiate a measure in a line or timeline chart, use a dashed line.
To contrast the line representing the average between the minimum and maximum values of closed opportunities in a timeline chart,
for example, click Use Dashed Lines, then choose the measure for the average from the multiselect menu below it.
1332
To make other measure lines dashed instead of solid, select them from the same menu.
Handle Missing Values in Line Charts

Charts can display gaps to highlight missing data. Or charts can ignore the missing data and show a continuous line that connects the
data points. For periods of missing data in timeline charts, you can make cumulative lines horizontal to indicate that no change occurs.
To configure how a chart handles missing data, set one of the following options in the Missing Value chart property.
Show as gaps
The graph connects contiguous data points and shows gaps whenever data is missing. In the following example, there’s a separate
graph for customer and partner account types.
Ignore, show continuous line

The graph connects all data points, glossing over missing data. The graph starts at the first data point and ends at the last for each
grouping.
1333
Use prior values

Uses the value prior to the missing data point to indicate no change. Use this option for charts that show cumulative values, such
as timeline.
Let’s look at an example. Because no deals closed between February 20 and 23, the cumulative value doesn’t change for the partner
line. To show no change, the chart uses the same value from the previous data point on February 19. This chart is more accurate
than the previous graph, which is misleading because it shows an upward trend during this same time period.
Use prior values (trimmed)

The graph ends at the last data point. For instance, looking at the following example, this graph is the same as the Use Prior Values
graph, except that it’s truncated on the right because there’s no data after March 5.
Add Multiple Reference Lines to Charts

You can use any number of static or dynamic reference lines to mark up a chart, such as when you indicate points of reference on a
timeline before and after a predictive line. Dynamic reference lines are powered by existing queries in the dashboard.
Note: Dynamic reference lines don’t appear while exploring a chart when the dashboard is in Edit mode. However, reference
lines with static values are visible in Edit mode.
1334
1. Tap +Reference Line in the X-Axis or Y-Axis section of the chart widget panel.
2. Add either a static or dynamic value for the reference line.
• To add a static value, type a numeric value in the Value field.
•
To add a dynamic value, tap .
1335
a. Select a source query.

b. Select a reference line value based on the query.
c. Select an interaction type.
To learn more about interaction types, see Result Binding and Selection Binding.
d. Tap Apply to add the value to your reference line.
3. Add either a static or dynamic value for the reference line.

• To add a static label, type custom text in the Label field.
•
To add a dynamic label, tap .
1336
a. Select a source query.

b. Use the query fields and custom text to create your label.
c. Select an interaction type.
d. Tap Apply to add the value to your reference line.
4. Select a default or custom color.
Annotate Data Points with Tooltips and Markers

Create your own tooltips and markers in charts to show details about data points. Create a tooltip to specify which details appear when
you hover over any data point. To annotate a specific data point, add a marker and, to draw more attention, make it blink.
The tooltips and markers appear when you hover over the data point.
1337
1. Edit the dashboard and select the chart widget.

2. To make it easier for users to locate data points on the line, select Show points in the chart’s section of the widget properties.
3. To configure the tooltip text, data point details, and visualizations, expand the Tooltip section of the widget properties.
1338
4. Specify these tooltip details.
Add custom text Specify your own text. To insert the value of a field in the text,
click Add field. If manually entering a field, reference the field
by its alias (not label) and enclose the alias in square brackets.
Customize data point details To show measures or dimensions in the tooltip, enable this
option.
Show dimensions Show the values of all selected dimensions.
Show measures Show the values of all selected measures.
Show percentage If you show measures, enable this option to show each measure’s
percentage of the total.
Show null values Show null values in the tooltips.
Add visualization To add a chart, table, or a component that houses multiple

widgets to the tooltip, enable this option. For a chart or table
visualization, update its query to create the tooltip you want.
Alternatively, to include a component visualization, select an
existing dashboard component or create one, and then select it
as your tooltip visualization. By default, for chart and table tooltip
visualization types, the initial selections and filters on the
1339
visualization match the ones in the associated chart widget. And,
when you hover over a chart’s grouping, that grouping is applied
as a filter on the tooltip.
Visualization size Set the width and height of the tooltip visualization in pixels.
5. To add a marker for a data point, expand the Chart Markers section in the widget properties, and then click Edit Chart Markers.
6. Select a data point in the chart where you want to add a marker.
7. Enter the following marker details.
Show dimensions Show the values of all selected dimensions.
Show measures Show the values of all selected measures.
Add custom text Specify your own text. To insert the value of a field in the text,
click Add field. If manually entering a field, reference the field
by its alias (not label) and enclose the alias in square brackets.
Open by default Opens the marker and shows its text, by default. Otherwise, the
dashboard viewer must click the marker to view the text.
Blink when closed Makes the marker blink when it’s closed.
1340
Background Background color of the marker.
Border Border color of the marker.
8. Preview the changes.

Compare Results for Different Groups with Trellis

Enable trellis on a chart to display a separate chart for each group. Because the charts in a trellis have the same scale, you can quickly
compare results across all groups.
Regular map charts, for example, can display one grouping. This map of the United States shows a sum grouped by state.
In trellis view, more groupings can be added. This trellis of maps of the United States shows a sum grouped by billing state and by
product.
1341
Trellis view can also be used to visualize values that may otherwise be difficult to see in a chart. For example, some of the values shown
by this stacked bar chart are difficult to pick out.
By using trellis view, you can separate the values so that smaller values can be picked out more easily.
1342
In any trellis view except for Wrap, you can remove the grid lines.
1343
You can also move the labels to the other side of the chart.
1344
Visualizing a large number of charts in a trellis can create a view that is difficult to read.
1345
Adjust the matrix type and the size ratio to create a trellised chart that is easier to view and understand.
Add Icons to CRM Analytics Charts

Bar charts (but not stacked bars), dot-plot charts, and line charts can have icons along with dimension values as labels. Polar gauge charts
can include icons in their centers.
To add icons to a chart, use a dataset with an ungrouped URL dimension whose values are URLs to the icon images. For example, each
row in the following dataset has a URL that points to a flag image stored in your org:
Country,Country_code,Region,flag_img_url,Accounts,Value
Australia,aus,South
Pacific,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagaustraliapng,1898,22930651
China,chn,East
Asia,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagchinapng,2051,29754009
1346
Europe,eur,Europe,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flageuropepng,4668,61238042
France,fra,Europe,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagfrancepng,2303,28746829
India,ind,Asia,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagindiapng,2721,32037499
Italy,ita,Europe,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagitalypng,1722,26340986
Japan,jpn,East
Asia,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagjapanpng,2872,36916012
Russian Federation,rus,East
Europe,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagrussiapng,1847,27387456
South
Africa,zaf,Africa,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagsouthafricapng,879,9794857
South Korea,kor,East
Asia,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagsouthkoreapng,1643,21934785
United States of America,usa,North
America,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/file-asset/flagusapng,6527,87044191
After you upload the dataset to CRM Analytics, explore the dataset using only one grouping. Then edit the SAQL query to add the image
URLs to the result set.
1. Explore the dataset to visualize the data you want to view in chart mode.
2. Switch to SAQL mode and edit the query using a non-grouping SAQL function such as first().
1347
3. Return to chart mode, then click the gear menu to open the chart properties.
4. Click Use Icons, then select the name of the dimension containing the icon URLs from the Icon Source menu.
Use the Fit Mode and Shape menus to adjust the icons’ appearance.
Note: The Use Icons menu contains the name of every non-grouped dimension used in your query, even if these dimensions
do not contain image URLs.
To use Chatter profile images, use your browser's development tools to find the image's underlying URL.
Once you've collected the URLs, add them to a column in your dataset before uploading the dataset to CRM Analytics.
name,url_src,num_accts,value_accts,territory
astro,https://MyDomainName.file.force.com/profilephoto/7290M000000WJzg/M/1,829,1309742,North
America
1348
...
Bar Charts
CRM Analytics provides the following types of bar charts: Bar, Column, Stacked Bar, and Stacked Column. Use the Bar or Column chart
to provide a quick visual comparison of related values. Use the Stacked Bar or Stacked Column chart to show groups within each bar.
Create a Horizontal Bar Chart

Use a horizontal bar chart to compare values across one or more categories. Using the auto-fit feature, you can fit a bar chart into a
crowded dashboard without the necessity of long scroll bars or loss of information.
For example, create a bar chart that analyzes the average opportunity amount by opportunity owner.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Bar chart type.
2. In the Bar Length field, add one or more measures.
3. In the Bars field, add one or more dimensions to analyze the measures by.
4. To rank the records and see the highest or lowest values, click the down arrow next to the measure and sort the results.
1349
5. To change the chart display, click and set the chart properties in the Formatting panel.
For example, to show all bars without scrolling, select Fit in the Auto Fit field.
Tip: If you resize the bar chart while arranging a dashboard and lose the labels, choose Preserve labels in the Auto Fit field
to restore them.
Create a Stacked Column Chart

Use a stacked column or bar chart to compare parts of a whole and show values across one or more categories.
For example, create a stacked column chart that analyzes the total opportunity amount by opportunity owner and breaks down total
opportunity amount by opportunity type within each bar.
1350
1. In the lens, click and then select the Stacked Column chart type.
2. In the Bar Length field, add the Sum of Amount measure.
3. In the Bars field, add one or more dimensions to analyze the measures by.
4. To rank the records and see the highest or lowest values, click the down arrow next to the measure and sort the results.
5. In the Bar Segments field, select Stage.

Each chart bar breaks up the total amount to show the value contributed by each opportunity stage.
For example, to show the total for each bar, select a value in the Show Total field. To subtract negative values from the total, select
Net. To ignore the negative signs and add the absolute values, select Absolute.
1351
Calendar Heat Map Charts

Calendar heat maps are useful for visualizing recurring discrete activities, such as closing accounts, over long periods of time. In this
chart, you can easily change the granularity of the time-based grouping, such as from month to week or day.
To use a calendar heat map, set a measure in the Color field and a date dimension in the Time Periods field. The underlying query groups
the measure by the specified time period. The chart shows a color for each time period based on the measure.
Column Charts
Use a column chart (also called vertical bar chart) to show relative counts of things, such as leads or dollars. Use a stacked column chart
to show groups within each bar.
1352
Combo Charts
Use a combo chart to display at least two related series of data, such as discrete grouped values as vertical bars overlaid with a line chart
representing an average value.
Create a Combo Chart

Use a combo chart to compare two measures by the same dimension. For example, when comparing deal sizes across industries, use a
combo chart to analyze the total amount and the number of deals for each industry.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Combo chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add the dimension to analyze the measures by. For example, select Industry.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add at least two measures.
For example, set the axis mode to specify whether both measures appear on the same axis.
Create a Combo Chart with Stacked Bars

In a combo chart, you can change the bar to a stacked bar to show and compare parts of a whole. For example, add a combo chart that
analyzes opportunities by industry. Use the line to show total number of opportunities and the bar to show total opportunity amount.
You can then divide each bar by forecast type to show the contribution of each type to the total amount. Let’s learn how to build this
example.
1. In the dashboard, create a combo chart that shows total opportunity amount as a bar and count of rows as a line, grouped by
industry.
1353
2. Click , and then click .

We switched to the compare table so that we can add multiple Sum of Amount measures, each with their own filter. Let’s create a
Sum of Amount measure for each forecast category: Best Case, Closed, Commit, and Pipeline. Let’s start by filtering the existing Sum
of Amount measure by the Best Case forecast category.
3. To filter the sum by Best Case category, click the dropdown next to Sum of Amount, and select Add a Filter.
4. Select Forecast Category > Best Case, and then click Add.
This filter applies only to this measure.
1354
5. To create three more instances of the Sum of Amount measure, click the dropdown arrow next to Sum of Amount, and select Clone
Column. Repeat this step two more times so that you have four Sum of Amount measures.
You now have four of the same Sum of Amount measures with the same filter.
1355
6. For second, third, and fourth Sum of Amount measures, change the Forecast Category filter to Closed, Commit, and Pipeline,
respectively.
7. To make the measure labels more descriptive, click the dropdown next to the top Sum of Amount measure, and select Edit this
Column. Change the column header to “Best Case Total.” Use a similar label for each of the remaining Sum of Amount measures.
8. Show the widget properties by clicking .

9. In the widget properties, expand the Series section, and then click Customize series.
10. To show all Total measures as bars, select each Total measure in the Measure field and then Bar in the Show As field.
Leave the Count of Rows measure showing as a line.
Note: You can also choose Dot in the Show As field to create a bullet chart.
1356
11. Under the Combo Chart section, change the Axis Mode to Dual Axis, and select Stack bars to stack all the bars for each industry.
Note: The Stack bars option is available when Axis Mode is set to Single Axis or Dual Axis, not Small Multiples. Also, when
you set Axis Mode to Dual Axis, the first measure appears on the left axis. If the first measure shows as a bar and you stack
bars, all bar measures appear on the left axis. Similarly, if the first measure shows as a line and you stack bars, the line measure
appears on the left axis and the bar measures appear on the right.
Donut Charts
Use a donut chart when you have a grouping and want to show not only the proportion of a single value for each group member against
the total, but also the total amount itself. If you remove the donut's center by selecting 0% from the Center Size menu, this visualization
is commonly referred to as a pie chart.
Create a Donut Chart

Donut charts are useful visualizations when comparing a measure across a few categories, which makes the chart readable.
1357
For example, showing opportunities that cover a limited number of product lines can be visualized effectively using a donut chart.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Donut chart type.
2. In the Segment Size field, add the measure that determines the size of each segment. For example, select the measure that shows
the total opportunity amount.
3. In the Segment By field, add the dimension to group the data by. For example, select Product Family.
4. To highlight slices, click individual them.

The total in the center changes to reflect the total of the selected slices.
1358
For example, select Custom Text from the Center Value menu, then enter custom text in the Custom Text field.
Dot Plot Charts

Horizontal and vertical dot plots use the size and coloring of bubbles to display multiple dimensions and measures. Use dot plots to
visualize related data to compare performance or locate unusual values.
Create a Horizontal Dot Plot

Create a horizontal dot plot chart to analyze one or two measures across one or more dimensions.
For example, you can create a horizontal dot plot that shows the number of opportunities for each account owner and record type.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Horizontal Dot Plot chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add the measure that you want to analyze. For example, select count of rows.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add at least one dimension that you want to analyze the measure by. For example, select Account Owner.
4. In the Bubble Size field, add the measure that determines the bubble size, such as sum of amount.
5. In the Bubbles field, add dimension that determines the different types of bubbles to show. For example, select Account Type to
show bubbles for each record type.
1359
Funnel Charts
Use a funnel chart to visualize sequential data that can be broken up into stages, such as a sales cycle.
Create a Funnel Chart

Use a funnel chart to compare a measure throughout a process.
For example, you can use this chart to compare the opportunity amounts through different pipeline stages.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Funnel chart type.
2. In the Segment Size field, add the measure that determines the size of each segment. For example, select the measure that shows
the total opportunity amount.
3. In the Segments field, add the dimension to group the data by. For example, select Stage.
1360
Note: This funnel chart also has a filter that includes only open pipeline.
Gauge Charts
Use gauge charts to track progress along a single measure, such as how much revenue has been realized versus the target.
1361
Create a Gauge Chart

If you've set goals for, as an example, average value for each account manager, gauge charts are a good choice for showing how close
you are to that goal.
You've got a dataset with account information. Now you want to present it in a chart that shows how close each account is in reaching
the associated goal. Each gauge chart can display one value per account manager, and highlight value ranges.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Polar Gauge (round) chart type.
A gauge (angular) and flat gauge (linear) are also available.
2. In the Value field, add the measure that you want to analyze, like average opportunity amount.
3. To compare the measure across every member of a category, like every account owner, add the dimension in the Trellis field.
A separate gauge appears for each value of the selected dimension.
4. To rank the performance based on the measure, sort the measure in ascending or descending order. Default sort order is alphabetical
order.
For example, set the Trellis Type field to Wrap so the chart can be viewed all at once, without having to scroll. Also, set the bins in
Conditional Formatting to create band colors. The band makes it easy to see how close managers are to hitting their goal. The band
color makes it easy to spot which managers are performing well and which can use some help.
1362
The breakpoints set the range values where the color bands transition. In this example, the maximum (goal) specified in the Range
Values section of the widget properties is $2 million. If account managers hit at least $1.4 million, they’re in the green . If they hit
between $1.2 and $1.4 million, they’re in the yellow. Otherwise, they’re in the red.
Bullet Charts
Bullet charts are perfect for comparing metrics against quantitative benchmarks and references, like current revenue with target revenue.
Create a Bullet Chart

Measure current revenue against target revenue and compare it with last quarter's revenue with a bullet chart.
You've got a dataset with opportunity information. From that dataset, you can measure current revenue by finding the sum of the
amount field. With a bullet chart, you can then measure current revenue against qualitative values, like target revenue.
The background bar represents target revenue, divided into three sections that represent qualitative performance: red for bad, yellow
for good, and green for great. The black bar (also known as a bullet) shows the current revenue. The blue reference line marks last
quarter's revenue.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Bullet chart type.
2. In the Value field, add the measure that you want to analyze, like sum of amount.
3. To customize the bullet chart, click and set the chart properties in the Formatting panel.
In this current revenue by target revenue example, set a target revenue, band colors, and a reference line.
First, set target revenue. Expand Range Values and set Max to your target revenue. For example, $300,000,000.00.
Let's make the bar and bullet a bit bigger. Expand Bullet and set Range weight to 200 and Bar weight to 40.
To add last quarter's revenue, click + Reference Line, set value to last quarter's revenue (for example, $190,000,000.00), and set
Label to Last Quarter.
Set bins in Conditional Formatting to create band colors on the background bar to create bands that represent qualitative performance:
red for bad, yellow for good, and green for great. The black bar (also known as a bullet) shows the current revenue.
1363
The bullet chart now makes it easy to see current revenue against target revenue.
Heat Maps
Use a heatmap to visually enhance high- and low-value data when there's a single measure and multiple dimensions.
Create a Heat Map Chart

Use a heat map chart to analyze the distribution of data to find if there are concentrations in particular segments.
For example, use a heat map to determine which functional areas and quarters have the most support cases.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Heat Map chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add a dimension to analyze the measure by. For example, add the Created Date dimension and choose
Year-Quarter.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add another dimension. For example, select Billing State/Province.
4. In the Color field, add the measure that you want to analyze across both dimensions. For example, select Avg > Amount to look at
the average opportunity amount.
By default, the heat map shows a color gradient based on two colors.
1364
Tip: When it’s hard to tell the difference between gradients, use bins.
For example, to categorize values in high, medium, and low bins, select Bins under the Conditional Formatting section, and set
them up based on thresholds.
Line Charts
Use a line chart when you have one important grouping representing an ordered set of data and one or more values to show.
Line charts are useful for comparing the value of measures, such as sales and profit totals, over a series of categories (grouped dimensions)
such as industries and sales territories.
1365
Map Charts
Use a map if you have data with a geographical component. Maps can shade areas in proportion to mapped values, allowing for visual
pop-out of high-value areas. You can find the map chart in the dashboard designer.
Data for map charts must contain geographical names corresponding to the geographical entities represented on the map. CRM Analytics
map charts are not case-sensitive, but specific codes or names for geographical entities such as US states and world countries are
expected.
For maps of the USA, each row of data must contain a single field identifying the state by its two-letter postal code (recommended) or
its full common name. A row with data linked to the state of California, for example, must have an identifying field with "CA" or "California",
but not "Calif".
For global maps, the identifying country names must follow ISO 3166-1 (alpha 3) three-letter code (recommended) or be spelled out
using the country names set by CRM Analytics. A row with data linked to the United Kingdom, for example, must have an identifying
field with "GBR" or "United Kingdom", but not "Great Britain".
Create a Map Chart

Use a map chart to analyze data across geographical regions.
For example, you can use color saturation in a map chart to indicate the number of opportunities in the pipeline for each country in
which you do business.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Map chart type.
2. Click and choose the type of map in the Map Type field. For example, to analyze measures by countries, choose World Countries.
1366
3. In the Locations field, add the dataset field that contains the locations. For example, select Billing Country, which corresponds to
the World Countries map type.
4. In the Color field, add the measure that determines the color of each region. For example, select Count of Rows to show colors
based on the number of opportunities for each country.
By default, the map shows a color gradient based on two colors.
Tip: When it’s hard to tell the difference between gradients, use bins.
5. To bin values in high, medium, and low categories, select Bins under Conditional Formatting, and choose the low and high value
thresholds and the legend labels and colors.
1367
6. To make more changes to the chart display, set the chart properties in the Formatting panel.
Country Codes and Names

For data to show up correctly in a map of countries, the data must identify countries using either the ISO 3166-1 (alpha 3) three-letter
country codes (recommended) or the spelled-out country names set by CRM Analytics.
The following table lists the supported country name for each ISO 3166-1 (alpha 3) country code.
Country Code Country Name

AFG Afghanistan
AGO Angola
ALB Albania
ARE United Arab Emirates
ARG Argentina
ARM Armenia
ATF French Southern and Antarctic Lands
AUS Australia
AUT Austria
AZE Azerbaijan
BDI Burundi
BEL Belgium
BEN Benin
BFA Burkina Faso
1368

BGD Bangladesh
BGR Bulgaria
BHR Bahrain
BHS The Bahamas
BIH Bosnia and Herzegovina
BLR Belarus
BLZ Belize
BMU Bermuda
BOL Bolivia
BRA Brazil
BRN Brunei
BTN Bhutan
BWA Botswana
CAF Central African Republic
CAN Canada
CHE Switzerland
CHL Chile
CHN China
CIV Ivory Coast
CMR Cameroon
COD Democratic Republic of the Congo
COG Republic of the Congo
COL Colombia
CRI Costa Rica
CS- Kosovo
CUB Cuba
CYP Northern Cyprus
CYP Cyprus
CZE Czech Republic
DEU Germany
1369

DJI Djibouti
DNK Denmark
DOM Dominican Republic
DZA Algeria
ECU Ecuador
EGY Egypt
ERI Eritrea
ESH Western Sahara
ESP Spain
EST Estonia
ETH Ethiopia
FIN Finland
FJI Fiji
FLK Falkland Islands
FRA France
FRO Faeroe Is.
GAB Gabon
GBR United Kingdom
GEO Georgia
GHA Ghana
GIN Guinea
GLP Guadeloupe
GMB Gambia
GNB Guinea Bissau
GNQ Equatorial Guinea
GRC Greece
GRL Greenland
GTM Guatemala
GUF French Guiana
GUY Guyana
1370

HKG Hong Kong
HND Honduras
HRV Croatia
HTI Haiti
HUN Hungary
IDN Indonesia
IND India
IRL Ireland
IRN Iran
IRQ Iraq
ISL Iceland
ISR Israel
ITA Italy
JAM Jamaica
JEY Jersey
JOR Jordan
JPN Japan
KAZ Kazakhstan
KEN Kenya
KGZ Kyrgyzstan
KHM Cambodia
KOR South Korea
KWT Kuwait
LAO Laos
LBN Lebanon
LBR Liberia
LBY Libya
LKA Sri Lanka
LSO Lesotho
LTU Lithuania
1371

LUX Luxembourg
LVA Latvia
MAR Morocco
MDA Moldova
MDG Madagascar
MEX Mexico
MKD Macedonia
MLI Mali
MLT Malta
MMR Myanmar
MNE Montenegro
MNG Mongolia
MOZ Mozambique
MRT Mauritania
MUS Mauritius
MWI Malawi
MYS Malaysia
NAM Namibia
NCL New Caledonia
NER Niger
NGA Nigeria
NIC Nicaragua
NLD Netherlands
NOR Norway
NPL Nepal
NZL New Zealand
OMN Oman
PAK Pakistan
PAN Panama
PER Peru
1372

PHL Philippines
PNG Papua New Guinea
POL Poland
PRI Puerto Rico
PRK North Korea
PRT Portugal
PRY Paraguay
PSE West Bank
QAT Qatar
REU Reunion
ROU Romania
RUS Russia
RWA Rwanda
SAU Saudi Arabia
SDN Sudan
SEN Senegal
SGP Singapore
SLB Solomon Islands
SLE Sierra Leone
SLV El Salvador
SOM Somaliland
SOM Somalia
SRB Republic of Serbia
SSD South Sudan
SUR Suriname
SVK Slovakia
SVN Slovenia
SWE Sweden
SWZ Swaziland
SYR Syria
1373

TCD Chad
TGO Togo
THA Thailand
TJK Tajikistan
TKM Turkmenistan
TLS East Timor
TTO Trinidad and Tobago
TUN Tunisia
TUR Turkey
TWN Taiwan
TZA United Republic of Tanzania
UGA Uganda
UKR Ukraine
URY Uruguay
USA United States of America
UZB Uzbekistan
VEN Venezuela
VNM Vietnam
VUT Vanuatu
YEM Yemen
ZAF South Africa
ZMB Zambia
ZWE Zimbabwe
Properties of Maps
The map chart is configured with the properties in the dashboard designer. These properties have equivalent JSON properties.
Configure Maps to Auto-Zoom on Selected Areas

When you select datapoints in a particular geographical area of your map chart, the data in that area is highlighted.
1374
With auto-zoom, the map chart both highlights the data and zooms in the geographical area.
Any filtering that occurs on the visualized data can trigger auto-zoom, including faceting in dashboards, allowing you to create dynamic
maps.
1375
Set the Map Projection Type for Map Charts

A map projection is a method for representing shapes from the curved surface of the Earth (or any other curved surface) using shapes
on a flat surface. Some map projection types preserve the accuracy of shape outlines while sacrificing the correct representations of area
sizes, while others preserve relative size but distort the outlines. You can apply the projection of your choice using the Projection Type
menu.
1376
JSON Representation Map Chart

This is an example map JSON with a United States map.
{
"visualizationType": "choropleth",
"step": "step_newmap",
"map": "US States",
"legend": {
"show": false,
"inside": false,
"showHeader": true,
"position": "right-top"
},
"title": {
"label": "",
"subtitleLabel": "",
"align": "center"
},
"theme": "wave",
"lowColor": "#C5DBF7",
"highColor": "#1674D9",
"trellis": {
"enable": false,
"type": "x",
"chartsPerLine": 4
}
}
Other available values for the map property are:

"World Countries", "Americas", "North America", "South America", "Central America", "Caribbean", "Europe", "Eastern Europe", "Northern
Europe", "Southern Europe", "Western Europe", "Central Europe", "Scandanavia", "Asia", "South Asia", "South East Asia", "East Asia",
"Australasia", "Africa", "East Africa", "Middle Africa", "North Africa", "Southern Africa", "Western Africa", "EMEA", "APAC".
Bubble Map Charts

Use a bubble map chart to visually indicate measure values in specified geographical areas.
Create a Bubble Map Chart

CRM Analytics bubble-map charts use the same maps available to map charts, giving you another choice representing measure values
on the map.
For example, you can use bubbles instead of color saturation alone to indicate the number of opportunities in the pipeline for each state
in the United States.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Bubble Map chart type.
2. Click and choose the type of map in the Map Type field. For example, to analyze measures by state, choose US States.
1377
3. In the Locations field, add the dataset field that contains the locations. For example, select Billing State/Province if the map type
is US States.
4. In the Bubble Size field, add the measure that determines the bubble size.
5. In the Bubble Color field, add the measure that determines the bubble color.
6. Set the chart properties in the Formatting panel to make other adjustments, such as entering the chart title.
1378
Geo Map Charts

Geo maps allow you to visualize data that contains geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude). Using coordinates allows you to
place visual data elements more precisely on map charts.
Create a Geo Map Chart

A dataset with geographical location data, such as U.S. states, can be overlaid on a U.S. map. The bubbles representing a measure appear
centered on the state areas. If the locations are tied to particular areas in those states, coordinates can be used to locate the bubbles
more accurately.
For example, with airline data tied to particular airports, use airport latitude and longitude coordinates to visualize the data at each
airport's actual location. The dataset could look like the following:
Airport,Year,Quarter,lat,lng,flights,passengers
JFK,2014,1,40.639751,-73.778925,120000,67276
SFO,2014,1,37.618972,-122.374889,30000,7383
ORD,2014,1,41.978603,-87.904842,50000,90908
HNL,2014,1,21.318681,-157.922428,10000,5262
ATL,2014,1,33.640411,-84.419853,217089,24044724
DFW,2014,1,32.89748,-97.040443,169955,15888600
DEN,2014,1,39.849312,-104.673828,141381,13368128
SEA,2014,1,47.443546,-122.301659,84283,10585134
SLC,2014,1,40.758701,-111.876183,81238,5285402
PHX,2014,1,33.457439,-111.727386,107615,10533665
JFK,2014,2,40.639751,-73.778925,170000,77276
SFO,2014,2,37.618972,-122.374889,40000,8383
ORD,2014,2,41.978603,-87.904842,50000,100908
HNL,2014,2,21.318681,-157.922428,11000,6262
ATL,2014,2,33.640411,-84.419853,227089,34044724
DFW,2014,2,32.89748,-97.040443,170955,25888600
DEN,2014,2,39.849312,-104.673828,151381,23368128
SEA,2014,2,47.443546,-122.301659,85283,20585134
1379
SLC,2014,2,40.758701,-111.876183,82238,6285402
PHX,2014,2,33.457439,-111.727386,117615,11533665
JFK,2014,3,40.639751,-73.778925,210000,87276
SFO,2014,3,37.618972,-122.374889,50000,9383
ORD,2014,3,41.978603,-87.904842,50000,90908
HNL,2014,3,21.318681,-157.922428,12000,7262
ATL,2014,3,33.640411,-84.419853,237089,35044724
DFW,2014,3,32.89748,-97.040443,180955,26888600
DEN,2014,3,39.849312,-104.673828,161381,24368128
SEA,2014,3,47.443546,-122.301659,95283,22585134
SLC,2014,3,40.758701,-111.876183,92238,6585402
PHX,2014,3,33.457439,-111.727386,127615,13533665
JFK,2014,4,40.639751,-73.778925,220000,117276
SFO,2014,4,37.618972,-122.374889,60000,7000
ORD,2014,4,41.978603,-87.904842,50000,90908
HNL,2014,4,21.318681,-157.922428,13000,8262
ATL,2014,4,33.640411,-84.419853,247089,36044724
DFW,2014,4,32.89748,-97.040443,190955,27888600
DEN,2014,4,39.849312,-104.673828,171381,25368128
...
1. In the lens, click and then select the Geo Map chart type.
2. To select the map type in the chart properties, click .
The map type depends on the region that you want to show in the map. For example, if your flights are only in the Unitied States,
select US States.
3. In the Locations field, select the location field that determines where to add bubbles. For example, select the Airport field.
4. In the Latitude and Longitude field, add two measures: the first contains average latitude coordinates and the second contains
average longitude coordinates.
1380
Tip: If you’re adding measures in a SAQL query, add the latitude and longitude measures first, and then any other measures.
5. In the Bubble Size field, add a measure that determines the bubble size, such as sum of flights.
6. In the Bubble Color field, add a measure that determines the color, such as sum of passengers.
7. To make additional changes, such as setting the colors of the geo map chart bubbles, set the chart properties in the Formatting
panel.
Custom Map Charts

Use a custom map if you have data with a geographical component that doesn't match any of the standard maps provided by CRM
Analytics charts, such as custom regions. You can also use custom maps for areas that can be represented with polygons, such as stadium
seat sections, city blocks, or floor plans.
Custom map charts can be used in lenses and dashboards. You can create and manage custom maps in lenses and dashboard designer.
Custom map charts in CRM Analytics can be created from GeoJSON with a geometry type of Polygon or MultiPolygon. See the reference
section for more information. Data is overlaid on a custom map using either an id or name property as a key.
Create a Custom Map

CRM Analytics comes with prepackaged maps that you can use in map, bubble map, and geo map charts. If you need a map that isn’t
available, upload the geoJSON file to the user interface to create it. Set the boundaries to focus on a specific region.
Adding, editing, and deleting custom maps, and uploading geoJSONs requires the Manage CRM Analytics Custom Maps user permission.
Users with this permission can edit and delete any custom map, including maps created by other users. All users in the org, even those
without this permission, can use all maps in their lenses and dashboards.
1. Select the map widget, and click next to the Map Type widget property.
1381
2. In the left pane, choose an existing geoJSON or upload a new one (max 10 MB). Each map is based on an underlying geoJSON.
Tip: You can create multiple maps from the same geoJSON by applying unique boundaries that focus on different regions.
To edit or delete an existing geoJSON, hover over the geoJSON and click the appropriate button. You can delete only unused
geoJSONs, those that aren’t used to define maps. To delete a used geoJSON, first remove it from the maps in which it’s used.
1382
3. Specify the label and projection type of the new map.

Mercator is most suitable for traditional geographical maps. Use AlbersUSA for a map of the United States of America that includes
Hawaii and Alaska near the rest of the United States. Use Equirectangular for simple geometric shapes such as floor plans, city blocks,
or zip-code areas.
Note: When you use the map in a chart, you can override this projection type in the widget properties.
4. In the center pane, drag the handles of the map to change the boundaries, and zoom in on a particular region. The boundaries are
listed in the right pane.
Edit and Delete a Custom Map

Edit a map to change its boundaries.
1. In the Map Type property, select the map type and then click Edit Selected Map.
2. Drag the handles of the map to change the bound box.
1383
The new coordinates appear in the right pane.
3. To apply the changes to all lenses and dashboards in your org that use this map, select Apply Globally. If left unchecked, the changes
only apply to this instance of the map.
4. To delete the map, click Delete Map.
You can’t delete maps that are prepackaged with CRM Analytics.
5. Click Done.
Properties of Custom Maps

Proper formatting of the underlying GeoJSON is critical for successfully overlaying data onto a custom map. For improved presentation,
it may be necessary to adjust the map's bounding-box coordinates to zoom in on the overlaid areas.
GeoJSON Structure
Standard GeoJSON typically has a structure that contains feature blocks similar to the following:
{
"type": "Feature",
"geometry": {
"type": "MultiPolygon",
"coordinates": [
[125.6, 10.1],
[126.1, 11.0], ...
]
1384
},
"id": "SI",
"properties": {
"name": "Sandwich Islands",
"property1": "value1"
}
}
Each feature block defines a shape, or map area. To correctly overlay data onto the map, the data must have a column with values
uniquely matching one of the properties in the GeoJSON. For example, if the data has values in a column called Country_Code, then
each feature block in the GeoJSON should have a property called "id" with values that exactly match values in Country_Code. The feature
block with "id": "SI" would match a row in the data that has "SI" in the Country_Code column, and that data can then be overlaid
on the area defined by that feature block. To overlay the data on the matching areas, you'll have to group on Country_Code when
exploring the dataset in Analytics.
The "id" property is required, and it has to be at the same level as "properties" in the GeoJSON. Often, however, it's a child of "properties":
{
"type": "Feature",
"geometry": {
"type": "MultiPolygon",
"coordinates": [
[125.6, 10.1],
[126.1, 11.0], ...
]
},
"properties": {
"name": "Sandwich Islands",
"id": "SI",
"property1": "value1"
}
}
Sometimes "id" doesn't exist at all, and must be created. In either case, the original GeoJSON must be edited to contain the "id" property
at the level of the "properties" property. In a single feature block, doing that is trivial, but a large GeoJSON file could contain hundreds
of GeoJSON feature blocks. Using a script is recommended.
Note: For GeoJSON that lacks an "id" property, Analytics falls back to using the values in properties.name. If your GeoJSON has a
property called "name" under "properties", and "name" has values that match a column in your data, it can be used instead of "id".
Do not change the position of name. It must remain a child of "properties".
Bounding Boxes
You can "zoom" into a map area by redefining the area of the map to display. This is done by giving the boundaries of the new area in
terms of coordinates. These coordinates are called a bounding box. A bounding box limits the map to the shapes within the coordinates,
or borders, of the bounding box.
When you create a map from a GeoJSON without a bounding box, every defined shape is displayed as an area on the map. For example,
the following map of zip codes in the Los Angeles area does not use a bounding box:
1385
The areas of interest, where data has been overlaid on the map, are indicated by the red rectangle. To make the map more readable,
the view should zoom in on the zip-code areas that have data. The coordinates (in this case, latitude and longitude) bordering the area
of interest can be found using a GeoJSON tool that gives the coordinates of the areas in the map. A second map is then created from
the original GeoJSON, this time with bounding-box coordinates.
When viewed in Analytics, this new map is zoomed in on the area of interest.
You can set the bounding box while creating or editing a map.
Matrix Charts
Use matrix charts to create a table that represents measures visually, allowing you to quickly spot extreme values.
For example, you can show which product families are generating the most opportunities.
1386
Create a Matrix Chart

Use a matrix chart to compare one or two measures across two dimensions.
For example, use a matrix chart to compare the number of opportunities by sales rep and pipeline stage.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Matrix chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add a dimension to analyze the measure by. For example, select Stage.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add another dimension. For example, select Opportunity Owner.
4. In the Bubble Size field, add the measure that you want to analyze across both dimensions. For example, select average opportunity
amount.
5. In the Bubble Color field, add another measure that you want to analyze across both dimensions. For example, select Count of Rows
to look at the number of opportunities.
By default, the matrix shows a color gradient based on two colors.
1387
6. To change the chart display, click and set the chart properties in the Formatting panel. For example, change the two colors
under the Conditional Formatting section.
Origami Charts
Use an origami chart to create a striking horizontal visualization for easily identifying high- and low-value data when there's a single
measure and a single grouping.
Parallel Coordinates Charts

Use a parallel coordinates chart when you have multiple measures and a single grouping. Parallel coordinate charts are useful for
displaying how data elements in a grouping stack up against each other.
Create a Parallel Coordinates Chart

If you're trying to spot outliers or patterns based on related metric factors, parallel coordinates charts can help tease them out.
1388
For example, you have product pricing data but you aren't sure why some higher-volume products are more profitable than others.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Parallel Coordinates chart type.
2. In the Node Measures field, add the measures you're interested in.
To compare product pricing, add average unit cost, discount, shipping cost, and profit.
3. In the Lines field, add the dimension that you’d like to group the data by. Each group gets its own line. For example, select Product
Name.
The parallel coordinates chart shows that higher discounts aren't adding up to higher profits.
4. To change the chart display, click and set the chart properties in the Formatting panel. For example, indicate whether to show
every measure title in the chart.
Pyramid Charts
Use a pyramid chart to visually highlight relative sizes of stacked dimension values.
Create a Pyramid Chart

A pyramid chart is a good choice for presenting related measures for one particular dimension, such as number of accounts and account
values in a particular category.
For example, you're interested in looking at the overall value and number of accounts in countries where your company does business.
A bar chart can show that data in order, but it's not necessarily a compelling or easy-to-read visualization. Changing it to a pyramid chart
improves both overall appearance and readability.
1389
1. In the lens, click and then select the Pyramid chart type.
2. In the Left Axis field, add the measure to include on the left side of the pyramid. For example, select Count of Rows.
3. In the Right Axis field, add the second measure. For example, select Sum of Amount.
4. In the Bars field, add a dimension to analyze the measures by, like Billing Country.
5. To sort the results by a measure, select the down arrow next to the measure and select the sort order.
For example, specify whether to show measure axes and titles.
1390
Radar Charts
Use radar charts to display a small dataset with one dimension and at least three measure columns.
Create a Radar Chart

A radar chart is useful when you're trying to visually represent a dimension along three or more measure axes that have different scales.
For example, you want to visualize the key metrics for all sales reps (opportunity owners) to determine who has superior performance.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Metrics Radar chart type.
2. In the Axes field, add at least three measures. For example, add average opportunity amount, total opportunity amount, and count
of rows.
3. In the Polygons field, add the dimension to analyze the measures by. For example, select Account Type.
For example, show all measures in the tooltip when you hover over a data point.
1391
5. To view a specific grouping, click it in the legend.
Tip: Use a metrics radar chart instead of a stacked bar chart when the measures are similar across groupings. Although stacked
bar charts can analyze multiple measures, they don’t provide enough contrast when comparing values with subtle differences.
For example, it’s difficult to determine which customer segment has the highest average discount in this stacked bar chart.
Rating Charts
Use a rating chart to get a sense of how well a measured quality, such as customer satisfaction, is meeting expectations.
Create a Rating Chart

If you've set a goal for, as an example, customer satisfaction in each of the countries where your company operates, rating charts are a
good choice for showing how close you are to that goal.
You've collected, averaged, and loaded the data from the surveys. Now you want to present it in a way that makes sense for customer
satisfaction scores. Each rating chart can display 1 value per country, and highlight value ranges.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Rating chart type.
2. In the Value field, add the measure that you want to analyze, like average opportunity value.
3. To compare the measure across each member of a category, like opportunity owner, add the dimension in the Trellis field.
A separate rating chart appears for each value of the selected dimension.
1392
4. To change the order of multiple rating charts, sort the measure in ascending or descending order. Default sort order is alphabetical
order.
For example, show the rating as a series of stars.
Sankey Charts
Use a sankey chart to visualize the distribution of a measure from one grouping to another grouping.
1393
The sankey chart performs calculations based on the absolute value of each measure. For example, you have the following data:
Based on the data in the table, total new business is 300 (200 + 200 + -100) and total add-on business is 75 (-50 + 50 + 75). When you
visualize this data in a sankey chart, notice the different results: new business is 500 and add-on business is 175. These values (3) also
impact the total (1) and difference between the two groupings (2).
Keep these considerations in mind when using sankey charts:
1394
• Sankey charts don't support scroll and don't render when there's not enough space. For high cardinality situations, consider alternative
visualizations.
• To facet and filter dashboard widgets based on a grouping in a sankey chart, set the chart’s Selection Type as Multiple Selection
in the Query Properties tab.
Scatter Charts
Use a scatter chart to visualize correlation between two groups of data.
Create a Scatter Plot Chart

Use a scatter chart to see the correlation between two measures across a single dimension.
For example, use this chart to analyze the correlation between total opportunity amount and number of opportunities for product
families.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Scatter Plot chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add the first measure. For example, select the count of rows.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add the second measure, such as sum of amount.
4. In the Bubble Size field, add a third measure that determines the bubble size. For instance, add average amount.
5. In the Bubble field, add the dimension that determines the bubbles that appear in the chart. For example, select Product Family
to create a bubble for each family.
1395
Timeline Charts
A timeline chart is a line chart with one axis dedicated to a time dimension. Use a timeline chart to show how a value changes over time.
Create a Timeline Chart

Use a timeline chart to analyze changes to a measure over time using a line.
For example, a timeline chart can show how profit changes over a year. Exploring a year's worth of data, you want to visualize not just
the total profit, but how profits changes from month to month.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Timeline chart type.
2. In Time Axis, select the date field and the granularity that you want to analyze the results by. For example, select Closed Date >
Year-Quarter.
3. In Y-Axis, add at least one measure to analyze over time, such as the total opportunity amount.
4. If needed, add a filter to restrict the results to a particular time period, like a single year.
The timeline chart analyzes the measures with the time dimension shown along the x-axis.
1396
For example, if some of the dataset includes predictions of future amounts, click Predictive Line under the X-Axis section in the
charts properties panel. Or add a reference line to provide a visual cue about a particular point in time.
6. To add a reference line, set the position of the reference line by specifying the date in Time.
The numerical date you specify should match the granularity selected in the Time Axis field. For example, if you selected Year-Month
and want the reference line to start just after August 2016, enter 2016/8. You can also specify a label in Label for the line, and a
color.
1397
Time Bar Charts

A time bar chart is a column chart with the horizontal axis showing a time dimension. Use a time bar chart to visualize changes over
time with vertical bars, which is a great way to illustrate relative changes over time and highlight missing data.
Create a Time Bar Chart

Use a time bar to analyze a measure over time using vertical bars.
For example, a time bar chart can show how total opportunity closes over time, where the lack of bars highlights no sales.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Time Bar chart type.
2. In Time Axis, select the date field and the granularity that you want to analyze the results by.
3. In Y-Axis, choose the measure to analyze over time, such as the total opportunity amount.
The time bar chart appears as a column chart, with the time dimension shown along the X-axis.
1398
color.
Time Combo Charts

A time combo chart shows two or more measures over time. You can display each measure as a line or bar. You can display the charts
on the same or separate axes.
If the time combo chart shows multiple bars, you can stack them to show and compare parts of a whole. For example, add a chart that
analyzes opportunities over time. Then stack the bars to compare how much you lost and won over each time interval.
Create a Time Combo Chart

Use a time combo chart analyze two or more measures over time.
For example, this chart can show how the total opportunity amount and the number of opportunities change over time.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Time Combo chart type.
2. In Time Axis, select the date field and the granularity that you want to analyze the results by.
3. In Y-Axis, choose at least two measures to show, such as the total opportunity amount and count of rows.
The first measure displays on the time bar graph and each subsequent measure displays on a timeline graph.
1399
color.
Treemap Charts
Use treemaps to visualize hierarchical quantitative data, where containing rectangles designate relationship using color, and "leaf"
rectangles represent quantity using area.
1400
Create a Treemap Chart

Treemap charts are especially useful for visualizing groupings that are difficult to organize well using other types of charts.
For example, you can show the number of opportunities by state or province in each country in a way that reveals top markets.
1. In the lens, click and then select the Treemap chart type.
2. In the Segment Size field, add a measure, such as total opportunity amount.
3. In the Segments field, add one or more dimensions to analyze the measure by. For example, select Billing Country and Billing
State/Province.
In the treemap chart, each color represents a country, as indicated in the legend. Each rectangle represents a state or province in a
country. The high-value states and provinces are easy to spot. Using tooltips, you can view details for any rectangle representing a
state.
1401
Waterfall Charts
Use a waterfall chart to show the cumulative effect of sequentially introduced positive or negative values with breakdowns of value
totals. Also known as "flying bricks" or "Mario" charts. To include breakdowns of value totals, use a stacked waterfall chart.
Create a Waterfall Chart

Use a waterfall chart to analyze the smaller segments that comprise a total value.
For example, use this chart to determine the relative contribution each stage adds to the total open opportunity amount,
1. In the lens, click and then select the Waterfall chart type.
2. In the X-Axis field, add the dimension to analyze the measures by. For example, select Stage.
3. In the Y-Axis field, add the measure, such as the sum of amount.
For example, set the label for the total column.
1402
Clone a Lens
Build upon a visualization by cloning its containing lens to a new tab where you can continue
EDITIONS
exploring. You can save the original in its own tab.
1. Click an existing CRM Analytics lens to open it. Available in Salesforce
If you're using a new, unsaved lens, you must save it before it can be cloned. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
2. Select Clone in a New Tab from the More menu.
Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1403
A new, unsaved copy of the cloned lens opens in a new tab.
Save a Visualization
Save your visualization as a lens.
EDITIONS
1. Click the Save icon.
Experience.
2. Enter a title and a description for your lens, and select the app to save it in. Available with CRM
3. Click Save. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1404
Analyze Your Data Build CRM Analytics Dashboards
Share a visualization with your colleagues by posting to Chatter, getting its unique URL, downloading
EDITIONS
a screenshot of it, or downloading its filtered data. A Chatter post provides an image and a link to
the asset—lens, dashboard, or app—in CRM Analytics. Colleagues with the link and access to the Available in Salesforce
asset can drill down and explore the information that’s presented. To share without giving access Classic and Lightning
to the asset, use the download options. Experience.
1. Click Share.
Available with CRM
2. Click the tab for the sharing method that you want: available in Developer
a. Post to Feed posts to Chatter an image and the link to the lens, dashboard, or app. Select Edition.
User or Group feed, enter the name, and then type your comment. You can also remove
the image from your post by hovering over it and clicking the x. Note that posted images USER PERMISSIONS
are public.
b. Get URL provides a unique URL to the asset. Copy the link and then paste it wherever you
want to share it.
c. Download gives you options to share a visualization without giving access to it. You can
download it as an image (.png) or as filtered data in Microsoft® Excel® (.xls) or comma-separated values (.csv) format.
3. If applicable, click Give Access to set the level of sharing access.

4. Click Done.
Note: To share a visualization, you must give access to the app that contains it. Lenses, datasets, and dashboards within the
default Shared App are accessible to all CRM Analytics users, unless administrators have restricted access. All other apps are
private unless someone with Manager access to the app has shared it with a specific user, group, or role.

Build a CRM Analytics dashboard to continuously monitor key metrics of your business, analyzing
EDITIONS
the results by key dimensions, like region, products, and time period. Add interactive charts that
synthesize information into an easy-to-read format. To complement the charts, add tables that Available in Salesforce
show record-level details. Add filters to allow dashboard viewers to change the focus of the results. Classic and Lightning
Create customized layouts to optimize the display of a dashboard on different types of devices, like Experience.
mobile phones, tablets, and desktops.
Available with CRM
Note: Prior to the Winter '20 release, queries were called steps. Analytics, which is available
Watch a Demo: Build Interactive CRM Analytics Dashboards (English Only) Enterprise, Performance,
Get Hands-On Training with Trailhead: CRM Analytics Dashboard Building Basics and Unlimited Editions. Also
Note: For you to create and edit dashboards with the dashboard designer, the admin must Edition.
enable it in CRM Analytics setup—it’s enabled by default—and must grant you the Create
and Edit CRM Analytics Dashboards user permission.
This section discusses how to build dashboards with the dashboard designer. The dashboard designer is the newer designer that offers
additional features to help you build dashboards more quickly and easily. Use a template to create a dashboard with a predefined design.
1405
Use the wizards to quickly build widgets. Use drag-and-drop, snap-to-grid, and browser reflow to effortlessly add, position, and align
widgets in a dashboard.
1. Create a CRM Analytics dashboard with a Template

Dashboard templates speed your analytics development by automatically creating dashboards. Some provide blank layouts that
you populate with data, while other “smart” templates create dashboards that require little to no additional configuration.
2. Create and Manage Dashboards with Reusable Components
Dashboard components are a type of dashboard widget that can contain other widgets, pages, and Lightning Web Components.
Use dashboard components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards. Use Lightning
Web Components to bring custom Lightning Experience functionality directly into dashboards.
3. Transform Tabular Data with Repeater Widgets
Use repeater widgets to show select fields from a query in a scrollable list in your dashboard. Create a customized layout of text,
numbers, charts, and images in a repeater widget, and your dashboard users can scroll through a stylized view of query data.
4. Make Real-Time Decisions with an Input Widget
Perform speculative analysis to assess risk and develop recommendations for your business in real time. Use values from the input
widget as a data source, and see its effect on your dashboard metrics without manual calculations.
5. Create Dashboard Pages
Make the information on a dashboard easier to digest by chunking the content into multiple pages. And with fewer queries per
page, dashboard performance increases. With pages, you can tell a story by creating a dynamic pathway through your dashboard.
Depending on how you lay out your pages, you can also create some cool effects as you transition from one page to the next.
6. Add Widgets to the Dashboard
Widgets are the basic building blocks of a dashboard. In the dashboard designer, you can add different widgets to perform functions.
For example, widgets can calculate key performance indicators, filter dashboard results, visualize your data using interactive charts,
and show record-level details in tables.
7. Copy and Paste Widgets Across Dashboards
Copy widgets such as text and charts, then paste them in another dashboard and still keep the original widget orientation, styling,
and queries.
8. Manage Queries for Widgets
Queries return results that are displayed in widgets. For example, a number widget displays the result of a calculation that is defined
in a query. Queries can be built on a data source, like a dataset or a Salesforce object. They can also be “custom queries” created with
user-defined values.
9. Make the Dashboard Widgets Interactive
You can make the widgets in CRM Analytics dashboards interactive. For example, you can filter a widget to show only results for the
region that’s selected in a list widget. Or, the value of a number widget can change to red when it falls below a threshold. An
interaction can also provide progressive navigation and exploration, revealing detailed information with a single click action.
10. Set Initial Selections and Global Filters in the Dashboard
Set the initial selections and global filters that appear when the dashboard first opens. To analyze the results from a different angle,
the dashboard viewer can change the initial selections and, if configured, global filters while viewing the dashboard.
11. Generate Unique CRM Analytics Dashboard Layouts for Different Devices
After you add widgets to a dashboard, optimize it for viewing on smaller screens. For example, remove widgets from a layout for
on-the-go mobile users, and rearrange widgets for users with tablet-sized screens.
1406
12. Optimize Dashboard Performance

Before you finalize the dashboard, run a performance check on the dashboard and its queries to ensure that everything is running
optimally. The dashboard inspector identifies different types of bottlenecks, such as slow queries and networks, and provides
recommendations to improve performance. Because dashboard layouts can contain different widgets (and queries), run the inspector
on each layout. If a dashboard contains multiple pages, you can run the inspector for all pages. The inspector initially provides results
only for the current page.
13. Keyboard Shortcuts for Building CRM Analytics Dashboards and Lenses
You can do some basic actions from your keyboard.
14. Restore a Previous Version of a Dashboard
CRM Analytics uses version history to back up dashboard versions when you edit them so you can restore a previous version.
15. Collaborate on a New Dashboard Version Behind the Scenes
CRM Analytics users can add themselves to the list of dashboard publishers so they can edit and test new versions of the dashboard.
Other CRM Analytics users continue to see a live version until a publisher makes the draft the live version.
SEE ALSO:
Best Practices for Building Your Own CRM Analytics Dashboard
Create a CRM Analytics dashboard with a Template

Dashboard templates speed your analytics development by automatically creating dashboards.
USER PERMISSIONS
Some provide blank layouts that you populate with data, while other “smart” templates create
dashboards that require little to no additional configuration. To create a dashboard:
Watch a Demo: Quickly Create Wave Dashboards with Templates (English Only) • Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
Each dashboard template provides a prebuilt layout with empty widgets, sections, and a color
scheme. Use the widget wizards to populate the widgets with your data. Choose the blank template
if you prefer to create your own layout.
Choose smart templates to create complete dashboards already populated with your data. They also include a configuration wizard to
guide you through the creation process. You don’t have to create queries or do any manual configuration—just answer a few questions
about the data you’d like to include.
1. From the home page, select Create > Dashboard.
1407
2. Choose Blank Dashboard or Dashboard from Template, and click Create.

3. Choose the template to use from the template picker. The SMART icon in the upper-right corner of a template thumbnail designates
a smart template.
1408
4. If you use a smart template, follow the instructions in the wizard. They prompt you to choose datasets and the specific data to display
in the dashboard.
Important: Creating dashboards from smart templates requires the ‘Use Any API Client’ permission. Without that permission,
you may not see all available datasets in the wizard.. To assign that permission, request API Access Control from Salesforce
Customer Support. See Restrict Access to APIs Connected Apps.
5. If you use a traditional template, add a query to each widget by clicking the icon inside the empty widget. A wizard guides you
through adding the query. When you complete the wizard, CRM Analytics populates the widget based on the results of the query.
CRM Analytics also adds the query to the query panel. If you use a smart template, you’re asked a set of questions about your data
before CRM Analytics creates the dashboard. Dashboards created from smart templates usually don’t require any more configuration
work, but you can customize them as you would any other dashboard.
6.
To set the dashboard properties, click and then click Dashboard Properties.
The dashboard properties include the default widget properties, which you can use to ensure that the background and borders of
all widgets are consistent. When you create a widget, you can specify whether the widget uses these default properties.
1409
7. To save the dashboard, click , enter a title and description. Also enter a brief description in the Version History field to help you
remember what’s unique about it in case you ever want to revert to it. For example, since it’s the first version, enter Original.
Select the app in which you want to save the dashboard, then click Save.
The permissions on the app determine each user’s access to the dashboard. To ensure that the right users have the right access to
the dashboard, review the app permissions.
These properties apply to a dashboard designer dashboard. Some of them are the default widget properties that you can apply to
each widget to ensure a consistent appearance.
Smart Dashboards
Use a smart dashboard template to create a ready-made dashboard that’s prepopulated with your Salesforce data.
Follow best practices to design and build useful, effective CRM Analytics dashboards, while minimizing rework and addressing
potential gaps.
1410
These properties apply to a dashboard designer dashboard. Some of them are the default widget properties that you can apply to each
widget to ensure a consistent appearance.
General
Select Available on mobile to show this dashboard in the Analytics mobile app. When not selected, mobile users can’t access this
dashboard. Use this option to hide dashboards that don’t perform well on the mobile app.
Widget Default Properties
Background Color Default background color for widgets
Border Default border around widgets
Border Color Default color for widget borders
Border Width Default width of widget borders (in pixels)
Border Radius Default roundness of the corners of widget borders
Smart Dashboards
Use a smart dashboard template to create a ready-made dashboard that’s prepopulated with your Salesforce data.
The CRM Analytics dashboard template picker includes the following smart dashboards. Each one lets you select data from an individual
CRM Analytics dataset to include in the dashboard. After selecting the template to use, follow a series of wizard questions to indicate
specific fields, dimensions, measures, and so on, to display in visualizations.
1411
• Performance Summary. Compares metrics side by side, across a single dimension. The wizard lets you select metrics to display, such
as sales revenue, product mix, or geography. Also select dates to trend the data over a certain period, and indicate how to group
the data.
• Metrics Trend. Visualize how metrics change over time with customized filters. Select the metrics to display, such as revenue, profit,
or quantity, and the time period to trend the data.
• Table Expansion. Visualize how metrics change over time with customized filters. The dashboard details table expands into a full
page. Select measures dimensions to include in the dashboard and the time period to trend the data.
• Time Series. Look at future metrics trends based on historical data. The template gives you the option of using the SAQL timeseries
function. Select measures dimensions to include in the dashboard and the time period to trend the data.

Follow best practices to design and build useful, effective CRM Analytics dashboards, while minimizing rework and addressing potential
gaps.
• Before you build the dashboard, take into account the following design best practices:
– Sketch your dashboard on paper or a whiteboard before you start building.
– Prioritize elements, top left to bottom right. With languages that are read left to right, people start by looking at the top left
corner and working their way down. Consider the audience’s language and design for it. If your audience has limited time or
attention, place important elements where they will be noticed.
– Place high-level, easy-to-read, actionable widgets near the top left, and place widgets with supporting information lower. For
example, place numbers that display a single measure, such as revenue for the current quarter, high and to the left.
Highlight facts that the audience wants to know at a glance.
– Group filters together at the top or left so that they are quickly noticeable. You can use a container widget to section them off
in the dashboard.
– Keep in mind that a chart in CRM Analytics is primarily a way to ask questions, not a way to illustrate a conclusion. A good
dashboard invites the audience to drill down and seek ever more focused and useful information.
– Choose chart types based on the characteristics of the data, not for look or variety. For example, if most of your charts display
value changes over time, it’s OK if they’re all line graphs.
– If a chart seems to need a lengthy caption or title, reconsider whether the chart is doing its job. Well-chosen data often speaks
for itself.
– Use container widgets to frame and organize related elements in the dashboard.
• While you build the dashboard:
1412
– Apply labels to sections and charts to annotate the dashboard.
– Use colors to define sections.
– Don’t clutter the dashboard—leave some empty space. If needed, break a dashboard into a series of dashboards, using link
widgets to help the user navigate them.
– Consider turning on high contrast colors to enable accessibility standards on your dashboards.
• After you build the dashboard:

– Have users review the dashboard before making it final. You can post a dashboard to Chatter to get feedback. Users can annotate
the widgets in the dashboard to have conversations about the content.
SEE ALSO:
1413
Create and Manage Dashboards with Reusable Components

Dashboard components are a type of dashboard widget that can contain other widgets, pages, and Lightning Web Components. Use
dashboard components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards. Use Lightning Web
Components to bring custom Lightning Experience functionality directly into dashboards.
You can create managed packages of CRM Analytics dashboard components to distribute those assets to other users within or outside
your company. You can also use change sets to move dashboard components between orgs that have a deployment connection.
Watch a Demo: Save Time Creating and Managing Dashboards with Reusable Components (English Only)
Dashboard Components Best Practices and Considerations

Learn whether dashboard components are right for you and how to use them effectively.
Create and Reuse Dashboard Components
Use dashboard components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards.
Edit Dashboard Components
When you edit a component that’s used in other dashboards, you can edit the original component or make a copy. If you edit the
original component, keep in mind that changes are applied wherever the component is used.
Preview and Save Dashboard Components
Preview and save components the same way you preview and save a dashboard.
Delete Dashboard Components
If you delete a component that’s used in other dashboards, keep in mind that you’re deleting the contents of the component only.
The component will be empty wherever it’s used in other dashboards. To completely delete a component in other dashboards,
open and delete the component in dashboards that use it.
Manage Global Filters in Dashboard Components
Global filters let you apply the same filter to multiple queries in a dashboard, or components in a dashboard.
Manage Datasets in Dashboard Components
You can control whether components inherit data source linking from the dashboard in which the component is created.
Add Lightning Web Components to the Dashboard
Lightning Web Components allow you to create customized reusable extensions for use anywhere in Lightning Experience. Use
these same components directly in your dashboards, to create an interactive experience between your custom extensions and your
CRM Analytics data.
Add Lightning Reports to Your Dashboards with Direct Report Queries
Unify your analytics by incorporating tabular, summary, aggregate, and matrix reports in your CRM Analytics dashboards for a single
and consistent experience.
Considerations for Direct Report Queries
Keep these considerations in mind when adding Lightning reports to CRM Analytics dashboards.
Use Parameters to Make Components Dynamic
Parameters are configurable options that adjust a component's behavior and appearance according to specific requirements or
preferences without rebuilding the component.
Dashboard Components Best Practices and Considerations

Learn whether dashboard components are right for you and how to use them effectively.
1414
What Exactly Is a Dashboard Component?

A dashboard component is the type of widget that dashboard builders use to group and reuse common parts of multiple dashboards.
Dashboard components aren’t used to package and distribute assets such as datasets and lenses. For information about analytics
components used to share CRM Analytics assets, see CRM Analytics Distribution and Packaging. Dashboard components can contain
another type of custom web component that’s built using HTML and JavaScript. For information about web components, see Add
Lightning Web Components to the Dashboard on page 1418.
What Makes Dashboard Components Special?

• They’re efficient. You can build and manage the common parts of multiple dashboards in one place.
• They give your dashboards a consistent look and feel. Create a uniform and consistent experience for your users by building and
managing dashboard components.
• They’re collaborative. Build dashboards as a team when you share and reuse dashboard components.
Are Dashboard Components Right for You?

Look for repetition. Are there common elements such as logos or performance metrics in multiple dashboards? For example, your call
center teams use three dashboards to monitor cases for Silver, Gold, and Platinum accounts. Each dashboard is unique, but they likely
use the same company branding, filters, or groups of KPIs. Dashboard components are a great way to manage these common elements.
Use Dashboard Components Effectively

• Make a plan. Components are powerful because you can build them one time and reuse them everywhere. Take time to understand
how to optimize reusability across your dashboards before you start creating dashboard components.
• Create components that fulfill one purpose or contain a unique grouping of content. Components with too many parts or dependencies
are applicable to fewer dashboards.
• Make components that are easy to maintain. Make sure that other dashboard builders can understand your strategy. Consider naming
conventions. Give users access to the app where the dashboard component is saved so that they can see and edit the component’s
contents.
Dashboard Components Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when using dashboard components.
• You can add up to 10 dashboard components to a dashboard, and each dashboard component can contain up to 20 pages.
• Layouts aren’t supported in dashboard components.
• You can save components in a private app or in shared apps. Keep in mind that components saved in a private app can be used in
other apps, but the contents of the component are visible only by you.
• If you delete a component that’s used in other dashboards, keep in mind that you’re deleting the contents of the component only.
The component is empty wherever it’s used in other dashboards.
• To make elements within a dashboard component interact with other elements of a dashboard, including filters in embedded
dashboards, set the dashboard component to “Allow filtering and faceting”. Deselect the "Allow filtering and faceting" check box if
you don’t want the component to be filtered or to filter other dashboard widgets outside of this component.
• When you create a dashboard component, size the component so that the widgets within the component fill up the horizontal
space inside the component border.
• To avoid multiple scroll bars on containers and contents in dashboard components, size widgets to show all available content.
1415
• Copying and pasting a dashboard component is different than copying and pasting a standard widget. When you copy and paste
a component, the newly created component uses the same query as the original component. When you copy and paste a standard
widget, you create a copy of the query used by the new widget.

Use dashboard components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more
USER PERMISSIONS
in multiple dashboards.
Watch a Demo: Save Time Creating and Managing Dashboards with Reusable Components To create a dashboard:
(English Only) • Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
1. To create a dashboard component, drop a component widget ( ) onto a dashboard.
2. Click the component. You can create a new component, or use an existing one.
When you save a component, you can use it in other dashboards as much as you want.
Tip: If your component contains multiple pages, you can select which page to show as the default initial page of the component.
Note: Layouts aren’t supported in dashboard components.
SEE ALSO:
Edit Dashboard Components

When you edit a component that’s used in other dashboards, you can edit the original component or make a copy. If you edit the original
component, keep in mind that changes are applied wherever the component is used.
1. To edit a component, open a dashboard that contains the component you want to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Select the component you want to edit and click Edit Component in the widget properties.
The component opens in a new tab.
Preview and Save Dashboard Components

Preview and save components the same way you preview and save a dashboard.
Example: With the dashboard component open in CRM Analytics, click Preview or Save.
Tip: You can save components in a private app or in shared apps. Keep in mind that components saved in a private app
can be used in other apps, but the contents of the component are visible only by you.
Delete Dashboard Components

If you delete a component that’s used in other dashboards, keep in mind that you’re deleting the contents of the component only. The
component will be empty wherever it’s used in other dashboards. To completely delete a component in other dashboards, open and
delete the component in dashboards that use it.
1. To delete a component, open a dashboard that contains the component you want to delete.
1416
2. Click Edit ( ).
3. Select the component you want to delete.
4. Click More ( ), and then select Delete.

Global filters let you apply the same filter to multiple queries in a dashboard, or components in a dashboard.
To manage global filters in components, click the global filters icon ( ), then select COMPONENT in the sidebar.
When components and dashboards contain global filters that use the same field, dashboard global filters override global filters in
components.
Note: If two components in the same dashboard have global filters on the same field, the filter applied is based on the alphanumeric
order of the components’ API names. For example, a global filter in a component with a name “corporate_info_1” takes precedence
over a global filter in a component named “corporate_info_2”. To change which global filter is used in components, clone and
rename the component with the global filter you want applied. Make sure the component’s API name precedes other component
API names in alphanumeric order.
SEE ALSO:

You can control whether components inherit data source linking from the dashboard in which the component is created.
To manage data filtering and faceting in a component, select a component and then select or deselect the Allow Filtering and Faceting
check box.
When selected, filtering and faceting is available in both the dashboard and components in the dashboard. When deselected, filtering
and faceting is available in the dashboard only.
Keep these considerations in mind when managing components and datasets.
• Components follow all dashboard-level data viewing, editing, and security rules.
• You can use data source linking to facet data in components the same way you facet data in dashboards. Use the dashboard designer
to link datasets in components.
• Component access is based on app access. If you have access to an app, you also have access to components and datasets in that
app.
• Components saved in a private app aren't available to other users or public apps, which means the component can be used in other
apps, but its contents are visible only by you.
SEE ALSO:
Configure Cross-Dataset Faceting with Connected Data Sources
1417
Add Lightning Web Components to the Dashboard

Lightning Web Components allow you to create customized reusable extensions for use anywhere in Lightning Experience. Use these
same components directly in your dashboards, to create an interactive experience between your custom extensions and your CRM
Analytics data.
You can add any custom Lightning Web Components you create to your CRM Analytics dashboards to bring in your own custom widgets
and extensions. To learn how to create a custom Lightning Web Component, see the Lightning Web Components in CRM Analytics
Dashboards developer guide.
To add your custom Lightning Web Component to a dashboard:
1. Drop a component widget ( ) onto a dashboard.
2. Select the Lightning Components tab.
3. Select the Lightning Web Component that you want from the list of components. If no custom Lightning Web Components are
available, the list is empty.
4. Click Done.
The custom Lightning Web Component can have attributes that must be specified for the component to function as expected. To set
the component attributes:
1. Select the component that you want to edit and show Component Attributes menu in the widget properties.
2. Set the attributes for your custom Lightning Web Component. Each Lightning Web Component defines different attributes.
Click Preview or Save. Test and update the custom Lightning Web Component and the dashboard as needed. With each update to
the component, a full refresh of the dashboard is required to render the changes.
Add Lightning Reports to Your Dashboards with Direct Report Queries

Unify your analytics by incorporating tabular, summary, aggregate, and matrix reports in your CRM Analytics dashboards for a single and
consistent experience.
By adding Lightning reports to your dashboards, you can apply CRM Analytics functionalities to visualize report insights in different ways.
You can learn more about Lightning reports in Salesforce Help.
Add Lightning reports to a CRM Analytics dashboard
1. With a dashboard open in edit mode, click Create Query.
2. Click the Report tab to see available reports.
3. Choose a report.
1418
4. Add a widget to your dashboard, such as a table widget.

5. Drag the Lightning report query you created onto the widget in the dashboard.
6. Select the widget and then click the Query tab to control how report data is displayed in the widget.
7. Choose a view option in the View As dropdown.
• Aggregate—Hides details; individual records don’t display in the report.
• Grouping—summary formulas, and record counts remain visible (tabular format).
• Summary—Shows data in a combined chart and table format. Reports must be grouped by rows (summary report).
When you create a CRM Analytics query from a report, the query is created based on the currently saved version of the report. To edit
groupings and fields in a report that’s used in a CRM Analytics dashboard, modify the report using report builder, save the report, and
then refresh the dashboard in CRM Analytics.
1419
Considerations for Direct Report Queries

Keep these considerations in mind when adding Lightning reports to CRM Analytics dashboards.
• You can visualize report data in any dashboard widget except for date and range widgets. Currently, tabular and summary report
formats are supported.
• When you change and save a report, those changes are visible in dashboards that use the report.
• Direct report queries support faceting, binding, data source linking, and saved views. Targeted faceting using direct report queries
isn’t supported.
• Some report functionality isn’t available in a CRM Analytics dashboard, including record actions and column-level sorting. Also, direct
report queries aren’t available in CRM Analytics notifications, subscriptions, and watchlists.
• Formula fields in a report only appear with the Grouping view. Formula fields don’t appear in the Details and Summary views.
Use Parameters to Make Components Dynamic

Parameters are configurable options that adjust a component's behavior and appearance according
EDITIONS
to specific requirements or preferences without rebuilding the component.
Watch a Demo: Get Multiple Use Cases With Components Using Parameters Available in Salesforce
Parameters enhance component reusability by providing benefits that include customization
Experience.
options, flexibility to handle different scenarios, and configurability. By using parameters effectively,
components become versatile and adaptable building blocks that can be reused across various Available with CRM
projects and contexts, saving development time and effort. Analytics, which is available
Benefit Description Enterprise, Performance,
Customization Parameters provide a way to customize the behavior and appearance available in Developer
of a component. By defining parameters for various aspects of a Edition.
component, such as format changes or query options, you can make
the component more adaptable to different use cases. Use stakeholder
input for these parameters to tailor components to specific business
USER PERMISSIONS
needs without recreating the underlying component. To create a parameter:
Flexibility Parameters allow components to handle different data inputs. For • Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
example, a component with a table can have parameters for the
column configuration, sort options, and filter criteria. By defining these
parameters, the component can be reused with customized
configurations making it adaptable to a wide range of scenarios.
Parameters can also enable interactions with dashboards, such as
passing a dashboard filter selection to a component.
Configurability Parameters allow dashboard builders to configure components

without starting over. By exposing configurable parameters, the
component can be easily adjusted to fit specific requirements,
promoting reusability across projects without the need for extensive
modifications.
1. To create a parameter, edit an existing component or create one.

2. Create a widget or select an existing widget in the component.
1420
3. Click Advanced Editor.

4. Click the Create Parameter link.
5. Add a parameter label, optional description, and a default value that’s used if no other value is found.
6.
Click Create. The parameter ID is automatically saved to the clipboard. You can also use the button.
After a parameter is created it’s now ready to be inserted in the component’s widget and query properties.
7. Click Close.
8. Click the Widget and Query tabs and paste the copied parameter to the applicable properties.
1421
9. Click Save.
Example: This component is embedded in multiple sales dashboards that use the same metrics. However, dashboard stakeholders
want to see the component presented in different ways, such as grouping the bar chart by province or account owner. This type
of request often required recreating the component.
Instead, you can make the applicable widget and query properties dynamic to enable the desired chart organization.
Note: Use CTRL/CTL+F to locate the values you want to update.
1422
The component chart can now accept new field values to group by without recreating the component.
Note: Parameters only support text and numeric values. When using query fields as text, its case must match the field as
it appears in the dataset to be recognized.
Parameter Value Type

Parameters offer a versatile way to reuse components and manage how updates are implemented according to your requirements.
Use a Parameter with a Dynamic Value Type
In this example a parameter is added to enable a dashboard filter to update a component chart by Industry selections.
Use a Parameter with a Static Value Type
In this example a parameter is added to the appropriate widget and query values to update a component chart by different groupings.
Use a Parameter to Update a Query
In this example dashboard stakeholders want the flexibility to add filter values and fields to a single column in a table. This type of
request can be complicated because it requires passing data to a portion of a query. However, you can insert a parameter into the
column filter to be updated with desired values and fields. The parameter can be set up to work as a static or a dynamic value type.
1423
Manage Parameters
You can edit parameters to make minor adjustments or change for a different use, and delete them when they’re no longer needed.
SEE ALSO:
Interactions in Dashboards
Parameter Value Type

Parameters offer a versatile way to reuse components and manage how updates are implemented according to your requirements.
Value type, in parameter settings, defines acceptable parameter values and how they’re used to update the component.
Value Type Description

Dynamic Set up parameters to enable components to interact with dashboard queries. For example, update a
component using dashboard filter selections.
Static Use parameters to update component elements with queries or freeform text. For example, update a
component’s chart groupings using a manually added field or data from a query.
You can easily configure parameters to interact with dashboards.
You can also configure parameters to respond to fixed inputs.
1424
Use a Parameter with a Dynamic Value Type

In this example a parameter is added to enable a dashboard filter to update a component chart by
EDITIONS
Industry selections.
Experience.
Available with CRM

1. Create a parameter in the component widget and copy its parameter ID. Edition.
2. Add the parameter to the filter. Click the Query tab and paste the copied parameter ID to the
filters value. USER PERMISSIONS
To create a parameter:
• Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
3. Save the component.

4. Edit the dashboard where the component is embedded.
5. Click the updated component widget and click the Parameters tab.
1425
6. Click the parameter you created.
7. Select Dynamic from the Value Type dropdown menu.
1426
8. Click Choose Query and select the filter query for the component to interact with.
9. Select a field value from the New Value menu that the component filters by.
10. Select an interaction type then click Update.
11. Dashboard filter selections now update the component.
1427
SEE ALSO:
Interactions in Dashboards
Use a Parameter with a Static Value Type

In this example a parameter is added to the appropriate widget and query values to update a
EDITIONS
component chart by different groupings.
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
1. Create a parameter in the component and copy its parameter ID. To create a parameter:
2. To update the grouping, click the Widget tab and paste the copied parameter to the • Create and Edit Analytics
dimensionAxis value in columnMap. Dashboards
3. Click the Query tab and paste the copied parameter to the orders, groups, and dimensionAxis values.
1428
4. Save the component.

5. Edit the dashboard where the component is embedded.
7. Click the parameter you created and select Static from the Value Type dropdown menu.
8. Add a field value in the text box and click Update.
1429
Note: The field value must exist in the component query otherwise you could get an error.
9. The parameter groups the component with the new field value.
1430
SEE ALSO:
Use a Parameter to Update a Query

In this example dashboard stakeholders want the flexibility to add filter values and fields to a single
EDITIONS
column in a table. This type of request can be complicated because it requires passing data to a
portion of a query. However, you can insert a parameter into the column filter to be updated with Available in Salesforce
desired values and fields. The parameter can be set up to work as a static or a dynamic value type. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create a parameter:
Dashboards
1431
1. Create a query with at least two measures (columns) and one grouping in the component.
2. Add a filter to the column to be filtered.
3. Switch the query to Query Mode and click Done.

4. Add the query to a Table widget in the component.
5. Select the query in the component and click Advanced Editor.
6. Create a parameter and add a default filter field and value the component query can process, such as
‘Product_Category’==”Furniture”.
7. Click the Query tab and replace the existing filter in the SAQL statement with the parameter.
Note: Make sure there are no escape (‘\’) symbols in the parameter default value.
8. Save your changes and the component.

9. Edit the dashboard the component is embedded in.
11. Click the parameter you created and select Static from the Value Type dropdown menu.
1432
12. Add your desired filter condition by typing in a filter field and filter value in the text box.
13. Click Update.
Data from the parameter now powers the filter portion of the query. Notice the parameter is filtering only the Sum of Sales column.
Note: The filter field and value must exist in the component query otherwise no results appear.
The parameter can also be set up as a dynamic value type to accept commonly used filter conditions to update the column.
14. Add a filter widget to the dashboard.
15. Create a custom query. Add display values along with its corresponding filter fields and values.
16. Repeat steps 1 through 10 to set up the table and parameter.

17. Click the parameter and select Dynamic from the Value Type dropdown menu.
18. Click Choose Query and select the custom filter query.
19. Select the column that lists the filter fields and values from the New Value menu.
20. Select an interaction type then click Update.
The filter selections now update the Sum of Sales column.
Note: Note: The Selection Type for the custom query must be Single selection or Single selection (required).
SEE ALSO:
1433
Manage Parameters
You can edit parameters to make minor adjustments or change for a different use, and delete them
USER PERMISSIONS
when they’re no longer needed.
1. Edit a parameter To manage a parameter:
a. Edit a component and click Advanced Editor. Dashboards
b. Click the Parameters tab.
c. Click a parameter and add your changes .
d. Click Update.
a. Click Save when complete.
2. Delete a parameter
a. Edit a component and click Advanced Editor.
b. Click the Parameters tab.
c. Select a parameter and click Delete.
d. Click Save when complete.
Transform Tabular Data with Repeater Widgets

Use repeater widgets to show select fields from a query in a scrollable list in your dashboard. Create a customized layout of text, numbers,
charts, and images in a repeater widget, and your dashboard users can scroll through a stylized view of query data.
1434
Create a Repeater Widget

A repeater widget is easy to create because you make just one custom layout using fields from a row of data. For each row of data
in a query, the custom layout repeats in a scrollable list.
Change the Layout and Style of a Repeater Widget
Fine-tune your repeater widget layout and stylize its content.
Use One-Click Actions from Repeater Widgets
When you add an actionable dataset field to a text widget in a repeater widget, the text in the widget becomes a one-click action.
Add Style to Your Toggles with the Repeater Widget
Liven up your dashboard toggles using a repeater widget instead of a toggle widget. With a repeater widget, you can add images
to provide visual cues for the available toggle states, change the text position, and add emoji to the text.
Highlight Repeater Widget Content with Conditional Formatting
Make key data in repeater widgets stand out by adding conditional formatting rules to text, numbers, charts, or images. For example,
highlight countries with opportunity amounts less than 3 million dollars in the Opportunities dashboard that’s set up with a repeater.
You can apply the same rule or a separate one for each widget in the repeater based on a value or range.
1435
Create Tooltips for Repeater Widgets

For a quick review of related data while reviewing metrics in a scrollable layout, add tooltips to a repeater. You can design a separate
tooltip for text, numbers, images, and bullet, gauge, polar gauge, or flat gauge charts in the repeater. The options available vary
depending on the widget type. For example, on a number widget, you can choose a default or custom tooltip, while you can include
custom text, data point details, and visualizations in a chart widget’s tooltip.
Sort Contents in a Repeater Widget
View metrics in the order that you want by sorting repeater cards at run time.
Delete a Repeater Widget
You can delete a repeater widget and its content.
Repeater Widget Considerations
Keep these considerations in mind when using repeater widgets.
Create a Repeater Widget

A repeater widget is easy to create because you make just one custom layout using fields from a
USER PERMISSIONS
row of data. For each row of data in a query, the custom layout repeats in a scrollable list.
1. Add a repeater widget to your dashboard (1), and then add a query (2). For best results, use a To create a dashboard:
grouping in your query, such as a compare or pivot table. • Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
2. Add and arrange text, numbers, charts, and images.
1436
When you add a widget to a repeater widget, you see values from the first row of query data.
When you’re done, your customized layout repeats in a scrollable list.
1437
To preview repeater widget content, change the size of the repeater widget container. Adjust the layout if needed, and click Done
to save your repeater widget content.
Change the Layout and Style of a Repeater Widget

Fine-tune your repeater widget layout and stylize its content.
Control a repeater widget’s layout when adding content. For example, change the size of the repeater widget grid for more granular
control of spacing within a repeater widget.
1. To adjust the repeater widget grid, select the Style tab when you’re editing repeater widget content.
1438
You can add additional columns (1), and set row height to Fine (2) for more granular control. You can also adjust the horizontal and
vertical spacing (3) between cells.
You can stylize the repeater widget the same way you stylize standard widgets. For example, adjust background color, border color,
and border width and radius.
When you’re done editing repeater widget content, you can make more adjustments to the layout.
2. To change the number of data groupings that show horizontally, select the repeater widget in the Dashboard Designer.
By default, a repeater widget shows one data grouping horizontally.
3. In the widget properties, expand the Content Layout section. Enter the number of data groupings to show in a row.
1439
The vertical height is automatically adjusted to show all widgets within the repeater widget.
Use One-Click Actions from Repeater Widgets

When you add an actionable dataset field to a text widget in a repeater widget, the text in the
USER PERMISSIONS
widget becomes a one-click action.
1. To enable one-click actions in repeater widgets, open Analytics Studio. To create a dashboard:
2. Use the dataset editor to create a values table. Include the dataset row identifier, such as Record Dashboards
ID, in the list of fields.
3. Assign an action to your chosen dataset field, such as opening a Salesforce record or invoking
a Visualforce page.
4. In the dashboard builder, open a lens and configure actions for the field (1) and column (2).
1440
Note: Actions enabled on the dataset don’t carry over to the repeater widget. For actions to work in the repeater widget you
must enable it on the column.
5. Then, in the dashboard builder, add the dataset field, such as Account_Name, to a text widget inside a repeater widget.
Now you can act directly from your dashboard. For example, create an event directly from an account.
1441
Add Style to Your Toggles with the Repeater Widget

Liven up your dashboard toggles using a repeater widget instead of a toggle widget. With a repeater widget, you can add images to
provide visual cues for the available toggle states, change the text position, and add emoji to the text.
You can use the toggle at the top of this dashboard (1) to highlight the quantity sold in these three product categories. Each toggle
option includes a photo representing the product category. When you click a toggle, that product category is highlighted in the bar
chart (2).
1442
Here’s how you do it.

1. Upload images to your gallery.
In the dashboard builder, use an image widget to upload the images that you want to use. You can place the image widget anywhere
on the dashboard. Click the image icon in the widget to open the Select Image window. Follow the on-screen instructions to upload
the first image. To add more images, click the image name in the Widget panel on the right of the dashboard builder.
After you upload all the images, copy their URLs to store in a text file for later use. In the Widget panel, click the image name to open
the Select Image window. On the Gallery tab (1), right-click each image and select Copy Image Address (2). Paste the image addresses
into the text file.
1443
When you’re done copying the URLs, close the image widget.
1. Create a query.
Use a compare table to create the query you want (1). In this example, for the data source, we use a dataset of quantities sold for each
product category. For Group By, select the field that you want to associate with the toggle action (2). The grouping in this example is
by product category.
3. Add a column for the image URLs using Query Mode.

In Query Mode (1), create a SAQL statement to associate each product category with the appropriate image, and store the URL in a new
Photo column (2). Use the URLs that you saved in the text file.
This SAQL statement was created for our example. Each product category is mapped to its image and added to the Photo column. You
can use this statement as a model when creating your own.
q = load "SuperStoreSales";
result = group q by 'Product_Category';
result = foreach result generate q.'Product_Category' as 'Product_Category', count(q) as

'A', (case 'Product_Category'
1444
when "Furniture" then "https://example.com/file-asset/furniturejpeg?v=1"

when "Office Supplies" then "https://example.com/file-asset/office_suppliesjpeg?v=1"
when "Technology" then "https://example.com/file-asset/technologiejpeg?v=1"
else "Unspecified"
end) as 'Photo';
result = order result by ('Product_Category' asc);

result = limit result 2000;
To confirm what you did, click back over to the compare table view. The image URLs are listed in the Photo column (1), and the new
grouping is on the left (2).
4. Design the repeater widget toggle.

Now design the repeater widget using the image URLs from the Photo column.
• Drag the repeater widget to the dashboard canvas.
• Drag your query from the right panel to the widget.
• Drag an image widget to the repeater. In the property panel, select Photo as the image source. Adjust the image scale to fit. Click
Done.
• Edit the repeater content again. Drag a text widget to the repeater widget. In the Widget panel on the right, change the text to
[Product_Category]. Add color and style. To add an emoji, right-click in the text area. When you’re finished, click Done.
• Under Content Layout in the right panel, enter three items per line so that the toggle options for this example are displayed side by
side.
That’s it! Save and preview the dashboard. When you click one of the toggles, the bar for that product category is highlighted.
1445
Tip: Use the techniques in this example to add images to any of your queries.
Highlight Repeater Widget Content with Conditional Formatting

Make key data in repeater widgets stand out by adding conditional formatting rules to text, numbers,
USER PERMISSIONS
charts, or images. For example, highlight countries with opportunity amounts less than 3 million
dollars in the Opportunities dashboard that’s set up with a repeater. You can apply the same rule To customize dashboard
or a separate one for each widget in the repeater based on a value or range. widgets:
1. In the dashboard designer, with the repeater widget selected, click Edit Repeater Content.
Dashboards
1446
2. In the repeater widget, select the widget that you want to add the conditional formatting rule to and, and then under Conditional
Formatting, click Add Rule.
To add a rule to an existing text widget in the repeater, modify the dashboard JSON.
3. Select the reference column (1) to base the conditional formatting rule on and the coloring method (2) to use.
1447
The reference column’s data type determines the available coloring method options. For example, when the reference column is a
measure or a derived measure, you can base the coloring method on a range (bins). When the reference column is a dimension,
you can base the coloring method on the dimension value or the reference column’s color style.
4. Use a similar process to apply conditional formatting rules to other widgets in the repeater widget.
To include symbols or custom images with conditional formatting rules, add an image widget to the repeater. For example, use
to indicate opportunity amounts less than 3 million dollars in the repeater widget.
1448
5. Preview your changes and save your dashboard.
1449
Create Tooltips for Repeater Widgets

For a quick review of related data while reviewing metrics in a scrollable layout, add tooltips to a
USER PERMISSIONS
repeater. You can design a separate tooltip for text, numbers, images, and bullet, gauge, polar
gauge, or flat gauge charts in the repeater. The options available vary depending on the widget To customize dashboard
type. For example, on a number widget, you can choose a default or custom tooltip, while you can widgets:
include custom text, data point details, and visualizations in a chart widget’s tooltip. • Create and Edit Analytics
Dashboards
1. In the dashboard designer, with the repeater widget selected, click Edit Repeater Content.
2. In the repeater widget, select the widget to which you want to add the tooltip, and then click Tooltip.
3. Set tooltip content and its size (1). Preview the tooltip when done (2).
1450
4. Use a similar process to create tooltips for other widgets in the repeater widget.
5. Preview your changes and save your dashboard.
Sort Contents in a Repeater Widget

View metrics in the order that you want by sorting repeater cards at run time.
1. Click the repeater widget and click the Sort By menu in the widget’s properties.
2. To add all dimension fields as sort options, select All Fields.
1451
3. To select fields to sort, select Pick Fields, and search or click the Select fields link.
4. Click Done.
5. To sort the cards in run time, click the repeater widget menu and select Sort by.
1452
Delete a Repeater Widget

You can delete a repeater widget and its content.
1. To delete a repeater widget, select it in the dashboard and click the delete icon.
2. To delete content from a repeater widget, click Edit Repeater Content in the Widget tab.
3. Select a widget and click the widget delete icon.
1453
Repeater Widget Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when using repeater widgets.
• To facet repeater widget data, use a query with a grouping. For example, use a Compare or Pivot table in your query.
• Changing the mode in a query used by a repeater widget can cause errors in the widgets used in the repeater widget. For example,
if you change a query from Table Mode to Chart Mode, the widgets within the repeater widget don’t show data.
• If a dashboard uses multiple layouts, such as mobile, tablet, and desktop, changes made to a repeater widget are shown in all layouts.
• When adding one-click actions, such as opening a Salesforce record, include the dataset row identifier, such as Record ID, in the
table to help locate the record.
• You can’t select a border color for a text widget in a repeater when setting a conditional formatting rule that applies to the field only.
Make Real-Time Decisions with an Input Widget

Perform speculative analysis to assess risk and develop recommendations for your business in real time. Use values from the input widget
as a data source, and see its effect on your dashboard metrics without manual calculations.
Watch a Demo: Make Real-Time Decisions with an Input Widget (English Only)
1454
Create an Input Widget

Speculative analysis starts by adding an input widget to the dashboard that captures numeric values to interact with other dashboard
widgets.
Change the Layout and Style of an Input Widget
Fine-tune the input widget layout, and stylize its content for the dashboard. Input style options depend upon the selected input
type.
Add the Input Widget to Formula Queries
Retrieving values from the input widget to use in a formula can be done through the UI. You can add the input widget as a column
in a query or with SAQL. The input widget works as a data source by collecting user inputs for use in other parts of the dashboard.
Create an Input Widget

Speculative analysis starts by adding an input widget to the dashboard that captures numeric values
USER PERMISSIONS
to interact with other dashboard widgets.
To create a dashboard:
Note: The input widget isn’t supported on mobile devices. An error message is displayed
on the input widget when a dashboard containing the widget is viewed. Dashboards
1. Add an input widget to your dashboard.
1455
2. In widget properties, use the Title field to add a label to the widget.
3. In Input Values, specify how to capture numeric values.
Input Type Definition

Slider Submit values using a slider handle and track.
Freeform Input Type in values manually.
4. Choose whether to display a percent or currency.

5. Add these settings.
Input Widget Setting Definition

Minimum Starting value of the input range. The default is 1.
Maximum Ending value of the input range. The default is 1.
Start Value Initial value when the input widget opens on a dashboard. The default is 1.
1456
Input Widget Setting Definition

Increments The value by which the input widget changes. This setting appears only for Slider input
types. The default is 1.
For slider input types, use the slider or click the pencil to add a value that’s within the input range.
For freeform input types, type in a value that’s within the input range.
1457
Change the Layout and Style of an Input Widget

Fine-tune the input widget layout, and stylize its content for the dashboard. Input style options depend upon the selected input type.
1. In the dashboard’s edit mode, select Input Style.
2. To change the style of a slider input type:
Input widget title (1), slider input range (2), slider handle (3), slider track (4), current slider value (5).
Slider Input Type Definition

Handle Color Color of the position indicator on the slider track
Track Color Color of the slider track
1458

Show current value Display the current slider value
Current Value Color Color of the current slider value
Title Color Color of the input widget title
Show values range Display the slider range
Values Range Color Color of the slider range
3. Set an input style for a freeform input type.
Input widget title (1), freeform input range (2), current freeform input value (3).

Active Value Color Color of the freeform input value
Input Border Color Color of the border around freeform input
Input Background Color Background color of the freeform input
1459

Title Color Color of the input widget title
Values Range Color Color of the freeform range
Add the Input Widget to Formula Queries

Retrieving values from the input widget to use in a formula can be done through the UI. You can add the input widget as a column in
a query or with SAQL. The input widget works as a data source by collecting user inputs for use in other parts of the dashboard.
Steps in this section show you how to add the input widget to a calculation through the UI. To learn more using the input widget with
interactions, see Create Interactions with Clicks
Add the Input Widget to a Formula Query

Use the input widget to build a formula in a new or existing query.
Add the Input Widget to a SAQL Query
Add the input widget to a new or existing query using SAQL.
Add the Input Widget to a Formula Query

Use the input widget to build a formula in a new or existing query.
2. Create a query or select an existing query for building your formula.
3. Edit the query you’re using to build your formula result.

4. Add a column to the query and select Input.
5. Search and select an input query.
1460
6. Add another column and select Formula.

7. Use the formula editor to create a calculation using values from the input query.
Add the Input Widget to a SAQL Query

Add the input widget to a new or existing query using SAQL.
2. Create a query or select an existing query for building your formula.
3. Edit the query you’re using to build your formula, and click Query Mode.
4. Position your cursor in the SAQL code where to add values from the input query, and click the Add Input link.
1461
Create Dashboard Pages

Make the information on a dashboard easier to digest by chunking the content into multiple pages. And with fewer queries per page,
dashboard performance increases. With pages, you can tell a story by creating a dynamic pathway through your dashboard. Depending
on how you lay out your pages, you can also create some cool effects as you transition from one page to the next.
Share widgets, queries, global filters, and selections across pages to keep the same focus as you go from one page to the next. For
example, a selection in one page also filters the results of the other pages.
Pages apply to the layout in which they’re created. When you create a layout, all pages in the current layout are copied to the new layout.
1. To add another page, click .
Each page appears as a separate tab. You can add up to 20 pages per dashboard. When you preview a page, it looks just like a
dashboard.
2. Click next to a page to configure it, like rename it or hide it from the navigation widget when a user views the dashboard.
3. To enable pages to link to each other, add a navigation widget that contains a tab for each visible page.
When a navigation widget is added, mobile users can no longer swipe to access other pages—they must use the navigation widget.
1462
Note: If you don’t add a navigation widget, mobile app users swipe to get to the next page. Use the Move Left and Move
Right actions to reorder the pages.
4. To create a path for viewers to navigate to a specific page, add a link widget. In the link widget properties, you can link to a dashboard,
page, query, lens, or web page.
5. To share widgets on other pages, select the widgets, click Add to Page, and then specify the pages.
For example, use it to add the navigation widget to all pages. When you use the Add to Page option to add a widget to another
page, you add an instance of the same widget to the page. Basically the widget is shared across both pages, making it easier to
maintain. The styling properties you set for the widget reflects across all pages.
1463
6. If needed, repeat these steps to set up pages for other layouts.

7. Save the dashboard to save changes to pages. When you save the new version, enter a brief description of the changes in the Version
History field. The description can help you remember what’s unique about this version of the dashboard in case you want to restore
this version after you make changes and save a new version. For example, enter Added Pages.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Link Widget to Link to Other Assets
Add Widgets to the Dashboard

Widgets are the basic building blocks of a dashboard. In the dashboard designer, you can add different widgets to perform functions.
For example, widgets can calculate key performance indicators, filter dashboard results, visualize your data using interactive charts, and
show record-level details in tables.
Watch a Demo: Get to Know Wave Dashboard Widgets (English Only)
Widgets that display data require a query. A widget determines how to use or display the results returned by a query. For example, a
query calculates the average opportunity amount, grouped by region. A bar chart widget displays the results in a bar chart format with
each bar showing the average opportunity amount for a region. If the query is faceted, when you select a bar in the chart, other widgets
are filtered, showing results for only the selected region.
Most widgets have a wizard that you can use to build the widget, including the underlying query. You can also build your own custom
query and apply it to a widget. Multiple widgets can use the same query, unless it's a date or range widget.
Clone widgets to create similar looking components in a CRM Analytics dashboard. For example, you can clone a chart widget and
change the chart type to get a different view of the same results. When you clone a widget, you also clone its query. You can also quickly
create three number widgets by cloning one of them and modifying their queries’ filters to show total open, total won, and total lost
1464
opportunity amounts. To clone widgets, remove queries, clone queries, and view query properties, select the widget while editing the
dashboard, and then click the appropriate button.
To configure how a widget appears, set the properties in the Widget tab. For example, you can show data values and the axis title for a
chart widget. You can also apply default properties to ensure that widgets look consistent, like having the same border and background
color.
To configure how the widget behaves, set query properties in the Query tab. For example, you can choose which measure to display
in the widget when its query contains multiple measures. Changes to query properties impact all widgets that are built on the query.
When you save the new version of your dashboard, it’s a good idea to enter a brief description of your changes to the Version History
field. The description can help you remember what’s unique about this version of the dashboard in case you want to restore this version
after you make changes and save a new version. For example, enter Added Number Widget.
Add Number Widgets to Include Key Metrics

Key metrics help you track critical measurements of your business. For example, you can show the total number of open cases or
total opportunity amount for the last quarter or the northern region.
Add Chart Widgets to Visualize Data
Charts in a CRM Analytics dashboard allow you to visually summarize and trend your data. For example, a donut chart can show the
distribution of opportunities across industry type.
Add a Global Filter Panel Widget to Filter Data from the Dashboard
The panel can contain single or multiple global filters. Use a global filter to apply the same filter to multiple queries in the dashboard.
For example, a dashboard has two charts comparing two sales reps’ performance. To compare apples to apples, both charts must
have the same filters. When possible, use a global filter instead of a selection-based filter to improve dashboard performance. If
configured, users can change a global filter while viewing the dashboard.
Add Selection-Based Filter Widgets to Enable Users to Filter the Results
Users viewing the dashboard can make selections in these types of widgets, which filter the results of other faceted widgets.
Selection-based filter widgets give users the ability to slice and dice the data to view results from different angles. For example, the
dashboard viewer can select a region in a list widget to focus the dashboard results on a specific sales location. Unlike with a filter
defined by a query, the viewer can filter the results differently (by making another selection) or remove the filter altogether.
1465
Add a Table Widget to Show Record Details and Create Calculated Columns
You can add different types of tables to a CRM Analytics dashboard. To view record-level details, add a values table. A values table
can show details like how long a case has been open and who owns it. To create custom columns in a table based on calculations
from existing fields, add a compare table. If the underlying query contains at least one grouping, you can create a pivot table.
Add a Container Widget to Create Sections in the Dashboard
Use a container in a CRM Analytics dashboard to group related widgets. For example, you can use a container widget to create a
filter panel on the left side of the dashboard to store all selection-based filter widgets. To distinguish the filter panel from the rest of
the dashboard, you can apply a background color and border to the container. When you move this widget, the contained widgets
also move while maintaining their spacing and alignment.
Add an Image Widget to Display Graphics in the Dashboard
You can include company logos to brand the CRM Analytics dashboard, icons to categorize results, or graphics to animate the
dashboard.
Enrich Your Data with Dashboard Text
Use text widgets to emphasize important data, make your dashboards more scannable, and tell a more compelling data story.
Add a Navigation Widget to Access Dashboard Pages
Give dashboard viewers an easy way to navigate dashboard pages with a navigation widget. Reuse your navigation widget for a
consistent look across dashboard pages.
Take dashboard viewers straight to where they need to go with links to specific assets, like dashboards, pages, queries, lenses, and
even web pages. You can also use links to create analysis paths for users to follow, helping them navigate your analytics app, or to
perform mass quick actions on record lists.
Widget properties define how widgets appear in the Analytics dashboard. For example, you can apply labels, backgrounds, and
borders. To make widgets look consistent, you can set up default widget properties in the layout and then assign them to each
widget. Widget properties vary based on the widget type and the designer used to create them. The properties listed here apply
only to widgets created in the dashboard designer.
Add Number Widgets to Include Key Metrics

Key metrics help you track critical measurements of your business. For example, you can show the total number of open cases or total
opportunity amount for the last quarter or the northern region.
The number widget requires a query that has at least one measure. If the query has multiple measures, you can choose which measure
to display in the widget properties—by default, the first measure shows. If you include groupings, the widget displays the measure for
the first group.
1. Drag the number widget to the dashboard canvas.
2. To open the wizard, click the button inside the widget.
One of the following screens appears.
• The Choose Data screen appears, showing the most recently used datasets first. Select the dataset in the Create Query tab or
select an existing query in the Use Existing Query tab.
1466
• The lens appears, showing a bar chart with the Count of Rows measure. CRM Analytics selects the dataset that you used to create
the previous query. To use a different dataset or an existing query, click Back.
3. In the lens, click Untitled Query and enter the query label.
CRM Analytics creates the query ID from the label. After you create the query, you can’t change the query ID. CRM Analytics refers
to queries by their ID so dashboards don’t break if you change the labels.
4. To add a measure, click + under the Bar Length field.
The Count of Rows measure shows, by default. To change a measure, click the measure and then choose a new one.
5. To sort, reorder, or delete a measure, click the down arrow to the right of the measure and select the option.
1467
Alternatively, to quick sort on a measure, click the measure’s field header. Quick sort isn’t available for charts with these underlying
queries:
• When the compact-form query has interactions present on the sort order
• When the SAQL query contains union statements or interactions
• When the query is in PIGQL
6. To add a filter, select Filters, click + under Filters, and then select the field to filter by.
You can add multiple filters.
1468
7. To delete the filter, click .

8. Click Done.
Behind the scenes, CRM Analytics created a query based on what you configured in the lens. CRM Analytics adds the query to the
query panel, making it available for use by other widgets in the dashboard. In addition, the widget shows the calculated measure.
9. To change the widget and query properties, select the widget.
The Widget panel groups the widget properties into sections. So that you don’t accidentally overlook any properties, expand any
collapsed sections.
For example, to shorten the number that appears in the widget, select Shorten number in the widget properties. Check out the
unit symbols for shortened numbers.
1469
Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
10. To customize the appearance of the widget, set the widget properties.
When you set a property, the widget immediately shows the effects of your change.
11. To show and set the query properties, click Query in the right panel.
12. To preview your changes to the dashboard, click the Preview button.
SEE ALSO:
Query Properties for Analytics Dashboard

Charts in a CRM Analytics dashboard allow you to visually summarize and trend your data. For example, a donut chart can show the
distribution of opportunities across industry type.
CRM Analytics supports multiple chart types. Each type has unique widget properties and query requirements. For details about each
chart type, see Visualizing Data With Charts.
1470
When previewing a dashboard, some charts show values in segments. Values appear as shortened numbers, rounded to the nearest
whole number. For example, 1,111,556 appears as 1 M, 999.95 appears as 1 K, and 111,045 appears as 111 K. You can hover over a
segment to view the actual value.
Check out the unit symbols for shortened numbers.
Symbol Unit Example

K Thousand (10^3) 4K = 4,000
M Million (10^6) 4M = 4,000,000
B Billion (10^9) 4B = 4,000,000,000
T Trillion (10^12) 4T = 4,000,000,000,000
P Quadrillion (10^15) 4P = 4,000,000,000,000,000
X Quintillion (10^18) 4X= 4,000,000,000,000,000,000
Z Sextillion (10^21) 4Z = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
Y Septillion (10^24) 4Y = 4,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000
m Thousandth (10^-3) 4m = 0.004
μ Millionth (10^-6) 4μ = 0.000004
n Billionth (10^-9) 4n = 0.000000004
p Trillionth (10^-12) 4p = 0.000000000004
z Sextillionth (10^-21) 4z = 0.000000000000000000004
y Septillionth (10^-24) 4y = 0.000000000000000000000004
1471
1. Drag the chart widget to the dashboard canvas.

1472

5. To sort, reorder, or delete a measure, click the down arrow to the right of the measure and select the option.
6. To group the measures by a date or dimension, click + under Bars, and then select the field.
You can add multiple groupings. To change a grouping, click the grouping and select a new field. To reorder or delete a grouping,
click the down arrow to the right of the grouping and then select the option.
1473
8. To change the chart type, click and the select the new one.
Although CRM Analytics saves the chart type with the query, you can override the chart type at the widget level by specifying a
different chart in the widget properties. Setting the chart type at the widget level is useful when you use the same query for multiple
widgets, but want to display the results differently in each widget.
9. Click Done.
CRM Analytics adds the query to the query panel, making it available for use by other widgets in the dashboard. In addition, the
widget shows the results in a bar chart.
collapsed sections.
1474
For example, add a title in the Title field.
For example, to enable this widget to filter other faceted widgets, select Broadcast selections as facets.
While viewing the dashboard, a user can select a segment of a chart to filter the results of other faceted widgets. To allow the viewer
to make single or multiple selections, configure this widget’s query properties. You can specify whether selections are optional or
required. You can also set an initial selection that applies when the dashboard opens. While viewing the dashboard, viewers can
undo the selection or change the selection to filter the results differently. For information about setting an initial selection, see Set
Initial Selections in the Dashboard .
13.
To preview your changes to the dashboard, click .
Project the Same Query Results Differently in Charts and Tables

If charts and tables use the same query, each widget can show a different set of fields from the query results. You can also specify a
different field order for each widget. For example, to change the measure that appears on each axis in a scatter plot, reorder the
measures for that widget.
SEE ALSO:
1475

different field order for each widget. For example, to change the measure that appears on each axis in a scatter plot, reorder the measures
for that widget.
different field order for each widget. For example, to change the measure that appears on each axis in a scatter plot, reorder the measures
for that widget.
The following compare table query shows multiple measures grouped by a dimension. The Expected Amount measure is calculated
based on the other two measures: Amount * Probability.
The following compare table query shows multiple measures grouped by a dimension. The Expected Amount measure is calculated
based on the other two measures: Amount * Probability.
1476
To show only the Expected Amount and Name fields for this widget, edit the widget and then select Hide for the other measures. (To
show a hidden field, select Show. To reorder a field, select Move Up or Move Down.)
The following example shows two charts based on the same query. The second chart shows the effect of hiding the other two measures.
1477
The Show and Hide options are only available for aggregateflex (for compare tables) and saql query types. To show or hide
fields for tables or charts based on other query types, configure the widget properties in the dashboard JSON. Add a “columns” attribute
and specify the API names of the fields that you want to appear in the widget.
"chart_2": {
"parameters": {
"columns": [ "Name", "C" ],
"visualizationType": "hbar",
"step": "Amount_Prob_1",
...
},
"type": "chart",
...
}
Consider the following guidelines when configuring the “columns” JSON property.
• If fields are listed in "columns" and you add a measure or grouping to the query, the new field doesn’t appear in the widget until
you add it to “columns.”
• If "columns" isn’t specified in the widget properties or is set to an empty array, the widget shows all fields available in the query
results.
• CRM Analytics ignores fields specified in “columns” that don’t exist in the query. If none of the fields in “columns” exist in the query,
the widget doesn’t show any fields.
• The order in which you specify fields in “columns” is the order in which they appear in the widget.
For charts and tables that use the same query, keep these behaviors in mind.
• If a chart widget’s underlying query returns multiple rows for the same grouping value, the chart only displays the first record for
each unique grouping value and ignores the rest. As a workaround, customize the query in SAQL form.
• In a lens or dashboard, when you hide one of the groups of a chart with multiple groupings, the chart is no longer grouped by the
hidden field.
Note: There are two ways to show, hide, or reorder columns. Do it by editing the query or editing the widget. If you perform
these actions at the query level, your changes impact all widgets that use the query and can break widgets that use the query. For
example, a widget breaks if you hide a required measure.
SEE ALSO:
1478
The panel can contain single or multiple global filters. Use a global filter to apply the same filter to multiple queries in the dashboard.
For example, a dashboard has two charts comparing two sales reps’ performance. To compare apples to apples, both charts must have
the same filters. When possible, use a global filter instead of a selection-based filter to improve dashboard performance. If configured,
users can change a global filter while viewing the dashboard.
Each global filter must be based on a single measure, dimension, or date field. You can’t create a composite filter based on multiple
fields, like Region=“West” and Industry= “CPG.”
If multiple datasets are linked using a data source connection, only one of the common fields used in the connection can be included
in a global filter. If you include multiple common fields, they can generate redundant, conflicting filters and not work properly. For
example, you connect the Opportunity dataset using the Account.Name field to the Account dataset using the corresponding Name
field. To filter based on account name, add one global filter based on either Account.Name from the Opportunity dataset or Name from
the Account dataset. Because the datasets are connected, the global filter applies to both datasets.
Global filters only apply to widgets that accept them. To apply global filters to a widget, select Apply global filters in the query properties
of the widget. By default, CRM Analytics applies global filters to all widgets that have queries based on the same dataset or connected
data sources.
1. Drag the global filter panel widget to the dashboard canvas.
An empty panel appears in the designer.
Note: If the dashboard contains a global filter created before Winter ’18, a pop-up message asks if you want CRM Analytics
to convert it to the new version. If you agree, CRM Analytics converts all global filters to the new design, showing all global
filters in a panel. During the conversion, CRM Analytics doesn’t add unsupported global filters to the new global filter panel
widget. Unsupported global filters are composite filters and invalid ones that reference datasets or fields that don’t exist. If you
don’t convert to the new design, you can continue to use the legacy global filter, but can’t add global filters to the dashboard.
2. To add a global filter to the panel:

a. In the global filter panel widget, click .
b. Select a dataset field and click Create.
To use a different dataset, click Change Dataset.
c. Select the filter operator and field values.

These filters apply when a user opens the dashboard.
1479
d. To prevent users viewing the dashboard from changing the global filter, select Locked.
The Locked option also ensures that incoming filters passed from a linked dashboard don’t override the global filter. If the global
filter is locked and the incoming filter is defined on the same field, CRM Analytics ignores the incoming filter. If it’s unlocked, the
incoming filter overrides the global filter defined in the dashboard.
e. To limit the global filter’s picklist values based on selections in other global filters, select Dependent.
For example, you select an opportunity in the Opportunity Name global filter. Only products sold in the selected opportunity
appear in the Product Name global filter picklist. The Dependent option applies to global filters that use the same dataset or a
connected data source.
f. Click Apply.
3. To change the widget properties, click the widget.

collapsed sections.

5. To edit a global filter in the panel, access the global filter panel by clicking the icon at the top of the dashboard.
For example, you might edit a global filter to change the selections.
6. To delete a global filter from the panel, click .

7. To delete all global filters from the dashboard, click Delete All Global Filters button in the Global Filters panel.
Note: If you delete the global filter panel widget, CRM Analytics removes the panel from the dashboard, but the global filters
still apply. To delete the global filters later, use the global filter property panel.
1480
SEE ALSO:

Users viewing the dashboard can make selections in these types of widgets, which filter the results of other faceted widgets. Selection-based
filter widgets give users the ability to slice and dice the data to view results from different angles. For example, the dashboard viewer
can select a region in a list widget to focus the dashboard results on a specific sales location. Unlike with a filter defined by a query, the
viewer can filter the results differently (by making another selection) or remove the filter altogether.
A selection-based filter is different from a query. When a selection is made, all values in the original query still appear in the widget, just
with particular values highlighted. However, a query modifies the widget, reducing the number of results that appear in the widget. A
global filter is a query that can be applied to multiple queries in a dashboard.
The following illustration shows the difference between a selection and a query on the same data.
You can create different types of selection-based filter widgets based on measure, date, and dimension fields. You can also set an initial
selection for each of them. For example, when the viewer opens the dashboard, the date widget can select last year, by default, to show
dashboard results for last year only.
Selection-based filter widgets can be styled using pill or combobox styling to easily mix-and-match selection-based filters and global
filters on the same dashboard.
1481
Add a Date Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Date

A date filter widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a selected date range. The
range can use relative dates based on UTC (like 2 years ago), absolute dates (like 1/15/2016), or presets (like Current Fiscal Year To
Date). For example, you can add a date widget to filter support cases, showing only cases that closed this month or last month.
Add a List Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Dimension
A list filter widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a dimension. For example, a list
widget can filter results based on a particular case status or region.
Add a Range Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Measure
A range widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a range of values for a measure.
For example, a range widget can show only opportunities with amounts between $100,000 and $900,000.
Add a Toggle Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Dimension
A toggle widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a date or dimension. For example,
a toggle widget can show results based on a specific record type.
SEE ALSO:
Set Initial Selections in the Dashboard
Add a Date Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Date

A date filter widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a selected date range. The range
can use relative dates based on UTC (like 2 years ago), absolute dates (like 1/15/2016), or presets (like Current Fiscal Year To Date). For
example, you can add a date widget to filter support cases, showing only cases that closed this month or last month.
The date widget requires a query that has a single grouping based on a date field.
1. Drag the date widget to the dashboard canvas.
The Select a Field screen appears, showing a list of all date fields in the specified dataset.
3. To use a different dataset, click Change Dataset.

4. Select the date field that you want to filter on.
5. Click Create.
1482
Behind the scenes, CRM Analytics creates a query grouped by the field that you selected. CRM Analytics adds the query to the query
panel, but you can’t reuse it in other widgets. CRM Analytics doesn’t apply any selections to the widget, by default.
collapsed sections.
7. In the widget properties, specify whether to show absolute, relative, or preset dates, select the default calendar type.
8. Use a List of presets for a fixed interval.
9. Specify whether users can switch calendar types while viewing the dashboard in Default Calendar Type.
Note: If you enable absolute and relative dates, absolute dates show by default. To show relative dates, by default, set an
initial selection based on a relative date.
12. Select applicable intervals. Use the Custom interval to switch calendar type or apply custom intervals, such as 60 days ago.
1483
Note: By default, Custom interval converts selected presets, such as Previous Fiscal Year, to a standard calendar date range
in the Absolute tab, which may not match your org’s fiscal year setting. To customize a fiscal preset, manually adjust the
absolute start and end dates in the Absolute tab or use settings in the Relative tab.

You can set an initial selection that applies when the dashboard opens. The selected range filters other faceted widgets. While viewing
the dashboard, viewers can change the selection to filter the results differently. For information about setting an initial selection, see Set
SEE ALSO:
Add a List Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Dimension

A list filter widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a dimension. For example, a list
widget can filter results based on a particular case status or region.
The list widget requires a query that has a single grouping based on a dimension. The values of the grouping appear as the values in
the list.
1484
Note: You can also create a custom query to specify a user-defined list of values for the list widget. For more information, see
Create a Custom Query with User-Defined Values.
1. Drag the list widget to the dashboard canvas.
The Select a Field screen appears, showing a list of all dimension fields in the specified dataset.

5. Click Create.
Tip: To create a user-defined list of values instead of using values from a dataset, click Customize.
panel, making it available for use by other widgets in the dashboard. In addition, by default, the list widget is collapsed and CRM
Analytics doesn’t apply any selections to the widget.
6. To expand the list and show more values, increase the size of the widget.
1485
Note: If you don’t expand the list, when a user views the dashboard, they can select the drop-down arrow to see the values
in the list.

collapsed sections.

While viewing the dashboard, a user can select a dimension in this widget to filter other faceted widgets. To allow the viewer to
make single or multiple selections, configure this widget’s query properties. You can specify whether selections are optional or
1486
SEE ALSO:
Add a Range Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Measure

A range widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a range of values for a measure. For
example, a range widget can show only opportunities with amounts between $100,000 and $900,000.
The range widget requires a query that has a single measure and no groupings.
1. Drag the range widget to the dashboard canvas.

The Select a Field screen appears, showing a list of all measure fields in the specified dataset.
1487

5. Click Create.
Behind the scenes, CRM Analytics creates a query with the measure that you selected. CRM Analytics adds the query to the query
panel, but you can’t reuse it in other widgets. CRM Analytics doesn’t apply any selections to the widget.
collapsed sections.

1488

The default range shown is the minimum to the maximum values of the measure.
You can set an initial selection that applies when the dashboard opens. The selected range filters other faceted widgets. While viewing
the dashboard, viewers can change the selection to filter the results differently. For information about setting an initial selection, see Set
SEE ALSO:
Add a Toggle Widget to Filter Dashboard Results Based on a Dimension

A toggle widget allows dashboard viewers to filter the CRM Analytics dashboard results based on a date or dimension. For example, a
toggle widget can show results based on a specific record type.
The toggle widget requires a query that has a single grouping based on a dimension. The values of the grouping appear as the toggle
options.
Note: You can also create a custom query to specify a user-defined list of values for the toggle widget. For more information, see
Create a Custom Query with User-Defined Values.
1. Drag the toggle widget to the dashboard canvas.
The Select a Field screen appears, showing a list of all dimension fields in the specified dataset.
1489

4. Select the dimension field to show each of its values as a toggle option.
5. Click Create.
panel, making it available for use by other widgets in the dashboard. CRM Analytics doesn’t apply any selections to the widget.
6. If needed, increase the size of the widget to show the display names of all toggle options.

collapsed sections.

For example, you can set the styling properties for all toggle options in the “General” section, except the selected option, which you
set under the “Selected Tab Style” section. You might choose different styling for the selected toggle option to indicate which option
is selected while viewing the dashboard.
1490
While viewing the dashboard, a user can select a toggle option in this widget to filter other faceted widgets. To allow the viewer to
make single or multiple selections, configure this widget’s query properties. You can specify whether selections are optional or
SEE ALSO:
You can add different types of tables to a CRM Analytics dashboard. To view record-level details, add a values table. A values table can
show details like how long a case has been open and who owns it. To create custom columns in a table based on calculations from
existing fields, add a compare table. If the underlying query contains at least one grouping, you can create a pivot table.
1491
The steps vary depending on the type of table you create. For a values table, choose which dataset fields to show as columns. For a
compare table, select which dataset fields to show as columns and define the calculations for custom columns. For a pivot table, define
at least one grouping. The values of the last grouping appear as columns.
1. Drag the table widget to the dashboard canvas.
1492
3. Select and then choose the table type.

Values table
Use to show dataset fields as columns. You can add, remove, or reorder columns. You can quick sort on a column by clicking its
field header. You can also add filters.
Compare table
Use to add calculated columns to the table. By default, the table shows the previously selected measure as the first column. You
can add measures and filters, and group by dimensions. To quick sort on a column, click its field header. To add a calculated
column, click the down arrow next to a measure, and select Clone Column and then edit the new column.
1493
For more information, see Creating Calculated Columns Using a Compare Table.
Pivot table
Use to show groupings on the x- and y-axes. The last grouping determines the columns, and the other groupings determine
the rows. The pivot table shows the first specified measure in the table cells. To quick sort on a column, click its field header.
4. To show totals in a values or compare table, click and then select Show Summary.
5. To increase the number of records that appear in a values table, click and change the limit parameter in the SAQL query.
Note: By default, the query for a values table widget returns up to 100 results. For more information about the limit
parameter, see CRM Analytics SAQL Developer Guide.
6. Click Done.
1494
The widget shows the table and results. CRM Analytics adds the query to the query panel.
collapsed sections.

The widget properties vary based on the table type.
10.
While viewing a dashboard, a table's groupings appear in the left columns (1) and the measures appear in the right ones (2). Although
the grouping columns are fixed, if needed, you can scroll across the measures. If your table isn't wide enough to display any measures,
you won't see the scrollbar.
Quick sort isn’t available for tables with these underlying queries:
• When the compact-form query has interactions present on the sort order
1495
• When the SAQL query contains union statements or interactions

• When the query is in PIGQL
• When subtotals are enabled
SEE ALSO:
Add a Container Widget to Create Sections in the Dashboard

Use a container in a CRM Analytics dashboard to group related widgets. For example, you can use a container widget to create a filter
panel on the left side of the dashboard to store all selection-based filter widgets. To distinguish the filter panel from the rest of the
dashboard, you can apply a background color and border to the container. When you move this widget, the contained widgets also
move while maintaining their spacing and alignment.
You can place any widget inside a container widget, except another container widget.
1. Drag the container widget to the dashboard canvas.
An empty container appears.
2. To change the widget properties, select the widget.
collapsed sections.

For example, apply a background color or image.
4. Drag other widgets inside the container.

You can increase the size of the container to fit more widgets.

SEE ALSO:
1496
Add an Image Widget to Display Graphics in the Dashboard

You can include company logos to brand the CRM Analytics dashboard, icons to categorize results,
USER PERMISSIONS
or graphics to animate the dashboard.
To upload image files to CRM Analytics, Chatter must be enabled in the org. To add images to CRM
Analytics dashboards:
You can also add images as backgrounds for container widgets and layouts. CRM Analytics in a web • Create CRM Analytics
browser supports .svg, .png. jpeg, .jpg, .gif, .bmp. The CRM Analytics mobile app supports all these Applications
file types, except .svg.
• Create and Edit CRM
Tip: To overlay one image on top of another, place an image widget inside a container Analytics Dashboards
widget. To display a background image for the entire dashboard, add a background image
in the layout properties. Click in the upper left corner to show the layout properties.
1. Drag the image widget to the dashboard canvas.
2. Click Image inside the image widget.
3. To upload a new image, click Browse Files. Or, select an uploaded image from the Gallery tab.
CRM Analytics uploads images to the gallery for the app displayed at the top-left corner of the screen. Each image file must be no
more than 2 GB.
Note: When moving a dashboard with images to another app with different users and permissions, the images must be
uploaded to the new app.

collapsed sections.
1497

Note: If the Image widget doesn’t render images, verify that third-party cookies in your browser are enabled.
SEE ALSO:
Enrich Your Data with Dashboard Text

Use text widgets to emphasize important data, make your dashboards more scannable, and tell a more compelling data story.
1. Drag a text widget ( ) onto your dashboard.
2. Type in the text box.
3. Select and format text.
Use standard and custom colors, adjust character size, and apply formatting to words and individual characters.
4. To format text that’s based on query data, first select and add the query field.
For example, add an [Account_Type] field (1). Then, highlight and format the text (2).
1498
5. When you’re done, save the dashboard.

Keep these considerations in mind when using enhanced text formatting.
• When you create a binding using a text widget, text widget controls are unavailable. Additional changes to text and text formatting
must be done using JSON.
• Conditional formatting colors take precedence over colors applied using a text widget. Although conditional formatting is defined
at the widget level, it gets applied at the query level. That means conditional formatting colors show up and override other colors
wherever the query is used, including in text widgets. Other formats, like bold and italic, show in query-based text along with
conditional formatting.
• Apply formatting to the entire portion of query-based text. For example, select and apply formatting to all of an “[Account_Type]”
query, including the brackets. If you select a portion of the query (such as “[Account_Ty”) and apply a format, the query changes to
plain text.
• The text widget doesn’t support multiple selections from a filter widget. By default the text widget uses the first value when multiple
values are selected from the filter widget.
SEE ALSO:
Add a Navigation Widget to Access Dashboard Pages

Give dashboard viewers an easy way to navigate dashboard pages with a navigation widget. Reuse your navigation widget for a consistent
look across dashboard pages.
For example, here’s a navigation widget that provides access to each of the 5 defined pages.
1499
1. Drag the navigation widget to the dashboard canvas.

The widget shows all pages in the dashboard. The underlined page in the widget is the one that you’re currently viewing.
2. To hide a page while viewing the dashboard, click and then Hide from Navigation.
Dashboard viewers see only visible pages. The link to the hidden page remains hidden from the navigation widget until you show
it again.
1500
3. From the same page menu, you can also move, rename, clone, and delete pages.
The order of the page tabs determines the order of the page links in the navigation widget.
Tip: To avoid truncation, keep page names short.
4. To set the widget properties, select the navigation widget.

For example, set the styling properties for all page links in the “General” section, except the selected page’s link. Set that under the
“Selected Tab Style” section. You can choose different styling for the selected page to indicate which page is selected while viewing
the dashboard.
5. To enable navigation from all pages, select the navigation widget that you created on this page and use the Add to Page action to
add it to other pages.
Using Add to Page ensures that all of the styling properties are consistent across pages.
1501


Take dashboard viewers straight to where they need to go with links to specific assets, like dashboards, pages, queries, lenses, and even
web pages. You can also use links to create analysis paths for users to follow, helping them navigate your analytics app, or to perform
mass quick actions on record lists.
In the CRM Analytics Studio, clicking a link widget in a dashboard opens the link in a new tab. In presentation mode and in the Analytics
tab (in Lightning Experience or Salesforce Classic), the link opens in the same window. For embedded dashboards, you can set a link to
open in the same or new window.
1. Drag the link widget to the dashboard canvas.
collapsed sections.
1502
3. In the Text field, enter the label that appears on the link widget.
4. In the Link To field, select whether you want to link to a query, lens, dashboard, page, URL, or mass action, and then select the asset.
If you link to a dashboard that has multiple pages, you can specify which page to view when the dashboard first opens.
a. To pass global filters and selection-based filters (also called facets) to a linked CRM Analytics asset, select Apply Selections and
Filters.
CRM Analytics passes selections in chart, list, toggle, range, and date widgets as selections in the linked asset if they apply. For
example, you select North America in a list widget based on the Region dataset field. CRM Analytics applies that same selection
to faceted queries in the linked dashboard that have a grouping based on the Region field in the same dataset.
Note: A selection is applied to a query in the linked dashboard only if the selected value exists in the initial result set for
that query. If your selection isn’t applied, try increasing the limit for the query in the linked dashboard so that the value
can be found.
CRM Analytics passes global filters as filters to a linked asset as long as the filters apply. CRM Analytics ignores a global filter if
the linked asset doesn’t use the dataset that the global filter is defined on. If the global filter is locked and the incoming filter is
defined on the same field, CRM Analytics ignores the incoming filter. If it’s unlocked, the incoming filter overrides the global filter
defined in the dashboard.
When you open a linked dashboard, the passed global filters appear as external filters. To view the external filters, click as
highlighted in the screenshot. The External Filters panel shows filters passed from linked dashboards (and filters preconfigured
in embedded dashboards). You can remove external filters while viewing the dashboard.
1503
To pass a filter selection to a linked asset, the asset must contain a query based on the same dataset and grouping used to define
the filter.
To pass a filter selection based on a custom query to a linked asset, the custom query must be linked to the dataset using a data
source connection. Also, the linked asset must contain a query based on the same dataset and grouping used to define the data
source connection.
1504
b. If the link is to a URL, enter the following properties.

• Destination: Enter the full URL. The URL field supports http, https, relative links, and dynamic links with bindings. It doesn’t
support passing Salesforce parameters in the URL, like Salesforce object or CRM Analytics dataset fields.
• Link Tooltip: Enter a description of the link or the URL so users know where the link takes them.
To create a relative link, enter a valid URL that starts with a slash. For example, use
/lightning/o/Account/list?filterName=Recent to open recently viewed accounts in Lightning Experience.
To create a dynamic link, click Advanced Editor in the link widget properties panel. Edit the JSON to add the
destinationLink with a url parameter that is a binding. The binding must be for an existing step that contains valid
URL values. An example binding is {{cell(step_1.selection, 0, \"url\").asString()}}, where url
is a valid URL.
1505
c. If the link is for a mass action, see Configure Mass Quick Actions on Multiple Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics Dashboards
for configuration steps.

SEE ALSO:

Widget properties define how widgets appear in the Analytics dashboard. For example, you can apply labels, backgrounds, and borders.
To make widgets look consistent, you can set up default widget properties in the layout and then assign them to each widget. Widget
properties vary based on the widget type and the designer used to create them. The properties listed here apply only to widgets created
in the dashboard designer.
General
Analytics groups widget properties into sections. After the first section (“General”), the remaining sections are listed in alphabetical order.
Chart Type Select the type of chart to visualize the data.
Show as pivot table Indicates whether the table is pivoted. A pivot table requires the underlying query to have at least
one grouping. Analytics pivots the table on the last defined grouping. Disabled, by default.
Show widget actions Hide a widget’s action menu, which includes options to download, share, and explore the widget’s
results. Hide the menu to hide these options or when the action dropdown arrow is too distracting
in smaller widgets.
1506
Show explore action Allow dashboard viewers to click a link in the widget to open the underlying query in a lens. This
option appears when you select Show widget actions.
Note: This option only applies to widgets based on queries in compact form. You can’t explore
widgets that are built on SAQL form queries or multiple datasets.
Title Title of the widget.
Subtitle Subtitle of the chart. Appears below the title in a smaller font.
Title Alignment Horizontal alignment of the title.
Title Color Color of title.
Title Size Font size of title.
Title Separator Color Color of the line that separates the widget title from the global filters.
Filters Per Row Number of global filters to show per row in the global filter panel.
Theme Set a color scheme for the chart.
Update instantly Instantly update the dashboard results based on a filter selection. Otherwise, you have to click Update
to apply the filter.
Measure Field The measure to show in the widget. You can use this field to specify the measure to show when
multiple measures are defined in the underlying query. You can also use this option to not show the
measure in the widget.
Shorten number Display shortened numbers, rounded to the nearest tenths place. For example, when shortened,
1,111,556 appears as 1.1 M, 999.95 appears as 1.0 K, and 111,045 appears as 111.0 K.
Text Widget label.
Link To Link to a dashboard, lens, query, page, or URL. If the dashboard contains no pages, the option to link
to a page doesn’t appear.
Page Specify the page that you want the link widget to link to.
Destination The URL of the page that the link widget links to.
Link Tooltip Enter a tooltip that appears when the user hovers over the link. For example, if the link is to a website,
enter the URL as the tooltip so the user knows where the link takes them.
Customize display and format Customize the display values for a list or toggle widget. The widget can display values from multiple
fields. For example, a list widget can show sales rep and region, with values like SalesRepA-West,
SalesRepB-West, and SalesRepC-North—allowing you to filter on both fields. You can also display
measures as part of the value, and format the display. Click Add field... dropdown, select a grouping
or measure defined in the query. You can insert more characters directly into the editor box to format
the display. For instance, you can add parentheses to enclose the measure value as shown here.
1507
Apply Selections and Filters CRM Analytics passes selections in chart, list, toggle, range, and date widgets as selections in the
linked asset if they apply. For example, you select North America in a list widget based on the Region
dataset field. CRM Analytics applies that same selection to faceted queries in the linked dashboard
that have a grouping based on the Region field in the same dataset.
CRM Analytics passes global filters as filters to a linked asset as long as the filters apply. CRM Analytics
ignores a global filter if the linked asset doesn’t use the dataset that the global filter is defined on. If
the global filter is locked and the incoming filter is defined on the same field, CRM Analytics ignores
the incoming filter. If it’s unlocked, the incoming filter overrides the global filter defined in the
dashboard.
Image The file name of the image. The image must be available in the gallery of the CRM Analytics app that
contains the dashboard. This property applies to image widgets created during or after Spring ’17.
Image ID 15-character ID of the image. The image must be uploaded to the Documents tab of Salesforce and
the Externally Available Image option must be enabled. This property applies to image widgets
created before Spring ’17.
Image Scale Indicate how to fit the image.
Image Alignment Horizontal and vertical alignment of the image.
Show custom action Show the widget properties that you set to show custom bulk actions on a table widget’s action
menu.
Custom Action Label Display label for the button in the table widget’s action menu. The dashboard viewer clicks the button
to execute the action.
Visualforce Page Name Name of the Visualforce page that defines the bulk action.
Visualforce Namespace Prefix Optional. Namespace prefix of the Visualforce page that defines the bulk action.
Background Image
Image The file name of the image. The image must be available in the gallery of the CRM Analytics app that
contains the dashboard. This property applies to container widgets created during or after Spring
’17.
1508
Image ID 15-character ID of the image. The image must be uploaded to the Documents tab of Salesforce with
the Externally Available Image option enabled. This property applies to container widgets created
before Spring ’17.
Image Scale Indicate how to fit the image.
Image Alignment Horizontal and vertical alignment of the image.
Band Colors
Low Band The color range for the low band.
Medium Band The color range for the medium band.
High Band The color range for the high band.
BreakPoints
Min Minimum value of the low color band.
Medium The value separating the low and medium colors.
High The value separating the medium and high colors.
Max Maximum value of the high color band.
Center Axis, Left Axis, X-Axis, Y-Axis
Start axis at zero Start the axis at 0.
Show axis Show the axis.
Show title Show the title of the axis.
Title Enter title of the axis. The default title is the name of the dimension for x-axis or names of the measures
for y-axis. Multiple measures appear as a comma-separated list.
Reference Line Show a reference line, which you can use to show a threshold, boundary, or reference point in the
chart. For x-axis, it’s a vertical line. For y-axis, it’s a horizontal line.
Chart Details
Compute total Computes the total based on all segments of the waterfall or stacked waterfall chart.
1509
Show values in chart bars Show the measure value of each bar in the chart if there is enough space to do so. Available space
will is determined by fit mode of axis, axis type (such as date-time), available space for the widget,
and other factors.
Normalize values Show stacked groups as a percentage of the total.
Axis Mode Specify how multiple measures appear in the chart.

You can select one of the following values:
Single Axis
Show all measures on the same axis.
Dual Axis
Show the first measure on its own axis and the remaining measures on a separate axis.
Small Multiples
Show each measure in a separate graph.
Auto fit Fit entire chart inside the widget. Else, if needed, scroll to see the remainder of the chart.
None
No scaling is applied. Scroll bars appear for charts larger than the widget.
Fit
Scale the chart to exactly fit the widget.
Preserve labels
Scale the chart to fit the widget while preventing labels from overlapping. Scroll bars appear for
charts larger than the widget.
Handling Missing Values Specify whether to connect data points regardless of missing data.
connect
Show a continuous graph, ignoring missing values.
disconnect
Show gaps in the graph where values are missing.
Fill area Fill area under the timeline chart.
Show points Show data points on the line.
# of stem segments The number of values that appear in the funnel’s stem.
Icon Icon used in the ratings chart.
Number of icons Number of icons that appear for each rating.
Show value as Specify how to show values.

You can select one of the following choices:
1510
None
Do not show values.
Number
Show as numbers.
Compact Number
Show compact form of numbers, summarized using letter suffixes.
Percentage
Show as percentages of the total.
Show max value Show the maximum measure value in each rating.
Show values on left Show the measure value on the left of each rating. Default is on the right.
Show measure title Show the title of the measure in the chart.
Show measure axes Show the axes for measures in the chart.
Show total in title Show the total in the measure title.
Show total in center Show the total of the measure in the center of the donut chart.
Center Size The percentage of the donut chart or polar gauge used to create the center circle.
Map Type Select the type of map.
Colors Depending on the chart type, specifies the colors of the low and high values, or colors for the start,
total, positive, and negative values.
Date
Default Date Mode Specify whether the date widget displays absolute or relative dates, by default.
Allow date mode switching Indicates whether the dashboard viewer can switch between absolute and relative dates in the date
widget.
Default Calendar Type Specifies whether the date widget displays dates using the calendar or fiscal year, by default.
Allow calendar type switching Indicates whether the dashboard viewer can switch between the fiscal and calendar year in the date
widget.
Filter Style
Field Color Color of the field name.
Value Color Color of the field value.
Background Color Color of the filter background.
1511
Border Color Color of the filter border.
Border Radius Radius of filter border.
Legend
Show legend Show the chart legend.
Show legend header Show legend header.
Show legend inside chart area Show legend inside the chart area to reduce space required for the legend. The legend might overlap
with the chart.
Position Location of legend inside the chart widget.
Onboarding
Resource Title Specify a title for the frame that presents your resource.
Resource URL Specify the URL for your video or webpage on a site that doesn’t prevent embedding. For best results
with a YouTube video, specify the Embed URL. To get the Embed URL in YouTube, click Share and
then Embed. The URL must have this format:
https://www.youtube.com/embed/xxxxxxxxxx
Note: The Onboarding property loads content from any URL into a Analytics inline frame. If
the URL allows execution within an inline frame, then all content at the URL becomes accessible
to dashboard viewers. Salesforce is not responsible for third-party URLs.
Table Options
Column Size You can set the table column size to:
Fit to Data
Dynamically set the column widths based on the length of the data currently visible in the table.
You can also set a minimum and maximum width to ensure that the column isn't too wide or
narrow.
Fixed Width
Set each column to the same width.
Fit to Widget
Fit the columns to the size of the widget. Use this setting to ensure that no empty space appears
at the right side of the table, as shown here.
1512
Column Width The width of each column in the table. Configure the widths to minimize whitespace and ensure
widget alignment in a dashboard. If you selected Fit to Data in Column Size, specify the minimum
and maximum column widths to ensure that the columns aren’t too wide or narrow.
Show Totals Shows the totals for all measures across the top of a compare or values table.
Note: The Show Totals option appears in the widget properties only if the Show Totals option
is set in the query.
Pagination Limits the amount of data loaded for a values table. As a user pages through the results, more data
loads as needed. Table pagination is on by default. Disable pagination by deselecting Disable
paginated loading,
If you use a query in more than one widget, the dashboard fully loads and ignores the pagination
setting.
Text Style
Text Color | Color Color of the text.
Text Size | Size Size of the text.
Number Color Color of the number.
Number Size Size of the number.
Title Color Color of the title.
Title Size Size of the title.
Alignment Horizontal alignment of the text.
Trellis
Show as trellis Create separate graphs based on groupings.
Type Select the type of trellis, which affects how the graphs appear.
1513
Horizontal
Separate horizontally, with a graph for each value in the first grouping.
Vertical
Separate vertically, with a graph for each value in the first grouping.
Matrix
Display graphs in a table, with the first grouping in columns and the second grouping in rows.
Wrap
Display graphs line-by-line for each value in the first grouping, wrapping at the value set in the
per-line setting.
Number of charts per line Number of charts per line when the trellis wraps to multiple lines.
Widget Style
Use defaults Use the default widget properties defined in the dashboard properties.
Background Color Background color of the widget.
Border Border around the widget.
Border color Color of the widget border.
Border Width Width of the widget border (in pixels).
Border Radius Roundness of the corners of the widget border.
Copy and Paste Widgets Across Dashboards

Copy widgets such as text and charts, then paste them in another dashboard and still keep the original widget orientation, styling, and
queries.
1. To copy and paste one or more widgets, first select them. To select multiple widgets, use Ctrl or Cmd.
2. To copy widgets, use Ctrl+c, Cmd+c, or click the copy icon ( ).
3. Paste widgets in the same dashboard or a different one.
To paste, use Ctrl+v, Cmd+v, or click the paste icon ( ). Pasted widgets keep their original layout, styling, and underlying queries.
Keep these considerations in mind when copying and pasting widgets.
• When you paste widgets in a dashboard with existing widgets, pasted widgets are placed in available space on the dashboard.
• When you copy and paste a text widget that contains query-based text, the query changes to plain text. However, you can duplicate
a text widget in the same dashboard without changing query-based text to plain text.
• When you copy and paste a widget with a query that uses targeted faceting, faceting is removed. To keep targeted faceting in a
widget, duplicate widgets instead.
• Bindings are resolved and changed to plain text when you paste a widget with a binding in another dashboard. Let’s say you use a
toggle widget to show dynamic values in a text widget. For example, show sales revenue in a text widget based on country or region
1514
selections in a toggle widget. When you paste the text widget with the binding into another dashboard, the dynamic text becomes
static. The static text shows the first row and column of data, such as “$25 K Sales in North America region”. To keep binding interactions
in pasted widgets, use the advanced editor to recreate bindings with JSON.
• Query and widget IDs can change in pasted widgets.
• You can’t paste a reusable dashboard component multiple times in a dashboard.
• You can create dashboard components by copying and pasting widgets into a component in the Component Designer. However,
you can’t copy a component widget into the Component Designer.
• Start value settings in pasted widgets are present when queries in the target dashboard don’t have start values defined. If the target
dashboard uses initial values for the same queries as the pasted widget, start values aren’t available in the pasted widget.
Manage Widgets on a Page

You can move widgets to another page. To share them and their queries across pages, add them to other pages. If you no longer
need a widget, delete it from the page.
Manage Widgets on a Page

You can move widgets to another page. To share them and their queries across pages, add them to other pages. If you no longer need
a widget, delete it from the page.
1. To move a widget to another page, select the widget, click Move/Add in the widget actions menu, and then click Move to Page.
2. To add a widget to another page, select Add to Page.

When you add a widget from one page to another, CRM Analytics adds an instance of the same widget. If you change a widget
property on one page, it affects all instances on other pages. If a widget is used in multiple pages, dashboard designer highlights
the widget in purple and adds a banner in the right pane when you select it.
1515
3. To make a widget work independently from other instances, select the widget, and then click Unlink in the banner.
4. To delete a widget from the page, select the widget, and then press the Delete key.
If you delete a widget from a page:
• and the widget is used in other pages, CRM Analytics removes the widget only from the current page.
• and the widget isn’t used in other pages but is used in other layouts, CRM Analytics removes it from the page and current layout.
• and the widget isn’t used in other pages or layouts, CRM Analytics deletes it from the dashboard.
5. To save your changes, save the dashboard.

Queries return results that are displayed in widgets. For example, a number widget displays the result of a calculation that is defined in
a query. Queries can be built on a data source, like a dataset or a Salesforce object. They can also be “custom queries” created with
user-defined values.
Watch a Demo: Use Steps to Build Wave Dashboard Widgets (English Only)
To create a query, you can clip a lens from an exploration, use the widget wizard, or create a query manually in dashboard designer. The
widget wizard creates a basic query that meets the minimum requirements for the widget. If you need a more robust query, like one
that has customized SAQL, manually create your own. The method you choose depends on how much flexibility you need.
Behind the scenes, CRM Analytics assigns a unique ID to each query in the dashboard. Because query IDs, like “Amount_1,” are not always
descriptive, add a query label when you create the query. For example, to clarify the “Amount_1” query, you can add the label “Won
Opportunity Amount.” CRM Analytics generates the query ID based on the label. After creating the query, you can’t change the ID, unless
you edit the JSON.
To improve dashboard performance, minimize the number of queries in a dashboard. When possible, reuse a query for multiple widgets.
You can reuse any query, except a range or date widget’s query.
Queries and Custom Queries

Widgets that display data require queries. A widget displays the results returned by a query. For example, a query calculates the
average opportunity amount, grouped by region. The widget displays the results in a bar chart format with each bar showing the
average amount for a region.
1516
Create a Query with a Lens

Manually create a query from the dashboard designer when you’re concerned about the results it returns and not the widget that
displays those results. For example, you might build a query that calculates three measures. You can display all measures in a combo
chart and display each measure in a separate number widget as well. You can reuse queries in multiple widgets.
Create a Query with the Query Editor
Use the query editor to create or customize SAQL or SOQL queries. The query editor gives you additional flexibility over queries
created by widget wizards or in the chart and table modes of the lens.
Create a Custom Query with User-Defined Values
Use custom queries to apply user-defined values to dimensions, measures, and limits of other queries. For example, you can create
a toggle widget that filters case records based on the following user-defined values: High Priority Cases, Medium Priority Cases, and
Low Priority Cases. To enable these custom values to filter your data, you map them to your data using a binding.
Find a Query
You can find all queries defined in the dashboard in the query panel. The panel organizes queries into categories and provides a
search bar to help you locate your queries faster.
Edit a Query
When you edit a query, you can change the details, like the query label. These changes affect all widgets that use the query. You
can also change the visualization properties, like chart type. Depending on the method that you use to edit the query, CRM Analytics
handles visualization changes differently.
Clone a Query
Clone a query to quickly create a query based on an existing one. Cloning is useful when you can reuse an existing query with just
a few tweaks.
Modify the Query Results Based on the Dashboard Viewer
You can modify a query based on the user viewing the dashboard. For example, you can filter opportunity records to show only
those opportunities owned by this user.
Optimize a Query
Queries can slow down your dashboard. Run a performance check on the queries to ensure that they’re running optimally. CRM
Analytics identifies query bottlenecks and provides recommendations to improve query performance.
Considerations for Queries with Multiple Datasets
When a query has multiple datasets, the query results are formatted using the XMD of the first loaded dataset. If the query is faceted,
it receives filters for all of its datasets, but broadcasts selections only from its first loaded dataset.
Troubleshoot Unexpected Query Results
If you have questions about a query’s results, review the query details to learn how CRM Analytics determines the results. Compare
the original query to the final query executed by CRM Analytics. If the query is faceted or the dashboard contains global filters, CRM
Analytics applies extra filters to query. If the query contains a binding, use the bindings tracer to verify the binding results.
Query properties define the query that returns results to display in the widget. These properties also specify how the widget behaves
and interacts with other widgets in the CRM Analytics dashboard. The properties apply to dashboards created in the dashboard
designer only.
SEE ALSO:
Make the Dashboard Widgets Interactive
1517
Queries and Custom Queries

Widgets that display data require queries. A widget displays the results returned by a query. For example, a query calculates the average
opportunity amount, grouped by region. The widget displays the results in a bar chart format with each bar showing the average amount
for a region.
In the dashboard designer, a lens and a query are similar, but not the same. Unlike a query, a lens can be saved as a standalone asset in
an app. For example, you can save a lens that displays opportunity trends as a timeline chart. We use “query” to refer to the underlying
calculation used to populate a widget in a dashboard.
You can build a widget using one of the following types of queries.
Query
Most queries are this type. The type of query is based on the data source. For instance, CRM Analytics can execute a SAQL query
against one or more datasets or a SOQL query against a Salesforce object. CRM Analytics provides multiple ways to create queries.
You can use the Chart mode or Table mode of the lens on a single dataset. You can calculate measures, group results by dates and
dimensions, and filter records based on dataset fields. Here’s an example of a lens-built query that populates a chart widget.
To create customized SAQL or SOQL queries, use the Query mode of the lens. For example, in Query mode, you can create a query
based on multiple datasets. The following chart widget shows the results from the SAQL query. For more information about SAQL
queries, see the CRM Analytics SAQL Developer Guide.
1518
CRM Analytics creates different query types based on the widget type. Some query types have a limit on the number of results that
they can return. For more information about all query types, including those not available in the lens, see the CRM Analytics Dashboard
JSON Reference.
Custom Query
A custom query is more rare. It doesn’t run calculations on your data. Instead, the query provides a static list of user-defined values.
For example, a toggle widget can show static values "$," "#" and "AVG." To make the toggle widget interact with other widgets in
the dashboard, use data source linking to connect the custom query with other faceted queries. Or bind the static values to the
queries of other widgets in your dashboard. For instance, you can bind "$" and "#" to show different measures: "$" to show the value
of opportunities, and "#" to show the number of opportunities. In this example, "$" is selected in the toggle widget, and the dashboard
shows the value of opportunities.
For more information, see Create a Custom Query with User-Defined Values.
SEE ALSO:

Manually create a query from the dashboard designer when you’re concerned about the results it returns and not the widget that displays
those results. For example, you might build a query that calculates three measures. You can display all measures in a combo chart and
display each measure in a separate number widget as well. You can reuse queries in multiple widgets.
For information about clipping a lens to create a query, see Clip a Lens to a Dashboard.
1. To open the queries panel, click an empty space in the dashboard canvas in the dashboard designer.
1519
2. If the queries panel has existing queries organized in sections, click next to the a section to create a query of that type.
For example, click next to the Static section to create a custom query. This feature is available for all section types, except Apex,
Soql, and multiple-dataset queries.
3. Click Create Query.
1520
4. Click Dataset for a CRM Analytics dataset or Salesforce Direct for a Salesforce object.
5. Select the dataset or Salesforce object that contains the data that you want to include in the query. Enter the name in the search
box if your data source isn’t easy to find.
The lens appears showing the default measure, Count of Rows.
You can add as many measures as needed.
1521
8. To group the measures by a date or dimension, click + under Bars, and then select the field.
You can add multiple groupings. To change a grouping, click the grouping and select a new field. To reorder or delete a grouping,
click the down arrow to the right of the grouping and then select the option.
10. To change the chart or table type for the query, click or , respectively.
11. To set the widget properties at the query-level, click .
12. To write a custom SAQL or SOQL query, click .

For more information, see Create a Query with the Query Editor.
13. Click Done.
CRM Analytics adds the query to the query panel, making it available for use by other widgets in the dashboard.
Tip: If you drag the query to the dashboard designer canvas, CRM Analytics displays the query results as the chart specified
while creating the query. To display the widget differently in the dashboard than what was specified at the query level, select
the widget in the dashboard and then set the widget properties. The widget properties override the query settings.
Tips for Salesforce Direct Data Queries

Direct Data is an option for querying live Salesforce data without having to set up replication or create datasets. With Direct Data,
you can query Salesforce objects in the dashboard designer’s explorer and edit Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) queries
in the query editor.
SEE ALSO:
1522
Tips for Salesforce Direct Data Queries

Direct Data is an option for querying live Salesforce data without having to set up replication or create datasets. With Direct Data, you
can query Salesforce objects in the dashboard designer’s explorer and edit Salesforce Object Query Language (SOQL) queries in the
query editor.
Direct Data is available only in the dashboard designer. Click Create Query, and then select the Salesforce Direct tab. Select an object
and the dashboard designer’s explorer opens with the object’s data ready to explore.
Important: Direct Data widgets aren’t automatically refreshed but are updated when the dashboard is refreshed.
Take the following into consideration.

• For best performance, use Direct Data only where data changes often and scheduled dataflows aren’t frequent enough. Queries on
Salesforce objects with a large number of records could increase query time. Use filters to limit the data that’s queried. For example,
rather than querying all cases opened, query only cases opened within a defined period of time.
• Direct Data is accessible only in the dashboard designer. After a Direct Data widget is added to a dashboard, you can select Explore
from the widget’s dropdown and open a Direct Data exploration in a new tab. However, saving custom queries on Direct Data lenses
isn’t supported.
• In the explorer, these features aren’t available: compare tables; totals and subtotals in tables; conversational querying; suggested
charts; drilling into data by hour, minute, or second; and applying filters based on aggregated measures or Boolean logic.
• These sharing options aren’t available from a Direct Data widget: Download as CSV and Download as Excel.
• These actions aren’t available from a Direct Data widget: Annotate, Set Notification, and Subscribe.
• Direct Data queries are run in user context, and the current user’s permissions, field-level security, and sharing rules apply.
Maximum limits on CRM Analytics API calls and on queries apply to Direct Data.
• Maximum concurrent CRM Analytics API calls per org is 100.
• Maximum CRM Analytics API calls per user per hour is 10,000.
1523
• Maximum concurrent queries per organization is 50 per platform.

• Maximum concurrent queries per user is 10.
SEE ALSO:

Use the query editor to create or customize SAQL or SOQL queries. The query editor gives you additional flexibility over queries created
by widget wizards or in the chart and table modes of the lens.
Note: If you modify a query using the query editor, you can no longer add dimensions, measures, and filters if you switch back
to the table or chart view. However, you can still change the visualization parameters.
1524
3. Click Dataset for a CRM Analytics dataset or Salesforce Direct for a Salesforce object.
4. Select the dataset or Salesforce object that contains the data that you want to include in the query. Enter the name in the search
box if your data source isn’t easy to find.
The lens appears showing the default measure, Count of Rows.
6. To write a custom SAQL or SOQL query, click .
The query editor appears, showing the code for the current query.
1525
7. Edit the query as needed.

For SAQL, the editor provides contextually smart, auto-completion suggestions. For more information about SAQL queries, see the
CRM Analytics SAQL Developer Guide.
8. Click Run Query to validate the query.

The Done button becomes active if the query is valid.
9. Click Done.

Queries created or edited in the query editor have unique characteristics compared to other queries, like those queries created in
the lens. Review the following tips for working with queries created in the query editor.
SEE ALSO:

Queries created or edited in the query editor have unique characteristics compared to other queries, like those queries created in the
lens. Review the following tips for working with queries created in the query editor.
Sorting in a Stacked Bar or Stacked Column Chart
1526
Sorting works differently in stacked bar and stacked column charts depending on whether the underlying query is created in the lens
or query editor. To see the difference, let’s start by creating a stacked bar chart in the lens. The chart shows the number of cases, grouped
by industry and account type. The chart is sorted in descending order. Notice how the total bar size shortens. (For advanced users who
modify the dashboard JSON, charts created in the lens have query type aggregateflex.)
If you customize the query in the query editor, the results sort differently—even if you don’t change the sort order. The same bars appear,
but in a different order. (For advanced users, the query type changes from aggregateflex to saql in the dashboard JSON when
you edit the query in the query editor.)
Although it looks like the results aren’t sorted, they are. The results are sorted in descending order based on the first account-type
segment for each industry. Notice how the blue segments get shorter as you scan down the chart.
If you’re wondering how to sort the results based on total bar size, like we saw when we first created the chart in the lens, perform these
tasks.
1. In the lens, create the chart by adding the measure and groupings (one for Bars and another for Bar Segments).
1527
2.
Click and select to switch to a compare table.
3. Add another Count of Rows measure by clicking + under Measures, and then clicking Count > Rows. You’re going to total the
values for all account types for each industry, and then sort based on that total using the windowing function.
4. For the second Count of Rows measure, click the down arrow and select Edit this Column.
1528
5. Select Sliding Window under Calculation, select Sum as the function, remove the start and end values for the window, select the
Account.Industry as the reset group, and then click Apply. This calculation combines the counts for both account types for each
industry.
6. To sort the results based on this new total, select the dropdown arrow for this measure and select Sort Descending.
1529
7. To view the results as a stacked bar or column chart, select and select the chart.
When you view the query for the chart in the query editor, you see the following SAQL query.
q = load "case95";
result = group q by ('Account.Industry', 'Account.Type');
result = foreach result generate q.'Account.Industry' as 'Account.Industry',
q.'Account.Type' as 'Account.Type', count(q) as 'A';
result = group result by ('Account.Industry', 'Account.Type');
result = foreach result generate 'Account.Industry', 'Account.Type', sum(A) as 'A',
sum(sum(A)) over ([..] partition by 'Account.Industry' ) as 'B';
result = order result by ('B' desc);
result = limit result 2000;
8. To hide the second measure that we created for sorting purposes, click the dropdown arrow for that measure, and then select Hide.
1530
The hidden measure appears under Unused Fields in the left pane.
9. To apply the changes, click Update.

Use custom queries to apply user-defined values to dimensions, measures, and limits of other queries. For example, you can create a
toggle widget that filters case records based on the following user-defined values: High Priority Cases, Medium Priority Cases, and Low
Priority Cases. To enable these custom values to filter your data, you map them to your data using a binding.
1531
1532
3. Click Create Custom Query.
4.
Click to change the query label.
5. Click +Add Column to add a dimension, measure, text, or number as a column to your custom query.
a. For a dimension or measure, choose a dataset.
1533
6. Click +Add to add rows to your custom query.

a. For a measure, choose a function. For a dimension or measure, choose a field.
Note: Each measure column in a custom query creates two values in the JSON. One value for the function (sum, average,
etc.) and one for the selected measure field. Use both values when creating a compact-form binding on a measure.
7. Add up to 20 columns and click Done.
Note: To create SAQL bindings, your custom query requires two additional text columns. One column determines the value
of the field and the other column is for the field label.
8.
To make changes, find the query in the query panel, click , then Edit.
You can change the query name, add and remove columns, add row and column values, reorder columns, and pick values from a
dataset.
Note: To use a custom query for linking, make the column the first column in the dialog.
9. To apply this custom query to a list or toggle widget:

a. Drag the list or toggle widget from the widget toolbar to the dashboard canvas.
b. Drag the custom query on top of the widget.
The widget shows the custom display values as selection options.
1534
c. To change the widget and query properties, select the widget.

The Widget panel groups the widget properties into sections. So that you don’t accidentally overlook any properties, expand
any collapsed sections.
d. To customize the appearance of the widget, set the widget properties.

e.
f. Save the dashboard.
If you applied the custom query to a list or toggle widget, you can see the widget in the dashboard. To specify how a selection in this
query affects other widgets, bind the values of the custom query to other widgets. For example, create a binding that filters the other
widgets based on a value in the list or toggle widget. For more information about binding queries, see the CRM Analytics Interactions
Developer Guide .
SEE ALSO:
Find a Query
You can find all queries defined in the dashboard in the query panel. The panel organizes queries into categories and provides a search
bar to help you locate your queries faster.
The queries panel categorizes queries by dataset name and query type. It also contains a special category for erroneous queries. Categories
and queries are listed in alphabetical order. You can collapse each category.
Hover over the query and click the down arrow to view actions that you can perform on the query. For instance, in the Queries with
Errors section, click View Error to understand what’s wrong with the query.
1535
Edit a Query
When you edit a query, you can change the details, like the query label. These changes affect all widgets that use the query. You can
also change the visualization properties, like chart type. Depending on the method that you use to edit the query, CRM Analytics handles
visualization changes differently.
You can use the following methods to change a query.
Method Handling Visualization Changes

Edit the query from the query panel CRM Analytics saves the visualization changes in the query, but
doesn’t apply them to existing widgets that use the query.
Double-click the widget CRM Analytics saves the visualization changes in the query and
applies them to the widget. CRM Analytics doesn’t apply them to
other widgets that use the query.
Note: CRM Analytics automatically loads queries on the opened page. Click other pages to load more queries, or click Start to
load a specific query.
1536
Consider the following limitations before editing a query.

• You can edit only queries with types aggregate, aggregateflex, saql, and grain. If you edit an aggregate or
aggregateflex that contains a SAQL query in the pigql JSON attribute, CRM Analytics converts the query type to saql.
• You can’t edit a query that’s used in a global filter widget created before Winter ’18.
• You can edit a saql type query that contains interactions(bindings) to switch modes (Chart, Table, Query) or modify the query.
You’re not able to switch modes or modify a query for an aggregateflex type that contains interactions. However, you can
change the format, such as adding conditional formatting.
1. Open the dashboard in edit mode.
2. Use one of the following methods to edit the query.
a. To edit the query from the queries panel, hover over the query, click the down arrow, and then click Edit in the query actions
menu.
a. Double-click the widget in the dashboard.
1537
You can also select the widget and click in the widget actions menu.
3. Make your changes.

You can change the following details:
• Query label (1)
• Query (2)
• Visualization properties and formatting (3)
• Chart, table, and SAQL mode (4)
4. Click Update.
5. To save your changes, save the dashboard.
Considerations When Converting Query Types

CRM Analytics treats query types differently. Before you convert an aggregate or aggregateflex query type to saql,
review the following implications.
1538
Considerations When Converting Query Types

CRM Analytics treats query types differently. Before you convert an aggregate or aggregateflex query type to saql, review
the following implications.
Unlike the aggregateflex query type, the saql query type provides limited support when the actual number of query results
exceeds the limit that a query can return.
• When performing a search in a list widget, a saql query type doesn’t find values that aren’t returned in the first batch of query
results.
• CRM Analytics doesn’t apply initial selections for a saql query type if the selected value isn’t returned in the first batch of query
results. For example, you set an initial selection on the Account Name field. When you open the dashboard, assume the corresponding
widget shows only 2,000 of 100,000 accounts. If the initial selection isn’t one of the 2,000 returned accounts, CRM Analytics doesn’t
apply the initial selection to the dashboard.
For more information about how to use the limit JSON parameter to configure the maximum number of results that each query type
can return, see steps JSON.
Clone a Query
Clone a query to quickly create a query based on an existing one. Cloning is useful when you can reuse an existing query with just a few
tweaks.
Note: You can’t clone a SAQL query for a single compare table column or a custom query with user-defined values.
1539
Note: You can’t apply grayed-out queries to widgets. But you can clone them and view their properties.
2. To show all queries, select All in the Show field.

3. Hover over the query that you want to clone, and then click the down arrow.
4. Select Clone.
The query opens in the lens, where you can easily modify it. If the query was created using SAQL, the clone opens in the SAQL editor
instead.
5. Edit the query label.
The default label has “Clone of “ prepended to the original query label
6. Make your changes to the clone.

7. Click Done.
1540
Note: When you clone a query and edit its SAQL, the resulting JSON doesn’t always reflect the functions applied to measures.
After you run and save the SAQL, the function is changed to count. For example, if the original query contained this measures
array:
"query": {
"measures": [
["max","DailyActiveUsers"]
]
}
and the SAQL was edited, run, and saved, the updated JSON contains this measures array instead:
"query": {
"measures": [
["count","*","max_DailyActiveUsers"]
]
}
This discrepancy has no effect on the data viewed in the dashboard.

You can modify a query based on the user viewing the dashboard. For example, you can filter opportunity records to show only those
opportunities owned by this user.
You can specify user tokens in any query parameter in saql, soql, and aggregateflex query types. The syntax to specify a
token is: !{user.<User object field name>}. Valid tokens are: user.Id, user.name, user.roleid, and
user.rolename.
Tip: Because names aren’t always unique, consider using IDs when specifying a user token.
This saql-type query adds the user.Id token as a query filter so that opportunity owners viewing the dashboard see only their
opportunities.
"My_Opportunities_1": {
"type": "saql",
"label": "My Opportunities",
"query": "q = load \"opportunity\";\nq = filter q by 'OwnerId' == \"!{user.Id}\";\nq
= group q by 'Account.Type';\nq = foreach q generate 'Account.Type' as 'Account.Type',
count() as 'count';\nq = order q by 'count' desc;\nq = limit q 1000;",
"datasets": [
{
"id": "0FbB000000017QxKAI",
"name": "opportunity",
"label": "Opportunities",
"url": "/services/data/v41.0/wave/datasets/0FbB000000017QxKAI"
}
],
"useGlobal": true,
"isGlobal": false,
1541
"broadcastFacet": true,
"receiveFacet": true,
"selectMode": "single",
"numbers": [],
"groups": [],
"strings": [],
"visualizationParameters": {
....
},
},
SEE ALSO:
Optimize a Query
Queries can slow down your dashboard. Run a performance check on the queries to ensure that they’re running optimally. CRM Analytics
identifies query bottlenecks and provides recommendations to improve query performance.
1. Open the dashboard in view mode.
Because CRM Analytics analyzes query performance for the current layout only, ensure that you’re viewing the dashboard in the
right layout. Performance can differ from one layout to another because layouts can have different widgets and interactions. If the
dashboard contains multiple pages, CRM Analytics provides performance analysis for the current page.
2. Click the drop-down arrow for the widget that uses the query that you want to analyze.
3. Select Show Details for the widget.
Tip: To see the Show Details option for a list widget, enable the “Show explore action” widget property. The Show Details
option doesn’t show for link, image, container, global filter panel, and text widget types because they don’t have queries.
The query details summarize different parts of the query, like measures, filters, groupings, and the dataset on which its built.
1542
The Last Run Metrics section identifies other factors that contribute to the total time required to populate the results of a query.
Last Run Metric Description

Metadata Number of milliseconds needed to retrieve the metadata for the datasets involved in the query. The
metadata fetch only occurs the first time the query runs.
Waiting Number of milliseconds needed to resolve bindings to construct the query.
Query Number of milliseconds to run the query. Note that a run might execute the query or use cached
results.
If CRM Analytics identifies a performance issue with the query, it shows a warning icon ( ) next to the View Performance Details
button ( ), as the previous screenshot shows.
4. To view the performance issues and suggestions for resolving them, click .
The Performance Factors section shows all factors by which the query is evaluated. Ignore the factors with a green checkmark ( )
because these issues don’t apply to the query.
1543
5. Expand each factor with a warning icon to learn how to improve the query’s performance.

When a query has multiple datasets, the query results are formatted using the XMD of the first loaded dataset. If the query is faceted, it
receives filters for all of its datasets, but broadcasts selections only from its first loaded dataset.
For more information about formatting results using the XMD, see the Extended Metadata (XMD) Developer Guide.
SEE ALSO:
Facet Queries with Multiple Datasets
Troubleshoot Unexpected Query Results

If you have questions about a query’s results, review the query details to learn how CRM Analytics determines the results. Compare the
original query to the final query executed by CRM Analytics. If the query is faceted or the dashboard contains global filters, CRM Analytics
applies extra filters to query. If the query contains a binding, use the bindings tracer to verify the binding results.
1. Open the dashboard in view mode.
2. Click the drop-down arrow for the widget that uses the query that you want to analyze.
1544
3. Select Show Details for the widget.
Tip: To see the Show Details option for a list widget, enable the “Show explore action” widget property. The Show Details
option doesn’t show for link, image, container, global filter panel, and text widget types because they don’t have queries.
4.
To compare the original query against the final one, click .
CRM Analytics modifies queries based on interactions with other widgets. It adds filters based on faceting and global filters, and can
modify the query based on bindings. The final query in the following example has three filters added to the original query.
1545
5. If the query has a binding, review the bindings trace to understand how CRM Analytics resolves the binding.
The easiest way to understand the bindings trace is to start from the bottom. In this example, you can see the results of both cell
binding functions. You can also see that the coalesce function uses the results from the second cell function. The final
result of the entire binding, which appears at the top, shows 5.

Query properties define the query that returns results to display in the widget. These properties also specify how the widget behaves
and interacts with other widgets in the CRM Analytics dashboard. The properties apply to dashboards created in the dashboard designer
only.
Display Label Query label. Use to provide a descriptive label for the query.
Broadcast selections as facets Controls whether the query’s selections are broadcasted as facets.
For more information about faceting, see Filter Dashboard Results
with Faceting.
Apply filters from faceting Controls whether the query listens for broadcasted facets and
applies them as filters.
1546
Apply global filters Apply the global filters to this query. This option is only available
for queries on datasets.
Selection Type Indicate whether dashboard viewers can make one or multiple
selections in the associated widget. You can also specify whether
selections are required. If a selection is required, set an initial
selection in the Initial Selections query property. If a selection is
required but not set, Analytics selects the first value in the list.
Note: Selection types are ignored when you open the

widget in a lens, or in iOS or Analytics mobile apps.
Initial Selections Show the initial selections that are applied when the dashboard
opens. For information about setting initial selections, see Set Initial
Selections in the Dashboard .
Make the Dashboard Widgets Interactive

You can make the widgets in CRM Analytics dashboards interactive. For example, you can filter a widget to show only results for the
region that’s selected in a list widget. Or, the value of a number widget can change to red when it falls below a threshold. An interaction
can also provide progressive navigation and exploration, revealing detailed information with a single click action.
Watch a Demo: Build Interactive CRM Analytics Dashboards (English Only)
Filter Dashboard Results with Faceting

Faceting makes dashboards interactive. For example, select a sales region in a list widget and see accounts from that region in a
table widget. When you enable faceting, selections made on chart, date, list, range, and toggle widgets automatically filter other
widgets in the dashboard. You can also use targeted faceting to include or exclude specific queries from your faceting selections.
Create Interactions with Clicks
Interactions, previously called bindings, are the most powerful way to specify relationships between different queries on your
dashboard. Creating the right syntax for an interaction can be complex. With the Advanced Interaction Editor, create, edit, and
preview your interactions with clicks.
Single-Click Widget Interactions
Add single-click interactions to your dashboard widgets to curate data journeys for your users. You can change a static dashboard
into a dynamic navigation experience that progressively reveals details. A single-click in an overview widget takes you directly to a
detailed page, opens a lens for cohesive exploration, or starts a flow.
SEE ALSO:

Faceting makes dashboards interactive. For example, select a sales region in a list widget and see accounts from that region in a table
widget. When you enable faceting, selections made on chart, date, list, range, and toggle widgets automatically filter other widgets in
the dashboard. You can also use targeted faceting to include or exclude specific queries from your faceting selections.
1547
By default, queries from the same dataset are faceted. To facet queries between different data sources such as different datasets or
custom queries, first connect them. Queries with a mix of datasets facet widgets based on the first dataset specified in the datasets
field in the dashboard JSON only.
1. To edit the dashboard, click .
2. Select the widget that uses the query.
The panel shows the widget properties.
3. Click Query.
4. In the Faceting section, select All, Include, Exclude, or None.

For Include or Exclude, click Choose Queries and then select from the list of queries in your dashboard. To apply external filters
when you open an embedded dashboard, set faceting to All.
5. Broadcast selections as facets is enabled by default.
1548
Controls whether the query’s selections are broadcast as facets.

Keep the following considerations in mind when configuring faceting for queries.
• Set query faceting on the receiving query. For example, to prevent faceting in query A when data from query B is selected, open
query A, set faceting to Exclude, and then choose query B. Alternately, to facet specific queries, use Include.
• The Broadcast selections as facets appears as read only for the apex and soql query types because they don’t support
faceting.
• Broadcast selections as facets appears as read only for the aggregate, grain, and static query types because they
don’t support these options. To change the faceting behavior for these query types, edit the isFacet property in the dashboard
JSON. For a list of the supported faceting JSON properties for each query type, see the CRM Analytics Dashboard JSON Reference.
• For Include, faceting applies to only the selected queries. For Exclude, faceting applies to all queries except those selected.

By default, queries from the same dataset are faceted—automatically filtering each other. To facet queries from different datasets
or even custom queries in the dashboard designer, connect them using common fields between them.
Configure Faceting on Related Salesforce Objects
Surface trends between Salesforce objects with parent-child relationships in a single dashboard. For example, on a dashboard that’s
set up to monitor Salesforce account records, you can track related opportunities and cases. To facet queries based on parent-child
relationships in the dashboard designer, connect them using common fields between them.
Considerations for Connected Data Sources
Keep these considerations in mind when faceting queries from different datasets.
You can use a query with multiple datasets in a widget and then facet the query. The query receives filters from all of its datasets,
but broadcasts selections from its first loaded dataset.
SEE ALSO:
Control How Filtering Works in Embedded Dashboards

By default, queries from the same dataset are faceted—automatically filtering each other. To facet queries from different datasets or
even custom queries in the dashboard designer, connect them using common fields between them.
Note: You can’t connect custom queries that specify date or measure ranges.
1. Click to edit the dashboard.

2.
Click and then select Connected Data Sources.
3. In Data Source Connections, on the Connections tab, click New Connection.
1549
4. Enter a name for the connection.

5. Click Choose Data Source 1 to select the first data source. For each data source, select a dataset or a custom query used in the
dashboard.
6. Choose one field from the data source so that CRM Analytics can match records between the specified sources.
7. Click Choose Data Source 2 to select the second source, and then choose a field.
8. To add another data source, click Add Data Source. This option appears after you connect two data sources.
You can connect two or more data sources.
9. Click Save.
SEE ALSO:
Configure Faceting on Related Salesforce Objects

Surface trends between Salesforce objects with parent-child relationships in a single dashboard. For example, on a dashboard that’s set
up to monitor Salesforce account records, you can track related opportunities and cases. To facet queries based on parent-child relationships
in the dashboard designer, connect them using common fields between them.
Parent-child faceting between steps built on Salesforce objects is enabled by default on new dashboards.
1. To edit the dashboard containing queries on Salesforce objects with parent-child relationships, click .
2.
Click in the dashboard designer (1) and then select Connected Data Sources (2).
1550
3. In Data Source Connections, on the Related Salesforce Objects tab (3), select Configure Connections Based on Existing
Relationships (4). If you’d like to exclude faceting for a Salesforce object, uncheck the box next to it.
4. Close the window and save your changes.

In preview mode, click an account to review related opportunities and cases.
1551

Keep these considerations in mind when faceting queries from different datasets.
Selecting Connection Fields
Faceting only works on the fields used to define the connection. For example, the connection in the following screenshot is based on
the StageName field. As a result, the StageName list widget is faceted to the bar chart. If a selection is made in the Account.Type list
widget, faceting doesn’t happen—the results aren’t filtered. To enable faceting on the Account.Type field, define another connection
based on this field using the same data sources.
Connecting Date Fields

When using date fields to connect datasets you must use time periods that describe the top-level date field. For example, if you want
to group by Close Date [top-level] in a lens, you’re prompted to select time periods, such as Close Date (Year) [time period] or Close Date
(Year-Quarter) [time period].
1. Create a filter widget with a time period of your choice, such as Close Date (Year) or Close Date (Year-Quarter).
2. Create a connection using Connect Data Sources in the dashboard builder, select the datasets, and top-level date field, such as Close
Date, to connect.
3. Open the dashboard JSON, press Ctrl+E (Windows), Cmd+E (macOS).
4. Press Ctrl+F (Windows), Cmd+F (macOS), and search for dataSourceLinks.
5. Update “fieldName” by replacing its current value with the time period used in the filter widget. Separate multiple time periods with
~~~ as shown in the example.
Example:
"dataSourceLinks": [
{
"name": "Link_544",
"label": "Close Date Connection",
"fields": [
{
"fieldName": "Close_Date_Year~~~Close_Date_Quarter",
"dataSourceName": "DTC_Opportunity",
"dataSourceType": "dataset"
1552
},
{
"fieldName": "Close_Date_Year~~~Close_Date_Quarter",
"dataSourceName": "ACME_Opportunities",
"dataSourceType": "dataset"
}
]
}
],
SEE ALSO:

You can use a query with multiple datasets in a widget and then facet the query. The query receives filters from all of its datasets, but
broadcasts selections from its first loaded dataset.
For example, suppose that the Opportunities dataset has the fields Account_Owner, Region, and Amount. The Quota dataset has the
fields Name and Quota.
quo = load "Quota";
opt = load "Opportunities";
att = cogroup opt by 'Account_Owner', quo by 'Employee';
att = foreach att generate opt.'Account_Owner' as 'Owner', sum(opt.'Amount')/sum(quo.'Quota')
as 'percent attained', opt.Region as 'Region'.
A widget that uses this query receives filters for the following selections: A widget that uses this query broadcasts selections for Quota.Name
and Quota.Quota.
• Opportunities.Name
• Opportunities.Amount
• Opportunities.Region
• Quota.Name
• Quota.Quota
SEE ALSO:
Create Interactions with Clicks

Interactions, previously called bindings, are the most powerful way to specify relationships between different queries on your dashboard.
Creating the right syntax for an interaction can be complex. With the Advanced Interaction Editor, create, edit, and preview your
interactions with clicks.
Note: Dashboard builders must place each interaction (binding) in the right place in the JSON or SAQL for an individual widget
or query. To learn more, see the Analytics Bindings Developer Guide.
1553
1.
Click Advanced Editor in the widget properties panel or to launch the Advanced Interaction Editor.
2. Click Select a query… and choose from any query in the dashboard.
Queries are searchable by name.
1554
3. Click Select data….

a. Select Row, Column, or Cell.
b. Select the desired options.
Use the Preview button to see details of the query without leaving the Interaction Editor.
c.
Click .
1555
4. Select Result or Selection for your interaction.

Result is the default interaction type.
5. Click More Options to set a default value or change the data serialization function.
To learn more, see Data Serialization Functions.
6.
To edit the interaction manually, click . This step is optional.
Note: Once you click the button, you can’t return to the original editor without resetting the entire Advanced Interaction
Builder. Any interaction you’ve already created is removed once you reset.
a. Add functions to your interaction and specify the source.
7. Copy your interaction.

8. Paste the interaction into the JSON or SAQL.
9. Click Save.
Dynamically Modify the Query, Initial Selection, and Widgets with Bindings
Compared to facets, bindings are more programmatic, and provide more ways to specify interactions. Bindings can dynamically
modify a query, set an initial filter selection, or change a widget’s appearance. For example, you can change the measure in a query
based on a selection in a custom query. You can initially filter a region-based dashboard based on the country of the logged-in user.
Or, you can change the color of the metric in a number widget based on whether its value is high, medium, or low. Each binding is
unidirectional, meaning it affects other queries, but other queries don’t affect it.
Dynamically Modify the Query, Initial Selection, and Widgets with Bindings
Compared to facets, bindings are more programmatic, and provide more ways to specify interactions. Bindings can dynamically modify
a query, set an initial filter selection, or change a widget’s appearance. For example, you can change the measure in a query based on
a selection in a custom query. You can initially filter a region-based dashboard based on the country of the logged-in user. Or, you can
change the color of the metric in a number widget based on whether its value is high, medium, or low. Each binding is unidirectional,
meaning it affects other queries, but other queries don’t affect it.
For more information about bindings, see Analytics Interactions Developer Guide
Single-Click Widget Interactions

Add single-click interactions to your dashboard widgets to curate data journeys for your users. You can change a static dashboard into
a dynamic navigation experience that progressively reveals details. A single-click in an overview widget takes you directly to a detailed
page, opens a lens for cohesive exploration, or starts a flow.
1556
When you click a selection in an overview chart (1), it opens the details page with your selection applied (2).
Or your selection (1) opens a lens with filters applied for immediate navigation (2).
Add a Dynamic Interaction to a Widget

You can connect a user action to a dashboard action. For example, when you select a bar in an overview chart, a dashboard page
with the details of the selection opens. You can create an interaction for a chart, container, image, number, repeater, table, and text
widget.
Build and Use Interactions to Navigate Through Product Data
You can add interactions to widgets to guide users through multiple levels of data. For example, start at a large scale, such as a
country, and navigate a user through more granular areas, such as a business segment or account owner. You can also use this
pattern to create longer, deeper flows, such as configuring a dimension to navigate by, or set a new product’s dashboard to open
when you select a product. This example explains how to create a flow that shows the revenue for account owners who work in a
specific part of a business, in the United States.
1557
Configure a Start a Flow Action (Beta)

You can configure Start a Flow interactions for custom autolaunched or screen flows.
Add a Dynamic Interaction to a Widget

You can connect a user action to a dashboard action. For example, when you select a bar in an overview chart, a dashboard page with
the details of the selection opens. You can create an interaction for a chart, container, image, number, repeater, table, and text widget.
1. To edit the dashboard, click and select the widget.
2. In the right panel, click Interaction.
3. Click Create Interaction.
4. Select the interaction.
5. For Event, select the type of action that triggers the interaction, such as selecting a row or clicking the widget.
You can’t create a select event for a container, image, number, or text widget.
6. Click Add Action.

A widget can have multiple actions. When more than one action exists, the actions are performed sequentially when you click or
select the item.
7. From the Action dropdown, select Navigate to.
a. For Link To, select the destination to link to, such as a dashboard, lens, or page.
A layout page is available only if the dashboard has more than one page. To navigate between dashboard pages, add a Back
button on the destination page so that you can return to the overview page.
b. If the destination is a page, select Go back on deselect.

This setting controls whether navigation takes you back to the original page when the selection is removed.
c. Select the destination. The options are based on your Link To selection.
8. From the Action dropdown, select Return to Initial View, and then select Return to initial view for Reset.
1558
9. From the Action dropdown, select Clear Selections.
a. To clear selections for all queries on the page, select All.

b. To clear selections for specific queries only, select Include. Choose the queries to clear
c. To exclude query selections from the clear action, select Exclude. Choose the queries to exclude.
10. Click Apply.

11. To test the interaction, preview the dashboard. Then save the dashboard.
Build and Use Interactions to Navigate Through Product Data

You can add interactions to widgets to guide users through multiple levels of data. For example, start at a large scale, such as a country,
and navigate a user through more granular areas, such as a business segment or account owner. You can also use this pattern to create
longer, deeper flows, such as configuring a dimension to navigate by, or set a new product’s dashboard to open when you select a
product. This example explains how to create a flow that shows the revenue for account owners who work in a specific part of a business,
in the United States.
Create an Interaction and Navigate to the Details Page

To add an interaction that moves from a selection on the map to the Details page in the Dashboard Editor, select the map widget. In
the Widget Properties panel on the right, click Interaction.
1559
Click Add Action, and create an interaction that navigates from the map to the Details page in the layout. To let users go back to the
default map setting when they deselect a component, select Go back on deselect.
To try out the interaction, click Apply and then click Preview. On the map of the world that appears, select the United States.
1560
This select interaction navigates the user to the Details page. On the Details page, the user sees filtered value charts, segment and account
owner data, and a product dashboard.
1561
To provide easy navigation of granular data, you can add interactions to some of the widgets.
Navigate to the Product Dashboard Data

Add another interaction to navigate to the product dashboard data. In the Dashboard editor, move to the Details dashboard page, and
click a repeater widget, such as Fleet. On the Interactions tab, click Add Action, and create an interaction that navigates to the component
page in the layout where the product dashboard data is stored.
1562
To view this interaction, click Preview, navigate to the Details page, and click Fleet (1). This select interaction changes to the Product
Details dashboard page (2). The dashboard now shows a list of car types and the revenue for each.
Now add the same interaction to each repeater widget.
Navigate to a Component Page

To navigate even deeper into the component pages, you can add an interaction that shows the account owner’s details. Create an
interaction on the chart widget that navigates to the component page Details 2 in the layout.
To view this interaction, click Preview, navigate to the component page, and click Count for a name in the table (1). The click interaction
navigates to the Account Owner Details dashboard page (2).
1563
The Clear Selection Interaction

If you want to clear queries at any level, you can add a Clear Selection interaction to a text box. In this journey, add a text box called Clear
Leaderboard Selection. From the Action dropdown, select Clear Selections.
This example clears two queries: Leaderboard_2 and Leaderboard_1.
1564
Now, when your user wants to clear the account owner selection and pick another one, they can click Clear Leaderboard Selection
and make another selection.
Configure a Start a Flow Action (Beta)

You can configure Start a Flow interactions for custom autolaunched or screen flows.
1. To edit the dashboard, click Edit.
2. Select a text widget, and in the right panel, click Interaction.
3. Click Create Interaction, and select the interaction.
4. For Event, select Click, and then click Add Action.
5. For Action, select Start a Flow.
1565
6. For Flow, select a flow.

Dashboard interactions support custom autolaunched and screen flows. Only active flows are visible. If you don’t see your flow,
make sure that you’ve activated it. If you have no custom flows, go to the Flow Builder to create a flow. See Flow Builder.
7. If the selected flow requires inputs to run, they’re listed with Add Mapping actions. For each flow input, click Add Mapping.
a. Select the value type.
Type Description
Static Enter the input value.
Dynamic Field • For Data Source, click Choose Query and select a query
from a dataset.
• For New Value, click Select field and select a query field
for the input.
• Select the interaction type.
b. Click Update.
8. Click Apply.
9. To test the interaction, preview the dashboard, and then save.
Set Initial Selections and Global Filters in the Dashboard

Set the initial selections and global filters that appear when the dashboard first opens. To analyze the results from a different angle, the
dashboard viewer can change the initial selections and, if configured, global filters while viewing the dashboard.
1566

If the CRM Analytics dashboard contains selection-based widgets (chart, date, list, range, or toggle), you can set initial selections that
are applied when the dashboard first opens. For example, you can select a bar in a bar chart and set that as the initial selection. If
the underlying query for the bar chart is faceted, other widgets with faceted queries are filtered based on this initial selection. While
viewing the dashboard, a user can change the selection in the chart to filter the results differently or remove the selection and filters
altogether.
Set Initial Global Filters in the Dashboard
If the CRM Analytics dashboard contains global filters, you can set the initial filters that are applied when the dashboard first opens.
If a global filter is unlocked, the dashboard viewer can change the filter while viewing the dashboard. Global filters apply to all queries
in the dashboard unless a query is configured to ignore these filters.

If the CRM Analytics dashboard contains selection-based widgets (chart, date, list, range, or toggle), you can set initial selections that
are applied when the dashboard first opens. For example, you can select a bar in a bar chart and set that as the initial selection. If the
underlying query for the bar chart is faceted, other widgets with faceted queries are filtered based on this initial selection. While viewing
the dashboard, a user can change the selection in the chart to filter the results differently or remove the selection and filters altogether.
If a widget’s query is configured to require a selection, set the initial selection. If you don’t, CRM Analytics selects the first value when
the dashboard opens.
CRM Analytics selects the value if it’s present in the results, otherwise, it attempts to search the data for the result by name. If the value
is still not found, it’s unselected. Keep in mind, for any custom query like SAQL, SOQL, or SQL, the system assumes the results are
complete and doesn't attempt to remotely search for additional values. For more information about query limits for a SAQL query type,
see saql Step Type Properties.
1.
While editing the dashboard, click and then select Pick Initial Selections.
CRM Analytics previews the dashboard.
2. Make selections in chart, date, list, range, or toggle widgets.
You can also select a row in a compare table.
3. Click Done.
CRM Analytics saves the selections as start values for the widget queries. You can view the initial selections in the query properties.
1567
Dynamically Set Initial Selections Based on the Dashboard Viewer

You can set initial filter selections to show information that’s relevant to the logged in user. For example, you can filter a sales
dashboard such that each sales rep views only their sales opportunities and performance. You can set initial filter selections based
on the user ID, user name, role ID, or role name of the logged in user.
SEE ALSO:
Dynamically Set Initial Selections Based on the Dashboard Viewer

You can set initial filter selections to show information that’s relevant to the logged in user. For example, you can filter a sales dashboard
such that each sales rep views only their sales opportunities and performance. You can set initial filter selections based on the user ID,
user name, role ID, or role name of the logged in user.
You can set initial selections based on the following Salesforce user tokens: user.id, user.name, user.rolename, and
user.roleid. At runtime, CRM Analytics retrieves the values of these tokens from Salesforce environment variables—these values
don’t come from datasets.
Tip: To set the initial selection based on other user attributes of the logged-in user, like their country, use a binding based on a
user token. For more information, see the CRM Analytics Bindings Developer Guide.
Example: When the dashboard opens, you want it to dynamically filter charts based on the name of the currently logged in user.
1568
To add the filter, create a list widget and then, in the dashboard JSON, add an initial filter selection based on the user.name
token in the widget’s query (Owner_Name_1). This selection filters the following charts:
• Donut chart because its query (Owner_Name_3) is faceted with query Owner_Name_1.
• Bar chart because its query (Owner_Username_3) contains a binding based on query Owner_Name_1.
See the bold text in the following dashboard JSON to see how to set the initial filter, as well as facet and bind the queries.
{
"label": "My Sales",
"state": {
"gridLayouts": [
…
],
"layouts": [],
"steps": {
"Owner_Name_1": {
"datasets": [
{
"id": "0FbB00000000pNNKAY",
"url": "/services/data/v38.0/wave/datasets/0FbB00000000pNNKAY"
}
],
"isFacet": true,
1569
"isGlobal": false,
"query": {
"measures": [
[
"count",
"*"
]
],
"groups": [
"Owner.Name"
]
},
"selectMode": "multi",
"start": [
"!{User.Name}"
],
"type": "aggregateflex",
"useGlobal": false,
"options": {}
}
},
"Owner_Name_3": {
"datasets": [
{
}
],
"isFacet": true,
"isGlobal": false,
"query": {
"measures": [
[
"count",
"*"
]
],
"groups": [
"Owner.Name"
],
"order": [
[
-1,
{
"ascending": false
}
]
]
},
"selectMode": "single",
1570
"useGlobal": true,
"options": {}
}
},
"Owner_Username_3": {
"datasets": [
{
}
],
"isFacet": false,
"isGlobal": false,
"query": {
"measures": [
[
"sum",
"Amount"
]
],
"groups": [
"Owner.Name"
],
"filters": [
[
"Owner.Name",
"{{column(Owner_Name_1.selection,
[\"Owner.Name\"]).asObject()}}",
"in"
]
],
"order": [
[
-1,
{
"ascending": false
}
]
]
},
"selectMode": "multi",
"useGlobal": true,
"options": {}
}
}
1571
},
"widgetStyle": {
"backgroundColor": "#FFFFFF",
"borderColor": "#E6ECF2",
"borderEdges": [],
"borderRadius": 0,
"borderWidth": 1
},
"widgets": {
"listselector_2": {
"parameters": {
"compact": false,
"expanded": true,
"exploreLink": false,
"instant": true,
"measureField": "count",
"step": "Owner_Name_1",
"title": "Owner.Name"
},
"type": "listselector"
},
"chart_2": {
"parameters": {
"autoFitMode": "fit",
"showValues": true,
"legend": {
"showHeader": true,
"show": true,
"position": "right-top",
"inside": false
},
"axisMode": "sync",
"exploreLink": true,
"title": {
"label": "Bound Chart",
"align": "left",
"subtitleLabel": ""
},
"trellis": {
"enable": false,
"type": "x",
"chartsPerLine": 4
},
"measureAxis2": {
"showTitle": true,
"showAxis": true,
"title": ""
},
"measureAxis1": {
"showTitle": true,
"showAxis": true,
"title": ""
},
1572
"theme": "wave",
"step": "Owner_Username_3",
"dimensionAxis": {
"showTitle": true,
"showAxis": true,
"title": ""
}
},
"type": "chart"
},
"chart_4": {
"parameters": {
"visualizationType": "pie",
"exploreLink": true,
"title": {
"label": "Faceted Chart",
"align": "left",
"subtitleLabel": ""
},
"step": "Owner_Name_3",
"theme": "wave",
"legend": {
"show": true,
"showHeader": true,
"inside": false,
"position": "right-top"
},
"trellis": {
"enable": false,
"type": "x",
"chartsPerLine": 4
},
"showMeasureTitle": true,
"showTotal": true,
"inner": 70
},
"type": "chart"
},
"container_1": {
"type": "container",
"parameters": {
"documentId": "",
"fit": "original",
"alignmentX": "left",
"alignmentY": "top"
}
}
}
},
"datasets": [
{
1573
}
]
}
For information about editing the dashboard JSON, see the CRM Analytics Dashboard JSON Developer Guide .
Set Initial Global Filters in the Dashboard

If the CRM Analytics dashboard contains global filters, you can set the initial filters that are applied when the dashboard first opens. If a
global filter is unlocked, the dashboard viewer can change the filter while viewing the dashboard. Global filters apply to all queries in
the dashboard unless a query is configured to ignore these filters.
1. While editing a dashboard, select a global filter, and then click Pick Initial Values (1).
2. Choose the initial filter value for each global filter, then click Apply.
3. Click Done, and save the dashboard.
SEE ALSO:

After you add widgets to a dashboard, optimize it for viewing on smaller screens. For example, remove widgets from a layout for on-the-go
mobile users, and rearrange widgets for users with tablet-sized screens.
When you generate a new layout, widgets from the currently selected layout can be automatically added to the new layout or you can
add widgets manually. If the current layout contains multiple pages, CRM Analytics also copies the pages to the new layout. You can
also add and rearrange widgets in one layout without affecting other layouts.
1574
Note: Use Manage Layouts to enable or disable synchronization between layouts.
2. To create a layout, click Add Layout (1). To open an existing layout, select it from the list (2).
3. Add and rearrange widgets, and choose other layout properties. The designer updates the preview in real time so that you can see
how your changes affect the display.
General
Set the layout name, grid settings, and background color. The designer previews the dashboard and layout based on the layout
property settings.
Device
Specify information about the devices that can use this layout. For more information about how CRM Analytics uses these
properties to choose the right layout, see Rules for Choosing a Layout for a Device.
Background Image
To apply a background image to the entire dashboard when this layout is used, enter the details about the background image.
You don’t have to include a background image.
Unused Widgets
To add an unused widget to the layout, drag the widget from the Unused Widgets section to the canvas.
Note: CRM Analytics also adds the widget to other layouts if layout synchronization is on and the layouts were created
with Copy Content enabled.
Theme
Themes enable you to create and apply aesthetic properties for dashboard widgets all at once. For more information, see Manage
Widget Properties with Themes.
1575
4. To save your layout changes, save the dashboard.

To edit a layout name or delete a layout, click Manage Layouts.

Layout properties specify the layout name, designer grid settings, background settings, and requirements for devices that can use
this layout. The properties apply only to dashboards created in the dashboard designer.
If multiple layouts are defined for a dashboard, CRM Analytics chooses the optimal layout when displaying the dashboard on a
device. To determine the optimal layout, CRM Analytics uses the device properties specified for each layout.

Layout properties specify the layout name, designer grid settings, background settings, and requirements for devices that can use this
layout. The properties apply only to dashboards created in the dashboard designer.
General Properties
These general properties apply to the specified layout.
Name Name of the layout.
Columns Number of columns in the dashboard designer grid. Increase the

number of columns to increase the precision in the layout.
Row Height Height of the rows in the dashboard designer grid. Values are
Normal and Fine. When using the Fine option, the vertical spacing
is set to 0 and can’t be changed. Analytics determines the default
sizes of widgets based on number of columns and the row height
to ensure that the widgets are readable and retain their relative
sizes.
Cell Spacing Horizontal and vertical spacing (in pixels) between cells in the
dashboard designer grid.
Maximum Dashboard Width Maximum width (in pixels) that the dashboard can use. If needed,
Analytics rearranges the existing dashboard widgets based on this
setting in the layout.
Background Color You can set the background color of the following areas.
Grid
Color of the dashboard designer grid.
Gutter
Color of the gutter that appears when the device’s screen is
wider than the dashboard’s maximum width.
1576
Device Properties
Analytics uses these values to choose the optimal layout for the device accessing the dashboard.
Screen Width Width of the devices supported by this layout. Specify the minimum
and maximum width (in pixels).
Orientation Orientation of the devices supported by this layout.
Platform Platform of the devices supported by this layout. Select one of the
following values:
iOS
For iOS-specific mobile devices that access Analytics apps from
the CRM Analytics mobile app.
Android
For Android-specific mobile devices that access Analytics apps
from the CRM Analytics mobile app.
All
For all other devices, including mobile devices that access
Analytics apps from a web browser or the Salesforce mobile
app. Basically, if you access a CRM Analytics app using any
method other than the Analytics mobile app, you must set this
option to All.
Background Image Properties
Image The file name of the image. The image must be available in the
gallery of the CRM Analytics app that contains the dashboard. This
property applies to background images created during or after
Spring ’17.
Image ID 15-character ID of the image. The image must be uploaded to the

Documents tab of Salesforce with the Externally Available Image
option enabled. This property applies to background images
created before Spring ’17.
Image Scale Indicate how to fit the image in the background.
Image Alignment Horizontal and vertical alignment of the background image.

If multiple layouts are defined for a dashboard, CRM Analytics chooses the optimal layout when displaying the dashboard on a device.
To determine the optimal layout, CRM Analytics uses the device properties specified for each layout.
CRM Analytics uses the following rules when determining which layout to use for a device.
• A layout is eligible for use when the device accessing the dashboard meets all the device properties set in the Layout panel.
1577
• If more than one layout is eligible, the one with the most device properties set is used. If there’s a tie, the most recently defined
layout is used.
• If no layouts are eligible with the device, the first defined layout is used.

1. Click the Dashboard Properties button.
2. Click the Theme tab and create the desired style in the Widget Style section for widgets to inherit.
Select previously used and custom colors from the My Colors tab.
1578
Note: When a widget must have a style that’s apart from a theme, uncheck Use defaults in the widget’s property. When
you want a widget to inherit a theme, use Apply to all widgets on the Theme tab.
Optimize Dashboard Performance

Before you finalize the dashboard, run a performance check on the dashboard and its queries to ensure that everything is running
optimally. The dashboard inspector identifies different types of bottlenecks, such as slow queries and networks, and provides
recommendations to improve performance. Because dashboard layouts can contain different widgets (and queries), run the inspector
on each layout. If a dashboard contains multiple pages, you can run the inspector for all pages. The inspector initially provides results
only for the current page.
1. While browsing the app, open a dashboard in view mode.
The dashboard inspector is not available while running the app, editing the dashboard, or previewing an embedded dashboard
outside of CRM Analytics.
2.
To open the dashboard inspector, click and then Dashboard Inspector. The dashboard inspector immediately collects
performance metrics.
3. The Performance tab shows all factors by which the dashboard is evaluated.
1579
Note: If your dashboard contains multiple pages, the dashboard inspector shows results for the current page being viewed.
4. If a warning icon ( ) appears next to a factor, expand the factor to learn how to fix the issue to improve the dashboard’s
performance.
Ignore the factors with a green checkmark ( ) because these issues don’t apply to the dashboard.
5. To analyze the performance of all queries in the dashboard, go to the Query table in the tab.
The table lists all queries that ran when the dashboard loaded. If the dashboard contains multiple pages, the table lists the queries
that ran for the current page. Each time you switch pages, newly run queries are added to the table, and previously run queries,
which are no longer used, are listed as unused.
1580
The table shows the following metrics for each query.
Metric Description
Max Time (SEC) Maximum execution time for each query on the current
dashboard page.
6. Select a query in the table to view additional details about the query and the last run.
1581
For more information about query performance, see Optimize a Query.
Note: When a query has errors and fails to execute, open the Dashboard Inspector and select the query with errors. Use the
View More Details button for more information about bindings syntax errors, query level errors, and the query that was run.
Keyboard Shortcuts for Building CRM Analytics Dashboards and Lenses

You can do some basic actions from your keyboard.
Lens Keyboard Shortcut Description

L Clip to dashboard designer
S Save
N Clone in new tab
Ctrl+E (Windows) Open JSON Editor
Cmd+E (macOS)
Dashboard Keyboard Shortcut Description

Tab Focus on next item in the dashboard.
Shift+Tab Focus on previous item in the dashboard.
Spacebar Select a widget to move it when editing the dashboard.
Arrow keys Move the selected widget when editing the dashboard.
C Share the dashboard when viewing it.
E Toggle between previewing or editing the dashboard.
S Save the dashboard.
X Redo the change.
Z Undo the latest change.
Delete Delete the selected widgets while editing the dashboard.
Drag+Shift Reflow other widgets down when dragging a widget in the

dashboard canvas.
Drag the widget before you press Shift.
Ctrl+Click (Windows) Select multiple widgets while editing the dashboard.
Cmd+Click (macOS)
Ctrl+A (Windows) Select all widgets in the canvas while editing the dashboard.
Cmd+A (macOS)
1582
Dashboard Keyboard Shortcut Description
Ctrl+C (Windows) Copy a widget or multiple widgets.
Cmd+C (macOS)
Ctrl+V (Windows) Paste a widget or multiple widgets.
Cmd+V (macOS)
JSON Editor Keyboard Shortcut Description
Ctrl+E (Windows) View dashboard with changes to JSON.
Cmd+E (macOS)
Ctrl+3 (Windows) Disregard changes and load the original JSON.
Cmd+3 (macOS)
Ctrl+D (Windows) Delete line
Cmd+D (macOS)
Alt+Shift+Down (Windows) Copy lines down
Cmd+Option+Down (macOS)
Alt+Shift+Up (Windows) Copy lines up
Cmd+Option+Up (macOS)
Alt+Down (Windows) Move lines down
Option+Down (macOS)
Alt+Up (Windows) Move lines up
Option+Up (macOS)
Alt+Delete (Windows) Delete to end of line
Ctrl+K (macOS)
Alt+Backspace (Windows) Delete to start of line
Cmd+Delete (macOS)
Ctrl+Delete (Windows) Delete word to the right
Ctrl+A (Windows) Select all
1583

Cmd+A (macOS)
Shift+Left (Windows) Select character to the left
Shift+Left (macOS)
Shift+Right (Windows) Select character to the right
Shift+Right (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+Left (Windows) Select word to the left
Option+Shift+Left (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+Right (Windows) Select word to the right
Option+Shift+Right (macOS)
Shift+Home (Windows) Select to start of line
Shift+Cmd+Left (macOS)
Shift+End (Windows) Select to end of line
Shift+Cmd+Right (macOS)
Shift+Up (Windows) Select up
Shift+Up (macOS)
Shift+Down (Windows) Select down
Shift+Down (macOS)
Shift+PageUp (Windows) Select page up
Shift+PageDown (Windows) Select page down
Ctrl+Shift+Home (Windows) Select to start
Cmd+Shift+Up (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+End (Windows) Select to end
Cmd+Shift+Down (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+D (Windows) Duplicate selection
Cmd+Shift+D (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+P (Windows) Select to matching bracket
1584
Left (Windows) Go to left
Left, Ctrl+B (macOS)
Right (Windows) Go to right
Right, Ctrl+F (macOS)
Ctrl+Left (Windows) Go to word left
Option+Left (macOS)
Ctrl+Right (Windows) Go to word right
Option+Right (macOS)
Up (Windows) Go line up
Up (macOS)
Down (Windows) Go line down
Down, Ctrl+N (macOS)
Alt+Left, Home (Windows) Go to line start
Cmd+Left, Ctrl+A (macOS)
PageUp (Windows) Go to page up
PageDown (Windows) Go to page down
Ctrl+Home (Windows) Go to start
Cmd+Up (macOS)
Ctrl+End (Windows) Go to end
Cmd+Down (macOS)
Ctrl+L (Windows) Go to line
Cmd+L (macOS)
Ctrl+P (Windows) Go to matching bracket
Ctrl+F (Windows) Find
Cmd+F (macOS)
1585
Ctrl+H or Ctrl+F twice (Windows) Replace
Cmd+Option+F (macOS)
Ctrl+K (Windows) Find next
Cmd+G (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+K (Windows) Find previous
Cmd+Shift+G (macOS)
SAQL Editor Keyboard Shortcut Description
Ctrl+D (Windows) Delete line
Cmd+D (macOS)
Alt+Shift+Down (Windows) Copy lines down
Cmd+Option+Down (macOS)
Alt+Shift+Up (Windows) Copy lines up
Cmd+Option+Up (macOS)
Alt+Down (Windows) Move lines down
Option+Down (macOS)
Alt+Up (Windows) Move lines up
Option+Up (macOS)
Alt+Delete (Windows) Delete to line end
Ctrl+K (macOS)
Alt+Backspace (Windows) Delete to line start
Cmd+Delete (macOS)
Ctrl+Delete (Windows) Delete word right
Option+Delete (macOS)
Ctrl+A (Windows) Select all
Cmd+A (macOS)
1586
Shift+Left (Windows) Select left
Shift+Left (macOS)
Shift+Right (Windows) Select right
Shift+Right (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+Left (Windows) Select word left
Option+Shift+Left (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+Right (Windows) Select word right
Option+Shift+Right (macOS)
Shift+Home (Windows) Select to line start
Shift+End (Windows) Select to line end
Shift+Up (Windows) Select up
Shift+Up (macOS)
Shift+Down (Windows) Select down
Shift+Down (macOS)
Shift+PageUp (Windows) Select page up
Shift+PageDown (Windows) Select page down
Ctrl+Shift+Home (Windows) Select to start
Cmd+Shift+Up (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+End (Windows) Select to end
Cmd+Shift+Down (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+D (Windows) Duplicate selection
Cmd+Shift+D (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+P (Windows) Select to matching bracket
Left (Windows) Go to left
Left, Ctrl+B (macOS)
1587
Right (Windows) Go to right
Right, Ctrl+F (macOS)
Ctrl+Left (Windows) Go to word left
Option+Left (macOS)
Ctrl+Right (Windows) Go to word right
Option+Right (macOS)
Up (Windows) Go line up
Up, Ctrl+P (macOS)
Down (Windows) Go line down
Down, Ctrl+N (macOS)
Alt+Left, Home (Windows) Go to line start
Cmd+Left, Ctrl+A (macOS)
Alt+Right, End (Windows) Go to line end
Cmd+Right(macOS)
PageUp (Windows) Go to page up
PageDown (Windows) Go to page down
Ctrl+V (macOS)
Ctrl+Home (Windows) Go to start
Cmd+Up (macOS)
Ctrl+End (Windows) Go to end
Cmd+Down (macOS)
Ctrl+L (Windows) Go to line
Cmd+L (macOS)
Ctrl+P (Windows) Go to matching bracket
Ctrl+H or Ctrl+F twice (Windows) Find
Cmd+F (macOS)
1588
Ctrl+H (Windows) Replace
Cmd+Option+F (macOS)
Ctrl+K (Windows) Find next
Cmd+G (macOS)
Ctrl+Shift+K (Windows) Find previous
Cmd+Shift+G (macOS)
Restore a Previous Version of a Dashboard

CRM Analytics uses version history to back up dashboard versions when you edit them so you can restore a previous version.
Here’s how to restore a previous version of a dashboard.
1.
Click the button at upper right.
2. Select the Version tab to see a list of previous versions of the dashboard.
3. Click the links (Change 1, Change 2, and so on) to view previous versions. The text under the links provides a brief description of
the version if one was added to the Version History field the last time someone saved the dashboard.
4. When you see the one you want to restore, click the disk icon and then click Save. It’s a good idea to enter a brief description of
what’s unique about this version in the Version History field for future reference.
Warning: When you restore a previous version, the dashboard doesn’t run as expected if it depends on a dashboard, dataset, or
lens that’s been deleted. If you get an error when you load a restored version of a dashboard, try restoring older versions until you
get one that works. You can use that one as a starting point to rebuild the dashboard with errors.
1589
For details, see Backup and Restore Previous Versions of Analytics Assets with History API.
Collaborate on a New Dashboard Version Behind the Scenes

CRM Analytics users can add themselves to the list of dashboard publishers so they can edit and test new versions of the dashboard.
Other CRM Analytics users continue to see a live version until a publisher makes the draft the live version.
To enable CRM Analytics users to add themselves to a dashboard publisher list, give them Editor or Manager access to the app that
contains the dashboard. Set access level to an app and all its contents when you share it with users.
1. Add Yourself to the List of Dashboard Publishers

CRM Analytics users with Editor or Manager access to the dashboard can add themselves to the list of dashboard publishers.
2. Collaborate on and Publish a Draft Version of a Dashboard
If you are listed as a publisher, you can review and edit a previous dashboard version. Then save it as the draft version for othesr
publishers to review and publish it as the live version that all CRM Analytics users view.
Add Yourself to the List of Dashboard Publishers

CRM Analytics users with Editor or Manager access to the dashboard can add themselves to the list of dashboard publishers.
1.
Click the button at upper right.
2. Select Version History.

3. Open the Publishers tab and click Add yourself as a Publisher.
To remove yourself from the publisher list, click the x to the right of your name in the publisher list.
Collaborate on and Publish a Draft Version of a Dashboard

If you are listed as a publisher, you can review and edit a previous dashboard version. Then save it as the draft version for othesr publishers
to review and publish it as the live version that all CRM Analytics users view.
Make sure you’ve opened Version History for the dashboard you want to work on and that you’ve made yourself a Publisher.
Select the Versions tab to see a list of all versions of the dashboard. The version at the top of the list is the live version that all CRM
Analytics users see. In the default state, when you open, edit, and save any version of the dashboard, it becomes the live version that
other users view. It also becomes the newest version at the top of the list.
Here’s how to work on a draft version behind the scenes.
1. In the Versions tab, click the triangle to the right of the version link at the top of the list and select Make Live. It’s now marked Live
in the Versions tab.
2. Open any version of the dashboard (including the live version). Edit and save it.
3.
Click the icon and select Version History.
1590
Analyze Your Data Embed and Customize CRM Analytics
4. The version you edited and saved now appears at the top of the list as a new version. It’s marked Draft, which means that only other
publishers can view it. Other users in the org continue to view the version marked Live. Anytime you edit and save the dashboard,
that version appears at the top of the list and is marked Draft.
5. Other publishers can open the dashboard, click Version History, and view the version of the dashboard marked Draft.
6. When you decide the draft version is ready for other users, click the triangle to the right of the version link and select Make Live to
publish it. The published version becomes the live version that other CRM Analytics users view.
Embed and Customize CRM Analytics

Extend CRM Analytics everywhere throughout your business. The CRM Analytics visualizations you’ve built are more powerful when you
share them across your Salesforce experience by integrating them into custom pages, Visualforce pages, Experience Cloud sites, and
more. In addition, custom menus in lenses and dashboards allow you to perform common Salesforce actions directly from CRM Analytics.

Use query faceting settings to control whether filters get applied to embedded dashboards. For example, to apply filters to a dashboard
when it’s opened from a link widget, enable faceting in the underlying query.
Embed Dashboards Everywhere
Embed CRM Analytics dashboards in every Salesforce experience.
Enable Actions for CRM Analytics Lenses and Dashboards
Let users take action on insights directly from CRM Analytics. Add actions to charts and tables in lenses and dashboards.
Integrate CRM Analytics into Salesforce with an Analytics Tab
Access your CRM Analytics home and run CRM Analytics apps from a tab within Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
Drive adoption and engagement with specialized educational resources right where users work. With the widget-specific Learn
option, you can provide videos and webpages that help users get the most out of each dashboard and its charts.
Customize CRM Analytics Dashboards using JSON
Configure advanced features in CRM Analytics dashboards using JSON.
Format Measures and Display Elements with CRM Analytics Extended Metadata (XMD)
Set up your data and customize dashboard elements with CRM Analytics Extended Metadata.

Use query faceting settings to control whether filters get applied to embedded dashboards. For example, to apply filters to a dashboard
when it’s opened from a link widget, enable faceting in the underlying query.
To apply filters to embedded dashboards, set faceting to All.
1591
Filters aren’t applied to embedded dashboards when faceting in underlying queries is set to Include, Exclude, or None.
SEE ALSO:
Embed Dashboards Everywhere

Embed CRM Analytics dashboards in every Salesforce experience.
Compare the options for embedding dashboards. To learn more about embedding dashboards for mobile users, see Integrate Dashboards
Into Your Mobile Users’ Workflow on page 587.
User Interface Where How Component

Lightning Experience Home, record, or app Lightning web component in the Lightning LWC CRM Analytics
home page App Builder (Beta) Dashboard
(wave-wave-dashboard-lwc)
Lightning Experience Home, record, or app Aura component in the Lightning App Builder CRM Analytics Dashboard
home page (wave:waveDashboard)
Lightning Experience Visualforce page Visualforce page component Aura component

(wave:dashboard)
Salesforce App Lightning app page Aura component in the Lightning App Builder CRM Analytics Dashboard
(wave:waveDashboard)
1592
User Interface Where How Component

Experience Cloud Experience Builder Lightning web component in an Experience LWC CRM Analytics
page Builder–based template Dashboard
(wave-wave-dashboard-lwc)
Experience Cloud Visualforce page Aura component in Salesforce Tabs + Aura Component
Visualforce template (wave:waveDashboard)
Depending on the device and the embedding option, you can perform these actions from an embedded CRM Analytics dashboard.
• Save and manage dashboard views
• Post to Chatter
• Download images
• Set notifications
• Subscribe to widgets
• Access global filters
• Link to other CRM Analytics dashboards
• Take action in Salesforce through record actions menus
• Collaborate on dashboards with annotations (available for Experience Cloud site users only)
•
Link to the CRM Analytics Studio app , whether it’s on desktop or on mobile (available for CRM Analytics users but not Experience
Cloud site users)
Embedded CRM Analytics dashboards have these limitations.
• Dashboards can’t be created, updated, or deleted.
• The app navigation menu isn’t available.
• Full-screen presentation mode isn’t available.
• Sharing options don’t include Give Access, Get URL, printing, or posting the link to a dashboard.
• Annotations and conversational exploration aren’t available.
• The charts don’t include hover-over information (tooltips).
• Some filters, such as date selectors, are difficult to set.
An embedded dashboard uses the Lightning Web Component (LWC) framework in Lightning Experience. Use the native CRM Analytics
Dashboard (LWC) component for seamless integration into your Lightning Experience or Experience Cloud pages. The Aura CRM Analytics
Dashboard component is still supported.
For reference documentation, see the Analytics Dashboard Component Developer Guide.
Note: For limitations of embedded dashboards viewed in the Salesforce mobile app, see Considerations When Viewing Dashboards
in a Mobile Web Browser .
Embed Dashboards in Lightning Pages

Add LWC or Aura CRM Analytics dashboards to Lightning home pages, record pages, and app home pages to provide interactive
visualizations of your data. Users can drill down and explore the dashboard within a Lightning page.
1593
Share CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites

With CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud sites, external users can view apps shared with them via CRM Analytics dashboards embedded
in their site. You can embed dashboards using Experience Builder or Visualforce pages.
Add a Analytics Dashboard to a Visualforce Page
By embedding a Analytics dashboard into a Visualforce page, you can provide an interactive presentation of your data. Users can
drill in and explore the dashboard within the frame on the Visualforce page or in a new window in Analytics.
Allow Trusted Sites for Embedded Dashboards
Embed CRM Analytics in any web page or web-based app. By specifying your trusted sites in the CRM Analytics allowlist, you can
include embedded CRM Analytics dashboards in websites and apps outside of Salesforce servers.
Filter and Selection Syntax for Embedded Dashboards
To specify filters or dashboard selections that require JSON strings, use the Filter String attribute of the embedded CRM Analytics
Dashboard Aura component or the Filter attribute of the LWC CRM Analytics Dashboard component.
Embed Dashboards in Lightning Pages

Add LWC or Aura CRM Analytics dashboards to Lightning home pages, record pages, and app home
EDITIONS
pages to provide interactive visualizations of your data. Users can drill down and explore the
dashboard within a Lightning page. Available in: Lightning
To learn more about embedding dashboards for mobile users, see Integrate Dashboards Into Your Experience
Mobile Users’ Workflow on page 587.
Go to an existing Lightning Experience page, select the wheel icon at the upper right, then click Enterprise, Performance,
Edit Page. Or, go to Lightning App Builder, click New, and follow the prompts to create a Lightning Unlimited, and Developer
page. Then, follow these instructions to embed a dashboard in the page. Editions
1. In the list of components, select (Beta) LWC CRM Analytics Dashboard.
USER PERMISSIONS
Note: You can still use the Aura CRM Analytics Dashboard component, but starting in
Summer `24, we recommend using the LWC component for seamless Lightning To view embedded CRM
integration. Analytics dashboards:
• CRM Analytics Growth
2. From the Dashboard dropdown list, select the dashboard to display. permission set license
with Use CRM Analytics
Note: (For Developers) In the code, the developerName attribute is used for the
permission
dashboard name. If configuring the component programmatically, you can use either
the developerName attribute or the dashboardId attribute. The developerName can be To create and save Lightning
pages in the Lightning App
requested through the API. The dashboardId is the 18-character code beginning with
Builder
0FK that is found in the URL when viewing a dashboard.
3. From the layout dropdown list, select the type of screen where your Lightning page is viewed. To view Lightning pages in
the Lightning App Builder
4. Configure the attributes of the embedded CRM Analytics dashboard.
• View Setup and
Configuration
Height Specify the height of the dashboard in pixels.
The default is 300.
Show Share Icon Add the Share icon on the dashboard. When
this option is selected, users can click the icon
to open the Share dialog, where they can post
to Chatter and download images and data. To
1594
show the Share icon, the minimum dashboard height is 612
pixels. The default is false.
Show Title Control the visibility of the dashboard title. When this option is
selected, the dashboard’s title appears above the dashboard.
The default is true.
Show Header Control the visibility of the dashboard header. When this option
is selected, the dashboard is displayed with a header bar that
includes the Open in Analytics icon, the date and time that the
dashboard’s data was updated, and the dashboard views menu.
The header bar also appears if either Show Sharing Icon or Show
Title is selected.
Open Dashboard Specify where the dashboard opens when users click the open
icon. The default behavior is to open the dashboard in the CRM
Analytics Studio. Other options include opening the dashboard
in the Salesforce Lightning Analytics tab or disabling the open
icon.
Open Links in New Windows (Aura Component only) Specify where links from the dashboard
to other assets are opened. When this option is selected, links
open in new windows. When this option isn’t selected, links open
in the same window. The default is true.
Hide On Error (Aura Component only) Use Set Component Visibility instead.
Enable Notifications Allow users with permission to set conditions and get notified
about updates to dashboard widgets. And when Show Header
is true, this option also surfaces the notifications icon in the
dashboard header, which opens the notifications management
panel for editing and deleting notifications. If you enable Show
Header, it’s recommended that the dashboard is at least 400
pixels in width to accommodate the management panel.
Enable Subscriptions Allow users with permission to subscribe for periodic email
updates on dashboard widgets. And when Show Header is true,
this option also surfaces the subscriptions icon in the dashboard
header, which opens the subscriptions management panel for
editing and deleting subscriptions. If you enable Show Header,
it’s recommended that the dashboard is at least 400 pixels in
width to accommodate the management panel.
Set Component Visibility Dynamically controls whether users see a dashboard. To set the
visibility for the dashboard component, add filters. For example,
add a filter of Permissions > Standard
Permissions > Use CRM Analytics Equal
true to show the dashboard component to users with CRM
Analytics permissions only. For more information on component
visibility, see Dynamic Lightning Pages.
1595
Filter (LWC Component only) Add selections or filters to the embedded
dashboard at runtime. You can filter dataset fields by variables
or specified values. Specify filters by entering JSON strings in the
Filter text box. For examples, see Filter and Selection Syntax for
Embedded Dashboards. If a filter or selection can’t be applied,
the attribute is ignored and the dashboard appears with all its
data and no selection.
Dashboard Filters (Aura Component only) Add selections or filters to the embedded
dashboard at runtime. You can filter dataset fields by variables
or specified values. Specify filters either by using the
point-and-click Filter Builder (record pages only) or by entering
JSON strings in the Filter String box. For examples, see Filter and
Selection Syntax for Embedded Dashboards.
Use the Filter Builder to set up a dashboard to show the
contextual data for each record page in which it appears. Click
Filter Builder and + Add Dashboard Filter. Select a dataset,
dataset field, and operator. Then click Select to specify a field in
an sObject or custom object.
Prevent users from exposing more data by locking or hiding

filters. With the Locked option, the Filters menu appears in the
embedded dashboard header, but users can’t modify or delete
the filters. With the Hidden option, the Filters menu doesn’t
appear in the embedded dashboard header.
When you click OK, the filter appears in the configuration panel.
1596
Click an existing filter to edit it in the Filter Builder, or click X to

remove it. To view or edit the filter JSON, click Filter String.
1597
Note: For the Filter Builder, the dataset fields must be dimensions (not dates or measures), and the object field values must
be tokenizable (not static values). If a filter is created or edited in the Filter String text box, it can't be viewed or edited in the
Filter Builder. If a filter or selection can’t be applied, the attribute is ignored and the dashboard appears with all its data and
no selection.
Note: When setting up locked or hidden filters for embedded dashboards, keep in mind the following considerations.
• Locked and hidden filters are applied on the dashboard. If a filter makes a field visible, users see the field even when you’ve
restricted access to filters with one of these options.
• Locked and Hidden options aren’t automatically applied in linked dashboards or lens explorations. The options are applied
only on the dashboard where specified.
• Locked and Hidden options are applied to a dashboard when embedded or when opened in CRM Analytics Studio or in
the Analytics tab.
• When locked or hidden filters are applied to the dashboard, the My Views menu isn’t visible to users.
5. Click Activation, and select the custom record page assignment.

For information about working with the Lightning App Builder, start on the Lightning App Builder overview page.
1598
Share CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites

With CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud sites, external users can view apps shared with them via
EDITIONS
CRM Analytics dashboards embedded in their site. You can embed dashboards using Experience
Builder or Visualforce pages. Available in Salesforce
Note: Only users with a Customer Community Plus, Partner Community, or Lightning External Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Apps Plus license can use this feature. This feature isn’t supported for guest users.
Experience Cloud site users with license and permission can view dashboards embedded in their Available for an extra cost in
site, and they can explore lenses, facets, and links in the embedded dashboards. Site users can’t Enterprise, Performance,
access the CRM Analytics home page or create, update, or delete any CRM Analytics asset. They and Unlimited Editions. Also
also can’t upload data. This table summarizes differences between internal CRM Analytics users and available in: Developer
Edition.
external site users.
CRM Analytics Users Site Users*** USER PERMISSIONS

Access, Explore, and Facet Dashboards and To create, customize, or
Lenses activate a site:
• Create and Set Up
Create, Update, and Delete Dashboards and Experiences
Lenses
AND is a member of the
Share Dashboards and Lenses (post to site they’re trying to
Chatter and download images and data*) update
Save Dashboard Views** To modify CRM Analytics

settings:
Access the CRM Analytics Studio or CRM • Analytics Growth
Analytics Mobile App permission set license
with Manage CRM
Access CRM Analytics Prebuilt Apps Analytics permission
Analyze Large Datasets To view, explore, and share

embedded CRM Analytics
Benefit from Security Predicates and dashboards for users with
Encryption an Experience Cloud site
license:
Annotate Dashboard Widgets* • CRM Analytics for
Communities permission
Subscribe to Lenses and Dashboard set license with View
Widgets* CRM Analytics on
Set and Track Notifications permission
Open Salesforce Records To download data from
widgets and lenses using
Perform Record-level Actions from Custom the CRM Analytics user
Action Menus interface:
• Download CRM
Perform Bulk Actions from Customized Analytics Data
Widget Menus
View Charts based on a Timeseries Query
1599
* Requires user permission. ** Requires setting enabled in Setup. ***Requires CRM Analytics for Communities permission set license
with View CRM Analytics on Experience Cloud pages permission.
Here are the high-level steps for setting up CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud sites.
1. Enable Share Analytics with Communities and set up site members. See Enable CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud
Sites.
2. Create CRM Analytics dashboards and save them in a CRM Analytics app that you can share with your site.
Important: All datasets and other assets referenced by the dashboards must also be in the same app that you share with
your site.
3. From the CRM Analytics app containing your dashboards, select Share.
4. In the Share dialog, select Enable sharing with Communities.
When an app is enabled for sharing with external users, a message appears to let you know at a glance. You can easily check and
change the sharing status of apps.
5. Share the app with site partners and customers by entering their names and clicking Add. Site members in the sharing list are
highlighted in orange to distinguish them as external users, and Viewer is the only access available for them.
6. Embed your CRM Analytics dashboards using either Experience Builder or Visualforce.
Considerations
Important: If your Site uses color customizations, the customizations also appear in your embedded dashboards. To prevent the
Site customizations from impacting your embedded dashboards, you can enable the legacy iframe behavior. From Setup, in the
1600
Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and select Settings. Select Use legacy iframe instead of LWC for embedded
dashboards and click Save
Note: Apex steps aren’t supported for dashboards embedded in sites.
Security is enforced at these levels.

• By role, group, or user, via the Sharing dialog.
• At the CRM Analytics app level, via the Enable sharing with Communities checkbox.
• At the org setup level, via security predicates.
Note: Embedded dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites don't support sharing inheritance. Leverage security predicates to
control security.
Access to the CRM Analytics REST API is limited to the GET method with these endpoints:
• /wave/folders/<folder ID> — Access to folders shared with the site.
• /wave/dashboards/<dashboard ID or API Name> — Access to dashboards belonging to a folder shared with the
site.
• /wave/lenses/<lens ID or API Name> — Access to lenses belonging to a folder shared with the site.
• /wave/datasets/<dataset ID> — Access to datasets belonging to a folder shared with the site.
Use Experience Builder to Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites
Add analytics via the CRM Analytics Dashboard component available in Experience Builder–based templates.
Use Visualforce to Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites
Share analytics with external users via CRM Analytics dashboards embedded in their site.
Collaborate on CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites with Annotations
Foster an environment of open communication sparked by CRM Analytics dashboards embedded in Experience Cloud sites. With
annotations, partners and customers can converse in Chatter feeds on individual dashboard widgets. Annotations are available
whether dashboards are embedded via Visualforce or the Experience Builder.
Take Action in Salesforce from Experience Cloud Sites
From CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud sites, you can open Salesforce records and perform record-level actions and bulk actions.
You set up an action menu on a dataset or a bulk action on a table widget. Then your site users can open records and take action
in Salesforce directly from the CRM Analytics dashboard, without leaving your site.
Best Practices for CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud
Before setting up an Experience Cloud site with CRM Analytics, keep these best practices in mind for optimal performance and data
security.
SEE ALSO:
1601
Use Experience Builder to Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites
Add analytics via the CRM Analytics Dashboard component available in Experience Builder–based
EDITIONS
templates.
To add CRM Analytics to your Experience Cloud site, follow the high-level steps in Share CRM Available in: Salesforce
Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites. When you’re ready to embed a dashboard, use the following Classic and Lightning
procedure. Experience.
1. Select the (Beta) LWC CRM Analytics Dashboard component in Experience Builder. Available for an extra cost
Note: You can still use the Aura CRM Analytics Dashboard component, but starting in and Unlimited Editions. Also
Summer `24, we recommend using the LWC component for seamless Lightning available in: Developer
integration. Edition.
2. From the Dashboard dropdown list, select the dashboard to display. Dashboards appear in the
list, and are visible in sites, when Enable sharing with Communities is selected in an app’s USER PERMISSIONS
Share dialog.
To create, customize, or
Note: (For Developers) In the code, the dashboard name is represented with the activate a site:
dashboard ID. The dashboardId is the 18-character code beginning with 0FK that is found • Create and Set Up
in the URL when viewing a dashboard. Experiences
3. Configure the attributes of the embedded CRM Analytics dashboard. site they’re trying to
update
To modify CRM Analytics
Height Specify the height of the dashboard in pixels. settings:
The default is 300. • Analytics Growth
permission set license
Filter Add selections or filters to apply to the with Manage Analytics
dashboard when it appears on the page at permission
runtime. You can filter dataset fields by
To view, explore, and share
variables or specified values. Specify filters by embedded CRM Analytics
entering JSON strings in the Filter box. For dashboards for users with
example JSON strings, see Filter and Selection an Experience Cloud license:
Syntax for Embedded Dashboards. • Analytics for
Show Share Icon Add the Share icon on the dashboard. When set license with View
this option is selected, users can click the icon Analytics on
to open the Share dialog, where they can post Communities pages
to Chatter and download images and data. To permission
show the Share icon, the minimum dashboard
height is 612 pixels. The default is false.
Show Title Control the visibility of the dashboard title.

When this option is selected, the dashboard’s
title appears above the dashboard. The default
is true.
Show Header Control the visibility of the dashboard header.

When this option is selected, the dashboard
is displayed with a header bar. The header bar
includes the Open in CRM Analytics icon, the
date and time that the dashboard’s data was
1602
updated, and the dashboard views menu. The header bar also
appears if either Show Share Icon or Show Title is selected.
Open Links in New Windows (Aura Component only) Specify where links from the dashboard
to other assets are opened. When this option is selected, links
open in new windows. When this option isn’t selected, links open
in the same window. The default is true.
Hide On Error (Aura Component only) Control whether users see a dashboard
that has an error. When this option is selected, if the dashboard
has an error, it doesn’t appear on the page. When this option
isn’t selected, the dashboard appears but doesn’t show any data.
An error can occur when a user doesn't have access to the
dashboard or it has been deleted. The default is false.
For information about working with Experience Builder, start with Customize Sites with Experience Builder.
1603
Use Visualforce to Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites

Share analytics with external users via CRM Analytics dashboards embedded in their site.
EDITIONS
1. To add CRM Analytics to your site, follow the high-level steps in Share CRM Analytics in
Experience Cloud Sites. Available in: Salesforce
2. Select the Visualforce page where you embed CRM Analytics, or create a page. See Defining
Experience.
Visualforce Pages.
3. Optionally, add your page to a Visualforce tab. See Create Visualforce Tabs. Available for an extra cost
4. When you’re ready to embed a dashboard, see Add a CRM Analytics Dashboard to a Visualforce and Unlimited Editions. Also
Page. available in: Developer
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
activate a site:
Experiences
site they’re trying to
update

settings:
• Analytics Growth
with Manage Analytics
permission
dashboards for users with
an Experience Cloud license:
• Analytics for
set license with View
Analytics on
Communities pages
permission
1604
Collaborate on CRM Analytics Dashboards in Experience Cloud Sites with Annotations

Foster an environment of open communication sparked by CRM Analytics dashboards embedded
EDITIONS
in Experience Cloud sites. With annotations, partners and customers can converse in Chatter feeds
on individual dashboard widgets. Annotations are available whether dashboards are embedded Available in: Salesforce
via Visualforce or the Experience Builder. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Apps Plus license can use this feature. Available for an extra cost
If you haven’t already set up CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud, see Share CRM Analytics in in: Enterprise, Performance,
Experience Cloud Sites. To set up annotations, verify that Chatter is enabled for your community and Unlimited Editions. Also
users. Also, enable feed tracking on CRM Analytics Assets. (For more information, see Enable available in: Developer
Edition.
Annotations on Dashboard Widgets.)
To create annotations, click to open your embedded dashboard in CRM Analytics. Then USER PERMISSIONS
select Annotate from the dropdown menu on a widget.
activate a site:
Experiences
community they’re trying
to update

settings:
permission
dashboards for users with
an Experience Cloud license:
• Analytics for
set license with View
Analytics on
Communities pages
permission
1605
In the annotations panel, you can type messages and @mention people in your org who have access to the dashboard. You can also
share screenshots of the current state of the dashboard. CRM Analytics dashboard annotations are natively integrated with Chatter, and
comments on dashboards also appear as Chatter posts. If users click the Follow button, they see all comments on the dashboard. From
Chatter, they can click the dashboard image to navigate directly to the annotation on the dashboard in CRM Analytics, where they can
add to the conversation. For more information, see Collaborate with Dashboard Annotations.
The visibility of posts depends on the type of user that makes the original post. For security, external site users can’t see annotations
originated by your org’s internal users (unless the external user is @mentioned). But if an internal user replies on an annotation started
by an external user, then all users can see all posts. For more information, see the visibility property in the Connect REST API
Developer Guide.
1606
Take Action in Salesforce from Experience Cloud Sites

From CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud sites, you can open Salesforce records and perform
EDITIONS
record-level actions and bulk actions. You set up an action menu on a dataset or a bulk action on
a table widget. Then your site users can open records and take action in Salesforce directly from Available in: Salesforce
the CRM Analytics dashboard, without leaving your site. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
Apps Plus license can use this feature. Available for an extra cost
Custom Action Menus
Let users create, update, and interact with Salesforce records that underlie the CRM Analytics Edition.
dashboards they see in their site. Action menus can include object-specific and global actions
defined in Salesforce, such as creating cases, updating accounts, and posting to Chatter.
USER PERMISSIONS
Add an action menu to any dataset field, except a measure. You can set up the menu to include
any actions available for the field. When an action menu is set up, a dropdown arrow appears in To create, customize, or
charts, chart legends, and table cells. Records that users access then open in new tabs within the activate an Experience
site. To set up action menus, see Perform Actions on a Salesforce Record from CRM Analytics. Cloud site:
Experiences
Bulk Actions AND is a member of the
You can also configure bulk action menu options to let users perform actions on multiple Salesforce site they’re trying to
records with only one click. For example, using the dashboard to filter a set of leads in a table, a update
user could create a campaign for those leads by selecting the bulk action in the table’s menu. To modify CRM Analytics
With CRM Analytics bulk actions, you can perform an action on all records shown in a table. You settings:
define the bulk action in a Visualforce page that is enabled for Experience Builder sites. You can • Analytics Growth
also configure the Visualforce page to display the results of the action or show an interactive form. permission set license
When the bulk action is set up, users can access it in the table’s menu. For setup details, see Perform
permission
Bulk Actions on Multiple Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics.
Considerations dashboards for users with a
site license:
Be aware of the following considerations for Salesforce actions in CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud
• Analytics for
sites.
• Action menus are accessible in dashboards embedded via either Experience Builder–based set license with View
templates or Salesforce Tabs + Visualforce templates. Analytics on
Communities pages
• CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud isn’t supported on mobile. permission
• To access a record from a dashboard’s action menu, the user must have access to its objects
and fields.
• Users see only actions available to their profile.
• Bulk actions are available only in values tables.
• Visualforce pages and components used in bulk actions must be made available for use in Experience Builder sites.
• Bulk action queries on Visualforce pages require the site prefix in the query URL, and the site prefix must start with a slash (/).
Best Practices for CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud

Before setting up an Experience Cloud site with CRM Analytics, keep these best practices in mind for optimal performance and data
security.
1607
Set Up Data Security for Row-Level Datasets

To restrict a user’s access to only the records that they need to see, implement a security predicate. A security predicate is a filter that
designates dataset row access. Security predicates work only with the user object. In scenarios where you want to set data security based
on the details of an account, transfer the account details to the User object in Setup. Putting proper security predicates in place can also
help improve query load time. See Add Row-Level Security with a Security Predicate for more recommendations.
Enable Dashboard Viewing with Permission Sets and Shared Apps
To ensure that a dashboard is properly shared, create permission sets for users to view the dashboards. Then make sure that all assets
related to the embedded dashboard, including the datasets, are in a shared app. Share this app with external partners or customer
community users, and select Enable sharing with Communities. See Share CRM Analytics in Experience Cloud Sites for more information.
Secure Data Downloading and Image Sharing
To protect sensitive data from being downloaded to .xls or .csv files, disable Download CRM Analytics Data in System Permissions.
For more information, see Enable Downloading Data from CRM Analytics. Regarding images, all users can share .png images of lenses,
dashboard widgets, and whole dashboards by default. To control downloading and sharing of images with your data, select Secure
Image Sharing and Downloading in Setup Settings. For more information, see Secure Image Sharing and Downloading.
Prepare Your Datasets for Optimal Performance in Dashboards
To lay the foundation for better dashboard performance, optimize the design of datasets that feed into the dashboard. Make sure that
your calculations are completed at the dataset level instead of the dashboard builder level. Leverage capabilities of CRM Analytics by
performing operations such as data table joining. For more information, see Best Practices for a Faster Dashboard.
Design Your Dashboard for Optimal Performance
Conduct a performance check on the dashboard and its queries to confirm that everything is running smoothly. Identify and remove
bottlenecks, such as redundant queries, using the dashboard inspector. Because a dashboard layout can contain different widgets and
queries, run the inspector on each layout. Split your content up by using pages and components to modularize your dashboard. See
Best Practices for Building Your Own CRM Analytics Dashboard for more recommendations.
Design Your Dashboard for Optimal Usability
Make sure that your dashboard is intuitive and easy to use for Experience Cloud site users who don’t have prior CRM Analytics training.
For example, to avoid common new-user confusion, replace any date selectors with static steps and predefined date filters. To ensure
that your dashboard tells a clear story about the data, split it into several pages or dashboards instead of one with multiple graphs.
Design Your Dashboard for Optimal Appeal
Consider using dashboard colors and branding visuals to match the general styling of your Experience Cloud site. Enable layouts for
different devices so that the dashboard looks good when viewed on a mobile device or tablet. Also consider using the Analytics Design
Toolkit to deploy ready-made dashboard, chart, and widget templates within your apps. See Analytics Design Toolkit for more information.
Set Up Filters When Embedding Dashboards
When embedding dashboards via Experience Builder or Visualforce, set up filters and selection so that users see data relevant to them.
These filters and selections apply to the dashboard when it appears on the page at runtime. You can filter dataset fields by variables or
specified values. For more information, see Filter and Selection Syntax for Embedded Dashboards.
1608
Add a Analytics Dashboard to a Visualforce Page

By embedding a Analytics dashboard into a Visualforce page, you can provide an interactive
EDITIONS
presentation of your data. Users can drill in and explore the dashboard within the frame on the
Visualforce page or in a new window in Analytics. Available in Salesforce
To add a dashboard to your Visualforce page, configure the <wave:dashboard> Aura Classic and Lightning
component. You can add one dashboard per Visualforce page. However, the dashboard can include Experience.
links to other dashboards or CRM Analytics assets. Available with CRM
Here are two examples. In these examples, the dashboard is identified by the dashboardId, Analytics, which is available
which is an 18-character code beginning with 0FK. You can find the dashboardId at the end for an extra cost in
of the URL when viewing a dashboard. An alternative way to identify the dashboard is by its Enterprise, Performance,
developerName, which can be requested through the API. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To view embedded Analytics

dashboards:
with Use Analytics
permission OR Analytics
for Communities
with View Analytics on
permission
<apex:page sidebar="true" standardController="Opportunity">
<wave:dashboard dashboardId="0FKB000000006Y7OAI"
showTitle="true"
height="800px"
openLinksInNewWindow="true"
filter="{'datasets' : {'opportunity': [ {'fields':['Id'], 'selection':
['{!Opportunity.Id}']}]}}"/>
</apex:page>
<apex:page standardController="case">
<wave:dashboard dashboardId="0FKxx000000000uGAA"
height="1000px"
showTitle="false"
showSharing="true"
openLocation="HIDE"
openLinksInNewWindow="false"
hideOnError="true"
filter="{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase4': [ {'fields':['Id'], 'selection':
['{!case.Id}']}, {'fields':['OwnerId'], 'filter': { 'operator':'in', 'values':
1609
['{!case.OwnerId}', '{!case.Product__c}']}}]}}"/>
</apex:page>
• The showTitle attribute gives you control over the visibility of the dashboard title. If set to true, the dashboard’s title is included
above the dashboard. If set to false, the dashboard appears without a title. The default is true.
• The showSharing attribute lets you include the Share icon on the dashboard. If the icon is present, users can click to open the
Share dialog, where they can post to Chatter and download images and data. If set to true, and the dashboard is sharable, then the
dashboard shows the Share icon. If set to false, the dashboard doesn't show the Share icon. The default is false. To show the Share
icon, the minimum dashboard height is 612 pixels.
• The showHeader attribute lets you control the visibility of the dashboard header. If set to true, the dashboard is displayed with
a header bar. The header bar includes the open dashboard icon, the date and time that the dashboard’s data was updated, and the
dashboard views menu. If set to false, the dashboard appears without a header bar. The default is true. The header bar automatically
appears when either showSharing or showTitle is true.
• The openLocation attribute lets you control where the open icon on the dashboard header opens the dashboard. The default
value is OPEN_IN_STUDIO, which opens the dashboard in the Analytics Studio. The other options are OPEN_IN_TAB, which
opens the dashboard in the Salesforce Lightning Analytics tab and HIDE, which disables the open icon.
• With the openLinksInNewWindow attribute, you can specify where links from the dashboard to other assets are opened. If
set to true, links open in new windows. If set to false, links to other assets open in the same window. The default is true.
• The hideOnError attribute gives you control over whether a Analytics asset appears if there is an error (such as the user doesn't
have access to the dashboard or it has been deleted). When set to true, if the dashboard has an error, it won’t appear on the page.
When set to false, the dashboard appears but doesn’t show any data. The default is false.
• The enableNotifications attribute lets users with permission to set conditions and get notified about updates to dashboard
widgets. When showHeader is true, this option also surfaces the notifications icon in the dashboard header which opens the
notifications management panel for editing and deleting notifications. If you enable Show Header, it’s recommended that the
dashboard is at least 400 pixels in width to accommodate the management panel. The default is false.
• The enableSubscriptions attribute lets users with permission to subscribe for periodic email updates on dashboard widgets.
When Show Header is true, this option also surfaces the subscriptions icon in the dashboard header which opens the subscriptions
management panel for editing and deleting subscriptions. If you enable Show Header, it’s recommended that the dashboard is at
least 400 pixels in width to accommodate the management panel. The default is false.
• The pageId attribute lets you specify which page of the dashboard to load on render. If not specified, the default page of the
dashboard loads on render.
• The width attribute specifies the width of the dashboard, in pixels or percent. Pixel values are simply the number of pixels, for
example, 500. Percentage values specify the width of the containing HTML element and must include the percent sign, for example,
20%. If the specified width is too large for the device, the maximum device width is used.
• With the filter attribute, you can either select or filter on dataset fields at run time. For example, this attribute can be used to
set up the embedded dashboard to show only the data that’s relevant for the record being viewed by linking data fields in the
dashboard to an object’s fields. Filters are configured with JSON strings.
Use this syntax for filtering on dimensions.
filter="{'datasets' : {'dataset1': [ {'fields': ['field1'], 'selection': ['!value1',
'!value2']}, {'fields': ['field2'], 'filter': { 'operator': 'operator1', 'values':
['!value3', '!value4']}}]}}"
1610
Use this syntax for filtering on measures.

filter="{'datasets' : {'dataset1': [ {'fields': ['field1'], 'selection': ['!value1',
'!value2']}, {'fields': ['field2'], 'filter': { 'operator': 'operator1', 'values':
[[value3]]}}]}}"
For example:
filter="{'datasets' : {'Sales': [ {'fields':['Region', 'Stage'], 'selection': [ ['West',
'Prospecting'], ['North', 'Qualification'] ]}]}}"
Refer to the table to understand the notation for the filter attribute.
Tip: This is a new syntax as of Spring ‘17. The previous syntax, noted here, is still supported.
Notation Description Notes

datasets CRM Analytics dataset Where to find it: On the CRM Analytics home page, select Edit on
the dataset. The System Name is in the left panel of the edit page
for the dataset. (If your org has namespaces, include the namespace
prefix and two underscores before the dataset system name.)
fields Dimension or Measure in the Where to find it: Click the Explore icon to open the widget. Then
CRM Analytics dataset select Show SAQL from the Options menu. For dimension names,
look for “group by” statements. For measure names, look for
statements with functions such as “sum” or “stddev.”
values Field in the Salesforce object, or Where to find it: In Setup, find the object you want, and select Fields.
a specific value Use the Field Name (also known as the API Name). For custom
fields, use the name with “__c” at the end.
selection With the selection option, the The selection option can be used alone or with the filter option.
dashboard is shown with all its Selection takes dimension values only. To use this option, the
data, and the specified dimension dashboard must include a list, date, or toggle widget that groups
values are highlighted by the specified dimension. If a selection specifies a value that doesn't
exist, or the dashboard doesn’t include a list, date, or toggle widget
that groups by the specified dimension, then the selection input is
ignored and the dashboard appears with all its data and no selection.
filter With the filter option, the The filter option can be used alone or with the selection option.
dashboard is shown with only Filter takes dimension or measure values.
filtered data
operator Use with the filter option Supported operators for dimensions: in, not in, matches
Supported operators for measures: ==; !=; >= ; > ; <= ; <
Note: In Visualforce, values must have the format object.field.
Note: To filter on a field that contains special characters, use Visualforce's JSENCODE function in the filter to replace special
characters with encoded values.
1611
For example, this syntax applies the name of the account in the Visualforce page as a selection on the dashboard:
filter="{'datasets': {'Account':[{'fields':['Name'], 'selection':['{!Account.Name}']}]}}"
This example syntax applies the name of the account in the Visualforce page as a filter so that the dashboard shows only the filtered
data:
filter="{'datasets': {'Account': [{'fields':['Name'], 'filter':{'operator': 'matches',
'values':['{!Account.Name}']}}]}}"
Note: The preceding syntax is new in Spring ‘17. The previous syntax continues to be supported, and it works the same as the
new selection option. For reference, here’s the previous syntax:
filter="{ 'datasetSystemName1': {'field1': ['!value1']}, 'datasetSystemName2': {'field1':
['!value1', '!value2'],'field2': ['!value3']} }"
For example:
filter="{'opportunity': {'Id': ['{!Opportunity.Id}']}}"
and
filter="{'ServiceCase4': {'Id': ['{!case.Id}'], 'OwnerId' : ['{!case.OwnerId}'],
'Product__c' : ['{!case.Product__c}'], 'Reason' : ['{!case.Reason}']}}"
For more information about embedding Analytics, see the Visualforce Developer Guide Standard Component Reference.
Allow Trusted Sites for Embedded Dashboards

Embed CRM Analytics in any web page or web-based app. By specifying your trusted sites in the CRM Analytics allowlist, you can include
embedded CRM Analytics dashboards in websites and apps outside of Salesforce servers.
First, add a CRM Analytics dashboard component to your site, using Visualforce embedding, Lightning App Builder, or Lightning Out.
This code sample shows how to add a CRM Analytics dashboard component via Lightning Out.
$Lightning.use("wave:waveApp", function() { $Lightning.createComponent("wave:waveDashboard",
{ dashboardId: "0FKxx00000006bOGAQ" }, "app");}, url, accessToken)
Second, set up an allowlist using the Content Security Policy (CSP). See Set Up an Allowlist of Trusted Sites for Embedded CRM Analytics
Dashboards .
The allowlist for embedded analytics includes the following by default:
• *.salesforce.com:*
• *.salesforce-sites.com:*
• *.site.com:*
• Your org’s company-specific My Domain or custom domain.
Filter and Selection Syntax for Embedded Dashboards

To specify filters or dashboard selections that require JSON strings, use the Filter String attribute of the embedded CRM Analytics
Dashboard Aura component or the Filter attribute of the LWC CRM Analytics Dashboard component.
Note: You can use a token to pass a value from the parent page. If the token resolves to multiple values, the resolved values are
properly reflected in the resulting filter string.
1612
Filter Syntax
Use this syntax for filtering on dimensions. Example values syntax for measures and dates for both filters and selections follow further
down.
{"datasets" : {
"dataset1": [
{
"fields": ["field1"],
"filter": {
"operator": "in",
"values": ["$value1", "$value2"]
}
}
]
}
}
In this example, the dashboard filters the account name on the record page and shows only data related to that account name.
{"datasets": {
"account":[
{
"fields":["Name"],
"filter": {
"operator": "matches",
"values":["$Name"]
}
}
]
}
}
Selection Syntax
With the selection option, the dashboard shows with all its data, and the specified dimension values are highlighted. The selection option
can be used alone or with the filter option. Selection takes dimension values only. To use this option, the dashboard must include a
query (step) of the specified id that groups by the specified group name. If a selection specifies a value that doesn't exist or if the query
itself is unused (for instance, not attached to any widget), then the selection input is ignored and the dashboard appears with no selection
applied.
This example applies the account name as a selection. With the selection option, the dashboard displays all of its data, and the specified
values appear highlighted or selected within the dashboard.
{"steps" : {
"Account_Step":
{
"metadata": {"groups": ["Name"]},
"values": ["$Name"]
}
}
}
1613
Additional Filter and Selection Syntax Examples

Use this syntax for filtering or selecting with measures values.
{
...
"values": [[value1]]
...
}
Use this syntax for filtering or selecting with relative date range values.
{
...
"values": [["year", 0], ["year", 2]]
...
}
Use this syntax for filtering or selecting with open-ended relative date range values.
{
...
"values": [null, ["year", 2]]
...
}
Use this syntax for filtering or selecting with absolute date range. Use epoch times for this range.
{
...
"values": [[1581033600000, 1585353600000]]
...
}
Syntax Reference Tables

Use these tables to understand the notation for the filters and selection syntax.
Notation Description Notes

datasets The CRM Analytics datasets. Datasets have fields Where to find it: In Analytics Studio, select Edit on
and a filter, described in the Datasets Notation the dataset. The System Name is in the left panel of
table. the edit page for the dataset. If your org has
namespaces, include the namespace prefix and two
underscores before the dataset system name.
steps The step names to reference for the selection. Steps Where to find it: In Analytics Studio, select Edit on
have metadata and values, described in the the dashboard. Select the widget to apply the
Steps Notation table. selection on. The step name is ID value on the Query
tab.
1614
Datasets Notation Description Notes

fields A list of Dimensions or Measures in the CRM Analytics Where to find it: Click the Explore icon to open the
dataset. widget. Then select Show SAQL from the Options
menu. For dimension names, look for “group by”
statements. For measure names, look for statements
with functions such as “sum” or “stddev.”
filter The filter to apply to the dashboard data. Filters have The filter takes dimension or measure values,
operators and values, described in the Filter described in the next table.
Notation table.
Filter Notation Description Notes

operator The filter operator. Supported operators for dimensions: in, not in,
matches
Supported operators for measures: ==, !=, >=, >,
<=, <
values The values to use for the filter. These values can be Where to find it: In Setup, find the object you want,
statically specified or inserted dynamically from the and select Fields. Use the Field Name, also known
page context using the $ prefix like as the API Name. For custom fields, use the name
$<FieldName>. with “__c” at the end.
Steps Notation Description Notes

metadata The step metadata. Any groups listed for the grouping must be
referenced in the values.
values The list of step values to use for the selection. These Where to find it: In Setup, find the object you want,
step values can be statically specified or inserted and select Fields. Use the Field Name, also known
dynamically from the page context using the $ prefix as the API Name. For custom fields, use the name
like $<FieldName>. with “__c” at the end.
Note: The preceding syntax became available in Spring ‘17. The previous syntax remains supported, and it works the same as
the new selection option. The new syntax is recommended for use, as it has better performance. For reference, here’s the previous
syntax:
{ "datasetSystemName1": {"field1": ["$value1"]}, "datasetSystemName2": {"field1":
["$value1", "$value2"],"field2": ["$value3"]} }
For example:
{"opportunity": {"AccountId': ["$Id"]}}
1615
Prevent users from exposing more data by locking or hiding filters. With the Locked option, the Filters menu appears in the embedded
dashboard header, but users can’t modify or delete the filters. With the Hidden option, the Filters menu doesn’t appear in the embedded
dashboard header.
Locked and hidden options can only be used for filters and not for selections. Add the options in the filter’s JSON with a boolean value.
For example, “locked”:false,”hidden”:true
When setting up locked or hidden filters for embedded dashboards, keep in mind these considerations.
• Locked and hidden filters are applied on the dashboard. If a filter makes a field visible, users see the field even when you’ve restricted
access to filters with one of these options.
• Locked and Hidden options aren’t automatically applied in linked dashboards or lens explorations. The options are applied only on
the dashboard where specified.
• Locked and Hidden options are applied to a dashboard when embedded or when opened in CRM Analytics Studio or Analytics tab.
• When locked or hidden filters are applied to the dashboard, the My Views menu isn’t visible to users.
Enable Actions for CRM Analytics Lenses and Dashboards

Let users take action on insights directly from CRM Analytics. Add actions to charts and tables in lenses and dashboards.
You can enable object-specific actions and global actions that you previously defined on Salesforce objects directly from CRM Analytics.
Lens and dashboard viewers can invoke these actions to create, update, and interact with Salesforce records. For example, you can
enable actions that let users create cases, update accounts, and post to Chatter.
After enabling actions for a specific dimension, viewers can choose to view all available actions for the dimension when they click records
in that dimension column.
Note: Selecting a Salesforce record action in a CRM Analytics dashboard opens the record in a new Lightning Experience tab. To
open in a new browser tab, select the Open Salesforce records in new browser tabs setting in Setup.

As you gain insights into your business from CRM Analytics, you sometimes perform actions on an underlying Salesforce record. No
need to exit CRM Analytics. You can invoke a Salesforce action on the record directly from CRM Analytics. You can also open web
pages, such as search the web for the company name listed in a CRM Analytics lens or dashboard.
Perform Bulk Actions on Multiple Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics
Sometimes, you need to perform the same action on a group of records. With CRM Analytics bulk actions, you can perform an action
on all records shown in a table in CRM Analytics.
Sometimes users want to perform the same quick action on a list of records. With CRM Analytics mass actions, users can save time
by performing a quick action on up to 100 records at once from a step in CRM Analytics.

As you gain insights into your business from CRM Analytics, you sometimes perform actions on an
USER PERMISSIONS
underlying Salesforce record. No need to exit CRM Analytics. You can invoke a Salesforce action on
the record directly from CRM Analytics. You can also open web pages, such as search the web for To edit a dataset:
the company name listed in a CRM Analytics lens or dashboard. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
You can add an action menu to any dataset field, except a measure. These actions appear in CRM
Analytics chart legends and table cells. To create actions:
1616
CRM Analytics supports the following object and global actions defined in Salesforce:
• Create, update, and change owner actions for object records. Global quick actions aren’t supported.
• Log a Call actions.
• Custom actions to invoke flows, Lightning components, and Visualforce Pages. Canvas apps aren’t supported. Lightning components
that use Lightning events, like force:createRecord or lightning:navigate, are supported in embedded dashboards,
but not in Analytics Studio.
• Standard Chatter actions except for File.
Actions assigned to a page layout for the User object aren’t supported. Actions are only available for the local org, and aren’t supported
for multi-org records. Actions are configured from a dataset or from the table chart view in a lens.
Important: Some actions result in a dashboard refresh. For dashboards with multiple pages, the refresh can result returning to
the home page.
• Configure actions from a dataset
– Edit the dataset.
1617
–
Click the Configure Actions button ( ).
– In the left pane, select the dataset field where you want the action menu to appear.
• Configure actions from a table.
1618
From the table view in a lens, from the dimension column’s action menu, select Configure Actions.
• In the Record ID Field, select the dataset field that contains the record ID of the object that you want to perform the action on.
For instance, if the dataset has Opportunity ID and Account ID fields, select Account ID to perform actions on the account records.
CRM Analytics uses the ID to identify the Salesforce object and record to perform the action on.
Note: In values tables, CRM Analytics uses the ID from the table row to perform the action on if the record ID field used in
the Configure Actions setup is included in the query.
• In Display Fields, choose which dataset fields to show users. An action can apply to multiple Salesforce records. Specifying the dataset
fields narrows the choices and helps users pick the correct record to perform the action on.
For example, if you enable actions on opportunity records, you can show the opportunity name, account name, and opportunity
owner name to help users pick the right opportunity.
• To let users open a Salesforce record or URL, select Open Salesforce record, choose the action in the Open field, and then enter a
tooltip. Users see the tooltip when they hover over the action in a CRM Analytics lens or dashboard.
1619
Choose one of the following actions.
Action Description
Salesforce Record Opens the Salesforce record. CRM Analytics searches for the
record in the same org where it’s running.
Salesforce Record (Multiple Orgs) Opens the Salesforce record from another org. If the dataset
contains records from multiple orgs, select this option. In the
Org ID Field, select the dataset field that contains the org ID. To
enable CRM Analytics to connect to each org, select Manage
Orgs and specify the URL for each org.
URL Opens a URL that uses HTTP or HTTPS protocols.

Use the following syntax to pass a dataset field as a parameter
in the URL:
{{row.<dataset_field_dev_name>}}
For example,
http://www.google.com?q={{row.AccountName}}
If you don’t specify the URL, CRM Analytics uses the org’s URL.
For example, you can specify the following parameter to open
the Account record in Salesforce:
/{{row.AccountId}}
CRM Analytics retrieves the Account ID from the AccountId field

in the dataset record.
• To enable users to perform actions on a Salesforce record, select Perform Salesforce actions and then choose the actions. The list
of actions varies based on the object identified by the Record ID Field.
1620
Option Description
All actions Adds all actions defined in the page layout for this object,
including new ones created later.
Choose actions Select from the list of currently available actions.
Note: The list contains a superset of all actions defined in all page layouts for the Salesforce object. Actions are only available
for the local org, and aren’t supported for multi-org records.
Note: A CRM Analytics user sees only the actions that you select and that are assigned to their page layout. If the predefined
actions are overridden for the Salesforce mobile app and Lightning Experience in a page layout, CRM Analytics displays only
the actions that are added to both the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher and the Salesforce Mobile and Lightning
Experience Actions sections of the layout.
1621
• Click Save.
Record Actions Example

Each week, opportunity owners analyze their opportunities using a CRM Analytics dashboard. Sometimes, they must update an
opportunity. To help them perform the update without going back and forth between CRM Analytics and Sales Cloud, you decide
to set up CRM Analytics actions. To let CRM Analytics dashboard viewers update an opportunity record from CRM Analytics, you add
the Update Opportunity action to the Opportunity Name field in a CRM Analytics dataset. The first step is to set up the action in
Salesforce and then add the action to the CRM Analytics dataset field.
Record Actions Example

Each week, opportunity owners analyze their opportunities using a CRM Analytics dashboard. Sometimes, they must update an opportunity.
To help them perform the update without going back and forth between CRM Analytics and Sales Cloud, you decide to set up CRM
Analytics actions. To let CRM Analytics dashboard viewers update an opportunity record from CRM Analytics, you add the Update
Opportunity action to the Opportunity Name field in a CRM Analytics dataset. The first step is to set up the action in Salesforce and then
add the action to the CRM Analytics dataset field.
To implement this record-level action, perform the following tasks.
1622
1. Create the Salesforce Action and Add It to an Object

This example adds the predefined Update a Record action to the Opportunities object.
2. Apply the Action to the Object’s Page Layout
Add the action to the page layout for the object. Users whose profiles are assigned to that layout can see the action in Salesforce.
Page layouts control the layout and organization of content, including custom actions, on record detail pages. Each record detail
page can have multiple page layouts to give different users a unique experience.
3. Add the Action to the CRM Analytics Dataset Field
When you add the Update Opportunity action to the Opportunity Name field in the Opportunities dataset, you specify which
dimension shows the action menu. You also specify the dataset field that contains the Salesforce record ID. The ID identifies both
the Salesforce object and the record.
Create the Salesforce Action and Add It to an Object

This example adds the predefined Update a Record action to the Opportunities object.
EDITIONS
1. In Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter the name of the object that you want to add actions to.
For this example, enter Opportunities, then select Buttons, Links, and Actions. Available in Salesforce
2. Click New Action to see which types of actions are available.
Experience.
3. From the Action Type dropdown list, select the action to add. In this case, select Update a
Record. Available with CRM
4. Enter a label and description for the action. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create actions:
1623
5. Click Save.
The next page shows the default fields that you can update. For the example, add the Probability (%) and Type fields.
6. Drag Probability (%) and Type below the Stage field in the workspace. To select multiple fields, hold down Ctrl (for Windows) or
Cmd (for macOS).
1624
7. Click Save.
You added the Update Opportunity action to the Opportunities object. Next, you add it to a page layout to determine which users
can see the action.
Apply the Action to the Object’s Page Layout

Add the action to the page layout for the object. Users whose profiles are assigned to that layout
EDITIONS
can see the action in Salesforce. Page layouts control the layout and organization of content,
including custom actions, on record detail pages. Each record detail page can have multiple page Available in Salesforce
layouts to give different users a unique experience. Classic and Lightning
In this example, you add the Update Opportunity action to the opportunity page layout that’s Experience.
assigned to the Standard User profile. You can use these same techniques to add actions to any
Available with CRM
Salesforce page layout and user profile. Analytics, which is available
1. Go to Setup in Salesforce, and enter the name of the object in the Quick Find box. For the for an extra cost in
example, enter Opportunities. Then select Page Layouts to see what’s available. Enterprise, Performance,
2. If multiple page layouts are defined for the object, click Page Layout Assignment to see which
page layout is assigned to each user profile.
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create actions:
3. Edit the page layout assigned to the profile for the users for whom you want to access the action.
For this example, edit the Opportunity Layout, which is assigned to the Standard User profile. Users who are assigned the other
opportunity page layouts can’t see this custom action, unless you apply the action to those page layouts.
4. To open the layout, click the Opportunity Layout link next to a profile. It doesn’t matter which profile.
5. In the palette, click Quick Actions to select the actions to add to the layout.
The available actions appear to the right.
6. Drag the Update Opportunity custom action to the existing actions in the Quick Actions in the Salesforce Classic Publisher section.
1625
7. If the predefined actions are overridden in the Salesforce app and Lightning Experience Actions section, you must also drag the
action to that section.
If the predefined actions are overridden, Analytics shows only the actions that appear in both the Quick Actions in the Salesforce
Classic Publisher and Mobile & Lightning Actions sections.
8. Click Save.
This action is now available on the Opportunity details page for all users assigned the Opportunity Layout.
1626
Note: If a page layout is based on a record type that certain users can’t access, actions for that type aren’t available to them.
Add the Action to the CRM Analytics Dataset Field

When you add the Update Opportunity action to the Opportunity Name field in the Opportunities dataset, you specify which dimension
shows the action menu. You also specify the dataset field that contains the Salesforce record ID. The ID identifies both the Salesforce
object and the record.
1. Edit the dataset.
1627
2.
Click the Configure Actions button ( .
3. In the left pane, select the dataset field where you want the action menu to appear.
1628
4. In the Record ID Field, select Opportunity Id, which is the dataset field that contains the record ID of the Opportunity object.
5. In Display Fields, select the dataset fields to show if multiple records match the action. Users can review this information to determine
which Salesforce record to perform the action on. To help users identify the correct opportunity record, show Opportunity ID,
Opportunity Name, Opportunity Owner, and Account Name.
6. To enable users to perform actions on a Salesforce record, select Perform Salesforce actions and then select Choose actions.
7. Select Update Opportunity.
8. Click Save.
Perform Bulk Actions on Multiple Salesforce Records from CRM Analytics

Sometimes, you need to perform the same action on a group of records. With CRM Analytics bulk actions, you can perform an action
on all records shown in a table in CRM Analytics.
You define the bulk action in a Visualforce page. The Visualforce page can make calls to Apex methods. You can also configure the
Visualforce page to display the results of the action or show an interactive form. For example, you can create a form that allows the
dashboard viewer to change the account owner of each opportunity shown in the table widget.
Before we get into the details about how to create a bulk action, review the following high-level process.
1. CRM Analytics passes the SAQL query used to populate the table widget to the Visualforce page.
Note: The SAQL query that CRM Analytics passes usually contains a limit. To return more results, modify the limit statement
in the SAQL query.
2. You write custom Visualforce and, if needed, Apex code to extract the SAQL query.
Tip: When issuing a CRM Analytics API request for the SAQL query, if most of your logic is in Javascript on the client side, then
you should use AJAX from Javascript. If most of your logic is in Apex, then use HTTP from your Apex class.
3. Your code executes the SAQL query against the CRM Analytics Query API.
4. The CRM Analytics API returns the results of the query—dataset rows—to the Visualforce page.
1629
5. You write more custom code that performs actions on the returned dataset rows. For example, you can perform a bulk edit, bulk
create, or integrate with third party.
Note: Bulk actions only work on steps that query datasets. If the table widget is built on a step with type static or soql, the
action doesn’t work.
Bulk Actions Example

You want to add the “Create Opportunities” option in a table widget’s action menu. This action must create an opportunity for each
account shown in a table widget.
Bulk Actions Example

You want to add the “Create Opportunities” option in a table widget’s action menu. This action must create an opportunity for each
account shown in a table widget.
Note: This widget-level action menu is different from the record-level action menu that you can access from a record.
To keep the user informed of what is happening, the action must also display a Visualforce page that shows the progress of the following
tasks.
1. The Visualforce page retrieves a list of accounts from the SAQL query used to populate the table widget. If the table widget’s results
were previously filtered because of selections in other dashboard widgets, only the filtered records are returned.
2. The Visualforce page creates an opportunity for each retrieved account.
1630
3. The Visualforce page shows the opportunity created for each account.
To implement this bulk action, perform the following tasks.
1. Define Action Behavior with Apex Controller Class and Methods

Define an Apex controller class and methods that generate a list of accounts shown in the table widget, create an opportunity for
each account, and return the progress of each task.
2. Create a Visualforce Page That Executes the Action
The Visualforce page calls the methods defined in the Apex controller class to invoke the action and provide a status on the tasks.
3. Assign Bulk Action to Table Widget
Configure the table widget properties to expose the bulk action defined in the Visualforce page.
Define Action Behavior with Apex Controller Class and Methods

Define an Apex controller class and methods that generate a list of accounts shown in the table widget, create an opportunity for each
account, and return the progress of each task.
1. From setup, enter Apex Classes in the Quick Find box.
2. Select Apex Classes.
3. Click New.
1631
4. Add the following code.

public class CreateOpportunitiesController {
public string query{get; set;}
/* To determine the records to perform the bulk action on, extract the SAQL query */
public PageReference init() {
query = ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('query');
return null;
}
/* Takes the account records from the SAQL query, creates an opportunity for each account,
and then returns a map between account ID and new opportunity name. Note: Account.Name
and AccountId referenced below refer to the dataset field names. Update them to match
your dataset fields. */
@RemoteAction
public static Map<String, String> create(List <Map<String, String>> accountRecords)
{
Map<String, String> result = new Map<String, String>();
List<Opportunity> opps = new List<Opportunity>();

for (Map<String, String> accountRecord : accountRecords) {
String name = accountRecord.get('Account.Name') + ' - Sprint Review - 12/2';
String accountId = accountRecord.get('AccountId');

result.put(accountId, name);
Opportunity opp = new Opportunity(
/* You can set different fields from the Opportunity object than those listed below,
1632
like Amount. */
Name = name,
Type ='New Customer',
AccountId = Id.valueOf(accountId),
CloseDate=Date.valueOf('2016-12-31'),
StageName='Prospecting');
opps.add(opp);
}
insert opps;
return result;
}
}
5. Click Save.
Create a Visualforce Page That Executes the Action

The Visualforce page calls the methods defined in the Apex controller class to invoke the action and provide a status on the tasks.
1. From setup, enter Visualforce in the Quick Find box.
2. Select Visualforce Pages.
3. Click New.
4. Enter the Visualforce page label and description.
5. Replace the existing markup with this code.

<apex:page controller="CreateOpportunitiesController" action="{!init}" showheader="false"
sidebar="false" standardStylesheets="false" title="Create Opportunities" >
<apex:stylesheet
value="https://maxcdn.bootstrapcdn.com/bootstrap/3.3.6/css/bootstrap.min.css"/>
/* Use jQuery to process API calls */

<apex:includeScript value="https://code.jquery.com/jquery-3.1.0.min.js"/>
<style>
th {
width: 50%;
1633
}
h4 {
font-size: 24px;
}
table {
font-size: 20px;
width: 100%;
}
</style>
<div class="container-fluid">
/* Add HTML table to the Visualforce page that shows the accounts, the opportunity
creation status, and then finally the new opportunity name */
<h4 id="message">Querying Accounts...</h4>
<table name="results" id="results" data-role="table" class="table-bordered
table-striped table-responsive">
<thead><tr><th>Account</th><th>Opportunity</th></tr></thead>
<tbody></tbody>
</table>
</div>
<script>
$(function() {
$.ajaxSetup({
headers: {"Authorization": 'Bearer {!$Api.Session_ID}'}
});
setTimeout(executeQuery, 1000);
});
/* Executes the SAQL query and displays the resulting accounts. Note: Account.Name and
AccountId referenced below refer to the dataset field names. Update them to match your
dataset fields. */
function executeQuery() {
var query = {};
query.statements = "{!JSENCODE(query)}";
var queryObj = {query: query.statements};
$.ajax({
type: 'POST',
url: '/services/data/v39.0/wave/query',
data: JSON.stringify(queryObj),
contentType: 'application/json',
success: function(data) {
$('#message').html('Creating Opportunities...');
var record = null;
var row = null;
$('#results tbody').empty();
for (var i = 0; i < data.results.records.length; i++) {

record = data.results.records[i];
row = $('<tr>');
row.append($('<td>').html(record['Account.Name']));
row.append($('<td class="' + record.AccountId +
'">').html('Creating...'));
1634
$('#results tbody').append(row);
}
setTimeout(function() {createOpportunities(data.results.records);},
1000);
},
});
}
/* Calls the Apex controller method that creates opportunities for each account and
returns the opportunity name for each account to the HTML table. */
function createOpportunities(accountRecords) {
CreateOpportunitiesController.create(accountRecords, function(result, event)
{
console.log(result);
if (event.status) {
for (var i = 0; i < accountRecords.length; i++) {
$('td.' +
accountRecords[i].AccountId).html(result[accountRecords[i].AccountId]);
}
$('#message').html(accountRecords.length + ' Opportunities Created');
}
else {
$('#message').html('Error: ' + event.message);
}
});
}
</script>
</apex:page>
6. Click Save.
Assign Bulk Action to Table Widget

Configure the table widget properties to expose the bulk action defined in the Visualforce page.
1. Open the CRM Analytics dashboard that contains the table widget.
2. Edit the dashboard.
3. Select the table widget.
4. In the widget properties, select Show custom action.
5. Enter the following widget properties.
Custom Action Label Label for the action in the action menu.
Visualforce Page Name API name of the Visualforce page.
Visualforce Namespace Prefix Optional. Namespace prefix specified for the Visualforce page.
1635
Sometimes users want to perform the same quick action on a list of records. With CRM Analytics mass actions, users can save time by
performing a quick action on up to 100 records at once from a step in CRM Analytics.
To use mass quick actions in CRM Analytics, configure mass actions for your selected Salesforce object. See Set Up a Mass Quick Action
for configuration details.
After you configure mass quick actions in your org, you can add a mass action link widget for your dashboard users.
Your dashboard must contain a step for the configured object, with a query that returns the record ID.
Note: Any step works with the mass quick action link, but the table chart provides the best visibility to the list of objects to perform
a quick action on. It’s also best practice to include filtering that reduces the list of actionable records to 100 records or less. If more
than 100 records are returned in the table query, the mass quick action is performed only on the first 100 actions.
In the CRM Analytics Studio, clicking a mass action link widget in a dashboard opens the action window for a user to perform quick
actions on a list of records. The list of records is returned by step query from a table or chart and can be filtered using global filters or
selection facets from other charts.
1. Drag the link widget to the dashboard canvas.
1636
3. In the Text field, enter the label that appears on the link widget.
Note: It’s best practice to make the label match the selected action so the user understands what action the link performs.
4. In the Link To field, select Mass Action and then the step to perform the mass action on.
5. In the Action Column field, select the record ID. If the selected step query doesn’t return the record ID, the action column appears
empty. Select the record ID for the mass quick action to function correctly.
6. In the Salesforce Actions field, select the mass quick action to perform when your link is clicked. The action menu is only populated
when mass quick actions are configured for the List View layout of the object.
8.
Integrate CRM Analytics into Salesforce with an Analytics Tab

Access your CRM Analytics home and run CRM Analytics apps from a tab within Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience.
The CRM Analytics tab is available in new CRM Analytics-enabled orgs.
1637
In existing orgs, set up the CRM Analytics tab as you would any new tab.
The CRM Analytics tab can include these features:

• Annotations, notifications, and full-screen presentation
• Sharing and downloading options
• Links to other CRM Analytics assets
• Record actions menu
• Link to CRM Analytics Studio (available for CRM Analytics users but not Experience Cloud sites users)

Drive adoption and engagement with specialized educational resources right where users work. With the widget-specific Learn option,
you can provide videos and webpages that help users get the most out of each dashboard and its charts.
Customized onboarding content can help users to understand and interpret the data, make informed decisions, and act based on the
latest information. Selecting Learn in the widget dropdown menu opens the in-app, resizable, draggable onboarding frame, loaded
with the content you specify.
1638
To set up customized onboarding, follow these steps.

1. In the dashboard designer, select the widget where you want to add the Learn option.
2. In the widget properties panel, open the Onboarding section.
3. Enter a title for the frame that presents your resource.

4. Enter the URL for your video or webpage. See the following considerations.
5. Click Preview your content to see what your users experience .
6. (Optional) Add custom onboarding for multiple charts to create a step-by-step learning progression through the dashboard.
When you have at least one widget with onboarding, the Learning Resources icon appears. Click the icon to open and close the Learning
Resources panel. When the panel is open, hover on a learning resource to highlight the chart that goes with it. Each learning resource
is numbered and the numbers appear on the charts for easy reference.
1639
Take note of these considerations for dashboard widget onboarding.

• Provide the URL to a site that doesn’t prevent embedding.
• The Onboarding property loads content from any URL into a CRM Analytics inline frame. If the URL allows execution within an inline
frame, then all content at the URL becomes accessible to dashboard viewers. Salesforce is not responsible for third-party URLs.
• If your resource is secured, instruct users to authenticate so that the resource can appear in the onboarding frame.
• For best results with YouTube, provide your video’s embed URL. To get the embed URL in YouTube, click Share and then Embed.
The URL must have this format: https://www.youtube.com/embed/xxxxxxxxxx.
• When designing web content for widget onboarding, keep in mind that while the onboarding frame allows linking to other webpages,
browser controls such as Back and Refresh aren’t accessible.
Customize CRM Analytics Dashboards using JSON

Configure advanced features in CRM Analytics dashboards using JSON.
The easiest way to build dashboards in CRM Analytics is to use the designer. However, if needed, you can further customize dashboards
by editing their JSON files. The JSON defines the components of the dashboard and how they interact.
Modify a dashboard’s JSON file to perform advanced customization tasks that can’t be accomplished in the designer’s user interface. For
example:
• Manually set up bindings to override the default faceting behavior and specify the relationships between the steps that aren’t bound
by default.
• Set query limits.
• Specify columns for a values table.
For complete information about Dashboard JSON, see the CRM Analytics Dashboard JSON Reference.
Format Measures and Display Elements with CRM Analytics Extended Metadata (XMD)
Set up your data and customize dashboard elements with CRM Analytics Extended Metadata.
Extended metadata (XMD) enables you to customize the formatting of dataset fields and their values in CRM Analytics dashboards and
lenses. If you modify the XMD for a dataset, every UI visualization that uses the dataset shows the modified format.
1640
Analyze Your Data Create and Share CRM Analytics Apps to Give Business Users
a Big Data Picture
You can customize the following with XMD:

• Format measures. Example: Show the decimal and grouping separators for currency.
• Add prefixes and suffixes to measures. Example: Show the percent symbol (%) after each percentage.
• Multiply measures by a factor. Example: Multiply by 100 to convert a decimal to a percent.
• Change display labels for dimensions and measures.
• Customize colors in charts based on field values.
• Define the first day of the week for the calendar year.
• Add action menus to dimensions that let dashboard viewers invoke actions from lenses and dashboards.
For complete information about Dashboard JSON, see the CRM Analytics Extended Metadata (XMD) Developer Guide.
Create and Share CRM Analytics Apps to Give Business Users a Big Data
Picture
CRM Analytics apps are purpose-built sets of analyses and answers that tell a story about a specific area of your business.
With CRM Analytics apps, you can provide curated paths through your data, plus powerful tools for spontaneous, deep explorations.
After creating dashboards, lenses, and datasets, you can organize them in apps to present dashboards in relevant order, and then share
apps with appropriate groups.
Build your own CRM Analytics apps that contain datasets, dataflows, recipes, lenses, dashboards—the assets you create in CRM Analytics
Studio. Apps can also include Einstein Discover stories. Or, select a prebuilt app from Salesforce, such as Sales Analytics or Service Analytics,
as a starting point for your CRM Analytics solutions. Either way, CRM Analytics apps let you bundle Analytics assets and share them with
other people in your organization.
App-Level Sharing
CRM Analytics apps are like folders, allowing users to organize their own data projects—both private and shared—and control
sharing of dataset, lenses, and dashboard.
Create an App
Create an app to organize and contain any combination of lenses, dashboards, and datasets.
Set Up Navigation Through Your App
Customize app navigation so that users can easily find the dashboards and lenses that are targeted for them.
Share an App
To enable others to see a lens, dashboard, or dataset, one way to share is by sharing the app it’s in.
Delete an App
If you have Manager access to an app, you can delete it. Deleting an app permanently removes all of its lenses, dashboards, and
datasets from CRM Analytics.
Create and Manage CRM Analytics Templates in Analytics Studio
CRM Analytics gives you a great way to leverage your CRM Analytics app development efforts because it allows you to create a
template of your app. Instead of recreating your work, other organizations can use your template to create their own version of your
app, built on their own data and org customizations.
1641
a Big Data Picture
CRM Analytics Distribution and Packaging

Package and distribute your CRM Analytics assets.
App-Level Sharing
CRM Analytics apps are like folders, allowing users to organize their own data projects—both private and shared—and control sharing
of dataset, lenses, and dashboard.
All CRM Analytics users start off with Viewer access to the default Shared App that’s available out of the box; administrators can change
this default setting to restrict or extend access. Each user also has access to a default app out of the box, called My Private App, intended
for personal projects in progress. The contents of each user’s My Private App aren’t visible to administrators, but dashboards and lenses
in My Private App can be shared.
All other apps created by individual users are private, by default; the app owner and administrators have Manager access and can extend
access to other users, groups, or roles.
Here’s a summary of what users can do with Viewer, Editor, and Manager access.
Action Viewer Editor Manager

View dashboard, lenses, and dataset in the app. X X X
If the underlying dataset is in a different app than a lens or dashboard, the
user must have access to both apps to view the lens or dashboard.
See who has access to the app X X X
Explore datasets that the user has Viewer access to and save lenses to an X X X
app that the user has Editor or Manager access to
Save contents of the app to another app that the user has Editor or Manager X X X
access to
Save changes to existing dashboard, lenses, and dataset in the app (saving X X
dashboard requires the appropriate permission set license and permission)
Change the app's sharing settings X
Rename the app X
Update asset visibility in an app X X
Delete the app X
Important: When users are deactivated, they lose share and delete access to all apps they manage. To avoid "stranding" an app,
be sure that manager access is assigned to at least one active user BEFORE deactivating the user who's the manager of the app.
1642
a Big Data Picture
Create an App
Create an app to organize and contain any combination of lenses, dashboards, and datasets.
EDITIONS
1. On the home page, click Create.
2. Select App.
3. Click Create Blank App, and then click Continue. Experience.
To start from a template, see Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates on page 1658.
Available with CRM
4. Enter the name of your app, and click Create. Analytics, which is available
Your app is created and displayed in a new tab. You can now save lenses, dashboards, and for an extra cost in
datasets in the app. Enterprise, Performance,
Note: App names have a 40 character limit.
Edition.
5. Click the Details sub-tab.
6. Add a description of the app’s purpose and contents so that your colleagues understand how
to use the data. USER PERMISSIONS
a. Click the pencil icon in the description field. To create an app:
b. Type a description. • Create CRM Analytics
The description is automatically saved. Apps
7. Change the app’s default icon to make it easier to distinguish from other apps.
a. Click the default icon.
b. Select an icon from the gallery.
The new icon is automatically saved.
1643
a Big Data Picture
Set Up Navigation Through Your App

Customize app navigation so that users can easily find the dashboards and lenses that are targeted
EDITIONS
for them.
1. In CRM Analytics Studio, select the app. Then click Run App. Available in Salesforce
2. Open the navigation list by clicking the disclosure triangle next to the app name.
Experience.
3. If you’re the manager of an app, you see the Edit List button. Click it to set up the app.
Available with CRM Analytics
an extra cost. Also available
USER PERMISSIONS
To edit and save navigation

lists in CRM Analytics apps:
• View DeveloperName,
View Setup and
Configuration
4. Change the presentation order by sliding the Selected Assets up or down. To add an available dashboard or lens to the navigation
list, select it and click the right arrow. To hide an asset from the navigation list, select it and click the left arrow.
5. To retain the navigation for your app, click Save.
Share the app with colleagues or customers. When they run the app, it starts with the first asset in your navigation list.
1644
a Big Data Picture
Share an App
To enable others to see a lens, dashboard, or dataset, one way to share is by sharing the app it’s in.
EDITIONS
1. On the app page, click the Share button.
2. On the Give Access tab:
a. Choose whether you’re sharing the app with a user, group, or role. Experience.
b. Start typing the name and select from the suggested matches. Available with CRM
c. Choose the level of sharing access: Viewer, Editor, or Manager. Analytics, which is available
d. Click Add.
e. Click Save, then click Done. and Unlimited Editions. Also
Important: When users are deactivated, they lose share and delete access to all apps they Edition.
manage. To avoid "stranding" an app, be sure that manager access is assigned to at least one
active user BEFORE deactivating the user who's the manager of the app.
USER PERMISSIONS
Control Who Sees What in an App with Asset Visibility To share an app:
• Use CRM Analytics and
App Managers and Editors can use the Asset Visibility feature to control the visibility of select assets.
Manager access to the
Asset visibility is limited for users that are assigned ‘Viewer’ sharing access. Assets remain visible to app
app Managers and Editors regardless of the asset’s status.
1. Hide an asset in an app.
c. Change the asset’s visibility by clicking Hide.
Hidden assets display a transparent state giving app managers an at-a-glance view of an asset’s status. Asset status is also available
in the asset tooltip.
1645
a Big Data Picture
2. Show an asset in an app.

c. Change the asset’s visibility to visible by clicking Show.
As an app manager, the asset visibility settings go beyond the shared app and impact other areas of CRM Analytics for app members
with Viewer status. Consider the following before updating asset status.
Analytics Studio
• Hidden assets aren’t available in CRM Analytics Home, which includes Recent Dashboards, Favorites, Created by Me, Shared with
Me
• Hidden assets can’t be browsed, seen in All Items, or any other list
• Hidden assets don’t appear in a search’s Recents listing
• Hidden assets don’t appear in search results, including pop-over and the full search results page
• URLs associated with a hidden dashboard or lens are blocked
• Users can access hidden dashboards that are embedded (included in a Salesforce page or report)
• If the dashboard is embedded users can add items from a hidden dashboard to a watchlist
• Users receive a “Resource not found” error while navigating to a hidden source dashboard from watchlist or notification
• Users can define notifications and subscriptions using items from a hidden dashboard that’s embedded
Analytics Tab
• Hidden assets aren’t available in Recents
• Hidden assets don’t appear in a search’s most recently used (MRU) pop-over
• Access is blocked to hidden assets in Salesforce global search results, including pop-over and the full search results page
CRM Analytics Mobile

• Hidden assets aren’t accessible at all for users with Viewer status
Salesforce Mobile
• Users can access hidden dashboards that are embedded in a Salesforce page
Asset Types
• Asset visibility can be managed for datasets, lenses, and dashboards
1646
a Big Data Picture
Delete an App
If you have Manager access to an app, you can delete it. Deleting an app permanently removes all
EDITIONS
of its lenses, dashboards, and datasets from CRM Analytics.
1. Open the app, and then click Delete. Available in Salesforce
Warning: You can’t recover a deleted app. Experience.
If applicable, CRM Analytics lists the lenses and dashboards outside of your app that will be Available with CRM
affected. When the datasets belonging to your app are deleted, any lens or dashboard that Analytics, which is available
references those datasets becomes unusable. for an extra cost in
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To delete an app:
• Use CRM Analytics and
Manager access to the
app
Important: Only lenses and dashboards to which you have access appear in the list. If
you don’t have access to them, lenses and dashboards aren’t listed even though they
have references to datasets in your app.
2. Click Delete Asset(s).
Create and Manage CRM Analytics Templates in Analytics Studio

CRM Analytics gives you a great way to leverage your CRM Analytics app development efforts because it allows you to create a template
of your app. Instead of recreating your work, other organizations can use your template to create their own version of your app, built on
their own data and org customizations.
After you develop your app, create and manage your template without leaving Analytics Studio.
Note: Template creation is also supported with the CRM Analytics REST API and the SFDX Analytics CLI plugin. For more information,
see CRM Analytics Development Tools.
Important: If you want to edit the template files to include features that let others customize the version of the app that they
create from your template, you must use development tools. These tools include Visual Studio Code and the Analytics CLI plugin.
For more information, see the CRM Analytics Templates Developer Guide.
Create a Template
Create a template to package your app for customization and distribution to other organizations. The app you choose to create a
template for is called the source app.
Managing Your Templates
Existing templates that you or other CRM Analytics admins created are manageable from CRM Analytics Studio. You can update,
decouple from source apps, and delete templates. Before they can be deleted, templates must be decoupled from their source app.
1647
a Big Data Picture
Template Considerations and Limitations

When creating and managing CRM Analytics templates, be aware of these considerations and limitations.
Create a Template
Create a template to package your app for customization and distribution to other organizations.
EDITIONS
The app you choose to create a template for is called the source app.
Important: Before following these steps, read the considerations for creating a template. Available in Salesforce
Not all apps are appropriate for templatization, and customizing a template requires the use Classic and Lightning
Experience.
and knowledge of developer tools
1. Navigate to Analytics Studio. Available with CRM
2. Open your app, click Create, then Template. If a template exists for your app or the app was for an extra cost in
created from an existing template, the Template selection doesn’t appear in the create menu. Enterprise, Performance,
3. Review the next screen. It asks if you’re sure that you want to create the template. If you’re sure, and Unlimited Editions. Also
click Create. If not, click Close or the X in the upper right corner available in Developer
After clicking Create, the screen displays a Creating Template progress indicator. If there are Edition.
any errors in creation, you’re notified and the template creation fails. When template creation
completes successfully, the screen closes with a notification that the template is complete.
USER PERMISSIONS
4. Find your template on the Analytics Studio home page by clicking All Items and then selecting
the Templates tab. To create and manage
templates:
• CRM Analytics Growth
with Manage CRM
Analytics Templated
Apps user permission
1648
a Big Data Picture
Managing Your Templates

Existing templates that you or other CRM Analytics admins created are manageable from CRM
EDITIONS
Analytics Studio. You can update, decouple from source apps, and delete templates. Before they
can be deleted, templates must be decoupled from their source app. Available in Salesforce
Note: Managing templates isn’t applicable for CRM Analytics Templates for Prebuilt Apps. Classic and Lightning
Experience.
CRM Analytics delivers these templates and they can’t be updated or deleted.
• Navigate to Analytics Studio. Available with CRM
• Click All Items in the left panel, then click Templates.
To update your template after modifying your source app assets. Enterprise, Performance,
• and Unlimited Editions. Also
On the right of the template, click . available in Developer
• Click Update. This option only appears if your template has a source app. Edition.
To delete your template, decouple it from the source app first.

• USER PERMISSIONS
On the right of the template, click .
• Click Decouple App. To create and manage
templates:
• Review the next screen. It warns you that decoupling an app from its source permanently • CRM Analytics Growth
disables app updates. To continue with the action, click Decouple. If not, click Cancel. permission set license
• with Manage CRM
On the right of the template, click again. Analytics Templated
• Click Delete. The next screen warns you that deletes are final and can’t be recovered. To continue Apps user permission
with the action, click Delete. If not, click Cancel.
Template Considerations and Limitations

When creating and managing CRM Analytics templates, be aware of these considerations and limitations.
Template Considerations
• Template development is an iterative process, with creation as the first step. Modifications aren’t always necessary, but to take
advantage of template customization features, you must understand CRM Analytics Templates and how to design them. For more
information, see Why Analytics Templates
• To edit template files for customization, you need familiarity with JSON and Salesforce developer tools. For more information, see
CRM Analytics Development Tools.
• As with any development process, starting early is a good idea. Don’t wait until your source app is perfect before creating a template
from it. Add some data and a dashboard, then create the initial template. Update that template periodically after adding features to
the source app.
• If you’re not planning on making one template dependent on another, make sure that all the app’s assets reside in the source app.
Assets include datasets that are used in dashboards, datasets that are referenced in dataflows, links from one dashboard to another,
and images that are used in multiple places. Don’t reference any assets from the Shared App or your Private App. For more information
on template dependencies, see Share CRM Analytics Assets Between Apps.
• If you’re planning to take advantage of the template dependency framework, make sure that any apps that your source app depends
on have also been made into templates. And make sure that your installation documentation includes a prerequisite to install those
supporting apps.
1649
a Big Data Picture
• If you have a dataflow that references data from a connected dataset, make sure that you understand how to use that connector in
a template and how to install that connector in a subscriber org. For more information, see Add a Remote Connector to a CRM
Analytics Template.
• Any CSV files that the template needs must be recently uploaded by the same user who is creating the template.
• Make sure that the source app only uses features that are supported by CRM Analytics templates. Features that aren’t currently
supported include:
– Custom Maps and Charts
– Using recipes in templates is available, but recipes are complex and some use cases are problematic when templatized. We
recommend you use dataflows for all Digest nodes and design recipes to run using the datasets output from the dataflows as
their inputs.
– Einstein Discovery Stories (Stories are supported in templates, but they aren’t added to the template on creation. They must be
added manually during template customization. For more information, see Add an Einstein Discovery Story to a CRM Analytics
Template.)
Template Limitations in CRM Analytics Studio

• You can’t update an existing template with another app that isn’t your source app.
• If you load an existing template into your org via the Metadata API or CLI, you can’t specify a source app for the template.
To perform these advanced actions, use the Analytics CLI plugin template commands. For more information, see Salesforce Analytics
Plugin CLI Command Reference - template commands
CRM Analytics Distribution and Packaging

Package and distribute your CRM Analytics assets.
CRM Analytics Supports Asset Distribution and Packaging

Developers, partners, and ISVs can deploy, license, and manage CRM Analytics apps as managed apps on AppExchange, just like standard
Salesforce components. Upgrade, delete, and deprecate operations are supported. Customers can browse these apps and install them.
Manage your AppExchange offerings via the License Management Application where you can specify the licensing options and create
lead and license records for each install of your package. Partners can control the usage of their CRM Analytics apps by the number of
users. Administrators can assign these licenses to the users, subject to the terms of the license.
To publish CRM Analytics apps on appexchange, partners can contact their Salesforce Partner Account Manager (PAM) or Technical
Evangelist (TE).
CRM Analytics Packaging Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when using packages to distribute CRM Analytics to other Salesforce users and organizations.
Migrate CRM Analytics Assets with Change Sets
Use change sets to move customized CRM Analytics assets between orgs that have a deployment connection. For example, create
a CRM Analytics app containing dashboards, lenses, datasets, dataflows in your Sandbox org, then migrate the app assets to your
production org once testing is complete.
Tips for Migrating CRM Analytics Assets with an Ant Script
If you use the Salesforce Ant Migration Tool to migrate CRM Analytics assets between orgs, consider the following tips.
1650
a Big Data Picture
Package CRM Analytics Assets in Managed Packages

You can create managed packages of CRM Analytics assets, including CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, lenses, datasets, recipes,
dataflows, and user XMD. Use packages to distribute those assets to other users within or outside your company.
Distribute CRM Analytics Assets Through AppExchange
Once your managed package is certified through our security review, you can make it available to your customers by uploading it
to AppExchange. You can specify your package release type, control major and minor version numbers, and specify licensing options
through the Licensing Management Application.
Use the Metadata API for CRM Analytics Assets and User XMD
CRM Analytics provides full support for the Metadata API, which can be used to retrieve, deploy, create, update, or delete customizations
for your organization.
CRM Analytics Packaging Considerations

Keep these considerations in mind when using packages to distribute CRM Analytics to other Salesforce users and organizations.
Use managed packages to distribute CRM Analytics
Packages come in two forms: managed and unmanaged. CRM Analytics supports managed packages, which must be created from
a Developer Edition org. If you use unmanaged packages to distribute CRM Analytics, keep in mind that you can’t change or upgrade
components. To learn more, see Use Managed Packages to Develop Your AppExchange Solution.
Deploy packages from namespaced orgs to namespaced orgs
If a source org has a namespace prefix, use a namespaced org as the destination org for the package. Deploying from a namespaced
org to a non-namespaced org such as a scratch or developer org can cause issues. Installed packages use the source namespace
and aren’t affected. To learn more, see Namespaces.
Avoid manually packaging individual datasets, dataflows, and other assets
Use app templates to manage analytics assets. App templates make it easy to manage asset references and the unique org IDs,
names, and schemas that make up a dataset.
Avoid removing assets from packages
Removing an asset such as a lens or dataset from a managed package can cause deployment errors. If you try to delete an asset
from a managed package and receive an access error, removing the asset isn’t recommended. Removing items from a managed
package can cause packaging upgrade issues. For example, if you delete a folder from a subscriber org, upgrading the package can
fail.
Understand dataset and dataflow dependencies in packages
• Datasets and dataflows are independent and must be manually added to a package.
• Datasets from managed packages can’t be used in dashboards as a connected data source.
• Invalid schema overrides and unsupported parameters are removed when adding a dataflow to a package. Also, comments in
JSON are removed, and node ordering can change.
• Source and security predicates aren't included in a package when adding a dataflow to a package.
• Datasets are linked to recipes. To package a recipe, create a dataset with the recipe. Then, add the related dataflow to the package
along with the recipe.
Understand dashboard behavior in packages
• Saved dashboard views aren’t included in packages.
• Distributing dashboards manually using JSON isn't supported.
Understand XMD files in packages
Master user XMD files are automatically added to and updated for datasets when you edit the file. To learn more, see Use the Metadata
API for CRM Analytics Assets and User XMD.
1651
a Big Data Picture
Refresh placeholder datasets

Placeholder datasets created in developer or sandbox orgs can include metadata only. To explore and query placeholder data, refresh
datasets. To learn more, see Repopulate Placeholder Datasets.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Second-Generation Managed Packages
Migrate CRM Analytics Assets with Change Sets

Use change sets to move customized CRM Analytics assets between orgs that have a deployment connection. For example, create a
CRM Analytics app containing dashboards, lenses, datasets, dataflows in your Sandbox org, then migrate the app assets to your production
org once testing is complete.
Tip: Remember, this topic describes how to migrate CRM Analytics assets—such as lenses, customized dashboards, dataset
containers, and so on. It does not discuss migrating Salesforce or CRM Analytics data from org to org. Where this topic refers to a
CRM Analytics dataset, what actually gets migrated is the container; the dataset metadata.
To migrate CRM Analytics assets:
1. Create and test your CRM Analytics assets in your source org, such as Sandbox. Note that assets in the Private App aren’t available
for change sets.
2. From Setup in your source org, select Outbound Change Sets and create a new one.
3. Click Add in the Change Set Components section, then use the Component Type drop-down list to select and add your CRM
Analytics assets to the change set. Each asset type is prefixed with “Analytics.” Note that you must add dependent dataflows manually.
That is, if you add a dataset to a change set, the associated dataflows are not automatically picked up.
1652
a Big Data Picture
Important: Analytics components include Analytics applications, dashboards, dataflows, datasets, lenses, recipes, and user
XMD. As you package Analytics components, keep these tips and best practices in mind.
• Analytics unmanaged packages, as opposed to managed packages, are considered a developer-only feature and aren’t
supported for general-purpose distribution. While Analytics unmanaged packages work as expected within the constraints
of Salesforce unmanaged packages, they aren’t subject to as much testing as managed packages. Unmanaged packages
come without many of the safeguards of managed packages, and are intended for developers familiar with their limitations.
Also refer to the relevant topic in the First-Generation Managed Packaging Developer Guide.
• Before a recipe is available for packaging, you must create a dataset with the recipe. The related dataflow must be added
to the package along with the recipe for deployment to succeed.
• Analytics Admin permissions are required to create a package but not for deployment, which requires only Salesforce
admin permissions.
• There’s no spidering between datasets and dataflows, meaning there’s no dependency following. When packaging both,
they must be added manually. If they aren’t, an error appears during deployment. The same is true for change sets—when
packaging both datasets and dataflows, add them manually.
• When you package a data flow, source and security predicates aren’t included in the package.
• Because views are user-specific, they aren’t included when you package the dashboard.
• If you migrate dashboards manually using JSON copy-and-paste, any conditional formatting, widget-specific number
formats, and measure labels on blended queries are lost. To retain these formats and labels in the migrated dashboard,
include the Analytics Dataset Metadata component type when packaging your change set.
• All custom fields used in a deployed dataflow must exist on the target org. The Analytics Cloud Integration User user must
have access to the custom fields.
1653
a Big Data Picture
• Unlike Apex or other code, the underlying JSON definition of Analytics assets are visible in a managed package.
• The Winter ’18 release contains a beta version of Apex steps, which lets developers include custom Apex functionality in
a dashboard to access Salesforce platform features that aren’t inherently supported in Analytics. If you include dashboards
in a package, Apex steps aren’t included—migrate Apex classes separately.
• Before the Spring ’17 release, images didn’t render when deploying a dashboard that used an image widget that referenced
image files not available on the target org. There were two workarounds: Manually upload the images, or add a folder
containing the images to the package. As of the Spring ’17 release, images are packaged with the dashboard, and references
between dashboards are maintained. You can’t delete a dashboard that is referenced in a link. Either re-create the image,
or link the widgets in the dashboard in the source org. Then repackage or fix the link issues in the target org.
• Take care when packaging dataflows. Invalid schema overrides and unsupported or illegal parameters are removed. For
example, Type = dim is no longer supported. Use Type = text instead. Comments in JSON are removed. Nodes
can appear in a different order.
4. Click View/Add Dependencies to ensure all dependent assets and appropriate permission sets and profile settings are added.
5. Click Upload and select your target org, such as Production. Make sure that the target org allows inbound connections. The inbound
and outbound orgs must have a deployment connection.
6. From Setup in your target org, select Inbound Change Sets and find the one you uploaded from your source org.
7. Validate and deploy the change set, making sure to assign the right users to any permission sets and profiles you included. Your
CRM Analytics assets will be available in the target org.
For details on using change sets to migrate configuration changes between orgs, view the Release Management: Deploying Changes
Using Change Sets (Salesforce Classic) video.
SEE ALSO:
Change Sets
Change Sets Best Practices
Deploy Outbound Change Sets
Deploy Inbound Change Sets
Tips for Migrating CRM Analytics Assets with an Ant Script

If you use the Salesforce Ant Migration Tool to migrate CRM Analytics assets between orgs, consider the following tips.
If you migrate a dashboard configured with conditional formatting, you must manually add the corresponding asset XMD to the project
manifest (package.xml) before deployment to the target org. This step is required because the asset XMD contains the conditional
formatting settings for the dashboard and is not included in the package.xml file, by default.
In the following sample package.xml, the first <types> node specifies the dashboard and the second node specifies the associated
asset XMD.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Package xmlns="http://soap.sforce.com/2006/04/metadata">
<types>
<members>MyDashboard_DevName</members>
<name>WaveDashboard</name>
</types>
<types>
<members>MyDashboard_DevName</members>
<name>WaveXmd</name>
1654
a Big Data Picture
</types>
<version>43.0</version>
</Package>
For the asset XMD <types> node, <members> specifies the dashboard dev name and <name> specifies the metadata type for
an asset XMD.
If you don’t add the asset XMD to package.xml, the dashboard migrates without conditional formatting. If needed, you can reapply the
conditional formatting to the dashboard in the target org.
Package CRM Analytics Assets in Managed Packages

You can create managed packages of CRM Analytics assets, including CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, lenses, datasets, recipes, dataflows,
and user XMD. Use packages to distribute those assets to other users within or outside your company.
A package is a container for something as small as an individual component or as large as a set of related apps. Packages can be distributed
to other Salesforce users and organizations, including outside your company. While packages come in two forms—unmanaged and
managed—CRM Analytics supports only managed packages, which must be created from a Developer Edition organization.
Why only managed packages? There are some key advantages, especially around licensing and managing licenses. Using AppExchange
and the License Management Application (LMA), partners, ISVs, and developers can sell and manage user-based licenses for the app.
Managed packages are also upgradeable, meaning you don’t have to start over; you can incrementally upgrade.
To package CRM Analytics assets:
1. From Setup in your Developer Edition org, select Packages and click New to create a managed package.
2. Click Add in the Components tab, then from the Component Type dropdown, list select and add your CRM Analytics assets to the
package. Each component type is prefixed Analytics. Add dependent dataflows manually. That is, if you add a dataset to a package,
the associated dataflows aren’t automatically picked up.
Important: Analytics components include Analytics applications, dashboards, dataflows, datasets, lenses, recipes, and user
XMD.
Note: All custom fields used in a deployed dataflow must exist on the target org. The Analytics Cloud Integration User user
must have access to the custom fields.
3. To ensure all dependent assets and appropriate permission sets and profile settings are added, click View Dependencies.
4. After your apps are packaged, prepare them for distribution.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Managing Licenses for Managed Packages
Distribute CRM Analytics Assets Through AppExchange

Once your managed package is certified through our security review, you can make it available to your customers by uploading it to
AppExchange. You can specify your package release type, control major and minor version numbers, and specify licensing options
through the Licensing Management Application.
To distribute a CRM Analytics managed package:
1. Submit your package for a security review.
Before a package can be listed on AppExchange, it must meet established standards. Since packages containing CRM Analytics assets
can potentially contain standard Salesforce objects too, they are subject to the same security requirements as all other AppExchange
listings.
1655
a Big Data Picture
2. When your package is ready, click Upload, then fill in the required information.
3. Add version specifics, including the name (usually a description and date) and the version number.
4. Choose the release type—Managed - Beta or Managed - Released—and an appropriate version number.
The Managed - Beta type is for testing, usually with a subset of customers, and allows changes that the Managed - Released type
does not.
5. Add a description for your AppExchange listing.

6. Optionally, add URLs for release notes and instructions, a password (if you wish to keep the package private), and any other objects
required.
7. Click Upload.
Note: Deployment requires Salesforce admin permissions.
Use the AppExchange and the License Management Application (LMA) to manage user-based licenses. You can request the application
through your partner community site.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Second-Generation Managed Packages
Security Review Overview
Salesforce DX Developer Guide: Managing Licenses for Managed Packages
Use the Metadata API for CRM Analytics Assets and User XMD
CRM Analytics provides full support for the Metadata API, which can be used to retrieve, deploy, create, update, or delete customizations
for your organization.
Every time your Salesforce organization is customized, its metadata is modified. Editing page layouts, creating a custom field, or adding
a CRM Analytics dataflow are all metadata updates. Metadata is the information that describes the configuration of your organization
and of your CRM Analytics assets. It’s data about your data. For example, the metadata type WaveLens includes properties that describe
the lens—what dataset it uses, the label of the dashboard, what visualization widget type it uses (pivottable, stackvbar, heatmap, and
so on).
You can create your own custom metadata types, which enable you to create your own setup objects whose records are metadata
rather than data. Rather than building apps from data records in custom objects or custom settings, you can create custom metadata
types and add metadata records, with all the manageability that comes with metadata: package, deploy, and upgrade.
You can create dashboards with reusable components. These components are a type of dashboard widget that contain other widgets,
pages, and Lightning Web Components. The metadata type WaveComponent allows you to create and distribute dashboard
components via packages and change sets.
While the Metadata API is the foundation on which change sets and packaging is built, developers can use the Metadata API to manipulate
their CRM Analytics assets. For example, your application could retrieve metadata about your dashboards and back it up to (and restore
from) some repository, effectively providing version control.
You can package and deploy user XMD too. User XMD is a JSON document that allows an application to override certain metadata for
a dataset. You can govern settings to control how the data is presented—for example, colors, formats, and labels. To deploy the overridden
dataset metadata, you must package the user XMD attributes. Metadata API support allows migration tools to migrate datasets with
user XMD between orgs—for example, you can migrate user XMD overrides from sandbox to production. Partners can deploy their
application-specific user XMD with their AppExchange package. They retain control of the user XMD and can update it with future
package versions. Refer to the WaveXmd metadata type in the Metadata API Developer Guide.
The following CRM Analytics metadata types are supported in the Metadata API:
1656
Analyze Your Data Deploy CRM Analytics Industry Apps and Prebuilt Apps
• WaveApplication
• WaveComponent
• WaveDashboard
• WaveDataflow
• WaveDataset
• WaveLens
• WaveRecipe
• WaveXmd
• WaveTemplateBundle
SEE ALSO:
Understanding Metadata API
Deploy CRM Analytics Industry Apps and Prebuilt Apps

CRM Analytics templated apps give you a fast way to get started with your analytics journey. Create
EDITIONS
an app from a template to get ready-made dashboards and KPIs that your team can use out of the
box or customize to meet your needs. Available with CRM
CRM Analytics templated apps can speed up your organization’s time-to-value. Instead of building Analytics, which is available
visualizations yourself, create templates that do the heavy lifting for you. You can create an app for an extra cost in
from a template with just a few clicks or answer questions in a handy configuration wizard. Templated Enterprise, Performance,
apps can also be installed automatically when you install managed packages. Many apps are also and Unlimited Editions. Also
designed for desktop and mobile devices. available in Developer
Edition.
There are two main types of templated apps.
• Industry Apps - Start working faster with tailored apps, dashboards, and KPIs, designed with
best practices for specific departments and industries. Uncover actionable insights tuned to your business. Quickly collaborate and
confidently act on predictions and prescriptive recommendations for better business results.
• Prebuilt Apps - CRM Analytics templated apps provide a fast way to get started with your analytics journey. Create an app from a
template for ready-made dashboards and KPIs that your team can use out of the box or customize to meet your needs.
To get started, see generic instructions for creating apps from templates and specifics for each template, and how to monitor auto-installed
apps by following these links.
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here

Follow these general procedures when you create Apps from any CRM Analytics Template. Before you create an app, see the help
for the CRM Analytics Template you want to use for requirements and instructions specific to that template.
Monitor, Update, and Delete Auto-Installed Apps
Templated CRM Analytics apps are automatically installed in Salesforce orgs via managed packages. Use the Auto-Installed App
setup page to monitor the status of auto-install requests, view logs to troubleshoot auto-install issues, track app usage statistics, and
update and delete auto-installed apps.
Manage Templated Apps
CRM Analytics templated apps have multistep processes for installation and upgrades. Use the App Install History page to monitor
installations in progress, track the assets created for the app, and view logs to troubleshoot any installation issues. After an app is
installed, run or schedule one-click data refreshes.
1657
Analytics Design Toolkit

Use the Analytics Design Toolkit to create an app with ready-made dashboard, charts, and widget templates that you can use to get
started fast with your own apps.
Event Monitoring Analytics App
The Event Monitoring Analytics App integrates with event monitoring and setup audit trail data to give you insights into your user
and org behavior. The app is a built-in way to explore your monitoring data in Salesforce. App creation is easy, and with its prebuilt
dashboards and datasets, you can start exploring right away. This app helps you drill into your data and swiftly identify suspicious
behavior, slow page performance, and poor user adoption.
Field Service Analytics
The Field Service Analytics app brings the power of Analytics to Salesforce Field Service on any device that supports CRM Analytics.
Introduction to CRM Analytics Apps for Industries
Get started quickly with the CRM Analytics templated apps specifically designed for industries clouds. The apps provide industry-specific
cloud solutions that help businesses in various industries to streamline their processes and enhance customer experiences.
CRM Analytics Prebuilt Apps
CRM Analytics prebuilt apps are ready-to-use applications that offer advanced analytics and reporting capabilities specifically tailored
for sales and customer relationship management. The apps provide preconfigured dashboards, reports, and data visualizations to
analyze business data.

Follow these general procedures when you create Apps from any CRM Analytics Template. Before
USER PERMISSIONS
you create an app, see the help for the CRM Analytics Template you want to use for requirements
and instructions specific to that template. To create apps from CRM
Before creating an app, set up your org to use the CRM Analytics platform and CRM Analytics Analytics templated apps
and manage them:
templated apps. See Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform.
Tip: For best results, follow the steps in the order shown. Templated Apps
Dataflows
1. Create and Share an App from a CRM Analytics Template
Create and share an app from the CRM Analytics template of your choice.
2. How to Answer CRM Analytics Template Custom Wizard Questions
Some CRM Analytics templates include a custom configuration wizard, which asks you a series of questions about your data. Follow
these general guidelines to get the best result. Help for each template with a custom wizard provides details for that template.
3. Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics Template
The app creation process includes data assets that import the latest data to CRM Analytics. Schedule the app to be refreshed every
day to ensure that your app uses up-to-date data. An app refresh runs all the data assets associated with the app in the required
order, including recipes, dataflows, connectors, Einstein Discovery models, and prediction definitions.
4. Set Field Level Security to Enable Creation of an CRM Analytics Template
Before creating an app from a template, you may have to give the Analytics Integration User access to all fields used in the app.
5. Reconfigure a CRM Analytics App
To restore deleted or altered dashboards or change wizard settings, reconfigure an existing app.
1658
6. Upgrade a CRM Analytics App

Take advantage of a CRM Analytics app’s latest features by upgrading when we release a new version.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up the CRM Analytics Platform
Create and Share an App from a CRM Analytics Template

Create and share an app from the CRM Analytics template of your choice.
USER PERMISSIONS
Important: Before following these steps, read the help for the template you want to create.
Each template has specific org setup and data requirements. Make sure that your org meets
Analytics apps:
those requirements before trying to create the app. • Manage CRM Analytics
1. Navigate to Analytics Studio. Templated Apps
2. Click Create, then select App.
Alternatively, click Template Gallery to see app template overviews, get ideas for your
dashboards, and select the best template for your use case. The gallery has categorization tags for quick reference and a Recommended
section with the most popular templates.
3. Select a template. You might have to scroll to find it. Then click Continue.
If the template you choose includes a configuration wizard, it opens now. The help for your template includes instructions about
the wizard.
Answer the questions on each page of the wizard. The first page asks you to choose between creating an app or using answers of
an existing app if you’ve already created an app with that template. See the help for the template for instructions about using the
wizard. If you don’t see a page with questions, you’re almost done creating your app.
Some wizards perform a compatibility check of your org’s data. If so, you see a wizard page that shows each stage of the org check.
If it uncovers any issues, you see error messages with instructions about how to address them. Fix the issues and try app creation
again.
4. Name your app and click Create. You can optionally select a logging level to generate more detailed creation logs. The default level
is Warning.
The creation process takes a few minutes. You can view the status on the next page. After it’s complete, refresh the page to see your
app. To see the generated app log that describes which assets were created and any failure notifications, click the Details tab.
To troubleshoot any app creation issues, use the App Install History Page in Setup. This page details the app creation process, the assets
built, and the app state during creation. For more information, see Monitor and Troubleshoot Templated App Installations.
Note: If you see an error saying that the Analytics Integration User doesn’t have access to selected fields, edit field level security
so that the Integration User has the required access and create the app again.
1659
Now that you’ve created the app, share it with users in your organization. You can only share it with users assigned the CRM Analytics
Plus User permission set.
1. Open your app if it’s not already open. If you’ve navigated away from CRM Analytics Studio, go back to it, select All Items, find your
app, and click it.
2.
Click the Share icon at upper right.
3. In the next screen, use the search field under Invite others: to find other users in your org.
4. Select whether you want to make the selected user a Viewer, Editor, or Manager of the app.
Important: Users with the Use Analytics Templated Apps permission and Editor or Manager access to the app can create,
edit, and delete assets in the app.
5. Click Add, and then click Save.
How to Answer CRM Analytics Template Custom Wizard Questions

Some CRM Analytics templates include a custom configuration wizard, which asks you a series of
USER PERMISSIONS
questions about your data. Follow these general guidelines to get the best result. Help for each
template with a custom wizard provides details for that template. To create and manage the
Adoption Analytics app:
• Most questions provide answers in pick lists showing fields from Salesforce objects. The lists
include standard Salesforce fields and any custom fields you’ve set up on an object. Answer
Templated Apps
these questions by selecting from the fields shown. Most questions of this type let you choose
only one field, and some let you choose multiple fields. To use the Adoption
Analytics app:
• You can choose a field from an object only one time. After you select a field, it’s no longer • Use CRM Analytics
available as an answer to other questions. Templated Apps
• Other questions are yes/no, provide a set of options, or require you to enter text.
• Questions marked with an asterisk (*) require answers.
• Using the default answers results in a useful set of dashboards. If you’re not sure what to select, use the answer that’s preselected.
Some questions do not have preselected answers. In those cases, CRM Analytics reminds you to make a selection. If you’re not happy
with the result, you can delete the app and create it again.
• You control only parts of the app with wizard settings, such as the filters used in dashboards. We built the app to provide immediate
value without much work on your part.
• Only some answers make sense given the question’s context. The answer pick-lists contain many fields, but only some make sense
for your app. For example, it’s unlikely that you filter Accounts data by Photo URL, even though the Accounts object includes a Photo
URL field.
Important: Fields that aren’t available to the Analytics Integration User aren’t visible in the wizard. See Schedule Data Refresh for
a CRM Analytics Template to give the Integration User access to all the fields you want your app to use.
Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics Template

The app creation process includes data assets that import the latest data to CRM Analytics. Schedule the app to be refreshed every day
to ensure that your app uses up-to-date data. An app refresh runs all the data assets associated with the app in the required order,
including recipes, dataflows, connectors, Einstein Discovery models, and prediction definitions.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Install History, and then select App Install History.
2. Find your app in the list of installed apps.
1660
3. Click the dropdown arrow to the far right of the app. From the menu that appears, select
Schedule.
4. Pick the days you want and set a time for refreshing the app data. It’s best to select a time outside normal working hours so the data
refresh doesn’t interrupt business activities. Then click Save.

The data refresh for your app now runs every day at the time you set.
Set Field Level Security to Enable Creation of an CRM Analytics Template

Before creating an app from a template, you may have to give the Analytics Integration User access
USER PERMISSIONS
to all fields used in the app.
You may have to set Salesforce field-level security to enable the CRM Analytics Integration User to To create and manage CRM
see all fields used in the app you create. Integration users run the dataflow, and if they don’t have Analytics apps:
proper field-level security permissions, the dataflow can fail.
Templated Apps
Follow these steps in Lightning Experience.
1. Go to Salesforce Setup, enter object in the Quick Find/Search box, and hit Enter. Dataflows
2. Select Object Manager.
3. Enter the name of the object whose field-level security you need to edit in the Quick Find / Search box, and hit enter.
4. Select the object you need to edit, then select Fields & Relationships.
5. Select the field you need to edit, then select Set Field-Level Security.
6. Look for the Analytics Cloud Integration User, check the box(es) for the required fields under Visible, and click Save.
7. Repeat the Steps 5 and 6 for all fields you want to use.
8. Refresh your browser cache.
Follow these steps in Salesforce Classic.
1. Step 1. Go to Salesforce Setup and enter the name of the object whose field-level security you need to edit in the Quick Find/Search
box and hit Enter.
2. Step 2. Click the name of the object.
3. Step 3. The next window shows all the fields for the object. Go to the one(s) where you need to edit field-level security.
4. Step 4. Look for the Analytics Cloud Integration User, check the box(es) for the required fields under Visible, and click Save.
5. Step 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for all objects with fields you want to use.
6. Step 7. Refresh your browser cache.
You can now create an app from the template.
1661
Reconfigure a CRM Analytics App

USER PERMISSIONS
Important: Reconfiguring your app gets rid of dashboard customizations, including fields
or objects added to the dataflow. It also deletes actions you enable, or changes to security
Analytics apps:
settings and dashboard colors and labels. If you’ve made any customizations, save copies of • Manage CRM Analytics
your dataflow definition file or dashboards. Then copy them into your reconfigured app. Templated Apps
1. Navigate to CRM Analytics Studio and open the app. Make sure you’re viewing the app’s landing • Edit CRM Analytics
page and that you can see the app name at upper left, with a list of dashboards below. Dataflows
2. Click the Reconfigure app link below the app name. If you see Upgrade instead of
Reconfigure, you need to upgrade to the new version of the app before you can use the
reconfigure feature. See Upgrade a CRM Analytics App.
3. Review the next screen carefully. It warns you that reconfiguring overwrites app customizations. If you’re comfortable overwriting
customizations, check the box and click Continue. If not, click Back or the X in the upper right corner.
4. Complete the app creation process described in Create and Share an App from a CRM Analytics Template.
5. At the end of the process, you’re asked to confirm that you want to reconfigure your app. This gives you one more chance to make
sure you’re comfortable overwriting customizations. If you are, click OK. CRM Analytics creates a new version of your app.
Important: If you delete your app, CRM Analytics doesn’t retain the answers you selected when you created that version of the
app, and you have to start the creation process all over again. If you wish to reuse settings from the app, keep it until you’ve
completed recreating the app and then delete it.
Upgrade a CRM Analytics App

Take advantage of a CRM Analytics app’s latest features by upgrading when we release a new
USER PERMISSIONS
version.
The banner at the top of your app home page tells you that we’ve released a new version. It also To create and manage CRM
provides a link to more information about the release. There’s also a link inviting you to start the Analytics apps:
upgrade process in the left-hand column of the home page, just below the app name.
Templated Apps
Here’s how to upgrade your app.
1. Click either the “What’s new” link in the banner or the “New version available” link in the left-hand Dataflows
column of your app’s home page.
2. You can read information about the new version on top of the page that opens. At the bottom
of the page, find the buttons: Upgrade current app and Create new app.
3. See descriptions of what the buttons do by hovering over them. If you click Upgrade current app, you overwrite your current app
and all its assets, replacing it with an app based on the new version. This also deletes any customizations, including any new fields
or object you’ve added to the dataflow or changes you’ve made to security settings and dashboard labels and colors. If you click
Create new app, you create a second copy of your current app based on the new version. Decide which option suits your
circumstances, and click the appropriate button.
4. Warning: If you’ve customized your app, click Create new app instead of Upgrade current app to make an app copy
based on the new version. This preserves the current version and any customizations, which you can then manually copy into
the new version of the app.
If you click Upgrade current app, you see a screen warning you that the upgrade option overwrites the current app and gets rid
of any customizations you’ve made to it. If you’re OK with that, check the box and click Continue. If you’re not, click Back to return
to the previous screen. Clicking Continue takes you to the configuration wizard. Skip ahead to step 6.
1662
5. If you click Create new app, you’re taken to the configuration wizard. You don’t see a warning, since you’re not overwriting your
current app, which is preserved with any customizations you’ve made to it.
6. The configuration wizard is preloaded with the settings you chose last time you used the wizard. You can either keep those settings
or change them. Go through each page of the wizard.
7. Once you complete the wizard, CRM Analytics shows a screen that indicates which assets are impacted by the upgrade. Review the
screen to see how many datasets, dashboards, and lenses will be changed, deleted, or added by the upgrade. It also shows how
changed assets will be modified—whether the change is to data or appearance. On the same screen, you have the option to
download a file with code for changes made to the app. If you’ve customized the app, download and save the file so you can copy
and paste customization code into the upgraded version.
8. Upgrade option only: If you’re upgrading your app, click Upgrade current app. Remember, this overwrites any customizations you’ve
made. You can also click Back to go back into the configuration wizard and change your selections or click the X in the upper-right
corner to cancel.
9. Create option only: If you’re creating a new app, name your app something different from the current version and click Create new
app. This option saves your current app and all its customizations. You can also click Back to go back into the configuration wizard
and change your selections or click the X in the upper-right corner to cancel.
If the link below the app name says “Reset app,” you’re using the latest version and don’t need to upgrade.
Monitor, Update, and Delete Auto-Installed Apps

Templated CRM Analytics apps are automatically installed in Salesforce orgs via managed packages.
EDITIONS
Use the Auto-Installed App setup page to monitor the status of auto-install requests, view logs to
troubleshoot auto-install issues, track app usage statistics, and update and delete auto-installed Available in: Lightning
apps. Experience
From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Auto-Installed Apps and then select
Auto-Installed Apps. Performance, Unlimited,
The home page shows usage statistics for all auto-installed apps and a list of each app with basic details. To view app details and manage
individual auto-installed apps, click the Apps tab. To view and manage auto-install requests, click the Requests tab. Clicking Usage
hides and reveals the usage charts.
If there are no installed apps or auto-install requests in your org, the page shows that no apps, statistics, or requests are available.
1663
Use the Get More Apps button to open App Exchange and find other CRM Analytics apps that are available for installation.
1. Auto-Install Usage
Track the average API calls per hour and the number of dataset rows used per day for all auto-installed apps and for each individual
app.
2. Auto-Installed Apps
Monitor and interact with installed apps on the Apps tab.
3. Auto-Install Requests
Monitor and interact with auto-install requests on the Requests tab.
Auto-Install Usage
Track the average API calls per hour and the number of dataset rows used per day for all auto-installed apps and for each individual app.
The Usage section on the main page has two charts. The first chart shows you the hourly average of API calls made by auto-installed
apps each day. The second chart shows you how many dataset rows the auto-installed apps use per day. Both charts show usage numbers
up to the past 7 days.
Note: The API statistics are updated hourly, while the dataset row statistics are updated at midnight UTC.
1664
On the Apps tab, in the tile view, each auto-installed app tile shows the usage numbers for that specific app. These numbers include
the number of API requests made per hour averaged over 7 days and the number of dataset rows used per day.
To see the individual app usage numbers in charts, click the app name, and then select the Usage tab. These charts show you the usage
statistics specific to this auto-installed app.
Auto-Installed Apps
Monitor and interact with installed apps on the Apps tab.
Apps
The default view of your installed apps is the tile view. You can also view the installed apps in a list view.
Each installed app includes this information:
Attribute Name Description

Name The name of the installed app.
1665

Type The type of auto-install request last processed for this app. The values are: App Create,
App Update, App Delete, and Start Dataflow. This value is only visible in
the apps list view.
Status The status of the most recent auto-install request for the installed app. The values include:
Success, Failed, In Progress, Not Started, and Canceled
Reason The failed reason of the installed app. For successful requests, the value is N/A. For failed
requests, the failure reason is displayed.
Created By The user who installed the app.
Created On The date and time the installed app was created.
Last Modified The date and time the installed app was last modified.
Requests/Hour The 7-day average of API requests made for the installed app per hour.
Rows Used The number of dataset rows used by the installed app.
Open App
This link is only visible to users with access to CRM Analytics Studio and only in the apps tile view. To open the installed app in CRM
Analytics Studio, click the Open App link on the app tile.
App Actions
Each app has an action menu accessible from the dropdown list icon . The app actions include:
• Open— Opens the installed app details. These details include all auto-install requests for the installed app, the most recent app
logs, and the request details as described here.
• Delete App — Deletes the installed app.
• View Log— Displays the auto-install request log.
• Try Again— Runs the last auto-install request for this installed app again.
• Cancel— Appears only when the auto-install request status is In Progress. Use this action to cancel long-running requests
or when you don’t want app creation or upgrade to complete.
Search Apps
Use the search bar to search installed apps by app name.
Refresh Page
To update the statuses of the installed apps, click the Refresh icon .
App Details
To see the details for an individual app, on the home page, click the app name. On the details page, you can view the app information,
see the app requests, the app usage data, the log results, app settings, and open and update the app.
1666
The app has an action menu accessible from the dropdown list icon . The app actions include:
• Update App— Updates the app using the current version of the template.
• Open App— This action is only visible to users with access to CRM Analytics Studio. Opens the app in CRM Analytics Studio.
• Install History— Opens the App Install History install details for the app.
To view and manage settings for an installed app, click App Settings.
Some installed apps have auto-upgrade enabled, which upgrades the app automatically when the template is updated. Auto-upgrade
keeps installed apps up to date with current features. It’s a best practice to allow installed apps to auto-upgrade unless you’re customizing
these apps.
Auto-Install Requests
Monitor and interact with auto-install requests on the Requests tab.
Each auto-install request includes this information.

Name The name of the auto-install request.
Type The type of auto-install request. The values are: App Create, App Update, App
Delete, and Start Dataflow.
Status The status of the auto-install request. The values include: Success, Failed, In
Progress, Not Started, and Canceled
1667

Reason The failed reason of the auto-install request. For successful requests, the value is N/A.
For failed requests, the failure reason is displayed.
Created By The user who created the auto-install request.
Created On The date and time the auto-install request was created.
App The name of the auto-installed app.
Request Actions
Each auto-install request has an action menu accessible from the dropdown list icon . The request actions include:
• Open—Opens the associated installed app details. These details include all auto-install requests for the installed app, the most
recent app logs for the installed app, and the details of the auto-install request described here.
• Delete App—Deletes the installed app. associated with the auto-install request.
• View Log—Displays the auto-install request log.
• Try Again—Runs the auto-install request for this installed app again.
• Cancel—Appears only when the auto-install request status is In Progress. Use this action to cancel long-running requests
or when you don’t want app creation or upgrade to complete.
Clean Stale Requests

To clean the list of auto-install requests of stale requests, click Clean Stale Requests. A stale auto-install request is a request that doesn’t
have an installed app. Stale requests occur when app creation fails or when the installed app is deleted, either manually or by another
auto-install request
Search Requests
Use the search bar to search auto-install requests by app name.
Filter Requests
Use the filter dropdown list to filter the auto-install request list by request status.
Refresh Page
To update the statuses of the auto-install requests, click the Refresh icon .
View Auto Request Details

After opening the auto-install request details from the Open action, you see the Details view.
1668
This view includes the auto-install request name, the request creation date and user, the user and date of the last modification, and the
request status.
The auto-install request details describe the configuration settings and the variable values used for app creation and the request log.
These details provide information necessary for troubleshooting requests and installed apps.
To see the requests for an individual app, on the home page, click the app name, and then select the Requests tab.
Manage Templated Apps

CRM Analytics templated apps have multistep processes for installation and upgrades. Use the App
EDITIONS
Install History page to monitor installations in progress, track the assets created for the app, and
view logs to troubleshoot any installation issues. After an app is installed, run or schedule one-click Available in: Lightning
data refreshes. Experience
From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Install History, and then select App Install
History. Performance, Unlimited,
Only Templated apps shared with manage access are visible to the user.
The home page shows the installed CRM Analytics templated apps that are shared with manage access to your user. Embedded apps
that are auto-installed and templated apps installed from Analytics Studio are listed here. The summary information includes the app
name, the install overview for each app, the last modified date, the log size, the install duration time, and the next app refresh.
App Refresh
When an app is installed, the data assets used by the app must be refreshed to provide to most up-to-date insights for you and your
users. To refresh all of the data assets for an installed app, in the correct order, you can refresh the app on-demand or create a schedule.
1669
To run a data refresh for your app immediately, from the app’s actions, select Refresh Now. To schedule regular data refreshes, select
Schedule.
You can schedule daily or weekly refreshes. The refresh runs according to the time zone of the user who set the schedule.
1. Monitor and Troubleshoot Templated App Installations

Click an app name to see the entire install history for the app, cancel running installations, and view app logs and state. The app logs
and state provide details for each installation and each task. Use this information for troubleshooting why an installation or task
wasn’t successful or when an installation was canceled.
Monitor and Troubleshoot Templated App Installations

Click an app name to see the entire install history for the app, cancel running installations, and view app logs and state. The app logs
and state provide details for each installation and each task. Use this information for troubleshooting why an installation or task wasn’t
successful or when an installation was canceled.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Install History, and then select App Install History.
2. To view the individual app history detail, click an app name.
1670
Each templated app install history record has an action menu accessible from the dropdown list icon .
Use the actions to cancel an app installation that is in progress, delete app install history records, or display the top-level installation
logs.
3. To view the details of an individual install history, click an install action record on the app history page.
The install detail shows overview information for the installation and a list of individual install tasks. Use the dropdown list for
an install record to display the logs or the state for a task detail. A default of 10 tasks is displayed. To change the number of rows
shown or to load more rows, use the pagination controls in the upper right of the task list.
4. To view logs, click View Log on an install history record or an install task.
1671
The log entries provide granular detail for each installation and each task. The logs are helpful for troubleshooting why an installation
or task wasn’t successful or when an installation was canceled.
Important: Logs availability is dependent on the log level selected at app creation. If there are logged events that are equal
to or more severe than the selected log level, logs are available for viewing.
5. To view the runtime state, click View State on an install task.
The state for each install task detail record contains context information about the user, org, app, app, variables, and constants,
represented as a tree. For each item, click to expand the elements of the tree.
For more information on how to use this page for troubleshooting, see the Use the App Install History Page in the Analytics Templates
Developer Guide.
1672
Analytics Design Toolkit

Use the Analytics Design Toolkit to create an app with ready-made dashboard, charts, and widget
USER PERMISSIONS
templates that you can use to get started fast with your own apps.
The Analytics Design Toolkit gives you a starting point for your own CRM Analytics app design and To create and manage the
development. The app’s dashboard, chart, and widget templates follow the internal Salesforce Analytics Design Toolkit app:
design guidelines. Brand the app with your own color, then apply the designs to your own data to
Templated Apps
build your own app.
To use the Analytics Design
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app Toolkit app:
creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps. The information here provides • Use CRM Analytics
specifics about creating and using the Analytics Design Toolkit app. Templated Apps
Create the Analytics Design Toolkit

If you have newly enabled CRM Analytics, the app is created for you by default. If you have already enabled CRM Analytics for your org,
you can install it manually using the instructions below, or you can enable auto-installation in the Settings menu.
Note: To see the status of your auto-installed app, go to Setup > Feature Settings > Analytics > Analytics > Auto-Installed
Apps. This app will auto-upgrade when the template is updated. To learn about auto-upgrade, see Auto-Installed Apps on page
1666.
The Analytics Design Toolkit configuration wizard requires that you select a color for your app. Click the disclosure triangle next to the
color square on the left of the wizard page and select a color. You can also manually enter values for Hex, R, G, and B. Then click Done.
Tip: Select a color that matches your color scheme you use for your company or your brand ID.
Use the Analytics Design Toolkit

Open the app.
•
From the app picker , select CRM Analytics Studio to open the CRM Analytics home page.
• Under Browse in the left column, select All Items.
• Select the Apps tab, then click your app to open it. If you can’t immediately find it, consult your Salesforce administrator to find out
the name they gave it when creating the app.
Click Run App to open its dashboard, which includes three tabs:
• Styles. Shows you the styles used in the app, including colors, typography, and widgets.
• Components. Dashboard components are a type of dashboard widget that can contain other widgets, pages, and Lightning Web
Components. Use dashboard components to manage and reuse groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards.
• Layouts. The layout helps define how the viewer interprets data. The layout helps to frame insights and drive actions.
1673
Design Style Guide includes two datasets based on CSV files to populate the examples in the app. Add your own data to the app, then
reuse the examples to build your own app. See Build CRM Analytics Dashboards on page 1405.
Create Your Own Beautifully Designed Apps

Here are some tips for putting Design Style Guide to use in your own app designs:
• When you create the app, select the color pattern that most closely matches your brand or corporate identity.
• In the app’s dashboard, select the widget, component, or layout of your choice and move it to a new page in the app you’re building.
From there, you can add metrics and other CRM Analytics Studio features using dashboard designer.
• Create a new layout by saving a new copy of the dashboard in your own app and moving widgets around. The template created
them with the color pattern of your choice, so they’ll already reflect your brand.
1674
Event Monitoring Analytics App

The Event Monitoring Analytics App integrates with event monitoring and setup audit trail data to
EDITIONS
give you insights into your user and org behavior. The app is a built-in way to explore your monitoring
data in Salesforce. App creation is easy, and with its prebuilt dashboards and datasets, you can start Available in: Salesforce
exploring right away. This app helps you drill into your data and swiftly identify suspicious behavior, Classic and Lightning
slow page performance, and poor user adoption. Experience
As part of Event Monitoring, you also get the Event Monitoring Analytics App. Use this app to upload
and access only the data provided to you as part of your subscription. Prevent your users from using Performance, and Unlimited
the app to upload or access any other data. Salesforce sometimes monitors such usage. The Event Editions
Monitoring Analytics App is available in English only. If you have a CRM Analytics Platform license,
you can access dashboards in the Event Monitoring Analytics app. Hourly event log file integration
with the Event Monitoring Analytics app is unavailable. Data is refreshed one time a day in the app. USER PERMISSIONS
Even with 30-day data retention, Event Monitoring doesn’t guarantee that 30 days worth of data To use the Event Monitoring
per dataset upload into CRM Analytics. The Event Monitoring Analytics App is subject to CRM Analytics App:
Analytics Limits. • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
Event Monitoring log files aren’t a system of record for user activity. They’re a source of truth, but
aren’t durable. During Salesforce site switches, instance refreshes, or unplanned system outages, To create and manage Event
data loss can occur. Monitoring Analytics Apps:
• Access Event Monitoring
For example, if Salesforce moves your production instance, your event log files can have a gap in Analytics Templates and
data. Salesforce makes commercially reasonable efforts to preserve event log file data integrity and Apps
avoid data loss. When Salesforce performs a site switch or instance refresh, it uses an automated
process to replicate event logs. Templated Apps
1. Set Up Salesforce Permissions for the Event Monitoring Analytics App Dataflows
Set up your org to use the Event Monitoring Analytics App by enabling CRM Analytics, assigning
permission set licenses, and then creating and assigning permission sets.
2. Create and Share the Event Monitoring Analytics App
After you enable the correct permissions, set up the Event Monitoring Analytics app. You can create an Event Monitoring Analytics
App in one of two configurations. The first configuration incrementally refreshes only new event log file data since the last dataset
update. In the second configuration, the app fully refreshes all data with new event log file data.
3. Upgrade the Event Monitoring Analytics App
Take advantage of the latest Event Monitoring Analytics App features by upgrading your app every time we release a new version.
4. Schedule the Event Monitoring Analytics Daily Dataflow
Schedule a daily app refresh to update the dataflow before you start exploring event data with Event Monitoring Analytics.
5. Event Monitoring Analytics App Prebuilt Dashboards
The Event Monitoring Analytics App comes with a set of prebuilt dashboards so that you can start exploring your data right away.
Data from your org is automatically loaded into your Event Monitoring Analytics App datasets when it’s generated.
6. Get to Know Event Monitoring Analytics App Terminology
To make the best use of the Event Monitoring Analytics App, it’s helpful to understand the metrics and terms used in the app.
1675
Set Up Salesforce Permissions for the Event Monitoring Analytics App

Set up your org to use the Event Monitoring Analytics App by enabling CRM Analytics, assigning
USER PERMISSIONS
permission set licenses, and then creating and assigning permission sets.
To create and manage Event
Note: As part of Event Monitoring, you also get the Event Monitoring Analytics App. Use
Monitoring Analytics Apps:
this app to upload and access only the data provided to you as part of your subscription. • Access Event Monitoring
Please prevent your users from using the app to upload or access any other data. Salesforce Analytics Templates and
sometimes monitors such usage. The Event Monitoring Analytics App is available in English Apps
only. If you have an CRM Analytics Growth license, you can access dashboards in the Event
Monitoring app. Templated Apps
Each Event Monitoring Analytics Apps license provides access to Event Monitoring Analytics to up
to 10 users. The table shows data storage limits for the app. If you require more data, you can Dataflows
purchase Analytics Cloud - Additional Data Rows, which entitles you to an additional 100 million
rows.
Table 14: Event Monitoring Analytics App Data Storage Limits

License Limit
Event Monitoring Analytics Apps 50 million rows when used without CRM Analytics Growth license.
Provides access to up to 10 users.
Analytics Cloud - Additional Data Rows 100 million rows.
Important: Event Monitoring Analytics App license data storage limits are contractual, not technical. Licensee agrees to strictly
monitor the total number of data rows used by the CRM Analytics app to ensure successful dataflow updates. If your org has only
one CRM Analytics app, and you have more than the licensed number of rows across all datasets, dataflows will fail. If you have
multiple CRM Analytics apps (such as Event Monitoring Analytics and Service Analytics), data storage limits are pooled across the
CRM Analytics apps and any app can consume storage without error.
The sample data for a particular event remains in the app until it’s overwritten with the data from an actual event. Event log file data is
available for the past 30 days. If you have a Developer Edition org, it’s available for the last 24 hours.
Your org can use the Event Monitoring Analytics App with or without the CRM Analytics platform. The Event Monitoring Analytics app
is available for free to any org with the paid Event Monitoring license. The Event Monitoring Analytics Apps license enables the following
permissions.
Table 15: Event Monitoring Analytics App User Permissions

Permission Function
Use CRM Analytics Templated Apps Enables access to all CRM Analytics templated apps, including the
Event Monitoring Analytics App.
Warning: This permission allows users to access event

monitoring data without requiring the View Event Log Files
and API Enabled user permissions. It also allows users to
edit app assets if they have Editor or Manager rights to the
app. Use caution when assigning it.
Access Event Monitoring Analytics Templates and Apps Gives admins the ability to create Event Monitoring Analytics apps.
1676
Permission Function
Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps Gives admins the ability to create templated CRM Analytics apps
for users in their orgs.
Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows Enables admins to upload and download JSON for existing data
flows.
Event Monitoring App Setup Process

For best results, follow the steps for setting up the Event Monitoring Analytics app in the order shown.
1. Event Monitoring Analytics App Permission Set License and User Permissions
The Event Monitoring Analytics Apps permission set license enables the user permissions required to explore data with and manage
the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
2. Identify Event Monitoring Analytics App User Types
Identify Event Monitoring Analytics app user types and the tasks they perform to ensure that the setup process meets your team’s
event monitoring analytics needs.
3. Enable CRM Analytics and Event Monitoring Integration with CRM Analytics
After Salesforce provisions you with the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps license, enable CRM Analytics and Event Monitoring.
4. Select User Permissions and Assign Users to Event Monitoring Analytics App Permission Sets
Give your users access to Event Monitoring Analytics features by assigning one or more permission sets based on the capabilities
they need.
Event Monitoring Analytics App Permission Set License and User Permissions
The Event Monitoring Analytics Apps permission set license enables the user permissions required to explore data with and manage
the Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Each Event Monitoring app user needs an Event Monitoring Analytics Apps permission set license. The Event Monitoring Analytics Apps
permission set license enables the following permissions.
Table 16: Event Monitoring Analytics Apps Permissions

User Permission What It Enables
Use CRM Analytics Templated Apps General access to all CRM Analytics templated apps, including the
Event Monitoring Analytics app.
Access Event Monitoring Analytics Templates and Apps The ability to create Event Monitoring Analytics apps.
Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps The ability to create templated CRM Analytics apps for users in
their orgs.
Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows Edit, delete, and use remote connections; add and remove
connected objects; run and schedule data sync; create, edit, delete,
run, schedule, and monitor dataflows and recipes. Use discretion
when assigning this user permission because it enables access to
all Salesforce object data to which the Integration User has access.
See Salesforce Data Access in CRM Analytics .
1677
Identify Event Monitoring Analytics App User Types

Identify Event Monitoring Analytics app user types and the tasks they perform to ensure that the setup process meets your team’s event
monitoring analytics needs.
The Event Monitoring Analytics Apps license includes the permissions required by users in your organization to administer Event
Monitoring Analytics and explore event data. Set up Event Monitoring Analytics by considering the different ways people can access
Event Monitoring Analytics features and categorizing users into types. Here are a few examples.
In most cases, Event Monitoring Analytics addresses the needs of two basic types of people on your team:
• Users, who view Event Monitoring Analytics dashboards and datasets.
• Administrators or managers, who access all Event Monitoring Analytics functionality to create apps, dashboards, and datasets, and
otherwise customize the Event Monitoring app experience.
Accordingly, when you set up Event Monitoring Analytics, creating two basic permission sets probably meets the needs of most users
in your organization:
• A “view” permission set that contains the permissions needed by most basic-level users when they access Event Monitoring Analytics.
• A “manage” permission set that’s reserved for a select few administrators and managers and contains permissions to use all Event
Monitoring Analytics features.
In the detailed Event Monitoring Analytics app setup instructions that follow, we show you how to create and assign these two permission
sets. Or, you can use the standard permission sets we provide.
Enable CRM Analytics and Event Monitoring Integration with CRM Analytics
After Salesforce provisions you with the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps license, enable CRM Analytics and Event Monitoring.
Enable the CRM Analytics Platform
1. In the Salesforce Setup menu, under Administer, select Analytics Cloud | Getting Started.
2. Click Enable Analytics.
Enable Event Monitoring
1. In Setup, enter Event in the Quick Find box, then select Event Monitoring Settings.
2. Select View Event Log Data in CRM Analytics Apps.
Select User Permissions and Assign Users to Event Monitoring Analytics App Permission Sets
Give your users access to Event Monitoring Analytics features by assigning one or more permission
USER PERMISSIONS
sets based on the capabilities they need.
After enabling CRM Analytics and Event Monitoring Integration with CRM Analytics, identify users To create permission sets:
who will access the Event Monitoring Analytics app and assign them to a permission set. You can • Manage Profiles and
Permission Sets
create any permission set you must meet the needs of your users. For convenience, two standard
permission sets are provided.
Standard Permission Sets For

Event Monitoring Analytics Apps Admin Users who create and customize Event Monitoring Analytics apps and
data flows
Event Monitoring Analytics Apps User Users who view Event Monitoring Analytics apps
Let’s begin selecting the user permissions in the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps Admin standard permission set.
1678
1. From Setup, enter Permission Sets in the Quick Find box, then select Permission Sets.
2. Select the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps Admin permission set.
3. Select the feature permissions to enable for your permission set. Use Find Settings to search for them quickly. Select Use
CRM Analytics Templated Apps, Access Event Monitoring Analytics Templates and Apps, Manage CRM Analytics Templated
Apps, and Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows. Make sure to select all four permissions.
4. Click Save. You can now assign the permission set to users. See Manage Permission Set Assignments.
5. Repeat the steps for the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps User standard permission set. However, for this permission set, select only
the Use CRM Analytics Templated Apps user permission, because your end users need only view access. If they need more access,
you can create your own permission set by cloning and customizing the standard permission set.
Warning: Assign the Event Monitoring Analytics Apps Admin permission set carefully, because it lets users create, edit, and delete
the app. Assign it only to users who administer or manage the app.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Permission Set Assignments
Create Permission Sets
Create and Share the Event Monitoring Analytics App

After you enable the correct permissions, set up the Event Monitoring Analytics app. You can create an Event Monitoring Analytics App
in one of two configurations. The first configuration incrementally refreshes only new event log file data since the last dataset update.
In the second configuration, the app fully refreshes all data with new event log file data.
Create an Event Monitoring Analytics App That Incrementally Refreshes Data

Create an Event Monitoring Analytics app and configure it to incrementally add new event log file data since the last dataset update.
This configuration reduces the likelihood of reaching row count limits and your 24 hourly rolling upload limit. It also speeds up
dataset refreshes for large datasets.
Create an Event Monitoring Analytics App That Refreshes All Data
Set up an Event Monitoring Analytics app that fully refreshes your dataset with new daily event log file data. This configuration
overwrites all dataset data daily.
SEE ALSO:
Tableau CRM External Data API Developer Guide: External Data API Limits
1679
Create an Event Monitoring Analytics App That Incrementally Refreshes Data

Create an Event Monitoring Analytics app and configure it to incrementally add new event log file
EDITIONS
data since the last dataset update. This configuration reduces the likelihood of reaching row count
limits and your 24 hourly rolling upload limit. It also speeds up dataset refreshes for large datasets. Available in: Salesforce
If you haven’t enabled permissions and event log file integration, complete the steps in Enable CRM Classic and Lightning
Analytics and Event Monitoring Integration with CRM Analytics on page 1678. Experience
To minimize your chances of hitting your 24 hourly rolling upload limit, apply this configuration to Available in: Enterprise,
all of your Event Monitoring Analytics apps. Performance, and
Unlimited Edition
1. Log in to Salesforce.
Requires Salesforce Shield
2. Select CRM Analytics from the App Picker.
or Salesforce Event
3. Click App, select Event Monitoring Analytics App, and then click Continue. Monitoring add-on
4. Click Continue until the Event Monitoring Analytics App - Personalize wizard appears. subscriptions.
5. Continue through the wizard, and accept the default settings or select new values.
6. Enable the Add only new event log file data to existing datasets? setting. USER PERMISSIONS
7. Name your app. To use Event Monitoring
8. Click Create. The app creation process can take a while. To check the progress, select Data Analytics apps:
Manager from the gear menu at the top of the page. If any part of your app creation fails, you • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
must recreate the app.
To create and manage Event
9. After your app is ready to go, you can share it with other users in your org. Remember that only
Monitoring Analytics apps:
users with the Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps and Access Event Monitoring Analytics • Access Event Monitoring
Templates and Apps permissions can see the app. To share your app, hover your mouse over Analytics Templates and
the app tile on the CRM Analytics home screen and click Share. You can also share from the Apps
app.
Because event log files have a 24-hour generation period, you don’t see your data in the app for Templated Apps
the first day after you create it. Incrementally refreshing data means that your apps accrue data
daily over the 30-day retention period starting the first day they’re created. Dataflows
Event log file data is available for the past 30 days. If you have a Developer Edition org, it’s available
for the last 24 hours.
We recommend that you schedule your dataflows to run daily.
Considerations for Incremental Refreshes to Event Monitoring Analytics App Datasets

Keep these considerations in mind when you configure your app to incrementally refresh datasets.
1680
Considerations for Incremental Refreshes to Event Monitoring Analytics App Datasets

Keep these considerations in mind when you configure your app to incrementally refresh datasets.
EDITIONS
• File uploads for some datasets end with the - Overwrite under the Origin column in Data
Manager. This name change happens when event log file events have schema changes across Available in: Salesforce
release boundaries, such as when a new field is added. In response, datasets make a full update Classic and Lightning
with a one-time overwrite process. Incremental dataset updates then resume the following Experience
day. To remove the - Overwrite suffix from your upload name, upgrade or reconfigure Available in: Enterprise,
your app and reenable the Add only new event log file data to existing datasets? Performance, and
configuration. Unlimited Edition
The - Overwrite suffix can also appear when you enable time zone support. If you use Requires Salesforce Shield
time zone support, schedule your dataflow to run daily. or Salesforce Event
Monitoring add-on
• For large datasets, the daily dataflow runtime for incremental dataset updates takes longer than
subscriptions.
full dataset updates. Update and reconfigure actions trigger the dataflow to run, which means
that app upgrade and reconfigure processes also take longer.
• Incremental dataset refreshes delete raw data from datasets.
• The append dataflow deletes all data in the dataset that supplies your app with new data, regardless of the specified retention period.
For example, if the Login dataset is the source dataset, running the append dataflow populates the LoginWithUsers dataset and
resets the row count of the Login dataset to zero. The retention period doesn’t apply to the source dataset data.
• Dataset API names are generated dynamically during app creation. We recommend that you don’t couple integrations with the
Event Monitoring Analytics app with dataset API names.
1681
Create an Event Monitoring Analytics App That Refreshes All Data

Set up an Event Monitoring Analytics app that fully refreshes your dataset with new daily event log
EDITIONS
file data. This configuration overwrites all dataset data daily.
If you haven’t enabled permissions and event log file integration, complete the steps in Enable CRM Available in: Salesforce
Analytics and Event Monitoring Integration with CRM Analytics on page 1678. Classic and Lightning
Experience
2. Select CRM Analytics from the App Picker. Available in: Enterprise,
Performance, and
3. Click App, select Event Monitoring Analytics App, and then click Continue. Unlimited Edition
4. Click Continue until the Event Monitoring Analytics App - Personalize wizard appears. Requires Salesforce Shield
5. Continue through the wizard, and accept the default settings or select new values. or Salesforce Event
Monitoring add-on
6. Name your app. subscriptions.
7. Click Create. The app creation process can take a while. To check the progress, select Data
Manager from the gear menu at the top of the page. If any part of your app creation fails, you
must recreate the app. USER PERMISSIONS
8. After your app is ready to go, you can share it with other users in your org. Remember that only To use Event Monitoring
users with the Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps and Access Event Monitoring Analytics Analytics apps:
Templates and Apps permissions can see the app. To share your app, hover your mouse over • Use CRM Analytics
the app tile on the CRM Analytics home screen and click Share. You can also share from the Templated Apps
app. To create and manage Event
Because event log files have a 24-hour generation period, you don’t see your data in the app for Monitoring Analytics apps:
the first day after you create it. The app includes some sample data, so you can preview your • Access Event Monitoring
Analytics Templates and
dashboards in the meantime. The sample data for a particular event remains in the app until it’s
Apps
fully replaced with the data from an actual event. Event log file data is available for the past 30 days.
If you have a Developer Edition org, it’s available for the last 24 hours. • Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
Dataflows
Upgrade the Event Monitoring Analytics App

Take advantage of the latest Event Monitoring Analytics App features by upgrading your app every
USER PERMISSIONS
time we release a new version.
The banner at the top of your app home page tells you that we released a new version. It also To create and manage Event
provides a link to more information about the release. There’s also a link inviting you to start the Monitoring Analytics apps:
• Access Event Monitoring
upgrade process in the left column of the home page, just below the app name.
Here’s how to upgrade your app. Apps
1. Click either the What’s new link in the banner or the New version available link in the left • Manage CRM Analytics
column of your app’s home page. Templated Apps
2. You can read information about the new version on top of the page that opens. At the bottom • Edit CRM Analytics
of the page, find the buttons: Upgrade current app and Create new app. Dataflows
3. See descriptions of what the buttons do by hovering over them. If you click Upgrade current
app, you overwrite your current app and all its assets, replacing it with an app based on the
new version. Upgrading also deletes any customizations, including new fields or objects that you added to the dataflow or changes
1682
that you made to security settings and dashboard labels and colors. If you click Create new app, you create a second copy of your
current app based on the new version. Decide which option suits your circumstances
4. Warning: If you customized your app, click Create new app to make an app copy based on the new version. Creating an
app preserves the current version and any customizations, which you can then manually copy into the new version of the app.
of any customizations you made. If you’re OK with overwriting customizations, check the box and click Continue. If you’re not, click
Back to return to the previous screen. Clicking Continue takes you to the configuration wizard. Skip ahead to step 6.
5. If you click Create new app, you’re taken to the configuration wizard. You don’t see a warning because you’re not overwriting your
current app, which is preserved with any customizations you made to it.
7. After you complete the wizard, CRM Analytics shows a screen that indicates which assets the upgrade impacted. To see how many
datasets, dashboards, and lenses get changed, deleted, or added by the upgrade, review the screen. It also shows how changed
assets get modified—whether the change is to data or appearance. On the same screen, you have the option to download a file
with code for changes made to the app. If you customized the app, download and save the file so that you can copy and paste the
customization code into the upgraded version.
8. Upgrade option only: If you’re upgrading your app, click Upgrade current app. Remember, this setting overwrites any customizations
you’ve made. You can also click Back to go back into the configuration wizard and change your selections or click the X in the
upper-right corner to cancel.
9. (Create option only) If you’re creating an app, name your app something different from the current version, and click Create new
If the link below the app name says Reset app, you’re using the latest version and an upgrade is unnecessary.
1683
Schedule the Event Monitoring Analytics Daily Dataflow

Schedule a daily app refresh to update the dataflow before you start exploring event data with
EDITIONS
Event Monitoring Analytics.
When you create Event Monitoring Analytics, a dataflow runs one time to import the latest Event Available in: Salesforce
Monitoring data to CRM Analytics. To ensure that your app uses up-to-date Salesforce data, you Classic and Lightning
can schedule the app to refresh your data every day. Experience
Salesforce uploads event log files after they’re generated. Most dataset uploads finish at about the Available in: Enterprise,
same time each day. Exact finish times vary depending on dataset size and content. Performance, and
Unlimited Edition
To get the most out of your scheduled data refresh, follow these best practices.
Requires Salesforce Shield
• To ensure that the app has the latest data, schedule the app refresh to run a few hours after
or Salesforce Event
event log files are generated. Large datasets take longer to upload, so schedule more time for
Monitoring add-on
them.
subscriptions.
• To prevent the app from overwriting full datasets every day, add the new Add only new event
log file data to existing datasets? app configuration. The app looks for the new event log
file data, adds it, and deletes all data that’s outside of the date retention period. Appending USER PERMISSIONS
only new data reduces network loads. And you’re less likely to reach row count limits and the
50-GB data upload limit. To create and manage Event
Monitoring Analytics Apps:
Note: The append dataflow deletes all data in the dataset that supplies your app with • Access Event Monitoring
new data, regardless of the specified retention period. For example, if the Login dataset Analytics Templates and
is the source dataset, running the append dataflow populates the LoginWithUsers dataset Apps
and resets the row count of the Login dataset to zero. The retention period doesn’t apply • Manage CRM Analytics
to the source dataset data. Templated Apps
To add the Add only new event log file data to existing datasets? setting to your app, see • Edit CRM Analytics
Create an Event Monitoring Analytics App That Incrementally Refreshes Data. Dataflows
Multiple background Salesforce processes trigger event log file uploads. For example, if a log is
generated later than expected, its corresponding event log file is regenerated and then added to a dataset. Customers then can see
multiple uploads within a single day, or they can get uploads outside of the scheduled window.
To schedule your app, see Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics App on page 1660. Select a time outside normal work hours so the
data refresh doesn’t interrupt business activities.
Event Monitoring Analytics App Prebuilt Dashboards

The Event Monitoring Analytics App comes with a set of prebuilt dashboards so that you can start exploring your data right away. Data
from your org is automatically loaded into your Event Monitoring Analytics App datasets when it’s generated.
Most of the dashboards represent a single event type on the EventLogFile object. The EventLogFile object reference contains detailed
information about each event type. Let’s get a quick idea about what each dashboard does.
Note: Each dashboard listed has a corresponding dataset. The Event Monitoring Analytics App also supports the following datasets
that don’t have dashboards: Bulk API, Apex Callout, Concurrent Long-Running Apex Limit, Apex REST API, Apex SOAP, Apex Trigger,
Apex Unexpected Exception, Console, and Knowledge Article View.
Analytics Adoption
Corresponds to the Wave Change, Wave Interaction, and Wave Performance event types. This dashboard shows CRM Analytics usage
and performance information.
1684
Apex Executions
Corresponds to the Apex Execution event type. This dashboard lets you track trends in Apex code executions and performance.
API
Corresponds to the API Event event type. This dashboard gives you information about both your users’ API usage and API performance
in your org. You can see how often each object is being used, how fast each object is being processed, and what methods are being
invoked on that object.
Dashboards
Corresponds to the Dashboard event type. This dashboard helps you track dashboard adoption and performance.
Files
Corresponds to the Content Transfer event type. When users in your org perform content transfers (downloads, uploads, or previews),
they show up on this dashboard. You can also track file adoption.
Lightning Adoption
Corresponds to the Lightning Interaction and Lightning Page View event types. Use this dashboard to see how users interact with
Lightning Experience on the desktop and mobile devices.
Lightning Performance
Corresponds to the Lightning Error, Lightning Interaction, Lightning Page View, and Lightning Performance event types. Use this
dashboard to optimize performance and user interactions with Lightning Experience and the Salesforce mobile app.
Login-As
Corresponds to the Login As event type. This dashboard lets you see which admins are using the login-as feature and on which user
accounts.
My Trust
The My Trust dashboard gives you an overall idea of what kinds of events are taking place in your org over time. It also shows the average
speed of these transactions. The dashboard corresponds to the following event types: Apex Execution, API, Content Transfer, Dashboard,
Lightning Page View, Login As, Login, Report, Report Export, REST API, and Visualforce, all correlated by User IDs. For the My Trust
dashboard to work, add all datasets to your app in the Configuration Wizard. It can impact your row utilization, depending on the number
of events in your org.
Page Views (URIs)

Corresponds to the URI event type. This dashboard lets you see which pages users are accessing in the Salesforce desktop app.
Report Downloads
Corresponds to the Report Export event type. This dashboard lets you see which users are downloading your reports and where they’re
downloading them from.
1685
Reports
Corresponds to the Report event type. This dashboard shows you trends in reporting as well as which users are running specific reports.
You can also find out which reports are having performance issues.
RestAPI
Corresponds to REST API event type. This dashboard shows you trends in REST API usage and which endpoints are seeing the most
traffic. You can also view information about the IP ranges issuing the requests and which methods are being called.
Setup Audit Trail

Corresponds to the Setup Audit Trail page in Setup. Use this dashboard to see the changes your users are making in the Setup area.
User Logins
Corresponds to the Login event type. This dashboard shows login trends by user and information about where and how users are
accessing your org.
Visualforce Requests
Corresponds to the Visualforce Request event type. Here you can see trends in Visualforce adoption and page performance.
Get to Know Event Monitoring Analytics App Terminology

To make the best use of the Event Monitoring Analytics App, it’s helpful to understand the metrics and terms used in the app.
Term Description
APT Average page time. An aggregate metric across multiple
transactions.
EPT Experienced page time. The timing of a page transaction as seen

by the user.
Event A user-initiated interaction in Salesforce. For example, a login, the

firing of an API call, or the download of a report. Events are related
to the EventLogFile sObject.
Field Service Analytics

The Field Service Analytics app brings the power of Analytics to Salesforce Field Service on any device that supports CRM Analytics.
With intuitive visualizations based on your field service data, Field Service Analytics provides just-in-time analytics for field service
managers and dispatchers. You get clear data insights to improve every on-site experience. Field Service Analytics empowers managers
with answers to help their technicians deliver personalized, actionable customer service.
Tip: Follow the steps in the order shown to get started with Field Service Analytics. If you haven’t used CRM Analytics before,
learn more about it from the Analytics Documentation.
1. About the Field Service Analytics App

Learn the benefits of Field Service Analytics before you create and use the app to help manage field service operations.
1686
2. Field Service Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard

The Field Service Analytics app includes prebuilt dashboards to accelerate Field Service data exploration.
3. Set Up and Create the Field Service Analytics App
Set up Field Service Analytics app permissions, make sure your org is enabled to use Field Service, and assign field level security
correctly so you can create and share the app.
About the Field Service Analytics App

Learn the benefits of Field Service Analytics before you create and use the app to help manage field
EDITIONS
service operations.
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To use CRM Analytics

templated apps:
Templated Apps
To use Field Service
Analytics:
• Access Service Cloud
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
1687
Salesforce created the Field Service Analytics app to help service managers analyze customer service data their teams generate when
they use Field Service. The app is bundled with the Service Analytics.
Important: Your org must be enabled to use Field Service. CRM Analytics datasets are based on Field Service’s new object model.
We’ve designed Field Service Analytics to give you just-in-time analytics to optimize the outcome of your field service business. Service
managers get a new level of insight into their field service data that they can use to maximize the efficiency of their technical service
agents.
Using the app, service managers can access insights to improve every on-site service visit. You gain visibility into mobile workforce
utilization, first-time-fix rate, and travel time. Problem detection lets you optimize field technician agent productivity. Performance
analysis visualizations help your team prioritize and resolve work orders faster to improve customer satisfaction. Armed with actionable
analytics, your agents can deliver personalized, effective customer service.
CRM Analytics automatically creates the app for you based on your Field Service data. Select the Field Service Analytics template, click
Create, and CRM Analytics does the rest. You get actionable insights fast from your field service data using the intuitive CRM Analytics
interface. And you can drill deeper into key aspects of service engagements and technician performance by customizing Field Service
Analytics around your business needs.
Note: Your organization can use Field Service Analytics with or without the CRM Analytics platform by purchasing a Service
Analytics license. Each Salesforce Analytics license includes a Service Analytics license.
1688
Field Service Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard

The Field Service Analytics app includes prebuilt dashboards to accelerate Field Service data
USER PERMISSIONS
exploration.
To use CRM Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
To use Field Service
Analytics:
• “Access Service Cloud
Apps”
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
• “Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows”
The prebuilt dashboards in the Field Service Analytics app contain key performance indicators that help you get value from your Salesforce
field service data—fast. The dashboards help you understand key elements of customer service work order status and field team
performance. You can prioritize customer service engagements, make technician utilization decisions, and quickly drill down to isolate
problems and take action. Quickly review first-time fix rates, utilization, SLA compliance, and travel-time analysis. Start from a territory
overview of all accounts, products, and teams and zoom into the technician and work order level.
The following table guides you through Field Service Analytics dashboards. You can also explore further on your own at any point. To
learn more about exploring data in CRM Analytics, see Explore and Visualize Your Data.
1689
Table 17: Field Service Analytics Dashboards

Dashboard Name Contents Target User Role
Work Order Performance Service managers start here for a summary Service manager/dispatcher
of KPIs. Review work order volume, average
work time, average travel times, and
first-time fix rate. Also review technician
agent data, including the number of work
orders per technician, their planned and
actual travel times, and utilization rates.
Technician Performance Focuses on each technician’s work order Service manager

volume. Review agent-by-agent work order
prioritization, travel time, first-time fix rates,
mean time to repair, due date and SLA
violations.
Service Resource Shows time spent by an individual Service manager and technician
technician on each type of job so managers
can assess technicians’ efficiency. Also
shows average number of jobs completed
by the technician for a specific date range,
the worker’s first-time fix rate, and actual
versus estimated travel times to job sites.
Embeddable in technicians’ pages so they
can monitor their own efficiency KPIs.
Service Territory Service managers can see the types of jobs Service manager
completed in their territories—for example,
HVAC, electrical, or plumbing—to ensure
that their team members have the skills they
need. They can also see the daily average
number of jobs completed, technician
utilization rate, and actual versus estimated
technician travel times.
Set Up and Create the Field Service Analytics App

Set up Field Service Analytics app permissions, make sure your org is enabled to use Field Service,
USER PERMISSIONS
and assign field level security correctly so you can create and share the app.
Set Up Field Service Analytics App Permissions To create and manage CRM
Analytics apps:
The Service Analytics license provides access to the Field Service Analytics app. To set up permissions • Manage CRM Analytics
for Field Service Analytics, follow the detailed instructions starting at Set Up Permissions for the Templated Apps
Service Analytics App.
• “Edit CRM Analytics
Make Sure That Field Service Is Enabled in Your Org Dataflows”
Important: Important: Your org must be enabled to use Field Service and its new standard
object model to use Field Service Analytics.
1. Go to Salesforce Setup.
1690
2. Enter Field Service in the Quick Find/Search box. If Field Service Settings appears in Setup, click it.
3. In the center window, under Field Service Settings, check to see if the box for Enable Field Service is checked.
If you’re unsure that your org is set up to use Field Service, contact your Salesforce representative.
Assign Field Level Security
Before you create Field Service Analytics, set Salesforce field-level security to enable the CRM Analytics Integration User to see all fields
you want your app to include. Integration users run the dataflow, and if they don’t have proper field-level security permissions, the
dataflow can fail. For instructions, see Create and Share the Service Analytics App, Step 2.
Create Field Service Analytics
When you’ve completed the previous setup processes, create Field Service Analytics.
1. Go to CRM Analytics.
2. Click Create in the upper right corner.
3. Select the Field Service Analytics template.
4. Name your app and click Create.
CRM Analytics creates your app, which can take a few minutes while CRM Analytics runs a new dataflow and creates the app’s dashboards.
Refresh your browser, and click the app you just created to see the dashboards.
Share Field Service Analytics
Now that you’ve created the app, share it with users in your organization. You can only share it with users who have the “Use CRM
Analytics Templated Apps” and “Access Service Cloud Analytics Templates and Apps” permissions enabled.
1. Open your app if it’s not already open. If you’ve navigated away from CRM Analytics Studio, go back to it, select All Items, find your
app, and click it.
2.
1691
Important: Users with the “Use Analytics Templated Apps” permission and Editor or Manager access to the app can create,
5. Click Add, then click Save.
Introduction to CRM Analytics Apps for Industries

Get started quickly with the CRM Analytics templated apps specifically designed for industries clouds. The apps provide industry-specific
cloud solutions that help businesses in various industries to streamline their processes and enhance customer experiences.
You can create an app from a template with just a few clicks or answer questions in a handy configuration wizard. Templated apps can
also be installed automatically when you install managed packages. The app includes customizable dashboards, real-time reports, and
data visualization tools to track key performance indicators (KPIs), and gives a deeper understanding of your customer data. Use the
predictive analytics capabilities embedded within these apps to forecast future customer behavior and to receive actionable
recommendations for enhancing customer engagement and retention.
The following table lists the available CRM Analytics apps for industries.
Industry Cloud Apps

Automotive • Analytics for Automotive
• CRM Analytics for Warranty Lifecycle Management
Communications • Analytics for Communications - Business

• Analytics for Communications - Consumer
• Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking
• Salesforce Contracts Analytics
Consumer Goods • Analytics for Consumer Goods

• Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model on page 1731
• Trade Promotion Effectiveness on page 1731
Education Analytics for Education on page 1779
Energy and Utilities Analytics for Energy and Utilities
Feedback Management Customer Lifecycle Analytics on page 1779
Financial Services • Analytics for Wealth Management

• FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start App on page 1760
• Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management
• Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management
• Analytics for Insurance
• Analytics for Mortgage
• Analytics for Retail Banking
• Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking
1692
Industry Cloud Apps
• Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics on page 1760

• Wealth Starter
• Consumer Banking Starter Analytics
• Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud
• Analytics for Complaints Management
Health • Analytics for Healthcare

• Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare on page 1763
• Analytics for Emergency Response Management on page 1736
Loyalty • Analytics for Loyalty

• Referral Marketing Analytics
Manufacturing • Analytics for Manufacturing

• Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing
on page 1763
• CRM Analytics for Warranty Lifecycle Management
• Rebate Analytics
Media Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management
Net Zero Cloud • Net Zero Analytics

• DEI Analytics on page 1779
Public Sector Services • Licenses, Permits, and Inspections Analytics

• Caseworker Productivity Analytics
Analytics for Automotive

The Analytics for Automotive app provides the dealers and Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM) insights to track and monitor
their dealership-based automotive business.
Analytics for Communications-Business
The Analytics for Communications-Business app brings insights to sales processes with three embedded dashboards highlighting
opportunities, quotes, and orders. This app allows sales reps to reduce time to close, prioritize accounts and quotes to follow up
with and understand the order completion and fulfillment behavior.
Analytics for Communications - Consumer
The Analytics for Communications - Consumer app gives customer service reps instant insights into accounts to help them gauge
customer sentiment, anticipate customer needs, and provide timely solutions.
Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking
The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app brings insights to track commercial and service orders through various
business milestones. Managers can use the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking dashboards to monitor the order journey,
identify orders and tasks that require immediate attention, minimize order fallout risks, and improve SLA adherence.
1693
Analytics for Consumer Goods

Analytics for Consumer Goods gives your sales team actionable insights into your retail business performance. Sales managers can
use the app to increase sales, improve store compliance, identify stores at risk, and maximize sales rep effectiveness.
Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model
The Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model app provides actionable account-level insights to increase sales, improve account
compliance, identify accounts at risk, and maximize sales rep effectiveness.
Trade Promotion Effectiveness
Trade Promotion Effectiveness app provides data-driven dashboards to analyze trade promotion data, evaluate the effectiveness of
a promotion, and make decisions for future promotions.
Analytics for Energy and Utilities
With the CRM Analytics for Energy and Utilities App, it’s easy to know which opportunities are most likely to generate a sale. You
can track how many quotes you’ve created and know whether customers have responded to them. The three embedded dashboards
(Home, Quotes, and Account) provide details about opportunities, quotes, and accounts.
Analytics for Emergency Response Management
Analytics for Emergency Response Management app provides insights to identify the hotspots in which requests for emergency
intakes are increasing and track intake persons needing attention
Financial Services Analytics
Analytics for Financial Services gives financial advisors and personal bankers a comprehensive customer intelligence solution based
on the CRM Analytics platform. It includes Einstein Discovery, which lets you create automated AI models on any dataset without
writing code.
Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics
Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app provides actionable insights to effectively manage your claims, quotes, and policies.
FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start
The FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start app provides insights to effectively monitor the growth of your policies over time and to
identify cross-selling opportunities within the existing customer base to improve business revenue.
The Analytics for Healthcare Template
Use actionable insights from CRM Analytics for Health Cloud apps to drive intelligent patient engagement, improve care effectiveness,
and manage patient risk.
Patient Risk Stratification Template
The Patient Risk Stratification template creates an app that lets healthcare coordinators identify high-risk patients to make sure they
get the extra care they need.
Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare
The Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare app provides a complete solution for streamlining the prior authorization review workflow.
Analytics for Loyalty
By using Analytics for Loyalty app, get actionable insights into loyalty programs and devise strategies to increase membership, retain
customers, improve processes, and grow your business.
The CRM Analytics for Manufacturing Template
The CRM Analytics for Manufacturing lets account managers visualize all aspects of their business to keep them on top of sales
agreements, orders, and contracts.
Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing
The Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing app provides insights into your forecast data and develop accurate
forecasts to optimize your production and operations.
1694
Public Sector Case Analytics Template

Public Sector Case Analytics lets public sector service organizations measure their effectiveness and identify immediate actions to
improve case work performance.
Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management
The Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app provides a detailed view of various subscriber trends that affect revenue,
churn, and customer lifetime value. By using the data-driven dashboards, Marketing Managers can quickly track overall subscriber
trends, analyze the trends' effects on revenue, and respond with better products and marketing strategies.
Net Zero Analytics
Net Zero Analytics enables you to bring your environmental accounting in line with your financial accounting.
DEI Analytics
DEI Analytics app provides insights to improve DEI (diversity, equity, and inclusion) goals and employee relationships.
Education Analytics
The Education Analytics app provides insights into recruitment, admissions, learner engagement, and student success that you can
use to improve processes and analyze learner metrics.
Customer Lifecycle Analytics
Customer Lifecycle Analytics app provides actionable insights into your customers and answer key questions about your business.
SEE ALSO:
Analytics for Automotive

The Analytics for Automotive app provides the dealers and Original Equipment Manufacturers
EDITIONS
(OEM) insights to track and monitor their dealership-based automotive business.
For more information on creating the Analytics for Automative app, see Deploy Analytics for Available in: Lightning
Automotive App. Experience
For more information on Analytics for Automotive dashboards, see Analytics Dashboards in Available in: Enterprise and
Automotive Cloud. Unlimited Editions of
Automotive Cloud
Analytics for Communications-Business
The Analytics for Communications-Business app brings insights to sales processes with three
embedded dashboards highlighting opportunities, quotes, and orders. This app allows sales reps to reduce time to close, prioritize
accounts and quotes to follow up with and understand the order completion and fulfillment behavior.
1. Deploy Analytics for Communications-Business

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template and use the dashboards, deploy Analytics for
Communications - Business in your Salesforce org.
2. Use Analytics for Communications-Business Dashboards
The Analytics for Communications-Business app provides a comprehensive range of B2B business analytics, starting from opportunity,
quote, order completion, and fulfillment insights to enhance sales and operational efficiency. It simplifies the complex enterprise
quoting process through visualizations and provides SMB executives with a complete account 360 view. Procurement Managers
can access self-service analytics on community portals to get a 360-degree view across the whole enterprise.
1695
Deploy Analytics for Communications-Business

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template and use the dashboards, deploy Analytics for
Communications - Business in your Salesforce org.
Before You Begin

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template note these requirements
Create CRM Analytics for Communications-Business App
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template, and share it with your users.
Embed Analytics for Communications-Business Dashboards
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template, and share it with your users.
Assign Analytics for Communications-Business Permissions
Assign relevant permissions to admin and users to manage the Analytics for Communications - Business app.
Understand CRM Analytics for Communications-Business App Datasets
When you set up the CRM Analytics for Communication Business app, you have access to various datasets for gaining valuable
insights into your business.
Before You Begin

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template note these
EDITIONS
requirements
Important: For general app creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps, see Available in: Developer
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here. edition and for an extra cost
Note these requirements to create an app from CRM Analytics for Communications-Business app and Unlimited editions.
template:
• Make sure that you and all app users have the CRM for Comms App license and the CRM Analytics
Plus license.
• Your org must have at least one record in each of the following objects: count, Opportunity, OpportunityLineItem, Order, Product2,
Quote, and User.
• Set Salesforce field-level security to enable the User to see all fields used in the app. See Set Field Level Security to Enable Creation
of an CRM Analytics Template.
Important: Currently, the Analytics for Communications-Business app is only supported in orgs with Data Sync on.
1696
Create CRM Analytics for Communications-Business App

Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template, and share it with your
EDITIONS
users.
To create an app from CRM Analytics for Communications-Business app template, follow these Available in: Developer
steps: edition and for an extra cost
• In CRM Analytics Studio, click Create in the upper right corner
and Unlimited editions.
• Select App, then Create App from Template and open the template picker.
• Locate the CRM Analytics for Communications-Business app tile, select it, and click
USER PERMISSIONS
Continue.
• Review the app preview page, and click Continue to open the configuration wizard. To create and manage the
CRM Analytics for Comms
• If you’re offered a choice between basing your app on an existing app or creating a one, select
app:
Create a brand new app and click Continue. The CRM Analytics for Communications-Business
• CRM Analytics Plus
app runs a compatibility check against your org to be sure it includes the data to successfully Admin and CRM for
create the app’s datasets and dashboards. If it doesn’t, follow the instructions in the error Comms Admin
message to add the required data and start the app creation process again. permission sets
• When the org compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next. To use the CRM Analytics for
• Name your app, and click Create. Comms app:
• CRM Analytics Plus User
Important: For general app creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps, see and CRM for Comms
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here. User permission sets
Embed Analytics for Communications-Business Dashboards

Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Business template, and share it with your
EDITIONS
users.
The Analytics for Communications - Business app includes dashboards that you can embed and Available in: Developer
access in Lightning Experience pages and Salesforce Classic experiences. Some dashboards require edition and for an extra cost
filters to be added when embedding. In this case, you must use filters for the Quote and Account in Enterprise, Performance,
Insights embedded dashboards. and Unlimited editions.
The Account Insights dashboard requires filters to be added when embedding it. Use the following
syntax:
{"datasets":{"Quote":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"Order":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"Opportunity":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}]}}
The Quote Insights embedded dashboard requires filters to be added when embedding the dashboard. Use the following syntax:
{"datasets":{"Quote":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"OrderItem":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"QuoteMember":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}]}}
For general instructions on embedding dashboards, see Embed Dashboards Everywhere in Salesforce Help.
For instructions on filtering embedded dashboards, see Filter and Selection Syntax for Embedded Dashboards in Salesforce Help.
Assign Analytics for Communications-Business Permissions

Assign relevant permissions to admin and users to manage the Analytics for Communications -
EDITIONS
Business app.
Follow the given steps to assign relevant admin or user permissions: Available in: Developer
edition and for an extra cost
• From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users.
• Click the name of the user. and Unlimited editions.
• Click Permission Set Assignments, and then click Edit Assignments.
1697
• To assign the user necessary admin permission, select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and CRM for Comms Admin permission
sets.
• To assign the user necessary user permissions, select both the CRM Analytics Plus User and CRM for Comms User permission
sets.
• Add the permission sets, and then save your changes.
Understand CRM Analytics for Communications-Business App Datasets

When you set up the CRM Analytics for Communication Business app, you have access to various
EDITIONS
datasets for gaining valuable insights into your business.
CRM Analytics for Communications-Business app includes the following datasets: Available in: Developer
• Account
• Opportunity and Unlimited editions.
• Oppty Products
• Orchestration Item
• Order
• OrderItem
• plain_quota
• Quota
• Quote
• QuoteMember
• User
Note: The plain_quota dataset is optional and must be imported from a CSV source.
Upload Dataset
Upload the plain_quota Dataset to view relevant metrics in the Home dashboard.
Upload Dataset
Upload the plain_quota Dataset to view relevant metrics in the Home dashboard.
EDITIONS
Optionally, you can upload quota data by overriding the plain_quota dataset in your app by following
these instructions. The plain_quota dataset is used to provide you with quota attainment metrics Available in: Developer
in the Opportunities section of the Home dashboard. If you don’t want to see this metric, you can edition and for an extra cost
skip this section. in Enterprise, Performance,
Note: When you work with .CSV files you want to import to CRM Analytics Comms-Business,
create and open them using only a UTF-8-compliant text editor. Opening them in Microsoft
Excel or other spreadsheet software reformats .CSV files and makes them unusable in CRM
Analytics Comms-Business.
Important: When you create the .CSV file, be sure it contains the following fields, in this order, with exactly these names. Field
names are case-sensitive:
• StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format)
• QuotaAmount
• OwnerName
1698
• Username
1. Create a .CSV file to include the fields described, that is StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format), QuotaAmount, OwnerName, Username.
3. In Salesforce, go to the CRM Analytics home page and find the plain_quota dataset.
5. Salesforce displays the dataset editing screen for the plain_quota dataset. Look for Replace Data in the upper right corner and click
it.
7. To open the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next.
8. If your fiscal period is different than calendar period, that is if it starts on a date other than January 1, update the plain_quota Metadata
metadata, the numeral “0” stands for January, “1” stands for February, and so on, up to “11,” which stands for December. Save
the file to your desktop.
1699
9. On the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next to open the Edit Field Attributes page. The first column —QuotaAmount— is selected.
If not, select it. In the Field Attributes panel on the right, make sure Field Type is set to Measure.
10. After uploading your quota data, rerun the recipe to update the dashboards.
a. Click the Gear menu at the upper right of the CRM Analytics Comms for Business screen and select Data Manager.
b. Select the Dataflow & Recipes view from the menu at the top left of the Data Manager screen and click the Recipes tab in the
main pane.
a. Find your app’s recipe. Open the menu on the far right of the screen next to the app icon and name, and click Run now.
Use Analytics for Communications-Business Dashboards

The Analytics for Communications-Business app provides a comprehensive range of B2B business analytics, starting from opportunity,
quote, order completion, and fulfillment insights to enhance sales and operational efficiency. It simplifies the complex enterprise quoting
process through visualizations and provides SMB executives with a complete account 360 view. Procurement Managers can access
self-service analytics on community portals to get a 360-degree view across the whole enterprise.
1700
Home Embedded Dashboard

The Home Embedded dashboard helps you stay on top of the details of your communications sales processes. The app brings insights
to these processes with a comprehensive dashboard that shows details about opportunities, quotes, and orders.
Account Insights Embedded Dashboard
The Account Insights embedded dashboard allows you to embed your account information anywhere so that it’s accessible at-a-glance.
This dashboard provides information about opportunities, quotes, and orders for an account so you can optimize selling.
Quote Insights Embedded Dashboard
The Quote Insights dashboard is designed to be embedded wherever you track your quotes. Use it to quickly and easily understand
where to put your efforts.
Self-Service Embedded Dashboard
The Self-Service dashboard offers a comprehensive view of account-specific details, such as contracts, quotes, orders, bills, and asset
distribution. Integrate the dashboard into the community portal to provide Procurement Managers with a comprehensive view of
the entire enterprise. Small and Medium Businesses (SMB) executives can access self-service analytics from the SMB Console for a
360° view of the complete account.
Quote to Order Process Visualization Embedded Dashboard
The Quote to Order Process Visualization dashboard provides B2B Sales Agents with a comprehensive and clear view of their Quote
to Order progress. At each stage of the Quote to Order journey, gain insights into any missing details that are required for task
completion, and identify focus areas to streamline the process effectively.
Report Download Dashboard
Use the Report Download dashboard to view and download customer-specific reports for every stage of the Quote to Order process.
These reports offer a comprehensive view of the stage's status and highlight any missing or partially valid data, enabling users to
quickly correct crucial details, such as addresses.

The Home Embedded dashboard helps you stay on top of the details of your communications sales
EDITIONS
processes. The app brings insights to these processes with a comprehensive dashboard that shows
details about opportunities, quotes, and orders. Available in: Developer
Embed the Home Dashboard in Enterprise, Performance,
You can embed and access the Home dashboard in Lightning Experience pages and Salesforce
Classic experiences.
Navigate the Dashboard

The dashboard is divided into two panes that allows you to select an area of interest and click for more details.
1701
Section Description
( 1.) Opportunities, Quotes, and Orders The top pane gives high-level information about three primary aspects of your
Communications sales processes: opportunities, quotes, and orders. At a glance, you can
see the closed-won amount, the number of quotes presented for approval, and the
number of orders fulfilled. Hovering over the bar gives you even more details.
( 2.) Opportunities detailed view The bottom pane shows a detailed view of your opportunities. If this pane isn’t open,
click View Details.
( 3.) Quotes detailed view To view information about your quotes, click View Details. The bottom pane populates
with details about your quotes.
( 4.) Orders detailed view To view information about your orders, click View Details. The bottom pane populates
with details about your orders.
Understand Your Opportunities
1702
Section Description
( 1.) Opportunities Displays the closed won amount. You can also see the percentage of your quota
attainment if you uploaded quota data. To understand your opportunities, click the View
Details button.
( 2.) Top Products Displays the products you selected when creating the opportunity sorted by dollar amount.
This metric can help you understand which products to focus on.
( 3.) Top Accounts Displays the accounts with the most opportunities stacked by dollar amount. This metric
can help you determine which accounts to focus on.
( 4.) Top Open Opportunities Displays your current opportunities stacked by dollar amount. This metric helps surface
the opportunities to help meet your quota.
KPI Calculations
• % Quota attainment: Sum of Quota Amount / Amount as %.
• Opportunities Closed Won: Sum of amount.
• Top Products chart: Sum of amount by Product Name.
• Top Accounts chart: Sum of amount by Account Name.
• Top Open Opportunities chart: Sum of amount by Opportunity Name.
• Top Open Opportunities: Sum of Amount.
Understand Your Quotes
Section Description
( 1.) Quotes Details about your quotes with emphasis on the most important milestones or status.
To understand your quotes, click the View Details button.
( 2.) Top Accounts with Pending Quotes The top accounts with quotes not yet been presented to the customer.
1703
Section Description
( 3.) # quotes presented The number of quotes presented to the customer. To see a detailed chart of the
presented quotes, including the margin and the number of days since presented to
the customer, hover over the number.
( 4.) Quote Amount The pending quotes presented but not yet accepted or denied by the customer. This
metric helps you to see where you must follow up on a presented quote.
( 5.) Top draft quotes The quotes in draft that haven’t yet been presented to customers, stacked by dollar
amount. A proposal hasn’t been generated or sent to a supervisor for approval.
( 6.) Days to Quote The time it took to configure your quotes compared to the average time it’s taken
you in the past. The quotes that have the longest days to quote are the ones that
need your attention.
KPI Calculations
• %Quotes Accepted: Sum of Accepted Quotes / Total Quotes as %.
• Top Account with Pending Quotes Chart: Sum of vlocity_cmt__EffectiveQuoteTotal__c by Account Name.
• #Quotes Presented: Count of Rows.
• Tooltip Days presented: Now() - LastModifiedDate.
• Top draft quotes: Count of Rows.
• # Days to Quote Chart: Now() - CreatedDate.
Understand Your Orders
Section Description
( 1.) Orders Details about your ordering process. To understand your orders, click the View
Details button.
( 2.) Total # Orders Orders and their fulfillment status. Use this metric to understand the status of all of
your orders and how many orders need attention.
1704
Section Description
( 3.) Accounts by # failed activations Accounts that had issues with activation, sorted by most to least issues. You can
check this section before presenting orders to customer so that you don’t attempt
to sell to an account that is experiencing issues.
( 4.) Pending orders for submission Orders that haven’t yet been submitted, sorted by the highest to lowest dollar
amount. The sum of the effective total order is the calculated total value of the entire
order.
KPI Calculations
• % Orders Fulfilled / Fulfillment Rate: Sum of Activated Orders / Total Orders as %.
• Orders Fulfilled: Sum of vlocity_cmt__EffectiveOrderTotal__c.
• Total # Orders: Count of Rows.
• Total Orders by status: Count of Rows by vlocity_cmt__OrderStatus__c.
• Accounts by # failed activations chart: Count of Rows by Parent Account Name.
• Pending orders for submission: Count of rows.
• Pending orders for submission chart: Sum of vlocity_cmt__EffectiveOrderTotal__c by Order Number.
Account Insights Embedded Dashboard

The Account Insights embedded dashboard allows you to embed your account information
EDITIONS
anywhere so that it’s accessible at-a-glance. This dashboard provides information about opportunities,
quotes, and orders for an account so you can optimize selling. Available in: Developer
Embed the Account Insights Dashboard in Enterprise, Performance,
You can embed and access the Account Insights dashboard in Lightning Experience pages and
Salesforce Classic experiences.
The Account Insights dashboard requires filters to be added when embedding it. Use the following syntax:
{"datasets":{"Quote":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"Order":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"Opportunity":[{"fields":["AccountId"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}]}}
1705
Understand Your Account Opportunities
Section Description
( 1.) Avg Margin The average margin for current quotes.
( 2.) vs last week This week’s average margin vs. last week’s average margin. Use this metric to see if your
margins are trending up or down.
( 3.) Quotes over time with the margin for each quote. Hover over points on the graph to see
the details for each quote’s creation date and average quote margin total.
( 4.) See more details about quotes and orders by navigating left or right.
( 5.) Opportunities (Price Quote Stage) The total opportunity. To see what percentage of the total opportunity has quotes, hover
over the bar graph.
( 6.) # w/o quotes created The number of opportunities without quotes created. To see a detailed chart that includes
the name of the opportunity and the amount (in dollars), hover over the number.
( 7.) # of Quotes Denied The number of quotes denied. To see the percent of quotes denied, hover over the bar
graph. To see a detailed list of the denied quotes, hover over the number.
( 8.) # presented for acceptance The number of quotes presented for acceptance. To see a detailed table of quotes
presented for acceptance, including the quote margin total and the effective quote total,
hover over the number.
KPI Calculations
• Average Margin %: Avg of vlocity_cmt__QuoteMarginTotal__c.
• Margin trending Chart: Avg of vlocity_cmt__QuoteMarginTotal__c by CreatedDate.
1706
• % Opp with Quotes: Sum of OppsWithQuotes / TotalOpps as %.

• $ Opportunities (Price Quote Stage): Sum of Amount.
• # w/out quote created: Count of Rows.
• % of quotes denied: Sum of QuotesDenied / TotalQuotes as %.
• # of quotes denied: Count of rows.
• # presented for acceptance: Count of rows.
Understand Your Account Quotes
Section Description
( 1.) To see more details about the account opportunities and orders, navigate left or right.
( 2.) To see the percent of quotes in draft, hover over the bar graph.
( 3.) #Draft Quotes Quotes that have been accepted and are ready to submit. To see the list of quotes,
including the days to quote and effective quote total, hover over the number.
( 4.) The chart shows the number of quotes in the following states:
• Approved. The quote was approved and is ready to present to the customer.
• Accepted: The customer accepted the quote.
• Denied: The customer denied the quote.
• Draft: The draft was created.
• In review: The quote was submitted for review, but not yet approved.
• Presented: The quote was presented to the customer, and not yet accepted or denied.
1707
Section Description
( 5.) To see the percent of orders in draft, hover over the bar graph.
( 6.) # Ready to submit orders To see the order number and amounts, hover over the number.
( 7.) The chart shows the number of orders in the following states:
• Activated
• In progress
• Queued
• Ready to submit
KPI Calculations
• % of quotes in draft: Sum of DraftQuotes / TotalQuotes as %.
• # Draft Quotes: Count of rows.
• Quotes by status chart: Quotes by Status.
• % orders in draft: Sum of DraftOrders / TotalOrders as %.
• # Ready to Submit Orders: Count of rows.
• Orders by status chart: Count of Orders by vlocity_cmt__OrderStatus__c.
Understand Your Account Orders
Section Description
( 1.) To see more details about the account opportunities and quotes, navigate left or right.
1708
Section Description
( 2.) # Orders Submitted To see the percentage of orders submitted, hover over the bar graph. Use this metric to
determine which orders to follow up on.
( 3.) To see a table of the submitted orders, hover over the number.
( 4.) View the states of your orders using this bar graph. You can see the number of orders in
different states.
( 5.) To see the percent of orders pending fulfillment, hover over the bar graph. You can view
the average in minutes or hours.
( 6.) # orders pending fulfillment The number of orders pending fulfillment. You can see the orders that need follow-up
to determine why they aren’t yet fulfilled. To display the list of orders pending fulfillment,
hover over the number.
KPI Calculations
• % orders submitted: Sum of OrderSubmitted / TotalOrders as %.
• # orders submitted: Count of rows.
• orders by order status chart: Count of Orders by vlocity_cmt__OrderStatus__c.
• % orders pending fulfillment: Sum of OrdersPendingFulfillment / Total Orders as %.
• Avg Hours/Minutes to fulfill order: ActivatedDate - vlocity_cmt__SubmittedToOmDate__c.
• # orders pending fulfillment: Count of rows.
Quote Insights Embedded Dashboard

The Quote Insights dashboard is designed to be embedded wherever you track your quotes. Use
EDITIONS
it to quickly and easily understand where to put your efforts.
Available in: Developer
Embed the Quote Insights Dashboard edition and for an extra cost
You can embed and access the Quote Insights dashboard in Lightning Experience pages and and Unlimited editions.
The Quote Insights embedded dashboard requires filters to be added when embedding the
dashboard. Use the following syntax:
{"datasets":{"Quote":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"OrderItem":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}],"QuoteMember":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":true,"hidden":true}]}}
1709
Understand Your Quotes
1710
Section Description
( 1.) Current Margin The current margin for all your quotes for a given account (including quotes accepted
and quotes presented).
( 2.) vs account avg The current margin for the account vs. the average margin for the account. This metric
helps you to understand if you’re working above or below the margin rates for a given
account.
( 3.) Days Since Quote Presented The number of days since the quote was presented to the customer. You can use this
metric to determine whether you must quickly follow up with a customer.
( 4.) Days Quote in Draft The days that your quote has been in draft. You can present quotes to customers or follow
up on presented quotes if there are a number of quotes in draft.
KPI Calculations
• Current Margin:Sum of vlocity_cmt__QuoteMarginTotal__c.
• % change of Current margin v Account Average: for Account Average Margin: Avg of vlocity_cmt__QuoteMarginTotal__c for %
change: absolute value of (Sum of vlocity_cmt__QuoteMarginTotal__c - Account Average Margin) / Account Average Margin as
%.
• # Days Since Quote Presented:Now() - LastModifiedDate.
• # Days Quote in Draft:Now() - CreatedDate.
Which Quotes Need My Attention?

From the dashboard, click the right arrow to open the Quotes details page. Use this page to see which quotes need your attention.
Hover over the unquoted members for a detail table.
1711
Section Description
( 1.) #Unquoted Members Members of a given account that haven’t accepted a quote. For example, if World
Telecommunications has members in California and Texas, and you have quoted California
members, the Texas members represent the unquoted members. You can see where the
members have denied the quotes. Hover over the unquoted members number to see
the details.
( 2.) Total # Order Items Total Order Items represents the total of order line items. For example, if your customer,
World Telecommunications, has purchased 951 cable boxes, then the total Order Items
is 951. Out of those orders, you can see how many orders are ready to be activated and
how many are already activated.
KPI Calculations
• # Unquoted Members: Unique of Name.
• # Unquoted Members by Status chart:Count of Rows by Quote.Status.
• Total # Order Items:Count of rows.
• # Order Items by Status chart:Count of Order Items by Order.vlocity_cmt__OrderStatus__c.
1712
Self-Service Embedded Dashboard

The Self-Service dashboard offers a comprehensive view of account-specific details, such as contracts, quotes, orders, bills, and asset
distribution. Integrate the dashboard into the community portal to provide Procurement Managers with a comprehensive view of the
entire enterprise. Small and Medium Businesses (SMB) executives can access self-service analytics from the SMB Console for a 360° view
of the complete account.
When the dashboard is embedded, it appears as a new tab on the community portal or the SMB Console. For general instructions on
embedding dashboards, see Embed Dashboards Everywhere in Salesforce Help.
• Track and analyze your contracts to gain insights into their details, such as the number of months since their initiation and actual
contract terms. Also, identify contracts that require approval and use the data to take actionable steps, such as identifying the
contracts that are up for renewal (1).
• Assess the distribution of cases based on their status and create cases easily (2).
• View the highlighted overdue and upcoming bills, to take prompt action (3).
• View the quotes that are pending approval (4).
• Gain visibility into the distribution of orders based on status (5).
The dashboard also provides users with a comprehensive view of asset allocation and distribution. It offers valuable geographic insights
through a visual representation of the asset distribution by location, accounts, state, and country.
Quote to Order Process Visualization Embedded Dashboard

The Quote to Order Process Visualization dashboard provides B2B Sales Agents with a comprehensive and clear view of their Quote to
Order progress. At each stage of the Quote to Order journey, gain insights into any missing details that are required for task completion,
and identify focus areas to streamline the process effectively.
1713
• Click each chart to gain insights into each stage of the Quote to Order process (1) .
• Use the drop-down arrow to access the Report Download dashboard, where you can view and download customer-specific reports
for every stage of the Quote to Order process (2) .
Report Download Dashboard

Use the Report Download dashboard to view and download customer-specific reports for every stage of the Quote to Order process.
These reports offer a comprehensive view of the stage's status and highlight any missing or partially valid data, enabling users to quickly
correct crucial details, such as addresses.
• Use the drop-down arrow to view the options (1).

• Use the Share option to access the Download Process page. You can post the content to a group chatter feed, export it to Quip, or
download the report in various formats such as image, Excel, and CSV .
1714
Analytics for Communications - Consumer

The Analytics for Communications - Consumer app gives customer service reps instant insights
EDITIONS
into accounts to help them gauge customer sentiment, anticipate customer needs, and provide
timely solutions. Available in: Developer
Edition and for an extra cost
Deploy Analytics for Communications - Consumer in Enterprise, Performance,
Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template and and Unlimited Editions
use the dashboards, deploy Analytics for Communications - Consumer in your Salesforce org.
Analytics for Communications - Consumer Dashboards
Use the Analytics for Communications - Consumer dashboards to get quick insights into key customer account or subscription
metrics, provide better service to your customers, and enhance their experience.
Deploy Analytics for Communications - Consumer

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template and use
EDITIONS
the dashboards, deploy Analytics for Communications - Consumer in your Salesforce org.
Available in: Developer
1. Enable CRM Analytics edition and for an extra cost
Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template, enable in Enterprise, Performance,
CRM Analytics in your Salesforce org. and Unlimited editions.
2. Assign Analytics for Communications - Consumer Administrator Permissions

Allow admins to create and manage the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app by assigning admin permissions.
3. Assign Analytics for Communications - Consumer User Permissions
Allow your users to view the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app by assigning the relevant permissions.
4. Data Requirements to Create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer App
To create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app, make sure that your Salesforce data meets these requirements.
5. Grant Permission to the Analytics Integration User
Assign the integration user with the Vlocity CMT license to allow them access to all the fields in the app.
6. Set Field-Level Security to Enable Creation of the Analytics for Communications - Consumer App
Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app, make sure that the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile
has access to all fields in the app.
7. Import Payment and Usage Data to Analytics for Communications - Consumer App
Add payment and usage data from an external source to the Analytics for Communications - Consumer App.
8. Create and Share an App from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer Template
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template, and share it with your users.
9. Embed Analytics for Communications - Consumer Dashboards in Lightning Pages
The Analytics for Communications - Consumer app includes dashboards that you can embed and access in Lightning Experience
pages.
1715

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template, enable
EDITIONS
CRM Analytics in your Salesforce org.
Note: If you see the Launch CRM Analytics button, CRM Analytics is already enabled. You Available in: Developer
can skip to Assign Analytics for Communications - Consumer Administrator Permissions on edition and for an extra cost
page 1716.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Getting Started, and then select Getting
Started under Analytics.
Assign Analytics for Communications - Consumer Administrator Permissions

Allow admins to create and manage the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app by assigning
EDITIONS
admin permissions.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users. Available in: Developer
2. Click the name of a user with the System Administrator profile.
3. Click Permission Set Assignments, and then click Edit Assignments. and Unlimited editions.
4. Select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and TCRM for Comms Admin permission sets.
5. Click Add, then save your changes.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who create and manage the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app.
Assign Analytics for Communications - Consumer User Permissions

Allow your users to view the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app by assigning the relevant
EDITIONS
permissions.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users. Available in: Developer
2. Click the name of a user who requires access to the Analytics for Communications - Consumer
app.
3. Click Permission Set Assignments, and then click Edit Assignments.
4. Select both the CRM Analytics Plus User and TCRM for Comms User permission sets.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who create and manage the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app.
Data Requirements to Create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer App

To create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app, make sure that your Salesforce data
EDITIONS
meets these requirements.
Important: Currently, the Analytics for Communications-Consumer app is only supported Available in: Developer
in orgs with Data Sync on. Edition and for an extra cost
Your org must have at least one record in each of these objects. and Unlimited Editions
• Account
• Subscription
1716
If your org’s data doesn’t meet the minimum requirements, you see a message describing what to fix. To add the required data and start
the app creation process again, follow the instructions in the error message.
Grant Permission to the Analytics Integration User

Assign the integration user with the Vlocity CMT license to allow them access to all the fields in the
EDITIONS
app.
1. From Setup, enter Installed Packages in the Quick Find box, and then click Installed Available in: Developer
Packages. edition and for an extra cost
2. Look for the Vlocity CMT package, and click Manage Licenses.
3. Click Add Users.
4. Select the Integration User.
5. Click Add.
Set Field-Level Security to Enable Creation of the Analytics for Communications - Consumer App
Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app, make sure that the Analytics
EDITIONS
Cloud Integration User profile has access to all fields in the app.
To successfully run a dataflow, users need field-level security permissions. To set Salesforce field-level Available in: Developer
security to enable your Analytics Integration users to see all fields used in the app, take these steps. edition and for an extra cost
1. In Setup, go to Object Manager.
2. In the Quick Find box, enter the name of the object whose field-level security you want to edit.
3. Select the object, then select Fields & Relationships.
4. Select the field that you want to edit, then select Set Field-Level Security.
5. For the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile, select Visible, and click Save.
6. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the fields that you want to use.
7. Refresh your browser cache.
Import Payment and Usage Data to Analytics for Communications - Consumer App
Add payment and usage data from an external source to the Analytics for Communications -
EDITIONS
Consumer App.
1. Create a CSV file with columns that lists these field names in the exact order shown in this table. Available in: Developer
Column names are case-sensitive. edition and for an extra cost
Name Description
and Unlimited Editions
SubscriptionID The identifier of the subscription.
ActivityDate The activity date.
DataUsageInGB The total data usage on the activity date.
DataThresholdFlag Determines whether the subscriber exceeded

the data usage threshold for the day.
1717
Name Description
VoiceUsageinMinutes Total duration of voice calls on the activity in minutes.
VoiceThresholdFlag Determines whether the subscriber exceeded the voice call

threshold for the day.
SMSUsage Total SMS sent on the activity date.
SMSThresholdFlag Determines whether the subscriber exceeded the SMS threshold

for the day.
TopUpAmount Total payment made on the activity date.
2. Save the CSV file to a location you can easily remember.

3. Upload the CSV file according to the instructions provided at Upload a CSV File to Create a Dataset.
Note: To make the data available to all the users creating the app, save the dataset to your Shared App.
The next time the recipe for your app runs, CRM Analytics adds payment and usage metrics to relevant dashboards.
Create and Share an App from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer Template
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer template, and share it with your
EDITIONS
users.
1. Navigate to CRM Analytics Studio. Available in: Developer
2. Click Create, then select App.
3. Select Analytics for Communications - Consumer, then click Continue. and Unlimited Editions
4. Take a quick look at the preview page, then click Continue to open the configuration wizard.
5. To create an app or use settings from an existing app, make a selection, and click Continue. USER PERMISSIONS
6. Analytics performs a compatibility check of your Salesforce org’s data. If it uncovers any issues, To create and manage the
you see error messages with instructions on how to address them. Fix the issues, and try app Analytics for
creation again. If Analytics completes the check successfully, click Looks good, next. Communications -
Consumer app:
7. The next page of the wizard asks you to select the dataset that has the payment and usage
data.
Admin permission set
Note: If you select an incorrect dataset and proceed with the app creation, you don’t To use the Analytics for
see any payment and usage-related metrics in your dashboards. Communications -
Consumer app:
8. Click Looks good, next. • CRM Analytics Plus User
9. Name your app, then click Create. permission set
View the status of the app creation on the next screen. The process takes a minute or two. After it’s
complete, refresh the page to see your app.
Note: If you see an error saying that the Analytics Integration User doesn’t have access to selected fields, edit Salesforce field-level
security.
Share the app with your users. You can share it only with users assigned the admin or user permission sets for Analytics for Communications
- Consumer.
1718
1. If it’s not open already, open your app. If you navigated away from CRM Analytics Studio, go back to it, select All Items, find your
app, and click it.
2.
Click
3. In the next screen, use the search field under Invite others to find users in your org.
4. To define the selected user’s access, select Viewer, Editor, or Manager.
Embed Analytics for Communications - Consumer Dashboards in Lightning Pages

The Analytics for Communications - Consumer app includes dashboards that you can embed and
EDITIONS
access in Lightning Experience pages.
For general instructions, see Embed CRM Analytics Dashboards in Lightning Pages in Salesforce Available in: Developer
Help. These examples use dashboards from the Analytics for Communications - Consumer app. edition and for an extra cost
Example: To embed the Account Highlights dashboard on an Account page, use the and Unlimited editions.
following string in the Filter String box:
{"datasets":{"B2C_Comms_Subscription":[{"fields":["vlocity_cmt__AccountId__c"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$vlocity_cmt__AccountId__c"]},"locked":null,"hidden":null}]}}
Example: To embed the Subscription Highlights dashboard on a Subscription page, use the following string in the Filter String
box:
{"datasets":{"B2C_Comms_Subscription":[{"fields":["vlocity_cmt__ServiceIdentifier__c"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$vlocity_cmt__ServiceIdentifier__c"]},"locked":null,"hidden":null}]}}
Analytics for Communications - Consumer Dashboards

Use the Analytics for Communications - Consumer dashboards to get quick insights into key customer
EDITIONS
account or subscription metrics, provide better service to your customers, and enhance their
experience. Available in: Developer
The Analytics for Communications - Consumer app includes two dashboards. Edition and for an extra cost
• Account Highlights
• Subscription Highlights
Note: To see metrics related to payment and usage data in your dashboards, your Salesforce
admin must import payment and usage data from an external source on page 1717 to the app.
Account Highlights
The Account Highlights embedded dashboard surfaces key account-level metrics such as customer tenure, customer lifetime value,
total interactions, average handling time, data usage, total spend, and payment frequency. If there’s at least 120 days of historical data,
you see a comparison of the last 30 and 90 days of usage, payment, and payment frequency data.
The dashboard answers these questions.
• How many customer interactions happened in the last 14 days?
• What’s the average handling time?
• What’s the data usage for the last 30 days?
• How much did the customer spend in the last 30 days?
1719
• What’s the payment frequency in the last 30 days?

• How’s the data usage, amount spent, and payment frequency in the last 30 days compared to the previous 90 days?
Note: When the payment and usage data isn’t available for the account, the dashboard shows first call resolution, activation time,
and orders instead of the payment and usage metrics.
Subscription Highlights
The Subscription Highlights embedded dashboard surfaces key subscription-level metrics such as customer interactions, average handling
time, data usage, total spend, and days since last payment.
The dashboard answers these questions.
• How many customer interactions happened in the last 14 days?
• What’s the average handling time?
• What’s the data usage for the last 30 days?
• How much did the customer spend in the last 30 days?
• When did the customer make their last payment?
Note: When the payment and usage data isn’t available for the subscription, the dashboard shows first call resolution, activation
time, and orders instead of the payment and usage metrics.
Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking

The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app brings insights to track commercial and service orders through various business
milestones. Managers can use the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking dashboards to monitor the order journey, identify
orders and tasks that require immediate attention, minimize order fallout risks, and improve SLA adherence.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions where B2B Communications Cloud is enabled
Deploy Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking

Deploy Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking by assigning permissions, enabling CRM Analytics, and creating and sharing
the analytics app for your users.
Use Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Dashboards
Use the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking dashboards to monitor the order journey and to identify orders and tasks
that require immediate attention. By using these insights, you can develop strategies to minimize order fallout risks and improve
SLA adherence.
Deploy Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking

Deploy Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking by assigning permissions, enabling CRM Analytics, and creating and sharing the
analytics app for your users.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking template.
1720
Assign Permissions to Administrator and User

Assign relevant permissions to admin and users to manage the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app.
Set Field-Level Security to Analytics Integration User
Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app, make sure that the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile
has access to all of the fields that the app uses.
Requirements for Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Data
Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app, ensure that your data meets these specific requirements.
Otherwise, the data fails the CRM Analytics check and you see an error message.
Embed Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Dashboard
The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app includes a dashboard that you can embed and access from the Lightning
Experience pages.
Create and Share the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking App
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking template and then share the app with your users.
Keep the Data in the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking App Up-to-Date
Keep the data in your analytics app current by scheduling the app to refresh regularly.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking template.

1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Users, and then select Users.
2. Click the name of the user to whom you want to assign permissions.
3. Click Permission Set Assignments > Edit Assignments
4. To assign the user necessary admin permissions, select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and the CRM Analytics for Comms
Admin permission sets.
5. To assign the user necessary user permissions, select both the CRM Analytics Plus User and CRM Analytics for Comms User
permission sets.
6. Add the permission sets, and then save your changes.
Assign a CME package license to the Integration user to provide access to the dashboards and datasets.

Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app, make sure that the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile
has access to all of the fields that the app uses.
1721
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions where B2B Communications Cloud is enabled
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter the name of the object whose field-level security you want to edit.
2. Select the object, and then select Fields & Relationships.
3. Select the field that you want to edit, and then select Set Field-Level Security.
4. For the Analytics Cloud Integration User profile, select Visible, and then save your changes.
5. Repeat these steps for all of the fields on all of the objects that the app uses.
Requirements for Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Data

Before you create the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app, ensure that your data meets these specific requirements.
CRM Analytics access the objects available in these SKUs.

• Comms Growth/ Advanced SKUs
• Consumer and Enterprise Order Management SKUs
Import data from an external source for the metrics to appear in relevant dashboards. Follow the steps to import data from an external
source to the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking App.
• Create a dataset with the following fields using your external SOM data, in this order, with these exact names. Field names are
case-sensitive.
– Sub Order Number
– Orchestration Item
– Service Order Number
– Service Order Status
– Service Order Jeopardy Status
– Service Order Task ID
– Service Order Task Name
– Service Order Task Type
– Service Order Task Status
– Service Order Task Jeopardy Status
– Service Order Task Start TS
The next time the dataflow for your app runs, CRM Analytics adds this data to relevant dashboards.
Embed Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Dashboard

The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app includes a dashboard that you can embed and access from the Lightning
Experience pages.
1722
Example: To embed the Order Overview dashboard, use this string in the Filter String box:
{"datasets":{"VCT_Com_OT_Orders_Orc_Items_PProduct":[{"fields":["Id"],"filter":{"operator":"in","values":["$Id"]},"locked":null,"hidden":null}]}}
Create and Share the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking App
Create an app from the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking template and then share the app with your users.
1. Navigate to CRM Analytics Studio.

2. Click Create.
3. Select App > Create App from Template, and then open the template picker.
4. Select Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking, and then click Continue.
5. Review the app preview page.
6. To open the configuration wizard, click Continue.
7. If you're asked whether to base your app on an existing app or to create an app, select Create a brand new app, and then click
Continue.
The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app runs a compatibility check against your org to ensure that the app contains
the data required to successfully create the app’s datasets and dashboards.
8. Perform an action:
a. If the instance's compatibility check fails, perform the instructions in the error message to add the required data, and then create
the app again.
b. If the instance's compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.
9. Select the Service Order Management (SOM) dataset, created using external SOM data.
10. Enter a name for your app, and then click Create.
After the process is completed, to see your app, refresh the page. If you see an error message that the Analytics Integration User
doesn’t have access to selected fields, edit Salesforce field-level security.
11. After the process is completed, to see your app, refresh the page.
12. To share the app with your users, in CRM Analytics Studio, open your app. You can share the app only with users who have the
relevant admin or user permission set.
13. In CRM Analytics Studio, open your app
14. On the Give Access tab of the share window, under Invite others, add the names of users that you want to share the app with.
15. For every user you add, select their level of access: Viewer, Editor, or Manager.
Keep the Data in the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking App Up-to-Date
Keep the data in your analytics app current by scheduling the app to refresh regularly.
1723
Creating a schedule for app refresh runs the 4 recipes for this app to run in the correct order. To schedule your app, see Schedule Data
Refresh for a CRM Analytics App on page 1660.
Note: We recommend that you schedule the app refresh every day outside of normal business hours, such as midnight in the
majority of your users' time zone.
Use Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking Dashboards

Use the Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking dashboards to monitor the order journey and to identify orders and tasks that
require immediate attention. By using these insights, you can develop strategies to minimize order fallout risks and improve SLA adherence.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions where B2B Communications Cloud is enabled
The Analytics for Communications - Order Tracking app includes these dashboards:
• My Orders and Tasks
• Fallout Management
• Order Analysis
• Order Overview (embedded)
My Orders and Tasks Dashboard

My Orders and Tasks dashboard is the starting point in the day of a Fallout Manager or Fallout Operator. The left panel shows orders that
require the most attention from the manager or operator. The dashboard answers these questions:
• Which orders have manual tasks that are Ready for my completion?
• How can I compare the manual tasks in the Ready status based on the average time taken to complete the tasks?
• In which stage of the orchestration plan for the selected order does the manual task appear?
• What's the status of other tasks and milestones in the orchestration plan for the order that I selected?
• How can I go to the record page for the Manual task in the Ready status for the order selected?
Use the panes in the dashboard to select an area of interest.
1724
• (1) Orders by Time Remaining to Complete Pending Tasks: Shows the elapsed time for each order and gives you a quick insight into
which order to focus on. Click an order row to know more about the order.
Note: The chart shows all the orders that have at least one manual task pending.
• (2) Tasks and Milestones for Order <>: Shows the order, the corresponding tasks, and the milestones. You can also view the status
of each task and the milestones that the order belongs to.
• (3) My Orders: Shows the details of the selected order.
Fallout Management Dashboard

The Fallout Management dashboard provides insights to monitor the fallout of orders and to identify the orders that require immediate
attention. You can view the number of orders in each milestone and the jeopardy distribution details of the tasks across all orders in the
milestone. The dashboard answers these questions:
• How adherent are the orders to your organizational fulfillment commitment date?
• Which milestones and orders in the milestone need my attention?
• What's the distribution of jeopardy statuses of the orders in a milestone?
• What are the related Service Orders (SOM), and what are the Service Orders’ task statuses?
1725
• (1) Milestone Status by Orders: Shows the distribution of orders in each milestone and tracks the overall milestone health for fallout
and jeopardy severity to identify orders at risk of missing their assigned service level agreement (SLA). The color of the bubble
depends on the fallout distribution of orders in a particular milestone:
– Grey: Denotes different stages in the quote creation and pre-orchestration workflow
– Green: Order fulfillment is on track and is expected to be completed on time. No immediate actions are required, and the orders
are being processed in adherence to standard operations flow.
– Yellow: Based on the progress of the orchestration plan completion, a manageable risk exists of a considerable number of orders
missing the due date. But the fallout percentage can still be under the overall SLA.
– Red: The number of orders in fallout exceeds the organizational threshold, and the milestone needs immediate attention from
the fallout manager
Hover over the bubble to view more details.
• (2) Total Count: The size of the bubble depends on the total count of orders in each milestone.
• (3) My Orders: Lists all your orders with details. Select a bubble to filter and view the orders specific to a milestone.
Order Analysis Dashboard

The Order Analysis dashboard provides managers insights to compare and analyze the trends for in-progress orders and their corresponding
tasks across time periods. The dashboard answers these questions:
• What's the total count of your orders, and how does the count trend over time?
• What's the count of delayed orders, and how does the count trend over time?
• How many orders have failed, and how does the count trend over time?
• How many orders are in jeopardy, and how does the count trend over time?
1726
• (1) Total Orders: Shows the total count of in-progress orders. You can view and compare the total order count with the previous
period's data. View the detailed analysis on the right pane, where you can view the orders’ trend over time.
• (2) Delayed Orders: Shows the count of in-progress orders that are past the due date. You can view and compare the count of delayed
orders with the previous period's data. View the detailed analysis on the right pane, where you can view the orders’ trend over time.
• (3) Failed Orders: Shows the count of in-progress orders with at least one task failed. You can view and compare the count of failed
orders with the previous period's data. View the detailed analysis on the right pane, where you can view the orders’ trend over time.
• (4) Orders in Jeopardy: Shows the count of in-progress orders with Jeopardy Status as red. You can view and compare the count of
orders in jeopardy with the previous period's data. View the detailed analysis on the right pane, where you can view the orders’ trend
over time.
• (5) Last 12 M: Shows the trend based on the current order count with the last 12 month’s order data. The last 12 months include the
last 11 months, the current month, and three forecasted months.
• (6) Last 12 W: Compares the current order count with the last 12 week's order data. The last 12 weeks include the last 11 weeks, the
current week, and three forecasted weeks.
1727
• (7) Last 7 D: Compares the current order count with the last seven days’ order data. The last seven days include the last seven days
and the forecasted three days.
• (8) Current: Differentiates the actual data trend (solid line until the current date) and the forecasted data trend (dotted line after the
current date).
• (9) Orders: Shows the distribution of orders based on the selected measure:
– Order Status: Shows the count of orders in each order status.
– Fulfillment Status: Shows the count of orders in each fulfillment status.
– Jeopardy Status: Shows the count of orders in each jeopardy status.
Order Status is the default status.
• (10) Tasks: Shows the distribution of tasks based on the selected measure.
– Task Type: Shows the count of tasks in each task type.
– Task Status: Shows the count of tasks in each task status.
– Jeopardy Status: Shows the count of tasks in each jeopardy status.
Jeopardy Status is the default status.
• (11) Order Distribution: Shows the distribution of orders based on the selected measure:
– Avg Task Completion Time: Shows the completed tasks based on the task type and the average time to complete.
– Avg Milestone Completion Time: Shows the completed orders in each milestone and the average time to complete the milestone.
Avg Milestone Completion is the default measure.
• (12) Order Distribution by Tasks Reached: Shows the distribution of orders based on the last task completed in a specific orchestration
plan. Hover over the individual bars to see the average time taken for each named task.
• (13) My Orders: Lists all your orders with details.
Team Performance Dashboard

The Team Performance dashboard gives the Fallout Manager insight into the performance of the team and identifies the top-performing
team member based on manual task completion status. Use the dashboard to filter individual allocation of manual tasks, analyze the
data table, and reassign tasks if needed. The dashboard answers these questions.
• How’s my team performing based on their task completion metrics?
• Who’s the high-performing team member?
• Who needs my attention?
• What’s the team’s order distribution by completed milestones?
1728
• (1) Total Tasks: Shows the count of all manual tasks assigned to the team.
• (2) Total Tasks Completed: Shows the count of tasks completed by the team.
• (3) Tasks Completed: Shows the percentage of completion of tasks compared to the total tasks.
• (4) Team Performance: Shows the performance of each team member based on the selected task status. Completed is the default
status, and indicates the percentage of manual tasks completed by each team member.
• (5) Individual Performance: Shows the performance of the selected team member based on the team’s performance. You can assess
performance by comparing the time taken by the team member to complete a task with the average time taken by the team to
complete the same task.
• (6) My Orders: Lists all your orders with details.
Order Overview Dashboard

The Order Overview dashboard provides a quick overview of your order. The dashboard can be embedded in and accessed from Lightning
Experience pages for the Order entity. The dashboard answers these questions:
• How many days have passed after placing the order?
• How many hours or days remain for or have passed the order due date?
• How many tasks and milestones are pending?
1729
• What's the orchestration plan for the order?

• What’s the estimated time of completion for each pending milestone?
• (1) Days Since Open: Shows the count of days that the order has been in the Open status.
• (2) Order Due in: Shows the number of days that remain for or have passed the order due date.
• (3) Pending Milestones: Shows the number of milestones yet to complete.
• (4) Pending Tasks: Shows the number of tasks yet to complete.
• (5) Business Milestone in the Orchestration Plan: Shows the milestones for the specific order and the status.
• (6) Pending Milestones by Expected Completion Time: Shows pending milestones for the specific order and the expected completion
date.
Analytics for Consumer Goods

Analytics for Consumer Goods gives your sales team actionable insights into your retail business performance. Sales managers can use
the app to increase sales, improve store compliance, identify stores at risk, and maximize sales rep effectiveness.
For information, see Deploy and Use Analytics for Consumer Goods
1730
Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model

The Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model app provides actionable account-level insights to
EDITIONS
increase sales, improve account compliance, identify accounts at risk, and maximize sales rep
effectiveness.
For more information on creating the Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model app, see Deploy Experience
Analytics for Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model App.
Available in: Enterprise and
For more information on Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model dashboards, see Analytics for Unlimited Editions of
Consumer Goods - Advanced Data Model Dashboards. Consumer Goods Cloud
Trade Promotion Effectiveness

Trade Promotion Effectiveness app provides data-driven dashboards to analyze trade promotion
EDITIONS
data, evaluate the effectiveness of a promotion, and make decisions for future promotions.
For more information on creating the Trade Promotion Effectiveness (TPE) app, see Set Up Trade Available in: Lightning
Promotion Effectiveness App. Experience
For more information on Trade Promotion Effectiveness (TPE) dashboards, see Trade Promotion Available in: Enterprise and
Effectiveness. Unlimited Editions that have
Consumer Goods Cloud
Trade Promotion
Management enabled
Analytics for Energy and Utilities

With the CRM Analytics for Energy and Utilities App, it’s easy to know which opportunities
USER PERMISSIONS
are most likely to generate a sale. You can track how many quotes you’ve created and
know whether customers have responded to them. The three embedded dashboards To create and manage the app:
(Home, Quotes, and Account) provide details about opportunities, quotes, and accounts. • CRM Analytics Plus Admin,
Insights.userCanCreateTCRMforEandU
license
To use the app:
• CRM Analytics Plus User,
Insights.userCanViewTCRMforEandU
license
1731
The template creates datasets, recipes, and dashboards to help you understand your Energy and Utilities deals.
Important: For general app creation procedures for all templates, see Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here This
link provides specifics about creating and using the app.
Salesforce Org Requirements
Note these requirements to create an app from the template:
• Your org must have at least one of each of these record types: Account, Opportunity, Quote.
• Set Salesforce field-level security to enable the Analytics Integration User to see all fields used in the app. See Set Field Level Security
to Enable Creation of an CRM Analytics Template.
• This template uses recipes. Recipes require that your org is set up for data sync. For a better understanding of working with recipes,
see Run a Recipe.
• For security purposes, you likely want to configure compliant data sharing. For details, see Enable Compliant Data Sharing for Objects.
Create the App
1. In CRM Analytics Studio, click Create in the upper right corner
2. To open the template picker, select App, then Create App from Template.
3. Locate the Analytics for Energy and Utilities tile, select it, and click Continue.
4. Review the app preview page, and click Continue to open the configuration wizard.
5. If you’re offered a choice of basing your app on an existing app or creating a one, select Create a brand new app and click Continue.
Analytics for Energy and Utilities runs a compatibility check against your org to ensure it includes the data to successfully create the
app’s datasets, recipes, and dashboards. If it doesn’t, follow the instructions in the error message to add the required data and start
the app creation process again.
6. When the org compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.
7. Name your app, and click Create.
Give CRM Analytics a few minutes to create your app. You can track its progress on the page that appears. When you see the Application
Complete! message, refresh the page. You see your app page with the datasets, recipes, and dashboards showing team performance
and activity intelligence. Click it to have a look.
Schedule the App Refresh
The app creates a recipe. Schedule the app refresh to sync data and to run recipe. To schedule your app, see Schedule Data Refresh for
a CRM Analytics App on page 1660. Select a time outside normal work hours so the data refresh doesn’t interrupt business activities.
Embed Analytics for Energy and Utilities
1732
The Analytics for Energy and Utilities app includes dashboards that you can embed and access in Lightning Experience pages and
Assign Analytics for Energy and Utilities for Admins
Enable administration of the Analytics for Energy and Utilities app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
2. Click the name of the user.
4. Select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin permission set.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who administrate the Analytics for Energy and Utilities app
Assign Analytics for Energy and Utilities for Users
Enable administration of the Analytics for Energy and Utilities app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions.
4. Select the CRM Analytics Plus User permission set.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who view the Analytics for Energy and Utilities app.
Datasets
Dataset Name Contents Special Requirements

Account Data about accounts. Includes accounts None.
without opportunities.
Opportunity Data about accounts, opportunities, and None.

users.
Oppty Products Data about products with opportunities and None.

accounts.
OrchestrationItem Data created for the Analytics for Energy None.

and Utilities app.
Quota Quotas data. None.
Quote Details about quotes. None.
QuoteMember Details about quote members. None.
User Provides details about all users in an org. None.
1733
Upload the plain_quota Dataset (Optional)

Optionally, you can upload quota data by overriding the plain_quota dataset in your app by following these instructions. The plain_quota
dataset is used to provide you with quota attainment metrics in the Opportunities section of the Home dashboard. If you don’t want to
see this metric, you can skip this section.
Note: When you work with .CSV files you want to import to CRM Analytics for Energy and Utilities, create and open them using
only a UTF-8-compliant text editor. Opening them in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software reformats .CSV files and makes
them unusable in Analytics for Energy and Utilities.
Important: When you create the .CSV file, be sure it contains the following fields, in this order, with exactly these names. Field
names are case-sensitive:
1. StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format)
2. QuotaAmount
3. OwnerName
4. Username
1. Create a .CSV file to include the fields described, that is StartDate (in yyyy-mm-dd format), QuotaAmount, OwnerName, Username.
3. In Salesforce, go to the CRM Analytics home page and find the plain_quota dataset.
5. Salesforce displays the dataset editing screen for the plain_quota dataset. Look for Replace Data in the upper right corner and click
it.
1734
7. To open the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next.
8. If your fiscal period is different than calendar period, that is if it starts on a date other than January 1, update the plain_quota Metadata
metadata, the numeral “0” stands for January, “1” stands for February, and so on, up to “11,” which stands for December. Save
the file to your desktop.
9. On the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next to open the Edit Field Attributes page. The first column —QuotaAmount— is selected.
If not, select it. In the Field Attributes panel on the right, make sure Field Type is set to Measure.
10. After uploading your quota data, rerun the recipe to update the dashboards.
a. Click the Gear menu at the upper right of CRM Analytics Studio and select Data Manager.
b. Select the Dataflow & Recipes view from the menu at the top left of the Data Manager screen and click the Recipes tab in the
main pane.
1735
c. Find your app’s recipe. Open the menu on the far right of the screen next to the app icon and name, and click Run now.
Analytics for Emergency Response Management

Analytics for Emergency Response Management app provides insights to identify the hotspots in
EDITIONS
which requests for emergency intakes are increasing and track intake persons needing attention
For more information on creating the Analytics for Emergency Response Management app, see Available in: Lightning
Create Analytics for Emergency Response Management App. Experience
For more information on Analytics for Emergency Response Management dashboards, see Track Available in: Enterprise and
Emergency Intakes with Analytics for Emergency Response Management . Unlimited Editions of Health
Cloud
Financial Services Analytics
Analytics for Financial Services gives financial advisors and personal bankers a comprehensive
customer intelligence solution based on the CRM Analytics platform. It includes Einstein Discovery, which lets you create automated AI
models on any dataset without writing code.
Note: Analytics for Financial Services is available at an extra charge for customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard
licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus (Analytics for Financial Services) license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services in the
Financial Services Cloud Administrator Guide for complete deployment instructions.
Analytics for Retail Banking Template

Analytics for Retail Banking is part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services Cloud customers. Its dashboards visualize
all the metrics and key performance indicators (KPIs) personal bankers require to grow client relationships.
Consumer Banking Starter Analytics Template
Consumer Banking Starter Analytics is part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services Cloud customers. It gives you a
quick way of creating an analytics solution personal bankers can use to move clients up the value chain.
Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking
The Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app is designed to help you understand your Corporate and Investment Banking
deals. This app includes details about deal participants, deal products, and deal parties (such as legal teams or other external partners).
1736
Wealth Starter Analytics Template

Creating an app from the Wealth Starter Analytics template gives Financial Services Cloud customers a quick way to apply the power
of CRM Analytics to data about their book of business.
Analytics for Wealth Management Template
Analytics for Wealth Management a comprehensive analytics solution that’s part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services
Cloud customers. Its extensive sets of dashboards apply the power of CRM Analytics to all significant data and KPIs from the Financial
Services Cloud. .
Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management Analytics
Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management Analytics allows financial advisors to intelligently forecast the likelihood
of adding assets to accounts. Using the power of Einstein Discovery, the app prescribes actions on how to increase the chances to
grow your account assets.
Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management Analytics
Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management Analytics allows financial advisors to intelligently predict customer churn. Using
the power of Einstein Discovery, the app prescribes corrective actions to help minimize occurrences of churn.
Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud
The Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app is a one-stop solution to track, monitor, and manage revenue for multiple
sales processes. It’s a purpose-built app that adapts to nuances of opportunity management within the financial service industry. It
comes prepackaged with the component library to make it easier to customize the app to your liking.
CRM Analytics for Complaint Management
The CRM Analytics app for Complaint Management gives your customer experience managers and complaint team managers quick
insights on customer complaints.
Analytics for Mortgage Template
Analytics for Mortgage enables loan officers and managers to drive increased mortgage sales by helping prioritize the customer
leads and mortgage applications to focus on. Process loans faster by highlighting the mortgage applications that have the highest
value, applications that have been open the longest, and applications that are missing documents.
Analytics for Insurance
A comprehensive set of CRM Analytics dashboards offers insurance executives and managers insights into their book of business
and identifies opportunities to improve sales.
Analytics for Retail Banking Template

Analytics for Retail Banking is part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services Cloud customers. Its dashboards visualize all
the metrics and key performance indicators (KPIs) personal bankers require to grow client relationships.
Note: Analytics for Retail Banking is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra charge for
customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus (CRM Analytics for Financial Services)
license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services for complete deployment instructions.
Consumer Banking Starter Analytics Template

Consumer Banking Starter Analytics is part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services Cloud customers. It gives you a quick
way of creating an analytics solution personal bankers can use to move clients up the value chain.
Note: Consumer Banking Starter Analytics is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra
charge for customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus (CRM Analytics for Financial
Services) license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services for complete deployment instructions.
1737
Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking

The Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app is designed to help you understand your
USER PERMISSIONS
Corporate and Investment Banking deals. This app includes details about deal participants, deal
products, and deal parties (such as legal teams or other external partners). To create and manage the
app:
• FSC Analytics Admin,
CRM Analytics Plus
Admin
To use the app:
• FSC Analytics User, CRM
Analytics Plus User
The template creates datasets, recipes, and dashboards to help you understand your Corporate and Investment Banking deals.
Important: For general app creation procedures for all templates. see Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here This
link provides specifics about creating and using the app.
• Make sure that you and all app users have the FSC Apps license.
• Your org must have at least one of each of these record types: FinancialDeal, and Account.
• This template uses recipes. Recipes require that your org is set up for data sync. For a better understanding of working with recipes,
see Run a Recipe.
• For security purposes, you likely want to configure compliant data sharing. For details, see Enable Compliant Data Sharing for Objects.
Create the App
1. In CRM Analytics Studio, click Create in the upper right corner
2. To open the template picker, select App, then Create App from Template.
3. Locate the Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking tile, select it, and click Continue.
4. Review the app preview page, and click Continue to open the configuration wizard.
1738
5. If you’re offered a choice of basing your app on an existing app or creating a one, select Create a brand new app and click Continue.
Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking runs a compatibility check against your org to ensure it includes the data to successfully
create the app’s datasets, recipes, and dashboards. If it doesn’t, follow the instructions in the error message to add the required data
and start the app creation process again.
6. When the org compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.
7. Name your app, and click Create.
Schedule the Recipe
The app creates a recipe. Schedule the recipe to sync data and to run.
1. In CRM Analytics Studio, click the wheel icon at upper right and select Data Manager. Or, click the Data Manager link in the
left-hand column.
2. Schedule the sync, and then select the Connect tab on the left.
Note: If you can’t see the Connect tab, you must enable data sync in your org. See Enable Data Sync and Connections.
3. Click the arrow to the far right of SFDC_LOCAL, which is the name of the connection your app uses. From the menu that appears,
select Schedule.
4. Set a time for running the data sync. It’s best to select a time outside normal working hours so the sync and recipe don’t interrupt
business activities. Then save your changes.
5. Next, schedule the recipe. Select the Dataflows & Recipes tab on the left.
6. Schedule the recipe.
a. Look for the recipe that contains the name of your app appended with _CIB_Deal_Management, and click the triangle
to the far right.
b. Select Schedule, then check the box next to Time-based.
c. Select the time to run the recipe. You can schedule the data to run by minute, hour, week, or month. See Schedule a Dataflow
to Run Automatically for more details.
d. Save your changes.
The recipe now syncs and runs every day at the time you set.
Embed Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking
The Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app includes dashboards that you can embed and access in Lightning Experience
pages and Salesforce Classic experiences.
1739
Assign Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking for Admins
Enable administration of the Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have Financial Services Cloud enabled.
4. Select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and FSC Analytics Admin permission sets.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who administrate the Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app
Assign Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking for Users
Enable administration of the Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have Financial Services Cloud enabled.
4. Select both the CRM Analytics Plus User and FSC Analytics User permission sets.
6. Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who view the Analytics for Corporate and Investment Banking app.
Datasets

Financial Deal Financial Deal, Account None.
Financial Deal Snapshot Financial Deal, Account None.
Financial Deal Participant Financial Deal Participant, Financial Deal, None.

User, Account, Group
Financial Deal Party Financial Deal Party, Financial Deal, Account, None.
Financial Deal Product Financial Deal Product, Financial Deal, None.

Product
Interaction Interaction, Account, Financial Deal None.
Interaction Attendee Interaction Attendee, Interaction, Account, None.

Financial Deal, Contact, User
Interaction Participant Interaction Participant, Interaction, Account, None.

Financial Deal, Group, User, ParticipantRole
Interaction Summary Interaction Summary, Interaction, Account, None.

Financial Deal
1740

Interaction Summary Participant Interaction Summary Participant, None.
InteractionSummary, User, Account,
ParticipantRole, Financial Deal, Group

The Home embedded dashboard includes pipeline metrics, call reports (including any interactions between internal or external deal
parties), and account insights.
Account Insights
The Account Insights dashboard answers questions such as how many deals are being managed in a given account space? What
are your customer interactions and profitability? And what meetings are scheduled with deal parties?
Deal Insights
Deal insights help you answer questions such as how is the deal progressing? What milestones have been met? What interactions
are planned for the future?

The Home embedded dashboard includes pipeline metrics, call reports (including any interactions between internal or external deal
parties), and account insights.
Use the Dashboard

Use the Home Embedded dashboard for a comprehensive view of your deals, activities, and accounts.
Click the fields on the left to populate the charts on the right. Click (1) Open Deals to understand your open pipeline. Click (2) Deals in
progress to understand which deals to focus on. Click (3) Call Reports to see overall client engagement and progress. Click (4) Received
Fee to understand expected vs. received fees over time.
KPI Calculations - Open Deals

• Open Deals: Sum of Transaction Value from Financial Deal object where Deal status is in ["On Hold", "Open"].
• Open Deals Over time: Sum of Transaction Value from Financial Deal object where Deal status is "Open" over time(Snapshot Date)
for Current Year until Current Day.
1741
• Open Deals by stage: Sum of Transaction Value from Financial Deal object where Deal status is "Open" by Stage.
KPI Calculations - Deals in Progress

• Deals in progress: Count of Deals from Financial Deal Object where status is in ["On Hold", "Open"].
• Deals in progress over time: Sum of TransactionValue from Financial Deal Object where status is in ["On Hold", "Open"] over time
(Snapshot Date) for YTD.
• Top Accounts: Sum of Transaction from Financial Deal Object grouped by Accounts toggled by Open and on Hold stages.
KPI Calculations - Call Reports

• # Call Reports: Count of call reports(Interaction Summary object) created in YTD.
• Call reports over time: Count of call reports created in YTD over CreatedDate.
• Call Reports Overview: Count of call reports created in YTD for Deals grouped by InteractionType.
KPI Calculations - Received Fee

• Received Fee: Sum of ReceivedFee from Financial Deal object for YTD.
• Received Fee over time: Sum of ReceivedFee from Financial Deal object where Deal status is "Open" over time(Snapshot Date) for
Current Year until Current Day.
• Received Fee Donut: Received Fee/ TotalExpectedFee for YTD.
• Received Fee Timeline: Sum of Received Fee and TotalExpectedFee over time for YTD.
Account Insights
The Account Insights dashboard answers questions such as how many deals are being managed in a given account space? What are
your customer interactions and profitability? And what meetings are scheduled with deal parties?
Use the Accounts Insights Dashboard

Use the Accounts Insights dashboard drill down into account details.
Click the fields on the left to populate the charts on the right. Click (1) Total Received Fee to understand what is the overall revenue
generated from this account. Click (2) Total # Interactions to understand overall client engagement. Click (3) Open Deals to see how
is overall client engagement.
1742
KPI Calculations -Total Received Fee

• Received Fee: Sum of Received Fee for the Account.
• Received Fee Donut: Received Fee/ TotalExpectedFee for the Account.
• Total Expense: Sum of Total Expense for the Account.
• TotalExpense Donut: Sum of TotalExpense where Status is Open / sum of TotalExpense where Status is Closed.
• TransactionValue: Sum of TransactionValue where Status is Open.
• TransactionValue: Sum of TransactionValue where Status is Open / sum of TransactionValue where Status is Closed.
• Timelime Chart: ReceivedFee, Transaction Value, and TotalExpenses over time.
KPI Calculations - Total # Interactions

• Total # Interactions: Count of rows from Interaction Object.
• Total # Interaction Attendees: Unique count of Ids from InteractionAttendee object.
• Total # Participants: Count of rows from InteractionParticipant object.
• Interactions over time: Count of interactions for each Financial Deal by Interaction Start Date.
KPI Calculations - Open Deals

• Open Deals: Sum of TransactionValue where status= Open.
• Open Pipeline: Sum of TransactionValue where status= Open in YTD (SnapshotDate).
• Open Pipeline Last Year: Percent change of TransactionValue where status = 'Open' this year compared with Last year.
• On Hold: Sum of TransactionValue where status= 'On Hold' in YTD (SnapshotDate).
• On Hold Last Year: Percent change of TransactionValue where status = 'On Hold' this year compared with Last year.
• Open Deals by Stage: Sum of Transaction Value for Open Deals by Stage.
Deal Insights
Deal insights help you answer questions such as how is the deal progressing? What milestones have been met? What interactions are
planned for the future?
1743
Use the Deal Insights Dashboard
Click the fields on the left to populate the charts on the right. Click (1) Total $ Received Fee to understand what is your deal profitability
status. Click (2) # Call Reports to understand overall client engagement, and what interactions you plan to engage with the customer.
Click (3) Days since Last Interactions to see which deals need your attention.
KPI Calculations -Total Received Fee

• Received Fee: Sum of Received Fee for the Account.
• Received Fee Donut: Received Fee/ TotalExpectedFee for the Account.
• Received Fee Timeline: Sum of Received Fee and TotalExpectedFee over time for YTD.
KPI Calculations - # Call Reports

• # Call Reports: Count of call reports(Interaction Summary object) created in YTD.
• Call reports over time: Count of call reports created in YTD over CreatedDate.
• Call Report Breakdown: Count of call reports by InteractionType.
KPI Calculations - Days Since Last Interaction

• Days Since Last Interaction: Days between Last Interaction (StartTime) until now for that Deal.
• Days Since Last Interaction Timeline: Average of Days_Between_Interactions_per_Deal over StartTime.
• Interaction Overview: Summary of Interaction Name, InteractionType, and count of participants.
1744
Wealth Starter Analytics Template

Creating an app from the Wealth Starter Analytics template gives Financial Services Cloud customers a quick way to apply the power of
CRM Analytics to data about their book of business.
Note: Wealth Starter Analytics is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra charge for
Analytics for Wealth Management Template

Analytics for Wealth Management a comprehensive analytics solution that’s part of a suite of CRM Analytics apps for Financial Services
Cloud customers. Its extensive sets of dashboards apply the power of CRM Analytics to all significant data and KPIs from the Financial
Services Cloud. .
Note: Analytics for Wealth Management is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra charge
for customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus (CRM Analytics for Financial
Services) license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services for complete deployment instructions.
Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management Analytics

Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management Analytics allows financial advisors to intelligently forecast the likelihood of
adding assets to accounts. Using the power of Einstein Discovery, the app prescribes actions on how to increase the chances to grow
your account assets.
Note: Predict Likelihood to Add Assets for Wealth Management Analytics is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services,
which is available at an extra charge for customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus
(CRM Analytics for Financial Services) license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services for complete deployment instructions.
Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management Analytics

Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management Analytics allows financial advisors to intelligently predict customer churn. Using the
power of Einstein Discovery, the app prescribes corrective actions to help minimize occurrences of churn.
Note: Predict Client Churn Risk for Wealth Management Analytics is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is
available at an extra charge for customers with Financial Services Cloud Basic or Standard licenses and the FSCAnalyticsPlus (CRM
Analytics for Financial Services) license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Financial Services for complete deployment instructions.
Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud

The Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app is a one-stop solution to track, monitor, and manage revenue for multiple
sales processes. It’s a purpose-built app that adapts to nuances of opportunity management within the financial service industry. It
comes prepackaged with the component library to make it easier to customize the app to your liking.
Available in: Developer, Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions
Deploy Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud

Before you create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template, deploy Revenue Management for
Financial Services Cloud in Salesforce.
1745
Use Revenue Management for Financial Services Component Library

Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud provides components to build customized dashboards. Components are container
elements that contain groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards, making it easy to add a group of objects
to your dashboard.
Use Revenue Management Embedded Dashboard
The Revenue Management dashboard provides insights to build better pipelines, improve forecast accuracy, and generate more
revenue. The dashboard includes the Revenue Optimizer page and Client 360 page.
Deploy Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud

Before you create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template,
USER PERMISSIONS
deploy Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud in Salesforce.
To create and manage the
Available in: Developer, Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Revenue Management for
Editions Financial Services Cloud
App:
• RI for Fins Admin
To deploy Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud: To use the Revenue
Management for Financial
• Enable CRM Analytics Services Cloud App:
• Give users access to Revenue Management for Financial Services. • RI for Fins User
• Set field-level security to Analytics Management User.
• Create and share an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services template.
Note: To create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template, the FSC-Managed Package must
be installed in your org.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template.
Assign appropriate permissions to users to work with the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app.
Give the Analytics Integration users access to all the fields that are used in the app.
Create and Share the App
Create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template and then share the app with your users.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template.
Available in: Developer Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions

Assign appropriate permissions to users to work with the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app.
Available in: Developer Edition and for an extra cost in Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions.
1746
Assign permissions to users to work with the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app.
3. Click Permission Set Assignments > Edit Assignments
4. To assign the user necessary admin permissions, select both the CRM Analytics Plus Admin and the RI for Fins Admin permission
sets.
5. To assign the user necessary user permissions, select both the CRM Analytics Plus User and RI for Fins User permission sets.
6. Add the permission sets, and then save your changes.

Give the Analytics Integration users access to all the fields that are used in the app.
EDITIONS
Follow these steps to set up Salesforce field-level security and enable the Analytics Integration users
to view all the fields used in the app. Available in: Developer
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter the name of the object whose field-level security you
want to edit.
5. Repeat these steps for all of the fields on all of the objects that the app uses.
Create and Share the App

Create an app from the Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud template and then share the app with your users.
1. Navigate to CRM Analytics Studio.

2. Click Create.
3. Select App > Create App from Template, and then open the template selector.
4. Select Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud, and then click Continue.
6. To open the configuration setup flow, click Continue.
Continue.
The Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud app runs a compatibility check against your org to ensure that the app
contains the data required to successfully create the app’s datasets and dashboards.
8. Perform one of these actions:

a. If the instance's compatibility check fails, follow the instructions in the error message to add the required data, and then create
the app again.
b. If the instance's compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.
1747

After the process is complete, refresh the page see your app. If you see a message that says that the Analytics Integration User doesn’t
have access to selected fields, edit Salesforce field-level security.
10. After the process is complete, refresh the page to see your app.
11. To share the app with your users, open your app in CRM Analytics Studio. You can share the app only with users who have the
appropriate permission set.
12. In CRM Analytics Studio, open your app
14. For every user that you add, select their level of access: Viewer, Editor, or Manager.
Use Revenue Management for Financial Services Component Library

Revenue Management for Financial Services Cloud provides components to build customized dashboards. Components are container
elements that contain groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards, making it easy to add a group of objects
to your dashboard.
Book of Business Components

Use the Book of Business components to understand your business performance. They include a summary of your metrics, customer
and advisor leaderboards, client segmentation charts and whitespace analysis charts.
Revenue Management Components
Use the Revenue Management components to get performance insights to build better pipelines, improve forecast accuracy, and
generate more revenue. They include Revenue Tracker, Top Open Opportunities chart, Opportunity Conversion chart, Pipeline
Forecast Changes chart, and Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage chart.
Lead Conversion Components
Use the Leads Conversion components to get a comprehensive view of your lead pipeline. They include a Lead Pipeline chart, Leads
by Time chart, Lead Conversion Rate by Lead Source chart, Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source chart, Lead Projections by Lead
Source chart, and Summary Metrics.
Book of Business Components

Use the Book of Business components to understand your business performance. They include a
EDITIONS
summary of your metrics, customer and advisor leaderboards, client segmentation charts and
whitespace analysis charts. Available in: Developer
Book of Business Overview Edition and for an extra cost
The Book of Business components include these charts.
• Summary Metrics: Use these metrics in places where you want a quick view of your business
performance. They provide an at-a-glance view of the state of your business.
• Customer Leaderboards: Quickly see which customer accounts are performing best. Use this chart to determine opportunities for
growth.
• Advisor Leaderboards: Quickly see which advisors are performing best. Use this chart to determine opportunities for coaching.
1748
• Clients by Age Group: See the distribution of your clients’ AUM and financial accounts sorted by AgeBucket. Use this chart to better
understand who your clients are.
• Whitespace Analysis: Use this chart to identify gaps in your business and uncover upsell and cross-sell opportunities within your
product portfolio, sorted by States and Category.
• Whitespace Analysis for Individual Accounts: Use this chart to identify gaps in your business and uncover upsell and cross-sell
opportunities within your product portfolio, sorted by individual person accounts.
Key Performance Indicators in the Summary Metrics
This table shows the key performance indicators in Summary Metrics.
Metric Description Calculation

Total AUM Summary of the assets under management Sum of AUM from the Account object
for non-household account records.
Wallet Share Average of wallet share for accounts Average of the Wallet Share from the
Account object for non-household
account records.
# of Financial Accounts Number of financial accounts Count of rows from the Financial
Account object.
Total FA Balance Summary of the financial account balance. Sum of the balance from the Financial
Account object.
Key Performance Indicators in the Customer Leaderboard Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Customer Leaderboard chart.

Wallet Share Average of wallet share for accounts Average of the Wallet Share from the
Account object for non-household
account records.
# of Financial Accounts Number of financial accounts Count of rows from the Financial
Account object.
Account object.
The Customer Leaderboard chart uses these Salesforce objects.

• Accounts
• FinancialAccount
Note: All the charts with these metrics are grouped by Account Name and sorted by selected metric values in descending order.
Key Performance Indicators in the Advisor Leaderboard Chart
1749
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Advisor Leaderboard chart.

# of Clients Count of accounts for non-household account Count of accounts for non-household
records. account records.
Account object.
The Advisor Leaderboard chart uses these Salesforce objects.

• Accounts
• Users
Note: All the charts with these metrics are grouped by Owner Name and User Name from the Account object. The groupings are
sorted by selected metric values in descending order.
Key Performance Indicators in the Clients by Age Group Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Clients by Age Group chart.

AUM Summary of the assets under management Sum of AUM from the Account object
# of Clients Count of accounts for non-household account Count of accounts for non-household
records. account records.
The Clients by Age Group chart uses these Salesforce objects.

• Accounts
Note: AgeBucket is a derived field in the recipe that’s used to group the data for these metrics. Bucketing is based on the values
available in Age fields in the Account object.
Key Performance Indicators in the Whitespace Analysis by States and Category Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in Whitespace Analysis by States and Category chart.

Whitespace AUM Count of Financial Account Records with Count of Financial Account Records
Country, Region, and Account record type. with Country, Region, and Account
record type.
The Clients by Age Group chart uses these Salesforce objects.
1750
• Account
Key Performance Indicators in the Whitespace Analysis for Individual Accounts Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in Whitespace Analysis for Individual Accounts chart.

Whitespace AUM Count of Financial Account Records for For each account, count of financial
individual accounts accounts for the FA Account record.
This metric is shown as a percentage of
financial account distribution within
that account.
The Client Whitespace Analysis for Individual Accounts chart uses these Salesforce objects.
• Account
Revenue Management Components

Use the Revenue Management components to get performance insights to build better pipelines,
EDITIONS
improve forecast accuracy, and generate more revenue. They include Revenue Tracker, Top Open
Opportunities chart, Opportunity Conversion chart, Pipeline Forecast Changes chart, and Available in: Developer
Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage chart. Edition and for an extra cost
Revenue Management Overview in Enterprise, Performance,
The Revenue Management components contain these charts:
• Revenue Tracker: Use this chart in places where you want a quick view of your team's progress
based on revenue.
• Top Open Opportunities: Quickly identify the top open opportunities. Use this chart to know where to focus your resources.
• Opportunity Conversion: Get a quick view of the potential value of opportunities for each product and the corresponding conversion
rate.
• Pipeline Forecast Changes: View the forecasts and recent changes to projections. Use the chart to understand the changes and
adjustments made in the forecasted revenue pipeline.
• Product Penetration: Identify the value of opportunities by each product for a profile.
Key Performance Indicators in the Revenue Tracker
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Revenue Tracker chart.

Total Sales Total won opportunities for the selected date Sum of all Closed Won Opportunities
range.
Win Rate Total won opportunity percentage from all Total Number of Closed Won
opportunities closed in the selected date Opportunities / [Total Number of Closed
range. Won + Total Number of Closed Lost]
Opportunities
1751

Avg Deal Amount Average won opportunity amount from all Total Amount of all Closed Won
opportunities closed in the selected period. Opportunities / [Total Count / Number
of Opportunities]
Key Performance Indicators in the Top Open Opportunities Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Top Open Opportunities chart.

Open Opportunities Total open opportunities in the selected date Sum of all open opportunities
range.
Value of Opportunities Value of each opportunity. Value of each opportunity.
Key Performance Indicators in the Opportunity to Focus Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Opportunity to Focus chart:
No Activity This metric can be one of two measures. No No Recent Activity: Count of open
recent activity (Open opportunities with no opportunities with no activity in the last
activity in the last fourteen days), or No fourteen days.
upcoming activity (Open opportunities with No Upcoming Activity: Count of open
no activities scheduled in the future from opportunities with no activities
today.) scheduled in the future from today.
No Next Step Open Opportunities where the Next Step field Sum of all Open Opportunities where
is blank. the Next Step field is blank.
Note: No Next Step view is available only for standard opportunity selection.
Key Performance Indicators in the Opportunity Conversion Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Opportunity Conversion chart:
Conversion Rate The ratio of converted opportunities to the Total Wins / Total Opportunities Closed
total opportunities grouped by product. Use opportunities
in the last 365 days.
Avg Potential Value The average value of opportunity by product. Avg of Opportunity Amount field by
Product
1752
Open Opportunities Total Open Opportunities Sum of all Open Opportunities
Closed Won Opportunities Total won opportunities closed in the selected Sum of all Closed Won Opportunities
date range.
Closed Lost Opportunities Total lost opportunities closed in the selected Sum of all Closed Lost Opportunities
date range.
Projected Value Sum of Potential Value of all closed Potential Value of All Closed
opportunities within the selected duration. Opportunities + [(Avg Potential Value
per Day * Number of days remaining)]
Key Performance Indicators in the Pipeline Forecast Changes Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Pipeline Forecast Changes chart:
Adjusted Opportunities Opportunities with a change in amount Opportunities with a change in an

compared to the forecasted value. amount from OpportunityHistory
object.
Filter all the records added into
Opportunity History based on the
selected duration.
IsClosed = False
New Opportunities All the opportunities created in the selected Sum of all the opportunities created in
duration from the date filter. the selected duration from the date
filter.
Opportunities Carried Over to Next Period Opportunities initially planned to close in this Sum of all opportunities initially
period but moved to the next period. planned to close in this period but
moved to the next period.
Opportunities Not Closed Opportunities that have crossed their closing Opportunities that have crossed their
date but the stage isn’t closed. closing date but the stage isn’t closed.
Key Performance Indicators in the Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage chart:
1753
Opportunity Stage Indicates the Opportunity status, for example, The potential value and Count of
Closed/Won. Opportunities.
Value Type Indicates how to display the value of the Indicates how to display the value of
opportunity. the opportunity.
Key Performance Indicators in the Percentage of Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Percentage of Opportunities by Product and Opportunity Stage chart:
Opportunity Stage Indicates the Opportunity status, for example, The potential value and Count of
Closed/Won. Opportunities in percentage.
Value Type Indicates how to display the value of the Indicates how to display the value of
opportunity. the opportunity.
Key Performance Indicators in the Leaderboard Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Leaderboard chart:

Total Deposit Indicates the total value of deposits of your Indicates the total value of deposits of
clients. your clients.
No of Financial Accounts Number of financial accounts Count of rows from the Financial
Account object.
Win Rate Indicates the total won opportunities closed Sum of all won opportunities that are
in the selected date range. closed in the selected date range.
Lead Conversion Components

Use the Leads Conversion components to get a comprehensive view of your lead pipeline. They
EDITIONS
include a Lead Pipeline chart, Leads by Time chart, Lead Conversion Rate by Lead Source chart,
Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source chart, Lead Projections by Lead Source chart, and Summary Available in: Developer
Metrics. Edition and for an extra cost
Leads Conversion Overview in Enterprise, Performance,
The Lead Conversion components contain these charts:
1754
• Summary Metrics: Use this chart in places where you want to see a quick summary of your leads.
• Lead Pipeline Chart: Visualize opportunities by pipeline stage in terms of the number of leads or revenue. Use the pipeline chart for
a high-level view of your leads.
• Leads Generated by Time Chart: Use this chart to understand if you’re generating enough leads for your pipeline and whether you’re
gaining leads consistently over time.
• Lead Conversion by Lead Source: Use this chart to identify the most effective lead sources based on the lead conversion rate. You
can focus on lead sources that bring in qualified leads consistently.
• Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source: Quickly view the count of leads that are open for each lead source. Use this chart to identify
the sources of leads that are difficult to convert to customers.
• Lead Projections by Lead Source: Understand the count of open leads from a specific lead source and the projected lead conversion.
Identify high-value open leads that need more focus.
Key Performance Indicators in the Summary Metrics
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Summary Metrics chart.

New Leads / Referrals Count of new leads from the Lead object Count of Leads where Status = New
from the Lead object
Total Converted Count of converted leads from the Lead object Count of Leads where IsConverted =
true from the Lead object
Conversion Rate The ratio of converted leads to the total leads. Total Converted / Count of Leads from
the Lead object.
Avg. Time to Convert (days) Average number of days between Created Average number of days between
Date to Converted Date for all the converted Created Date to Converted Date for all
leads from the Lead object. the converted leads from the Lead
object.
Key Performance Indicators in the Lead Pipeline Chart

This table shows the key performance indicators in the Lead Pipeline chart.

Potential Value Total potential value of the leads in the Sum of Potential Value by different
pipeline. statuses from the Lead object.
Count of leads Total count of leads in the pipeline Count of Leads by different statuses
from the Lead object.
The Lead Pipeline chart uses this Salesforce object:

• Lead.
Key Performance Indicators in the Leads Generated by Time Chart
The Leads Generated by Time chart contains this key performance indicator:
• Count of new leads from the Lead object.
1755
The Leads Generated by Time chart uses this Salesforce object:

• Lead
Key Performance Indicators in the Lead Conversion by Lead Source Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Lead Conversion by Lead Source chart.

Lead Source Source from which the leads are generated. Source from which the leads are
generated.
Conversion Rate The ratio of converted leads to the total leads. Total Converted / Count of Leads from
the Lead object.
The Lead Conversion by Lead Source chart uses this Salesforce object:
• Lead
Key Performance Indicators in the Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source chart.

Percentage of Open Leads Indicates the percentage of leads that are in Percentage of leads that are in the Open
the Open stage stage
Percentage of Total Leads by Lead Source Indicates the percentage of leads created from Count of leads by their source.
a specific source.
Lead Conversion Rate by Source Indicates the conversion rate of leads Lead conversion rate by lead source
generated from each source
The Open Lead Distribution by Lead Source chart uses this Salesforce object:
• Lead
Key Performance Indicators in the Lead Projections by Lead Source Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Lead Projections by Lead Source chart.

Lead Source Source from which the leads are generated. Source from which the leads are
created.
Open Leads by Source Indicates the count of open leads generated Count of open leads by their source.
from each source.
Lead Conversion Rate by Source Indicates the conversion rate of leads Lead conversion rate by lead source
generated from each source
The Lead Projections by Lead Source chart uses this Salesforce object:
1756
• Lead
Key Performance Indicators in the Leads by Contact Timeline Chart
This table shows the key performance indicators in the Leads by Contact Timeline chart.

Days Left to Contact Indicates the number of days remaining to Count of days remaining to contact the
contact the lead. lead.
Days Since Last Contact Indicates the number of days passed since the Count of days passed since the last
last contact with the lead. contact with the lead.
Total Activities Indicates the count of activities (tasks and Count of activities (tasks and activities)
activities) for the lead. for the lead.
The Leads by Contact Timeline chart uses this Salesforce object:

• Task
• Event
Use Revenue Management Embedded Dashboard

The Revenue Management dashboard provides insights to build better pipelines, improve forecast
EDITIONS
accuracy, and generate more revenue. The dashboard includes the Revenue Optimizer page and
Client 360 page. Available in: Developer
Revenue Optimizer in Enterprise, Performance,
Use the charts on the Revenue Optimizer page to get a quick view of the status of the revenue, top
opportunities to focus on, and potential areas to increase revenue. You can filter the analytics data
based on a team member, product, branch unit, revenue category, and specific period.
• Revenue Tracker: Use this chart in places where you want a quick view of your team's progress based on revenue.
• Top Open Opportunities: Quickly identify the top open opportunities. Use this chart to know where to focus your resources.
• Opportunities to Focus: Get a quick view of opportunities that need your attention.
Client 360
Use the charts on the Client 360 page to get a comprehensive view of a specific client’s financial portfolio. The analytics provide insights
to the financial managers to understand their clients better based on their current financial situation, to identify risks and opportunities,
and to offer a personalized financial plan to improve their financial position. You can filter the analytics data based on billing country,
billing state/province, status, and marketing segment. The Client 360 page consists of the Overview and Client Holdings tab, Leads and
Opportunities tab, and Service and Engagement tab.
• Overview and Client Holdings:
– Financial Goal: View the client’s progress on various goal types.
– Financial Account: Get a quick summary of client’s financial accounts based on the value and held away assets.
– Financial Holdings: Get insights into the various financial holdings of the client based on price and market value.
– Assets and Liabilities: Get a summary of client’s assets and liabilities by type.
1757
• Leads and Opportunities: Provides insights to identify high scoring leads and keep track of your contact timeline with the leads'
accounts.
• Service and Engagement:
– Engagement Score: Indicates the client’s interaction with the organization or the financial manager.
– Case Details: Get a summary of the cases filed by the client including the total count, count of open cases, count of escalated
cases, and average time taken to resolve the request.
CRM Analytics for Complaint Management

The CRM Analytics app for Complaint Management gives your customer experience managers and complaint team managers quick
insights on customer complaints.
Complaint Management Dashboard

The Complaints Management dashboard analyzes customer complaints and provides quick insights into complaint volume, trends,
and complaints resolution progress. You can analyze complaints based on channels, subtypes, customers, and representatives, to
make informed decisions on improving complaint resolution processes.
Complaints Intelligence Dashboard
Use the Complaints Intelligence dashboard to quickly monitor and manage complaints, reduce complaint volume, identify areas
for improvement, and make data-driven decisions to enhance complaint management processes.
Complaint Management Dashboard

The Complaints Management dashboard analyzes customer complaints and provides quick insights
EDITIONS
into complaint volume, trends, and complaints resolution progress. You can analyze complaints
based on channels, subtypes, customers, and representatives, to make informed decisions on Available in: Lightning
improving complaint resolution processes. Experience
You can filter the data on the dashboard based on products and services types, complaints type,
complaints sub-type, status, financial accounts, duration and compare the data with a previous
Enterprise, and Unlimited
period to analyze progress. Editions where Financial
Services Cloud is enabled
Complaints Volume
Here are examples of complaints volume related questions that the dashboard can answer:
• What’s the total count of complaints received, and how does it differ from the previous period?
• What’s the count of complaints per 1000 customers, and how does it differ from the previous period?
• Which channel do customers primarily use to raise complaints?
• What’s the trend in complaints volume based on the count?
• What’s the trend in complaints volume based on the number of customers who raised complaints?
• What’s the trend in complaints volume based on the sales representatives who handled the complaints?
SLA Management
Here are examples of SLA related questions that the dashboard can answer:
• What's the average handling time for complaints, and how does it differ from the previous period?
• What's the count of complaints that have been open for more than 56 days, and how does it differ from the previous period?
1758
• How many complaints are in each stage of the complaint process?

• How many complaints were resolved after 56 days of being opened?
• What’s the percentage of complaints that were resolved within the Service Level Agreement (SLA) timeframe?
Complaints Resolution
Here are examples of complaints resolution related questions that the dashboard can answer:
• What’s the count of complaints resolved, and how does it differ from the previous period?
• What’s the monetary settlement amount for complaints, and how does it differ from the previous period?
• How many complaints were resolved based on complaint type and subtype?
• What’s the monetary settlement for complaints based on complaint type and subtype?
• What’s the count of complaints for each user?
Complaints Intelligence Dashboard

Use the Complaints Intelligence dashboard to quickly monitor and manage complaints, reduce
EDITIONS
complaint volume, identify areas for improvement, and make data-driven decisions to enhance
complaint management processes. Available in: Lightning
You can filter the data on the dashboard based on products and services types, complaints type, Experience
complaints sub-type, status, financial accounts, duration and compare the data with a previous
period to analyze progress.
Enterprise, and Unlimited
The dashboard provides a quick view of the count of complaints received, resolved complaints, Editions where Financial
open complaints, and complaints that require immediate attention, allowing users to identify areas Services Cloud is enabled
for improvement and make data-driven decisions. Users can quickly see the number of complaints
that are open for more than 56 days, enabling them to take appropriate action to resolve complaints
within the Service Level Agreement (SLA) timeframe. Also, track the channels through which complaints are raised, view the count of
complaints for each product and service, and get valuable insights into customer behavior and preferences.
Analytics for Mortgage Template

Analytics for Mortgage enables loan officers and managers to drive increased mortgage sales by helping prioritize the customer leads
and mortgage applications to focus on. Process loans faster by highlighting the mortgage applications that have the highest value,
applications that have been open the longest, and applications that are missing documents.
Note: Analytics for Mortgage is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra charge for
Analytics for Insurance

A comprehensive set of CRM Analytics dashboards offers insurance executives and managers insights into their book of business and
identifies opportunities to improve sales.
Note: Analytics for Insurance is included with CRM Analytics for Financial Services, which is available at an extra charge for
license. See Use CRM Analytics for Insurance.
1759
Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics

Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app provides actionable insights to effectively manage your
EDITIONS
claims, quotes, and policies.
For more information on creating the Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics app, see Create Insurance Available in: Lightning
Claims and Policy Analytics App. Experience
For more information on Insurance Claims and Policy Analytics dashboards, see Insurance Claims Available in: Enterprise and
and Policy Analytics Dashboards. Unlimited Editions where
Financial Services Cloud for
Insurance is enabled and
Vlocity Insurance is installed
FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start

The FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start app provides insights to effectively monitor the growth of
EDITIONS
your policies over time and to identify cross-selling opportunities within the existing customer base
to improve business revenue.
For more information on creating the FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start app, see Create FSC Insurance Experience
Analytics Fast Start App.
For more information on FSC Insurance Analytics Fast Start dashboards, see Use FSC Insurance Unlimited Editions that have
Analytics Fast Start. Financial Services Cloud for
Insurance enabled.
The Analytics for Healthcare Template

Use actionable insights from CRM Analytics for Health Cloud apps to drive intelligent patient
engagement, improve care effectiveness, and manage patient risk.
Note: Analytics for Healthcare is only for Salesforce Health Cloud users. It requires that you have the Health Analytics Plus add-on
license. See Provide Patient and Member Insights with Analytics.
Patient Risk Stratification Template

The Patient Risk Stratification template creates an app that lets healthcare coordinators identify
USER PERMISSIONS
high-risk patients to make sure they get the extra care they need.
Patient Risk Stratification app
and set up custom actions
in the app:
Templated Apps
To use the Patient Risk
Stratification app:
Templated Apps
1760
Patient Risk Stratification brings your Health Cloud data into CRM Analytics to help you deliver the right level of care management to
high-risk patients. The Patient Care Risk Stratification dashboard lets you drill in to a population. You can see risk score, age, number of
conditions, and enrollment type for specific population segments. The metrics help you understand risk for your patients and plan the
appropriate level of care to assure best-possible treatment outcomes.
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app creation procedures for all CRM Analytics
templated apps. The information here provides specifics about creating and using the Patient Risk Stratification app.
Note: Analytics App and Template functionalities included as a part of CRM Analytics are only available in English.
Org Requirements
Your org requires the following before you can create an app from the Patient Risk Stratification template:
• Make sure you and all app users have the CRM Analytics license.
• Patient Risk Stratification is only for Health Cloud customers who have installed the Health Cloud Risk Stratification package.
• Your org needs to include at least one risk score within a program patient summary record. You also need to use Record Types.
Enable Bulk Actions in the App

After creating the app, enable bulk actions in the table at the bottom of the Risk Stratification dashboard. Bulk actions let you perform
an action on multiple Salesforce records at the same time. In this case, you can send a list of high-risk patients to other Health Cloud
users.
•
Click the edit icon at the top of the dashboard.
• Select the table with the list of patients at the bottom of the dashboard.
1761
• In the Properties panel at right, select Widget.

• To enable the bulk action, click Show custom action. In the Custom Action Label field, enter a name for the custom action, for
example Send List to Health Cloud.

• In the Visualforce Page Name field, enter HcWaveListIntegrationPage. This string refers to a Visualforce page that’s
included with the Health Cloud package.
•
Click the Save icon at the top of the dashboard, then click the Save button.
Use Patient Risk Stratification

Open the app.
•
The filters along the top of the dashboard let you select criteria for creating a list of high-risk patients. In the example dashboard shown
above, you could select Diabetes from the Conditions filter and 60-64 Years Old from the Age Band filter to create a list of
60-to-64-year-old patients with diabetes.
The visualizations just below the filters change to show data for the selected group of patients as determined by filter selections. Click
the Show Details button below each chart to learn more about that group. View the list of patients in the table at the bottom of the
dashboard. Click the arrow in the top right corner of the table and select Send to Health Cloud to share the list with others in your org.
Note: The action is called something different in your org if you gave it a different name. See the section above, Enable Bulk Actions
in the App.
1762
Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare

The Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare app provides a complete solution for streamlining the prior
EDITIONS
authorization review workflow.
For more information on creating the Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare app, see Install the Enhanced Available in: Lightning
Analytics for Healthcare App. Experience
For more information on Enhanced Analytics for Healthcare dashboards, see Enhanced Analytics Available in: Enterprise and
for Healthcare . Unlimited Editions of Health
Cloud.
Analytics for Loyalty
By using Analytics for Loyalty app, get actionable insights into loyalty programs and devise strategies
to increase membership, retain customers, improve processes, and grow your business.
For more information, see Deploy and Use Analytics for Loyalty.
The CRM Analytics for Manufacturing Template

The CRM Analytics for Manufacturing lets account managers visualize all aspects of their business to keep them on top of sales agreements,
orders, and contracts.
Note: CRM Analytics for Manufacturing is only for Salesforce Manufacturing Cloud users. It requires that you have the Manufacturing
Analytics Plus add-on license. See Deploy CRM Analytics for Manufacturing.
Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing

The Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing app provides insights into your
EDITIONS
forecast data and develop accurate forecasts to optimize your production and operations.
For more information on creating the Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing Available in: Lightning
app, see Deploy Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing. Experience
For more information on Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing dashboards, Available in: Enterprise and
see Use Advanced Account Forecasting Analytics for Manufacturing. Unlimited Editions of
Manufacturing Cloud
1763
Public Sector Case Analytics Template

Public Sector Case Analytics lets public sector service organizations measure their effectiveness and
EDITIONS
identify immediate actions to improve case work performance.
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app Available in Salesforce
creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps. The information here provides Classic and Lightning
Experience.
specifics about creating and using the Public Sector Case Analytics app.
Available with CRM
Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS
To create and manage

Public Sector Case Analytics:
Templated Apps
To use the Public Sector
Case Analytics app:
Templated Apps
The app’s prebuilt dashboards give you instant insight into case status, surfacing the ones that require immediate attention. Visualizations
surface case-related activities that are near or past due to help you stay on track delivering client services. View bottlenecks in the process
so you can take action to assure effective case management and resolution. And see if you and your team are compliant with service
level agreements.
Also, get details about your clients and beneficiaries, trends in client satisfaction, and case history brought to life via interactive visualizations.
You can also immediately surface top-performing case managers and understand why they’re effective. And identify lower performers
so you can help them take steps to become more effective.
Org Requirements
Your org requires the following before you can create an app from the Public Sector Case Analytics template:
• Make sure you and all app users have the Analytics Plus or Analytics Growth licenses.
• Your org must have at least one closed case and one closed task to enable app creation.
• The wizard checks to see if you track data about the following in your org:
– Customer satisfaction (CSAT)
– Knowledge
– Case history
– Queues
– Events
– Business hours
1764
– Case record types

– Telephony
– Omni-Channel
– Person Accounts
to Enable Creation of a CRM Analytics Template.
• CRM Analytics looks for your org’s fiscal year start date and uses it in app dashboards. To choose a different fiscal start date, use the
app’s Custom create option.
1. Customize Public Sector Case Analytics with the Configuration Wizard

Use the configuration wizard to make sure Public Sector Case Analytics reflects how you prefer to view case management data.
2. Use Public Sector Case Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard
After you create Public Sector Case Analytics, navigate to the app and use its dashboards to measure your team’s effectiveness and
improve services delivery.
Customize Public Sector Case Analytics with the Configuration Wizard

Use the configuration wizard to make sure Public Sector Case Analytics reflects how you prefer to view case management data.
When you start the app creation process, Public Sector Case Analytics opens the configuration wizard. The wizard guides you through
the following steps.
• Checks your org to be sure it meets minimum data requirements and to detect features that can be added to your app. The results
let you know if you have to add data or change Salesforce settings to create the app. It also lets you know about available features.
• Asks you to choose between basic and custom create options. Basic is intended for first-time app users, while custom lets experienced
administrators fine-tune app setup.
• Choose the basic option, and CRM Analytics creates the app quickly with default settings.
• Choose custom and the wizard guides you through the steps to fine-tune your app.
– Add features to your app
– Answer a series of questions about how you use data in your org.
The following provide details about each using each part of the wizard. Read them in the order shown to get the best results when you
create Service Analytics. Click the question mark in the top-right corner of each page of the wizard to see help for that page.
1. Public Sector Case Analytics Wizard Data and Feature Check

At the start of app creation, Public Sector Case Analytics scans your org. It checks to make sure you can create the app and looks for
features and data to add to your app.
2. Choose Public Sector Case Analytics App Creation Options
After Public Sector Case Analytics checks your org’s data and features, choose between basics and custom app creation options.
3. Use the Public Sector Case Analytics Basic Create Option
Select the basic app creation option when you create Public Sector Case Analytics for the first time or when you want to create the
app quickly.
4. Use the Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Create Option
Custom app creation gives you fine-grained control over Public Sector Case Analytics features and data.
1765
5. Case Metrics Questions, Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Wizard Step 4 of 6
Answer a series of questions to tell CRM Analytics how you prefer to view metrics about your cases.
6. Data Drill Down Questions, Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6
Tell Public Sector Case Analytics how you prefer to drill into data about cases, including category, type, severity, owner, and reason,
and if they’re resolved at first contact.
7. Questions About Features Added to Public Sector Case Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6
Provide more specifics about how Public Sector Case Analytics uses data from the features you add to the app.
8. Set Up Public Sector Case Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example
This scenario provides detail to help you answer questions about CSAT data in Step 6 of the Public Sector Case Analytics configuration
wizard.
Public Sector Case Analytics Wizard Data and Feature Check

At the start of app creation, Public Sector Case Analytics scans your org. It checks to make sure you can create the app and looks for
features and data to add to your app.
Public Sector Case Analytics checks your org for data and features when you open the configuration wizard. If it finds any issues you
need to correct before creating the app, you see messages that tell you what to do. Position your cursor over the tooltip for more
information.
Here are details about each phase of the check.
Minimum Requirements
Your org must have at least one closed case and one closed task to enable app creation. If you see an error message, close a case and a
task and try creating the app again
Features to Add to Your App

The wizard checks to see if you track data about the following in your org:
• Customer satisfaction (CSAT)
• Knowledge
• Case history
• Queues
• Events
• Business hours
• Case record types
• Telephony
• Omni Channel
• Person Accounts
The tooltip tells you which are available in your org. Basic app creation automatically adds those features. Custom app creation
lets you choose the ones to add.
Note: CSAT and knowledge data can only be added using custom app creation.
1766
The wizard checks if the Analytics Integration User has access to all fields needed to create the app using the basic create option. If the
Integration User can’t access all fields, you see a warning and the tooltip lists the fields that lack access. Go to Salesforce Setup and
provide access to those fields. See Set Field Level Security to Enable Creation of an CRM Analytics Template. Until all fields are available,
you can’t use the basic create option.
Fiscal Calendar Setting

The wizard looks for your org’s fiscal year start date and uses it for Service Analytics. To choose a different fiscal start date, use the app’s
Custom create option.
Case History
The wizard checks to be sure that your org uses history tracking on the Cases object for case status and owner. If it doesn’t, follow the
directions in the error message and try creating your app again.
Choose Public Sector Case Analytics App Creation Options

After Public Sector Case Analytics checks your org’s data and features, choose between basics and custom app creation options.
Select Basic if you’re using Public Sector Case Analytics for the first time. It sets up your app quickly based on standard settings determined
by the org compatibility check. You get an immediately useful version of the app so you can see how it works. Experiment with it and
share it with your team. Based on what you learn, change the standard settings by recreating the app using the custom create option.
Public Sector Case Analytics disables basic app creation if the Analytics Integration User can’t access all required fields. If the basic option
is disabled, click Back to return to the org check and follow the instructions in the field-level security tooltip and error message.
Select Custom and use the wizard to make custom settings that reflect the way you and your team prefer to view data. The initial, default
settings in the screens that follow are the ones used when you create an app using the basic create option. Custom create lets you vary
these settings to meet your team’s specific needs. You can choose to add or delete features detected by the org check. You can also
make specific choices about the data used in the app’s dashboards.
Whether you use basic or custom create, Public Sector Case Analytics runs a final scan of your org’s field-level security settings. The scan
detects if the Analytics Integration User has access to all data fields required to create the app. If the scan fails, you see a message telling
you how to fix the issue. For more information about field-level security settings, see Set Field Level Security to Enable Creation of an
CRM Analytics Template
Use the Public Sector Case Analytics Basic Create Option

Select the basic app creation option when you create Public Sector Case Analytics for the first time or when you want to create the app
quickly.
The basic create option uses data, features, and default settings detected during the compatibility check that runs when you start app
creation.
The wizard asks you a single, required question about the field you use to categorize cases. Choose the name of the field your business
uses most to identify and organize cases, service, category, type, or level. Then click Looks good, next.
Name your app, and click Create.
Basic create can’t use client satisfaction and knowledge data. CRM Analytics requires more information about how they’re used in your
org before creating an app. To add them, use the custom create option, and answer the wizard questions about the data.
Basic create uses the following settings:
• To identify cases by geography, the Billing State/Province field from the Accounts object.
1767
• Fifty (50) seconds as the maximum time agents can keep customers waiting during phone calls.
To vary these settings based on how you use Service Cloud, select the custom create option.
Use the Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Create Option

Custom app creation gives you fine-grained control over Public Sector Case Analytics features and data.
Add Data and Features

The first window in the custom creation process lets you add data and features to your app. By default, Public Sector Case Analytics
includes data from these standard Salesforce objects.
• Cases
• User
• UserRole
• Task
The compatibility check that run at the start of app creation looks for other available data and features. The wizard displays the results
on the first custom create window, letting you know which features you use in your org. If you use a feature, this window tells you it’s
available to your app. If you don’t use the feature, CRM Analytics tells you it’s not available.
CRM Analytics preselects the features used for basic app creation. You have the option of adding others. Preselected options contain a
check mark in the upper right corner. Add other available options to your app by clicking them. Click options with a check mark to
deselect them. Here are the options Public Sector Case Analytics lets you add, if available, and details about adding each.
• Customer Satisfaction (CSAT) Score. Select to add CSAT data to your app. If you select, CRM Analytics adds questions to the wizard
that ask how you track CSAT data. See Questions About Features Added to Public Sector Case Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of
6.
• Knowledge. Select to add Salesforce knowledge data to your app. If you select, CRM Analytics adds questions to the wizard that ask
how you track knowledge data. See Questions About Features Added to Public Sector Case Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6.
• Business Hours. Select to add a business hours case duration calculation to datasets. This uses data from the Business Hours field in
the Cases object. Be sure that the Analytics Integration User has access to this field by editing field-level security for the Cases object.
• Case History. Select to include historical tracking for both case owner and for the field selected in wizard Page 5, Question 4. Data
Drill Down Questions, Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6.
• Case Record Types. Select to add record type for the Cases object. If you select, Public Sector Case Analytics lets you filter cases by
record type.
• Queues. Select to add queues data from the Group object, which your org uses to assign case ownership. If you select, Public Sector
Case Analytics lets you filter cases by user and queues.
• Events. Select to add data from the Events object, which your org uses to track case activity. If you select, Public Sector Case Analytics
includes events data and combines it with tasks data so you can drill into cases by activities (that is, tasks and events).
• Telephony. Select to add telephony data from standard call fields in the Tasks object. Standard fields include call duration, call object
identifier, call result, and call type. If you select, Public Sector Case Analytics creates the Telephony dashboard showing data from
those fields.
• Omni-Channel. Select to add data from Omni-Channel, which your org uses to create and route work items. If you select, Public
Sector Case Analytics creates the Omni-Channel dashboard and dataset.
• Person Accounts. Select to add data from the Person Accounts object, which your org uses to track clients. If you select Person
Accounts, Public Sector Case Analytics lets you filter cases by clients. If you don’t, the app extracts clients from the Contacts object
and augments Accounts with them.
1768
Case Metrics Questions, Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Wizard Step 4 of 6
Answer a series of questions to tell CRM Analytics how you prefer to view metrics about your cases.
Note: This page is labeled Step 4 of 6, even though it’s the first page of questions you see after you select custom create. This is
the fourth of six steps for creating Public Sector Case Analytics with the custom option.
• Question 1, optional: Asks you to indicate the primary field you use in Salesforce to track case duration, if any. If you don’t track case
duration, CRM Analytics uses its own formula to calculate case duration based on the date a case was opened and closed. If the case
is still open, it uses today’s date as part of the calculation. Allows only a single selection. If you add business hours to the app, CRM
Analytics includes a business hours case duration calculation.
• Question 2, optional: Asks if you use other (secondary) fields related to case duration. You can select multiple fields, for example,
Duration with client and Duration with case manager.
• Question 3, optional: Asks you to select the field you use to track SLA compliance. Typically, you would track SLA compliance with
a custom formula field on the Cases object or the standard Milestone Status field. (Milestone Status field values include compliant,
open violation, and closed Violation). If you track SLA compliance using a Boolean custom formula field, you can’t select that field
from the wizard. In that case, do the following: Select any field and then manually edit the dataflow to include the Boolean field.
Then, find and replace the field name in Public Sector Case Analytics dashboard JSON (see CRM Analytics Dashboard JSON Reference).
• Question 4, optional: Asks you to select the field you use to record that a case is resolved on first contact. You would typically track
first contact resolution using a Boolean custom formula field on the Cases object or the standard Closed when Created
(IsClosedOnCreate) field.
• Question 5, optional: Asks if you’d like to include other Cases object metrics in your app. Choose a numeric field.
Data Drill Down Questions, Public Sector Case Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6
Tell Public Sector Case Analytics how you prefer to drill into data about cases, including category, type, severity, owner, and reason, and
if they’re resolved at first contact.
Note: This page is labeled Step 5 of 6, even though it’s the second page of questions you see after you select custom create. This
is the fifth of six steps for creating Public Sector Case Analytics with the custom option.
• Question 1, required. Asks about the field you use to categorize cases. Choose the name of the field you use to identify and organize
cases, such as service category, type or level.
Note: This is the only question you see if you use basic app creation.
• Question 2, optional. Asks about the field you use to record clients’ type of support. Examples include premium and basic.
• Question 3, required. Asks which field you use to categorize case severity—usually the field you use to prioritize cases.
• Question 4, required. Asks which field you use to track case status of case. You filter and analyze cases in dashboards based on your
selection.
• Question 5, required. Asks about the field you use to identify topics, reasons, and closure codes of cases. Your selection helps you
understand which kinds of cases your team solves most efficiently.
• Question 6, required. Asks you to choose the field you use to track types of cases so you can filter and analyze cases according to
support type.
• Question 7, required. Asks you to select the field used to track channels clients use to open cases, such as phone, email, mobile, or
web.
• Question 8, required. Asks you to select the object used to track cases according to geography. Options are Accounts, Contacts (if
not using Person Accounts), and Cases. Defaults to Accounts, which is used in basic create.
• Question 9, required. Asks you to indicate the field in the object selected in Question 8 to track cases by geography. Defaults to
Billing State/Province, which is used in basic create.
1769
• Question 10, required. Asks you to indicate your fiscal year start month. Defaults to January; select another month if your fiscal year
is different from calendar year. Public Sector Case Analytics supports only standard fiscal periods.
• Question 11, optional: Select dimension fields from the Cases object you haven’t selected in previous questions. Adding dimensions
lets you drill into dimensions that are important to your organization. Dimensions are qualitative values, such as date, region, and
product name.
Questions About Features Added to Public Sector Case Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6
Provide more specifics about how Public Sector Case Analytics uses data from the features you add to the app.
Note: This page is labeled Step 6 of 6, even though it’s the third page of questions you see after you select custom create. This is
the last of six steps for creating Public Sector Case Analytics with the custom option.
Most of the questions on this page appear only if you add CSAT and knowledge features to your app. Follow the instructions carefully
to assure success.
• Question 1, required. You see this question only if you add CSAT to your app. Asks which object you use to track CSAT. Public Sector
Case Analytics defaults to Cases. If you use a different object to track CSAT, select it from the pick list and answer the additional
questions that appear.
• Question 2, required. You see this question only if you add CSAT to your app. Asks you to select the field from the object selected in
Question 1 you use to track CSAT.
– Question 2a, required. You see this question only if you select an object other than Cases in Question 1. Public Sector Case
Analytics has to create a join between that object and Cases for you to see CSAT data in dashboards. (For an example, see Set
Up Public Sector Case Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example.) Enter the API name the field where you store case identification
information. Usually, that’s the Id field, in which case you enter Id.
If it’s a field other than Id, find the API name for the field. Go to Setup—>Cases—>Fields. In the top chart showing standard
fields, field name column shows the API name. For example IsSelfServiceClosed is the API name for the Closed by Self-Service
User field. The chart further down for custom fields includes an API Name column.
– Question 2b, required. You see this question only if you select an object other than Cases in Question 1. Determine which field
from the object selected in Question 1 to use for the other side of the join with the Cases object. Use the field that contains case
identification. Enter the API name for the field here.
• Question 3, required. You see this question only if you added knowledge to your app. Asks about the article type you want to see
data about in Public Sector Case Analytics dashboards. Choose only a single article type. To see the names of available article types,
go to Salesforce Setup and enter knowledge in the Quick Find box.
• Question 4, required. You see this question only if you add telephony to your app. Asks you to set the maximum time in seconds
case managers can keep clients waiting during a call. Public Sector Case Analytics assesses case manager effectiveness against their
ability to meet this requirement.
• Question 5, required. You always see this question in the wizard. Gives you the option of having Public Sector Case Analytics check
to see if data in your org supports the answers you select. We recommend that you select Yes and run the check, because app
creation fails if your org doesn’t contain the right data. Public Sector Case Analytics displays an error message that tells you what to
fix. Make any required changes in Salesforce, refresh your browser cache, and come back to the wizard and finish creating your app.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up Public Sector Case Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example
1770
Set Up Public Sector Case Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example

This scenario provides detail to help you answer questions about CSAT data in Step 6 of the Public Sector Case Analytics configuration
wizard.
If you track customer satisfaction (CSAT) data, such as the CSAT score for a service case, in an object other than Cases, take particular
care in how you answer the questions on this page.
For example, if you store the CSAT score in a custom object, for example "CSAT Survey", select this object in question 1. In Question 2,
specify the field that has the CSAT metric you would like to report, for example "CSAT Score." Public Sector Case Analytics needs to relate
the custom object specified in Question 1 to the Cases object so dashboards can include data about cases, accounts, and agents by
CSAT. This relationship is created through a join.
To specify the relationship between the Cases object and your custom CSAT object, designate join keys from both objects and enter
their API names in Questions 3 and 4. On the Cases object, this will typically be the "Id" field. On the example custom object "CSAT
Survey," this is the custom field that stores the case ID, which in this scenario is the field with the API name CaseId__c.
The following diagram shows the join between the two objects.
Use Public Sector Case Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard

After you create Public Sector Case Analytics, navigate to the app and use its dashboards to measure your team’s effectiveness and
improve services delivery.
Open the app.
1.
2. Under Browse in the left column, select All Items.
3. Select the Apps tab, then click your app to open it. If you can’t immediately find it, consult your Salesforce administrator to find out
Click Dashboards to see a list of all app dashboards. Public Sector Case Analytics prebuilt dashboards contain best practices that help
you get value from your Salesforce data—fast. The dashboards let you manage service cases and forecast and understand key business
performance drivers, visualize trends, and assign actions. They also help you get fast answers to questions you have about your service
business’s results.
1771
Note: The dashboards and datasets included in your instance of Public Sector Case Analytics can differ. The ones you see depend
on how you answer configuration wizard questions when you create the app.
Public Sector Case Overview. Start here. Summarizes key performance indicators (KPIs) about your case load, including open cases in
the backlog, agent average time to close, and first contact resolution rate. Helps you gauge effectiveness of service delivery and surface
issues requiring further investigation. Also, provides springboard to all other dashboards.
Case Changes. Brings your historical case data to life. View cases with the most changes and see their average duration in each status
in the resolution process. Also sort cases according to their owner and see how cases move from one status to another.
Case Owner Activity. Helps determine how well case owners use their time. Shows how much work they do and how their work aligns
with case-closing numbers and duration as well as CSAT.
Case Owner Performance. Shows case manager team performance against key activity and client satisfaction metrics. Performance trends
and benchmarks help case managers provide direction and drive team success.
Case Origin Review. Shows client satisfaction and activities—duration and volume—on cases by where they originated to help you
monitor success of each origin.
Case Variances. Gives complete view of your backlog to show how efficiently your team resolves cases and how quickly your backlog is
growing. Helps you prioritize and staff your team accordingly.
Client Review. Provides a full breakdown of a selected client’s service history and current backlog and includes client satisfaction data
and trends. Identify bottlenecks in case lifecycle with insights into average duration spent in various case statuses.
Customer Satisfaction. You only see this dashboard if you add CSAT data to your app. Highlights CSAT measures so you can identify
specific areas to improve service. Orders clients from most to least satisfied and associates case managers, products, and channels with
satisfaction.
Knowledge Impact. You only see this dashboard if you add knowledge data to your app. Provides a view into how knowledge articles
attached to cases impact CSAT and resolution time. See which case managers used the most articles to determine who needs coaching
about how to use knowledge to help resolve service issues.
Knowledge Use. You only see this dashboard if you add knowledge data to your app. Helps you understand how case managers use
knowledge articles to help you drive article creation. See which articles are attached the most and the least and which have the most
views or votes (high ratings) over time.
Omni-Channel. You only see this dashboard if you add Omni-Channel data to your app. Gives managers insight into case manager
utilization based on Omni-Channel work record tracking. Includes incoming case manager work volume, average speed to answer,
average handle time, average active time, and other agent utilization metrics.
Prioritize Open Cases. Shows current open case workload to help you prioritize, investigate problematic cases, and view escalations and
SLA compliance. Let’s you prioritize cases by case reason, priority, or any other classification so you can take appropriate action.
Telephony. You only see this dashboard if you add telephony data to your app. Helps you understand the impact of phone contact with
client during case resolution. Filter call volume and duration by inbound or outbound call, the result of the call, and other factors. Also
relates call volume to case manager performance.
Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management

The Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app provides a detailed view of various subscriber trends that affect revenue, churn,
and customer lifetime value. By using the data-driven dashboards, Marketing Managers can quickly track overall subscriber trends,
analyze the trends' effects on revenue, and respond with better products and marketing strategies.
Available in: Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited Editions where Media Cloud is enabled
1772
Deploy Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template, deploy Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle
Management in Salesforce.
Use Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management Dashboards
By using the Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics dashboards, Marketing Managers can track overall subscriber trends, analyze
the trends' effects on revenue, and respond with better products and marketing strategies. Service Agents can view the resolution
status of their cases and monitor the improvement of case-resolution KPIs and Customer Lifetime Value (CLTV) over time.
Deploy Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management

Before you create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template, deploy Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle
Management in Salesforce.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template.
Assign Permissions to Admins and Users
Assign relevant permissions to admins and users to manage the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app.
Assign Permissions to Analytics Integration User
Assign permissions to the Integration user.
Set Field-Level Security for Analytics Integration User
To ensure that Analytics Integration users can view all the fields in the app, set field-level security for all the fields on all the objects
that the app uses.
Requirements for Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management Data
Before you create Analytics for the Subscriber Lifecycle Management app, ensure that your data meets these specific requirements.
Create and Share Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App
Create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template and then share the app with your users.

Enable CRM Analytics in Salesforce before you create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template.
Note: If you see the Launch CRM Analytics button, Analytics is already enabled. You can proceed to assign Analytics for Subscriber
Lifecycle Management permissions to admins and users.
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Getting Started, and then under Analytics, select Getting Started.
Assign Permissions to Admins and Users

Assign relevant permissions to admins and users to manage the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app.
1773
3. Click Permission Set Assignments > Edit Assignments.

4. Assign the user admin or user permissions:
• To assign admin permissions, select the Revenue Intelligence Media Analytics Admin permission set.
• To assign the user user permissions, select the Revenue Intelligence Media Analytics User permission set.
5. Add the permission set, and then save your changes.
Assign Permissions to Analytics Integration User

Assign permissions to the Integration user.
2. Select Analytics Integration User.
3. Click Permission Set Assignments > Edit Assignments.
4. Select CRM Analytics for Media SLM.
5. Add the permission set, and then save your changes.
Set Field-Level Security for Analytics Integration User

To ensure that Analytics Integration users can view all the fields in the app, set field-level security for all the fields on all the objects that
the app uses.
For more information on field-level security, see Salesforce field-level security.
To set field-level security for a field:
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter the name of the object whose field-level security you want to edit.
Requirements for Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management Data

Before you create Analytics for the Subscriber Lifecycle Management app, ensure that your data meets these specific requirements.
• Ensure that at least one record exists in each of these objects:

– Assets
– Account
– Case
– Product
• Import data from an external source. for Payment and Usage metrics to appear in relevant dashboards
– For information on importing payment data, see Import Media_Payment Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management
App on page 1775.
1774
– For information on importing usage data, see Import Media_Usage Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App
on page 1776.
Import Payment Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App

Import payment data from an external source to the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app to show payment metrics
in relevant dashboards.
Import Usage Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App
Import usage data from an external source to the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app to show usage metrics in
relevant dashboards.
Import Payment Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App

Import payment data from an external source to the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app to show payment metrics in
relevant dashboards.
1. Create a CSV file with these fields (Field Name), in this order, with these exact names.
Field names are case-sensitive.
Field Name Contents
AccountId (Text) Unique Id to identify an account that owns the subscription.
Product2Id (Text) Unique Id to identify the product.
Bill_Period_Start (Date) Start date of the billing period in mm-dd-yy format.
Bill_Period_End (Date) End date of the billing period in mm-dd-yy format.
PaymentMode (Text) Method that's used to make the payment.
Invoice_ID (Text) Unique ID to identify the invoice.
Amount (Numeric) Amount paid.
Currency (Text) Currency in which the payment is made.
Date_of_Payment (Date) Date on which the payment is made.
Use only a UTF-8-compliant text editor to create and open CSV files. Opening CSV files in non-compliant text editors, such as Microsoft
Excel, reformats the CSV files and makes them unusable in CRM Analytics. To review the format requirements, such as date formats,
see the CRM Analytics External Data Format Developer Guide.
2. Save the CSV file.

3. Create the app.
For information on how to create the app, see Create and Share the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App on page
1776.
4. Open the app, click Datasets, and then locate the Media_Payment dataset.
5. Click Edit.
6. Click the Replace Data icon.
7. Click Select a file or drag the file.
8. Select the CSV file that you created, and then click Open.
1775
9. Click Next > Next, and then click Upload File and Replace.
The next time the dataflow for your app runs, CRM Analytics adds Media_Payment to relevant dashboards. For more information
on uploading a CSV file, see Upload a CSV File to Create a Dataset.
Import Usage Data to Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App

Import usage data from an external source to the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app to show usage metrics in relevant
dashboards.
1. Create a CSV file with these fields (Field Name), in this order, with these exact names.
Field names are case-sensitive.
Name Contents
AccountId (Text) Unique ID to identify the account that owns the

subscription.
Product2Id (Text) Unique ID to identify the product.
Year (Text) Effective year for the subscription.
Month (Text) Number of months.
Days (Text) Number of days.
Hours_Usage (Numeric) Number of hours.
Sessions (Numeric) Number of sessions.
Failed_Sessions (Numeric) Number of failed sessions.
Create and open CSV files using only a UTF-8-compliant text editor. Opening them in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software
reformats .CSV files and makes them unusable in CRM Analytics. Also, review the format requirements, like date formats, in the CRM
Analytics External Data Format Developer Guide.
2. Save the CSV file.

3. Create the app.
For information on how to create the app, see Create and Share the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App on page
1776.
4. Open the app, click Datasets, and then locate the Media_Usage dataset.
5. Click Edit.
6. Click the Replace Data icon.
7. Click Select a file or drag the file.
8. Select the CSV file that you created, and then click Open.
9. Click Next > Next, and then click Upload File and Replace.
The next time the dataflow for your app runs, CRM Analytics adds Media_Usage to relevant dashboards. For more information on
uploading a CSV file, see Upload a CSV File to Create a Dataset.
Create and Share Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management App

Create an app from the Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management template and then share the app with your users.
1776
1. To create the app, go to CRM Analytics Studio.

2. Click Create.
3. Select App > Create App from Template, and then open the template picker.
4. Select Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management, and then click Continue.
6. To open the configuration setup flow, click Continue.
Continue.
The Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management app runs a compatibility check against your instance to ensure that the app
contains the data required to successfully create the app’s datasets and dashboards.
8. Perform an action:
• If the instance's compatibility check fails, perform the instructions in the error message to add the required data, and then create
the app again.
• If the instance's compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.

A status bar shows the app-creation status. The process takes a minute or two.
10. After the process is completed, to see your app, refresh the page.
If you see an error message that the Analytics Integration User doesn’t have access to selected fields, edit Salesforce field-level
security.
11. To share the app with your users, in CRM Analytics Studio, open your app.
You can share the app only with users who have the relevant admin or user permission set.
13. For every user that you add, select the level of access: Viewer, Editor, or Manager.
Use Analytics for Subscriber Lifecycle Management Dashboards

By using the Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics dashboards, Marketing Managers can track overall subscriber trends, analyze
the trends' effects on revenue, and respond with better products and marketing strategies. Service Agents can view the resolution status
of their cases and monitor the improvement of case-resolution KPIs and Customer Lifetime Value (CLTV) over time.
The Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics app includes these dashboards:

• Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics
• Service Console
1777
Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics Dashboard

The Subscriber Lifecycle Management Analytics dashboard tracks the overall trend in subscriber count and churn. You can use the
dashboard to analyze the effects of subscriber trends on revenue and CLTV.
Product Performance Page
The page answers these questions:
• What's the number of new, churned, and net active subscribers over time?
• Which is the most subscribed product?
• Which is the top-performing product based on key revenue metrics?
• What's the most popular payment method by transaction and by amount?
• What's the percentage of overall churned subscribers?
• How do my products perform based on churn rate, average subscription length, and count of subscribers?
• What's the subscribers’ CLTV distribution?
Customer Lifetime Value Analysis Page
The page answers these questions:
• How did the key revenue metrics trend over time?
• How did the number of subscribers change over time?
• How did the revenue in focus duration perform relative to the past?
• What’s the change in KPIs for a selected period?
• How much did the CLTV change over time?
Service Console Dashboard

The Service Console embedded dashboard for service agents tracks the resolution status of their cases and monitors the improvement
of case-resolution KPIs and CLTV over time. The dashboard answers these questions:
• What's my case resolution status?
• How many cases have I handled?
• Did the case resolution KPIs improve over time?
• What's the CLTV of the subscribers that I serviced?
• How did the CLTV trend over time?
• What's my average case resolution time relative to the global average?
Net Zero Analytics

Net Zero Analytics enables you to bring your environmental accounting in line with your financial accounting.
For complete deployment instructions, see. Deploy Net Zero Analytics
For information on Net Zero Analytics dashboards, see Use Net Zero Analytics
1778
DEI Analytics
DEI Analytics app provides insights to improve DEI (diversity, equity, and inclusion) goals and
EDITIONS
employee relationships.
For more information on configuring the DEI Analytics app, see Enable DEI Insights in Net Zero Available in: Lightning
Cloud. Experience
For more information on DEI Analytics dashboards, see DEI Insights. Available in: Enterprise and
Unlimited Editions of Net
Zero Cloud
Education Analytics
The Education Analytics app provides insights into recruitment, admissions, learner engagement,
EDITIONS
and student success that you can use to improve processes and analyze learner metrics.
For more information on creating the Education Analytics app, see Configure Education Analytics. Available in: Lightning
For more information on Education Analytics dashboards, see Understand Education Analytics. Experience
Unlimited Editions of
Education Cloud
Customer Lifecycle Analytics

Customer Lifecycle Analytics app provides actionable insights into your customers and answer key
EDITIONS
questions about your business.
For more information on creating the Customer Lifecycle Analytics app, see Deploy Customer Available in: Lightning
Lifecycle Analytics. Experience
For more information on Customer Lifecycle Analytics dashboards, see Use Customer Lifecycle Available in: Enterprise and
Analytics Dashboards. Unlimited Editions where
Salesforce Surveys is
enabled.
CRM Analytics Prebuilt Apps
CRM Analytics prebuilt apps are ready-to-use applications that offer advanced analytics and reporting
capabilities specifically tailored for sales and customer relationship management. The apps provide preconfigured dashboards, reports,
and data visualizations to analyze business data.
The Einstein Accuracy Analytics Template

The Einstein Accuracy Analytics app helps you monitor how well Einstein Discovery models predict actual outcomes over time.
Track Your Renewal Business with the Subscription Analytics App
Create an app to track your subscription renewals and the value of your subscription-based products in a dashboard. The Subscription
Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Monitor Your Configure-Price-Quote Process with the Quoting Analytics App
Create an app to get instant insights into your configure-price-quote process and its effectiveness across teams, regions, and products.
View quotes across all your accounts, uncover bottlenecks, and assess reps’ discount practices in ready-made dashboards. The
Quoting Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
1779
Get Insights into Deal Pricing with the Pricing Analytics App
Create an app to get instant insights into how your organization prices deals. Connect with Einstein Discovery to get discount
recommendations for every quote. The Pricing Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Adoption Analytics Template
Get insight into how your team uses CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, lenses, and datasets. Use the Adoption Analytics template to
create an app with datasets and dashboards to track the use of your CRM Analytics assets.
Evaluate Your Marketing with the Campaign Analytics App
See how your marketing campaigns translate to revenue and impact the bottom line. Compare performance over time, drill into
regional top performers, and highlight successful campaigns. Also review channels to see which are most effective. The Campaign
Evaluate Your Scheduling Efficiency with the Appointment Analytics App
Learn about your team’s appointment volume and your reps’ performance to see how well your service team is applying their
resources to meet customer needs. The Appointment Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Revenue Operations Analytics App
Help sales teams gain performance insights to build stronger pipelines, improve forecast accuracy, and generate more revenue.
Monitor Object Usage with the Change Analytics App
Bring your historical data to life and gain insights into how your team uses an object by visualizing data from any Salesforce object
that uses field history. The Change Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Increase Approval Process Visibility with the Approval Analytics App
Use the Approval Analytics app to view approval history, understand trends, identify bottlenecks, and act to streamline the process.
See the number of approvals and rejections, pending approvals, who’s approved what, and how long approvals take. The Approval
Trend Data Using the Snapshot Analytics App
Monitor trends by capturing a snapshot of a CRM Analytics dataset or Salesforce object. If you’re using a Salesforce object, CRM
Analytics imports its data into a dataset. The Snapshot Analytics app then creates a dashboard with a snapshot of your data. You
can record one snapshot per day.
Visualize Sales Data and Opportunities with the Cluster Analysis Account Segmentation App
Use no-code machine learning to visualize sales data, KPIs, and opportunities by cluster. Get insights into your accounts and products,
and change the number of clusters to see different account segments. The Cluster Analysis Account Segmentation template guides
you through creating the app.
Understand Your Pharmaceutical Sales with the Salesforce Analytics for Veeva App
Salesforce Analytics for Veeva assembles key metrics to give you insight into pharmaceutical reps’ processes and effectiveness. See
how reps manage their accounts using key messages, products, and samples. And use Einstein Discovery to understand the impact
of sales call activities on account orders. The Salesforce Analytics for Veeva template guides you through creating the app.
Service Analytics
The Service Analytics template gets you started fast with Analytics and provides a clear path through your Service Cloud data on
any device. Whether you’re a service manager or agent, you get everything you need in one place to uncover key data insights to
help you grow your business.
Get Sales Predictions with the Einstein Discovery for Sales Analytics App
Identify your most promising accounts—the largest potential opportunities or the ones that you have the greatest chances of
winning or closing quickly. The Einstein Discovery for Sales Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Get Ecommerce Data Insights with the B2B Commerce Analytics App
Help your team track orders, see who’s buying what products, discover year-to-date and year-over-year sales revenue, and more.
The B2B Commerce Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
1780
Social Case Analytics Template

The Social Case Analytics template creates an app that provides ready-made insights into team performance on each social channel.
B2B Marketing Analytics App
Explore your marketing and sales data in one place with B2B Marketing Analytics. Dashboards consolidate Account Engagement
and Sales Cloud data so that you can monitor the impact of marketing on revenue and take instant action to drive marketing results.
Fundraising Analytics Template
The Fundraising Analytics template lets you create an app that brings the power of CRM Analytics to data from the Salesforce
Nonprofit Success Pack.
Fundraising Performance Analytics Template
Nonprofits can measure the impact of fundraising work with a precise picture of donor retention and attrition. The app also provides
actionable insight into donor gains and losses, donation amount gains and losses, and other key performance indicators.
Customer Insights
The Customer Insights app brings together analysis of Sales cloud and Service cloud in a unified, easy-to-customize app. In addition,
it’s easy to customize the dashboard using components. Use the app components as building blocks to create the perfect dashboard
for your environment.
Sales Analytics
Sales Analytics brings the power of Analytics to Sales Cloud on any device that supports Analytics. With intuitive visualizations based
on your Salesforce data, Sales Analytics lets you move from insight to action quickly and helps you turn data into smarter sales.
Multi Org Sales Analytics Template
Use the Multi Org Sales Analytics template to create a scaled-down version of the Sales Analytics that pulls in data from all your
connected orgs.
Lead Trending Analytics Template
Create an app from the Lead Trending Analytics Template to increase your visibility into your team’s lead conversion process. Sales
operations can get instant insight into how quickly the team converts leads and can identify bottlenecks in the conversion process.
Pipeline Analytics Template
Use Pipeline Analytics to plug your pipeline snapshot data into a ready-made waterfall dashboard. You get instant insight into how
the pipeline changes between two snapshots.
The Einstein Accuracy Analytics Template

The Einstein Accuracy Analytics app helps you monitor how well Einstein Discovery models predict actual outcomes over time.
Note: Create the Accuracy Analytics app using the Einstein Discovery Model Manager. See Analyze Prediction Accuracy with the
Einstein Accuracy Analytics App.
1781
Track Your Renewal Business with the Subscription Analytics App

Create an app to track your subscription renewals and the value of your subscription-based products
EDITIONS
in a dashboard. The Subscription Analytics template guides you through creating the app.
Before you create the app, make sure that: Available with CRM
• Your org has at least one Salesforce CPQ Subscription record.
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the Enterprise, Performance,
fields that you want to analyze. and Unlimited Editions. Also
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. available in Developer
Edition. Requires a CRM
2. Select the Subscription Analytics template to open the guided flow. Analytics and Salesforce
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements. CPQ license.
3. If your org meets the minimum requirements, click Looks good, next.
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. USER PERMISSIONS
4. Name and save your app. To create and manage the

Subscription Analytics app:
SEE ALSO: Templated Apps
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here To use the Subscription
Analytics app:
Templated Apps
Monitor Your Configure-Price-Quote Process with the Quoting Analytics App

Create an app to get instant insights into your configure-price-quote process and its effectiveness
EDITIONS
across teams, regions, and products. View quotes across all your accounts, uncover bottlenecks,
and assess reps’ discount practices in ready-made dashboards. The Quoting Analytics template Available with CRM
guides you through creating the app. Analytics, which is available
Before you create the app, make sure that: for an extra cost in
• Your org has at least one Salesforce CPQ Quote record, and quote history is enabled.
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the available in Developer
fields that you want to analyze. Edition. Requires a CRM
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. Analytics and Salesforce
CPQ license.
2. Select the Quoting Analytics template to open the guided flow.
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements.
USER PERMISSIONS
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. Quoting Analytics app:
4. Name and save your app. • Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
To use the Quoting Analytics
SEE ALSO: app:
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
1782
Get Insights into Deal Pricing with the Pricing Analytics App
Create an app to get instant insights into how your organization prices deals. Connect with Einstein
EDITIONS
Discovery to get discount recommendations for every quote. The Pricing Analytics template guides
you through creating the app. Available with CRM
Before you create the app, make sure that: Analytics, which is available
• Your org has at least one Salesforce CPQ Quote Line record.
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the and Unlimited Editions. Also
fields that you want to analyze. available in Developer
1. In Object Manager, add a custom number field for recommended discounts on the Salesforce Edition. Requires a CRM
CPQ Quote Line object (API name SBQQ__QuoteLine__c). Analytics and Salesforce
CPQ license. To create the
2. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. app, you also need the
3. Select the Pricing Analytics template to open the guided flow. Einstein Discovery license.
USER PERMISSIONS
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. To create and manage the
Pricing Analytics app:
5. For tracking the recommended discounts for deals, enter your recommended discounts field. • Manage CRM Analytics
6. (Optional) If you want to track competitors for opportunities, enter the field that you use. If you Templated Apps AND
don’t track competitors, leave this field blank. Manage Einstein
Discovery
7. Click Looks good, next.
To use the Pricing Analytics
8. Name and save your app. app:
9. Select Browse, and then select Apps and open the app. • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
10. On the app’s overview page, in the Stories section, confirm that the Einstein Discovery story is
complete by clicking Pricing.
If the message is “Einstein is in the lab crunching numbers,” the story isn’t done running. If you see a chart with What Happened and
Why It Happened, the story is complete.
11. Deploy the Einstein Discovery model. See Deploy Models.

12. Use bulk scoring to write back recommended discounts to the Salesforce Quote Line object. See Get Predictions With Bulk Scoring.
13. Run the dataflow.
a. In Data Manager, select Manage Dataflows.
b. Locate the dataflow with the same name as your app.
c. From the dataflow's action menu, select Run Now.
SEE ALSO:
Adoption Analytics Template

Get insight into how your team uses CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, lenses, and datasets. Use the Adoption Analytics template to
create an app with datasets and dashboards to track the use of your CRM Analytics assets.
1783
Set Up Your Org for the Adoption Analytics App

Before creating an app from the Adoption Analytics template, configure your org to collect the necessary data. The app collects logs
that track how often users open CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, and lenses. If you have the CRM Analytics Plus or CRM Analytics
Growth license, your app includes Analytics log data. Your app includes Event Monitoring bundle data if you also have the Event
Monitoring license.
Create the Adoption Analytics App
Guided setup walks you through creating an app from the Adoption Analytics template.
Schedule the Data Refresh for the Adoption Analytics App
The Adoption Analytics template creates a dataset called WaveChange, which collects the logs that track how often users open CRM
Analytics apps, dashboards, and lenses. To keep the data in your app up to date, schedule the Adoption Analytics app to refresh
daily.
Upgrade the Adoption Analytics App
Access new features and enhancements by upgrading to the latest version of the app.
Adoption Analytics App Considerations
Keep these considerations in mind when using the Adoption Analytics app template.
Set Up Your Org for the Adoption Analytics App

Before creating an app from the Adoption Analytics template, configure your org to collect the
EDITIONS
necessary data. The app collects logs that track how often users open CRM Analytics apps,
dashboards, and lenses. If you have the CRM Analytics Plus or CRM Analytics Growth license, your Available with CRM
app includes Analytics log data. Your app includes Event Monitoring bundle data if you also have Analytics, which is available
the Event Monitoring license. for an extra cost in
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter Event, and then select Event Monitoring Settings. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Turn on View event log data in analytics apps and Generate event log files. available in Developer
3. In the Quick Find box, enter Analytics, and then select Settings. Edition. All app users have
a CRM Analytics Plus or CRM
4. Select Extract Adoption Analytics Metadata via Dataflow.
Analytics Growth license.
USER PERMISSIONS

• Access Adoption
Apps
AND
Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
To use the Adoption

Analytics app:
Templated Apps
1784
Create the Adoption Analytics App

Guided setup walks you through creating an app from the Adoption Analytics template.
EDITIONS
1. In the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, select Create then App and select the Adoption Analytics
template to open the guided flow. Available with CRM
2. Choose whether to create an app or use the settings from an existing app, and click Continue.
3. Enter the number of days of data, from 2 through 365, that you want CRM Analytics to store to Enterprise, Performance,
use in the Adoption Analytics app. and Unlimited Editions. Also
To prevent a user’s data from being retained, add the user’s 18-character Salesforce ID to the available in Developer
GDPR_Legal_Compute node in the dataflow. Edition.
4. If your org doesn’t use user roles, set Remove UserRole dependencies to Yes.
USER PERMISSIONS
6. Give your app a name, and click Create. To create and manage the
• Access Adoption
SEE ALSO: Analytics Templates and
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here Apps
AND
Templated Apps
To use the Adoption

Analytics app:
Templated Apps
1785
Schedule the Data Refresh for the Adoption Analytics App

The Adoption Analytics template creates a dataset called WaveChange, which collects the logs that
EDITIONS
track how often users open CRM Analytics apps, dashboards, and lenses. To keep the data in your
app up to date, schedule the Adoption Analytics app to refresh daily. Available with CRM
Set the app to refresh at least 1 hour after the WaveChange dataset is refreshed, which usually Analytics, which is available
happens overnight. for an extra cost in
1. In Data Manager, on the Datasets tab, scroll to the WaveChange dataset and look for the refresh
time in the Data Refreshed column. available in Developer
2. Schedule your app refresh by following the steps described in Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Edition.
Analytics App on page 1660.
USER PERMISSIONS

• Access Adoption
Apps
AND
Templated Apps
To use the Adoption

Analytics app:
Templated Apps
1786
Upgrade the Adoption Analytics App

Access new features and enhancements by upgrading to the latest version of the app.
EDITIONS
1. On the Adoption Analytics app’s home page, click New version available.
Available with CRM
2. Read the release note about the new version, and then click Looks good, upgrade.
3. Enter the number of days of data, from 2 through 365, that you want CRM Analytics to store to for an extra cost in
use in the Adoption Analytics app. Enterprise, Performance,
To prevent a user’s data from being retained, add the user’s 18-character Salesforce ID to the and Unlimited Editions. Also
GDPR_Legal_Compute node in the dataflow. available in Developer
Edition.
4. If your org doesn’t use user roles, set Remove UserRole dependencies to Yes.
5. Click Looks good, next. USER PERMISSIONS
6. Upgrading the app overwrites customizations. To retain your customizations, select Create
new app and keep your previous version. If you select Upgrade current app, you lose your To create and manage the
customizations but CRM Analytics retains the historical log data in the WaveChange dataset.
• Access Adoption
7. If you select Create new app, give your app a name, and click Create New. Analytics Templates and
Apps
8. If you select Upgrade current app, confirm that you want to overwrite the current version,
and then click Upgrade app. AND
Templated Apps
Adoption Analytics App Considerations
Keep these considerations in mind when using the Adoption Analytics app template. To use the Adoption
Analytics app:
• Datasets created for the app count against row limits for your CRM Analytics license. • Use CRM Analytics
• Only CRM Analytics logs are included. To include Salesforce logs, use Event Monitoring. Templated Apps
• The first time you use Adoption Analytics, it can take 24 hours for data to be collected in the
event logs and logs data to register in the app’s datasets and dashboard.
• Salesforce stores event log data for 30 days.
• CRM Analytics stores event log data in a dataset for up to 365 days, which counts against your license’s row limit.
1787
Evaluate Your Marketing with the Campaign Analytics App

See how your marketing campaigns translate to revenue and impact the bottom line. Compare
EDITIONS
performance over time, drill into regional top performers, and highlight successful campaigns. Also
review channels to see which are most effective. The Campaign Analytics template guides you Available with CRM
through creating the app. Analytics, which is available
Before you create an app, make sure that: for an extra cost in
• You have at least one row of data in the customizable Campaign Influence object.
fields that you want to analyze. Edition. Requires a CRM
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. Analytics license.
2. Select the Campaign Analytics template to open the guided flow.

USER PERMISSIONS
3. If your org meets the minimum requirements, click Looks good, next. To create and manage the
Campaign Analytics app:
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. • Manage CRM Analytics
4. Name and save your app. Templated Apps
To use the Campaign
Analytics app:
SEE ALSO:
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here Templated Apps
Evaluate Your Scheduling Efficiency with the Appointment Analytics App

Learn about your team’s appointment volume and your reps’ performance to see how well your
EDITIONS
service team is applying their resources to meet customer needs. The Appointment Analytics
template guides you through creating the app. Available with CRM
Before you create an app, make sure that: Analytics, which is available
• You have at least two rows of data in the Service Appointment object.
• Lightning Scheduler is set up in your org. See Manage Business Information in Salesforce and Unlimited Editions. Also
Scheduler. available in Developer
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. Edition. Requires a CRM
Analytics license.
2. Select the Appointment Analytics template to open the guided flow.
USER PERMISSIONS
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. Appointment Analytics app:
4. Name and save your app. • Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
To use the Appointment
SEE ALSO:
Analytics app:
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
1788
Revenue Operations Analytics App

Help sales teams gain performance insights to build stronger pipelines, improve forecast accuracy, and generate more revenue.
1. Create the Revenue Operations Analytics App

A guided flow walks you through creating an app from the Revenue Operations Analytics template.
2. Upload a Quota Dataset to the Revenue Operations Analytics App
If you don’t have Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts enabled, you must add quota data to your app. Without quota data, the Team
Performance charts can’t provide an accurate visualization of performance metrics.
3. Configure an Embedded Forecast Overview Dashboard
You can embed the Forecast Overview dashboard in Lightning Experience and Aloha pages. Edit the embedded dashboard to set
target lines and the upper bounds for gauges.
4. Revenue Operations Analytics Datasets
The Revenue Operations Analytics template creates datasets based on your Salesforce configuration.
Create the Revenue Operations Analytics App

A guided flow walks you through creating an app from the Revenue Operations Analytics template.
EDITIONS
Before you create an app, make sure that:
Available with CRM
• You have at least one record for each of the Opportunity, Account, Forecasting Item, Forecasting
Type, User, and UserRole objects.
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the Enterprise, Performance,
fields used in the app. and Unlimited Editions. Also
2. Select the Revenue Operations Analytics template to open the guided flow. Analytics Plus license.
3. If you have a Revenue Operations Analytics app, choose whether you want to base this app on
an existing one or create another.
USER PERMISSIONS
4. If your org meets the minimum requirements, click Looks good, next. Revenue Operations
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. Analytics app:
5. If you use a different field than amount to track the total opportunity value, select the field that Admin permission set
you use, and then click Looks good, next.
To use the Revenue
6. Name and save your app. Operations Analytics app:
7. To create snapshots of your opportunity data for period-over-period comparisons, schedule
permission set
your app to refresh.
The Revenue Operations Analytics app creates two dataflows, one to process the revenue data
and another for opportunity data snapshots. A refresh syncs both dataflows. Select a time outside normal work hours so that the
data refresh doesn’t interrupt business activities. See Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics App on page 1660.
1789
The Revenue Operations Analytics app generates an Einstein Discovery story to predict ways to maximize your sales team’s win rates.
The story contains insights on the top revenue drivers—the factors that have top positive and negative impacts on the forecast. The AI
or machine learning model is natively generated at app creation.
SEE ALSO:
Upload a Quota Dataset to the Revenue Operations Analytics App

If you don’t have Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts enabled, you must add quota data to your
EDITIONS
app. Without quota data, the Team Performance charts can’t provide an accurate visualization of
performance metrics. Available with CRM
Your quota data must be in a CSV file and contain these fields in this order. Analytics, which is available
• StartDate (yyyy-mm-dd format)
• QuotaAmount and Unlimited Editions. Also
• OwnerName available in Developer
• Username
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Browse and find the Quota dataset. USER PERMISSIONS
2. In the Quota dataset dropdown menu, select Edit.
3. Revenue Operations
Analytics app:
In the upper-right corner, click the replace data icon. • CRM Analytics Plus
4. Locate the CSV file.
To use the Revenue
5. Click Next. Operations Analytics app:
6. If your fiscal period starts on a date other than January 1, update the Quota Metadata file. • CRM Analytics Plus User
permission set
a. Copy the JSON from Sales Analytics Quota Dataset JSON File and paste it into a text editor.
b. Change the value of "fiscalMonthOffset" from 4 to a number that represents the
month that your fiscal period starts, where “0” indicates January, “1” February, and so on, up to “11” for December.
c. Save the file.
d. On the Replace Dataset Data page, locate the Data Schema File area.
e. Click the arrow next to the Quota .JSON file, select Replace File, find the file that you saved and upload it.
7. On the Replace Dataset Data page, click Next.

8. Select the first column —QuotaAmount— and in the Field Attributes panel on the right, set Field Type to Measure.
1790
9. Upload your CSV file with the quota data.

10. Rerun the dataflow to update the dashboards.
a. In Data Manager, click Dataflows & Recipes and find your app’s dataflow.
b. In the app dataflow’s dropdown menu, click Run now.
Configure an Embedded Forecast Overview Dashboard

You can embed the Forecast Overview dashboard in Lightning Experience and Aloha pages. Edit
EDITIONS
the embedded dashboard to set target lines and the upper bounds for gauges.
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Browse and find the dashboard. Available with CRM
2. In the dashboard’s dropdown menu, select Edit.
3. Click the widget that you want to edit. Enterprise, Performance,
4. In the properties panel on the right, change the target lines or upper bound values. and Unlimited Editions. Also
5. Save the dashboard. Edition. Requires a CRM
SEE ALSO:
Embed Dashboards in Lightning Pages USER PERMISSIONS

Revenue Operations Analytics Datasets Revenue Operations
The Revenue Operations Analytics template creates datasets based on your Salesforce configuration. Analytics app:
To use the Revenue
Account Data about accounts. None Operations Analytics app:
Opportunity Data about opportunities. None
permission set
Includes records joined on
opportunity split and
opportunity amount.
1791

Opportunity Splits Data about opportunities splits. The Included only if opportunity splits is enabled
cumulative split amount is used for the
opportunity amount.
Forecast Data about forecasts, including the item, Included only if forecasting is enabled
quota, and type.
User Roles Data about users, including role, Included only if user roles is enabled
opportunity, and role hierarchy.
Forecasting Quota Data about forecasting quotas. None
Product Data about your products. None
Oppty Products Data about product opportunities. None
Monitor Object Usage with the Change Analytics App

Bring your historical data to life and gain insights into how your team uses an object by visualizing
EDITIONS
data from any Salesforce object that uses field history. The Change Analytics template guides you
through creating the app. Available with CRM
Before you create an app, make sure that: Analytics, which is available
• The object that you want to analyze has fields with Field History Tracking and valid history
records
fields that you want to analyze Edition. Requires a CRM
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. Analytics license.
2. Select the Change Analytics template to open the guided flow.

USER PERMISSIONS
3. Select an object.
Only the objects with history tracking enabled are listed. To create and manage the
Change Analytics app:
4. Select up to eight fields to track. • Manage CRM Analytics
Only the object’s fields that have history records are listed. Templated Apps
To use the Change Analytics
5. Select up to eight fields to include with the tracked fields.
app:
The history for these fields isn’t tracked, but they’re included in the app’s datasets and dashboard • Use CRM Analytics
filters for context. Templated Apps

7. Name and save your app.
Use a name that makes the app easy to find. For example, if you’re analyzing changes in the Case object, use a name such as Case
Object Change Analytics.
SEE ALSO:
1792
Increase Approval Process Visibility with the Approval Analytics App

Use the Approval Analytics app to view approval history, understand trends, identify bottlenecks,
EDITIONS
and act to streamline the process. See the number of approvals and rejections, pending approvals,
who’s approved what, and how long approvals take. The Approval Analytics template guides you Available with CRM
through creating the app. Analytics, which is available
• Your org has an approval process defined and at least one object with a record submitted for
approval. available in Developer
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the Edition. Requires a CRM
fields that you want to analyze. Analytics license.
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App.
2. Select the Approval Analytics template to open the guided flow. USER PERMISSIONS
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements. To create and manage the
Approval Analytics app:
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. Templated Apps
4. Name and save your app. To use the Approval
Analytics app:
SEE ALSO: Templated Apps
Trend Data Using the Snapshot Analytics App

Monitor trends by capturing a snapshot of a CRM Analytics dataset or Salesforce object. If you’re
EDITIONS
using a Salesforce object, CRM Analytics imports its data into a dataset. The Snapshot Analytics app
then creates a dashboard with a snapshot of your data. You can record one snapshot per day. Available with CRM
See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general information about creating Analytics, which is available
CRM Analytics template apps. for an extra cost in
Tip: You can’t re-create snapshot data. We recommend that you take a separate snapshot and Unlimited Editions. Also
to guard against data loss. For example, if you’re taking a weekly snapshot of orders, make a available in Developer
copy that takes snapshots monthly or quarterly. Snapshot copies count toward your dataset Edition.
row limit.
USER PERMISSIONS
Create a Snapshot of a CRM Analytics Dataset
To create and manage a
1. In the Snapshot Analytics wizard, select Start With an Existing Dataset and click Looks good, Snapshot Analytics app:
next. • Manage CRM Analytics
2. Select the dataset that you want a snapshot of. Templated Apps
If you don’t see the dataset that you want to use, check that you have the Use Any API Client To use the Snapshot
permission. See Restrict Access to APIs with Connected Apps. Analytics app:
3. Add up to six dimensions to include in your dashboard. Templated Apps
4. Add up to three measure fields to include in the chart.
1793
6. Select the number of days to keep the snapshot.

To save storage space, set a time to delete the snapshot from CRM Analytics automatically. If you select Never, CRM Analytics
preserves your data until you manually delete it.

You can set the snapshot frequency by rescheduling the Snapshot Analytics dataflow. See Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics
Template.
To add actions, measure formatting, and dimension labels to the app, edit the dataset created from Salesforce objects. See Edit a Dataset
and Enable Actions for CRM Analytics Lenses and Dashboards.
Create a Snapshot of Salesforce Object Data

1. In the Snapshot Analytics wizard, select Start With Salesforce Objects and click Looks good, next.
2. Select an object.
3. (Optional) Select up to two child objects to tailor the data.
For example, say that you select Account for the parent object and Contact as the child object. Snapshot Analytics adds only the
accounts related to contacts in the dataset. If you don’t include a child object, Snapshot Analytics adds all the data from the parent
object.

5. Add fields from any of the selected Salesforce objects to the Snapshot Analytics dataset, and then click Looks good, next.
6. Select the number of days to keep the snapshot.
To save storage space, set a time to delete the snapshot from CRM Analytics automatically. If you select Never, CRM Analytics
preserves your data until you manually delete it.

To add actions, measures, or dimensions, edit the dataset created from Salesforce objects.
You can set the snapshot frequency by rescheduling the Snapshot Analytics dataflow. See Schedule Data Refresh for a CRM Analytics
Template.
To add actions, measure formatting, and dimension labels to the app, edit the dataset created from Salesforce objects. See Edit a Dataset
and Enable Actions for CRM Analytics Lenses and Dashboards.
1794
Visualize Sales Data and Opportunities with the Cluster Analysis Account Segmentation App
Use no-code machine learning to visualize sales data, KPIs, and opportunities by cluster. Get insights
EDITIONS
into your accounts and products, and change the number of clusters to see different account
segments. The Cluster Analysis Account Segmentation template guides you through creating the Available with CRM
app. Analytics, which is available
• Your org uses the Account, Opportunity, and Product objects and that you have at least one
opportunity with a product linked to an account. available in Developer
• The Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce field-level security to view the Edition. Requires a CRM
fields that you want to analyze. Analytics license.
2. Select the Cluster Analysis: Account Segmentation template to open the guided flow. USER PERMISSIONS
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements. To create and manage the
Cluster Analysis Account
Segmentation app:
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. • Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
To use the Cluster Analysis
Account Segmentation app:
SEE ALSO: • Use CRM Analytics
Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here Templated Apps
Understand Your Pharmaceutical Sales with the Salesforce Analytics for Veeva App
Salesforce Analytics for Veeva assembles key metrics to give you insight into pharmaceutical reps’
EDITIONS
processes and effectiveness. See how reps manage their accounts using key messages, products,
and samples. And use Einstein Discovery to understand the impact of sales call activities on account Available with CRM
orders. The Salesforce Analytics for Veeva template guides you through creating the app. Analytics, which is available
Before you create an app, ensure that the Analytics Integration User has the appropriate Salesforce for an extra cost in
field-level security to view the fields that you want to analyze. Enterprise, Performance,
2. Select the Salesforce Analytics for Veeva template to open the guided flow. Edition. Requires a CRM
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements. Analytics and Veeva CRM
license.
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. USER PERMISSIONS
Salesforce Analytics for
SEE ALSO: Veeva app:
Templated Apps
To use the Salesforce
Analytics for Veeva app:
Templated Apps
1795
Service Analytics
The Service Analytics template gets you started fast with Analytics and provides a clear path through your Service Cloud data on any
device. Whether you’re a service manager or agent, you get everything you need in one place to uncover key data insights to help you
grow your business.
Tip: Follow the steps in the order shown to get started with Service Analytics. If you haven’t used Analytics before, learn more
about it from the Analytics Documentation.
Note: Service Analytics is available only in English.
1. About Service Analytics

Salesforce created the Service Analytics template to make it easy for service managers and agents to use data to drive the success
of your service business. Learn the app’s benefits before you create and use the app to explore your Service Cloud data.
2. Service Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard and Datasets
The Service Analytics app includes prebuilt dashboards and datasets to accelerate data exploration for both service managers and
agents.
3. Set Up Permissions for the Service Analytics
Set up your organization to use the Service Analytics by enabling CRM Analytics and creating and assigning permission sets.
4. Create Service Analytics
Follow these steps to create Service Analytics and start uncovering the value of your Salesforce data—fast.
5. Customize Service Analytics with the Configuration Wizard
Create Service Analytics with the configuration wizard so the app reflects how your company prefers to view Service Cloud data.
6. Share Service Analytics
Members of your team can only use Service Analytics if you share it with them.
7. Reconfigure Service Analytics
To restore deleted or altered dashboards or change wizard settings, reconfigure an existing version of Service Analytics.
8. Delete Service Analytics
Delete apps to start app creation all over or to get rid of apps you no longer use.
9. Upgrade Service Analytics
Take advantage of the latest Service Analytics features by upgrading your app every time we release a new version.
10. Schedule the Service Analytics Data Sync and Dataflow
Schedule a daily app refresh to assure that Service Analytics uses up-to-date data.
11. Embed Service Analytics Sidebar Dashboards in a Salesforce Page
Add Service Analytics dashboards to Salesforce pages so your service team can get a complete view of their cases and take appropriate
action.
12. Understand Service Analytics Limitations
Service Analytics requires that Service Cloud include specific data, initially supports a limited set of Salesforce objects, and has other
miscellaneous limitations.
1796
About Service Analytics

Salesforce created the Service Analytics template to make it easy for service managers and agents
EDITIONS
to use data to drive the success of your service business. Learn the app’s benefits before you create
and use the app to explore your Service Cloud data. Available in Salesforce
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS

templated apps:
Templated Apps
To use Service Analytics:
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
Dataflows
1797
Service Analytics dashboards give you best-practice key performance indicators (KPIs) about your Salesforce service data in a single
place. We’ve based the app’s dashboards on learnings from many years of helping businesses manage customer relationships. The goal
is to provide the right amount of information at the right time to help both managers and agents make the right decision.
Service managers get a complete view of service customer data that includes trending as well as historical and peer benchmarks. Agents
can quickly view a snapshot of each case and customer to help them make quick decisions about their next customer interactions.
We’ve done a lot of the hard work: Our team has built complex queries, formulas, and ratios that draw from your service and sales data
and assembled them into easy-to-read visualizations. You create the app: using a built-in configurator, answer a few questions about
the data and fields you want to see, and CRM Analytics takes care of the rest. When you’ve created the app, use its prebuilt datasets and
dashboards to explore Service Cloud data from any device that supports CRM Analytics.
You get actionable insights fast from your data using the intuitive CRM Analytics interface. And you can drill deeper into key aspects of
your business by customizing Service Analytics around your needs.
Note: Your organization can use Service Analytics without CRM Analytics platform by purchasing a Service Analytics license. A
Service Analytics license is included with the CRM Analytics platform license.
1798
Service Analytics Prebuilt Dashboard and Datasets

The Service Analytics app includes prebuilt dashboards and datasets to accelerate data exploration
USER PERMISSIONS
for both service managers and agents.
Note: The dashboards and datasets included in your instance of Service Analytics can differ.
The ones you see depend on how you answer configuration wizard questions when you Templated Apps
create the app.
To use Service Analytics:
Service Analytics Dashboards Analytics Templates and
Apps
Service Analytics prebuilt dashboards contain best practices that help you get value from your
Salesforce data—fast. The dashboards let you manage service cases and forecast and understand To create and manage CRM
key business performance drivers, visualize trends, and assign actions. They also help you get fast Analytics apps:
answers to questions you have about your service business’s results. • Manage CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
Dataflows
1799
Dashboards available from the app provide a complete view of service customer data that includes all your key service performance
indicators in one place. Managers can quickly view average case closing times, customer satisfaction, trendings, and historical and peer
benchmarks. They can also get insight into the teams’ use of knowledge to resolve cases and other data so they can quickly take
appropriate action.
Another set of dashboards -- called sidebars -- are specifically for service agents. Embed sidebars in a Salesforce page, such as the service
console, to make them more accessible to agents during their day-to-day work. For a given case, an agent can view customer history,
number of cases, and CSAT. Agents can also see previous customer actions and their result so they can find out what worked. The goal
is to provide agents the right amount of information at the right time to help them take the right action.
The following table guides you through Service Analytics dashboards. You can also explore further on your own at any point. To learn
more about exploring data in CRM Analytics, see Explore and Visualize Your Data in CRM Analytics on page 1264.
Table 18: Service Analytics Dashboards

Dashboard Name Contents Target User
Service Analytics Overview (Service Manager Start here. Summarizes key performance Service manager
Overview) indicators (KPIs) from your Service Cloud,
including open cases in the backlog, agent
average time to close, and first contact
resolution rate. Helps you gauge health of
the business and surface issues requiring
further investigation. Also, provides
springboard to all other dashboards.
Account Profile Provides a full breakdown of a selected Service manager

customer’s service history and current
backlog and includes customer satisfaction
(CSAT) data and trends. If you track
Opportunity data, you can also see pending
and closed deals.
Agent Activity Helps determine how well agents use their Service manager
time. Shows how much work agents do and
how their work aligns with case-closing
numbers and duration as well as CSAT.
Agent Performance Shows agent and team performance against Service manager
key activity and customer satisfaction
metrics. Performance trends and
benchmarks on agent performance help
you provide direction and drive agent
success.
Channel Review Shows CSAT and activities—duration and Service manager

volume—on cases by channel to help you
monitor success of each channel.
Backlog Gives complete view of your backlog to Service manager

show how efficiently your team resolves
cases and how quickly your backlog is
growing. Helps you prioritize and
acquire/assign resources accordingly.
1800

Customer Satisfaction Highlights CSAT measures so you can Service manager
identify specific areas to improve the service
experience. Indicates most/least satisfied
customers and associates agents, products,
and channels with CSAT.
Knowledge Impact Provides a view into how knowledge articles Service manager
attached to cases impact CSAT and
resolution time. See which agents used the
most articles to determine who needs
training/coaching in the use of knowledge
to help resolve service issues
Knowledge Use Helps you understand how agents use Service manager
knowledge articles to help you drive article
creation. See which articles are attached the
most and the least and which have the most
views or votes (high ratings) over time.
Chat Shows how your team uses chat to help Service manager
solve support cases. Includes number of
chats, days of the week with most activity,
missed or abandoned chats, chat length,
and average handle time.
Omni Gives managers insight into agent utilization Service manager

based on Omni-Channel work record
tracking. Includes incoming agent work
volume, average speed to answer, average
handle time, average active time, and other
agent utilization metrics.
Open Cases Shows current open case workload to help Service manager
you prioritize, investigate problematic cases,
and view escalations and SLA compliance.
Let’s you prioritize cases by accounts and
pending deals so you can take appropriate
action.
Telephony Helps you understand the impact of phone Service manager

contact with customers during service case
resolution. Filter call volume and duration
by inbound or outbound call, the result of
the call, and other factors. Also relates call
volume to agent performance.
Sidebar – By Customer Provides a snapshot of customers, including Service agent

the service products they’re using, case
reason, and priority. Also shows which
1801

agents have helped customers and provides
a CSAT overview.
Sidebar – By Similarity Shows a snapshot of historical data to help Service agent

guide further customer interactions. Shows
if there are other cases similar to the ones
they’re resolving. Helps agents identify
potential product issues or candidates for
creating knowledge and find agents who
have worked similar cases.
Sidebar – By Case History Gives an overview of case history or lifecycle Service agent
so agents can be more informed during
customer conversations. Includes a snapshot
of case interactions and duration of case
against the average.
My Performance Summary Gives agents visibility to their own Service agent

productivity so they’re always aware of their
results towards targets as tracked in
Salesforce. Includes ranking within the
support center, trends, and benchmarking
so they’re always prepared for meetings
with managers and reviews. Typically results
in higher agent satisfaction and
performance and lower turnover rates.
Service Analytics Datasets

The table lists all the possible standard datasets that become part of Service Analytics when you create the app.
Table 19: Service Analytics Datasets

Dataset Name Contents
Service Activity Replaces Service Event and Service Task datasets used in Classic
version of app. Data about events and tasks associated with cases,
including last modified date and case duration. (Your Service Cloud
data must include at least one event and one task for Service
Analytics dashboards to function correctly.)
Service Case Data about cases, including duration, last modified date, and
customer satisfaction measure.
Service Case History Data about case history, including owner, type, and creation date.
Service Chat Transcript One of two Service Analytics datasets with data about your team’s
use of Chat usage. Includes data from Chat transcripts, such as
response times, numbers of messages per chat, and chat duration.
1802
Dataset Name Contents

Service Chat Transcript Event One of two Service Analytics datasets with data about your team’s
Chat usage. Includes data about Chat events, such as if chats are
accepted, queued, declined, or transferred.
Service Knowledge Data about use of knowledge articles in cases, such as number of
views, ratings, last referenced dates, and case associations.
Service Knowledge Attached Data about attachment of knowledge articles to cases including
whether articles are shared by email, article version number, and
case type.
Service Omni Agent Work One of two Service Analytics datasets with data from Omni-Channel
Agent Work object. Includes data that helps you track information
about the assignments your agents work on, including the queue,
channel, status, and speed to answer. (Your org must use
Omni-Channel to create and route work items for Service Analytics
to create this dataset. You must also answer Yes to the
configuration wizard question about Omni-Channel.)
Service Omni User Presence One of two Service Analytics datasets with data from Omni-Channel
User Presence object. User presence records contain fields that
help you track information about agent availability. (Your org must
use Omni-Channel to create and route work items for Service
Analytics to create this dataset. You must also answer Yes to the
configuration wizard question about Omni-Channel.)
Service Opportunities Data about opportunities so you can filter cases by opportunity for
prioritization and appropriate action.
Service Event (Only in Classic version of app.) Data about events associated with cases, including last modified
date and case duration. (Your Service Cloud data must include at
least one event for Service Analytics dashboards to function
correctly.)
Service Task (Only in Classic version of app.) Data about tasks associated with cases, including last modified
date and case duration. (Your Service Cloud data must include at
least one task for Service Analytics dashboards to function correctly.)
Set Up Permissions for the Service Analytics

Set up your organization to use the Service Analytics by enabling CRM Analytics and creating and
USER PERMISSIONS
assigning permission sets.
To set up CRM Analytics
Important: Customers set up to use CRM Analytics Growth licenses have the required user
users:
permissions to access Service Analytics. The following instructions apply only to customers • Manage CRM Analytics
with the Service Analytics license.
Each Service Analytics license is a single-user license that provides access to Service Analytics. It
includes a single Service Analytics app single-user license. The table shows data storage limits for the app. If you require more data, you
can purchase Analytics Cloud - Additional Data Rows, which entitles you to an additional 100 million rows.
1803
Table 20: Service Analytics Data Storage Limits

License Limit
Analytics Cloud - Service Analytics 25 million rows when used without CRM Analytics Growth license.
Use of Service Analytics app license does not increase data limit
for platform license.
Analytics Cloud - Additional Data Rows 100 million rows.
Important: Service Analytics license data storage limits are contractual, not technical. Licensee agrees to strictly monitor its total
number of data rows.
Your org can use the Service Analytics with or without the CRM Analytics platform.
To give administrators or users in your org access to the Service Analytics, enable CRM Analytics and assign ready-made permission sets
to them. By assigning permission sets, you also assign the Service Analytics permission set license.
Warning: Assign the Service Analytics Admin permission set sparingly because it lets users administer Service Analytics, which
lets them create, edit, and delete the app. Assign it only to users who administer or manage the app. Users with Service Analytics
User and Editor or Manager access to the app can create, edit, and delete app assets.
1. First, enable Analytics. In Salesforce Setup, enter Analytics in the QuickFind (search) field, then click Getting Started.
2. Click Enable Analytics.
3. Now, assign permission sets. In Salesforce Setup, enter Users in the QuickFind field.
4. Click Permission Sets.
5. Scroll through the list of permission sets until you see Service Analytics Admin and Service Analytics User.
6. For users who require administrator-level access to Service Analytics, assign the Service Analytics Admin permission set. This
permission set enables all user permissions for the app shown in the table.
a. Click Service Analytics Admin.
b. Click Manage Assignments, then Add Assignments.
c. Check the boxes next to the names of the users who require administrator-level access to the app.
d. Click Assign, then click Done.
The selected users can now create and manage Service Analytics.
7. To assign user-level access to Service Analytics, assign the Service Analytics User permission set.
a. Click Service Analytics User.
b. Click Manage Assignments, then Add Assignments.
c. Check the boxes next to the names of the users who require access to the app.
d. Click Assign, then click Done.
The selected users can now use Service Analytics.
After you’ve completed these steps, create and share Service Analytics with the users in your organization. Users can only explore Service
Analytics dashboards and datasets after you’ve shared the app with them.
1804
Create Service Analytics

Follow these steps to create Service Analytics and start uncovering the value of your Salesforce
USER PERMISSIONS
data—fast.
For rapid app creation, choose the basic creation option, which uses default settings to create To create and manage CRM
Service Analytics. To set up the app according to your team’s specific Service Cloud analytics Analytics apps:
requirements, choose custom creation.
Templated Apps
Important: Service Analytics requires that your org has at least one closed case and one
task. It also requires that your org has at least one contact ID associated with a case.
2. Set field level security to enable the CRM Analytics Integration User to see all fields you’d like your app to use. Integration users run
the dataflow, and if they don’t have proper field-level security permissions, the dataflow can fail.
a. Go to Setup and enter the name of an object—for example, Accounts or Cases—in the Quick Find box and hit Enter.
b. Click the name of the object.
c. The next window shows all the fields for the object. Go to the one(s) where you need to edit field-level security.
d. Look for the Analytics Cloud Integration User, check the box(es) for the required fields under Visible, and click Save.
e. Repeat the Steps a through d for all objects with fields you want to use.
f. Refresh your browser cache.
3. From the App Launcher ( ), find and open CRM Analytics Studio.
4. If you’ve created an app before: Choose between creating a brand new app or creating an app based on settings from a
previously-created app. Click Continue. Service Analytics scans your org’s data and features. For details about the scan, see Checking
Data and Features with the Service Analytics Configuration Wizard.
Tip: If you want to create your app with different settings, repeat the previous steps and select the previously-created app
here. Complete app creation choosing different wizard settings and give your app a new name.
5. If the scan detects your org is missing required data, Service Analytics displays error messages telling you what to do. Follow the
instructions and start app creation again. Position your cursor over tooltips to see more detail. If there are no errors, click Looks
good, next.
6. Choose between basic and custom creation options to set up your app. Select Basic to set up your app quickly based on standard
settings determined by the org data check. Select Custom to open the configuration wizard. The wizard helps fine-tune app setup
to reflect the way your team wants to view data. See Customize Service Analytics with the Configuration Wizard.
7. If you choose Basic: Click Looks good, next. Answer the question about the field you use to categorize cases. Click Looks good,
next, and skip to Step 10. See Service Analytics Wizard Basic Create Option.
8. If you choose Custom: The wizard asks you to choose Salesforce objects to add to Service Analytics. It then takes you through a set
of questions about how you prefer to view data. See Service Analytics Wizard Custom Create Option on page 1809.
9. Give your app a name that’s easily recognizable to others in your company and click Create. That starts a dataflow,which creates
the app and its assets (a dataflow definition file, datasets, and dashboards). The app creation process can take a few minutes. During
that process, Service Analytics runs a final scan to be sure the Analytics Integration User has access to all fields you select in the
wizard. If the scan fails, you see an error message with the fields that can’t be accessed. Return to Step 2 and give the Integration
User access to those fields.
10. You can check the status of the dataflow while you wait. In CRM Analytics Studio, click the gear menu at the upper right of the page,
and select Data Manager. From the pulldown menu, select Dataflow View and look for your app.
1805
Taking a few extra steps can make Service Analytics better serve the needs of your organization:
• Embed the sidebar dashboards on page 1817 in a Salesforce page of your choice, such as the service console. This step provides a
seamless analytics experience for service agents. Embedding sidebars in pages used regularly by agents gives them access to key
metrics as part of their regular work to help the take the most effective customer action.
• Add datasets to the app based on Salesforce data using the CRM Analytics dataset builder on page 1018. Service Analytics includes a
default set of datasets based on your Salesforce data. Creating additional datasets lets your service managers and view other Salesforce
data through the app.
Note: Service Analytics does not support data sources external to Salesforce or registering new datasets from the app-generated
dataflow.
• Add objects, fields, and filters to Service Analytics. Edit the app’s dataflow on page 1109 to include standard and custom objects and
fields from Salesforce.
Note: To create new datasets with just the Service Analytics app license, use the CRM Analytics dataset builder. CRM Analytics
associates new datasets created using the builder with the CRM Analytics default dataflow. If you edit the dataflow for the Service
Analytics to register new datasets, you can’t access the resulting datasets.
Customize Service Analytics with the Configuration Wizard

Create Service Analytics with the configuration wizard so the app reflects how your company prefers
USER PERMISSIONS
to view Service Cloud data.
When you start the app creation process, Service Analytics opens the configuration wizard. The To create and manage CRM
wizard guides you through these steps. Analytics apps:
1. Checks your org to be sure it meets minimum data requirements and to detect features that Templated Apps
can be added to your app. The results let you know if you have to add data or change Salesforce
settings to create the app. It also lets you know about available features.
Dataflows
2. Asks you to choose between basic and custom create options. Basic is intended for first-time
app users, while custom lets experienced administrators fine-tune app setup.
3. Choose the basic option, and CRM Analytics creates the app quickly with default settings.
4. Choose custom and the wizard guides you through the steps to fine-tune your app.
a. Add features to your app
b. Answer a series of questions about how you use data in your org.
The following provide details about each using each part of the wizard. Read them in the order shown to get the best results when you
create Service Analytics. Click the question mark in the top-right corner of each page of the wizard to see help for that page.
1. Service Analytics Wizard Data and Feature Check

At the start of app creation, Service Analytics scans your org. It checks to make sure you can create the app and looks for features
and data to add to your app.
2. Choose Service Analytics App Creation Options
After Service Analytics checks your org’s data and features, choose between basics and custom app creation options.
1806
3. Use the Service Analytics Basic Create Option

Select the basic app creation option when you create Service Analytics for the first time or when you want to create the app quickly.
4. Use the Service Analytics Custom Create Option
Custom app creation gives you fine-grained control over Service Analytics features and data.
5. How to Answer Service Analytics Custom Wizard Questions
After you add features to Service Analytics, the custom version of the configuration wizard asks you a series of questions about your
data. Follow these general guidelines, and the specifics that follow, to get the best result.
6. Data Drill Down Questions, Service Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6
Tell Service Analytics how you prefer to drill into data about cases, including category, type, severity, owner, and reason, and if they’re
resolved at first contact.
7. Questions About Features Added to Service Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6
Provide more specifics about how Service Analytics uses data from the features you add to the app.
8. Set Up Service Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example
This scenario provides details to help you answer questions about CSAT data in Step 6 of the Service Analytics configuration wizard.
Service Analytics Wizard Data and Feature Check

At the start of app creation, Service Analytics scans your org. It checks to make sure you can create
USER PERMISSIONS
the app and looks for features and data to add to your app.
Service Analytics checks your org for data and features when you open the configuration wizard. To create and manage CRM
If it finds any issues you need to correct before creating the app, you see messages that tell you Analytics apps:
what to do. Position your cursor over the tooltip for more information. Templated Apps
Here are details about each phase of the check. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
Minimum Requirements
Your org must have at least one closed case and one closed task to enable app creation. If you see an error message, go to Service Cloud,
close a case and a task, and try creating the app again.
Features to Add to Your App

The wizard checks to see if you track data about the following in your org.
• Knowledge
• Case history
• Opportunity
• Queues
• Events
• Business hours
• Opportunity record types
• Telephony
• Chat
1807
• Omni-Channel
The tooltip tells you what features are available in your org. Basic app creation automatically adds those features. Custom app
creation lets you choose the ones to add.
Note: CSAT and knowledge data can only be added using custom app creation.
The wizard checks if the Analytics Integration User has access to all fields needed to create the app using the basic create option. If the
Integration User can’t access all fields, you see a warning and the tooltip lists the fields that lack access. Go to Salesforce Setup and
provide access to those fields. See Create Service Analytics on page 1805, Step 2, for details. Until all fields are available, you can’t use the
basic create option.
Fiscal Calendar Setting

The wizard looks for your org’s fiscal year start date and uses it for Service Analytics. To choose a different fiscal start date, use the app’s
Custom create option.
Choose Service Analytics App Creation Options

After Service Analytics checks your org’s data and features, choose between basics and custom app
USER PERMISSIONS
creation options.
Select Basic if you’re using Service Analytics for the first time. It sets up your app quickly based on To create and manage CRM
standard settings determined by the org compatibility check. You get an immediately useful version Analytics apps:
of the app so you can see how it works. Experiment with it and share it with your team. Based on
Templated Apps
what you learn, change the standard settings by recreating the app using the custom create option.
Service Analytics disables basic app creation if the Analytics Integration User can’t access all required
Dataflows
fields. If the basic option is disabled, click Back to return to the org check and follow the instructions
in the field-level security tooltip and error message.
Select Custom and follow additional steps in the wizard to make your own, custom settings to reflect the way you and others on your
team want to view data. The initial, default settings in the screens that follow are the ones used when you create an app using the basic
create option. Custom create lets you vary these settings to meet your team’s specific needs. You can choose to add or delete features
detected by the org check. You can also make specific choices about the data used in the app’s dashboards.
Whether you use basic or custom create, Service Analytics runs a final scan of your org’s field-level security settings. The scan detects if
the Analytics Integration User has access to all data fields required to create the app. If the scan fails, you see a message telling you how
to fix the issue. For more information about field-level security settings, see See Create Service Analytics, Step 2.
Use the Service Analytics Basic Create Option

Select the basic app creation option when you create Service Analytics for the first time or when
USER PERMISSIONS
you want to create the app quickly.
The basic create option uses data, features, and default settings detected during the compatibility To create and manage CRM
check that runs when you start app creation. Analytics apps:
The wizard asks you a single, required question about the field you use to categorize cases. Choose Templated Apps
the name of the field your business uses most to identify and organize cases, such as service product,
type or level. Then click Looks good, next.
Dataflows
Name your app, and click Create.
1808
Basic create can’t use customer satisfaction and knowledge data. Service Analytics requires more information about how they’re used
in your org before creating an app. To add them, use the custom create option, and the wizard asks for the required details.
Basic create uses these settings.
• To identify cases by geography, the Billing State/Province field from the Accounts object.
• Fifty (50) seconds as the maximum time agents can keep customers waiting during phone calls.
To vary these settings based on how you use Service Cloud, select the custom create option.
Consult Create Service Analytics on page 1805 for details about creating your app.
Use the Service Analytics Custom Create Option

Custom app creation gives you fine-grained control over Service Analytics features and data.
USER PERMISSIONS
Add Data and Features To create and manage CRM

Analytics apps:
The first window in the custom creation process lets you add data and features to your app. By • Manage CRM Analytics
default, Service Analytics includes data from these standard Salesforce objects. Templated Apps
• Account • Edit CRM Analytics
• Cases Dataflows
• Contact
• User
• UserRole
• Task
The compatibility check that run at the start of app creation looks for other available data and features. The wizard displays the results
on the first custom create window, letting you know which features you use in your org. If you use a feature, this window tells you it’s
available to your app. If you don’t use the feature, Service Analytics tells you it’s not available.
Service Analytics preselects the features used for basic app creation. You have the option of adding others. Preselected options contain
a check mark in the upper right corner. Add other available options to your app by clicking them. Click options with a check mark to
deselect them. Service Analytics lets you add these options, if available, and details about adding each.
• Customer Satisfaction (CSAT) Score. Select to add CSAT data to your app. If you select, Service Analytics adds questions to the wizard
that ask how you track CSAT data. See Questions About Features Added to Service Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6.
• Knowledge. Select to add Salesforce knowledge data to your app. If you select, Service Analytics adds questions to the wizard that
ask how you track knowledge data. See Questions About Features Added to Service Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6.
• Business Hours. Select to add a business hours case duration calculation to datasets. This uses data from the Business Hours field in
the Cases object. Be sure that the Analytics Integration User has access to this field by editing field-level security for the Cases object.
See Create Service Analytics, Step 2.
• Case History. Select to include historical tracking for both case owner and for the field selected in wizard Page 5, Question 4. See
Data Drill Down Questions, Service Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6.
• Case Record Types. Select to add record type for the Cases object. If you select, Service Analytics lets you filter cases by record type.
• Queues. Select to add queues data from the Group object, which your org uses to assign case ownership. If you select, Service
Analytics lets you filter cases by user and queues.
• Opportunities. Select to add data from the Opportunities object, which is connected to cases via accounts in your org. If you select,
Service Analytics adds sales data to dashboards to give you a complete view of accounts.
• Opportunity Record Types. Select to add record type from the Opportunities object. If you select, Service Analytics lets you filter
opportunities by record type.
1809
• Events. Select to add data from the Events objects, which your org uses to track case activity. If you select, Service Analytics includes
events data and combines it with tasks data so you can drill into cases by activities (that is, tasks and events).
• Telephony. Select to add telephony data from standard call fields in the Tasks object. Standard fields include call duration, call object
identifier, call result, and call type. If you select, Service Analytics creates the Telephony dashboard showing data from those fields.
• Chat. Select to add Chat data. If you select, Service Analytics creates the Chat dashboard and dataset based on Chat data.
• Omni-Channel. Select to add data from Omni-Channel, which your org uses to create and route work items. If you select, Service
Analytics creates the Omni-Channel dashboard and dataset.
How to Answer Service Analytics Custom Wizard Questions

After you add features to Service Analytics, the custom version of the configuration wizard asks you
USER PERMISSIONS
a series of questions about your data. Follow these general guidelines, and the specifics that follow,
to get the best result. To create and manage CRM
Analytics apps:
• Most questions provide answers in pick lists of fields from Salesforce objects. The lists include
standard Salesforce fields and custom fields you’ve set up on an object. Answer these questions
Templated Apps
by selecting from the fields shown. Most questions of this type let you choose only one field,
and some let you choose multiple fields. • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
• You can choose a field from an object only one time. After you select a field, it’s no longer
available as an answer to other questions.
• Other questions are yes/no (Boolean), provide a set of options, or require you to enter text.
• Questions marked with an asterisk (*) require answers.
• Default answers result in a useful set of dashboards. If you’re not sure what to select, use the answer that’s preselected. Some questions
do not have preselected answers. In those cases, Service Analytics reminds you to make a selection.
• You can only control parts of the app with wizard settings, such as filters and widgets. We built the app to provide immediate value
without much work on your part.
• Only some answers make sense given the question’s context. The questions often contain many fields, but only some make sense
for your app. For example, it’s unlikely that you filter Accounts data by Photo URL, even though the Accounts object includes a Photo
URL field.
Case Metrics Questions, Service Analytics Custom Wizard Step 4 of 6

Note: This page is labeled Step 4 of 6, even though it’s the first page of questions you see after you select custom create. This step
is the fourth of six for creating Service Analytics with the custom option.
• Question 1, optional: Asks you to indicate the primary field you use in Salesforce to track case duration, if any. If you don’t track case
duration, Service Analytics uses its own formula to calculate case duration based on the date a case was opened and closed. If the
case is still open, it uses today’s date as part of the calculation. Allows only a single selection. If you add business hours to the app,
Service Analytics includes a business hours case duration calculation. See Use the Service Analytics Wizard Custom Create Option.
• Question 2, optional: Asks if you use other (secondary) fields related to case duration. You can select multiple fields, for example,
Duration with customer and Duration with agent.
• Question 3, optional: Asks you to select the field you use to track SLA compliance. Typically, you track SLA compliance with a custom
formula field on the Cases object or the standard Milestone Status field. (Milestone Status field values include compliant, open
violation, and closed Violation). If you track SLA compliance using a Boolean custom formula field, you can’t select that field from
the wizard. In that case, do the following: Select any field and then manually edit the dataflow to include the Boolean field. Then,
find and replace the field name in Service Analytics dashboard JSON (see Analytics Dashboard JSON Reference).
1810
• Question 4, optional: Asks you to select the field you use to record that a case is resolved on first contact. You typically track first
contact resolution using a Boolean custom formula field on the Cases object or the standard Closed when Created (IsClosedOnCreate)
field.
• Question 5, optional: Asks if you want to include other Cases object metrics in your app. Choose a numeric field.
Data Drill Down Questions, Service Analytics Custom Wizard Step 5 of 6

Tell Service Analytics how you prefer to drill into data about cases, including category, type, severity,
USER PERMISSIONS
owner, and reason, and if they’re resolved at first contact.
Note: This page is labeled Step 5 of 6, even though it’s the second page of questions you see
Analytics apps:
after you select custom create. This step is the fifth of six for creating Service Analytics with • Manage CRM Analytics
the custom option. Templated Apps
• Question 1, required. Asks about the field you use to categorize cases. Choose the name of the • Edit CRM Analytics
field your business uses most to identify and organize cases, such as service product, type or Dataflows
level.
Note: This question is the only one you see if you use basic app creation.
• Question 2, optional. Asks about the field you use to record customers’ type of support. Examples include gold, silver, or bronze; and
premium and basic.
• Question 3, required. Asks which field you use to categorize case severity—usually the field you use to prioritize cases.
• Question 4, required. Asks which field you use to track case status of case. You filter and analyze cases in dashboards based on your
selection.
• Question 5, required. Asks about the field you use to identify topics, reasons, and closure codes of cases. Your selection helps you
understand which kinds of cases your team solves most efficiently.
• Question 6, required. Asks you to choose the field you use to track types of cases so you can filter and analyze cases according to
support type.
• Question 7, required. Asks you to select the field used to track channels customers use to open cases, such as phone, email, mobile,
or web.
• Question 8, required. Asks you to select the object used to track cases according to geography. Options are Accounts, Contacts,
and Cases. Defaults to Accounts, which is used in basic create.
• Question 9, required. Asks you to indicate the field in the object selected in Question 8 to track cases by geography. Defaults to
Billing State/Province, which is used in basic create.
• Question 10, required. Asks you to indicate your fiscal year start month. Defaults to January. If your fiscal year is different from calendar
year, select another month. Service Analytics supports only standard fiscal periods.
• Question 11, optional: Select dimension fields from the Cases object you haven’t selected in previous questions. Adding dimensions
lets you drill into dimensions that are important to your organization. Dimensions are qualitative values, such as date, region, and
product name.
1811
Questions About Features Added to Service Analytics; Custom Wizard Step 6 of 6

Provide more specifics about how Service Analytics uses data from the features you add to the app.
USER PERMISSIONS
Note: This page is labeled Step 6 of 6, even though it’s the third page of questions you see
after you select custom create. This step is the last of six for creating Service Analytics with
Analytics apps:
the custom option. • Manage CRM Analytics
Most of the questions on this page appear only if you add CSAT and knowledge features to your Templated Apps
app. See Use the Service Analytics Wizard Custom Create Option. Follow the instructions carefully • Edit CRM Analytics
to assure success. Dataflows
• Question 1, required. You see this question only if you add CSAT to your app. Asks which object
you use to track CSAT. Service Analytics defaults to Cases. If you use a different object to track
CSAT, select it from the pick list and answer the additional questions that appear.
• Question 2, required. You see this question only if you add CSAT to your app. Asks you to select the field from the object selected in
Question 1 you use to track CSAT.
– Question 2a, required. You see this question only if you select an object other than Cases in Question 1. Service Analytics has to
create a join between that object and Cases for you to see CSAT data in dashboards. (For an example, see Set Up Service Analytics
CSAT Metrics: Example.) Enter the API name the field where you store case identification information. Usually, that’s the Id field,
in which case you enter Id.
If it’s a field other than Id, find the API name for the field. Go to Setup—>Cases—>Fields. In the top chart showing standard
fields, the field name column shows the API name. For example IsSelfServiceClosed is the API name for the Closed by
Self-Service User field. The chart further down for custom fields includes an API Name column.
– Question 2b, required. You see this question only if you select an object other than Cases in Question 1. Determine which field
from the object selected in Question 1 to use for the other side of the join with the Cases object. Use the field that contains case
identification. Enter the API name for the field here.
• Question 3, required. You see this question only if you added knowledge to your app. Asks about the article type you want to see
data about in Service Analytics dashboards. Choose only a single article type. To see the names of article types in Service Cloud, go
to Salesforce Setup and enter knowledge in the Quick Find box.
• Question 4, required. You always see this question in the wizard. Gives you the option of having CRM Analytics check to see if data
in your org supports the answers you select. We recommend that you select Yes and run the check, because app creation fails if
your org doesn’t contain the right data. CRM Analytics displays an error message that tells you what to fix. Make any required changes
in Salesforce, refresh your browser cache, and come back to the wizard and finish creating your app.
SEE ALSO:
Set Up Service Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example
Set Up Service Analytics CSAT Metrics: Example

This scenario provides details to help you answer questions about CSAT data in Step 6 of the Service Analytics configuration wizard.
If you track customer satisfaction (CSAT) data, such as the CSAT score for a service case, in an object other than Cases, take particular
care in how you answer the questions on this page.
For example, if you store the CSAT score in a custom object, for example "CSAT Survey", select this object in question 1. In Question 2,
specify the field that has the CSAT metric you want to report, for example "CSAT Score." Service Analytics needs to relate the custom
object specified in Question 1 to the Cases object so dashboards can include data about cases, accounts, and agents by CSAT. This
relationship is created through a join.
1812
To specify the relationship between the Cases object and your custom CSAT object, designate join keys from both objects and enter
their API names in Questions 3 and 4. On the Cases object, it’s typically the "Id" field. On the example custom object "CSAT Survey," it’s
the custom field that stores the case ID, which in this scenario is the field with the API name CaseId__c.
This diagram shows the join between the two objects.
Share Service Analytics

Members of your team can only use Service Analytics if you share it with them.
USER PERMISSIONS
You need to create an app before you can share it. See Create the Service Analytics App You can
only share it with users who have the following permissions enabled: To create and manage CRM
Analytics apps:
• Access Service Cloud Analytics Templates and Apps • Manage CRM Analytics
• Use Analytics Templated Apps Templated Apps
• Access Sales Cloud Analytics Templates and Apps • Edit CRM Analytics
Dataflows
1. Open your app if it’s not already open. If you’ve navigated away from CRM Analytics Studio, go
back to it, select All Items, find your app, and click it.
2.
Important: Users with the “Use Analytics Templated Apps” permission and Editor or Manager access to the app can create,
5. Click Add, then click Save.
1813
Reconfigure Service Analytics

To restore deleted or altered dashboards or change wizard settings, reconfigure an existing version
USER PERMISSIONS
of Service Analytics.
Important: Important. Reconfiguring your app gets rid of dashboard customizations, including
Analytics apps:
fields or objects added to the dataflow. It also deletes actions you enable, or changes to • Manage CRM Analytics
security settings and dashboard colors and labels. If you’ve made any customizations, save Templated Apps
copies of your dataflow definition file or dashboards. Then copy them into your reconfigured
app.
Dataflows
1. Open the app landing page. If you see Upgrade instead of Reconfigure, you need to upgrade
to the new version of the app before you can use the reconfigure feature. See Upgrade the
Service Analytics App.
2. Click the Reconfigure app link.
3. Review the next screen carefully. It warns you that reconfiguring overwrites customizations, including changes or additions you’ve
made to your app. If you’re comfortable overwriting customizations, check the box and click Continue. If not, click Back or the X in
the upper right corner.
4. Complete the app creation process described in Create the Service Analytics App.
5. At the end of the process, you’re asked if it’s OK to reconfigure your app. This gives you one more chance to make sure you want to
overwrite customizations. If you are, click OK. Service Analytics creates a new version of your app.
Delete Service Analytics

USER PERMISSIONS
Important: If you delete your app, CRM Analytics doesn’t retain the wizard answers you
selected for that version of the app. You have to start the creation process over. If you wish
Analytics apps:
to reuse settings from the app, keep it until you’ve recreated the app and then delete it. • Manage CRM Analytics
1. Navigate to CRM Analytics Studio and open the app. Make sure you’re viewing the app’s landing Templated Apps
page and that you can see the app name at upper left, with a list of dashboards in the center • Edit CRM Analytics
panel. Dataflows
2. Click the triangle in the upper left corner and select Delete.
1814
3. In the next screen, Service Analytics asks you to confirm that you want to delete your app. If you are, click the Delete XX Asset(s)
button.
4. CRM Analytics deletes your app.
Upgrade Service Analytics

Take advantage of the latest Service Analytics features by upgrading your app every time we release
USER PERMISSIONS
a new version.
The banner at the top of your app home page tells you that we’ve released a new version. It also To create and manage CRM
provides a link to more information about the release. There’s also a link inviting you to start the Analytics apps:
upgrade process in the left-hand column of the home page, just below the app name.
Templated Apps
Here’s how to upgrade your app.
1. Click either the “What’s new” link in the banner or the “New version available” link in the left-hand Dataflows
column of your app’s home page.
2. You can read information about the new version on top of the page that opens. At the bottom
of the page, find the buttons: Upgrade current app and Create new app.
3. See descriptions of what the buttons do by hovering over them. If you click Upgrade current app, you overwrite your current app
and all its assets, replacing it with an app based on the new version. Upgrading also deletes any customizations, including any new
fields or object that you’ve added to the dataflow or changes you’ve made to security settings and dashboard labels and colors. If
you click Create new app, you create a second copy of your current app based on the new version. Decide which option suits your
circumstances, and click the appropriate button.
4. Warning: If you’ve customized your app, click Create new app instead of Upgrade current app to make an app copy
based on the new version. Creating a new app preserves the current version and any customizations, which you can then
manually copy into the new version of the app.
of any customizations you’ve made. If you’re OK with overwriting customizations, check the box and click Continue. If you’re not,
click Back to return to the previous screen. Clicking Continue takes you to the configuration wizard. Skip ahead to step 6.
5. If you click Create new app, you’re taken to the configuration wizard. You don’t see a warning, since you’re not overwriting your
current app, which is preserved with any customizations you’ve made to it.
7. Once you complete the wizard, CRM Analytics shows a screen that indicates which assets are impacted by the upgrade. Review the
screen to see how many datasets, dashboards, and lenses will be changed, deleted, or added by the upgrade. It also shows how
1815
changed assets will be modified—whether the change is to data or appearance. On the same screen, you have the option to
download a file with code for changes made to the app. If you’ve customized the app, download and save the file so you can copy
and paste customization code into the upgraded version.
8. Upgrade option only: If you’re upgrading your app, click Upgrade current app. Remember, this overwrites any customizations you’ve
made. You can also click Back to go back into the configuration wizard and change your selections or click the X in the upper-right
corner to cancel.
9. Create option only: If you’re creating a new app, name your app something different from the current version and click Create new
If the link below the app name says “Reset app,” you’re using the latest version and don’t need to upgrade.
Schedule the Service Analytics Data Sync and Dataflow

Schedule a daily app refresh to assure that Service Analytics uses up-to-date data.
USER PERMISSIONS
When you create Service Analytics, the creation process includes a dataflow that imports the latest
Services Cloud data to CRM Analytics. You can schedule the app to refresh daily to assure that your To create and manage CRM
app uses up-to-date Salesforce data. Schedule the refresh to take place sometime outside normal Analytics apps:
business hours so the processes don’t interrupt your use of the app.
Templated Apps
Note: The Service Analytics dataflow runs only one time when you create the app. Schedule • Edit CRM Analytics
it to refresh daily so the app uses the latest sales data. Dataflows
1. From Setup, in the Quick Find box, enter App Install History, and then select App
Install History.
2. Find your app in the list of installed apps.
3. Click the dropdown arrow to the far right of the app. From the menu that appears, select
Schedule.
4. Pick the days you want and set a time for refreshing the app data. It’s best to select a time outside normal working hours so the data
refresh doesn’t interrupt business activities. Then click Save.
1816
Embed Service Analytics Sidebar Dashboards in a Salesforce Page
To use CRM Analytics templated apps: Use CRM Analytics Templated Apps Available in Salesforce
To use Service Analytics: Access Service Cloud Analytics Templates
Experience.
and Apps
Available with CRM
To create and manage CRM Analytics apps: Manage CRM Analytics Templated Apps
Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows for an extra cost in
To edit a dataset’s extended metadata (XMD) Edit CRM Analytics Dataflows and Unlimited Editions. Also
file: available in Developer
To create a Visualforce page (for Salesforce Customize Application Edition.
Classic pages)
To create and save Lightning pages in the Customize Application

Lightning App Builder
To view Lightning pages in the Lightning App View Setup and Configuration
Builder
Add Service Analytics dashboards to Salesforce pages so your service team can get a complete view of their cases and take appropriate
action.
Service Analytics includes three specialized dashboards—called sidebars—to give service agents instant access to visualizations of data
about their cases.
• The By Customer sidebar gives agents a snapshot of their customers, including products, case reasons and priority, and CSAT.
• The By Similarity sidebar shows data about previous cases so agents can guide customer interactions based on what they did in
similar cases.
• The By Case History sidebar provides a quick view of the lifecycle of a case so agents can be informed during customer conversations.
Administrators can embed them in a Salesforce page so agents can access Service Analytics seamlessly while they carry out their normal
case work. For example, if your Salesforce makes the Service Cloud available through a service console, that’s an ideal place to embed
the sidebar dashboards.
To embed a sidebar in Lightning Experience, use Wave Dashboard Components. Read the process in Embed Dashboards in Lightning
Pages, then see Steps 3, 4, and 5 below to create the filter.
To embed a sidebar in Salesforce Classic, follow the steps here.
1. Create a Visualforce page for each sidebar. Go to Setup and enter Visualforce Pages in the Quick Find box, then select Visualforce
Pages, and click New. Enter a label with the name of the sidebar and, optionally, a description.
2. Replace the text that appears when you open the editor with the following: <apex:page standardController="case">
<wave:dashboard dashboardId="Your_dashboard_id" height="1000px" showTitle="false"
filter="Filter_condition" /></apex:page>
a. Replace Your_dashboard_ID with the dashboard ID for the sidebar. You can find the dashboard ID by opening the sidebar
in Service Analytics; the ID is the last 15 characters of the URL for the sidebar.
Depending on which sidebar you’re embedding, go to one of the following steps:
• By Customer sidebar: Go to Step 3.
1817
• By Similarity sidebar: Go to Step 4.

• By Case History sidebar: Go to Step 5.
3. If you’re creating a page for the By Customer sidebar, replace filter="Filter_condition" with one of the following,
then skip to Step 6.
a. If you’re embedding a sidebar dashboard from the Service Analytics (Classic) app built with the old dashboard designer in a
Salesforce Classic page, use this syntax: filter="{'ServiceCase1': {'AccountId':
['{!case.AccountId}']}}".
b. If you’re using the latest version of Service Analytics based on the new dashboard designer, use this syntax to embed the
dashboard in a Salesforce Classic page: filter="{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1':
[{'fields':['AccountId'], 'filter': { 'operator':'in', 'values':
'{!case.AccountId}'} }]}}".
c. If you’re embedding a dashboard from the latest version of Service Analytics in a Lightning Experience page, use this syntax:
filter=”{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1': [{'fields':['AccountId'], 'filter': {
'operator':'in', 'values': ['$AccountId']} }]}}”.
In all cases, replace ‘ServiceCase1’ with the name of the Service Case dataset. To find the name, open a dashboard, hit
Command+e to view the JSON for the dashboard, and search for ServiceCase. The name of the dataset is appended with a
numeral that’s incremented each time you create the app, such as ‘ServiceCase2’. Enter the entire dataset name including
the numeral.
4. If you’re creating a page for the By Similarity sidebar, replace filter="Filter_condition" with one of the following, then
skip to Step 6.
a. If you’re using Service Analytics (Classic) with previous dashboards built with the old dashboard designer, use this syntax to
embed the dashboard in a Salesforce Classic page: filter="{'ServiceCase': {'Reason':
['{!case.Reason}'],'Product__c': ['{!case.Product__c}']}}”.
b. If you use the latest version of Service Analytics based on the new dashboard designer, use this syntax to embed the dashboard
in a Salesforce Classic page: filter="{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1': [ {'fields':['Reason'],
'filter': { 'operator':'in', 'values': '{!case.Reason}'}}, {'fields':['Product__c'],
'filter': { 'operator':'in', 'values': '{!case.Product__c}' }} ]}}".
filter=”{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1': [{'fields':['Reason'], 'filter': {
'operator':'in', 'values': ['$Reason']}}, {'fields':['Product__c'], 'filter': {
'operator':'in', 'values': ['$Product__c'] }} ]}}”.
In all cases, do the following.
• Replace ‘ServiceCase1’ with the name of the Service Case dataset. See Step 3 to learn how to find the name.
• Replace ‘Product_c’ with the API name of the custom field you use to track products. This field is the answer you selected
in the configuration wizard, Page 2, Question 4. Find the API name of this field by going to Setup and typing Cases in the
Quick Find box. Then click Fields and review your custom field names to find the field you use for products. Look for the API
name of the field, and use that in place of ‘Product_c’ in both places in the query.
If you use a custom field to track case reasons, replace ‘Reason’ with the API name of your custom field. Find the API name using
the same technique you use for finding the custom field you use to track products.
5. If you’re creating a page for the By Case History sidebar, replace filter="Filter_condition" with one of the following,
then skip to Step 6.
a. If you’re using Service Analytics (Classic) with previous dashboards built with the old dashboard designer, use this syntax to
embed the dashboard in a Salesforce Classic page: filter="{'ServiceCase1': {'Id': ['{!case.Id}'],
1818
'OwnerId' : ['{!case.OwnerId}'], 'Product__c' : ['{!case.Product__c}'], 'Reason'

: ['{!case.Reason}']}}".
b. If you’re using the latest version of Service Analytics based on the new dashboard designer, use this syntax to embed the
dashboard in a Salesforce Classic page: filter="{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1': [ {'fields':['Id'],
'filter': { 'operator':'in', 'values': '{!case.Id}'} }]}}".
filter=”{'datasets' : {'ServiceCase1': [ {'fields':['Id'], 'filter': {
'operator':'in', 'values': ['$Id']} }]}}”.
Also do the following:
• Replace ‘Product__c’ with the name of the custom field you use to track product family. See Step 4 to learn how to find
the name of that field.
• Replace ‘Reason’ with the API name of the field you use to track the case reason. This field is the answer you selected in the
configuration wizard, Page 2, Question 5. Find the API name of this field by going to Setup and typing Cases in the Quick Find
box. Then click Fields and review your custom field names to find the field you use for case reason. Look for the API name of the
field, and use that in place of ‘Reason’ in the query
In all cases, replace ‘ServiceCase1’ with the name of the Service Case dataset. See Step 3 to learn how to find the name.
6. Save the page, and open it in preview mode to be sure it shows the dashboard.
7. Add the page to the console or whatever page you prefer in Salesforce. Through Setup, find the specific page layout you want to
include the sidebar. For example, some customers use a page layout for information from the Cases object. In that case, enter Cases
in the QuickFind box in Setup, then open Page Layouts under Cases, and look for the page layout you want to edit.
8. Click Edit Layout and select the Custom Console Components tab near the top. Go the Right Sidebar section and select one of
the pages you just created. First, select Visual Force page from Type, then select the page you just created from the Component
drop-down. Enter a label.
9. Set the width to 450px and save the layout. The sidebar should appear embedded in the page you just edited.
10. Repeat this step with the other two sidebars, as needed.
Understand Service Analytics Limitations

Service Analytics requires that Service Cloud include specific data, initially supports a limited set of Salesforce objects, and has other
miscellaneous limitations.
Service Analytics Limitations

These limitations apply to Service Analytics.
Service Analytics Data Requirements

Service Cloud data must include at least one each of the following for Service Analytics dashboards to function correctly: Events, tasks,
closed cases, or published articles attached to a case or an opportunity. It also requires that your org has at least one contact ID associated
with a case.
Custom formula fields on the Cases object must exist or be created for the SLA missed (text) and FCR (Boolean) fields.
1819
Service Analytics Support for Salesforce Objects and Fields

Service Analytics supports all Salesforce standard and custom objects and data. When you first create the app by default it includes only
a predefined set of objects and fields. The app creates a dataflow that exposes selected fields from the following Salesforce objects:
• Account
• Cases
• Contact
• User
• UserRole
• Task
Service Analytics also uses fields from the following options depending on the answers you select in the configuration wizard:
• Knowledge
• Business hours
• Case history
• Queues
• Opportunities
• Opportunity record types
• Events
• Telephony
• Chat
• Omni-Channel
Service Analytics supports standard and custom fields on standard Salesforce objects. The fields provided are determined by the answers
you provide when you create the app using the built-in configuration wizard.
Service Analytics limits custom objects support to no more than 10 custom objects for each org that implements Service Analytics. This
limitation is contractual, not technical.
To add custom objects or extra fields not included when you first create the app, you must update the Service Analytics dataflow. For
details, see Design Datasets with Dataflows and the Dataset Builder on page 1004.
More Service Analytics Limitations

Service Analytics doesn’t support external data sources or registering new datasets from the app-generated dataflow.
Including CSAT score in dashboards or dataflows is optional. The app configuration wizard lets you associate CSAT from a custom case
field or Custom Object related to the Cases object.
You must manually add security predicates or other dataset filters to the app dataflow.
The app doesn’t support multi-hierarchy (team and manager) when you create it. You can manually add that functionality.
The Knowledge Usage dashboard reports on a single Article Type, which you select when you use the configuration wizard.
1820
Get Sales Predictions with the Einstein Discovery for Sales Analytics App
Identify your most promising accounts—the largest potential opportunities or the ones that you
EDITIONS
have the greatest chances of winning or closing quickly. The Einstein Discovery for Sales Analytics
template guides you through creating the app. Available with CRM
Before you create an app, make sure that you’ve created the Sales Analytics on page 1835 app and Analytics, which is available
scheduled its daily dataflow. for an extra cost in
2. Select the Einstein Discovery for Sales Analytics template to open the guided flow. available in Developer
3. If you have an Einstein Discovery for Sales app, choose whether to base this app on an existing Edition. Requires a CRM
one or create another. Click Continue.
4. Select a Sales Analytics app opportunities dataset for the Einstein Discovery story and how you
want the prediction to help. Select Looks good, next. USER PERMISSIONS
5. Add fields to improve your story’s predictions. The template has selected the most useful fields To create and manage the
for you. Click Looks good, next. Einstein Discovery for Sales
Analytics app:
6. Name and create your app.
A tab opens for your app, which takes a few minutes to create. When you see the Application Admin permission set
Complete! message, refresh the page to view the story, dataset, and dashboard showing the
To use the Einstein Discovery
predictions. for Sales Analytics app:
7. Add the dashboard to your Sales Analytics app. • CRM Analytics Plus User
permission set
a. Open the dashboard.
b. In the dropdown menu, select Clone in New Tab.
c. Click Save, and in App select the Sales Analytics app that you want to add the dashboard to.
d. Click Save.
A copy of the dashboard now displays with the other dashboards in your Sales Analytics app.
You can’t update the Einstein Discovery story using the Reconfigure App action. To change your story, create another Einstein Discovery
for Sales Analytics app.
SEE ALSO:
1821
Get Ecommerce Data Insights with the B2B Commerce Analytics App
Help your team track orders, see who’s buying what products, discover year-to-date and
EDITIONS
year-over-year sales revenue, and more. The B2B Commerce Analytics template guides you through
creating the app. Available with CRM
1. From the Analytics tab or Analytics Studio, click Create and then select App. Analytics, which is available
2. Select the B2B Commerce Analytics template to open the guided flow.
The guided flow checks that your org meets the minimum requirements. and Unlimited Editions. Also
If the requirements aren’t met, check the feedback. Analytics license and the
Salesforce B2B Commerce
(CloudCraze) managed
package.
SEE ALSO:
USER PERMISSIONS

B2B Commerce Analytics
app:
Templated Apps
To use the B2B Commerce
Analytics app:
Templated Apps
AND
Manage Einstein
Discovery
USER PERMISSIONS
Social Case Analytics Template

The Social Case Analytics template creates an app that provides ready-made insights into team
USER PERMISSIONS
performance on each social channel.
The Social Case Analytics template gives service managers a fast way to get started analyzing Service To create and manage the
Cloud social customer service data. The app’s ready-made dashboard keeps you on top of how Social Case Analytics app:
your agents use social channels to deliver customer service. Its visualizations help you:
Templated Apps
• Plan capacity with visualizations of historic volume and handle time data.
To use the Social Case
• Improve productivity and lower cost per case by tracking per-case post volume. Analytics app:
• Identify agents who need coaching by analyzing your team’s time-to-close and response times. • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
• Measure social post volume and trends by language, geography, and handle.
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app
creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps. The information here provides
specifics about creating and using the Social Case Analytics app.
1822
Org Requirements
Your org requires the following before you can create an app from the Social Case Analytics template:
• Social Case Analytics requires that your org:
– Includes at least one social post linked to a case.
– Uses case record types.
to Enable Creation of an CRM Analytics Template
Use Social Case Analytics
Open the app.

•
1823

The Social Case Analytics Social Posts dashboard gives you a wealth of data visualizations about your service agents social channel
interactions. Summary metrics include the following:
• Total posts to social channels
• Unique social personas
• Average social case duration
• Average first response time
• Average outbound posts per agent
• Incoming volume by day and channel
Filter summary metrics by the following:
• Social persona
• Agent
• Role
• Product
• Record Type
• Time period
You can also review post volume trends and each agent’s social post volume in separate charts.
The app includes SocialPost and SocialPersona datasets, which you can use to build your own custom explorations.
B2B Marketing Analytics App

Explore your marketing and sales data in one place with B2B Marketing Analytics. Dashboards consolidate Account Engagement and
Sales Cloud data so that you can monitor the impact of marketing on revenue and take instant action to drive marketing results.
For help with B2B Marketing Analytics, see Salesforce Help. To get started, go to the B2B Marketing Analytics overview page.
Fundraising Analytics Template

The Fundraising Analytics template lets you create an app that brings the power of CRM Analytics
USER PERMISSIONS
to data from the Salesforce Nonprofit Success Pack.
Fundraising Analytics gives you a fast way to get started analyzing the success of your fundraising To create and manage the
with CRM Analytics. Optimized for organizations who use the Salesforce Nonprofit Success Pack, Fundraising Analytics app:
the app brings Salesforce donation data from accounts, contacts, and opportunities (donations)
Templated Apps
into CRM Analytics. You can visualize your donation performance out-of-the-box with its prebuilt
dashboards. Or customize them and create your own explorations using the app’s datasets to meet To use the Fundraising
your own requirements. Analytics app:
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app Templated Apps
creation procedures for all CRM Analytics templated apps. The information here provides
specifics about creating and using the Fundraising Analytics app.
Org Requirements
1824
Your org requires the following before you can create an app from the Fundraising Analytics template:
• Data stored in the Salesforce Opportunities, Accounts objects and at least one task and one event. The Salesforce Nonprofit Starter
Pack uses the Opportunities object for donation data. In the app, opportunities are called donations.
• Set Salesforce field-level security to enable the Analytics Integration User to see all fields used in the app.
The Fundraising Analytics Configuration Wizard
Fundraising Analytics includes a configuration wizard. Follow these steps to use it.
1. Org check page. CRM Analytics checks your org for the data needed to create the app. When the check is done, click Looks good,
next, and move to the next page. If CRM Analytics detects an issue, it shows an error message. Follow the instructions in the message
to fix the problem, and try creating your app again.
2. Basic and custom create options page.
• Use basic create the first time you create Fundraising Analytics or when you want to create the app quickly.CRM Analytics creates
the app based on default settings. Select Basic, click Looks good, next, name your app, and click Create. CRM Analytics takes
a few minutes to create your app. You can see its status on the next page. When it’s done, refresh your browser to view the app.
• Custom app creation gives you more fine-grained control over Fundraising Analytics features and data. To select it, click Custom,
then Looks good, next, and move to Step 3—the first page of wizard questions.
3. Choose additional objects page. The org check from Step 1 checks your org for objects you can add to your app. Based on your
selection, CRM Analytics adds wizard questions about how you want to use data from the additional objects. Select the ones you
want and click Looks good, next.
4. Questions about how Fundraising Analytics uses Accounts data. Answer the questions on this page about how app dashboards
segment customer and geographic data. When you’re satisfied with your answers, click Looks good, next.
5. Questions about how Fundraising Analytics uses Opportunities data. Answer the questions on this page about the opportunity field
that contains total amounts and the field that indicates new business. Remember, opportunities are called donations in your finished
app, after it’s created. When you’re satisfied with your answers, click Looks good, next.
6. Questions to enhance the CRM Analytics experience. Answer the questions on this page, as follows, and clickLooks good, next.
• Question 1: Lets you control user access to data in your app. Here are the available options:
– Option 1 enforces Salesforce role hierarchy, which means that users can only see data in Opportunities and Accounts owned
by them and their subordinates.
– Option 2 enables team benchmarking. It lets users see data in Opportunities and Accounts owned by them and their
subordinates. It also lets users see data from Opportunities and Accounts owned by others at the same level in the role
hierarchy.
– Option 3 lets all users see all Sales Cloud data regardless of role.
• Question 2, mandatory: Select how your app handles Account Team information. Defaults to Option 3, which excludes Account
Team data. Select Option 1 to add Account Team member data to datasets or Option 2 to add Account Team data and grant
record visibility to members of the team.
• Question 3, mandatory: Select how your app handles Opportunity Team information. Defaults to Option 3, which excludes
Opportunity Team data. Select Option 1 to add Opportunity Team member data to datasets or Option 2 to add Opportunity
Team data and grant record visibility to members of the team.
• Question 4, optional. Only appears if your app detects that you segment opportunities by record types. Choose record types
and CRM Analytics excludes unselected record types from datasets. Leave this question blank to include all record types.
7. Questions about adding data to Fundraising Analytics datasets. By default, this page asks you 4 questions about adding data from
Accounts, Donations (Opportunities), Users, and Activities to the app. If you added objects to the app in Step 3, questions about
1825
adding data from those objects appear here. Select the fields you want added to app datasets, and click Looks good, next. Then
name your app, and click Create. CRM Analytics takes a few minutes to create your app. You can see its status on the next page.
When it’s done, refresh your browser to view the app.
Fundraising Performance Analytics Template

Nonprofits can measure the impact of fundraising work with a precise picture of donor retention
USER PERMISSIONS
and attrition. The app also provides actionable insight into donor gains and losses, donation amount
gains and losses, and other key performance indicators. To create and manage the
Fundraising Performance
Analytics app:
Templated Apps
To use the Fundraising
Performance Analytics app:
Templated Apps
Use the Fundraising Performance Analytics template to create an app targeted to addressing the analytics needs of Salesforce Nonprofit
Success Pack users. Its dashboard measures and compares fundraising efforts concisely and uniformly to help you develop strategies to
improve future drives.
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app creation procedures for all CRM Analytics
templated apps. The information here provides specifics about creating and using the Fundraising Performance Analytics app.
Org Requirements
Your org includes the following to make the best use of the Fundraising Performance Analytics template:
1826
Note: You can create the Fundraising Performance Analytics app in orgs with or without the Nonprofit Starter Pack, as long as
you use the objects mentioned here.
• At least three years of data in standard objects used in the Nonprofit Success Pack, including the Contact, Account, Opportunity
(Donation), and User objects. Use of the Contact object is optional; if Analytics does not detect contacts, the template uses accounts.
• Data includes Opportunities (Donations) with stage type Closed Won, for example, Stage - Closed Won, Awarded, Posted.
• Your org uses the Campaign object Campaign Type field to signify a donation’s type of program or segment. That lets you analyze
fund-raising results according to different programs, such as direct mail, major giving, and so on.
For best results, exclude large one-time gifts, which can distort your results.
Use Fundraising Performance Analytics

Open the app.
•
The app’s dashboard shows metrics for donors, giving, and performance. Summary charts across the top display top-level measures.
Click Details below each chart for more information about each aspect of your fund-raising performance.
• Donors
– Summary shows annual total number of donors and totals for each year.
– Details include donor and retention rates, growth of number of donors, and donors by type.
• Giving
– Summary shows annual total donations and totals each year.
– Details include net growth in donations, average gift per donor, average gift, donations over time, and a breakout of the size of
donations by category.
• Performance
– Summary shows net gain for the selected period and annual gains for each year.
– Details include percentage donor churn (donors gained and lost each year), and donations gained and lost broken out by
categories.
Key Performance Indicators

Key performance indicators (KPI) are determined as follows:
Total Donors Total Donors Current Year
Total New Donors Donor Type - New
Total Recurring Donors Donor Type - Recaptured, Upgraded, Same, Downgraded
Total Donations Total Donations Current Year
Total Giving Total Giving Current Year
Net Growth in Donors Current Year Total Donors - Last Year Total Donors
1827
Net Growth in Giving Current Year Total Giving - Last Year Total Giving
Rate of Growth in Donors (Current Year Total Donors - Last Year Total Donors) / Last Year
Total Donors * 100
Rate of Growth in Giving (Current Year Total Giving - Last Year Total Giving) / Last Year Total
Giving * 100
Donor Retention Rate Total Donors that gave Current Year (Same, Upgraded,
Downgraded) / Total Donors Last Year * 100
Donation Retention Rate Total Retained Donations Current Year (Same, Upgraded,
Downgraded) / Total Donations Last Year * 100
Donor Attrition Rate Total Donors that did not give Current Year (Lapsed New & Repeat)
/ Total Last Year Donors * 100
Donation Attrition Rate Total Lost Donations Current Year (Lapsed New & Repeat) / Total
Last Year Donations * 100
Donor Participation Rate Total Donors Current Year (Recaptured, Upgraded, Same) / Total
Donors Current Year * 100
Donor Recapture/Reactivation Rate Total Donors Current Year (Recaptured) / Total Donors Current Year
* 100
Donor Churn Total Gained Donors Current Year (New, Recaptured) - Total Lost
Donors Current Year (Lapsed New & Repeat) / Total Donors Current
Year * 100
Average Gift $ Total Giving Current Year / Total Gifts Current Year
Average Giving $ per Donor Total Giving Current Year / Total Donors Current Year
Average Number of Gifts per Donor Total Gifts Current Year / Total Donors Current Year
Average Gift $ per Donor Total Donor Average Gift $ / Total Donors Current Year
Gain/Loss Category Definitions

Categories for gains and losses are defined as follows:
• New. Donors who first gave during current year.
• Recaptured. Previously lapsed donors who gave again in current year.
• Upgraded. Donors who gave more in current year than in previous year.
• Same. Donors who gave the same amount current and previous years.
• Downgraded. Donors who gave less in current year than in previous year.
• Lapsed new. New, first-time donors in previous year who did not give in current year.
• Lapsed repeat. Other lapsed donors who gave in previous and prior years but not in current year.
1828
Customer Insights
The Customer Insights app brings together analysis of Sales cloud and Service cloud in a unified,
USER PERMISSIONS
easy-to-customize app. In addition, it’s easy to customize the dashboard using components. Use
the app components as building blocks to create the perfect dashboard for your environment. To create and manage the
The template creates datasets, recipes, and dashboards to help you understand customer insights. app:
Important: See Create Apps from CRM Analytics Templates: Start Here for general app Templated Apps
creation procedures for all templates. The information here provides specifics about creating To use CRM Analytics
and using the app. templated apps:
Templated Apps
Customer Insights Dashboards
The Customer Insights app has a number of dashboards with component galleries to build your
own dashboards, ready-to-deploy dashboards, and dashboards designed for embedding. The dashboards use minimal SAQL and
interactions (bindings) to make it easy to customize. In addition, the dashboards incorporate design and usability best practices. Customer
Insights includes the following dashboards:
• Account Embedded: A ready-to-deploy Accounts dashboard that includes details about activities, opportunities, cases, and
sales. The Accounts Embedded dashboard is designed to embed in the Accounts page layout using Lightning App Builder.
• Case Embedded: A ready-to-deploy Case dashboard that includes escalated cases, closed cases, customer tenure, customer
sentiment, average case duration, and distribution of case escalations. The Case dashboard is designed to embed in the Service
Console page layout using Lightning App Builder.
• Gallery - Activity Components: A components gallery designed to build dashboards. It contains details about activities,
such as activity breakdown, activities by team and account, activity by Status, and days since last activity.
• Gallery - Case Components: A components gallery designed to build dashboards about cases. It includes details, such
as cases by status and priority, by sales rep and account, by agent and duration, and by account and origin.
• Gallery - Lead Components: A components gallery designed to build dashboards with details about leads, such as total
leads, converted leads, leads by recent and source, and leads by status and industry.
• Gallery - Opportunity Components: A components gallery designed to build dashboards with details about
opportunities, such as closed won details, average win rates, average days in the sales cycle, and open pipeline.
• Gallery - Product Components: A components gallery designed to build dashboards with details about products, such
as products purchased, product pipeline, product by family and name, product whitespace analysis.
• Opportunity Embedded:A ready-to deploy dashboard that shows details, such as the probability of the opportunity, the deal
age, and the current stage. The Opportunity Embedded dashboard is designed to embed in the Opportunity page layout using
Lightning App Builder.
• Sales Performance: A ready-to-deploy dashboard that shows how your sales are trending.
• Service Performance: A ready-to-deploy Service dashboard that includes the most commonly requested service metrics.
You can track cases, escalations, backlog, volume, and agents.

• Make sure that you and all app users have the CRM Analytics Growth or CRM Analytics Plus licenses.
• Your org must have at least one record of each of the following objects: User, Account, and Opportunity.
1829
• This template uses recipes. Recipes require that your org is set up for data sync. You must schedule the recipes to run on a regular
cadence to ensure your data is up to date. For a better understanding of working with recipes, see Run a Recipe.
Create the App

If you have newly enabled CRM Analytics, the app is created for you by default. If you have already enabled CRM Analytics for your org,
you can install it manually using the instructions below, or you can enable auto-installation in the Settings menu.
Note: To see the status of your auto-installed app, go to Setup > Feature Settings > Analytics > Analytics > Auto-Installed
Apps. This app will auto-upgrade when the template is updated. To learn about auto-upgrade, see Auto-Installed Apps on page
1666.
• In CRM Analytics Studio, click Create in the upper right corner
• To open the template picker, select App, then Create App from Template.
• Locate the Customer Insights tile, select it, and click Continue.
• Review the app preview page, and click Continue to open the configuration wizard.
• If you’re offered a choice of basing your app on an existing app or creating a one, select Create a brand new app and click Continue.
Customer Insights runs a compatibility check against your org to ensure it includes the data to successfully create the app’s datasets,
recipes, and dashboards. If it doesn’t, follow the instructions in the error message to add the required data and start the app creation
process again.
• When the org compatibility check succeeds, click Looks good, next.
• Name your app, and click Create.
Schedule the Data Sync

Configure a data sync for your recipes.
• In CRM Analytics Studio, click the wheel icon at upper right and select Data Manager. Or, click the Data Manager link in the
left-hand column.
• Select the Connect tab on the left.
Note: If you can’t see the Connect tab, enable data sync in your org. See Enable Data Sync and Connections.
• Click the arrow to the far right of SFDC_LOCAL, which is the name of the connection your app uses. From the menu that appears,
select Schedule.
• Set a time for running the data sync. It’s best to select a time outside normal working hours so the sync and recipe don’t interrupt
business activities. Then save your changes.
1830
Schedule the Recipes

Schedule the recipes to run on a schedule. Ensure that the data is synced before you run the recipes.
The app creates several recipes that you must schedule.
• In CRM Analytics Studio, click the wheel icon at upper right and select Data Manager. Or, click the Data Manager link in the
left-hand column.
• Select the Dataflows & Recipes tab on the left.
• Schedule the recipes to run on a cadence that is appropriate for your organization.
The recipes now run on the schedule you set.
Assign Customer Insights for Admins

Enable administration of the Customer Insights app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions that have Sales and Service cloud enabled.
• Click the name of the user.
• Select the CRM Analytics Plus Admin permission sets.
• Click Add, then save your changes.
• Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who administer the Customer Insights app.
Assign Customer Insights for Users

Enable administration of the Customer Insights app by assigning the relevant permissions.
Available in: Developer, Enterprise, Performance, and Unlimited editions in Sales and Service clouds.
• Click the name of the user.
• Select the CRM Analytics Plus User permission sets.
• Click Add, then save your changes.
• Repeat Steps 2–5 for all users who view the Customer Insights app.
Datasets
Dataset Contents Source Used By DeFAULT Security Predicate (On Special

Name Auto-installation) Requirements
Activity Data about Salesforce Sales Performance, 'Owner.Role.Roles' == "$User.UserRoleId" || None.
events and object -> Account 'OwnerId' == "$User.Id" ***
tasks. Recipe Embedded,
Opportunity
Embedded
1831

Accounts Data about Salesforce Sales Performance, 'Owner.Role.Roles' == "$User.UserRoleId" || None.
accounts. object -> Case Embedded 'OwnerId' == "$User.Id" ***
Includes Recipe
accounts
without
opportunities.
Opportunity Data about Salesforce Sales Performance, 'Owner.Role.Roles' == "$User.UserRoleId" || None.

accounts, object -> Service 'OwnerId' == "$User.Id" ***
opportunities, Recipe Performance,
and users. Account
Embedded,
Opportunity
Embedded, Case
Embedded
OpptyProduct Data about Salesforce Sales Performance 'Opportunity.Owner.Roles.Roles' == None.

products with object -> "$User.UserRoleId" || 'Opportunity.OwnerId'
opportunities Recipe == "$User.Id" ***
and accounts.
Opportunity Data about Salesforce Sales Performance, 'Opp.Owner.Roles.Roles' == None

History historical object -> Opportunity "$User.UserRoleId" || 'Opp.OwnerId' ==
opportunity Recipe Embedded "$User.Id"
records
Case Shows current Salesforce Sales Performance, n/a None.

open case object -> Service
workload to Recipe Performance,
help you Account
prioritize, Embedded, Case
investigate Embedded,
problematic Opportunity
cases, and view Embedded
escalations and
SLA
compliance.
Case History Data about Salesforce Case Embedded n/a None

historical case object ->
records Recipe
Lead Salesforce leads Salesforce Sales Performance 'Owner.Role.Roles' == "$User.UserRoleId" || None.

data, including object -> 'OwnerId' == "$User.Id" ***
converted leads Recipe
connected to
accounts and
opportunities.
1832

User Provides details Salesforce Lead Recipe, Case n/a None.
about all users object -> Recipe, Activity
in an org. Recipe Recipe,
Opportunity
Recipe
User Role Provides details Salesforce Opportunity n/a None.

about user roles object -> Recipe
in an Org Recipe
Product Data about the Salesforce Sales Performance, n/a None.

products in your object -> Opportunity
Org Recipe Recipe
*** If you use role hierarchy, the role syntax

is used. Otherwise, owner syntax is used.
Recipes Used in Customer Insights

The following recipes are used in the Customer Insights app:
• Customer_Insights_user_role_hierarchy. This recipe pulls in User and User Role datasets and then creates
multivalue fields for role hierarchy.
• Customer_Insights_insights_opportunity This recipe pulls in Opportunity, Account, Oppty Line Item,
OpportunityHistory, Product, and PricebookEntry datasets and augments user and account information onto opportunity.
• Insights_insights_activity This recipe pulls in Task and Event datasets and joins them into a single dataset called
Activities. It also augments User Account and Opportunity information onto Activity.
• Customer_Insights_insights_case. This recipe pulls in the in Case dataset and joins it with CaseHistory, Account,
Contact, and User datasets.
Embed the Accounts Embedded Dashboards

• From your Accounts tab, click the Setup icon, and click Edit Page.
• From the Components menu on the left-hand side, select the CRM Analytics dashboard and drag it onto your dashboard.
• In the right-hand panel, select the Accounts Embedded Dashboard.
• In the same panel, change the height to an appropriate size. Salesforce recommends a height of 620.
• Uncheck Show Title and Show Header.
• Click Add Dashboard Filter.
• For the Case dataset, select Account ID Embed.
• Leave the operator as Equals, and open the Object field by clicking Select. Choose Account ID and click Done and OK.
• For the Opportunity dataset, select Account ID Embed.
• For the Activity dataset, select Account ID Embed.
• Save your changes.
1833
Embed the Case Embedded Dashboards

• From your Case tab, click the Setup icon, and click Edit Page.
• In the right-hand panel, select the Case Embedded Dashboard.
• For the Account dataset, select Account ID.
• Repeat these steps for the rest of your datasets:
– Case: AccountID = AccountID
– CaseHistory: CaseID = AccountID
– Opportunity: AccountID = AccountID
Embed the Opportunity Embedded Dashboard

• From your Opportunities tab, click the Setup icon, and click Edit Page.
• In the right-hand panel, select the Opportunity Embedded Dashboard.
• For the Case dataset, select Account ID Embed.
• For the Opportunity dataset, select Opportunity ID Embed.
• Leave the operator as Equals, and open the Object field by clicking Select. Choose Opportunity ID and click Done and OK.
• For the Opportunity History dataset, select Opportunity ID Embed.
• For the Activity dataset, select OppID_Embed.
Customize Your Dashboards

Now that you have your recipes scheduled and the correct permissions, build your dashboard using components. Components are
container elements that contain groups of charts, tables, filters, text, and more in multiple dashboards, making it easy to add a group of
objects to your dashboard. For information about using components to build a dashboard, see Create and Reuse Dashboard Components
.
1834
Sales Analytics
Sales Analytics brings the power of Analytics to Sales Cloud on any device that supports Analytics. With intuitive visualizations based on
your Salesforce data, Sales Analytics lets you move from insight to action quickly and helps you turn data into smarter sales.
Tip: Follow the steps in the order shown to get started with Sales Analytics. If you haven’t used Analytics before, learn more about
it from the Analytics Documentation.
Note: Sales Analytics is available only in English.
1. About Sales Analytics

Learn the benefits of Sales Analytics before you create and use the app to explore your Sales Cloud data.
2. Sales Analytics Prebuilt Dashboards, Lenses, and Datasets
Sales Analytics includes a prebuilt dashboard, lenses, and dataset to accelerate your data exploration.
3. Set Up Permissions for the Sales Analytics
Set up your organization to use the Sales Analytics by enabling CRM Analytics and assigning permission sets to users.
4. Create and Share Sales Analytics
Follow these steps to create Sales Analytics and start uncovering the value of your Salesforce data.
5. Customize Sales Analytics with the Configuration Wizard
Create Sales Analytics with the configuration wizard so the app reflects how your company prefers to view Salesforce data.
6. Delete Sales Analytics
7. Upgrade Sales Analytics App
Take advantage of the latest Sales Analytics features by upgrading your app when we release a new version.
8. Reconfigure Sales Analytics
9. Collaborative Forecasting and Quotas Data in Sales Analytics
Sales Analytics gives you a choice for how to include your team’s quotas depending on whether you use the Sales Cloud Collaborative
Forecasts feature to store quotas data.
10. Schedule the Sales Analytics Data Sync and Dataflow
Schedule a daily app refresh to assure that Sales Analytics uses up-to-date data.
11. Integrate Sales Analytics With Salesforce
Make Sales Analytics more usable by performing a variety of optional integrations and customizations.
12. Understand Sales Analytics Limitations
Sales Analytics requires that Sales Cloud include specific data and supports a limited set of Salesforce objects.
13. Get to Know Sales Analytics Data Terminology
To make the best use of Sales Analytics, it’s helpful to understand the metrics and terms used in the app.
1835
About Sales Analytics

Learn the benefits of Sales Analytics before you create and use the app to explore your Sales Cloud
EDITIONS
data.
Experience.
Available with CRM

Edition.
USER PERMISSIONS

templated apps:
Templated Apps
To use Sales Analytics:
• Access Sales Cloud
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
Dataflows
1836
Important: Each CRM Analytics platform license includes a Sales Analytics license. Licenses for individual CRM Analytics apps do
not provide the complete capabilities available to CRM Analytics platform license holders. See Understand Sales Analytics Limitations
for details.
Salesforce created Sales Analytics to make it easy to analyze Sales Cloud data. Whether you’re a sales executive or manager, a rep, or on
the operations side, Sales Analytics gives you a new level of insight into your Salesforce data. Start with the Sales Analytics Home
dashboard to see the latest wins, win rate, average deal amount. Dig in to all the other dashboards from there, which take advantage
of Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts to show quotas and help you pinpoint forecasting.
• Execs get their own overview highlighting pipeline and sales and service business performance as well as top deals. They can easily
jump to dashboards with all the details.
• Managers can start with a leaderboard showing team key performance indicators (KPIs) and dive right in to specifics about quota,
changes in the pipeline, team trending, and average sales cycle time. They can also focus on the performance of members of their
team and take action to accelerate business closings.
• Reps can view their own quota attainment, bookings, and pipe activities for a given period. They can also quickly find opportunities
for new business to help hit their quotas.
• Operations staff can sort through performance by geography, source, and customer to spot trends to help speed new deals.
1837
App creation is easy. Sales Analytics runs a compatibility check against your org to be sure it includes all the data to create the app’s
datasets and dashboards. If your org doesn’t have the required data, error messages tell you what you need to add before creating the
app.
When the compatibility check determines that your org is ready, you have two options:
• Quickly create the app using standard, default settings as determined by Sales Analytics during the compatibility check. Default
settings include collaborative forecasting data to show quotas in app dashboards if your org uses the Sales Cloud Collaborative
Forecasting feature.
• Use the built-in configuration wizard to choose your own, custom settings to reflect the way you and others on your team want to
view data.
When you’ve created the app, use its prebuilt dashboards to explore Sales Cloud data from any device that supports CRM Analytics.
You get actionable insights fast from your sales data using the intuitive CRM Analytics interface. And you can drill deeper into key aspects
of your business by customizing Sales Analytics around your business needs.
Sales Analytics Prebuilt Dashboards, Lenses, and Datasets

Sales Analytics includes a prebuilt dashboard, lenses, and dataset to accelerate your data exploration.
USER PERMISSIONS
The prebuilt dashboard in Sales Analytics contains key performance indicators (KPIs) that help you
get value from your Salesforce data—fast. The dashboard let you manage pipeline, visualize quotas To use CRM Analytics apps:
data, and fine-tune forecasts. They also help you understand key business performance drivers, • Use CRM Analytics
Templated Apps
visualize trends, and assign actions. You get fast answers to questions you have about business
results. To use Sales Analytics:
The app also includes lenses—more narrowly focused visualizations that augment dashboard with
greater detail about your sales KPIs. Additionally, when you create Sales Analytics, the app Apps
automatically creates a dataset based on your existing Salesforce data in the Sales and Service
clouds. Datasets include both standard fields from Salesforce objects as well as custom fields
Analytics apps:
computed from your Salesforce data. The dashboard and lenses use data from the dataset to visualize
your KPIs to give you the insights you need to run your business. Templated Apps
You can create your own lenses and dashboard using the data in Sales Analytics dataset. To learn • Edit CRM Analytics
more about exploring data in CRM Analytics, see Explore and Visualize Your Data in CRM Analytics. Dataflows
Note: The dashboards and datasets included in Sales Analytics differ depending on how
you answer configuration wizard questions when you create the app.
Sales Analytics Dashboard Guide

Sales Analytics includes prebuilt dashboard to meet the needs of everyone on the team. Sales executives, managers, and representatives
as well as the operations staff all have instant access to the KPIs they need to manage the sales business.
Sales Analytics Lenses
Sales Analytics lenses augment app dashboards with targeted visualizations of your org’s sales data.
Sales Analytics Datasets
When you create Sales Analytics, CRM Analytics imports your Salesforce data into the app dataset based on your wizard selections.
The dataset drive the app’s dashboards and lenses.
Sales Analytics Calculated Fields
Sales Analytics adds custom fields computed from your Salesforce data to app dataset. The table lists the fields in alphabetical order
and shows how they are computed and the dataset that include them.
1838
Sales Analytics Dashboard Guide

Sales Analytics includes prebuilt dashboard to meet the needs of everyone on the team. Sales
USER PERMISSIONS
executives, managers, and representatives as well as the operations staff all have instant access to
the KPIs they need to manage the sales business. To use CRM Analytics apps:
Note: The dashboards included in Sales Analytics differ depending on how you answer Templated Apps
configuration wizard questions when you create the app.
General Purpose and Embedded Dashboards Analytics Templates and
Apps
• Sales Analytics Home
• Account (Embedded)
Analytics apps:
• Opportunity (Embedded) • Manage CRM Analytics
• Sales Overview Home (Embedded) on page 1847 Templated Apps
Dashboards for Sales Managers Dataflows
• Forecast
• Leaderboard
• Team Activities
• Team Benchmark
• Team Trending
• Team Whitespace
Dashboards for Sales Representatives

• Sales Overview Home (Embedded) on page 1847
• Accounts on page 1861
• Sales Rep Overview
• Trending
• Whitespace (individual)
Dashboards for Sales Executives

• Executive Overview – Pipeline Performance
• Executive Overview – Sales Performance
• Executive Overview – Service Performance
Dashboards for Sales Operations

• Company Overview
• Company Trending
• Lead Analysis
• Sales Performance (Operations)
• Sales Stage Analysis
1839
1. Sales Analytics Home Dashboard

Start exploring Sales Analytics with an overview of top-level year-to-date key performance indicators (KPIs).
2. Sales Analytics Account Dashboard (Embedded)
Get a snapshot of an account, including its average sales cycle, opportunity amount, and win rate. The dashboard is intended for
use when embedded in a Salesforce account or opportunity page.
3. Sales Analytics Opportunity Dashboard (Embedded)
Get a summary of an opportunity. You embed the dashboard in a Salesforce opportunity page.
4. Sales Analytics Sales Overview Home (Embedded)
Designed to be embedded in the Lightning Home page, the dashboard lets sales reps see their KPIs the second they log into
Salesforce. They can also quickly access the Sales Analytics dashboards that matter most to them.
5. Sales Analytics Forecast Dashboard
View quota attainment and forecast for each member of the team, and fine-tune the forecast by reviewing opportunities by stage
in a selected period.
6. Sales Analytics Leaderboard Dashboard
Gives sales leaders an overview of team and individual rep performance, including quota attainment, pipe coverage, bookings, pipe
generation, closed won business, average sales cycle time, and sales activities.
7. Sales Analytics Team Activities Dashboard
See what your team’s been doing to keep on top of opportunities. Look at their total, completed, and overdue tasks and review each
member’s calls, events, emails, and tasks.
8. Sales Analytics Team Benchmark Dashboard
Shows a ranking of sales rep results across your team’s KPIs, such as closed won deals, best case, and average deal size. Also shows
each rep’s performance against team average.
9. Sales Analytics Trending Dashboards
View company, team, and pipeline changes for a given period, including beginning and end values of the pipe as well as what’s
moved in and out.
10. Sales Analytics Team Whitespace Dashboard
Use this dashboard to uncover resell and upsell opportunities by viewing whitespace. Whitespace means accounts that you can
revisit to create business.
11. Sales Analytics Sales Rep Accounts Dashboard
A snapshot of opportunity, case, and activity trends to help sales reps stay on top of all their accounts.
12. Sales Analytics Sales Rep Overview Dashboard
Sales reps: start here to see the status of opportunities you own and get ideas for the quickest ways to make quota. Review quota
attainment, bookings, and pipeline for a given time period. Also uncover key opportunities for accelerating deal closing and review
the number of activities you’ve completed in the selected period.
13. Sales Analytics Executive Overview – Pipeline Performance Dashboard
Sales executives get instant pipeline status. You can view the current amount in the pipe, comparison to the previous period, projected
closing, and top deals by lead source, product, account, and region. Also get top-level views of sales and service performance.
14. Sales Analytics Executive Overview – Sales Performance Dashboard
Sales executives get instant insight into closed business and quickly recognize trends. See bookings for the period, changes from
previous period, as well as win rate, lead conversion rate, and top deals. Also see top-level views of pipeline and service business.
15. Sales Analytics Executive Service Performance
Sales executives get instant insight into customer service performance. See average case duration for a selected period compared
with previous periods and case duration by account, service channel, and geography.
1840
16. Sales Analytics Company Overview Dashboard

Intended to give sales leaders and operations staff high in the corporate hierarchy an overview of the sales business and operations.
17. Sales Analytics Lead Analysis Dashboard
Boost operational efficiency by taking a close look at your team’s lead conversions. Quickly identify leads that convert the most
quickly and visualize the team’s conversion rate. And get a view into top leads by source and region.
18. Sales Analytics Sales Performance Dashboard (Operations)
Sales leaders: Drill into your closed business by geography, account, product, source, or other criteria to get a 360-degree view of
the team’s operational efficiency.
19. Sales Analytics Sales Stage Analysis Dashboard
Shows how deals move through stages of the sales process and if deals are moving smoothly. Also reveals bottlenecks and exposes
at-risk opportunities.
Sales Analytics Home Dashboard

Start exploring Sales Analytics with an overview of top-level year-to-date key performance indicators
USER PERMISSIONS
(KPIs).
Templated Apps
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
Dataflows
1841
Default Behavior and Recommended Options

Get an overview of your sales business for your current fiscal year, including comparisons to the previous year and the team’s progress
against goals. Includes closed won, win rate, average deal amount, and average days in the sales cycle. Also, follow the links to see all
the app’s other dashboards and KPIs. All KPIs are based on row visibility settings defined in the Opportunities dataset.
Customize the goal for each metric by editing the dashboard.
1.
With the dashboard open in CRM Analytics Studio, click the edit icon to open the designer.
2. Click the Goal widget.
3. In the properties panel on the right, expand Breakpoints. Then change Max to the goal you want to use.
Wizard and Other Setup Options
Closed Won (1) and Avg Deal Amount (3) KPIs use amounts from the field selected for opportunity amount, wizard Page 5, Question 1.
All other KPIs based on standard fields that can’t be changed.
Supports Opportunity Splits if the feature is enabled in your org. See Opportunity Splits.
Datasets Used
• Opportunities.
KPI Calculations
• Closed Won (1)
– Total (a). Total closed won year-to-date (YTD) based on Opportunity.IsWon = true.
– Comparison (b). (Total closed won YTD - Total closed won same time last year) / Total amount closed won YTD.
– Over time (c). Total closed won by month for past 3 years.
– Goal (d). Total closed won this year vs. last year.
1842
• Win Rate (2)

– Total (a). Total won YTD / Total closed won or lost YTD.
– Comparison (b). (Win rate YTD - Win rate last YTD) / Win rate last YTD.
– Over time (c). Win rate by month for past 3 years.
– Goal (d). Total won YTD / Total closed won or lost YTD vs. same for last year.
• Avg Deal Amount (3)

– Total (a). Average amount for won deals YTD.
– Comparison (b). (Average amount for won deals YTD - Average amount for won deals last YTD) / Average amount for won deals
last YTD.
– Over time (c). Average amount for won deals by month for past 3 years.
– Goal (d). Average deal size YTD vs. same for last year.
• Avg Days in Sales Cycle (4)

– Total (a). Average won opportunity (Opportunity CloseDate - CreatedDate) for YTD.
– Comparison (b). (Average cycle YTD - Average cycle last YTD) / Average cycle last YTD.
– Over time (c). Average days to complete (win) sales cycle each month for past 3 years.
– Goal (d). Average cycle YTD vs same for last year.
Sales Analytics Account Dashboard (Embedded)

Get a snapshot of an account, including its average sales cycle, opportunity amount, and win rate. The dashboard is intended for use
when embedded in a Salesforce account or opportunity page.

Embed the dashboard in either Lightning and Aloha page layouts.
1843
Edit the dashboard to set target lines and set the upper bounds for gauges. With the dashboard open in CRM Analytics Studio, click the
edit icon to open the designer, then click the widget you want to edit. Then look for the value you want to change in the
properties panel on the right and change it there. Save the dashboard.
Average Discount and Breakdown by Product widgets. Only included if you select Products on the wizard page that lets you add objects
to the app. Otherwise it includes two activities widgets.
Cases widget. Only included if you select Cases on the wizard page that lets you add objects to the app.
If your org uses account hierarchy, the dashboard can be embedded so that all child account KPIs roll up into KPIs for the parent.
Embedding Syntax
Here’s the syntax for embedding the dashboard in either Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience pages. Note the difference between
using a filter for single accounts or account hierarchy. Opportunity is the developer name for the opportunity dataset. Use the
exact developer name of the dataset when embedding the dashboard.
Salesforce Classic
Embedding the dashboard in the Account page layout.
Here’s the syntax to filter by a single account:
{"datasets": { "opportunity": [{"fields": ["AccountId"] ,"filter": { "operator": "in",
"values": ["$Id"] }
} ]}}
Here’s the syntax to filter using account hierarchy. Roll ups include KPIs for the account and its child accounts:
{"datasets": { "opportunity": [{"fields": ["Account.Parent.AccountParents"] ,"filter": {
"operator": "in",
"values": ["$Id"] } } ]}}
Embedding the dashboard in the Opportunity page layout.

{"datasets": { "opportunity": [{"fields": ["AccountId"] ,"filter": { "operator": "in",
"values":
["$AccountId"] } } ]}}
{"datasets": { "opportunity": [{"fields": ["Account.Parent.AccountParents"] ,"filter": {
"operator": "in",
"values": ["$AccountId"] } } ]}}
Note: Syntax for Lightning Experience uses single quotes instead of double quotes.
Embedding the dashboard in the Account page layout.

{'datasets': { 'opportunity': [{'fields': ['AccountId'] ,'filter': { 'operator': 'in',
'values': ['$Id'] } }
]}}
1844
{'datasets': { 'opportunity': [{'fields': ['Account.Parent.AccountParents'] ,'filter': {
'operator': 'in', 'values':
['$Id'] } } ]}}
Embedding the dashboard in the Opportunity page layout.

{'datasets': { 'opportunity': [{'fields': ['AccountId'] ,'filter': { 'operator': 'in',
'values': ['$AccountId'] } }
]}}
{'datasets': { 'opportunity': [{'fields': ['Account.Parent.AccountParents'] ,'filter': {
'operator': 'in', 'values':
['$AccountId'] } } ]}}
KPI Calculations
Default Widgets
• Average Sales Cycle. Average of opportunity close date - Created date for won opportunities for life of account.
• Win Rate. Total won/ Total closed (won or lost) for life of account.
– Total Won. Total won for life of account.
– Total Lost. Total lost for life of account.
• Open Opportunities. Open opportunities with any close date for the account.
– Count. Total count of open opportunities with any close date for the account.
– Push. Total number of open opportunities for the account that have been pushed at least once.
Optional Widgets
Analytics creates these widgets depending on selections you make on the wizard page that lets you add objects to the app.
• Average Discount. 1 - (Product total price for all products sold to account / Product list price). Only appears if you add Products.
• Product Breakdown. Sum of product total price grouped by product. Only appears if you add Products.
• Number of Open Activities. (Not shown.) Count of open tasks and events related to account. Only appears if you add Products.
• Number of Overdue Activities. (Not shown.) Count of overdue tasks related to account. Only appears if you do not add Products.
• Open Cases. Number of open cases related to account. Only appears if you add Cases.
Sales Analytics Opportunity Dashboard (Embedded)

Get a summary of an opportunity. You embed the dashboard in a Salesforce opportunity page.
1845
Note: This dashboard is only included if Sales Wave is set up to include products. See Wizard and Other Setup Options.
Embed the dashboard in either Lightning and Aloha page layouts.

Edit the dashboard to set target lines and set the upper bounds for gauges. With the dashboard open in Analytics Studio, click the edit
icon to open the designer, then click the widget you want to edit. Then look for the value you want to change in the properties
panel on the right and change it there. Save the dashboard.
To add this dashboard to your app, select Products on the wizard page that lets you add objects to the app.
Datasets Used
• Opportunity Products
• Activities
Embedding Syntax
Here’s the syntax for embedding the dashboard in either Salesforce Classic or Lightning Experience Opportunity page layout. Note the
difference between using a filter for single accounts or account hierarchy. Opportunity is the developer name for the opportunity
dataset. Use the exact developer name of the dataset when embedding the dashboard.
Salesforce Classic
{"datasets": { "opportunity": [{"fields": ["Id"] ,"filter": { "operator":
"in", "values": ["$Id"] } } ]}}
Note: Syntax for Lightning Experience uses single quotes instead of double quotes.
{'datasets': { 'opportunity': [{'fields': ['Id'] ,'filter': { 'operator': 'in', 'values':

['$Id'] } }
]}}
KPI Calculations
1846
• Age. Number of days opportunity has been open; Today’s date - Created date.
• Days in Current Stage. (Not shown.) Number of days the opportunity has spent in the current stage.
• Days until Close. (Not shown.) Expected close date - today’s date
• Pushed Close Date. Number of times the close date has been pushed into the future.
• Product Breakdown. Grouping of product names according to product total price.
• Discount. (Product total price for all products attached to the opportunity/ Product list price)
• Activity Breakdown. Number of Activities (open or closed) broken down by activity type.
Sales Analytics Sales Overview Home (Embedded)

Designed to be embedded in the Lightning Home page, the dashboard lets sales reps see their KPIs the second they log into Salesforce.
They can also quickly access the Sales Analytics dashboards that matter most to them.

Embed the dashboard in the Lightning Home page using the Lightning App Builder without using any filter syntax. By default, data is
filtered to show data for the rep viewing the dashboard. You see only opportunities and activities that you own.
Edit the dashboard to set target lines and the upper bounds for gauges. With the dashboard open in Analytics Studio, click the edit icon
to open the designer, then click the widget you want to edit. Look for the value you want to change in the properties panel
on the right and change it there. When you’re done, save the dashboard.
Click View Sales Rep Overview, View Product Whitespace, and View Activity Overview to open other dashboards.
The View Product Whitespace button appears and links to the Whitespace dashboard only if you select Products on the wizard page
that lets you choose to add objects. Otherwise, you see a View Pipeline Trending button, which links to the Trending dashboard.
Datasets Used
• Opportunities
• Opportunity Splits (if you add Opportunity Splits to the app on the wizard page that lets you add objects)
• Pipeline Trending
1847
• Activities
KPI Calculations
• Closed Won (1). Total amount closed won opportunities in the selected period.
• Closed Won comparison (2). (Total amount closed won opportunities in the selected period - Total closed won opportunities in the
previous period) / Total closed won opportunities in the previous period.
• Open Pipe (3). Total number of open opportunities with close dates within the selected period.
• Open Pipe comparison (4). (Total open pipe in the selected period - Total open pipe in the previous period) / Total open pipe in the
previous period. The amount of open pipe in the previous period is based on data from the same day of the previous period. For
example, if the period is this month, the amount is for the same day for the previous period minus 1 month.
• Activities Completed (5). Total number of activities completed in the selected period.
• Activities Completed comparison (6). (Total number of activities completed in the selected period - Total number of activities
completed in the previous period) / Total number of activities completed in the previous period.
Sales Analytics Forecast Dashboard

View quota attainment and forecast for each member of the team, and fine-tune the forecast by reviewing opportunities by stage in a
selected period.

If your org uses the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature, the dashboard shows opportunity forecast and forecasts with manager
adjustments. Historical opportunity data draws from the standard Opportunity Amount field.
Select from the Forecast User filter to view forecast for each team member.
Change the Time Period filter to Next Month or Next Quarter to identify possible opportunities to move into the current period. When
you choose other categories from the Forecast Category filter, the Pipe Coverage metric changes accordingly.
1848
View As filter. If Salesforce is set up to use the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature, the filter shows forecast usernames. If your
org doesn’t use Collaborative Forecasts, filter shows role developer names. In either case, pipe rolls up to the selected user. If your org
doesn’t use Salesforce role hierarchy, this filter does not appear.
Opportunity Type filter. Values shown determined by selection made in wizard page 5, question 3. By default, the filter uses the standard
Opportunity Type field.
Quotas. Dashboard automatically includes quota information from Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts Quotas if your org uses this feature.
If it does not, you can manually upload quotas data into the app from an external tool as a CSV file. See Collaborative Forecasting and
Quotas Data in Sales Analytics.
Products. Dashboard includes products if you include products (opportunity line items) when you create the app. Top products are
sorted by the product amount selected in the wizard, page 6, question 1.
Opportunity Details chart. Amount column changes to Schedule Amount, Close Date column changes to Schedule Date if you select
Product Schedules on page that lets you add data to the app.
Datasets Used
• Opportunities (or Opportunity Splits)
• Users
• User Allocation
• Forecasting Item (if org uses Collaborative Forecasts)
• Oppty Products (if you set up app with products)
• Pipeline Trending (for Forecast last week comparison)
KPI Calculations
Filters at Top
• View As. Role developer names or forecast managers, depending on how app is set up.
• Opportunity Owner. Any user who has ever owned an opportunity, including inactive users or users who do not own any deals in
the selected period.
• Forecast Category. Values from standard opportunity forecast category field.
• Opportunity Type. Values from standard opportunity type field, or another field selected during app setup.
• Record Type. Opportunity record type names defined in your org.
• Time Period. Based on Salesforce fiscal year settings.
1849
Summary (Top Left Panel)

• Quota Attainment. Closed won / Quota amount per opportunity owner based on close date and quota date in selected period. Can
include future closed opportunities.
• Pipe Coverage. Open pipeline/ Remaining quota per opportunity owner based on selected period. Comparisons are to date. Does
not include future closed opportunities.
• Quota Remaining. Quota amount - Closed won based on close date and quota date in selected period.
• Forecast. Closed won + Number of categories selected in Forecast Category filter. Can include opportunities set to close outside of
selected period.
• Forecast vs Last Week. Current opportunity forecast amount for categories selected in Forecast Category filter compared with historical
opportunity amount for the same categories.
Forecast (Top Right Panel)
• Forecast. Cumulative forecast for categories selected Forecast Category filter. Based on opportunity close date within selected period.
• Forecast No Adjustments/Forecast including adjustments. Total opportunity amount of forecast for categories selected Forecast
Category filter compared with adjusted forecast for user selected in Forecast User filter.
Charts at Bottom
• Opportunity Amount by Stage. Opportunities grouped by stage based on close dates within selected period and other values selected
in filters.
• Top Opportunities. Total amount open for selected opportunity owner based on close date in selected period.
• Top Products. Top products based on total product amount for all opportunities in forecast.
Sales Analytics Leaderboard Dashboard

Gives sales leaders an overview of team and individual rep performance, including quota attainment, pipe coverage, bookings, pipe
generation, closed won business, average sales cycle time, and sales activities.
1850
The Leaderboard gives a quick overview of team performance for a given time period. View results for the entire team or for any of your
subordinates. The team is made up of sales reps that roll up to the user selected in the View As filter (1), depending on the configuration
of the app. (See Wizard and Other Setup Options.)
Select a key performance indicator (KPI) at the top of the left column (2) to view a stacked ranking of your team according to that KPI.
Examples of KPIs include the following:
• Quota progress.
• Pipe coverage.
• Open pipe.
• Pipe generated.
• Remaining quota.
• Closed won.
• Completed activities.
• Average sales cycle.
Change the View As filter (1) and view KPIs from that user’s perspective.
The leaderboard column on the left (5) displays opportunity owners only. It does not roll up metrics up the role hierarchy; the Company
Overview dashboard provides that view.
Quotas. Dashboard automatically includes quota information from Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts Quotas if your org uses this feature.
If it does not, you can manually upload quotas data into the app from an external tool as a CSV file. See Collaborative Forecasting and
Quotas Data in Sales Analytics on page 1904.
Close Date filter. Changes to schedule date if you select Product Schedules on page that lets you add data to the app.
View As filter. Contents of this filter depend on your org:
• If your org uses the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature, the filter lists forecasting managers as defined by the forecast hierarchy.
• If your org defines a role structure/hierarchy but doesn’t use Collaborative Forecasts, the filter lists manager roles as defined by the
hierarchy.
• If your org does not define role hierarchy, the filter lists opportunity owners.
Top Deals details chart. Amount column changes to Schedule Amount, Close Date column changes to Schedule Date if you select
Product Schedules on page that lets you add data to the app.
Closed won and quota amounts calculated based on the amount field selected in the wizard, Page 5, Question
1.
1851
Datasets Used
• Opportunity
• User Allocation
• Activities
• User
• Opportunity Splits (if you select Opportunity Splits on the wizard page that lets you add objects)
KPI Calculations
• Top of Chart
– Closed Won (6a). Total amount closed won during selected time period. Can include future closed opportunities.
– Closed Won comparison (6b). (Total amount closed based on selected user in View As filter - Average total amount closed by
team) / Average total amount closed by team. Team defined by all opportunity owners.
– Closed Won over time (6c). Total amount closed won by quarter for past eight quarters
– Pipe Generated (7a). Based on selections from Created Date (3) and Close Date (4) filters. For example, to see what pipe is
generated this period and closes anytime, set Created Date (3) to this fiscal quarter and Close Date (4) to all time.
– Pipe Generated comparison (7b). (Total pipe created by selected user in View As filter - Average total pipe created by team) /
Average total pipe created by team.
– Pipe Generated over time (7c). Win rate by month for past three years.
– Avg Days in Sales Cycle (8a). Average of opportunity close date - created date for won opportunities year to date.
– Avg Days in Sales Cycle comparison (8b). (Average cycle for selected user in View As filter - Average cycle by team) / Average
cycle by team..
– Avg Days in Sales Cycle over time (8c). Average days to complete (win) sales cycle in the selected period
– Avg Activities Completed (9a). Average number of activities completed per team member in selected time period. Team made
up of opportunity owners included in role selected in View As filter (1).
– Avg Activities comparison (9b). (Average cycle for selected user in View As filter - Average cycle by team) / Average cycle by
team.
– Avg Activities over time (9c). Activities completed per quarter.
• Upper-Left Filter Options (5)

– Closed Won. Total amount closed won as of close date in selected period per opportunity owner.
– Open Pipe. Total amount open as of close date in selected period per opportunity owner.
– Quota Attainment. Closed won / Quota amount per opportunity owner as of close date and quota date in selected period.
– Remaining Quota. Quota amount - Closed won as of close date and quota date in selected period.
– Pipe Generated. Total amount of opportunities created since created date in selected period per opportunity owner.
– Avg Sales Cycle. Average sales cycle since created date in selected time period per opportunity owner.
– Activities Completed. Number of activities completed in the selected time period per opportunity owner.
– Pipe Coverage. Open pipeline / Remaining quota per opportunity owner in selected period. Values selected in Forecast Category
filter impact open pipeline calculation.
• Top Deals (open opportunities) table (not pictured)

– Pushed. Number of times an opportunity close date has been pushed to a future date. Only shows opportunities in the table
for which the closed date has been pushed into the future at least once.
1852
– Neglected. Opportunities that have not been touched for 60 days. Time period can be changed by editing app dataflow.
Sales Analytics Team Activities Dashboard

See what your team’s been doing to keep on top of opportunities. Look at their total, completed, and overdue tasks and review each
member’s calls, events, emails, and tasks.
Note: Multi Org Sales Analytics Version Only. Use the Data Source menu to select the org data to view in the dashboard.

Measure team and individual activity based on Salesforce tasks and events data. Start by looking at total, completed, and overdue tasks
for your entire team. Select team members in the panel on the left (1) to see their individual activities and review their calls, events,
emails, and tasks. Also see how their level of activity compares to the team average.
Note: The dashboard does not yet support Einstein Activity Capture.
1853
View As filter. If Salesforce is set up to use the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature, the filter shows forecast usernames. If your
org doesn’t use Collaborative Forecasts, filter shows role developer names. In either case, pipe rolls up to the selected user. If your org
doesn’t use Salesforce role hierarchy, this filter does not appear.
Datasets Used
Activities.
KPI Calculations
Top Section (2)
• Total Activities. Total number of activities with due date in the selected period.
• Total Activities comparison. (Total activities for selected user - Total activities) / Total activities.
• Completed Activities. Total number of activities marked as complete based on due date in the selected period. If the event date is
in the past, events are marked as complete.
• Completed Activities comparison. Completed activities for the selected user - Completed activities total / Completed activities total.
• Overdue Activities. Total count of any activity that is overdue. Includes tasks not marked as complete with due dates are in the past.
Middle and Lower Sections (3)
• Calls. Number of tasks of type call with due date in selected period.
• Calls by Week. Number of calls per week with due date in selected period.
• Calls vs. Team Avg. Number of calls for selected user compared with average number for team. Team is made up of activity owners
who roll up to user selected in View As filter or user selected in Activity Owner filter.
• Inbound Calls. Number of inbound calls based on Call Type field in the standard Tasks object
• Outbound Calls. Number of outbound calls based on Call Type field in the standard Tasks object.
• Emails. Number of tasks of type email with due date in selected period.
• Emails by Week. Number of emails per week with due date in selected period.
• Emails vs. Team Avg. Number of emails for selected user compared with average number for team. Team is made up of activity
owners who roll up to user selected in View As filter or user selected in Activity Owner filter.
• High Priority emails. Number of high-priority emails based on standard Tasks object Priority field.
• Normal Priority emails. Number of normal emails based on standard Tasks object Priority field.
• Events. Number of events with due date in selected period.
• Events by Week. Number of events per week with due date in selected period.
• Events vs Team Avg. Number of events for selected user compared with average number for team. Team is made up of activity
owners who roll up to user selected in View As filter or user selected in Activity Owner filter.
• Complete events. Number of events marked closed.
• Open events. Number of future events within the selected period.
• Tasks. Number of open tasks due in the selected period, including overdue tasks.
• Tasks by Week. Number of tasks per week with due date in selected period.
• Tasks vs. Team Avg. Number of tasks for selected user compared with average number for team. Team is made up of activity owners
who roll up to user selected in View As filter or user selected in Activity Owner filter.
• Complete tasks. Number of tasks marked closed.
• Open tasks. Number of future events in the selected period.
1854
Sales Analytics Team Benchmark Dashboard

Shows a ranking of sales rep results across your team’s KPIs, such as closed won deals, best case,
USER PERMISSIONS
and average deal size. Also shows each rep’s performance against team average.
Templated Apps
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
Dataflows

Select two KPIs in the main (bar) chart (1) to compare one measure of performance against another. Both selectors contain the same
KPIs so you can compare whatever is on the left with whatever is on the right. The rank order of your team sorts according to the measure
selected on the left.
Select a specific rep to view their scorecards in the right column, which also shows the rep’s team rank. Team is defined by all the reps
that show up in the bar chart, depending on what you select in the Forecast User/Manager Role filter (Forecast User in image).
Forecast User/Manager Role filter (Forecast User in image). If Salesforce is set up to use the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts Concepts
feature, the filter shows forecast usernames. If your org doesn’t use Collaborative Forecasts, filter shows role developer names. In either
case, pipe rolls up to the selected user. If your org doesn’t use Salesforce role hierarchy, this filter does not appear.
1855
Time Period filter. All time periods based on Salesforce fiscal year setting.
Datasets Used
• Opportunities (or Opportunity Splits)
• User Manager
• User Allocation
• Activities
KPI Calculations
All KPIs appear in the right-hand column.
• Closed Won (2a). Total amount closed won based on a selected time period, which can include future opportunities.
• Closed Won Comparison (2b). (Total amount closed won for selected time period to date [for owner selected in main chart (1)] -
Average total amount closed won for team during the same period) / Average total amount closed won for all team members during
the same period. Comparative value appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see 0.
• Closed Won Team Rank (2c). Rank of rep selected in the main chart (1) based on closed won business in the selected time period.
Rank based on opportunity owners who roll up to the manager selected in Forecast User filter as well as the owners selected in
Opportunity Owner filter. Rank appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see a 1.
• Quota Attainment (3a). Closed Won / Quota Amount based on a selected time period, which can include future opportunities.
• Quota Attainment Comparison (3b). (Quota attainment for rep selected in main chart (1) - Quota attainment for team) / Quota
attainment for team. Comparative value appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see 0.
• Quota Attainment Team Rank (3c). Rank of rep selected in main chart (1) based on quota attainment in the selected time period.
Rank based on opportunity owners who roll up to manager selected in Forecast User filter as well as the owners selected in
Opportunity Owner filter. Rank appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see a 1.
• Win Rate (4a). Total amount won / Total amount closed (Won or Lost) based on selected time period, which can include future
opportunities.
• Win Rate Comparison (4b). (Win rate for the owner selected in main chart (1) - Win rate for team) / Win rate for team. Comparative
value appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see 0.
• Win Rate Team Rank (4c). Rank of rep selected in main chart (1) based on their win rate in the selected time period. Rank based on
opportunity owners who roll up to the manager selected in Forecast User filter as well as the owners selected in Opportunity
Owner filter. Rank appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see a 1.
• Avg Sales Cycle (5a). Number of days from CreatedDate in the selected time period, which can include future opportunities.
• Avg Sales Cycle Comparison (5b). (Sales cycle for rep selected in main chart (1) - Average sales cycle for team) / Average sales cycle
for team. Comparative value appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see 0.
• Avg Sales Cycle Team Rank (5c). Rank of rep selected in main chart (1) based on sales cycle in the selected time period. Rep with
shortest sales cycle receives top ranking. Rank appears only if you select a sales rep in main chart (1), otherwise you see a 1.
1856
Sales Analytics Trending Dashboards

View company, team, and pipeline changes for a given period, including beginning and end values of the pipe as well as what’s moved
in and out.
Note: Multi Org Sales Analytics Version Only. Use the Data Sourcemenu to select the org data to view in the dashboard.
Note: The following pertains to Team Trending (shown), Company Trending, and Trending (individual) dashboards, except as
noted.
1857
Dashboards show the pipeline for all opportunity owners rolling up to the manager using the app. Depending on which dashboard you
view, choose another user to change opportunity owners reflected in the chart.
• Team Trending (shown): Change opportunity owner using the Forecast User/Manager Role/Opportunity Owner filter (Forecast
User in image). Filter name changes depending on how your org is set up. See Wizard and Other Setup Options.
• Company Trending: Change opportunity owner using the View As filter.
• Trending (individual): Change opportunity owner using the Opportunity Owner filter.
The dashboard supports only fields within the opportunity history table. Even if you select a custom amount field in the wizard, the
dashboard contains only the standard opportunity amount field. Filters at the top use only current opportunity values; they don’t reflect
historical values. For example, if the owner of the opportunity has changed, historical data does not reflect the change.
The dashboard does not support opportunity splits.
View As filter: Contents of this filter depend on your org.
• If your org uses the Sales Cloud Collaborative Forecasts feature, the filter lists forecasting managers as defined by the forecast hierarchy.
• If your org defines a role structure/hierarchy but doesn’t use Collaborative Forecasts, the filter lists manager roles as defined by the
hierarchy.
• If your org does not define role hierarchy, the filter lists opportunity owners.
Note: Pertains only to Team Trending dashboard.
Datasets Used
Pipeline Trending, including data from Opportunity History.
KPI Calculations
Time period filters
Time periods based on Salesforce fiscal year setting.
• Set Pipeline Start and End Dates. Select the start and end dates for when you want to view the pipeline. Click Year, Quarter,
Month, Weeks, or Days to indicate unit of time. Then either click edit icon and type in a number or drag slider handles to set the
start and end for the period you want to view. For example, click Quarters, then drag left handle to -3 and drag right handle to +1
to view pipeline starting three quarters ago until one quarter from now.
• Set Close Date for Opportunities. Select the close date for the opportunities you want to include in your view of the pipeline.
Main (Waterfall) Chart
• Values along top
– Starting Pipeline. Total amount open during the selected starting period.
– Pipeline Change. (Total amount open during selected starting period - total amount open during selected end period/ Total
amount open during selected starting period). Does not include future closed opportunities.
– Ending Pipeline. Total pipeline at the end of the period.
1858
• Values in vertical bars

– Open Pipe (Start). Total pipeline at the start of the time period.
– New. Opportunities created after the start period.
– Expand. Existing opportunities in which total amount was increased since start of the period.
– Moved In. Opportunities with close dates moved into the selected time period. (Where close date was changed after start of the
period.)
– Moved Out. Opportunities with a close date that no longer falls within the selected time period. (Where close date was changed
after start of the period.)
– Reduce. Opportunities in which total amount is less than at the beginning of the period.
– Closed Won. Opportunities closed won after the beginning of the period.
– Closed Lost. Opportunities lost after the beginning of the period.
– Open Pipe (Today). Total pipeline at the end of the period.
Sales Analytics Team Whitespace Dashboard

Use this dashboard to uncover resell and upsell opportunities by viewing whitespace. Whitespace
USER PERMISSIONS
means accounts that you can revisit to create business.
Templated Apps
Apps
Analytics apps:
Templated Apps
Dataflows
1859
Note: The following pertains to Team Whitespace (shown) and Whitespace (individual) dashboards, except as noted.

Start by viewing products your team or individual reps have sold by account and what’s in the pipeline. You can also see accounts not
associated with products and products that have not been sold to any account. Use filters to group similar accounts to spot product
whitespace.
Team version shows accounts where you and subordinate members of your team are named owners or other accounts that you can
see based on security settings in your org.
Opens to all closed won and open deals for a given time period for the entire team or an individual rep. Click Closed Won (shown in
image) or Open in the View by toggle (1) to see just those deals. Select a sales rep’s name from the Account Owner filter (2) to view
deals for that rep. Change the Product Family

Analytics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Analytics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Analytics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Analytics

Salesforce, Spring ’24

Analyze Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Dashboards Intelligent Analytics Apps Einstein Discovery in Tableau

CRM Analytics for Experience Cloud

Unified Analytics Experiences Einstein Discovery Marketing Cloud Intelligence

Tableau Views in CRM Analytics

Salesforce Analytics Tools

Reports and Dashboards

Salesforce Analytics Tools

Develop tools and data analysis for decision-making

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Bring data into decision-making processes

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Govern and manage

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Answer business questions with data

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Personalize and act on your analysis

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Collaborate with others around data

Reports and Dashboards CRM Analytics Tableau

Reports and Dashboards

Get Started with Reports and Dashboards

Learn Reporting Concepts and Build Your First Report and

Review Report and Dashboard Limitations

Get Started with Reports and Dashboards

• Lightning Reports and Dashboards Technical Requirements

Report on Your Data

Share Reports and Report Data

Subscribe to and Schedule Reports

Report on Your Data

Analyze Report Data Using AI

Share Insights with Dashboards

Subscribe to and Schedule Dashboards

Share Insights with Dashboards

Manage Your Reports and Dashboards on Analytics Home

To access the Analytics tab

Browsing the Analytics Tab

Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards

Browsing the Analytics Tab

To browse the Analytics tab:

To browse the Analytics tab

Click column headers to sort search results in ascending or descending order.

Click Details in the row-action menu to view asset metadata.

Use Navigation Breadcrumbs on the Analytics Tab

To access the Analytics tab:

To access the Analytics tab

Favorite Your Reports and Dashboards

Available in: Essentials,

To access the Analytics tab:

To access the Analytics tab

Stay Organized with Collections

Available in: Enhanced

Also available with CRM

To manage a collection with

Create Reports and Dashboards on the Analytics Tab